Vedic Education

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Something new has to go in education, and the only thing for all-ways satisfaction will be total knowledge to every student; total capacity of action to every youth; and a fulfilled state of life in enlightenment to every elderly person.1 —Maharishi Mahesh Yogi I. READING THE VEDIC LITERATURE FROM BEGINNING TO END AS AN EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

This thesis explores in detail the curriculum of reading the Vedic Literature in Sanskrit, that His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi proposes as a key technology of Vedic Education that will bring total knowledge and capability to every student: Reading the Vedic Literature in sequence is the procedure to spontaneously train the brain physiology and the whole physiology of speech to function in the most orderly way so that every thought, speech, and action is spontaneously promoted in the evolutionary direction of Natural Law, and thereby spontaneously enjoys full support of the evolutionary quality of intelligence that upholds order and evolution in the entire universe. The importance of reading the Vedic Literature is very obvious in view of the recent discovery of the Veda and Vedic Literature in the human physiology.2 This program of reading Vedic Literature has its theoretical foundation in the discovery by His Majesty King Nader Råm that every aspect of Veda and Vedic Literature has a counterpart, a corresponding structure in human physiology.3 Reading the Vedic Literature in sequence—combined with the practice of the Transcendental *

Meditation® technique, the other key technology of Vedic Education—is a systematic program to enliven total brain physiology, in order to culture perfection in life. The program of reading has been successfully explored in a series of case studies and ® Transcendental Meditation, TM-Sidhi, Maharishi Transcendental Meditation, Maharishi TM, Maharishi TM-Sidhi, Maharishi Vedic Science, Vedic Science, ConsciousnessBased and Maharishi University of Management are registered or common law trademarks licensed to Maharishi Vedic Education Development Corporation and used with permission. *

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

2

theoretical investigations.4 On the basis of this success, the program of reading Vedic Literature is being adopted by Maharishi schools and colleges around the world. The presentation of this program of reading Vedic Literature to students of all ages requires attention to the proper packaging of the Vedic Literature. The curriculum for the program of reading Vedic Literature defines precisely every syllable, every word and every page in sequence that the student reads in a 3000-hour reading program, and presents every page in a simple, attractive and appealing format. The Vedic Literature reading curriculum practically applies to the field of education the fruit of the knowledge of Vedic Science brought to light by His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, and His Majesty King Nader Råm. Maharishi has organized the scattered Vedic Literature into a systematic science, consisting of 40 branches.5 This organization of total Vedic Literature into 40 branches is the starting point of the Vedic Literature reading program. (Please refer to Figure 1.) For almost every branch of Vedic knowledge, H.M. King Nader Råm6 has, with Maharishi’s guidance, specified in detail, what are the specific texts of that branch, and how they are correlated with human physiology. With Maharishi’s definition of Vedic Literature,7 and H.M. King Nader Råmís extraordinary exposition of the relationship of the individual texts to the physiology,8 in broad strokes, the full scope of Maharishi’s Vedic Science, and the full breadth and depth of Vedic Literature have been defined. This thesis advances this process one more step, to the point of actually putting into the hands of the reader the texts that he should read in sequence, in an ideal form, for maximum impact, and complete accomplishment of all the goals of the reading program, for structuring perfection in life. This thesis chronicles the sequence of texts on a website where students go to retrieve the Vedic Literature.9 The website has a simple structure: The home page shows the 40 branches of Vedic Literature in their proper sequence.


Figure 1: Maharishi’s vision of the total range of Vedic Literature.

3


4

(Please refer to Figure 2.) For each branch, there is a linked-page that shows all the texts of that branch in their proper sequence. (Please refer to Figure 3): Each linked-file that the student downloads contains only the material that the student should read, without commentary or discussion of any kind. This purity and simplicity of presentation of each text makes the reading curriculum completely adaptable to students of all ages from elementary to Ph.D. and completely accessible to students in the United States and around the world, as far as the World Wide Web reaches. The development of the ancient Vedic Literature as a curriculum of reading appropriate for students of all ages from elementary to Ph.D. requires the adaptation of more than 300 texts to the very specific demands of beginning readers. As a general rule, the published texts of Vedic Literature are intended for scholarly audiences, that is for readers who are to a large degree fluent in thinking, speaking, reading and understanding Sanskrit. Contrariwise, student readers in Maharishi’s Vedic Literature reading program are trained only in the correct pronunciation of the sounds of the Devanågar¥ script: Fluency in recognizing and correctly pronouncing the letters of the Devanågar¥ script is the starting point for entering into the curriculum of reading Vedic Literature.10 The published literature provides many obstacles and hurdles for incorporation into the reading program, and indeed, there is no published text for any branch that is completely appropriate and acceptable for the reading curriculum. The ideal packaging presents each ancient text without introduction, without commentary or translation, without critical apparatus, and with a consistent and familiar Devanågar¥ font. The Vedic Literature reading curriculum and the Vedicreserve website11 grew out of the practical needs of the pioneering individuals who began to read through the entire Vedic Literature, under the guidance of His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi.12 The


Figure 2: Homepage of the Vedicreserve website.

5


Figure 3: Íhik∑hå webpage on Vedicreserve website.

6


7

defining and packaging of the reading curriculum has taken place to fulfill the needs of a growing community of readers. To explain this need for a precisely defined and packaged reading curriculum, the next section chronicles the history of the Vedic Literature reading program. II. HISTORY OF THE VEDIC LITERATURE READING PROGRAM The Vedic Literature reading program at Maharishi University of Management began in October, 1991,13 when the new “Vedic Literature track” of the doctoral program in Maharishi Vedic Science received the direction from His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, founder of the University, to “Read the Vedic Literature from beginning to end.”14 They began reading the Vedic Literature, skipping over the study of grammar, syntax and other aids in understanding the meaning of the text, instead reading only for the sound value. Reciting the sounds of the texts of the Vedic Literature without regard for the meaning is an ancient technology of human development recognized by K. Parameswara Aithal as the real reason for existence of the ancient science of phonetics, which he calls “Veda-lak∑haâ”: A mere recitation of the Vedic hymns in the proper way is believed to produce a spiritual effect irrespective of understanding the meaning of the texts recited. Though the knowledge of meaning is regarded as useful in the performance of the rituals by enhancing their effects, this aspect is usually ignored.15 Aithal explains that, generally, recitation of the texts has been reserved for students learning the Veda in a procedure called “Adhyåyana,” where the student learns the Vedic texts traditionally maintained by his family.16 On the basis of Aithal’s testimony it is evident that recitation of texts without regard to meaning is in accord with contemporary and historical practice. However, the reading of the entire corpus of Vedic Literature, encompassing the four Veda, the four Upaveda, the Vedåãga and Upåãga, the Bråhmaâ, Ãraˆyaka and Upani∑had, and Itihåsa, Puråâ and Sm®iti, together


8

with the Pråtißhåkhya, 27 branches in all,17 as Maharishi proposed in 1991, was a completely new program. Thus, the seven students who began to read the Vedic Literature four hours a day, in 1991, were pioneering a new technology of Maharishi Vedic Science, that was destined to become a core program of Vedic Education. As Maharishi explained in Maharishi Vedic University Introduction,18 reading Vedic Literature is a program that builds on the coherence and orderliness of brain functioning developed through the practice of the Maharishi Transcendental Meditation and TMSidhi programs. Initially, the students in this Vedic Literature reading program read some texts in Sanskrit, and some texts in English, but in the spring of that first school year, when these beginning students had became much more proficient in reading Devanågar¥, the guidance came from Maharishi to read primarily in Sanskrit.19 During the course of their reading, these early pioneers soon found that it was more convenient and more enjoyable to read one text for a sustained period, usually from beginning to end, rather than reading one branch for 30 minutes, and another branch for 30 minutes, and thus quickly stepping through all the branches of Vedic Literature.20 Thus, the students were accustomed to reading the Vedic Literature text by text, when, in the summer of 1994, Maharishi added a fundamental feature of structure to the program of reading Vedic Literature: The Vedic Literature was to be read in sequence.21 Students reading the Vedic Literature thereafter began with the four Veda, then began to read Shikshå and the other Vedåãga, then the Upåãga and Upavedic texts, and finally the Upani∑had, Ãraˆyaka and Bråhmaâ, and Itihåsa, Puråâ and Sm®iti, followed by the Pråtißhåkhya. This became the program of reading the Vedic Literature until 1996, when the four Vedas were removed from the reading program, and instead students were


9

encouraged to listen to the recitation of the four principal Veda by properly trained pandits.22 The reading sequence was first published in Vedic Knowledge for Everyone in 1994.23 There 27 branches of Vedic Literature were listed. An expanded version of the reading list was contained in the landmark work by Tony Nader, M.D., Ph.D., Human Physiology, Expression of Veda and Vedic Literature, 1995.24 Here for the first time, the six Pråtishåkhya were recognized as independent branches of Vedic Literature, rather than being collected together in a single branch. The six traditionally recognized branches of Ãyur Veda were also recognized as independent branches, bringing the total number to (27+5+5=) 37. The subsequent edition of Nader’s text, published in 2000,25 contained many refinements in the organization of the Vedic Literature, including the addition of three lesser known Ãyurvedic texts, Hår¥ta Samhitå, Bhela Samhitå and Kåshyapa Samhitå, bringing the total number of texts in the Vedic Literature to 40. For each branch, Dr. Nader listed all the component texts, for the first time delimiting which texts belonged to each branch, and, by implication, defining which texts were to be acquired and read in the program of reading the entire Vedic Literature. More than simply listing the branches and texts of the Vedic Literature, Dr. Nader showed systematically that every branch of Vedic Literature was matched for structure and function by some system in the body, or some particular group of fibres or specific aspect of the human physiology. He demonstrated that the texts of Vedic Literature contain the intelligence underlying every aspect of structure and function of the human physiology.26 He made the prediction that reading of the text not only enlivens that quality in the physiology as a whole, but specifically enlivens proper functioning of the intelligence in that particular corresponding aspect of the physiology. Thus reading the Vedic Literature becomes a systematic way of enlivening the total intelligence of the


10

physiology, fibre by fibre, and raising the style of functioning of the entire physiology more and more towards perfection. This knowledge can be applied to cure diseases, by reciting the Vedic texts appropriate to strengthen and heal diseased or weakened organs, but can also be used to culture the nervous system to fulfill the highest goals of education, unfolding the infinite inner intelligence of every student.27 A number of doctoral dissertations at Maharishi University of Management have systematically investigated the entire range of claims for personal and psychological transformation through reading the Vedic Literature in Sanskrit.28 In particular, Ramberg examined 12 different areas of improvement in a student’s life that were predicted by Maharishi in various lectures and published books.29 These predictions are: Hypothesis 1: Orderliness in the brain physiology: Orderly brain functioning means functioning free from stress and strain, and functioning with least effort, functioning with least expenditure of energy. Hypothesis 2: Balance in the brain physiology: Balance in brain functioning is seen in increased coordination and reciprocity in the relationship between different parts of the brain, as for example between the left and right hemispheres of the brain. Hypothesis 3: Expansion of memory: Improvement in memory means better short term memory, more profound and expanded long term memory, and spontaneous access to those stored impressions that are most useful at the moment. Hypothesis 4: Purification of the physiology: When the physiology functions in limited channels for a long time, it loses its flexibility, and capacity for holistic integrated functioning. Purification of the physiology refers to the removal of blocks and stress which restrict the individual parts of the physiology from participating completely in the functioning of the whole. Hypothesis 5: Brain functioning from more silent levels: Quieter levels of the mind are more comprehensive, taking in a broader territory, and bringing to bear more of the hidden reserves of the brain for more profound decision-making and greater success in the field of action. Hypothesis 6: Increased peace of mind: By functioning from quieter levels of consciousness, the basis of action in knowledge becomes more profound: Right knowledge is the basis of successful action, action which achieves its target, giving rise to fulfillment. This state of fulfillment based on right knowledge and successful action is enjoyed as tranquility and peace of mind.


11

Hypothesis 7: Increased harmony in the mind: Harmony in the mind means that every aspect of the personality—senses, mind and heart, intellect and ego—is functioning in coordination with the whole. The enlivenment of total brain functioning inspires every aspect to participate coherently with the whole, to be harmonious with the whole. Hypothesis 8: Unfoldment of deeper levels of consciousness: Deeper levels of consciousness put to function more and more of the intelligence of the creative process in Nature. Unfoldment of deeper levels of consciousness means unfolding the infinite organizing power of the creative intelligence in Nature to function in every thought and action. Hypothesis 9: Promotion of evolution to higher states of consciousness: Higher states of consciousness, in which the transcendental fourth state of consciousness is maintained as an all-time reality along with the changing states of waking and sleeping, develop naturally on the basis of the cultivation of holistic brain function. Holistic brain functioning occurs with eyes closed during the practice of Transcendental Meditation, but with eyes open during the reading of Vedic Literature. Hypothesis 10: Eliminates stress and strain in brain functioning: By reading Vedic Literature, the brain physiology is cultured to adopt the sequential and orderly functioning of Natural Law, so that brain activity is completely natural and free from stress and strain. Hypothesis 11: Promotes orderly functioning of the entire physiology of speech: Reading the Vedic Literature out loud trains the entire physiology of speech to function in accord with Natural Law, in the most orderly and efficient way. Hypothesis 12: Each text enlivens a specific quality of consciousness in the individual: For each of the 40 branches of Vedic Literature, there is a specific quality of consciousness which Maharishi has identified, that encapsulates the theme of that branch of knowledge. The reading of any text in a particular branch should enliven that quality of consciousness in the awareness of the individual. Ramberg systematically explored and verified these claims in his own experience of two and half years of reading the Vedic Literature. Similarly, Kleinschnitz, Freeman, Hankey, deFreitas and others have confirmed the validity of the predictions made by Maharishi for this powerful educational technology.30 With these different features of the reading program in place, 1) reading in Sanskrit without regard for the meaning, 2) reading each text from beginning to end, one by one, and 3) reading the 36 branches (other than Âik Veda, Såma Veda, Yajur Veda and Atharva Veda) in sequence, and with the growing confirmation of the effectiveness


12

of the program, based on the research of the doctoral students at Maharishi University of Management, Maharishi, in 1998, began to unfold a new thought: Establishing the simple innocent reading of the Vedic Literature in Sanskrit as the core educational curriculum in primary schools, high schools and colleges.31 This new educational program is intended to replace concept-based education with education focused on culturing consciousness and physiology to a state of perfection. The goal of Maharishi’s vision of education, is to use every student’s education years to refine the physiology and to develop the individual’s full cosmic potential, rather than teaching concepts and cramming the mind full of facts and information, that lose their relevance in a very short time.32 Supported by the dramatic results and experiences of the doctoral students in the Vedic Literature track,33 Maharishi saw that education could be raised to the level of perfection. Maharishi pursued this thought of reading the Vedic Literature to culture the human physiology to perfection in a course called “Creating a Perfect Man,”34 taught by Dr. Tony Nader, and broadcast by satellite to 4,000 course participants around the world, in 2000 and 2001. In that course, in which course participants were systematically introduced to every branch of Vedic Literature, its correspondences in the physiology, and the recitation of sample texts of each branch, Maharishi advised everyone to read the entire Vedic Literature for its pure sound value, and brought out the Sanskrit expression:

p;#m;]e, …s?yit påˇha-måtreâ sidhyati By mere recitation, one gains perfection.35 In one decade, the initial experiment of reading the Vedic Literature from beginning to end, a research program carried forward by a handful of doctoral researchers, was expanded to a universal mandate, a program of education to bring


13

perfection to every child born anywhere in the world. During that decade, Maharishi, working with H.M. King Nader Råm, defined the main parameters of the reading program: The branches of Vedic Science, the main texts of each branch, what to read in each text, and the program of reading in sequence. Now the educational theory of bringing perfection to education through reading Vedic Literature challenges the reality of the completely scattered and incoherent character of the Vedic Literature as it is available today. On the one hand, the scattered Vedic Literature has been brought together into a complete and perfect science of life by Maharishi, and the importance of each text for enlivening the underlying intelligence in the physiology has been brought out by King Nader Råm. But the texts themselves remain undeveloped, rare, sometimes out of print, poorly typeset, difficult to read, and often challenging for all but the most erudite scholar. The rise of a program of reading Vedic Literature brings forth the need to take stock of what Vedic Literature is available in the world today, and how it may be put to use in a universal curriculum of reading. The next section examines the limitations and problems posed by the currently available textbooks of Vedic Literature, and the standard of presentation that should ideally upheld in the curriculum of reading Vedic Literature. III. THE NEED FOR AN ONLINE RESOURCE OF VEDIC LITERATURE TO ACTUALIZE VEDIC EDUCATION There are actually no published texts that are completely suitable for the Vedic Literature reading program. The doctoral students beginning the program in 1991 had an incomplete collection of texts at their disposal, and the texts they did have presented a wide range of challenges. Even for a highly motivated student, there are a great number of hurdles that beset the path of reading the Vedic Literature in sequence, and it is perhaps due to the need to overcome a wide range of difficulties that the program was started with doctoral students, rather than with elementary or high school students,36 who


14

are also quite capable of learning the Devanågar¥ script, and reading the texts aloud syllable by syllable—and gaining all these same benefits from reading. Indeed, it can be argued that the flexible and growing nervous system of the child is even more suited to this program of reading Vedic Literature. For the young reader, however, the texts need to be packaged in such a way that there is no confusion and no discrimination needed. For the older reader, in view of the large number of texts to be read, the procedure needs to be simplified and streamlined as much as possible, in order for the goal of the program—the reading of the entire Vedic Literature from beginning to end—to be realizable. Gathering together all the scattered texts of Vedic Literature is obviously an essential step in promoting this educational paradigm of reading the Vedic Literature in sequence. However, bookstores are limited by what is actually in print at any one time. A large proportion of the Vedic Literature is out of print. A good Vedic Library requires patient accumulation over 30 or 40 years, and even then there will be significant gaps. This problem is overcome to a large degree, at least for the individual researcher in the U.S.A, by the national system of library catalogs in the U.S.A., called OCLC.37 The Online Computer Library Center makes it possible to locate texts in any library in North America. OCLC, and the interlibrary loan system, make it possible for a researcher to bring together on his desktop all the different texts of Vedic Literature that may be scattered among dozens of libraries across the continent.38 This brings together the acquisition efforts of librarians and Sanskrit departments throughout the U.S. and Canada for more than a century. Hardly any books will have completely escaped the notice of scholars and librarians: Thus, there is no real restriction to access to the published texts of Vedic Literature, at least for the patient scholar. However, the scarcity of many titles in the Vedic Literature implies that there will be a major bottleneck in the flow of


15

knowledge if an entire class or school begins on the project of reading through the Vedic Literature.39 One might suggest, naturally, that, copyright permitting, out-of-print books could be scanned and distributed on the internet. Scanning and posting rare texts could, in principle, solve the problem of access to a limited supply of out-of-print books. However, when one opens each text, and begins to focus on the contents of each text, one realizes that the texts so far available in the world—those in print, and those out of print—are not easily adapted to the program of reading the total Vedic Literature in sequence. There are five main problems that the already published texts of Vedic Literature present: 1) English translations and commentaries; 2) Sanskrit commentaries; 3) footnotes and other apparatus of critical editions; 4) corrigenda; and 5) difficult or undesirable typefaces. 1) Since it is the sound of the Sanskrit language that has the desired effect in culturing balanced brain functioning, and not the meaning brought out by the translator, students are advised not to get bogged down reading translations. Therefore texts with English translations alternating with text are a distraction. Examples are shown in Figures 4, 5, 6, and 8. Texts can be condensed to far fewer pages, and the reader can proceed from verse to verse much more easily when the translations are left out. 2) Because it is the Sanskrit text itself whose precise correspondence with an aspect of the human physiology has been remarked by Dr. Nader, and not any later manmade commentary on the text, the students are advised not to read the commentaries. Many texts have been preserved from oblivion by great commentaries that have drawn attention to the great significance of their source texts. These great commentaries are very precious for their intellectual content, and are greatly appreciated for their inherent value in preserving their texts against the ravages of time. But the commentaries are not useful in the context of the Vedic Literature reading program. Commentaries in texts are at best


16


17


18

a distraction; in many cases beginning students are completely bewildered and unable to distinguish the text from the commentary. A very tangible example of a commentary that is difficult to distinguish from the main text is shown in Figure 5. The example is from a popular edition of the S™tra of Vyåkaraâ (Vedic grammar). 3) Footnotes in English or in Sanskrit, and other paraphernalia of the critical apparatus provide another kind of difficulty. Although seemingly innocuous, always appearing below the line, the reference numbers and symbols that refer to notes are sometimes confused for diacritical marks. Figure 6 shows examples, quite typical of many critical editions, where the references dominate the page, and the text itself seems more in the background. Critical editions attempt to show how the same text has been presented differently in different published or manuscript editions. However, the reader can only pronounce the text one way, and in this reading program he is not concerned with the meaning. Thus the alternate readings are of no use at all. One particularly difficult incarnation of the alternate reading involves placing the alternate reading in parenthesis within the stream of the text. In many—but not all cases—the parenthetical text is to be substituted for the preceding syllables or words. To determine the appropriateness or relevance of including the parenthetical text, and whether in fact a substitution is implied, requires a grammatical understanding of the language that readers in the Vedic Literature reading program have not gained. This particular kind of critical apparatus provides an insuperable challenge for the reader. 4) There is another extraordinary challenge found in some of the more rare, infrequently published texts. When a text intended for a small community of scholars is published, careful reading by scholars may give rise to a list of typesetting errors in the original text. Such a list of corrections may be called corrigenda. When the text is reprinted, these corrigenda are included as a list at the end. In order to correctly read


19


20

the text, one has to go through the entire text and make the corrections in the original that are listed in the corrigenda. The text has thus been published in a corrupt state, and it is left to the reader to correct the mistakes. This style of presentation requires a more patient, scholarly approach than may rightly be expected from student readers. 5) A fifth problem is the difficulty in reading many Devanågar¥ typefaces: There are typefaces that are so small, they are a strain to read for people not extremely familiar with Devanågar¥, as for example, the Upani∑hatsamgraha, shown in Figure 7. There are also older typefaces in the published literature, that depart from the norm so much as to be unintelligible to beginning readers, as shown in Figure 8; and in Figure 9, a text published in transliteration, rather than in the traditional Devanågar¥ is shown. Confronted with the challenges of translations, commentaries, footnotes, corrigenda, and obscure typefaces, it becomes apparent that if the Vedic Literature could be presented to the students in one uniform type style, without superfluous material, that would be ideal. There would be no English translations to distract; no commentaries or footnotes to skip over; every character would be familiar, and there would be no challenges or mysteries from the beginning to the end. The Vedic Literature needs to be presented to readers in a uniform and consistent style, attending to the needs of the student reader rather than the experienced scholar. The goal of retyping and reformatting the entire Vedic Literature requires first of all a decision as to the best way to present Sanskrit texts. From the outset the choice was made for Devanågar¥. The underlying assumption has been that the maximum effect for culturing the nervous system of the student comes from reading Sanskrit in the traditional Devanågar¥ script. A significant portion of the benefit of reading is thought to come from seeing the forms of the Devanågar¥ letters.40 For this purpose considerable effort has gone into the design of the ideal Devanågar¥ font. Under the guidance of His Holiness


21


22


23


24

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, a font called Mahoreg was developed in the 1990s which uses a calligraphic style, and favors more traditional forms for some letters, such as

a, A, ,, l, Z, and z. This family of fonts is used exclusively for the Vedic Literature reading program and for all Sanskrit quotes in this dissertation. Maharishi University of Management originally pursued a program of publishing the texts of Vedic Literature in Sanskrit, beginning with the Shr¥mad Bhagavad G¥tå, and the six Darshana: Nyåya, Vaisheshika, Såmkhya, Yoga, Karma M¥måmså and Vedånta.41 These were published between 1994 and 1998. But the cost of publishing, multiplied by several hundred different texts of Vedic Literature could not practically be borne, either by the editors, the press, or by the student readers. The complete 60,000page Vedic Literature is comparable in length to the entire Encyclopedia Britannica (30 thousand-page volumes, with two columns per page). In the electronic age, there is a more cost effective solution to the demand for access to the total range of Vedic Literature. To accomodate the needs of readers following Maharishi’s program of reading Vedic Literature in sequence, a community of readers that has expanded to a world-wide audience because of the “Creating a Perfect Man” course, Maharishi University of Management launched a website in 2002, incorporating texts of all 40 branches of Vedic Literature in Adobe42 portable-document-file format. Texts are presented in a single typeface, without translations, without commentaries, without footnotes or other distractions, so that all the student has to do is start at the beginning and read through to the end of each text.43 The sequence of texts is inescapable, because of the overall design of the website. The student can read the text directly on his or her computer monitor, which is very easy and enjoyable with modern LCD screens, or it can be printed out if reading from hard copy is preferred. In this way, the Vedic Literature reading program


25

has been made accessible to anyone anywhere in the world with an Internet connection and the Adobe Acrobat Reader software. The meeting point between Maharishi’s vision of the total range of Vedic Literature, and the finite universe of texts available in the world is made completely transparent through the implementation of the Vedic Literature reading curriculum. This curriculum helps to bring out the full potential of Maharishi Vedic Science by systematically making available the entire body of Vedic Literature in an easy-to-use format. And even though presentation of texts on the website is not a once and for all finished project, and scholars around the world continue to contribute to the project of digitizing the Vedic Literature, nevertheless, the majority of Vedic Literature is already available in typed form, so that the primary texts of every branch of Vedic Literature can be presented in a consistent format, using the font developed for this purpose under Maharishi’s guidance. All the difficulties and challenges faced by the early readers in the doctoral research program are completely unknown now to readers who make use of the online repository of Vedic Literature. IV. DEVELOPMENT OF THE VEDIC LITERATURE READING CURRICULUM The paramount need for an online presentation of the Vedic Literature, to make the program of reading smooth and accessible to students of all ages has been established. Now an enormous responsibility falls on the organizers of the website to present the authentic texts of the Vedic Literature in proper sequence. Because it is the sound of the text that is expected to generate holistic brain functioning, it is necessary that each text be the right text, and that each word and each syllable be, as far as is possible, the right sound that will reverberate within the physiology and consciousness of the individual and create wholeness. There is a responsibility to remove all kinds of errors and mistakes from each text, and at the same time, there is the responsibility to maintain the purity of


26

the tradition of each text, without any changes. There is the responsibility to the reader to make the text as compact and straightforward as possible, and thereby reduce the time of reading, and at the same time there is the responsibility to not omit any chapter or appendix or accessory text that may have a crucial role to play in the structure and function of intelligence in that branch. The purpose of establishing a curriculum of reading is to save the reader from innumerable choices for which he has little basis for evaluation, so that he never stumbles on the path, and is never distracted from the goal. Chapter 2 starts with an indepth examination of the Vedic alphabet, the constituent letters that the student must master in order to embark on the project of reading Vedic Literature. Here the alphabet is explained as the reverberation of the Self of the student, pure abstract uninvolved consciousness taking on different roles in order to express the total range of possibilities in the process of manifestation. Chapter 3 begins the examination of the curriculum of reading Vedic Literature, branch by branch. The alphabet, which is introduced in Chapter 2, is brought to life in language by the comprehensive knowledge of Vedic phonetics, and this is the subject of Chapter 3. The 36 main source texts of Vedic phonetics are explored within the broader context of the entire Vedic ancillary literature. The boundaries of the field of Vedic phonetics are not sharply defined, and in the process of shining light on the constituent texts, a number of texts on the fringe of Vedic phonetics come into view. The primary issues involved in defining and establishing the curriculum of reading of Vedic Literature in the field of phonetics are examined, highlighting the selections made and yet to be made to provide a smooth and simple sequence of texts in this branch. At the same time, an in-depth review of the knowledge of anatomy which provides counterpoint to the knowledge of Vedic Science is presented: The understanding of the human physiology as the expression of the Veda and Vedic Literature is the cornerstone of the curriculum of


27

reading Vedic Literature. Chapters 4–8 continue this theme for the remaining texts of the group of texts called the Vedåãga, showing for each branch the individual constituent texts, and the corresponding structures in the human physiology. Chapter 9 presents His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s synthesis of the knowledge of the Vedåãga in terms of the transformation and systematic development of human awareness to the level of perfection, described in terms of all-knowingness. Maharishi’s synthesis brings a great awakening to the field of Vedåãga, by interpreting the knowledge of each branch in terms of its source in transcendental pure consciousness. The unfolding of pure Transcendental Consciousness in human awareness, is according to Maharishi, the role of Íhik∑hå, Vedic phonetics, among the branches of the Vedåãga. In service of a comprehensive understanding of the Vedåãga, Maharishi presents a new vision of Íhik∑hå, articulating a systematic revival of the science of Vedic phonetics, founded on the knowledge of “A.” The broad lines of this science of phonetics, which Maharishi attributes to Âi∑hi Madhuchchhandas, are sketched in the remainder of Chapter 9. In this light, the Vedic Literature reading program is seen as the showpiece, the technology which applies the total range of wisdom of the ancient Vedic Literature to practical life. The program of reading the Vedic Literature from beginning to end is the essence of Vedic education, the consummate technology of Vedic phonetics, Íhik∑hå. A curriculum is a course of study. The purpose of the presentation of the Vedic Literature reading curriculum—starting with the alphabet, and proceeding through a detailed exposition of the six limbs of the Vedåãga, followed by a brief review of all the remaining texts—is to put into the hands of the teacher all the resources needed to successfully implement Maharishi’s program of reading Vedic Literature. The aim is to provide a systematic and clearly structured foundation for this new paradigm of education. On this basis it will be possible to implement programs for students of all ages


28

that make use of the total knowledge of perfection in life contained in the Vedic Literature. The program of reading Vedic Literature is completely simple. The student learns to recognize and pronounce the script of the language. The student reads one syllable, and then the next syllable, the next syllable,44 without involvement of intellect. This procedure may be complemented, according to the grade level, by books and videotaped lectures by His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi on various topics in Maharishi Vedic Science, by detailed examination of the physiology corresponding to each branch of Vedic Literature, and by learning in very broad strokes the specific content of the individual textbooks of the branches of Vedic Literature. Knowledge of the physiology is part of the curriculum of reading Vedic Literature as Maharishi has described it,45 but the foundation of the program is reading the Vedic Literature in Devanågar¥. Reading Devanågar¥ is a simple innocent procedure that spontaneously brings powerful results due to the Vedic sounds’ inherent ability to enliven the inner intelligence of the physiology.46 Maharishi’s launching of this universally accessible program of reading Vedic Literature for gaining perfection in life was a great landmark in the field of education. The rise of Vedic Education in modern times augurs well for the creation of a perfect man, a man who will not make mistakes and will not create the ground for suffering in his own life, and in the lives of those around him. The author is grateful to His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi and to His Majesty King Nader Råm for laying out the detailed structure of Vedic Literature, and establishing the procedure for enlivening total knowledge in the awareness of every student. It is hoped that this curriculum of reading Vedic Literature will make it easy for every student in the world to take full advantage of Maharishi’s offer to create a perfect man, and rise to supreme knowledge and enlightenment.


29

Notes: 1

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Question on the appropriateness of giving students total knowledge,” in Education Press Conference, April 2, 2004. 2

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Vedic Knowledge for Everyone: Maharishi Vedic University—an Introduction, (Holland: Maharishi Vedic University Press, 1994), p. 184. 3

Nader, Tony, Human Physiology, Expression of Veda and the Vedic Literature: Modern Science and Ancient Vedic Science Discover the Fabrics of Immortality in the Human Physiology, (Vlodrop: Maharishi Vedic University, 1995), pp. 29ff. 4

Anne Christy Kleinschnitz, “Reading the Vedic Literature: The Approach in Maharishi’s Vedic Science for Accelerating the Development of Consciousness,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 1996). Marci Freeman, “Enlivening Veda in Consciousness and Physiology by Reading the Vedic Literature in Conjunction with the Experience of the Transcendental Meditation and TM-Sidhi Programs of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 1997). Jan Ramberg, “The Effects of Reading the Vedic Literature on Personal Evolution in the Light of Maharishi Vedic Science and Technology,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 1999). Deborah Hankey, “The Awakening of Full Human Potential Through Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s Vedic Science: Research on the Experience of Reading the Vedic Literature,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 2000). Graham de Freitas, “A Case Study of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s Program for Reading Vedic Literature: Revealing the Effect of Vedic Sounds on Growth Towards Higher States of Consciousness, Enhanced Intuition, and Increasingly Refined Poetic Expression,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 2002). McQuiston, Tina Colleen, “The Maharishi Program for Reading Vedic Literature: Results Utilizing the Technology of Vedic Sound in the Light of Prachetanå,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 2004). Oates, Patricia Ferguson, “The Program of Reading Vedic Literature in Maharishi Vedic Science: Fundamental Principles and Application,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 2004).


30

Pohlman, David Matthew, “Unfolding Spiritual Potential Through the Transcendental Meditation and TM-Sidhi Programs and Reading Vedic Literature,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 2004). Wegman, Keith Stewart, “Applying the Principal Educational Methodology of Maharishi Vedic Science—The Maharishi Transcendental Meditation Program and Maharishi’s Program of Reading the Vedic Literature—for Accelerated Development of Higher States of Consciousness Characterized by Life in Accord with Natural Law,” (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, 2004). 5

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi Vedic University: Celebrating Perfection in Education: Dawn of Total Knowledge, (India: Age of Enlightenment Publications, 1997), p. 8ff. 6

His Majesty King Nader Raam, Human Physiology, (July, 2000), pp. 100ff.

7

For example, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1994) pp. 153ff.

8

Nader, Tony, (July, 2000), Chapter 8, “Veda and the Vedic Literature in the Physiology,” pp. 64–227. 9

At time of writing, this website is located at http://is1.mum.edu/vedicreserve/

10

Learning to read the Devanågar¥ script is taught in classes at Maharishi University of Management, and in the Maharishi School of the Age of Enlightenment. Please refer to Thomas Egenes, Learning the Sanskrit Alphabet, (Fairfield: Maharishi University of Management Press, 1997). 11

Please refer to footnote 9, p. 3.

12

Kleinschnitz, pp. 154-168.

13

Kleinschnitz, pp.154-156.

14

Ramberg, p.141.

15

Aithal, K. Parameswara, Veda-Lakshana: Vedic Ancillary Literature: A Descriptive Bibliography, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993), p. 11. 16 17

Aithal, Veda-Lakshana, p. 11.

The arithmetic changed over the years, as more weight was given to individual Ãyurvedic texts and Pråtishåkhya, so that the number swelled to forty branches.


18

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1994), pp. 182–184.

19

Ramberg, p. 142.

20

Kleinschnitz, pp. 157–158.

21

Ramberg, p. 142.

22

Kleinschnitz, p. 157.

23


24

Nader, (1995), Chapter 5, “The Vedic Literature in the Physiology,” pp. 65–193.

25

Nader, (2000). For the lesser known Ãyurvedic texts, see pp. 196–198.

26

Nader, (2000).

31

27

The Vedic Vibration program uses Vedic sounds as therapeutic technology, for treating physiological imbalances and diseases. 28

For a list of dissertations on Reading the Vedic Literature, see above, footnote 4.

29

Ramberg, (1999), pp. 137–140.

30

Please refer to above, footnote 4.

31

Lectures by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi to Maharishi University of Management faculty during their visit to Vlodrop, Holland in 1998. 32

Lectures by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi to Maharishi University of Management faculty during their visit to Vlodrop, Holland in 1998. 33

In addition to the written theses of the students, until 1994, Maharishi received monthly progress reports from the students reading Vedic Literature in the Ph.D. program at Maharishi University of Management. 34

Maharishi Open University, “Creating a Perfect Man,” 1999–2000, and 2000–2001, Dr. Tony Nader. 35

Maharishi Open University, lectures by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi in “Creating a Perfect Man.”


32

36

Learning the Devanågar¥ script, and reading the Vedic Literature began in the Maharishi School of the Age of Enlightenment in Fairfield, IA, in 1981, but the curriculum has been limited to a few texts. 37

Online Computer Library Center, OCLC Online Computer Library Center, Inc. Dublin, OH 43017–3395. 38

The Ideal Vedic Library, Appendix II of this dissertation, presents the textbooks of a comprehensive and complete collection of Vedic Literature. While almost all the books in this collection are available in North American libraries, no library in America owns even close to all these texts. 39

As an extreme example, there are texts, such as Nånd¥ Puråâ, that are available only in microfilm. 40

This principle, that Sanskrit is best represented by the Devanågar¥ script is implicit in all of Maharhishi Mahesh Yogi’s lectures on Vedic Science. It is a testable hypothesis, using modern EEG equipment, because the EEG signature of reading Vedic Literature is distinctive. However, there has been no contention on this point: The Mahoreg font is a simple and elegant font, clear and easy to read and much preferred by student readers: At Maharishi University of Management, transliteration is used only as a learning tool 41

Freund, Peter, ed., Shr¥mad Bhagavad G¥tå, (Fairfield: Maharishi International University Press, 1994). Freund, ed., Nyåya S™tras of Maharishi Gautama, (Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Management Press, 1997). Freund, ed., Vaisheshika S™tras of Maharishi Kanåda, (Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt. Press, 1997). Freund, ed., Såmkhya S™tras of Maharishi Kapila, (Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Management Press, 1998). Freund, ed., Yoga S™tras of Maharishi Patanjali, (Fairfield: Maharishi International Univ. Press, 1995). Freund, ed., Karma M¥måmså S™tras of Maharishi Jaimini, (Fairfield: Maharishi U. of Mgmt. Press, 1998). Freund, ed., Vedånta S™tras of Maharishi Bådaråyana, (Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt. Press, 1996). 42

Product of Adobe Systems, San Jose, California.


33

43

As a compromise with scholars and users who may not be involved in the reading program, we include a bibliographical reference at the end of each text, showing where the particular text may be available in the published literature. 44

Lectures by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi to Maharishi University of Management faculty during their visit to Vlodrop in 1998. 45

Please refer to below, quotation on page 74, where Maharishi explains the importance of knowledge of the physiology in the context of a comprehensive program for gaining total knowledge. 46

By contrast, understanding the meaning of the words (in Sanskrit, or in any foreign language) is a strenuous, time-consuming and superficial process, compared to the program of innocently pronouncing the sequence of sounds.

`

VEDIC LITERATURE READING CURRICULUM

Peter Franklin Freund

A Dissertation Submitted to the Graduate School of Maharishi University of Management in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

July, 2006

Dissertation Supervisor: Professor Thomas Egenes

© 2006 Peter Franklin Freund All Rights Reserved Graduate School Maharishi University of Management Fairfield, Iowa ® Transcendental Meditation, TM-Sidhi, Maharishi Transcendental Meditation, Maharishi TM, Maharishi TM-Sidhi, Maharishi Vedic Science, Vedic Science, ConsciousnessBased and Maharishi University of Management are registered or common law trademarks licensed to Maharishi Vedic Education Development Corporation and used with permission.

CHAPTER 2: THE VEDIC ALPHABET I. THE SOURCE OF THE VEDIC ALPHABET The starting point for the study of the Sanskrit alphabet is the direct experience of what in Sanskrit is called Ãtmå. In modern times it is described as Transcendental Consciousness, the fourth state of consciousness;1 it is experienced as the source of thought, unbounded wakefulness, bliss consciousness, the experiencer awake in himself without any object of perception.2 The development of experience of Transcendental Consciousness has been systematized in a practical format of instruction, called the Transcendental Meditation® technique. Through the practice of the Transcendental Meditation program, individuals report the experience of “restful alertness,” where the mind is peaceful, restful, but alert, awake inside, while the body is gaining very deep rest.3 Forty years of scientific research on the practice has validated the uniqueness of this state, distinguishing it from ordinary waking state experiences and has shown the growth of higher states of consciousness, states of consciousness utilizing more and more “hidden reserves,” the innate potential of the human nervous system.4 When the myriad thoughts and engagements of the active mind settle down, during the practice of the Transcendental Meditation technique, and the knower, the inner Self of the individual, remains awake in himself, then that Self or Ãtmå, which is unbounded in space and time, comes to be perceived as the source of thought, the source of all the energy and intelligence that is expressed in the various channels of life and living of the individual.5 The inner Self is a field of pure life, a field of pure intelligence, pure wakefulness. It is the stirring, the reverberation of this field of infinite intelligence, the inner Self of every individual, that is the starting point of Vedic speech, according to

CHAPTER 2: THE VEDIC ALPHABET

35

Maharishi. The generation of speech from the silence of the Self or Ãtmå, is described in verses 6 and 7 of the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå:

a;Tm; buı‰; smeTy;q;Rn( mno yu¤π ivv=y; mn" k;y;i¶m;hiNt s p[eryit m;®tm( 6 m;®tStUris crNmN{' jnyit Svrm(

The Self stirs with an intention. Together with the intellect, it takes a direction, and engages the mind. The mind strikes the fire of the body, which in turn drives out the air. The air moving within the lungs, causes the emergence of subtle sound, which becomes sound―Svaram―the reverberation of the Self.6

The first sound, the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet,7 “A” is the reverberation of the Self, the stirring of the unbounded field of pure wakefulness. II. THE SOUND “A” The teaching of the Transcendental Meditation technique stems from an ancient Indian tradition called the Vedic tradition, the tradition of “Veda.” The word “Veda” means knowledge, pure knowledge; the Vedic tradition is a tradition of teachers upholding the technology of direct experience of the field of pure knowledge, the Self, and the intellectual understanding of the reverberations of the Self, the stirring of unbounded pure wakefulness in the expressions of pure knowledge, the Veda. The Veda is thousands of years old, preserved in human memory, and recited without variation generation after generation by the Vedic families of India. Maharishi describes the Vedic tradition as a tradition of total knowledge, starting with the sound “A”: The Vedic tradition is the voice of eternity, and it goes on and on with perfection in its unmanifest value and its manifest value, and how the unmanifest manifests. All that is expressed in the Vedic sounds, Vedic sequentially developing Vedic sounds, starting from one sound “A.” “A” is the first reverberation of total, we can say tradition of knowledge, we can say total knowledge. Total knowledge means eternity—all about silence, all about dynamism. It’s an eternal theme of progression.8


36

On any journey, the starting point, the first step, is like the seed that contains within it the whole progression of the journey up to the final achievement of the goal. Like the first step of a journey, the first sound of the Sanskrit alphabet, which is also the first sound of the Âik Veda, contains the total knowledge in seed form. All the possibilities that can be expressed in speech, are abstractly contained in the first letter, which articulates the potentiality of expression: Whatever knowledge can be expressed in speech in all disciplines and phases of life, has its starting point here, in the very first sound of the Sanskrit alphabet: The entire infinite variety and its organization and expansion are available in one word “A”—totality—just in one word. It’s like when we are far away from a market, we hear one sound: “hummmmm,” one sound. All the innumerable talks of the market collect in one sound, and they are heard as one syllable, “A.” That is “A,” supposing. As we go nearer and nearer, as we become more acquainted with the sound, we enter into the sound, and then we begin to differentiate many sounds with all other sounds. And when we are in the market, we can talk to a man who is selling oranges or diamonds and this and this and this. But from a distance, one syllable. And that one syllable contains all the sounds of the market.9 Like so many different vendors in a marketplace, all the different fields of knowledge merge together in pure abstract potentiality of expression in the sound “A.” From this sound “A” emerge the eight Svara, which are the first stage of expansion of the all-possibilities structure of the first Sanskrit alphabet, “A.” III. THE EIGHT SVARA The Sanskrit word, “Svara” means vowel; but on a deeper level, Maharishi explains, it is the reverberation, “ra” of the Self, “sva.”10 In the reverberation of the “A,” all the letters of the alphabet are contained; but there is a sequential evolution of sounds, starting from the abstract all-possibilities structure of “A,” and proceeding to more and more concrete, more and more manifest, more and more limited or point value expressions—the openness of the vowels is sequentially clamped down, closed down to


37

the rigid specificity of the consonants. This progression from abstract to specific, from open throat to closed, from infinity to point, is found already in the first level of expansion of the pure sound “A” into its diverse expressions: Maharishi explains that the first level of expansion is the formation of the eight fundamental, pure vowels, the eight Svara. The eight Svara, as Maharishi has identified them, range from the completely open throat sound of “A,” to the completely closed sound of “˜.” Maharishi counts the eight Svara to be ìA,î ìI,î ìU,î ìÂi,î ìL®i,î ìE,î ìO,î and ìA˜.î11 In this list of eight, only the pure sound, called a “Varâ” or color of sound, is represented, and not the various alphabets formed from it, such as “A,” “Ã” and ìÃ3,î for example. The dipthong “AI” is left out because in pronunciation, first “A” is pronounced, and then ìIî is pronounced, whereas ìEî is a continuous homogenous sound distinct from both “A” and ìIî; similarly “AU” is left out, but ìO,î a homogenous vowel sound is included. The eight Svara are the fundamental irreducible vowel sounds of the Sanskrit language.12 Maharishi explains the evolution of the eight Svara from “A”: How many syllables come up within the “A”? There is a very systematic evolution of “A” into eight: “A,” “I,” “U,” “Âi.” These are the alphabets of the Sanskrit language. “A,” “I,” “U”—like that, there are eight. In the eight is “M.” “A”-infinity; “M,” “Ma,” the point. From infinity to point is the expanded version of the one holistic version of the Constitution of the Universe. And these have been explained in the Vedic Literature in terms of one value: Ãtmå, Ãtmå —one value, Ãtmå. “A”—again, starting from “A”—“A,” significant, one Ãtmå.13 These eight Svara are the eight-fold reverberations of the Self, Ãtmå, and this is the abstract foundation of all Vedic speech. From the eight fundamental Svara, all the vowels of the Sanskrit language may be derived. IV. THE VOWELS OF THE SANSKRIT LANGUAGE In the traditional recitation of the alphabet, there are 15 vowels

a a; î È ¨ Ë A Å lO E Ee ao a* a' a"


38

a å i ¥ u ™ ®i ©i ¬ri e ai o au aµ a˙ By contrast, the alphabet used in grammar, the Pratyåhåra S™tra, lists only 9 vowels,

a î ¨,( A lOk™ E aoõ™ Ee a*c( a i uˆ ®i ¬ri k e oã ai auc

The list is shortened by allowing a single “A” to stand for short and long versions of the letter, as also for “I,” “U” and “Âi”; and by leaving out the Anusvåra and Visarga entirely. Taittir¥ya Pråtishåkhya14 asserts that there are sixteen initial Svara or vowels:

Wo@x;idt" Svr;" ∑ho∂aßhådita˙ svarå˙

There is a traditional couplet describing the sixteen Svara, and it is presented by Ãpishali,15 Ãtreya16 and Påri17 in their respective Shikshå texts:

ÓSvdI`RPlut;v,eRv,oRv,;R A Å lO c Edwdod*idit Dey;" Wo@xeh;idt" Svr;" hrasva-d¥rgha-plutåvarêvarôvarˆå ®i ©i ¬ri ca edaidodauditi jñeyå˙ ∑ho∂aßehådita˙ svarå˙

The couplet requires some explanation: long, and

ÓSv Hrasva, means short, dI`R

D¥rgha means

Plut Pluta refers to the extended long vowels, written with the number three

following the letter in the text: The Pluta vowel is said to be held for 3 Måtras, compared to 1 Måtra for the Hrasva vowels, and two Måtras for the D¥rgha vowels. If the Saµdhi is pulled apart, so that the contributing words are seen, then the verse becomes more clear:

ÓSv-dI`R-Plut-av,R-îv,R-¨v,;R" A Å l» c Ed( Eed( aod( a*d( îit Dey;" Wo@x-îh-a;idt" Svr;" hrasva-d¥rgha-pluta-avarâ-ivarâ-uvarˆå˙ ®i ©i ¬ri ca ed aid od aud iti jñeyå˙ ∑ho∂aßha-iha-ådita˙ svarå˙


39

The Varâ or sound “A,” as well as the Varâ “I” and the Varâ “U” are found as Hrasva, D¥rgha and Pluta, making for a total of 9 vowels. Added to that are short and long “Âi,” and “L®i,” for a total of 12 vowels in the first line of the couplet. The second line uses a terminal “T,” changed to “D” by Samdhi, to separate the dipthong vowels, a traditional notation in grammar used to mark an individual letter.18 Thus “E,” “AI,” “O,” and “AU,” become “Ed,” “AId,” “Od,” and “AUd.” Then, the word “Iti” is used to denote that this is the end of the list. The verse thus says that there are 16 initial vowels to be learned, and they are:

a a; a;3 î È È3 ¨ Ë Ë3 A Å lO E Ee ao a* a å å3 i ¥ ¥3 u ™ ™3 ®i ©i ¬ri e ai o au

The most well-known Shikshå, is the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå. The text asserts that there are 21 vowels.19

Svr; iv'xitrekí svarå viµßatirekaßh ca Although the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå does not enumerate which those 21 vowels are, commentators agree that the additional vowels are made up by the plutas of dipthongs e, ai, o, and au and vocalic ® as the fifth. Thus Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå’s list of 21 vowels is:

a a; a;3 î È È3 ¨ Ë Ë3 A Å Å3 lO E E3 Ee Ee3 ao ao3 a* a*3 a å å3 i ¥ ¥3 u ™ ™3 ® © ©3 ¬ e e3 ai ai3 o o3 au au3 20

Finally, a fragment of an ancient Shikshå text by Vasi∑hˇha claims that there are 26 vowels:

Svr;" Wi@±v'xit" p[oˇ_;" svarå˙ ∑ha∂viµßhati˙ proktå˙21


40

This is the expansion of the eight Svara into the full range of vowels in the Sanskrit alphabet.22 The vowels, arising from their source in “A,” in turn give rise to the consonants. V. VOWELS AND CONSONANTS Investigation into the foundation of knowledge of the ancient Vedic civilization, the study of pure knowledge, Veda, is called “Vedic Study.” Vedic Study, Maharishi explains, is not the study of anything outside of oneself.23 It is the study of the Self, the Ãtmå. The Self reverberates and expresses itself in the one eternal sound, “A,” and then the one sound, “A,” is seen for its eight-fold values in the eight basic Svara, which expand to create all the vowels. Finally, in the full expansion of the sound “A,” there is the formation of consonants from the vowels. The expansion of “A” to all the vowels, and then to the consonants, expresses the collapsing of the abstract to the concrete, the collapsing of infinity to its own point; this is the dynamics of human consciousness, expanding and contracting, reverberating back and forth between its unbounded cosmic status, and its localized finite point value; in this dynamism of reverberation of the Self, the study of the Veda becomes meaningful. Maharishi explains the investigation of the Vedic sounds as the exploration of the relationship between vowels and consonants: When you study the Vedic Literature, then first you study the vowels and consonents, then you study the gaps between vowels and the consonents. This is studying the nature of the Self. And when you study the nature of the Self, you see that the Self reverberates in terms of its own reverberations and they are the Svara; they are the reverberations of Ãtmå. And they are the vowels. There are two values in the language, one is vowel and one is consonant—vowels and consonants. This is Vedic Literature, this Vedic language made of vowels— that means reverberations of the Self itself. . . . It is a beautiful sequentially evolving reality of how the singularity of Ãtmå, the singularity of the SelfReferral intelligence multiplies itself. It multiplies itself as the first syllable— eight syllables—and from there they become the consonants. Consonants are Vyañjana, we call it, Svara and Vyañjana.


41

Svara means reverberations of the Self, reverberations of the Total Natural Law, Ãtmå, consciousness. And they then extend into the consonants. Consonants are the syllables where the vowels are attached to other words. Ka, Kha, Ga, Gha. Always “A,” “A,” “A,” “A.” Ka, Kha, Ga, Gha, Ta, Tha, Da, Dha, Pa, Pha, Ba. Always “A,” “A,” “A.” “A” is the first Svara, the first vowel. The first vowel “A” is the flow of silence. “Aaaaaaaaaaa.” It is sound that carries the character of the infinite value of unified wholeness—“Aaaaaaaaaaa.” “Iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii.” So “A” stands for silence; “I” stands for dynamism. Like that, the whole conception and the emergence of one syllable from the other syllable—one within the other— huge infinity, and the point of infinity also has the total concentrated value of the Self.24 Here Maharishi has given an expanded microscopic view of the totality of knowledge contained in the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, “A”: What he called, in his analogy, the hum of the marketplace, which was like a roar from a distance, has been resolved, on closer approach, first into the different vowels and then into vowels and consonants, all participating together in the eternal flow of silence. This is how Maharishi explains the ultimate source of all the letters of the Sanskrit alphabet in the silence of the Self, or Ãtmå. The different consonants of the Sanskrit alphabet have been classified and systematized by the authors of the various Íhik∑hå texts. VI. CONSONANTS Consonants are called Vyañjana in Sanskrit. Although there was a considerable range of opinion as to the number of vowels, there is much less diversity of opinion as to how many consonants there are. Here is Gautama’s presentation of the consonants:25

aq ]yiS]'x√‰Ôn;in .viNt ) Spx;RNtSqo„m;,íeit atha trayas-triµßad vyañjanåni bhavanti , sparßåntastho∑hmåâß ceti Gautama asserts that there are 33 consonants, and that consonants are of three kinds, Sparßha, (full contact consonants), Anta˙stha (semi-vowels), and ¤∑hmåâ (sibilants).26 1. Sparßha (full contact) consonants. Gautama begins by defining the Sparßha, or contact consonants:


42

t] kk;r;dyo mk;r;Nt;" Spx;R" pçiv'xití tatra kakårådayo makåråntå˙ sparßhå˙ pañcaviµßatißhca

The letters starting with the letter “Ka” and ending with the letter “Ma” are the Sparßha, and they are twenty-five in number. This apparently alludes to the traditional recitation of the alphabet, in which there are five rows or vargas of five consonants each:

k%g`õ czjZñ $#@!, tqd/n pfb.m ka kha ga gha ãa cha chha ja jha ña ˇa ˇha ∂a ∂ha â ta tha da dha na pa pha ba bha ma Gautama enumerates them differently, separating out the nasal sounds as a separate category within the set of Sparßha. His listing nevertheless starts with “Ka” and ends with “Ma”:

aq;nNTy; iv'xit.RviNt te kc$tp;" %z#qf; gj@db; `Z!/.;íeTyq;NTy;" pç te õñ,nm;íeit athånantyå viµßatir bhavanti te ka-ca-ˇa-ta-på˙ kha chha ˇha tha phå ga ja ∂a da bå gha jha ∂ha dha bhåßcetyathåntyå˙ pañca te ãa ña ânamåßceti Ãpishali, Påri and Ãtreya27 present the Sparßha in verse form:

k%* g`* õczj; Zñ* $#@!; ,t* qd* /n* pfb.; m" Spx;R" pçiv'xit"

ka-khau ga-ghau ãa-cha-chha-jå jha-ñau ˇa-ˇha-∂a-∂hå â-tau


43

tha-dau dha-nau pa-pha-ba-bhå ma˙ sparßhå˙ pañcaviµßati˙ The Pratyåhåra S™tra of Vedic grammar present the 25 Sparßha in six separate S™tra.28 The nasals are presented separately, as one group; the next three S™tra are devoted to the Gho∑ha or voiced consonants: Two of these three S™tra are devoted to the voiced aspirated consonants, and then the third one to the voiced unaspirated consonants; finally, eight out of the ten unvoiced, Agho∑ha consonants are listed in one S™tra starting with the five aspirated consonants; “Ka” and “Pa” are given their own final S™tra, thus completing the presentation of the Sparßha consonants:

ñmõ,nm( Z.ñ( `!/W( jbg@dx( %fz#qc$tv( kpy( ña-ma-ãa-â-nam jha-bhañ gha-∂ha-dha∑h ja-ba-ga-∂a-daß kha-pha-cha-ˇha-tha-ca-ˇa-tav ka-pay Finally, a S™tra from Taittir¥ya Pråtishåkhya sums up the Sparßha consonants:29

a;¥;" pç…v\ xit Spx;‹" ŒdyŒú pa–caviº§ati spar§Œú

The first group of consonants are these 25 full contact consonants called “Sparßha.”


44

2. Anta˙stha Consonants (semivowels). The second group of consonants that Gautama mentions while defining “Vyañjana” are the Anta˙stha consonants. Anta˙stha are stationed (stha) in the middle (antar) between vowels and consonants. They do not have the full contact of the Sparßha consonants, nor the free flow of the vowel sounds; they are called semi-vowels in English. Gautama says there are four, and they are “Ya,” “Ra,” “La” and “Va”:30

cTv;roåNtSq;Ste yrlv;" chatvåroíntasthås te ya-ra-la-vå˙

Vasishˇha agrees that there are four:31

cTv;rí tq;NtSq;" chatvåraß cha tathåntasthå˙

Ãmareßhi says similarly:32

ctßo y;dyoåNtSq;" chatasro yådayoíntasthå˙

Ãpishali, Ãtreya and Påri phrase it metrically:33

yr* lv* ctßoåNtSq;í ya-rau la-vau catasroíntasthåß cha

Yåjñavalkya further describes their qualities:34

cTv;yRNtSq; yrlv;" kiplv,;R a…¶dwvTy;" chatvåryantasthå ya-ra-la-vå˙ kapilavarˆå agnidaivatyå˙

In the Pratyåhåra S™tra of Vedic grammar, the letter “Ha” is added to the group, although it is not being classed as a semi-vowel. There are two S™tra:35

hyvr$( l,( ha-ya-va-raˇ laˆ

The Taittir¥ya Pråtishåkhya sums up in one S™tra:36


45

pr;ítßoåNtSq;" paråß chatasroíntasthå˙

3. ¤∑hman Consonants (sibilants and ha). The final class of “Vyañjana” consonants identified by Gautama are called

Ë„m;, (¤∑hmåâ). Gautama says that

there are four ¤∑hman letters, ìHa,î ìÍa,î ìÛaî and ìSaî:37

cTv;río„m;,Ste hxWs;íeit

chatvåraß co∑hmåâs te ha ßha ∑ha såß ceti

Yajñavalkya gives the traditional sequence of these four ™∑hman letters:38

cTv;yUR„m;," xWsh; a®,v,;R a;idTydwvTy;" chatvåry-™∑hmåâ˙ ßha ∑ha sa hå aruâvarˆå ådityadaivatyå˙

A similar treatment is found in the Pratyåhåra S™tra, where the last two S™tra are devoted to these four ¤∑hman letters:39

xWsr( hl( ßha ∑ha sar hal

It is interesting to note that the Pratyåhåra S™tra list the letter “Ha” twice, once as the first of the anta˙stha (semivowel) class, and then again here, directly following the three sibilants. By contrast, Vasishˇha, Påri, Ãpishali, Ãtreya, and the Taittir¥ya Pråtishåkhya all declare that there are six ¤∑hman letters. Vasishˇha says:40

W@Ü„m;," p[k°itRt;" ∑ha∂ ™∑hmåâ˙ prak¥rtitå˙

Ãtreya, Påri and Ãpishali all identify what the six are with the same metrical expression:41


46

cãkxWsæph;" W@Ü„m;,"

cha˙ ka ßha ∑ha sa˙ pa hå˙ ∑ha∂ ™∑hmåâ˙

Visarga is a breath following a vowel sound, that may be pronounced at the completion of a word. Ancient Indian phoneticians noticed that if the breath or Visarga was pronounced directly before a following “Ka,” then the closing or choking down of the throat tended to make the Visarga take on a sort of rasping throat sound as the breath rushed by the root of the tongue. They called this transformed Visarga, pronounced immediately before a guttural “Ka” or “Kha,” Jihvåm™l¥ya. Jihvå means tongue, and M™la means root, so the name means “pronounced at the root of the tongue.” Phoneticians also noticed that if the Visarga is pronounced directly before a following “Pa,” then the closing of the lips created a distinctive sort of blowing sound. This transformed visarga is called Upadhmån¥ya. In ancient Vedic language, these two sounds, Jihvåm™l¥ya and Upadhmån¥ya are considered different letters, different from the ordinary Visarga. They are even given their own symbols. Sometimes they are represented by two different symbols, represented by the same symbol

ã and æ but more commonly they are both

ã since the context, namely the following “Ka,” or

“Kha,” or “Pa,” or “Pha,” makes obvious which of the two is intended. In recent times, the use of a special symbol to denote Jihvåm™l¥ya and Upadhmån¥ya has become infrequent, even in Vedic texts, and the two dots of the Visarga are often used even when the Jihvåm™l¥ya and Upadhmån¥ya are intended. In the above metrical phrase, the Visarga preceding the letter “Ka” is the Jihvåm™l¥ya and the Visarga preceding the letter “Pa” is the Upadhmån¥ya. The letters “Ka” and “Pa” are here used by the seers only to show the special nature of the Visarga sounds; “Ka” and “Pa” are not themselves considered part of the series of ¤∑hman letters. Thus, according to Ãtreya, Påri and Ãpishali, the ¤∑hman letters are:


47

x W s h, (ßha ∑ha sa ha), jihvåm™l¥ya and upadhmån¥ya.

42

Taittir¥ya Pråtißhåkhya agrees with Ãtreya, Påri and Ãpißhali in declaring the number of the ¤∑hman letters as six:43

pre W@Ü„m;,"

pare ∑ha∂ ™∑hmåâ˙ Âik Veda Pråtißhåkhya declares the ¤∑hman letters to be eight:

¨ˇreå∑; Ë„m;," uttareí∑hˇå ™∑hmåâ˙

Commentators elaborate that these eight ¤∑hman letters are ha, ßha ∑ha sa, Visarga, Jihvåm™l¥ya, Upadhmån¥ya and Anusvara.44 These three groups, Sparßha, Anta˙stha and ¤∑hman comprise the consonants in the Sanskrit alphabet. VII. ADDITIONAL LETTERS: CHODITA AND YAMA 4. Choditas. There is another class of letters, according to Ãpishali, called the Chodita. The word Chodita comes from the root “cud,” to impel, incite, cause to move quickly. All are derived from the quick or sudden movement of the breath in the throat, nose or mouth. There are five Chodita sounds. The class of six ¤∑hman letters is the first; the Visarga is the second; the Anusvara is the third, the retroflex “£a,” is the fourth, and the class of sounds called Anunåsikya or simply Nåsya, make up the fifth. These are described by Ãpishali and Påri, in one line:45

ivsg;RnuSv;r¬;í;nun;isKy;" pç coidt;" 6 visargånusvåra¬åßhchånunåsikyå˙ pañcha choditå˙ 6


48

The list presents four Chodita letters, although counting five: Visarga, anusvåra, “£a,” and Anunåsikya. Ãpishali and Påri raise the number to five in a subsequent verse by adding the six ¤∑hmåâ letters as one member of the group of five Choditas:46

W@Ü„m;,o ivsgoRånuSv;ro ¬o n;Sypçkm( 9 ∑ha∂™∑hmåô visargoínusvåro ¬o nåsyapañchakam 9

The ¤∑hmåâ letters and Visarga have already been described. The Anusvåra or “Aµ,” is handled differently in each of the four Vedas, and the name and symbol are often pre-empted in the later classical literature as a short-hand for a final nasal, or a nasalized vowel. However, the pure Anusvåra is something different. L. Aravind explains the pure Vedic Anusvåra: The Íhaunaka, Måˆ∂™kya, Påîni and other authorities have declared that the Anusvåra “˜” in its original state is a voiced sound involving only the Nåsika and no other oral articulation (e.g. anusvåra yamånåµ cha nåsikå sthånaµ uchyate). This differentiates it from the other Anunåsikas such as “ma,” “na,”“â,” “ña,” and “ãa,” which are sounds with specific oral articulations that are tinged with passage of air through the nasal cavity. In the pure AnusvŒra the mouth is kept naturally closed without forming any particular articulation and the air is allowed to pass, superficial contacting the oral cavity into the nasal cavity. However, it does not pass into the oral cavity to resonate within it.47 The Anusvåra is considered to be purely a nasal sound, i.e., air is moving through the nostrils only during the pronunciation of Anusvåra. A quite different treatment of Anusvåra is found in some recensions of Yajur-Veda, Abhyankar explains. The Anusvåra may be treated “As a kind of consonant of the type of nasalized half “Ga,” (gm() as described in some treatises of the Yajur-veda Pråtißhåkhya .”48 The Anunåsikya is uttered through the nose and mouth both, as different from the Anusvåra which is uttered only through the nose. The five nasals

õñ,nm

(ãa ña â na m) of the Sparßha class are considered Anunåsikya; three of the four semivowels, “Ya,” “La,” and “Va,” and all the vowels may all be nasalized, becoming


49

Anunåsikya. These Anunåsikya semi-vowels and vowels are marked with chandrabindu

\ . The remaining Chodita is a retroflex “£a.” The retroflex “£a,” ¬ is substituted in the ancient Vedic language for the retroflex @ (Îa) when the “Îaî is preceded and followed by a vowel. The verb ¥∂e (È@º) which is the second word of Âik Veda, “I adore,” is changed to ¥¬e (È¬π). These five, ¤∑hmåâ, Visarga, Anusvåra, ¬, (£a,) and Anunåsikya, are the five Chodita described by Ãpishali and Påri. 5. Yama. There is another very important group of letters, called the Yama. According to a contemporary dictionary writer, a Yama is: one of a pair, a twin letter available in pronunciation before a nasal letter and similar to it, when the nasal consonant is preceded by any one of the four consonants of the five classes; the Yama is a transitional sound intervening between a non-nasal and the following nasal, as a counterpart of the non-nasal.49 In the conjunct “gn” in agnim, for example, the letter “Ga” succeeds in bringing the flow of speech to a complete stop. In order to pronounce the “Na,” some vibration must first be supplied to the voice box or larynx. This momentary stirring of sound in the voice box is considered to be a letter in its own right, called a Yama. There are four different kinds of Yama, according to whether the consonant preceding the nasal is hard or soft, aspirated or unaspirated. Yåjnavalkya describes the Yama very succinctly, giving four examples, and the four names of the Yama:

Km :m Gm ~m k⁄˘ %u' gu' ù' îit ym;íTv;r"

kma khma gma ghma kuµ khuµ guµ ghuµ iti yamåßhchatvåra˙ Gautama describes in detail the unique position of the Yama with respect to a

preceding consonant and following nasal:

aq;nNTy; iv'xit.RviNt te kc$tp;" %z#qf; gj@db; `Z!/.;íeTyq;NTy;" pç te õñ,nm;íeit aq;nNTy;íTv;rSte sym;Ste k⁄˘ %u' gu' ù'


50

îTynNTy;NTys'yogeånNTypUveRånNTyoˇre Vyv/;nvijRte t] ym; vˇRNte n s'xy îit

athånantyå viµßatirbhavanti te ka ca ˇa ta på˙ kha chha ˇha tha phå ga ja ∂a da bå gha jha ∂ha dha bhåßh chetyathåntyå˙ pañcha te ãa ña â na måßh cheti athånantyåßh chatvåras te sayamås te kuµ khuµ guµ ghuµ ityanantyåntyasaµyogeínantyap™rveínantyottare vyavadhånavarjite tatra yamå varttante na saµßhaya iti Gautama says: Now, the non-final letters (Anantya)(of the five Vargas or rows of consonants) are 20: They are Ka, Ca, Êa, Ta, Pa; Kha, Cha, Êha, Tha, Pha; Ga Ja Îa Da Ba, and Gha, Jha, Îha, Dha, and Bha. Now, the final letters (Antya)(of the five Vargas) are five: They are õa, Ña, Ôa, Na and Ma. Now, the non-final letters are of four kinds, corresponding to four Yama, Kuµ, Khuµ, Guµ, and Ghuµ. When a non-final letter is conjunct with a final letter, then in the gap before the final, but after the non-final letter, when there is no pause between the final and non-final letter, there the Yama reside without doubt.50 Starting from pure consciousness, Ãtmå, this chapter has examined the emergence

of the alphabet from pure silence, starting with the expression of the first sound, the first letter of the alphabet, “A.” The first letter, “A,” was seen to contain all the letters of the alphabet in seed form. The first sound, “A,” gave rise to the eight Svara, which in turn gave rise to all the vowels. The vowels in turn gave rise to the progressively collapsing sequence of consonants, the semivowels, the sibilants, and finally the full contact consonants or Sparßha. The furthest limit of this progression may be seen in the Yama. The Yama are not so much distinct letters, as a tangible manifest expression of the gap between letters, that value which holds two sounds together. The gap holding two sounds together reveals the underlying continuum of speech, the continuum of the sound “A,” that was the starting point of speech. The gap points to the continuum that is here made manifest as vibration: Here in the gap between letters, there is yet a sign of that unmanifest value of speech, the source of speech, consciousness, Ãtmå. It may be


51

inferred that by bringing the attention to the existence of this phase of speech, the Yamas, Gautama is laying out to vision the existence of a greater value of Yama, Yama the administrator: Organizing the collapse and emergence of successive sounds—the death and rebirth of sounds, one might say—Yama is found administering the entire field of speech by organizing the joining together of innumerable syllables into one continuum of flow of the totality of life. Thus it is seen that the alphabet letters called Yama may be understood as the organizing power of the mind made tangible; at once silent and dynamic, they exude the nature of unamnifest pure Transcendental Consciousness, that is the ultimate source of all the letters of the alphabet. Not carrying meaning, they remain unnoticed, but by energizing the gap, the field of transformation between letters, they are responsible for the diversity of expressions on the surface of speech. The Choditas and the Yamas are the final two groups of letters of the Sanskrit alphabet to be learned. With this knowledge of the whole range of the Sanskrit alphabet as taught by the sages who wrote the ancient Íhik∑hå texts, it is now possible to count the letters of the Sanskrit alphabet, and the various discrepancies in the numbers of letters propounded in different texts can be understood. VIII. THE SANKSRIT ALPHABET Maharishi has described the Sanskrit Alphabet as a perfect system of quantification of totality.51 The infinite continuum of the total potential of Natural Law, reverberating in the Self, gets quantified in speech, when the fully opened mouth, expressing the continuum of the sound “A,” the infinity of Being, is progressively collapsed down to a point in the sound “Ka,” in which the vibrations of sound are completely nil, and the breath is completely stopped—speech is brought to a standstill. It has been seen how systematically, in this collapse of infinity into a point, from “A” into “Ka,” from the abstract to the concrete, all the sounds of the Vedic alphabet emerge


52

sequentially. From the starting point of “A,” first the eight Svara emerge, expanding to all the vowels, and then from the vowels, the different classes of consonants emerge. The Sanskrit alphabet is called “Varâ-samåmnåya,” which means traditional collection of the letters of the Vedic alphabet. Collections of letters are found in the ancient Shikshå texts written by the great Maharshis of previous ages, and in the Pråtishåkhya of the various Veda, and in the text of Vedic grammar. These ancient texts often give more elaborate, more detailed and precise presentations of the alphabet, than the traditional recitations taught in schools and colleges. The traditional recitation of the Sanskrit alphabet involves 48 letters. (Please refer to Table 1, Varâ Samåmnaya.) Vasishˇha presents a Vedic alphabet of 68 letters, Påîni suggests that there are 63 or 64 letters. (Please refer to Table 2, Påîni’s alphabet.) Ãtreya counts 59 letters, while Ãpishali and Påri list 56 letters each. The Taittir¥ya Pråtishåkhya presents 51 letters, (Table 3), while in the Pratyåhåra S™tra of Vyåkaraâ, (Table 4) only 42 are given. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, in the context of comparing the Vedic alphabet to the 64 codons of the genetic code, suggested that there were 64 letters in the Vedic alphabet. (Please refer to Table 2). However in the context of learning the alphabet in order to enter into the reading and recitation of the Vedic Literature, he has set a number of 52 letters in the Vedic alphabet.52 The 52 letter Vedic alphabet includes the 48 sounds of the Varâ Samåmnåya (Table 1) augmented by Jihvåm™l¥ya and Upadhmån¥ya, and the retroflex semi-vowels “£a” and ì£ha.” (Please refer to Table 5: 52 Letter Alphabet.) This is the syllabary to be learned by students in the Vedic Literature reading program. The Vedic texts provide a number of additional orthographic peculiarities: There are accents that are noted differently and pronounced differently in the four Vedas; and in Yajur Veda there are a variety of symbols for Visarga, and Anusvåra. These will be reviewed, starting with the Vedic accents.


53

Table 1: Varâ Samåmnaya Traditional Recitation of the Sanskrit Alphabet

a a; î

È

a

¥

å

i

v,Rsm;ªy

¨ Ë A Å lO u

™

®i

E Ee

ao a* a' a"

e

o

ai

au

aµ

©i

¬ri

a˙

k % g ` õ ka

kha ga

gha ãa

c z j Z ñ cha

chha ja

jha

ña

$ # @ ! , ˇa

ˇha

t

q d / n

ta

tha

p

f b . m

pa

pha ba

y r

ya

∂a da

∂ha â dha na bha ma

l v x W s h ra

la

va

ßha ∑ha sa

ha


54

Table 2: Påîni's Alphabet Based on Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå

a a; a;3 î

È

È3 ¨ Ë Ë3

a

¥

¥3

å

å3

i

u

™

™3

A Å Å3 lO E E3 Ee Ee3 ®i

©i

©i3

¬ri

e

e3

ai

ai3

ao ao3 a* a*3 o

o3

au

au3

k % g ` õ

ka

kha ga

gha ãa

c z j Z ñ cha

chha ja

jha

ña

$ # @ ! , ˇa

ˇha

t

q d / n

p

f b . m

ta pa

tha

∂a da

pha ba


y r

l v x W s h

ya

la

ra

va

ßha

∑ha

sa

ha

k⁄˘ %u' gu' ù' a' a" ã æ ¬ ¿h kuµ khuµ guµ

ghuµ aµ

aú

jihvŒmªlýa

upadhmŒnýa

Â

Âha


55

Table 3: Taittir¥ya Pråtißhåkhyaís Alphabet

a a; a;3 î

È

A Å lO E

Ee ao a*

a

®i

å

©i

å3 ¬ri

i

e

¥

ai

È3 ¨ Ë Ë3 ¥3

o

u

™

™3

au

k % g ` õ

ka

kha ga

gha ãa

c z j Z ñ cha

chha ja

jha

ña

$ # @ ! , ˇa

ˇha

t

q d / n

p

f b . m

ta pa

tha

∂a da

pha ba


y r

l v x W s h

ya

la

ra

ã jihvŒmªlýa

va

ßha

∑ha

æ a" a' a\ upadhmŒnýa

aú

aµ

aº

sa

ha


Table 4: Pratyåhåra S™tra of Vyåkaraâ

a î ¨ ,( a i u A lO k™ ï Âri E ao õ™ e o Ee a* c( ai au hyvr$( ha ya va ra l,( la ñmõ,nm( –a ma ‹a öa na Z.ñ( jha bha `!/W( gha ¶ha dha jbg@dx( ja ba ga ¶a da %fz#qc$tv( kha pha chha ÿha tha cha ÿa ta kpy( ka pa xWsr( §ha ·ha sa hl( (ö)

(k)

(‹)

(ch)

(ÿ)

(ö)

(m)

(–)

(·h)

(§h)

(y)

(r)

ha

(l)

(v)

56


57

Table 5: 52-Letter Vedic Alphabet of the Vedic Literature Reading Curricululm

a a; î

È

¨ Ë A Å lO

a

¥

u

å

i

™

®i

E Ee

ao a* a' a"

e

o

ai

au

aµ

©i

¬ri

a˙

k % g ` õ ka

kha ga

gha ãa

c z j Z ñ cha

chha ja

jha

ña

$ # @ ! , ˇa

ˇha

∂a

t

q d / n

ta

tha

p

f b . m

pa

pha ba

da


y r

l v x W s h

ya

la

ra

va

ßha

∑ha

ã æ ¬ ¿h jihvŒmªlýa

upadhmŒnýa

Âa Âha

sa

ha


58

IX. VEDIC LETTERS AND MARKS 1. Vedic Accents. The Âik Veda is chanted, and there are different tones or accents that are traditionally marked in the text. The three accents in the Âik Veda are the Udåtta, the Anudåtta, and the Svarita. The Anudåtta, or un-raised pitch is the low tone. It is marked with a horizontal line below the syllable. The Svarita is a high pitch, or sliding note; it is marked with a vertical line above the syllable. The Udåtta or raised tone, is not marked; also unaccented syllables are not marked. The first verse of Âik Veda looks as follows with these accent markings:

aô…¶mIÿ¬π puûroihÿt' yÖDSyÿ deÖvmOû‚Tvjÿm( ) hot;ÿr' ràÖ/;tÿmm( 1 Âik Veda also has what is called a Kampa accent, which may be short or long, and is written accordingly with a 1 or a 3, having both a Svarita accent above the number, and an Anudåtta accent mark below. An example is shown from S™kta 2, verse 6:

mÖæ+v1ÖÿTq; …/ôy; nÿr; 6 The Såma Veda Saµhitå uses an entirely different system of notation. The Udåtta accent is written as a “1” above the syllable. The Svarita accent is written as a “2” above the syllable. The Anudatta is written as a “3” above the syllable. “2U” and “2R” are additional kinds of Svarita accents, called appropriately Svarita U and Svarita Ra. “3K” is a special Anudatta accent called Anudåtta Ka, and finally there is a Såmavedic U accent written as an “U” above the syllable.53 The first verse of Såma Veda looks as follows with these accent markings:

1

aÅ¶è a;Ä y;Åih vIètÄyeÅ gO,;ènoÅ hèVyÄd;Åtye inÄ hot;ñ s‚Ts bèihÄRiWÅ 1

The Atharva Veda uses accent markings similar to those of Âik Veda, with the


addition of the Jåtya Svarita accent, which is an unusual flourish:

59

˝ The first verse of

Atharva Veda looks as follows, with a Jåtya Svarita accent just past the middle of the second line:

ye i]ÿWÖ¢;" pÿ·rÖy≤Ntô ivê;ÿ ÂÖp;…,ô …b.[ÿt" ) v;ôcSpitôbRl;ô teW;'Ã tÖNvo˝ aÖ¥ dÿ/;tu me –1– The Íhukla Yajur Veda accentuation system includes a symbol for a Jåtya Svarita that is like a cursive “w,” written below the syllable; there is also an Antargami Anudåtta, a horizontal line below the syllable, that has a short vertical hook attached on the left side; and the symbol for Anudåtta in Íhukla Yajur Veda notation is a curved horizontal line below the syllable, rather than a straight line. Verse 11 of the first chapter is shown as an example:

.Uût;yÿ Tv;Öô n;r;ÿtyeÖ Svùri.ôiv:yeÿWÖNÎ˝hÿNt;ôNdu≤;‹Ã… pOiqôVy; muûvRáNt·rÿ=ÖmNveÿim pOiqôVy;STv;ô n;.*Ã s;dy;ôMyidÿTy;å¨ÖpSqeå¶eÿ hÄVy˝ rÿ= 11 The K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda accentuation system varies in different recensions. The Taittir¥ya typically uses the system employed for Âik Veda. Kåˇhaka marks a Svarita with a caret below the syllable.54

t8

Anudåtta is marked with a vertical line below the syllable.

t9

The Jåtya Svarita is marked with a curved horizontal line below the syllable:

tÖ


60

This latter mark is also used by Maitråyaî Saµhitå. Maitråyaî Saµhitå, although following largely the accentuation system of Âik Veda, also uses a special Svarita mark consisting of three vertical lines above the syllable.55

t: There is also a “Sentence-ending” Udåtta consisting of two dots below the syllable, used in texts of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda:56

t; 2. Visarga. Íhukla Yajur Veda utilizes several additional marks for Visarga, the breath-like or “ha” sound at the end of words. These different marks provide information regarding accentuation and associated hand-movements. The first Visarga looks like a division sign, and is used when the Visarga follows the Svarita accent. Here is an example from verse 1 of Íhukla Yajur Veda:

îÄWe TvoôjeR Tv;ÿ v;Öyvÿ Sq deÖvo vÿæ sivÖt; p[;pÃRytuû ≈eœÿtm;yÖ The Visarga that have a semi-circle facing left or right, positioned around the upper or lower dot signal that the hand moves up or down, or left or right. Here is an example from verse 17:

≤Mpÿ·rÖi/MpÖ≤R/ÿTq;ôåa¶eÿ dev p;ôi,i.ÿguRûÁm;ÿn… ) tNtÿåEÖtmnuû joWÿM.r;MyôeW neÊvdÿpcÖety;ÿt;åaÖ¶eÆ ip[ôyMp;qopIÿtm( 17 3. Anusvåra. There are more than half a dozen symbols for the Anusvåra. The Anusvåra is usually written as a dot above the line of the syllable it follows. However, in the Taittir¥ya branch of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda, as well as in Såma Veda, the Anusvåra is written differently. It is written as a Chandra-bindu, written slightly below, and following


61

the horizontal line of the preceding syllable; it has a Viråma or halant written below it. Here is an example from the second verse of the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå.

yÖDSyÿ òôWd…sÖ p[Tyuÿ∑Ö˝r=Ö" In Yajur Veda there is a special Anusvåra that signals that thumb and forefinger touch briefly: This is shown below with some of its common variants:57

tX t‰ t1 t2 t3 There is a special Anusvåra used when the above Anusvåra follows short Måtrås, and is followed in turn by the letters “Íha,î ìÛha,î ìSa,î ìHa,î or ìÂi:î58

t4

Some other symbols for Anusvåra are:59

t5 t“ t6 t7 t˝ Here is an example showing the use of different Anusvåras, from verse 1 of chapter 4 of Íhukla Yajur Veda:

AûKs;ôm;>y;ÿã sÖNtrÿNtoô ≤jÿu.IR r;ÖySpoWÿe,Ö simôW; mÿdem ) îÖm;åa;pÖ… xmÿu me sNtu dÖevIroWÿ/Öe ];yÿSvÖ Svi/ÿteÖ mwnÿ˝ ih˝sI… 1 4. Special “Ya” in Íhukla Yajur Veda. One can see in the above line, that there is an unusual letter “Ya,” that has an oblique line drawn through it:

≤ This occurs

frequently in Íhukla Yajur Veda. This letter is used to represent a “Ya,” which although grammatically a true “Ya,” is pronounced as “Ja.” These are the special symbols used to represent Vedic Sanskrit. (Please refer to Table 6: Special Vedic Characters).


62

Table 6: Special Vedic Characters

k⁄˘ %u' gu' ù'

¬ ¿h ≤

kuµ

Âa

khuµ guµ

ghuµ

Âha

ya/ja

tX t‰ t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t“ t6 t7 t˝ t˝ Anusvåra:

t… tÆ tæ

Visarga: Vedic Accents

aÿ

aÖ

1Öÿ

3Öÿ

ÂgVeda Svarita

ÂgVeda Anudåtta

Short Kampa

Long Kampa

aÖ

vù

yÿ

vá

Anudåtta

Antargami Anudåtta

Svarita

Jåtya Svarita

Íhukla Yajur-Veda

Íhukla Yajur-Veda

Íhukla Yajur-Veda

Íhukla Yajur-Veda

t8

t9

tÖ

Kåˇhaka Svarita

Kåˇhaka Anudåtta

Kåˇhaka Jåtya Svarita

tÖ

t:

t;

Maitråyaˆ¥ya Jåtya Svarita Maitråyaˆ¥ya Svarita

Maitråyaˆ¥ya Sentence Ending Udåtta

a;Ä

aÅ

a;ñ

a;ô

Såma Veda Udåtta

Såma Veda Svarita

Såma Veda "Svarita ra"

Såma Veda "Svarita u"

aè

a¡

a‡;

Såma Veda Anudåtta

Såma Veda ìAnudåtta Kaî

Såma Veda ìUî

˝

Atharva Veda Jåtya Svarita


63

X. THE VALUE OF READING VEDIC LITERATURE The alphabet emerges sequentially from the eternal continuum of the sound “A,” through the eight Svara, and the evolution of all the vowels, to the semi-vowels and sibilants, and finally to the full contact consonants, called Sparßha. The underlying theme has been that “A” is the reverberation of one’s own consciousness when it is awake in itself, when it is referring only to itself, not to anything outside of itself: self-referral consciousness, reverberating within itself between the unbounded infinite continuum of its own nature, and the restricted finite point of its own nature, systematically gives rise to the sequentially unfolding sounds of the Vedic alphabet. The sounds of the Vedic Literature are the reverberations of the Ãtmå, the reverberations of one’s own Self. Reading Vedic Literature is a procedure, which combined with direct experience of the Self through the practice of the Transcendental Meditation technique, enlivens in individual human awareness the dynamics of evolution of consciousness, the mechanics whereby consciousness, the field of total natural law, expresses itself in the material world and creates the diverse universe. Having seen how the Vedic sounds emerge systematically from the field of consciousness, the field of the Self, Maharishi’s vision of the culturing of perfection through the recitation of the Vedic Literature can be understood: Maharishi sums up his theme of unfolding the latent potential of the individual through recitation of the sounds of the Vedic Literature as follows: Life is expressed through words. Vedic chanting are the words of consciousness —consciousness reverberates. So the Self of everyone is the consciousness of everyone. So Vedic Sounds—Vedic Mantras we call it to distinguish it from other sounds, ordinary sounds—so these are the Mantras from the Transcendental Field. They are the reverberations of the self-referral consciounsess. And the whole physical universe is the expression of these sounds, these vibrations. It is not a matter of belief. When you study the sounds of the mantras and you study the gaps between sounds, then you understand that the reverberations of these sounds, they are the speech of the Self. It is the Ãtmå that reverberates. It is called Svara. It is called


64

the reverberations of Ãtmå, it is called the reverberations of the Self. So Vedic reverberations of the Self, they are always at the basis of the evolutionary impulse of activity, evolutionary. That is why they are always soothing, because they are the generators of evolution, the generators of evolution.60 “Generating evolution” is the goal of the program of reading the Vedic Literature. This revered goal of raising life to perfection, unfolding the infinite potential of the human nervous system, is possible to attain, because the infinite dynamism of the Ãtmå, which is the energy, intelligence and organizing power at the basis of the whole Creation, is structured in the sounds of the Vedic alphabet. XI. THE åICHO AKóHARE VERSE FROM åIK VEDA. The program of reading the Vedic Literature is based upon the Sanskrit Alphabet. This chapter has systematically presented the sounds of the Vedic alphabet, and the Devanågar¥ script used to represent those sounds. But rather than starting with the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, and proceeding through the various letters of the Classical Sanskrit, and ancient Vedic alphabets, this chapter began with a discussion of the source of alphabet, the source of thought, pure consciousness. In subsequent sections, the entire alphabet was unfolded as a sequential collapse of infinity onto a point: The fully open throat, characteristic of the sound “A,” collapsing, contracting more and more, moving through all the vowels, the semi-vowels, the sibilants, and the full consonants consonants, until the continuum of sound represented by the first letter, “A,” has been completely brought to a stop, arrested in a point. And even the farthest most remote point from this beginning “A,” the Yama, were seen as the representative of the underlying continuum of consciousness at the source of speech. This collapse of infinity onto a point, is called in Vedic Science the K∑hara of “A,” the collapse of “A.” The word Ak∑hara, which in Sanskrit means “letter,” also may be understood as A-k∑hara, the K∑hara, collapse, of “A.”


65

When the alphabet is seen as the unfoldment of the inherent dynamism contained in the collapse of the continuum onto a point—that means when the alphabet is seen as the expression of the dynamics of one’s own infinite, eternal self-referral consciousness or Ãtmå, collapsing onto its own point, and expanding again to infinity in an eternal reverberation—then it is seen that in the study of the alphabet, it is actually the source of alphabet, consciousness, that is of primary importance. The primacy of consciousness, unfolded for its full range of possibilities by the collapse of infinity onto a point, by the collapse, K∑hara, of “A,” is the theme of understanding that is described in the Richo Ak∑hare verse of Âik Veda. This one verse contains in seed form the knowledge of all disciplines.61 Faculty of Maharishi University of Management have developed Richo Ak∑hare charts for all the major disciplines and their varied subdivisions. The charts show how the overall theme of knowledge in each discipline, and in its various branches can be organized in terms of the structure of knowledge unfolded in the Richo Ak∑hare verse.62 This parallel between the structure of knowledge in the modern sciences, and in the ancient Vedic Science may be seen also in the study of the sounds of the Vedic language. Table 7 reviews the parallel between the knowledge of the alphabet and its source in Ãtmå, and the theme of pure knowledge, total knowledge, contained in the Richo Ak∑hare verse. Maharishi’s translation of the verse is used as the starting point. In this way, the Richo Ak∑hare verse shows how the understanding and experience of the Vedic alphabet as the expression of the dynamism of one’s own Ãtmå, one’s own unbounded Self, is the gateway to unfolding the infinite potential of human existence and living life in Enlightenment. This understanding is the foundation for beginning the program of reading Vedic Literature. This explains why Maharishi has presented two components of Vedic study, side by side: Reading the Vedic Literature in


Table 7: Âicho Ak∑hare Chart

66


67

Table 7A: Âicho Ak∑hare Chart (first half) The Vedic Alphabet in One Verse of Âik Veda—Âik Veda 1.164.39

V E D I C

A L P H A B E T

Aûco aÖ=reÿ RICHO AKSHARE The verses of the Veda exist in the collapse of fullness (the kshara of ‘A’)

The letters of the alphabet arise from the sequential closing of the fully open throat, characteristic of “A,” to its fully closed, choked down, full-stop character expressed in “Ka.”

prÄme VyoÿmÖn(

yiSmÿNdeÖv;

PARAME VYOMAN ...in the transcendental field, self-referral consciousness, the Self

YASMIN DEVA In which reside all the devas, the impulses of creative intelligence, the Laws of Nature

The open sound, “A,” presents the unbounded continuum of pure consciousness, and the consonantal stop presents the point value, the arresting of that continuum in a point; the continuum of “A,” and the point of any consonant, “Ka,” reside in the inherent dynamism of consciousness, reverberating between infinity and point: they have their basis in the transcendental unmanifest field of speech.

All the letters of the Vedic alphabet emerge from the progressive sequential collapsing of the continuum of “A” onto its own point.

ai/Ö ivXvÿe inWeÖdu" ADHIVISHVE NISHEDUH ...responsible for the whole manifest universe

These Vedic sounds emerging from the collapse of “A,” go to participate in all the mantra of the Veda and all the verses of the Vedic Literature, encompassing the total knowledge and organizing power at the basis of the whole creation.


68

Table 7B: Âicho Ak∑hare Chart (second half)

yStNn vedÖ YASTANNA VEDA He whose awareness is not open to this field...

Without the experience of the Self awake in its own Nature, infinite and unbounded, eternally reverberating between infinity and point, the individual letters and words can only refer to limited, bound realities of the external world, they cannot tell the story of self-referral consciousness, Ãtmå, ever creating infinite possibilities from within its own eternal Reality.

ikmOûc; k¡ir„yitÖ KIMRICHA KARISHYATI ...what can the verses accomplish for him?

The letters of the Vedic alphabet, interpreted in terms of the manifest objects and activities of the phenomenal world, become fairy tales and myths, without any foundation; they lose their source in the infinite knowledge and organizing power of the Self. Reading the texts of Vedic Literature without experiencing pure consciousness through the regular practice of the Transcendental Meditation program is of little value because the reference to the infinite potential located deep within every human being is missing.

y îˇd( ivÖdus( YA ITTADVIDUS Those who know this level of reality...

Those who experience pure consciousness and its self-referral fluctuations, enjoy the individual impulses of sound of the Vedic Literature as the self-referral transformations of their own pure consciousness; the qualities of each branch of Vedic Literature are awakened in their awareness by reading and hearing the text of that branch.

t îÖme sm;ÿste TA IME SAMASATE ...are established in evenness, wholeness of life.

When all the different channels of consciousness represented by all the 40 branches of Veda and Vedic Literature have been experienced as the self-referral fluctuations of one’s own pure consciousness, then one’s own pure wakefulness is fully awake to the infinite possibilities within its own structure, and life is lived in affluence and abundance and perpetual bliss consciousness. This is life in enlightenment.


69

sequence, and experiencing one’s own self-referral consciousness through the practice of the Transcendental Meditation program. Without the experience of the unboundedness of the Self through the TM program, the power of the Vedic sounds for uplifting life, for generating evolution could not be practically realized. Knowledge of the Vedic alphabet is prerequisite to entering into the examination of the actual sequence of texts to be read. The Vedic alphabet is the necessary foundation for reading the Vedic Literature from beginning to end. Chapter 9 returns to the theme of the emergence of the alphabet from the reverberations of the Self, the Ãtmå, in order to analyze the mechanics underlying the effectiveness of the reading program for achieving life in enlightenment, spontaneously harnessing the infinite organizing power of Natural Law in every thought and action. XI. CURRICULUM FOR READING THE VEDÃõGA In the following chapters a model curriculum for reading the six Vedåãga is presented. The curriculum is intended as a resource for teachers on the graduate, undergraduate and high school levels; it can also be used as a reader since there are sample readings from each of the texts of the Vedåãga, presented in proper sequence, as well as graphic presentation of His Majesty King Nader Råm’s discovery of the correlate in the physiology of every text of the Vedåãga. In the doctoral program in Maharishi Vedic Science at Maharishi University of Management, students read through the entire Vedic Literature in two and a half years. At least three months (about 300 hours of reading) are usually devoted to Vedåãga. On this schedule, students can read about one third of the full corpus of texts of Kalpa, and all of the five other branches of Vedåãga, before proceeding to the texts of the remaining 30 branches of Vedic Literature. The curriculum of reading for the 30 branches following the Vedåãga is presented in Appendix I.


70

In the undergraduate major in Maharishi Vedic Science at Maharishi University of Management, there is a series of four consecutive one-month courses devoted to reading the Vedåãga. In the first month, students read all 36 texts of Íhik∑hå. In the second month, they read excerpts of Kalpa and all of Vyåkaraâ, Vedic grammar, reading Påîniís A∑hˇådhyåy¥, as always, purely for its sound value, not for meaning. In the third month the students read the Nighaˆˇu and Nirukta, and the textbook of Chhandas, and in the fourth month they read through all of the B®ihad Påråßhara Horå Íhåstra, the main sourcebook of Jyoti∑h. In the upper school of Maharishi School of the Age of Enlightenment (9–12), situated on the campus of Maharishi University of Management, where Sanskrit study is part of the school curriculum, students become familiar with the reading process by reading the Bhagavad G¥tå, the six Darßhana, and the fifteen principle Upani∑had. When these are completed, then usually in the senior year, they may begin reading Íhik∑hå. Many graduates of the undergraduate program in Maharishi Vedic Science, and graduates of the Masters program in Maharishi Vedic Science at Maharishi University of Management embark on reading through the total Vedic Literature on their own. Students in the “life” reading program generally read through all the available packages of knowledge as summarized in Chapters 3 through 8, and in Appendix I of this dissertation, and as presented in completeness on the website of Maharishi University of Management, at MUM.edu/vedicreserve. It is intended that every student should profoundly own in his awareness the connection between the text of Vedic Literature and the corresponding fibre or structure in the physiology. Maharishi explains: The entire Vedic Literature has been discovered as the structuring dynamics of Âik Veda on one side and the structuring dynamics of the human physiology on the other side.


71

Therefore, the complete knowledge of the Veda and Vedic Literature—the complete knowledge of Natural Law—is vital for everyone who wants to enjoy daily life fully supported by Natural Law. Maharishi Vedic University allows the student to identify himself with complete knowledge. Complete knowledge means intellectual understanding of the structures of knowledge available in the Vedic Literature and experience of consciousness, which is the common source of all these structures of knowledge. The student identifies the structures of knowledge in the Vedic Literature with different areas of his own physiology. In this theme of study he identifies himself with the structure of total knowledge and spontaneously allows knowledge and its organizing power to be a living reality of his daily life.63 Similarly it is intended that the student should have a general knowledge of the trend of surface meaning of the text,64 as well as intellectual understanding of Maharishi’s one-word synopsis of the quality or theme of knowledge in that field. This background of knowledge will support and strengthen experiences that emerge from the practice of reading the Vedic Literature. In courses on reading the Vedic Literature in Sanskrit, the one-word synopsis, the correlate in the physiology, and the overall trend of meaning should be learned by each student as a framework for understanding his experiences of reading the texts, and these are presented for each text in the following chapters. It is hoped that bringing together all these points related to each text of Vedåãga in one written curriculum will simplify and enrich the process of learning for teacher and student alike. The six chapters of this dissertation devoted to the Vedåãga are a model curriculum, that could in time be expanded to incorporate all the 40 branches of Veda and Vedic Literature. As a first step in that direction, a comprehensive descriptive bibliography of all the texts in the reading curriculum for the remaining branches of Vedic Literature is presented in Appendix I.


72

Notes: 1

Wallace, R. Keith, “The Physiological Effects of Transcendental Meditation: A Proposed Fourth Major State of Consciousness,” Doctoral dissertation, reprinted in Orme-Johnson, D.W., ed., Scientific Research on the Transcendental Meditation Program, Collected Papers, Volume 1, (Bopart: Maharishi European Research University Press, second edition, 1977). 2

Please refer to, for example, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi Vedic University Introduction, (India: Maharishi Prakashan, 1995), pp. 58–59. 3

Wallace, “The Physiological Effects of Transcendental Meditation.”

4

Scientific Research on the Transcendental Meditation Program, Collected Papers, Volumes 1–6, (Bopart and Livingston Manor: Maharishi European Research University Press, 1975–2004). 5

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Transcendental Meditation: The Main Principle,” in Bhagavad-Gita: A New Translation and Commentary with Sanskrit Text, Chapters 1–6, (Los Angeles, International SRM Publications, 1967), p. 350. Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå 6–7. Translation based upon Maharishi’s videotaped lecture, “The Unbounded Scope of Maharishi’s Vedic Science,” (Vlodrop, Holland: MERU, January 14, 1991). 6

7

According to the American Heritage Dictionary, alphabet means the letters of a given language, arranged in the order fixed by custom; or it may mean the basic or elementary principles of anything. In Sanskrit, every consonant has “A” as a part of it. The collection of letters of the Sanskrit alphabet is therefore actually a collection of syllables, fundamentally different from the Roman alphabet. The word is nevertheless convenient and appropriate for referring to the ordered collection of sounds and symbols fixed by the custom of the language. 8

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, in Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, August 13, 2003. 9

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi’s introductory remarks in Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, October 8, 2003. 10

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi’s Global News Conference, December 3, 2003.


73

11

Dillbeck, Michael, “World Peace Parliament” broadcast on the Maharishi Channel, August, 2004. 12

The identification of the eight Svara as the foundation of the expression of all the vowels and consonants of the Vedic language is the first bold stroke in Maharishi’s program to articulate a comprehensive science of Vedic phonetics. Maharishi Mahesh Yogi attributes the cognition of a comprehensive phonetic science based on the eight Svara to Madhuchchhandas Vaißhvamitra, the cognizer of the first S™kta of Âik Veda. Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, in “Maharishi’s Global Family Chat,” January 17, 2006. Synthesizing the whole of Vedic speech in terms of eight fundamental syllables is neither transparent nor obvious. For example, the occurrence of the Anusvara, “Aµ,” in the list of Svara is surprising, because metrical patterns in Sanskrit recitation count it as a consonant. However, Âik Pråtißhåkhya allows that Anusvara may be either a Svara or Vyañjana. There is a traditional teaching that there are eight basic Svara, as evidenced, for example, by the existence of the Íhik∑hå text entitled Svarå∑hˇaka Íhik∑hå, included in Íhik∑hå Saµgraha˙. That text lists “A,”“I,”“U,”“Â,” “L®i,”“E,”“AI,”“O,”and “AU,” and then says, itya∑hˇau svarå˙, ìThese are the eight vowels.” (sic.) Further elaboration of Maharishi’s systematic revival of the Vedic science of phonology is found in Chapter 9 of this dissertation. 13

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, in Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, October 29, 2003. 14

Taittir¥ya Pråtißhåkhya I:5.

15

Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 7.

16

Ãtreya Íhik∑hå, verses 2.2-3.1.

17

Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 3.

18

The terminal “T” is used to mark an individual vowel, as distinct from others of the same Varâ. Please refer to Påîn¥ I.1.70. 19

Ghosh, Manmohan, p. 51. Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå (Text and Translation), (Delhi, V.K. Publishing House, 1991), verse 4. 20

According to the Pañjikå and Prakåßha commentaries on the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå, cited in Ghosh, p. 51. 21

Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå, belonging to K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda, verse 2


74

22

As described in these Íhik∑hå texts. More elaborate expansions are possible, taking into account the three pitches. 23

Please refer to below, Maharishi quotation from Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, January 15, 2003, Question 6. 24

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, in Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, Jan. 15, 2003, Question 6. 25

Gautam¥ Íhik∑hå.

26

Gautam¥ Íhik∑hå, verse 1.

27

Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 8; Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 4; and Ãtreya Íhik∑hå, verses 3.2 and

4.1. 28

A∑hˇådhyåyi, page 1.

29

Taittir¥ya Pråtißhåkhya, S™tra 7.

30

Gautam¥ Íhik∑hå 1.

31

Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå, belonging to K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda, verse 2.

32

Ãmareßhi Íhik∑hå, verse 13.

33

Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 9; Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 5; and Ãtreya Íhik∑hå, verse 4.2.

34

Tripåˇh¥, Ír¥ Råma Prasåda, Íhik∑hå Saµgraha˙, (Varanasi, Sampurnand Sanskrit University, 1989)p. 27. 35


36


37

Gautam¥ Íhik∑hå 1.

38

Yajñavalkya Íhik∑hå, in Paâß¥kara, Våsudeva Lak∑maâ Íåstr¥, ÍuklayajurvedaSaµhitå (text and Padapåˇha), (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1996), p. 827, column 2. 39



40

Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå, belonging to K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda, verse 2.

41

Ãtreya Íhik∑hå, verse 4.2, Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 5; and Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 9.

42

Ãtreya Íhik∑hå, verse 5, Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 5; and Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 9.

43


75

Verma, V., ågveda-PrŒti§Œkhya of êaunaka along with UvaÿabhŒ·hya, (Delhi: Chaukhamba Sanskrit Pratishthan, 1986), 1:10, p. 53. 44

45

Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 6; Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 2.

46

Ãpishali Íhik∑hå, verse 9; Påri Íhik∑hå, verse 5.

47

Aravind, L., “On the Vedic Anusvåra,” Geocities Webpage of L. Aravind, June 1, 2006, . 48

Abhyankar, M.K.V., A Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar, (Baroda: Oriental Institute, 1986), p. 1. 49

Abhyankar, p. 313.

50

Author’s translation.

51

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Unbounded Scope of Maharishi's Vedic Science,” videotaped lecture, January 14, 1991. 52

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Study of the Veda is the study of consciousness, our own Self,” Lesson 5 in videotaped course, Maharishi Vedic Science, Maharishi Vedic University, 2001. 53

“List of Vedic Accents,” Omkarananda Ashram Himalayas, April 24, 2006, < http://www.omkarananda-ashram.org/Sanskrit/vedicaccents.htm>. This page was previously given a more descriptive title, “Proposal to the Unicode Consortium for Additional Character Assignments to Accomodate Vedic texts.” 54

Omkarananda Ashram.

55

Omkarananda Ashram.


56

Omkarananda Ashram.

57

Omkarananda Ashram.

58

Omkarananda Ashram.

59

Omkarananda Ashram.

76

60

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, in Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, Jan. 15, 2003. 61

Âicho Akshare charts for Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics, and Physiology show that all the theories of modern science have their basis in the collapse of the unbounded abstract all-possibilities structure onto its own point value. Please refer to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Celebrating Perfection in Education, (1997), p. 52 ff. 62

Maharishi Technology of the Unified Field: Integration of Modern Science and Ancient Vedic Science, Creating Unified Field-Based Perfect Civilization for all Mankind in this Scientific Age, (Fairfield: Maharishi International University, 1984), pp. 16–25. 63 64


This recommendation was made explicit by Maharishi in conversations about the reading with John and Sara Konhaus. Private e-mail communications 1998–2000.

`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 3: VEDIC PHONETICS I. INTRODUCTION TO THE BROAD FIELD OF VEDIC PHONETICS The first branch of Vedic Literature that is read by students in the curriculum of reading the total Vedic Literature,1 is called Íhik∑hå, dealing with the pronunciation or expression of the Vedic texts.2 A. Definition of Veda Lak∑haâ. In service of correct pronunciation of the texts of the four principal Veda, there is a diverse collection of ancillary texts that serve to elucidate the salient points in the Vedic texts that the student must know in order to pronounce the texts properly.3 These texts, of which Íhik∑hå is perhaps the most salient part, are broadly called Veda Lak∑haâ.4 They represent a class of compositions that serve to elucidate both simple and complex issues of pronunciation. Vedic phonetics is an elaborately detailed science, comprehensively exploring the theory and practice of all kinds of Vedic recitation.5 There are phonological texts associated with each of the four Vedas.6 Aithal identifies four classes of texts within Veda Lak∑haâ:7 1) Texts that enumerate special features of the Vedic texts, features that come into prominence as points of transformation in the different forms of recitation; 2) Texts that describe the different forms of recitation, and 3) broadly speaking, texts on Vedic phonetics, texts dealing with the actual pronunciation of the various letters of the Vedic alphabet, including the Íhik∑hå and Pråtishåkhya, and 4) texts, including Anukramanikas, that do not deal with phonetic issues. This latter group of texts describes the organizational

CHAPTER 3: VEDIC PHONETICS

78

structure of the Vedic texts, bringing together, for example, the full range of prefatory material that is recited at the beginning of each chapter or S™kta, to prepare the mind of the pandit to recite each specific text in its completeness, with perfect pronunciation. B. Modes of recitation. Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå, often considered the most universal of the Íhik∑hå texts, systematically characterizes the parts of the mouth where the different letters of the alphabet are pronounced, and also the different degrees of contact, full, partial, and no-contact, that characterize different classes of letters. This scientific classification of speech sounds is the fundamental basis of Vedic phonetics.8 However, Vedic phonetics also systematically addresses the more complex issues that arise when sounds are pronounced in different contexts, that is, when vowels or consonants are preceded or followed by different sounds. These laws are codified in rules of Saµdhi as well as many elaborate case by case studies of the mixing of different speech sounds as they occur in Vedic texts. This is the practical knowledge or intellectual understanding of the proper pronunciation of the Vedic texts. But the descriptive phase of Sanskrit phonetics gives way to the prescriptive phase, in which the pandit reciting the Vedic text has to apply the rules of euphonic combination of sounds on-the-fly, as it were, as he follows the more complex systems of recitation in which the sequence is jumbled, and the proper pronunciation at the boundaries between words where the sounds are mixing has to be re-evaluated at every step. The full range of understanding of phonology must be brought to bear in order to undertake the different modes of recitation which are the province of very advanced students of Vedic study.9 There are Prak®iti ( original) modes of recitation, in which the progress is uniformly in the forward direction, and there are


79

Vik®iti (altered) modes of recitation in which there is some backwards as well as forward progression. The standard or normal recitation of the text, Âicha by Âicha and S™kta by S™kta, one after the other in sequence, progressing in the same manner as is found in the printed texts of the Vedic Saµhitå, is called the Saµhitå Påˇha. This is the first of the Prak®iti modes of recitation. C. Relationship of Saµhitå-påˇha and Pada-påˇha. The cognitions of the ancient seers of the Âik Veda are collected together into books, called Maˆ∂ala, or circles, which are perfectly arranged in a coherent and orderly structure.10 Because of being put together in an orderly structure of the Vedic Mandala, they are called Saµhitå, or “put together,” or because Saµdhi has been applied, they are “with Saµdhi.” They are also called Saµhitå, according to Maharishi, because the respective values of Âi∑hi, Devatå, and Chhandas are completely integrated in the expressions of sound of the text.11 For more advanced recitation-modes, a second text is supplied, called the Pada-påˇha.12 The Pada-påˇha pulls apart the words that have been joined together according to the rules of phonetic combination, called “Saµdhi,” so that the independent character of each constituent word can be appreciated. The rules of Saµdhi give rise to some ambiguity, some lack of clarity as to what may have been the underlying text before the application of Saµdhi. For example, a final “t” becomes “n” before a nasal consonant. Thus a word ending in “t” may become indistinguishable from a word having its own ending in “n.”13 Such ambiguities are resolved by the founder of the Shåkhå, or recension, whose Pada-påˇha becomes the basis for all further, more complex modes of


80

recitation. Thus in the Shåkalya recension of Âik Veda, Shåkalya is credited as the author of the Pada-Påˇha.14 It is an interesting conundrum, that even though the Pada-Påˇha is pointing out the words as they exist before being put together by the rules of Saµdhi, the Saµhitå is considered the primary or original text, and the Pada-Påˇha is derivative.15 Once the underlying words are known, it becomes possible to articulate the different modes of recitation, that come into being by expanding on the original sequence. In this expansion, words come into connection with other sounds than those with which they are connected in the Saµhitå, and so more complex issues arise. Dealing with compounds represents one complication;16 but not only the rules of Saµdhi must be completely mastered and all ambiguities in the relationship between Pada-påˇha and Saµhitå- påˇha intimately known, but also changes of accent arise,17 and these must be closely followed in order to maintain the purity of correct recitation. The Saµhitå, Pada and Krama are the three Prak®iti modes of recitation in which the forward-moving sequence of words is maintained. There are eight Vik®iti modes of recitation,18 in which the sequence is elaborated in a prescribed back and forth manner. These eight Vik®iti modes are listed in Vyåli Íhik∑hå verse 3:

j$;m;l;d<@re%;rq?vjix%;`n;" £mm;i≈Ty invORˇ; ivk;r; a∑ iv≈ut;" 3

19

jaˇå-målå-daˆ∂a-rekhå-ratha-dhvaja-ßhikhå-ghanå˙ kramamåßhritya nirv®ttå vikårå a∑hˇa vißhrutå˙ 3 These eight are Jaˇå (“braid”), Målå (“garland”), Daˆ∂a (“staff”), Rekhå (“row”), Ratha (“chariot”), Dhvaja (“flag”), Íhikhå (“topknot”), and Ghana (“bell”).20 These are


81

elaborated by Wayne Howard,21 and are explicitly laid out by Devasthali.22 An example of an expansion according to the complex Ghana Vik®iti recitation is shown in Table 8. The training of the student in these advanced modes of recitation of the Vedic texts requires many years of study.23 And traditionally, this knowledge is transmitted orally, not through textbooks, from a qualified and experienced teacher.24 The written Lak∑haâ texts that are preserved by the tradition are external aids in service of the comprehensive transfer of knowledge from the teacher to the student, in service of perfect pronunciation.25 D. A∑hˇalak∑haâ. For each of Âik Veda, Såma Veda, Yajur Veda, and Atharva Veda, there is a set of texts, called A∑hˇalak∑haâ (or sometimes Saptalak∑haâ) that bring together many of the peculiarities in the relationship between Pada-Påˇha and Saµhitå, which must be mastered by the student in order to pursue the advanced modes of recitation. Many of these texts are simply lists of words with special characteristics. These Lak∑haâ texts are listed in Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå, a Íhik∑hå text belonging to K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda, devoted to the knowledge of the various modes of recitation. Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå verse 7:

xm;n' c ivlÏ‰' c npr' tpr' Svrm( av

Table 8: An example of Ghana.1 This example uses one line from verse 22 of Sªkta 97 of the tenth Maö¶ala as given by S. Yegnasubramanian. The verse from the SaµhitŒ PŒÿha is:

aoWÿ/yÖ" s' vÿdNteô someÿn sôh r;D;ÿ ) In the Ghana recitation, there is expansion and repetition according to formula: Six words, a-b-c-d-e-f, according to Yegnasubramanian, when chanted in the Ghana format will be, a-b-b-a-a-b-c-c-b-a-a-b-c; b-c-c-b-b-c-d-d-c-b-b-c-d; and so on. Here is 2 the complete Ghana expansion of the line given above :

aoWÿ/y" s' s' aoWÿ/y" aoWÿ/y" s' vÿdNte vdNte s' aoWÿ/y" aoWÿ/y" s' vÿdNte ) s' vÿdNte vdNte s' s' vÿdNte someÿn someÿn vdNte s' s' vÿdNte someÿn ) vdNte someÿn someÿn vdNte vdNte someÿn sh sh someÿn vdNte vdNte someÿn sh ) someÿn sh sh someÿn someÿn sh r;Dÿ;ÿ sh r;D; r;Dÿ;ÿ sh sh r;Dÿ;ÿ ) r;Deit r;Dÿ;ÿ – 1

S. Yegnasubramaniam, “Vedic Chanting: A perfectly formulated oral tradition,” Sringeri Journal Vol. II, no. 2.

2

Accents as given by S. Yegnasubramanian.

82


83

Lak∑haâ texts. The word Íhamåna refers to any word from the Saµhitå text ending in long å, in which a final Visarga has been elided (i.e. removed) due to Saµdhi, the rules of phonetic combination.27 The operative Saµdhi rule states that when a word ending in long “Ãî and Visarga, i.e. “Ã˙î is followed by a voiced consonant or a vowel, then the Visarga is elided.28 When it is followed by a vowel, then the presence of the original Visarga can be inferred, but if it is followed by a voiced consonant, then it is not apparent from inspection whether there originally was a Visarga or not. These instances must be intimately known for the advanced modes of recitation, because if in another mode of recitation, the word ending in “Ãî now comes into connection with a word starting with an unvoiced consonant, for example, then the elided Visarga must be supplied. By the authority of the Pada-påˇha, all these instances of the dropping of a Visarga in the original Saµhitå are enumerated. There are hundreds of such instances in each of the Saµhitås. There are Íhamåna Prakaraâs for Âik, Såma and Yajur Veda. The Âik Veda Íhamåna Prakaraâ exists in hundreds of manuscripts under somewhat varying titles29 and will be discussed in a later section. The Taittir¥ya Yajur-Veda version of Íamånaprakaraâm, also called Samånasaµdhi, has the following beginning and ending:

aq yju"s'iht;y;m( a;k;rPlutpUvoR òWv√‰Ônoˇr-xs-k;rpro ivsjRnIyo yeWu pdeWu luPyte t;in pd;in p[v+y;…m ) a]e©‰pd;n;' n;n;pdTvms':y;ne ) teW;' pUvRpdmvg[h" ) Ë„mivsjRnIyp[qmi√tIy;


84

aòW;" ) n hk;r" ) VyÔnxeWo òWv;n( ) gj@;¥;S]yo v,;R d;dyíwv b;dy" ) y;idv;Nto hk;rí xs* t;vNys'yut* – îit p·r.;W; ) a…fly; ay+m; ag[; ap[; asur; avO,; aj;yq; aê; a˙,Iym;n; a/; aSmer; ain∑; an; agOhIt; ***concluding S™tra***

n p[itpUvR" ) iSqr; anvpUv;R" ) anO=u s;?y;" ) sv;R" ) n vwpr" ) …sm; hotVy; h;y; h;yn; h;®k; ho];" ) n depr" ) Ùt; mk;rpr" ) îit xm;np[kr,m( 30

2. The second of the texts of A∑hˇalak∑haâ is called Vilanghya-Prakaraâm. Vilanghya-Prakaraâm is an enumeration of words that end with “E,” “AI,” “O” and “AU,” and undergo change due to a following word that begins with a vowel.31 The Vilaãghya-Prakaraâ of Nåråyaâ-bhaˇˇa, belonging to the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå begins and ends as follows:

p[,My .;rtI' devI' svRlokìkm;trm( n;r;y," p[v+y;…m ivlÏ‰;in pd;Nyhm( 1 Ek;rwk;rv,*R y* s'iht;y;' ivk;·r,* tdNt;in ivlÏ‰;nITyuCyNte vedivˇmw" 2 pur;tneåit·rˇ_' yt( TyKTv;nuˇ_' smoPy c v,R£me, gOÁNte sVy;:y;Nyev t;Nyip 3


85

î©‰' yt( pdm];ip n;n;pdvid„yte in…mˇTven yd( g[;Á' gOÁte pdmev tt( 4 aip cet( Sy;≤ı n;Nyt( tu pUr,eå] iv/Iyte ag[eåp;re ydyeRå◊ºåitqyeåin∑kÉåjre – ***concluding verses***

b◊Ty;hvnIye c ¸te ho]e hv;mhe hte hSte tu ne©‰;Nt' hrNte ◊yte ˆëte 45 hIyte Ùyte hTyw hNtvw c hr;mhw ◊y;mhe hrw ihTyw nw>y" sNTy…/k;in tu 46

32

3. The third of the texts of A∑hˇalak∑haâ is called Napara-Prakaraâm. Napara-Prakaraâ deals with several ambiguities in Saµdhi, wherein the original contributing vowels or consonants cannot be unequivocally ascertained. The beginning and ending of the Sarva-Naparam33 of Íhe∑ha Nåråyaâ is given below:

p[,My g®@;Â!' h·r' nIl;.[s'in.m( xeWn;r;y,;:yen l=,' i£yte my; – ntyoStu ivh;y;Nyt( sVy;:y' doWv…jRtm( s'gOÁ XlokÂpe, tdNt;in pd;in tu – cjyoí /k;r' tu ihTv; t;idctu∑ye mk;re c lk;re c pre sit ivk;r.;k™ – ***concluding verse***

sv;Rn( sIVyn( tq; StotøNt( s;mNTsTvn( shNtm" s◊;n( …sçn( hiv„m;'í hn( hyR…•it s'g[h" –


86

îit ≈IxeWn;r;y,;:yivr…ct' svRnpr' sm;¢m( 34

4. The fourth of the texts of A∑hˇalak∑haâ is called Tapara Prakaraâm, or Tapara-Lak∑haâm.35 Tapara-Lak∑haâm is a list of words ending in “T” in the Pada text, but changed to “N” because of a following nasal.36 Following are the beginning and ending verses of the Tapara-Lak∑haâ belonging to the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå.

a¥;dtO,dXnIy;db[vIdjuWˇt" ) aSq;dSmds∞wvmnNTyjndpRyet( 1 aSm;dvsOjed£mIdvSt;∞ g
hiv„m…•/n' pUv| hiv„’…•/n' tq; ) hNy;ı»•pr' t;Nt' pdmev' p[k°itRtm( 10 y] Kvcn tenwv pUv| {∑ëmpe=te ) nt;Ntpdm;ley' nvràoˇr;=r; 11 sgu,; vedivduW;' r…ct; k<#.UW,m( ) toW;y devdevSy iv„,on;Rr;y,Sy vw 12 îit tpr' n;m l=,m( – 37


87

5. The fifth of the texts of A∑hˇalak∑haâ is called Svara Lak∑haâm. Svara Lak∑haâm refers to several works on accents. The beginning and ending verses of a short work of 15 verses is given below:

¨∞;Tproånud;ˇo y" Sv·rtTvmv;“uy;t( ) Sv·rt;dnud;ˇ;í p[cyTvmv;“uyu" – ¨d;ˇ≈uitreveit p[cySy p[…s≤ıt" ) Sv·rtod;ˇyoyR] pr] iSqtyo" sto" – ***concluding verses***

pd;d* p[cyo n;iSt Svr;dekpde tt" ) n;STyud;ˇoåip ivDeyo hStivNy;skmR…, – Xlok;' m©l;y a; ¨pÙt;mv;“ut" ) dI`;RSt; îme dev; ¨ Sv; ahmmUin av;" – îit Svrl=,' sm;¢m( 38

6. The sixth of the texts of A∑hˇalak∑haâ is the Avarî.39 Avarî-Prakaraâ refers to texts that list the Vedic words beginning with “A” in which the “A” is elided because of a preceding “E” or “O”.40 There are Avarî texts for Âik Veda, Såma Veda and for Yajur Veda.41 Sometimes the texts are called “Hrasva-saµgraha.” The beginning and ending verses of the Avarî Prakaraâm of the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå are:

av…,RNynuˇ_' smoPy;it·rˇ_' p·r„’Ty du„k°itRt' c;….vI+y kk;r;idv,R£me,;hmet;' suvOiˇ' k·r„y;…m ivSp∑v;Cy;m( 1 aodedv,Rs'z•' s'iht;y;' pd;idgm(


88

av,| D;tumSm;….·rd' x;S]' p[,Iyte 2 nod;ˇo y" pd;?y;y ¨d;ˇ" s'iht;gme yíod;ˇ" pd;?y;ye Sv·rt" s'iht;gme 3 aòW;=rt" pUvR aok;r" s;'ihtí y" te>y" pr" pd;?y;ye Tvk;r" Sy;t( pd;idg" 4 ***concluding verses***

aSyNTyStuvt;Sqeå©‰eåSq•Sme c;StmiSt c aSmw c;Sq;NysId∞;Sm;nSy;' inhto n tu 40 aSy;ihrh.Unoåh•¸t;doåhr•h" ahr∞;hrNt;h; ah;W| c;¸t;dhm( ah;Sq;hrt;' cwveTyuˇ_o ÓSvSy s'g[h" 41 42

7. The seventh text of the A∑hˇalak∑haâm is called Iãgya Prakaraâm. One such Iãgya Prakaraâm is called Iãgya-ratna. Iãgya-ratna is an account of Iãgya and Aniãgya words in K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. Iãgya words are compounds that are separated by an Avagraha in the Pada-påˇha.43 Aniãgya words are compounds that are not separated in the Pada-påˇha. The beginning and ending verses of the Iãgya-ratna are as follows:

v;,I' nTve©‰s':y;n;' v+y;My=rs':yy; îWe Tv;¥nuv;k;n;mekìk˘ pdx" £m;t( – t] √π √π a=re tu pds'DkmuCyte pUvRmek˘ √y' vO≤ıdRx;idpdm=rm( – k;dyo nv v,;R" Syu∑;dyoåip tqwv c p;dy" pç y;¥∑* v,;RSt] yq;£mm( –


89

…bNduSq;ne nk;r" Sy;d.;ve nihn;Pyu.* m©l;qoRåqxBd" Sy;TpUr,;q;R" Svr; aip – aq n;insyo n;ko lokÉ re%;/n' s$" ) pyoprtrn;rIk;pIsrng; îit 1 lokdUkjp' n;ks;nunIk/n' nym( ) ney' jy' s;$I n;rImy;.;iv i√tIykÉ 2 .ekn;gcy' dey' s;nuv;yu/nIks" ) n¬÷ …/yo tnu' ten /nu c;ipStOtIykÉ 3 m…y tnusRyunIkms* vn' pintnu" xin.*n vne vnm( ) mnugn' pn%;inivn;gs* gnvnInyuten vne vne – ***concluding verses***

f,nvmtrefnd' n.' xu.xu.' /r /Ir/Iy;·rpu" ) hn·rpu' vn.;nukn' vih c;ndenut tduˇrkÉ mtm( – nvLy' su%n;kfl' c yo jpkr' ngr;mxr' gnm( ) /nrn' /nj;yjy' tnu" rvnny' p[jviNTvit p;#kÉ – .gtuW; .u…jt' pinm' tnu' jlsug' tnu .;r%' mn" ) Svntnu' gn d;n cy' c n" n$.n' /nnIk…mtI·rtm( – s;sor;yxkjr;%lolt; m' m;in t' clsinpr·rs; y" ) kÀljnsno muin' c n*k; yo /In' n%/nhink;ys'D; – îtI©‰;in yjuveRde s':y;t;Nyuˇ_s':yy; ) ttoåNy;in Tvin©‰;in boıVy;in su/Imt; – îit î©‰rà' sm;¢m( 44


90

8. The eighth text of the A∑hˇalak∑haâm45 is the Aniãgya Prakaraâ:46 In the Pada-påˇha, compound words are shown with an Avagraha between the component parts. Aniãgya refers to words that appear to be compounds, that appear to be analyzable in terms of their component parts, but are not split up by Avagraha in the Pada-påˇha, because they are not to be taken as compounds. The following text by Íhr¥vatsåãka, son of Devaman¥shin, describes the Aniãgya words in the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå, in one hundred verses.

muinm;nsmNq;nm…qt;gms;gr;t( ) ïdt;y nmo .Uy;dmOt;y mur;rye 1 gu,]yivhIn;y jgT]yiv/;…yne ) ≈uit]yÎxe xêTpur]ymqe nm" 2 nmS’Ty ivnet;r' ivfl;n;mnuix„yte ) ain©‰…m©‰s;ÎXy;¥Ts'deh;Spd' .vet( 3 ***concluding verses***

s;hNTys;iv]spàsUnOt;≈uto hiv„y' c hlI+,xBd;" ) hemNtho]Iyihr
This is a sampling of the texts belonging to the A∑hˇalak∑haâm of the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. Parallel texts are found in the A∑hˇalak∑haâm and


91

Saptalak∑haâm texts for Âik, and Såma Veda. These eight Lak∑haâ texts reflect eight different angles for studying the relationship between the Saµhitå and the Pada-påtha. E. The Importance of Veda Lak∑haâ for the Success of Vedic Technologies. These Lak∑haâ texts exemplify the broad scope, and precise detail that is characteristic of Vedic phonetics. While a great deal of the spirit of Vedic phonetics is captured in these simple lists, their orientation towards experience and advanced practice of recitation48 rather than phonological theory render them to a great degree inaccessible for their full depth and richness to the scholar who has not been trained in Vedic recitation and has not committed to memory the Saµhitå of his own recension.49 Neglected by scholars,50 they are nevertheless the raw material of which the advanced science of Vedic phonetics is composed. Vedic phonetics is normative: There is a correct, or ideal, or perfect pronunciation that is to be learned by each generation of students. According to His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, perfect pronunciation is central to the preservation of the Veda, generation after generation.51 Right experience and right practice of recitation are therefore the motivating force for all the texts of the broad field of Vedic phonetics, called Veda Lak∑haâ. Having reviewed the different texts of the A∑hˇa-lak∑haâ, and seeing their importance for defining the ambiguities in the Saµdhi, and other complexities in the relationship between the Saµhitå and the Pada-påˇha recitations of the Vedic text, it can be seen that the need for instruction in correct pronunciation is paramount, and the development of phonetic theory may proceed only insofar as it serves a purpose in raising pronunciation of the Vedic texts to the level of perfection. The primacy of experience and practice is the driving force behind all the different subfields of Veda Lak∑haâ, not only the lists as are found in the A∑hˇa-lak∑haâ, but also the textbooks describing the modes of recitation, such as Vyåli and Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå; the Anukramaîka such as


92

Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå, Sarvånukramaˆ¥, and B®ihaddevatå, exposing the organizational structure of the texts; and not least of all the school books, or Íhik∑hå, such as Ãpißhali or Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå which teach the basic principles of correct pronunciation. There are many hundreds of these texts comprising Veda Lak∑haâ, all ultimately motivated by the desire to instill complete knowledge, total knowledge in the awareness of the student, so that the resulting recitation of the Veda with perfect pronunciation will enliven all possibilities in the individual life and in the life of the community and the world.52 The pearls in this ocean of Lak∑haâ dedicated to perfect pronunciation are the Íhik∑hå, written by the great Âi∑his and Mahar∑his of past ages, and these are the focus for the first branch of reading in the Maharishi University of Managment Vedic Literature reading curriculum. F. The quality of Expressing in Vedic Literature and in Human Physiology. With experience as the guiding organizational principle, His Majesty King Nader Råm has proposed a correspondence between the eternal self-referral dynamics of consciousness knowing itself, known as Ãtmå, expanded in terms of knower, process of knowing and known into the entire range of Vedic Literature, and the different structures and functions of the various organ systems and different structural components of the human nervous system. Under the guidance of His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, H.M. King Nader Råm has brouhg out that the human physiology is the expression of Veda and Vedic Literature. The Íhik∑hå represent one specific aspect of Vedic Literature corresponding to one specific aspect of the human nervous system: Following the description by His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi of the qualities of self-referral consciousness found to be constitutive of the different branches of Vedic Literature,


93

H.M. King Nader Råm explains that “Íhik∑hå represents the expressing quality of selfreferral consciousness. . . .” The word expressing encapsulates the entire range of knowledge of Natural Law engaged in articulating or pronouncing speech, as is ordinarly understood broadly by Veda Lak∑haâ, and specifically in terms of the texts of Íhik∑hå belonging to the different Saµhitå. H.M. King Nader Råm goes on to explain: In the physiology, Íhik∑hå is represented by the structures which compute and express the internal aspects of the physiology, such as its biochemical constituents, temperature, pressure, etc., (the expression of the autonomic nervous system). They are the components that maintain the homeostatic balance of the internal milieu. These expressions are channelled via the autonomic ganglia. These are 36 on each side of the spinal cord, corresponding to the 36 books of Íhik∑hå.53 H.M. King Nader Råm has taken on the task of ordering the Lak∑haâ texts in terms of their correspondence with structures in the human physiology, and thereby proposing a structure for the entire field of Vedic phonetics based on the theme of expressing, as it presents itself in the human physiology. He begins by making use of the natural groupings of the sympathetic and parasympathetic ganglia belonging to the autonomic nervous system: These are correlated with the Íhik∑hå texts belonging to the five main Saµhitå, Âik Veda, Såma Veda, K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda, Íhukla Yajur Veda, and Atharva Veda. [Please refer to Table 9.] Within each grouping of texts, correlations are made with corresponding autonomic ganglia based on the structure and function, as well as the name of each text. G. Three Eurekas of Knowledge in the Program of Vedic Study. To appreciate the total range of knowledge contained in Veda Lak∑haâ, one must have a detailed understanding of the structure and function of the 36 pairs of autonomic ganglia lying on


Table 9

94

Vedic Íhik∑hå and their Physiological Correlates

Âik Veda Íhik∑hå

Cranial Parasympathetic Ganglia

Såma Veda Íhik∑hå

Sacral Parasympathetic Ganglia

K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå

Ganglia in Visceral Plexuses, and the Cervical, Lumbar and Sacral segments of Sympathetic Trunk

Íhukla Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå

Ganglia of Thoracic Portion of Sympathetic Trunk

Atharva Veda Íhik∑hå

Coccygeal Termination of Sympathetic Trunk

each side of the spinal cord, as well as direct experience of the expressing quality of selfreferral consciousness. There are thus three angles of approach that come together to represent the total knowledge of Íhik∑hå: Knowledge from personal experience of the self-interacting dynamics of consciousness in terms of the quality of expressing; knowledge of the structure and function of the corresponding physiology, in this case the corresponding autonomic ganglia; and the knowledge that can be gleaned from the meaning of the text itself. This three phased approach to knowledge of Vedic Science has been advocated by Maharishi as the Three Eurekas of knowledge of Vedic Science.54 Research into the self-interacting dynamics of consciousness enlivened in terms of specific qualities of consciousness by reading the different texts of Vedic Literature in the original Sanskrit, not for meaning, but purely for their sound value, has been presented in a number of dissertations presented at Maharishi University of Management in the past ten years. In the program of reading the Vedic Literature, the student, alternating the reading of Vedic Literature with the experience of Transcendental Consciousness through the regular practice of Transcendental Meditation technique, supplies this subjective component of knowledge of the text. In the current analysis, the


95

intention is to enumerate the specific texts of Vedic Literature, their internal structure, layout and organization, unusual features, and the overall trend of the meaning of the texts. At the same time, the specific structures of the corresponding physiology in broad terms, should be unfolded, in order to have a view of the precipitated form of the abstract knowledge of Natural Law contained in the Vedic text. It is hoped that the easy availability of the knowledge of the structure and dimension of the text, and the corresponding structures in human physiology will inform and inspire experience of the self-interacting dynamics of consciousness flowing in that specific quality, systematically giving rise to comprehensive and verifiable knowledge of each flavor of the selfinteracting dynamics of consciousness, in terms of the total knowledge of Natural Law. The study of Íhik∑hå, leading to correct pronunciation of the Vedic text, is the natural foundation of the curriculum of reading of the Vedic Literature, and the ideal starting point, because perfect pronunciation empowers the student to enjoy the flavor of each text of Vedic Literature within his own self-referral consciousness. II. ÂIK VEDA ÍHIKóHÌ H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the four Âik Veda Íhik∑hås, Íhamåna Íhik∑hå, Vyåli Íhik∑hå, Svaravyañjana Íhik∑hå and Shaishir¥ya Íhik∑hå with the four parasympathetic ganglia associated with the trigeminal nerve. Gray observes: The trigeminal nerve is the largest cranial nerve and is the great sensory nerve of the head and face, and the motor nerve of the muscles of mastication. It emerges from the side of the pons, near its upper border, by a small motor and a large sensory root—the former being situated in front of and medial to the latter. . . . [From its emergence from the side of the pons, the trigeminal nerve proceeds to the semilunar ganglion:] The semilunar ganglion ... lies in a cavity of the dura mater near the apex of the petrous part of the temporal bone. . . . From its convex border, which is directed forward and lateralward, three large nerves proceed, viz., the ophthalmic, maxillary, and mandibular. . . . Associated with the[se] three


96

divisions of the trigeminal nerve are four small ganglia. The ciliary ganglion is connected with the ophthalmic nerve; the sphenopalatine ganglion with the maxillary nerve; and the otic and submaxillary ganglia with the mandibular nerve. All four receive sensory filaments from the trigeminal, and motor and sympathetic filaments from various sources . . . 55 [Please refer to Figure 11]. A. Íhamåna Íhik∑hå. The first Âik Veda Íhik∑hå is the Íhamåna Íhik∑hå. His Majesty King Nader Råm correlates the Íhamåna Íhik∑hå to the Ciliary Ganglia, a pair of autonomic ganglia located directly behind the orb of the eyes. Gray describes their location and appearance: (Please refer to Figures 10 and 11.)

The ciliary ganglion is a parasympathetic ganglion which is concerned functionally with the motor innervation of certain intraocular muscles. It is a small, flat, reddish-gray swelling, 1–2 mm in diameter, connected to the nasociliary nerve, and located near the apex of the orbit in loose fat c.1 cm in front of the medial end of the superior orbital fissure. It lies between the optic nerve and lateral rectus, usually lateral to the ophthalmic artery. Its neurones, which are multipolar, are larger than in typical autonomic ganglia; a very small number of more typical neurones are also present.


97

Its connections or roots enter or leave it posteriorly. Eight to ten delicate filaments, termed the short ciliary nerves, emerge anteriorly from the ganglion arranged in two or three bundles, the lower being larger. They run forwards sinuously with the ciliary arteries, above and below the optic nerve, and divide into 15–20 branches that pierce the sclera around the optic nerve and run in small grooves on the internal scleral surface. They convey parasympathetic, sympathetic and sensory fibres between the eyeball and the ciliary ganglion: only the parasympathetic fibres synapse in the ganglion. The parasympathetic root, derived from the branch of the oculomotor nerve to the inferior oblique, consists of preganglionic fibres from the Edinger-Wesphal nucleus, which relay in the ganglion. Post-ganglionic fibres travel in the short ciliary nerves to the sphincter pupillae and ciliaris. More than 95% of these fibres supply ciliaris, which is much the larger muscle in volume.56

The Íhamåna Íhik∑hå is a collection of the Íhamånas from Âik Veda. There are a number of such collections of Íhamåna, as has been seen: The Såma Veda and Yajur-


98

Veda Saptalak∑haâ texts both start with a Íhamåna Prakaraâm. There is another collection of Íhamånas for the Kåˇhaka recension, called Ãraˆyaka Íhamåna; 57 for Âik Veda, there is a collection of Íhamånas making up part of the Chåturjnåna,58 (also Âik Veda A∑hˇa Lak∑haâm. The Íhamåna Íhik∑hå is identical with the Íhamåna Prakaraâm. This text, by Någadeva, son of Yajñanåråyaâ, is found under a wide number of names: Âiksarva-Íhamåna, ÂigVeda Íhamåna, Âigved¥ya-ÍhamånaLak∑haâm, Laghusamåna, Sarva-Íhamåna, Samåna-S™tra, Samåna-Padådi, Samåna-Saµdhi, as well as Íhamåna Íhikshå. Its status as a Íhikshå is recognized by Varma who lists the Íhamåna Íhikshå along with the Svaravyañjana Íhikshå (described below) as among the “very few extant Íhikshås of Âik Veda.”59 In the Âik Veda Íhamåna Prakaraâm, or Íhamåna Íhikshå, all the Íhamåna occurring in Âik Veda have been collected and arranged in alphabetical order. It will be interesting to look a little more deeply into the structure of the Âik Veda Íhamåna Íhikshå. After a general description of the project in five verses, there are 31 paragraphs, one for each letter of the alphabet with which Shamåna begin in Âik Veda. The first paragraph lists the Íhamåna starting with short “A.” The last word of the paragraph gives the count, in this case Ekasaptati˙, (which is 71). (Please refer to Table 10). There are 71 Íhamåna in Âik Veda starting with the short “A” vowel. On closer inspection, one sees in this first paragraph that there is indeed a long string of words beginning with short “A,” and ending with long “Ã,” as one would expect. However, the number of such words presented in sequence is only 53, not the full 71 claimed. After the 53, there are eighteen more Íhamånas that are not listed in the same way, because they require more detailed specification. For example, the first one of


99

Table 10: First Paragraph of Íhamåna Íhik∑hå: 71 Íhamånas starting with short “A” Part 1: Simple List of first 53 Íhamånas starting with short “A”

ajoW; av; aSy; a≈/; av;t; ap[; aPy; aim]; apXy; adO∑; ayn; aSt>n; aNySy; ai.[y; aSmer; ap; apO,; ag; ad/; ak;≥ aifly;y; adB/; avIt; air∑; am; akv; arep; ag[; aPy; adO∑; aStm; avIr; asmn; aD;t; agop; an;g; ay+m; aNt; anen; anIk; ar;Ty; apv/; aj; anUp; aprSy; a£; ai©r; apu„p; arq; an;/O„y; aiSqt; anU/; aPsr; aj;yq; Table 10, Part 2: List of Remaining 18 Íhamånas of First Paragraph and Contexts

ySy;nUn;StSqurTy;jve„vsm; ap¢•®,; ye m%; aimt; yuvoriCz{ ;SsmNy; /[uv'pyRy;SsµNv;m®W; aojomTy;RSsmu{;q;R È' Vyˇ_; amIv; in" promOt;nip[y;/;m;in pUvoRê;nivnyxs; igro v;tSy pro,;R n/Ir;projuy;Rnev pUvoRirp[;ihNviNt pr Text as it occurs

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

ySy;nUn;s( tSqurTy; jve„vsm; ap¢•®,; ye m%; aimt; yuvoriCz{;s( smNy; /[uv' pyRy;s(

Actual words of the text

ySy anUn;" tSqu" aTy;" jveWu asm;" ap¢n( a®,;" ye m%; aimt;" yuvo" aiCz{;" s' aNy;" /[uv' p·r ay;"

Intended Íhamåna

anUn;" aTy;" asm;" a®,;" a…mt;" aiCz{;" aNy;" ay;"


100

Table 10, Part 2 continued

sµNv;m®W; sµn( v;' a®W;" a®W;" aojomTy;Rs( aojoåmTy;‹" amTy;‹" smu{ ;q;R smu{ aq;R" aq;R" È' Vyˇ_; È' iv aˇ_;" aˇ_;" amIv; in" pro amIv;" in" pr" amIv;" mOt;nip[y;/;m;in pUvoRåmOt;" n ip[y;/;m;in pUvR" amOt;" 15. ê;nivnyxs; igro v;tSy pro åê;" n ivnyxs; …gro v;tSy pr" aê;" å,;R" n /Ir;pr" a,;R" 16. ,;R n/Ir;pro åjuy;‹" nevpUv;R" ajuy;‹" 17. juy;RnevpUvoR å·rp[;" ihNv≤Ntpr" a·rp[;" 18. irp[;ihNviNt pr

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

these is An™nå˙. In the Âik Veda Saµhitå, an™nå occurs twice, in 7.27.4, and in 8.16.4. However, only the latter, 8.16.4 is a Íhamåna, wherein the Pada-påˇha lists the corresponding word as An™nå˙. In order to distinguish between these two occurrences, the Íhamåna Prakaraâ also lists the preceding word, in this case “yasya.” When an™nå is combined with yasya, i.e. yasyån™nå, as it occurs in 8.16.4, then only is an™nå to be taken as a Íhamåna. For all these remaining 18 Íhamånas in the first paragraph of the Âik Veda Íhamåna Prakaraâm, the special conditions are listed within the paragraph. Table 10 shows these different text phrases and the Íhamåna beginning with short “A” that is being counted among the 71 Íhamånas in the first paragraph. This is how the list of Íhamåna in the Âik Veda Íhamåna Prakaraâm is organized. Here are the beginning and ending paragraphs of the Íhamåna Prakaraâm, also known as Íhamåna Íhik∑hå.


101

xm;np[kr,m( p[,My p[,t;.I∑p[d;t;r' pit' i≈y" b◊»c;n;' subo/;y xm;n' i£yte lù ivsjRnIy a;k;rpUvRko òWvTpr" VyÔnSvO=npro luPyte s'iht;=,e EWu v,R£m;ˇ;in p[v+y;im pd;Nyhm( î©‰' pOqKpd' c;] in…mˇTv' pdSy c n;n;pdTvim©‰;n;' pUvR.;gSTvvg[h" inimˇ' gOÁte yˇTpdmev;] l=,e p[qm;'í i√tIy;'í ihTv; vGy;RS]yS]y" aNtSq;í hk;rí òWvNt" p[k°itRt;" p·r.;W; xm;nSy s'g[he,wvmI·rtm( gj@;¥;S]yo v,;R d;dyíwv b;dy" y;idv;Nto hk;rí xs* t;vNys'yut* îit pir.;W; ajoW; av; aSy; aCzd; av;t; ap[; aPy; aim]; apXy; adO∑; ayn; aSt>n; aNySy; ai.[y; aSmer; ap; apO,; ag; ad/; ak;≥ aifly;y; adB/; avIt; air∑; am; akv; arep; ag[; aPy; adO∑; aStm; avIr; asmn; aD;t; agop; an;g; ay+m; aNt; anen;


102

anIk; ar;Ty; apv/; aj; anUp; aprSy; a£; ai©r; apu„p; arq; an;/O„y; aiSqt; anU/; aPsr; aj;yq; ySy;nUn;StSqurTy;jve„vsm; ap¢' ns,;ye m%; aimt; yuvoriCz{;SsmNy; /[uv' pyRy;Ss √Nv;m®W; aojomTy;RSsmu{;d;R È' Vyˇ_; amIv; n" promOt;nip[y;/;m;in pUvoRê;nilnyxs; igro v;tSy pro,;R n/Ir;projuy;Rnen pUvoRirp[;ihNviNt pr Eks¢it" 1 ***concluding paragraph***

ihm;hvm;n; Ùym;n; ihNv;n; hy;R¸v;n; ◊»t;hy;heTy; vIrhVy;í h;dIy{Xm;no ihr
B. Vyåli Íhik∑hå. The second Âik Veda Íhik∑hå is Vyåli Íhik∑hå. His Majesty King Nader Råm correlates the Vyåli Íhik∑hå to the Pterygopalatine Ganglion also called the Sphenopalatine Ganglion. Gray describes this ganglion [Please refer to Figures 12 and 13]: The pterygopalatine ganglion is the largest of the peripheral parasympathetic ganglia. It is placed deeply in the pterygopalatine fossa, near the sphenopalatine foramen, and anterior to the pterygoid canal and foramen rotundum. It is flattened, reddish-gray in color, and lies just below the maxillary nerve as it crosses the pterygopalatine fossa. The majority of the ‘branches’ of the ganglion are connected with it morphologically, but not functionally, because they are primarily sensory branches of the maxillary nerve. Thus they pass through the ganglion without synapsing. . . .


103

Preganglionic parasympathetic fibres destined for the pterygopalatine ganglion run initially in the greater petrosal branch of the facial nerve, and then in the nerve of the pterygoid canal (Vidian nerve), after the greater petrosal unites with the deep petrosal nerve. The nerve of the pterygoid canal enters the ganglion posteriorly. Postganglionic parasympathetic fibres leave the ganglion and join the maxillary nerve via a ganglionic branch, then travel via the zygomatica and zygomatico-temporal branches of the maxillary nerve to the lacrimal gland. Preganglionic secretomotor fibres of uncertain origin also travel in the nerve of the pterygoid canal. They synapse in the pterygopalatine ganglion, and postganglionic fibres are distributed to palatine, pharyngeal and nasal mucous glands via palatine and nasal branches of the maxillary nerve.61

Vyåli Íhik∑hå deals with the Vik®iti modes of recitation of Âik Veda. It consists of 54 verses, published in a collection of texts on the modes of recitation, called Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-Saµgraha.62 There it is called “A∑hˇavik®tiviv®ti˙” and attributed to Madhus™danamaskar¥. A maskarin is a kind of Sannyåsin; Madhus™dana was a disciple of


104

K®i∑hâ Dvaipåyana.63 This publication of A∑hˇavik®tiviv®ti˙ was a reprint of a publication by Satyavrata Samasrami in the Sanskrit journal U∑hå, in 1889. A portion of this, consisting of only 45 verses, was later published under the name Âigved¥ya Jaˇåpaˇalam: ßhr¥ madhus™dan¥ya-ßhik∑håntargatam with an accompanying commentary.64 The whole of it was published again, with some additional notes in Sanskrit, in the years 1947–1950 in the Mysore Sanskrit College magazine, under the title Vyålißhik∑hå.65 Apparently the text is attributed to Vyåli in some of the manuscripts, and to Madhus™danamaskar¥ in others. The first 45 verses deal with the Jaˇå (braid) mode of recitation, and the remaining 9 verses deal with the other seven Vik®iti modes of


recitation. For a description of topics discussed, please refer to Devasthali’s Introduction.66 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

Vy;il ix=; ≈ImNt* ≈InOhircr,;v;Tmno NySy cetSyOGved;∑*ivkéitivvOit' vwidkXloknIy;m( Vy;@‰;c;y;Rnumitm/us'sdU n;:yo gu®≈I’„,√Ÿp;yntnu.vo mSkrI ckúrIit 1 mh;’itiry' mm p[’itinmRl; h;ir,I su/;ivmitk;ir,I ivxyh;ir,I seivn;m( vcSymph;ir,I privpiít;mNvh' mno.uiv ivh;ir,I .vtu vediv¥;ivd;m( 2 j$;m;l;d<@re%;rq?vjix%;`n;" £mm;i≈Ty invORˇ; ivk;r; a∑iv≈ut;" 3 i√pd;id£m;" pç p[;k™ £m;d( VyuT£m;ˇt" pun" £m;du∞irt; j$;Tv' p[;ipt; bu/w" 4 anu£míoT£mí VyuT£moåi.£mStq; s'£míeit pçwte j$;y;' kiqt;" £m;" 5 a;k;rg.Ri]pd£me„v;k;rpUvRvt( pun®ˇ_˘ pd√N√' i]£me i√pd.[mm( heturev p[vOˇTv;∆$;.;v' n c;hRit 6 s;nuSv;r;k;rg.Ri]£mp[.Ot* yq;

105


i√£mTv.[m' hNtu' m?ySqpdve∑nm( 7 j$;y;' £myo" p[;itx;:yl=,l+yt; VyuT£me s; mt; nwv t] Vy;kr,' mtm( 8 WTv,Tve dTvgTve ÓSvt;' dI`Rt;' tq; ivsOJy s'iht;/m;Rn( VyuT£me pdvt( p#et( 9 s'iht;gt aok;r" pdm*k;rt;' v[jet( Kvict( s VyuT£me v;Cy a*Êvenwv j$; .vet( 10 ***concluding verses***

b[yU ;d;de" £m' sMygNt;duˇ;ryeidit vgeR v; Aic v; y Sy;Tpi#t" s ?vj" SmOt" 50 £mmuKTv; ivpyRSy puní £mmuˇrm( a/Rc;Rdevmuˇ_oˇw_" £md<@oåi./Iyte 51 p;dxoå/RcRxo v;ip shoKTy; d<@v{q" 52 ix%;muKTv; ivpyRSy puniS]pdmu∞ret( ix%;j$; `n" p[oˇ_ îTy∑* iv’tI" p#et( 53 îTy∑*iv’tIn;' SvÂpkqn' my; ivrict' yt( ten iv„,uijR„,u" p[Ito .vt;t( .v;in prxu" 54 îit ≈Im/usdU nivrict;∑*iv’itivvr,' sm;¢m( 67

C. Svaravyañjana Íhik∑hå. The third Âik Veda Íhik∑hå is Svaravyañjana Íhik∑hå. His Majesty King Nader Råm correlates Svaravyañjana Íhik∑hå to the Otic ganglion in the physiolgoy. Gray describes the Otic ganglion (ganglion oticum)

106


107

[Figure 14 shows the otic ganglion in relation to the mandibular nerve in the jaw. Figure 15 shows the various branches of the otic ganglion]:

The otic ganglion (g. oticum) is a flattened, oval, or stellate ganglion, 2 to 4 mm in diameter, closely approximated to the medial surface of the medulla oblongata, principally through the glossopharyngeal but probably partly through the facial nerve. Communications of the Otic Ganglion: . . . A slender filament, the sphenoidal branch, connects with the nerve of the pterygoid canal, and a small branch communicates with the chorda tympani. Branches of Distribution of the Otic Ganglion.—The postganglionic fibers arising in the otic ganglion pass mainly through a communication with the


108

auriculotemporal nerve and are distributed with its branches to the parotic gland. Other filaments probably accompany other nerves to reach small glands in the mouth and pharynx.68 There is only one manuscript in the world of the Svaravyañjana Íhik∑hå,69 in the care of the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute,70 although the text has occasionally caught the attention of scholars. The text has six paragraphs or vargas. Its purpose is to show where the vowel “Âi” is pronounced as a vowel, and where it is pronounced as a consonant. According to the text, sometimes the A occurring in Âik Veda is pronounced more in the direction of a consonantal “R,” followed by “I,” that is “Ri,” than a pure vowel sound. For example, at the beginning of a word, such as Âiju or Âiñjase, a focusing


109

of the vowel sound may occur, so that the vowel becomes a “concentrated R,” Saµcito Repha˙, that is more in the direction of the consonantal “R” plus “I,” rather than a pure vowel

A.

71

The text presents some phonetic theory and principles, quoting

from the Âik Veda Pråtißhåkhya, and from Påîni's A∑hˇådhyåya, and also gives numerous examples. A summary of the text is given by Varma.72 The beginning and ending verses of the Svaravyanjana Íhik∑hå are as follows:

SvrVyÔn ix=; ref;nulome inyte p[i≈t;k;myo" £me rlo„mopihtoÓ≥Svo õ™nvj| pirp•ge 1 a>y;se ]Iit s':y;y;StOtIyitsOvijRt" ir,iCz^to irpu" i£im" i£iv" iv[xo irx;ds" 2 i]ivi∑iT]∑uj;tSy i]p¥iS]iS]/;iT]t" ≈IS]Ip[yoˇ_⁄yiS]'xiT£ivr;idWu sopd; 3 irWoq irWto irXyiX≈t" s¢kvijRt" yk;re c irxoˇ_* c a;d* c;nupd; irpu" 4 ir,i¶∑' irir=;'so irhteåq irx;ds" îTyuˇ_' Vy'jn' svRimd;nImuCyte Svr" 5 îit p[qmo vgR" ivvOiˇ=wp[.u¶;in pur; rekoåip v; yid iv£mo n;PynuSv;r Ak;r" s Sf⁄$Svr" 1 s'yog;∞ pr" pUvR" s'yoge Vy'jnop/" Vy'jn' vjRiyTvwkhsn;mpm' i]," 2


110

Vy'jn;Nt' pd' pUvRe som/e purt"iSqte yk;rodys':y;n;t( iKlivvj| Svro .vet( 3 a;Svsµeit pi$t; i]i„vit √;dxSvr;" ye c;Nye Vy'jnpr;" s'idG/;Ste Svr;" 4 îit i√tIyo vgR" 2 ***concluding verses***

cvgeR Ac; îCziNt Ajuir'jseirit c;q 5 îTy;'>y;ssiN/G/' Vy'jn' $vgeR mOr A,;in iririgit s'icto ref" tvgeR At' vOq;ddUdre, AWk™ i]t îit s'icto ref" 6 aNtSq;Svj;gOj;gOiv' i]ivi∑/;i√it ref" 7 s':y;qRTv;t( yu„m;su A„y" irx;ds îit s'icto ref" A∑yo irWimit ref" 8 bOsySy bOht( bOhSpit" kk;r;id" pk;r;idík;r;idí yo .vit aNtSq; yrlv;" kk;r;id Vy'jn' vih" 9 îit Wœo vgR" SvrVyÔnix=;sm;¢; 73


111

D. Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå. The fourth Âik Veda Íhik∑hå is Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå. His Majesty King Nader Råm correlates the Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå to the Submandibular or Submaxillary ganglia in the physiology. Gray describes the Submaxillary ganglion [Please refer to Figures 14 (p. 107) and 16]:

The Submandibular Ganglion (g. submandibulare; submaxillary ganglion) is a small mass, 2 to 5 mm in diameter, situated above the deep portion of the submandibular gland, on the Hyoglossus, near the posterior border of the Mylohyoideus, and suspended from the lower border of the lingual nerve by two


112

filaments approximately 5 mm in length. The proximal filament is the parasympathetic root which conveys fibers originating in the nervus intermedius and communicated to the lingual by the chorda tympani. These are preganglionic visceral efferent fibers (secretomotor) whose postganglionic fibers innervate the submandibular, sublingual, lingual, and neighboring small salivary glands. The branches of distribution are (a) five or six filaments distributed to the submandibular gland and its duct, (b) to the small glands about the floor of the mouth, and (c) the distal filament attaching the ganglion to the lingual nerve which communicates the fibers distributed to the sublingual and small lingual glands with the terminal branches of the lingual nerve. Small groups of ganglion cells are constantly found in the stroma of the submandibular gland, usually near the larger branches of the duct, and are considered to be functionally a part of the submandibular ganglion.74 There are two texts under the heading of Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå, that may be considered to be different recensions of the same underlying text. The first one, having the name Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå, or Íhåkhå-Lak∑haâ, is approximately 175 verses in length. There are no sub-divisions in the text, and the verses are not numbered. The text is attributed to Íhaißhiri, a disciple of Íhaunaka. It is a standard Íhik∑hå, dealing with subjects commonly taught in the Íhik∑hås belonging to the Vedas. There is a presentation of the alphabet consisting of 63 or 64 letters.75 There is discussion of the places of articulation,76 Svarabhakti, pitch accents, and other common Íhik∑hå themes, replete with examples. As is typical in Íhik∑hå texts, words and phrases that are to be taken as examples of the theme or principle under discussion are followed by the word “Nidarßhanam.” For example, after describing the correct pronunciation of various conjuncts involving “Ha,” including the conjunct of Ha+Ma, there is the line:77

mh;NÁSy b[˜b[˜;ˆ;êit indxRnm(

mahån hyasya brahmabrahmåhnåhneti nidarshanam


113

Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå also echoes an exhortation common to many Íhik∑hås, promising Brahma-Loka, the highest heaven, if the Vedas are pronounced with perfect purity.78

AGyju"s;m…." pUto b[˜lok˘ smXnute Âig-Yaju˙-Såmabhi˙ p™to Brahmalokaµ samaßhnute. Aithal observes that there are many verses in Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå that are also found in Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå or in Yåjñavalkya Íhik∑hå.79 The sharing of verses among these important works implies a common theme, and helps to identify Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå as a broad-ranging standard textbook of Sanskrit phonetics. The beginning and ending verses of the Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå are as follows:

xwixrIy ix=; hir" ≈Ig,ptye nm" aivflmStu gj;nn;y ≈Ix;y svRivflp[,;ixne nmo g,exÂp;y iv„,ve dxb;hve jgTs'.iU ts'r=; s'h;rwkivnoidne nmo .gvte tSmw icd;nNd;y iv„,ve mu˝lo g;lvo g;GyR" x;kLy" xwixrStq; pçwte x*nk;" ix„y;" x;%;.edp[vtRk;" xwixrSy tu ix„ySy x;k$;yn Ev c svRD' svRkt;Rrm;c;y| tu p[,My c xwixroåh' p[v+y;im x;%;y; l=,' ivi/m( i]Wi∑ítu"Wi∑v;R v,;R" s'.vto mt;"


114

p[;’te s'S’te v;ip Svy' p[oˇ_;" Svy'.uv; Svr; iv'xitrekí Spx;Rn;' pçiv'xit" y;dyí SmOt; Á∑* cTv;rStu ym;" SmOt;" anuSv;ro ivsgRí ¬k;rí tqwv c duSpO∑íeit ivDeyo n;isKy' r©muCyte ¨∞;r,ivxeWe,;];=r;≈ymuCyte ***concluding verses***

vedo ih v,Rs'`;to vedo b[˜eit k«TyRte tSm;ˇ√πdv,RDo b[˜loko mhIyte zNd" p;d* JyoitW' ne]yuGm' hSt* kLp" ≈o]yuGm' in®ˇ_m( ix=; `[;,' Vy;kr,' tq;Sy' ved;Tmne iv„,veåSmw nmoåStu iv„,u' W@©πiN{ym;iddev' ved;Tm;n' pu®W' ivêÂpm( siçNTy dev' p#te i√jo y" s y;it iv„,o" prm' pd' tt( ao' îit xwixrIyix=; sm;¢;

80

The second text under the heading of Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå, is the Íhaunak¥ya Íhik∑hå also called Varôccåraâlak∑haâm.81 Although it has only 67 verses, according to Aithal, “except a few verses the text is almost identical”82 with the Íhaißhir¥ya Íhik∑hå. The beginning and ending verses of the Íhaunak¥ya Íhik∑hå are as follows:


115

x*nk°y ix=; svRD' svRkt;Rr' sv;RTm;n' ixv' gu®m( p[,My=uR p[v+y;…m v,oR∞;r,l=,m( 1 vedSy l=,' sMyg( b;l;n;' bu≤ıv/Rnm( yqoˇ_' pUvRx;S]eWu tq; s'≤=¢mqRvt( 2 i√iv/' v,Rj;t' ih Svro VyÔnmev c ak;r;id" Svro Dey" k;id VyÔnmev c 3 ***ending verses***

vedo ih v,Rs'`;to vedo b[˜eit k°TyRte tSm;t( t√πdv,RDo b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 65 EtTpu
These are the four Íhik∑hå of Âik Veda, correlated with the four autonomic ganglia arising out of the three divisions of the tri-geminal cranial nerve in the head. These four Âik Veda Íhik∑hå comprise the beginning of the reading program in Íhik∑hå.84 III. YAJUR-VEDA ÍHIKÛHÃ. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the twenty-eight Íhik∑hås of Yajur Veda with five different groups of autonomic ganglia.85 The first group of autonomic ganglia are the three pairs of ganglia lodged within the body cavity and governing the internal organs and arteries in the abdomen: The celiac ganglia at the core


116

of what is commonly called the solar plexus, and below that plexus, the superior and inferior mesenteric ganglia: these three pairs are correlated with the Vyåsa, Chåråyaˆ¥ya and Ãtreya Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The remaining twenty-five ganglia comprise the ganglia of the sympathetic trunk (see Figure 17). The sympathetic trunk is a gangliated fiber containing nerves and fibers of the sympathetic autonomic nervous system, located on each side of the spine, running the entire length from the head to the bottom of the spine. The twenty-five ganglia of the sympathetic trunk are divided into groups corresponding to the portion of the spine where they are located. Uppermost is the cervical (neck) portion, having three ganglia, correlated with the second group of Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå, the Våsi∑hˇha, Påîn¥ya and Lak∑hmikånta Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. Next is the thoracic (chest) portion, having twelve ganglia, correlated with the the third group of Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå, the twelve Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur-Veda. Immediately below the thoracic portion is the lumbar portion of the sympathetic trunk, having five ganglia, correlated with the fourth group of Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå, the Siddhånta, Ãpißhali, Sarvasaµmata, Ãraˆya and Íhambhu Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. Below the lumbar is the sacral portion of the sympathetic trunk, having again five ganglia, correlated with the fifth group of Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå, Kålanirâya, Bhåradvåja, Kauhal¥ya, Påri, and Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The left and right sympathetic trunks terminate in a single coccygeal ganglion, that is correlated with the single Íhik∑hå of Atharva Veda, the Måˆ∂™k¥ Íhik∑hå. Table 11 summarizes the different divisions of Íhik∑hå in Yajur-Veda. Figure 17 shows the various ganglia of the sympathetic trunk. Introduction to the Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda are more coherently crystallized than were those of Âik Veda. There are texts in which the available Íhik∑hå are listed or systematized, greatly simplifying the


117

Abdomen: Celiac, Superior and Inferior Mesenteric Ganglia

Cervical Sympathetic Trunk

Thoracic Sympathetic Trunk

Lumbar Sympathetic Trunk

Sacral Sympathetic Trunk

Coccygeal Sympathetic Trunk

2

3

4

5

6

Location in Physiology

1

Group Number

1

5

5

12

3

3

Number of Ganglia

Atharva Veda

K®i∑hâ YajurVeda


Shukla YajurVeda



Division of Veda

Måˆd™k¥

Kålanirâya, Bhåradvåja, Kauhal¥ya, Påri, and Ûhodaßhaßhlok¥

Siddhånta, Ãpißhali, Sarvasammata, Ãraˆya and Íhambhu

Påråßhara, Padyåtmikå Keßhav¥, Svarabhaktilak∑haâparißhi∑hˇa, Kåtyåyan¥, Ãmaresha, Mådhyandin¥ya, Måˆdavya, Våsi∑hˇh¥, Yågyavalkya, Mallasharma, Amoghånandin¥, Avasånanirâya

Våsi∑ˇha, Påîn¥ya and Lak∑hmikånta

Vyåsa, Chåråyaˆ¥ya and Ãtreya

Names of Íhik∑hå

Table 11: Divisions of Yajur-Veda and Atharva Veda Íhik∑hå

CHAPTER 3: VEDIC PHONETICS 118


119

task of identifying and locating the Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Ved. Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå gives one verse that lists nine Íhik∑hå texts belonging to K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda:

Vy;so l+mI.Rr√;j" x'.u" k;iplin…mRt;" k*hlIy" k;l;]ey;r
.;r√;jVy;sp;·rx'.uk*hlh;·rt;" bo/;yno v…sœí v;LmIk°í mh;muin" – aq;ipxlk*i<@Nyp;…,Ny;]eyn;rd;" pulSTyb;@.Ik;rPl;≤=Pl;=;y,Stq; – munyoå∑;dx Áºte ix=;k;r;" p[k°itRt;" k;lin,Ry…sı;Ntl+mIk;Nt;®,;Stq; – svRs'mtix=; c Sy;iCz=;c≤N{k; tq; ) Bhåradvåja Vyåsa Påri Íhambhu Kauhala Håritå˙ Bodhåyano Vasi∑hˇhaßhca Vålm¥k¥ßhca mahåmuni˙ athåpißhala Kauˆ∂inya Påîny Ãtreya Nåradå˙ Pulastya Bå∂abh¥kåra Plåk∑hi Plåk∑håyaâs tathå munayoí∑hˇådaßha hyete ßhik∑håkårå˙ prak¥rtitå˙ Kåla-Nirâya Siddhånta Lak∑hm¥kåntåruˆås tathå Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå ca syåcchik∑håchandrikå tathå87


120

The Íhik∑hådi-Vedåãga-S™ch¥ lists 18 great sages of antiquity who are the writers of Íhik∑hå texts that bear their names, and then lists six more Íhik∑hå texts that are named after their subject matters. Of these last six named after their topics, Kåla-Nirâya, Siddhånta, Lak∑hm¥kånta, Aruâ (Ãraˆya) and Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå are extant; the Íhik∑håchandrikå of Lak∑hmaâ, a commentator on the Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå, is unknown. Of the 18 sages whose texts are named after them, the Hår¥ta, Baudhåyana and Valm¥ki Íhik∑hå are mentioned in the commentary on Siddhånta Íhik∑hå88, but are not known since, and Pulastya, Bå∂abh¥kåra, Plåk∑hi, and Plåk∑håyaâ Íhik∑hå are not known even by citation. Thus, eleven remain of the 18 original Íhik∑hå-kåras. The only available Nårada Íhik∑hå belongs to Såma Veda, and will be discussed in that context. Together with the five topical Íhik∑hå, that makes a total of (10 + 5 = ) 15 Íhik∑hå belonging to K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The full roster of 16 Krishna Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is rounded out by the addition of the Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå.89 A. First group of Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå: Three K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå correlated with the three visceral ganglia arising in the major abdominal plexuses. 1. Vyåsa Íhik∑hå. The first K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is Vyåsa Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Vyåsa Íhik∑hå to the Celiac ganglia in the physiology. Gray describes the Celiac ganglia [Please refer to Figure 18]: The celiac plexus, the largest of the three sympathetic plexuses, is situated at the level of the upper part of the first lumbar vertebra and is composed of two large ganglia, the celiac ganglia, and a dense net-work of nerve fibers uniting them together. It surrounds the celiac artery and the root of the superior mesenteric artery. It lies behind the stomach and the omental bursa, in front of the crura of the diaphragm and the commencement of the abdominal aorta, and between the suprarenal glands. The plexus and the ganglia receive the greater and lesser splanchnic nerves of both sides and some filaments of the right vagus, and give off numerous secondary plexuses along the neighboring arteries. The Celiac Ganglia are two large irregularly-shaped masses having the


121

appearance of lymph glands and placed one on either side of the middle line in front of the crura of the diaphragm close to the suprarenal glands, that on the right side being placed behind the inferior venacava. The upper part of each ganglion is joined by the greater splanchnic nerve, while the lower part, which is segmented off and named the aorticorenal ganglion, receives the lesser splanchnic nerve and gives off the greater part of the renal plexus. The secondary plexuses springing from or connected with the celiac plexus are


122

the phrenic, hepatic, lienal, superior gastric, suprarenal, renal, spermatic, superior mesenteric, abdominal aortic, and inferior mesenteric.90 [Please refer to Figure 18.] Kielhorn writes, that the Vyåsa Íhik∑hå is “the longest and certainly one of the most important and in several respects most interesting Íhik∑hås which I have examined.”91 He explains that the first chapter treats Saµjñå, or technical terms. A large part of this first chapter gives the rules for Pragraha, instances where there is no euphonic change due to Saµdhi. This chapter is followed by several chapters dealing with the relationship between the Pada and Samhitå-påtha, including rules of Saµdhi. These chapters are followed by chapters on the accents in general, and the different kinds of Svarita accent in particular. Then there are chapters on consonantal doubling, and augments. The following chapter on syllabication includes a thorough treatment of Svarabhakti. There is a chapter on the different Sthåna or places of articulation in the mouth, and on the Måtrå or lengths of time of the various syllables. The work concludes with chapters on Savarna, the cognate or homophonic sounds, and Uchcharana, proper enunciation of the Íhåstra.92 Lueders has published a study of the Vyåsa Íhik∑hå.93 The text has 28 chapters, called Prakaraâ, and a total of 263 verses. The beginning and ending verses of the Vyåsa Íhik∑hå are:

Vy;six=; s'D;p[kr,m( 1 ≈Iv;sudev' vrd' p[,My ≈ImÌ,ex' vcs;ç devIm( 1 ix=;' p[v+ye ≈uitk;r,;©÷ subo/k˘ l=,xIWR.WU ;m( 2 aq Svr;ids'D;í tTp[yojnmev ih 3 tTflç p[v+y;im ivduW;' p[mude yq; 4 av,Rev,Rkov,;R Av,oR lOTvmeTvmwt( 5


aod*{©* £m;doMyoTSvr;SSyuVyRÔn;Nyq 6 k;idm;Nt;SSmOt;SSpx;R aNtSq; y;idvoˇr;" 7 ij◊;mUl;idh;Nt;í W@Ü„m;, ¨dIirt;" 8 Spx;Rn;' pç pç SyuvRg;R vgoRˇrSy c 9 tTp[qm;ids'D;SSyu" pçmSyoˇm" £m;t( 10 aòW;SSyuivRsgoR„mi√tIyp[qm; n h" 11 gj@;¥; db;¥;í òWvNt" pre hl" 12 sivxeWStu yStSy Dey' v,;RNtr' bu/w" 13 tuLyÂp' sv,| Sy;LlopSSy;dp[dxRnm( 14 Av,RSy lOk;rSy pOˇ_s'D; p[k°itRt; 15 avs;neåNTyv,;Rí n;d; îit bu/wSSmOt;" 16 a;:y;nekSy v,oR?vR" SvrSy k;rtoˇr" 17 .vedk;rk;roıvoR hl;mˇu r Efg" 18 adNt' g[h,' v; Sy;TsNdehe si•i/' Tvip 19 indeRx;" k;rmu:y;í;Nv;dex;vip ceTy/" 20 ***concluding verses***

nwv tTflm;“oit s ivp[Ssujnoåip ih 516 s'iht;pdv,;Rn;' k;l;dIn;ç l=,m( 517 hl( ivsg;Rc(Svr;,;ç sN/elR=,mev c 518 Et;in sMyg∑* c ividTv; l=,;in y" 519 a?y;y' s p#Tyev i√tIy' b[˜ kQyte 520 s'iht;ç pd' v;ip £mçwv j$;' p#n( 521

123


124

l=,DStd;“oit b[˜D;n' ih x;êtm( 522 ved;mOt' ipbe¥Stu s tSm;∫Àsuro .vet( 523 Evç Vy;six=;iv∫ÀsureN{Ss kQyte 524 ≈ImTprb[˜sup,U Ricˇ≈IVy;sk<#p[sOt;ç ix=;m( Et;mi.D" p[yt" p#π¥Ssv;Rn.I∑;'í smXnute vw 525 îit ¨∞;r,flp[kr,m( 28 sm;¢oåy' g[Nq" 94

2. Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå. The second K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå to the Superior Mesenteric Ganglion in the physiology. Gray describes the Superior Mesenteric Ganglia [Please refer to Figure 18 (p.121)]: The superior mesenteric plexus, an inferior continuation of the coeliac plexus, lies in the preaortic connective tissue around the origin of the superior mesenteric artery, posterior to the pancreas. It receives preganglionic parasympathetic elements via the right vagus nerve. Preganglionic sympathetic fibres originate from neurones in the midthoracic spinal segments and travel in the greater and lesser splanchnic nerves to the coeliac and superior mesenteric ganglia where they synapse. The superior mesenteric ganglion lies superiorly in the plexus, usually above the origin of the superior mesenteric artery. Postganglionic axons accompany the superior mesenteric artery into the mesentery and are distributed along branches of the artery.95 S. Varma describes the Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå as follows: The treatise speaks of itself as a “Mahåßhik∑hå, spoken by the Creator himself,” and the fruit of understanding it is said to be a place in Brahma-loka. It is a complete Íhik∑hå, even more complete than the Yåjnavalkya Íhik∑hå . . . .It belongs to the Chåråyaˆ¥ya school, which according to the Charaâ-vy™ha, was one of the twelve divisions of the Charaka school of the Black Yajur Veda.96 The Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå has also been reviewed by Kielhorn:97 Kielhorn counts 335 verses, in 10 chapters. The chapters are described as follows: Chapter 1, having 64


125

verses, deals with the pronunciation and classification of the letters. Chapter 2 has 57 verses and describes the combination of letters. Chapter 3 presents 37 verses on the combination of words. Chapter 4 has 28 verses describing the rules and regimen for the study and recitation of the Veda. Chapter 5 describes the Svarita accent in 18 verses. Chapter 6 describes Viråma, Måtras, and Viv®ittis in 19 verses. Chapter 7 has 8 verses on V®ittis, such as Drutå, etc. Chapter 8 has 46 verses on the Piˆ∂as, Svarabhakti and Raãga. Chapter 9, with 18 verses, and chapter 10 with 40 verses treats the Krama recitation.98 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

c;r;y,Iy ix=; p[;k™ p[p¥e iv.u' .KTy; svRlokipt;mhm( ix=;' s;=;Tp[v+y;im tenwv;l' ipt;mhm( 1 c;r;y,I' mh;ix=;' p[v+y;MynupUvRx" inbo/t bu/wjuR∑;' inTy' v;Ñlx;Ntye 2 v,;‹n;' cwv s':y;n' s'D;Sq;n' pOqiGv/m( Svr;" sVyÔn;íwv teW;' .edmxeWt" 3 dxSq;n;in v,;‹n;' k°tRyiNt mnIiW," yt" p[vOiˇvR,;‹n;' t;in me gdt" Í,u 4 ¨r" k<#" ixrSt;ludNt; ao∑* tu n;isk; ij◊;mUl' tu sOKví dNtmUlStqwv c 5 ¨r" k<#" ixríwv Sq;n;in ]Ii, v;Ñye svn;Ny;Ûret;in s;vm;TyqRtoåNtrm( 6 ¨d;ˇSt;lug.Rí Svirt" p[cyStq;


126

nIc" s;v;‹nud;ˇí s•ˇe ¨rStqwv c 7 trs; p[yjye•IcmuCc' pO∑;idvo•yet( nw„y;Tpç .[uvomR?ye Svirt' ix=k; ivdu" 8 ak;rp[mu%wvR,wRhRk;r;" twiS]Wi∑i." ivvı' v;Ñy' svRmp[meymp;rgm( 9 ak;r; a*k;r;Nt;" Svr; Dey;ítudRxm( ix∑;in VyÔn;Nyev p[oˇ_;Ny=ricNtkì" 10 ***concluding verses***

Ek;qR.;vopgt;Ste hir' p[ivx'it vw W$( pç;xTp[qme vw i]'xCz™lok;i√tIykÉ 39 tOtIye i]'x∞wvoˇ_; EkÉnon;ítuqRkÉ Wi$(]'xTpçme p[oˇ_;" s¢cTv;rmev ih 40 cTv;ir'xÊv∑me vw nvme tu ]yodx cTv;ir'xˇu dxme Xlok; vw pirk°itRt;" 41 Ek]wv tu iv:y;t' Xlok;n;' tu xt]ym( cTv;ir'xdi/k˘ vw x;S]' c;r;y,Iykm( 42 amTsr îd' dey' mTsre n kd;cn mTsre tu .ve∂ˇ' Tyu¢' bIjimvoWre 43 y îd' p#te inTy' yí;?y;pyeid(√jm( aSy;q| buı‰te yo vw b[˜lok˘ s gCzit 44 îit c;r;y,Iyix=;y;' dxmoå?y;y"

99


127

3. Ãtreya Íhik∑hå. The third K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is Ãtreya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Ãtreya Íhik∑hå to the Inferior Mesenteric Ganglion in the physiology. Gray describes the Inferior Mesenteric Ganglia [Please refer to Figure 18 (p.121)]: The Inferior Mesenteric Ganglion is more difficult to define in man than in many animals, but a considerable amount of ganglionic tissue is almost invariably present at the origin of the inferior mesenteric artery. The roots of the ganglion are provided by nerves from the celiac plexus, the celiac roots, and by the lumbar splanchnic nerves. . . . The branches of the inferior mesenteric ganglion are (a) nerves which accompany the inferior mesenteric artery and its branches to supply the colon, and (b) fibers which join each hypogastric nerve and continue from the bifurcation to join the pelvic plexus. The hypogastric nerve crosses the medial side of the ureter and contributes to the ureteric network of nerves. It contains mainly fine unmyelinated fibers but has many medium myelinated fibers (4 to 6 µ) and a few large ones, probably afferent. The hypogastric nerves fan out into an extensive network just under the parietal peritoneum in the subserous fascia. They supply the rectal, vesical, prostatic, ureteric, and ductus deferens nerves (Ashley and Anson ’46).100 The Ãtreya Íhik∑hå is a comprehensive phonetic treatise in 294 verses, addressing 57 different topics. It discusses the alphabet and the Yamas, the different Prakriti and Vikriti modes of recitation, the pronunciation of the Anusvara and Svarabhakti, Vedic accents, Måtrås, hand movements, and the fruit of Vedic study, among other topics. The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

a;]ey ix=; a;ª;y; ySy in"ê;s;íN{sUy*R c c=uWI tt( p[,My pr'Jyoit" ix=;' v+y;im inmRl;m( 1 ac" Svr; îit p[oˇ_; VyÔn;in hl" SmOt;" ÓSvdI`RPlut;v,eRv,oRv,;R A Å lO c 2


128

Edwdod*idit Dey;" Wo@xehoidt;" Svr;" k%* g`* õczj; Zñ* $#@!; ,t* 3 qd* /n* pfb.; m" Spx;R" pçiv'xit" yr* lv* ctßoåNtSq;íãkxWsæph;" 4 W@Ü„m;,o ivsgoRånuSv;ro õo n;Sypçkm( îTyete y;juW; v,;R Ekon; Wi∑rIirt;" 5 ***concluding verses***

anud;ˇo ˙id Deyo mUfiyuRd;ˇ ¨d;˙t" Svirt" k<#mUlIy" sv;R©π p[cy" SmOt" 281 a©m;];dyo /m;R" pUvRmevoidt;í ye t;n( sv;Rn( v,Rs;reåiSmn( t] t] p[yojyet( Ev' sl=,' ved' yoå/Iteå?y;pyTyip --ved;'í ≈oi]y' b[˜ ye kÉ du„yiNt m;nv;" te òr' nrk˘ p[;Py j;yNte .uiv sUkr;" vedÂpivlst( pr;Tpr' ye p#iNt ivi/n; i√joˇm;" te i]vgRimh c;nu.yU tCz;êt' pdmv;“uyu" prm( îTy;]eyix=;mUl' s'p,U Rm( 101

B. Second group of Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå: Three K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå correlated with the three cervical ganglia. Gray describes the cervical ganglia as follows: The cervical sympathetic trunk lies on the prevertebral fascia behind the carotid sheath and contains three interconnected ganglia, the superior, middle and inferior (stellate or cervicothoracic). However there may occasionally be two or four ganglia. The cervical sympathetic ganglia send gray rami communicantes to all


129

the cervical spinal nerves but receive no white rami communicantes from them. Their spinal preganglionic fibres emerge in the white rami communicantes of the upper five thoracic spinal nerves (mainly the upper three), and ascend in the sympathetic trunk to synapse in the cervical ganglia.102

1. Våsi∑hˇha Íhik∑hå. The fourth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is Våsi∑hˇha Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Våsi∑hˇha Íhik∑hå to the Superior Cervical Ganglion in the physiology. Gray describes the Superior Cervical Ganglia [Please refer to Figure 19, p. 129]:


130

The superior cervical ganglion is the largest of the three ganglia. It lies on the transverse processes of the second and third cervical vertebrae and is probably formed from four fused ganglia judging by its gray rami to C1–4. The internal carotid artery within the carotid sheath is anterior, and longus capitis is posterior. The lower end of the ganglion is united by a connecting trunk to the middle cervical ganglion. Postganglionic branches are distributed in the internal carotid nerve, which ascends with the internal carotid artery into the carotid canal to enter the cranial cavity, and in lateral, medial and anterior branches. They supply vasoconstrictor and sudomotor nerves to the face and neck, dilator pupillae and smooth muscle in the eyelids and orbitalis. The lateral branches are gray rami communicantes to the upper four cervical spinal nerves and to some of the cranial nerves. . . .The medial branches of the superior cervical ganglion are the laryngopharyngeal and cardiac. . . .The anterior branches of the superior cervical ganglion ramify on the common and external carotid arteries and the branches of the external carotid, and form a delicate plexus around each in which small ganglia are occasionally found.103 The Våsi∑hˇha Íhik∑hå is described by Kielhorn as dealing with the doubling of consonants and Svarabhakti.104 It has 12 verses, and is reproduced here in full:

v;isœix=; Svr' Svr;∞;nuSvr;√‰Ôn' VyÔne pre i√Âpim„yte ref;t( SvrpUv;RTprç tt( lv;>y;muˇr" SpxR îit p[;i¢ítuivR/" n i√tIyctuq;Rn;' i√Tv' tTp[;i¢gocre pUv;RgmStt" pUv| vw/Xzi% .ujeWu c yTPlutSvryomR?ye i√Tv' pUv;Rgmoåip v; ¨∞;r,;idn; Sp∑' td] n iv/Iyte aòW;dU„m,SSpxeR pre tNm?y a;gm" p[qmSpxR sSq;nStyorPyv/;yk" pd;NtSyetrSy;ip p[qmSy i√tIyt;


131

Wsyo" pryo" Sy;ˇu apd;NtSy xe pre n VyÔne vs;nSqe i√Tv' refivsgRyo" ij◊;mUlIy;i./eyop?m;nIye c k⁄]ict( n Svreåi.in/;n;:y" p[qmo vo„m," pre n sÂpsvgIRypro v,oR i√®Cyte inWe/ ¨ˇmpre Spx;Rn;' ymnuˇme anuSv;rSy n i√Tv' sSvre VyÔne pre n SpxeR lvyoLlRSy hxorSvirte c vw pd;NtSy n k;rSy yvheWu preWu c i√TvmiSt vk;re tu s }yk;rpreåiSt tt( pd;Nte„v;nun;isKye pds'ihtyoˇ_y; p[;’to vw ’tí;ip tımoR bu?yte su%m( pdm?y;nun;isKye Spx;RTpUveR tduˇm" aNtSq;>y" pr; t∞eTswv;NtSqeit in,Ry" îit v;isœix=; sm;¢; 105

2. Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå. The fifth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå to the Middle Cervical Ganglion in the physiology. Gray describes the Middle Cervical Ganglia [Please refer to Figure 19 (p. 129)]: The middle cervical ganglion is the smallest of the three, and is occasionally absent. . . . It is usually found at the level of the sixth cervical vertebra, anterior or just superior to the inferior thyroid artery, or it may adjoin the inferior cervical ganglion. It probably represents a coalescence of the ganglia of the fifth and sixth


132

cervical segments, judging by its postganglionic rami, which join the fifth and sixth cervical spinal nerves (but sometimes also the fourth and seventh). It is connected to the inferior cervical ganglion by two or more very variable cords. . . . The middle cervical ganglion gives off thyroid and cardiac branches. The thyroid branches accompany the inferior thyroid artery to the thyroid gland. They communicate with the superior cardiac, external laryngeal and recurrent laryngeal nerves, and send branches to the parathyroid glands. Fibres to both glands are largely vasomotor but some reach the secretory cells. The cardiac branch, the largest sympathetic cardiac nerve, either arises from the ganglion itself or more often from the sympathetic trunk cranial or caudal to it. . . . Fine branches from the middle cervical ganglion also pass to the trachea and oesophagus.106 The Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå is described by Varma as the “general” Íhik∑hå.107 He explains: The Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå . . . . may be designated the “general” Íhik∑hå, as it has enjoyed a leading position among the extant Íhik∑hås owing to its complete character as a Íhik∑hå proper, and as it has been found in two recensions, one belonging to the Âik Veda, and the other to the Yajur Veda. It has dominated the Påîn¥yan school of grammarians, who quote this Íhik∑hå more often than any other, while the portion common to this and the other Íhik∑hås has possibly been borrowed from this Íhik∑hå.108 The Yajur Veda recension has 45 verses while the Âik Veda recension, that is used in the reading curriculum, has 60 verses.109 The core of the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå, including the allimportant recitation of the alphabet, called the Varâ-samåmnaya, is found also in the Agni Purana,110 an encyclopedic work that summarizes the findings of all the sciences. Varma points out that tradition ascribes the authorship of this Íhik∑hå to Piãgala, who is said to be the younger brother of Påîni.111 Ghosh presents an easily accessible English translation of all 60 verses of the text.112 The beginning and ending verses of the Âik Veda recension used in the reading curriculum are as follows:


p;i,nIy ix=; aq ix=;' p[v+y;im p;i,nIy' mt' yq; x;S];nupUVy| ti√¥;¥qoˇ_' lokvedyo" 1 p[isımip xBd;qRmivD;tmbuiıi." punVyRˇ_Ikir„y;im v;c ¨∞;r,e ivi/m( 2 i]Wi∑ítu"Wi∑v;R v,;R" sM.vto mt;" p[;’te s'S’te c;ip Svy' p[oˇ_;" SvyM.uv; 3 Svr; iv'xitrekí Spx;Rn;' pçiv'xit" y;dyí SmOt; Á∑* cTv;rí ym" SmOt;" 4 anuSv;ro ivsgRí ãkãp* c;ip pr;i≈t* du"SpO∑íeit ivDeyo lOk;r" Plut Ev c 5 a;Tm; buı‰; smeTy;q;Rn( mno yu¤π ivv=y; mn" k;y;i¶m;hiNt s p[eryit m;®tm( 6 m;®tStUris crNmN{' jnyit Svrm( p[;t"svnyog' t' zNdog;y]m;i≈tm( 7 k<#π m;?yiNdnyug' m?ym' ]w∑ë.;nugm( t;r' t;tIRysvn' xIWR
133


134

***concluding verses***

hSthIn' yoå/Ite Svrv,RivvijRtm( AGyju"s;mi.dRG/o ivyoinmi/gCzit 54 hSten ved' yoå/Ite Svrv,;RqRs'yutm( AGyju"s;mi." pUto b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 55 x˚r" x;˚rI' p[;d;∂;=Ipu];y /Imte v;Ñye>y" sm;˙Ty devI' v;cimit iSqit" 56 yen;=rsm;ª;ymi/gMy mhe„vr;t( ’Tò' Vy;kr,' p[oˇ_' tSmw p;i,nye nm" 57 yen /*t; igr" pu's;' ivmlw" xBdv;iri." tmí;D;nj' i.•' tSmw p;i,nye nm" 58 aD;n;N/Sy lokSy D;n;Ônxl;ky; c=u®NmIilt' yen tSmw p;i,nye nm" 59 i]nynmu%in"sOt;imm;' y îh p#πTp[yt" sd; i√j" s .vit pxupu]k°itRm;Nsu%mtul' c smXnute idiv idvIit 60 113

3. Lak∑hm¥kånta Íhik∑hå. The sixth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Lak∑hm¥kånta Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Lak∑hm¥kånta Íhik∑hå to the Inferior Cervical Ganglion in the physiology. Gray describes the Inferior Cervical Ganglia [Please refer to Figure 19 (p. 129)]: The inferior cervical ganglion (cervicothoracic/stellate) is irregular in shape and much larger than the middle cervical ganglion. It is probably formed by a fusion of the lower two cervical and first thoracic segmental ganglia, sometimes including the second and even third and fourth thoracic ganglia. The first thoracic


135

ganglion may be separate, leaving an inferior cervical ganglion above it. The sympathetic trunk turns backwards at the junction of the neck and thorax and so the long axis of the cervicothoracic ganglion becomes almost anteroposterior. The ganglion lies on or just lateral to the lateral border of longus colli between the base of the sevevnth cervical transverse process and the neck of the first rib (which are both posterior to it). The vertebral vessels are anterior, and the ganglion is separated from the posterior aspect of the cervical pleura inferiorly by the suprapleural membrane. The costocervical trunk of the subclavian artery branches near the lower pole of the ganglion, and the super intercostal artery is lateral. . . . The inferior cervical ganglion sends gray rami communicantes to the seventh and eighth cervical and first thoracic spinal nerves, and gives off a cardiac branch, branches to nearby vessels and sometimes a branch to the vagus nerve. The gray rami communicantes to the seventh cervical spinal nerve vary from one to five (two being the usual number). . . . Gray rami to the eighth cervical spinal nerve vary from three to six in number.114 Aithal describes the Lak∑hm¥kånta Íhik∑hå as “Four verses dealing with the characteristics of Saµdhis, doubling, accentuation, etc., of the Taittir¥ya school.”115 The text makes use of the shorthand notation of the Pratyåhåra S™tra of Påîni,116 using “Ac” to represent the class of all the vowels, and “Hal” to represent the class of all consonants. There is an introductory and a concluding couplet, and in between four verses with four lines each. The text is reproduced here in full.

l+mIk;Nt ix=; r=; vwidkv,;Rn;' ix=; dumRitr=s;m( l+mI' d¥;∞tu"Xlok« l+mIk;NtSy .Uitvt( aCpUv| hil hiL√®ˇ_mip c SpxoR lvo?vRSvr;d( Ë?v;R/;Rd( /il v;ic v; hlip v;nuSv;ryuˇ_;idm* √;vNyoNysh;ytoNtgnõ* ÓSv;t( pr;vCpr* √π√πStoåip c pUvRm;gmimtStuyRi√tIy*hl* 1 .Ute /;m c p;q EW prm;'Ty;'Tyg[g;" pUvRg;"


ik˘ co?v;R ¨psgRtXzi%.uj; l+y;t( Kvict( pUvRg;" tNm?ye p[qm;gmí sÎxSpxeRåPyòWo„m,;m( Ë?v;R/" p[qmo .vet( sWxto n;Nto i√tIy' n v; 2 no„m; tu p[qmSvr;t( p[qmto n;nuˇme hLpre vgeRnuˇm ¨ˇmen n ivsgoR lo hxSpxRg" lop" SpxRprí ní yvh;t( pUvoRåNtgo n i√/; m" pUvoRånun;isk˘ c yvlSpx;Rt( sv,| .jet( 3 õonNt;d/yo" £me, prtSSy;t;' kg;v;gm* õ;t( kSy;ØntStu tí sWyo" Spx;Rdnu„m;Tmn" Ë?vRSqe„vip coˇmeWu c ym;n;¸Stq;nuˇm;n( n;isKy' n,mwyuRt;¥juiW h;©Sy;CzpUvRSy k" 4 v,R£mctuXlok«' v,R£mivc=,;" p;#tí;qRto D;Tv; ivjy?v' idxo dx 117

One manuscript at the Adyar Library presents an additional 44 verses, for a total of 50 verses. This somewhat corrupt manuscript ends with:

td(/[Svp[qm;¥oˇ_; n;d;¥; ¨∞k;dy" pUvoRg;¥;Stq; v,R£mo hStSvre yuk™ 46 £mo j$; c vedeWu av/;n;it c;∑ c EteWu inpu,o yStu s iv„,u" kQyte bu/w" 47 ¨d;ˇs'iht;pdl=,' x;'idtuLy;'t' pds':y;k˘

136


137

îm;Ny∑;v/;n;in p[oCy'te ved Ev ih 48 --- svRs;':y' h;≤lbR¸≈uitSvr;t( ¨Tp;í p;$kTklm;ns' cwt --- 49 demNU yv/;n;in Áuˇm;in ivdubuR/;" pUvoRˇ_' pI@ --- tSy --- mOt' 50 îTyv/;ns'D;p[kr,' --- t l+mIk;Ntix=; sm;¢; 118

This completes the second group of Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda, correlated with the cervical ganglia of the sympathetic trunk. C. Third group of Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå: Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur Veda correlated with the thoracic ganglia of the sympathetic trunk. There are twelve Íhik∑hå belonging to Íhukla Yajur Veda which H. M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the twelve thoracic ganglia on the sympathetic trunk, running along both sides of the spine. (Please refer to Figure 20). Gray explains, “The thoracic sympathetic trunk contains ganglia almost equal in number to those of the thoracic spinal nerves (11 in more than 70% of individuals; occasionally 12, rarely 10 or 13).”119 The roots of the sympathetic trunk ganglia are white rami communicantes that connect the spinal nerves with their corresponding ganglia. These preganglionic fibers are myelinated, hence white, and are 1 to 3 µ in diameter.120 They arise in the intermedio-lateral cell column of the entire thoracic cord and they leave the cord through ventral roots of spinal nerves. They leave the spinal nerves as white rami communicantes to join the thoracic chain.121 They may synapse in a ganglion at the level of origin, or may ascend or descend the trunk before synapsing.122


138


139

The ganglia of the sympathetic trunk contain from 3/4 to 1 million cells each.123 The axons from these cells, usually unmyelinated, hence gray, are called postganglionic.124 These include gray rami communicantes that return to the spinal nerves, and fibers that innervate the target organs, blood vessels, and skin.125 The proportion between preganglionic and postganglionic fibers is in the range of 1:63 to 1:196.126 In general, the junction between preganglionic fibers and their target neurons is the typical axo-dendritic connection.127 However, the axons as well as dendrites frequently progress in several spirals around their target cells, and their path within the ganglion is frequently tortuous and long. Thus the fine structure of the ganglion can be quite complex.128 The presence of interneurons, that have their roots and branches inside the ganglion has not been confirmed.129 Postganglionic fibers from the thoracic ganglia, T1–T5 innervate target organs in the head and neck. The fibers of the T1–T5 ganglia also target the heart, lungs and eosophagus. Fibers from T2–T9 innervate the skin and blood vessels in the trunk and upper limbs. Fibers from T9–L2 target the skin and blood vessels of the lower trunk. Fibers from T5–L2 target the abdominal viscera, the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon as well as the liver, spleen, kidney, ureter, ascending and transverse colon, and adrenal medulla. Fibers from T10–L2 target the skin and blood vessels of the lower limbs.130 The splanchnic nerves are formed from branches of the lower six or seven thoracic and first lumbar ganglia. They are composed primarily of white, myelinated preganglionic fibers that pass through the sympathetic trunk without synapsing. Contributions from the fifth to the ninth thoracic ganglia form the Greater Splanchnic Nerve; branches from the ninth and tenth thoracic ganglia form the Lesser Splanchnic Nerve, and a branch from the last thoracic ganglion gives rise to the Lowest Splanchnic Nerve.131 Gray observes (1918):


140

A striking analogy exists between the splanchnic and the cardiac nerves. The cardiac nerves are three in number; they arise from all three cervical ganglia, and are distributed to a large and important organ in the thoracic cavity. The splanchnic nerves, also three in number, are connected probably with all the thoracic ganglia, and are distributed to important organs in the abdominal cavity.132 There is one verse in the Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå listing the Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur Veda. It says:

y;DvLk° tu v;isœI ix=; k;Ty;ynI tq; p;r;xrI g*tmI tu m;<@Vy;mo`niNdnI 77 p;i,Ny; svRvedeWu svRx;S]eWu gIyte v;jsneyx;%;y;' t] m;?yiNdnI SmOt; 78

133

Yåjñavalk¥ tu Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå Kåtyåyan¥ tathå Påråßhar¥ Gautam¥ tu Måˆ∂avyåmoghanandin¥ 77 Påînyå sarvavede∑hu sarvaßhåstre∑hu g¥yate Våjasaneya-Íhåkhåyåµ tatra Mådhyandin¥ sm®tå 78 The verse lists Yåjñavalkya, Våsi∑hˇh¥, Kåtyåyan¥, Påråßhar¥, Gautam¥, Måˆ∂avya, Amoghanandin¥, Påîni, and Mådhyandin¥ as the nine principle Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur Veda. All of these texts are extant; the Gautam¥ Íhik∑hå is associated with Såma Veda, and the Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå has already been considered among the first Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda described above. The remaining seven names provide an excellent starting point for identifying the Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur Veda. 1. The Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå. The first Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå in the reading curriculum as presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå to the T1 (first thoracic) ganglion of the sympathetic trunk. Gray describes the first ganglion of the thoracic sympathetic trunk: The first thoracic ganglion, when independent, is larger than the rest, is elongated or crescentic in shape, and because of the change in direction of the trunk as it passes from the neck into the thorax, the ganglion is elongated dorsoventrally. It


141

lies at the medial end of the first intercostal space, or ventral to the neck of the first rib, medial to the costocervical arterial trunk.134 The first thoracic ganglion was independent of the inferior cervical ganglion only 5 times out of 25.135 Postganglionic fibers from the first thoracic ganglion innervate the head and neck, and also thoracic viscera, including the heart, lungs and esophagus.136 Varma describes the Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå as follows: The Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå, to which we owe the list of the Íhik∑hås belonging to the White Yajur Veda, speaks of itself as the foremost among the Íhik∑hås, “like Viråj among the gods, or like Pu∑hkara among the holy places.” It claims to be a Íhik∑hå of the Påråßharas, which has been classed as a school of the White Yajur Veda along with Kånva, Mådhyandina, etc. But as it mentions nearly all the leading Íhik∑hå of the White Yajur Veda, it should be posterior to them, so far as its present form is concerned, although its kernel may have been much older. . . Some of its original contributions may be mentioned: 1. the half-long vowel K∑hipra; 2. “V" the product of Saµdhi is “light;” and 3. the observation that the intervocalic double “K” in kukkuˇa must be pronounced double, [as] contrary to the Våjasaneyi Pråtißhåkhya’s rule.137 The Påråßhar¥ Íhik∑hå has 160 verses with no subdivisions. Its beginning and ending verses are as follows:

p;r;xroˇ_£mIyctuqIR p;r;xrIix=; aq ix=;' p[v+y;im p;r;xrmt' yq; yq; deveWu ivê;Tm; yq; tIqeRWu pu„krm( 1 tq; p;r;xrI ix=; svRx;S]eWu gIyte p[,v' tu p[v+y;im itßo m;];iS]dwvtm( 2 i]Âp' c i]v,| c i]Sq;n' i]gu,' tq; a=r;xIitrekí p[qm; ki<@k; SmOt; 3


l=,oˇ_p[k;rwStu îWe Êveit indxRnm( ]Ii, ]Ii, c cTv;ir dx pç;∑m' SmOtm( 4 Ek;dx;=r' t√du.yorip ÎXyte s¢m' pçm' cwv puníwk;dx;=rm( 5 nv;=r' ivj;nIy;√;Ky' cwk;dx;=rm( aNTy;vs;n;" W$( cwv pçwt;iS]i.rıRk;" 6 Ek; ctuqRt; Dey; xeW; yuGm;ıRk;" SmOt;" ¨∞;du∞tr' n;iSt nIc;•Ictr' tq; 7 Ev' v,;‹" p[yoˇ_Vy;" îWeTveit indxRnm( s¢ ]Ii, ctu„k˘ c vsuv,;‹" p[k°iˇ‹t;" 8 W$(√y∑* c p[p¥Nte i√tIy; ki<@k; SmOt; p[qm' ®{sõ™:y; vw s¢ sõ™:y; i√tIykm( 9 ini/sõ™:y; tOtIy' Sy;√sus':y; ctuqRkm( pçm veds':y; c tOtIy; k<@k; SmOt; 10 ***concluding verses***

arÔn;" pç aı;‹ aıR m;]; .viNt c pUW; im]o vsuíwv aÔn;ê p[k°iˇ‹t;" 156 pUW; im]o vsUNpç;nurÔn;"p[k°itRt;" Ek;ıRm;i]k;íwv pçwte c;nurÔn;" 157 v+yy+yk+y.+ym;,; îTyevm;dy" îme v,;‹Stu t;lVy;" pr; mU/RNyj;" SmOt;" 158 Ev' D;Tv; p#π¥Stu s gCzπd( vw„,v' pdm(

142


143

n me ip[yo i√j" kiíCz⁄ıp;#« Tvitip[y" 159 îit p;r;xre,oˇ_' ivp[;,;' ihtk;Myy; ix„y;,;mupk;r;y prlokiht;y c 160 îit p;r;xrIix=; sm;¢; 138

2. Keßhav¥ Padyåtmikå Íhik∑hå. The second Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Keßhav¥ Padyåtmikå Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Keßhav¥ Padyåtmikå Íhik∑hå to the T2 (second thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The second thoracic ganglion was independent of the stellate (the inferior cervical ganglion) in 22 out of 25 cases.139 As was discussed above, branches are also supplied to the cardiac plexus by the second thoracic ganglion.140 The posterior pulmonary plexus also receives twigs from the second ganglia that follow the intercostal arteries to the hilum of the lung.141 Postgang-lionic fibers from the second thoracic ganglion also innervate the head and neck, and also thoracic viscera, including the heart, lungs and esophagus.142 The T2 ganglion is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.143 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. Written by Mahar∑hi Keßhava, Keßhav¥ Padyåtmikå Íhik∑hå has 21 verses, with no subdivisions. Varma describes the Keßhav¥ Padyåtmikå Íhik∑hå as follows: The work contains 21 Kårikas (verses). The topics fall under the following heads. A. Verses 1–6: The methods of indicating letters with fingers. B. Rules of the pronunciation of letters. Verses 7 and 8: Rules of pronunciation of the letter “Ya.” Verses 9 to 11: Rules of pronunciation of the letters “Ra” and “La.” Verses 12 and 13: Three kinds of pronunciation, Guru (heavy), Madhyama (middle), and Laghu (light), of Antasthas.

CHAPTER 3: VEDIC PHONETICS Verse 14: Pronunciation of the letter “Ûha.” Verses 15–17: Anunåsika and its different kinds. Verses 18 and 19: Pauses of the voice in pronunciation. Verses 20 and 21: The authorship of the work.144 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

kÉxvI p¥;iTmk; ix=; anud;ˇ;dud;ˇíeTSvirtoˇr Ev c ˙iCzr"k,Rml U eWu NyseıStms'xym( 1 anud;ˇ;dud;ˇíednud;ˇprStq; anud;ˇ' ˙id NySyod;ˇ' v;m.[uiv Nyset( 2 pun˙Rid Nyse•ocimit x;S]VyviSqit" p[icto∞;r,e Ny;so hStSy n;isk;g[t" 3 j;Tyoåi.iniht" =wp[" p[iXl∑o VyÔniStr" twroivr;m" p;dvOˇSt;q;.;VyStq;∑m" 4 EteW;' l=,;Ny;¸" k;Ty;ynmunIêr;" t] j;Ty;idsHD;n;' ctu,;| dxRne krm( 5 itYyRç©myeıIm;iNptOd;nvdev ih mnu„yd;nimv cedud;ˇ" p[Tyy" Svr" 6 a;¥;NtSqSy jo∞;r" pd;d* pi#tSy c ¨psgRpro yStu ySy zNdis ne„yte 7 pdSy;¥Ntm?ye Sy;Îrhw" s\YyutSy c i√.;RveåPyevmev Sy;idit k;Ty;yn≈uit" 8 aNtSq;n;' i√tIySy swk;ro∞;r,' .vet(

144


145

aTyuˇ_hiL." xWswARk;re, yutSy c 9 Evmev tOtIySy xWsw" s\YyutSy c swk;ro∞;r,' k⁄y;Ridit x;S]VyviSqit" 10 ***concluding verses***

Ak;rpr Ë„m;NTye dI`;R∂IòRåip j;yte prsv,eR ÁnuSv;rSyeWTp[’it®Cyte 17 a,um;]mnuSv;ro Áuˇm' c;,um;]km( xWse c k%pfÉ ivsg;R" siNt y] c 18 v;co ivr;m" kˇRVySt]eWCΩitcodn;t( s\Yyuˇ_Sy pd;¥Sy c;k;rSy p[tIyte 19 ÈW∂I`Rtyo∞;r" k;Ty;ynmuneigRr; a;iStkSy munev|xe j;to dwvDgok⁄l" 20 tTsuten kÉxven ’t; sMyk™ xu.;i¢n;m( p[ITyq| sui/y;' k;irk;vlI inMmRl; xu.; 21 îit i≈md;iStkmhiWRv'xo∫vDgok⁄lcN{sutdwvDkÉxvr;m’t;k;irk;vlI sMpU,;R 145

3. Svarabhaktilak∑haâparißhi∑hˇaßhik∑hå. The third Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Svarabhaktilak∑haâparißhi∑hˇaßhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Svarabhaktilak∑haâparißhi∑hˇaßhik∑hå to the T3 (third thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia were described above. Fusion between the third and fourth thoracic ganglia occurred three times out of 25 instances.146 Branches are supplied to the cardiac plexus by the third thoracic ganglia also.147 The posterior pulmonary plexus receives twigs also


146

from the third ganglia that follow the intercostal arteries to the hilum of the lung.148 Postganglionic fibers from the third thoracic ganglion also innervate the head and neck, and thoracic viscera, including the heart, lungs and esophagus.149 The T3 ganglion is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.150 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. Svarabhaktilak∑haâparißhi∑hˇaßhik∑hå has 42 verses with no subdivisions. However, in the middle of verse 29 there is a line that starts with iti that could be understood as a colophon indicating the conclusion of one division of the text. Varma describes the whole text as follows: This work is ascribed to Kåtyåyana. It contains 42 Kårikas. The style and diction lead one to think that the work belongs to a later period than that of Kåtyåyana. . . . In this work, many Pratyåhåras (contracted forms), which are known as Påîni's inventions, are used. . . .The last six verses of the treatise are with regard to Svara-bhakti, and are a reproduction from the Yåjñavalkya-ßhik∑hå. The subjects are: (1) Varieties of the circumflex accent. (2) Some euphonic combinations. (3) Duplication. (4) Classification of euphony (Lopa, Ãgama, Vikåra and Prak®tibhåva). (5) Description of ‘Viv®tti’ and its kinds. (6) Different kinds of ‘Svara-bhakti’. After the fourth, the following sentence is to be seen [verse 29]: Iti Kåtyåyana-pråtißhåkhya-varôccåraprakåra˙.151 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

Svr.·ˇ_l=,p·r≤x∑≤x=; aq;t" sMp[v+y;…m svRl=,l≤=t;m( ≤x=;' sm;stSt] Svr;'STv∑* p[k°·ˇ‹t;" 1 twro…vr;m" =wp[í twroVyÔkStq; .;Vyoå….inihto j;Ty" p;dvOˇí s¢m" 2 p[ÆXl∑ îit …vDey;" p[oCyNte l=,;Nyq avg[h ¨d;ˇíeTSv·rt" Sy;ˇt" prm( 3


avg[h;Tpd' yStu t' …v¥;Tp[qm' Svrm( l+ymSy tu …vDey' gopt;…vit go ) pt* 4 îk;rok;ryo" Sq;ne yv* Sy;t;mud;ˇyo" anud;ˇe pde inTy' s ≤=p[ îit k°·ˇ‹t" 5 }yMbk˘ d(v[• îTy;id l+y' Dey' …vc=,w" Sv·rt' zNd…s pd' y≤Tk≤çdip ÎXyte 6 ¨d;ˇpUv| tTsVvRNtwroVyÔn ¨Cyte î@ºrNte tq; hVye k;Mye îTy;id dxRnm( 7 ak;r Ekod;ˇen refÉ,;p˙to .vet( tç;….iniht' p[;Û" k⁄‘⁄$oå…s indxRnm( 8 …vvOÊy; ÎXyte y] Svr' c Sv·rt' pde s Svr" p;dvOˇ" Sy;Tpu] È/e indxRnm( 9 y]od;ˇ îk;ro ih inp;twk;rs\ Yyut" s p[ÆXl∑ îit Deyoå.Im…mTy;id dxRnm( 10 ***concluding verses***

k⁄…vR,I s; ih …vDey; ¨pvLheit pXyit rk;rSy xk;re, s\ Yyogo y] ÎXyte 38 h·r,I s; tu …vDey;xRs îTy;id dxRnm( lk;re, xk;re, s\Yyogo y] j;yte 39 t;' h·r,I' ivj;nIy;CztvLxeit dxRnm( refSy;q Wk;re, s\Yyogo y] ÎXyte 40 h'sp;deit …vDey; vWoR vWIRysIit c

147


EtLl=,m;:y;t' Svr.ˇ_eivRc=,w" 41 D;TvwtNmnujo y;it b[˜lok˘ sn;tnm( îit k;Êy;ynenwv p·r≤x∑' ’t' mud; 42 îit k;Ty;ynoˇ_; Svr.·ˇl=,p·r≤x∑≤x=; sm;¢;

148

152

4. Kåtyåyan¥ Íhik∑hå. The fourth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Kåtyåyan¥ Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Kåtyåyan¥ Íhik∑hå to the T4 (fourth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the third and fourth thoracic ganglia occurred three times and between the fourth and fifth, five times out of 25 instances.153 Branches are supplied to the cardiac plexus also by the fourth thoracic ganglia.154 The posterior pulmonary plexus receives twigs also from the fourth ganglia that follow the intercostal arteries to the hilum of the lung.155 Postganglionic fibers from the fourth thoracic ganglion also innervate the head and neck, and thoracic viscera, including the heart, lungs and esophagus. The T4 ganglion is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.156 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. Kåtyåyan¥ Íhik∑hå has 13 verses with no subdivisions. Varma describes the text as follows: Of the three accents, the circumflex is the most difficult. Here, an attempt is made to describe the characteristics of this particular accent, in the detached (Pada) and combined (Saµhitå) texts. At the end, a short description of acute, grave, and Pracaya accent-pitches also is found. There exists a commentary on this work by one Jayanta-svåmin. The text portion contains 13 Kårikas (verses) only. 157 The entire text is reproduced here:


k;Ty;yn ix=; ydud;ˇ;Tpr' nIc' Sv;y| tTprto n cet( ¨d;ˇ;TSvirt' v; Sy;¥] Sy;TSvirt' vdet( 1 Ek«.Utmud;ˇen Sy;dud;ˇmt" prm( nIc' Sv;y| yqoˇ_˘ ce¥∞ Sy;TSvirt;iNvtm( 2 ydud;ˇ îk;r" Sy;dnud;ˇen s'yut" îk;re, td; Sv;YyoRå.IN/t;i.Tyy' yq; 3 pdk;le y Ek;r ¨d;ˇ" s'ihto∫v" aok;r"Svrs'yuˇ_oåy' n c Sv;YyR Ev s" 4 Svirt' pdm?ySqmud;ˇen smiNvtm( pdk;le n pUVveR, tt" Sv;yRNtu yTprm( 5 Ek«.Ut;ivk;r* cedud;ˇSvirt* pde EkiSm•ev t* Sv;Yy*R dI`RpvU eR tyo" prm( 6 pdSy SvirtSq;ne VyÔn' j;yte yid siN/k;le td; nIc" Sv;YyR" Sy;ˇTpur" iSqt" 7 pdk;le yd; n;d" Svirt" s c î„yte siN/k;le td; tSm;TSv;YyR" pUvRpde tu y" 8 VyÔn' Svirt;TpUv| pçmen;iNvt' yid Svirt;duˇr' tSm;TSv;YyoR n;dSTvnNtr" 9 t∞ nIcimit Dey' y¥ekiSmNpde .vet( p[cy' Svirt;dU?vRmupopeidTyy' yq; 10

149


nIc;Tp[cytStSm;TSvirt; s'iht; .vet( preW;' yˇu pUv| Sy;TSvro∞' nIcmev tt( 11 ¨d;ˇ' pdk;le yTs'iht;y;' tqwv c tSm;TpUv| tu yiTkiçdnud;ˇ' tduCyte 12 y•Ic' pdk;le tTs'iht;y;' tqwv c ¨ˇ_˘ v; nIchIn' ceiTptO≈v,' t∫vet( 13 îit mhiWRk;Ty;ynp[,It; ix=; sm;¢;

150

158

5. Varâratnaprad¥pikå Íhik∑hå. The fifth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Varâratnaprad¥pikå Íhik∑hå. The author is Ãmaresha of the family of Bhåradvåja,159 so the text is sometimes also called the Ãmareßhi Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Ãmareßhi Íhik∑hå to the T5 (fifth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the fourth and fith ganglia occured five times, and between the fifth and sixth one time out of 25 instances.160 Branches are supplied to the cardiac plexus also by the fifth thoracic ganglia.161 Postganglionic fibers from the fifth thoracic ganglion also innervate the head and neck, and also thoracic viscera, including the heart, lungs and esophagus. The T5 ganglion also is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.162 By its contribution to the Greater Splanchnic Nerve, the T5 ganglion also contributes to innervation of abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.163 The splanchnic nerves are composed mainly of preganglionic myelinated fibers that pass through the sympathetic trunk without synapsing on their way to the celiac ganglia and related abdominal ganglia. 164 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138.


151

Varâratnaprad¥pikå Íhik∑hå has 227 verses with no subdivisions. According to Varma the text may be considered “an epitome of Kåtyåyana's Pråtißhåkhya.” The text begins with the rules of Vedic study, and the enumeration of the letters of the alphabet. The different lengths of syllables, Hrasva, D¥rgha, Pluta, Aû, and Paramåû are described. The places of articulation, degrees of contact and effort (Karaâ) are explained. The nine letters that are not independent, Anusvara, Visarga, and so forth, are described and there is a detailed discussion of the various accents and their combinations. Rules of euphonic changes including Saµskåras are examined at length, and finally the colors, caste and presiding deities of letters, accents and words are recounted.165 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

v,Rràp[dIipk; ix=; ≈eyo idxtu n" ’„," ksm;t©kÉsrI r;/;kÉilkl;i.Do gopIv;dk⁄tUhlI 1 ¨Tp•o y" Stute v'xe buiım;N’tiníy" amrex îit :y;to .;r√;jk⁄lo√h" 2 soåh' ix=;' p[v+y;im p[;itx;:y;nus;ir,Im( b;l;n;' p;#xuı‰q| v,RD;n;idhetve 3 jp;idxu.k;yeRWu pum;•;i/’to .vet( sMyKp;#÷ ivn; ySm;ˇ' inimˇ' vd;Myhm( 4 Svrs'Sk;ryoVveRde inym" kiqto yt" tto ivc;yR vˇ_Vyo v,Rs'`;t ¨ˇm" 5 mN]o y" Svrto hIno v,Rto v;ip k⁄]ict(


152

in„fl' t' ivj;nIy;ˇqwv;xu.sUckm( 6 vedSy;?yyn;ımR" sMp[d;n;ˇq; ≈ute" v,Rxoå=rxo D;n;d( iv.iˇ_pdxoåip c 7 Svro v,oRå=r' m;]; tTp[yog;qR Ev c mN]' ijD;sm;nen veidtVy' pde pde 8 Sq;n' c kr,' m;]; sMygu∞;r,' tq; yo n ved s inlR∆" p#;mIit kq' vdet( 9 aq p[qmto v,RsHD;i/i£yte my; yy; ivn; n isı‰iNt Vyvh;r; nO,;imh 10 ***concluding verses***

Svirt' vwXymev;ÛmuRing;‹GyoRåSy k°iˇ‹tm( j;gt' tu .veCzNdo inyog" x]un;xne 223 EW; mN]rhSySy mÔUWoı;i$t; my; EtTsv| ividTv; tu b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 114 anen ivi/n; ved' yoå/Ite ≈ıy; i√j" soåême/shßSy fl' p[;“oit pu„klm( 225 rhSy' yo n j;n;it l=,' c;WRk;idkm( soå?y;pne n yoGy" Sy;∆phom;idkmRsu 226 amrex’t;met;' ix=;' yo /;ryeTsu/I" iv√∆ns.;m?ye jy' s l.te /[uvm( 227 îTymrex’t; v,Rràp[dIipk; ix=; sm;¢;

166


153

6. Mådhyandan¥yå Íhik∑hå. The sixth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Mådhyandan¥yå Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Mådhyandan¥yå Íhik∑hå to the T6 (sixth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the fifth and sixth ganglia occurred once, and between the sixth and seventh ganglia once out of 25 instances.167 The T6 ganglion is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.168 By its contribution to the Greater Splanchnic Nerve, the T6 ganglion also contributes to innervation of abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.169 As was seen above, the splanchnic nerves are composed mainly of preganglionic fibers that pass through the sympathetic trunk without synapsing.170 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. There are two Íhik∑hå under this heading. The first one, called Mådhyandan¥yå Íhik∑hå begins with seven verses dealing with reduplication of consonants including illustrations. According to Aithal, “the second part enumerates the repetitions (1975 in number) of Âik-s in each chapter of the Íhukla Yajur Veda. This second part is almost identical with the Galad®k Íhik∑hå, also called Luptark-Íhik∑hå.”171 Varma summarizes the text as follows: There is no sufficient evidence to identify the author of this work with the sage Mådhyandina, who is known as the preceptor of one of the Íhåkhås or schools of the Våjaasaneyi-saµhitå. The work begins with the well-known verse, which states that the mantra (Vedic verses) should be pronounced without any fracture or elision of accent-pitches and letters respectively. Mantro h¥nas svarato varâto vå mithyåprayukto na tam artham åha , Sa vågvajro yajamånaµ hinasti yathendraßhatrus svaratoíparådhåt .172 The topics of the work can be divided under two main headings:


154

(1) Dvitvaprakaraâ (the section on the reduplication of letters). (2) Galitarcånåm nirâyaprakaraâ (the section on the repeated Âik portions). The first deals with the duplication of consonants in the combined text; and the second with the portions of Âiks, which are known as repetitions, in each chapter of the Våjaasaneyi-saµhitå. These repetitions of Âik portions have been estimated to number 1975. “Evam catu∑h∑ha∑hˇyuttaraßhataµ lopå˙, ekådaßhottaram a∑hˇådaßhaßhatais saha iti.”173 The beginning and ending are as follows:

m;?y≤NdnmhiWRp[,It; ≤x=; mN]o hIn" Svrto v,Rto v; …mQy; p[yuˇ_o n tmqRm;h s v;Gvj[o yjm;n' ihn‚St yqeN{x]u" Svrtoåpr;/;t( 1 Svr;‚d(√Tvmv;“oit VyÔn' VyÔne pre hr* n y¥c" pUv*R in…mˇ' VyÔnSy c 2 îWe ÊvojeR Tv; ) SvrpUv;‹" xWsh; aNtSq;í tq; yid in…mˇ.Ut; i√TvSy SpxR Ev n s'xy" 3 aXmn( ) SpxRpUv;‹ yrlv;" SpxRpUv;‹" xrStq; VyÔnç tt" pUv| √π/;.;v' n c;“uy;t( 4 ay+m;" ) …vsg;‹∞ pr" k;idVyRÔn;≤Tkl pUvRg" ÓSvpUv*R nõ* i√Tvm;p¥ete pd;Ntg* aip Svrtr;vev ÆXl∑* .vit n;Nyq; 5 …v„,o" £m" ) d?yõ™õéiW ) aXm•U∆Rm( )


155

a] yen in…mˇen i√Tv' VyÔnmXnute i√tIySy c p[qmSturIySy tOtIyk" 6 b;ÛB>y;m( ) SvvgeR c pre cwv;pçme prt"æSqte sv,Re c yme cwv Av,Re n tq; xil 7 t∂ºv;n;m( ) A≤ı ) t•' ) a…¶" ) iptø,;m( ) a] kvgIRy %k;r; inidRXyNte ) a;%re„ö;" 1 a;%uSte 2 myU%w" 3 ¥;Mm; le%I" 4 tt" %nem 5 ¨%;˚é,otu 6 ¨%;'Mp·rdd;…m 7 %nTvv$ 8 d/tU%e 9 …m]wt;Nt ¨%;m( 10 Tvƒ;d 11 su%;idt;n 12 a.;®%; 13 gN/Vv;‹%nn( 14 a;≤%dte 15 p[≤%dte 16…v≤x%; îv 17 …≈yw ≤x%; 18 .U>y;;%Un( 19 AtUn;m;%u" 20 ***concluding lines***

y∆;g[t îTy];’„,en s¢pç;xt( 34 apet îTy];êÊqe v" su…mi]y; n ¨√ym¶;yU\ WITy∑;dx 35 Ac\ Vv;c…mTy] .UB.uRv" ky; n" kSTv; Syon;pO…qVy;poihœºit i]•RmSte hrse su…mi]y; noå.IWu,o Îte Î'hmeit ]yodx 36 devSy TveTy] devI ¥;v;pO…qvIN{Sy*joåêSyTveyTyg[e ˙de Tv; yuÔte mn" p[wtu m%Sy ≤xrS]yodx 37


156

i√tIydevSy TveTy] su…mi]y; n ¨√yme/oåsI EÁidTywr; ò;sIN{;yTv; W@±√;…v'xit" 38 Èx;Vv;Sy…mTy];N/NtmoåNydev;sM.Uit…m≤lt;S]yoå¶e n y ]yodx 40 Ev' ctu„W∑‰uˇrxt' lop;" ) Ek;dxoˇrm∑;dxxtw" sheit m;?y≤NdnIy≤x=; sm;¢; 174

The second text under this heading is called Laghumådhyandan¥yå Íhik∑hå. It is a shorter work consisting of only 28 verses, with no formal subdivisions. However it is not an abbreviated version of the other text, but rather deals with completely different subject matter. Its three topics include (1) a Saµdhi-prakaraâ, treating the changes of “Ûhaî and “Ya,” “Âiî and “L®i,” explaining the three kinds of “Va” and the three kinds of Anusvåra; (2) Ayogavåha prakaraâ detailing the pronunciation of the Visarga, explaining how its sound changes to “Ha,” “Hi,” “Hu,” “He” and “Ho” according to context; and (3) a section on accents, showing how the acute, grave, circumflex and Pracaya accents should be indicated by fingers.175 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

lùm;?y≤NdnIy; ix=; aq ix=;' p[v+y;…m m;?y≤Ndnmt\ Yyq; Wk;rSy %k;r" Sy;Øëkyoge tu no .vet( 1 îWe l+y' ’„,å¨=; smu{" p[Tyud;˙it" pd;d* iv¥m;nSy Ás\ yuˇ_Sy ySy c 2


a;dexo ih jk;r" Sy;¥uˇ_" sNhr,en tu ) yDen yD' vwl+y' myUre p[Tyud;˙it" 3 tSm;¥JD;ÊsVvR¸t" smSMm;¥ˇqwv c refÉ,;q hk;re, yuˇ_Sy svRq; .vet( 4 sUyoR b;ÁNtu vwl+y' x„PYy;y p[Tyud;˙it" yk;rk;≥ryuˇ_Sy jk;r" svRq; .vet( 5 shrYy; tq; VyOı‰; copsgRprSy n ¨pyDMm;nuW;,;mip yNtITyud;˙it" 6 gu®vRk;ro ivDey" pd;d* pi#to .vet( ) iv.[;@ëd;˙itDeRy; sivt;NtlRù" SmOt" 7 pd;Nte vw lùtrStv Vv;yvOtSpte ¨psgRpro yStu svk;ro lùmRt" 8 vo v;' v; vw mN]p;#π l`vo gurv" pde p[v;yumCz; bOhtI v;to veit indxRnm( 9 refo rekTvm;“oit xWheWu preWu c ddxR vWoRåah;R∞ s'Yyoge nwv k;ryet( 10 ***concluding verses***

tjRnImocn' k⁄y;Rdud;ˇe tu ivsgRkÉ devo /mRStq; ÓSve Sv·rte tU.y' ≤=pet( 24 aêo mTyoR .veLl+y' Sv;re dIèR kiniœk;m( ¨.yorip ÓSve c vk;re Sv·rte sit 25

157


158

dIèRåip co.yo" =epåîit x;S]VyviSqit" yq; Sfi$kd<@;id®p;…/vxto .vet( 26 t√dU„m; p[yoˇ_Vyo ih¸heho indxRnm( Vvso" piv]' vw t] Áud;hr,muCyte 27 Ak;r" %lu svR] Áºk;rsÎxo .vet( ˙de mOgStOtIy; c Ac' Vv;cmq;prm( 28 lùm;?y≤NdnIy; ix=; sm;¢;176 7. Måˆ∂avya Íhik∑hå. The seventh Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Måˆ∂avya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Måˆ∂avya Íhik∑hå to the T7 (seventh thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the sixth and seventh ganglia occurred once, and between the seventh and eighth ganglia four times out of 25 instances.177 The T7 ganglion is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.178 Branches to the aortic network are also supplied by the seventh thoracic ganglia.179 By its contribution to the formation of the Greater Splanchnic Nerve, the T7 ganglion also contributes to innervation of abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.180 As was seen above, the splanchnic nerves are composed mainly of fibers that pass through the sympathetic trunk without synapsing.181 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. The Måˆ∂avya Íhik∑hå is an enumeration of the occurrence of the labial ‘b’ in each chapter of the Íhukla Yajur Veda.182 There is an introductory verse explaining that O∑hˇhya-saµkhyå, “enumeration of labials” is the purpose of the text, followed by 40


159

paragraphs, one for each of the 40 chapters of Íhukla Yajur Veda. Varma explains the purpose of this text as follows: The Måˆ∂av¥ Íhik∑hå is attributed to Måˆ∂avya, a name mentioned in the list of families in the Íhatapatha Bråhmaâ. The Måˆ∂avya families, according to Varåhamihira, lived in the middle, the north-west, and the north. The nature of the Íhik∑hå, however, seems to indicate its connection more with the middle and east, than with the north, for it is exclusively devoted to the enumeration of words containing the labial plosive “B.î This was presumably done in order to prevent the confusion between “Vî and “B,” which was probably more common in the above-mentioned areas than in the north. It is possible, however, that the Íhik∑hå refers to a period when the pronunciation in question was still found in the north. For the confusion of “Vî and “Bî is still found in some of the north-western dialects like Dogr¥ and Bhadarvåh¥ in western Pahå®¥, and Ûhiˆå in Dardic.183 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

m;<@VymhiWRp[,It; ix=; aq;t" s'p[v+y;im ix„y;,;' ihtk;Myy; m;<@Vyen yq; p[oˇ_; aoœ‰s':y; sm;˙t; 1 îWe Tv; b◊I" p[qm;=r' b;ÛB>y;' itß" pOqubu›o bOhd(g[;v;is b[˜vin Tv; îN{Sy b;Ûris b/;ndev itß Ë∆eR Tv;dB/en pçdx 1 ’„,oåis bihRWe Tv; bihRris ßuG>yo bOhNtm?vre sivtuBb;‹ÙSTqo b;ÛB>y;' bOhSptye b[˜,e bOhSpityRDimm' bihRiW m;dy?v' a¶eådB/;yo sMbihRS]yodx 2 sim/;i¶' ÒtwboR/yt bOhCzo c;dB/;s" s no boi/ b[˜ √y' gOh; m; ib.It Ë∆| ib.[t √y' swmnso bÛmRnStnUWu ib.[t" sh Svß;iMbky;


160

devN}yMbkmuVv;‹®kimv bN/n;Ts¢dx 3 Edm;po devIbORhtIbORhSptye b[˜;i¶" p[bu/eådB/StnUp; b›It;' bOhSpitÇ;Sme te bN/u" ctßo b[Ut;t( aÏ;re bM.;re b[˜ √y' pçdx 4 ***concluding verses***

y∆;g[to b;/te b[iU h ipbt' bOhtI b[˜,ítub;‹/;mhe ib.TyR b›n( b›;im bufiyo boi/ bOhTpçdx 34 apeto b[vIim p[qm;=r' ikiLvW' b;/Sv ]Ii, 35 Ace'Vv;c bOhSpit√≥y' b[˜ b[v;m p[qm;=r' cTv;ir 36 devSyTv; b;Û>y;' bOhto b[˜,o bOhSPpte boi/ pç 37 devSy Tv; b;Û>y;' bOhptye ipbt b[˜,e b[õ?vR bihR>yoR b.Uv b[˜,o bOhd( b[˜,; dx 38 Sv;h; p[;,e>yo bOhSpitBbRlen b[˜,e b[˜hÊy;yw cTv;ir 39 Èx; Vv;Sy' iKlb Ek" 40 îit ≈Im;<@vI ix=; sm;¢; 184

8. Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå. The eighth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Våsi∑hˇh¥ Íhik∑hå to the T8 (eighth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the seventh and eight ganglia occurred four times, and between the eighth and ninth ganglia two times out of 25 instances.185 The T8 ganglion is also involved in innervation of the skin and blood


161

vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.186 Branches to the aortic network are also supplied by the eighth thoracic ganglia.187 By its contribution to the formation of the Greater Splanchnic Nerve, the T8 ganglion also contributes to innervation of abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter,188 although the splanchnic nerves are composed mainly of preganglionic fibers that do not synapse in the ganglia of the sympathetic trunk.189 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. The text has one verse at the beginning, followed by 40 paragraphs, one for each of the 40 chapters of the Íhukla Yajur Veda Saµhitå. At the end there are two more verses. Aithal describes the text as follows: It is a kind of Anukramaîkå based on Kåtyåyana's Íhukla-yajurvedasarvånukrama. It examines the Saµhitå, chapter by chapter, differentiating the Âik-s from the Yajus portions (which number 1467 and 2833 respectively). Therefore, in the colophon it is called Âigyaju∑hor-vibhåga˙. Pandit Sridhara Anna Sastri Ware, the editor of the Kåtyåyan¥ya-parißhi∑hˇa-daßhaka remarks in his edition of the Âigyaju˙-parißhi∑hˇa (footnote on p. 94) that this Våsi∑hˇh¥-ßhik∑hå is by some scholar belonging to Vasi∑hˇha Gotra. 190 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

v;…sœI≤x=; aq ≤x=;' p[v+y;…m v;…sœSy mt' yq; sv;‹nu£mmuıOTy AGyjuWoStu l=,m( 1 a?y;ye p[qme nvmeånuv;kÉ pur;£ÀrSyeTyek; yjU\ iW sveR mN];" s¢dxoˇrxt' yjU\ iW p[qme 1)117 i√tIyeå?y;ye VvIitho]…mTyeW; teå¶ îit m®t;'pOWtI·rit yMp·r…/…mit yjurNt;¶e" ip[y' yju" s\ ßv.;g; îit yjurNt; Sv;h;


162

Vv;…@ityjurekÉn sh mN]' dev;g;tu…vd îit √π s\ Vv∞Rseit ye Âp;
cTv;·r'xˇmeå?y;ye Èx; Vv;Sy…mit ctudRx;¶e nyeit c √π îit s¢dxcoR v;yurinl…mit√π yjuWI ao…mit v; g;y]I £to îit ]I…, yjU\ iW ihr

163

aqv; pç….NyURn;" s'iht;y;' …v.;gt" 2 îit AGyju"…v.;g;‚Tmk; v;…sœI ≤x=; sm;¢; 191

9. Yåjãavalkya Íhik∑hå. The ninth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Yåjãavalkya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Yåjãavalkya Íhik∑hå to the T9 (ninth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the eighth and ninth ganglia occurred two times, and between the ninth and tenth two times out of 25 instances.192 The T9 ganglion is involved in the innervation of the blood vessels and skin of the lower trunk, and the T9 ganglion is sometimes involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels in the upper limbs and upper trunk.193 Branches to the aortic network are supplied also by the ninth thoracic ganglion.194 By its contribution to the formation of the Greater and Lesser Splanchnic Nerves, the T9 ganglion contributes to innervation of abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter,195 although the splanchnic nerves are composed mainly of preganglionic fibres that pass through the trunk without synapsing.196 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. Yåjãavalkya Íhik∑hå, also called B®hachchhik∑hå and Våjasaneyi-ßhik∑hå, has approximately 232 verses, including eight fairly lengthy prose paragraphs. Aithal says, “It is almost a commentary on the Våjasaneyi-Pråtißhåkhya.”197 Kielhorn says, “Both as regards its contents and the number of Íhlokas, this treatise resembles the Måˆ∂™k¥ more than any other Íhik∑hå.”198 It addresses a wide range of typical phonetic issues: It deals extensively with accents. It treats the Sthånas, or places of articuation, and teaches the alphabet. It teaches many rules of Saµdhi by example, and has a detailed discussion of


Piˆ∂as. Varma says, “It is the most complete among the Íhik∑hås of the White Yajur Veda.”199 Its beginning and ending verses are as follows:

yDvLKyAiWp[,It; y;DvLKyix=; ≈I" ) aq;tS]wSvyRl=,' Vy;:y;Sy;m" ¨d;ˇí;nud;ˇí Sv·rtí tqwv c l=,' v,R…y„y;…m dwvt' Sq;nmev c 1 xuKlmu∞' ivj;nIy;•Ic' loihtmuCyte Xy;m' tu Sv·rt' ivN¥;d…¶mu∞Sy dwvtm( 2 nIce som' ivj;nIy;TSv·rte sivt; .vet( ¨d;ˇ' b[;˜,' ivN¥;•Ic' =i]ymuCyte 3 vwXy' tu Sv·rt' ivN¥;∫;r√;jmud;ˇkm( nIc' g*tm…mTy;Ûg;RGy| c Sv·rt' ivdu" 4 ivN¥;dud;ˇ' g;y]' nIc' ]w∑ë.muCyte j;gt' Sv·rt' ivN¥;dt Ev' inyogt" 5 g;N/vRvede ye p[oˇ_;" s¢ W@±j;dy" Svr;" t Ev vede ivDey;S]y ¨∞;dy" Svr;" 6 ¨∞* inW;dg;N/;r* nIc* AW./wvt* xeW;Stu Sv·rt; Dey;" W@±jm?ympçm;" 7 W@±jo vede ≤x%æ<@" Sy;ÎW." Sy;dj;mu%e gv; rM.≤Nt g;N/;r' k*ç;íwv tu m?ymm( 8

164


165

k*ikl" pçmo Deyo inW;d' tu vdeÌj" a;êí /wvto Dey" Svr;" s¢ iv/Iyte 9 inmeWm;]" k;l" Sy;i√¥uTk;lStq;pre a=r;ˇuLyyog;∞ mit" Sy;TsomxmR," 10 ***concluding verses***

p[qm* c*œn;…sKy;voœn;se ¨p;…≈t* i√tIy" k<#‰dNTyí n;s;mUlmup;…≈t" tOtIy" k<#‰…j◊;g[e n;s;y;mev inidRxet( ctuqoR ˙id n;…sKy" k<#π c;….iht; ym;" a;pçmwíwkp;d" s'yuˇ_' pçm;=rm( ySm;ˇ] invtRNte Xmx;n;idv b;N/v;" y≤Tk˘…c√;Ñy' lokÉ svRm] p[itiœt' svRm] p[itiœt…mit Av,Re itTpre s;d;vnuSv;ro i√m;]k" s'yoge pr.UteWu ÓSv EvoCyte bu/w" – îit ≈Iy;DvLKy≤x=; sm;¢; – îit ≈ImhiWRyoigvry;DvLKyp[oˇ_; ix=; sm;¢; 200

10. Mallaßharma Íhik∑hå. The tenth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Mallaßharma Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Mallaßharma Íhik∑hå to the T10 (tenth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Fusion between the ninth and tenth ganglia occurred two times out of 25 instances.201 The T10 ganglion is involved in the innervation of the blood vessels and skin of the lower trunk, and the skin and blood


166

vessels of the lower limbs.202 Branches to the aortic network are also supplied by the tenth thoracic ganglia.203 By its contribution to the formation of the Lower Splanchnic Nerve, the T10 ganglion contributes to innervation of abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter,204 although the splanchnic nerves are composed mainly of preganglionic fibers that pass through the sympathetic trunk without synapsing.205 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. The Mallaßharma Íhik∑hå is also called Hastasvaraprakriyå.206 Keßhava is given as the author. The text contains 65 verse. Sarma says, The main subject of the present treatise is the description of the method of indication of accents by different postures of the hand. There is no other work hitherto known, treating about this subject equally elaborately. The contents of the work are given below: 1) Sådhåraâniyamå˙, 2) M™lasthånam, 3) Såmånyavidhi˙, 4) Chatussvaragati˙, 5) P™rˆå-rdha-nyubja-jåtyånåm saµjñå, 6) Hastasvaragatipramåâm, 7) Aãgulinissaraâm, 8) Anunåsikasaµjñå, 9) K∑hipravicåra˙, 10) Rekhåbhir udåttå-nudåtta-svaritasaµjñå, 11) Takårådimånte∑hu tarjanyaãgu∑hˇhayogådimu∑hˇyantå˙ kriyå˙, 12) Repha-vißhe∑hokti˙, 13) Bråhmaâ-svara-saµk∑hepa˙, 14) Raãga-mahåraãgå-tiraãgå˙, 15) Raãgåd¥nåm uccåraê pramåâm, 16) Dvisvarakrama˙, 17) O∑hˇhamakårasthånåni, 18) O∑hˇhamakårotpatti˙, 19) Ûhˇhakårasthånåni.207 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

mLlxmR’t; ≤x=; nTv; g,pit' dev' ?y;Tv; ≈Ik⁄ldevt;m( mLlxm;‹ hStpUv;| kro…m Svrp[i£y;m( 1 nTv; …vflhr' sd; xu.kr' svRSy k;mp[dm( SmOTv; ≈Igu®p;duk;' sul≤lt;' ?y;Tv; pr;' devt;m(


167

vede v;jsneykÉ Tv…/’t; …vp[;í ye sˇm;" teW;mev ’te ’t; n k⁄…/y;' hStSvrp[i£y; 2 aq s;/;r,inym" tq; p[;itx;:ye mnu" b[˜," p[,v' k⁄y;‹d;d;vNte c svRd; ßvTyno˚ét' pUv| prSt;∞ …vxIyRte 3 tq; ¨ˇ;np;…,' f,vTkéTv; sh xl;ky; gu®˘ p[,My mns; tt" Sv;?y;yv;N.vet( 4 a] jp;d* hStSvrv,RhInSy;n…/k;rTv' r;v,en Svr;©ëxe y;DvLKyen ≤x=;y;' c bo…/tm( tq; ih hSthIn' tu yoå/Ite hStSvr…vv…jRtm( AGyju" s;m….dRG/o …vyoinm…/gCzit 5 îit y;DvLKy≤x=;y;' coˇ_m( jp;d* n;…/k;roå‚St sMyk™ p;#mj;nt" îTyuˇ_' p[;itx;:ye mN]o hIn" Svrto v,Rto v; …mQy; p[yuˇ_o n tmqRm;h s v;Gvj[o yjm;n' ihn‚St yqeN{x]u" Svrtoåpr;/;t( 6 îTyip t]wvoˇ_m( Eten hStSvrv,Ryuˇ_ Ev vedoå?yetVy îTyto hStSvrp[i£yoCyte t] t;vıStSvrSy mUlSq;n' XlokìkÉn kQyte tq; a;d* hSt' NyseNm?ye æSqitreW; sn;tnI tt" Svr;nukÀLyen gitStSy n s'xy" 7


168

îit mUlSq;nm( a/St;Tp[v[jNpUv;‹mı U RNm?ye c itœit m?yto d≤=,' gCzπ∂≤=,;¥;it coˇre 8 ÎÇ; j;TySvr' xI`[' m?yto y;it coˇrm( ¨ˇr;¥;Ty/o hSt' Svr' ÎÇ; c d≤=,e 9 aıR NyuBje tt" p;…,r/St;¥;it d≤=,e sMpU,eR sTy/o gCzπd/St;∞ n s'xy" 10 ***concluding verses***

ySsubo/;Mp#π…•Ty…mm;\ c Svrp[i£y;m( hStpUv;| tu tSywv sMyGvede git.Rvet( 62 ≈Imt; k;Nyk⁄Bjen ÁupmNYv…¶hoi],; ≈Im√πdSvÂp;,;' ≈Im√;KpitxMmR,;m( 63 sUnun; iptO.ˇ_en mLl…vp[e, /Imt; …v£m;kúgt;BdeWu cN{vSvg.U…mWu 64 Ë∆Rm;se …ste p=e Áºk;dXy;' xneidRne ’tey' b;lbo/;y SvhStSvrp[i£y; 65 îit ≈ImTk;Nyk⁄BjIyopmNyugo]Iy;…¶hoi]%gpittnUjiptO .ˇ_`;$mpurv;…smLlxMmR’t; ≤x=; sm;¢;

208

11. Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå. The eleventh Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå to the T11 (eleventh thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Gray explains, “The thoracic ganglia rest against the heads of the ribs. . . ; the last two [of which T11 is one], however, are more anterior than the rest, and are placed on the sides


169

of the bodies of the eleventh and twelfth thoracic vertebrae.” 209 T11 is involved in the innervation of the skin and blood vessels of the lower trunk, and the skin and blood vessels of the lower limbs.210 Branches to the aortic network are also supplied by the eleventh thoracic ganglia.211 Through its contribution to the Lowest Splanchnic Nerve, when present, it participates in the innervation of abdominal viscera including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.212 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. There are three texts under the heading of Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå. The first text has 130 verses. Sarma describes the text as follows: The words containing labials and dentals are enumerated here. The letters which appear in their short and long forms in the Saµhitå; the change of a short letter into a long one, if it occurs in the Pada text; the three different pronunciations of “Va” (Guru, Laghu and Laghutara); the characteristics of Nåda and nasals with examples; the five kinds of Raãga [nasal sounds]; the seven kinds of Pluta [in the Våjasaneyi Saµhitå]; and the method of pronunciation of letters are also described. 213 Varma says, “The Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå is composed on the same lines as the Yåjãavalkya Íhik∑hå and the Påråßhara Íhik∑hå, but to some extent its object seems to have been similar to that of the Måˆ∂av¥ Íhik∑hå, for it gives a list of words with initial labio-dental “V,” and another with the labial plosive “B.” Like the Yåjãavalkya Íhik∑hå it follows the Våjasaneyi Pråtißhåkhya.” 214 The beginning and ending of this first text are as follows:

amo`;niNdnI ix=; aq ix=;' p[v+y;im Ámo`;nNdk;ir,Im( ySy;" ≈v,m;]e, svR] ivjyI .vet( 1 aoœ‰; dNTy; lùíwv punrev lÙˇr"


n;dn;isKysiht;\ Ll=,;in pOqk™ pOqk™ 2 b[˜b;Ù bOhäıo bOhtI ¥*bR/;n y" bihRbORhSpte ib.[;i@±bi.to bÛ bo/y 3 bihRW; c ipb b[tU e }yMbk˘ b;/buıy" bN/uStB>nI c b›It;iMbky; b>lux;y c 4 b[vI∂éb;is bM.;re aMbíwv b.ubRÛ" =]SyoLb' tq;Bd' c xtMbSTyJyte bu/w" 5 p[qm;=r• v∆IRt i√tIy' pirv∆Ryet( Ev' b◊IStq; b;◊o" pU,RbN/u' pirTyjet( 6 ib.[t' ib.[t;PSveniäl' gOB>,;tUp b[üve a;vbN/' c bIj' c b.[u" p@±vIxikiLbW;t( 7 mU/;‹ Vvyis y√Sto b›;bo?yi¶b;‹,v;n( ¨äu?ywlbOd; bıo b;hve ibiLmne yq; 8 k⁄bl' ivbl' cwv s ib.ed bl' tq; r=oh,' bl' Ty;JymNTyoœo bl ¨Cyte 9 aNtSq;yvk;roåip îTyetw" s\ Yyuto mt" abuRdNNybuRd' b.[u" xuLb' coLb' jh;it c 10 ***concluding verses***

p[md; ÂpsMp•; dir{Syev yoiWt; SvrhIn; yq; v;,I vS]hIn;Stu yoiWt" 126 Ev' v,;‹" n xo.Nte p[;,hIn;" xrIir," vedp;#« sd; sMyg( ivc;ywRv' pun" p#πt( 127

170


iVvê;Âp;
The second text with the name Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå, completely different from the above, is a text of 57 verses, that according to Kielhorn, “treats of the pronunciation of certain letters.”216 Its beginning and ending verses are as follows:

p[,My ixrs; Sq;,u' i]lokÉx' i]locnm( i]purfl' ]yImUit| ix=ey' i£yte my; 1 yq;buı‰; yjuveRde someêrp[s;dt" m;?y≤NdnSy x;%;y;mud;hr,s'yut; 2 p;…,nIy;idix=;>yo yt( s;=;•opl>yte ix„y;,;mupdex;y tdxeW' myoCyte 3 anuSv;ro ivsgRí n;…sKy;í ym;Stq; …j◊;mUlmup?m; c nvwte Syu" pr;≈y;" 4 ayogv;h; ivDey; injSvrivv…jRt;" pUvRSy;©÷ .vNTyete Svr EteWu pUvRvt( 5 ***concluding verses***

√w/e cwv smuTp•e l=,;…•,Ryo .vet(

171


172

l=,' n ivn;ix Sy;t( s'p[d;yo ivn;xv;n( 52 ≈uTv; ved' iv/;n;t( tu sMyg( b[yU ;t( s vw bu/" p[;Ùy t' ivv£˘ tu tq; /moR n hIyte 53 Ek" sv| n j;n;it svRmeko n ivNdit îit mTv; n muÁ≤Nt pi<@t;" xuı.;ivn" 54 p[m;,;nugt' v;Ky' moh;¥o hNtu…mCzit p[itv;t' s mU!;Tm; p;'xUnuæT=pit Svym( 55 my;] b;Lybu≤ıTv;¥≤Tk˘…cı‰Nyq;’tm( iv√≤∫Stˇq; k;y| kt;R ko n ivmuÁit 56 l+y;nus;·r,I ÁºW; ’t; v;jsne…yn;m( amo`;nNds'Dey' pUjnIy; mnIiW…." 57 217

The third text under this heading is called Laghvamoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå. It has 17 verses. It is described by Aithal as, “17 Kårikå-s on the pronunciation of “Ya,”“Va” and “Anusvåra” with illustrations from Våjasaneyi-saµhitå.”218 According to Kielhorn, all 17 of these verses are in his manuscript of the above 57 verse version of Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå. Aithal suggests, however, that only 12 of the 17 can be found in the 57 verse version of Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå, others being found in the Kaußhik¥ Íhik∑hå. The full text is as follows:

p;d;d* c pd;d* c s\Yyog;vg[heWu c j" xBd îit ivDeyo yoåNTy" s y îit SmOt" 1 yuˇ_Én mns; t√ˇTv;v;…m tq;prm( anUk;xen b;Á' c turIymnuy; pde 2


pd;d;vPyivCzπde s\Yyog;Nte c itœt;m( v∆R…yTv; rh* y;n;mIWTSpO∑Tv…m„yte 3 iv∂‰dI Sy…m];\í rocn;Sy yq; .vet( tq; p;Yy;‹y sUyRí muÁNTvNye smUÁvt( 4 ¨psgRpro yStu pd;idrip ÎXyte ÈWTpO∑o yq; iv¥;TpdCzπd;Tpro .vet( 5 iv.;Wy; yk;rí inTym;m[e…@teåip c y] y]eit m; yD' tq; yeit pd;dip 6 aq;tå¨ˇro y" Sy;ˇq; neit pd;Tpr" .vNTyeteåip pUvR] tq; c s pd;dip 7 aq; vym;idTy;d;vqoyeåaSy ÎXyte n yTpro yq; c Sy;Ts pde tdud;˙t;" 8 vo v;' v; vw iv v* p;#π ¨psg;RTpro lù" aq m; s n xBde>yo iv.;W;ååm[e…@te yv* 9 ydev l=,' ySy vk;rSy;ip t∫vet( y] y] ivxeW" Sy;ˇidd;nI' tu kQyte 10 TvdqRv;…cn* vo v;' v; vw yid inp;tj* a;dex;í ivkLp;q;R ÈWTSpO∑;í te SmOt;" 11 devIv" sivt; y; v;' Vv;to veit tq; n tt( t] v;YvOtSpte t;nå a;veit k°itRt;" 12 yT’t' sU]k;re, t√TSy;TsMp[s;r,m(

173


tJDey' svRx;%;su n tu v;jsne…yn;m( 13 l=,Sy ivro/eåip p;#¯Ky' yid ÎXyte tˇq; p[itpˇVy' YyD; yD; våîTyq 14 anuSv;ro i√m;]" Sy;Îv,RVyÔnodye ÓSv;√; yid v; dI`;R∂ºv;n;#R0 ˙dye>y" 15 sãß∑; …sãÁ…s s'Yyoge ÓSv î„yte m?ymã≈q;yeit s'Yyogo n i√®Cyte 16 D;Tv; vedivn;x' tu sMyg( b[Uy;• vw bu/" a;Ùy t' ivivˇ_É vw tSy /moR n hIyte 17 îit ≈Il~vmo`;n≤NdnI ix=; sm;¢;

174

219

12. Avasåna-Nirâya Íhik∑hå. The twelfth Íhukla Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, is the Avasåna-Nirâya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Avasåna-Nirâya Íhik∑hå to the T12 (twelfth thoracic) ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. The thoracic ganglia are described above. Gray explains that the twelfth thoracic ganglia are more anterior than the rest of the thoracic ganglia, and are placed on the sides of the bodies of the corresponding vertebrae. 220 The branches of the T12 Thoracic ganglion contribute to the innervation of the skin and blood vessels of the lower trunk and lower limbs.221 Branches to the aortic network are also supplied by the twelfth thoracic ganglia.222 Another branch of the T12 Thoracic ganglion becomes the Lowest Splanchnic Nerve. Through this contribution to the Lowest Splanchnic Nerve, when present, it participates in the innervation of abdominal viscera including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.223 Although the splanchnic nerves are composed


175

mainly of preganglionic myelinated fibers destined for the celiac ganglia and related abdominal ganglia, they include some postganglionic fibers from the last six or seven thoracic and first lumbar ganglia of the sympathetic trunk.224 Please refer to Figure 20, p. 138. The Avasåna-Nirâya Íhik∑hå has two introductory verses, 14 prose paragraphs, and several more verses of summation. Devasthali describes the purpose of the text as follows: In the Kramapåˇha a hemistich is considered as a unit; and hence there is no ambiguity regarding the Avasåna (end) of a krama in Âig Veda. But in the Mådhyandina Saµhitå, in the prose portions, the Avasåna cannot be easily determined. Hence Anantadeva has composed his Avasånanirâya Íhik∑hå, noting each and every Avasåna in that Saµhitå.225 Sarma explains further that the Avasånas are grouped in nine classes: (1) Dvyavasåna 1493; (2) Antyåvasåna 233; (3) Tryavasåna 150; (4) Caturavasåna 32; (5) Niravasåna 56; (6) Madhyåvasåna 5; (7) Pañcåvasåna 8; (8) Ûha∂avasåna 2; (9) Navåvasåna 2. The total number of endings is 1975.226 The beginning and ending of the text are as follows:

avs;nin,Ry≤x=; nmSkéTy tu t' dev' x˚rSy sut' p[.um( ySy p[s;d;∂ºvSy bu≤ı.edoåTy.UNmm 1 avs;n' tu v+y;…m yq;vdnupvU Rx" 2 îWe Tv; .Ut;y k⁄‘⁄$oå…s jnyÊyw Tv; m; .e"pO…q…v devy jNyidÊyw VyuNdnmS‘•m¥;¶eVver¶eådB/;yo id…v ‚Vv„,ur¶e v[tpteåN/STywWte ®∂^ .;g" Sv;h; yDmeW te g;y]IVv®,SyoˇM.nm¶eStnU" …s\ ÁsIN{òW-


176

STv;…s\ Á…s /[uvoå…s r=oh,\ Vvlghn\ Svr;@…sr=oh,o vo …m]Sy m; devIr;po Vv;cNtesmu{©Cz mno me tPpRyt Sv;˚étoåSyupy;mgOhItoåSy;g[y," som" pvte …m];v®,;B>y;NTv;Tmne me m/ve Tv;¶ye Êv; mÁ' ySteåXêsinr¶ye Tv; g;y]CzNds' v[exIn;NTvo≤xKTvNdev;≤Ndvm;pye Sv;h;…¶rek;=re, …m]oVvsvS]yo dx;=re,wW te ye dev;;…vMmRYy;‹ Ëı±v;‹m;roh;…¶" pOqu" s…v]; p[s…v]; pO…qVy;"s/STq;√svSTvo.yoriditÇ; vsvSTv;’itm…¶m( 3 ***concluding verses***

aq mYy;‹d; xt;in ctudRx i]nvit√‰Rs;n;in 1493 .v≤Nt √π xte ]y‚S]'xdNTy;vs;n;in 233 .v≤Nt xt' pç;xT}yvs;n;in 150 .v≤Nt i]'x∞turvs;n;in 32 .v≤Nt W$(pç;x…•%s;n;in 56 .v≤Nt pç m?y;vs;n;in 5 .v≤Nt √π pç;vs;ne 5 √π W@vs;ne 2 nv;vs;ne .vt" sv;‹
227


177

These are the Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur-Veda as presented by H.M. King Nader Råm. There are in addition two more Lak∑haâ texts belonging to Íhukla Yajur-Veda that are of significant importance although they have not been included in the reading curriculum.228 Pada-Chandrikå. The first is one that has only recently come to light, called Pada-Chandrikå.229 Pada-Chandrikå has about 260 verses divided into thirteen chapters or Prakaraâ, written by a disciple of Yåjñavalkya. The text presents a broad range of topics typical of Íhik∑hå, using illustrations from Våjasaneyi-saµhitå. Chapter headings are 1) Svarita, 2) Svara, 3) Ãkhyåta, 4) Visarga, 5) Satva-∑hatva-ni∑hedha, 6) Lopågama, 7) Ôatva, 8) D¥rgha, 9) Anusvårågama, 10) Nakåra-vikåråbhåva, 11) Halsaµdhi, 12) Svarasaµdhi, and 13) Avagraha-prakaraâm. 230 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

pdciN{k; ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ¨m;pu]' nmS’Ty y;DvLKy' guÂ˘Stq; Svr;dIn;' p[bo/;y i£yte pdc'i{k; 1 ¨∞w®d;ˇo ivDeyoånud;ˇo nIc Ev c Svrío.yv;NSv;r" p[v;' Sví indxRn' 2 Svro ÓSvoåPyud;ˇ" Sy;•Ic" Sv·rt Ev c dI`RPlutoåPyevmev Dey' svR] vwidkì" 3 a∑* Svr;n( p[v+y;…m teW;mev tu l=,' j;Tyo….iniht" =wp[" p[…Xl∑í tq;pr" 4 twroVy'jns'Dí tq; twroivr;mk"


p;dvOˇStq;t;q;.;Vyí;∑*Svr;" SmOt;" 5 Vy'jnwStu yv*>y;' c pro y" Sv;r Ev c apUvoR nIc pUvoR v; j;Ty" Sv;r" s ¨Cyte 6 /;Ny' mnu„y;' cMbI c vIy| kNy; îveit c .;Vy' coKQy' pQye v; pUvR nIc" Sv ¨Cyte 7 Edoto®∞yoyR] nIcok;r" pro yid pUvRÂpeå….inihtoåPyd;ˇSy tu b;/k" 8 ivsgoRåPyup/; yuˇ_í*Tvm;p¥te yd; ak;re c pre cwv vedo asIit c iSqte 9 EdoŒ;' c purok;r" pUvRÂp' tu in…ít' a;p¥te te„vrs;' vedosIit indxRn' 10 ***concluding verses***

p[gOÁ' c;ip cc;Ry;…mn;Vyy/Iyte √π îit √π c xIWeR c ËÂ b;Ù amI îit Tve îit Tve cmU aSme îTySme c indxRn' 5 pun" Svr' t" s ivtíeit n;Vyv/Iyte s'iht; y;…mme xBd; ÎXy'te refv…jRt;" 6 √N√;in i√vcn;Nt;in t] n Sy;dvg[h" pUv| pd' hlNt' ce¥d; n Sy;ˇdwv s" 7 îN{;¶I îN{;v;yU c îN{;bOhSptI tq; îN{;¶I îN{v;yU c du/u=NsIW/;in c duStr" p[;vPye….í s;sk;NsuWuve tq; 8

178


bOhSptI ]w∑u.' c Tvhor;]e c v;vOje a;sIWd' c nwW;d' ximRœ;y; mdiNt c

179

231

Pada-Kårikå-Ratnamålå. The second text is called Pada-Kårikå-Ratnamålå, and attributed to Íhaµkaråchårya in the colophon of each chapter. This text is described by Aithal: On certain phonetic peculiarities, the number of words, Visarga-s, Anusvåra-s, Ve∑hˇana-s, and words ending with the letter “N,” etc. of the Våjasaneyi-saµhitå, in 40 chapters.232 This is an unusually long text for a Lak∑haâ work, with approximately 1020 (unnumbered) verses. The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

pdk;·rk;ràm;l; ≈Ix˚r;c;yRivr…ct; ≈Ik;Nt' …st®…cr;…jtoˇm;©÷ g*rIx' gu®pdmMbuj;ly' c ) s•Tv; sul≤ltl=,' pd;n;m;c;yRw" p[ki$tmev v;cy;m" – pd;n;m;v≤l' vel ivsg;R,;' inrI=,m( ) n;Nt;n;' v+yte l+min≤=Pywk;=re =ym( ivhIn; A lO v,;R>y;' n v; y" Svr;" ) dxm' inNdun; Dey' ivsg;Ri√÷xit.Rvet( – i]dx;˚o k⁄ïx" p;ê;R ¨k;río.y;ïz;" ) a;s•≤ßdx' l+m y] Kv…cidh Sf⁄$m( –


pd;n;' l=,' p[oˇ_' vel;n;' tdnNtrm( ) v;g;R,;' pçm;v;R,;' pçpço?vRrefy; – dxo.y;ïx' l+m vede v;jsneykÉ ) v;g;RNtx=rw" pçivsg;R,;' inrI=,m( – aNyo refStq; pç i√pçeWu xukStq; ) svelsinsg;R˚o v;g;R,;' c hl' £m;t( sivsg;RStq;M.Sq; hk;re,;¢l=,m( ) avel;St√∂»Ç;,o lStSqwv hn' £m;t( – n;Nt;n;'nw Tv/oyuˇ_' vg;R,;' c hl"£m;t( ) Ë„m;,' c tq;NtSqrefvj| yq;£mm( – ***concluding verses***

tto kk°R tto /NvI v;sudevo n pçm" ) g,;Nt; y] vtRNte pun®ˇ_Stu luPyte ) pun®ˇ_o g,;Nt" Sy;√πde v;jsneykÉ ) ÓSvpUvoR ÁnuSv;ro dI`;RnuSv;r.;G.vet( i√Tv' prç• tq; £mk;le tu v;…jn;m( ) aNtSv sivt" punyR≤T]ref˘ pro .vet( ) ivsjRnIymev Sy;d.;ve ve∑n' .vet( ) îy' veidí v;j;y Sv;h; √* c ivh;y c ) a.;vo ve∑nSt] TvNyq; ve∑n' .vet( ) tq; c;Nt" pr;/Rí vjR…yTv;Nyq;cvOt( ) îit ≈I x˚r;c;yR’t* v;jsney-

180


s'iht;y;' pdk;·rk; ràm;l;n;m( EkcTv;·r'xd?y;y" sm;¢"

181

233

This concludes the discussion of the Íhik∑hå of Íhukla Yajur-Veda, correlated with the twelve pairs of autonomic ganglia on the thoracic portion of the sympathetic trunk. D. Fourth group of Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå: Five Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda correlated with the five lumbar ganglia of the sympathetic trunk. There are five Íhik∑hå among the Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda, the Siddhånta, Ãpißhali, Sarvasaµmata, Ãraˆya, and Íhambhu Íhik∑hå, which H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the five lumbar ganglia on the sympathetic trunk, L1 through L5, running along both sides of the spine. (Please refer to Figures 17 (p. 117) and 21). Gray describes the lumbar autonomic ganglia: The lumbar part of each sympathetic usually contains four interconnected ganglia. It runs in the extraperitoneal connective tissue anterior to the vertebral column and along the medial margin of psoas major. Superiorly, it is continuous with the thoracic trunk posterior to the medial arcuate ligament. Inferiorly, it passes posterior to the common iliac artery and is continuous with the pelvic sympathetic trunk. On the right side, it lies posterior to inferior vena cava, and on the left it is posterior to the lateral aortic lymph nodes. It is anterior to most of the lumbar vessels, but may pass behind some lumbar veins.234 The lumbar ganglia have no fixed pattern. The number varies from two to six, with four or five occurring in three-fourths of the trunks, but massive fusions are frequent and two examples with four ganglia may bear no resemblance to each other. Although the five individual lumbar ganglia should not be expected in any particular instance, each one occurs with sufficient frequency to make an anatomical description possible. The numbering of the ganglia is based upon the spinal nerves with which they are connected as well as upon the relationship to the vertebrae. 235 1. Siddhånta Íhik∑hå. The seventh K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Siddhånta Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Siddhånta Íhik∑hå to L1, the


182


183

first lumbar ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 (p. 117) and 21 (p. 182)] The lumbar ganglia are described above. Gray observes, “The first lumbar ganglion is close to or partly concealed by the medial lumbocostal arch.” 236 The first lumbar ganglion was independent in 13, fused with other ganglia in 10, and separated into two parts in two cases out of 25.237 The ganglia are best identified by their rami communicantes. The first ganglion has a white rami communicantes connecting it to the twelfth thoracic nerve, as well as a gray rami communicantes connecting it to the first lumbar nerve. Gray explains, “The first lumbar splanchnic nerve, from the first ganglion, gives branches to the coeliac, renal and inferior mesenteric plexuses.”238 The first lumbar ganglion is involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels of the lower trunk, and through the lumbar splanchnic nerves, it contributes to the innervation of the abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.239 The first lumbar ganglion also has a vascular branch that joins the abdominal aortic plexus.”240 The Siddhånta Íhik∑hå has two chapters with a total of 74 verses. This is one of three secondary Íhik∑hå named in a list of 12 Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda found in the Vedalak∑hånukramaîkå. Verses 5 and 6 from the Vedalak∑hånukramaîkå list 9 primary Íhik∑hå241 and three Upaßhik∑hå or secondary Íhik∑hå texts as follows:242

aq nvix=;" .;r√;jVy;sx'.up;…,ink*hlIykm( bo/;yno v…sœí v;LmIikh;R·rt' nv 5 svRs'mtm;r

184

bodhåyano vasi∑hˇhaßhca vålm¥kir håritaµ nava 5 sarvasaµmatam åraˆyaµ tathå siddhåntam eva ca upaßhik∑hå imå˙ proktå lak∑haâjñånakovidai˙ 6 All three of the secondary, or Upa-Íhik∑hå texts listed here, Sarvasaµmata, Ãraˆya and Siddhånta Íhik∑hå, have been correlated with specific ganglia in the lumbar portion of the sympathetic trunk (L3, L4 and L1). According to Varma, the word Siddhånta in the name Siddhånta Íhik∑hå, should imply the treatment of the general principles of phonetics. However this is not the case, as he explains: The third and last secondary Íhik∑hå mentioned243 is the Siddhånta Íhik∑hå. The designation is a misnomer, for the treatise does not deal with the general principles of phonetics. Its treatment is entirely empirical; it is prepared on the same lines as the Bhåradvåja Íhik∑hå, giving lists of words containing different sounds in alphabetical order—e.g., in kami∑hyante, lokam, etc.244 The only point of some interest is the view that “tvam” is optionally pronounced tvaã in the Vedas.245 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

isı;Ntix=; s'p[,My sklwk k;r,' b[˜®{mu%m*il .UW,m( 1 l=,' ≈uitigr;' ivl=,' ≈Iinv;smi%n; p[,Iyte 2 .UiminNd;p[x's;su inTyyogo itx;yNte s'sgRVyiˇ_ .;ve c .viNt mtub;dy" îit 3 pUvRix=;" pr;mOXy p[;itx;:y' c svRx" isı;Ntix=;' v+y;im ved.;„y;nus;ir,Im( 4


ak;r;id pd;n;' Sy;dhod;hr,' £m" a;idm?y;NttSt] y;v√πd' in®Pyte 5 av;tm;nItpUv| Sy;idd' p[;gˇu no hiv" nheN{' vO]mht prSmw c dd;xt" 6 vO]' ned' it nudte ce„yse pUvRv;•it aSy;" pro p[itœ;y; ai.dvw"s/eTyip 7 l.teår
JlPl=ydXlo,ä>luxÒ;dmLml; anvStvte ê' c p[pede vd vÔn; 70 TvÎ„p/;vTve dev; avO
185


186

Xlok;" isı;Ntix=;y;' ctu"s¢itrIirt;" 74 îit isı;Ntix=; sm;Pt; 246

2. Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå. The eighth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå to L2, the second lumbar ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 21, pp. 117 and 182]: The lumbar ganglia are described above. The second lumbar ganglion was missing in 2, independent in 12, fused in 7, and split in 4 cases out of 25 cases.247 This second ganglion is the most constant, largest, and most easily identified. The second lumbar ganglion has a white rami communicantes connecting it to the first lumbar nerve, as well as a gray rami communicantes connecting it to the second lumbar nerve.248 Its branches include the second lumbar splanchnic nerve, which connects to the inferior mesenteric plexus. The second lumbar ganglion is involved in innervation of the skin and blood vessels of the lower trunk, and through the lumbar splanchnic nerves, it contributes to the innervation of the abdominal viscera, including the gastrointestinal tract, the ascending and transverse colon, the liver, spleen, adrenal medulla, kidney and ureter.249 Vascular branches from the second lumbar ganglia also join the abdominal aortic plexus.”250 The Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå consists of approximately 100 S™tra, divided into eight Prakaraâ. There are three, or in some editions 20 verses at the beginning, and again three verses at the end. Kielhorn describes the text as follows: The Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå treats of the classification and pronunciation (Sthåna and Prayatna) of the letters of the alphabet. It is written in prose, but ends with three Íhlokas which give a resume of the preceeding prose portion.251 Varma points out that 11 kinds of external effort are described in Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå.252


There is an extensive review by Cardona of the phonetics of the Ãpißhali Íhik∑hå.253 There is also an English translation of the text by van Nooten.254 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

a;ipxilix=; aq ix=;' p[v+y;im mt;m;ipxlemuRne" gu®l~v;idivD;n' tSy;rM.p[yojkm( ¨ˇ_˘ tt( svRm©πWu ix=;Vy;kr,eWu yt( 1 ivkLp.;j;' x;S];,;mip Î∑;nuvitRn;m( tˇCz;%;ivxeWeWu VyvSq;qRimd' SmOtm( 2 s'iht; tTpd;?y;y" £m;?y;y îit i]/; p[isıoåSy sm;ª;yo ivWyo v+yte tt" 3 VyviSqteWu k;yeRWu t√t( i]i„vh kÉWuict( k;y;RNtr;,;' tNmUl;d( VyvSq; sugm; .vet( 4 tSm;t( tˇTsm;ª;ye p[;itx;:y;ivro/t" k;y| sv| VyvSq;Py' ix=;Vy;kr,oidtm( 5 Svr;" Spx;RStq;NtSq; Ë„m;,í;q dixRt;" ivsg;RnuSv;r¬;í;nun;isKy;" pç coidt;" 6 ÓSvdI`RPlut;v,eRv,oRv,;R A Å l» c Edwdod*idit Dey;" Wo@xeh;idt" Svr;" 7 k%* g`* õczj; Zñ* $#@!; ,t* qd* /n* pfb.; m" Spx;R" pçiv'xit" 8

187


188

yr* lv* ctßoåNtSq;íãkxWsæph;" W@Ü„m;,o ivsgoRånuSv;ro ¬o n;Sypçkm( 9 aNy];iv¥m;nStu yo v,R" ≈Uyteåi/k" a;gMym;ntuLyTv;t( s a;gm îit SmOt" 10 ***concluding verses***

yd; tu mNd" p[yào .vit td; g;]Sy ß'sn' k<#iblSy mhÊv' SvrSy c v;yomRNdgitTv;t( iòG/t; .vit tmnud;ˇm;c =te 21 ¨d;ˇ;nud;ˇSvrs'inp;t;t( Svirt" 22 îTyev' p[yàoåi.invORˇ" ’Tò" p[yào .vit 23 a∑* Sq;n;in v,;Rn;mur" k<#" ixrStq; ij◊;mUl' c dNt;í n;iskoœ* c t;lu c 24 SpO∑TvmIWTSpO∑Tv' s'vOtTv' tqwv c ivvOtTv' c v,;Rn;mNt"kr,muCyte 25 k;lo ivv;rs'v;r* ê;sn;d;vòWt; òWoåLpp[;,k;lwv mh;p[;," Svr;S]y" b;Á' kr,m;¸St;n( v,;Rn;' v,Rveidn" 26 îTy;ipxilix=; sm;¢; 255

3. Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå. The ninth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå to L3, the third lumbar ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer


189

to Figures 17 and 21, pp. 117 and 182]: The lumbar ganglia are described above. The third lumbar ganglion was independent in two cases, fused in 17, split in 4, and connected only with the third lumbar nerve in 3 cases of 25.256 The third splanchnic nerve arises either from the the third or fourth lumbar ganglion and proceeds in front of the common iliac vessels to the hypogastric plexus.257 The third lumbar ganglion is the last to receive white rami communicantes from the spinal cord, connecting to the L2 spinal nerve, which marks the end of the intermediolateral column within the spinal cord.258 Vascular branches from the third lumbar ganglia also join the abdominal aortic plexus.259 Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå has 135 verses divided into four chapters called Prakaraâ. Some manuscript versions are longer, according to Aithal, having 235 verses, and five chapters.260 Others, such as that translated into German by Otto Franke in 1886, are shorter, having 49 verses.261 Varma quotes the commentator, Mañci Bhaˇˇaís description of the purpose and scope of Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå: “Sarvasaµmata expounds subjects common and acceptable to all the phonetic works, the Pråtißhåkhyas, etc., belonging to the Taittir¥ya school.” The 170 verse manuscript that Varma describes contains:262 some material hardly to be met with in any other extant Íhik∑hå. For instance, its observation that the quantity of a consonant without a vowel is a quarter-mora, and that the quantity of a pause between a labial vowel and the first member of a consonant-group is a half-mora, provided that the consonant-group intervenes between two labial vowels—e.g., in utp™ta-, the “pause” between u and t was said to be a half-mora. . . . It is not unlikely that they are original theories of the Íhik∑hå itself. Moreover, although the work is admittedly of a secondary character, its date does not seem to be very recent. . . Kielhorn summarizes the contents of the Íhik∑hå as follows: The Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå gives in 134 ßhlokas263 a very clear and intelligible resume of what is generally taught in the Íhik∑hås. It treats of the doubling of consonants, Svarabhakti, the Vedapåˇhakado∑hå˙, the Måtrås, Raãga, of

CHAPTER 3: VEDIC PHONETICS syllabication, of the accents, and especially the different Svaritas, of the denotation of the accents by means of the fingers, of Kampa, etc.264 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

svRs'mtix=; g,ex' vrd' dev' p[i,pTy gj;nnm( i√Tv;dIn;' p[v+y;im l=,' svRs'mtm( 1 Svr;id≠√Tvmv;“oit VyÔn' VyÔne pre SpxoR lk;rpUvoR yo v pUvRí i√®Cyte 2 SvrpUvRSy refSy prSt;√‰Ôn' iSqtm( a;p¥te i√v,| t√,Rm;]e pre sit 3 s'yog;idiry;id≠√TvmnuSv;r;TpriSqt" anuSv;ro i√®Cyet s'yoge prt" iSqte 4 m;];i√m;]oånuSv;ro i√m;];Nm;] Ev tu m;i]k;dip s'yoge m;i]kStu i√Âpvt( 5 anuSv;ro i√m;]" Sy;{efo„msu preWu c s'yoge pr.Ute Sy;Nm;i]kStu i√Âpvt( 6 ÓSvpUv*R nõ* i√Tvm;p¥ete pd;Ntg* aip Svroˇr;vev iXl∑e .vit n;Nyq; 7 îit i√Tvp[kr,' sm;¢m( y] yen inimˇen i√Tv' VyÔnmXnute i√tIySy ctuqRSy ten pUv;Rgmo .vet( 1 prm;Ty;it .Ute c Áupsg;Rí /;m c

190


191

p;q EW c pUveRWu pUv| zi% .uj; îyu" 2 k⁄]icTSvryomR?ye i√Tv' l+y;nus;rt" pUv;RgmStq; t] Deyo v,Rivc=,w" 3 îit pUv;Rgmp[kr,' s'p,U Rm( ***concluding verses***

mN]o hIn" Svrto v,Rto v; imQy;p[yuˇ_o n tmqRm;h s v;Gvj[o yjm;n' ihniSt yqeN{x]u" Svrtoåpr;/;t( 94 Svrv,;Rn( Sf⁄$' mTv; sMyGyí smu∞ret( a.uT’∑fl' tSy t] t] smIirtm( 95 hSten ved' yoå/Ite Svrv,;RqRs'yutm( AGyju"s;mi."pUto b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 96 pd£mivxeWDo v,R£mivc=," Svrm;];id.;gDo gCzed;c;yRs'sdm( 97 sUyRdev bu/eN{Sy nNdnen mh;Tmn; p[,It' kÉxv;yeR, l=,' svRs'mtm( 98 îit svRs'mtix=; s'pU,; 265

4. Ãraˆya Íhik∑hå. The tenth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Ãraˆya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Ãraˆya Íhik∑hå to L4, the fourth lumbar ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 21, pp. 117 and 182]: The lumbar ganglia are described above. The fourth lumbar ganglion was independent in one case, fused in 12, split in 12, and of these, eleven were connected with L4 only.266 As described above, the third splanchnic nerve may arise from either the third or fourth lumbar ganglion.267 Vascular branches from the fourth lumbar ganglia also join


192

the abdominal aortic plexus.”268 The fourth lumbar ganglia are also involved in the sympathetic innervation of the lower limbs.269 The Ãraˆya Íhik∑hå has 281 lines. The grouping of lines into verses is not clearly shown, and there is no numbering of verses. According to Varma, “The Ãraˆya Íhik∑hå is a monograph on accent in the Taittir¥ya Ãraˆyaka. It enumerates words with accent in different positions: those with an initial accent, those with two final Udåttas, etc. . . . This Íhik∑hå is admittedly a more recent work, for it speaks of itself as ‘nectar extracted from the ocean of the nine Íhik∑hås.’ ”270 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

a;r

y]wtdupÎXyete yo vw t;' b[˜,o ved îTy;id v,;RNyTv' ---NyTv' pçp[XneWu Î„yte Sv;rnIcTvmu∞Sy nIc;dIn;\ tu co∞t; y;tpuyNt' dui.R=' hemt" pr;õ™ loihtSTv' tq;.[;i, ivêe j;yetdevxm( pOCz;Myu.ytov;t;d;.og;ê;py" purm( devIpu]í n;sTy;Tyug[o/Ir;my; tt" ***concluding verses***

a;ry"pUvoR ivg;Stq;

193


194

s¥í v;mdev;y At\ ssTymev c .U"p[p¥e c svoR vw nmí Svirto .vet( nk˘cn yto v;cSv;r;NtopinW∫vet( sveRn;r;y,p[Xn ¨∞;Nt; îit in,Ry" ≈IrStu 271

5. Íhambhu Íhik∑hå. The eleventh K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Íhambhu Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Íhambhu Íhik∑hå to L5, the fifth lumbar ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 21, pp. 117 and 182.]: The lumbar ganglia are described above. The fifth lumbar ganglion is relatively inaccessible, because of the common iliac vessels.272 The fifth lumbar ganglion gives rise to the fourth lumbar splanchnic nerve, which passes above the common iliac vessels to the superior hypogastric plexus.273 Vascular branches from the fifth lumbar ganglia also join the abdominal aortic plexus.”274 The fifth lumbar ganglia are also involved in the sympathetic innervation of the lower limbs.275 Íhambhu Íhik∑hå has approximately 47 unnumbered verses, with no subdivisions. Aithal describes the text as follows: A work of about 50 verses explaining the names given to the Kåˆ∂a-s and the Ãnuvåka-s in the Taittir¥ya-saµhitå. It classifies the letters of the alphabet and deals with accent, quantity, hiatus, doubling, svara-bhakti, etc.276 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

xM.uix=; p[,My ixrs; l+mI' k;lk;' c srSvtIm( g,ex' c tq; xM.u' ix=;' v+y;im x;˚rIm( k;<@oåi¶s'Do ivDeyítuqRStwiˇrIykÉ


g[h îTy;dde p[Xn" sjo,;Nto iv/Iyte ¨:yimTyi¶k;<@Sy p[Xni√tym;idkm( aNTy;nuv;ksiht' vedivi∫®d;˙tm( îWe p[.OTyp;mNt' p[Xn;n;' yu+vs'yutm( aNTy;nuv;k; y;Jy;:y;S]yoiv'xitrIirt;" devsivtr;r>y ¨py;m;Nts'iDkm( v;jpey;i./;n' W@nuv;k˘ ivpiít" simi∂x;' simıoå¶emRNve Sy;Tp[œ‰s'iDkm( jImUt;id ctu„k˘ c g;y]I i√ty' tq; yˇTpçmk;<@º c;nuv;ki]ty' ivn; p[∑‰mev mh;p[œ‰imit vedivdo ivdu" pç;nuv;km;Xmi•TySy p[XnSy c;idkm( ivkWRs'DimTy;¸ARWyo vedv;idn" ivhVys'D; v;jon" p[.OtIn;' iv/Iyte ]y;,;mnuv;k;n;' vedl=,veidi." dxm;id ]y" p[Xn;" î∑yon;m ¨Cyte g[h,' Tvekmui∂Xy pd' vw i£yte yt" ***concluding verses***

dI`R ¨∞i√m;]" Sy;d(/[Sv" Sy;dekm;i]k" prSprSy s'yog" Spx;Rn;' s'.ve¥id tyor;id ≈uitn;RiSt ivr;mVyÔnSy c anNTy' c .veTpUvRmNTy' c prto yid

195


196

tyomR?ye ymiStœ•;isk;Sq;nmuCyte n;isKyTvmurSyTv' pçmwhRSy yogt" aNtSq;i.®rSyTv' k<#‰Tv' kÉvlSy tu pd;d* pdm?ye v; iSqtSyo„m prSy vw p[qmSy i√tIyTv' pUv| k⁄vIRt pi<@t" /UÕ(,; dÕ(,v îTy];PynuSv;ro iv/mRt" xM.uix=;sm;¢; 277

This concludes the discussion of five K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå, comprising the three Upa-Íhik∑hå, Siddhånta, Sarvasaµmata, and Ãraˆya Íhik∑hå, together with Ãpißhali and Íhambhu Íhik∑hå, correlated with the five autonomic ganglia (L1 through L5) of the lumbar portion of the sympathetic trunk. E: Fifth group of Yajur Veda Íhik∑hå: Five Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda correlated with the five sacral ganglia of the sympathetic trunk. There are five Íhik∑hå among the Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda, the Kåla-Nirâya, Bhåradvåja, Kauhal¥ya, Påri˙, and Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå, which H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the five sacral ganglia on the sympathetic trunk, S1 through S5, running along both sides of the sacrum. [Please refer to Figures 17, (p. 117) and 22]. Gray describes the sacral autonomic ganglia of the sympathetic chain: The pelvic portion of the sympathetic trunk lies against the ventral surface of the sacrum, medial to the sacral foramina. It is the direct continuation of the lumbar trunk and contains four or five ganglia, smaller than those in other parts of the chain. Fusion of adjacent ganglia is quite common and cords connecting the trunks of the two sides across the midline are of regular occurrence. There are no white rami communicantes in the sacral region. . . . The branches of the sacral and coccygeal ganglia which are the gray rami communicantes of the sacral spinal nerves are supplied to each of the sacral and


197


198

the coccygeal nerves. In the majority of instances, each ganglion, or its representative in a fused ganglion, supplies rami to two adjacent spinal nerves.278 Brodal explains, “The sacral vertebral ganglia receive their preganglionic fibers from the lower thoracic and upper two lumbar segments of the cord.”279 According to Robinson’s description, “The interganglionic portions of the trunk consist of primarily descending fibers that are mostly preganglionic. These fibers have entered the lumbar portion of the trunks through white rami communicantes. Most synapse in the sacral sympathetic ganglia and run through gray rami communicantes to the sacral nerves.”280 Gray observes, “Visceral branches in variable numbers join the hypogastric and pelvic plexuses, and are supplied through them to the pelvic viscera and blood vessels.”281 The sacral sympathetic trunks send small branches to the median sacral artery and the inferior hypogastric plexus. Lindsay explains that outflow also “descends through these ganglia from lumbar levels to stimulate perspiration, contract arrector pili muscles of hair follicles, and dilate blood vessels of leg muscles and constrict those in the skin.”282 This is said to be the primary function of the sacral sympathetic trunks.283 1. Kåla-Nirâya Íhik∑hå. The twelfth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Kåla-Nirâya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Kåla-Nirâya Íhik∑hå to S1, the first sacral ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 22, pp. 117 and 197]: The sacral ganglia are described above. According to Gray, branches of distribution from the first sacral ganglia pass to join the pelvic plexus.284 The Kåla-Nirâya Íhik∑hå has 54 lines, or 27 verses. It is, according to Aithal, “A treatise . . . on the time measurement of letters, accents and stops.”285 Varma quotes the author of Kåla-Nirâya Íhik∑hå as saying, “After studying, according to my lights, the Íhåstras, like the Pråtißhåkhyas, etc., I proceed to describe quantity, for the comprehension of Vedic truth.”286 The Íhik∑hå explains that time is different in Vedic


199

recitation from what is used in business, and that is still different from the slow speech used in instruction. The Kåla-Nirâya Íhik∑hå deals with the intermediate speed of speech, saying, “We cannot speak of time as being uniform in the case of vowels, consonants, and the pause in all the various kinds of speech. This treatise on duration is based on intermediate speech, for other kinds of speeech have been prohibited by the Pråtißhåkhyas.” “It is evident,” Varma concludes, “that intermediate speech, which presumably represented ordinary conversation, was the only practical basis for the definite determination of quantity.”287 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

k;lin,Ryix=; p[;itx;:y;idx;S];i, my; vI+y yq;mit vedtÊv;vbo/;qRimh k;lo inÂPyte a%<@v,RivWyo v,;|xivWyoåip c ivr;mivWyíeit i]iv/" k;l ¨Cyte Svrv,Rivr;m;,;' i.•v;GvOiˇvitRn;m( EekÂPye, k;lSy kqn' nopp¥te m?ym;' vOiˇm;i≈Ty my; cey' ’it" ’t; p[;itx;:ye iniW?y;Nye ySm;Tswkìv bo?yte VyÔnSvr.ˇ_°n;' k;l" Sy;d/Rm;i]k" Ak;rLk;ryomR?ye tq; reflk;ryo" Ek;r*k;ryor;d;vk;roåPy/Rm;i]k" îv,oRv,RyoXxeW* Sy;t;m?y/Rm;i]k* Vyˇ_;vekpde v,;RvNtre iSqtsiN/t"


200

proåPyoœ‰Svr;Ntí s'yog;idyRidiSqt" anuSv;ro i√®ˇ_oåNTypçmí i√m;i]k" ÓSv;Tpr" Plut;∂I`;RTkÉvl;dekm;i]k" Vyiˇ_m?ySqn;isKy" sp;do m;i]k" SmOt" Vyiˇ_reW;idtTk;l; .veidit iviniítm( Ak;rpUvR" p[qmo hLprSTvekm;i]k" Ak;r;Tp[qmSy;ip i√Tv' n Sy;Tkd; cn avs;ne lk;rSy i]p;dTv' sd; .vet( ***concluding verses***

pçr©Plut; dI`;RíTv;rStwiˇrIyk;" Ë„mrefSvre>y" p[;gnuSv;roåiSt n;Nyq; k;<@p[Xn;nuv;k;n;' sm;¢* k;l î„yte dx;∑pçm;];" SyuStN];,;' tu }yh' .vet( iv≈mo n sm;sSy m?ye k;yR" pdSy v; inTy' p[;Kpds'bN/' c;id' p[;KpdmNtr; pre, inTys'bN/' p[;id' prpd' tq; EkSvr;,;' c;dIn;' p[;dIn;imit td(√ym( yo yo ivr;mk;l" p[;gOg;d* smudIirt" a©I’tSy;/Rm;]' tu n soåi/k î„yte îit k;lin,Ryix=; sMpU,;R

288

2. Bhåradvåja Íhik∑hå. The thirteenth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Bhåradvåja Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Bhåradvåja Íhik∑hå to S2, the


201

second sacral ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 22, pp. 117 and 197]. The sacral ganglia are described above. Gray observes that branches of the second sacral ganglia pass to join the pelvix plexus,289 also called the inferior hypogastric plexus. The inferior hypograstric plexus is made up of contributions from the hypogastric nerve, the sacral splanchnic nerves from the sacral sympathetic trunk (mostly the S2 ganglion), and the pelvic splanchnic nerves from the third and fourth sacral ventral rami.290 According to Baader, “These fibers converge to form a uniform nerve plate medial to the vascular layer and deep to the peritoneum.”291 The contribution of fibers from the sacral splanchnic nerve are predominantly postganglionic.292 The pair of S2 ganglia are often united by transverse or oblique interfunicular commissures.293 The Bhåradvåja Íhik∑hå has 133 verses. There are no chapters, but there are 71 headings explaining the topics of the upcoming verses. Kielhorn describes the Bhåradvåja Íhik∑hå as follows: The Bhåradvåja-Íhik∑hå, which belongs to the Taittir¥ya-veda, differs altogether from the Íhik∑hås described above (Amoghånandini, Ãpißhali, Ãraˆya, Keßhava, Chåråyaˆ¥ya, Nårada, and Påîni Íhik∑hås). It has nothing whatever to do with the classification and pronunciation of the letters, nor with the manner of reciting or accentuating the Vedic texts, but like the Siddhånta Íhik∑hå, it lays down empirical rules by which to distinguish, and to employ in their proper places, words of similar sound or form. It teaches, e.g., where to read v®ijana and where v®jita, where su∑hˇuta and where su∑hˇuti, åhuta and åhuti, paraßhu and parßhu, akår∑ham and akåri∑ham, dadhåti and dadhati, tri∑hˇuk and tri∑hˇup, dadåti and dadhåti, saumya and saurya, etc. The object of this, as well as of the Siddhåntaßhik∑hå, appears to be no other than to keep the text of the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå free from wrong readings. 294 The beginning and ending verses of the text are as follows:


.;r√;j ix=; g,ex' p[i,pTy;h' s'deh;n;' invOˇye xI=;mnup[v+y;im ved;n;' mUlk;r,m( 1 -avOjne j ¨d;ˇíedk;re, shoCyte Stut' pd' tu v;Ky;Nte p[cy' pirk«itRtm( 2 a; pçm;ıVypUvoR Òteno?vRí a;¸tm( v;Ky;Ntoåip tq; p[oˇ_o y"pUvRStu n iv¥te 3 -Svr.iˇ_"r;dt( prxurNto∞e iTv©‰" pxuRí .iˇ_t; pWR∞eh;itpW;Rip Svr.ˇ_ÉStu inTyt; 4 p;p' ivlompUveR c;k;W| k;WIRˇd;idWu Svr.iˇ_˘ ivj;nIy;•;Nyv,oRå] s'.vet( 5 -a;a¶e t;•pte ]I'í i]∑ë.; cwvm;d( .vet( -î-îyi=p[; .}yRiy}yr;}ymN}yip}y;ip k;#kÉ 6 sm;ne tu pde ÓSv;" shLr; ivr¬;í ye -îju∑o v;c" p[j;i¶'ic m;noim] ¨dSt c 7 ai¶v;Rv c dev;vw kÉxv;piv/;yk"

202


203

r=;'sITynuv;kÉWu ÁPyetIk;rv;n( .vet( 8 zNd; y; ten bihRí îı‰; a¶e bOhNpre yDSy pUvR î∑‰w c iTvk;r;id" p[k«itRt" 9 ak;irW' c ," pUvoR rIirWo rIirW•ip t;irW∞;irW' cet( Sy;t( Svr.iˇ_nR iv¥te 10 ***concluding verses***

-ivsgR"A?yte nIt a;¸yoR ivê tiı suvgR c 125 cwn;St;Svit zNd;'is Tvp;' n;NTy' pxu„vip 126 deivk; EtEveit s'pwvwn;Stu m;/[uv; a;TpUvR sim/" ≈o]' d;iv/Oit vRisœ tw" 127 Tv' soNte tv mYyeW; Tv' svR" c /[uvoåis ip[" yTSqle y;Îx" xBd" t;Îx" pirk«itRt" 128 iv.iˇ_il©Âpwí v,;R Dey; ivc=,w" £m î'Gy" c k<#oiˇ_ yjur;id pd√ym( 129 pds;':y' v,Rs;':ymv/;n;∑k˘ bu/w" yo j;n;it .r√;jix=;mqRsmiNvt;m( 130 s b[˜lokm;“oit gOhme/I gOh' yq; îit .;r√;jix=; sm;¢; 295

3. Kauhal¥ya Íhik∑hå. The fourteenth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Kauhal¥ya Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm, correlates the Kauhal¥ya Íhik∑hå to S3, the third sacral ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures


204

17 and 22, pp. 117 and 197.]: The sacral ganglia are described above. The second and or third ganglia of the sacral sympathetic trunk form the sacral splanchnic nerves, whose fibers are predominantly postganglionic.296 These are the secondary ways in which sympathetic neurons reach the hypogastric plexus, and therefore the pelvic viscera.297 The third sacral ganglia are often united by transverse interfunicular commissures.298 The Kauhal¥ya Íhik∑hå consists of 81 verses, with no subdivisions. Varma describes the text briefly as “a short manual of 79 verses, the first 41 of which are devoted to accent. The Íhik∑hå professes to follow the teaching of Kauhala.”299 With regard to Vedic Study, the Kauhal¥ya Íhik∑hå propounds, “only he can expound the Jaˇå Påˇha who knows the Íhåstras like the Pråtißhåkhyas and who is an expert in all the Íhik∑hås.”300 Varma states that it contains little that is not common to other Íhik∑hå.301 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

k*hlIyix=; aq ix=;' p[v+y;im k*hlIymt;nug;m( Svr;idin,RySt] i£yte ti•bo/t 1 ¨d;ˇí;nud;ˇí Svirt" p[cyStq; îit cTv;r.;ge ih Svr;" p[oˇ_; mnIiWi." 2 ¨∞w®∞;yRte yStu s ¨d;ˇ ¨d;˙t" a;y;mo Î!t; s*+My' g;]eå©πWu tq; gle ¨∞Tvk;rk;net;n;¸" p[;D; ivxeWt" 3 nIcw®∞;yRte yStu soånud;ˇoåi./Iyte p[ßt; mOdut; Sq*Ly' g;];de" k;rk˘ ivdu" 4 nIcTve Svirt" p[oˇ_StyoSs'/;n î„yte


tSy tu SvirtSy;¥m/Rmu∞wStr;' ivdu" xeWSy;/RSy nIcTv' ik˘icÊv;d( .Oxim„yte 5 kÉicdSy;idm' .;gmud;ˇsÎx' ivdu" anud;ˇsmXxeW Et;vNto i√/; SmOt;" 6 p[cy" kQyte si∫®d;ˇsÎx≈uit" 7 Sv;r;Ss¢iv/; Dey; v+yNte te ivxeWt" inTy" =wp[oåi.inht" p[iXl∑" p[;ithtStq; p;dvOˇStq; twroVyÔnSvirtoåip c 8 a,um;]k îTyekÉ SvrmNy' p[c=te ¨d;ˇ;duˇro nIcSs'/;ne SvirtSSmOt" 9 Sv;rod;ˇpríet( Sy;t( td; inht î„yte SvirtSy;Sy mNyNte p[D;n' p[;’tiSTvit 10 ***concluding verses***

refSy Ë„ms'yog EW y;it Svr;Tmt;m( sm;nkr,Âp.;k™ 77 Ak;r a;idr,um;]o m?ye refoå/Rm;i]k" a,um;]Stq;NTy;'xo m?ye .iˇ_ivR/Iyte 78 anuSv; s'yog;idyRid iSqt" ao∑‰Svr;Nte c;Pyev' inpu,' ti•bo/t 79 a yoRivR¥te yVy ti√y;' p[y x;S]metˇt" svRmOiWrSy p[sIdit 80 ix=;imm;' tu yoå/Ite vedtÊvp[k;ixk;m(

205


206

atul;mXnute k«iˇ| pre b[˜i, lIyte 81 k*hlIyix=; sm;¢; 302

4. Pår¥ Íhik∑hå. The fifteenth K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Pår¥ Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Pår¥ Íhik∑hå to S4, the fourth sacral ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 22, pp. 117 and 197.]: The sacral ganglia are described above. Rami originating from the fourth sacral ganglia join together with rami from the sacral roots to form the proximal pelvic nerve.303 Gray rami communicantes from the fourth sacral ganglia supply vasomotor, pilomotor and sudomotor enervation to the sacral plexus.304 The fourth sacral ganglia may be united by transverse interfunicular commissures.305 The Pår¥ Íhik∑hå consists of approximately 200 verses, with four chapters. It is a complete Íhik∑hå, according to Varma, with striking observations on doubling, quantity, and accent.306 Aithal lists 67 topics covered in the text, the list taken from the margins of one of the manuscripts of Pår¥ Íhik∑hå.307 The beginning and ending verses of Pår¥ Íhik∑hå are as follows:

p;irix=; p[i,pTy jg•;q' v;sudev' sn;tnm( g,;i/p' igr;' devI' ix=;' v+ye yq;mit aqv,Rsm;ª;y ¨Cyte y;juWoå] tu Svr;" Spx;RStq;NtSq;" Ë„m;,í;q dixRt;" ivsg;RnuSv;r¬;í;nun;isKy;" pçcoidt;" ÓSvdI`RPlut;v,eR v,oR v,;R A Å l» c Edwdod*iditDey;" Wo@xoh;idt"Svr;"


k%* g`* õ c z j Z ñ* $# @ !;,t* yd*d/* pfb.*mSpx;R" pçiv'xit" yr* lv* ctßoåNtSq;í "k"xWs"ph;" W@Ü„m;,o ivsgoRånuSv;ro lon;Sy pçkm( a;idto nvv,;R" Syu" sm;n;=rk; îh aNvqRTv' mh;s'D; VyÔNTyq;RNtr;i, c pUv;R c;ywRrtSt;' tu sU]k;re, c;i≈t;" ÓSvdIèR sv,eR Sto √π √π n PlutpUvRkm( Svr;"Wo@x tSy;d* xeWo VyÔns'Dk;" y"Svy' r;jte t' tu Svrm;hptÔil" ¨pirSq;iyn; kÉten Vy©‰' VyÔnmuCyte Spx;R" SyuVyRÔne„v;¥;" pçiv'xitrIirt;" pr;ítßSTv•Sq;" W@Ü„m;,St" pre ***concluding verses***

a;d* Svr;,;mCs'D; tˇNm;]; vdet( tt" aq Svr;nud;ˇ;dIn( t•;m c vdet( £m;t( VyÔn' y¥vist' tSy m;]; iv/Iyte y];nvist' tt( Sy;t( tNm;]; t] ne„yte anekv,Rs'yogo y]wkVyÔn;Tmk" Sy;TpUv;R©o .vet( t] pUv;R©;id s’d( vdet( EkVyÔns'yog ¨.y;©o .ve¥id pOqg©÷ p[yuÔIy;t( p*v;RpyR£m;t( td;

207


208

yduˇ_' kÉvle v,Re x;S];id i√Tv;gm;idkm( tt( svRm©v,oRˇ_* p[yuÔIy;¥q;ivi/ p;ir ix=; sm;¢; 308

5. Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå. The last Íhik∑hå in this last group Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå is the Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå. H.M. King Nader Råm correlates the Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå to S5, the fifth sacral ganglion of the Sympathetic Trunk in the physiology. [Please refer to Figures 17 and 22, pp. 117 and 197.]: The sacral ganglia are described above. Gray rami communicantes from the fifth sacral ganglia supply vasomotor, pilomotor and sudomotor enervation to the sacral plexus.309 The Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå of Råmak®i∑hâ, as its name suggests, consists of 16 verses. It is divided into four sections. Sarma summarizes the work: Here, some elementary principles, regarding the pronunciation of words, are laid down, in a clear manner. The contents fall under: 1) enumeration of letters. 2) each of the original three vowels, which are the earliest and most universal vowels of the Indo-European languages can occur in 18 forms in the following manner: (1) hrasva (2) d¥rgha (3) pluta X (1) udåtta (2) anudåtta (3) svarita X (1) sånunåsika (2) niranunåsika = 18. 3) description of consonants. 4) description of some contracted terms (pratyåhåra). 5) description of the term sparßha, ™∑hman, antastha, etc. 6) jihvåm™l¥ya and upadhmån¥ya are considered to be ‘ardhavisargas.’ 7) description of sthånas—kaˆˇha, tålu, etc. and 8) how a student becomes fit to make proper sounds. 310 According to Sarma, the Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå that is published in the Íhik∑håsaµgraha˙ belongs to Íhukla Yajur-Veda.311 It is surprising therefore that H.M. King Nader Råm has included it in the group of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå texts correlated with the sacral sympathetic ganglia.312 The beginning and ending verses of the Ûho∂aßhaßhlok¥ Íhik∑hå are as follows:


Wo@xXlok° ix=; aq ix=;\ p[v+y;im v;c ¨∞;r,e ivi/m( yq; s'Vyvh;reWu Svy' p[oˇ_; SvyM.uv; 1 ]yiS]'xıx; v,;‹" Svr; √;iv'xitYyRm;" cTv;rí ivsgoRånuSv;r" k" piS]Wi∑k;" 2 sm;Steåidduto Dey; A∞;dI`R lOpçm" Edwdod* tu cTv;roåÓSv;" sN?y=r;i, c 3 ÓSvdI`RPlut; .ed;Stdud;ˇoånud;ˇk;" Svirtí;ip te s;nun;isk;nnun;isk;" 4 îTy∑;dx/; .ed; Vyv,;‹ n;imn" Svr;" k⁄cu$ütupuvg;‹StduTpçv,Rs§h"îit Svr.ed;" 5 k⁄PvNTyCv;idvg;‹,;' VyuT£m;Tpçm;idt" %f;¥;Xz#q; Dey; rl;NTy; hyv;" SmOt;" 6 atíet" Svr;" pUVv;‹ hlo ñmo Zmo jb" %qíp" xsíwte p[Ty;h;r;STvsƒ‰k;" 7 k;dyo m;iNtk;" Spx;‹ ym; Zpñm;Ntre xWsh;" SyuÂ„m;,oåNtSq; yrlv;" SmOt;" 8 k%t" pft" pUvR" £m;dıRivsgRk" ij◊;mUlIyko Dey ¨p?ym;nIysHDk" 9 ivsg;‹ıRivsg;‹nuSv;rVy©÷ pr;≈ym( EtTpr;pr* ÓSv* Gl* dI`Rí gu®Stq; 10

209


210

***concluding verses***

vo dNtoœ' ñmSy;ip n;isk;ymyuGùr" aod*torip k<#oœ' Tvedwto" k<#t;lukm( 12 ij◊;mUlIym;]Sy ij◊;mUl' ih c;∑mm( s¥o bo/kr; ix=; mi,.Ut; p[k;ixt; 13 kr;lo n c lMboœo n;Vyˇ_o n;nun;isk" gÌdo bıij◊í p[yog;Nvˇ_umhRit 14 Vy;`[I di∫hRreTpu];N.It; p;t;∞ pI@n;t( t√Tp[yojye√,;|Sten lokÉ mhIyte 15 îit v,oR∞;r" ixv; y;i•"sOt;' ix=;' p[yto y" p#πidh pu]k°itR/n;yu„m;NTSvgeRåitsu%mXnute 16 îit r;m’„,ivrict; Wo@xXlok° ix=; sm;¢;

313

This completes the consideration of the 16 sixteen K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå, correlated with the three ganglia of the visceral plexuses, and the cervical (3), lumbar (5), and sacral (5) portions of the autonomic trunk. These sixteen texts constitute the reading program in the K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda Íhik∑hå. The reading program thus includes Íhik∑hå texts from both the Chåråyaˆ¥ya and Taittir¥ya schools: The Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå belonging to the Chåråyaˆ¥ya school, and the remaining 14 belonging to the Taittir¥ya recension.314 There is however, for each of these two schools, one important Íhik∑hå text that has been left out. For the Chåråyaˆ¥ya school, the Laugåk∑hi Íhik∑hå is a work that has often caught the attention of scholars. It is unpublished, but is found bundled with the manuscripts of the Chåråyaˆ¥ya Íhik∑hå.


211

Laugåk∑hi Íhik∑hå. Laugåk∑hi Íhik∑hå has approximately 160 verses, followed by a long prose section consisting of about 25 paragraphs. Varma quotes verse 32 of the text in a discussion about Raãga and Anusvåra. “Just as a pearl, overpowered with the light of sapphire, becomes blue, so the entire vowel, when nasalized, becomes a Raãga.”315

yqeN{nIlp[.y;…..Ut" muˇ_;m…,y;Rit ih nIl.;vm( tqwv n;…sKygu,en yuˇ_" Svroåip r'gTvmupwit’Tò" 32 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

l*g;i= ix=; mheN{o mly sÁ" xu·ˇ_m;NvO=pvRt" …v'¥í p;·ry;]í s¢wte k⁄lpvRt;" vedvw„,vv*{;hRCz¯vs*r" iv.edt" W$(x'n…mit :y;t' muin….D;Rnkoivdw" ao' SvyM.uve nmS’Ty b[˜,e vedmUtRye vede>yo devt;>yí m']’>yStqwv c a;W| zNdodwvt' c ivinyog' tqwv c p[v+y;MynupvU eR, ’Tò' c;r;y,IykÉ a;yuyRxo/n' pu];" pU,RSvgRStqwv c p[;Ppte svRmeten yq;vi√idten tu aivh;Nb[;˜,íwv AiTvG>yo y;Jy Ev c k⁄y;RTk;ryte yD' kmR m;]e, kÉvlm(


212

zNds;' y;ty;mTv;t( p;pIy;n( j;yte tu s" svRJy;it' p[mItí g.RSy;nop[p¥te mN]e mN]e tu yo ved AWI' zNd;'…s tSy tu idVymnushß;,;mekìkSy;…/in≤Ndt" p[itt≤Nd'it sveR t' pU…jtoqnv;'Stq; inr;t'ko devt;y;StSv∫ym;“uy;t( yo m']o yen vw Î∑tps; .;ivt;Tmn; stSywv AiW" p[oˇ_o b[˜;svRSy cwv ih ***concluding S™tra***

¨p/;…/k;·rr;jeit y;…m lu¢e=rTycoi√v,Rlope Jyoitr;idivpyRye c Stok;µNt ivpyRye guVy;RmNy*c" pu®W;ndn;yeTyekSm;√πck; n g.;R…mit√yorekm( n;mvd;:y;n' iv.+ymr,;iv.·ˇ_ivpyRyo hT%Xlokì" ¨d;hr,m( p'cmI – Xlo 21 sm;¢…mit 316

Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå. In the Taittir¥ya school, one additional Íhik∑hå has already been mentioned, occurring in the list of Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda, namely the Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå. It is not clear why among all the texts listed in the traditional list of Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda, this one alone would not find its correlate in the human physiology. Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå has 100 verses. Devasthali says: The contents of the work may be described as follows: After the benedictory verse (1) and a general direction for the study of Íhik∑hå and other Íhåstras (2), Kauˆ∂inya deals with the following topics: Sapta Saµhitå˙ (3–5), A∑hˇalak∑haâm Padam (6–7), a defence of Krama (8–9), formation of krama (10), trikrama (11), utility of krama (12), jaˇå (13), ghana, its four kinds (16–19), vik®tipaˇhanaphata (21–26), guâ saµdhi (45 f), saµdhi of ai, au, ® (46),


213

svårasaµdhi (48), kinds of svarita (50–56), kampa (58 f.), varˆånåµ ∑ha∑hˇisaµkhyå (60 f.), dvitva (61 f.), svarabhakti (72 f.), dvitva of ã (78–80), a∑hˇa viv®ttaya˙ (81–90), ekamåtrika and dvimåtrika anusvåra (91), prohibition of saµdhi in hari˙ om (92), and pañca varâkaramå˙ (93). The author concludes the work by lak∑haâjñapraßhaµså (94–99) and vidyåpråptisådhanåni (100).317 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

≈Ik*i<@Nyix=; v;gIx;idsur;n( sv;Rn( ’t;q;Rn( ktuRm;idxt( v$mUle yd;.;it tSmw …cNmhse nm" 1 a/ITy' s'iht;' pUv| pd£mj$;`n;n( ix=;idx;S];?yyn' k⁄y;Rt( k*m;rs'yutm( 2 pd;n;' s'…/®Cz™v;se s'iht;nvs;ng; anulomivlom;>y;' s; i√/; pdmNtgm( 3 v,;R=rSvr;©;,;' s'/yStu yq;£m;t( pOqKpOqgnup[oˇ_;ítß" s'iht;" SmOt;" 4 pdvt( s'iht; y] n k;y| s;'iht' yid s'iht; p[’itDeRy; s¢ t;" s'iht;" SmOt;" 5 pdSy;vg[hSy;ip s'd?y;duˇre, c £me, p[oCyte yˇu l=,en smiNvtm( 6 sui¢õNt;id.eden bu/wStt( pdmuCyte xm;n' c ivlÏ‰' c npr' tpr' Svrm( av

214

pur;p[…sı;≈ypUvR…s≤ı…." n cody;p;ykro n c ≈ut" 8 …cpyRy;Cz;S]sm;…/d≤xRt;n( pur;p[…sıe®.yorn;≈y;t( sm>yupey;ä¸….í s;/u…." ≈uteí sNm;nkr" £mo .vet( 9 ¨∞;yR s'iht;bıe pde p[oCyoˇr' pun" s'd?y;duˇre,wv £moå/Rc;RNtm;pyet( 10 ***concluding verses***

n;s* tTflm;“oit sMyKp;#mj;nt" l=,en ivn; v,;R inmRl;in n xu?yit 96 p[md; Âps'p•; d·r{Syev yoiWt; SvrhIn; yq; v;,I vS]hIn;Stu yoiWt" 97 Ev' v,;R n xo.Nte p[;,hIn;" xrI·r," l=,' yo n n; veiˇ n tSy fl.;G.vet( 98 l=,Do ih ivp[;,;' skl' .{mXnute a;c;yoRp;sn;¥og;ˇps" p[;Dsevn;t( 99 ivivCy kqn;Tk;l;t( W≤@±.ivR¥; p[p¥te 100 îit ≈Ik*i<@Nyix=; sm;¢; 318

This concludes the review of the reading program for the Íhik∑hå of Yajur-Veda, comprising all the texts correlated with the sympathetic ganglia of the autonomic nervous system: The three pairs of sympathetic ganglia nestled in the plexuses of the internal organs, correlated with the first group of three texts from K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda; the three cervical ganglia of the sympathetic trunk correlated with the second group of three Íhik∑hå texts from K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda; the twelve thoracic ganglia correlated with


215

twelve Íhik∑hå texts of Íhukla Yajur-Veda; and the five lumbar ganglia and five ganglia lying on the sacral portion of the sympathetic trunk correlated with the remaining ten Íhik∑hå of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. These 28 Íhik∑hå of Yajur-Veda are correlated with all but one of the sympathetic ganglia of the autonomic nervous system: That one remaining ganglion is the terminal ganglion of the sympathetic trunk, which is correlated with the one Íhik∑hå of Atharva Veda. IV. ATHARVA VEDA ÍHIKÛHÃ. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the one Íhik∑hå of Atharva Veda, Måˆ∂™k¥ Íhik∑hå, with the single un-paired ganglion at the bottom termination of the left and right sympathetic trunks. Gray describes the terminating ganglion as follows (see also Figure 22, p.197): The coccygeal ganglion is the most caudal ganglion of the sympathetic trunk; it is commonly a single ganglion, the ganglion impar, representing a fusion of the ganglia of the two sides, and usually lies in the midline but may be at one side.319 A. The Måˆ∂™k¥ Íhik∑hå. The Måˆ∂™k¥ Íhik∑hå has 181 verses with no subdivisions. It is primarily concerned with Vedic accents. Varma describes the text as follows: The Íhik∑hå belonging to the Atharva Veda is the Måˆ∂™k¥, but although connected with the Atharva Veda, owing to the copious number of quotations from that Veda occurring therein, it is particularly interested in accent common to all the Vedas, especially the Såma Veda, and seems to have further developed the teachings of the Nårada Íhik∑hå on accent. Thus it speaks of the seven musical notes of the Såma chants, of the necessity of moving the hand in the Âig, the Yajus and the Såma recitations, and of the opinion, attributed to Maˆ∂™ka, that the first two and the last two notes of the musical scale are sung in the Vedas. . . . Verses 8–12, describing the nature of notes in the musical scale, seem to be the same as those given in the Nårada Íhik∑hå, slightly modified. . . . It contains a good deal of material common to some of the Íhik∑hås of the White YajurVeda—e.g., pronunciation of “Ya” and “Va” in different positions (v. 87), [and] the reference to the woman of Surå∑hˇra pronouncing the nasal sound raãga (verse 112), etc.320


The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

aqvRvedIy; m;<@Ük° ix=; itßo vOˇyoånu£;Nt; &tm?ymivliMbt;" yq;nupvU | p[qm; &t; vOiˇ" p[xSyte 1 m?ymwk;Ntr;vOiˇ√‰RNtr; ih ivliMbt; nwn;' bu/" p[yuÔIt ydICzπd(v,RsMpd;m( 2 a>y;s;qeR &t; vOiˇ®plB/* ivliMbt; m?ym; tu p[yog;qeR n t√cnmNyq; 3 EeN{I tu m?ym; vOiˇ" p[;j;pTy; ivliMbt; ai¶m;®tyovORiˇ" svRx;S]eWu iniNdt; 4 doW;p[k;xStu ivliMbt;y;' v,;‹ &t;y;' n tu sUpl=;" tSm;d(&t;' cwv ivliMbt;' c ÊyKTv; nro m?ymy; p[yuÔ‰;t( 5 sv;‹ Ev tu indoRW; vOˇy" smud;˙t;" %¥otSy suvK]Sy ix=kSy ivxeWt" 6 s¢Svr;Stu gIyNte s;mi." s;mgwbuR/w" cTv;r Ev zNdo>yS]ySt] ivvijRt;" 7 [email protected];N/;ro m?ym" pçmStq; /wvtí inW;dí Svr;" s¢eh s;msu 8 W@je vdit myUro g;vo rM.iNt cWR.e aj; vdit g;N/;re £*çn;dStu m?yme 9

216


217

pu„ps;/;r,e k;le koikl" pçme Svre aêStu /wvte p[;h k⁄ÔrStu inW;dv;n( 10 ***concluding verses***

jlm>y;syogen xwl;n;' k⁄®te =ym( kkúx;n;' muduSpx| ikm>y;so n s;/yet( 177 a;c;y;‹" smimCziNt pdCzπdNtu pi<@t;" iS]yo m/urimCziNt iv£⁄∑imtre jn;" 178 a;c;yoRp;sn;¥og;t( tps; p[;Dsevn;t( ivgOÁ kqn;Tk;m;d( Wi@±.ivR¥; p[p¥te 179 a;lSy;NmU%Rs'yog;d( .y;{oginpI@n;t( aTy;xKTy; c m;n;∞ Wi@±.ivR¥; ivnXyit 180 m<@ÜkÉn ’t;' ix=;' ivduW;' buiıdIipnIm( yo ih tÊven j;n;it b[˜lok˘ s gCzit 181 îTyqvR,vedIy; m;<@Ük°ix=; sm;¢;

321

Måˆ∂™k¥ Íhik∑hå, correlated with the coccygeal segment of the sympathetic trunk, constitutes the reading curriculum for the Íhik∑hå of Atharva Veda. B. The Dantyo∑hˇhya-Vidhi. There is another important Lak∑haâ text belonging to Atharva Veda, called the Dantyo∑hˇhya-Vidhi. It is said to be the fourth of the five Lak∑haâ texts of Atharva Veda. The five Lak∑haâ texts are described by the Charaâvy™ha (4:8)322

l=,g[Nq; .v≤Nt ) ctur?y;yI p[itx;:ym( pçp$≤lk; dNTyoœiv…/" bOhTsv;Rnu£m,I ceit

The Lak∑haâ texts of Atharva Veda are the Chaturadhyåy¥, the Atharva Veda Pråtißhåkhya, Pañchapaˇalikå, Dantyo∑hˇha-Vidhi, and


218

B®ihatsarvånukramaˆ¥. The Pañchapaˇalikå is a work that describes how to fill in the abbreviations and ellipses in the written text of the Saµhitå. The B®ihatsarvånukramaˆ¥ gives the names of the Âi∑hi, Devatå and Chhandas for Atharva Veda. The Chaturadhyåy¥ and the Atharva Veda Pråtißhåkhya are two of the six Pråtißhåkhya texts that make up the last six of the 40 branches of Veda and Vedic Literature. The Dantyo∑hˇha-Vidhi is a short text of two chapters, with a total of 23 verses. Like the Maˆ∂avya Íhik∑hå, the Dantyo∑hˇha-Vidhi is devoted to clarifying the correct pronunciation of “Ba” and “Va.” The complete text is as follows:

aq dNTyoœiv…/" p[qmoå?y;y" aqv;R,mOiW' dev' devhyixro/rm( p[,My sMp[v+y;…m dNTyoœiv…/ivStrm( 1 zNdSy?yyne p[;¢e ivduW;mq /Imt;m( bk;re s'xyo inTym*œ‰' dNTy…mit Sm h 2 tSm;ˇi√…/ in,Rye s'xyzπdn;y c muˇ_; dNTy; p[yoJy;m a*œ‰;n( v+ye £m;iht" 3 .pr' y] ÎXyet;in'Gye SpxRn' Kv…ct( a*œ‰' t] pde /Iro …b.Ito …b.[tIyRq; 4 a;¥ud;ˇe ble b;,e …bl xBde tqwv c smSteåip y] Sy;t;mNtod;ˇo ivix„yte 5 bld;bl;nug[;bl/Nv; tqwv c bl;s' b;Ù a;c;y;‹" sv;RSvev iv.·ˇ_Wu 6


blI blen bihRí;blen blIyse b[Vn" ikæLbW' v"kÉtu" k⁄Mb' b;…/œ b;≤lit 7 b;¸÷ bo…/ tq; b'/ubR¸b;/e bOh∞ yt( ipbit b[uvte cwv yq;q;R" sMp[k°iˇRt;" 8 bStv;…sno b;◊÷kìb;R¸vIyeR tqwv c bhv" k;bv' b;◊oboR/ b◊º tqwv c 9 tq; bfiy' t;buv' b◊InRvm" s'p[k°iˇRt;" Ete sveRWu xBdeWu p[qmSpXy;‹ ih mt;" 10 vwb;/ devbN/u' c ivbıStu ivbN/uWu i√tIy SpxoR ivDeyo ivbb;/e tqwv c 11 b;h* b;hvo b¸l' bufiy; bıkmev c Ete sveR .vNTyoœ‰; ye noˇ_;Ste tu dNtj;" 12 îit p[qmoå?y;y" i√tIyoå?y;y" a/r;duˇre .;ge .;g;Tp[itiv.;gx" dxn;g[e, s'SpO∑‰o n tu pI@;su yojyet( 1 kMbl' bLbj' bIj' ≤lbuj; b
219


220

k⁄ber" StMbj' b.[*pBdw" p·rbe…/re 4 as'b;/e nwb;R?yen bıe bı;in kÀLbj' bto bt;…s b'/u' c …bs' KlIb' buje buj" 5 b/;n p[;b'/;y;íoLb' k;berkStq; a;be/urwlbíwv;be/e b‚Lhk;in c 6 abo…/ b;hRTs;me òWbuı; tqwv c b'/n' y] xeW' Sy;d;b/e me indxRnm( 7 al;bu bj" b;,' Sy;d;¥ud;ˇo yd; .vet( b[˜ xBd' tu sv;qRm*œ‰mev ivdubuR/;" 8 z⁄buk;Bd„kye b;le kÉxb;le tqwv c a…/b;le vy" p[ok˘ xeWeWu p·rm;,t" 9 …b.ed;idWu .ed;í p·r pUv| ble tq; b'/u v; …s'/urpr EteW;' tu bl" Kv…ct( 10 tuz⁄Bdíubukíwv b.Uvuí b.UvuWI Ete sveR p·rTyJy bk;roNyoNy .=n 11 îit i√tIyoå?y;y" dNTyoœiv…/" sm;¢" 323

V. SÃMA VEDA ÍHIKÛHÃ H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the three Íhik∑hås of Såma Veda, Nårad¥ya, Gautami and Lomaßhi Íhik∑hås, with the three sacral parasympathetic ganglia. The sacral parasympathetic ganglia associated with the S2, S3, and S4 Sacral nerves, constitute the


221

sacral portion of the parasympathetic system: These are separate from the sympathetic trunk.324 Gray describes the parasympathetic system as follows (see Figure 23): The parasympathetic system is the craniosacral portion of the autonomic nervous system and contains visceral efferent fibers which originate in certain cranial nerves and in the sacral portion of the spinal cord. The cells which give rise to the sacral outflow are in the second, third, and fourth sacral segments of the spinal cord, and pass out with the corresponding sacral nerves. They leave the sacral nerves in the visceral branches and join the pelvic plexus in the deeper portions of the pelvic subserous fascia. Branches from this plexus contain preganglionic fibers for the scattered ganglia in or near the walls of the various pelvic viscera.325 A. Nårad¥ya Íhik∑hå. The first of the three Såma Veda Íhik∑hå, which H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the S2 or second sacral segment of the parasympathetic nervous system, is the Nårad¥ya Íhik∑hå. The Nårad¥ya Íhik∑hå has 241 verses in two main divisions, called Prapåˇhaka. Each Prapåˇhaka has eight divisions, called Kaˆ∂ikå. There is an English translation by Bhishe.326 Varma describes the text as follows: The Nårada Íhik∑hå is one of the oldest and the most profound Íhik∑hås. It states its object to be “the treatment of accents in the Såma Veda.”327 This is corroborated by the nature of the text, which [for 34 pages] describes accent and its relation to musical notes; then there occurs a break of three pages in which other subjects of phonetics, as doubling, syllabication, etc., are dealth with; accent is resumed [in the following two pages]. Again there is a break of nine pages on extraneous subjects; and accent is again resumed [after these 9 pages]. These two breaks in the treatise seem to be interpolations which were inserted later in order to make it a complete Íhik∑hå.328 The beginning and ending verses of the Nårada Íhik∑hå are as follows:

n;rdIy;ix=; p[qm" p[p;#k" ki<@k; 1 aq;t" Svrx;S];,;' sveRW;' vediníym(


222


223

¨∞nIcivxeW;iı Svr;NyTv' p[vˇ‹te 1 a;icRk˘ g;iqk˘ cwv s;imk˘ c Svr;Ntrm( ’t;Nte Svrx;S];,;' p[yoˇ_Vy' ivxeWt" 2 Ek;NtrSvro ÁO=u g;q;su √‰Ntr"Svr" s;msu }yNtr' iv¥;det;vTSvrtoåNtrm( 3 AKs;myjur©;in ye yDeWu p[yuÔte aivD;n;iı x;S];,;' teW;' .vit ivSvr" 4 mN]o hIn" Svrto v,Rto v; imQy;p[yuˇ_o n tmqRm;h s v;Gvj[o yjm;n' ihniSt yqeN{x]u" Svrtoåpr;/;t( 5 p[hI," Svrv,;‹>y;' yo vw mN]" p[yuJyte yDeWu yjm;nSy ®WTy;yu" p[j;' pxUn( 6 ¨r" k<#" ixríwv Sq;n;in ]Ii, v;Ñye svn;Ny;¸ret;in s;m v;PyqRtoNtrm( 7 ¨r" s¢ivc;r' Sy;ˇq; k<#Stq; ixr" n c s¢oris Vyˇ_;Stq; p[;vcno ivi/" 8 k#k;l;pp[vOˇeWu twiˇrIy;◊rkÉWu c AGvede s;mvede c vˇ_Vy" p[qm" Svr" 9 AGvedStu i√tIyen tOtIyen c vtRte ¨∞m?yms'`;t" Svro .vit p;iqRv" 10 ***concluding verses***

yq; %nn( %in]e, .Utle v;ir ivNdit Ev' gu®gt;' iv¥;' xu≈WU uri/gCzit 28


224

xu≈WU ;riht; iv¥; y¥ip me/;gu,w" smupy;it bN?yev y*vnvtI n tSy iv¥; flvtI .vit 29 ¥Ut' puStkv;¥' c n;$kÉWu c siˇ_k; iS]yStN{; c in{; c iv¥;ivflkr;i, W$( 30 yq; Vy;`[I hreTpu];n( d'∑^;i.nR c pI@yet( .It; ptn.ed;>y;' t√√,;‹Np[yojyet( 31 Ev' v,;‹" p[yoˇ_Vy; n;Vyˇ_; n c pIi@t;" sMyg( v,Rp[yoge, b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 32 îit i√tIySy;∑mI ki<@k; îit i√tIy" p[p;#k" îit n;rdIy; ix=; sm;¢; 329

B. Gautam¥ya Íhik∑hå. The second of the three Såma Veda Íhik∑hå, which H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the S3 or third sacral segment of the parasympathetic nervous system, is the Gautam¥ya Íhik∑hå. The Gautam¥ya Íhik∑hå, also called Saµyoga Í®ãkhalå,330 is a prose work. Like the Nårada Íhik∑hå it also has two main divisions, called Prapåˇhaka. The first Prapåˇhaka has nine paragraphs or Kaˆ∂ikå, while the second Prapåˇhaka has seven, for a total of 16 prose paragraphs. Gautama, according to the Ãr∑heya Bråhmaâ, was the seer of the first Såman.331 Gautama enumerates the different consonants of the alphabet, and clearly explains the Yama. He describes doubling of consonants, and the different consonant groupings of two, three, four, five, six and seven consonants together. After this close study of doubling and consonant-groups, the text says, “Gautama has declared that there exists no consonantgroup with more than seven consonants.”332


225

The beginning and ending paragraphs of the text are as follows:

s;mvedIy; g*tmI ix=; aq ]yiS]'x√‰Ôn;in .viNt Spx;RNtSqo„m;,íeit t] kk;r;dyo mk;r;Nt;" Spx;R" pçiv'xitíTv;roåNtSq;Ste yrlv;íTv;río„m;,Ste hxWs;íeTynek˘ VyÔn' y]opyuRpir s'yuˇ_' tTs'yogs'D' .vit ) îTySvr' c pUvRm=rm( aq i]iv/" s'yogip<@o .vTyyiSp<@o d;®ip<@Stqo,;R ip<@íeit ymsihtmyiSp<@m( d;®ip<@mNtSqwyuRˇ_m( ym;NtSqvjRNtU,;Rip<@imTyNtSqyms'yoge ivxeWo nopl>yt îTyxrIr' ym' iv¥;dNtSq" ip<@n;yk" 1 aq;nNTy; iv'xit.RviNt te kc$tp;" %z#qf; gj@db; `Z!/.;íeTyq;NTy;" pç te õñ,nm;íeit aq;nNTy;íTv;rSte sym;Ste k⁄˘ %u' gu' ù' îTynNTy;NTys'yogeånNTypUveRånNTyoˇre Vyv/;nvijRte t] ym; vˇRNte n s'xy îit 2 ***concluding S™tra***

aq W@=r;,;mud;hr,m©π cKKMVy;d;ivit √* kk;r* ymmk;rvk;ryk;r; îit s]k;TSNy;R îit rttsny;" aPs;?yGG?mRv;himit rgg/ymmk;r;" 6


226

aq s¢;=rmekmud;˙t' m˚π p[;itx;:ye ih n ih n /uñuùñ(=uõ±Õ±+v;ivit õõkWkWv;" g*tmenoˇ_˘ n s¢;=r;Tpr" s'yogo .vTyeW; shßvTm;RTm; n;n;vitRiv.UiWt; s'yogÍƒl; n;m s;mvedinbN/n;t( 7 îit i√tIyp[p;#k" îit s;mvedIyg*tmIix=; sm;¢; 333

C. Lomaßhi Íhik∑hå. The third of the three Såma Veda Íhik∑hå, which H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the S4 or fourth sacral segment of the parasympathetic nervous system, is the Lomaßhi Íhik∑hå. The Lomaßhi Íhik∑hå, attributed to Garga, has 75 verses, divided among eight Khaˆ∂a. According to Kielhorn the text treats in the usual fashion of “the Måtrås, the doubling of consonants, Kampa, Raãga, Svarabhakti, etc. It refers distinctly to the Såmåni, Såmagås, and Ãrchika.” 334 Varma points out that the text refers also to “Tumburu, quoting his opinion on the regulation of exhalation and inhalation during Såma chants.”335 The beginning and ending paragraphs of the text are as follows:

s;mvedIy; lomxI ix=; lomxix=;p[;r'." xu.mStu s;mg;nip[y' r;mm;r;/…ytu…mCzt; my; lomxix=ey' y;juWe,;ip ≤l:yte lomxIy;' p[v+y;im gg;‹c;yeR, iciNtt;m( s;i./;n;' yqoˇ_' tu Sv;c;yRvcn' tq; 1 ÓSv' dI`| tq; vOımi.gIt' tu s;mg;"


muÛmORd©vTk⁄yuR" sMp;toTq;nsHDvt( 2 kÉn kMp;itt" kMp" s'yogo yen kMpte ik˘ v; kMp îit p[oˇ_o yen;s* kMp ¨Cyte 3 pUv;‹©π, ht' pUv| pr;©π, tu /;irtm( VyÔnen i√/; i.•" Svro .ItStu kMpte 4 dI`RkMpeå?y/Rm;]; tOtIye pirk°itRt; i√tIye aıRm;]; tu p[yogo `<$t;lvt( 5 r©Stu i√iv/o Dey" Svrpro VyÔn" pr" p;r;vt" sv,;‹.o ivihtoå=ricNtkì" 6 tSy m;]; tu ˙dye a,um;]; tu mUıRin n;s;g[e Tv,Un;' m;]; r©Sy pirk°itRt; 7 r©π cwv smuTp•e n g[set( pUvRm=rm( Svre dI`| p[yuÔIt tSy n;isKymu∞ret( 8 i√m;]o m;i]ko v;ip nismUl' sm;i≈t" aNte p[yuJyte r©" pçmw" svRn;isk" 9 îit p[qm%<@" ***concluding verses***

˙dySqm,u iv¥;Tk<#π iv¥;i√r;,uvt( i]r;,vNtu ij◊;g[e insOt' m;i]k .vet( 8 c;WStu vdte m;];' i√m;];' v;ysoåb[vIt( ix%I i]m;]o ivDey" EW m;];pirg[h" 9 Ekm;]o .ved(/[êo i√m;]o dI`R ¨Cyte

227


228

PlutiS]m;]o ivDey" VyÔn' c;/Rm;i]km( 10 svRm]ctuqR• vıRNt Et;in vıRNte yq; dírit r;N{iSvN{sCzÀ atps;Tv;sUgol;r;TptNtI c rhSye vihR„y;‹dIn;mpirSv;ro VyÔnlopo VyÔnlop" 1 îit lomxI ix=; sm;¢; 336

This concludes the review of the reading program for the Íhik∑hå of Såma Veda, comprising three texts correlated with the parasympathetic outflow from the three sacral parasympathetic spinal nerves, S2, S3, and S4.

VI. SUMMARY In reviewing the entire field of Íhik∑hå, it may be seen that the cranial parasympathetic autonomic ganglia are correlated with the Íhik∑hå of Rik Veda while at the other extreme end of the physiology, the sacral parasympathetic autonomic ganglia are correlated with the Íhik∑hå of Såma Veda. The parasympathetic system is the part of the autonomic nervous system responsible for relaxation, conserving energy, lowering the metabolic rate, food processing and energy absorption, and, in general, restoring the body to normalcy after an intense or stressful experience.337 In between these two extreme ends of the physiology governed by the parasympathetic autonomic nervous system is the sympathetic autonomic system, responsible for stimulating metabolism, increasing alertness, and activation to mobilize the physiology to deal with crises and sudden requirements, such as the “fight or flight” response.338 The sympathetic autonomic system is characterized by two groups of ganglia: 1) the ganglia associated with the three visceral plexuses, celiac, superior mesenteric and inferior mesenteric, and 2) the sympathetic trunk running on either side of the spine, and joined together by the


229

terminating coccygeal ganglion. The three visceral ganglia, and all 28 pairs of ganglia of the sympathetic system are correlated with the different Íhik∑hå of Yajur Veda, with the one unpaired ganglion, the terminating coccygeal ganglion that bridges and joins together the left and right trunks of the sympathetic system, being correlated with the one Íhik∑hå of Atharva Veda. This is the broad outline of the map of the underlying intelligence of the quality of “expression” structured in the human physiology as the 36 autonomic ganglia of the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems, and in the Vedic Literature, as the 36 Íhik∑hå texts belonging to the different Saµhitå of the four Veda. The effect of reading the different Íhik∑hå texts in the original Sanskrit, in sequence, with correct pronunciation, should be to systematically enliven the quality of expression in the whole physiology, and in every channel of individual endeavor.


230

Notes: 1

The reading curriculum in Vedic Literature at Maharishi University of Management consists of reading in sequence the 40 branches of Veda Vedic Literature. The Vedåãga are read first, starting with Íhik∑hå; then the Upåãga, the Upaveda, the Ãyurvedic treatises, the Bråhmaâ including Itihåsa, Puråâ and Sm®iti, and finally the Pråtißhåkhya. The Saµhitå are not read. Please refer to Kleinschnitz, C., ìReading the Vedic Literature: The Approach in Maharishi’s Vedic Science for Accelerating the Development of Consciousness,î (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, July, 1996), pp. 96–97. The Saµhitå of the four Veda are not read, that being the province of the pandits raised in the Vedic tradition. Please refer to Oates, P., ìThe Program of Reading Vedic Literature in Maharishi Vedic Science: Fundamental Principles and Application,î (dissertation, Maharishi University of Management, June, 2004), p.130. 2

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Vedic Knowledge for Everyone: Maharishi Vedic University—an Introduction, (Holland: Maharishi Vedic University Press, 1994), pp. 86– 87. 3

A broad discussion of the full range of Vedic ancillary texts, and their connection with the tradition of Vedic recitation is presented by Aithal in his introduction: K.P. Aithal, ed., Veda Lak∑haâ: Vedic Ancillary Literature: A Descriptive Bibliography, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991) pp. 1–20. 4

The category of ìVeda Lak∑haâî Aithal identifies as originating in South India in library registers. It is more descriptive than ìMiscellaneous.î Please refer to Aithal, p. 1, footnote 2. However many texts call themselves ìLak∑haâî texts, indicating that this designation has a content which is directly relevant to Vedic phonetics. 5

Aithal, Veda Lak∑haâ, pp. 3–4.

6

All the texts of Veda Lak∑haâ are associated with the training of pandits for recitation in the various recensions of the principle Vedas. Aithal identifies the texts associated with Âik Veda as numbering three hundred: Veda Lak∑haâ, p. 3. 7

These four categories of Veda Lak∑haâ are taken from Aithal, p. 4.

8

Íhik∑hå texts such as Påîn¥ya and Ãpißhali fall into this basic category.

9

Please refer to Aithal, pp. 6–18.


231

10

Maharishi’s Apaurusheya Bhashya describes the perfection of structure of the Vedic texts. A description of the systematic sequential unfoldment of the S™kta in the Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda is found in Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Celebrating Perfection in Education: Maharishi Vedic University, (India: Vedic University Press, 1997), pp. 150 ff. 11

Maharishi Vedic University Introduction, pp. 72–82.

12

Aithal, pp. 6–9.

13

For a concise summary of the rules of Saµdhi, please refer to Bucknell, R., Sanskrit Manual: A Quick-reference Guide to the Phonology and Grammar of Classical Sanskrit, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994) pp. 74–75. For a listing of ambiguities in Saµdhi, please refer to p. 76. 14

Mueller, F.M., ed., Âig-Veda-Samhitå: The Sacred Hymns of the Bråhmans Together with the Commentary of Såyanåchårya, Vol. 1, (Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1983) p. xii. 15

Please refer to Devasthali, “Introduction,” in Abhyankar, K.V., and Devasthali, G.V., eds., Veda-vik®ti-lak∑haâ-saµgraha, A Collection of Twelve Tracts on Vedavik®tis and Allied Topics, (Poona: Bhandekar Oriental Research Institute, 1978), p. xvii-xviii. Devasthali writes: “Såyaâ holds that the Pada is prior to the Saµhitå; for, it is by combining the padas that the Saµhitå is formed. Yåska and Íaunaka both define Saµhitå as padaprak®ti. But Yåska takes it as a bahuvrihi and holds that Saµhitå is prior to Pada; while Íaunaka takes it as a tatpuru∑a and takes pada to be prior to Saµhitå. But this difference between the two is possibly due to the aim they have placed before them; and actually perhaps they have nothing to say about their order. Yåska names Íåkalya as the author of the Pada Påˇha; and has pointed out discrepancies therein. Patañjali has gone even further and boldly declared thrice that in the case of conflict between the two, the padakåra should follow lak∑haâ (i.e. vyåkaraâ) and not vice versa. . . .” 16

Please refer to below, sections on Aningya and Ingya Lak∑haâ works.

17

These are dealt with, for example, in Kåtyåyana Íhik∑hå and Yohi-Pråpti Íhik∑hå.

18

Aithal, p. 9.

19

A∑hta-Vik®ti-Viv®ti of Madhus™dana-maskarin, in Veda-vik®ti-lak∑haâ-saµgraha, pp. 75–112. (This text is ascribed to Vyåli in some manuscripts.)


232

20

Translations are from Howard, W., Veda Recitation in Våråâs¥, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986), p. 121. 21

Howard, p. 26, and 121 ff.

22

Vedavikritilakshanasamgraha, ìIntroduction.”

23

Aithal writes, “Where there is a regular and complete recitation of the Veda, with the modified forms of pada, krama, etc., the course extends to more than eight years, with ten to twelve hours of learning each day.” p. 12. 24

Aithal, p. 7.

25

As for example, the Cåturjñånådilak∑haâ, described by Aithal on pages 13–14.

26

Ír¥ Kauˆ∂inyaßhik∑hå in Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-saµgraha.

27

Aithal, p. 593, etc.

28

Bucknell, p.74.

29

Please refer to below under Âik Veda Íhik∑hå.

30

This is published as part of several rare editions of Saptalak∑haâm, in Grantha, Telugu and Malåyalam scripts, (1888 to 1929AD) (Please refer to Aithal, pp. 639–640) but not in Devanågar¥. Aithal gives the beginning and ending verses under the heading of “#1262 Íhamåna or Samåna (-prakaraâ),î p. 593. 31

Aithal, p. 558.

32

The Vilanghya is also published as part of several rare editions of Saptalak∑haâm, about which see Aithal, pp. 639–640. Beginning and ending verses are presented by Aithal under the heading “#1151 Vilaãghya(-prakaraâ),î p. 559. 33

Aithal only presents the beginning and ending verses of Napara-prakaraâm in conjunction with its accompanying commentary by Mallayårya (#738, page 391). As an example of Napara without commentary, the following text is the Sarva-Naparam of Íe∑ha Nåråyaâ, called Natånta-Padåni or Napara(-Lak∑haâ), Aithalís #737, on page 388. 34

The Napara-prakaraâm is also published as part of several rare editions of Saptalak∑haâm, about which please refer to Aithal, pp. 639–640.


233

35

The Tapara-prakaraâm is also published as part of several rare editions of Saptalak∑haâm, about which see Aithal, pp. 639–640. Aithal, p. 356. 36

Aithal, p. 356.

37

Beginning and ending verses provided by Aithal under #645 Tapara (-Lak∑haâm), p. 356. 38

Aithal’s #1553, p. 689.

39

The Avarî-prakaraâm is also published as part of several rare editions of Saptalak∑haâm, about which see Aithal, pp. 639-640. Aithal, p. 106–107. 40

Aithal, p. 106.

41

Såma Veda Avarî-prakaraâm is listed as Aithalís #95, p.108; Âg-Avarî is listed, for example, as Aithal’s #99, p. 109. 42

Aithal’s #93 Avarî(-prakaraâ), p. 106–107.

43

Aithal, p. 75.

44

Aithal’s #168 Iãgya-Ratna or Iãgyåniãgya-Parigaâna, p. 148.

45

Sometimes the Ãvarî is included as part of the A∑hˇalak∑haâm. Ãvarî, Aithal explains, is a ìList of words from the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå beginning with ìåî merging with the last vowel of the preceding word.î Aithal, p. 144. 46

The Aniãgya-prakaraâm is also published as part of several rare editions of Saptalak∑haâm, about which see Aithal, pp. 639–640. Aithal, pp. 106–107 Aithal, p. 76. 47

Aithal’s #32 Aniãgya(-prakaraâm)(Taitt.), p. 76.

48

Aithal writes: ìOne of the reasons why the Veda-lak∑haâ works have been so far neglected in modern Vedic research appears to be the fact that the subject matter of most of these works is useful mainly for Svådhyåya. Only orthodox Brahmins well-versed in Vedic recitation seem to have been able to appreciate the value of these works.î p. 12. 49

Please refer to Aithal, Veda Lak∑haâ. This is the overall theme of Aithal's introduction, pp. 1-20.


50

234

Aithal, p. 12.

51

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Vedic Studies Core Course, “Lesson 6: The Vedåãgas: Preservation embedded in the Nature of Life,î (Interlaken: MIU Video, 1974). 52

Recent scientific research at Maharishi University of Management has demonstrated integrated and coherent brain functioning resulting from listening to Vedic recitations. Please refer to Fred Travis, et al., in Maharishi’s Global News Conference, March 30, 2005 (Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Vedic City, U.S.A.). The nervous system is cultured by listening to and reciting the Vedic texts, according to Maharishi, and this beneficial effect—contingent upon correct pronunciation—is useful to unfold the total potential of the human brain physiology, for maximum creativity and success for the individual, and peace and harmony in society and in the world. Please refer to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi Vedic University Introduction, pp. 182–183. 53

Nader, T., Human Physiology, Expression of Veda and the Vedic Literature, (Vlodrop, The Netherlands: Maharishi Vedic University, 1995), pp. 80–81. 54

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “The Three Eurekas,” videotaped lecture, February 16, 1974, Interlaken, Switzerland. 55

Gray, Henry, and Lewis, Warren H., Anatomy of the Human Body, (Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger, 1918), p. 886. 56

Standring, Susan, Ed., Gray’s Anatomy: The Anatomical Basis of Clinical Practice, 39th Edition, (Edinburgh: Elsevier, 2005), p. 700. 57

Aithal, p. 134.

58

Aithal’s #548 Cåtur-jñåna or Cåt®-jñåna (-paribhå∑hå), p. 317, attributed to Paãgu Nåråyaâ or Råvaâ. 59

Varma, S., Critical Studies in the Phonetic Observations of Indian Grammarians, (Delhi: Munshi Ram Manohar Lal, 1961), p. 30. 60

1) Venkatarama Sastri, K. S., Âgved¥yaµ Íamånalak∑haâm Upalekhas™traµ ca, (Ír¥raãgam: Ír¥våˆ¥vilåsamudrålaya˙, 1967). 2) Âksarva-Íhamåna of Någadeva, son of Yajñanåråyaâ, #239, in Aithal, p. 174. 3) Vira, Raghu, and Chandra, L., Sanskrit texts on phonetics, (New Delhi: Satapitaka Series, 1981), pp. 280–286. 61

Gray’s Anatomy, (2005), p. 578.


62

235

Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-Saµgraha.

63

“Introduction,î in Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-Saµgraha, p. v, and especially refer to footnote #3, on page v. 64

Sastri, K.S.V., Âgved¥ya Jaˇåpaˇalam -- ßhr¥ madhus™dan¥ya-ßhik∑håntargatam, ßhr¥ satyavratavyåkhyå-sahitam, (Srirangam: Vani Vilas Press, 1964.) Referenced in Aithal, p. 15. 65

Ír¥manmahåråja Saµsk®ta Mahåpåˇhaßhålå Patrikå, (vol. 23–26) Mysore Sanskrit College. Referenced in Aithal, p. 16. 66

“Introduction,” in Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-Saµgraha, page v, vi, and following.

67

Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-Saµgraha, pp. 75–111.

68

Goss, Charles Mayo, ed., Anatomy of the Human Body by Henry Gray, 29th American Edition, (Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger, 1973), pp. 934–935. 69

As well as personally visiting the main manuscript repositories in India and Europe, Aithal has had access to the findings of the New Catalogorus Catologorum project, which is compiling the holdings of manuscript libraries around the world into a single catalog. (Please refer to Aithal's “Introduction.”) Thus he has searched the universe of currently known manuscripts. 70

The Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute describes this manuscript as follows: “Svaravyañjana Íhik∑hå” a Íhik∑hå of Âig Veda. Author: Unknown; Date: Unknown; Structure: 6 numbered paragraphs; Length: 3 pages, a total of 25 lines, each line containing approximately 46 syllables. P.G. Navathe, ed., Descriptive catalogue of manuscripts in the Government Manuscripts Library deposited at the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, (Poona : Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1990). 71

Varma, p. 60.

72

Varma, pp. 58–60.

73

BORI 21(2) of 1875–1876, Manuscript from Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute.

74

Anatomy of the Human Body by Henry Gray, (1973), pp. 928–930.

75

Íhaishir¥ya Íhik∑hå, verses 5–8.


76

Íhaishir¥ya Íhik∑hå, verses 21 ff.

77

Íhaishir¥ya Íhik∑hå, verse 162.

78

Íhaishir¥ya Íhik∑hå, verse 84.

79

Aithal, p. 618.

236

80

Rani, Sharada, ed., Vedic Studies—A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira, (New Delhi: Íatapiˇaka Series, Vol. 272, 1981), pp. 403–420. 81

Aithal, p. 620.

82

Aithal, p. 618.

83

Aithal’s #1328, Íaunaka-Íik∑hå or Íaunak¥ya-Íik∑hå, pp. 620–621.

84

Other notable Lak∑haâ texts not included in the reading curriculum include the remaining seven Prakaraâs of the A∑hˇalak∑haâ, after Íhamåna Prakaraâ; the Svaråãkußha Íhik∑hå of Jayanta-svåmin, a work in 21 verses dealing with Vedic accents; and Âgvarâ-Krama-Lak∑haâ by Narasiµha-s™ri, dealing with duplication, augmentation, and elision of syllables of Âik Veda, and allied topics. 85

King Nader Råm, (July 2000 edition), pp. 100–101.

86

Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 536–79, post colophon.

87

#1284 Íik∑hådi-Vedåãga-S™c¥, a list of authors and works on Veda-lak∑haâ, reproduced in full in Aithal, p. 603. 88

Aithal: References to Hår¥ta-Íik∑hå, p. 711, and to Baudhayana Íik∑hå, p. 479.

89

His Majesty King Nader Råm has included the Ûhodashi Íhlok¥ Íhik∑hå, a text from Íhukla Yajur-Veda, instead of the Kauˆ∂inya Íhik∑hå, a work dealing with the modes of recitation in K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. 90

Gray, (1918), pp. 985–986.

91

Kielhorn, F., “Remarks on the Íhik∑hås,” Indian Antiquary, May-July, 1876, p. 196.

92

Kielhorn.


237

93

Lueders, H., Die Vyåsa-çikshâ Besonders in ihrem Verhältnis zum Taittirîyaprâtiçâkhya. (Göttingen: Dieterich'sche univ.-buchdr. (W.F. Kaestner) 1894). 94

Sastri, P.N. Pattabhirama, ed., Vyåsa Íik∑hå, (Varanasi: Mimamsa Research Centre, 1976). 95


96

Varma, pp. 36-37.

97

Kielhorn, pp. 194–195.

98

Kielhorn, p. 194.

99

BORI 21 of 1875–76, 13 folios (folios numbered 6–18) Manuscript from the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute. Also manuscript in the Oxford Indian Institute Library, #62, 98 folios in Sharada script. 100


101

Aithal's #141, Ãtreya-Íik∑hå (3), pp. 129–130.

102


103


104

Kielhorn, p. 196.

105

Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 251–252.

106


107

Varma, p. 30.

108

Varma, p. 30.

109

Ghosh.

110

Ghosh.

111

Varma, pp. 5–6.

112

Ghosh.


238

113

Ghosh.

114


115

Aithal, p. 523.

116

These will be described below, in the section on the A∑hˇådhyåy¥, Vedic grammar.

117

Aithal’s #1055, Lak∑hm¥kånta-Íik∑hå or Catu˙-Ílok¥, pp. 523–524. Text is amended based on manuscripts quoted in Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Adyar Library, No. 956–958, pp. 324–325. 118

Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Adyar Library, No. 958, p.

325. 119


120

Anatomy of the Human Body by Henry Gray, (1973), p. 1010.

121

Pansky, Ben, Review of Gross Anatomy, (New York: Macmillan Publishing Co., 1979), p. 302. 122

Pansky, p. 302.

123

Brodal, A., Neurological Anatomy in Relation to Clinical Medicine, (New York: Oxford University Press, 1981), p. 716. 124

Brodal, p. 715.

125

Lindsay, David T., Functional Human Anatomy, (St. Louis: Mosby, 1996), p. 646.

126

Brodal, p. 716.

127

Brodal, p. 715.

128

Brodal, p. 714.

129

Brodal, p. 716.

130

Lindsay, p. 646.

131



132

Gray, pp. 981–982.

133

Tripåth¥, Ír¥ Råma Prasåda, ed., Íik∑håsaµgraha˙, (Vårånasi: Sampurnand Sanksrit University, 1989), p. 53. 134


135


136

Lindsay, p. 646.

137

Varma, p. 32.

138

Íik∑håsaµgraha˙, pp. 43–61.

139


140


141


142

Lindsay, p. 646.

143

Lindsay, p. 646.

144

Sarma, pp. 445–446.

145


146


147


148


149

Lindsay, p. 646.

150

Lindsay, p. 646.

151

Sarma, pp. 453–454.

152


239


153


154


155


156

Lindsay, p. 646.

157

Sarma, p. 432.

158


159

Sarma, p. 436.

160


161


162

Lindsay, p. 646.

163

Lindsay, p. 646.

164


165

Sarma, pp. 437–439.

166


167


168

Lindsay, p. 646.

169

Lindsay, p. 646.

170


171

Aithal, p. 498.

172

240

This verse is indeed well-known as Varma suggests: It also occurs in Chåråyaîya Íhik∑hå chapter 4, verse 1; Påîn¥ya Íhik∑hå v. 52, Mallaßharma Íhik∑hå v. 6, Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå v. 122, Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå v. 94, and Nårad¥ya Íhik∑hå v. 5. It is surprising to see the same verse repeated in texts belonging to Âik Veda, (Påîn¥ya


Íhik∑hå); Såma Veda (Nårad¥ya Íhik∑hå); and both K®∑hâ Yajur Veda (Chåråyaîya and Sarvasaµmata Íhik∑hå), and Íukla Yajur Veda (Mallaßharma Íhik∑hå, Amoghånandin¥ Íhik∑hå, and of course, Mådhyandina Íhik∑hå). 173

Sarma, pp. 434–435

174


175

Sarma, p. 435–436.

176


177


178

Lindsay, p. 646.

179


180

Lindsay, p. 646.

181


182

Aithal, p. 492.

183

Varma, pp. 33–34.

184


185


186

Lindsay, p. 646.

187


188

Lindsay, p. 646.

189


190

Aithal, p. 553.

191


192


241


193

Lindsay, p. 646.

194


195

Lindsay, p. 646.

196


197

Aithal, p. 507.

198

Kielhorn, p. 196.

199

Varma, p. 30.

200


201


202

Lindsay, p. 646.

203


204

Lindsay, p. 646.

205


206

Sarma, p. 446.

207

Sarma, pp. 448–449.

208


209

Gray, p. 981.

210

Lindsay, p. 646.

211


212

Lindsay, p. 646.

213

Sarma, p. 433.

242


214

Varma, p. 34.

215


216

Kielhorn, p. 193.

217

Aithal’s #80, p. 101, and BORI 2 of 1873–74, 3 folios (12b–14b).

218

Aithal’s #81, p. 102.

219


220

Gray, p. 981.

221

Lindsay, p. 646.

222


223

Lindsay, p. 646.

224

Lindsay, p. 646.

225

Vedavik®tilak∑haâsaµgraha, Introduction by Devasthali, p. xvi.

226

Sarma, pp. 452–453.

227


228

243

A third, worthy of mention, is the Kaußhik¥ Íik∑hå. The Kaußhik¥ Íik∑hå has a number of verses in common with the Amoghånandini Íik∑hå; the Kaußhik¥ Íik∑hå has not been published, and its several manuscripts are housed with the Asiatic Society, Calcutta. A fourth, Svarå∑hˇaka Íhik∑hå, is interesting in the light of Maharishi’s presentation of the eight basic Svara at the basis of the entire language as A, I, U, Âi, £ri, E, O, Aµ; the letters AI and AU being dipthongs are not considered as fundamental. By contrast, the Svarå∑hˇaka Íhik∑hå proposes A, I, U, Âi, £ri, E, AI, O, and AU as the eight Svara, even though there are nine! Sarma leaves out £ri to make the numbers work. The short Íhik∑hå deals, according to Sarma, p. 460, with vowel-combinations, accents, handpostures, consonant-combinations and visarga-saµdhi. It is published in the Íik∑håsaµgraha˙, pp. 302–307. 229

After years of neglect.


230

244

Aithal, p. 416.

231

Manuscript #33169 from Ganganatha Jha Research Institute, Allahabad, cited by Aithal, p. 416. Manuscript is lacking its ending colophon. 232

Aithal’s #785, p. 411.

233


234

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

235


236


237


238

Gray, (2005), p.1126.

239

Lindsay, p. 646.

240

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

241

The Bodhåyana, Vålm¥ki, and Hår¥ta Íhik∑hå, as has been mentioned above, are unknown. 242

Varma, p. 38; Aithal's #1207, pp. 577–578. The 17 verses of this text are reproduced in full in Aithal. 243

Here Varma is referring to the group of three Upaßhik∑hå texts mentioned in the above verses from the Vedalak∑hanånukramaîkå. 244

Here Varma presents verse 45 from the Siddhånta Íhik∑hå in a footnote on page 43, without further explanation. [This verse presents examples of words starting with the letter “Ka”:] kakårådi˙ kami∑hyante syåd amuµ lokam uttara˙ kaˇa-dhåto˙ ka∂ ity åhur aßhvibhyåµ parita˙ k®tam 45 245

Varma, p. 43.

246


247



248


249

Lindsay, p. 646.

250

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

251

Kielhorn, p. 193.

252

Varma, p. 44.

245

253

Cardona, George, ìOn the Ãpißhalißhik∑hå,î in : A Corpus of Indian Studies— Essays in Honour of Prof. Gaurinath Sastri, (Calcutta: Sanskritl Pustak Bhandar, 1980), pp. 245–256. 254

van Nooten, B.A., “The Structure of Sanskrit Phonetic Treatise,” in Tartu Oriental Studies 11, 2, Tartu (Konks-Numerkund-Maell) 1973, pp. 408–437. 255

Edited by Raghu Vira, on the basis of two Adyar Manuscripts, in Journal of Vedic Studies, Vol. 1, 2 (May 1934), pp. 225 ff. Reprinted in Vedic Studies—A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira, ed. by Mrs. Sharada Rani, (New Delhi: Sata-Pitaka Series—Indo-Asian Literatures, vol. 272, 1981) pp. 346–69. 256


257

Gray's Anatomy, (2005), p. 1126.

258


259

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

260

Aithal, p. 649.

261

Varma, p. 41.

262

Varma, p. 42.

263

Although the number of Íhloka matches between Kielhorn’s manuscript and that published in Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, many of the verses presented by Kielhorn are not found in Raghu Vira’s transcribed manuscript. There are more than a hundred extant manuscripts of this text, listed by Aithal, with apparently significantly divergent contents. 264

Kielhorn, p. 198.


265


266


267

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

268

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

269

Brodal, p. 711, Figure.

270

Varma, pp. 42–43. Please refer to below, lines 3 and 4 of verse 1.

271


272


273

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

274

Gray, (2005), p. 1126.

275

Brodal, p. 711, Figure.

276

Aithal, p. 598.

277


278


279

Brodal, p. 709.

246

280

Robinson, Byron, The Abdominal and Pelvic Brain, 1907, reprinted by meridianinstitute.com. 281

Anatomy of the Human Body by Henry Gray, (1973), pp.1029–1030.

282

Lindsay, p. 648.

283

Hellmann, Matthew, “Pelvis and Perineum Review,” (2004) p. 6, webpage of Raymond Cheong hosted by Department of Biomedical Engineering at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine. 29 April 2006

284

Gray, (1918), p. 984.

285

Aithal, p. 272.

286

Varma, p. 45.

287

Varma, p. 171.

288


289

Gray, (1918), p. 984.

247

290

“Topography of the pelvic autonomic nervous system and its potential impact on surgical intervention in the pelvis,” Baader, B; Herrmann, M., Clin Anat. 2003; 16: 119– 30. 291

Baader, B, Herrmann, M.

292

“Dissector Answers: Pelvic Neurovasculature,” The University of Michigan Medical School, 2000. 26 May, 2006 . 293

Lancaster, Winston, “Pelvic Autonomics, Lumbosacral Plexus and Pelvic Musculature,” Biology 122, Laboratory 19, (Sacramento: California State University, Spring 2006), p. 4. 294

Kielhorn, p. 195.

295

Dikshitar, V.R. Ramchandra, and Ayyar, P.S. Sundaram, Bhåradvåjaßhik∑hå with Någeßhvara's Commentary, (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1938). 296

(http://anatomy.med.umich.edu/reproductive_system/pelvicwall_ans.html)

297

(http://anatomy.med.umich.edu/reproductive_system/pelvicwall_ans.html)

298

Lancaster, p. 4.

299

Varma, p. 40.

300

Varma, p. 40.

301

Varma, p. 40.


302

248

In Vedic Studies, A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira, pp. 394–

402. 303

G. Benoit, S. Droupy, J. Quillard, V. Paradis, and F. Guiliano, “Supra and infralevator neurovascular pathways to the penile corpora cavernosa,” J. Anat. (1999) 195, pp. 605–615, with 7 Figures, Printed in the United Kingdom. Blackwell Synergy®, Blackwell Publishing, Inc., 26 May 2006, . 304

Brodal, p. 709, figure.

305

Lancaster, p. 4.

306

Varma, pp. 45–46.

307

Aithal, pp. 448–449.

308


309

Brodal, p. 709, figure.

310

Sarma, p. 451.

311

Sarma, p. 432ff.

312

The theme of correlation would seem to be better served if all the Íhukla YajurVeda Íhik∑hå were correlated with the thoracic sympathetics, and only K®i∑hâ YajurVeda Íhik∑hå texts were correlated with the sacral sympathetic ganglia. 313


314

Varma considers that these 14 texts of the Taittir¥ya recension represent by far the most important contribution to Indian phonetics. (p. 37). 315

Varma, p. 150.

316

Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute No. 21 of 1875–1876.

317

“Introduction,” in Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-saµgraha, p. vii.

318

Vedavik®tilak∑haâ-saµgraha, p. 113ff.


319

Gray and Goss, p. 1030.

320

Varma, p. 51.

321


249

322

Quoted from Sastri, P.R., ed., Dantyo∑hˇha-Vidhi, the 4th Lak∑haâ treatise of the Atharvaveda (Lahore: D.A.V. College, 1921). 323

Sastri, Dantyo∑hˇha-Vidhi.

324

Gray and Goss elaborate that “The sympathetic and parasympathetic systems both innervate many of the same organs, and in this double innervation the two systems are usually antagonistic to each other physiologically. . . The two systems frequently travel together, especially in the thorax, abdomen, and pelvis, with the result that extensive plexuses are formed which contain the fibers of both. The arrangement of the bundles within these plexuses is very complicated and the identity of individual fibers cannot be determined with certainty.” p. 1007–1008. 325

Gray and Goss, p. 1008–1009.

326

Bhishe, Usha R., Nårad¥ya Íhik∑hå with the Commentary of Bhaˇˇa Íobhåkara, Critically Edited with Translation and Explanatory Notes in English, (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1986). 327

Nårada Íhik∑hå I.2.1.

328

Varma, p. 48.

329


330

Meaning, “Treatise on Conjunct-Consonant Chains.”

331

Varma, p. 51. Varma says, in a footnote, “According to Charaâvy™ha, (Benares, p. 45) Gautam¥ was one of the nine subdivisions of the Råˆåyan¥ya school.î 332

The translation is by Varma, p. 51. The text says, Gautamenoktaµ na saptåk∑haråtpara˙ saµyogo bhavati. 333


334

Kielhorn, p. 196.


335

Varma, p. 50.

336


337

Martini, Frederic H., Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology, (Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1995), pp. 537–540. 338

Martini, pp. 534–535.

250

`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 4: KALPA I. INTRODUCTION TO KALPA Kalpa is the second branch of Vedic Literature read by students on the program of reading the Vedic Literature. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi has encapsulated the total knowledge of Kalpa in one word: Transforming. In his theme of dividing the whole Vedic Literature into streams of texts that are Âi∑hi predominant, Devatå predominant or Chhandas predominant, he has identified Kalpa as a Devatå predominant text. He writes: Kalp is one of the structuring dynamics of Âik Veda. It highlights the TRANSFORMING quality involved in structuring Âik Veda. With reference to consciousness, Kalp comprises the specific sets of Laws of Nature that are engaged in promoting the quality of Devatå within Saµhitå, providing a structure to the eternally silent, self-referral, self-sufficient, fully awake state of consciousness, which is intimately personal to everyone.1 Kalpa is the second of the Vedåãga. There are six Vedåãga, Íhik∑hå, Kalpa, Vyåkaraâ, Nirukta, Chhandas, and Jyoti∑h. Whereas the first Vedåãga, Íhik∑hå, dealt with the expression of Veda, the second, Kalpa, enters into the process of transformation whereby the expressed Ãtmå, i.e. Veda, is transformed from unmanifest into manifest. From the realm of pronunciation, the next step is into the practical application of the Veda, which means using the total knowledge of Veda to create an ideal civilization. H.M. King Nader Råm explains: Vedåãga represents the limbs, or body, of Veda. The first aspect of Vedåãga, Íhik∑hå, is the quality that accounts for the mechanics of Expressing Veda. From that level of expression, Ãtmå gets transformed from unmanifest into manifest. This Transforming quality is Kalp. Kalp is the fundamental value that transforms the Being level into the becoming level. It describes how singularity brings diversity through the Self-referral quality of consciousness.2

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

252

Kalpa presents a comprehensive technology for transforming anything into anything else, or transforming empty space, vacuum, into any desired object.3 The procedures that are presented in Kalpa are predominantly Yagya, which are procedures for making use of Vedic sounds to accomplish specific desired results. Starting with a Sankalpa, a resolution of what is desired, the Yagya carries the attention through different phases of transformation by means of specific recitations of the four Veda, so that the organizing power is generated that will bring about the fulfillment of the desire. It is essentially an advanced technology of materialization of the impulses of speech. Maharishi explains that the mechanics of transformation through Yagya and Graha Shånti are through Vedic sounds: the verbal repetition of specific mantras or verses belonging to the four Veda, Âik Veda, Såma Veda, Yajur Veda, and Atharva Veda. To understand the mechanics of transformation, whereby the Yagya performances are successful in accomplishing their objectives, one must enter into the Vedic science of phonology. The technology of Kalpa builds upon the science of sound, expounded in Íhik∑hå. Reviewing the knowledge of phonetics introduced in Chapter 2, the sounds of the Veda are basically of two kinds, vowels and consonants. The vowels have their origin from the first vowel, which is the first letter of the Vedic alphabet, and the first letter of alphabets all over the world, the letter “A.” The vowels in turn, through steps of transformation, give rise to the consonants. So “A” becomes “K” and “A” becomes “G,” and so forth, and these mechanics of transformation whereby the vowels starting from “A” are transformed into the various consonants of the Vedic speech, are the mechanics of creative intelligence, the mechanics of progress and evolution of every particle of creation. Maharishi teaches, This transformation of vowels into vowels, and transformation mechanics of

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

253

transforming vowels into consonants, these are the impulses of Creative Intelligence, the Intelligence of Natural Law.4 Because the Vedic sounds by their origin and structure contain the fundamental Creative Intelligence of Natural Law at the basis of Creation, they are capable of creating anything, or changing anything, or developing and expanding anything, or bringing about any influence anywhere in Creation. Maharishi explains: This is the specialty, great specialty of the Sanskrit Language that its flow is the flow of Creative Intelligence, which is at the basis of the whole Creation and the whole field of Evolution.5 How Nature creates, how the unified field of Natural Law creates from within itself is encapsulated in the Vedic sounds, and thus the precise expression of the Vedic sounds becomes the instrumentality for bringing about any desired transformation anywhere in creation. In the process of performance of Yagya, a Âik Vedic pandit speaks out some specific Mantra, specific words; at another point in the performance a Såma Vedic Pandit may recite some words from Såma Veda or a Yajur Vedic Pandit may recite some words from Yajur Veda, and so forth. It is these sequentially pronounced sounds, Maharishi explains, which in the context of the performance of the Yagya achieve the objective that was announced at the start of the Yagya performance. The mechanics of the fulfillment of the desire, the mechanics by which the objective or Sankalpa is accomplished is the mechanics of transformation of sounds, the mechanics by which the first vowel “A” is transformed into all the other vowels, and the mechanics by which vowels are transformed into consonants. The traditionally prescribed performances of Vedic Yagya put to practice the knowledge of the transformation of sounds. Maharishi concludes, The effect [of performance of the Yagya] will be enlivening those most fundamental Creative Intelligences which construct the Creation, which construct physiology from the field of consciousness. . . . That is what we are going to use

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

254

for our purpose of creating a very cordial, a very harmonious, a very happy and fulfilled world.6 This description of the mechanics of the fulfillment of desire through Vedic performances connects Yagya with the transforming quality, and explains how Kalpa contains the knowledge for transformation of any object into any other object, and even the knowledge of transformation of the empty space, vacuum, into any desired object. Kalpa puts to practical use the knowledge of how Nature creates. The procedures and rites that are presented in Kalpa for the materialization of specific desires are manifold. Kalpa is one of the largest divisions of Vedic Literature. H.M. King Nader Råm lists 54 texts belonging to the literature of Kalpa. Of these 54 texts 48 have been so far collected, for a total of 5,683 pages. The remainder are unpublished manuscripts that are difficult to procure. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kalpa branch of Vedic Literature with the limbic system. He explains as follows: In the physiology, Kalp is represented by the structures that process and transform any specific or point value of expression into a response that takes into consideration the totality of physiological expressions. These structures process any expression or experience with regard to its emotional meaning and its significance with respect to the inner and outer requirements of the physiology. The limbic system plays the role of transforming any point value of expression into an expanded response that generates an adaptive adjustment of the physiology to maintain overall balance and homeostasis.7 In practical terms, the functions of the limbic system are described as “1) establishing emotional states and related behavioral drives; 2) linking the conscious, intellectual functions of the cerebral cortex with the unconscious and autonomic functions of the brain stem; and 3) facilitating memory storage and retrieval.”8 There are four main divisions of Kalpa: G®ihya S™tra, Íhrauta Sutra, Íhulba S™tra, and Dharma S™tra. These correspond to four main divisions of the limbic system, the Archicortex, Subcortical Structures, Mesocortex including some neocortical

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

255

structures, and the Paleocortex. (Please refer to Figure 24.) The constituent texts of each of these four divisions will be examined along with their physiological correlates in the architecture of the brain.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

256

II. GÂIHYA S¤TRA The G®ihya S™tra describes the household rites, including the Saµskåra, the rites of passage that are performed at crucial junctures in the life of every individual. (Please refer to Table 12, p. 259.) In the physiology, the G®ihya S™tra correspond to the Archicortex, a section of the cerebral cortex encompassing the Uncus, Hippocampus, Parahippocampal Gyrus, the Dentate Gyrus and the Entorhinal Cortex, and fuctionally associated with the formation of short and long term memory. (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258.) This portion of the cortex belongs to the temporal lobe, on its medial surface. The Parahippocampal Gyrus, and the Uncus show up very clearly in a medial view of the brain, showing the gyri and sulci of the cerebral cortex. The Hippocampus itself is the most medial portion of the cerebral cortex, making up a prominent horn on the floor of the lateral ventricle. The undulations within this horn, called Ammon’s Horn, or Cornu Ammonis, (CA), have the form of a seahorse, which may be seen in Figure 27 (p. 258).9 This section examines each of the texts of G®ihya S™tra in sequence, and describes the corresponding fibres of the limbic system.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

257

A. The Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra with the Fimbria, the posterior pillars of the Fornix. [Please refer to Figures 25 (p. 256) and 26.] The Fimbria is a thick white bundle of axons, that forms the highly arched crus of the fornix. Gray describes the Fimbria: The crura (posterior pillars) of the fornix are prolonged backward from the body. They are flattened bands, and at their commencment are intimately connected with the under surface of the corpus callosum. Diverging from one another, each curves around the posterior end of the thalamus, and passes downward and forward into the inferior cornu of the lateral ventricle. Here it lies along the concavity of the hippocampus, on the surface of which some of its fibers are spread out to form the alveus, while the remainder are continued as a narrow white band, the fimbria hippocampi, which is prolonged into the uncus of the hippocampal gyrus. The inner edge of the fimbria overlaps the fascia dentata hyppocampi (dentate gyrus), from which it is separated by the fimbriodentate fissure; from its lateral margin, which is thin and ragged, the ventricular epithelium is reflected over the choroid plexus as the latter projects into the chorioidal fissure.10 The fibers of the fornix and fimbria are the greatly expanded connections between the hippocampus and the septal nuclei, between the hippocampus and the hypothalamus,

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

258

and between the hippocampus and the tegmentum, structures that lay adjacent to each other in the original neural tube in the developing embryo, but which were dramatically separated by the enormous expansion of the corpus callosum. The extension of these axons in the fornix and fimbria maintains the connectedness of these tissues formed in the early brain.11 The fimbria is a major input-output pathway of the hippocampus. It is associated with spatial learning and memory. The Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Íhåkalya recension of Âik Veda. There are 55 Kaˆ∂ikå, or topically arranged prose paragraphs of S™tra, divided among

CHAPTER 4: KALPA Table 12: Sho∂asha Saµskåra: Sixteen Means of Purification 1. Garbhådhåna

conception, depends upon condition of parents at the time of conception

2. Puµsavana

three months, for a male child, for saftey and proper growth

3. S¥mantonnayana

parting of hair, 4, 6, or 8th month, for a smooth pregnancy and to reduce the danger of a miscarriage, for long life and good health of the child

4. Jåtakarman

after birth or on 11th day, for support of Natural Law

5. Nåmakaraâ

after 12 days, name giving in accordance with physiology

6. Nishkramaâ

going out to sun, introduces child to the laws of nature, 12 days or fourth month

7. Annapråshana

first feeding, in 6th month

8. Karâvedha

ears pierced, gold, 6th, 7th, or 8th month

9. Ch™∂åkaraâ

shaving the head, 3, 5, or 7th year

10. Aksharårambha

3rd or 5th year, beginning of the study of the alphabet, Dec 22–June 21, first step of total knowledge

11. Upanayana

leading towards, bringing near, Brahmin, 3 or 5; Kshatriya, 6 or 11; Vaishya, 8 or 12, Meditation and recitation of Four Veda and other Vedic Literature

12. Vedårambha

begining of knowledge, joins teacherís household to study Veda and Vedic Literature

13. Keshånta

cutting of hair and nails, Brahmin, 16; Kshatriya, 22; Vaishya, 24, for cleanliness in behavior and habits which will bring good fortune

14. Samåvartana

end of education,ëreturning,í preparation to become a householder

15. Vivåha

marriage, for children, in front of Agni. Seven steps for prosperity, energy, land, happiness, cattle, support of nature, friendship

16. Antyeshˇi

funeral rites, by son, as soon as possible after death, helps soul on journey

259

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

260

four chapters. Bhattacharji summarizes the text as follows: The Ãßhvalåyana is divided into four sections, the first of which deals with the setting up of the domestic fires and the rites which cover an Aryan’s life from conception to cremation and ßhråddha. The second part lays down rules for some seasonal rites, . . . rites for mounting a chariot, and proper sites for building a house. . . . The third part deals with miscellaneous subjects, the five rites for the householders, Vedic study, etc. . . . The last section begins with diseases and death. Cremation . . . . [and] the seven kinds of ßhråddha are described. . . . The text ends with the spit-ox rite offered to Rudra for plenty and prosperity.12 There is an English translation by Oldenberg.13 The Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra Parißhi∑hˇa, consisting of 30 supplemental Kaˆ∂ikå in verse and prose, is included in most manuscripts as a fifth chapter. Its authenticity was not doubted by Såyaâ who quoted from it frequently. The text contains many special performances relating to the Íhråddha; some accessory rites pertaining to marriage; some rites concerned with the study of the Veda; details for maintaining the sacred fire; the V®i∑hotsarga, a rite for setting free a bull; offering to planets; consecration of a pond, well or lake; and some expiatory rites.14 The beginning and ending Kaˆ∂ikå of the Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra are as follows:

a;êl;yn gOÁ sU]m( ¨ˇ_;in vwt;ink;in gOÁ;…, v+y;m" 1 ]y" p;kyD;" 2 ¸t; a¶* Ùym;n; an¶* p[¸t; b[;˜,.ojne b[˜…,¸t;" 3 aq;PyOc ¨d;hr≤Nt y" s…m/; y a;¸tI yo vedeneit 4 s…m/mev;ip ≈∂/;n a;d/NmNyet yj îd…mit nmStSmw y a;¸Ty; yo vedeneit iv¥ywv;PyiSt p[IitStdetTpXy-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

261

•OiW®v;c ago®/;y givWe¥u=;y dSMy' vc" ) Òt;TSv;dIyo m/uní vocteit vc Ev m îd' Òt;∞ m/uní Sv;dIyoåiSt p[Iit" Sv;dIyoåiSTvTyev td;h a; te a¶ Ac; hiv˙≥d; t∑' .r;m…s ) te te .vNtU=, AW.;so vx; ¨teit Et Ev m ¨=;,í AW.;í vx;í .v≤Nt y îm' Sv;?y;ym/Iyt îit yo nms; Sv?vr îit nmSk;re, vw %Lvip n vw dev; nmSk;rmit yDo vw nm îit ih b[;˜ ,' .vit 5 1 ***concluding S™tra***

aq xUlgv" 1 xrid vsNte v;{Ry; 2 ≈eœ' SvSy yUqSy 3 ak⁄iœpOWt( 4 kLm;W…mTyekÉ 5 k;m' ’„,m;lohv;'íet( 6 v[IihyvmtI….r≤∫r….iWCy 7 ≤xrSt a;.sˇ" 8 ®{;y mh;dev;y ju∑o v/RSveit 9 t' v/RyeTsMp•dNtmOW.' v; 10 y…Dy;y;' id≤x 11 asNdxRne g[;m;t( 12 Ëı±vRm/Rr;];t( ) ïdt îTyekÉ 13 vw¥' c·r]vNt' b[˜;,mupveXy spl;x;m;{Rx;%;' yUp' in%;y v[tTy* k⁄xr∆U v; rxne aNytry; yUp' p·rvIy;Nytry;/R≤xr…s pxu' b?v; yUpe rxn;y;' v; inyun·ˇ_ ySmw nmStSmw Tv; ju∑' inyunJmIit 14 p[o=,;id sm;n' pxun; ivxeW;Nv+y;m" 15 p;}y; pl;xen v; vp;' ju¸y;idit h ivD;yte 16 hr;y mO@;y xv;Ry ≤xv;y .v;y mh;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

262

dev;yog[;y .Im;y pxuptye ®{;y x˚r;yex;n;y Sv;heit 17 W≤@±.voRˇrw" 18 ®{;y Sv;heit v; 19 ctsOWuctsOWu k⁄xsUn;suctsOWu id=u b≤l' hre¥;Ste ®{pUvRSy;' id≤x sen;St;>y En' nmSte aStu m; m; ih'sI·rTyev' p[itidx' Tv;dexnm( 20 ctu….R" sUˇ_ìítßo idx ¨pitœºt k&{;ye m; ®{;y;te ipt·rm; ®{;y iSqr/Nvn îit 21 svR®{yDeWu idx;mupSq;nm( 22 tuW;n( flIkr,;'í puCzçmR≤xr" p;d;inTy¶;vnup[hret(23 .og' cmR,; k⁄vIRteit x;'vTy" 24 ¨ˇrtoå¶edR.RvIt;su k⁄xsUn;su v; xo…,t' innyeCz™v;…snIòRiW,IivR…cNvtI" smXnutI" sp;R Et√o å] tır?v…mit 25 aqodõ™õ;vOTy ê;…snIòRiW,IvR…cNvtI" smXnutI" sp;R Et√oå] tır?v…mit speR>yo yˇ];sOgUv?y' v;vßut' .vit tır≤Nt sp;R" 26 sv;R…, h v; aSy n;m/ey;in 27 sv;R" sen;" 28 sv;R
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

263

n h;pxu.RvtIit ivD;yte 39 xNt;tIy' jpNgOh;iny;t( 40 pxUn;mupt;p Etmev dev' m?yegoœSy yjet( 41 Sq;lIp;k˘ svR¸tm( 42 bihRr;Jyç;nup[˙Ty /Umto g; a;nyet( 43 xNt;tIy' jpNpxUn;' m?y…my;Nm?y…my;t( 44 nm" x*nk;y nm" x*nk;y 45 9 îit ctuqoRå?y;y" a;êl;yngOÁsU]' sm;¢m( 15

The beginning and ending Kaˆ∂ikå of the Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra Parißhi∑hˇa are as follows:

a;êl;yngOÁp·rix∑m( ki<@k; 1 gOÁº tu y;in noˇ_;in Kv…c√wt;inkÉåip v; iv/erlopn;q;Ry tin v+y;Myt" prm( 1 Kv…cÌ¥w" Kv…cc(z™lokìSt√+y;MynupUvRx" g;y}y;idWu zNd"su sivt; yeWu devt; 2 t] pu
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

264

b◊»c' vwêdeve tu inyuÔ‰;√πdp;rgm( inyuˇ_o vwêdeve tu s ≈;ı' p·rp;lyet( 6 ikmq| vwêdev;n;' pUvRm•' p[dIyte dÊv; tu pUvRmeteW;' kSm;t( pí;i√sjRnm( 7 asur;" iptOÂpe, c;ˇu' ih's≤Nt m;nv;n( teW;' vw r=,;q| tu tSm;Tpí;i√sjRnm( 8 îit ki<@k; 1 ***concluding paragraph***

ki<@k; 30 ar
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

265

a;l>y mN]o vˇ_Vy" s'Sk;r;∆;yte h…v" 5 s'Sk;r;∆;yte hiv·rit 6 nm" x*nk;y nm" x*nk;y îit ki<@k; 30 16

B. The Khadira G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Khadira G®ihya S™tra, also called the Dråhyåyaâ G®ihya S™tra, with the Prosubiculum. “Prosubiculum refers to the transition zone between the hippocampus and the subiculum in which elements of both structures are represented.”17 This transition grades between the 6 layer cortex of the Parahippocampal Gyrus, and the three layer cortex characteristic of the Hippocampus.18 Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258. Khådira G®ihya S™tra belongs to Såma Veda. The text consists of 19 Khaˆ∂a of topically arranged prose S™tra divided among 4 Paˇalas. The Khådira G®ihya S™tra is largely a recast of the Gobhila G®ihya S™tra, according to Oldenberg,19 but according to Bhattacharji, “It has a few new entries like the proper time and directions for the rites, special rites for the house, and for one who desires prosperity.” There is an English translation of the text, again by Oldenberg:20 The first Paˇala deals with the domestic rites, and the maintenance of the domestic fire. The second Paˇala deals with full and new moon sacrifices, and with various rites of passage. The rites of passage of a student becoming a householder are described in the third Paˇala. The fourth Paˇala describes vows of fasting for fulfillment of desires, and the performance of Arghya. Beginning and ending Khaˆ∂a are as follows:

%;idr gOÁ sU]m( {;Á;y,gOÁsU]m(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

266

aq;to gOÁ; km;R…, 1 ¨dgynpUvRp=puyu+y ≤xroå>yu=et( 10 î≤N{y;
ivWvt; d∑m≤∫r>yu=n( jpeNm; .wWI·rit 1 ò;tkSsiv xn( vw,v' d<@mupind?y;ˇurgop;yeit SvSTyynm( 2 htSt îit i£…mvNt' dexm≤∫r>yu=Ôpet( 3 pxUn;' ced-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

267

pr;ê sIt;lo∑m;˙Ty tSy p[;t" p;'su…." p[it‚„krÔpet( 4 m/upk| p[itgOhI„y…•dmh…mm;…mit p[ititœn( jpet( 5 ahRyTsu v; 6 iv∑rp;¥;~y;‹cmnIym/upk;≥,;mekìk˘ i]veRdyNte 7 g;' c 8¨dç' iv∑rm;StIyR y; aoW/I·rTy?y;sIt 9 p;dyoi√≥tIyy; √* cet( 10 ap" pXyet( yto devI·rit 11 sVy' p;dmv…sçet( sVy…mit 12 d≤=,' d≤=,…mit 13 ¨.* xeWe, 14 a•Sy r;i∑^rsITy~y| p[it gOIy;t( 15 yxoåsITy;cmnIym( 16 yxso yxo åsIit m/upkúm( 17 i]" ipbe¥xso mhs" …≈y; îit 18 tU„,I' ctuqRm( 19 .Uhoåipp;y b[;˜,;yoiCz∑' d¥;t( 20 g;' veidt;mnumN]yet muç g;…mTymu„y ceTyhR…ytun;Rmb[yU ;t( 21 EvmyDe 22 k⁄®teit yDe 23 a;c;yR AiTvk™ ò;tko r;j; ivv;Á" ip[y îit W@~y;‹" 24 p[its'vTsr;nhRyet( 25 punyRDivv;hyoípunyRDivv;hyoí 26 îit ctuqR" %<@" îit ctuqR" p$l" sm;¢' %;idr' gOÁsU]m( 21

C. The Kåˇhaka G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kåˇhaka G®ihya S™tra, also called the Laugåk∑hi, Charaka, and Chåråyaˆ¥ya G®ihya S™tra, with the Subiculum. Gray describes the Subiculum: The subicular complex is generally subdivided into subiculum, presubiculum and parasubiculum. The major subcortical projections of the hippocampal formation (to the septal nuclei, mammillary nuclei, nucleus accumbens and anterior

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

268

thalamus), and to the entorhinal cortex all arise from pyramidal neurones of the subicular complex. The subiculum consists of a superficial molecular layer containing apical dendrites of subicular pyramidal cells, a pyramidal cell layer that is c.30 cells thick, and a deep polymorphic layer. Neurones in the subicular complex and entorhinal cortex give rise to projections to the nucleus accumbens and to parts of the caudate nucleus and putamen. The subicular complex gives rise to the major, postcommissural fiber system of the fornix. . . . Both the subiculum and the presubiculum provide the major extrinsic input to the mamillary complex. . . . The subicular cortex receives direct cortical inputs, e.g. from the temporal polar cortex, perirhinal cortex, parahippocampal gyrus, superior temporal gyrus and dorsolateral prefrontal cortex.22 The subiculum consists of approximately 4.6 ± 1.1 million neurons.23 The Kåˇhaka G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Kåˇhaka recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The text has 73 Khaˆ∂ikå, topically arranged paragraphs of prose S™tra, arranged in five chapters. According to Bhattacharji, The contents of the Laugåk∑hi G®ihyas™tra are the same as those treated generally in G®ihyas™tras. It lays some emphasis on the purification of the bride and her welcome, and on auspicious songs employed in the worship of the gods. . . . The marriageable age of girls was ten or twelve years. Maidens have special festivals, Råkå and Holåkå.24 A listing of the kind of students worthy to be taught includes the giver of wealth, and the karmak®t, a person who works for the teacher. There are also rites given to drive away many kinds of evil spirits. The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

k;#kgOÁsU] ¨pnynp[.Oit v[tc;rI Sy;t( 1 m;gRv;s;" 2 s'htkÉx" 3 .w=;c;yRvO·ˇ" 4 sxLkd<@" 5 s¢muÔ;' me%l;' /;ryet( 6 n m/um;'se aXnIy;t( 7 =;rlv,vjIR 8 a;c;yRSy;p[itkÀl" 9 svRk;y;RSvtN]" 10 pUvoRTq;yI

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

269

j`Nys'vexI 11 ydenmupey;ˇdSmw d¥;t( 12 bÙn;' yen s'yuˇ_" 13 n;Sy xYy;m;ivxet( 14 n rqm;®het( 15 n s'vS]yet 16 sv;R…, s;'SpxRk;in S]I…." sh vjRyet( 17 n muiWt;' p[e=et 18 n ivh;r;q| jLpet( 19 n ®Cyq| ikçn /;ryet 20 n ò;y;t( 21 ¨dk˘ v;>yupey;t( 22 yid ò;y;∂<@ îv;Psu p·rPlvet( 23 mu<@o ji$l" ≤x%I v; 24 s;y' p[;t" sN?y;mup;sIt 25 itœºTpUv;Rm( 26 a;sItoˇr;m( 27 ao' .U.uRv" Sv·rTyuKTv; tTsivtu·rit s;iv]ImNv;h 28 p[;gStmy;…•„£My s…m/ a;hreı·r,Ib[R˜vcRsk;m îit ≈uit" 29 s;y' p[;t" sN?y;in"sr,' .w=cr,m¶IN/nm( 30 s;ymev;…¶…mN/IteTyekÉ 31 .w=Sy;cr,e doW" p;vkSy;s…mN/ne s¢r;]mkéTvwtdvk°…,Rv[t' cret( 32 1 ***concluding paragraph***

r;k; hol;kÉ 1 îN{;,Im;su n;·r‚„vit k⁄m;rI,;' yD' yjet( 2 devt; ap[D;ym;n; a;¶eYy; yje√wêdeVy; v; 3 Sv‚Stpu
25

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

270

D. The Kau∑h¥taka G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kau∑h¥taka G®ihya S™tra with the Presubiculum. The Presubiculum consists of approximately 9.8 ± 2.4 million neurons, making up part of the Hippocampal formation.26 It is located in the ventral region of the medial Entorhinal area. Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258. Gray describes the Presubiculum: The presubiculum is medial to the subiculum and is distinguished by a densely packed superficial layer of pyramidal cells. There is a plexiform layer superficial to this dense cell layer. Cells deep to it are best regarded as either a medial extension of the subiculum or a lateral extension of the deep layers of the entorhinal cortex. The parasubiculum also has a superficial plexiform layer and a primary cell layer. It forms the boundary between the subicular complex as a whole and the entorhinal cortex. . . . . The subicular complex gives rise to the major, postcommissural fiber system of the fornix. The presubiculum, in particular, projects to the anterior thalamic nuclear complex (anteromedial, anteroventral and laterodorsal nuclei). Both the subiculum and the presubiculum provide the major extrinsic input to the mamillary complex.27 The presubiculum receives projections from the lateral part of the Entorrhinal area, Field CA3, the lateral nucleus of the Amygdala, and the lateral part of the Supramamillary nucleus. The different parts of the Subiculum complex, the Entorhinal area, the Dentate gyrus and 25 other structures receive projections from the Presubiculum. The Kau∑h¥taka G®ihya S™tra belongs to Âik Veda. The text is divided into five chapters, with a total of 56 Khaˆ∂a. The beginning and ending Khaˆ∂a are as follows:

k*WItkgOÁsU]m( p[qm;?y;ye p[qm" %<@" ¨Tq;y p[;tr;cMy;hrh" Sv;?y;ym/IyIt a¥; no dev sivt" îit √π apeih mnsSpte îit sUˇ_m( At' c sTy' c îit sUˇ_m;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

271

idTy; avih:yt îit vgR√ym( mih vo mht;imit sUˇ_xeW" îN{≈eœ;in îTyek; h's" xu…cWt(îTyek; nmo mhŒ" îTyek; mm;¶e vcR" îit sUˇ_m( yenedimit sUˇ_m( SviSt no …mmIt;imit pç Ac" 1 cTv;r" p;kyD;" 2 ¸to å¸t" p[¸t" p[;≤xtîit 3 pçsu bih" x;l;y;" 4 ivv;he cU¬;kr, ¨pnyne kÉx;Nte sImNto•yn îit 5 ¨p≤lPyoıTy p[o+y a…¶mupsm;/;y 6 inmRNQywkÉ ivv;he 7 ¨dgyn a;pUyRm;,p=e puy;Tmm©;in Syu" sm;" kÉx;Nt;" 9 a;vt;Rvip ySyw Sy;t;' p[d≤=,* g[Iv;y;' W@±vIr;n( jn…y„ytIit iv¥;t( 10 ***concluding paragraph***

aq a∑m" %<@" tSy;pvgeR p·r…/kmR 1 a;n¬üh' loiht' cmR p[;Gg[Iv' vodGg[Iv' voˇrlom pí;d¶e®pStIyR tiSm•upivXy 2 aNtre,;…¶met;'í;Xm;n' ind/;it 3 xMy;" p·r/In( ’Tv; xmImy…m?m' p;l;x' v;®,en ßuve, k˘sen v; juhotITyupSq’t" smNv;rB/eWu 4 îm' jIve>y" prwtu mOTyurmOt' n a;gn( vwvSvto a.y' n" ’,otu p,| vnSpte·rv;….nXxIyt;' r…y" sct;' n" xcIp;t" y;í;®,e" dx;Nv;/;n îit ap n" x;xucdìmit s¢ a¶e ny ySTv; ˙d; Tv' no

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

272

a¶e a/r;dudˇ_;t( îit √;dx ¸Tv; yq;h;in îit d≤=,m' s' √;>y;' smI+y;Ôn' sipRW; s•Iy d.RipÔUlw" S]I,;m=I
E. The Månava G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Månava G®ihya S™tra with the Parahippocampal gyrus. The Parahippocampal gyrus is the name given to the most medially placed gyrus of the temporal lobe, lying between the hippocampal and collateral sulci. Please refer to Figure 28. Medpix describes it as follows: The parahippocampal gyrus is in the medial temporal lobe, just above the collateral sulcus and immediately inferior to the subiculum. It blends into the subiculum without a sulcus or other gross margination. Anteriorly, the parahippocampal gyrus blends into the uncus (primary olfactory cortex); mostly, it is entorhinal cortex. Sensory information passes through the parahippocampal, into the hippocampal formation, and then returns to the association areas for storage. 29 Gray briefly explains the connections and role of the parahippocampal gyrus:

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

273

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

274

The parahippocampal gyrus projects to virtually all association areas of the cortex in primates and also provides the major funnel through which polymodal sensory inputs converge on the hippocampus.30 The Månava G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Maitråyana recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. It is divided into two portions called Purusha. The first Purusha has 23 Khaˆ∂a, and the second Purusha has 18 Khaˆ∂as, for a total of 41 Khaˆ∂a. According to Bhattacharji, the Månava G®ihya S™tra begins with “rites of studenthood which it treats in detail, [followed by] the householder’s life through marriage which also receives an elaborate treatment. The final section deals wtih seasonal sacrifices, rites connected with some natural calamities and augury.”31 There is an English translation by Dresden.32 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

m;nvgOÁsU]m( ≈IrSTv] p[qm" pu®W" p[qm" %<@" aq m;nvgOÁsU]p[;rM." — ¨pnynp[.Oit v[tc;rI Sy;t( 1 m;gRv;s;" s'htkÉxo .w=;c;yRvO·ˇ" sxLkd<@" s¢ ) muÔ;' me%l;' /;ryed;c;yRSy;p[itkÀl" svRk;rI 2 ydenmupey;ˇdSmw d¥;äÙn;' yen s'yuˇ_" 3 n;Sy xYy;m;ivxet( 4 n s\ vS]yet( 5 n rqm;rohet( 6 n;nOt\ vdet( 7 n muiWt;\ ≤S]y' p[e=et 8 n ivh;r;qoR jLpet( 9 n ®Cyq| ik˘ cn /;ryIt 10 sv;R…, s;\ Sp≤xRk;in S]I>yo vjRyet( 11 n m/um;\ se p[;XnIy;T=;rlv,e c 12 n ò;y;dudk\ v;>yvey;t(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

275

13 yid ò;y;∂<@ îv;Psu Plvet 14 p[;gStmy;…•„£My s…m/;v;hreı·ry jpit 22 ®c' no /ehIit pO…qvIm;r.te 23 }y;yuW' jmd¶e" kXypSy }y;yuWmgSTySy }y;yuWm( y∂ºv;n;' }y;yuW' tNme aStu }y;yuWm( îit .Smn;©;in s\ SpOXy;poihœIy;….m;RjRyte 24 îit p[qm" %<@" 1 ***concluding paragraph***

a∑;dx" %<@" W@;¸t' p[itpid pu]k;m" 1 py…s Sq;lIp;k\ ≈p…yTv; tSy juhoit b[˜,;…¶" s\ ivd;no r=oh; b;/t;…mt" amI v; ySte g.| du,;Rm; yoinm;xye

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

ySte g.RmmI v; du,;Rm; yoinm;xye a…¶œ' b[˜,; sh in„£My;dmnInxt( ySte h≤Nt ptyNt' inWTòu\ y" srIsOpm( j;t\ ySte …j`;\ sit t…mto n;xy;m…s ySTv; Sv“en tms; moh…yTv; inp¥te p[j;\ ySte …j`;\ sit t…mto n;xy;m…s ySTv; .[;t; pit.URTv; j;ro .UTv; inp¥te p[j;\ ySte …j`;\ sit t…mto n;xy;m…s ye te flNTyPsrso gN/v;R goœ;í ye £Vy;d\ sur' deivn' t…mto n;xy;m…s ySt ËÂ ivhrTyNtr; dMptI xye yoin\ yo aNtr;re…! t…mto n;xy;m…s a….•;<@; vOıg.;R a·r∑; jIvsUkrI ivj;yt;' p[j;yt;…my' .vtu toiknI iv„,uyoRin' kLpytu Tv∑; Âp;…, ip\ xtu a;…sçtu p[j;pit/;Rt; g.| d/;tu te g.| /eih …snIv;≤l g.| /eih srSvit g.| te a…ên* dev;v;/ˇ;' pu„krßj; ihr
276

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

277

c=u„mte Í
F. The Påraskara G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Påraskara G®ihya S™tra, also known as the Kaˆva or Kåtyåyana G®ihya S™tra,34 with the Hippocampal gyrus. Gray describes the Hippocampal gyrus as follows (Please refer to Figure 29): The hippocampal gyrus is bounded above by the hippocampal fissure, and

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

278

below by the anterior part of the collateral fissure. Behind, it is continuous superiorly, through the isthmus, with the cingulate gyrus and inferiorly with the lingual gyrus. Running in the substance of the cingulate and hippocampal gyri, and connecting them together, is a tract of arched fibers, named the cingulum. The anterior extremity of the hippocampal gyrus is recurved in the form of a hook (uncus), which is separated from the apex of the temporal lobe by a slight fissure, the incisura temporalis. Although superficially continuous with the hippocampal gyrus, the uncus forms morphologically a part of the rhinencephalon. 35 The number of cells in the Hippocampal gyrus has been estimated at 9.5 million. 36 The Påraskara G®ihya S™tra, also called the Kåt¥ya G®ihya S™tra, belongs to Íhukla Yajur Veda. The text has three books, with a total of 51 prose paragraphs. In addition there are three supplements, called Parißhi∑hˇa. Bhattacharji describes the text: The first book begins with preparations for and lighting of the domestic fire and includes a description of the wedding ritual. The second book deals with the rites for the child, including the sacred thread ceremony and the inauguration of Vedic study. The third book contains many seasonal rites as well as burial and Íhraddha ceremonies.37

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

279

There is an English translation by Oldenberg.38 The beginning and ending verses are as follows:

p;rSkrgOÁsU]m( ≈Ig,ex;y nm" aq;to gOÁSq;lIp;k;n;' kmR 1 p·rsmuÁop≤lPyoÆLl:yoı»Ty;>yu+y;…¶mupsm;/;y d≤=,to b[˜;snm;StIyR p[,Iy p·rStIy;RqRvd;s;¥piv]e ’Tv; p[o=,I" s'S’Ty;qRvTp[o+y in®Py;Jym…/…≈Ty pyR…¶ k⁄y;Rt( 2 ßuv' p[tPy sMmOJy;>yu+y pun" p[tPy ind?y;t( 3 a;Jymu√;SyoTpUy;ve+y p[o=,Ií pUvRvdupymn;Nk⁄x;n;d;y s…m/oå>y;/;y pyuR+y ju¸y;t( 4 EW Ev iv…/yR] Kv…cıom" 5 1 ***concluding S™tra***

n .;y;RdxRneåXnIy;• .;yRy; sh n s'?yyonR m?y;Nhe n;/Rr;]e n;yDopvItI n;åå{R≤xr; n;{v;s; nwkv;s; n xy;no n t;m[.;jne n ….•e n r;jts*vnRxƒSf;i$kk;'S y.;jnvj| n l*he n mONmye n s'…/s'iSqte n .uiv n p;,* n svR.ojI Sy;≤Tk˘…c∫oJy' p·rTyjedNy] Òtp;ysd…/sˇ_⁄pllm/u>y" s;?v;c;Nto d≤=,p;d;©ëœº p;…,' in"ß;vyed©ëœm;]" pu®Wo a©ëœ' c sm;…≈t" ) Èx" svRSy jgt" p[.u" p[I,;tu ivê.u…git ê;];"pIt; îit n;….m;l.et amOt; îTyt" p[;ggSTy' vwntey' c xin' c

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

280

v@v;nlm( ) a;h;rp·r,;m;q| Smre∫Im' c pçm…mTyudrm;l>y xy;Rit' c sukNy;' c Cyvn' x£m…ên* ) .ojn;Nte Smre…•Ty' tSy c=unR hIyt îit SmOTv; mu%xu≤ı' k⁄y;R•mo .gvte v;jsney;y y;DvLKy;y nmo .gvte v;jsney;y y;DvLKy;y 3 39

The Kåtyåyana G®ihya S™tra. The Kåtyåyana G®ihya S™tra40 is almost identical to the Påraskara G®ihya S™tra, so much so, that H.M. King Nader Råm has not considered it to be a G®ihya S™tra in its own right. The beginning and ending S™tra of the Kåtyåyana G®ihya S™tra are as follows:

aq k;Ty;yngOÁsU]m( p[qm' k;<@m( p[qm; ki<@k; aq;to gOÁSq;lIp;k;n;' kmR 1 p·rsmuÁop≤lPyoÆLl: yoı»Ty;>yu+y;…¶mupsm;/;y d≤=,to b[˜;snm;StIyR p[,Iy p·rStIy;RqRvd;s;¥piv]e ’Tv; p[o=,I" s'S’Ty;qRvTp[o+y inÂPy;Jym…/…≈Ty pyR…¶ k⁄y;Rt(2 ßuv' p[tPy sMmOJy;>yu+y pun" p[tPy ind?y;t( 3 a;Jymu√;SyoTpUy;ve+y p[o=,Ií pUvRvdupymn;Nk⁄x;n;d;y s…m/oå>y;/;y pyuR+y ju¸y;t( 4 EW Ev iv…/yR] Kv…cıom" 5 1 ***concluding S™tra***

aq;toå/ITy;å/ITy;inr;kr,m(--p[tIk˘ me ivc=,'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

281

…j◊; me m/u y√c" k,;R>y;' .U·r xu≈uve m; Tv˝ h;WIR" ≈ut' m…y ) b[˜," p[vcnm…s b[˜," p[itœ;nm…s b[˜koxo å…s sinr…s x;≤NtrSyinr;kr,m…s b[˜kox' me ivx ) v;c; Tv; ipd/;…m v;c; Tv; ipd/;…m itœ p[itœ Svrkr,k<#‰*rsdNTy*œ‰g[h,/;r,o∞;r,x·ˇ_mR…y .vtu a;Py;yNtu meå©;in v;Kp[;,í=u" ≈o]' yxo blm( ) yNme ≈utm/It' tNme mn…s itœtu itœtu 23 16 îit ≈ImTk;Ty;ynivr…cte gOÁsU]e tOtIy' k;<@÷ sm;¢m( 41

There are a number of supplements to the Påraskara G®ihya S™tra and Kåtyåyana G®ihya S™tra. These include the Íhaucha S™tra, Íhråddha S™tra, and Bhojana S™tra. The beginning and ending of the Íhaucha S™tra is as follows:

aq x*csU]m( p[qm; ki<@k; aq;t" x*civ…/' Vy;:y;Sy;mo dUr' gTv; dUrtr' gTv; yDopvIt˝ixr…s d≤=,k,Re v; /OTv; tO,mNt/;Rn' ’TvopivXy;hnITyuˇrto inx;y;' d≤=,t" ¨.yo" sN?yyo®dmu%o n;¶* n gosmIpe n;Psu n;ge vO=mUle ctu„pqe gv;' goœº devb[;˜,s…•/* dhn.U…m' .Sm;Cz•' dex' f;l’∑.U…m' c vjR…yTv; mU]purIWe k⁄y;Rt( )

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

282

***concluding S™tra***

an;…mk;©ëœºn ≈o]' kiniœk;©ëœºn n;….' hSten ˙dy' sv;R©ë≤l…." ixr îTys* svRdevmyo b[;˜,o deihn;…mTy;h îTyev' x*civ…/' ’Tv; b[˜lokÉ mhIyte b[˜lokÉ mhIyt îTy;h .gv;n( k;Ty;yn" 3 42

Beginning and ending of the Íhråddha S™tra is as follows:

aq ≈;ısU]m( p[qm; ki<@k; aprp=e ≈;ı' k⁄vIRtoı±v| v; ctuQy;| ydh" sMp¥et tdhb[;R˜,;n;mN}y pUveR¥uv;R ò;tk;nekÉ ytINgOhSq;Ns;/UNv; ≈oi]y;NvOı;nnv¥;NTSvkmRSq;n.;veåip ix„y;NTSv;c;r;n( i√nR¶xuKlivÆKl/Xy;vdNtivıp[jnnVy;…/tVyi©…êi]k⁄iœk⁄n≤%vjRminN¥en;m≤N]to n;p£;med;m≤N]to v;åNyd•' n p[itgOIy;Tò;t;HCz⁄cIn;c;Nt;Np[;Ñü%;nupveXy dwve yuGm;nyuGm;Nyq;x·ˇ_ ip}y EkìkSyodÑü%;N√* v; dwve ]In( ip}y Ekìkmu.y] v; m;t;mh;n;' cwv' tN]' v; vwêdeivkm( ) ***concluding paragraph*** nvmI ki<@k; aq k;My;in .v≤Nt ≤S]yoåp[itÂp;" p[itpid i√tIy;y;: S]IjNm;ê;StOtIy;y;' ctuQy;| =u{pxv" pu];" pçMy;' ¥Ut≤ıR" Wœ‰;' ’iW" s¢My;' v;…,Jym∑My;mekxf˘ nvMy;' dxMy;' g;v" p·rc;rk; Ek;dXy;' /n/;Ny;in √;dXy;'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

283

k⁄Py˝ ihr
Beginning and ending of the Bhojana S™tra is as follows:

aq .ojnsU]m( p[qm; ki<@k; vNde ≈I d≤=,;mUiˇR s≤∞d;nNdivg[hm( sv;Rq;Rn;' p[d;t;r' ixv;deh;/R/;·r,m( 1 aq;t" ≈uitSmOtIrnusOTy .ojniv…/' Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) a;c;Nto /OtoˇrIyvS]o /Ot≈I%<@gN/pu<@ô .ojnx;l;m;gTy gomyenop≤lPy xuc* dexe ivihtpI#;…/iœto inTyp[;Ñü%o n d≤=,;mu%o n p[TyÑü%o n ividÑü%" ) ***concluding S™tra***

a;h;rp·r,;m;q| Smre∫Im' c pçm…mTyudrm;l>y xYy;‹itç sukNy; c Cyvn' x£m…ên* .ojn;Nte Smre…•Ty' tSy c=unR hIyt îit SmOTv; mu%xu≤ı' k⁄y;R•mo .gvte v;jsney;y y;DvLKy;y nmo .gvte v;jsney;y y;DvLKy;y 3 îit ≈I k;Ty;ynoˇ_.ojnsU]' sm;¢m( 44

G. The Baudhåyana G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the The Baudhåyana G®ihya S™tra with the Dentate gyrus. Gray describes the Dentate gyrus as follows (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258):

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

284

The dentate gyrus is a crenated strip of cortex related inferiorly to the subiculum, laterally to the hippocampus and, more medially, to the fimbria of the fornix. The form of the fimbria is quite variable, but medially it is separated from the crenated medial margin of the dentate gyrus by the fimbriodentate sulcus. The hippocampal sulcus, of variable depth, lies between the dentate gyrus and the subicular extension of the parahippocampal gyrus. Posteriorly, the dentate gyrus is continuous with the gyrus fasciolaris and thus with the indusium griseum. Anteriorly, it is continued into the notch of the uncus, turning medially across its inferior surface, as the tail of the dentate gyrus (band of Giacomini), and vanishes on the medial aspect of the uncus. . . . The trilaminar cortex of the dentate gyrus is the least complex of the hippocampal fields, and its major cell type is the granule cell, found in the dense granule-cell layer. Granule cells (c.9 x 106 in the human dentate gyrus) have unipolar dendrites that extend into the overlying molecular layer, which receives most of the afferent projections to the dentate gyrus (primarily from the entorhinal cortex). . . . The polymorphic layer, or hilus of the dentate gyrus, contains cells that give rise primarily to ipsilateral association fibers. They remain within the dentate gyrus and do not extend into other hippocampal fields.45 The Baudhåyana G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text is divided into 47 chapters which are grouped in 4 Praßhnas. There is also a G®ihya Paribhå∑hå section which has two more Praßhna with a total of 23 chapters. There is a section called the G®ihya Íhe∑ha S™tra, consisting of 5 Praßhna, containing a total of 98 chapters. There is a Pit®medha S™tra consisting of 3 Praßhna containing a total of 45 Khaˆ∂a. And finally there is a Pit®medha Íhe∑ha S™tra containing 3 Khaˆ∂a. An interesting feature of the text is found at the end of each Praßhna: The beginning word of each of the chapters in that Praßhna is listed, first in ascending order of the chapters, and then in descending order. Bhattacharji describes the text as follows: [The first Praßhna of the G®ihya S™tra] begins with the wedding and ends with the last of the pregnancy rites. The second begins with the birth rite and continues with boyhood rites, Vedic study and householder’s rites. The [third] book treats various exicencies and their expiations, appeasement of snakes and demigods and certain rites for well-being. The last section lays down rules for various untoward

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

285

eventualities including omens and portents and rites for averting the evil arising from them. The main text is followed by a Paribhå∑hå section which deals with rules for ritual baths, auspicious days, and the five obligatory rites for a householder. After this comes what is called a G®ihya-Íhe∑ha, which takes up subjects not properly dealt with in the previous texts among which are rules for inauguration of images of Vi∑hû, Rudra, Durgå, Ravi, Jye∑hˇha, Vinåyaka, ⁄ßhåna and the offering to Nåråyana. . . . There are also two other supplementary texts on Pit®medha and Pit®medha Íhe∑ha by Baudhåyana.46 The beginning and ending of the G®ihya S™tra are as follows:

bo/;yngOÁsU]m( aq p[qmp[Xne p[qmoå?y;y" yqo Etıët" p[¸t a;¸tXxUlgvo b≤lhr,' p[Tyvroh,m∑k;hom îit s¢p;kyDs'Sq; îit 1 t; anu Vy;:y;Sy;m" 2 t] yıÜyte s ¸to yqwti√v;hSsImNto•yn' ceit 3 t] ih Ùyt Ev 4 aq yıëTv; dIyte s p[¸to yqwt∆;tkmR c*l' ceit 5 t] ih ¸Tv; dIyt Ev 6 aq yuıëTv; dTv; c;dIyte s a;¸t" yqwtdupnyn' sm;vtRn' ceit 7 t] ih ¸Tv; dTv; c;dIyte 8 aq yCzÀleWpU nIy gVy;in ≈py≤Nt s xUlgv" 9 aq yt( gOÁ;>yo devt;>yoå•' sNp[i£r≤Nt tt( b≤lhr,m( 10 aq yÎto Atu' p[Tyvroh≤Nt tt( p[Tyvroh,m( 11 aq ydek;∑k;y;m•' i£yte soå∑k;hom îit 12 ivv;h' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 13 ¨dgyn a;pUyRm;,p=e pu
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

286

vre….vRr;\ a….Wup[sIdt ) aSm;k…mN{ ¨.y' jujoWit yTs*MySy;N/so bubo/it îit 14 ytoånumN]yte anO=r; AjvSsNtu pNq; ye….Ss%;yo y≤Nt no vreym( ) smyRm; sM.go no innIy;TsÔ;SpTy\ suymmStu dev;" îit 15 aq yid d≤=,;….Ssh dˇ; Sy;•;] vr;n( p[ih,uy;t( 16 t;' p[itgOIy;t( p[j;pit≤S]y;' yx" îTyet;….„W≤@±.rnuCzNdsm( 17 sveR m;s; ivv;hSy 18 xu…ctpStpSy vjR…mTyekÉ 19 roih,I mOgxIWRmuˇre fLgunI Sv;tIit ivv;hSy n=];…, 20 punvRsU it„yo hStX≈o,; revtITyNyeW;' .UitkmR,;m( 21 y;in c;Ny;in pu
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

287

aòrc=urpitfl‰e…/ ≤xv; pit>ySsumn;Ssuvc;‹" ) jIvsUdeRvk;m; Syon; x' no .v i√pde x' ctu„pde îit 25 aqwn;mNtre, .[umu%e d.eR, sMm;i∑R îdmh' y; Tv…y pitfl‰læ+mSt;' inidRx;…m îit 26 d.| inrSy;p ¨pSpOXy;qwn;' d≤=,e hSte gO;it …m]oå…s îit 27 aqwn;' devyjnmud;nyit Ek…mWe iv„,uSTv;åNvetu ) √π ËjeR iv„,uSTv;åNvetu ) ]I…, v[t;y iv„,uSTv;åNvetu ) cTv;·r m;yo.v;y iv„,uSTv;åNvetu ) pç pxu>yo iv„,uSTv; åNvetu ) W@;ySpo'W;y iv„,uSTv;åNvetu ) s¢>yo ho];>yo iv„,uSTv;åNvetu îit 28 s¢m' pdmups©»Á jpit s%;ySs¢pd; ¨.Um s:y' te gmey' s:y;ˇem; yoW' s:y;Nme m; yoœ;" îit îit bo/;ynIygOÁsU]e p[qmp[Xne p[qmo å?y;y" ***concluding chapter***

aq ctuqRp[Xne √;dxoå?y;y" aq gOhSqSy iv¥;…qRn≤S]y;å>ynuD;tSy Atus'vexnivCzπdp[;y…íˇ' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 vsNto g[I„mo vW;RXxrıemNtÆXx≤xre,tuRk;lmuKTv; b[;˜,e>yo inved…yTv; cI,Rv[t;Nten;q p[doWe devyjnmud;nyit 2 aq devy-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

288

jnoLle%np[.OTy;…¶mu%;T’Tv; pKv;∆uhoit ySTv; ˙d; k°·r,; mNym;n"puroånuv;Ky;mnUCy ySmw Tv' su’te j;tved" îit y;Jyy; juhoit 3 aq;Jy;¸tI®pjuhoit m/uí Sv;h; ) m;/ví Sv;h; îTy;åNt;dnuv;kSy 4 iSv∑’Tp[.Oit …sım;/enuvrp[d;n;t( 5 apre,;…¶' a;JyxeWmudkxeW' co.* j;y;ptI p[;XnIy;t;m( 6 Atus'vexnivCzπdp[;y…íˇ' Vy;:y;tm( 7 îit bo/;ynIye gOÁsU]e ctuqRp[Xne √;dxoå?y;y" aq gOhSqSy ) aq gOhme…/n" ) aq yid homk;leWu ) aq;tSs¢p;kyD;n;m( ) aq p[;y…íˇ;in ) aq ivprIt ) aq g.;R/;n ) aqp;kyD;n;m( ) aq;>y;`;t" ) svR] Svym( ) svR] dvIR ) aq;tSs¢p;kyD;n;m( 12 aq;tSs¢p;kyD;n;m( ) svR] dvIR ) svR] Svym() aq;>y;`;t" ) aq p;kyD;n;m( ) aq g.;R/;n ) aq ivprIt ) aq p[;y…íˇ;in ) aq;tSs¢p;kyD;n;m( ) aq yid homk;leWu ) aq gOhme…/n" ) aq gOhSqSy 12 îit bo/;ynIye gOÁsU]e ctuqRp[Xn" 47

The beginning and ending of the Paribhå∑hå section are as follows:

aq bo/;yngOÁsU]e p·r.;W;p[;rM."

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

289

aq p[qmp[Xn" aq vw .vit j;ym;no vw b[;˜,≤S]….A≥,v; j;yte b[˜cyeR, AiW>yo yDen deve>y" p[jy; iptO>y" îit 1 b[˜cyR Vy;:y;Sy;m" 2 a; sm;vtRn;devwt∫vit n;cI,Rv[to b[˜c;rI .vit îit td;≈mo Vy;:y;t" 3 at Ë?v| b[˜cy| yen;nO,o .vit 4 Svd;r îTyekm( 5 mN]vTp[yog îTyekm( 6 At;ivTyprm( 7 aq;…/b[˜cyRm( ivv;he i]r;]m( 8 At* i]r;]m( 9 am;v;Sy;y;' p*,Rm;Sy;' ≈;ı' dTv; .uKTv; cwkr;]m( 10 prS]IWu idv; c y;v∆Ivm( 11 aGNy;/eye √;dxr;]m( 12 a;g[y,ei∑pxubN/;n;mupvsqe„vekr;]m( 13 Evmev sveRWu vedkmRsu 14 c;tum;RSyeWu s'vTsrm( 15 yq;p[yogmNyeWu yD£tu„vNy]t*R dI`Rs]eWu `mRv[teWu c 16 tdetıMy| puy" îit yD' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 18 Ek…v'xit s'Sqo yD AGyjuSs;m;TmkXzNdo….…íto g[;My;r
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

290

iv√;n( ivp[o nwtw" hInX≈oi]yo n;≈oi]ySy yD îit 24 tSm;d;c;r" p[m;,' s'Sq; a;c;r" i£y; sNtit·rit inTy;.;v;t( 25 tSm;¥" kín i£y;v;n( st;mnumt;c;rSs ≈oi]yEv ivDey" 16 aq;Pyud;hr≤Nt inWekÉ g.Rs'Sk;re j;tkmRi£y;su c iv…/vTs'S’t; mN]wíI,Rv[tsm;pn;" ≈oi]y; îit te Dey;Xx;%;p;r;í ye i√j;" iv…/vÌ»Á ye p;…,mOt* cI,Rv[t;vu.* mN]vTsMp[yoge t* b[;˜
aq i√tIyp[Xne s¢moå?y;y" Wœoåhin xucI ò;t* xuKlvS]* Svl˚ét* hiv„ym•m;d;y b[;˜,;n( susm;iht;n( 1 .oj…yTvops©»Á sus'tO¢eWu te„vq pu
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

291

p[;gg[eWu tu d.eRWu p[;iKxr;' tu inp;tyet( ctuhoRt;r' mns;ånu&Ty p[,ven;¸it.Rvet( 5 EvmuTp;idt;" pu]; n luPyNte kd;cn n luPyNte kd;cneit 6 îit bo/;ynIye gOÁp·r.;W;sU]e i√tIyp[Xne s¢moå?y;y" Wœºåhin xucI ò;t* ) yqo Et¥≤Tk≤çt( ) aq yid b[;˜," =i]yí smeTy;y;t;m( ) a…jn' v;sSsU]' v; i√tIym( ) aq vw .vit b[;˜, Ekhot; ) aq vw .vit invIt' mnu„y;,;m( ) aq v[Iih>yo yve>yí 7 aq v[Iih>yo yve>yí ) aq vw .vit invIt' mnu„y;,;m( ) aq vw .vit b[;˜, Ekhot; ) a…jn' v;sSsU]' v; i√tIym( ) aq yid b[;˜," =i]yí smeTy;y;t;m( ) yqo Et¥≤Tk≤çt( ) Wœoåhin xucI ò;t* 7 îit bo/;ynIye gOÁp·r.;W;sU]e i√tIy" p[Xn" sm;¢" 48

The beginning and ending of the G®ihya Íhe∑ha S™tra is as follows:

aq bo/;yngOÁxeWsU]p[;rM." aq;tSs¢p;kyD;n;muˇ_' tCz¯W' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 piv]kr,' p[o=,Is'Sk;r' p[,It;p[,yn' ßuKßuvs'm;jR-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

292

n…mit dxRp,U Rm;svˇU„,Im( 2 aq;…¶' p·rStIyR d≤=,en;…¶' b[˜;ytne d.;Rn( s'StIyoRˇre,;…¶' p[;gg[;n( d.;Rn( s'StIyR teWu p;];…, s;d…yTv; tU„,I' s'S’t;….r≤∫®ˇ;n;in p;];…, ’Tv; ivßSye?m' i]Ssv;R…." p[o+y d.eRsu d≤= ,to b[;˜,mupvexyit dxRp,U Rm;svˇU„,Im( 3 ariàm;];" p·r/y" a;{;R v; sTv‘;" 4 p[;dexm;];yJy p·rs…m/' ≤xni∑ 7 Sv;h;k;re,;>y;/;y;`;r;v;`;y;RJy.;g* p[itmu%' p[b;¸Gjuhoit 8 p[…sım;…¶mu%;T’Tv; ßuve, dVy;RmupStIyR pUv;R/;Rdvd;y;pr;/;Rdv¥Ty….`;ryit p[Tyn·ˇ_ 9 yid pç;vˇI Sy;∂Vy;RmupStIyR m?y;TpUv;R/;Rdvd;y;pr;/;Rdv¥Ty….`;ryit p[Tyn·ˇ_ 10 ßuv' inmOJyyq;devt' puronuv;Ky;mnUCy y;Jyy; juhoit 11 aqopStIyR s’duˇr;/;Rt( iSv∑’tmv¥it i√r….`;ryit n p[Tyn·ˇ_ 12 tmNt"p·r…/ s;d…yTv; yq;ª;tm;Jy;¸tIjuRhoit 13 Vy;˙it….rn;ª;teWu 14 aq iSv∑’tm;d;yoˇr;/RpUv;R/eR juhoit pUveR, v;]wt' me=,mnup[hrit 15 aqwnt( s'ß;ve,;….juhoit 16 dVy;Rmp a;nIy s'=;¬nmNt" p·r…/ innyit 17in…,RJy ßuc' in∑Py;≤∫" pUr…yTv; bih"

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

293

p·r…/ innyit 18 aq s…m/m;/;y jy;n( juhoit …cˇ' c Sv;h; îit 19 ]yodx ßuv;¸tIÛRTv;å>y;t;n;n( juhoit a…¶.URt;n;m…/pitSs m;vTviSmn( b[˜•iSmn( =]e Sy;m;≤x„ySy;' puro/;y;miSmn( kmR•Sy;' devÙTy;' Sv;h; îit 20 s¢dx ßuv;¸tIÛRTv; v;cyit iptr" ipt;mh;" preåvre tt;Stt;mh; îh m;åvt îit21 aq r;∑^.Oto juhoit At;W;@ét/;m;å…¶gRN/vRSs îd' b[˜ =]' p;tu tSmwSv;h; tSy*W/yoåPsrs ËjoR n;m t; îd' b[˜ =]' p;Ntu t;>ySSv;h; îit 22 Evmev;Nt;dnuv;kSy;Ny] .uvnSy pte s no .uvnSy pte îit 23 aq;m;Tyhom;n( juhoit y∂ºv; devhe@nm( îTyNt;dnuv;kSy p[TyOcm( 24 aq p[;j;pTy;' juhoit p[j;pte n Tvdet;NyNy" îit 25 aq s*iv∑’t' juhoit ydSy kmR," îit 26 ßuve, p·r/Inn·ˇ_ 27 aq p·rStr;TsmuÆLlPy;JySq;Ly;' p[StrväihRrKTv; tO,' p[iCz¥;¶;vnup[˙Ty tU„,I' tO,' c;q xMy; apoÁ p·rvInnup[hrit 28 m?ym' p·r…/mnup[˙Ty;qetr;vupsmSyit 29 aqwn;n( s'ß;ve,;….juhoit 30 aq;g[e,;…¶' yq;ª;t' ¸txeW' dTv; xeW' k⁄y;RdNy] ivv;hxeW;t( 31 tqwv p·riWçit aNvm'Sq;" p[;s;vI" îit mN];Nt;n( s•myit 32 aq p[,It;>yo idxo Vyu•yit dxRp,U Rm;svˇU„,Im( 33 b[;˜,' ivsOJy

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

294

xeW' p[;Xn;it a;yur…s ivê;yur…s îit 34 p[;Xy;p a;cMy j#rm….mOxit yt îN{.y;mhe SviStd; ivxSpit" îit √;>y;m( 35 xeWm….`;·rt' b[;˜,;y d¥;t( 36 n pà‰; hivW;' .=,mNy]oiCz∑m….sMp;t;….¸t;n;' ip<@d;nSy xeW' c nwv devt;¸txeWmNy] b[˜*dn;t( 37 îit bo/;ynIye gOÁxeWe p[qmp[Xne p[qmoå?y;y" ***concluding chapter***

aq pçmp[Xne a∑moå?y;y" aq;t ¨g[rqx;≤Ntiv…/' Vy;:y;Sy;m" b[;˜,r;jNyvwXy;n;' jNmidn;d;r>y Wi∑tms'vTsre jNmm;se jNmn=]e gomyen gocmRm;]' ctur≈' Sqi<@l' ’Tv; tSy;¶eyidG.;ge in„k√yen mOTyup[itm;' ’Tv; /;Ny;n;mup·r yq;iv…/ klxSq;pn' ’Tv; klxSyop·r p[itm;' pUjyet( apwtu mOTyu" pr'mOTyo m; nStokÉ i]yMbkm( îTy∑oˇrxtv;r' jipTv;åq devyjnoLle%np[.OTy;…¶mu%;Nt' ’Tv; pKv;∆uhoit i√rvd;nm( m; no mh;Ntm( îit puronuv;Ky;mnUCy m; nStokÉ îit y;Jyy; juhoit 1 aq;Jy;¸tI®pjuhoit ÒtsUˇ_Én p[TyOcm( 2 iSv∑’Tp[.Oit …sım;/enuvrp[d;n;t( 3 aq;g[e,;…¶' dUv;RStMbeWu ¸txeW' ind/;it 4 apre,;…¶' p[;Ñü% ¨pivXy mOTyusuˇ_pur;,yN]w" klxodkÉn;Tm;nm….iWCy;c;y| s'pJU y AiTvG>yo

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

295

yq;x·ˇ_ d≤=,;' dTv; b[;˜,;n( .ojyeidTy;h .gv;n( bo/;yn" 5 îit bo/;ynIye gOÁxeWsU]e pçmp[Xne a∑moå?y;y" aq;t ¨g[rqx;≤Ntiv…/m( ) aq;to vnSpithomm( ) aq;t" pçmI≈;ım( ) aq;toåkoR√;hm( ) aq;to mOiˇk;ò;niv…/m( ) aqtuRx;≤Ntm( ) aq ivv;ÁkNy; ) aq;…¶mu%p[yog" 8 aq;…¶mu%p[yog" ) aq ivv;ÁkNy; ) aqtuRx;≤Ntm( ) aq;to mOiˇk;ò;nm( ) aq;toåkoR√;hm( ) aq;t" pçmI≈;/m( ) aq;to vnSpithomm( ) aq;t ¨g[rqx;≤Ntiv…/m( 9 îit bo/;ynIygOÁxeWsU]e pçmp[Xn" îit bo/;ynIygOÁxeWsU]' sm;¢m( 49

The beginning and ending of the Pit®medha S™tra is as follows:

aq bo/;ynIy iptOme/sU]e p[qm" p[Xne p[qm" %<@" aq y¥;iht;…¶inRm;Rr' gCzTyuptpt; v; jry; v;å…¶œ Ev;Sy yjm;n;ytne xyn' kLpyeyujR`nen g;hRpTym( 1 tdSmw .=;n;hr≤Nt y;vdl' .=;y mNyte 2 s y¥u h;gdo .vit punreit ) y¥u vw p[wit n pySsm;…sçit 3

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

296

aqwtd…¶ho]' s;ymup£m' p[;trpvgR…mTy;c;y;R b[uvte 4 t]od;hr≤Nt--s yid s;y' ¸teå…¶ho]e p[ey;t( p[it’„y p[;tr…¶ho]' ju¸y;t( 5 aq yid p[;tr…¶ho]e ¸te k⁄xlm( 6 aqem* dxRp,U Rm;s* p*,Rm;Syup£m;vm;v;Sy;s'Sq;ivTy;c;y;R b[uvte 7 t]od;hr≤Nt--s yid p*,Rm;Sy;' vOˇ;y;' p[ey;t( p[it’„y;m;v;Sy;' yjet( 8 aq y¥m;v;Sy;y;' vOˇ;y;' k⁄xlm( 9 aq ySyo.e pvR,I aitp•e Sy;t;mitp•p[;y…íˇ' k⁄vIRt 10 aq y¥;tRSy;…¶ho]' iviCz¥et y¥Sy pu]o v;åNtev;sI v;ål' kmR,SSy;t( ) soåryvhreyu"--apo .=;n>yvhr≤Nt îit ivD;yte 12 aq;Sy;¶Inupin˙≥Tyem;' idx' ivh;r' kLp…yTv; d≤=,;p[;cIm(--EW; ih iptO,;' p[;cI idk™ îit ivD;yte 13 aqwnm;d;y;Ntre, ve¥uTkr* p[p;¥ j`nen g;hRpTymups;dyNTy] hivinRÂPyt îit 14 aqwnm;d;y;NtveRid p[;iKxrsm;s;dyNTy] hivr;s;¥tîit 15 aq g;hRpTy a;Jy' ivl;PyoTpUy ßu…c ctugORhIt' gOhITv; p[ets d≤=,' b;¸mNv;r>y;hvnIye juhoit 16

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

297

îit bo/;ynIye iptOme/sU]e p[qmp[Xne p[qm" %<@" ***concluding paragraph***

tOtIyp[Xne √;dx" %<@" aqwW;' pàI s'vTsrm/XxyIt =;rlv,m/um;'s;in koxI /;Ny' vjRyedNy] itle>y" 1 shßd≤=,o v; iptOme/StSy;/| k⁄vR≤Nt 2 Eten iv…/n; p[et' inhRrit pXyit pu]' pXyit p*]' n xU{eWu j;yte n;npTyo j;yte îTy;h .gv;n( bo/;yn" 3 îit bo/;ynIye iptOme/sU]e tOtIyp[Xne √;dx" %<@" aqwW;' pàI ) aq;t" p·rv[;jkSy ) aq;toåiSqs'cym( ) aq y¥NtvRàI ) a;iht;…¶íet( ) a;p¥uˇ_m( ) yqo Et• p[;Kc*¬;t( ) aq hwkÉ tU„,Im( ) îmMm¶e cmsm( ) yq; ipt; pu]' pXyit ) aq;?vyuR" p[;cIn;vItI ) aq;to i√j;tIn;' dhnkLpm( 11 aq;to i√j;tIn;' dhnkLpm( ) aq;?vyuR" p[;cIn;vItI ) yq; ipt; pu]' pXyit ) îmm¶e cmsm( ) aq hwkÉ tU„,Im( ) yqo Et• p[;c*¬;t( ) a;p¥uˇ_m( ) a;iht;…¶íet( ) aq y¥NtvRàI ) aq;toåiSqs'cym( ) aq;t" p·rv[;jkSy ) aqwW;' pàI 12 îit bo/;ynIye iptOme/sU]e

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

tOtIy p[Xn" sm;¢" iptOme/sU]' sm;¢m(

298

50

The Bodhåyana Pit®medhaßhe∑has™tra begins and ends as follows:

aq iptOme/xeWsU]e p[qm" %<@" aq;vix∑p[yoge mr,s'xye b[˜ s'SmOTy dx d;n;in ’Tv; ¨T£;≤Ntg;' d¥;t( 1 ***concluding S™tra***

vWeRvWeR mOtitq* ≈;ı' k⁄y;Rt( ) iv.ˇ_Stu pOq‘⁄y;Rt( p[its;'vtr;idk…mit 1 îit bo/;ynIye iptOme/xeWsU]e tOtIy" %<@" sm;¢' ced' bo/;ynIyiptOme/xeWsU]m( 51

H. The Kaußhika S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kaußhika S™tra with the Alveus. Gray describes the Alveus as follows: (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258.) The main mass of the hippocampus consists of gray substance, but on its ventricular surface is a thin white layer, the alveus, which is continuous with the fimbria hippocampi.52 The alveus is the layer of the hippocampus bordering the ventricles. It contains subicular and hippocampal pyramidal cell axons converging on the fimbria of the fornix.53 The Kaußhika S™tra belongs to the Íhaunaka recension of Atharva Veda. The text has fourteen chapters made up of a total of 141 mostly prose paragraphs. Bloomfield describes it as follows: It contains . . . all the salient practices, which are regularly treated in such

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

299

[G®ihya S™tra] texts, notably the sacraments (saµskåra), from conception, through marriage, to death; also the madhuparka, åjyatantra, etc. . . . [It includes also] an account, in s™tra form, of the practices implied along with the recitation of the individual Atharvan hymns: the recitation and the practice, or perhaps to speak more cautiously, some practice, of which the s™tra gives a later developed form. . . The Kaußhika is a mixture of two distinct kinds of s™tras, Atharva s™tras and G®ihya s™tras. 54 A small portion has been translated into English by Gonda.55 The beginning and ending of the text are as follows:

k*ixk sU]m( aq iv…/' v+y;m" 1 s punr;ª;yp[Tyy" 2 a;ª;y" punmRN];í b[;˜,;in c 3 t¥q; b[;˜,iv…/rev' kmR≤l©; mN];" 4 tq;Ny;q;R" 5 tq; b[;˜,≤l©; mN];" 6 td.;ve s'p[d;y" 7 p[muˇ_Tv;d(b[;˜,;n;m( 8 yD' Vy;:y;Sy;mo dev;n;' iptø,;' c 9 p[;Ñü% ¨p;'xu kroit 10 yDopvItI dev;n;m( 11 p[;cIn;vItI iptø,;m( 12 p[;gudGv; dev;n;m( 13 d≤=,; iptø,;m( 14 p[;gudgpvg| dev;n;m( 15 d≤=,p[Tygpvg| iptø,;m( 16 s’TkmR iptø,;' }yvr;/| dev;n;m( 17 yq;id∑' v; 18 a….d≤=,m;c;ro dev;n;' p[sVy' iptø,;m( 19 Sv;h;k;rvW$(k;rp[d;n; dev;" 20 Sv/;k;rnmSk;rp[d;n;" iptr" 21 ¨pmUllUn' bihR iptø,;m( 22 pvRsu dev;n;m( 23 p[ yCz pxëR…mit d.;Rh;r;y d;]' p[yCzit 24 aoW/Id;RNtu pvR…•Tyup·r pvR,;' lUTv; tU„,Im;˙Tyoˇrtoå¶e®ps;dy;it 25 n;…¶' ivpy;RvteRt 26 n;Ntr; yD;©;in

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

300

Vyvey;t( 27 d≤=,' j;nu p[.uJy juhoit 28 y; pUv;R p*,Rm;sI s;numityoRˇr; s; r;k; 29 y; pUv;Rm;v;Sy; s; …snIv;lI yoˇr; s; k⁄Ù" 30 a¥opvsq îTyupvTSy∫ˇ_mXn;it 31 m/ulv,m;'sm;WvjRm( 32 mm;¶e vcR îit s…m/ a;/;y v[tmupwit 33 v[ten Tv' v[tpt îit v; 34 b[˜c;rI v[Ty/" xyIt 35 p[;tÛRte å¶* kmR,e v;' veW;y v;' su’t;y v;…mit p;,I p[=;Ly;pre,;¶edR.;Rn;StIyR teWUˇrm;n@ëh' roiht' cmR p[;Gg[Ivmuˇrlom p[StIyR piv]e k⁄®te 36 d.;Rvp[…Cz•p[;Nt* p[=;Ly;nulommnum;i∑R iv„,omRns; pUte Sq îit 37 1 ***concluding S™tra***

aSt…mte i√sˇ;y;' i]sˇ;y;' c p;$v" aq t;vTk;l' .uKTv; pdoW ¨.e s'?ye 37 aPsu Xmx;ne xYy;y;m….xSte ≤%leWu c aNt"xve rQy;y;' g[;me c;<@;ls'yute 38 dugRN/e xU{s'≈;ve pw©π xBde .ye ®te vw/OTye ngreWu c 39 ainˇ_Én c v;ss; c·rt' yen mwqunm( xy;n" p[*!p;do c;g[topSq;≤NtkÉ guro" 40 ivrMy m;®te xI`[e p[Ty;rM.o iv.;iWt" sveR,;prr;]e, ivrMy p[Ty;rM.o n iv¥te 41 p*WI p[m;,m.[e„v;ptuR ced/Iy;n;m( 42

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

301

vW| iv¥uTStn…yàuv;R ivp¥te 43 i]r;]' Sq;n;sn' b[˜cyRmrs;x' copeyu" 44 s; t] p[;y…í·ˇ" s; t] p[;y…í·ˇ" 45 5 141 îTyqvRvede k*≤xksU]e ctudRxoå?y;y" sm;¢" îit k*≤xksU]' sm;¢m( 56

I. The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya G®ihya S™tra with the Fasciolar gyrus. Mercksource describes the Fasciolar Gyrus as “a posterior and upward extension of the dentate gyrus, forming a transitional area between the dentate gyrus and the indusium griseum.”57 Gray explains: The splenium of the corpus callosum overhangs the posterior ends of the thalami, the pineal gland and tectum, but is separated from them by several structures. On each side the crus of the fornix and gyrus fasciolaris curve up to the splenium. The crus continues forwards on the inferior surface of the callosal trunk, but the gyrus fasciolaris skirts above the splenium, then rapidly diminishes into the indusium griseum.58 The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The text is divided into two Praßhna, each with eight Paˇala. There are 29 Kaˆ∂ikå, or prose paragraphs, in the first Praßhna, and 20 Kaˆ∂ikå in the second Praßhna. There is also an Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya G®ihya Íhe∑ha S™tra, having one Praßhna with 8 Paˇala, and Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya G®ihya Kårikå having 260 verses, and dealing with the rites from Upanayana to the tonsure ceremony (Chaula). The first Praßhna of the G®ihya S™tra begins with the Upanayana ceremony and the various rites of student life. This is followed by marriage rites, and rites for beginning a household, including construction of a house. Pregnancy and rites for the young child are explained in Praßhna two, along with expiatory rites, and seasonal festivals.59 There is an English translation of

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

302

the G®ihya S™tra by Oldenberg.60 Beginning and ending sections of the G®ihya S™tra are as follows:

aq ihry;m;Tm•…¶' gOhITv; 15 ¨ˇre,;…¶' d.;RNs'StIyR yq;q| {Vy;…, p[yun·ˇ_ 16 aXm;nmht' v;so…jn' m*ÔI' me%l;' i]vOt;' b[;˜,Sy Jy;' r;jNySy;vIsU]' vwXySy bwLv' p;l;x' v; d<@÷ b[;˜,Sy nwYyg[o/' r;jNySy*duMbr' vwXySy 17 Ek…v'xitd;®…m?m' s'nÁTy;¸itp·rm;,' v; 18

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

303

tiSmHzMy;" p·r/Iin?m ¨ps'nÁit 19 dvI| kÀcRm;'JySq;lI' p[,It;p[,yn' yen c;qR" 20 s’dev sv;R…, yqoppd' v; 21 EtiSmNk;le b[˜; yDopvIt' ’Tv;p a;cMy;pre,;…¶' d≤=,;it£My b[˜sdn;ˇO,' inrSy;p ¨pSpOXy;…¶m….mu% ¨pivxit 22 sm;vp[iCz•;g[* d.*R p[;dexm;]* piv]e ’Tv;Nyen n%;iCzÊv;≤∫rnumOJy piv];NtihRte p;]ep a;nIyop…bl' pUr…yTvodgg[;>y;' piv];>y;' i]®TpUyoˇre,;…¶' d.eRWu s;d…yTv; d.wRripd/;it 23 itr" piv]' p[o=,I" s'S’Ty yq; purSt;iälvNTyuˇ;n;in ’Tv; ivW;ye?m' i]" sv;R…." p[o=it 24 dvI| in∑Py s'mOJy puninR∑Py ind/;it 25 s'm;g;Rn>yu+y;¶;v;d/;it 26 a;Jy' ivl;Py piv];NtihRt;y;m;JySq;Ly;m;Jy' inÂPyo dIco©;r;…•ÂÁ te„v…/…≈Ty;v¥oTy d.Rt®,;>y;' p[TySy i]" pyR…¶ ’Tvodgu√;Sy;©;r;Np[TyUÁodgg[;>y;' piv];>y;' punr;h;rm;Jy' i]®TpUy piv]e¶;v;/;y 27 1 ***concluding S™tra***

vwxMp;yn;y p≤l©ve it·ˇr;yo%;y;]ey;y pdk;r;y k*i<@y" sTy;W;!;y p[vcnktOR>y a;c;yeR>y AiW>yo v;np[Sqe>y Ë?vRreto>y EkpàI>y îit 1 yq;Sv' iptO>yo m;t;mhe>yí kLpy≤Nt 2 amu„mw kLpy;Mymu„mw kLpy;…m ) îTy;snen 3 amu'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

304

tpRy;Mymu' tpRy;…m ) îTyudkÉn 4 amu„mw nmomu„mw nm" ) îit gN/pu„p/UpdIpw" 5 amu„mw Sv;h;mu„mw Sv;h; ) îTy•en 6 amu' tpRy;Mymu' tpRy;…m ) îit flodkÉn 7 amu„mw nmomu„mw nm" ) îTyupSq;y 8 apre, veidm…¶mupsm;/;y Vy;˙itpyRNt' ’Tv; k;<@WIRÔuhoit k;<@n;m;in v; s;iv]ImOGved' yjuveRd' s;mvedmqvRved' sdsSpit…mit ) ¸Tv; p[qmen;nuv;kÉn;/Iyte ) k;<@;dINv; sv;Rn( ) jy;id p[itp¥te ) iSv∑’dNt' ’Tv; }yhmek;h' v; =My yq;?y;ym?yetVy…mit vd≤Nt 9 k;<@;Tk;<@;t( ) y; xten ) îit √;>y;mudk;Nte dUv;R ropy≤Nt 10 ¨d…/mU…mRmNt' ’Tv; p[;cImudIcI' v; idxm;t…mtor;…j' /;v≤Nt 11 p[TyeTy;pUpw" sˇ_⁄….rodneneit b[;˜,;' StpRy≤Nt 12 Ev' p;r;y,sm;¢* dUv;Rrop,od…//;vnvjRm( 13 inTymev;≤∫deRv;nOWI≤Nptø'í tpRy≤Nt tpRy≤Nt 14 20 a∑m" p$l" i√tIy" p[Xn" sm;¢" 61

Beginning and ending of the G®ihya Íhe∑ha S™tra are as follows:

aq sTy;W;!ivr…ctihr
’Cz^;it’Cz^* c;N{;y,…mit svRp[;y…í·ˇ" svRp[;y…í·ˇ" 10 îit sTy;W;!ihr
Beginning and ending of the G®ihya Kårikå are as follows:

gOÁk;·rk;" ) knk;Ô≤l….yuRˇ_ì" kLpsU]iv/;…y…." ) sml'’tmU/;Rn' sTy;W;!mup;Smhe 1

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

a;c;y;RNm;tOdˇ;dIn….vN¥ tdI·rt;n( ) aq;RNs'gOÁ gOÁSy i£yNte k;·rk; my; 2 k⁄y;Rdupny;dIin ivv;h;Nt;in l*ikkÉ ) aNyÌ»Áº·rt' kmR svRm*p;sneånle 3 n;m;idWu .veNt;idp[;xn;idWu k*tukm( ) g.oRp;kmRvjeRWu c*l;id„vïr' .vet( 4 y];•p·rveW" Sy;t];•whoRm î„yte ) n Sy;dupnySy;ååd* ti√…/" p[;gs'.v;t( 5 a];vd;n/moRåym;pUvRTv;• iv¥te ) a;`;rsihte p=e Sq;lIp;kÉ s ¨Cyte 6 ¨pney' smuTq;Py s'SpOXy mns; i£y;m( ) s'kLpmN]vcn' p·rd;n…mit SmOtm( 7 ***concluding verses***

aNv;r>y k⁄m;roåip a;sIn" p[;Ñü%o .vet( m;t; v; b[˜c;rI v; ¨dKsmupivXy c 256 bı±v; kÉx;Nk⁄m;rSy gOIy;Ìomye tt" ap a;nIy xIt„,;St;….r≤∫" p[d≤=,m( 257 ¨Ndn;idvpn;Nt' sVy' svR] pUvRvt( dev≈U·rit mN]e, p[vpe∂≤=,e tt" 258 yen;vpidit pí;¥] pUWeTyudˇ_t" yq; Jyo…git purt" ix%;' k⁄y;R¥q;iv…/ 259 in/;y gomye svoRåNy] pUWeit mN]t"

306

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

in%nedq goœº v; d.RStMb ¨duMbre 260 îTyupnyn;idc*l;Nt; gOÁk;·rk;"

307

63

J. The Våråha G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Våråha G®ihya S™tra with the Entorhinal cortex. The Entorhinal area is the area of cortex between the Prorhinal area and the Parasubiculum. (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258). Gray describes it as follows: The entorhinal cortex (Brodmann’s area 28) extends rostrally to the anterior limit of the amygdala. Caudally it overlaps a portion of the hippocampal fields. The more primitive levels of the entorhinal cortex (below the amygdala) receive projections from the olfactory bulb. More caudal regions do not generally receive primary olfactory inputs. The entorhinal cortex is divisible into six layers and is quite distinct from other neocortical regions. Layer I is acellular and plexiform. Layer II is a narrow cellular layer, which consists of islands of large pyramidal and stellate cells. These cell islands are a distinguishing feature of the entorhinal cortex. They form small bumps on the surface of the brain that can be seen by the naked eye (verrucae hippocampae), and provide an indication of the boundaries of the entorhinal cortex.64 Several fields in the temporal lobe neocortex, especially TF and TH of the parahippocampal gyrus, the dorsal bank of the superior temporal gyrus, the perirhinal cortex (Brodmann’s area 35) and the temporal polar cortex, together with the agranular insular cortex and posterior orbitofrontal cortex, all project to the entorhinal cortex. Projections to the entorhinal cortex also arise from the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex (Brodmann’s areas 9, 10, 46), the medial frontal cortex (Brodmann’s areas 25, 32), the cingulate cortex (Brodmann’s areas 23, 24), and retro-splenial cortex. . . . The entorhinal cortex projects to the perirhinal cortex as well as to temporal polar cortex, caudal parahippopcampal and cingulate gyri.65 The Entorhinal cortex is part of a circuit or loop through the Hippocampus, that employs a number of major limbic system components. Gray explains: The dentate gyrus is the point of entry into the hippocampal circuitry. It receives fibres via the perforant path projections from layers II and III of the entorhinal

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

308

cortex. The axons terminate in the outer two thirds of the molecular layer of the dentate gyrus, on the dendritic spines of granule cells. These cells project heavily via their mossy fibers onto the proximal dendrites of CA3 pyramidal cells. The latter give rise, via the so-called Schaffer collaterals, to a projection that terminates mainly in the stratum radiatum of the CA1 hippocampal field. The CA1 field projects heavily to the subicular complex, which projects to the entorhinal cortex.66 (p. 408) The Våråha G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Charaka branch of the Maitråyaˆ¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. It is divided into 17 Khaˆ∂a. Bhattacharji describes the text:67 The work is divided into seventeen Khaˆ∂as the first of which is a supplement to the Maitråyaˆ¥ya S™tras. The rest deals with the usual cooked oblations, rites for the newborn child, the initiation, on which it lays great stress stating that one should not teach, marry, perform a wedding or any other rite for the uninitiated. There follows a list of rites to be performed at initiation. Rules for Vedic studies with holidays and interruptions come next. After graduation comes the wedding rite . . . The other usual rites follow and lead to those for the pregnant woman. The last chapter lays down rules for offering oblations to the various directions and near the furniture for warding off evil influences. The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

v;r;hgOÁsU] nmo yDvr;h;y at" pr' p·r≤x∑; mw];y,IysU]Sy ) gOÁpu®W" p[;y…íˇ' anug[ihkh*tOkxuæLvkoˇre∑kvw„,v;?vyRivkc;tuhoRtOkgon;…mk;k⁄lp;drhSyp[itg[hymkvOWoTsgRp[Xn{iv,W$(k;r,p[/;ns;Ndeihkp[vr;?y;y®{iv/;nzNdoånu£m,I aNtKyRkLpp[v;siv…/p[;t®pSq;n.UtoTp·ˇ·rit √;…v\ xit"p·r≤x∑s':y;n;m( 1 gOÁeå¶* p;kyD;iNvhret( 2 hSvTv;Tp;kyD" ) ÓSv\ ih p;k îTy;c=te 3

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

309

dxRp,U Rm;sp[’it" p;kyDiv…/rp[y;joånnuy;joås;…m/enIk" 4 Sv;h;k;r;Nt' ing¥ hom;" 5 prtN]oTp·ˇ" d≤=,;¶;v;iht;…¶" k⁄vIRt x;l;¶;vn;iht;…¶" 6 gomyen gocmRm;]' cturß\ Sqi<@lmup≤lPyeWum;]' tiSmNl=,' k⁄vIRt--sTysdsIit pí;/;RdudIcI' le%;' ≤l%it ) AtsdsIit d≤=,;/;RTp[;cIm( ) /mRsdsITyuˇr;/;RTp[;cIm( ) m?ye √π itßo v; p[;cI" ) ËjRSvtIit d≤=,;m( ) pySvtITyuˇr;m( ) îN{;y Tveit m?y;√; ) sv;R" p[;dexm;}yo d.eR,;v≤l%et( 7 a≤∫" p[o+y;…¶\ s;dyit 8 p·rsmuÁ p·rStIyR pyuR+y tU„,I…m?m;bihR" s'nÁ g[;gg[wdR≤=,;rM.w®dKs\ SqwryuGmw/;Rtu…." StO,;it 9 d≤=,toå¶eb[R˜;,mupveXyoˇrt ¨dp;]m( 10 bihRW" piv]e k⁄®te 11 sm;vp[iCz•p[;Nt* d.*R p[;dexm;]* piv]e Sqo vw„,Vye îTyoW?y; …zÊv; iv„,omRns; pUte Sq îTy≤∫≤S]®NmOJy p[o=,I/RmwR" s\ S’Ty p[,It;' p[,Iy invRp,p[o=,s\ vpn…mit yq;devt' c®m…/…≈Ty ßuKßuv' p[mOJy;>yu+y;¶* p[t;Py--aiditr…s n;iCz•p]eTy;Jym¶;v…/≈yit 12 pOXne" pyoåsITy;Jy' invRpit 13 p·r v;jpit·rTy;Jy\ hiví i]"pyR…¶ kroit 14devSTv; sivtoTpun;iTvTy;Jy\ ≈pyit 15 tU„,I…m?m;bihRivRp[o+y yq;ª;tm….p·rStO,;it 16 p·r/INp·rd/;it 17 tejo

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

310

åsITy;Jymve+y pí;d¶edR.eR„v;s;dyit 18 a….`;yR Sq;lIp;kmuˇrt ¨√;syit 19 s’deve?mm;/;y vwÂp;=" p[qmo hom;n;m( 20 b[˜;,m;mN}y s…m/m;/;y;`;r;v;`;y;RJy.;g* ¸Tv; yuniJm Tveit c yoj…yTv; 21 n Áyuˇ_o hVy\ vht îit h ivD;yte 22 k;m' purSt;ıuro juhoit--yuˇ_o vh j;tved" purSt;idd\ iv≤ı i£ym;,\ yqeh Tv' ….WG.eWjSy;…s go¢; Tvy; p[stU ; g;mê' pU®W\ snem ) Sv;h; îit ) ivê; a¶e Tvy; vy' /;r; ¨dNy; îv ) aitg;hemih i√Wm( ) îit 23 n=]…mÇ; devt;\ yjet ) ahor;]mOtu' it…q' c 24 a….`;yR y∂ºvt\ h…v" Sy;ˇ∞ ju¸y;¥q;devt\ yq;devty; cc;R 25 a;kÀt;y Sv;h; ) a;kÀtye Sv;heit jy;Nju¸y;t( 26 p[j;pit" p[;yCzt( ) î@;m¶ îit iSv∑’tmuˇr;/RpUv;R/eR ju¸y;t( 27me=,mupy;m' piv]e c;Nv;d?y;t( 28 aNv¥ no anumit" ) aiNvdnumte Tvimit .U" Sv;heit p[;y…íˇ;¸tIí 29 Tv•o a¶e ) s Tv•o a¶e ) mno Jyoit" ) ]y‚S]\ xˇNtv" ) ay;í;¶eåsIit c 30 îm\ Stn' m/umNt' /y;p;' p[pInm¶e s≤llSy m?ye ¨Ts' juWSv m/umNtmU…mR \ smu{y\ sdnm;ivxSv ) Sv;h; îit p·r…/ivmokm….juhoit 31 a•pt îTy•Sy

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

311

ju¸y;t( 32 E/oåSye…/WImih Sv;heit s…m/m;d/;it ) s…md…s sme…/WImhIit i√tIy;m( 33 bihRiW pU,Rp;]' innyet( 34 EWoåv.Oq" 35 p;kyD;n;metˇN]m( 36 a;poihœIy;….m;RjR…yTv; pyuR=et 37 vro d≤=,; ) aê\ vr\ iv¥;t( ) g;…mTyekÉ 38 îit v;r;hgOÁº p[qm' %<@m( ***concluding paragraph***

aq vwêdev\ Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 t] s;y'p[;t"p[.OtIn;m…¶ho ]vTp·rsmuÁ p·rStIyR pyuR+y s;y' p[;t" Sy;idTyekÉ 2 hiv„ySy v; …sıSy vwêdev" 3 a¶ye som;y p[j;ptye /NvNtrye v;Sto„ptye ivêe>yo deve>yoå¶ye iSv∑’te c ju¸y;t( 4 av≤x∑Sy b≤l\ hret( 5 d…/m/u…m≈Sy;¶ye purSt;¥m;y d≤=,t" som;y pí;√®,;yoˇrt" m?ye v®,;yRm>y;' b[˜,e c ) a¶ye pO…qVyw v;yveåNt·r=;y sUy;Ry idve cN{mse n=]e>y îit 6 aŒ" k⁄M.dexe 7 aoW…/vnSpit>yo m?ydexe 8 k;m;y ) gOhpty îit xYy;dexe 9 …≈yw c 10 r=ojne>yoåNt" xr,e 11 a;k;x;yeit Sq≤lk;<@;>y;m( 12 tU„,I' in„£Myop·r xr,e 13 kVy' p[;Cy;m( 14 iptO>y" Sv/eTynuWjet( 15 nm îTyNte c 16 ye b[;˜,;" p[;Cy;' idXyhRNtu ) ye dev; y;in .Ut;in p[p¥e t;in me SvSTyyn' k⁄vRiNTvit ) d≤=,Sy;m( ) p[tICy;m( ) ¨ˇrSy;m( ) Ë?v;Ry;m( ) ye

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

312

b[;˜,; îit svR];nuWjet( 17 òehvdm;\ sm•' .oj…yTv; ivduWo b[;˜,;nqR…s≤ı\ v;cyet( 18 b≤lhr,Sy;Nte y; m;≤xW…mCzπˇ;m;sIt 19 gOhpit"--aom=ym•miSTvTy; h 20 ….=;' p[d;y s;y'.ojnmev p[;tr;xet( 21 ivp[o„y gOh;nupitœºt( 22 îit v;r;hgOÁº s¢dx' %<@m( îit v;r;hgOÁsU]m( 68

K. The Gobhila G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Gobhila G®ihya S™tra with the Prorhinal cortex. The Prorhinal cortex is an area of cortex adjacent to the Parasubiculum and Entorhinal cortex. The Gobhila G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Kauthuma recension of Såma Veda. The text has four Prapåˇhaka, further subdivided into 39 Kaˆ∂ikå or chapters. Bhattacharji says, “the rites covered in the Gobhila G®ihya S™tra are almost the same as in most other G®ihya S™tra, except that greater emphasis is laid on the Såman chanting student.”69 There is an English translation by Oldenberg: The first Prapåˇhaka deals with household rites including the full and new moon sacrifices. The second treats marriage, pregnancy rites and early childhood and student rites. In the third, vows and rules for student life are described, as well as seasonal festivals. Íhråddha and other miscellaneous rites are described in the fourth Prapåˇhaka.70 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

s;mvedSy go….lIygOÁsU]m(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

313

aq;to gOÁkm;Ry;/;Syn( 7 j;y;y; v; p;…,' …jÒ=n( 8 anugu¢; ap a;˙Ty p[;gudKp[v,' dex' sm' v; p·rsmuÁop≤lPy m?yt" p[;cI' le%;muÆLl:yodIcI' c s'ht;' pí;µ?ye p[;cI‚Stß ¨ÆLl:y;>yu=et(9 l=,;vOdeW; svR] 10 .U.uRv"Sv·rTy….mu%m…¶' p[,y≤Nt 11 p[ete v; gOhpt* prmeiœkr,m( 12 tq; it…qn=]pvRsmv;ye 13 dxeR v; p*,Rm;se v;…¶sm;/;n' k⁄vIRt 14 vwXyk⁄l;√;MbrIW;√;…¶m;˙Ty;>y;d?y;t( 15 aip v; b¸y;…jn Ev;g;r;d(b[;˜,Sy v; r;jNySy v; vwXySy v; 16 aip v;Ny' m…qTv;>y;d?y;t( 17 puy;d/;it j;y;y; v; p;…,' …jÒ=Njuhoit tm….s'yCzπt( 20 s Ev;Sy gOÁoå…¶.Rvit 21 ten cwv;Sy p[;tr;¸itÛRt; .vtIit 22 s;ym;¸Tyup£m Ev;t Ë?v| gOÁºå¶* homo iv/Iyte 23 pur; p[;du„kr,vel;y;" s;y'p[;trnugu¢; ap a;hreTp·rcr,Iy;" 24 aip v; s;ym( 25 aip v; k⁄M.;√; m…,k;√; gOIy;t( 26 pur;Stmy;d…¶'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

314

p[;du„kéTy;St…mte s;ym;¸it' ju¸y;t( 27 purody;Tp[;t" p[;du„kéTyoidtenuidte v; p[;tr;¸it' ju¸y;t( 28 1 ***concluding paragraph***

¨ˇrto g;' bı±vopitœºr•hR,; pu] ¨v;s seit 1 îdmh…mm;' p¥;' ivr;jm•;¥;y;…/itœ;mIit p[ititœm;no jpet( 2 y]wnmhR…y„yNt" Syu" 3 yd;v;hRyeyu" 4 iv∑rp;¥;~y;RcmnIym/upk;≥nekìkx≤S]‚S]veRdyern( 5 y; aoW/I·rTyudç' iv∑rm;StIy;R?yupivxet( 6 √* ceTpOqgOG>y;m( 7 p;dyorNym( 8 yto devI·rTyp" p[e=et 9 sVy' p;dmvneinj îit sVy' p;d' p[=;lye∂≤=,' p;dmvneinj îit d≤=,' p;d' p[=;lyet( 10 pUvRmNymprmNy…mTyu.* xeWe, 11 a•Sy r;i∑^rsITy~y| p[itgOIy;t( 12 yxoåsITy;cmnIym;c;met( 13 yxso yxoåsIit m/upk| p[itgOIy;t( 14 yxso .=oå…s mhso .=oå…s ≈I.R=oå…s …≈y' m…y /ehIit i]" ipbet( 15 tU„,I' ctuqRm( 16 .Uy Ev;….p;y xeW' b[;˜,;y d¥;t( 17 a;c;Ntodk;y g*·rit n;ipt≤S]b[URy;t( 18 muç g;' v®,p;x;‚d(√WNt' meå…./ehIit t' jÁmu„y co.yo®TsOj g;mˇu tO,;in ipbtUdk…mit b[yU ;t( 19 m;t; ®{;,;…mTynumN]yet 20 aNy] yD;t( 21 k⁄®teTy…/yDm( 22 W@± a~y;Rh;R .v≤Nt 23 a;c;yR A‚Tvk™ ò;tko r;j; ivv;Á" ip[yo åit…q·rit 24 p·rs'vTsr;nhRyeyu" 25 punyRDivv;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

315

hyoí punyRDivv;hyoí 26 10 îit ctuqR" p[p;#k" îit s;mvedSy go….lIygOÁsU]' sm;¢m(

71

L. The Ãgniveßhya G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the The Ãgniveßhya G®ihya S™tra with the Periamygdaloid cortex. According to Carpenter and Sutin,72 The periamygdaloid cortex is a region of the pyriform lobe; the pyriform lobe consists of the lateral olfactory stria, the uncus and the anterior part of the parahippocampal gyrus. The periamygdaloid area is a small region dorsal and rostral to the amygdaloid nuclear complex; it is intimately related to the prepyriform area. The amygdaloid nuclear complex is a gray mass in the dorsomedial part of the temporal lobe which underlies the uncus. The Ãgniveßhya G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Vådh™la branch of the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda.73 The text is divided into three Praßhna with a total of 26 chapters. Bhattacharji describes the text: The contents cover all the G®ihya rites from Puµsavana to the fourth stage in life, Sannyåsa. The last Praßhna contains miscellaneous subjects: besides Íhråddha and rites for enciente and the renouncer, it covers ancestor rites like the Nåråyaâ bali and the minor rite, Íhakala homa. A few rites treated in this work are not found elsewhere.74 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

a;…¶veXygOÁsU]m( p[qm" p[Xn" ¨pnyn' Vy;:y;Sy;m" s¢me vWeR b[;˜,mupnyItwk;dxvWeR r;jNy' √;dxe vWeR vwXym( ) vsNte b[;˜,' g[I„me r;jNy'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

316

xrid vwXym( ) a;pUyRm;,p=e puy;m;Tm;nm…¶' gOhITvoˇre,;…¶' d.;Rn( s\ StIy;Rq;Sy {Vy;…, p[yun·ˇ_ ) aXm;nmht' v;soå…jn' m*ÔIme%l;' i]vOt;' b[;˜,Sy Jy;' r;jNySy a;ivk˘ vwXySy bwLv' p;l;x' v; d<@÷ b[;˜,Sy nwyg[o/' r;jNySy*duMbr' vwXySywk…v'xitd;®…m?mmSyeTy;¸itp·rm;,' v; ) EtiSmn( xMy;" p·r/Iin?m ¨ps•Áit ) dvI| kÀcRm;JySq;lI' p[,It;p[,y' yen c;Ny;in p[o+yte t∞ s’devsv;‹…, yqoppd' v; EtiSmn( k;le b[˜; yDopvIt' ’Tv;p a;cMy;pre,;…¶' d≤=,;it£My b[˜;sn;t( tO,' inrSy;p ¨pSpOXy;…¶m….mu%mupivxit ) ***concluding paragraph***

aq svRp[;y…íˇ;in juhoit ) pl;xxklm*duMbrxkl' v;Ny;in y;…Dkxkl;in v;∑* gOIy;t( ) pç mh;yD;n(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

317

’Tv;…¶' p·rStIy;RJy' ivl;PyoTpUy smNt' p·rWecn' kroit ) purSt;dop·r∑;í Vy;˙it….ivR˙t;…." smSt;….í ¸Tv; xkl;n;Jyen;>yJy Ekìkxo ju¸y;t( dev’tSywnso åvyjnm…s Sv;h; ) mnu„y’tSywnsoåvyjnm…s Sv;h; ) iptO’tSywnsoåvyjnm…s Sv;h; ) a;Tm’tSywnsoåvyjnm…s Sv;h; ) aNy’tSywnsoåvyjnm…s Sv;h; ) yi∂v; c nˇ_' cwní’m tSy;vyjnm…s Sv;h; ) yi√√;\ sí;iv√;\ síwní’m tSy;vyjnm…s Sv;h; ) yTSvpNtí j;g[tíwní’m tSy;vyjnm…s Sv;h; ) Ens Ensoåvyjnm…s Sv;h; îit ) tqwv p·riWCy Evmev;hrh" s;y' p[;t" xklhom' ¸Tv; svRSm;t( ikæLbW;t( pUto .vit svRSm;t( ikæLbW;t( pUto .vtITy;h .gv;n;…¶veXy" 2 .uKTv;≈;ım( aqsvRp[;y…íˇ;in √π îTy;…¶veXygOÁsU]e tOtIyp[Xne √;dxoå?y;y" tOtIy" p[Xn" sm;¢" sm;¢' c;…¶veXygOÁsU]m( xu.' .Uy;t( 75

M. The Íhåãkhåyana G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Íhåãkhåyana G®ihya S™tra with the Mossy Fibre pathway. The Mossy Fibre pathway is one of three major afferent pathways running from the Subiculum to the CA1 region of the Hippocampus. (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258.)

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

318

The Íhåãkhåyana G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Våskala recension of Âik Veda.76 The text is divided into six chapters. Bhattacharji describes the text: The first section is devoted to the seven Påkayajñas, cooked oblations which are offered at the A∑hˇakås, Íhråvaˆ¥, Ãgrahåyaˆ¥, Caitr¥, Ãßhvayuj¥, and the seasonal Íhråddhas. . . . This is followed by the wedding rites. . . . Then follow the pregnancy and the birth-rites, as also the boy’s naming, first food, first tonsure and shaving. The second book begins with initiation and continues with Vedic studies and the student’s conduct. . . . In book III after the rites for the student we have directions for building a house which is followed by the release of a stud-bull, and the Íhråddhas. Book four begins with auspicious rites to the Manes for prosperity, the beginning of the academic session (Upåkaraâ) and the occasions for interrupting Vedic study. [The text] classifies seers into various groups. Book five continues with the Vaißhvadeva, the expiatory rites and rites for consecration of tanks, wells, ponds, and gardens. A list of omens, diseases, and various exigencies together with expiatory rites comes at the end of the book. The last book begins with directions for the Ãraˆyaka homa as the subject of svådhyåya, i.e. Vedic study, and closes with holidays and modes of Vedic recitation.77 There is an English translation of the text by Oldenberg.78 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

aq x;ƒ;yngOÁsU]m( aq p[qmoå?y;y" aq;t" p;kyD;NVy;:y;Sy;m" 1 a….sm;vTSyRm;no y];NTy;' s…m/m>y;d?y;ˇm…¶…mN/It 2 vwv;Á' v; 3 d;y;¥k;l EkÉ 4 p[ete v; gOhpt* Svy' Jy;y;n( 5 vwx;:y;mm;v;Sy;y;mNySy;' v; 6 k;mto n=] EkÉ 7 pu®pxuiv$(k⁄l;MbrIWb¸y;…jn;mNytmSm;d…¶…mN/It 8

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

319

s;y'p[;trekÉ 9 s;ym;¸its'Sk;roå?vyuRp[Tyy îTy;c;y;‹" 10 p[;t" pU,;R¸it' ju¸y;√w„,Vyc;R tU„,I' v; 11 tSy p[;du„kr,hvnk;l;v…¶ho]e, Vy;:y;t* 12 yDopvItITy;id c s'.vTsv| kLpwkTv;t( 13 tdPy;Û" 14 p;ks'Sq; h…v"s'Sq;" soms'Sq;Stq;pr;" Ek…v\ xit·rTyet; yDs'Sq;" p[k°itRt;" 15 1 ***concluding paragraph***

sivt; pí;t;ˇ∞=u·rTy;idTymupSq;y 1 Vy;vtRm;n;í p[Ty;yNTyupivx≤Nt 2 yq;p" x;Nt; îit x;≤Ntp;];dp a;d;y 3 pO…qVy;mvinnIy 4 yq; pO…qvITySy;….kWRNTyev' m…y x;My‚Tvit d≤=,eå\ se in≤lMpTyev' i√tIym( 7 Ev' tOtIym( 8 k;<@;Tk;<@;Ts'.v…s k;<@;Tk;<@;Tp[roh…s ≤xv; n" x;le .veit dUv;Rk;<@m;d;y mU/Rin ’Tv;…¶StOPytu v;yuStOPytu sUyRStOPytu iv„,uStOPytup[j;pitStOPytu ivÂp;=StOPytu shß;=StOPytu svR.Ut;in tOPyÆNTvit 10 sumNtujw…minvwxMp;ynpwl;¥;c;y;‹" 11 iptøNp[Ty;‚Tmk;n( 12 smu{' v îTypo innIy 13 v;mdeVy' jipTv; 14 yq;k;m' ivp[itœNte 15 yq;gmp[D;≈uitSmOitiv.v;dnu£;Ntm;n;divv;dp[itœ;d.y' x'.ve no aStu nmoåStu devAiWiptOmnu„ye>y" ≤xvm;yuvRpurn;my' x;≤Ntm·ri∑m≤=itmojStejo yxo bl' b[˜vcRs' k°itRm;yu"p[j;' pxU•mo nmS’t; v/RyNtu du∑ë-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

320

t;∂u®pyuˇ_;•‰Un;…/k;∞ svRSm;TSv‚St devAiW>yí b[˜ sTy' c p;tu m;…mit b[˜ sTy' c p;tu m;…mit 16 6 îit x;ƒ;yngOÁº Wœoå?y;y" sm;¢' ced' x;ƒ;yngOÁsU]m( 79

N. The Vådh™la G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vådh™la G®ihya S™tra with the Schaeffer Collateral pathway. The Schaeffer Collateral pathway is one of three major afferent pathways running from the Subiculum to the CA1 region of the Hippocampus. (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258.) Like the Ãgniveßhya, the Vådh™la G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Vådh™la branch of the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. Currently only a few fragments of the text are available. Because of the fragmentary nature of the text, it has not been included in the reading curriculum. Table of contents and beginning paragraph of chapter 12 are shown:

v;/UlgOÁsU]m( anu£msUcI a;v;p 1 Atus'vexn 2 c*lkr, 3 s;'vTs·rk;…, 4 ¨p;kmR 5 vwêdev 6 sm;vtRn 7 ivv;h 8 a∑k; 9 ¨pnyn 10 s;iv]v[t 11 ≈;ı 12 sip<@«kr, 13 a*p;sn;…¶ 14 dhniv…/ 15 aiSqsçyn 16 mOtb≤l .Utb≤l 17 Ekoi∂∑m( 18 iptOme/ 19 ≈;ı 20a;‚TvRJym( 21 goiptOyD ¨pvsqgiv 22 ¨pv;s 23 piv]dxhivs( 24

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

321

sdSyTv 25 a¢oy;Rm 26 ßucor;d;n 27 ¨p;vhr, 28 p[;y…íˇ 29 x;≤NtmN] 30 dhn 31 p;]yog 32 p·r…/kmR 33 x;≤NtmN] 34 punr;/ey 35 mh;pu®Wp·rcy;R 36 v;/Ul gOÁsU] ≈;ı 12 jNm≈utxIl;c;rvt ò;tk;n…/gMy Sv;/Iv;s…•mN]yet;¥ êo v; ≈;ı' k·r„y îit ) ’„,p=;Nte p[ytoåpr;ê ’tx*cXxuKlv;s; yDopvItI d.eRSv;sIn Sv;gt…mit b[yU ;ˇt" p;¥m~yRm;cmnIyç dTv; itlwrvk°y;RpsVye v;so yDopvIte ’Tv; d.oRpKlO¢e„v;sneWu p[;co vodIco v;yuGm;Nb[;˜,;nups'gOÁopvexyed;sn…mTyNv;r>y tt ò;t;nu≤l¢eWu bıp[itsreWu b[;˜,eWu swkte Sqi<@le itlodk˘ svRsur…. ’Tv; b[;˜,eWu dTv; x•o devI·rit b[;˜,;nnuD;pye≤Tptøn;v;h…y„y îTyuxNtSTveTy;v;Á piv];NtihRteWu b[;˜,eWUdk…•nyeÌN/pu„p/UpdIpwrl'’Ty s Òtm•m;d;y;¶* k·r„yeit k⁄ivRit b[;˜,wrnuD;toå…¶xr,e d≤=,;…¶mupsm;/;y d.;Rn;StIyR d≤=,;g[;Np·r/I'Stto å…¶k;y| k⁄y;Rd;m;Tyo y¥upyuˇ_SsvoR n ceˇ‚SmNy;" p[;cI·rit ¸Tv;•Sy ju¸y;t( ) som;y iptOmte Sv/; nmo

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

322

ym;y;'…grSvte iptOmte Sv/; nmoå¶ye kVyv;hn;y Sv/; nmeit ¸txeW' b[;˜,e>yo ddd'guœmUlmups'gOÁed' iv„,uivRc£meTynuidxe∆;nU inWJy .Um* iptøN?y;yNmns; itlx;k sUp.=m;'s’srp;ys;pUpl;jcU,Rm/u…m≈' sÒtm•…m∑to d¥;dnsUyub[;R˜,;N.uÔ;n;•;•gu,doW;n….vded(b[;˜,;í n;NyoNy' SpOxeyunR p[.Ut…mit b[yU urNy] hSts'D;>ys( ) so„m ih y;vd•' y;v∞ n p[xSyte t;vdXn≤Nt iptroåNy] d…/mUlfl.=p;nkÉ>y" piv];Ô≤lp;…,mR/u v;t; At;yteit jpeTpiv]N/mRx;S]ÔpeÌ;y]Imp[itrqç m?ye jpeˇtStO¢;N’Tv; Svidt…mit pOÇ; xeWmnuD;Py p[’t;•ivk;r' k⁄yuRr( ) iv∑r;'S]I…•d?y;T]I
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

323

p·rhre• idv; mwqun' v[je¥id v[jeTKlIb; aLpvIy;R aLp;yuWí j;yNte n h vw iptø,;NtNtumuCzIN¥;≤Tptr" ipt;mh;íwv tqwv p[ipt;mh;" pu]Ô;tmudI=Nte ipPpl' xk⁄n; îv m/um;'sen hVyen pys; p;ysen v; as* d;Syit nStOi¢' vW;Rsu c m`;su c sNt;nv/Rn' pu]mu¥uˇ_' iptOkmR…, devb[;˜,s'yuˇ_m….nNd≤Nt pUvRj;" iptrStSy tu„y≤Nt vO∑‰ev ih ’WIvl;" yÌy;Sqo dd;Ty•Nt∞;nNTy;y kLpte kLpt îit 80

O. The Jaimin¥ya G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Jaimini G®ihya S™tra with the Perforant pathway. The Perforant pathway is one of three major afferent pathways running from the Subiculum to the CA1 region of the Hippocampus. (Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258.) Jaimin¥ya G®ihya S™tra belongs to Såma Veda. The text has a P™rva section with 24 Kaˆ∂ikå, and an Uttara section with nine Kaˆ∂ikå. There is an English translation by Caland: The P™rva section details the general outline of the domestic rites, pregnancy, child and student rites, Vedic study, rites for the conclusion of student life, wedding, regular evening and morning sacrifices, and the sacrifice of the first fruits. The Uttara section describes the Íhråddha, the A∑hˇaka, funeral ceremonies, the rite of the house, the allaying of prodigies, the recitation of the Veda during a fast, and the appeasing of the planets.81 The beginning and ending of the text are as follows:

aq jw…mingOÁsU] aq;toå…¶' p[,e„yNp[;gudk™ p[v,m>yu+y Sqi<@l' l=m'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

324

k⁄y;RNm?ye p[;cI' re%;muÆLl:yodIcI' c s'iht;' pí;·ˇßo m?ye p[;Cyoå>yu+y;…¶' p[itœ;pye∫À.uRv" Sv·rit l=,;vOdeW; svR];q;t" p;kyD;NVy;:y;Sy;mo ¸toå¸t" p[¸t" p[;≤xt îit teW;mek;¶* homo inTye yDopvItodk;cmne dxRp,U Rm;stN];" SvtN]; v; d≤=,toå¶e" pU,Rp;]mupind/;it ßuv' c;p;' pU,Rmuˇrtoå¶e·r?m;bihRdRevSy Tv; sivtu" p[sveå…ênob;R¸>y;' pU„,o hSt;>y;' p[o=;mIit p[o≤=tmupKlO¢' .vit s’¥juW; i√StU„,I' %;idr" p;l;xo ve?mStdl;.e iv.ItkitLvkb;/kinMbr;jvO=xLmLyrlud…/Tqkoivd;rXle„m;tkvj| svRvnSptIn;…m?m" k⁄x;l;.e xUktO,xrxIyRbLbjmutvnlxu<#vj| svRtO,;in xuKl;" sumnsSt;s;ml;.e jp;Âpk;k⁄Tq;.<@«k⁄r<@kvj| gN/vTyo v; svRv,;Rítß a;Jyp[’tyo .vNTyU/Ny' v; v;Á' v; d…/ v; pyo v; pí;d¶er;cmn' i]r;c;me‚d(√" p·rmOjTe s’dupSpOxeTp;d;v>yu+y ≤xrí xIWRy jptId' .Ume.Rj;mh îd' .{' sum©l' pr; spà;Nb;/Sv;NyeW;' ivNd te /n…mit vSvNt' r;i]íeidm'StoMyen tOcen;…¶' p·rsmUhed;¥y; v; i]" p[Strmups'gOÁ p[itidx' p·rStO,;it d≤=,purSt;dup£My;g[w-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

325

mURl;in z;dyNpí;√opStIyoRlpr;…j>y;muphre∂≤=,oˇr" s ‚N/" 1 ***concluding verses***

ihr
P. The Bhåradvåja G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Bhåradvåja G®ihya S™tra with the Alvear pathway. The Alvear pathway runs from the Entorhinal cortex to the CA1 region of the Hippocampus. Please refer to Figure 27, p. 258. The Bhåradvåja G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text has 81 Kaˆ∂ika or prose paragraphs, grouped in three Praßhna. 83 According to Bhattacharji, “It covers all the usual G®ihyas™tra topics beginning with wedding through the householder’s rites, special exigencies, expiations, death, funeral and obsequial rites.”84 There is an English translation by ProoyeSalomons.85

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

326

The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

.;r√;jgOÁsU]m( ¨pnyn' Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) s purSt;dev s'.;r;nupkLpyte p;l;x…m?m' %;idrm*duMbr' vwk˚t' vwt√é=Iy;mev dvI| kroit Tv‚Gbl;' mUld<@;ràI' ctur©ël' …bl' kroit ) s;dy;c;·rk˘ kmeRit ivD;yte ) g.;R∑meWu b[;˜,mupnyIt g.wRk;dxeWu r;jNy' g.R√;dxeWu vwXy' g.RnvmeWu b[;˜,…mTypr'v;s;'…s sm;mnNTyw,ey' b[;˜,o vsIt r*rv' r;jNyo bSt;…jn' vwXyo yd…jn' /;ryed(b[˜vcRvO√;so /;ryeT=]' v/Ryedu.y' /;yRmu.yovORı‰; îit ivD;yte vsNte b[;˜,mupnyIt g[I„me hemNte v; r;jNy' xrid vwXy' vW;Rsu rqk;r' ≤x≤xre v; sv;Rn;pUyRm;,p=e pu
aq pvR
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

327

mh;yD;n;' mno Jyoit·rit √yoS]y;,;' ctu,;| pç;n;' v; Wœp[.Oit itßStNtumtIÛRTv; ctßo v;®,IjRpeidm' me v®, tÊv; y;…m y≤∞≤ı te y≤Tk˘ ceTy; nvr;];dt Ë?vRm; dxr;];∞tßoå>y;vitRnIÛRTv; k;yRSt;Ntumtí®" ò;tkSy;ip homiv…zˇ;vuˇ_' p[;¢e p[;j;pTye tSy iv…z·ˇStSy tu punr;/ey' mno JyoitStNtumtI" punSTv;idTy; ®{; îit c pU,;R¸it' p[tIy;det;m¶‰up`;teWu svR] ≤S]y;íwv' hom;….gmnSq;lIp;kÉWu sveRW;mNtto Vy;˙tI·rit …sı' nm a;c;yeR>yo nm a;c;yeR>y" 21 îit .;r√;jsU]e tOtIy" p[Xn" sm;¢" .;r√;jIy' gOÁsU]' sm;¢m( 86

Q. The Ãpastamba G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Ãpastamba G®ihya S™tra with the Indusium griseum, also called the Supracallosal gyrus. Please refer to Figure 25, p. 258, where it is labeled “Gyrus supracallosus.” Gray describes the Indusium griseum: The supracallosal gyrus (indusium griseum; gyrus epicallosus) consists of a thin layer of gray substance in contact with the upper surface of the corpus callosum and continuous laterally with the gray substance of the cingulate gyrus. It contains two longitudinally directed strands of fibers termed respectively the medial and lateral longitudinal striae. The supracallosal gyrus is prolonged around the splenium of the corpus callosum as a delicate lamina, the fasciola cinerea, which is continuous below with the fascia dentata hippocampi. The dentate gyrus which may be considered as a modified part of the hippocampus is partially separated from the gyrus hippocampus by the hippocampal fissure and from the fimbria by the fimbrio-dentate sulcus; it is intimately connected with the hippocampal gyrus and the hippocampus. When followed backward the dentate gyrus separates from the fimbria at the splenium, loses its incisions and knobs, and as the fasciola cinerea passes over the splenium

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

328

onto the dorsal surface of the corpus callosum and spreads out into a thin layer of gray substance known as the indusium, which can be traced forward around the genu of the corpus callosum into the gyrus subcallosus. The white matter of the indusium known as the medial longitudinal striae (nerves of Lancisi) and the lateral longitudinal striae, are related to the indusium somewhat as the cingulum is to the gyrus cinguli. Axons from the indusium pass into the longitudinal striae, some running forward and others backward while some after entering the medial longitudinal stria, pierce the corpus callosum to join the fornix. Some of the fibers which pass forward extend around the front of the corpus callosum and the anterior commissure, then curve downward, according to Cajal, to enter the corpus striatum where they join the olfactory projection-path. Other fibers are said to arise in the parolfactory area, the gyrus subcallosus and the anterior perforated substance (diagonal band of Broca) and course backward in the longitudinal striae to the dentate gyrus and the hippocampal region. The indusium is usually considered as a rudimentary part of the rhinencephalon.87 Although the indusium griseum is on the upper surface of the Corpus Callosum, in close vicinity to the Cingulate gyrus and thus apparently part of the “Mesocortex,” (Please refer to Figure 24, p. 255), it is classified as belonging to the Archicortex because morphogenetically, the Indusium is actually the dorsal half of the Hippocampus that became separated from the Hippocampal gyrus by the dramatic expansion of the Corpus Callosum. Smythies explains: “In the human brain the enormous posterior growth of the corpus callosum from its origins just behind the hippocampal commissure carries the hippocampus on its dorsal surface (and reduces this pattern to the vestigial induseum griseum and longitudinal striae) and the fornix on its ventral surface.” 88 The Ãpastamba G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text is divided into 23 Khaˆ∂a or 8 Paˇals. There is also a G®ihya Íhe∑ha.89 The text begins with general rules for household rites. Rules for selection of the bride, the wedding and marriage follow. The Upanayana and rules for student life are described, as well as the ceremonial bath for the end of student life. There is a chapter on the proper reception of guests with the Samåvartana rite. Pregnancy rites, rites of birth and early childhood are then described. The building of a house, and rites to

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

329

cure specific diseases are explained. The last Paˇala describes the monthly Íhråddha ceremony, and various expiatory rites. According to Bhattacharji, “The Ãpastamba G®ihya S™tra . . . differs very little from the other G®ihya S™tra texts and lays greater emphasis on the lighting of the domestic fire and on rites connected with the bride.”90 There is an English translation by Oldenberg.91 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

a;pStMbgOÁsU]m( aq p[qm" p$l" p[qm" %<@" aq km;Ry;' piv];>y;' i]®TpUy sm' p[;,w˙≥Tvoˇre,;…¶' d.eRWu

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

330

s;d…yTv; d.wR" p[Cz;¥ 20 b[;hm,' d≤=,to d.eRWu inW;¥ 21 a;Jy' ivl;Py;pre,;…¶' piv];NtihRt;y;m;JySq;Ly;m;Jy' in®PyodIcoå©;r;…•ÂÁ te„v…/…≈Ty Jvlt;åv¥uTy √π d.;Rg[e p[TySy i]" pyR…¶ ’Tvodgu√;Sy;©;r;Np[TyUÁodgg[;>y;' piv];>y;' punr;h;r' i]®TpUy piv]e anup[˙Ty 22 îTy;pStMbIye gOÁp[Xne p[qm" %<@" ***concluding paragraph***

]yoiv'x" %<@" d≤=,en flIkr,mui∑muˇry; ¸Tv; gTvoˇr;' jpet( 1 £⁄ımuˇr;>y;m….mN]yet iv£o/o .vit 2 as'.vePsu" preW;' SqUl;!;·rk;jIvcU,;Rin k;r…yTvoˇry; su¢;y;SsMb;/ ¨pvpet( 3 …sı‰qeR b.[um]U e, p[=;lyIt 4 …sı‰qeR ydSy gOhe py;' i]" p[sVy' p·riWçet( 6yen pq; d;skmRkr;" pl;yerNtiSm…•
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

331

a;¸tIÛRTv; jy;id p[itp¥te 9 p·rWecn;Nt' ’Tv;å….mOte>y ¨ˇry; d≤=,toåXm;n' Mp·r…/' d/;it 10 îTy;pStMbIye gOÁp[Xne ]yo…v'x" %<@" sm;¢Stq;å∑mí p$l" sm;¢oåym;pStMbgOÁsU]m( 92

R. The Vaikhånasa G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vaikhånasa G®ihya S™tra with the Medial Longitudinal Striae. Gray describes the Medial (and Lateral) Longitudinal Striae as the white matter of the Indusium griseum (Please refer to Figure 25, p. 256, where the Indusium griseum is labeled Supracallosal gyrus): The supracallosal gyrus (indusium griseum; gyrus epicallosus) consists of a thin layer of gray substance in contact with the upper surface of the corpus callosum and continuous laterally with the gray substance of the cingulate gyrus. It contains two longitudinally directed strands of fibers termed respectively the medial and lateral longitudinal striae. . . . The white matter of the indusium known as the medial longitudinal striae (nerves of Lancisi) and the lateral longitudinal striae, are related to the indusium somewhat as the cingulum is to the gyrus cinguli. Axons from the indusium pass into the longitudinal striae, some running forward and others backward while some after entering the medial longitudinal stria, pierce the corpus callosum to join the fornix. Some of the fibers which pass forward extend around the front of the corpus callosum and the anterior commisure, then curve downward, according to Cajal, to enter the corpus striatum where they join the olfactory projection-path. Other fibers are said to arise in the parolfactory area, the gyrus subcallosus and the anterior perforated substance (diagonal band of Broca) and course backward in the longitudinal striae to the dentate gyrus and the hippocampal region.93 The Vaikhånasa G®ihya S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text has 7 Praßhna with a total of 120 Khaˆ∂a or prose paragraphs. Bhattacharji describes the text as follows: The Vaikhånasa G®ihya S™tra in seven Praßhnas subdivided into Khaˆ∂as begins with the ritual bath and rinsing of the mouth for the four stages of life (Ãßhramas). This is followed by fire rites, ancenstral rites, initiation, graduation

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

332

and the rest of the rites for the student and the householder. . . . Rites for sanctification of the house is followed by the usual domestic rites from gestation to Íhråddha. This last, together with funerary rites receives special attention. Then follow untoward eventualities, and portents which require expiation.94 There is an English translation by Caland.95 The beginning and ending paragraphs of the text are as follows:

vw%;nsgOÁsU]m( aq inWek;ids'Sk;r;NVy;:y;Sy;m" Atus'gmng.;R/;npu'svnsImNtiv„,ub≤lj;tkmoRTq;nn;mkr,;•p[;xnp[v;s;gmnip<@v/Rnˇ*@kopnynp;r;y,v[tbN/ivsgoRp;kmRsm;vtRnp;…,g[h,;nITy∑;dx s'Sk;r;" x;rIr;" yD;í √;…v'xt( b[˜yDo devyD" iptOyDo .UtyDo mnu„yyDíeit pç;n;mhrhrnuœ;n' Sq;lIp;k a;g[y,m∑k; ip<@iptOyDo m;…s≈;ı' cw}y;êyujIit s¢ p;kyD;" aGNy;/eym…¶ho]' dxRp,U Rm;s;v;g[y,ei∑í;tum;RSyo inÂ!pxubN/" s*];m,Iit s¢ hivyRD;" a…¶∑omoåTy…¶∑om ¨KQy" Wo@xI v;jpeyo åitr;]oå¢oy;Rm îit s¢ somyD; îTyete cTv;·r'x∫v≤Nt inWek;d; j;tk;Ts'S’t;y;' b[;˜
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

333

s'Sk;rwretw®peto inymym;>y;mOiWkLp" s;©ctuveRdtpoyo g;ÎiW" n;r;y,pr;y,o in√≥N√o muin·rit s'Sk;rivxeW;TpUv;RTpUv;RTprovrIv;init ivD;yte 1 ***concluding paragraph***

gOhSqSy*p;sne iviCz•e yid p[;,oT£;≤NtvORı;nuD;tStTpu]" ≈oi]y;g;r;d…¶m;˙Ty s'S’t;y;' .uiv Vy;˙it…." s'Sq;Pyopitœºt ju∑o dmUn; îTyqwn' p·rsmUÁ p·rStIyR pyuR+y;Jy' ivl;PyoTpUy ßu…c ctugORhIt' gOhITv; s¢ Vy;˙tIÛRTv; punrip pUvRvÌ»hITv; pUv| dev;" p[;,;p;n;ivit √;>y;' m; Tv; vO=* s'b;…/∑;' m; Tv; vO=* s'b;/eq;…mit √;>y;m¶eå>y;vitR•¶e ai©r îit √;>y;' punÂj;R sh rYyeit √;>y;my;í;¶e b[;˜, Ekhoteit √;>y;' £me, ctugORhIt;in ¸Tv; punítugOhIt' gOhITv; mh;Vy;˙tIí ju¸y;devm…¶muTp;¥ pUvoRˇ_Én iv…/n; dhn' k⁄y;Rt( 9 s¢m" p[Xn" sm;¢" sm;¢' gOÁsU]m( 96

Vaikhånasa Mantrapraßhna. There is a supplementary text belonging to the Vaikhånasa recension that should be mentioned, called the Vaikhånasa Mantrapraßhna. The name Mantrapraßhna refers to a class of texts that provide all the Mantra that are recited in the various Yagya performances. In the G®ihya and Íhrauta texts describing the various Yagya performances, the Mantra that are to be recited are sometimes given in full, but at other times they are referred to by name, or are referred to

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

334

by their Prat¥ka, which is the first word of the Mantra. The pandit, knowing the Saµhitå by heart, easily fills in the full Mantra that he is supposed to recite. The Mantrapraßhna simplifies this process somewhat by listing the Mantra by themselves. Especially interesting is the feature that often these lists of Mantra contain Mantra that are not contained in the Saµhitå. When that is the case, the Mantrapraßhna is not a mere convenience, but an essential text for the performance of the Yagya. The existence of the Mantrapraßhna was originally inferred by scholars when they cames across Prat¥ka of Mantras that could not be located in any existing Saµhitå. Mantrapraßhna are known also for Ãpastamba and Ãßhvalåyana recensions.97 The first and fourth paragraphs of the fifth Praßhna of the Vaikhånasa Mantrapraßhna are as follows:

≈I vw%;nsmN]p[Xn;∑kÉ pçmp[Xnp[;rM." ip[yt;' .gv;iNv„,uSsvRdeveêro h·r" ≈IvTs;˚Sshß;=Sshßcr,Stq; 1 …jtNte pu<@rIk;= nmSte ivê.;vn nmSteåStu ˙WIkÉx mh;pu®W pUvRj 2 .vNtu sv;R" pu
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

335

®{' .Ut…mN{' ym' m;tøSsom' vIrm[u{…mN{' ym' vO=eN{;n( 1 vnSpit>yo nm" 2 k⁄m;rI>yo nm" 3 vO=r;je>yo nm" 4 svRk;mp[de>yo nm" 5 a¶ye Sv;h; 6 vnr;j;y Sv;h; 7 som;y Sv;h; 8 4 98

S. The Kauthuma G®ihya S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kauthuma G®ihya S™tra with the lateral longitudinal striae. Gray describes the medial and lateral longitudinal striae as the white matter of the indusium griseum. As seen above, the indusium griseum “contains two longitudinally directed strands of fibers termed respectively the medial and lateral longitudinal striae. . . . Axons from the indusium pass into the longitudinal striae, some running forward and others backward while some after entering the medial longitudinal stria, pierce the corpus callosum to join the fornix.”99 (Please refer to Figure 25, p. 256, where the indusium griseum is labeled “supracallosal gyrus”.) The Kauthuma G®ihya S™tra belongs to Såma Veda. It consists of 21 Khaˆ∂a or prose paragraphs. According to Bhattacharji, with regard to Kauthuma G®ihya S™tra “only some fragments are found and these show that the text is more of an auxiliary Paddhati nature than a proper G®ihya S™tra.”100 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

k*qumgOÁm( ≈IrStu k*qumgOÁm;r>yte aq;t" p[;y…íˇ;in ) aq;t" £m;,;' v+ye gOhSqo v; b[˜c;rI v; gOhSqo gOÁ;¶* b[˜c;rI l*ikk;¶* gOh-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

336

Sqei„vitcr,en p·rcr,e v; b[˜cyRiviCz•e l*ikkÉå¶* p[;tr;¸itpUvRk˘ nw…m·ˇk˘ k;yRm( ) punr;/;ne vjRyet( s;ymup£My t;Tk;≤lkp[;y…íˇ;pˇ* ceˇ;Sy;' t] k;yRm( ) p*,RMy;¸Ty;mtIt' ceˇ;>y;' tˇTk⁄yuR" pvR,; ceTs'kLPy k;yRm( td.;ve s¥" k⁄y;Rd( apre, dx| Tve p[;y…í·ˇ" i]r;]' pçr;]' v; dxr;]; ˇ;" p[;y…íˇpUvRyD' yjete t;vu.* pv;R s'kLPy tIt* t;…m∑* t√t( t] yid lop' v; t' m;m;s;dtIt' v; punr;/;n' k⁄yuR" ) p[;y…íˇ;qeR p[;j;pTy' v; tdU?v| ivxeWí gOÁ;¶* gOÁ;…¶' yid SpxeRˇ']' t meko v; k;yoR mN];,;' t;vu.* b[yU ;ˇ']I tTs…m/* s'yuˇ_' gOn( nvroh,' tt" kmR p[;,;y;m' k⁄yuR" ) tU„,I' p·riWCy mN]e,;>y Cy;‹¸Ty;mnqR Strs( t;vu.* √* s…m/m;/;y .WTkmIRmN]' b[yU ;t( ) a] pupStU„,I' k;y| pàI v; îit sm;n' sm;rop,' k⁄yuR" ktRVy; îit vwtdu .vit Svy' Svy' p[;y…íˇI tt Ë?v| ivxeW' Sy;d( aNy;¶* SvymmSm∫;ivtq;…c y…D¥•evroh,' k⁄y;| a;idsm;rop,' p[D;tStdm…¶muTsOJy .U.uRv" Sv·rit b[yU ;" ) tU„,I' itœn( n gCzπt( td…¶pTy;' t p[;¶* kmR.[∑; SvgOÁ;¶* Svy' Svy' p[;y…í·ˇr( at Ë?v| ivxeW' Sy;d( a;JytN]wrn;rop,' ceTsm;rop,' p[D;t" punr;r>yp[;tr;¸Ty;id p[pd;NtpyRNt' y≤Tk˘…cTkmR yid lop' Sy;t( p[;tr;¸itíeTp[;y…íˇ…mTyekÉ NyUnkm;Rid

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

337

punr;vO·ˇ" p[/;n;dU?v| p[;y…í·ˇr( at Ë?v| ivxeWí®tN]e, tto Vy;:y;t; p[;gudKp[v,e dexe t] Sq'…@lmup≤l y;t( 1 ***concluding paragraph***

îTyete v; v;…mTyu∞w" b[Uy;t( p[d≤=,en jl' vI+y;idTym;idTymxˇ_íet( p[ity;me s’t( ì$k;vs;n' v;t;Stmy;d( .vit tt" s;y m;jR…yTv; km<@lunodk˘ gOhITv; m!' p[ivxet( ) p[;Ñü%opivXy tt ¨dk˘ pITv; ne]yo" p[=;Ly;cMy tt" p[;,;p;n* √* tvXy;vIy* √* r;jnx;x;ih,;>y;' gv;' v[te √π îd' iv„,u" W@éc' devv[t;in EteW;' pun" punr>y;so n itœ' v;vs;n' n in{' {;c îit √;dxr;]mupv;so Á;prev;d(v[t' n y;cte ) √;dxr;]' n;XnIy;t( îTyev' √;dxr;]mupv;s" ’Êv;it’Tò îit SmOtm( ) yvä»hSpitb[R˜; t;vTSvgeR lokÉ mhIyte n c punr;vtRte n c punr;vtRte 21 k*qumgOÁ' sm;¢m( 101

These are the 19 G®ihya S™tra texts which are presented by H.M. King Nader Råm. There are a handful of additional G®ihya S™tra texts whose manuscripts have been noticed by scholars, including Sambavya,102 Íhaunaka, Kapi∑ˇhala, Phulla, Paithinasi103 and Gåyatravidhåna G®ihya S™tra.104 There are also a number of G®ihya S™tra texts that have been referenced in subsequent literature, but are not currently extant. Bhattacharji mentions Íhåkalya, Aitareya, Bahv®ca, Bhårav¥ya, Påråßhara and Paiãgi for Âik Veda and Våjavåpa for Íhukla Yajur Veda.105

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

338

The 19 G®ihya S™tra that H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the different component parts of the archicortex give a detailed and comprehensive vision of the architecture of Natural Law governing the quality of transformation alike in the human physiology, in the household,106 and in the universe. H.M. King Nader Råm explains that “the mechanics of Kalp, transformation, allow one Law of Nature to be expressed differently, taking into account different environmental values, background, etc.”107 This concludes the discussion of the 19 G®ihya S™tra correlated with the 19 components of the archicortex. III. ÍHRAUTA S¤TRA The Íhrauta S™tra are texts on major sacrifices. The major sacrifices are of three kinds, according to Bhattacharji, 1) the Nitya rites that are compulsory daily and seasonal rites such as the Agnihotra and Darßhap™râmåsa; 2) Naimittika rites to be performed on special occasions; and 3) Kåmya rites for the fulfillment of specific desires.108 In the physiology, the Íhrauta S™tra correspond to the Subcortical structures of the limbic system, the fine detailed structure of brain architecture that connects the unconscious autonomic nervous system functions in the brain stem with the conscious faculties of perceiving, thinking and acting, organized in the cerebral cortex. The subcortical part of the limbic system is located between the brain stem and the corpus callosum, and includes the Amygdala, the Septal nuclei, the Mamillary body, the Habenular nucleus, parts of the Thalamus and Hypothalamus, as well as various tracts and connecting structures, such as the Fornix. (Please refer to Figures 30 and 31). A. The Íhåãkhåyana Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Íhåãkhåyana Íhrauta S™tra with the Mammilary body. (Please refer to Figure 31.) The

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

339

Mammilary body lies at the terminal end of the Fornix, connected by the fornix to the Fimbria and Hippocampus. Gray describes the Mammilary body (corpora mammilare): The mamillary bodies are smooth, hemispherical, pea-sized eminences, lying side by side, anterior to the posterior perforated substance, each with nuclei enclosed in white fascicles derived largely from the fornix. 109 The medial mammillary nuclei, which form the bulk of the mammillary bodies, are very prominent. The composition of a lateral mammillary nucleus is controversial, though a group of larger cells can be distinguished along the lateral border of the medial mammillary nucleus. Lateral to this lies the tuberomammillary nucleus, which gives rise to widespread axons that diffusely innervate the entire cerebral cortex, hypothalamus and brain stem.110

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

340

The Íhåãkhåyana Íhrauta S™tra is one of two Íhrauta S™tra belonging to Âik Veda. It belongs to the Vå∑hkala recension. The text has 18 chapters. Hillebrandt describes the text: The Íhåãkhåyana Íhrauta S™tra is one of the two great S™tra works thus far known which treat of the duties of the Hotar and his assistants at the celebration of the so-called Íhrauta or Vaitånika sacrifices, beginning with the

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

341

Darßha-p™râ-måsa I∑hˇi and ending with the complicated Sattras or ‘sacrificial sessions.’111 The text describes the Aßhvamedha or horse sacrifice as a national festival involving people from all walks of life.112 There is an English translation by Caland.113 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

x;ƒ;yn ≈*t sU] yD' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 s ]y;,;' v,;Rn;m( 2 b[;˜,=i]yyovwRXySy c 3 as'yuJy iv/Iym;n' s;/;r,m( 4 s'yog;√‰vitœte 5 yDopvItI devkm;R…, kroit 6 p[;cIn;pvItI ip}y;…, 7 a;cmnp[.Oit yen;…/kr,en s'yuJyet n ten Vy;vteRt 8 n c Vyvey;t( 9 îTy;vOt;' l=,; 10 ¨∂ºx" 11 ¨ˇrt ¨p;c;r" 12 p[;õ™n(y;y;in devkm;R…, 13d≤=,;Ny;y;in ip}y;…, 14 a;sInNy;y' b;◊»Cym( 15 vcn;TSq;nm( 16 hot; c k⁄y;Rdn;id∑m( 17 i]p[.Oit„vOGg,eWu p[qmoˇmyo≤S]vRcnmNy] jpe>y" 18 ¨ˇmSy c CzNdom;nSyo?vRm;idVyÔn;TSy; n aok;r" Plut≤S]m;]" xuı" 19 mk;r;Nto v; 20 t' p[,v îTy;c=te 21 avs;ne mk;r;Nt' sveR„vOGg,eWu spuronuv;KyeWu 22 ten;/RcRmuˇrSy;" s'/;y;vSyit p;d' v; tTs'tt…mTy;c=te 23 s sveRW;mOGg,;n;' /moR ye kmR-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

342

s'yogen co¥Nte 24 ivdUre„vip kmRSvNtre, p[qm;' p·r/; nIy;' c s't;n;qoRå/RceRn k;Õit 25 a/RcRNy;y;ícR" 26 vcn;dNyt( 27 ¨∞wNy;‹yíMveRd" 28 vcn;dup;'xut; 29 s'Sv;rNy;yt; c xBd;n;m( 30 EkSvy| c 31 ¨∞wStr;' p[,v" puronuv;Ky;y;" 32 p[,v;¥;Jyo∞wStr;m( 33 ¨∞wStr;' vW$(k;r" 34 smo v; 35 p[,vo yeyj;mho vW$(k;r" s'p[wW;" p[wW;ío∞w®p;'xuh…v"Wu 36 devt;n;m/ey' cop;'xu ingmSq;neWu 37 .U.uRv îit purSt;∆p" 38 ye yj;mhe v*Wloj" sh" sh aoj" Sv·rTyup·r∑;idit ctu∑y' sv;Rsu y;Jy;su 39 anuy;jeWu tu yeyj;mho n;‚St 40 anuvW$(k;re c 41 Pluten y;Jy;Nten vW$(k;rSy s'/;nm( 42 aPluten v; 43 tdup;'xuy;je n;‚St 44 1 ***concluding paragraph***

aq p[;t®dyjIymitr;]mupy≤Nt 1 y Ev;s* p[;y,Iy" s ¨dynIy" 2 t] sv;RNkrò;Ns'b;?y p[e„yit mw];v®," 3 te p[qmm;s' dI≤=tvsn;in v; vste 4 t;in nvr;];y ind/it 5 ¨ˇm;y c m;s;y 6 aqetr;Nm;s;n…jn;in v;{Rvsn;in v; vste 7 t‚Sm≤Nh s'æSqt km;R…, i£yNte 8 n prSm; aô vstIvrIgOR≤Nt 9

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

343

n;itp[wWm;h 10 ju◊it s…m∑yjU'iW 11 yNTyv.Oqm( 12 i£yteåv.OqkmR 13 te yid yD;g;r¯.;R+ym;,; .vNTy;d/t Ev p[ƒ…m≈m( 14 y¥u /+yNto å]wv Sy;t( 15 p[D;toåv.Oq" 16 p[D;todynIy; 17 p[D;t;nUbN?y; 18 tSyw vp;y;' s'æSqt;y;' d≤=,;/;Rpr;/;R√πde" ik˘…cTp·r…≈Ty t‚Sm•upivXy kÉxXm≈U…, v;py≤Nt 19 sv;R…, c rom;…, n%;in in’NtyNte 20 ò;≤Nt 21 al'k⁄vR≤Nt 22 ¨„,IW;NpyRSyNTy; kÉx;n;' s'jnn;t( 23 p·rxeWmnUbN?y;yw s'Sq;py≤Nt 24 ˙dyxUl;Nt; s'itœte 25 tSy;' s'æSqt;y;' yq;s'p[k°,Rm¶INsm;roPy;Ntre, c;Tv;loTkr; ¨pin„£;m≤Nt 26 ¨ˇrt ¨ıt;vo≤=teåGNy;ytn;in ’Tv; gomyenop≤lPy m…qTv;¶I‚Nv˙Ty p[,It;" p[,Iy pU,;RÛtIÛRTv; pOqgudvs;nIy;….yRjNte y a;iht;¶yo .v≤Nt 27 aq yeån;iht;¶yo gOhpitmev t ¨p;ste 28 s k;mmev pOœxmnIyen yjet 29 k;m' n yjet 30 yid tu yjetwt Ev;Sy s≤T], A‚Tvj" Syu" 31 te>ySt∂¥;¥∂ºy' Sy;t( 32 a] s'vTsr" s'itœte 33 aq;to ho];,;mev mIm;'s; ) tSy;tStSy;t" 34 24 îit x;ƒ;yn≈*tsU]eå∑;dxoå?y;y" sm;¢" îit x;ƒ;yn≈*tsU]' sm;¢m( 114

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

344

B. The Ãpastamba Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Ãpastamba Íhrauta S™tra with the Diagonal Band of Broca. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Carpenter and Sutin describe the Diagonal Band as follows: At the point of division of the olfactory tract into lateral and medial olfactory striae, there is a rhomboid shaped region, bounded by the olfactory trigone and the optic tract, known as the anterior perforated substance. This region is studded with numerous perforations made by entering blood vessels. The posterior border of this region, near the optic tract, has a smooth appearance and forms an oblique band, the diagonal band of Broca.115 Gray describes the connections of the Diagonal Band: Cholinergic neurons in the horizontal limb nucleus of the diagonal Band of Broca, part of the basal forebrain cholinergic system, project to the granule cell layer and also to the glomerular layer. Other afferents to the granule cell layer and the glomeruli arise from the pontine locus coeruleus and the mesenchaphalic raphe nucleus.116 Dorland’s Medical Dictionary points out further that it is “a band of nerve fibers . . . which is continuous caudolaterally with the periamygdaloid area and rostromedially passes above the optic chiasm to blend with the paraterminal gyrus.”117 Ãpastamba Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text has 30 Praßhna. According to Bhattarcharji, It deals with all the major sacrifices including late rites like Sautråmaî, Våjapeya, Råjas™ya, Aßhvamedha, Puru∑hamedha and Sarvamedha. A separate Paribhå∑hå section together with patriarch lists, a collection of mantras and the Hot® priests office are also treated here. It . . . is virtually a complete Kalpas™tra, for it has a G®ihyas™tra, a Dharmas™tra and a Íhulbas™tra.118 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

a;pStMbIy' ≈*tsU]m( ≈Ig,ex;y nm" aq;to dxRp,U Rm;s* Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 p[;tr…¶ho]' ¸Tv;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

345

Nym;hvnIy' p[,Iy;¶InNv;d/;it 2 n gt…≈yoåNym…¶' p[,yit 3 dev; g;tuivdo g;tu' yD;y ivNdt ) mnsSpitn; deven v;t;¥D" p[yuJyt;…mit jipTv; mm;¶e vcoR ivhve∑ÆSTvTy;hvnIymups…mNıe ) ¨ˇry; g;hRpTymuˇry;Nv;h;yRpcnm( 4 itsO….‚StsO….v;R 5 ¨ˇm;' tu jped;hvnIye v;d?y;t( 6 Vy;˙tI….rNv;/;nmekÉ sm;mn≤Nt 7 s'nyt" pl;xx;%;' xmIx;%;' v;hrit b¸p,;| b¸x;%;mp[itxu„k;g[;msuiWr;m( 8 y' k;myet;pxë" Sy;idTyp,;| tSmw xu„k;g[;m;hredpxurev .vit y' k;myet pxum;NSy;idit b¸p,;| tSmw b¸x;%;m;hreTpxumNtmevwn' krotIit ivD;yte 9s;y; p[;CyudIcI p[;gudIcI v; .vtIWe TvojeR Tveit t;m;æCzn·ˇ 10 aip veWe TveTy;æCznÊyUjeR Tveit s'nmyTynum;i∑R v; 11 îit p[qm; k‚<@k; ***concluding paragraph***

¨ˇmSy;=rSy ivk;rmek a;Û" 1 a…/k" Sy;idTyprm( 2 ivD;yte c ) AcmuKTv; p[,*Typr;muKTv; p[,*Ty…/kÉ punretdupp¥te s'ttmOc; vW$(krotIit c t√¥;Jy;y; a…/ vW$(kroit 3 apgUyR vW$(krotITyu∞wv;Rd" xBdSy 4 y' k;myet p[m;yuk" Sy;idit tSyo∞wrpgUyR in≤%d…•v vW$(k⁄y;Rt( ) y' k;myet p;pIy;NSy;idit nIcwStr;' tSy y;Jy;y; vW$(k⁄y;Rt( ) y' k;myet vsIy;NSy;idTyu∞wStr;'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

346

tSy y;Jy;y; vW$(k⁄y;Rt( ) nvsIy;• p;pIy;init sm' tSy y;Jy;y; vW$(k⁄y;Rt( ) ¨∞w" £*ç…mv vW$(k⁄y;RTSvgRk;mSyeit ivD;yte 5 blIy Aco vW$(krotIit t√t( 6 y;' devt;' yjeˇ;' mns; ?y;yeTpur; vW$(k;r;TSvgRk;mSyeit ivD;yte 7 vW$(’Ty p[;yoå….vh;Myoj" sh" sh aoj" ) v;GvW$(k;r nmSte aStu m; m; ih'sI·rTyet√W$(’te jpit ) v;GvW$(k;r nmSte aStu m; m; ih'sI·rit v; 12 a©ëlI muKTv; …mWe p[;,;yeit mu%dexmU?vRmuT’„yo jeRåp;n;yeTyv;cIn' inyCzit 13 av;nre@;mvˇ;m©ëlI….inRgOÁ n mui∑' kroit 14 mu%…mv p[Tyup◊yte 15 y' k;myet;pxë" Sy;idit pr;cI' tSyeTyuˇ_m( 16 pd;>y;sp[itWe/Stu 17 ivD;yte ce@opÙteit tTpr;cI ) ¨pÙteit tTp[tIcI 18 a;?vyRv Ev;toåNy;in km;R…, hotur;ª;t;in .v≤Nt ) ¨pdex;idtr;,Itr;…, 19 îit ctudRxI ki<@k;

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

îit ctu…v|x" p[Xn"

347

119

C. The Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra with the Amygdaloid Complex. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Amygdaloid Complex: The amygdaloid nuclear complex is made up of lateral, central and basal nuclei, which lie in the dorsomedial temporal pole, anterior to the hippocampus, and close to the tail of the caudate nucleus. Collectively the nuclei form the ventral, superior and medial walls of the tip of the inferior horn of the lateral ventricle. The amygdala is partly continuous above with the inferomedial margin of the claustrum. Fibres of the external capsule and substriatal gray matter, including the cholinergic magnocellular nucleus basalis (of Meynert), incompletely separate it from the putamen and globus pallidus. Laterally, it is close to the optic tract. It is partly deep to the gyrus semilunaris, gyrus ambiens and uncinate gyrus. . . .A consistent feature of the intrinsic connections among amygdaloid nuclei is that they arise primarily in lateral and basal nuclei, and terminate in the central and medial nuclei, which suggests a largely unidirectional flow of information. . . . The organization of the extensive subcortical and cortical interconnections and connections of the amygdala are consistent with a role in emotional behavior. It receives highly processed unimodal and multimodal sensory information from the thalamus, sensory and association cortices, and olfactory information from the bulb and piriform cortex, and visceral and gustatory information relayed via brain stem structures and the thalamus. Its projections reach widespread areas of the brain, including the endocrine and autonomic domains of the hypothalamus and brain stem.120 The Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra has 14 Prapåˇhaka. Bhattacharji describes the text: The Ãr∑heyakalpa, also known as Maßhaka Kalpas™tra is a work in fourteen Prapåˇhakas of which the last three constitute the K∑hudras™tra. The author is Maßhaka. . . . It covers eight sacrifices, mainly varieties of the Soma ritual, giving lists of Såmans to be chanted at these sacrifices; there is also a section of Pråyaßhcittas. . . . There is a close correspondence with the Gråmageya, Ãraˆya, ¤ha and ¤hya gånas which appear to follow the order of Såmans as laid down by the Ãr∑heyakalpa. The text is quite compact and avoids repetition. The K∑hudras™tra seems to have acquired its name from the shortness of its texts. . . .121 The K∑hudras™tra is often taken as a text in its own right. Sharma describes the K∑hudras™tra:

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

348

The K∑hudras™tra, unlike the Ãr∑heya which presents but a most monotonous list of Såmans to be sung at the various rituals and sacrifices, gives not only the K¬ptis or Kalpas i.e. formulae of verses, but also mentions the Vi∑hˇutis and the Sampats, i.e. the accountability of the total syllables of different Såmans composed on various metres in the Stomas, and also contains instruction or discussion that is warranted in the context. In this respect it may be treated as a supplementary treatise to the Såmaveda Bråhmaâs as also an auxiliary to the later Shrautas™tras. . . . It is to be noted that the K∑hudras™tra . . . has included some sacrifices which are not very common in other Shrauta-s™tras, e.g., Âitvigpohana, Puraståjjyotis, Sukarajåtis, etc. 122 The Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra is the first of ten Íhrauta related S™tra texts traditionally held to belong to Såma Veda. The list, according to Gonda, is found in a commentary on the Gobhila G®ihya S™tra.123 The ten are Ãr∑heyakalpa, K∑hudra, Låˇyåyana, Upagrantha, Pañcavidha, Nidåna, Taˆ∂ålak∑haâ, Anupada, Anustotra, and Kalpånupada. Of these, the Ãr∑heyakalpa and the K∑hudra comprise the Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra. Låˇyåyana, Nidåna, and Anupada are treated below as Íhrauta S™tras in their own right. The Upagrantha, Pañcavidha, Taˆ∂ålak∑haâ, Anustotra, and Kalpånupada will be considered as appendices or supplements to the Ãr∑heyakalpa (Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra including the K∑hudra S™tra).124 The Beginning and ending paragraphs of the Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra are as follows:

mxkkLpsU] KlO¢o Jyoit∑omoåitr;]oåWo@≤xk" 1-1-1 pvSv v;co a…g[y" pvSveNdo vOW; sut ¨p;Smw g;yt; nr ¨po Wu j;tm¢ur' div¥utTy; ®cwte a;sOg[…mNdv" pvm;nSy te vy' pvm;nSy te kv ¨p p[ yNto a?vr' p[ vo …m];y g; yteN{; y;ih …c].;no îN{e a¶; nmo bOh√éx;pvSv /;ryeit g;y]' c;mhIyv' cw@÷ c s*p,R \ roihtkÀlIy' c

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

349

pun;n" som /;ryeit smNt' itsOWu smNtmekSy;' Plv EkSy;' dw`R≈vsmekSy;…mit v; rq'tr' itsOWu g*©v\ r*rv' i]…,/nm;y;Sy' t Ekc;‹" p[ k;Vymuxnev b[uv;, p;qRmNTy' bOh∞ v;mdeVy' c m; …cdNyi√x\ steTy.IvtR" Sv;su k;ley' ySte mdo vre
pvSv v;co a…g[y ¨p;Smw g;yt; nro div¥utTy; ®c; pvm;nSy te kveå¶ a;y;ih vIty îit rq'tr' ]I…, b;hRt;Ny…¶' dUt' vO,Imh îTyu.y;Ny;Jy;nIit vo∞; te j;tmN/s îit g;y]mekSy;' g*WUˇ_mekSy;\ s];s;hIymekSy;' pun;n" som /;ryeit smNtmekSy;\ s\ spRmekSy;' yˇOtIy' dw`R≈vsmekSy;\ rq'tr' itsOWu vOW; xo, îit p;qRmNTy' bOh∞ v;mdeVy' c XywtSy=uR s\ sp| yTp[qm' Sv;su k;ley\ Sv;idœy; midœyeit g;y]' c;êsUˇ_' c pvSveN{mCzπit sf ≈u?ye p[uao…jtI vo aN/s îit g*rIivtmekSy;' tSy;mev;N/Igv\ s\ sp| itsOWu yid≠√tIy\ sUyRvtIWu k;vmNTy' yD;yDIym…¶∑oms;m svoR √;dx" 11-10-1

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

350

aqwte Ev pUveR ahnI a;vOˇe t;>y;m;vOˇ;>y;muˇr;NW
Beginning and ending verses of the K∑hudras™tra are as follows:

=u{kLpsU]m( p[qmoå?y;y" g[;mk;mSy KlO¢o Jyoit∑om" 1 p[j;k;mSy-¨poWu j;tm¢ur…mit Sto]Iyo n*/sSy=uR jin]' b[˜s;m n ih vírm' cneTyetyo" pUvm( ) inmR?y;s¢dxSy iv∑ëitÂ?v| hotu" pOœ;t( ) sm;n…mtr' Jyoit∑omen 2 y;' sm;'mh;dev" pxUn( hNy;t( 3 s n" pvSv x'gv îit Sto]Iy a;vOˇStOc" 4 n*/sSy=uR a;qvR,' b[˜s;m 5 ¨¥-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

351

Tqo iv∑ëty" ) sm;n…mtr' Jyoit∑omen 6 ≈wœ‰k;mSy;…g[yvtI p[itpd( ) b;hRt;Ny;Jy;in ) bOhTpOœ' Xywt' b[˜s;m ) ≈u?ymui„,ih ) sm;n…mtr' Jyoit∑omen 7 bÙn;ms%In;' yjm;n;n;mete asOg[…mNdv îit Sto]Iy" ) s¢;iSqt; s¢dxSy iv∑ëit" pOœ;n;m( ) sm;n…mtr' Jyoit∑omen 8 s%In;' yjm;n;n;'div¥utTy; ®ceit Stoi]y ¨p;Smw g;yt; nr îTynuÂp" ) s¢;iSqt; s¢dxSy iv∑ëit" pOœ;n;m( ) sm;n…mtr' Jyoit∑omen 9 dI≤=te mOte a¶ a;yU'iW pvs îit p[itpdmNy] VyU!º>yo aho>y" 10 VyU!ºWu ceTp[ey;t( ) ydwv td; g;y]Ip[itpTkmh" Sy;ˇSywW; p[itpt( 11 aNy]odynIy;ditr;];t( ) sm;n…mtr' Jyoit∑omen 12 îit p[qmp[p;#kÉ p[qm" %<@" 1 ***concluding paragraph***

Wo@x" %<@" aq;toånNt; √;dx;h; îit ih p[itidx≤Nt 1 y;vNTyOvs;m;in t;vNto √;dx;h;Stto v; .Uy;'s" 2 teW;m;h;r' kLpyet( ) s yd; sv;R Ac" s…my;t( sv;R…,s;m;in sv;RNTStom;n( 3 aPyektOcm;˙Ty;NySy Sq;neånukLpyet( ) tt Ev soåNy" kLpo .vtIit 4 pXy;mo ih vymektOcenwv;PyNy' kLp' .vNt' yq; .vit ) EtSywv revtIWu

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

352

v;rvNtIym…¶∑oms;m ’Tv; pxuk;mo yjeteit ) aip vw k˘ Stomm;˙Ty;NySy Sq;neånukLpyet( ) tt Ev soåNy" kLpo .vtIit ) pXy;mo ih vymekStomenwv;PyNy' kLp' .vNt' yq; .vit ) EtSywvwk…v'xm…¶∑oms;m ’Tv;my;ivn' y;jyeidit 5 aip v; p[itpd;vev;NyoNySy Sq;n' Vyithret( ) Stom* v; kLp* v; tN]e v; pOœº v; s'Sqe v; s;mnI v; tt Ev soåNy" kLpo .vit 6 Eten p[dexen;p;r Ev √;dx;h;n;' iv¥te n p;r îit ) n p;r îit 7 îit tOtIye p[p;#kÉ Wo@x" %<@" 16 tOtIy" p[p;#k" sm;¢" 3 =u{kLpsU]' sm;¢m( 126

1. Upagrantha S™tra. The Upagrantha S™tra of Kåtyåyana has been published in U∑hå, a nineteenth century Indian Journal. It is a supplement to the Ãr∑heyakalpa, and is one of the ten Íhrauta texts belonging to the Råˆåyan¥ya and Kauthuma recensions of Såma Veda. Beginning and ending Kaˆ∂ikå from U∑hå are as follows:

¨pg[NqsU]m( aq p[qm" p[p;#k" aq sMpiTs≤ırn;dexe Sto]Iy;Nt" xte ivxeW" s':y;smSt;:ye p[Tyekmq;Ri√inymo Jyoit∑ome nv tmuKQye i]pç;xe √;cTv;·r5x;in cTv;yRitr;]e svn;n;' .·ˇ_-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

353

v;dXzNdSto..+ySq;ndwvtwy;Rin s¢ ctu®ˇr;,Iit g;y]IjgTy* √π bOhTy;vui„,iK]∑ë.* c √π p¤‰nu∑ë.* swv s¢mI yw®KQywí zNdo….·rit Wi∑≤S]∑ë.St;s;5 …s≤ıS]yo…v'xitgRy}y" pçcTv;·r5xtm( bOhTyo √;dx kk⁄.ítsO….g;Ry]I….St; bOhTy" S];" s¢pç;xt' t;vTy=r;…, g;y}yStwSt;≤S]∑ë.iStßí*xne puro…jTy;' dxp¥;pd;Nynu∑ëp( ixrsí;=Yy;‹xITy=r©oa;yuWo" pUvRSywkcTv;·r5xe prSywk;•Wœº NyUn;it·rˇ_; vev5 sm;n;' ivr;j5 sMp¥ete cTv;·r i]5x;Nyitr;]yor∑;dx;yuWo…/k;" pçi√Wœ;Nyitr;]e g;y]I sMp•e t;s;5 …s≤ı" 1 ***concluding paragraph***

xui£y;¥m¶ev[Rt' .[;j;.[;je ivk,R.;se mh;idv;k°Êy| pç tSy;Tm; Sto.iv.;Gyo i√p[St;v' cwtSm;ˇSy;¥e devte ivp·rhred;¥Ntsm;/ye tOcSq;" W$( p·r/y" p[;k™ p·r…/>yo /MmRrocn…mN{Syoˇr' mh;n;ª‰" …sm;" xKvYyoR mÁ; vcn;d( i√p[St;v; i√pd;y;" p[StuTy xKvYy;‹" p[St*TyU/soåtIW©vdU?v| pu®W;t( W@=rçwkÉ Sto.;Nt' p[St;v' c;?y;Sy;purIWpdeWu purIWpdxeW;…, in/n;Ny;c;y;‹" Sv·rt;Nt;in yq;/It' teWu p;çiv?y' ceıo…yk;r;√;gNto v;gt" 13

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

354

îit ¨pg[NqsU]e ctuqR" p[p;#k" g[Nqí sm;¢" 127

2. Pañcavidha S™tra. The Gånas, or songs that are sung by the Såma Veda pandits during the performance of Yagyas, are divided into five Bhakti, which according to Sharma, are sung in sacrificial sessions and rituals in the proper order, promptly and accurately, by the three priests viz., Prastot®, Udgåt® and Pratihart®. For this, each Chandoga must know, when he assumes the position of one of these priests, the exact portions of the Såman chant he has to sing loud when he is called for. The Prastot® begins the melodies singing the Praståva, the first Bhakti, Udgat® takes the Udg¥tha, the second [Bhakti]; Pratihart® [sings] Pratihåra, the third [Bhakti]; again Prastot® [sings the] Upadrava, the fourth [Bhakti]; and lastly and finally all these three join together to sing the Nidhana, the fifth and final Bhakti in chorus.128 The Pañcavidha S™tra deals with these five Bhaktis, although it emphasizes the Praståva, Pratihåra and Nidhana. The Pañcavidha S™tra has two Prapåˇhaka, with seven Khaˆ∂ikå in each. The Pañcavidha S™tra is also one of the ten Íhrauta texts belonging to the Råˆåyan¥ya and Kauthuma recensions of Såma Veda. The beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

pçiv/sU]m( p[qm" p[p;#k" p[qm; %i<@k; p[St;voÌIqp[ith;rop{vin/n;in .ˇ_y" 1 tTp;çiv?y' SmOt' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 2 ao'k;rih'k;r;>y;' s;¢iv?ym( 3 avs;n' pUv| p[St;v a;¥oTpiˇWu 4 Sv;dINdu" pp[;revTy;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

355

dIin 5 ik˘ yidN{eN{m; 6 vw/eWu tu iv/wvn;¥mvs;nm( 7 îd'te-x•o-ivTvd(-as;iv-p[.OtIin 8 a;no…mkd;-p[Tyua-TymU-i√tIye p[its;m iv/;ivk;r;" 9 in/nvtI tu Sto.pvoRp;…ynI 10 j;t"pre, s*…m]' /mRiv/m;Ry;vItI-pun;-prItoåy;p-pçin/noduTy'kXyppuCzAW.;dIin c 11 invOˇ;in nik-itß"-prItîN{;-ysNtNytIW©Sv;do"-Xyen;idWu pUv;Rvs;n-p[St;v;in 12 sv;Rsu pUvR…mTyekÉ kÈ'-x•o-ivTvTp[.OtIin 13 i√iv/e p;de pUvoR.e v; vOW;pTv;vt-îN{;yeNdo-p[/Nv; sv(-îN{;…mN{'-s`;ySte-…c£-t=d(-a;¥; /t;Ry;m( 14 pUv| cedpd;NTy' s;mpvR sÎxoˇrm;ê; yD;tOtIye p[;so ¨p◊re vyMy;d* vy;m*ho ¸ve hoî y Ek î√;r;Nto v; cN{m;¥ ¨∞;i√tIye √;dx;=ro v; Sv;idp[qm îN{;yeNdv; te d=' t' v" swtmuTy' vOWkÉ c;tUa*ho 15 îit pçiv/sU]e p[qmp[p;#kÉ p[qm; %i<@k; 1 ***concluding S™tra***

a;tUn îhk;r" 30 rqIn;' c suhVym( 31 yo r…y' pvSv hIWIp[qmo∞e 32 p[qmo∞' v; 33 ay;p îh îihy; i]®ˇ_m( 34 p[q" kpe c 35 idv;k°TyeR md;y;" 36 purIWpdeWu c 37 idKxBd" SvreWu 38 ˙dye i]®ˇ_' p[;Gvc" 39 a;nNdp[itnNdyo" 40 i]®ˇ_mNTy-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

356

muÌIqoåNy" 41 ¨p;yo ySm;•o?v| p[ith;r" 42 in/n' p[Ty©m( 43 îtreW;' yqoˇ_m( ) yqoˇ_m( 44 îit pçiv/sU]e i√tIye p[p;#kÉ s¢mI %i<@k; 7 i√tIy" p[p;#k" sm;¢" pçiv/sU]' sm;¢m( 129

3. Taˆ∂ålak∑haâ. A manuscript of the Taˆ∂ålak∑haâ is in the collection of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.130 4. Anustotra S™tra. A manuscript of the Anustotra S™tra is in the collection of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.131 5. Kalpånupadas™tra. There is an appendix to the K∑hudras™tra called the Kalpånupadas™tra. It has two Prapåˇhaka and reads like a commentary on parts of the K∑hudras™tra. This appendix is also sometimes associated with the Nidånas™tra.132 The Kalpånupadas™tra is also one of the ten Íhrauta S™tra belonging to Såma Veda. Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

a;c;YyRp[m;,in∂º≥xo b[;˜,sU];WeRykLpKs;Rm;ª;yohopdexm;c;r' cwkÉinym;.;vSTvev' teW;' Kv…cdivxeW≈ut* ti√xeW≈uitStdNvveÊy iv…/yRq; JyoitdRxr;]yodwRvt≤l©CzNd"sUˇ_codn;su b[;˜,en AKsm;ª;yStdnUceTy…/" – îTy;id

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

357

***concluding S™tra***

ctu…v|xp[’tTv;t( ’tSq;nTv;√; ]yiS]'xoå…¶∑oms;ª≤S]k" prSq;nTv;t( pre„v…¶∑omeNTyyo" StomyoJyTv;√; Stomyog" p[’itsMp…•Ty" p[’itsMp…•Ty" i√tIyp[p;#k" sm;¢" kLp;nupdsU]' sm;¢'

133

D. The Kaußhika Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kaußhika S™tra with the Medial Septal nuclei. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) The Medial Septal nucleus becomes continuous with the nucleus and tract of the Diagonal Band and thus establishes connections with the Amygdaloid Nuclear Complex.134 Brodal describes the Septal nuclei: The septal nuclei. . . .influence various behavioral patterns and autonomic functions. . . . Their main connections appear to be established with the hippocampus, and are reciprocal. It appears that the lateral septal nuclei is the main region receiving afferents and that the medial septal nucleus gives rise to most of the septal efferents.135 According to Leutgeb, “The septal nuclei are reciprocally connected with the hippocampal formation and contribute importantly to spatial and memory processing.”136 The Kaußhika S™tra is one of two S™tra texts belonging to Atharva Veda. The Kaußhika S™tra has both G®ihya and Íhrauta qualities. Bhattacharji says,137 The Kaußhika S™tra is neither a pure G®ihya S™tra nor a pure Íhrauta S™tra but a mixture of both. Closely connected with the Atharvaveda Saµhitå, it seeks to provide the ritual application of the Atharvaveda hymns and quite often mentions more than one rite for the same hymn. . . .Although it belongs to the Íhaunaka school. . . it occasionally mentions practices current in three other Atharvaveda schools, Jalada, Ak∑hala (or Jåjala) and Brahmadeva. In one sense the Kaußhika S™tra is ritual commentary on the Atharvaveda Saµhitå.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

358

For its G®ihya character, dealing with domestic rites such as marriage, etc., H.M. King Nader Råm has included it in the list of G®ihya S™tra, and because it provides a systematic ritual commentary on the Atharva Veda Saµhitå, he has included it also in the list of Íhrauta S™tra. As was described above, the text has 14 chapters made up of a total of 141 mostly prose paragraphs. Beginning and ending paragraphs are given above in the G®ihya S™tra section. There are three texts that are sometimes considered to be Kalpa texts in their own right,138 and sometimes considered to be of the nature of Parißhi∑hˇa, supplements. These are called the Íhåntikalpa, the Nak∑hatrakalpa, and the Aãgirakalpa.139 Íhåntikalpa. The Íhåntikalpa is a text for pacification of the planets. It consists of 1000 words of prose and 98 verses arranged in 25 Kaˆ∂ikås.140 It includes 28 verses of invocation of the Nak∑hatras, and 28 verses of the Nak∑hatradaivatå mantrå˙. There is an English translation by Modak.141 The beginning and ending verses of the Íhåntikalpa are as follows:

aq n=];,;mupc;r' v+y;moåhtv;s;¶e" purSt;dhten vS]e,o dGdxen;sn;Nyvz;¥ ’iˇk;dINyO=;
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

359

a;{;Rm;v;h…y„y;…m n=]' b;¸s'Dkm( EÁ;{eR c;®sv;R©π d;®,e ®{s'…mte 5 A≤=m;v;h…y„y;…m /mRD' tu punvRsum( punvRs îh;gCz crkmRp[s;/k 6 1 ***concluding verses***

p[;,sUˇ_Én s'p;Ty bN?yo v[Iihyv* m…," al'’Ty tq;>yCyR tto √* p·r/;pyet( 1 p;kyDiv/;nen ≈p…yTv; c®˘ bu/" a;v;ipkÉn t' ¸Tv; tN]' s'Sq;pyeˇt" 2 tdNv;h;yR xeW' tu b[;˜,;N.ojyeˇt" .ojyeTpexl' c;•' tu„yeyuyeRn v; i√j;" 3 b[;˜,o dx g; d¥;dn@±v;h' ttoå…/km( xIr;…/k˘ tto vwXyStq; p[;deixko hym( 4 r;j; d¥;√r' g[;m' smUho r;jvˇq; yqoˇ_;' d≤=,;' d¥;Tskl' flmXnute 5 skl' flmXnut îit 25 îit ≈I aqvRvede x;≤NtkLp" sm;¢"

142

Nak∑hatrakalpa. The Nak∑hatrakalpa has 50 Kaˆ∂ikå. Modak describes the text: The Nak∑hatra-Kalpa takes its name from the fact that it describes the ritual related to the constellations. It is counted as the first among the seventy-two Parißhi∑hˇas of the Atharva Veda. At the outset the Nak∑hatra-Kalpa enumerates the names of the twenty-eight constellations and mentions the Âi∑hi families to

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

360

which they belong, the deities which preside over them and the objects which are affected by them. Then it proceeds to a statement of the duties of a king under each constellation. It also mentions the objects mystically associated with the various constellations and describes the rituals which aim at gaining prosperity from them. It further mentions the parts of the day over which the constellations prevail. The constellations are divided according to the four main quarters, and their influence upon a journey, especially upon the military expedition of a king, is set forth. . . . The Nak∑hatra-Kalpa then deals with the ritual of the baths to be taken under the various constellations (Nak∑hatra- snånåni), by mixing various objects with water. Similarly, the gifts to be offered under different constellations are prescribed.143 The beginning and ending verses of the Nak∑hatrakalpa are as follows:

aq n=]kLp' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 ’iˇk; roih,I mOgixr a;{;R punvRsU pu„y;XleW; m`;" f;LgunI fLguNy* hSt…í]; Sv;itivRx;%e anur;/; Jyeœ;mUlMpUv;RW;!; ¨ˇr;W;!;….…jCz^v," ≈ivœ; xt….W" pUvRp[oœpdoˇrp[oœpd* revTyêyuj* .r
kMbl' ≈v,e d¥;√S];NtrmupoiWt" ≈ivœ;….vRS]yug' gN/;Nxt….WG.vet( 1 aj' s'pCy*dn' d¥;TpUvRyo" p[oœpdyor*r.[e, shoˇryo" 2

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

361

/enu' c Âps'p•;' g*gORi∑" pU,RdohnIm( revTy;' i]vTs;' d¥;Cz⁄.k;'SyopdoihnIm( 3 vS]e,;n@±v;h* s'bı±v; d¥; aêyujonRr" dx vWRshß;…, lo…ªlo…ª mhIyte 4 a∑* vWRshß;…, aj/eNv; pyoåXnute dx vWRshß;…, go/eNv; pyoåXnute 5 an@±v;h' tu yo d¥;Tsu˙d' s;/uv;ihnm( vIrmp[j;n;' .t;Rr' p[;“oit dx/enudm( 6 yd; vTsy p;d* √* ixrí;ip p[ÎXyte td; g*" pO…qvI Dey; y;vÌ.| n muçit 7 .r,I…." ’„,itl;' d¥;iˇl/enu' pyiSvnIm( ty; dug;R…, trit =ur/;r;'í pvRt;n( 8 n=];,;' yq; somo JyoitW;…mv .;Skr" .;it idVy' idv' Jyoit" p;vk" xu…c®ˇm" 9 Evmuˇ_;' n=]d≤=,;' yo dd;tIh jIvlokÉ aphTy tm" sv| b[˜lokÉ mhIyte yq; y∑ëStq;?yetureW; b[;˜I p[it≈uitreW; b[;˜I p[it≈uit·rit 10 50 144

The Ããgirasa-Kalpa. The Ããgirasa-Kalpa, not known to Modak145 except through Såyana's quotations from it, has been located in manuscript.146 It has not yet been published.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

362

E. The Vaitåna Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vaitåna S™tra, the second of the two Atharva Veda S™tra, with the second of the two paired Septal nuclei, the Lateral Septal nuclei. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Septum, the Lateral Septal nuclei, and their connections: All [septal] afferents from the hippocampus proper end in the lateral septal nucleus. The fibers pass in the precommissural component of the fornix. . . . In addition, the septum has been found by many authors to receive fibers from the subiculum.147 The septum is a midline and paramedian structure. Its upper portion corresponds largely to the bilateral laminae of fibres, sparse gray matter and neuroglia, known as the septum pellucidum., which separates the lateral ventricles. Below this, the septal region is made up of four main nuclear groups: dorsal; ventral; medial; and caudal. . . . The ventral group consists of the lateral septal nucleus. The major afferents to the region terminate primarily in the lateral septal nucleus. They include fibres carried in the fornix that arise from hippocampal fields CA3 and CA1, and the subiculum. There are also afferents arising from the preoptic area, anterior, paraventricular and ventromedial hypothalamic nuclei, and the lateral hypothalamic area. The lateral septum receives a rich monaminergic innervation, including noradrenergic afferents from the locus coeruleus and medullary cell groups (A1, A2); serotoninergic afferents from the midbrain raphe nuclei; and dopaminergic afferents from the ventral tegmental area (A10). Projections from the lateral septum run to the medial and lateral preoptic areas, anterior hypothalamus, supramammillary and midbrain ventral tegmental area, via the medial forebrain bundle. There is also a projection to the medial habenular nucleus and some midline thalamic nuclei via the stria medullaris thalami, which runs on the dorsomedial wall of the third ventricle.148 The Vaitåna Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Íhaunaka recension of Atharva Veda, although it is related also to the Paippalåda recension.149 The text has eight chapters composed of 43 Kaˆ∂ikå. According to Bhattacharji, it is named after the first word of the text. Beginning with a Paribhå∑hå chapter it deals with the major sacrifices, especially the Soma sacrifices as also with Råjas™ya, Våjapeya, Sautråmaî, Aßhvamedha, Puru∑hamedha, Sarvamedha and Gavåmayana. One notices the heavy emphasis on the special rites for the king as we have seen the Atharvan priest was pre-eminently a royal priest.150

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

363

The eight chapters of the Vaitåna Íhrauta S™tra are supplemented, according to Bhattacharji, by the addition of six chapters of the Atharva-pråyaßhcittåni, rules for expiations. Rules for expiation are not met with in the Kaußhika or in the eight chapters of the Vaitåna; these six Pråyaßhcitta chapters are added to the Vaitåna, to bring it to the same number of chapters as the Kaußhika, fourteen.151 There is an English translation by Ghosal.152 Beginning and ending verses of the eight chapters of the Vaitåna S™tra are as follows:

aq ivt;nSy b[˜; kmR…, b[˜vediv∂≤=,to iv…/vdupivxit v;Gyt" 1 hom;n;id∑;nnumN]yte 2 mN];n;dexe ≤l©vteit .;g≤l" ) p[j;pte n Tvdet;NyNy îit yuv; k*≤xk" ) yq;devt…mit m;#r" ) ao' .U.uRv" SvjRndo3…mTy;c;y;‹" 3 p[/;nhommN];NpurSt;ıoms'iSqthome„v;vpNTyekÉ 4 v;cyit yjm;n' .OGvi©roivd; s'S’tm( 5 a…¶r;hvnIy" 6 s'crv;Gym* b[˜v¥jm;nSy 7 devt; hivdR≤=,; yjuveRd;t( 8 a;¶I/[Syoˇrt ¨p;c;r" SPys'm;gRp;,eiStœto d≤=,;mu%Sy 9 yq;SvrmStu ≈*3W…@it p[Ty;≈;v,m( 10 yjm;noåm;v;Sy;y;' pUveR¥u®pvTSy∫ˇ_mXn;Typr;º 11 a;hvnIy g;hRpTyd≤=,;…¶Wu mm;¶e vcR îit s…m/oåNv;d/;it iv.;gm( 12 v[tmupwit v[ten Tv' v[tpt îit ) anxn…mTy;id 13 mm;¶e vcR îit ctsO….deRvt;" p·rgO;it ) …snIv;≤l pOqu∑ëk îit mN]oˇ_;m( 14 aNv¥ n îit

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

364

p*,Rm;Sy;m( 15 p[;tÛRTv;…¶ho]' k⁄Ù' devI' yˇe dev; îTym;v;Sy;y;m( ) r;k;mh' pU,;R pí;idit p*,Rm;Sy;m( 16 aq b[˜;,' vO,Ite .Upte .uvnpte .uv;' pte mhto .UtSy pte b[˜;,' Tv; vO,Imh îit 17 vOto jpTyh' .Upitrh' .uvnpitrh' .uv;' pitrh' mhto .UtSy pitStdh' mnse p[b[vI…m mno v;ce vGg;y}yw g;y}yui„,h ï„,gnu∑ë.eånu∑ëBbOhTyw bOhtI p¤ye p…¤≤S]∑ë.e i]∑ëBjgTyw jgtI p[j;ptye p[j;pitivRêe>yo deve>y ao' .U.uRv" SvjRndo3…mit ) ap[itrq' c 18 jIv;….r;cMyeTy;id p[pdn;Ntm( 19 ¨ˇrtoå¶edR≤=,to åpr;…¶>y;' p[p¥;s;d' vI+y;he d*/WVy îTy;¥; ¥;v;pO…qVyo" smI=,;t( 20 1 ***concluding paragraph***

aGNy;/ey' vsNte b[;˜,Sy b[˜vcRsk;mSy ) g[IWo r;jNySy tejSk;mSy ) vW;Rsu vwXySy pui∑k;mSy ) x rid sveRW;m( 1 gd;pnuˇye pU,;R¸TyNt…mTyekÉ 2 a…¶ho];y…,n;…mit yuv; k*≤xk" 3 teW;m;g[y,e nvSy 4 Sq;lIp;kÉn;…¶ho]' yv;Gv; v; 5 a.;ve gvI@;' nv`;sm;x…yTv; tSy;" pys; ≈Ik;mSy 6 inTym¶In;' j;gr,m( 7 a…¶ho]' SvgRk;mSy 8 pys; svRk;mSy 9 d›e≤N{yk;mSy 10 a;Jyen tejSk;mSy 11 twlen ≈Ik;mSy 12 aodnen p[j;k;mSy 13 yv;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

365

Gv; g[;mk;mSy 14 t<@ëlwbRlk;mSy 15 somen b[˜vcRsk;mSy 16 m;'sen pui∑k;mSy 17 ¨dkÉn;yu„k;mSy 18 dxRp,U Rm;s* svRk;mSy 19 d;=;y,yD" p[j;k;mSy 20 s;k˘p[Sq;YyyD" pxuk;mSy 21 s'£myD" svRk;mSy 22 î@;d/" pxuk;mSy 23 s;vRsenyD" p[j;k;mSy 24 x*nkyDoå….c;rk;mSy2 5 v…sœyD" p[j;k;mSy 26 ¥;v;pO…qVyoryn' p[itœ;k; mSy 27 Et;in dxRp,U Rm;s;yn;in 28 a;g[y,m•k;m Sy 29 c;tum;RSy;in svRk;mSy 30 EeN{;¶" pxur;yu„p[j;pxuk;mSy 31 y;m" xukh·r" xu<#o v;n;myk;mSy iptOlokk;mSy c32 Tv;∑ô v@v" p[j;k;mSy 33 k;My;vet* 34 suTy;" svRk;mSy 35 ¨KQy" pxuk;mSy 36 v;jpey" Sv;r;Jyk;mSy 37 aitr;] A≤ık;mSy 38 gv;myn' √;dx;hSy 39 r;jsUy" Sv;r;Jyk;mSy 40 aême/" p®Wme/o svRk;mSy 41 svRme/" ≈wœ‰k;mSy 42 k;m;nNTy;dp·r…mt; yD;" 43 te p[’it….Vy;R:y;t;" 44 yD£mo b[;˜,;t( ) iv·r∑s'/;n' c 45 y îm* kLp;v/Ite y ¨ cwv' ved ten svwR" £tu….·r∑' .vit sv;|í k;m;n;“oit 46 aq;Pyud;hr≤Nt yq; y∑ëStq;?yetureW; b[;˜I p[it≈uit·rit 47 5 43 îTyqvRvede vwt;nsU]eå∑moå?y;y" sm;¢" 153

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

366

Beginning and ending of the six chapters of the Atharva-pråyaßhcittåni are as follows:

aq;åto y;De kmR…, p[;y…íˇ;in Vy;:y;Sy;mo iv?ypr;/e ) svR] pun" k;y| ’Tvoåˇrt" p[;y…íˇ' p[;y…íˇ' v; ’Tvo åˇrt" sm;/;n' ) yTpUv| p[;y…íˇ' kroit gOhw" pxu….revw ån' sm/Ryit ) yduˇrt" SvgeR,wvwn' tLlokÉn sm/Ryit ) kqm¶In;/;y;åNv;h;yR ≈p,m;hret( ) kq…mit ) p[;,; v; Ete yjm;nSy;å?y;Tm' in/IyNte yd¶ys( ) teWu ¸teWu d≤=,;¶;v;Jy;¸it' ju¸y;d¶yeå•;d;y;å•ptye Sv;heåit ) kqm¶In;/;y p[vsit ) yqwån;• ivro/yedip h xêd(b[;˜,ingmo .vit ) p[;,;Nv; EWoånucr;N’Tv; crit yoå¶In;/;y p[vstIit ) kqm¶In;/;y p[vTSyNp[o„y voåpitœºt ) tU„,ImeveåTy;¸s( ) tU„,I' vw ≈ey;'sm;k;Õ≤Nt ) yid mn…s k⁄vIRt;å.y' voå.y' meåiSTvTy.y' hwåv;åSy .vTyevmupitœm;nSy ) Ekvcnmek;¶* ) pur; z;y;n;' s'.ed;Ì;hRpTy;d;hvnIym>yuıren( ) mOTyu' vw p;Pm;n' z;y;' trit ) s'p[wW' ’Tvo åır;ååhvnIy…mit ) s'p[wWvjRmek;å¶* 1 ***concluding paragraph***

svR];ån;D;te„v¶ye Sv;h; ) yD;y Sv;h; ) b[˜,e Sv;h; ) iv„,ve Sv;h; ) p[j;ptye Sv;h; ) ånumtye Sv;h; ) å¶ye iSv∑’te Sv;heit ) ];t;r…mN{m( ) yyorojseit cw ) åt; iv„,uv®,devTy; ) ¨ˇ_;in

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

367

p[;y…íˇ;Nyqwk;¶* y] purod;x; ¨ˇ_; Sq;lIp;k;'St] k⁄y;Rt( ) puro@;xeWu jpwrev k⁄y;Rt( ) svR] zπdn.edn;vd;r,dhneW% U ;su somklxmh;vIryD.;<@ºWu svR] xI,Re ….•e n∑eåNy' ’Tv; punmwRiTv≤N{y…mTy;ddIt ) svR] m; no ivd…•Ty.ywrpr;…jtwjuR¸y;d.ywrpr;…jtwjuR¸y;t( 9 Wœoå?y;y" ) aq y]wtt( p;…qRvm;Nt·r=' idVy' devwrsurwv;R p[yuˇ_' td∫⁄t' xmyTyqv;R p[.ur∫⁄t;n;' ) so dUv;RJy' gOhITv;hvnIye juhoit ) pO…qVyw ≈o];y;Nt·r=;y p[;,;y vyo>yo idve c=uWe n=]e>y" sUy;Ry;…/ptye Sv;heit sU]p[;y…íiˇSt] Xlok" p[;y…íˇ;n;' p·rm;,' n yD ¨pl>yte tSm;∂»∑" sm;soå] t' inbo/t y;…Dk;" îTyqvRvede vwt;nsU]e p[;y…íˇp[kr,' sm;¢m( 154

F. The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhrauta S™tra, with the Anterior Commissure. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Anterior Commissure: The anterior commissure is a compact bundle of myelinated nerve fibres, which crosses anterior to the columns of the fornix and is embedded in the lamina terminalis, where it is part of the anterior wall of the third ventricle. In sagittal section it is oval, its long (vertical) diameter is c.1.5 mm. Laterally it splits into two bundles. The smaller anterior bundle curves forwards on each side to the anterior perforated substance and olfactory tract. The posterior bundle curves posterolaterally on each side in a deep groove on the anteroinferior aspect of the lentiform complex, and subsequently fans out into the anterior part of the temporal lobe, including the parahippocampal gyrus. Areas thought to be

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

368

connected via commissural fibres include: the olfactory bulb and anterior olfactory nucleus; the anterior perforated substance, olfactory tubercle and diagonal band of Broca; the prepiriform cortex; the entorhinal area and adjacent parts of the parahippocampal gyrus; part of the amygdaloid complex (especially the nucleus of the lateral olfactory stria); the bed nucleus of the stria terminalis and the nucleus accumbens; the anterior regions of the middle and inferior temporal gyri.155 The Satyå∑hå∂ha Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. It has 29 Praßhna. The text starts with a chapter on Paribhå∑hå, universal principles.156 The list of contents is long; Among later sacrifices it treats the Pravargya, Våjapeya, Råjas™ya, Sautråmaî, Aßhvamedha, Puru∑hamedha, Sarvamedha, Mahåvrata, and Gavåmayana. It gives two varieties of the Sautråmaî: Caraka and Kaukil¥. It lays down rules for the Sava sacrifice and gives a special variety of the Pit®medha, viz., the Bhåradvåja. That it belongs to a comprehensive S™tra tradition is proved by the inclusion of G®ihya, Íhulba and Dharma texts.157 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

sTy;W;!ivr…ct' ≈*tsU]' yD' Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) s i]….veRdwivR/Iyte ) AGveden yjuveRden s;mveden svwRJyoRit∑om" ) AGvedyjuveRd;>y;' dxRp,U Rm;s* ) yjuveRden;…¶ho]m( ) iv…/l=,;in km;R…, ) mN]b[;˜,yoveRdn;m/eym( ) kmRiv/;n' b[;˜,;in ) tCzπWoåqRv;d" ) inNd; p[x's; ) pr’it" pur;kLpí ) atoåNye mN];" ) l*ikk;" p[yuJym;n; amN];" ) yq; pu]Sy n;m/ey' duNdu….xBdí ) yDkm;Rq;R mN];" ) Âpivp[itWe/;Ll*ikkÉWu ) yq; gO;…m te sup[j;STv;y hSt…mm;' %n;MyoW/I' vh vp;'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

369

j;tved" iptO>y îit ) yqopid∑' b[;˜,vNto yq;Âp…mtre ) xeWSy ivin/;nm( ) p;·rPlv;q;R d;xtYy" ) ¨ˇryo" pvm;nyo" Stom;>y;se s;m;in ) tU„,IkÉWu p[;’teWu yju" ) ved" kmRn;m/eyen ≈Uym;,StdqR" ) yq; v;jpeyo y;Jy;puronuv;Ky;í ) ¨p;˝xu yjuveRden i£yte ) aNy] p[vrs'v;d;≈;v,s'p[wWe>y" ) ¨∞w·rtr;>y;m( ) svwR®p;˝xu 1 ***concluding paragraph***

yid t;in n ivNder•v;n;' d.;R,;' y;…Dk;n;' v; vO=;,;' tw" ’„,;…jne pu®W;’it' ’Tv; m/un; sipRW; s˝sOJy iv…/n; d;hyet( 40 y¥etiSmN’teå…¶…." punr;gCzπÓtk⁄M.;duNm¶Sy j;tkmRp[.Oit √;dxr;]' v[t' c·rTv; tywv j;yy; å¶In;/;y p[;j;pTyen pxun; v; yjet 41 …g·r' gTv;å¶ye k;m;yei∑' invRped;yu„mtI' xt’„,l;m( ) idx;mve∑‰; v; yjet 42 at Ë?vRmI‚PstwyRD£tu….yRjeteit ivD;yt îit ivD;yte 43 îit sTy;W;!ihr
G. The Vadh™la Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vadh™la Íhrauta S™tra with the Medial Forebrain Bundle. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Medial Forebrain Bundle:

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

370

The medial forebrain bundle is a loose grouping of fibre pathways that mostly run longitudinally through the lateral hypothalamus. It connects forebrain autonomic and limbic structures with the hypothalamus and brain stem, receiving and giving small fascicles throughout its course. It contains descending hypothalamic afferents from the septal area and orbitofrontal cortex, ascending afferents from the brain stem, and efferents from the hypothalamus.159 The Vadh™la Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. It has fifteen chapters. Gonda summarizes the topics of the text: Agnyådheya, Punarådheya, Agnihotra, Agnyupasthåna, etc. in I; Purodåßh¥ (oblations of ground rice offered on such occasions as the new moon sacrifices etc.) in II; Yajamåna, Ãgrayaâ, Brahmatva in III; Chåturmåsyas in IV; animal sacrifice in V; Jyoti∑hˇoma in VI and VII (without the Pravargya); Agnicayana in VIII; Våjapeya in IX; Råjas™ya with Sautråmaî in X; Aßhvamedha in XI; [and chapters XII-XV] dealing with Agnyådheya, Agnihotra, Paßhubandha, Agni∑hˇoma, Agnicayana, and Pråyaßhcittas. . .160 Bhattacharji writes: It has no separate chapter on Paribhå∑hå but has, beside the major sacrifices, a few sections called Bråhmaâs. . . .The text can thus be called a composite S™tra-Bråhmaâ. . . . Its antiquity is attested variously—by its mixed S™tra-Bråhmaâ character, its inclusion of many domestic rites, its extensive collection of mantras, taking nothing for granted—instead of briefly alluding to previous directions it describes each rite in detail.161 In this text, there are two unusual orthographic features: When an expression is being abbreviated because of having been recently spelled out, a small zero may be placed in the stead of the phrase or expression that is left out. An equal sign (=) is also used in the same way; it may also indicate that a well known verse or phrase from the Saµhitå is to be filled in at this point.162 The beginning and ending paragraphs of Vadh™la Íhrauta S™tra are as follows:

v;/Ul≈*tsU]m( aq p[qm" p[p;#k" )

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

371

aq;GNy;/eym( ) a¶In;/;Sym;n" s'.;r;n( s'.rte 1 ËW;í …skt;í;%UTkr' c sUd' c vr;hivht' c xkúr;ç pu„krp,| c W$( c ihryo dd;it 13 Í,oTv…¶" s…m/; hv' me îit ctugORhIten g;hRpTySyoıte d.RStMbe ihr
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

372

d≤=,;s¢WIRn( p[,Iih s¢WIRn( …jNv s¢iWR>y" Sv;h; 1 p[itgOI„v 2 hot·ryãSte /enuSt;' 3 a?vyoRåy' te ån@±v;ãSt' p[itgOI„v 4 a¶I/e b[˜,e ho]eå?vyRv ¨Ì;]e 5 b[;˜,; îm* vo …mqun* g;v* t* yq;.;g' p[itgOI?vm( 6 îd' v;s" îm; voå∑* g;v" ) îy' vo g*St;' 7 ay' vo p[qmjo vTs" 8 22 îm; √;dx xt' g;voåSy;…¶∑omSy d≤=,; t;s;' tv .;g' b[ñ( p[itgOI„v TvTpu®Ww" sh 1 îm; = hot" p[it = sh 2 îm; = m~yvyoR p[it = sh 3 îm; = muÌ;trg[e p[itgOI„v TvTpu®Ww" sh 4 sdSy p[itgOI„v 5 23 îit p·rxeW" ) îit pçdx" p[p;#k" ) îit v;/Ul≈*tsU]m( sm;¢m( 163

H. The Månava Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Månava Íhrauta S™tra with the Anterior Nucleus of the Thalamus. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Anterior Nucleus of the Thalamus: The anterior group of nuclei are enclosed between the arms of the Y-shaped internal medullary lamina, and underlie the anterior thalamic tubercle. Three subdivisions are recognized. The larges is the anteroventral nucleus, the others are the anteriomedial and anterodorsal nuclei. The anterior nuclei are the principal recipients of the mammillothalamic tract, which arises from the mammillary nuclei of the hypothalamus. The mammillary

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

373

nuclei receive fibres from the hippocampal formation via the fornix. The medial mammillary nucleus projects to the ipsilateral anteroventral and anteromedial thalamic nuclei, and the lateral mammillary nucleus projects bilaterally to the anterodorsal nuclei. The nuclei of the anterior group also receive a prominent cholinergic input from the basal forebrain and the brain stem. The cortical targets of efferent fibres from the anterior nuclei of the thalamus lie largely on the medial surface of the hemisphere. They include the anterior limbic area (in front of and inferior to the corpus callosum), the cingulate gyrus, and the parahippocampal gyrus (including the medial entorhinal cortex and the pre- and para-subiculum). These thalamocortical pathways are reciprocal. There also appear to be minor connections between the anterior nuclei and the dorsolateral prefrontal and posterior areas of neocortex. The anterior thalamic nuclei are believed to be involved in the regulation of alertness and attentinon and in the acquisition of memory.164 The Månava Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Maitråyaˆ¥ recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. There is a section on preparing for the Soma sacrifice, and sections on the Agni∑hˇoma, expiations (Pråyaßhcitta), the Pravargya rite of the soma sacrifice, the I∑hˇi sacrifice, the Chayana, Våjapeya, and Anugråhika, the Råjas™ya sacrifice, the Íhråddha, and a number of others. Bhattacharji describes the text: Its twenty-one chapters take up many major sacrifices and have some sections peculiar to it. One such is the Vai∑hâva rite. . . ; the others are Gonåmika and Anugråhika. It also has a patriarch list, an appendix (Parißhi∑hˇa), a section on Íhråddha and a Íhulbas™tra attached to it.165 There is an English translation by van Gelder.166 Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

m;nv≈*tsU]m( ¨ˇrt¨pc;ro ivh;r" 1 aNtr;…, yD;©;in ktuR" 2 cTv;·rcTv;·r km;R…, p[s'pXyNk⁄y;Rd; ctuq;RTkmR," 3 mN];Nten km;RdI\ s'inp;tyet( 4 a;idnoˇrSy pUvRSy;Nt\ iv¥;t( 5 yDopvItI d≤=,;c;r" p[;õ™Ny;Yy' kmoRp;\ xu

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

374

yjuveRden k⁄y;Rt( 6 dxRp*,Rm;syo/Rm;R" s;/;r,;" 7 indeRx;√‰vitœºrn( 8 cTv;r AiTvjoå?vyuRhoRt; b[˜;¶I /[" 9 an;dexeå?vyuR" k⁄y;Rt( 10 ¨pvTSydxne .uˇ_É g;hRpTy;d;hvnIy' JvlNt' p[,yit 11 dev; g;tuivdo g;tu\ yD;y ivNdt ) mnsSpitn; deven v;t;¥D" p[yuJyt;m( – îit jipTv; v[topetSy x;%;mz¯it p,Rx;%;\ xmIx;%;\ v; p[;cImudIcI\ v;h;n;' b¸x;%;' b¸p,;Rmxu„k;g[;msuiWr;m( 12 îWe Tveit …zn·ˇ 13 Ë,Re TveTynum;i∑R 14 su.Ut;yeit s'nmyit 15 v;yv" Sqeitx;%y; vTs;np;kroit ]INyjuW; tU„,I' ]In( 16 ap;’t;n;mek\ x;%y; tU„,ImupSpOxit 17 d.RipÔUlw" sh x;%y; devo v" sivt; p[;pRyiTvit g;" p[;pRyit 18 a;Py;y?vmfl‰; deve>y; îN{;y .;g…mtIN{y;…jno – mheN{;yeit mheN{y;…jn" 19 xuı; ap" sup[p;,e ipbNtI" xt…mN{;y xrdoduh;n;" ) ®{Sy heit" p·r vo vO,ˇ_⁄ – îit v[jNtIrnumN]yte 20 /[uv; a‚MmNgopt* Sy;t b◊I·rit yjm;nSy gOh;n….py;RvtRte ) yjm;n\ v; p[e=m;,o jpit 21 a…¶œºånSyGNyg;re v; yjm;nSy pxUNp;hIit p[Tygg[;\ x;%;mupkWRit 22 ¨ˇrto g;hRpTySy devSy Tv; sivtu" p[sv îTy…slm;dˇe 23 goWdsIit g;hR-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

375

pTymupitœte 24 ¨vRNt·r=\ vIhIit v[jit 25 p[Tyu∑\ r= îTy;hvnIye in∑pit 26 p[eymg;idit jpit 27 p[;gudGv;….p[v[Jy bihRr…zit 28 dev;n;' p·rWUtmsIit d.;RNp[Str;y p·rWuvit 29 iv„,o" Stup îit d.RStMbm….mOxit 30 aitsO∑o gv;' .;g îTyek;NtmitsOjit 31 xeW' p[Str;y 32 m;/o mop·r p®St A?y;s…mit jpit 33 devSy Tv; sivtu" p[sv îit ivx;%;in p[it lun;it s'n%' mui∑m( 34 pO…qVy;" s'pOcSp;hIit tO,mNt/;Ry p[Str\ s;dyit 35akLm;W;Nd.;|Llun;it p[.Ut;np[/nU yn( 36 a;zπˇ; te m; ·rW…mit jpit 37 atSTv' bihR" xtvLx\ ivroheTy;lv;n….mOxit 38 shßvLx; iv vy\ ®hemeTy;Tm;n'p[Ty….mOxit 39 ayuipt; yoin·rit xuLb' p[itd/;TyyuG/;tu p[d≤=,m( 40 aidTy; r;ò;sIit xuLbmnulom' i]rnum;i∑R 41yq;lUnmmuto v; sus'.Ot; Tv; s'.r;mIit xuLbe bihRiS]" s'.rit 42 ayuipt; yoin·rit p[Strm( 43 îN{;y;mu¥z îTyu¥zte 47 bOhSptemUR›;R hr;mIit mU/RNy;d/;it 48 ¨vRNt·r=\ vIhITyeit 49

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

376

aidTy;STv; pOœº s;dy;mIit pí;dprSy s;dyTynoå/o v; 50 bihRr…s dev'gm…mTyupy;Rd/;it 51 smUlwdR.wR" p;l;x' %;idr\ r*ihtk\ v;∑;dxd;ivR?m\ s'nÁit ) ]I\ í p·r/INyo y…Dyo vO=StSy Sqivœo m?ymo {;Ìy;Nd≤=,oå,Iy;n(Ó…sœ ¨ˇr" 52 ¨prI?mm;d/;it 53 1 ***concluding verses***

ySy ≈;ıe n .uÔ≤Nt b[˜,; vedp;rg;" a’t' t∫veCz^;ı' iptø,;' nopitœit 19 ySy ≈;ıe n .uÔNte b[;˜,;" Svx;≤%n" a;sur' t∫veCz^;ı' iptø,;' nopitœit 20 ved;qRivTp[vˇ_; c b[˜c;rI sd; iSqt" xt;yuíwv ivDey; b[;˜,;" p…¤p;vn;" 21 EW;mNytmo ySy .uÔIt ≈;ım…cRt" iptø,;' tSy tOi¢" Sy;Cz;êtI s;¢p*®WI 22 itl; r=Ntu dwtey;Nd.;R r=Ntu r;=s;n( tSm;∂;neWu d;tVy; a;Tmno .Uit…mzt; 23 4 îit ≈;ıp·rix∑\ sm;¢m( 167

I. The Bhåradvåja Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Bhåradvåja Íhrauta S™tra with the Stria Medullaris. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Stria Medullaris: Inferior to the facial colliculus, at the level of the lateral recess of the ventricle, a

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

377

variable group of nerve fibre fascicles, known as the striae medullaris, runs transversely across the ventricular floor and passes into the median sulcus.168 The stria medullaris crosses the superomedial thalamic aspect, skirts medial to the habenular trigone and sends many fibres into the ipsilateral habenula. Other fibres cross in the anterior pineal lamina, and decussate as the habenular commissure, to reach the contralateral habenula. Some fibres are really commissural and interconnect the amygdaloid complexes and hippocampal cortices. They are accompanied by crossed tectohabenular fibres. Serotonin-containing fibres from the ventral ascending tegmental serotoninergic bundle, which join the habenulointerpeduncular tract to reach the nuclei, may control neurones of the habenulopineal tract, and thus influence innervation of pinealocytes. Similarly, habenular nuclear afferents from the dorsal ascending tegmental noradrenergic bundle may influence pinealocytes. 169 The Bhåradvåja Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The text has 15 Praßhna. It describes the New-Moon and FullMoon sacrifices, setting up the sacred fires, the Agnihotra, the Ãgrayaâ sacrifice, the animal sacrifice, the Chåturmåsya, the rites of expiation, and the Jyoti∑hˇoma. 170 There are two Praßhna in an accompanying text called the Bhåradvåja Pait®medhika S™tra, treating the Pit®medha sacrifice, and 222 S™tra in a supplementary Bhåradvåja Parißhe∑ha S™tra. There is an English translation by Kashikar.171 Beginning and ending paragraphs for the three components of the text are as follows:

.;r√;j ≈*tsU]m( aq p[qm" p[Xn" dxRp,U Rm;s* Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 a;m;v;Syen hivW; y+ym;, EkSy; √yov;R pUveR¥uhRivr;tçn' dohyit 2 aip v; purSt;dev √‰he }yhe v;nugu¢' duG/' doh…yTv;nugu¢en d›;tn·ˇ_ 3 s'ttmiviCz•m….duhNTyopvsq;t( 4 ydh"

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

378

pU,RíN{m;"Sy;t( t;' p*,Rm;sImupvset( 5 ê" pU·rteit v; 6 ydhnR ÎXyet t;mm;v;Sy;m( 7 êo nodeteit v; 8 t]w WoåTyNtp[dexo ye kÉcn p*,Rm;sImm;v;Sy;' v; /m;R an;r>y;ª;yNt ¨.y]wv te i£yNte 9 yDopvITyev dwveWu kmRsu .vit 10 p[;cIn;vItI ip}yeWu 11 p[;õ™n(y;y;Nyudõ™n(y;y;in v; p[d≤=,' dwv;in km;R…, k⁄y;Rt( 12 ivprIt' ip}y;…, 13 n ivh;r;dppy;RvteRt 14 n yD;©πn;Tm;nm….p·rhredNy' v; 15 ¨ˇrt ¨pc;ro ivh;r" 16 y] Kv c juhotIit codyed?vyuRrev ju◊;Jyen;hvnIye ju¸y;t( 17 a?vyuRmev;n;id∑e ktR·r p[tIy;d;¶I/[' i√tIym( 18 y] Kv copitœteånumN]yt îit codyed( yjm;n Ev tt( k⁄y;Rt( 19 EkmN];…, km;R…, 20 a;id p[id∑; mN]; .v≤Nt 21 1 ***concluding paragraph***

y]wnm;mN]yte b[˜ Sto„y;m" p[x;St" îit tt( p[s*it ih' de v sivtretˇe p[;h tt( p[ c suv p[ c yj bOhSpitb[R˜;yu„mTy; Aco m; g;t tnUp;Ts;ª" sTy; v a;ixW" sNtu sTy; a;kÀty At' c sTy' c vdt Stut devSy sivtu" p[sve ) riXmr…s =y;y Tv; =y' …jNvo \ Stut îit 1 Evmev Sto]eSto]e p[s*it 2 Ev\ Stom.;g;n;muˇrmuˇr' d/;it 3 √;dx;…¶∑ome ) ]yodx;Ty…¶∑ome ) pçdxoKQye ) Wo@xe Wo@ixin ) s¢dx v;jpeye )

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

379

Ek;•i] \ xtmitr;]e ) ]y≤S] \ xtm¢oy;Rm îit ivD;yte 4 Stute bih„pvm;neåpre,oˇrveidmit£My d≤=,t ¨pivxit ) soå]wv;St a; svnIySy vp;y; hom;t( 5 ¸t;y;' vp;y;' y] m;jRyNte tNm;jRyte 6 y] p[;t"svn;y s'p[spR≤Nt t∂≤=,en hiv/;Rne d≤=,en m;j;RlIy' d≤=,en sd" prITy;pry; √;r; sd" p[ivXy;pre, p[x;S]Iymit£My d≤=,t ¨pivxeidTy;XmrQy" ) apre,oˇrveidmit£Myoˇre, hiv/;Rne d≤=,en m;j;RlIy' prITy pUvRy; √;r; sd" p[ivXy;g[e, p[x;S]Iymit£My d≤=,t ¨pivxeidTy;le%n" 7 4 Etenoˇryo" svnyo" 1 îit pçdx" p[Xn" 172

Beginning S™tra of the Bhåradvåja Pait®medhika S™tra:

.;r√;jpwtOme…/ksU]m( aq p[qm" p[Xn" aq;t" pwtOme…/k˘ dhnm( ) pu®W;¸itÁRSy ip[ytmeit ivD;yte 1 a;iht;àemRr,s\ xye p[;cIn;vItI dhndex' joWyte d≤=,;p[TyKp[v,min·r,msuiWrmnUWrm.©ërmnuphtmivßGd;yRnupiCz•p[v,m( 2 ySm;∂≤=,;p[tICy a;po in"sOTyodICy ETy mh;ndImveTy p[;Cy" s'p¥Nte 3 ***concluding S™tra of the Pait®medhika S™tra***

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

380

y¥ev' ’te punr;gCzπd( Òtk⁄M.;duNm¶Sy j;tkmRp[.Oit √;dxr;]' v[t' c·rTv; tywv j;yy;¶In;/;y v[;Tyen pxun; yjet 7 …g·r' gTv;¶ye k;m;yei∑' invRpet( 8 È‚Pstw" £tu….yRjeteit ivD;yte 9 12 îit i√tIy" p[Xn" 173

The Bhåradvåja Parißhe∑ha S™tra:

.;r√;jp·rxeWsU]m( aq;t" sU]p·rxeW;n( Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 b;¸m;];" p·r/y" SFy" xMy; c 2 p[;dexm;];
216 c;tum;RSyw" pçdx;h;in y+ym;," p[itpid vwê;nrp;jRNy* ) i√tIye vwêdevm( )tOtIye ctuqeR pçme coprMy

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

381

Wœº v®,p[`;s;" ) s¢meå∑me nvme coprMy dxm Ek;dxe c s;kme/;" ) √;dxe ]yodxe coprMy ctudRxe xun;sIrIy' pçdxe pxu·rit 217 √;dx;h;in y+ym;," p[itpid vwê;nrp;jRNy* ) i√tIye vwêdevm( ) tOtIye ctuqeR coprMy pçme v®,p[`;s;" ) Wœº s¢me coprMy;∑me nvme c s;kme/;" ) dxm Ek;dxe coprMy √;dxe xun;sIrIym( ) ]yodxe pxu·rit ) s'vTsrp[itm; vw √;dx r;]y" s'vTsrmev yjt îit ivD;yte 218 sipRv;R m?vl;. îTy;id 219 k⁄x; bihRrqR îTy;id 220 %;idr…bLvp;l;x;n;…m?md;Â,ITy;id 221 a;Jy;l;. a;jm;ivk˘ m;ihW' v; Òtm;Jy;qR;id 222 îit .;r√;jp·rxeWsU]m( 174

J. The Dråhyåyaâ Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Dråhyåyana Íhrauta S™tra with the Habenular Nucleus. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) The Habenular Nuclei are part of the Epithalamus. Gray describes it as follows: The habenular nuclei lie posteriorly at the dorsomedial corner of the thalamus, immediately deep to the ependyma of the third ventricle, with the stria medullaris thalami above and laterally. The medial habenular nucleus is a densely packed, deeply staining, mass of cholinergic neurones, whereas the lateral nucleus is more dispersed and paler staining. . . .The habenular nuclear complex is limited laterally by a fibrous lamina, which enters the habenulo-interpeduncular tract. Posteriorly, the nuclei of the two sides and the internal medullary laminae are linked across the midline by the habenular commissure. . . . Afferent fibres to the habenular nuclei travel in the stria medullaris from the prepiriform cortex bilaterally, the basal nucleus of Meynert, and the hypothalamus. Afferents from the internal segment of the globus pallidus ascend

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

382

through the thalamus, and may be collaterals of pallidothalamic axons. Additional inputs come from the pars compacta of the substantia nigra, the midbrain raphe nuclei and the lateral dorsal tegmental nucleus. The afferent pathways mostly end in the lateral habenular nucleus. . . . The medial habenular nucleus sends efferent fibres to the interpeduncular nucleus of the brain. The lateral habenular nucleus sends fibres to the raphe nuclei and the adjacent reticular formation of the midbrain, the pars compacta of the substantia nigra and the ventral tegmental area, and to the hypothalamus and basal forebrain.175 The Dråhyåyaâ Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Råâyaˆ¥ya recension of Såma Veda. The text has 31 Paˇala each of which is further divided into approximately four Khaˆ∂a. According to Bhattacharji, “In all it deals with seven sacrifices, mainly varieties of the Somayåga.”176 It emphasizes the hymns to be sung in the various sacrifices it describes. The Dråhyåyaâ Íhrauta S™tra is closely related to the Låˇyåyana Íhrauta S™tra. “The Låˇyåyana and Dråhyåyaâ quote the same authorities and resemble each other so closely in their linguistic form that they are regarded as one single text of two recensions with minor variations.”177 There is an English translation by Parpola.178 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

{;Á;y,≈*tsU]m( p[qm" p[p;#k" p[qm" p$l" p[qm" %<@" aq iv?yVypdexe svR£Tv…/k;r" 1 mN]iv…/í;idg[h,en 2 ¨ˇr;id" pUv;RNtl=,' 3 Ek≈uitiv/;n;NmN];n( km;R…, coÌ;twv k⁄y;‹dn;dexe 4 y;v¥jurn;id∑;Nt;n( mN];n( 5 Ací;idg[h,en 6 AiTvg;WeRyo

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

383

ånUc;n" s;/ucr,o v;GMyNyUn;©oånit·rˇ_;©o √ystí;nit’„,oånitêet" 7 y;Jyí p[qmw≤S]….guR,wVy;R:y;t" 8 somp[v;kmk·r„y•m" som;y r;D îTyuKTv; p[;Ty;c=It 9 mhNme voc îit k·r„yn( p[itmN]yet 10 t• jÁ;dp[oˇ_Éåip k·r„y;mIit ividTv; 11 a;vsq' somp[v;k;y lv,m•'d›;h;ryet( 12 p[ih,uy;Tp[StotOsub[˜y" 13 p[;gudKp[v,'devyjn' lomx' sm' 14 purSt;∞;Sy;p" Syu" 15 t≤T]xui£y…mit Á;h 16 td.;ve mh;vO= ¨dp;no mh;pqo v; 17 n c;Sy SqltrmdUre Sy;t( 18 devyjnm;]' c purSt;t( 19 ivpyRSy;….cr,IyeWu 20 Sql;dNy∂ºvyjnm;];∞ 21 Svy' b[jeT£y ¨pvsQye v; 22 ¨dõ™õπv tu gOhe>y" p[qm' devo devmeiTvit 23 dUr' v[…jTv; ivh;y d*„’Tym( 24 b√;n;m;sIit pNq;nm;p¥oˇr' ve¥Ntm;£My d≤=,mI=m;," iptro .U·rit 25 yjurNtryeåNv;h;r' /;n'jYy" 26 ¨pe=,' x;i<@Ly" 27 îit {;Á;y,≈*tsU]e p[qme p$le p[qm" %<@" ***concluding paragraph***

ctuqR" %<@" s'vTsrmhrhSt*re, yjet 1 Wœ‰;' cw]I p=SyeTy;c;y;‹" 2 pçMy;…mitx;i<@Ly;yn" 3 p[;tr;¸it' ¸Tv; v[top;-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

384

ynIymodnm≤xTv; kÉxXm≈U…, v;p…yTv;ht' vsn' p·r/;y p·rsmuÁ;¶In( p·rStIyR p[,It;" p[,Iy d<@÷ p;,* ’Tv; me%l;m;b?y nvnIten;©;Ny>yÔ‰ pí;t( g;hRpTySyopivXy Svy' ’„,;…jn' p[itWJyet tU„,Im( 4 p…íme n;hvnIy' d≤=,;it£Mywtt( k⁄y;‹t( 5 tSy itß î∑y" ) pUv; Ek; ) pOqk™Tv' m?y'≤dn;pr;yo" 6 t;su pOqgnupvU | hvI'iW y;Nyuˇ_;in b[;˜,en 7 Ek; vwv Sy;ˇSy;' t;in sv;R…, Syu" 8 t] s;mg;n' yq; pUvRiSmn( 9 ¨.yoSTvv.Oq;dudeTy yt( purSt;id∑‰yn' teneÇ; somen yjet 10 y;v≤Nt v; hvI'iW purSt;ˇ;v≤∫v;R pxu….St∂wvTyw" 1 1 spRs]' gv;myn' Stoms'Sq;iv’t…mTyekÉ 12 W<@k⁄W<@;v….gr;pgr;ivit Á;h 13 p[Ty=iviht' Tv;WeRykLpen t];num;n' n iv¥te 14 a….gr;pgr;vevopoˇme åhin Sy;t;m( 15 p*,Rm;sIp[sv' i]s'vTsrm( 16 tSy y;q;k;mI dI=;,;m( 17 Wi∑·rit x;i<@Ly" 18 p[qmoˇm* s'vTsr* Vyithreidit /;n'jYy" 19 a….PlvStompOœ‰dexroh;qR" 20 am;v;Sy;p[sve shßs'vTsre shßs'vTsre 21 îit {;Á;y,≈*tsU]e Eki]'xe p$le ctuqR" %<@" 4 sm;¢oåy' g[Nq" 179

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

385

K. The Låˇyåyaâ Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Låˇyåyaâ Íhrauta S™tra with the Stria Terminalis. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the location and structure of the Stria Terminalis: Medially, the greater part of the caudate nucleus abuts the thalamus, along a junction that is marked by a groove, the sulcus terminalis. The sulcus contains the stria terminalis, lying deep to the ependyma. The stria terminalis forms one margin of the choroid fissure of the lateral ventricle, the hippocampal fimbria and fornix form the other margin. The sulcus terminalis is especially prominent anterosuperiorly (because of the large size of the head and body of the caudate nucleus relative to the tail), and here the stria terminalis is accompanied by the thalamostriate vein. 180 Carpenter and Sutin describe the connections of the Stria Terminalis as follows: This is the most prominent efferent pathway from the amygdaloid nuclear complex. Most, but not all, of the fibers in this bundle originate from the corticomedial part of the amygdaloid complex. Fibers of the stria terminalis arch along the entire medial border of the caudate nucleus near its junction with the thalamus. Rostrally these fibers pass into and terminate in the nuclei of the stria terminalis located lateral to the columns of the fornix and dorsal to the anterior commissure. This is the most massive termination of the stria terminalis. Part of these fibers, which belong to the postcommissural part of the stria terminalis, also end in the anterior hypothalamic nucleus, and some of the fibers may join the medial forebrain bundle. Fibers of the precommissural part of the stria terminalis terminate in the medial preoptic area. . . .181 The Låˇyåyaâ Íhrauta S™tra, like the Dråhyåyaâ, also belongs to the Råâyaˆ¥ya recension of Såma Veda. The text is divided into ten Prapåˇhaka; each Prapåˇhaka is further divided into approximately twelve Kaˆ∂ikå. Bhattacharji says: As a Såmaveda text it dwells mainly on the responsibilities of the Udgåt® priest and his assistants as well as of the Brahman priest in a Soma sacrifice. The text covers a few rites but its sole concern is the hymns to be sung in these sacrifices. . . . Låˇyåyaâ is the more compact of the two [Låˇyåyaâ and Dråhyåyaâ] and omits the exegetical sections found in the Dråhyåyaâ, thus preserving a purer text.182 There is an English translation by Parpola.183 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

386

l;$‰;y, ≈*t sU] ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) l;$‰;ynIye ≈*tsU]e p[qm" p[p;#k" aq p[qm; ki<@k; aq iv?yVypdexe svR£Tv…/k;r" 1 mN]iv…/í;idg[h,en 2 ¨ˇr;id" pUv;RNtl=,' 3 Ek≈uitiv/;n;NmN];n( km;R…, coÌ;twv k⁄Yy;‹dn;dexe 4 y;v¥jurn;id∑;Nt;n( mN];n( 5 Ací;idg[h,en 6 AiTvg;WeRyo ånUc;n" s;/ucr,ov;GMyNyUn;©onit·rˇ_;©o √ystí;nit’„,oånitêet" 7 y;Jyí p[qmw≤S]….guR,wVy;R:y;t" 8 somp[v;kmk·r„y•m" som;y r;D îTyuKTv; p[;Ty;c=It 9 mhNme voc îit k·r„yn( p[itmN]yet 10 t• jÁ;dp[oˇ_Éip k·r„y;mIit ividTv; 11 a;vsq" somp[v;k;y lv,m•Nd›;h;ryet( 12 p[ih,uy;Tp[StotOsub[˜y" 13 p[;gudKp[v,Ndevyjn' lomxmvO=' sm' 14 purSt;∞;Sy;p" Syu" 15 td.;ve mh;vO= ¨dp;no mh;pqo v; 16 n c;Sy SqltrmdUre Sy;t( 17 devyjnm;]ç purSt;t( 18 ivpyRSy;….cr,IyeWu Sql;dNy∂ºvyjnm;];∞ 19 Svy' b[jeT£y ¨pvsQye v; 20 ¨dõ™õπv tu gOhe>y" p[qm' devo devmeiTvit 21 dUr' v[…j-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

387

Tv; ivh;y d*„’Ty…mit 22 b√;n;m;sIit pNq;nm;p¥ 23 ¨ˇr' ve¥Ntm;£My d≤=,mI=m;," iptro.U·rit 24 yjurNtryeNv;h;rN/;nÔYy" 25 ¨pe=,' x;i<@Ly" 26 îit p[qmSy p[qm; ki<@k; ***concluding paragraph***

aq …v'xI ki<@k; s'vTsrmhrhSt*re, yjet 1 Wœ‰;' cw]Ip=Sy pçMy;…mit g*tmo v[top;ynIymodnm≤xTv; kÉxXm≈U…, v;p…yTv;ht' vsn' p·r/;y p·rsmuÁ;¶In( p·rStIYyR p[,It;"p[ ,Iy me%l;m;b?y d<@÷ p;,* ’Tv; pí;Ì;hRpTySyopivXy Svy' ’„,;…jn' p[itWjet tU„,Im( 2 p…ímen;hvnIy' d≤=,;it£Mywtt( k⁄Yy;‹t( 3 tSy itß î∑y" pUv;R Ek; pOqk™ c m?y≤Ndn;pr;yo" 4 s t;su pOqgnupvU Rã™ hvIã™iW y;Nyuˇ_;in b[;˜,en 5 Ek; vwv Sy;ˇSy;' t;in sv;R…, Syu" 6 s'vTsr;dUı±vRmv.Oqm>yvey;ˇ] s;mg;n' yq; pUvRiSmn( 7 ¨.yoSTvv.Oy;dudeTy yt( purSt;id∑‰yn' teneÇ; somen yjet 8 y;v≤Nt v; hvIã™iW purSt;ˇ;v≤∫v;R pxu….St∂ºvTyw" 9 W<@k⁄W<@;v….gr;pgr;ivit Á;heit 10 p[Ty=iviht' Tv;WeRykLpen t];num;n' n iv¥te 11 a….gr;pgr;vevopoˇmeåhin Sy;t;m( 12 p*<,Rm;sIp[sv' i]s'vTsrm( 13 tSy y;q;k;mI dI-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

388

=;,;m( 14 Wi∑·ritx;i<@Ly" 15 p[qmoˇm* s'vTsr* VyithreidTyekÉå….PlvStompOœ‰dexroh;qR îit 16 yq;ª;ymevopeyu" 17 am;v;Sy;p[sve shßs'vTsre shßs'vTsre 18 îit l;$‰;ynsU]e dxm" p[p;#k" l;$‰;ynsU]' sm;¢m( 184

L. The Våråha Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Våråha Íhrauta S™tra with the Interpeduncular Nuclei. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Interpeduncular Nuclei: The Interpeduncular ganglion is a median collection of nerve cells situated in the ventral part of the tegmentum. The fibers of the fasciculus retroflexus of Meynert, which have their origin in the cells of the ganglion habenulae, end in it. . . . The interpeduncular ganglion has rather large nerve cells whose axons curve backward and downward as the tegmental bundle of Gudden, to end partly in the dorsal tegmental nucleus and surrounding gray substance where they come into relation with association neurons and the dorsal longitudinal bundle of Shutz.185 The Våråha Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Maitråyaî recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text has 25 Khaˆ∂a distributed in four chapters. Bhattacharji describes the text: Together with some major sacrifices, among which varieties of the Soma figure prominantly, it deals with the Mahåvrata and uncommon minor rites like Utsargiˆåmayana and Ekådaßhin¥. It bears close resemblance to the Månava, the only difference being the omission of its Paribhå∑hå section in the Våråha. Its vocabulary shows some peculiarity: it uses some words not found in other S™tras.186 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

v;r;h ≈*t sU]m( aq v;r;h≈*tsU]e p[;Ks*…mkm(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

389

p[yoge pu®Wiht\ yDSy c D;ne 1 t\ Vy;:y;Sy;m" 2 sv;Rq| /m| p[qmm( ) ¨pv;d;nnuvdet( 3 b[;˜,=i]yvwXyrqk;r;,;\ yD;" 4 inW;dSqpte·r∑‰GNy;/eym( 5 a?vyuRyRjuveRden kroTyOGveden hot; s;mvedenoÌ;t; svwRb[R˜; 6 ¨∞wA≥Gveds;mved;>y;mup;\ xu yjuWo∞w" s'p[wWw" 7 s\ Sv;rwkSvyR…mit xBdNy;y" 8 p[;Ñü%" kmR k⁄y;Rd; ctuq;RTkmR," p[s'pXyn( 9 ¨ˇrt¨pc;ro ivh;r" 10 ***concluding S™tra***

sodvsnIye s\ iSqte pxubN/en yjte 21 i]x;%o yUpo å∑;≈y" x;%;pOqukp;l;in tN]\ Sv®rphrit 22 Tvwt;n;' p[qm" k;lkmeivv.[uSt' m?yme ivx;%yUp a;…ênm;l.et 23 tyoi√≥tIySt' .*m' d≤=,;/eR 24 yStOtIyStmUjR ¨ˇr;/eR 25 pxUn;' puro@;xmnu mOg;rei∑' invRpit 26 shiSv∑’id@÷ mOg;rei∑pxupuro@;x;n;' c 27 tiSmNs\ iSqte √;dx b[˜*dn;N≈pyit 28 t;NmhiTvRj" p[;Xn≤Nt 29 te>yo √;dx √;dx ®Km;Ndd;it 30 s'itœteåême/" 31 trit mOTyu' trit p;Pm;n' trit b[˜hTy;\ yoåême/en yjte yíwv deivk;p[.Oit….·ri∑….yRjte yjte 32 îTyême/e ctuqeRå?y;ye pçm' %<@m( îit ctuqoRå?y;y" 187

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

390

There is a Våråha Hautra S™tra, associated with the Våråha Íhrauta S™tra.188 The Hautra S™tra details the office of the Hot®i. Its beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

h*tOkm( dxRp,U Rm;syo" s•eWu hiv„Wu d;Ntoåhm( îTyuKTv; .U" p[p¥e îit tIqeRn p[p¥;g[e,oˇr;\ veid≈o…,mNtveRid d≤=,pd' ’Tvoˇr' b…Ó≥veRid p[;çmÔ≤lmurSy;rokvt ’Tv;s;…m/enI >yoåvitœte 1 avSq;y m/u v+y;…m îTyuKTv; Vy;˙tIdRxhot;r' c s'p[eiWteånuD;t Ë?vRiStœn( ¥;v;pO…qVyo" s'…/mNvI=m;,≤S]r….ih'’Ty s;…m/enIrNv;h p[ vo v;j; a….¥v" îTyek;dx2 i]" p[qm;' i]®ˇm;…mit 3 an;dexe p[qmo 4 1 ***concluding S™tra***

svR] y;Jy;NteWu vW$(k;roåNTym=rmNTy' Pl;vyit 1 p[,v\ v; 2 Ek;rek;r;Nt;Sv;¨k;rm;p¥ vW$(k;r" 3 aNTyok;r* ¨k;r;Nt;Sv;¨k;rm( ) Plut' pUv| kroit vW$(k;r' c 4 b[iU hp[e„yKswW$( v*W@º„v;vheit c 5 a;≈;v,;Êv;idto √π 6 someWu NyUƒne c 7 i√vcn' p[it gOÁ\ yqoNTy•m( 8 Svr;Nt;su ivsjRnIyk¥op/; luPyte 9 Ny;yenetr;su Pluití 10 Evo--189

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

391

M. The Kåtyåyana Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kåtyåyana Íhrauta S™tra with the Mammilothalamic tract. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Mammillothalamic tract: The anterior nuclei (of the thalamus) are the principal recipients of the mammillothalamic tract, which arises from the mammillary nuclei of the hypothalamus. The mammillary nuclei receive fibres from the hippocampal formation via the fornix. The medial mammillary nucleus projects to the ipsilateral anteroventral and anteromedial thalamic nuclei, and the lateral mammillary nucleus projects bilaterally to the anterodorsal nuclei.190 The medial mammillary nucleus gives rise to a large ascending fibre bundle, which diverges into mammillothalamic and mammillotegmental tracts. The mammillothalamic tract ascends through the lateral hypothalamus to reach the anterior thalamic nuclei, whence massive projections radiate to the cingulate gyrus.191 The Kåtyåyana Íhrauta S™tra belongs to both the Kåˆva and Mådhyandina recensions of Íhukla Yajur Veda. The text has 26 chapters. Bhattacharji notes that, “There is a separate chapter on Paribhå∑hå and a patriarch list and several uncommon rites. . . .”192 Sacrifices treated include new and full moon sacrifices, sacrifices to the Manes, Chåturmåsya or seasonal sacrifice, the animal sacrifice, the Agni∑hˇoma soma sacrifice, the Dvådaßhåha soma sacrifice, the Gavåmayana, the Våjapeya, the Råjas™ya, the Chayana, the Sautråmaˆ¥, the Aßhvamedha, the Puru∑hamedha, Sarvamedha and Pit®medha (again), the Ekåha, the Ah¥na, the Sattra, rites of expiation, and the Pravargya.193 There is an English translation by Ranade.194 Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

k;Ty;yn ≈*tsU] p[qmoå?y;y" p·r.;W;inÂp,m(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

392

aq;toå…/k;r" 1 flyuˇ_;in km;R…, 2 sveRW;mivxeW;t( 3 mnu„y;,;'v;årM.s;mQy;Rt( 4 a©hIn;å≈oi]yW
¨psdNte p[vGyoRTs;dnm( 1 aNt"p;Tye p·r`MyR in/;y d≤=,en in˙≥TyoiCz∑%rm( 2 a;hvnIye ]I'Cz;l;k;n( p[dIPy p[dIPy;¶I/[o /;ryit xt®i{yvTp[itlom' p[m;,eWu) ctugORhIten;….juhoit y; te `mR idVy; xu…git p[itmN]m( 3 p[;Sy tOtIymupivXy 4 =]Sy Tveit in„£m,' purSt;TpàImNt/;Ry 5 s;m p[e„yTyvmOqv∂ºx;" 6 in/n' c 7 ¨Ts;dndex' gCzNTyn¶; ¨ˇrveidm( 8 i]" p·riWCy;…c£didit 9 mN]£me, v; 10 n;….SpOx' p[vO'jnIy' ind/;it ctu"sU·ˇ_·rit 11 p[;'c;ivtr* 12 ¨pxy;'c tU„,Im( 13 prIx;s;v….t" 14 r*ih,hvNy* c;v’∑e

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

393

b;Áº 15 a….[muˇrt a;sNdI' d≤=,t" ’„,;…jnmuˇrt" svRto /iv];…, p·r/I'í r∆usNd;n' vedmupymNy;m;/;y pí;t( 16 pí;≤TpNvne c;….to d<@m( 17 SqU,;myU%' p í;t( 18 r*ih,kp;le c 19-20 m?yeåNyt( 21 %r; ¨ˇrt" ) d≤=,to m;j;RlIydex' bihveR¥uiCz∑%rm( 22 a;secnv≤Nt pys" pUryit `mwRtˇ îit 23 xeW' v[t…m≈' dI≤=t;y p[yCzit 24 p[ˇ' ceTkÉvlm( 25 a] v; p·rWe cnm( 26 v;W;Rhre∑;ho]Iye s;mnI g;yeit p[e„yit 27 c;Tv;le m;jRyNte spàIk; su…mi]y; n îit ) ¨√y…mTyu£;mTyuˇrpUv;R/Rmnpe=meTyw/oåsIit s…m/m;d;y;hvnIyeå>y;d/;it s…mdsIit pàI c g;hRpTye tU„,Im( p[vOÔnIy* xtm;n* b[˜,e dd;it 28 `mRdu`;m?vyRve ) yjm;nv[tdu`;' ho]e ) pà‰; ¨Ì;]eå¶I/eåj;m( 21 `mR.ede yqoˇ_m( 30 ¨%;v∞;Ny' k⁄y;Rt( 31 a….•en cret( 32 Sv;h; p[;,e>y" s;…/pitkÉ>y îit pU,;R¸itm;¥;muˇm;' c mns" k;mm;kÀit…mit 33 p[j;pit" s'….[ym;, îit c yq;k;lm( 34 sivt; p[qmeåh…•it c p[Tyhm( 35 avk;XySy p[vOÔy;t( 36 n p[qmyDe 37 y;vtI ¥;v; pO…qvI îit d…/`mRg[h,' m…y Tyidit .=,m( 38 iTvW" s'vO…git mh;v[tIye 39 c;Tv;le m;jRnm( 40 x;≤Ntkr ,m;¥Ntyo" ) Sv;?y;ydxRn;t( 41-42

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

îit k;Ty;yn≈*tsU]m(

394

195

There are 18 Parißhi∑hˇa attributed to Kåtyåyana and associated with the Íhrauta, G®ihya and Dharma S™tra of Íhukla Yajur Veda. These are Y™palak∑haâ, Chhågalak∑haâ, Pratijñå, Anuvåkasaµkhyå, Charaâvy™ha, Íhraddhakalpa, Íhulba, Âigyaju∑ha, Pår∑hada, I∑hˇakåp™raâ, Pravarådhyåya, M™lyådhyåya, Uñchaßhåstra, Nigamå˙, Yajñapårßhve, Hautrika, Prasavotthåna, and K™rmalak∑haâ. As an example, the Hautra S™tra or Hautrika details the responsibilities of the Hot®i priest in the Yagya. The position of Hot®i is ideally filled by a Âik Veda pandit, and his responsibilities would be of little interest to the Íhukla Yajur Veda pandits following the instructions of Kåtyåyana; however, in the extenuating circumstance where a Âik Veda pandit is not available to fill the office of Hot®i, then the knowledge of the responsibilities of Hot®i in the various Yagya is found in the Hautrika.196 Beginning and ending of the Hautra S™tra are as follows:

h*i]km( aq p[qmoå?y;y" h*]' k·r„yNTs'cre, p[ivXy;pre,;hvnIy' p[;õ™ itœ•?vyuRp[eiWto b[ÑTs;…m/enIrnuv+y;…m îTyuKTv; tSm;Tp[svm;k;Õπt( 1 b[˜p[stU oå©ë≤lpv;Rg[m;\sm\iht\ ˙dydexe åÔ≤l' p[itœ;Py d≤=,' c p;d' ve¥;" ≈o…,sm' ’Tv; ¥;v;pO…qVyorNtrmI=m;,o nm" £Nd' jpet( nm" p[vK]e nm ¨pvK]e nmo {∑ê nmoånu:y;]e ) k îdmnuv+yit s îdmnuv+yit k a;iTvRJy' k·r„yit s a;iTvRJy' k·r„yTyOc" p[p¥e

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

395

yju" p[p¥e s;m p[p¥e b[˜ p[p¥e ån;t;| zNds;' m;tr' p[p¥e .U" p[p¥e .uv" p[p¥e Sv" p[p¥e .U.uRv" Sv" sv| p[p¥e îit 2 i]ih'˚éTyop;\xu mh;Vy;˙tIro'pUv;R" s;…m/enI" p[,ven;/RcRx" s'd?y;t( 3 aNy];Py/RceRåvSyet( 4 p[ vo v;j; a….¥vo hiv„mNto Òt;Cy; ) dev;≤Ôg;it suªyu" – a¶ a; y;ih vItye gO,;no hVyd;tye ) no hot; siTs bihRiW – t' Tv; s…m≤∫ri©ro Òten v/Ry;m…s ) bOhCzoc; yivœ‰ – s n" pOqu ≈v;YymCz; dev ivv;s…s ) bOhd¶e suvIyRm( – ***concluding paragraph***

aq;t" SvrivvOty" 1 mN{e, ivl‚Mbty; c vOÊy; s;…m/enIp[wW;¥;Jy.;g;Ntm( 2 k<#‰en m?ymy; ce@;Ntm( 3 xIWR
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

îit h*i]kÉ pçmoå?y;y"

396

197

N. The Kåˇhaka Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kåˇhaka Íhrauta S™tra with the Substantia innominata of Meynert. (Please refer to Figure 32.) Gray describes the Substantia innominata: The substantia innominata of Meynert is a stratum consisting partly of gray and partly of white substance, which lies below the anterior part of the thalamus and lentiform nucleus [putamen]. It consists of three layers, superior, middle, and inferior. The superior layer is named the ansa lentiformis, and its fibers, derived from the medullary lamina of the lentiform nucleus, pass medially to end in the thalamus and subthalamic region, while others are said to end in the tegmentum and red nucleus. The middle layer consists of nerve cells and nerve fibers; fibers enter it from the parietal lobe through the external capsule, while others are said to connect it with the medial longitudinal fasciculus. The inferior layer forms the main part of the inferior stalk of the thalamus, and connects this body with the temporal lobe and the insula.198 The Kåˇhaka Íhrauta S™tra belongs to K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. Originally, the text had 39 chapters,199 but according to Bhattacharji, the text is only fragmentary, and only a small part of the original is extant. “In one such extant fragment there are directions for the Piˆ∂apit® sacrifice.”200 The text was divided into Paˇala, and the fourth of these Paˇala is among the portions that have survived. The remainder of the Kåˇhaka Íhrauta S™tra Saµkalanam is a collection of quotations of the original Kåˇhaka Íhrauta S™tra from subsequent literature.201 The first Khaˆ∂a of the fourth Paˇala is as follows:

k;#k≈*tsU]e ctuqR" p$l" ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) idv" XyenI….rNvh' ) SvgRk;mo yjet ) idv" Xyenyo n;m s¢e∑y" ) t;…." xuKlp=-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

397

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

398

p[itp¥;r>y s¢;hm( yjet ) aNvhmekìky; i]hiv„ky; ) a¶ye k;m;y;∑;kp;l' a;x;yw c®m( ) anumTyw c®…mit p[qm; ) sv;RSv;¥oˇme tuLye hivWI ) m?ye ivxeW" ) k;m;y b[˜,e yD;y aŒ" a¶ye b≤lmte anuivÊyw Et; i√tIy;idi„vi∑Wu yq;£m' i√tIy;" p[id∑;" ) p[tI∑‰uphom; a;ª;t;" soå] juhotIit ) tSy kmR ) xuKlp=e p[qm;y;m;m;v;SyeneÇ; idv" XyenI….yR+ye Svg| lokmv;“v;nIit s'kLp" ) dwv" Xyen˝ h…v" ) sv| p*,Rm;svt( ) a¶ye k;y ju∑' invRp;…m ) a;x;yw ju∑mnumTyw ju∑m( ) a¶e k;m hVy' r=Sv;xe hVy' r=Sv;numte hVy˝r=Sv; inv;Rpvt( ) p[o=,m( ) p[o=;mIit ivxeW" ) ¨Tkre i]inRnIy yq;.;g' Vy;vtR?vm( ) îdm¶e" k;mSyeit peW,;q;Rn( îdm;x;y; anumTy; îit cvR q;Rn( ) a¶ye k;m;y ju∑m…/vp;…m ) kp;l;Nyup/;y c®√ym( ) a¶ye k;m;y ju∑' s'vp;…m) puro@;xm…/…≈Ty c®√y' `moRåsIit ) a;Jylep;id puro@;xen p[cyR ) a;x;y; anub3[U ih ) a;x;' yj ) a;x;y; ahm•;d" Evmnumte" ) tu>y' t; aXy;m t…mit k;mSy ) a;x;n;' Tv; ivê; a;x; îTy;x;y;" ) anu no ¥;nu-

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

399

mitriNvdnumte Tv…mTynumte" ) n;·rœ;n( ¸Tv; ) a¶ye k;m;y Sv;h; ) a;x;yw Sv;h; ) anumTyw Sv;h; ) p[j;ptye Sv;h; ) Svg;Ry lok;y Sv;h; ) a¶ye iSv∑’te Sv;heit ¸Tv; iSv∑’t' yjit ) hVyv;h' iSv∑…mit iSv∑’t" ) a]e∑* d≤=,;k;le pœ*hIvr;' k˘ sp;]' Âp;Ntr,' k;'cInUpur;id Et;NyNtveRid Sq;p…yTv; n pu'skb¸vcnenoh") b[˜;…, b[˜;…, Sq b[˜,e vo m;m;ih˝…s∑;¸t;in mÁ˝ixv;in .vt ) shß/;r;
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

400

Pravargya and Råjas™ya and lays down rules for the function of the Âigveda priests, the Hot®, Maitravaruâ, Acchavake and Aravastut as also for the Atharvaveda Brahman priest and the sacrificer (Yajamåna). As the Âigveda priests recite verses, instructions are given regarding proper places of pause for breathing during each recitation. Directions are also given for different kinds of invocation, . . . and liturgical formulae for specific junctures of the sacrifice. The Hot® was expected to know not only his Veda, the Âigveda by heart but also the course of the sacrifice so that he could say his bits at the precise moments. The priests had to know how to make up verses from different hymns by joining halves or quarters of verses from different but allied hymns. They were expected to concentrate on the relevant deities while reciting their verses because these were not always mentioned by name in the hymns. . . . The Ãßhvalåyana does not have a separate Paribhå∑hå section for general rules on interpretation but these rules are spread out over the whole text and appear according to the context; the rules are complicated hence the text is also difficult.205 There is an English translation by Ranade.206 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

a;êl;yn≈*tsU]m( ≈Ig,ex;y nm" aqwtSy sm;ª;ySy ivt;ne yog;piˇ' v+y;m" 1 aGNy;/eyp[.OtINy;h vwt;ink;in 2 dxRpU,Rm;s* tu pUv| Vy;:y;Sy;mStN]Sy t];ª;tTv;t( 3 dxRpU,Rm;syohR…v"„v;s•eWu hot;m≤N]t" p[;gudg;hvnIy;dvSq;y p[;Ñü%o yDopvITy;cMy d≤=,;vOi√h;r' p[p¥te pUveR,oTkrmpre, p[,It;" 4 î?mmpre,;p[,Ite 5 c;Tv;l' c;Tv;lvTsu 6 EtˇIqR…mTy;c=te 7 tSy inTy;" p[;çíe∑;" 8 a˚/;r,; c 9 yDopvItx*ce c 10 ivh;r;dVy;vOiˇí t] cet( kmR 11 Ek;©vcne d≤=,' p[tIy;t( 12 an;dexe

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

401

13 kmRcodn;y;' hot;r' 14 dd;tIit yjm;n' 15 juhoit jptIit p[;y…íˇe b[˜;,' 16 Ac' p;dg[h,e 17 sUˇ_' sUˇ_;d* hIne p;de 18 a…/kÉ tOc' sVvR] 19 jp;numN],;Py;ynopSq;n;Nyup;'xu 20 mN];í kMmRkr,;" 21 p[s©;dpv;do blIy;n( 22 p[p¥;….˙ttre, p;den veid≈o
pOWdê; muÌl; iv„,uvO√;" k
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

402

Ek Ev AiWy;Rvt( p[vre„vnuvˇRte t;vTsm;ngo]TvmNy] .OGvi©rs;©,;idTysm;np[vrwivRv;ho ivv;h" 207

P. The Jaimin¥ya Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Jaimin¥ya Íhrauta S™tra with the Medial Dorsal Nucleus of the Thalamus. (Please refer to Figure 33.) Carpenter and Sutin describe the Medial Dorsal Nucleus of the Thalamus:208 The dorsomedial nucleus (DM) occupies most of the area between the internal medullary lamina and the periventricular gray. Three cytologically distinct regions of the nucleus are recognized: (a) a magnocellular portion, located rostrally and dorsomedially, consisting of fairly large, polygonal, deeply staining cells, (b) a large dorsolateral and caudal parvicellular portion made up of small, pale-staining cells which tend to occur in clusters and (c) a paralaminar portion characterized by very large cells occupying a narrow band adjacent to the internal medullary lamina. The nucleus has connections with the centromedian and other

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

403

intralaminar nuclei and with the lateral nuclear groups. The medial magnocellular division of the dorsomedial nucleus receives fibers from the amygdaloid complex, temporal neocortex and possibly the substantia innominata via the inferior thalamic peduncle. . . . . The medial subdivision of the dorsomedial nucleus also receives projections from the pyriform cortex and the olfactory tubercle, which suggests that portions of this nucleus may receive an olfactory input. The caudal orbitofrontal cortex also has connections with the medial division of the dorsomedial nucleus. The Jaimin¥ya Íhrauta S™tra belongs to Såma Veda. The text has 26 Khaˆ∂a. There is a commentary by Bhavatråta that comments extensively on two additional sections of text; although long thought to be no longer extant, these have also been discovered.209 The first part, consisting of 26 Khaˆ∂a, treats the Agnichayana and the Pravargya, prescribing the Såmans to be recited for each.210 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

jw…mnIy ≈*t sU] aq p[qm" %<@" somp[v;km;gt' p[itmN]yet mhNmeåvoco .g' meåvoc" pui∑' meåvoco yxo meåvoc îit ) aqwnm;h k≤∞•;hIn" ) k≤∞•;nU∂ºXy" ) k≤∞dNyStm;iTvRJy' kÉ y;jy≤Nt ) k; d≤=,; îit ) tSy ]I…, mIm;'set jNmkmRiTvRj îit ) Et;Nyev yjm;n AiTvj;' mIm;'set ) td;Û" koåhIn îit ) aitr;]" p[qmoåhIn îTy;Û" ) nih soåhor;]yohIRyte ik≤çidit ) td;n?y;yo .vit ) anU∂ºXyen n y;jyed( y] TvNt"xvo g[;mo .vit ) aNt"xv EW yDo yoånU∂ºXy" îit ) NyStm;iTvRJy' n k⁄y;Rd( ) te ydev pUvR" p·rc=;,o NySy;ˇdev p·rc+mh îit ) aq;ip

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

404

NySt…mTyetenwv ) kÉ y;jyNtIit ) anUc;n; Ev;nUc;n' bN/umNto bN/umNt' suc·ritn" suc·ritnm( îit ) ’„,jNm;n' n y;jyet( ) p;pkm;R,' n y;jyet( ) ’„,jNm….A≥iTv‚G." sh n y;jyet( ) p;pkmR…." sh n y; jyet( ) k;d≤=,; îit ) n d≤=,;" pOCzπidit h Sm;h x;$‰;yinivR£ySywtd( Âp…mit ) pOCzπidit h Sm;h t; <@‰ EtTflo vw yDo y∂≤=,; îit ) s yid y;j…y„yn( Sy;d….{ved( ) s y¥dI≤=t' y+ym;,' gCzπduˇrt ¨pivXy p[v;cyet ) yjm;n Ev;t Ë?vRm….{vit p·rveW,;y 1 ***concluding paragraph***

aq Wi@±v'x" %<@" aq pxubN/eWu ) s;iv];…, s;iv]e ) a;¶ey;Ny;¶eye ) EeN{;
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

405

dex;>y;s" Sy;d( ¨√;snIy Ev svoR in/nmupey;dv.Oqs;…ª c ) n v;W;Rhre ) a;vitRv[txui£yeWu ctu"km;Rp•;" k⁄yuR" ) .[;j;.[;j;>y;' tUp{vin/ne i]®ˇ_É Sy;t;m( ) kSy heto·rit ) Ek…v'xe .vt" ) svRm;vitR pçoˇ_' mh;v[te ) aNy] p[=;ve>y" p[=;ve>y" 26 îTy…¶∑omSy jw…minsU]' sm;¢m( 211

Q. The Nidåna S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Nidåna Íhrauta S™tra with the Lateral Dorsal Nucleus of the Thalamus. (Please refer to Figure 33, p. 402.) Carpenter and Sutin describe the Lateral Dorsal Nucleus of the Thalamus as follows: This nucleus begins near the caudal part of the anterior nuclear group and extends caudally along the dorsal surface of the thalamus. A well-defined myelin capsule surrounds the nucleus which in myelin-sheath-stained sections has light staining properties similar to that of the anterior nuclear group. The nucleus achieves its largest dimensions dorsal to the portion of the internal medullary lamina which contains the central lateral nucleus. Topographically this nucleus has been considered as a posterior extension of the anterior nuclear group. . . . Recent data indicate that its fibers pass mainly to the cingulate gyrus, although some pass to the supralimbic cortex of the parietal lobe. Retrograde transport studies indicate that HRP injected into all parts of the limbic cortex, except for the rostral region, labels cells in the lateral dorsal nucleus. The lateral dorsal nucleus also sends and receives fibers from the precuneal cortex.212 The Nidåna S™tra belongs to the Bhållaveya recension of Såma Veda.213 The text contains 30 Paˇala divided among ten Prapåˇhaka. According to the Gautama Pit®medha S™tra, which quotes the text, the Nidåna S™tra is by Patanjali. There is a detailed summary of the various topics treated in the work.214 The first Prapåˇhaka deals with meter.215 The second discusses the authenticity of the ¤ha and the relationship between the Såman and its corresponding verse or strophe. The third begins by comparing the

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

406

merits of the Agni∑hˇoma and Atiråtra sacrifices.216 Bhattacharji says, “The text is interesting for the wide range of historical and literary information it supplies.”217 The author’s chief aim in subsequent Prapåˇhaka is to lay down the different Såman and Stoma to be used in the various sacrifices described in the Pañcaviµßha Bråhmaâ.218 Major sacrifices discussed include the Agni∑hˇoma, Daßharåtra, Ah¥na, Gavåmayana, Sattra, Jye∑hˇhayajña, the Chåturmåsyas, the four day rite, the Ûha∂aha, the Aindra, and finally, the thousand years sacrificial session.219 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

aq ind;nsU]m( aq p[qm" p[p;#k" aq;tXzNds;' ivcy' Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) ]yXzNd"p;d; .v≤Nt ) a∑;=r Ek;dx;=ro √;dx;=r îit ) tiNm≈' dx;=r" ) a∑;=r a;pç;=rt;y;" p[it£;mit ) ivÄêeÅW;ã ihètÅ" îit ) a;ctur=rt;y;' îTyekÉ ) a;dx;=rt;y; a….£;mit ) vÖy' tdÿSyô s'.Oÿt'Ö vsu îit ) Ek;dx;=r a;nv;=rt;y;" p[it£;mit ) yidÿ v; dÖ/e yidÿ v;ô n îit ) a;∑;=rt;y; îTyekÉ )

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

407

a;pçdx;=rt;y; a….£;mit ) sè];Ä d/;ñnèmÄp[Åit„k⁄tè˝ ≈Äv;Å˝…sè .UÄ·rÅ îit ) √;dx;=r a;nv;=rt;y;" p[it£;mit ) aènpU eô gom;èNgoÄ….År=;è" îit ) a;∑;=rt;y; îTyekÉ ) a;Wo@x;=rt;y; a….£;mit ivkWeR, ) Tv'Å vOè];Ä…,Å h˝Syp[ètIôNyekè îÅTpuè® îit ) a;∑;dx;=rt;y; îTyekÉ ) ac;RÄ…mÅ sèTyÄsÅv˝ ràè/;Åmè….Å ip[èy'Å mèitÅ' kivm( îit ) aq;to vOiˇp[dex" ) y] ÓSvm=rmupoˇm' p;dSy .vit s; j;gtI vO·ˇ" ) y] dI`R˝ s; ]w∑ë.I ) ÓSv;=rSyop·r∑;d( VyÔns…•p;teåip g*rvm( ) a∑;=r√;dx;=r* lùvOˇI dx;=rwk;dx;=r* gu®vOˇI ) Etw" %lu zNd;˝…s vtRNte ) pQy;Nyev;g[e s¢ ctu®ˇr;…, zNd;˝…s Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 ***concluding S™tra***

Eten vw g;v" p[j;it' .Um;nmgCzn( p[j;yNte bhvo .vNtIit ) Stomtíwv gv;myn;n;˝ roho .iv„ytIit ) aqwtt( p[j;pte" shßs'vTsr' prm;' ivr;jmup’tm( ) aip v; p[j;ptIPs;mevop’t˝ Sy;t( )

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

408

t] %lu i]vOt' kroit rq;Ntr' c lùí;g[Stomí;g[' p[j;pit·rit ) Jyoit∑om' tN]m( ) a;…¶∑omI˝ s˝Sq;˝ rqNtrpOœm( ) t] %lu bOhSpitsv' kroit ) EWoå…¶∑om≤S]vOtStomo rqNtrpOœo Jyoit∑omtN]o .vtIit Ny;yKlO¢muˇr' Ny;yKlO¢muˇrm( 13 îit ind;nsU]e dxm" p[p;#k" ind;nsU]' sm;¢m( 220

R. The Baudhåyana Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Baudhåyana Íhrauta S™tra with the Hyopthalamic Nuclei. (Please refer to Figure 34.) Carpenter and Sutin describes the location and topography of the Hypothalamus as follows: The hypothalamus is the part of the diencephalon concerned with the central control of visceral, autonomic and endocrine functions, and with affective behavior. The hypothalamus lies in the walls of the third ventricle below the hypothalamic sulci and is continuous across the floor of this ventricle. On the ventral surface of the brain the infundibulum, to which the hypophysis is attached, emerges posterior to the optic chiasm. A slightly bulging region posterior to the infundibulum is the tuber cinereum. The ventral external hypothalamus is bounded anteriorly by the optic chiasm, laterally by the optic tracts and posteriorly by the mammillary bodies. This region is roughly diamond shaped and its surface is irregular because of several small protuberances, identified as eminences.221 Gray describes the divisions of nuclei within the Hypothalamus: The hypothalamus contains a number of neuronal groups that have been classified on phylogenetic, developmental, cytoarchitectonic, synaptic and histochemical grounds into named nuclei, many of which are not very clearly delimited,

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

409

especially in the adult. While it contains a few large myelinated tracts, many of the connections are diffuse and unmyelinated, and the precise paths of many afferent, efferent, and intrinsic connections are uncertain. The hypothalamus can be divided anteroposteriorly into chiasmatic (supraoptic), tuberal (infundibulo-tuberal) and posterior (mammillary) regions, and mediolaterally into periventricular, intermediate (medial), and lateral zones. Between the intermediate and lateral zones is a paramedian plane, which contains the prominent myelinated fibres of the column of the fornix, the mammillothalamic tract and the fasciculus retroflexus. For this reason, some authors group the periventricular and intermediate zones as a single medial zone. These divisions are artificial and functional systems cross them.222 The Baudhåyana Íhrauta S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text is divided into 30 Praßhna. Many sacrifices are described including the Agnyådheya, Agnihotra, Piˆ∂apit®yajña, Paßhubandha, Chåturmåsya,

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

410

Agni∑hˇoma, Pravargya, Agnichayana, Våjapeya, Råjas™ya, I∑hˇi, Aßhvamedha, Dvådaßhåha, Gavåmayana, Ah¥na, Atiråtra, Ekådaßhini, Ekåha, Råjas™ya, and the Sautråmaî. Bhattacharji describes the text: The subjects treated in the Baudhåyana include the major sacrifices, Pravargya and Aßhvamedha and a few unfamiliar subjects. . . . It has sections on concluding (Karmånta) rites, expiatory rites (Pråyaßhcitta), and patriarch (pravara) list; it also contains a Íhulba section. . . . Many old authorities are quoted. . . 223 There is an English translation by Kashikar.224 Beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

b*/;yn ≈*tsU]m( p[qm" p[Xn" a;m;v;Syen v; p*,Rm;sen v; hivW; y+ym;,o .vit s purSt;dev hivr;tçnmupkLpyt Ek;hen v; √‰hen v; yqTvRq vw b[;˜,' .vit d›;tn·ˇ_ seN{Tv;y;…¶ho]oCzπW,m>y;tn·ˇ_ yDSy s'tTy;îit cN{ms' v;inD;Ry s'p,U | v; ivD;y;¶InNv;d/;it ]I…, k;œ;in g;hRpTye å>y;d/;it ]I
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

411

≈eœtm;y kmR, a;Py;y?vm…fly; dev.;gmUjRSvtI" pySvtI" p[j;vtIrnmIv; ay+m; m; v Sten Èxt m;`x\ so ®{Sy heit" p·r vo vO,ÆKTvit /[uv; a‚SmNgopt* Sy;t b◊I·rit yjm;nmI=teåqwt;\ x;%;mg[e,;hvnIy' py;R˙Ty pUvRy; √;r; p[p;¥ j`nen g;hRpTym…¶œºånSyuˇr;/eR v;¶‰g;rSyoÌUhit yjm;nSy pxUNp;hIit nu yid s'nyit y¥u vw n s'nyit bihR" p[itpdev .vit 1 ***concluding S™tra***

n;r;x\ s;NVy;:y;Sy;m a;]eyv;?r‰êv;/Ulv…sœk
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

412

mN]o b[;˜,' ved îTy;c=te tSm;Tp[vrD;ne yào mh;≤N√jw" k;yR" ≈;ıivv;h A‚Tvjo dev; Sto]' go]mUl;in c mh;p[vre s'itœte inTy' pvR…,pvR…, Sv;?y;yI b[˜lokÉ mhIyte b[˜lokÉ mhIyt îit 54 225

S. The Vaikhånasa Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vaikhånasa Íhrauta S™tra with the Fasciculus Retroflexus. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) Gray describes the Fasciculus Retroflexus as follows: The trigonum habenulae is a small depressed triangular area situated in front of the superior colliculus and on the lateral aspect of the posterior part of the taenia thalami. It contains a group of nerve cells termed the ganglion habenulae. Fibers enter it from the stalk of the pineal body, and others, forming what is termed the habenular commissure, pass across the middle line to the corresponding ganglion of the opposite side. Most of its fibers are, however, directed downward and form a bundle, the fasciculus retroflexus of Meynert, which passes medial to the red nucleus, and after decussating with the corresponding fasciculus of the opposite side, ends in the interpeduncular ganglion.226 The projections from the habenula via the fasciculus retroflexus to the interpeduncular nucleus and adjacent ventral tegmental area in the midbrain provide a route through which forebrain limbic structures can influence midbrain nuclear groups.227 The Vaikhånasa Íhrauta S™tra, also known as the Aukhiyas™tra, belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text has twenty-one Praßhna. Bhattacharji describes the text: Besides a Paribhå∑hå chapter, it deals fully with many major sacrifices but does not dwell on . . . ones like Aßhvamedha, Puru∑hamedha, Sarvamedha or Råjas™ya. The main emphasis is on Soma sacrifices. There are two Pråyaßhcitta sections in connection with I∑hˇi and Soma which form its last two chapters. 228 The beginning and ending paragraphs are as follows:

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

413

vw%;ns ≈*t sU]m( aq;GNy;/ey' Vy;:y;Sy;mo b[;˜,o vsNte r;jNyo g[I„me vwXy" xrid rqk;ro vW;Rsu sveR ixixr îTyekÉ roih,I’iˇk;mOgixr"punvRsˇU r;nUr;/;≈v,hStivx;%;SvekiSm•=]eåm;v;Sy;y;' p*,Rm;Sy;' v;d/It ’iˇk;Sv…¶m; d/Iteit b[;˜,oˇ_;in k;My;in n=];…, yq;k;m' y]wt;in ]I…,s'.vNTyOtunR=]' pvR t∫{' ivp[itWe/e tu n=]mOtuí blIy" somen y+ym;n a;d/It nt|u n n=]' sU=eR¥qopp;d' xmIg.RmêTq' y¥xmIg.| xuKl;ïrmxinv;YvnuphtmGNydG/' b¸p+yn;v;smxu„kmxI,RmNTyj;Tynupht' gTv; vwê;nrsUˇ_Én p[d≤=,' ’Tv; p[,met( tenwv p[;cImudIcI' v; x;%;' p[;g;id p[d≤=,' zπd…yTv; p[;gg[mudgg[' v; inp;tyet( pittoˇrm/r' mUlmg[' c yq; Dey' tq;˚…yTv; x;%;p];…, p[h;pyit t;' i√/; Czπd…yTv;/o.;gen;/r;mr…,' TvKp;êoR?vR.;g;' ivgtTvc' ivxoiWt;' ctu…v|xTy©ël;yt;m∑;©ë≤livSt;r;' ctur©ëlo•t;' tqoˇr.;genoˇr;mr…,' c g;y}y; kroit t] p[qm;in y;in cTv;yR©ël;in ixrí=u" ≈o]m;Sy' c i√tIy;in y;in g[Iv; v=o ˙dy'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

414

StnStOtIy;Nyudrp[.OtIin ctuq;Rin ≈o,I pçm;NyUÂ Wœ;in jÏπ p;d;ivTyek Evmr,I svwRr©¯" s'p,U Re .vto yCz«i„,R mNqit xIWR·ˇ_m;Nyjm;no .vit yÌ[Iv;y;' vepnoåy' inmRNqe¥dudreån;rB/oåSy yDo .vTyUÂ r=s;' yoinjRÏπ p;d* ipx;c;n;' ≈o,I dev;n;' yoinStSm;Czô
a¶e v;jSy gomt îit itsO….®i„,‚G.r?vyuRr;¶I/[e juhoTyuˇr;…." p[itp[Sq;t; yid p•ejinklxo vstIvrIrek/n;" k⁄M.e∑k;" Kvqne∑k; v; pr;…sCyerNyUp*duMbrI{o,klx; dIPyern( rxn; ….¥et kplmNy√; p;]mpSq;ne %enwv yjuW;….jpit d;®mym;hvnIye p[hret( ) ?y;y•;r;y,' yTp[;y…íˇm….dd;Ty;nqRKy;ˇˇTp[s©π tTk⁄y;Rd;pTsu tın' tın…mTy;h iv%n;" 18 îTyek…v'x" p[Xn" îit ≈Imd*%eyx;%;y;' iv%ns; p[oˇ_É ≈Ivw%;nssU]e mUlgOÁº √;i]'x" p[Xn" 229

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

415

T. The Anupada Íhrauta S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Anupada Íhrauta S™tra with the Mammillotegmental tract. Carpenter and Sutin describe the Mammillotegmental tract as follows: Mammillary efferent fibers, arising from the medial mammillary nucleus and to a lesser extent from the lateral and intermediate mammillary nuclei, form a well defined bundle, the fasciculus mammillaris princeps. This bundle passes dorsally for a short distance and divides into two components: the Mammillothalamic tract and the mammillotegmental tract. . . . The mammillotegmental tract curves caudally into the midbrain tegmentum. Fibers of this tract terminate in the dorsal and ventral tegmental nuclei. 230 The Anupada Íhrauta S™tra is one of the Íhrauta S™tra belonging to Såma Veda. The text is unpublished. It deals with “the lustral bath,. . . Soma sacrifices, . . . the Gavåmayana, . . . solo Såmans to be sung at the Pravargya and the Agnichayana, and the Subrahmaˆya litany and its variations.”231 According to Shåstri, the Anupada S™tra “attempts an exposition of obscure passages of the Pañchaviµßhati Bråhmaâ, and quotes as authorities a large number of works of the different schools of the Âik and the Yajur-vedas, besides those of Såma-veda.”232 These are the 20 Íhrauta S™tra texts that are presented by H.M. King Nader Råm. The 20 Íhrauta S™tra texts give a detailed and comprehensive vision of the architecture of Natural Law governing the quality of transformation in national consciousness, through large and complex Yagya procedures, involving many participants, that are capable of bringing prosperity and fulfillment of desire to the entire society. The same intelligence that designs the Yagya which connect and channel the organizing power of Natural Law for the fulfillment of individual and collective desires, has organized the layout of Subcortical nuclei and pathways, that mediate between the conscious thinking processes of the cortex, and the unconscious, autonomic functions of the brain stem, connecting and transforming the resources of the physiology for the

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

416

fulfillment of the aspirations of the individual, while attuning the aspirations of the individual to the short and long term requirements of the physiology: It is the same precise architecture of Natural Law that brings about transformation in the human physiology, in the national consciousness and in the universe. This concludes the discussion of the 20 Íhrauta S™tra correlated with the 20 components of the Subcortical structures of the limbic system. IV. ÍHULBA S¤TRA The Íhulba S™tra are texts on the mathematical layout of various structures used in Yagya performances. According to Sen and Bag, The Íhulba S™tras . . . deal specifically with rules for the measurements and constructions of the various sacrificial fires and altars and consequently involve geometrical propositions and problems relating to rectilinear figures, their combinations and transformations, squaring the circle and circling the square as well as arithmetical and algebraic solutions of problems arising out of such measurements and constructions. The word Íhulba (also spelt as Íhulva) means a ‘cord’, a ‘rope’, or a ‘string’, and its root Íhulb signifies ‘measuring’ or ‘act of measurements’.233 H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Íhulba S™tra with the Mesocortex and several neocortical structures. The Mesocortex is the portion of the medial cortex that is caudal to the corpus callosum. (Please refer to Figure 24, p. 255.) The Mesocortex represents a type of cortex that is transitional between the three-layer cortex characteristic of the Archicortex and Paleocortex, and the six layer cortex characteristic of the the remainder of the cerebral cortex, called Neocortex.234 A. The Kåˇhaka Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kåˇhaka Íhulba S™tra with the Subcallosal gyrus. (Please refer to Figure 28, p. 273, where it is labeled ‘Subcallosal area.’) Gray describes the Subcallosal gyrus: The subcallosal gyrus (gyrus subcallosus; peduncle of the corpus callosum) is a

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

417

narrow lamina on the medial surface of the hemisphere in front of the lamina terminalis, behind the parolfactory area, and below the rostrum of the corpus callosum. It is continuous around the genu of the corpus callosum with the supracallosal gyrus. [Please refer to Figure 25, p. 256].235 The Kåˇhaka Íhulba S™tra, known also as the Laugåk∑hi Íhulba S™tra,236 is known only through references. Sen and Bag report that they were unable to locate any Íhulba S™tra other than those by Baudhåyana, Ãpastamba, Kåtyåyana, and Månava.237 B. The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhulba S™tra with the Paraterminal gyrus. Carpenter and Sutin describe the Paraterminal gyrus: The media olfactory stria extends toward the medial hemispheric surface and becomes continuous with a small cortical field known as the subcallosal area (parolfactory area), located beneath the rostrum of the corpus callosum. This area is limited in front by the anterior parolfactory sulcus, while behind it is separated by the posterior parolfactory sulcus from an other strip of cortex, the paraterminal gyrus, which is closely applied to the rostral lamina of the corpus callosum. The subcallosal area and the paraterminal gyrus together constitute the septal area (paraterminal body).238 The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhulba S™tra is the twenty-fifth Praßhna of the Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhrauta S™tra, which belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The twenty-fifth Praßhna contains two parts. The first is a S™tra text that is identical to the Ãpastamba Íhulba S™tra. It is divided into six Paˇala and 21 Khaˆ∂a.239 The second part is the Chayanopayogikårikå˙ which has 445 verses. With regard to the S™tra section, according to Khadilkar, The [first Paˇala deals] mainly with Geometrical rules. The remaining portion consists of the description of the various Vedis, Citis, etc., and forms and sizes of bricks required for their construction, with instructions as to how and where to place them.240 The S™tra section is translated into English by Sen and Bag.241 The beginning and ending of the S™tra section is as follows:

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

418

sTy;W;!ivr…ct' ihrySy 3 apr‚Sm˝StOtIye W@±.;gone l=,' kroit 4 pOœ‰;NtyorNt* inyMy 5 l=,en d≤=,;åp;yMy in…mˇ' kroit 6 Evmuˇrt" 7 ivpyRSyetrt" 8 s sm;…/" 9 t…•…mˇo inÓ;so vO≤ıv;R 10 a;y;m' v;å>ySy;åågNtu ctuqRm;y;mí;+,y;r∆uiStyRÑ;nI xeW" 11 Vy;:y;t' ivhr,m( 12 dI`Rctur≈Sy;+,y;r∆u" p;êRm;nI ityRÑ;nI c yTpOqG.Ute k⁄®tStdu.y' kroit 13 t;….DeRy;….®ˇ_' ivhr,m( 14 smctur≈Sy;+,y;r∆ui√≥St;vtI' .U…m' kroit smSy i√kr,Im( 15 ***concluding S™tra***

an;ª;n;t( 63 ivD;yte c k˚…ct˝ xIWRy;so

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

åivxeW;t( 68 dI`Rctur≈;,;˝ sm;sen p=puCz;n;˝ sm;s ¨ˇ_" 69 Ek…v˝xoå…¶.RvtITyême/eivD;yte 70 t] pu®W;>y;so n;riàp[;dex;n;\ s':y;s'yog;Ts':y;s'yog;t( 71 îit sTy;W;!ihr
The beginning and ending of the Chayanopayogikårikå˙ is as follows:

aq cynopyo…gk;·rk;" akìkhome d;·r{‰' /inkTv' smu∞ye Ac' y¥≤Ntm;' k⁄y;RCzNdog;…m fl' .vet( 1 atoå≤Ntm' yju" k⁄y;R¥Jvg;…mfl;¢ye %;idrI vw,vI v;å….[" kLm;WI suiWr; n v; 2 +,ut; co.yto v;åNytrto b[˜vO=j; akoRduMbrxMyuTq; v;åNy;fltÂ∫v; 3 Vy;mm;]I mui∑m;]I b;¸m;]I Áq;ip v; ariàm;]I p[;dexm;]I v; Á…mt;åip v; 4 ip∑;NymRkp;l;n;' ve
419

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

420

Ete s'sjRnIy;Stu p[vGyoR%e∑k;idWu xUNyg[;mSqmO∫;<@%<@÷ TvmRkp;lkm( 7 p[;dexo∞;årià…mt; ityRGVy;y;ms'…mt; smNtp·rm;,en v;å…mt; ctur…≈k; 8 sm;Ntr;l;å∑;…≈v;R b*/;ynmt;nug; p·rm<@lk; v;å….c;r;d* tu nv;…≈k; 9 m?ydexe tu r;ò; v; …bldexsmIpt" √* yd; p[;≤Gd≤x Sy;t;' cTv;ro idKctu∑ye 10 ***concluding verses***

Wœ‰;mNTy; ivk,I| Sy;Tp[oqdêeitmN]t" a;tO<,kop/;n' Sy;iCz∑; lok˘pO,; îh 441 …v'xitcoˇre cwk; ]y" p[Str Ev tu …ct* ihr
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

421

C. The Baudhåyana Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Baudhåyana Íhulba S™tra with the Cingulate gyrus. Gray describes the Cingulate gyrus: The zone under the cingulate sulcus is the cingulate gyrus. Starting below the rostrum, this gyrus follows the callosal curve, separated by the callosal sulcus. It continues round the splenium to the inferior surface, and then into the parahippocampal gyrus through the narrow isthmus.244 The cingulate gyrus may be divided rostrocaudally into several cytoarchitectonically discrete areas. These are the prelimbic (area 32) and infralimbic (area 25) cortices, the anterior cingulate cortex (areas 23 and 24) and part of the posterior cingulate or retrosplenial cortex (area 29). The cingulate gyrus, which is related to the medial surfaces of the frontal lobe, contains specific motor areas, and has extensive connections with neocortical areas of the frontal lobe. The cingulate gyrus on the medial surface of the parietal lobe has equally extensive connections wtih somatosensory and visual-association areas of the parietal, occipital and temporal lobes. These afferents to the cingulate gyrus are predominantly from neocortical areas on the lateral surface of the hemisphere. Within the cingulate cortex, most projections pass caudally, ultimately into the posterior parahippocampal gyrus. Through this system, afferents from widespread areas of association cortex converge upon the medial temporal lobe and hippocampal formation.245 The Baudhåyana Íhulba S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. It is included as the thirtieth Praßhna of the Baudhåyana Íhrauta S™tra. The Baudhåyana Íhulba S™tra has three chapters and 21 Khaˆ∂a. According to Khadilkar, (1) The first part is devoted to the Geometrical portion, required in the construction of various Vedis, Citis and Pandals etc. In addition to this, the distance between the sacred fires, their shapes, the forms of different bricks and their numbers and how to place them is described. Then follows the description of various Dhi∑hˆyas. (2) The second and third chapters deal with Vedis, Citis, Pandals, etc. giving their sizes, shapes of bricks required and how and where to place them.246 In the first chapter, the first 20 S™tra give the definitions of different measures that occur in the S™tra. The next 20 S™tra give an idea of four different methods of

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

422

constructing a square. S™tra 45 gives a clear definition of the square on the diagonal of a square. S™tra 48 gives the definition of the square on the diagonal of a rectangle with reference to two other sides (this proposition is at present named after Pythagoras) and S™tra 68 gives the value of the square root of two. There is an English translation by Sen and Bag.247 Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

b*/;yn xuLb sU]m( aqemeå…¶cy;" 1 teW;' .Ume" p·rm;,ivh;r;NVy;:y;Sy;m" 2 aq;©ëlp[m;,' ctudRx;,v" ctuiS]'x·ˇl;" pOqus'…Xl∑; îTyprm( ) dx;©ël' =u{pdm( ) √;dx p[;dex" ) pOqoˇryuge ]yod≤xkÉ ) pd' pçdx ) a∑;xIitxtmIW; ) ctu"xtm=" ) W@xIityuRgm( ) √;i]'x∆;nu" ) Wi$(]'xCzMy;b;Ù ) i√pd" p[£m" ) √* p[;dex;vrià" ) aq;Pyud;hr≤Ntpde yuge p[£meårà;ivyit xMy;y;' c m;n;qeRWu y;q;k;mIit ) pç;rià" pu®Wo Vy;mí ) cturriàVy;Ry;m" 3 ctur≈' …ck°WRNy;v≤∞k°WeRˇ;vtI' r∆umu.yt" p;x;' ’Tv; m?ye l=,' kroit ) le%;m;≤l:y tSy; m?ye xï÷ inhNy;t( ) tiSmNp;x* p[itmuCy l=,en m<@l' p·r≤l%et( ) iv„kM.;Ntyo" x˚À inhNy;t( ) pUvRiSmNp;x' p[itmuCy p;xen m<@l' p·r≤l%et( ) EvmpriSm'Ste y] smey;t;' ten i√tIy' iv„kM.m;yCzπt(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

423

) iv„kM.;Ntyo" x˚À inhNy;t( ) pUvRiSmNp;x* p[itmuCy l=,en m<@l' p·r≤l%et( ) Ev' d≤=,t Ev' pí;devmuˇrtSteW;' yeåNTy;" s'sg;RSt∞tur≈'s'p¥te 4 ***concluding S™tra***

kÀmRSy;Nte tnu purIWmupd?y;Nm?ye b¸lm( ) Etdev {o,e ivprItm( 9 aqhwk Ekiv/p[.OtINp[*g;dIn( b[ëvte 10 smctur≈;nek a;c;y;‹" ) tSy kry;so n;riàp[;dex;n;' 12 p[;’to v; i]gu," ) i]St;vo å…¶.RvtITyek…v'xoå…¶.RvtITyu.y' b[;˜,mu.y' b[;˜,m( 13 21 îit b*/;ynxuLbsU]m( 248

D. The Våråha Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Våråha Íhulba S™tra with the Orbito-frontal gyrus 1. Gray describes the Orbito-frontal gyrus 1, which he calls the Medial Orbital gyrus: The inferior frontal gyrus lies below the inferior frontal sulcus, and extends forward from the lower part of the precentral sulcus; it is continuous with the lateral and posterior orbital gyri on the under surface of the lobe. It is subdivided by the anterior horizontal and ascending rami of the lateral fissure into three parts, viz., (1) the orbital part, below the anterior horizontal ramus of the fissure; (2) the triangular part (cap of Broca), between the ascending and horizontal rami; and (3) the basilar part, behind the anterior ascending ramus. The left inferior frontal gyrus is, as a rule, more highly developed than the right, and is named the gyrus of Broca, from the fact that Broca described it as the center for articulate speech. The inferior or orbital surface of the frontal lobe is concave, and rests on the orbital plate of the frontal bone. (Fig. 729). It is divided into four orbital gyri by a well-marked H-shaped orbital sulcus. These are named, from their position, the

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

424

medial [1], anterior [2], lateral [3], and posterior [4] orbital gyri. The medial orbital gyrus presents a well-marked anterioposterior sulcus, the olfactory sulcus, for the olfactory tract; the portion medial to this is named the straight gyrus, and is continuous with the superior frontal gyrus on the medial surface. 249 The Våråha Íhulba S™tra belongs to the Maitråyan¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. According to K. Sharma, The Våråha Íhulbas™tra is very similar to the texts of Månava and Maitråyaniya Íhulbas™tra. It reproduces several Kårikas from the Månava text, and one Kårika from the Kåtyåyana Íhulbas™tra. The text is divided into 3 parts, each further divided into several sections (Khåˆ∂as). 250 The text has not yet been published. E. The Vådh™la Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vådh™la Íhulba S™tra with the Orbito-frontal gyrus 2. The Orbital gyri have been described by Gray in the above section on the Våråha Íhulba S™tra. Gray calls the Orbito-frontal gyrus 2, the Anterior Orbital Gyrus.251 Please refer to Figure 35. The Vådh™la Íhulba S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. Khadilkar writes: “The manuscript of the Vådh™la Íhrauta S™tra is available at Madras but it will have to be ascertained whether it contains a Íhulba S™tra.”252 Subsequently the Vådh™la Íhrauta S™tra has been published by Caube,253 but so far, according to Dr. Ikari of Kyoto University, only fragments of the Íhulba S™tra have been discovered.254 F. The Månava Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Månava Íhulba S™tra with the Orbito-frontal gyrus 3. The Orbital gyri have been described by Gray in the above section on the Våråha Íhulba S™tra. Gray calls the Orbito-frontal gyrus 3, the Lateral Orbital Gyrus.255 Please refer to Figure 35. The Månava Íhulba S™tra belongs to the Maitråyan¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The text is mixed with both verses and prose passages: The text has

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

425

117 verses with 23 prose passages intermingled, organized into 16 Khaˆ∂a. According to Khadilkar, the text has three parts: The first part consists of the East-West line; the relative positions of the three sacred fires, etc. The second part is called Uttare∑hˇaka and the third is Vai∑hâva. This deals mainly with the square and the circle and the description of a few Citis. 256 Bag and Sen note further that, The Månava Íhulba S™tra, although following the common tradition of the Íulbakåras, gives methods and details often very difficult to comprehend. In many cases the details are either lacking or incomplete and can be understood only by reference to Baudhåyana, Ãpastamba and Kåtyåyana. . . . The very arrangement and the treatment of the subject have appeared far from systematic.257 There is an English translation by Sen and Bag.258 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

m;nvxuLbsU]m( aq;t" xuLb' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 r∆u' p;xvtI' sm;'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

426

inr;yt;' pOœ‰;' yq;qRmupkLpyet( 2 aNtre, …c];Sv;tI ≈v,p[it≈v,* ’·ˇk;p[it’·ˇkÉ it„ypunvRsU c p[;Gdexo åy' yugm;]oidtyo" p;x;ç 3 d;≤xRKy;" xy;" W$(t;in s¢ s¢dxwv tu Ek˘ √π pç twmIRTv; smrw" p·rle%yet( 4 a's;Czô,* rJJvNt' p[itœ;Py p[;cImnu≤l%ed'sep[itœ;Py p[tIcI' smre rJJvNt' p[itœ;Py ≈o,er?y's;dnu≤l%et( 5 Evmuˇrt" purSt;Tpí;∞ 6 ariàítur≈Stu pUvRSy;¶e" %ro .vet( rqc£;’it" pí;∞N{;/eRn tu d≤=,e 7 m?y;t( koi$p[m;,en m<@l' p·rle%yet( ait·rˇ_i].;gen sv| tu shm<@lm( ctur≈eå+,y; r∆umR?yt" s'inp;tyet( p·rle:y td/eRn;/Rm<@lmev tt( 8 ***concluding verses***

rqc£Sy …cTySy s'=epoˇ_Sy iv„,un; aq /;tuinRivRœSy i]gu,;Ny' bihbRih" lIyNte m<@le ySy s¢ s;/;R nr; bu/w" 1 muCyNte ivvre„vNye =e];d>y…/k;S]y" 2 tSy c£iv/;n' tu ne…mrre>yo ivStr" m<@l;n;' c iv„kM." i].;g" kr,;in c 3 nr;/eRn;….≤l%e•;….Stt" p[St;rgocr; are>yoå>y…/k; ne…m≤S]Wœºn;=r;g;rm(

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

427

i]'xten s…v'xen a…/kìí;/Rpçmw" …mm;y;©ëlwv;R m?y' k⁄y;Ri√÷xen p·rle%nm( 4 p[qme p[Stre rqc£Sy sO,ute∑k;" ctu….Rr…/k˘ veTq cTv;·r'xCzt]ym( 5 i√tIyeå>y…/k; y;Ntu ctu…v|xit·r∑k;" pçko,;≤S]ko,;í neMyre>y" c s'…/Wu 6 î∑k;n;' shße, xtw" s¢….rev c a∑W∑‰; c c£Sy …cty" pç pU·rt;" 7 îit xuLbsU]' sm;¢m( 8 16 259

There is another Íhulba S™tra belonging to the Maitråyan¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda, that is somewhat different from the Månava Íhulba S™tra. It is called the Maitråyan¥ya Íhulba S™tra. It has four sections. Although it is largely a variant of the Månava Íhulba S™tra, the two texts differ with regard to the arrangement of individual S™tra and topics.260 G. The Ãpastamba Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Ãpastamba Íhulba S™tra with the Gyrus rectus. The Gyrus rectus or “straight gyrus” is located medial to the Orbital gyri discussed above. Please refer to Figure 35, p. 425. The Ãpastamba Íhulba S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. It is included as the thirtieth Praßhna of the Ãpastamba Íhrauta S™tra. The Ãpastamba Íhulba S™tra has 21 prose paragraphs grouped in six chapters or Paˇala. There is an English translation by Sen and Bag.261 The first section describes the formation of squares of different sizes. The formation of rectangles, and the law of areas, and other principles of geometry are described in the following two

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

428

sections. The arrangement of sacrificial fires is described in section 4. Principles of measurement relating to construction of sacrificial altars including the Pythagorean theorem are described in section 5. Different altars, and the different standard measures used to lay them out are described in section 6. The arrangement of bricks for the sacrificial fire is described in section 7. The fire altar, constructed in the likeness of birds, is described in sections 8 through 13. Different kinds of fire altars and their effects are described in sections 14 and 15. The falcon fire altar is described in sections 16 through 20. Different variations of the falcon fire altar including that for the Aßhvamedha sacrifice are described in the last section. The beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

a;pStMb xuLb sU] ivh;ryog;NVy;:y;Sy;m" 1 y;vd;y;m' p[m;,m( td/Rm>ySy;priSm'StOtIye W@±.;gone l+m,' kroit ) pOœ‰;NtyorNt* inyMy l=,en d≤=,;p;yMy in…mˇ' kroit ) Evmuˇrto ivpyRSyetrt" ) s sm;…/" ) t…•…mˇo inh;Rso ivvO≤ıv;R 2 a;y;m' v;>ySy;gNtuctuqRm;y;mSy;+,y;r∆u" ityRÑ;nIxeW" ) Vy;:y;t' ivhr,m( 3 dI`RSy;+,y;r∆u" p;êRm;nI ityRÑ;nI c yTpOqG.Ute k⁄®tStdu.y' kroit ) t;….DeRy;….®ˇ_'

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

429

ivhr,m( 4 ctur≈Sy;+,y;r∆ui√≥St;vtI' .U…m' kroit ) smSy i√kr,I5 p[m;,' tOtIyen v/Ryeˇ∞ ctuqeRn;TmctuiS]'xonen sivxeW" 6 ***concluding S™tra***

k˚…cdlj…cidit Xyen…ct; Vy;:y;t* 1 Ev…mv ih XyenSy vWIRy;'s* p=* puCz;√£* s'nt' puCz÷ dI`R a;Tm;åm<@l" ≤xrí ) tSm;Czûits;mQy;Rt( ) a≤xrSko v;ån;ª;n;t( 2 ivD;yte c ) k˚…ct' xIWRy;soåivxeW;t( 7 dI`Rctur≈;,;' sm;sen p=puCz;n;' sm;s ¨ˇ_" 8 Ek…v'xoå…¶.RvtITyême/e ivD;yte 9 t] pu®W;>y;so n;riàp[;dex;n;' s':y;s'yog;t( s':y;s'yog;t( 10 21 îTy;pStMbxuLbsU] 262

H. The Kåtyåyana Íhulba S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Kåtyåyana Íhulba S™tra with the Anterior Perforated Substance (see Figure 25, p. 256 and Figure 36). The Anterior Perforated Substance is described by Gray: The anterior perforated substance is an irregularly quadrilateral area in front of the optic tract and behind the olfactory trigone, from which it is separated by the fissure prima; medially and in front it is continuous with the subcallosal gyrus; laterally it is bounded by the lateral stria of the olfactory tract and is continued

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

430

into the uncus. Its gray substance is confluent above with that of the corpus striatum, and is perforated anteriorly by numerous small blood vessels.263 The Kåtyåyana Íhulba S™tra belongs to Íhukla Yajur-Veda. The text has 101 S™tra organized in six sections, followed by a seventh section with 39 verses. There is an English translation by Khadilkar.264 The first chapter describes drawing of the EastWest line, construction of squares and fixing the places of the Ãhavan¥ya, Gårhapatya, Dak∑hiˆågni and Utkara altars. The second chapter describes units of measure, Pait®ki Vedi, measures for diagonal, theorem of square, and combination of squares. The third chapter explores the difference of two squares, transformation of a rectangle into a square and a square into a rectangle, areas of figures, the problem of circling a square and

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

431

the squaring of a circle. The fourth chapter describes the construction of Droâchit, the construction of triangle and rhombus, and the transformation of a triangle and a rhombus into a square. The fifth and sixth chapters describe the process of enlarging the units for building fire altars from 8 1/2 sq. Purusha to 101 1/2 sq. Purusha; the construction of a square equal to N times a given square and the Ekådaßhin¥ fire altar.265 The seventh chapter describes details of the use of cords for measuring and constructing altars, and practical principles of construction.266 The beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

k;Ty;ynxuLbsU] r∆usm;s' v+y;m" 1 sme xï÷ in%;y xïs‚Mmty; rJJv; m<@l' p·r≤l:y y] le%yo" x˚±vg[Cz;y; inptit t] x˚À inh≤Nt s; p[;cI ) tdNtr' rJJv;>ySy p;x* ’Tv; x˚±vo" p;x* p[itmuCy d≤=,;yMy m?ye xïmevmuˇrt" sodIcI 2 rJJvNtyo" p;x* kroit ) ≈oySy;>y;sctuqeRl+,' kroit t…•rHznm( ) a+,y; ityRÑ;nIxeW 4 p[m;,;/| v;>ySy;>y;sWœº l=,' kroit t…•rHznm( ) a+,y; ityRÑ;inxeW" 5 p[m;,;/eR smctu

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

432

r≈Sy xï" ) x;S]vd/eR dI`Rctur≈Sy ) xk$mu%Sy cwvm( 6 ***concluding verses***

’iˇk; ≈v," pu„y…í];Sv;TyoyRdNtrm( EtTp[;Cy; idxo Âp' yugm;]oidte pur" 35 pç;xCzkúr;" pí;t( pUveR dey;≤S]s¢it" d≤=,e tu p[d;tVy; dx pç c s¢ c 36 x'Syítu…v|xitp;êR.;gítudRx…." p·rle:yStu nyRm( tqwv c;∑i√gu,wrqYyRiS]'x≤∫r;yMy hreˇOtIym( 37 a¶e®dKs;/Rnv;©ële m?y' tto ≤l%et( vOˇmekon…v'xTy; p[;cIJy; m?yg; .vet( ¨dg/| ivh;y;v;Rk™ %r;¶edR≤=,Sy tu 38 sU]doWd·r{Sy gU!mN]Sy /Imt" sm;¢ey' i£y; x*LbI k;Ty;ynmh;Tmn" 39 267

These are the 8 Íhulba S™tra texts that are presented by H.M. King Nader Råm.268 Whereas the G®ihya S™tra described the household rites, with performances such as the Saµskåra, that are focused on the major points of transformation in the whole span of life of the individual starting from conception; and the Íhrauta S™tra brought to light more powerful Yagya procedures capable of giving an evolutionary direction, not just to one individual, but to a whole society, even to the whole civilization; the Íhulba S™tra examine, not the transformation of individual life or the collective life of society, but the transformation of space itself. Starting from the construction of a straight line from East to West, based on the flow of time as the sun follows its course through one day,

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

433

foundational principles of geometry are presented that allow space itself to be transformed from a square to a circle, and back to a square,269 and on through expansion of various assembled components of squares, triangles, rectangles, etc., to create all possible forms.270 The mastery of the transformations of space is made tangible with bricks; the layout of bricks that is the tangible manifestation of the transformations of space taught by the Shulba S™tra, then becomes the theater for the various performances of Yagya. In this way, the Íhulba S™tra, which H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated with the mesocortex, a part of the limbic system involved in emotions—give a detailed and comprehensive vision of the architecture of Natural Law, a system of quantification of totality, governing the quality of transformation of space in the abstract field of consciousness, in the manifest theater of the performance of Yagya, and in the geometry of the expanding universe. John Price, a mathematician at the University of New South Wales, while appreciating the profound mathematical truths expounded in the Íhulba S™tra in his article on the applied geometry of the Íhulba S™tra, argues first of all that the texts have an internal unity and coherence, a systematic presentation that points to deeper levels of intrinsic meaning not captured in the idea of a construction manual: When each of the main Íhulba S™tras is viewed as a whole, instead of a collection of parts, then a striking level of unity and efficiency becomes apparent. There are exactly the right geometrical constructions to the precise degree of accuracy necessary for the artisans to build the Citis. Nothing is redundant.271 Secondly, he proposes that some of the key terms in the Íhulba S™tra, suggest that there is a much deeper significance to the S™tras. One is the word Citi. . . . In the context of the Íhulba S™tras, the usual translation is a type of ceremonial platform but it is close to the word Cit which means consciousness. Another is Vedi which is usually translated as the place or area of ground on which the Citi is constructed. But since the word Veda means “pure knowledge, complete knowledge,” Vedi also means an enlightened person. . . . A third is

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

434

Puru∑ha which is usually translated as a unit of measurement obtained by the height of a man with upstretched arms . . . . However, [Maharishi Mahesh Yogi defines Puru∑ha as] “the uninvolved witnessing quality of intelligence, the unified . . . self-referral state of intelligence at the basis of all creativity.”272 Thus we could easily infer that a more expanded role of the Íhulba S™tras is as a description of consciousness.273 This relates to H.M. King Nader Råm’s explanation of the meaning of transformation: “The mechanics of Kalp, transformation, allow one Law of Nature to be expressed differently, taking into account different environmental values, background, etc.”274 This concludes the discussion of the eight Íhulba S™tra correlated with the eight components of the mesocortex. IV. DHARMA S¤TRA The Dharma S™tra are texts on the customs of daily life. They describe temporal duties, customs and punishments: They include the duties of the four stages of life, Brahmachari, G®ihastha, Vanaprastha, and Sannyasa, as well as prosaic matters like the laws of inheritance, forbidden fruits, and political matters such as the duties of a king.275 H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Dharma S™tra with the Paleocortex, the Olfactory cortex of the cerebrum. Included with the Olfactory cortex are the Piriform cortex, the Olfactory system, and parts of the Amygdaloid Complex. (Please refer to Figure 24, p. 255.) A. The Vi∑hû Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vi∑hû Dharma S™tra with the Pyriform cortex of the Parahippocampal gyrus. (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340.) The Pyriform cortex is located behind the eyes at the bottom of the temporal lobe. It is the area of the brain responsible for identifying and remembering odors. Gray describes the Pyriform cortex: The lateral olfactory gyrus and gyrus ambiens form the prepiriform region of the cortex, passing caudally into the entorhinal area of the parahippocampal gyrus. The prepiriform and periamygdaloid regions and the entorhinal area (area 28) together make up the piriform cortex.276

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

435

The Vi∑hû Dharma S™tra belongs to the Chåråyaˆ¥ya Kaˇhaka recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda.277 The text has two divisions, and a total of one hundred chapters. There is an English translation by Jolly.278 The first chapter tells the story of Lord Vi∑hû. The second chapter describes the system of the four castes in society. There follows the duties of a king, and the criminal law statutes. Laws of inheritance, funeral ceremonies, duties of women, duties of students, penances and hells ordained for wrong actions, duties of a householder, Íhråddha rites, and pious gifts are described, among other topics.279 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

iv„,u/mRs]U m( p[qmo .;g" p[qmoå?y;y" b[˜r;}y;' VytIt;y;' p[buıe pµs'.ve iv„,u" …ssO=u.URt;in D;Tv; .U…m' jl;nug;m( 1 jl£°@;®…c x(u.' kLp;…dWu yq; pur; v;r;hm;iSqto Âpmu∆h;r vsu'/r;m( 2 vedp;do yUpd'∑^" £tudNt…ítImu%" a…¶…j◊o d.Rrom; b[˜xIWoR mh;tp;" 3 ahor;]e=,o idVyo ved;©≈uit.UW," a;Jyn;s" ßuvtu<@" s;mòWSvno mh;n( 4 /mRsTymy" ≈Im;N£miv£msT’t" p[;y…íˇmh;ò," px(uj;numRh;’it" 5 ¨Ì;];N]o hom≤l©o bIj*W…/mh;fl"

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

ve¥Ntr;Tm; mN]‚Sf‚Gv’t" somxo…,t" 6 veidSkN/o hivgRN/o hVykVy;idvegv;n( p[;Gv'Wk;yo ¥uitm;•;n;dI=;….riNvt" 7 d≤=,;˙dyo yogmh;mN]myo mh;n( ¨p;kmoRœ®…cr" p[vGy;RvtR.WU ," 8 n;n;CzNdogitpqo guÁopinWd;sn" z;y;pàIsh;yo vw m…,Í© îvoidt" 9 mhI' s;grpyRNt;' sxwlvnk;nn;' Ek;,Rvjl.[∑;mek;,Rvgt" p[.u" 10 ***concluding verses***

/mRx;S]…md' ≈eœ' Svy' deven .;iWtm( ye i√j; /;r…y„y≤Nt teW;' SvgeR git" pr; 1 îd' piv]' m©Ly' SvGyRm;yu„ymev c D;n' cwv yxSy' c /ns*.;Gyv/Rnm( 2 a?yetVy' /;r,Iy' ≈;Vy' ≈otVymev c ≈;ıeWu ≈;v,Iy' c .Uitk;mwnRrw" sd; 3 y îd' p#te inTy' .Uitk;mo nr" sd; îd' rhSy' prm' k…qt' c /re tv 4 my; p[s•en jg≤ıt;q| s*.;GymetTprm' yxSym( du"Sv“n;x' b¸pu
436

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

437

B. The Vasi∑hˇha Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vasi∑hˇha Dharma S™tra with the Anterior Olfactory nucleus. Caudal to the Olfactory bulb are scattered groups of neurons, intermediate in size between mitral and granule cells, that form the Anterior Olfactory nucleus. Gray explains that centrifugal inputs to the Olfactory bulb arise from a variety of central sites. Neurons of the Anterior Olfactory nucleus and collaterals of pyramidal neurones in the Olfactory cortex project to the granule cells of the Olfactory bulb.281 Please refer to Figure 36, p. 430. The Vasi∑hˇha Dharma S™tra belongs to the Bahv®ica recension of Âik Veda.282 It has 30 chapters. There is an English translation by Buehler.283 Subjects dealt with include description of the four castes and their origin; lawful occupations; duty of studying the Veda; purification; role of women; student, householder, hermit and ascetic phases of life; treatment of guests; Íråddha offerings; sacrifices; initiation; Snåtaka; saluting; lawful and forbidden food; adoption; excommunication; legal procedures; inheritance; mixed castes; the duties of a king; penances; secret penances; and gifts. Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

aq ≈Iv;…sœ/mRx;S]' p[;r>yte aq;t" pu®Win"≈eys;q| /mR…jD;s; 1 D;Tv; c;nuitœN/;…mRk" 2 p[xSytmo .vit lokÉ p[eTy c SvgRlok˘ smXnute 3 ≈uitSmOitivihto /mR" 4 tdl;.e ≤x∑;c;r" p[m;,m( 5 ≤x∑" punrk;m;Tm; 6 agOÁm;,k;r,o /mR" 7 a;y;RvtR" p[;g;dx;RTp[Ty‘;lkvn;dudKp;·ry;];∂≤=,en ihmvt" 8 ¨ˇre, c ivN?ySy 9 t‚SmNdexe ye /m;R

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

438

ye c;c;r;Ste svR] p[TyetVy;" 10 n TvNye p[itlomk/m;R ,;m( 11 g©;ymunyorNtreåPyekÉ 12 y;v√; ’„,mOgo ivcrit t;vd(b[˜vcRs…mTyNye 13 aq;ip .;Llivno ind;ne g;q;mud;hr≤Nt 14 ***concluding verses***

p;it ];it c d;t;rm( a;Tm;n' cwv ikæLvW;t( vedeN/nsmOıeWu ¸t' ivp[mu%;…¶Wu 6 n SkNdte n Vyqte nwnm?y;pte∞ yt( v·rœm…¶ho];ˇu b[;˜,Sy mu%e ¸tm( 7 ?y;n;…¶" sTyopcyn' =;NTy;¸it" ßuv' Ó«" puro@;xmih's; s'toWo yUp" ’Cz^' .Ute>yoå.yd;≤=
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

439

C. The Ãpastamba Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Ãpastamba Dharma S™tra with the Olfactory Tract. Please refer to Figures 25 and 36, pp. 256 and 430. Gray describes the Olfactory Tract: The olfactory tract leaves the posterior pole of the olfactory bulb to run along the olfactory sulcus on the orbital surface of the frontal lobe. The granule cell layer of the bulb is extended into the olfactory tract as scattered medium-sized multipolar neurones which constitute the anterior olfactory nucleus. They continue into the olfactory striae and trigone to the gray matter of the prepiriform cortex, the anterior perforated substance and precommissural septal areas. Many centripetal axons from mitral and tufted cells relay in, or give collaterals to, the anterior olfactory nucleus; the axons from the nucleus continue with the remaining direct fibres from the bulb into the olfactory striae. As the olfactory tract approaches the anterior perforated substance it flattens and splays out as the olfactory trigone. Fibers of the tract continue from the caudal angles of the trigone as diverging medial and lateral olfactory striae, which border the anterior perforated substance. . . . The olfactory cortex receives a direct input from the olfactory bulb, which arrives via the olfactory tract without relay in the thalamus.285 The Ãpastamba Dharma S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. There are two chapters: The first chapter has 11 Paˇala subdivided into a total of 32 Kaˆ∂ikå. The second chapter also has 11 Paˇala, that are further subdivided into 29 Kaˆ∂ikå. Thus there are a total of 22 Paˇala and 61 Kaˆ∂ikå. There is an English translation by Buehler.286 Subjects dealt with include initiation; studentship; rules for a student who has returned home; the study of the Veda; saluting; purification; eating and forbidden food; lawful livelihood; penance; rules for a Snåtaka; duties of a householder; inheritance; funeral oblations; description of the four castes; the duties of the king; and civil and criminal law.287 Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

a;pStMb /mR sU]m( aq;t" s;my;c;·rk;N/m;RNVy;:y;Sy;m" 1 /mRDsmy"

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

440

p[m;,m( 2 ved;í 3 cTv;ro v,oR b[;˜,=i]yvwXyxU{;" 4 teW;' pUvRSpUvoR jNmt" ≈ey;n( 5 axU{;,;mdu∑kmR,;mup;yn' ved;?yynm¶‰;/ey' flv≤Nt c km;R…, 6 xu≈UW; xU{SyetreW;' v,;Rn;m( 7 pUvR‚SmNpUvR‚SmNv,Re in"≈eysM.Uy" 8 ¨pnyn' iv¥;qRSy ≈uitt" s'Sk;r" 9 sveR>yo vede>y" s;iv}ynUCyt îit ih b[;˜,m( 10 tmso v; EW tm" p[ivxit ymiv√;nupnyte yí;iv√;init ih b[;˜,m( 11 t‚Sm•….jniv¥;smudet' sm;iht' s'Skt;RrmIPset( 12 ***concluding S™tra***

s; inœ; y; iv¥; S]IWu xU{eWu c 11 a;qvR,Sy vedSy xeW îTyupidx≤Nt12 ’Cz^; /mRsm;i¢" sm;ª;ten ) l=,kmR,;ˇu sm;Pyte 13 t] l=,m( ) svRjnpde„vek;Ntsm;ihtm;y;R,;' vOˇ' sMy‚GvnIt;n;' vOı;n;m;Tmvt;mlolup;n;md;‚M.k;n;' vOˇs;ÎXy' .jet ) Evmu.* lok;v….jyit 14 S]I>y" svRv,Re>yí /mRxeW;Np[tIy;idTyek îTyekÉ 15 29 îTyek;dx" p$l" îit i√tIyoå?y;y" sm;¢' cedm;pStMbIy/mRs]U m( 288

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

441

D. The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Dharma S™tra with the Olfactory Bulb. Please refer to Figure 36, p. 430. Gray describes the Olfactory Bulb: The olfactory nerves arise from olfactory receptor neurones in the olfactory mucosa. The axons collect into c.20 bundles and enter the anterior cranial fossa by passing through the foramina in the cribriform plate. They attach to the inferior surface of the olfactory bulb, which is situated at the anterior end of the olfactory sulcus on the orbital surface of the frontal lobe, and terminate in the bulb. . . . The olfactory bulb is continuous posteriorly with the olfactory tract, through which the output of the bulb passes directly to the olfactory cortex. There is a clear laminar structure in the olfactory bulb. From the surface inwards the laminae are the olfactory nerve layer, glomerular layer, external plexiform layer, mitral cell layer, internal plexiform layer, and granule cell layer. . . . The principal neurones in the olfactory bulb are the mitral and tufted cells: their axons form its output via the olfactory tract.289 The Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Dharma S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur-Veda. The Dharma S™tra makes up the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh Praßhna of the Hiraˆyakeßh¥ya Íhrauta S™tra. The first Praßhna, Praßhna 26 of the Íhrauta S™tra, has 31 Khaˆ∂a distributed among eight Paˇala. The second Praßhna of the Dharma S™tra, Praßhna 27 of the Íhrauta, has 20 Khaˆ∂a distributed among six Paˇala. Thus the two Praßhna together have 51 Khaˆ∂a and 14 Paˇala. Although the divisions are different, the text is virutally the same as the Ãpastamba Dharma S™tra. For summary of contents see above, under Ãpastamba Dharma S™tra. Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

sTy;W;!ivr…ct' ≈*tsU]m( aq Wi@±v'xp[Xnp[;rM." t] p[qm" p$l"

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

442

aq;t" s;my;c;·rk;N/m;RNVy;:y;Sy;m" 1 /mRDsmy" 2 p[m;,' ved;"3 cTv;ro v,;R b[;˜,=≤T]yvwXyxU{;" 4 teW;' pUvR" pUvoR jNmt" ≈ey;n( 5 axU{;,;mdu∑kmR,;mupnyo ved;?yynmGNy;/ey' flv≤Nt c km;R…, 6 xu≈UW; xU{SyetreW;' v,;Rn;m( 7 pUvRiSmNpUvRiSmn( v,Re in"≈eys' .Uy" 8 ¨pnyn' iv¥;qRSy ≈uitt" s'Sk;r" 9 sveR>yo vw vede>y" s;iv}ynUCyt îit ih b[;˜,m( 10 ***concluding S™tra***

pu
E. The Gautama Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Gautama Dharma S™tra with the Olfactory Tubercle. Biology Online describes the Olfactory Tubercle (Please refer to Figure 36, p. 430): A small, oval area at the base of the cerebral hemisphere, between the diverging medial and lateral olfactory striae, in the anteromedial part of the anterior perforated substance; it is formed by a small area of allocortex

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

443

characterised by the presence of the islands of Calleja. Corresponding to a much more prominent structure in nonprimate mammals (especially rodents and insectivores), the olfactory tubercle receives fibres from the olfactory bulb by way of the intermediate olfactory stria; it has efferent connections with the hypothalamus and the mediodorsal nucleus of the thalamus.291 The Gautama Dharma S™tra belongs to the Gautama school of Såma Veda. The text has three chapters, with a total of 28 Kaˆ∂ikå or prose paragraphs. There is an English translation by Buehler.292 The text treats of initiation; the different stages of life; studentship; the ascetic; the hermit and the householder; saluting; rules for times of distress; the king and the Bråhmaâ versed in the Veda; the duties of a Snåtaka; lawful occupations and livelihood; the duties of a king; civil and criminal law; witnesses; impurity; funeral oblations; the study of the Veda; rules of eating and forbidden food; role of women; penances; and inheritance. The beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

g*tm /mR sU] vedo /mRml U m( 1 ti√d;' c SmOitxIle 2 Î∑o /mRVyit£m" s;hs' c mht;' 3 avrd*bRLy;t( 4 tuLyblivro/e ivkLp" 5 ¨pnyn' b[;˜,Sy;∑me 6 nvme pçme v; k;Mym( 7 g.;Rid" sƒ‰; vW;R,;m( 8 t‚d(√tIy' jN m 9 t¥Sm;Ts a;c;yR" 10 ved;nuvcn;∞ 11 ***concluding S™tra***

apTy' j@Sy .;g;hRm( 42 xU{;pu]vTp[itlom;su 43 ¨dkyog=em’t;•e„viv.;g" 44 S]IWu c s'yuˇ_;Wu 45 an;D;te dx;vrw" ≤x∑wÂhiv≤∫rluB/w" p[xSt' k;yRm( 46

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

444

cTv;rítu,;| p;rg; ved;n;' p[;g( ¨ˇm;T]y a;≈…m," pOqg( /mRivdS]y Et;Ndx;vr;Np·rWidTy;c=te 47 asM.ve TveteW;' ≈oi]yo vedivæCz∑oivp[itpˇ* yd;h 48 ytoåymp[.vo .Ut;n;' ih's;nug[hyogeWu 49 /…mR,;' ivxeWe, Svg| lok˘ /mRivd;“oitD;n;….invex;>y;m( 50 îit /moR /mR" 51 10 3 293

F. The Vaikhånasa Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Vaikhånasa Dharma S™tra with the Olfactory Striae. Gray describes the Olfactory Striae (Please refer to Figure 36, p. 430): As the olfactory tract approaches the anterior perforated substance it flattens and splays out as the olfactory trigone. Fibers of the tract continue from the caudal angles of the trigone as diverging medial and lateral olfactory striae, which border the anterior perforated substance. An intermediate stria sometimes passes from the center of the trigone to end in a small olfactory tubercle. The lateral olfactory stria follows the anterolateral margin of the anterior perforated substance to the limen insulae, where it bends posteromedially to merge with an elevated region, the gyrus semiluminaris, at the rostral margin of the uncus in the temporal lobe. . . . The medial olfactory stria, covered thinly by the gray matter of the medial olfactory gyrus, passes medially along the rostral boundary of the anterior perforated substance towards the medial continuation of the diagonal band of Broca. Together, they curve up on the medial aspect of the hemisphere, anterior to the attachment of the lamina terminalis.The diagonal band enters the paraterminal gyrus. The medial stria becomes indistinct as it approaches the boundary zone, which includes the paraterminal gyrus, parolfactory gyrus and, between them, the prehippocampal rudiment.294 The Vaikhånasa Dharma S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The text has three Praßhna, with a total of 41 Khaˆ∂a or prose paragraphs. There is an English translation by Caland.295 The text describes the Dharma for the different orders of religious life: student, householder, hermit and recluse. The different orders of each are described. The procedure for becoming a hermit and a recluse are explained.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

445

Rules of conduct incumbent on all the orders are explored, followed by the specific rules of conduct pertaining to each. The bali offering to Lord Nåråyaâ is described. The text concludes with a discussion of the Dharma of the mixed castes.296 The beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

vw%;ns /mRs]U m( aq v,;R≈m/m| 1 b[;˜,=i]yvwXyxU{;mu%b;Ù®p;deWu j;t;íTv;ro v,;R 2 ySm;d(b[;˜,oåSy mu%m;sIidit ≈uit" 3 pUveRW;' ]y;,;' inWek;¥;" s'Sk;r; iv/IyNte 4 teW;' i√jNmn;' ved;…/k;rStSm;d(b[;˜,Sy;?yyn;?y;pnyjny;jnd;np[itg[h;…, W$( km;R…, .v≤Nt 5 =≤T]yvwXyyoyRjn;?yynd;n;in 6 =i]ySy p[j;p;lydu∑ing[hyuı;" vwXySy p;xup;Lyk⁄sIdv;…,Jy;in 7 xU{Sy i√jmn;' xu≈WU ; kéiWíwv 8 b[;˜,Sy;≈m;íTv;r" =i]ySy;¥;S]yo vwXySy 9 √;vev td;≈…m,íTv;ro b[˜c;rI gOhSqov;np[Sqo ….=u" 10 îit ¨pnIto b[˜c;rI me%lopvIt;…jnd<@/;rI ò;Tv; tpR,' b[˜yD' s;y'p[;t" sN?yop;sns…mıom* c k⁄vRNguro" p;d;vups'gOÁ inTy;….vNdI v[ten;?yyn' kroit 13iSqte gur* Sqey;du‚Tqte pUvRmuTq;yv[jNtmnugCzπd;sIne xy;ne c inyuˇ_o nIcwrNv;snxyne k⁄y;Rd( 14 anuˇ_o y≤Tk≤çTkmR n;crit 15 anuˇ_oåip Sv;?y;yinTykm;R
CHAPTER 4: KALPA

446

c<@;l;i√p[;y;' êpc" c<@;lv≤∞ˆyuˇ_o inTyinN¥" svRkmRbih„k;yoR ngy;Rd* ml;pohk" Xmx;ne vsNheyp;]g[;hI p[etmbN/uk˘ ivsOjet 1 v?y;NhTv; t√S];idg[;hIpr;/In;h;ro ….•p;].ojI êm;'s.=I cmRv;rv;,v;…,Jyk;rI Sy;t( 3 tSm;…•ké∑e sute smuTp•e pitto n∑oòr;•rk;Nv[jit 4 sTpu]o nrkÉ>yS];yk" iptøNp;v…yTv; xu.;'l( lok;•yit 5 tSm;äâ;˜,;¥;" sv,;Ry;' iv…/vTpu]muTp;dyeyu·rit iv%n;" 8 34 297

G. The Baudhåyana Dharma S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Baudhåyana Dharma S™tra with parts of the amygdaloid complex (Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340). Gray describes the parts of the amygdaloid nuclear complex that have cortical characteristics: The lateral nucleus has dorsomedial and ventrolateral subnuclei. The central nucleus has medial and lateral subdivisions. The basal nucleus is commonly divided into a dorsal magnocellular basal nucleus, an intermediate parvicellular basal nucleus, and a ventral band or darkly staining cells usually referred to as the paralaminar basal nucleus, because it borders the white matter ventral to the amygdaloid complex. The accessory basal nucleus lies medial to the basal nuclear divisions. It is usually divided into dorsal, magnocellular, and ventral, parvicellular, parts. The lateral and basal nuclei are often referred to collectively as the basolateral area (nuclear group) of the amygdaloid complex. It has been suggested that the basolateral complex of nuclei (lateral, basal, accessory basal) shares several characteristics with the cortex, and that it may be considered as a quasi-cortical structure. Although it lacks a laminar structure, it has direct, often reciprocal, connections with adjacent temporal and other areas of cortex, and it projects to the motor or premotor cortex. . . .Thus it may be appropriate to consider this part of the amygdaloid complex as a polymodal cortex-like area, which is separated from the cerebral cortex by fibres of the external capsule.298

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

447

The Baudhåyana Dharma S™tra belongs to the Taittir¥ya recension of K®i∑hâ Yajur Veda. The text consists of four Praßhna. The first Praßhna has 21 Khaˆ∂a, the second has 18 Khaˆ∂a; the third Praßhna has 10 chapters, and the fourth Praßhna has eight chapters. There is an English translation by Buehler.299 Subjects treated include sources of the law; different customs in different lands; studentship; Snåtaka; waterpot; purification; lawful livelihood; impurity; inheritance; forbidden food; sacrifices; the king; criminal law; witnesses; marriage; study of the Veda; penances; role of women; duties of a householder; the twilight devotions; bathing; Tarpaâ; Mahåyajña; the four orders; the offering to the vital airs; rules for eating; Íråddha; having sons; rules for the ascetic; ways of living for householders; hermits; penances for students; Aghamar∑haâ; Pras®itiyåvaka; K™∑hmåˆ∂as; Chåndråyaâ; Anasnatpåråyaâ; and rites securing success.300 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

aq b*/;yn/mRs]U m( ¨pid∑o /mR" p[itvedm( 1 tSy;nu Vy;:y;Sy;m" 2 Sm;toR i√tIy" 3 tOtIy" ≤x∑;gm" 4 ≤x∑;" %lu ivgtmTsr; inrh'k;r;" k⁄M.I/;Ny; alolup; dM.dpRlo.moh£o/ivv…jRt;" 5 /meR,;…/gto yeW;' ved" sp·rbO'h," 6-1 ≤x∑;Stdnum;nD;" ≈uitp[Ty=hetv" ) îit 6-2 td.;ve dx;vr; p·rWt( 7 aq;Pyud;hr≤Nt 8-1 c;tuvwR¥' ivkLpI c a©ivımRp;#k" 8-2 a;≈mSq;S]yo ivp[;" pWRdeW; dx;vr; 9-1 pç v; SyuS]yo v; Syureko v; Sy;din≤Ndt" 9-2 ***concluding verses***

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

aitlo.;Tp[m;d;√; y" kroit i£y;…mm;m( aNySy so'åhs;iv∑o grgI·rv sIdit 1 a;c;yRSy iptum;Rtur;Tmní i£y;…mm;m( k⁄vRN.;Tykúvi√p[" s; k;ywRW;mt" i£y; 2 k Eten shß;=' piv]e,;kroCz⁄…cm( a…¶' v;yu' r…v' som' ym;dI'í sureêr;n( 3 y≤Tk˘…cTpu
448

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

449

pu'soånO,Sy p;pSy ivmo=" i£yte Kv…ct( 11 ivmuˇ_o iv…/nwten svRp;p;,Rs;gr;t( a;Tm;n' mNyte xuı' smq| kmRs;/ne 12 svRp;p;,Rmuˇ_;Tm; i£y; a;r.te tu y;" ayàenwv t;" …s≤ı' y;≤Nt xuıxrI·r," 13 p[;jpTy…md' puyo b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 14 y;‚NsW;/…yWumRN];N√;dx;h;in t;Ôpet( Òten pys; d›; p[;Xy inXyodn' s’t( 15 dxv;r' tq; hom" sipRW; svn]ym( pUvRsev; .vedeW;' mN];,;' kmRs;/ne mN];,;' kmRs;/n îit 16 îit b*/;ynIye /mRs]U e ctuqRp[Xne a∑moå?y;y" îit ctuqR" p[Xn" îit b*/;yn/mRs]U ' sm;¢m( 301

These are the 7 Dharma S™tra texts that are presented by H.M. King Nader Råm, and correlated with the olfactory portion of the limbic system, called the paleocortex. The theme of the Dharma S™tra, the rules of behavior governing the different stages of life, explain the transformations of life governed by changing times in the life of the individual. They emphasize that the laws of nature function differently at different times

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

450

in the life of the individual, so that behavior must be different in the different stages of life. As was seen in the G®ihya S™tra, with regard to the rites of the individual household, and again in the Íhrauta S™tra with regard to the collective rites and Soma sacrifices, and then again with regard to the transformations of space that were described in the Íhulba S™tra, here the transformations of time show how the same Natural Law comes to be expressed differently. H. M. King Nader Råm’s statement is again relevant: The mechanics of Kalp, transformation, allow one Law of Nature to be expressed differently, taking into acount different environmental values, background, etc.302 This concludes the discussion of the 54 texts that constitute the reading program in the four different divisions of the Vedåãga Kalpa.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

451

Notes: 1

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1994), p. 87.

2

King Nader Råm, (2000), p. 59.

3

Please refer to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi on Vedic Engineering, “Vedic Engineering to create anything from an empty box,” March 3, 2004, Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference. 4

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi’s Weekly Global News Conference, October 2, 2002, Question #3. 5

MOU, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, October 2, 2002.

6

MOU, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, October 2, 2002.

7


8

Martini, Frederic H., Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1995), p. 474. 9

Smythies, J.R., Brain Mechanisms and Behaviour: An Outline of the Mechanisms of Emotion, Memory, Learning and the Organization of Behaviour, with Particular Regard to the Limbic System, (New York: Academic Press, 1970), pp. 19–20. 10

Gray, (1918), p. 840.

11

Smythies, pp. 15–17.

12

Bhattacharji, Sukumari, Literature in the Vedic Age, (Calcutta: K.P. Bagchi, 1984), pp. 319–320. 13

Oldenberg, Hermann, The Grihya S™tras, rules of Vedic domestic ceremonies, Vol. 29 of Sacred Books of the East series edited by F. Max Mueller, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997). 14

Aithal, K. Parameswara, Ãßhvalåyanag®hyaparißhi∑hˇa, (Madras: Adyar Library and Research Center, 1964), p. 19.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

452

15

Vidyåratna, Råmanåråyana, and Vedåntåvåg¥ßa, Anandachandra, eds., The G®ihya S™tra of Ãßwalåyana: With the Commentary of Gårgya Nåråyana, (Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1986). 16

Aithal, Ãßhvalåyanag®hyaparißhi∑hˇa.

17

“BrainInfo,” University of Washington, Search by Name: Prosubiculum. 26 May, 2006. . 18

“Glossary of Neuroanatomical and Neurological Terms,” Department of Human Anatomy and Cell Science, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, MB. Subiculum, 26 May, 2006 . 19

Oldenberg, Hermann, The Grihya S™tras, rules of Vedic domestic ceremonies, Vol. 30 of Sacred Books of the East series edited by F. Max Mueller, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997). p. xxxvii. 20

Oldenberg, The Grihya S™tras, rules of Vedic domestic ceremonies, Vol. 29 of Sacred Books of the East series. 21

Khådirag®hyas™tram, athavå, Dråhyåyaâg®hyas™tram, Rudraskandav®ttisahitam, Hind¥vyåkhyopetam, (Delhi: Chaukhambå Saµsk®ta Prati∑ˇhåna, 1991). 22

Gray, (2005), p. 409.

23

Wiskott, Laurenz and Rasch, Malte J. and Kempermann, Gerd “What is the functional role of adult neurogenesis in the hippocampus?” Cognitive Sciences Eprint Archive #4012, 30 December 2004, 39 pp. 26 May 2006 < http://cogprints.org/4012/> 24

Bhattacharji, p. 332.

25

Caland, Willem, The Kåˇhakag®hyas™tra with Extracts from Three Commentaries, an Appendix and Indexes, (Lahore: Dayånanda Mahåvidyålaya Saµsk®ta Granthamålå, 9, 1925). 26

Wiskott.

27

Gray, (2005), p. 407–409.

28

Chintamani, T.R., The Kauß¥taka G®hyasËtras with the Commentary of Bhavatrata, University of Madras (Madras: 1944) 201 pp.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

453

29

Smirniotopoulos, James George, “Parahippocampal gyrus,” MedPix™ Medical Image Database, Atlas and Teaching File, Topic Factoid Card: 45, Feb. 26, 2000. 26 May 2006 . 30

Gray, (2005), p. 405.

31


32

Dresden, Mark J., Manavagrhyasutra: a Vedic Manual of Domestic Rites; Translation, (Groningen, Batavia: J.B. Wolters, 1941). 33

Sastri, R.H., Maitråyan¥ya Månava G®hya SËtram with the Commentary of A∑ˇavakra, Meharchand Lachmandas (New Delhi: 1982) 197 pp. 34

Bhattacharji identifies the Kåtyåyana with the Påraskara G®hya S™tra. This can be seen by inspection from the published edition of the Kåtyåyana G®hya S™tra: Mimamsaka, Yudhisthira, ed., Katyayana-Grhyasutram, (Bahalagarha: Ramalala Kapura Trust, 1983). 35

Gray, (1918), p. 826.

36

Wiskott, Laurenz.

37

Bhattacharji, pp. 322–325.

38

Oldenberg, Hermann, tr., The G®ihya S™tras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997 [first published by Oxford University Press, 1886]). 39

Båkre, M.G., Grihya-SËtra by Påraskar with Five Commentaries, Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt. Ltd. (Bombay: 1982) 548pp. 40

Mimamsaka, Yudhisthira, ed., Katyayana-Grhyasutram, (Bahalagarha: Ramalala Kapura Trust, 1983). 41

Mimamsaka, Katyayana-Grhyasutram.

42


43


44


CHAPTER 4: KALPA

45

Gray, (2005), p. 406.

46


47

454

Srinivasachar, L., and Sastri, R. S., Bodhåyanag®hyasËtram of Bodhåyana Mahar∑i, Oriental Research Institute (Mysore: 1983) 551pp. 48

Srinivasachar, L., and Sastri, R. S.

49


50


51


52

Gray, (1918), p. 833.

53

Gray, (2005), p. 407.

54

Bloomfield, Maurice, The Kaußhika S™tra of Atharva Veda, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1972), p. xxi. 55

Gonda, J., The Savayajñas (Kausikasutra 60-68. Translation, introduction, commentary), (Amsterdam: Noord-Hollandsche Uitg. Mij., 1965). 56

Bloomfield, M.

57

“Fasciolar gyrus,” Mercksource, Merck & Co., 26 May 2006 < http://www.mercksource.com/pp/us/cns/cns_search_results.jsp>. 58

Gray, (2005), p. 413.

59

Oldenberg, Hermann, The G®ihya S™tras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies, Part 2. 60

Oldenberg, Hermann, The G®ihya S™tras.

61

Kåßh¥nåthaßhåstr¥ Ãgåßhe, ed., Satyå∑hå∂haviracitaµ Írauta S™tram, (India: Ãnandåßhrama Press, 1907). 62

Kåßh¥nåthaßhåstr¥ Ãgåßhe.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

63

Kåßh¥nåthaßhåstr¥ Ãgåßhe.

64

Gray, (2005), p. 408.

65

Gray, (2005), p. 409.

66

Gray, (2005), p. 408.

67


455

68

Raghu Vira, ed., Våråha-G®hyas™tra with Short Extracts from the Paddhatis of Gaãgådhara and Vasi∑hˇha, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1982). 69


70

Oldenberg, Hermann, The G®ihya S™tras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies, Part 2. 71

Knauer, Fedor Ivanovich, Gobhila-G®hyaS™tra, (Leipzig: Simmel & Co., 1884).

72

Carpenter, Malcolm B., and Sutin, Jerome, Human Neuroanatomy, (Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 1983), pp. 619-620. 73


74


75

Ravivarmma, El. E., Ãgniveßhyag®hyas™tra, (Trivandrum: University of Travancore, 1940). 76


77


78

Oldenberg, Hermann, Vol. I.

79

1. Hermann Oldenberg,ìÍåãkhåyana-G®hyas™tra,î in Indische Studien, Beitraege fuer die Kunde des Indischen Alterthums, herausgegeben von Albrecht Weber. fuenfzehnter Band, 1878, pp. 1–166, (Berlin: F. Duemmler). 2. Sehgal, S.R. Íåãkhåyana-G®hyas™tra, (Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1960). 80

An informal announcement was made in the UK indology forum indicating the Vådh™la G®ihya S™tra had been discovered and was being prepared by the Kyoto

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

456

University scholars. However, Professor Ikari, who is the director of the team of Kyoto Sanskrit scholars, was only able to supply a few fragments. (Personal communication.) As may be seen from the table of contents, the text starts abruptly with chapter 12. 81

Caland, W., The Jaiminig®hyas™tra Belonging to the Såmaveda, with extracts from the commentary, edited with an introduction and translated into English, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991). Reprinted from Lahore Punjab Sanskrit Book depot edition of 1922. 82

Caland, W., The Jaiminig®hyas™tra.

83

87 chapters, according to Bhattacharji, p. 336.

84


85

Prooye-Salomons, H.J.W., The Domestic Ritual According to the School of Bharadvaja, (Leyden: E.J.Brill, Ltd., 1913). 86

Salomons, Henriette J.W., ed., Bhåradvåjag®hyas™tram: the Domestic Ritual According to the School of Bhåradvåja, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1992). 87

Gray, (1918), p. 827.

88

Smythies, p. 15.

89

Bhattacharji, p. 333

90


91

Oldenberg, Hermann, Vol. II.

92

Pandey, U.C., Ãpastamba-G®hya-S™tra, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1971). 93

Gray, (1918), p. 827.

94


95

Caland, Willem, Vaikhanasasmartasutram : the Domestic Rules and Sacred Laws of the Vaikhanasa School Belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi : Ramanand Vidya Bhawan, 1982).

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

457

96

Caland, W., Vaikhanasasmartasutram: Vaikhanasagrhyasutram Vaikhanasadharmasutram ca, (New Delhi: Meharcand Lachmandas Publications, 1989, 1927). 97

Agarwal, Vishal, personal communication, June 1, 2005.

98

Resnick, Howard Jay, “The ‘Daivika-Catustayam’ of the ‘Vaikhanasa-mantraprasna’ : a Translation,” Thesis, (Cambridge MA : Harvard Univ., 1996). 99

Gray, p. 827.

100


101

S™ryakånta, Kauthuma-G®hya, Edited with Introduction, Notes and Indices, (Calcutta: The Asiatic Society, 1956). 102

“Sanskrit,” Britannica Encyclopedia, 11th Edition, 1911, Volume V24, Page 183. Online Encyclopaedia, . 103

Íaunaka, Kapisthala, Phulla, and Paithinasi are listed by Vishal Agarwal, as extant manuscripts: “Lists of Vedic Texts”, URL:http://www.hindunet.com/forum/showflat.php?Number=3452 104

Gåyatravidhåna G®ihya S™tra belongs to Såma Veda, according to V. Agarwal. The text is published: Sharma, B.R., Gayatravidhanabhashyam, (Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Institute, 1971). 105


106

The house or "Vastu" is also a complete and perfect model of the macrocosm, the universe as a whole, according to Maharishi Sthapatya Veda. "All the laws of Nature are involved in laying out a house," Maharishi's introduction in Maharishi's Global News Conference, May 28, 2003. 107

Human Physiology—Expression of Veda and the Vedic Literature, (2000), p. 102.

108


109

Gray, (2005), p. 375.

110

Gray, (2005), p. 375.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

458

111

Hillebrandt, Alfred, Íhåãkhåyana Íhrauta S™tra Together with the Commentary of Varadattasuta Ãnart¥ya and Govinda, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981), foreword. 112

Hillebrandt, Alfred.

113

Caland, Willem; and Chandra, Lokesh, Sankhayana Srautasutra: Being a Major Yajnika Text of the Rgveda, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1980, 1953). 114

Hillebrandt, Alfred, Íhåãkhåyana Íhrauta S™tra Together with the Commentary of Varadattasuta Ãnart¥ya and Govinda, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981). 115

Carpenter and Sutin, p. 617.

116

Gray, (2005), p. 432.

117

“Diagonal Band,” Mercksource, Merck & Co., 26 May 2006 < http://www.mercksource.com/pp/us/cns/cns_search_results.jsp>. 118


119

Kashikar, C.G., and Garbe, R., eds., The Írauta S™tra of Ãpastamba, Belonging to the Taittir¥ya Saµhitå, with the Commentary of Rudradatta, 3 vol., (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1983). 120

Gray, (2005), p. 409–410.

121


122

Sharma, B.R., ed., K∑hudrakalpas™tra of Mashaka Gårgya with the Commentary of Shr¥ Shr¥nivåsa, (Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Vishva Bandhu Institute of Sanskrit and Indological Studies, 1974), p. 11 and p. 24. 123

Gobhil¥ya-G®hyakarma-Prakåßhikå, p. 128, quoted in Gonda, Jan, The Ritual S™tras, p. 536. 124

Gonda says, “The greater part of these (ten) works attach themselves to the Ãr∑heyakalpa.î Gonda, p. 536. 125

ìDas Maßhakakalpas™tra,î in Caland, W., ed., Der Ãr∑heyakalpa des Såmaveda, (Liechtenstein: Nendeln, 1966) (reprint).

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

126

Caland, Der Ãr∑heyakalpa des Såmaveda.

127

Satyavrata Såmaßhram¥, ed., U∑hå 4, Calcutta, 1897, cited by Gonda, p. 537.

459

128

Sharma, Bellikoth Ramachandra, ed., Pañcavidha-S™tra with Commentary, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1970), p. 11. 129

Sharma, Bellikoth Ramachandra.

130

Shastri, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad, A Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of The Asiatic Society of Bengal, Volume II (Vedic Manuscripts), (Calcutta, 1921), page 1047, item 1322 (999): Tandalakshana Sutra of Samaveda. 14 Folia, extent in Shlokas = 280. 131

Shastri, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad, page 1055, item 1332 (994A): Anustotram of Samaveda, folia 8. 132


133

Shåstr¥, M. H., Volume II Vedic Manuscripts, (1923), page 1061, Catalog Entry # 1339, Manuscript # 995. 134

Carpenter and Sutin.

135

Brodal, Alf, Neurological Anatomy in Relation to Clinical Medicine, (New York: Oxford University Press, 1981), p. 664. 136

Leutgeb, Stevan and Mizumori, Sheri J.Y., “Excitotoxic Septal Lesions Result in Spatial Memory Deficits and Altered Flexibility of Hippocampal Single-Unit Representations,” The Journal of Neuroscience, August 1, 1999, 19(15): 6661–6672. The Journal of Neuroscience, . 137


138

Modak, B.R., The Ancillary Literature of the Atharva-Veda, (New Delhi: Rashtriya Veda Vidya Pratishthan, 1993), pp. 123ff. 139

Bolling, George Melville, “The Çantikalpa of the Atharva-Veda,” in Transactions and Proceedings of the American Philological Association, Volume 35 (1904) 77–127. 140

According to Modak, there is an additional first chapter of 18 Kaˆ∂ikå, in addition to the 25 described here.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

141

Modak.

142

Modak.

143

Modak, p. 124.

460

144

Bolling, George Melville, and von Negelein, Julius, eds., The Parißi∑ˇhas of the Atharvaveda, Vol. 1, parts 1 and 2, Leipzig: Harrassowitz, 1909–1910). 145

Modak, pp. 124–125.

146

Vishal Agarwal writes, in personal communication, May 7, 2005, “About five manuscripts of Angira Kalpa are available, and they vary a lot from each other and show a lot of Tantric interpolations.” 147

Gray, (1918), p. 665.

148

Gray, (2005), p. 409.

149


150


151


152

Ghosal, S.N., "The Vaitanasutra," in Indian Historical Quarterly, v. 34–36, (Calcutta: 1958–1960). 153

Garbe, Richard, Vaitana Sutra: the Ritual of the Atharvaveda, edited with critical notes and indices, (New Delhi: Mahalakshmi Publishing House, 1982). 154

von Negelein, Julius, "Atharvaprayascittani," in Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. 33 (1913), 71–120. 155

Gray, (2005), p. 414.

156


157


158

Ãgåßhe, Kåßh¥nåthaßhåstr¥.

159

Gray, (2005), p. 379.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

461

160

Gonda, Jan, ed., A History of Indian Literature: Vol. 1, The Ritual S™tras, (Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1977), p. 523. 161


162

Private communication from Dr. Y. Ikari, 8/12/03: “=” sign is used in the Malayalam mss and the Madras ms which is a Devanågar¥ copy of a Malayalam ms. (what we call K1 ms in my edition.). In some of the secondary Devanågar¥ mss, “=” signs are replaced by “+” signs. They indicate two cases: 1. abbreviation of a part of mantra, whose portion is presumably the same with the parallel text of the Taittir¥ya Íhrutis (TS,TB,TA); 2. abbreviation of the prose portion of S™tra which has already been fully expressed in the previous part of the Vådh™la Írautas™tra. 163

Chaubey, Braj Bihari, ed., Vådh™la-Írautas™tram, critically edited with Introduction and Indices, (Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 1993). 164

Gray, (2005), p. 371.

165


166

van Gelder, Jeannette, The Månava Írautas™tra belonging to the Maitråyaˆ¥ Saµhitå, 2 vols., (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1985). 167

van Gelder.

168

Gray, (2005), p. 291.

169

Gray, (2005), p. 384.

170

Kashikar, C.G., The Írauta, Pait®medhika and Parißhe∑ha S™tras of Bharadvåja, (Poona: Vaidika Saµßhodhana Maˆ∂ala, 1964), vol. 2. 171

Kashikar, S™tras of Bharadvåja.

172

Kashikar, S™tras of Bharadvåja, vol. 1.

173


174


175

Gray, (2005), p. 384.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

176


177


462

178

Parpola, Asko, The Írauta S™tras of Låˇyåyana and Dråhyåâ and Their Commentaries: an English Translation, (Helsinki: Societas scientiarum Fennica, 1968). 179

Reference: Dråhyåyaâ Írauta S™tram (With the Commentary of Dhanvin), B.R. Sharma, ed., (Allahabad: Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan, 1983). 180

Gray, (2005), p. 421.

181

Carpenter and Sutin, pp. 636–637.

182

Bhattacharji, p. 311–312.

183

Parpola.

184

Vedantavagisa, Ananda Chandra, ed., Írauta S™tra of Låtyåyana with the commentary of Agniswåm¥, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1982). 185

Gray, (1918), pp. 800–802.

186


187

Caland, W., and Vira, Raghu, eds., Våråha-Írauta-S™tra Being the Main Ritualistic S™tra of the Maitråyaˆ¥ Íåkhå, (Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1971). 188

Kashikar, C.G., ìHaut®kaî in Annals of the Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute, Vol. LXXIX (Pune: A.M. Ghatage, 1998), pp. 137–148. 189

Kashikar, “Haut®ka.” Text ends abruptly.

190

Gray, (2005), p. 371.

191

Gray, (2005), pp. 379–80.

192

Bhattacharji, p.311.

193

H.G. Ranade, Kåtyåyana Írauta S™tra: Rules for the Vedic sacrifices, (Pune: H.G. Ranade and R.H. Ranade, Publishers, 1978).

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

194

Ranade, Kåtyåyana Írauta S™tra.

195

Ranade, Kåtyåyana Írauta S™tra.

463

196

Kashikar, C.G., Kåtyåyan¥ya Hautraparißhi∑hˇa together with Karka’s Commentary and an English Translation, (Pune: Tilak Maharashtra Vidyapeeth, 1984). 197

Kashikar, Kåtyåyan¥ya Hautraparißhi∑hˇa.

198

Gray, p. 837.

199

Gonda, p. 527.

200


201

S™ryakånta, Kåˇhaka-Saµkalana: Extracts from the Lost Kåˇhaka Bråhmaâ, Kåˇhaka-Írautas™tra and Kåˇhaka G®hyas™tras, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981). 202

S™ryakånta, Kåˇhaka-Saµkalana.

203

Please refer to above, under the discussion of Ãßhvalåyana G®ihya S™tra.

204

Gray, p. 838.

205


206

Ranade, H. G., Asvalayana Srauta-Sutram, 2 vols. (Poona: R.H. Ranade, 1981– 1986). 207

Vidyåratna, Råmanåråyaâ, ed., The Írauta S™tra of Ãßwalåyana with the Commentary of Gårgya Nåråyaâ, Calcutta (Asiatic Society, 1989). 208


209

Parpola, Asko in Acta Orientalis 36, 504, Leiden, Copenhagen, and in Orientalia Suecana 16, 207, Uppsala. (Ref. from Gonda.) 210 211


Premnidhi Shastri, Jaimin¥ya-Írauta-S™tra-V®tti of Bhavatråta, (New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture, 1966).

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

212


213

Bhattacharji, p. 313, quoting C.G. Kashikar.

214

464

K.N. Bhatnagar, Nidåna-S™tra of Patañjali, Edited with an Introduction, a Fragmentary Commentary and Indices, (Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1971), pp. 48–66. 215


216

Bhatnagar, p. 50.

217


218

Bhatnagar, p. 29.

219

Bhatnagar, pp. 48–66.

220

Bhatnagar, pp. 1–189.

221


222

Gray, (2005), p. 376.

223


224

Kashikar, Chintaman Ganesh, tr., The Baudhayana Srautasutra, 4 vols., (New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts and Motilal Banarsidass, 2003). 225

Caland, W., The Baudhåyana Írauta S™tra Belonging to the Taittir¥ya-Saµhitå, Vols. 1–3, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1982; 1st Edition Calcutta 1904–13). 226

Gray, (1918), p. 812.

227

Gray, (2005), p. 409.

228


229

Caland, W., editor, Vaikhånasa Írautas™tram: The Description of Vedic Rites According to the Vaikhånasa School belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt Ltd, 1991). [Originally published in 1941 in Bibliotheca Indica Series, Calcutta.]

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

230

Carpenter and Sutin, p. 564–565.

231

Gonda, p. 540.

232

Shåstri, M.H., Vol. II, Vedic Manuscripts.

233

465

Sen, S.N., and Bag, A.K., The Íulbas™tras of Baudhåyana, Ãpastamba, Kåtyåyana and Månava with Text, English Translation and Commentary, (New Delhi: Indian National Science Academy, 1983), p. 1. 234


235

Gray, (1918), p. 827.

236

Sen and Bag, p. 2.

237

Sen and Bag, p. 2.

238


239

Although the divisions are apparently different from those of the Ãpastamba Íhulba S™tra, which has 21 Khaˆ∂a, according to Khadilkar, S.D., Kåtyåyana Íhulba S™tra, (Poona: Vaidika Saµßhodhana Maˆ∂ala, 1974), p.x, the 21 Khaˆ∂a are again grouped in six chapters: The S™tra are not different. 240

Khadilkar, p. ix-x.

241

Sen and Bag.

242

Ãgåße, Kåß¥nåthaßåstr¥, Praßhna 25.

243

Ãgåße, Kåß¥nåthaßåstr¥, Praßhna 25.

244

Gray, (2005), p. 388.

245

Gray, (2005), p. 404.

246

Khadilkar, p. ix.

247

Sen and Bag.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

248

Sen and Bag, pp. 17–38.

249

Gray, (1918), p. 822.

250

Sharma, Kundanlal, Kalpasutra (Vaidika Vanmaya ka vivechanåtmaka brihad itihåsa: saptama khanda). (Hoshiarpur, Punjab: Vishveshvarånand Vaidika∑hodha Samsthåna, 1981), p. 189. This quote translated into English by Vishal Agarwal. 251

Gray, (1918), p. 822.

252

Khadilkar (1974), p. xi.

253

Caube, V.B., Vadhulasrautasutram, (Hosiyarapura: Katyayana Vaidika Sahitya Prakasana, 1993). 254

Yasuke Ikari, private e-mail communication, April, 2001.

255

Gray, (1918), p. 822.

256

Khadilkar, p. x.

257

Sen and Bag, p. 9.

258

Sen and Bag, pp. 126 ff.

259


260

Sharma, Kundanlal.

261

Sen and Bag, pp. 101 ff.

262


263

Gray, (1918), p. 827.

264

Khadilkar, 1974.

265

Chapter summaries from Sen and Bag, pp. 264 ff.

266

Chapter 7 summary from Khadilkar.

267

Sen and Bag, pp. 54 ff. and Khadilkar.

466

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

467

268

He has not mentioned the Maitråyaîya Íhulba S™tra, which is a manuscript in the keeping of the Asiatic Society of Bombay, according to Khadilkar, p. ix. 269

These calculations are so refined that the ‘square to circle,’ ‘circle to square’ and ‘square root of two’ constructions fit together with an accuracy of 0.0003%, according to Price, John F., “Applied Geometry of the Íhulba S™tras,” in Gorini, Catherine A., ed., Geometry at Work, (Washington, D.C.: Mathematical Association of America, 2000). 270

The various expansions suggested for the falcon fire altar are referred to here.

271

Price, John F., “Applied Geometry of the Íhulba S™tras,î in Gorini, Catherine A., ed., Geometry at Work, (Washington, D.C.: Mathematical Association of America, 2000), p. 47. 272

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi’s Absolute Theory of Government, (Vlodrop, the Netherlands: MVU Press, 1993). 273

Price, John F.

274


275

Max Mueller, writing to W.H. Morley, quoted in “Introduction to Ãpastamba,” Buehler, Georg, tr., The Sacred Laws of the Ãryas as Taught in the Schools of Ãpastamba, Gautama, Vasishˇha and Baudhåyana, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986), pp. x-xi. 276

Gray, (2005), p. 432.

277

Jolly, Julius, The Institutes of Vishnu, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1970), p. xii.

278

Jolly.

279

Jolly.

280

Krishnamacharya, V., ed., Vi∑hûsm®ti, The Adyar Library Series, Vol. 93 (in 2 parts), (Madras: The Adyar Library and Research Center, 1964). 281

Gray, (2005), p. 432.

282

Buehler, Sacred Laws vol. 2, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1969), pp. xii, xiii.

283

Buehler, Sacred Laws of the Aryås, vol. 2.

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

468

284

Buehler, George, Våsi∑hˇha-Dharmaßhåstra, Bombay Sanskrit and Prakrit Series, cited by M. Fushimi. 285

Gray, (2005), p. 432.

286

Buehler, Sacred Laws, vol. 1.

287

Buehler, Sacred Laws, vol. 1.

288

G. Buehler, Apastamba-Dharmas™tra, Bombay Sanskrit Series Nos. LIV and L, 3rd ed. 1932. 289

Gray, (2005), p. 432.

290

Kåß¥nåthaßåstr¥.

291

“Olfactory tubercle,” Biology-Online.org, 3 October 2005. 26 May 2006 . 292

Buehler, George, Vol. 1.

293

Gautam¥ya-Dharmas™tra, Ãnandåßrama Sanskrit Series 61, 1966.

294

Gray, (2005), p. 432.

295

Caland, W., tr., Vaikhanasasmartasutram: The Domestic Rules and Sacred Laws of the Vaikhanasa School Belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi: Ramanand Vidya Bhawan, 1982). 296

Caland, Vaikhanasasmartasutram.

297

W. Caland, ed.,Vaikhånasasmårtas™tram, The Domestic Rules of the Vaikhånasa School, Belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1927). 298

Gray, (2005), p. 409-410.

299

Buehler, George, Vol. II.

300

Buehler, George, Vol. II.

301

Hultzsch, Das Baudhayana-Dharmasutra. Zweite, Verbesserte Auflage. Abhandlungen fuer die Kunde des Morgenlandes, 16, Leipzig 1922; and Pandeya, Umesa

CHAPTER 4: KALPA

469

Chandra, Baudhayana-Dharmasutra with the ‘Vivarana’ Commentary by Sri Govinda Svami and critical notes by M.M.A. Chinnaswami Sastri, (Varanasi: The Kashi Sanskrit Series, 104, 1972). 302


`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 5: VEDIC GRAMMAR I. THE TEXTBOOK OF VYÃKARAÔA, THE AÛHÊÃDHYÃY⁄ The third branch of the Vedåãga is Vyåkaraâ, Vedic Grammar. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi has encapsulated the total knowledge of Vyåkaraâ in one word, Expansion. In his theme of dividing the whole Vedic Literature into streams of texts which are predominantly Âi∑hi, predominantly Devatå or predominantly Chhandas, he has identified Vyåkaraâ as a Chhandas predominant text. He writes: Vyåkaraâ is one of the structuring dynamics of Âik Veda. It highlights the quality of EXPANSION involved in structuring Âik Veda. With reference to consciousness, Vyåkaraâ comprises the specific sets of Laws of Nature that are engaged in promoting the quality of Chhandas within Saµhitå, providing a structure to the eternally silent, self-referral, self-sufficient, fully awake state of consciousness, which is intimately personal to everyone.1 H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Vyåkaraâ with the hypothalamus, a subcortical region of the brain (Please refer to Figure 34, p. 409). Gray describes the hypothalamus: The hypothalamus consists of only 4cm3 of neural tissue, or 0.3% of the total brain. Nevertheless, it contains the integrative systems that via the autonomic and endocrine effector systems, control fluid and electrolyte balance, food ingestion and energy balance, reproduction, thermoregulation, and immune and many emotional responses. The hypothalamus extends from the lamina terminalis to a vertical plane posterior to the mammillary bodies, and from the hypothalamic sulcus to the base of the brain beneath the third ventricle. It lies beneath the thalamus and the mesencephalic tegmentum. Laterally, it is bordered by the anterior part of the subthalamus, internal capsule and optic tract.2

CHAPTER 5: VEDIC GRAMMAR

471

Some hypothalamic neurones have specific receptors that sense the temperature, osmolarity, glucose, free fatty acid, and hormone content of the blood. Neurosecretory neurones secrete neurohormones into the blood. These control the anterior pituitary and act on organs such as the kidney, breast, uterus and blood vessels. . . . Broadly, neural inputs to the hypothalamus are derived from the ascending visceral and somatic sensory systems, the visual and olfactory systems, and numerous tracts from the brain stem, thalamus, ‘limbic’ structures and neurocortex. Efferent neural projections are reciprocal to most of these sources and, in particular, they impinge on and control the central origins of autonomic nerve fibers. The hypothalamus therefore exerts control via the autonomic and endocrine systems and through its connections to the telencephalon.3 King Nader Råm explains the quality of expansion represented in the hypothalamus as follows: The hypothalamus releases factors that activate the pituitary gland, neurohypophysis, and the autonomic nervous system. These releasing factors represent the expansion fundamental to the process of evolution of the endocrine and autonomic response, which leads to a large number of biochemical and physiological responses that brings the system to a new state of balance.4 There are eight different areas of the hypothalamus, each with four nuclei. King Nader Råm correlates these 32 nuclei with the 32 sections, collected in eight chapters that make up the main text of Vyåkaraâ, called the A∑hˇådhyåy¥. The A∑hˇådhyåy¥, written by the sage Påîni, is made up of about 4000 extremely pithy S™tra.5 Expansion is found in the A∑hˇådhyåy¥ in the process of expanding a root, whereby a verbal root undergoes a series of operations. The original root undergoes transformation, and a series of prefixes and suffixes are added and rules of euphonic combination are applied until finally the root appears as a verb or noun in audible speech. The A∑hˇådhyåy¥ begins with a series of definitions. The overall organization of the text, in terms of the grammatical system, can be seen from the series of Adhikåra, or major headings that occur in the text. George Cardona of the University of Pennsylvania, author


472

of comprehensive reviews of Påîni's grammar and its satellite literature, describes the different sections according to the Adhikåra of the text as follows: Rules 2.1.3 and following, to the end of the second quarter chapter of the second chapter, apply to form compounds. Rules of chapter 2.3 introduce postnominal endings. Rules of the section beginning with 3.1.1, through the fifth chapter, introduce units classed as affixes. This large section has subsections: rules which introduce post-verbal affixes, those which introduce affixes after nominal bases and elements terminating in the affixes denoted by ã¥ and åp, taddhita affixation rules. 6.1.1 and following provide for doubling certain elements in given contexts. Rules under the heading of 6.1.84 let a single replacement substitute for two sounds in contiguity. Rules of the section beginning with 6.4.1 state operations for presuffixal bases and those of the section beginning with 8.1.16 operations for padas. The final three quarter chapters . . . constitute a separate section, the rules of which do not generally supply operands for rules of the preceding seven and one-quarter chapters.6 There are English translations.7 Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

p[qmoå?y;y" ) p[qm" p;d" vO≤ır;dwc( 1 ade©ë," 2 îko gu,vOıI 3 n /;tulop a;/R/;tukÉ 4 …Kõit c 5 dI/IvevI$;m( 6 hloånNtr;" s'yog" 7 mu%n;…sk;vcnoånun;…sk" 8 tuLy;Syp[yà' sv,Rm( 9 n;JZl* 10 ÈdUde‚d(√vcn' p[gOÁm( 11 adso m;t( 12 xe 13 inp;t Ek;jn;õ™ 14 aot( 15 sMbuı* x;kLySyet;vn;WeR 16 ***concluding S™tra***

hlo ym;' y…m lop" 64 Zro Z·r sv,Re 65 ¨d;ˇ;dnud;ˇSy Sv·rt" 66 nod;ˇSv·rtodymg;GyRk;Xypg;lv ;n;m( 67 a a îit 68 8


473

II. SATELLITE TEXTS SUPPORTING THE AÛHÊÃDHYÃY⁄ 1. Íhiva S™tra. The extremely pithy nature of Påîniís S™tra has been made possible by a number of satellite texts that are an integral part of the grammatical system. The first of these is a presentation of the alphabet in a special sequence, grouped in S™tra. These S™tra are called the Íhiva S™tra or Pratyåhåra S™tra, and they are said to have emerged from 14 beats of Íhiva's drum as he was performing the dance of Íhiva.9 Each S™tra of the the Íhiva S™tra contains a sequence of letters of the alphabet, followed by a terminal letter that is marked with a Viråma. From these S™tra, Pratyåhåras can be formed, which are extremely concise expressions useful for denoting particular groups or classes of letters. A Pratyåhåra consists of one letter of the alphabet followed by one of the terminal letters from the Íiva S™tra. Then, all the letters of the alphabet from the initial letter of the Pratyåhåra, up to the one immediately preceding the terminal letter, are included in the set signified by that Pratyåhåra. Thus, for example, the first Pratyåhåra used in Påîniís grammar is aic. Ai is the letter of the alphabet; c is the terminal letter. The letters included in this collection or Pratyåhåra are ai and au. The Pratyåhåras are perfectly designed to enable Påîni to refer to collections of letters for the formation of specific rules, with maximum economy. The presentation of the alphabet in the form of the Íhiva S™tra usually precedes the A∑hˇådhyåy¥. The S™tra are:

a î ¨ ,( ) A lO k™ ) E ao õ™ ) Ee a* c( ) hyvr$( ) l,( ) ñmõ,nm( ) Z.ñ( ) `!/W( ) jbg@dx( ) %fz#qc$tv( ) kpy( ) xWsr( ) hl(


474

In addition to the Íhiva S™tra, three texts are essential to the structure of the A∑hˇådhyåy¥ as a system of grammar. These are the Dhåtupåˇha, the Gaâpåˇha, and the Uˆådi S™tra. 2. The Dhåtupåˇha. Dhåtupåˇha means recitation (påˇha) of the roots or Dhåtu of the language. Just like the body is made up of tissues, bones, muscles, blood, and so forth, called Dhåtu in the Vedic system of medicine, so also the language is made up of a fundamental constituent, the roots of the language, called Dhåtu in Vedic grammar. These roots are divided into 10 classes; each class behaves differently with respect to how the verbal stem (Aãga) is formed. Each class of verbal roots is given a name according to the verb which is the first one in the list of that class. This allows Påîni to refer to entire classes of verbs with a single word, thus contributing to the economy of his presentation. The importance of the root Bh™, coming at the start of the Dhåtupåˇha has been explained by Maharishi, in a lecture on the fundamental principles of Vedic grammar: All the verbs, whatever are the verbs in the [Vedic] language, they have their source in the root Bh™, which means just pure existence, state. So that all that means activity—verb is just the activity, in action, motion—verb just signifies motion and activity. So all the verbs have their source in the root Bh™, which means Being. From the unmanifest field of Being starts all kind of activity. This is Påîni, grammar, that the verbs are derived from that field which is non-active, Being, to be. From Being, becoming starts, and all the verbs are representatives of becoming—activity—they are just pertaining to activity.10 The beginning of the Dhåtupåˇha, showing the first root to be the root Bh™, to be or become, follows below. Note that after each root, there is a word which gives the principle tendency or trend of meaning of that root. Also note that there is a special system of notation that adds a suffix to the root, so that for example root ßhvid is written ßhvidi.11


aq >v;idg," .U sˇ;y;m( – ¨d;ˇ" prSmw.;W" – aq tvgIRy;Nt;" E/;dy" kQyNt;" Wæ$(]'xd;Tmne.;W;" E/ vOı* ) SpıR sÏWeR ) g;/O p[itœ;≤lPsyog[RNqe c ) v;/O …vlo@ne ) n;qO n;/O y;Cñopt;pwêy;‹ååxI"Wu ) d/ /;r,e ) Sk⁄id a;p[v,e ) …êid êwTye ) vid a….v;dnStuTyo" ) .id kLy;,e su%e c ) mid StuitmodmdSv“k;≤NtgitWu ) Spid ik≤ç∞lne ) ÆKlid p·rdevne ) mud hWeR ) dd d;ne ) „vd SvdR a;Sv;dne ) ¨dR m;ne £°@;y;' c )

475


476

***concluding paragraph***

l;$ jIvne ) ˙,Iõ™ roW,e lˇy;' ) mhIõ™ pUj;y;m( ) re%; Xl;`;s;dnyo" ) duvs( p·rt;pp·rcr,yo" ) itrs( aNtı*R ) agd nIrogTve ) ¨rs( bl;qeR ) tr, gt* ) pys( p[sOt* ) sM.Uys( p[.Ut.;ve ) aMbr sMbr sM.r,e ) a;’itg,oåym( ) îit k<@±v;idg," ) îit /;tup;#" sm;¢" 3. The Gaâpåˇha. The second text that is fundamental to the exposition of the Ashtådhyåy¥ is called the Gaâpåˇha. Gaâ is a set or collection or group. This is a recitation of all the sets of words that are acted upon by the various rules of grammar. When Påîni wishes to refer to a particular group of words, such as all the words that denote the faculty of a particular sense, as for example taste, he says Rasådaya˙. The reader then knows that he is referring to all the words in the 193rd class:


477

rs;dy" rs Âp v,R gN/ SpxR xBd òeh .;v gu,;t( Ek;c" 193 There are 261 different classes of words presented in the Gaâpåˇha. The Gaâpåˇha is given in alphabetical order, arranged according to the first word in each list. Beginning and ending are as follows.12

g,p;# a'ê;dy" a'xë jn r;jn( ¨∑^ %e$k a…jr a;{;‹ ≈v, ’·ˇk; a/R pur 1 a=¥Ut;dy" a=¥Ut j;nup[˙t jÏ;p[˙t jÏ;p[ht p;dSvedn k<$kmdRn gt;nugt gt;gt y;topy;t anugt 2 a©ëLy;dy" a©ë≤l .®j b.[u vLgu m<@r m<@l x„k⁄lI h·r kip muin ®h %l ¨d…êt( go,I ¨rs( k⁄≤lx ≤x%; 3 aj;dy" aj; E@k; koikl; c$k; aê; muiWk; b;l; ho@; p;k; vTs; m<@; …vl;t; pUv;‹ph;,; apr;ph;,; sM.S];…jnx,ip<@º>y" fl;t( sMfl; .S]fl; a…jnfl; x,fl; ip<@fl; i]fl; sTp[;‘;<@ p[;Nt xtwkÉ>y" pu„p;t( sTpu„p; p[;Kpu„p; k;<@pu„p; p[;Nt-


478

pu„p; xtpu„p; Ekpu„p; xU{; c;mhTpUv;‹ j;it" £⁄ç; ¨‚„,h; dev…vx; Jyeœ; kinœ; m?ym; pu'yogeåip mUl;t( n ñ" amUl; d'∑^; 4 a…jr;dy" a…jr %idr pu≤ln h's k;r<@v c£v;k 5 ***concluding paragraph***

hrItKy;dy" hrItk° kox;tk° n%rjnI x„k<@« d;@« do@« êetp;ik ajuRnp;k° {;=;k;l; ?v;=; g.Ik; k<$k;·rk; ipPplI …cMp; xef;≤lk; 260 hSTy;dy" hiStn( k⁄∂;l aê kixk k⁄®t k$ol k$olk g<@ol g<@olk k<@ol k<@olk aj kpot j;l g<@ mhel; d;sI g…,k; k⁄sl U 261 4. Uˆådi S™tra. The third text that is essential to the A∑hˇådhyåy¥ is a collection of ìk®t-affixesî beginning with uˆ. These are called the Uˆådi S™tra. They present a large number of irregularities and exceptions in the Vedic language, situations that are not subject to the orderly evolution from the root described in the main text. The Uˆådi S™tra appears to be a traditional text that was incorporated by Paîni into his grammatical system, because of its relevance and utility. There are two versions of the text. Following are the beginning and ending S™tra of the Pañcapådin version:13


479

aq ¨,;dy" ’v;p;ijimSvids;?yxU>y ¨,( 1 zNdsI," 2 Îsinjincirci$>yo ñu,(3 ikÔryo" i≈,;" 4 ]o rí l" 5 ’kÉ vc" kí 6 .OmOxItøcirTsirtin/inimms(ij>y ¨"7 a,í 8 /;Nye int( 9 xøSvOiòih]pu„yisvishiniKlidviN/min>yí 10 SyNde" s'p[s;r,' /í 11 ¨Ndeir∞;de" 12 ÈWe" ik∞ 13 SkNde" slopí 14 sOjersum(c 15 ’ter;¥NtivpyRyí 16 n;vçe"17 filp;i$ni.minjn;' guKpi$n;ik/tí 18 vleguRKc 19 x" ikTsNv∞ 20 yo √π c 21 k⁄.[Rí 22 pøi.idVyi/gOi//OiW>y" 23 ’g[o®∞ 24 apdu" suWu Sq" 25 rpeir∞op/;y;" 26 aijRÎixkMyimpixb;/;mOijpixtuG/uGdI`Rhk;rí 27 p[iqªid.[s(j;' s'p[s;r,' slopí 28 lõ™i/b'ÁonRlopí 29 Ë,oRtenuRlopí 30 ***concluding S™tra***

av¥;vm;/m;vRref;" k⁄iTste 54 lIrIõoÓ≥Sv" pu$( c tr* XleW,k⁄Tsnyo" 55 iKlxerI∞op/;y;" kNlopí lo n;Sc 56 aXnoter;xukmRi, vr$( c 57 cte®rn( 58 p[;tterrn( 59 ameStu$( c 60 dhegoR lopo dí n" 61 isce" s'D;y;' hnum* kí 62 Vy;iõ `[;teí j;t*


480

hNterCùrc(64 =eme®p/;lopí 65 trtei@^R" 66 g[herin" 67 p[qermc( 68 creí 69 m©πrlc( 70 îTyu,;idWu pçm" p;d" These texts, Dhåtupåˇha, Gaâpåˇha, and Uˆådi S™tra are essential parts of the systematic knowledge of grammar, Vyåkaraâ, necessary for complete explication of the pithy S™tra of the A∑hˇådhyåy¥.14 This concludes the discussion of the reading program in Vedic grammar, presenting the knowledge of Expansion.


481

Notes: 1


2

Gray, (2005), p. 375.

3

Gray, (2005), p. 379.

4


5

Cardona, George, Påîni: A survey of research, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1976), p. 142. 6

Cardona, Påîni, p. 187.

7

Sharma, Ramanath, The Ashˇådhyåy¥ of Påîni, 5 vols., (Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1987-2003). Katre, Sumitra Mangesh, Ashˇådhyåy¥ of Påîni, (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1987). Vasu, Ír¥ßha Chandra, The Ashˇådhyåy¥ of Påîni, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). 8

Cardona, George, Påîni, His Work and its Traditions, Vol. I, Second Edition, (New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). For about 100 S™tras Cardona gives alternate readings in brackets. The unbracketed reading is the one Cardona proposes was available to Patanjali and Kåtyayana when they wrote their commentaries, and these unbracketed S™tra, and not their alternates, were used for the reading curriculum. Final proofing and editing by Jean Marie Karst. 9

Vettam Mani, Puranic encyclopaedia : a comprehensive dictionary with special reference to the epic and Puranic literature. (Delhi : Motilal Banarsidass, 1975) p.566. 10

His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, "The Root Bh™ and Vedic grammar." 17 November 1972, Lake Tahoe, audiorecording. According to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, all the verbs and all the words in Sanskrit, come from the root Bh™, to be or to become. Thus the entire language has its basis in Being. 11

12

J.L. Shastri, Dhåtupåˇha˙, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984).

Sumitra M. Kartre, A∑ˇådhyåy¥ of Påîni in Roman Transliteration, (Austin, TX: University of Texas Press, 1987).


482

13

Ír¥ßa Chandra Vasu, ed., The Siddhånta Kaumud¥, v.2, (Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1982). 14

Cardona lists also the Phiˇ S™tra, and the Liãgånußhåsanam as satellite texts of the A∑ˇådhyåy¥. Please refer to Cardona, (1976) pp. 174–179.

`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA I. INTRODUCTION TO THE NIRUKTA The fourth branch of the Vedåãga is Nirukta. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi has encapsulated the total knowledge of Nirukta in one word, Self-referral direction. In his theme of dividing the whole Vedic Literature into streams of texts which are Âi∑hi (the knower) predominant, Devatå (process of knowing) predominant or Chhandas (known) predominant, he has identified Nirukta as a Chhandas predominant text. He writes: Nirukta is one of the structuring dynamics of Âik Veda. It highlights the quality of SELF-REFERRAL DIRECTION involved in structuring Âik Veda. With reference to consciousness, Nirukta comprises the specific sets of Laws of Nature that are engaged in promoting the quality of Chhandas within Saµhitå, providing a structure to the eternally silent, self-referral, self-sufficient, fully awake state of consciousness, which is intimately personal to everyone.1 H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Nirukta with the pituitary gland, the neurohypophysis (the posterior lobe of the pituitary), and the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems. The two lobes of the pituitary and their relation to other brain structures are shown in Figure 37. The location and appearance of the pituitary gland is described by Gray: The pituitary gland, or hypophysis cerebri, is a reddish-gray, ovoid body, c. 12mm in transverse and 8 mm in anteroposterior diameter, and weighing c.500 mg. It is continuous with the infundibulum, a hollow, conical, inferior process from the tuber cinereum of the hypothalamus. It lies within the pituitary fossa of the sphenoid bone, where it is covered superiorly by a circular diaphragma sellae of dura mater. . . . The pituitary has two major parts, neurohypophysis and adenohypophysis, which differ in their origin, structure and function. The neurohypophysis is a diencephalic downgrowth connected with the hypothalamus.

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

484

The adenohypophysis is an ectodermal derivative of the stomatodeum. Both include parts of the infundibulum. . . . Neurohypophysis. Axons arising from groups of hypothalamic neurones . . . terminate in the neurohypophysis. . . . Some smaller parvocellular neurones in the periventricular zone. . . . produce releasing and inhibitory hormones, which control the secretory activities of the adenohypophysis via its portal blood supply. The neurohormones stored in the main part of the neurohypophysis are vasopressin and oxytocin. Adenohypophysis. The adenohypophysis . . . consists of epithelial cells of varying size and shape arranged in cords or irregular follicles, between which lie thin-walled vascular sinusoids supported by a delicate reticular connective tissue. Most of the hormones synthesized by the adenohypophysis are trophic. They include the peptides, growth hormone (GH) . . .and prolactin. Glycoprotein trophic hormones adrenocorticotrophin . . . thyroid-stimulating hormone; folliclestimulating hormone, . . . and luteinizing hormone. β-Lipotropin is released from the pituitary, but its function in humans is uncertain. β-Endorphin is another cleavage product released from the pituitary.2

King Nader Råm explains how self-referral functions in the physiology: In the physiology, Nirukt is represented by the pituitary gland, the neurohypophysis, and the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems. These are activated by the limbic system and the hypothalamic releasing factors. They

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

485

expand the response and bring it back towards the organs and organ systems of the physiology through a feedback loop that maintains homeostatic balance. There are 13 factors involved in this self-referral expansion, corresponding to the 13 chapters of Nirukta.3 Two of the factors that King Nader Råm describes are the cholinergic and adrenergic factors that activate the parasympathetic and sympathetic systems. Two other factors, Oxytocin and Vasopressin, are released by the posterior lobe of the pituitary gland, also called the neurohypophysis. The pituitary gland releases the remaining nine, Follicle-stimulating hormone, Luteinizing hormone, Thyrotropin, Growth hormone, Prolactin, Melanocyte stimulating hormone, β-lipotropin, Adrenocorticotropin and βendorphin.4 Nirukta is a dictionary, a textbook to systematically unfold the meanings of words.5 The self-referral direction is shown in the text of Nirukta by reversing the direction of expansion found in Vyåkaraâ. Whereas Vyåkaraâ started with the root, and systematically expanded it until it was fully articulated as a verb or noun, in Nirukta, Yåska starts with the expressed word, and points out the root from which the word was derived. Vyåkaraâ, Vedic grammar, presents the rules for structuring speech from its source in the verbal roots, the Dhåtu of the language. By knowing the collection of verbal roots, and knowing the procedure for expanding on those roots to create all the verb forms, and the nouns, and adjectives, and indeed all the words that make up speech, one can see how meaning is imbibed in each word, as it progresses from the root, undergoing specific transformations and appending of affixes until finally it emerges as an expressed word. This is the expansion of the root into the expressed word: The roots and their principal tendencies, and the shades of meaning associated with each affix and each transformation, all function together in an integrated and systematic way to construct the meaning of words and sentences. When one understands in detail how words are

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

486

constructed from roots, then in order to understand any particular word, one traces the word back in the reverse direction, reversing the trend of expansion, and goes back to the root. The connection of each word with its source, its root, unfolds the meaning of the word. There are, however, many words in Sanskrit whose connection with verbal roots is unclear; hence the meaning of the words may be clouded. This circumstance creates a call for a dictionary in which those words whose verbal roots are not obvious by inspection, can be explained. This demand is fulfilled by Nirukta. II. THE TRADITIONAL WORD LIST CALLED THE NIGHAÔÊU The starting point of Nirukta is a list of words, handed down by tradition, whose meaning requires special explication. This word list is called the Nighaˆˇu. Yaska says, ìA traditional list (of words) has been handed down (to us). It is to be (here) explained. This same list is called Ni-ghaˆˇavas.î6 The Nighaˆˇu is itself a kind of dictionary. It is not simply a list, and the words that it organizes in its five chapters are not arranged in alphabetical order. The words are intelligently organized to divulge their meaning by context within the collection of words. The system underlying the sequential presentation of words in the Nighaˆˇu will be explained below. The beginning and ending paragraphs of the Nighaˆˇu are as follows:

aq …n`<$u" ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" ) g*" ) Gm; ) Jm; ) +m; ) =; ) =Öm; ) =oô,I ) …=ôit" ) aôv…nÿ" ) ¨ÖvIR ) pOûQvI ) mÖhI ) ·rÄp" ) aidÿit" ) î¬;ÿ ) inAÃ≥it" ) .U" ) .U…mÿ" ) pUûW; )

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

487

g;ôtu" ) go]eit pO…qVy;" 1 heÖm ) cÖN{m( ) ®ÄKmm( ) ayÿ" ) ihrÿ
Xyeôn" ) somÿ" ) cÖN{m;ÿ" ) mOûTyu" ) ivôê;nÿr" ) /;ôt; ) ivô/;ôt; ) mÖ®tÿ" ) ®Ä{;" ) Aû.vÿ" ) ai©ÿrs" ) ipôtrÿ" ) aqÿv;R," ) .Ogÿv" ) a;ô¢‰;" ) aidÿit" ) sÖrm;ÿ ) srÿSvtI ) v;k™ ) anuÿmit" ) r;Ök; ) …sônIôv;ôlI ) k⁄ûÙ" ) yÖmI ) ¨ÖvRxIÿ ) pOû…qôvI ) îÖN{;ô,I ) g*ôrI ) g*" ) /eÖnu" ) afl‰;ÿ ) pÖQy;ÿ ) Svô‚St" ) ¨ÖW;" ) î¬;ÿ ) rodsI 5 aÖ…ên*ÿ ) ¨ÖW;" ) sUûy;R ) vOûW;ôkÖp;yIÿ ) sÖrÄ
CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

488

ivêeÿdeÖv;" ) s;ô?y;" ) vsÿv" ) v;ô…jnÿ" ) devpà‰o devpà‰ 6 îit in`<$* pçmoå?y;y" 7

Word lists such as the Nighaˆˇu allow one to gain knowledge of a word by association, from the context or sequence of the words, like in a thesaurus. A simple example of how words can divulge their meaning simply by association in a word list may be found in the Bhåva Prakåßa Saµhitå: There is a section called the Bhåva Prakåßha Nighaˆˇu, in which lists of words are organized in verses. Here is a series of words from the Bhåva Prakåßha Nighaˆˇu, all of which have the meaning, ìwater.î

p;nIy' s…ll' nIr' k°l;l' jlmMbu c a;po v;v;R·r k˘ toy' py" p;qStqodkm( jIvn' vnmM.oå,oåmOt' `nrsoå…p c 1 8

pån¥ya ⎯ to be drunk, drinkable, a beverage, water salila ⎯ flowing, surging, fluctuating; flood, surge, waves, water n¥ra ⎯ water k¥låla ⎯ a sweet beverage (also a heavenly drink similar to Amrita, the food of the gods), blood, water jala ⎯ water, any fluid ambu ⎯ water åpas ⎯ water vår ⎯ water; stagnant water, a pond våri ⎯ water, rain, fluid, fluidity kaµ ⎯ water (Maitråyaˆ¥ Saµhitå)[MW] toya ⎯ water paya˙ ⎯ any fluid or juice, milk, water, rain påtha ⎯ water udaka ⎯ water j¥vana ⎯ vivifying, giving life, enlivening, ‘life giving element’, water vana ⎯ water (Nighantu)

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

489

ambha ⎯ water, the celestial waters aâ ⎯ not held up, not pent up, not fixed am®ta ⎯ nectar, ambrosia, water ghanarasa ⎯ cloud-fluid, water The qualities of water are seen from many different angles: Creating a list of synonyms, without any further commentary helps to eliminate a great deal of confusion about the meaning of words. In the Nighaˆˇu-koßha, the first three chapters, called collectively the Naighaˆˇuka Kåˆ∂a, are divided into small groups of words, and each group is summed up with the word iti. The word iti is followed by a single word which characterizes the set to which all those words belong. These are broadly speaking, synonyms. For example:

g*" ) Gm; ) Jm; ) +m; ) =; ) =m; ) =o,I ) …=it" ) av…n" ) ¨vIR ) pOQvI ) mhI ) ·rp" ) aidit" ) î¬; ) inA≥it" ) .U" ) .U…m" ) pUW; ) g;tu" ) go]eit pO…qVy;" 1 1. gau˙ gmå jmå k∑hmå k∑hå k∑hamå k∑hoˆ¥ k∑hiti˙ avani˙ urv¥ p®thv¥ mah¥ ripa˙ aditi˙ i¬å nir®ti˙ bh™˙ bh™mi˙ p™∑hå gåtu˙ gotra-iti p®thivyå˙. In this first collection of words in the Nighaˆˇu-koßha, all are words meaning ìP®thiv¥,î earth. The collections of words in the fourth and fifth chapters in the Nighaˆˇu do not end with iti and a single word description. The collections in these chapters are not synonyms, so it is more difficult to make use of the list to grasp the meaning of a word. Chapter 4 is called the Naigama Kåˆ∂a, and it lists groups of homonyms. Chapter 5 is called the Daivata Kåˆ∂a, and concerns deities.9 III. NIRUKTA AS A DICTIONARY FOR THE WORDS IN THE NIGHAÔÊU The Nirukta provides an explanation for all the words in the Nighaˆˇu. For the first three chapters of the Nighaˆˇu, which may be called collections of synonyms, where each collection of words already has a descriptor, Yåska, the author of the Nirukta, does

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

490

not find it necessary to comment on every word, although he comments on most of them. For chapters 4 and 5 of the Nighaˆˇu, which are collections of difficult Vedic words, Yåska comments on every word. Yåskaís commentary has two components: First, he suggests various derivations or etymologies, that is roots or verb forms from which the word may have evolved. These derivations are suggested by giving the third person singular present indicative form of the verb, as for example, bhavati to indicate the root bh™.10 Second, he presents quotations from the Vedic Saµhitås, so that one can see the use of the word in context. Here is an example from chapter 4, explaining the word dam™nå (Nirukta 4:4)11 The quotation following the explanation is from Âik Veda V.4.5. and Atharva Veda 7.73.9.:

dmUn; dmmn; v; ) d;nmn; v; ) d;Ntmn; v; ) aip v; dm îit gOhn;m ) tNmn;" Sy;t( ) mno mnote" 4 ju∑o dmUn; ait…qduRro, îm' no yDmup y;ih iv√;n( ) ivê; a¶e a….yujo ivhTy; x]Uyt;m; .r; .ojn;in – One of the difficult words on which Yåska comments is Vyoman. He quotes the Âicho Ak∑hare verse:

Aûco aÖ=reÿ prÄme VyoÿmÖNy‚SmÿNdeÖv; a…/ô ivêeÿ inWeÖdu" ) ySt• vedÖ ikmOûc; k¡·r„yitô y îˇi√ôduSt îÖme sm;ÿste – Aco a=re prme Vyvne y‚SmNdev; a…/inW<,;" sveR ) 12

The word vyoman is proposed to be derived from vi-avane, that which favors separation or divison, i.e. space. The Vedic quotations are traditionally presented in their accented form, and so can be easily distinguished from Yåskaís commentary. It is more difficult to ascertain by inspection which words are the subject of commentary; however, at the end

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

491

of each chapter, the words commented upon in that chapter are listed. These examples show how Nirukta functions as a dictionary, and they also serve as a brief introduction to the overall structure of the Nirukta. The text has been translated into English. The first chapter and the first four sections of the second chapter deal with linguistic, grammatical and etymological principles.13 The remainder of chapter 2 and all of chapter 3 describe synonyms. Chapters 4, 5 and 6 describe homonyms. Chapters 7 and 8 discuss the Devatå associated with Yagya, “to whom panegyrics are addressed,” as the text explains.14 Chapters 9 through 12 discuss the specific Devatå associated with the regions of life.15 The last chapter, called Parißhi∑hˇa or appendix, treats the exceptions and omissions. The text begins:

≈Iy;Skmuinivr…ct' in®ˇ_' p[;r>yte aq p[qmoå?y;y" sm;ª;y" sm;ª;t" ) s Vy;:y;tVy" ) t…mm' sm;ª;y' in`<$v îTy;c=te ) in`<$v" kSm;t( ) ingm; îme .v≤Nt ) zNdo>y" sm;˙Ty sm;˙Ty sm;ª;t;" ) te ingNtv Ev sNto ingmn;…•`<$v ¨CyNt îTy*pmNyv" ) aip v; hnn;dev Syu" ) sm;ht; .v≤Nt ) y√; sm;˙t; .v≤Nt ) td( y;in cTv;·r pdj;t;in n;m;:y;te copsgRinp;t;í t;nIm;in .v≤Nt ) t]wt•;m;:y;tyolR=,' p[idx≤Nt ) .;vp[/;nm;:y;tm( ) sÊvp[/;n;in n;m;in ) td( y]o.e .;vp[/;ne .vt"

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

492

pUv;RprI.Ut' .;vm;:y;ten;c∑e ) v[jit pctIit ) ¨p£ mp[.OTypvgRpyRNt' mUt| sÊv.Ut' sÊvn;m…." ) v[Jy; p·ˇ_·rit ) ad îit sÊv;n;mupdex" ) g*rê" pu®Wo hStIit ) .vtIit .;vSy ) a;Ste xete v[jit itœtIit ) îiN{yinTy' vcnm*duMbr;y," 1 ***concluding paragraphs***

m; teÖ r;/;Ã\ …sô m; tÿ Ëôtyoÿ vsoôåSm;Nkd;ÿ cÖn; dÿ.n( ) ivê;ÿ c n ¨p …mmIôih m;ÿnuWÖ vsUÿin cWRÖ…,>yô a; – m; c te /n;in m; c te kd;cn s·rWu" sv;R…, p[D;n;Nyupm;ny ) mnu„yihtoåym;idTyoåym;Tm; ) aqwtdnup[vdit ) aqwn' mh;Ntm;Tm;nmeWGgR," p[vdit ) vwêkmR,o dev;n;' nu vy' j;n; n;sÿd;sIô•o sd;ÿsIˇÖd;nIôm( ) îit c ) swW;Tm…jD;s; ) swW; svR.Ut…jD;s; ) b[˜," s;i∑| sÂpt;' slokt;' gmyit y Ev' ved ) nmo b[˜,e ) nmo mhte .Ut;y ) nmo y;Sk;y ) b[˜xuKlmtIy b[˜xuKlmsIy 48 îit p·r≤x∑m( 16

CHAPTER 6: NIRUKTA

493

Notes: 1


2

Gray, (2005), p. 380-382.

3


4

King Nader Råm, (2000), pp. 111-113.

5

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi described Nirukta as a dictionary in his lecture, “Vedic Literature: the radiant flowers of the garden of knowledge,” Feb. 14, 1974, Interlaken, Switzerland. 6

Translation by Sarup, Lakshman, The Nighaˆˇu and the Nirukta, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984), translation page 5. 7

Sarup.

8

Bhåva Prakåßha Saµhitå, Nighaˆˇu chapter 13, verse 1.

9

Sarup, p. 13 of Introduction.

10

It is a special citation form which uses the third person singular active form of the verb, even when the verb does not occur in the active. Thus the word always ends with the suffix ßhtip, i.e., ìti” with initial and final markers, and it is declined like a noun. 11

Sarup, p.76. Sanskrit text.

12

Nirukta, Chapter 13, verse 10. Page 226 in Lakshman Sarup’s edition. YåskaMaharishi Mahesh Yogi has commented extensively on this verse, as for example in Maharishi Technology of the Unified Field: Integration of Modern Science and Ancient Vedic Science Creating Unified Field based Perfect Civilization for all Mankind in This Scientific Age. (Fairfield, Iowa: Institute of World Leadership, 1984) pp. 17-25. 13

Sarup.

14

Sarup, p. 113 (translation).

15

This is explained further in King Nader Råm, (2000), p. 111.

16

Sarup.

`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 7: VEDIC METRE The fifth branch of the Vedåãga is Chhandas, Vedic Prosody or Meter. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi has encapsulated the total knowledge of Chhandas in one word, Measuring. In his theme of dividing the whole Vedic Literature into streams of texts that are Âi∑hi predominant, Devatå predominant or Chhandas predominant, he has identified Chhandas (prosody) as a Devatå predominant text. He writes: Chhand is one of the structuring dynamics of Âik Veda. It highlights the MEASURING quality involved in structuring Âik Veda. With reference to consciousness, Chhand comprises the specific sets of Laws of Nature that are engaged in promoting the quality of Devatå within Saµhitå, providing a structure to the eternally silent, self-referral, self-sufficient, fully awake state of consciousness, which is intimately personal to everyone.1 H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Chhandas with neurotransmitters and neurohormones. Neurotransmitters and neurohormones, as for example those produced by the pituitary gland, discussed in the previous chapter, function with great precision, targeting specific membranes, cells or organs in the body. Neurotransmitters move within the gaps between neurons; neurohormones move in the blood stream in order to reach their target organs. There are eight target organ systems whose activities are influenced by the action of neurohormones and neurotransmitters (Please refer to Figure 38): 1) The gastrointestinal-excretory system, 2) the pulmonary system (lungs), 3) the haematologicimmunologic system comprising the red and white blood cells, and their stems 4) the neurological system, 5) the cardiovascular system, 6) the musculo-skeletal system, 7) the endocrine-reproductive system, and 8) the dermatologic system. Hormones flowing throughout the body in the bloodstream reach their target organs because the organs have

CHAPTER 7: VEDIC METER

495


496

receptors on the surface of the cell membrane that are specific to the molecular shape of that hormone. The hormone functions like a key fitting precisely into the lock, which is the receptor on the cell membrane. When the key fits into the lock, i.e. when the neurohormone reaches the cell membrane and combines with the receptor, then the channel governed by that receptor is opened, like the opening of a door in the cell. Depending on the type of receptor, the fitting of the key into the lock may result in the opening of an ion channel in the membrane, or in a cascade of activities inside the cell. Hart describes this phenomenon as follows: The body’s organs and cells have to communicate with each other in order to function and to survive. As their language, they use a great variety of specialized chemical messengers that include the neurotransmitters and the hormones. Serotonin and other messenger molecules pass signals from one cell to another by interacting with special gatekeeper molecules called receptors. It is a lock and key system, in which each messenger molecule can unlock and activate only a specific receptor type. When a messenger molecule attaches to the proper receptor, the receptor triggers a series of responses within the cell, which may then release its own messengers to pass the information on to yet other cells. . . . About thirty neurotransmitters have been identified, some of them very specialized and others with a range of job duties in different parts of the brain and nervous system.2 Each of the eight organ systems has its own unique receptors that recognize the specific neurohormones and neurotransmitters intended for them. Some receptors are responsive not only to the specific endogenous hormone that fits like a key into a lock; their activity may also be triggered, or conversely, blocked by drugs. Chemicals that block the receptor site, keeping the neurohormone from reaching its destination and fitting into the lock, are called antagonists; chemicals that open the door by fitting into the lock, are called agonists. H.M. King Nader Råm explains the transformation or Devatå quality of the neurotransmitters and neurohormones as follows:


497

The transmitter operates like a key that fits into a specific lock and allows the opening of the door. The receptor is the lock, and the response . . . is the opening of a channel (like opening a door). In this manner, Chhand has a value of transformation (opening or closing a channel); in addition, the term Chhand refers to the hiding quality (the transmitter covers the receptor). The receptors are located on the surface of the cells in the organ systems.3 Because of the precision with which the target organ is activated by the neurohormone, activating processes within specific cells, the number of transmitter molecules released into the blood stream will be in proportion to the number of cells activated, and hence to the overall level of activation of the target organ system. Thus a quantified or measured response is achieved, and this represents the measuring quality in the physiology. Chhandas measures the number of syllables in the ®icha or verse of the Veda. The main textbook of Chhandas, Vedic metre, is Piãgalachhanda˙s™tra. The text has eight chapters with a total of 315 S™tra. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the eight chapters of the Piãgalachhanda˙s™tra with the eight organ systems targeted by the neurohormones and neurotransmitters. Sastri summarizes the topics of the eight chapters: The first chapter of the Chhanda˙s™tra contains definitions and the second chapter deals with number of syllables in the metres like Gåyatr¥ etc. The third chapter covers various characteristics of the Vedic metres and their feet etc. The fourth chapter contains åryå vaitål¥ya Chhandas. The fifth chapter covers ‘ardhasamav®tta’ and the sixth contains metres with six syllable feet up to those with twelve syllabic ones. The seventh chapter covers thirteen syllabic feet up to twenty-six syllable feet and their characteristic features. The eighth chapter contains gåthå and praståra etc.4 Beginning and ending S™tra are as follows:

zNd"x;S]m( p[qmoå?y;y" ) /I≈IS]Im( 1 vr; s; y( 2 k; guh; r( 3 vsu/; s( 4


498

s; te Kv t( 5 kd; s j( 6 ik˘ vd .( 7 n hs n( 8 gO l( 9 gNte 10 /[;idpr" 11he 12 l* s" 13 Gl* 1 4 a∑* vsv îit 15 îit p[qmoå?y;y" aq i√tIyoå?y;y" zNd" 1 g;y]I 2 dwVyekm( 3 a;surI pçdx 4 p[;j;pTy;∑* 5 yjuW;' W$( 6 s;ª;' i√" 7 Ac;' i]" 8 √* √* s;ª;' v/eRt 9 ]I'S]InOc;m( 10 cturítur" p[;j;pTy;y;" 11 Ekìk˘ xeWe 12 jÁ;d;surI 13 t;Nyui„,gnu∑ëBbOhtIp…¤i]∑ëBjgTy" 14 itßiStß" sn;ª‰ Ekìk; b[;˜‰" 15 p[GyjuW;m;„yR îit 16 îit i√tIyoå?y;y" ***concluding chapter***

aq a∑moå?y;y" a];nuˇ_' g;q; 1 k⁄@±mldNtI .(t* n(g* ig≤N{yrs;" 2 vrtnunR(j* j[* W@±rs;" 3 jl/rm;l; m(.* s(m* smu{vsv" 4 g*rI n* r* 5 lln; .(t* n(s;iv≤N{yWRy" 6 knkp[.; s(j* s(j* g( 7 k⁄i$lgitn*R t* g( SvrtRv" 8 vrsuNdrI .(j* s(n* g* 9 k⁄i$l; m(.* n(y* g* vedrssmu{;" 10 xwl≤x%; .(r* n(.* .(g* .Utrse≤N{y;i, 11 vryuvtI .(r*


499

y(n* n(g* 12 aitx;…ynI s* j(.* j(g* g( idk™Svr;" 13 aivtq' n(j* .(j* j(l* g( 14 viSv≤N{ysmu{;íeTkoiklkm( 15 ivbu/ip[y; r(s* j* .(r* vsuidx" 16 n;r; ck˘ n* r* r* 17 iviSmt; y(m* n(s* r* g( rstuRSvr;" 18 x≤xvdn; n(j* .(j* j( j(r* ®{idx" 19 i√k* Gl* 20 …m≈* c 21 pOqGl* …m≈;" 22 vsv≤S]k;" 23 lıeR 24 swkÉ g( 25 p[itlomgu,' i√l;R¥m( 26 ttoåPyek˘ jÁ;t( 27 i√rıeR 28 Âpe xUNym( 29 i√" xUNye 30 t;vd/eR tÌu…,tm( 31 i√¥URn' tdNt;n;m( 32 Ekoneå?v; 33 pre pU,Rm( 34 pre pU,R…mit 35 îTy∑moå?y" ) sm;¢í;y' g[Nq" ) 5


500

Notes: 1


2

Hart, Carol, Secrets of Serotonin, (Griffin: St. Martin's Press, 1996). National Association of Science Writers, 26 May 2006 < http://nasw.org/users/twoharts/ serotonin.html>, “Chapter 2, How One Little Molecule Can Do So Much,” paragraph 5. 3


4

Sastri, Asoke Chatterjee, ed., Piãgalachhanda˙s™tra: A study, (Calcutta: University of Calcutta, 1987), p. 82. 5

Sastri, Asoke Chatterjee, pp. 1 ff.

`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 8: VEDIC ASTRONOMY AND ASTROLOGY I. INTRODUCTION TO JYOTIÛH The sixth branch of the Vedåãga is Jyoti∑h, Vedic Astronomy and Astrology. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi has encapsulated the total knowledge of Jyoti∑h in one word, All-knowing. In his theme of dividing the whole Vedic Literature into streams of texts which are Âi∑hi predominant, Devatå predominant or Chhandas predominant, he has identified Jyoti∑h as a Âishi predominant branch of knowledge. He writes: Jyoti∑h is one of the structuring dynamics of Âik Veda. It highlights the ALLKNOWING quality involved in structuring Âik Veda. With reference to consciousness, Jyoti∑h comprises the specific sets of Laws of Nature that are engaged in promoting the quality of Âi∑hi within Saµhitå, providing a structure to the eternally silent, self-referral, self-sufficient, fully awake state of consciousness, which is intimately personal to everyone.1 H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Jyoti∑h with the deep seated basal ganglia, the twelve cranial nerves, the 28 monoaminergic cell groups of the brain stem, and the twelve areas of the cerebral cortex. All of these function together to create the allknowing quality in human physiology. It is necessary to understand the overall structure of Paråßharaís science of Jyoti∑h in order to appreciate the correlations that King Nader Råm has made with human physiology, and to see thereby the functioning of the all-knowing quality in the physiology, and in the practical affairs of life. King Nader Råm has not located Jyoti∑h in the physiology in terms of the underlying texts; the all-knowing quality is not associated with any one part of the brain or nervous system; rather the all-knowing quality emerges from an abstract structure of relationships between components that can be investigated outside, in the cosmos, and also, inside, in

CHAPTER 8: VEDIC ASTRONOMY AND ASTROLOGY

502

the physiology. The textbooks of Jyoti∑h present the calculations by which knowledge is extracted, based on the reality of cosmic counterparts governing the behavior and destiny of every individual. But as discussed below, it is the cosmic counterparts that are structured in the physiology, and not the calculations. The overall structure of the science of prediction presented by Paråßhara will be examined in order to understand the correlations made by H.M. King Nader Råm between the cosmic counterparts and the human physiology, in order to gain better insight into the character of the “all-knowing” quality in human awareness. Then the main textbooks of the science of Jyoti∑h will be reviewed, and the reading curriculum for the science of Jyoti∑h will be explained. Paråßhara encapsulates the entire science of Jyoti∑h in verses 4–6 of chapter 3:

gCzNto .;in gO≤Nt stt' ye tu te g[h" .c£Sy ng;XVy'x; a…êNy;idsm;◊y;" 4 td(√;dxiv.;g;Stu tuLy; meW;ids'Dk;" p[…sı; r;xy" s≤Nt g[h;STvk;≥ids'Dk;" 5 r;xIn;mudyo l¶' t√x;dev j‚Nmn;m( g[hyogivyog;>y;' fl' …cNTy' x(u.;x(u.m( 6 Those are called planets (or Grahas) that move through the Nakshatras (or asterisms) in the zodiac. The said zodiac is comprised of 27 asterisms commencing from Aswini. The same area is divided in 12 parts equal to 12 Rashis (or signs) commencing from Aries. The names of the planets commence from the Sun. The sign rising is known as Lagna (or the ascendant). Based on the ascendant and the planets joining and departing from each other, the native’s good and bad effects are deduced.2 II. THE NINE PLANETS The nine planets or Grahas commencing with the Sun, are correlated with the deepseated basal ganglia. The Nakshatras or asterisms through which the planets move are 27 equal divisions of the zodiac, the plane of the ecliptic through which the sun and


503

the planets move. These Nakshatras are correlated with the 27 cell groups in the brain stem. The 12 Rashis, or signs, which are a different subdivision of the zodiac, are correlated with the 12 cranial nerves. Finally, the sign rising at the horizon is known as Lagna, which then becomes the first house or Bhåva, in the Kundali or horoscope of the individual. The twelve Bhåvas starting with the Lagna, are correlated with the twelve divisions of the cerebral cortex. Based on the ascendent and the positions of the planets in the birth chart, and their motions “joining and departing from each other,” the native’s good and bad effects are deduced, i.e., one can know anything that one wants to know about the future or past of the individual. This is in brief how Paråßhara has laid out his astronomical science, and how H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the elements of that science with structures in the human physiology. 1. Sun. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sun, the first of the nine planets, with the thalamus. Please refer to Figure 39. Gray describes the thalamus: The thalamus is an ovoid mass, c.4 cm long, which borders the dorsal part of third ventricle. The narrow anterior pole lies close to the midline, and forms the posterior boundary of the interventricular foramen. Posteriorly, an expansion, the pulvinar, extends beyond the third ventricle to overhang the superior colliculus. The brachium of the superior colliculus (superior quadrigeminal brachium) separates the pulvinar above from the medial geniculate body below . . . . The boundary with the hypothalamus is marked by an indistinct hypothalamic sulcus, which curves from the upper end of the cerebral aqueduct to the interventricular foramen. The thalamus is continuous with the midbrain tegmentum, the subthalamus and the hypothalamus. Internally, the thalamus is divided into anterior, medial and lateral nuclear groups by a vertical Y-shaped sheet of white matter, the internal medullary lamina. In addition, intralaminar nuclei lie embedded within, and surrounded by, the internal medullary lamina. . . . In general, thalamic nuclei both project to and receive fibres from the cerebral cortex. The whole cerebral cortex, not only neocortex but also the phylogenetically older paleocortex of the piriform lobe and archicortex of the hippocompal formation, is reciprocally connected with the thalamus. The


504

thalamus is the major route by which subcortical neuronal activity influences the cerebral cortex, and the greatest input to most thalamic nuclei comes from the cerebral cortex.3 Paråßhara describes the sun as follows:

m/uip©ldOKsUyRíturß" x(u…ci√≥j ipˇp[kéitko /Im;n( pum;nLpkco i√j 23 The sun has honey-colored eyes, square body; he is of clean habits, is bilious [pitta], intelligent, manly and has limited hair on his head.4

The sun is the soul of all, (v. 12), malefic (v. 11), having royal status (v. 14), blood-red in color (v. 16), male (v. 19).


505

2. Moon. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the moon with the hypothalamus. Please refer to Figure 34, p. 409. The hypothalamus, its appearance and connections were described above in the chapter on Vedic grammar. Here Carpenter and Sutin describe more explicitly the role of the hypothalamus in behavior: This subdivision of the diencephalon is concerned with visceral, endocrine and metabolic activity, as well as with temperature regulation, sleep and emotion. The hypothalamus . . . plays a major role in the regulation of the release of hormones from the pituitary gland, maintenance of body temperature, and the organization of goal seeking behaviors such as feeding, drinking, mating and aggression. While the coordination of smooth and striated muscles and secretory epithelial cells required to carry out these behaviors is not exclusively controlled by the hypothalamus, this region of the brain is essential for behavioral adjustments to changes in the internal or external environment.5 Paråßhara describes the Moon as follows:

b¸v;tkf" p[;DíN{o vOˇtnui√≥j x(u.dOÑ/uv;Kyí cçlo mdn;tur" 24 24. O Brahmin, the Moon is very windy and phlegmatic [våta and kapha]. She has round body and is learned. She has auspicious looks and sweet speech, is fickleminded and very lustful.6 The Moon is the mind (v. 12), malefic when it is decreasing and benefic when increasing (v. 11), tawny in color (v. 16), female (v. 19), belonging to the Vaishya class (v. 21). 3. Mars. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Mars with the Amygdala. Please refer to Figure 31, p. 340. The Amygdala was described in detail above, with reference to the Maßhaka Íhrauta S™tra. In brief, the Amygdala may be described as follows: The nucleus amygdalae (amygdala) is an ovoid gray mass, situated at the lower end of the roof of the inferior cornu. It is merely a localized thickening of the gray cortex, continuous with that of the uncus; in front it is continuous with the putamen, behind with the stria terminalis and the tail of the caudate nucleus.7


506

Carpenter and Sutin add a comment on its function: This nuclear complex has primarily olfactory inputs and has reciprocal connections with the hypothalamus and prepyriform cortex. [It] is concerned with visceral, endocrine and behavioral functions.8 Paråßhara describes Mars as follows:

£Àro rˇ_É=,o .*míplod;rmUitRk" ipˇp[kéitk" £o/I kéxm?ytnui√≥j 25 O Brahmin, Mars is cruel, has bloodred eyes, is fickleminded, liberal hearted, bilious [pitta,][passionate,] and has thin waist and thin physique.9 Mars is one’s strength (v. 12), the army chief (v. 14), malefic (v. 11), not very tall and blood red (v. 16), male (v. 19), Tamasic (v. 22), and the fire element (v. 20). 4. Mercury. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Mercury with the Subthalamic Nucleus. Gray describes the Sub-thalamic Nucleus: The subthalamic nucleus is a biconvex, lens-shaped nucleus in the subthalamus of the diencephalon. It lies medial to the internal capsule, immediately rostral to the level at which the latter becomes continuous with the crus cerebri of the midbrain. Within its substance, small interneurons intermingle with large multipolar cells with dendrites, which extend for about one-tenth the diameter of the nucleus. It is encapsulated dorsally by axons, many of which are derived from the subthalamic fasciculus, and which carry a major GABAergic projection from the lateral segment of the globus pallidus as part of the indirect pathway. It also receives afferents from the cerebral cortex. The subthalamic nucleus is unique in the intrinsic circuitry of the basal ganglia in that its cells are glutamatergic. They project excitator axons to both the globus pallidus and substantia nigra pars reticulata. Within the pallidum, subthalamic efferent fibres end predominantly in the medial segment but many also end in the lateral segment. The subthalamic nucleus plays a central role in the normal function of the basal ganglia and in the pathophysiology of basal ganglia-related disorders.10 The subthalamic nucleus is considered to be derived from the dorsocaudal part of the lateral hypothalamic cell column. Richter describes the subthalamic nucleus as arising from the “subthalamic longitudinal zone,” along with both segments of the pallidum.


507

Paråßhara describes Mercury as follows:

vpu"≈eœ" ÆXl∑v;Kc Áith;Sy®…cbuR/" ipˇv;n( kfv;n( ivp[ m;®tp[kéitStq; 26 26. O Vipra, Mercury possesses an attractive physique and the ability to make pun or to speak words having double meaning, [and possesses a] sense of humour. He has a blend of all three humours of Bile, Phlegm and wind [Pitta, Kapha and Våta].11 Mercury is the giver of speech (v. 12), the prince-apparent (v. 11), malefic when he joins a malefic (v. 11), of the hue of green grass (v. 18), neuter (v. 19), Vaishya caste (v. 21), Rajasic (v.22), and the earth element (v. 20). 5. Jupiter. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Jupiter with the Globus Pallidus. Gray describes the Globus Pallidus as follows: The globus pallidus lies medial to the putamen and lateral to the internal capsule. It consists of two segments, lateral (external) and medial (internal), which are separated by an internal medullar lamina, and which have substantially different connections. Both segments receive large numbers of fibres from the striatum and subthalamic nucleus. The lateral segment projects reciprocally to the subthalamic nucleus as part of the ‘indirect pathway.’ The medial segment is considered to be a homologue of the parts reticulata of the substantia nigra, with which it shares similar cellular and connectional properties. Together, these segments constitute the main output of the basal ganglia to other levels of the neuraxis, principally to the thalamus and superior colliculus. The cell density of the globus pallidus is less than one-twentieth of that of the striatum. The morphology of the majority of cells is identical in the two segments. They are large multipolar GABAergic neurones that closely resemble those of the substantia nigra pars reticulata. The dendritic fields are discoid, with planes at right angles to incoming striatopallidal axons, each of which, therefore, potentially contacts many pallidal dendrites en passant. This arrangement, coupled with the diameters of the dendritic fields (>500µm), suggests that a precise topographical organization is unlikely within the pallidum.12 [Please refer to Figure 40.] Paråßhara describes Jupiter as follows:


508


509

bOhÌ;]o gu®íwv ip©lo mUıRje=,e kfp[kéitko /Im;n( svRx;S]ivx;rd" 27

27. Jupiter is large bodied, has honey colored eyes, and hair, is phlegmatic [Kapha], intelligent, and learned in all Shåstras (classics).13 Jupiter confers knowledge and happiness (v. 13), is a minister (v. 14), benefic (v. 11), male (v. 19), Sattvic (v. 22), tawny (v. 17), Brahmin caste (v. 21), and the ether element (v. 20). 6. Venus. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Venus with the Substantia Nigra. Please refer to Figure 41. Gray describes the Substantia Nigra as follows: The substantia nigra is a nuclear complex deep to the crus cerebri in each cerebral peduncle of the midbrain. It consists of a pars compacta and a pars reticulata. The pars compacta, together with the smaller pars lateralis, corresponds to the dopaminergic cell group A9. With the retrorubal nucleus (A8), it makes up most of the dopaminergic neurone population of the midbrain and is the source of the mesostriatal dopamine system that projects to the striatum. The pars compacta of each side is continuous with its opposite counterpart through the ventral tegmental dopamine group A10, which is sometime known as the paranigral nucleus. . . . The pars reticulata contains large multipolar cells, which are very similar to those of the pallidum. Together they constitute the output neurones of the basal ganglia system. Their disc-like dendritic trees, like those of the pallidum, are orientated at right angles to afferents from the striatum, probably making en-passant contacts. Like the striatopallidal axons, of which they may be collaterals, striatonigral axons utilize GABA and substance P or enkephalin. . . . formation, including the pedunculopontine nucleus. The pathway from the striatum to the superior colliculus, via the substantia nigra pars reticulata, is thought to function in the control of gaze.14 Paråßhara describes Venus as follows:

su%I k;Ntvpu" ≈eœ" sulocno .Ogo" sut" k;Vykt;R kf;…/Kyoåinl;Tm; v£mU/Rj" 28 28. O Bhrigusut (the son of Bhrigu)! Venus is joyful, charming in physique, has beautiful eyes, is a poet, is phlegmatic [kapha] and windy and has curly hair.15


510


511

Venus governs semen (potency) (v. 13), is a minister (v. 15), benefic (v. 11), female (v. 19), Rajasic (v. 22), variegated in color (v. 17), Brahmin caste (v. 21), and water element (v. 20). 7. Saturn. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Saturn with the Putamen. Please refer to Figure 42. Gray describes the Putamen: The corpus striatum consists of the caudate nucleus, putamen and globus pallidus. Because of their close proximity, the putamen and globus pallidus have historically been considered as an entity, termed the lentiform complex or nucleus. With increasing knowledge of their structure and function, however, it has become clear that the putamen is more correctly considered to be in unity with the caudate nucleus, with which it shares common chemocytoarchitecture and connections. The putamen and caudate nucleus are together referred to as the neostriatum or simply the striatum. The striatum is considered as the principal ‘input’ structure of the basal ganglia since it receives the majority of afferents from other parts of the neuraxis. Its principal efferent connections are to the globus pallidus and pars reticulata of the substantia nigra.16 The somatosensory and motor cortices project predominantly to the putamen. Their afferents establish a somatotopic pattern, in which the lower body is represented laterally and the upper body is represented medially. The motor cortex is unique in sending axons through the corpus callosum to the opposite putamen, where they end with the same spatial ordering. The occipital and temporal cortices project to the tail of the caudate nucleus and to the inferior putamen.17 Paråßhara describes Saturn as follows:

kéxdI`Rtnu" x*·r" ip©dO∑‰inl;Tmk" SqUldNtoåls" p'gu" %rromkco i√j 29 29. O Brahmin, Saturn has an emaciated and long physique, honey colored eyes, is windy in temperament, has big teeth, is indolent, lame and has coarse, rough hair.18 Saturn denotes grief (v. 13), is a servant (v. 15), malefic (v. 11), neuter (v. 19), Tamasic (v. 22), dark in complexion (v. 17), Íh™dra caste (v. 21), and air element (v. 20).


512


513

8–9. Råhu and Ketu. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated Råhu and Ketu, the ascending and descending nodes in the orbit of the Moon where the moon crosses the ecliptic, with the head and tail of the Caudate Nucleus. Please refer to Figures 40–42, pp. 508–512. Gray describes the Caudate Nucleus as follows: The caudate nucleus is a curved, tadpole-shaped mass. It has a large anterior head, which tapers to a body, and a down-curving tail. The head is covered with ependyma and lies in the floor and lateral wall of the anterior horn of the lateral ventricle, in front of the interventricular foramen. The tapering body is in the floor of the body of the ventricle, and the narrow tail follows the curve of the inferior horn, and so lies in the ventricular roof, in the temporal lobe. Medially, the greater part of the caudate nucleus abuts the thalamus, along a junction that is marked by a groove, the sulcus terminalis. The sulcus contains the stria terminalis, lying deep to the ependyma. . . . The sulcus terminalis is especially prominent anterosuperiorly (because of the large size of the head and body of the caudate nucleus relative to the tail), and here the stria terminalis is accompanied by the thalamostriate vein. The corpus callosum lies above the head and body of the caudate nucleus. The two are separated laterally by the fronto-occipital bundle, and medially by the subcallosal fasciculus, a bundle of axons that caps the nucleus. The caudate nucleus is largely separated from the lentiform complex by the anterior limb of the internal capsule. However, the inferior part of the head of the caudate becomes continuous with the most inferior part of the putamen immediately above the anterior perforated substance. . . . In the temporal lobe, the anterior part of the tail of the caudate nucleus becomes continuous with the posteroinferior part of the putamen. The vast bulk of the caudate nucleus and putamen are often referred to as the dorsal striatum.19 Paråßhara describes Råhu and Ketu as follows:

/Um[;k;ro nIltnuvRnSqoåip .y'kr" v;tp[kéitko /Im;n( Sv.;RnuStTsm" ≤x%I 30 30. Råhu has a smoke-like blue body, lives in forests and is horrible. He is windy [våta] in temperament and is intelligent. Like Råhu is Ketu.20


514

These are the nine planets described by Paråßhara, and their correlates assigned by H.M. King Nader Råm in the deeply seated basal ganglia within the human nervous system. These are the planets or Grahas that move through the fixed stars or constellations called Nak∑hatras, by whose “joining and departing from each other, the native’s good and bad effects are deduced.”21 The nine planets are the first and most basic components of Paråßharaís astronomical science. The presence of correlates in the physiology whose structure and function parallels the organization of the solar system, suggests that every human being has the entire solar system represented within his nervous system, within his consciousness: Every human being is essentially cosmic in nature. This hints at the possibility that the quality of all-knowing is a natural and intrinsic feature of the human brain, and that to know anything in the universe, past, present or future, is as Maharishi says, “intimately personal to everyone.” III. THE TWELVE RÃSHIS The background of the fixed stars, against which the planets are seen to be moving about in their courses, are organized first of all in twelve divisions, called Råshis. The Råshis, or signs, are correlated by H.M. King Nader Råm with the cranial nerves. 1. Aries (Me∑ha). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Aries with the Oculomotor nerve. Please refer to Figure 44 (p. 516), showing all the cranial nerves; the Oculomotor nerve is labeled as the third of the twelve cranial nerves. Please refer also to Figure 43. Gray describes the Oculomotor nerve: The oculomotor nerve supplies somatic motor fibers to all the ocular muscles, except the Obliquus superior and Rectus lateralis; it also supplies through its connections with the ciliary ganglion, sympathetic motor fibers to the Sphincter pupillae and the Ciliaris muscles. The fibers of the oculomotor nerve arise from a nucleus which lies in the gray substance of the floor of the cerebral aquaduct and extends in front of the


515


516


517

aqueduct for a short distance into the floor of the third ventricle. From this nucleus the fibers pass forward through the tegmentum, the red nucleus, and the medial part of the substantia nigra, forming a series of curves with a lateral convexity, and emerge from the oculomotor sulcus on the medial side of the cerebral peduncle. . . . On emerging from the brain. . . it passes between the superior and posterior cerebral arteries, and then pierces the dura matter in front of and lateral to the posterior clinoid process, passing between the free and attached borders of the tentorium cerebelli.22 Paråßhara calls Aries the head of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). Paråßhara classifies signs as movable, fixed, or dual. King Nader Råm has correlated the fixed character of signs with sensory cranial nerves, the movable character of signs with motor cranial nerves, and the dual nature of signs with cranial nerves having both sensory and motor components.23 In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Aries is a movable sign. Aries is male, and Pitta (Ch. 4, v.5–6). Paråßhara further describes Aries as follows:

rˇ_v,oR bOhÌ;]ítu„p;{;i]iv£mI 6 pUvRv;sI nOpD;it" xwlc;rI rjogu,I pOœodyI p;vk° c meWr;≤x" k⁄j;…/p" 7 6–7. The sign Aries has blood-red complexion, huge bulky body, is a quadruped sign and is strong during night. It resides in the east, is of royal caste and wanders in hills. It has the predominance of Rajoguâ, rises with its back and is fiery; its lord is Mars.24 2. Taurus (Vrishabha). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Taurus with the Olfactory nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Olfactory nerve is labeled as the first of the twelve cranial nerves. Please refer to also Figure 45. Gray describes the Olfactory nerves: The olfactory nerves or nerves of smell are distributed to the mucous membrane of the olfactory region of the nasal cavity; this region comprises the superior nasal concha, and the corresponding part of the nasal septum. The nerves originate from the central or deep processes of the olfactory cells of the nasal mucous membrane. They form a plexiform network in the mucous membrane, and are then collected into about twenty branches, which pierce the cribriform


518

plate of the ethmoid bone in two groups, a lateral and a medial group, and end in the glomeruli of the olfactory bulb.25 Paråßhara calls Taurus the face of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Taurus is a fixed sign. Taurus is female, and Våta. Paråßhara further describes Taurus as follows (Ch.4 v.8):

êet" x(u£;…/po dI`Rítu„p;CzvRrIblI y;Mye$( g[;Myo v…,G.U…mrj" pOœodyo vOW" 8 8. Its complexion is white, and is lorded by Venus. It is long and is a quadruped sign. It has strength in night and resides in the south. It represents villages and businessmen. An earthy sign, Taurus rises with its back.26

3. Gemini (Mithuna). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Gemini with the Vagus nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Vagus nerve is labeled as the tenth of the twelve cranial nerves. Figure 46 shows the


519


520

entire course of the Vagus nerve from head to target organs in the abdomen. Gray describes the Vagus nerve as follows: The vagus nerve is composed of both motor and sensory fibers, and has a more extensive course and distribution than any of the other cranial nerves, since it passes through the neck and thorax to the abdomen. The vagus is attached by eight or ten filaments to the medulla oblongata in the groove between the olive and the inferior peduncle, below the glossopharyngeal. The sensory fibers arise from the cells of the jugular ganglion and ganglion nodosum of the nerve, and, when traced into the medulla oblongata mostly end by arborizing around the cells of the inferior part of a nucleus which lies beneath the ala cinerea in the lower part of the rhomboid fossa. These are the sympathetic afferent fibers. . . . A few of the sensory fibers of the vagus, probably taste fibers, descend in the fasciculus solitarius and end around its cells. . . . The sympathetic efferent fibers, distributed probably as preganglionic fibers to the thoracic and abdominal viscera, i.e., as motor fibers to the bronchial tree, inhibitory fibers to the heart, motor fibers to the esophagus, stomach, small intestine and gall passages, and as secretory fibers to the stomach and pancreas, arise from the dorsal nucleus of the vagus. The filaments of the nerve unite, and form a flat cord, which passes beneath the flocculus to the jugular foramen, through which it leaves the cranium. The vagus nerve passes vertically down the neck within the carotid sheath, lying between the internal jugular vein and internal carotid artery as far as the upper border of the thyroid cartilage, and then between the same vein and the common carotid artery to the root of the neck. The further course of the nerve differs on the two sides of the body . . . .27 Paråßhara calls Gemini the arms of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Gemini is a dual sign. Gemini is male, and is a mix of Våta, Pitta and Kapha. Paråßhara further describes Gemini as follows (Ch. 4 v.9– 10):

xIWoRdyI nO…mqun' sgd' c svI,km( p[TyGv;yui√≥p;{;i]blI g[;mv[joåinlI 9 smg;]o h·r√,oR …mqun;:yo bu/;…/p"


521

9–10. The sign Gemini rises with its head, it is represented by a couple (male and female) holding a mace and a lute; it resides in the West and its element is air, it is biped, is strong in the night, resides in villages and is windy in temperament; it has an even body and its hue is grass green. Its Lord is Mercury.28

4. Cancer (Karka). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Cancer with the Hypoglossal nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Hypoglossal nerve is labeled as the twelfth of the twelve cranial nerves. Figure 47 shows the path of the Hypoglossal nerve. Gray describes the Hypoglossal nerve as follows:


522

The hypoglossal nerve is the motor nerve of the tongue. Its fibers arise from the cells of the hypoglossal nucleus, which is an upward prolongation of the base of the anterior column of gray substance of the medulla spinalis. This nucleus is about 2 cm. in length, and its upper part corresponds with the trigonum hypoglossi, or lower portion of the medial eminence of the rhomboid fossa. The lower part of the nucleus extends downward into the closed part of the medulla oblongata, and there lies in relation to the ventro-lateral aspect of the central canal. The fibers run forward through the medulla oblongata, and emerge in the antero-lateral sulcus between the pyramid and the olive. The rootlets of this nerve are collected into two bundles, which perforate the dura matter separately, opposite the hypoglossal canal in the occipital bone, and unite together after their passage through it . . . . The nerve descends almost vertically to a point corresponding with the angle of the mandible. It is at first deeply seated beneath the internal carotid artery and internal jugular vein, and intimately connected with the vagus nerve; it then pases forward between the vein and artery, and lower down in the neck becomes superficial below the Digastricus. It passes beneath the tendon of the Digastricus, the Stylohyoideus, and the Mylohyoideus, lying between the last-named muscle and the Hyoglossus, and communicates at tha anterior border of the Hyoglossus with the lingual nerve; it is then continued forward in the fibers of the Genioglossus as far as the tip of the tongue, distributing branches to its muscular substance.29 Paråßhara calls Cancer the heart of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Cancer is a movable sign. Cancer is female, and Kapha constitution. Paråßhara further describes Cancer as follows (Ch. 4 v.10–11):

p;$lo vnc;rI c b[;˜,o in≤x vIyRv;n( 10 b¸p;dcr" Sq*Lytnu" sÊvgu,I jlI pOœodyI kkúr;≤xmORg;'k;å…/pit" SmOt" 11 10–11. The sign Cancer is pale red in hue, resides in forests, Brahmin by caste and is strong in the night. It is many footed and has a bulky body; it is Sattwika in disposition, its element is water; it rises with its back and the Moon has been regarded as its Lord.30 5. Leo (Siãha). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Leo with the Optic nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Optic nerve is


523

labeled as the second of the twelve cranial nerves. Figure 48 shows the Optic nerve, the Optic chiasma and the Optic tract and their connections. Gray describes the Optic nerve: The optic nerve, or nerve of sight, consists mainly of fibers derived from the ganglionic cells of the retina. These axons terminate in arborizations around the cells in the lateral geniculate body, pulvinar, and superior colliculus which constitute the lower or primary visual centers. From the cells of the lateral geniculate body and the pulvinar, fibers pass to the cortical visual center, situated in the cuneus and in the neighborhood of the calcarine fissure. The optic nerve . . . fibers pass backward and medialward through the orbit and optic foramen to the optic commissure where they partially decussate. The mixed fibers from the two nerves are continued in the optic tracts, the primary visual centers of the brain.31


524

Paråßhara calls Leo the stomach of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Leo is a fixed sign. Leo is male, and Pitta constitution. Paråßhara further describes Leo as follows (Ch. 4 v.12):

…s'h" sUy;R…/p" sÊvI ctu„p;t( =i]yo vnI xIWoRdyI bOhÌ;]"p;<@ë" pUveR@± ¥uvIyRv;n( 12 12. The sign Leo is of Sattwika disposition and lorded by the Sun; it is four footed and Kshatriya (martial) by race and resides in forests; it rises with its back, has a bulky body and is pale in hue; it resides in the east and is strong in the day.32 6. Virgo (Kanya). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Virgo with the Facial nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Facial nerve is labeled as the seventh of the twelve cranial nerves. The branches of the Facial nerve are shown in Figure 49. Gray describes the Facial nerve: The facial nerve consists of a motor and a sensory part. . . . The two parts emerge at the lower border of the pons in the recess between the olive and the inferior peduncle, the motor part being the more medial, immediately to the lateral side of the sensory part is the acoustic nerve. The motor part supplies somatic motor fibers to the muscles of the face, scalp, and auricle, the Buccinator and Platysma, the Stapedius, the Stylohyoideus, and posterior belly of the Digastricus; it also contains some sympathetic motor fibers which constitute the vasodilator nerves of the submaxillary and sublingual glands, and are conveyed through the chorda tympani nerve. These are preganglionic fibers of the sympathetic system and terminate in the submaxillary ganglion and small ganglia in the hilus of the submaxillary gland. From these ganglia postganglionic fibers are conveyed to these glands. The sensory part contains the fibers of taste for the anterior two-thirds of the tongue and a few somatic sensory fibers from the middle ear region. . . . The motor root arises from a nucleus which lies deeply in the reticular formation of the lower part of the pons. . . . The sensory root arises from the genicular ganglion, which is situated on the geniculum of the facial nerve in the facial canal, behind the hiatus of the canal. . . From their superficial attachments to the brain, the two roots of the facial nerve pass lateralward and forward with the acoustic nerve to the internal acoustic meatus. . . .


525

At the bottom of the meatus, the facial nerve enters the facial canal, which it traverses to its termination . . . .33 Paråßhara calls Virgo the hip of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Virgo is a dual sign. Virgo is female, and Våta constitution. Paråßhara further describes Virgo as follows (Ch. 4 v.13–14):


526

p;vRtIy;q kNy;:y; r;≤xidRnbl;iNvt; xIWoRdy; c m?y;'g; i√p;¥;Mycr; c s; 13 s; sSydhn; vwXy; …c]v,;R p[.≤ÔnI k⁄m;rI tms; yuˇ_; b;l.;v; bu/;…/p; 14 13–14. The sign Virgo has been spoken of as Pårvat¥ya or hillresorter and is strong in the day. It rises with its head and has a medium sized body. It is biped and resides in the South. It has grains and fire in its hands. It is of Vaißhya Varâ (race) and is variegated. Its element is air; it is virgin and is Tamoguni; it is of child like nature and its lord is Mercury.34 7. Libra (Tula). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Libra with the Trochlear nerve. In Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves the Trochlear nerve is labeled as the fourth of the twelve cranial nerves. Figure 50 shows the Trochlear nerve


527

and other nerves of the orbit of the eye. Gray describes the Trochlear nerve: The trochlear nerve, the smallest of the cranial nerves, supplies the Obliquus superior oculi. It arises from a nucleus situated in the floor of the cerebral aqueduct, opposite the upper part of the inferior colliculus. From its origin it runs downward through the tegmentum, and then turns backward into the upper part of the anterior medullary velum. Here it decussates with its fellow of the opposite side and emerges from the surface of the velum at the side of the frenulum veli, immediately behind the inferior colliculus. The nerve is directed across the superior cerebellar peduncle, and then winds forward around the cerebral peduncle, immediately above the pons, pierces the dura mater in the free border of the tentorium cerebelli, just behind, and lateral to, the posterior clinoid process, and passes forward in the lateral wall of the cavernous sinus, between the oculomotor nerve and the opthalmic division of the trigeminal. It crosses the oculomotor nerve, and enteres the orbit through the superior orbital fissure. It now becomes the highest of all the nerves, and lies medial to the frontal nerve. In the orbit it passes medialward, above the origin of the Levator palpebrae superioris, and finally enters the orbital surface of the Oblique superior. 35 Paråßhara calls Libra the space below the navel of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Libra is a movable sign. Libra is male, and has a Våta, Pitta and Kapha mixed constitution. Paråßhara further describes Libra as follows (Ch. 4 v.15–16):

xIWoRdyI ¥uvIy;R!‰Stul" ké„,o rjogu,I p…ímo .Ucro `;tI xU{o m?ytnui√≥p;t( 15 x(u£;å…/po --15–16. The sign Libra rises with its head, is strong in day, has black complexion, is Rajoguni in nature, it resides in the West and wanders on the earth; it is violent, is of Íhudra varâ (race) and has medium-sized body and is biped. Its lord is Venus.36 8. Scorpio (V®ischik). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Scorpio with the Vestibular nerve. The Vestibular nerve is one of two nerves making up the Acoustic


528

nerve, which is labeled as the eighth of the twelve cranial nerves in Figure 44, p. 516. Gray describes the Vestibular nerve: The vestibular nerve or root, the nerve of equilibration, arises from bipolar cells in the vestibular ganglion, ganglion of Scarpa, which is situated in the upper part of the outer end of the internal auditory meatus. The peripheral fibers divide into three branches: the superior branch passes through the foramina in the area vestibularis superior and ends in the utricle and in the ampullae of the superior and lateral semicircular ducts; the fibers of the inferior branch traverse the foramina in the area vestibularis inferior and end in the saccule; the posterior branch runs through the foramen singulare and supplies the ampulla of the posterior semicircular duct.37 Paråßhara calls Scorpio the private parts of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Scorpio is a fixed sign. Scorpio is female, and Kapha constitution. Paråßhara further describes Scorpio as follows (Ch. 4 v.16–17):

aq SvLp;'go b¸p;d(b[;˜,o …blI s*MySqo idnvIy;R!‰" ipx'go jl.Uv" 16 romSv;!‰oåittI+,;g[o vO…íkí k⁄j;…/p" 16–17. The sign Scorpio has slender physique and is multi-footed (Centipede). It is Brahmin by Varâ (race) and resides in holes. Its direction is north and it is strong in day. Its hue is reddish brown and it resides in both water and land. It has hairy body, very sharp forepart (very sharp sting) and its ruler or Lord is Mars.38 9. Sagittarius (Dhanu). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Sagittarius with the Trigeminal nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Trigeminal nerve is labeled as the fifth of the twelve cranial nerves. Please refer also to Figure 16, p. 111, showing the three main branches of the Trigeminal nerve. Gray describes the Trigeminal nerve: The trigeminal nerve is the largest cranial nerve and is the great sensory nerve of the head and face, and the motor nerve of the muscles of mastication. It emerges from the side of the pons, near its upper border, by a small motor and a large sensory root—the former being situated in front of and medial to the latter.


529

The fibers of the motor root arise from two nuclei, a superior and an inferior. The superior nucleus consists of a strand of cells occupying the whole length of the lateral portion of the gray substance of the cerebral aqueduct. The inferior or chief nucleus is situated in the upper part of the pons, close to its dorsal surface, and along the line of the lateral margin of the rhomboid fossa. The fibers from the superior nucleus constitute the mesencephalic root: they descend through the midbrain, and, entering the pons, join with the fibers from the lower nucleus, and the motor root, thus formed, passes forward through the pons to its point of emergence. . . . The fibers of the sensory root arise from the cells of the semilunar ganglion which lies in a cavity of the dura mater near the apex of the petrous part of the temporal bone. They pass backward below the superior petrosal sinus and tentorium cerebelli, and, entering the pons, divide into upper and lower roots. . . .39 Paråßhara calls Sagittarius the thighs of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Sagittarius is a dual sign. Sagittarius is male, and Pitta constitution. Paråßhara further describes Sagittarius as follows (Ch. 4 v.17–19):

pOœodyI Tvq /nuguR®Sv;mI c s;æÊvk" 17 ip'glo in≤xvIy;R!‰" p;vk" =i]yo i√p;d( a;d;vNte ctu„p;d" smg;]o /nu/Rr" 18 pUvRSqo vsu/;c;rI tejSvI b[˜,; két" 17–19. The sign Sagittarius rises with its [back], and its Lord is Jupiter. It is Sattwika. Its hue is pale and it is strong in night; its element is fire and its Varâ (race) is K∑hatriya (royal or martial). It is biped to 15° and afterwards quadruped. It has even body, and bears a bow and arrow. It resides in the east and wanders on the earth. Brahma (the creator God) has made it splenderous.40 10. Capricorn (Makara). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Capricorn with the Abducens nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Abducens nerve is labeled as the sixth of the twelve cranial nerves. Please refer also to Figure 11, p. 97, and Figure 51 for the location of the Abducens nerve in relation to the eye. Gray describes the Abducens nerve: The Abducent nerve supplies the Rectus lateralis oculi. Its fibers arise from a


530

small nucleus situated in the upper part of the rhomboid fossa, close to the middle line and beneath the colliculus facialis. They pass downward and forward through the pons, and emerge in the furrow between the lower border of the pons and the upper end of the pyramid of the medulla oblongata. From the nucleus of the sixth nerve, fibers are said to pass through the medial longitudinal fasciculus to the oculomotor nerve of the opposite side, along which they are carried to the Rectus medialis. The Rectus lateralis of one eye and the Rectus medialis of the other may therefore be said to receive their nerves from the same nucleus. The nerve pierces the dura mater on the dorsum sellae of the sphenoid, runs through a notch in the bone below the posterior clinoid process, and passes forward through the cavernous sinus, on the lateral side of the internal carotid artery. It enters the orbit through the superior orbital fissure, above the ophthalmic vein, from which it is separated by a lamina of dura mater. It then passes between the two heads of the Rectus lateralis, and enters the ocular surface of that muscle.41


531

Paråßhara calls Capricorn the knees of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Capricorn is movable. Capricorn is female and Våta constitution. Paråßhara further describes Capricorn as follows (Ch. 4 v.19–20):

mNd;…/pStmI .*mI y;Mye$( c in≤x vIyRv;n( 19 pOœodyI bOhÌ;]" kbuRro vn.Ucr" a;d* ctu„pdoåNte tu ivpdo jlgo mt" 20 19–20. This sign is lorded by Saturn, Tamoguˆ¥ and its element is earth. It resides in the south and is strong in night. It rises with its back, has an unwieldy or huge body, is variegated and wanders on land and in forests. It is quadruped in the first half and is footless in the second half and glides in water.42 11. Aquarius (Kumbha). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Aquarius with the Cochlear nerve. The Cochlear nerve is one of two nerves making up the Acoustic nerve, which is labeled as the eighth of the twelve cranial nerves in Figure 44, p. 516. Gray describes the Cochlear Nerve: The cochlear nerve or root, the nerve of hearing, arises from bipolar cells in the spiral ganglion of the cochlea, situated near the inner edge of the osseous spiral lamina. The peripheral fibers pass to the organ of Corti. The central ones pass down the modiolus and then through the foramina of the tractus spiralis foraminosus or through the foramen centrale into the lateral or outer end of the internal auditory meatus. The nerves passes along the internal auditory meatus with the vestibular nerve and across the subarachnoid space, just above the flocculus, almost directly medialward toward the inferior peduncle to terminate in the cochlear nucleus. The cochlear nerve is placed lateral to the vestibular root. Its fibers end in two nuclei: one, the accessory nucleus, lies immediately in front of the inferior peduncle; the other, the tuberculum acusticum, somewhat lateral to it.43 Paråßhara calls Aquarius the ankles of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Aquarius is fixed. Aquarius is male, and a mixture of all three, Våta, Pitta, and Kapha. Paråßhara further describes Aquarius as follows (Ch. 4 v.21–22):


532

k⁄M." k⁄M.I nro b.[uv,oR m?ytnui√≥p;t( ¥uvIyoR jlm?ySqo v;txIWoRdyI tm" 21 xU{" p…ímdexSy Sv;mI dwv;k·r" SmOt" 21–22. The sign Aquarius is represented by a male holding a pot. It has brown complexion and medium sized body and is biped. It is strong in day, resides in deep water and its element is air. It rises with its head and is Tamoguni. Its Varâ (race or Caste) is Íhudra (low born). It is the Lord of the western direction. It is lorded or ruled by Saturn.44 12. Pisces (M¥na). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the sign Pisces with the Glossopharyngeal nerve. Please refer to Figure 44, p. 516, showing all the cranial nerves; the Glossopharyngeal nerve is labeled as the ninth of the twelve cranial nerves. Please refer also to Figure 46, p. 519. Gray describes the Glossopharyngeal nerve: The Glossopharyngeal nerve contains both motor and sensory fibers, and is distributed, as its name implies, to the tongue and pharynx. It is the nerve of ordinary sensation to the mucous membrane of the pharynx, fauces, and palatine tonsil, and the nerve of taste to the posterior part of the tongue. It is attached by three or four filaments to the upper part of the medulla oblongata, in the groove between the olive and the inferior peduncle. The sensory fibers arise from the cells of the superior and petrous ganglia, which are situated on the trunk of the nerve. . . . The somatic motor fibers spring from the cells of the nucleus ambiguus, which lies some distance from the surface of the rhomboid fossa in the lateral part of the medulla and is continuous below with the anterior gray column of the medulla spinalis. From this nucleus the fibers are first directed backward, and then they bend forward and lateralward to join the fibers of the sensory root.45 Paråßhara calls Pisces the feet of the Kålapurusha (Ch. 4, v.4). In the classification of movable, fixed, and dual, Pisces is dual. Pisces is female, and Kapha. Paråßhara further describes Pisces as follows (Ch. 4 v.21–22):

mIn* puCz;Sys'l¶* mInr;≤xidRv;blI 22


533

jlI sÊvgu,;!‰í SvSqo jlcro i√j" apdo m?ydehI c s*MySqo Áu.yodyI 23 sur;c;y;R…/píeit r;xIn;' gidt; gu,;" i]'x∫;g;Tmk;n;' c SqUlsU+mfl;y c 24 22–24. The sign Pisces has the appearance of a pair of fish, one tailed with the head of the other and is strong in day. Its element is water and it is Satwaguni and healthy. It glides in water and its Varâ (race) is Brahmin. It is footless, has medium sized body, resides in the northern direction and rises with both head and back. Its Lord is B®ihaspati or Jupiter, the teacher of Gods. It is in this way that the 12 signs each having 30° have been described to assess gross and specific effects.46 These are the twelve signs that divide the zodiac, and through which the planets move, “joining and departing from each other.” Lordships. An important aspect of the signs is their lordship or regency. Each sign is ruled by a particular planet, called the Lord, ruler, or owner of that sign. The Sun and the Moon are each the ruler of only one sign, Leo for the Sun, and Cancer for the Moon. (Please refer to Figure 52) The other planets each are Lords of two signs. To


534

summarize the rulership which has been laid down by Paråßhara, there is a very orderly arrangement of the Regency of the signs, starting with the Sun sign, Leo. The Sun sign and the Moon sign are adjacent to each other, and together make one pair. Flanking these two signs, on either side, are the two signs governed by the planet closest to the Sun, Mercury. The signs governed by Mercury are Gemini and Virgo. Flanking these two signs, one on either side, are the two signs governed by the next closest planet to the Sun, Venus. The signs governed by Venus are Taurus and Libra. Flanking these two signs, one on either side, are the two signs governed by the next closest planet to the Sun, Mars. The signs governed by Mars are Scorpio and Aries. Flanking these two signs are the signs governed by the planet next after Mars, which is Jupiter. The signs governed by Jupiter are Pisces and Sagittarius. Finally, the remaining two signs which are farthest away from the Sun-sign and Moon-sign, are the two which are governed by Saturn, the planet farthest from the Sun. The sequence of planetary lords starting from Leo and the Sun, and Cancer and the Moon is easy to remember, because it parallels the sequence of planets with increasing distance from the sun in the modern heliocentric view of the solar system. IV. THE ASTROLOGICAL HOUSES The knowledge of the twelve Råshis dividing up the zodiac makes possible the determination of what is called the rising sign: The sign rising is known as Lagna (or the ascendant). This is the fundamental step for establishing the horoscope in Paråßharaís Jyoti∑h: At the moment of birth, there will be one particular sign of the zodiac rising on the Eastern horizon, and this forms the basis for the construction of the horoscope. The sign that is rising becomes the first house or Bhåva in the horoscope, and from there, in sequence, the other eleven signs become the remaining eleven houses in the horoscope. These twelve houses comprise all the different areas of life of the individual, and form the basis for the science of prediction by which anything past, present or future can be


535

known about the individual. In some systems of calculation the Bhåvas may be more independent from the signs; the first and seventh may be placed with their midpoints (cusps) exactly on the horizon, and the fourth and tenth placed with their midpoints at the nadir and the zenith. These differences do not effect the rising sign or Lagna, but may influence the placement of planets in houses. When, however, the Bhåvas follow the signs exactly, degree by degree, it is called “equal houses and equal signs,” and this is the most popular method of calculation of the horoscope. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the twelve Bhåvas with the twelve areas of the cerebral cortex. Please refer to Figure 53. The 12 Bhåvas and corresponding cortical areas will be examined in the following. 1. First House (Bhåva 1: Tanu). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the right and left occipito-temporal regions of the cortex with the first house. The functions associated with these cortical areas are “facial recognition, memory, self-image, personality, language.”47 Paråßhara describes the first Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.2):

deh' Âp' c D;n' c v,| cwv bl;blm( su%' du"%' Sv.;vç l¶.;v;…•rI=yet( 2 2. INDICATIONS OF THE FIRST HOUSE: Physique, appearance, intellect (or the organ of intelligence, i.e. brain), complexion of the body, vigour, weakness, happiness, grief and innate nature are all to be deduced through the ascending sign.48 (King Nader Råm adds “Self,” and “birth place” as indications of the first house.49) 2. Second House (Bhåva 2: Dhana). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the right occipital area of the cerebral cortex with the second house. The functions associated with the right occipital area are: visual identification of face and facial expression, appreciation of visually


536


537

precious objects (precious stones and metals), association with wealth, which brings material goods pleasing to the sense of sight.50 Paråßhara describes the second Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.3):

/n/;Ny' k⁄$üMb;'í mOTyuj;lm…m]km( /;turà;idk˘ sv| /nSq;n;…•rI=yet( 3 3. SECOND HOUSE: Wealth, grains (food etc.), family, death, enemies, metals, precious stones, etc. are to be understood through the 2nd house.51 (King Nader Råm adds “speech,” “expression,” and “learning to speak.”) 3. Third House (Bhåva 3: Sahaja). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the right parietal area of the cerebral cortex with the third house. The functions associated with the right parietal area are: perception of space (could be connected with travel, which is a mutation in space), the sense of touch (connected with sensuality), polymodal sensory integration, somatic sensations and perception of body in space and its relation to the environment (this could be connected with courage and valour).52 Paråßhara describes the third Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.4):

iv£m' .OTy.[;];id copdexp[y;,km( ip]ovwR mr,' ivDo du…íKy;∞ inrI=yet( 4 4. THIRD HOUSE: From the 3rd house, know of the following: valour, servants (attendants etc.), brothers, sisters, etc., initiatory instructions (Upadeßha), journey, and parent’s death.53 (King Nader Råm adds “vitality” as indications of the third house.) 4. Fourth House (Bhåva 4: Bandhu). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the right limbic area of the cerebral cortex with the fourth house. The functions associated with the right limbic area are: emotional and instinctive (confidence, belief, homeland, happiness), contains the hypothalamus (associated with mother), pleasure.54 Paråßhara describes the fourth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.5):


538

v;hn;Nyq bN/U'í m;tOs*:y;idk;Nyip in…/ =e]' gOh' c;ip ctuq;Rt( p·r…cNtyet( 5 5. FOURTH HOUSE: Conveyances, relatives, mother, happiness, treasure, lands and houses are to be consulted through the 4th house.55 (King Nader Råm adds “maternal happiness,” “confidence,” “belief,” “comforts,” and “homeland” as indications of the fourth house.) 5. Fifth House (Bhåva 5: Putra). His Majesty King Nader RAm has correlated the right frontal area of the cerebral cortex with the fifth house. The functions associated with the right frontal area are: action-oriented or action-dependent functions and inclinations of the mind associated with knowledge, intelligence, learning, inclinations of the mind, success in the relative, field of education, romance, liaisons, children.56 Paråßhara describes the fifth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.6):

yN]mN]* tq; iv¥;' buıeíwv p[bN/km( pu]r;Jy;p.[;'x;dIn( pXyet( pu];ly;d( bu/" 6 6. FIFTH HOUSE: The learned should deduce from the 5th house amulets, sacred spells, learning, knowledge, sons, royalty (or authority), fall of position etc.57 (King Nader Råm uses a different turn of phrase for learning and knowledge, “intelligence” and “inclinations of the mind,” and includes also “success in the relative,” and “romance and liaisons,” as indications of the fifth house.) 6. Sixth House (Bhåva 6: Ari). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the right prefrontal area of the cerebral cortex with the sixth house. The functions associated with the right prefontal cortex are: mood regulation, motivation, mental disease, conflict, opposition, worries, anxieties.58 Paråßhara describes the sixth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.7)


539

m;tul;Ntkx'k;n;' x]U'íwv v[,;idk;n( spàIm;tr' c;ip Wœ.;v;…•rI=yet( 7 7. SIXTH HOUSE: Maternal uncle, doubts about death, enemies, ulcers, step mother etc. are to be estimated from the 6th house.59 (King Nader Råm expands on the idea of “enemies” with “competitors,” “opponents,” and “adversity,” and adds also “intelligent speech,” “consultancy,” “mental disease,” “obstacles,” “worries,” “anxieties,” and “vices.”) 7. Seventh House (Bhåva 7: Yuvati). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the right and left temporal areas of the cerebral cortex with the seventh house. The functions associated with the right and left temporal areas are: memory, impressions, sensorial functions, desires, pleasure.60 Paråßhara describes the seventh Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.8)

j;y;m?vp[y;,' c v;…,Jy' n∑vI=,m( mr,' c SvdehSy j;y;.;v;…•rI=yet( 8 8. SEVENTH HOUSE: Wife, travel, trade, loss of sight, death etc. be known from the 7th house.61 (King Nader Råm adds “expansion of life and power,” “desires,” and “partnership.”) 8. Eighth House (Bhåva 8: Randhra). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the left prefrontal area of the cerebral cortex with the eighth house. The functions associated with the left prefrontal cortex are: anticipation of the future, mood regulation, occult or mystical interests, prognostication, research, aggressivity.62 Paråßhara describes the eighth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.9)

a;yu r,' ·rpu' c;ip dug| mOt/n' tq;


540

gTynuk;idk˘ sv| pXye{N/[;i√c=," 9 9. EIGHTH HOUSE: The eighth house indicates longevity, battle, enemies, forts, wealth of the dead, and things that have happened and are to happen (in the past and future births).63 (King Nader Råm expands on the meaning of “battle” with the word “violence,” and adds “vulnerability,” “transformations,” “research,” and “mystical topics,” as indications of the eighth house.) 9. Ninth House (Bhåva 9: Dharma). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the left frontal area of the cerebral cortex with the ninth house. The functions associated with the left frontal cortex are: action-oriented or action-dependent functions and inclinations of the mind associated with destiny, fortune, religion, righteous conduct, spirituality, philosophy, higher education, gain.64 Paråßhara describes the ninth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.10)

.;Gy' Xy;l' c /m| c .[;tOpà‰;idk;'Stq; tIqRy;];idk˘ sv| /mRSq;n;…•rI=yet( 10 10. NINTH HOUSE: Fortunes, wife’s brother, religion, brother’s wife, visits to shrines etc. be known from the 9th house.65 (King Nader Råm expands on the word Dharma, “religion,” with “righteous conduct,” “spirituality,” and “philosophy,” and adds also “higher education,” “gain without pain,” and “father’s physical aspect” as indications of the ninth house.) 10. Tenth House (Bhåva 10: Karma). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the left limbic area of the cerebral cortex with the tenth house. The functions associated with the left limbic area of the cortex are, “Elaboration of personality, vocation, contains the thalamus (associated with king and father).”66 Paråßhara describes the tenth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.11):


541

r;Jy' c;k;x' vO·ˇ' c m;n' cwv iptuStq; p[v;sSy A,Sy;ip VyomSq;n;…•rI=,m( 11

11. TENTH HOUSE: Royalty (authority), place, profession (livelihood), honour, father, living in foreign lands and debts are to be understood from the 10th house.67 (King Nader Råm adds “activity,” “occupation,” “status,” “position,” “respect,” “vocation,” “name and fame,” “father’s social status,” “public life,” and “government” as indications of the tenth house.) 11. Eleventh House (Bhåva 11: Låbha). H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the left parietal region of the cerebral cortex with the eleventh house. The functions associated with the left parietal area of the cortex are: income, prosperity, hopes, aspirations and their fulfillment, sensory integration, physical comfort, sensory fulfillment.68 Paråßhara describes the eleventh Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.12)

n;n;vStu.vSy;ip pu]j;y;idkSy c a;y' vO≤ı' pxUn;' c .vSq;n;…•rI=,m( 12 12. ELEVENTH HOUSE: All articles, son’s wife, income, prosperity, quadrupeds etc. are to be understood from the 11th house.69 (King Nader Råm adds “any gain,” “fulfillment of hopes and aspirations,” and “greed” as indications of the eleventh house.) 12. Twelfth House (Bhåva 12: Vyaya). His Majesty King Nader Råm has correlated the left occipital area of the cerebral cortex with the twelfth house. The functions associated with the left occipital area of the cortex are “Visual discrimination, visual attraction and temptation.”70 Paråßhara describes the twelfth Bhåva as follows (chapter 11, v.13)

Vyy' c vw·rvOˇ;Nt·r"fmNTy;idk˘ tq;


542

Vyy;∞wW ih D;tVy…mit svR] /Imt; 13 13. TWELFTH HOUSE: From the 12th house, one can know about expenses, history of enemies, one’s own death etc.71 (King Nader Råm adds “losses,” “enlightenment,” “foreign lands,” “investment,” “fall,” “sin,” “journeys abroad,” and “any remote place or confined situation” as indications of the twelfth house.) These are the twelve houses or Bhåvas that are used to determine the good and bad fortunes of the individual through the examination of the birth chart. In the birthchart or horoscope, the different signs are automatically assigned to their appropriate Bhåvas, based on the Lagna or ascendent at the time of birth; the planets are placed in the different houses according to the calculated positions of the planets in the sky at that time.

V. INTERPRETING THE HOROSCOPE Based on the horoscope that is created for the individual (called the “native,” in Vedic astrology), the characteristics of the native are determined on the basis of the rulership of the different signs. For any particular house, the planet that is the Lord of the sign occupying that house is the Lord of that house. Now the planet that is the Lord of the First House, for example, will be in one of the twelve houses. The location of the planet which is the Lord of the house will determine the features the native will experience pertaining to that house. Thus for each house, there are twelve possible locations of the Lord, and the predictions will vary accordingly. There are twelve times twelve or 144 different combinations of Lords and houses, which are the possibilities for any particular chart, and all these possibilities are specified by Paråßhara. This forms the basis for the


assessment of the native. Here for example are the possibilities spelled out by Paråßhara for the Lord of the fourth house:

su%exe l¶ge j;to iv¥;gu,iv.UiWt" .Uimv;hns'yuˇ_o m;tu" su%smiNvt" 37 su%exe /nge j;to .ogI svR/n;iNvt" k⁄$üMbsihto m;nI s;hsI k⁄hk;iNvt" 38 su%exe shje j;to iv£mI .OTys'yut" ¨d;roå®g( gu,I d;t; Sv.uj;…jRtivˇv;n( 39 su%exe su%.;vSqe mN]I svR/n;iNvt" ctur" xIlv;n( m;nI D;nv;n( S]Iip[y" su%I 40 su%exe pu].;vSqe su%I svRjnip[y" iv„,u.ˇ_o gu,I m;nI Sv.uj;…jRtivˇv;n( 41 su%exe ·rpu.;vSqe m;tu" su%ivv…jRt" £o/I coroå….c;rI c SveCz;c;rí dumRn;" 42 su%exe s¢me j;to b¸iv¥;smiNvt" ip];…jRt/nTy;gI s.;y;' mUkvd( .vet( 43 su%exe rN/[.;vSqe gOh;idsu%v…jRt" ip]o" su%' .vedLp' j;t" KlIbsmo .vet( 44 su%exe .;Gy.;vSqe j;t" svRjnip[y" dev.ˇ_o gu,I m;nI .vet( svRsu%;iNvt" 45 su%exe kmR.;vSqe r;jm;Nyo nro .vet(

543


544

rs;ynI mh;˙∑o su%.ogI …jte≤N{y" 46 su%exe l;.ge j;to gu¢rog.y;iNvt" ¨d;ro gu,v;n( d;t; propkr,e rt" 47 su%exe Vyy.;vSqe gOh;idsu%v…jRt" j;to duVyRsnI mU!" sd;ålSysmiNvt" 48 37. When the 4th Lord is situated in the Ascendant, the native is blessed with learning, virtues, ornaments, lands, conveyances and maternal happiness. 38. Should the 4th Lord occupy the 2nd House (the House of Wealth) the native will enjoy pleasures, be blessed with all kinds of wealth, family life and honour and be adventurous. He will be cunning and deceptive in disposition. 39. If the 4th Lord be placed in the 3rd House, the native will be valorous, will have servants, be liberal, virtuous and charitable and will have self-earned wealth and be free from diseases. 40. In case the 4th Lord occupies the 4th House, the native will rise to the ministership, will possess all kinds of wealth, he will be skillful, virtuous, honourable, learned, happy and be well disposed to his wife. 41. If the 4th Lord is situated in the 5th House, the native will be happy, be favourite of all, devotee of Lord Vishnu, virtuous, honourable and will possess self-earned wealth. 42. In the event of the 4th Lord falling in the 6th House (the House of Enemies) the native will be devoid of maternal happiness. He will be given to wrath, be a thief and a man of questionable character, self-willed and vicious. 43. If the 4th Lord has gone in the 7th House the native will be highly learned in various branches of knowledge, will be apt to leave his paternal property, and will be akin to the dumb in an assembly. 44. When the 4th Lord happens to be placed in the 8th House, the native will be devoid of domestic and other comforts, will not get much paternal happiness and be equal to a neuter. 45. If the 4th Lord is situated in the 9th House, the native will be loved by one and all, be a devotee of God, Virtuous, honourable and blessed with every kind of happiness. 46. Should the 4th Lord occupy the 10th House, the native will enjoy royal honours, be an alchemist, be extremely pleased, will have pleasures and will be conqueror of his five senses. 47. In case the 4th Lord has gone in the 11th House, the native will be obsessed with fear of secret disease, be liberal, virtuous, charitable and helpful to others. 48. If the 4th Lord is situated in the 12th House, the native will be devoid of domestic and other comforts, will have vices and be foolish and indolent.72


545

In addition to the placement of the House Lords, planetary aspects are an important determination, as are special combinations, called Yogas. All of these must be taken into account in the evaluation of the horoscope. VI. THE NAKÛHATRAS AND THE DÃÍHA SYSTEM There is one more consideration that has not been explored, that is fundamental to an understanding of the science of Jyoti∑h, and this is the Viµshottari Dåßha system, which lays out with precision the various time periods in an individual’s life when the predicted karma of various kinds will actually come to fruition. In the introductory quote examined, in chapter 3, v. 4–6, of Paråßhara the planets were described as moving through the Nak∑hatras, or asterisms, a division of the whole zodiac into 27 parts. The 27 Nak∑hatras, beginning with Aßhwin¥ each subtend 13 degrees and 20 minutes of arc. These Nak∑hatras provide the basis for various Dåßha systems, in which the different planets hold sway for specific periods of time in a cycle, and the fruits associated with those specific planetary influences in the birth horoscope are enjoyed or suffered by the native. H.M. King Nader Råm has correlated the Nak∑hatras with the mono-aminergic cell groups that reside primarily in the brain stem. There are three distinct types of monoaminergic cell groups, the Epinephrine-norepinephrine groups, the serotonin groups, and the dopamine groups.73 King Nader Råm has correlated these three classes of monoaminergic cell groups with three traditional divisions of the Nak∑hatras: Those having a predominantly Deva nature, those having a predominantly human nature, and those having a predominantly Asura or demonic nature. The Nak∑hatras having a Deva nature are Aßhvin¥, M®igaßhirå, Punarvasu,


546

Pußhya, Hasta, Svåti, Anurådhå, Íhravaâ, and Revat¥. These are correlated with the monoaminergic cell groups A1 to A7, plus the Locus Coerulus and the Lateral Tegmental Nucleus. These cell groups are Noradrenergic (norephrinergic). Figures 54, p. 549, shows the location of some of these cell groups in the brain stem. Table 13, p. 547, describes the cell groups in more detail. Wikipedia describes the functions of Norepinephrine: [Norepinephrine] is released from the adrenal glands as a hormone into the blood, but it is also a neurotransmitter in the nervous system where it is released from noradrenergic neurons during synaptic transmission. It is one of the ‘stress hormones’ and affects parts of the human brain where attention and impulsivity are controlled. Along with epinephrine this compound effects the fight-or-flight response, activating the sympathetic nervous system to directly increase heart rate, release energy from fat, and increase muscle readiness. The host of physiological changes activated by a stressful event are unleashed in part by activation of a nucleus in the brain stem called the locus ceruleus. This nucleus is the origin of most norepinephrine pathways in the brain. Neurons using norepinephrine as their neurotransmitter project bilaterally from the locus ceruleus along distinct pathways to the cerebral cortex, limbic system, and the spinal cord, among other projections.74 The Nak∑hatras having a Manushya or “human” nature are Bharaˆ¥, Rohiˆ¥, Ãrdrå, P™rvaphålgun¥, Uttaraphålgun¥, P™rvå∑hå∂hå, Uttarå∑hå∂hå, P™rvabhådrapada, and Uttarabhådrapada. These are correlated with the monoaminergic cell groups B1 to B9 found in the Raphe nuclei. These cell groups are serotonergic. Figure 55, p. 550, shows the location of these cell groups in the brain stem. Table 14, p. 548, describes the cell groups in more detail. A. Byrd describes the function of serotonin in the brain: Serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine, 5-HT) is a neurotransmitter in the brain that has an enormous influence over many brain functions. . . . The functions of serotonin are numerous and appear to involve control of appetite, sleep, memory and learning, temperature regulation, mood, behavior, cardiovascular function, muscle contraction, endocrine regulation, and depression (1). The activity of serotonin arises in the brainstem from clusters of neurons known as the raphe nucleus. From the brain, serotonin neurons extend to virtually all parts of the central nervous system making the branching of the serotonin network the most


547

Table 13: The Noradrenergic Cell Groups in the Brain Stem Correlated with the Deva Class of Nak∑hatras, Aßvin¥, M®igaßhirå, Punarvasu, Pußhya, Hasta, Svåti, Anurådhå, Íhravaâ, and Revat¥ Description1 A1 is situated in the lower part of the medulla oblongata. The cells of group A1 surround the nucleus of the lateral funiculus and extend dorsomedially into the lateral part of the reticular formation. A2 A2 is situated in the lower part of the medulla oblongata. The cells of group A2 lie dorsal and lateral of the hypoglossal nucleus, close to the ventricular surface. A3 This group has not been observed in primates. A4 Group A4 consists of a band of subependymal neurons which extends along the superior cerebral peduncle. This group merges rostrally with the caudal portion of A6. A5 Group A5 consists of rather loosely arranged cells that surround the facial nucleus and the superior olivary complex. A6 Group A6 is a densely packed accumulation of cells situated within the locus coeruleus. The latter is a macroscopically visible blue-black streak of tissue situated in the floor of the fourth ventricle at rostral pontine levels. A7 The cells of group A7 are situated in the rostral pontine part of the lateral reticular formation. Strands of cells connect this cell group with the groups A4 and A6. Some authors consider the groups A4, A6 and A7 together one complex. Locus Coerulus Containing almost half of the total number of noradrenaline synthesizing neurons , the locus cueruleus is quantitatively by far the most important noradrenergic centre of the brain. Its efferents constitute a major ascending pathway designated the dorsal noradrenergic bundle. Other efferents are distributed to the cerebellum and still others descend to the lower medulla oblongata and to the spinal cord. [Please refer above, A6] Lateral Tegmental Nucleus The lateral tegmental nucleus receives projections from substantia nigra, nucleus tractus solitarius and the interpeduncular nucleus. It sends its efferents to many brain regions: hypothalamus and thalamus, hippocampus, septum, subfornical organs and cerebral cortex, many of which are implicated in the control and expression of emotions. It also projects to the dorsal parabrachial nucleus, an area that is involved in the control of cardiovascular and respiratory functions.2

Cell Group A1

1

Nieuwenhuys, R., Voogd, J., van Huijzen, Chr., The Human Central Nervous System: A Synopsis and Atlas, (New York: Springer Verlag, 1981), pp. 222 - 224. 2 Endogenous CCK4 and anxiety/panic, Queendom.com


548

Table 14: The Seratonergic Cell Groups in the Brain Stem Correlated with the Manußhya Class of Nak∑hatras, Bharaˆ¥, Rohiˆ¥, Ãrdrå, P™rvaphålgun¥, Uttaraphålgun¥, P™rvå∑hå∂hå, Uttarå∑hå∂hå, P™rvabhådrapada, and Uttarabhådrapada Cell Group B1

B2 B3

B4 B5 B6

B7

B8

B9

3

Description3 Cell group B1 is situated in the ventral part of the medulla oblongata and borders ventrally on the pyramidal tracts. It is limited mainly to the raphes pallidus, although some of its cells extend laterally in the ventral part of the reticular formation. The rostral part of group B1 is continuous with the caudal part of group B3. Cell group B2 is situated at the same level as B1, but occupies a more dorsal position. Its cells form two narrow paramedian sheets that coincide with the nucleus raphes obscurus. Cell group B3 is situated in the borderland between the medulla oblongata and the pons. Most of its cells are found within the nucleus raphes magnus, but others constitute laterally extending bands along the fibre bundles of the corpus trapezoideum. Cell group B4 is not found in primates. Cell group B5 is rather small and located within the nucleus raphes pontis at the level of the motor nucleus of the fifth nerve. It seems likely that the cell groups B6 and B8 both lie largely within the confines of the superior central nucleus of Bechterew. This nucleus is situated in the upper part of the tegmentum pontis and extends rostrally into the tegmentum of the midbrain. The large, mesencephalic cell group B7 is mainly localised within the nucleus dorsalis raphes. The latter is situated in and ventral to the periaqueductal gray. It extends from the level of the dorsal tegmental nucleus to the caudal pole of the oculomotor nucleus. The ventral part of the nucleus is situated between the two medial longitudinal fascicles. It seems likely that the cell groups B6 and B8 both lie largely within the confines of the superior central nucleus of Bechterew. This nucleus is situated in the upper part of the tegmentum pontis and extends rostrally into the tegmentum of the midbrain. Cell group B9 is not found in primates.

Nieuwenhuys, R., Voogd, J., van Huijzen, Chr., The Human Central Nervous System: A Synopsis and Atlas, (New York: Springer Verlag, 1981), pp. 224 - 226.


552

expansive neurochemical system in the brain. The importance of this network becomes apparent when considering each serotonin neuron exerts an influence over as many as 500,000 target neurons.75 The Nak∑hatras having an Asura or “demonic” nature are K®ittikå, Ãßhle∑hå, Maghå, Chitrå, Vißhåkhå, Jye∑hˇhå, M™la, Dhani∑hˇhå, and Íhatabhi∑hå. These are correlated with the monoaminergic cell groups A8 to A15 and the lateral parabrachial nucleus. These groups are dopaminergic. Figure 56, p. 551, shows the location of these cell groups in the brain stem and surrounding areas. Table 15, p. 553, describes the cell groups in more detail. Wikipedia describes the functions of dopamine in the brain: Dopamine is critical to the way the brain controls our movements and is a crucial part of the basal ganglia motor loop. . . . In the frontal lobes, dopamine controls the flow of information from other areas of the brain. . . . This function is particularly related to the mesocortical dopamine pathway. Dopamine is commonly associated with the ‘pleasure system’ of the brain, providing feelings of enjoyment and reinforcement to motivate us to do, or continue doing, certain activities. . . . Dopamine is released (particularly in areas such as the nucleus accumbens and striatum) by naturally rewarding experiences. . . . Dopamine is [also] known to be released when unpleasant or aversive stimuli are encountered, suggesting that it is not only associated with ‘rewards’ or pleasure. . . . Dopamine may be involved in desire rather than pleasure. . . . Dopamine function may be involved in the salience (‘noticeableness’) of perceived objects and events, with potentially important stimuli (including rewarding things, but also things which may be dangerous or a threat) appearing more noticeable or more important. This theory argues that dopamine’s role is to assist decision making by influencing the priority of such stimuli to the person concerned.76 This is how the Nak∑hatras are located in the physiology. As introduced above, the Nak∑hatras are fundamental to the various Dåßha systems, by which time is subdivided according to changing predominance in the influences of the different planets on the native. Of all the Dåßha systems that are described in the Påråßhara Horå Íhåstra,


553

Table 15: The Dopaminergic Cell Groups in the Brain Stem Correlated with the Asura Class of Nak∑hatras, K®ittikå, Ãßhle∑hå, Maghå, Chitrå, Vißhåkhå, Jye∑hˇhå, M™la, Dhani∑hˇhå, and Íhatabhi∑hå Description4 The cells of the A8 group are located in the mesencephalic reticular formation. This group merges ventromedially with the A9 group, which is constituted by the compact part of the substantia nigra. A9 The A9 group is constituted by the compact part of the substantia nigra. All of the cells present in the latter area have been reported to be monoaminergic. A10 The A10 group is an unpaired midline group that is limited ventrally by the interpeduncular nucleus. The majority of its cells are located within the confines of the ventral tegmental area. A11 Group A11 is situated in trhe caudal hypothalamic periventricular region dorsal to the infundibular nucleus, which contains most of the cells of the A12 group. A12 The infundibular nucleus contains most of the cells of the A12 group. A13 The cells of the A13 group are located in the zona incerta. A14 The cells of the A14 group constitute a rostral continuation of the A12 group. A15 As far as is known, the olfactory bulb is the only telencephalic centre containing dopaminergic neurons. These elements are scattered in the outer zone of the bulb and form part of a set of interneurons (‘periglomerular cells’). They have been collectively designated the A15 group. Lateral Parabrachial Nucleus The Lateral Parabrachial Nucleus in transverse sections is located between the lateral surface of the Superior Cerebral Peduncle (PCS) and the lateral lemniscus. It extends vertically from the level of the pons-mesenchephalon junction (cranial pole) to the level where the lateral lemniscus nucleus is clearly visible (caudal pole). The size of the Lateral Parabrachial Nucleus decreases from cranial to caudal pole. The neurons are round or tapering, with a light, often central nucleus, prominent nucleolus and scarce cytoplasm.5

Cell Group A8

4

Nieuwenhuys, R., Voogd, J., van Huijzen, Chr., The Human Central Nervous System: A Synopsis and Atlas, (New York: Springer Verlag, 1981), pp. 224 - 226. 5 Lavezzi, A.M., Ballabio, G., Ottaviani, G., Matturri, L., Rossi, L., “Study of the cytoarchitecture of the parabrachial/Koelliker-Fuse complex in SIDS and fetal late stillbirth,” in Proceedings of the 7th SIDS International Conference, Florence, Italy, 2002: 132. http://users.unimi.it/~pathol/pdf/florence_4.pdf


554

Paråßhara holds the Viµshottari Dåßha system to be the best (Ch. 46, v. 14):

…v'xoˇrxt' pU,Rm;yu" pUvRmud;˙tm( kl* …v'xoˇrI tSm;d( dx; mu:y; i√joˇm 14

14. In Kaliyuga the natural life span of a human being is generally taken as 120 years. Therefore, Viµshottari Dåßha is considered to be the most appropriate and the best of all Dåßhas.77

The Viµshottari Dåßha system presents a cycle that extends for 120 years. The question naturally arises, where an individual begins in this cycle. The answer is that depending on the Janma Nak∑hatra, the Nak∑hatra in which the Moon is situated in the birth chart, there is a corresponding Dåßha or period governed by a particular planet. Paråßhara explains somewhat tersely how the planet in whose Dåßha period the native begins his life is determined:

ké·ˇk;t" sm;r>y i]r;vOTy dx;…/p;" a;c'k⁄r;guxbukÉx(upUv;R ivhg;" £m;t( 12 viˆ.;∆Nm.' y;vd( y; s':y; nvti∑t; xeW;∂x;…/po DeyStm;r>y dx;' nyet( 13 12–13. Beginning from Krittika, the lords of Dåßhas (periods) are the Sun, the Moon, Mars, Råhu, Jupiter, Saturn, Mercury, Ketu and Venus in that order. Thus if the Nak∑hatras from Krittika to the Janma Nak∑hatra (natal constellation) are divided by nine, the remainder will signify the lord of the commencing Dåßha. The remaining Dåßhas will be of the planets in the order given above.78 In other words, the sequence, Sun, Moon, Mars, Råhu, Jupiter, Saturn, Mercury, Ketu and Venus is repeated three times, starting from the Nak∑hatra Krittika. In this way the starting Dåßha period is determined for the native (Please refer to Table 16). Dåßha periods are not uniform, they are of different lengths for different planets. Paråßhara lists the period of years for each Planetary Dåßha period:


Table 16: Janma Nak∑hatras and Corresponding Planetary Dåßhas in the Viµßhottari Dåsha System 1. K®ittikå

Sun

2. Rohiˆ¥

Moon

3. M®igaßh¥r∑hå

Mars

4. Ardrå

Råhu

5. Punarvas™

Jupiter

6. Pußhya

Saturn

7. Ãßhle∑ha

Mercury

8. Makha

Ketu

9. P™rva Phålgun¥

Venus

10. Uttara Phålgun¥

Sun

11. Hastha

Moon

12. Citra

Mars

13. Svati

Råhu

14. Vißhåkhå

Jupiter

15. Anurådha

Saturn

16. Jye∑hˇha

Mercury

17. M™la

Ketu

18. P™rvå∑hå∂ha

Venus

19. Uttarå∑hå∂ha

Sun

20. Íhravaâ

Moon

21. Dhani∑hˇha

Mars

22. Ûhatabhi∑hak

Råhu

23. P™rvabhådrapåda

Jupiter

24. Uttarabhådrapåda

Saturn

25. Revat¥

Mercury

26. Aßhvin¥

Ketu

27. Bharaˆ¥

Venus

555


556

dx;sm;" £m;deW;' W@± dx;åê; gjeNdv" nOp;l; nvcN{;í ngcN{; ng; n%;" 15 15. The periods of Dåßhas of the Sun, the Moon, Mars, Råhu, Jupiter, Saturn, Mercury, Ketu and Venus are 6, 10, 7, 18, 16, 19, 17, 7 and 20 in that order. The total of all the Dåßha periods of the nine planets is 120 years, as mentioned above. Having determined in which Dåßha period a native has taken his birth, it remains to be shown how far into the Dåßha period he has entered into life, whether at the beginning, the middle, or towards the end of the particular Dåßha period. This also must be calculated. Paråßhara gives the requisite calculation:

dx;m;n' .y;tfl' ..ogen ˙t' flm( dx;y; .uˇ_vW;R¥ .oGy' m;n;d( ivxo…/tm( 16 16. To find out the remainder of the Dåßha operating at the time of birth, first find out the expired portion of the Dåßha of the concerned planet. This is done as follows. Multiply the Dåßha period of the planet concerned by the period of the stay of the Moon in the Janma Nak∑hatra that has expired and divide it by the total period of the stay of the Moon in that Nak∑hatra. The figure in years, months, etc. so arrived at will be the expired period of the Dåßha. If this figure is deducted from the total period of the Dåßha, we will get the balance of Dåßha at the time of birth.79 Whatever is the proportion remaining of the time the Moon stays in that particular Nak∑hatra, that proportion of the Dåßha period is remaining. The native finishes out the Dåßha period in which he is born, and then proceeds through the succeeding planetary Dåßha periods in the order given above; completing the sequence, he begins the cycle again with the Dåßha periods of the Sun, the Moon, etc. The principle of the Dåßha periods that is propounded here gives a deeper insight, a deeper level of meaning to the statement made at the outset that “Those are called planets (or Grahas) that move through the Nak∑hatras in the zodiac.” Their “seizing” (Graha) nature is manifested in terms of the Nak∑hatras according to the plan laid out in


557

the Viµshottari Dåßha. The Nak∑hatras, viewed in terms of the functions of the different monoaminergic cell groups and the specific properties of their respective neurotransmitters, bring to life the abstract principles of calculation, presenting afunctional model in terms of specific brain structures of the corresponding cosmic counterparts. VII. THE COSMIC NATURE OF MAN The planets and their corresponding values in the physiology have been examined, as also the Råßhis or signs, and their corresponding values in the physiology. The Lagna or ascendent, and the assignment of Bhåvas in the horoscope, and their corresponding values in the physiology have been explored. And the different qualities of the Nak∑hatras corresponding to the three different classes of monoaminergic cell groups have been examined. In the theater created by the signs, the Bhåvas, and the Nak∑hatras, it can be seen how from the “planets joining and departing from each other, the native’s good and bad effects are deduced.” There are two simultaneous parallel processes: Building up the human being from the specific qualities of planets and signs and houses, and Nak∑hatras, all put together in one integrated wholeness in the life experience of the individual; and building up the human being from the specific qualities and properties and behaviors of anatomical structures in the physiology. The close correspondence between the two parallel processes verifies the systematic and scientific nature of both angles of investigation, Vedic astrology and human physiology, and leads to the inevitable conclusion that the individual is built up of the impulses of cosmic life; the individual is made of Natural Law, the individual human body is truly cosmic, all inclusive in his or her nature. The discovery of the cosmic nature of man is the brilliant accomplishment of H.M. King Nader Råm. In the context of King Nader Råm’s discovery, the purpose has been to present the ground rules, the overall structure of the


558

science of Jyoti∑h in order to establish the mechanics of unfolding all the possibilities that make up an individual’s life. The unfolding of all possibilities is based on the cyclical flow of intelligence in the Dåßha system, combined with the positions of the planets and stars at one specific moment in time, the time of birth of the native. From the knowledge of one point in time, and the knowledge of the principles of sequential unfoldment from that point, one can know anything that one wants to know. This is the genesis of the allknowing quality of consciousness which is, as Maharishi explained, “intimately personal to everyone.” VIII. THE LITERATURE OF JYOTIÛH The literary of Jyoti∑h is extensive, and there are many branches and subdivisions. The three main branches are Horå Íhåstra, predictive astrology, Gaîta, or astronomy, and Saµhitå, a branch dealing with collective destiny of nations, as well as omens and portents.80 A Jyoti∑h text called Praßhna Mårga divides the field of Jyoti∑h into six branches. The six branches are 1. Gola, spherical astronomy and observations; 2. Gaîta, astronomical calculations; 3. Jåˇaka, predictive astrology based on the birth horoscope; 4. Praßhna, predictive astrology based on principles such as the timing of the question; 5. Muh™rta, or electional astrology, and 6. Nimitta, omens, signs and portents. In the following, some of the main texts in each of these six branches will be highlighted. 1. Gola Gola treats spherical astronomy, observing the paths of the planets in the solar system, including the apparent orbits of the sun and the moon. In this branch are texts called the “ Vedåãga Jyoti∑h.” Simple, basic texts, there is one associated with each of Rik, Yajur and Atharva Veda. The text associated with Rik Veda is a short treatise by Lagadha.


559

A. Lagadha Vedåãga Jyoti∑h. Lagadha's Vedåãga Jyoti∑h teaches how to observe and calculate the orbits of the sun and the moon. It is very concise, consisting of 35 verses. The beginning and ending verses of the text are as follows:

lg/ AGvedved;©JyoitW pçs'vTsrmy' yug;?y=' p[j;pitm( idnTvRynm;s;©÷ p[,My ixrs; xu…c" 1 p[,My ixrs; k;lm….v;¥ srSvtIm( k;lD;n' p[v+y;…m lg/Sy mh;Tmn" 2 JyoitW;myn' ’Tò' p[v+y;MynupUvRx" ivp[;,;' sMmt' lokÉ yDk;l;qR…sıye 3 inrek˘ √;dx;/;RBd' i√gu,' gts'…Dkm( W∑‰; W∑‰; yut' √;>y;' pvR,;' r;ix®Cyte 4 Svr;£mete som;k*R yd; s;k˘ sv;sv* Sy;ˇd;id yug' m;`Stp" xuKloåyn' Áudk™ 5 p[p¥ete ≈ivœ;d* sUy;RcN{ms;vudk™ s;p;R/eR d≤=,;kúStu m;`≈;v,yo" sd; 6 `mRvO≤ırp;' p[Sq" =p;Ó;s ¨dGgt* d≤=,e t* ivpy;Rs" W

560

/;t; kí;yn;¥;í;qRpçm.STvOtu" 9 .;'x;" Syur∑k;" k;y;‹" p=√;dxkoÌt;" Ek;dxgu,íon" xuKleå/| cwNdv; yid 10 ***concluding verses***

ivWuv' tÌu,' √;>y;' ÂphIn' tu W@±gu,m( yLlB/' t;in pv;R…, tq;/| s; it…q.Rvet( 31 m;`xuKlp[vOˇSy p*W’„,sm;ipn" yugSy pçvWRSy k;lD;n' p[c=te 32 tOtIy;' nvmI' cwv p*,Rm;sImq;…ste WœI' c ivWuv;Np[oˇ_o √;dxI' c sm' .vet( 33 ctudRxImupvsqStq; .ve¥qoidto idnmupwit cN{m;" m;`xuKl;iˆko yu¤π ≈ivœ;y;' c v;iWRk°m( 34 yq; ix%; myUr;,;' n;g;n;' m,yo yq; t√√πd;©x;S];,;' JyoitW' mU/Rin iSqtm( 3581 B. Atharva Veda Vedåãga Jyoti∑h: Ãtmajyoti∑ham. The Vedåãga Jyoti∑h belonging to Atharva Veda, called Ãtmajyoti∑ham, is a somewhat longer text, consisting of 14 Prakaraâ, and a total of 174 verses. It examines the different divisions of time and their precise measurement. Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

a;TmJyoitWm( muÙˇRp[kr,m( aq b[˜;,' SvyM.u' gu®˘ lokipt;mhm( b[õlokÉ su%;sIn' k;Xyp" p·rpOCzit 1


ik˘ p[m;,' muÙˇ;‹n;' r;]* v; yid v; idv; cN{;idTygt' sv| tNme p[b[Uih pOCzt" 2 tSy xu≈WU m;,Sy k;XypSy mh;Tmn" p[ov;c .gv;n( sv| muÙˇ| D;nmuˇmm( 3 √;dx;≤=inmeWStu lvo n;m iv/Iyte lv;" i]'xTkl; Dey; kl;i]'x'T]ui$.Rvet( 4 ]u$In;' tu .ve≤T]'xNmuÙˇRSy p[yojnm( √;dx;©ëlmuCzï÷ tSy z;y; p[m;,t" 5 nvtI W@;©ël;íwv p[tIcI' t;' p[k;xyet( purSt;TsiN/vel;y;' muÙˇoR r*{ ¨Cyte 6 êet" Wi∑" sm;:y;to mw]o vw √;dx;©ël" W$(su s;r.$o Dey" s;iv]" pçsu SmOt" 7 ctuWuR tu vwr;j≤S]Wu ivê;vsuStq; m?y;º a….…j•;m yiSmn( z;y; p[itiœt; 8 p[;cI' vw g;…mnI' z;y;' r*ih,≤S]Wu vˇRte blítuWuR iv:y;to ivjy" pçsu SmOt" 9 nwA≥tStu W@©ëLy; v;®,o √;dx;©ël" s*My" Wi∑" sm;:y;to .gStu prmStq; 10 ***concluding verses***

x;≤Nt….í yq;Ny;ymupv;swv[Rt;id…." yeåcRy≤Nt mh;Tm;n' sv| p[xsy≤Nt tm( 8 ¨pv;swgRv;' d;nwStpR,wí mnIWI,;m(

561


562

g[hn=]j; doW;" p[x;MyNtIh deihn;m( 9 n=];…, g[h;íwv devt;" iptro i√j;" pU…jt;" p[itpUJyNte in∂≥hNTypm;int;" 10 a;TmJyoitW…mTyuˇ_' Svymuˇ_' Svy'.uv; tTvt" pOCzm;,Sy k;XypSy mh;Tmn" 11 y îd' p#te ivp[o iv…/v∞ sm;iht" yqoˇ_' l.te svRm;ª;yiv…/dxRn;d( a;ª;yiv…/dxRn;idit 12 14 Ev' x*nkx;%;y;' b[˜vedSy;©÷ JyoitWg[Nq' b[˜k;Xyp;nuv;d' sm;¢m( 82

2. Gaîta Gaîta is the study of the observation, measurement, and prediction of the positions of the planets, the moon and the fixed stars. It is the part of Jyoti∑h that deals with astronomical issues; it is not much concerned with interpretation. A major division of Gaîta is the Siddhånta, or Vedic astronomy. It is a complete and wide-ranging astronomical science, based on direct cognition and intuition of the structure of the universe. The texts of Siddhånta have as their subject matter what is actually there: The entire range of time and space. Tradition holds that there are 18 texts in the field of Siddhånta:

sUYyR" ipt;mho Vy;so vix∑oåi]" pr;xr" ) kXypo n;rdo ggoR mrI…cmRnuri©r;" – lomx" p*≤lxíwv Cyvno yvno .Ogu" )


x*nkoå∑;dxíwte Jyoit"x;S]p[vˇRk;" –

563

83

Of these eighteen texts on astronomy, only five have come down to us, Paulißa, Romaka, Vasi∑hˇha, S™rya, and Pitåmaha Siddhånta. Here are the S™rya, V®ddha Vasi∑hˇha and Pitåmaha Siddhånta texts. A. S™rya Siddhånta. The greatest of the Siddhånta texts is listed first, the S™rya Siddhånta. S™rya Siddhånta, by its own account, was written at the end of Satyuga, by an Asura named Maya.84 The text has fourteen chapters. There is a famous English translation of the text by Ebenezer Burgess, first published in 1860.85 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

sUyRisı;Nt" aicNTy;Vyˇ_Âp;y inguR,;y gu,;Tmne smStjgd;/;r mUtRye b[˜,e nm" 1 aLp;vix∑e tu ’te myo n;m mh;sur" rhSy' prm' pu

564

îTyuKTv;åNtdR/e dev" sm;idXy;'xm;Tmn" s pum;n( mym;hed' p[,t' p[;ÔiliSqtm( 7 ***concluding verses***

myoåq idVy' tJD;n' D;Tv; s;=;d( ivvSvt" ’t’Tyimv;Tm;n' mene in/URtkLmWm( 25 D;Tv; tmOWyí;q sUyRlB/vr' mym( pirbb[u®peTy;qo D;n' pp[Cz⁄r;dr;t( 26 s te>y" p[dd* p[Ito g[h;,;' cirt' mht( aTy∫uttm' lokÉ rhSy' b[˜siMmtm( 27 îit sUyRisı;Nte m;n;i/k;r" 14 sm;¢í;y' g[Nq" 86

B. V®ddha Vasi∑hˇha Siddhånta. V®ddha Vasi∑hˇha Siddhånta has 544 verses in 13 chapters. The beginning and ending of the text are as follows:

vOıv…sœ…sı;Nt" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) nmSte …cTSvÂp;y pr;y prm;Tmne ) yo…g?yey;y x;Nt;y k;lÂp;y iv„,ve 1 nw…m„yeåin…mW=e]e v;mdevo i√joˇm" ) a….v;¥ su%;sIn' v…sœ' p·rpOCzit 2 guro /mRD x;Nt;Tm\ ≤S]k;lD dy;in/e ) svRx;S];

565

vedne]' ivn; tSm;∆‰oit"x;S]' p[yCz me 4 v…sœ ¨v;c s;/u s;/u mh;.;g yNm;' Tv' p·rpOCz…s ) ivStre, p[v+y;…m yq;D;t' ipt;mh;t( 5 Jyoit"x;S]' smg[' p[qmpu®Wt" Sv,Rg.;Ri√idTv; pUv| b[˜; tqopyR≤%l.u…mm,p[;qRn;¥∞k;r ) t∞ed' sup[s•' mOdupdinkrwguRÁm>y;TmÂp' xêi√êp[k;x' g[hc·rtivd;'inmRl' D;nc=u" 6 zNd" p;d* xBdx;S]' c vK]' kLp" p;,I Jy*itW' locne c ) ix=; `[;,' ≈o]muˇ_' in®ˇ_' vedSy;©;Ny¸ret;in W@±v; 7 ***concluding verses***

at" xnerLpgitinR®ˇ_; cN{Sy k=;Lpvx;∞ b◊o ) .c£pU·ˇ| mht;åLpg;mI c;Lpen k;len v[jet xw`[‰" 26 n=]k=;.[m,' c c£p;,;Tmk˘ 21600 t…•yt' in®ˇ_m( ) tdev sUy;Ridn.ír;,;' Svm?y.u·ˇ_.[m, in®ˇ_m( 27 s;yn' tdhor;]' sUy;Rdersusçym( Dey' m?ymm;nen v;mdev i√joˇm 28 îit ≈Ib[˜iWRvOıv…sœp[,Ite g…,tSkN/e ivêp[k;xe g[hk=;?y;yS]yodx" 13 sm;¢oåy' vOıv…sœ…sı;Nt" ) 87


566

C. Pitåmaha Siddhånta. Pitåmaha Siddhånta is a prose work having eight chapters. In the colophons of the text, it claims to belong to the Vi∑hûdharma Puråâ. The beginning and ending of the text is as follows:

ipt;mh…sı;Nt" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) pu„kr ¨v;c ) aq .gvNt' .uvnoTpiˇiSqits'h;rk;rk˘cr;crgu®˘ p[ityxs' sm…/gMy .OguivRD;py;m;s ) .gvn( Jyoit"x;S]' ivn; g…,ten durvg;hmto g…,tiv…/m;c+v ) tmuv;c ≈I.gv;n( ) Í,uvTs g…,tD;nm( ) an;idin/nk;l" p[j;pitivR„,u" ) tSy g[hgTynus;re, D;n' g…,tm( ) t];kúSy.;g.og" s*r;hor;]m( ) it…qí;N{;h" ) akoRdy;t( s;vn" ) cN{n=].ogen n;=];hor;]m( ) s;vn;hor;]' nr;,;m() s;k| teW;' idnm( ) Vyk;≥ r;i]" ) cN{msí;N{m;s" iptO,;mhor;]m( ) teW;' ’„,;∑My;mkoRdy" ) am;v;Sy;y;' m?y;ˆ" ) ***concluding verses***

k;m;nv;“uy;t( k;mI mo=;qIR prm' pdm( ) sMyGg[hgit' D;Tv; p;]t;' y;it vw i√j" – n ce√éiˇ' ty; k⁄y;Rˇy; vOiˇ' ivvjRyet( ) p;];,;mip tTp;]' g[h;,;' veiˇ yo gitm( – ved; ih yD;qRm….p[vOˇ;" k;l;nupUv;R iviht;í yD;" ) tSm;idd' k;liv/;nx;S]' yo Jy*itW' ved s ved svRm( – îit ≈Iiv„,u/meR pu„krop;:y;ne


567

r;mipt;mhs'v;de ipt;mh…sı;Nt;?y;y" ) sm;¢oåy' …sı;Nt" ) 88

3. Jåˇaka B®ihat Påråßhara Horå Íhåstram. Jåˇaka is the branch of Jyoti∑h that makes predictions based on the natal horoscope of the individual. The founding textbook of Jyoti∑h belongs to this branch: The main textbook of Jyoti∑h, which organizes all the elements of the cosmos, planets, Råßhis, Nak∑hatras and Bhåvas into a systematic science of all-knowingness, is called the B®ihat Påråßhara Horå Íhåstram. The B®ihat Påråßhara's Horå Shåstra teaches calculations and interpretations leading to conclusive predictions based on the birth chart or horoscope of the individual. The text has 97 chapters.89 Its beginning and ending verses are as follows:

aq bOhTp;r;xrhor;x;S]m( sOi∑£mkqn;?y;y" 1 aqwkd; muin≈eœ' i]k;lD' pr;xrm( pp[CzopeTy mw]ey" p[…,pTy két;Ô≤l" 1 .gvn( prm' pu

aq;h' prm' b[˜ tCz·ˇ_' .;rtI' pun" 5 sUy| nTv; g[hpit' jgduTp·ˇk;r,m( v+y;…m vednyn' yq; b[˜mu%;CΩtm( 6 x;Nt;y gu®.ˇ_;y svRd; sTyv;idne a;‚Stk;y p[d;tVy' tt" ≈eyo Áv;PSyit 7 n dey' pr≤x„y;y n;‚Stk;y x#;y v; dˇe p[itidn' du"%' j;yte n;] s'xy" 8 EkoåVyˇ_;Tmko iv„,urn;id" p[.urIêr" x(uısTvo jgTSv;mI inguR,≤S]gu,;iNvt" 9 s's;rk;rk" ≈Im;…•…mˇ;Tm; p[t;pv;n( Ek;'xen jgTsv| sOjTyvit lIly; 10 ***concluding verses***

gu,]yfl;?y;ySttoåPyD;tjNmn;m( jNml¶;idivD;n' p[v[Jy;l=,;in c 21 S]I,;' c flvwix∑‰m©l+mfl;in c pUvRp;poTqx;poTqyog; vwpu}yk;rk;" 22 sTpu]p[;¢‰up;y;í shwv p[itp;idt;" jNmNyin∑l¶=RitQy;idp[itp;dnm( 23 tˇCz;≤Ntiv…/íwv s'=epe, p[d≤xRt" p[svSy ivk;r;í k…qt;" x;≤Nts'yut;" 24 Ev' j;tkvyeRå] iniv∑; ivWy;" xtm( ivD;y ivbu/;STvet;n( p[;“uvNtu yx" …≈ym( 25

90

568


569

B. Garga Horå Íåstra. There is another Horå Íåstra text by a famous Âi∑hi, Mahar∑hi Garga. It is called Garga Horå Íhåstra. It is a much shorter work, consisting of 13 chapters. The first chapter presents general principles, and the remaining 12 chapters deal with all possible circumstances in each of the twelve Bhåvas (houses) in the Kuˆ∂ali (horoscope).91 Beginning and ending of the texts are as follows:

p[qmoå?y;y" £Àr=e]e yd; jnm aStko l¶n;yk" ) akÉú jIve tq; p;t" soå∑vWeRn jIvit 1 Wœ;∑me c mUˇoR c bu/.*mo yd; iSqt* tSkr' òrkm;R,; krp;d' ivnXyit 2 Wœ;∑me c mUˇoR c jNmk;le yd; bu/" ) ctuvRWeR .veTmOTyurmOte yid …s'cit 3 .*m=e]e yid jIv" jIv=e]e c m'gl" ) √;dx;Bde .veNmOTyu r=te yid x'kr" 4 .*m=e]e yd; jIv" Wœ;∑m i√tIyk" Wœº vWeR .veNmOTyuj;RtkSy n s'xy" 5 jNmmUˇ*R yd; r;¸r∑Wœº c cN{m;" ) …v'x{;]* .veNmOTyujitkSy n s'xy" 6 ctuqRip yd; r;¸ kÉN{e .vit cN{m;" ) …v'x{;]* .veNmOTyuj;RtkSy n s'xy" 7 ***concluding verses***

ySywv jNmn=]e j;yet( .[;t; sutoåip v;


570

sj;tIy" sj;Ty;v; soåSy p[;,;n( ivn;xyet( – s'pTkreåip j;tSy ≈eyS’iˇœte sd; ) inTy' k≤lsm' pXye¥o j;yet ivpTkre – =emeå….j;t" pu®W s*Myíwk;≤Ntko .vet( ) p[Ty;·rjo ·rpusm" nw/n tSkro .vet( – s;/kÉ svRk;y;R,;' s;/k" Sy;ditip[y" ) mw]e prmmw]e c pr…m]mitip[y" ) 92

C. Jaimini Upadeßha S™tra. There is a text called Jaimini Upadeßha S™tra, in four chapters. It propounds a different system of astrology. The text begins and ends as follows:

¨pdex' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 a….pXy'it A=;…, 2 p;êR.e c 3 t…•œ;í t√t( 4 d;r.;GyxUlSq;gRl; in?y;tu" 5 k;mSq;tu .Uys; p;p;n;m( 6 ·r"f nIck;mSq; ivro…/n" 7 ***concluding S™tra***

Sv nNde tuLye v; 34 vgeR nv;'xe c 35 t] t] D;n;D;neWu 36 pu]o m…, c rmy;m( 39 Sv l¶ n;q;í 40 ) 4 ) 4 93

4. Praßhna. The fourth branch of Jyoti∑h is called Praßhna. A. Ûhaˇpañchåßhika. The central work on Praßhna is an extremely concise work, written by P®thuyaßas, the son of one of the most famous figures in Indian astrology, Varåhamihira. The text is called Ûhaˇpañchåßhika, because it is made up of 56 verses.


571

These verses encapsulate the entire science of Praßhna, in which the Jyoti∑hi finds the answer to an inquirerís question by analyzing the time at which the question was asked. Beginning and ending of Ûhaˇpañchåßhika are as follows:

W$(pç;≤xk; ≈Ivr;h…mihr;TmjpOquyxs; ivr…ct; a?y;y 1 aq hor;?y;y" p[…,pTy r…v' mU›;R vr;h…mihr;Tmjen pOquyxs; p[Xne ’t;qRghn; pr;qRmui∂Xy s¥xs; 1 CyuitivRl¶;≤ıbuk;∞ vO≤ımR?y;Tp[v;soåStmy;…•vO·ˇ" v;Cy" g[hw" p[Xnivl¶k;l;Ì»h' p[iv∑o ihbukÉ p[v;sI 2 yo yo .;v" Sv;…mÎ∑o yuto v; s*Mywv;R Sy;ˇSy tSy;iSt vO≤ı" p;pwrev' tSy .;vSy d;in indeR∑Vy; pOCzt;' jNmto v; 3 s*Mye …vl¶e yid v;Sy vgeR xIWoRdye …s≤ımupwit k;yRm( ato ivpyRStm…s≤ıhetu" ’Cz^π, s'…s≤ıkr' iv…m≈m( 4 hor;iSqt" pU,Rtnu" xx;'ko jIven Î∑o yid v; …sten ≤=p[' p[n∑Sy kroit læB/' l;.opy to blv;Hz⁄.í 5 ***concluding verses***

mNd" p;psmeto l¶;•vmeåxu.wyuRtÎ∑" rog;tR" prdexe c;∑mgo mOTyukr Ev 11


572

s*Myyutoåkú" s*Myw" sNÎ∑í;∑m=Rs'Sqí tSm;∂ºx;dNy' gt" s v;Cy" ipt; tSy 12 îit vr;h…mihr;TmjpOquyxoivr…ct;y;' W$(pç;≤xk;y;' …m≈k;?y;y" s¢m" W$(pç;≤xk; sm;¢; 94

B. Daivajñavallabhå. Another important work on Praßhna has been written by Varåhamihira, the father of P®thuyaßhas. Daivajñavallabhå is a text of 15 chapters. Varåhamihira covers all the yogas presented in his son’s work Ûhaˇpañchåßhikå, and also treats the Praßhna Lagna, and different means of determining it; the Praßhnåk∑hara paddhati (the initial letter of query); the study of omens, and prediction by Dre∑hkaâ, and Triµßhåµßha. A summary of the text is given by Manish Shrivastaw: In the first chapter, Prashnåvatår, planet’s conditions (avasthå) are described, definitions [are given and the] author discusses duties of answer seeker and astrologer both, the basis of making prediction. In the second chapter, Shubhåshubha, the author describes ‘significations’ or things covered by all 12 houses (bhåva kårakatva) and some basic principles. In the third chapter, Låbhålåbha combinations indicating financial profit or loss are given. In the fourth chapter, Såmånyagamågam, some basic yogas of travel, arrival or departure, are discussed. Fifth chapter, Shatrugamågam deals with enemy’s attack on one’s country. Sixth chapter, Pravåsachintå deals exclusively with the state of a person gone abroad, his well being, possible arrival or captivity. Seventh chapter, Jayaparåjaya, deals with war queries explicitly, who’ll be victorious, the aggressor (Yåy¥) or attacked one (Sthåy¥). Eighth chapter, Rogashubha, points out combinations for patient’s health, recovering from or succumbing to disease. Ninth chapter is about larceny, lost wealth’s recovery, identification of thief. Tenth chapter, Manomushtichintå answers silent queries in a rational way, explaining the size, color, sex of planets, leading to determine if it’s living organism, animal, flora, or unananimated metal, a person is thinking about. Eleventh chapter, Vrishtinirnaya, briefly suggests rain indicating combinations. Twelfth chapter, Vivåhavichar, is for concerns about marriage, while thirteenth chapter, Stripunjanma, deals with childbirth. Fourteenth chapter, Prakirna, as the name suggests consists of everything which the author thinks should not be left out . . . [including] answering from first letter of question asked, [and] dividing


573

alphabets in 8 sections governed by 7 planets (a, ka, cha, ˇa, ta pa, ya, ßha vargas). In fifteenth chapter, Lagnachinta, again the author describes fate of war strikes, army’s every aspect, journey, food, camping, vehicles, loopholes, etc., determined by Dre∑hkaâ. In the end he suggests favorable traveling times and combinations of unexpected journey.95 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

dwvDvLl.; 1 p[Xn;vt;r;?y;y" nTvoiÌrNtmnl' .wrvm√wtmIêr' nOh·rm( vr;he,wW; i£yte p[Xne dwvDvLl.;rcn; 1 dI¢;¥' dx.ed' Vyomcr;,;' inÂPy .;vflm( pO∑o y¥Tkqyit xu.;xu.' tˇdNyq; noˇ_m( 2 dI¢o dIn" SvSqo muidt" su¢" p[pI…@to muiWt" p·rhIym;nvIyR" p[vOıvIyoRå…/vIyRí 3 Svo∞e dI¢o nIce dIn" SvgOhe VyviSqt" SvSq" muidto …m]gOhSqo ·rpugehSqo .veTsu¢" 4 aNywivR…jto yuıe inpI…@toåSt'gto muiWt" p·rhIym;nvIyoR nIc;….mu%' p[spRí 5 gCzn( Svo∞;….mu%' p[vO/vIyR" sm;:y;t" xu.vgRSq" %e$oå…/kvIyoR ivpulriXmí 6 dI¢e …s≤ırnuˇm; nrptedIRne c dwNy;gm" SvSqe Sve mn…s iSqt' c .vit ≈Ik°itRs*:y;idkm( a;modo muidte yqe‚Pstflp[;i¢" p[su¢e ivpt(


574

pI@;x]u’t; p[pI…@ttn* moW' gteåqR=y" 7 .vit p[vOıvIyeR gjtur'gsuv,R.Ul;." t√d…/vIyRyuˇ_É x·ˇ_]ys'pd;idb;¸Lym( 8 pu„pw" flw" knkràyutw" Sv.Um* n=]j;itsiht' g[hr;ixc£m( ≈ı;' a>yCyR .·ˇ_.rb'/uk˘/r;g[" iv/;y injcet…s inivRkLpe 9 p[;t" pum;iNvihtdevgu®p[,;m" p;,* vhn( k⁄sumràfl;=t;í ) sT’Ty dwvivdm;drm;d/;n" pOCzπTs’Cz⁄.mn;" xu.idÑü%Sq" 10 ***concluding verses***

prSpr' s*·rk⁄j* rvINdU i]ko,g* .;gRvloiht* c fl' yduˇ_' tdxeWmev ivn;Xy pí;TSvidx' nyet;m( 39 t;r;g[híeæT=itj;≤T]ko,e sUy;Rdip Sy;¥id v; xx;'k" idgIêr;Tp'cmgo blI v; g[h" Svk;œ;' nyit p[s¥ 40 Î∑;åÎ∑fl;¢‰w x;S]' ˙dye in/;y …mihrSy dwvDvLl.;:y' ÎÇ; p[Xn' vdeˇJD" 41 ydup…ctmNyjNmin xu.;åxu.' tSy kmR," p'·ˇ_m( VyÔyit x;S]mett( tm…s {Vy;…, dIp îv 42 a;idTyd;stnyStdv;¢bo/" k;ipTql" sivtOlB/vrp[s;d" )


575

a;v≤Ntko muinmt;NyvloKy yà;det;' vr;h…mihro rcy;'ck;r 43 96

C. Praßhna Mårga. Another famous text in the field of Praßhna is called Praßhna Mårga. The Praßna Mårga goes beyond the narrow confines of the issues of Praßna to explore the entire field of Jyoti∑h. Praßna Mårga has 32 chapters. Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

≈I g,ex;y nm" ) p[qm;?y;y" m?y;$Vy…/p' duG/…sN/ukNy;/v' …/y; ?y;y;…m s;?vh' buıe" xu?yw vO?yw c …sıye 1 gu®>yí g[he>yí my; bıoymÔ≤l" p[s•mnsSte me sTy;' k⁄vRNtu .;rtIm( 2 nm" ≈Im©l≈e,Iinv;s;y mh;Tmne sv| j;n≤Nt dwvD; y¥t( Íit c=uW" 3 ceLlUrIêrm;nMy xwlj;vLl.' my; ix„y;y deixk;v;¢' p[≈vTmoRpidXyte 4 SkN/]y;Tmk˘ JyoitXx;S]mett( W@©vt( g…,t' s'iht; hor; ceit SkN/]y' mtm( 5 j;tkgo¬in…mˇp[XnmuÙt;R:yg…,tn;m;in a….d/tIh W@©;Ny;c;y;R Jy*itWe mh;x;S]e 6 go¬o g…,t' ceit i√ty' %lu g…,ts'ihte SkN/e hor;s'ihtyorip in…mˇmNy]y' c hor;:ye 7


576

***concluding verse***

a?y;yw" Wo@x….íoˇr.;gStqwv sMpU,R" ix„yjnp[;qRny; r…ctSy p[Xnm;gRSy 140 sm;¢oåy' p[Xnm;gR" 97

5. Muh™rta The fifth branch of Jyoti∑h is called Muh™rta, which may be translated as electional astrology. Muh™rta is the science of determining an auspicious starting time for an event or project, or life experience, so that everything unfolds automatically and systematically without obstacles, and the project is brought to successful completion. A Muh™rta, or favorable, auspicious time for an action is chosen on the basis of the changing values of time. The days of the week, the lunar days or Tithis, which measure the successive progress of the path of the moon along the ecliptic through increments of twelve degrees, the Nak∑hatra in which the moon is stationed, the Aµßha or divisions of the Lagna, and the positions and conditions of the planets, all contribute to the determination of the auspiciousness of a particular moment for a proposed action. Of all of these, the Nak∑hatras may be said to play the most pivotal role in determining Muh™rta.98 Here are three different Muh™rta texts. A. Muh™rta Chintåmaî. The first Muh™rta text to be considered is the Muh™rta Chintåmaî.99 The text has thirteen sections and 493 verses. There is an English translation by Girish Chand Sharma.100 There are sections on auspicious and inauspicious Muh™rta (starting times), on Nak∑hatras, the lunar asterism, on Sankrånti (the entry of a planet into a new sign), planetary transits, on choosing auspicious times for the various rites of passage called Saµskåra including marriage, Muh™rtas for the performance of


577

Yagya, for coronation of a king, and for journeys, living in a city, and entering a new house. Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

muÙˇ‹…cNt;m…," g*rI≈v"kÉtkp].©m;’„y hSten ddNmu%;g[e …v›' muÙt;‹k≤lti√tIydNtp[roho hrtu i√p;Sy" 1 i£y;kl;pp[itp·ˇhetu' s'≤=¢s;r;qR…vl;sg.Rm( anNtdwvDsut" s r;mo muÙtR…cNt;m…,m;tnoit 2 xë.;xë.p[kr,m( 1 itqIx; viˆk* g*rI g,exoåihguRho r…v" ≤xvo dug;‹åNtko …vêe h·r" k;m" ≤xv" xxI 3 nNd; c .{; c jy; c ·rˇ_; pU,eRit itQyoåxë.m?yxSt;" …steå…ste xStsm;/m;" Syu" …stD.*m;ikúgur* c …sı;" 4 nNd; .{; n≤Ndk;:y; jy; c ·rˇ_; .{; pU,RsHD; mOt;åk;‹t( y;My' Tv;∑^' vwêdev' /inœ; ååyRM,' Jyeœ;åNTy' rvedRG/.' Sy;t( 5 Wœ‰;iditqyo mNd;i√lom' p[itpäë/e s¢MykÉúå/m;" Wœ‰;¥;m;í rd/;vne 6 Wœ‰∑mI .Ut…v/u=yeWu no


578

sevet n; twlple =ur' rtm( n;>yÔn' …vêdxi√kÉ itq* /;]Iflw" ò;nmm;i{go„vst( 7 sUyeRxpç;…¶rs;∑nNd; ved;©s¢;…êgj;˚xwl;" sUy;‹©s¢orggoidgIx; dG/; …vW;:y;í Ût;xn;í 8 sUy;‹idv;re itqyo .v≤Nt m`;…vx;%;≤xvmUlviˆ" b[;˜' kroåk;‹¥m`<$k;í xë.e …vvJy;‹ gmne TvvXym( 9 .;{e cN{Îx* n.Synlne]e m;/ve √;dxI p*We vedxr; îWe dx≤xv; m;geRåi{n;g; m/* go∑* co.yp=g;í itqy" xUNy; bu/w" k°itRt; Ëj;‹W;!tpSyxë£tps;' ’„,e xr;©;B/y" 10 ***concluding verses***

aq g[Nqk;rv'xv,Rnm( a;sIımRpure W@©ingm;?yetOi√jwmRæ<@te Jyoit…vR·ˇlk" f,IN{r…cte .;„ye ’t;it≈m" tˇ∆;tks'iht;g…,t’Nm;Nyo mh;.U.uj;' tk;‹l'’itvedv;Ky…vlsäë≤ı" s …cNt;m;," 1 Jyoit…vRÌ,v≤Ndt;'…`[kmlStTsUnur;sITkétI n;ª;ånNt îit p[q;m…/gto .Um<@l;hSkr" yo rMy;' jinpıit' smkro∂u∑;xy?v'…snIm( $Ik;' coˇmk;m/enug…,teåk;WIRTst;' p[Itye 2 td;Tmj ¨d;r/I…vRbu/nIlk<#;nujo


579

g,expdp˚j' ˙id in/;y r;m;…./" …groxngre vre .uj.ujeWucN{w…mRte xkÉ …vinrm;idm' %lu muÙtR…cNt;m…,m( 3 sm;¢í;y' g[Nq" 101

B. Kåla Prakåßikå. Kåla Prakåßikå is a text in 45 chapters. There is an English translation by N.P.S. Iyer.102 Kåla Prakåßikå advocates the study of the Pañchåãgam, which is a particular kind of ephemeris showing the lunar day or Tithi, the day of the week, the Nak∑hatra, the Yoga and the Karaâ for each day. It describes Muh™rta for various Saµskåra or rites of passage, for agriculatural work, laying up treasure, putting on new clothes, wearing a new ornament, laying foundations, opening a house, coronation of a king, and travel. It describes the influence of Nak∑hatras on the course of a disease, and success of treatment, and describes various Yogas and Dåßha periods used in prediction. There are chapters on the interpretation of dreams, the celebration of festivals, and the Ekådaßh¥ observance. Beginning and ending of the text are as follows:

k;lp[k;ixk; ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) xuıSfi$ks'k;x' rà…s'h;sne iSqtm( pµy; siht' inTy' nr…s'hmh' .je 1 g®@?vjsen;Ny' klye c£/;·r,m( yı‰;nm;];TsN]St;" p[TyUh; y;≤Nt dUrt" 2 v;/Ulvrd;c;yRp;dp˚jm;≈ye yTp;dp˚j?y;n;Tp[yhU ; y;≤Nt dUrt" 3 yd;…≈t;n;' .u·ˇ_í mu·ˇ_í sul.; .vet(


580

vNd;mhe nO…s'h;y| v;/Ul;Nvyn;ykm( 4 k;NtopyNtOyogIN{k®,;p;]t;' gtm( pdv;Kyp[m;,D' vNde smrpu'gvm( 5 ’t;q;R" p[;…,n" sveR ySy;vtr,;∫⁄iv po≤¬p;‘ îit :y;te p[*!r;ypure vsn( 6 a;….j;Tyen vOˇen iv¥y; c;itx;…yn" pu]oåh' vrd;yRSy .;r√;jk⁄l;.v" 7 ***concluding verses***

x;k;h;r' tu yo .u¤π ˙id xLy' mm;ipRtm( b¸n; ik…mhoˇ_Én s'deho j;yte yid 21 Ek;dxI' p·rTyJy √;dxI' smupoWyet( p;r,' tu ]yodXy;' n ktRVy' fl;…qR…." p;r,' tu ]yodXy;' in„k;m;n;' ivmu·ˇ_dm( 22 îit nO…s'hsU·rivr…ct;y;' k;lp[k;ixk;y;' pçcTv;·r'xoå?y;y" sm;¢ey' k;lp[k;ixk; 103

C. Muh™rtagaâpati. Another important text in electional astrology is Muh™rtagaâpati. The text has 22 chapters:

muÙtRg,pit" ) s'vTsr;idp[kr,m( ) ≈ImTy; kLpvLLyev hwmvTy; inrTyy" jyTy;≤li©t" kLp&m" sTfld" ixv" 1 p[vtRyit s;lok˘ lok˘ yD;idkmRsu


581

yNmuÙˇ;‹kro¥;n' vNdeåk| k;lmIêrm( 2 ≈Iivêex' g,ex' gu®cr,mqo yDmUit| suk°it| nTv; ip]o" pd;Bj' in≤%lmuinvr;n( s'iht;s'p[,etøn( ) gg;Ri]≈Iv…sœ;i©rsivr…ct;" s'iht; mUl.Ut;" D;Tv; JyoitinRbN/;nitl≤ltpd;' ràm;l;' iv…cNTy 3 s˚πt;n( s'ivh;y Vyv˙itsu%d' b;lbo/;y xI`[' Jyoitg[RNqoidt;qwR" sugmlùpdw" …sık;ywRmRuÙˇw‹" ) JyoitæSsı;Ntveˇ; ≈uitiviv/kl;x;S]p;rI,bu≤ıg*@o cInexm;Ny" ≤=itpititlkÉn;CyRm;ní.Uy" 4 ≈Ir;md;sjnuWo h·rx˚rSy ≈Ir;vlSy tnyo ivnyopp•" ) g[Nq' muÙˇRg,pTy…./' iv/ˇe iv¥;…/gR,pitgR…,t;gmD" 5 ***concluding verses***

îit nOptnye iht' ividTv; spid tdIyivnodn;y aq iviv/muÙˇRsTp[bN/o g,pitr;vlxmR,; Vy/;…y 29 v;,I yq; g,pte" ixvyoghetu" k;Xy;' tqwv h·rx˚rnNdnSy ) EW; muÙˇRg,pTy…./p[bN/p[;du.Rv; .vit .U…mtle jn;n;m( 30 a;yu" p[D; yx" s*:y' s*.;Gy' flm=ym( a.I∑' c pxUn( pu];n( l.t;' g[NqtÊvivt( 31


582

îit ≈Im∂ŸvDr;vlh·rx'krsU·rsUnug,pit’te muÙtRg,pt* g[Nq;l˚;rp[kr,m( √;…v'xittm' sm;¢m( sm;¢í;åy' g[Nq" 22 104

6. Nimitta Nimitta is the science of omens and portents, whereby unusual events are explored for their potential predictive value. In ancient times, one court astrologer would often be devoted full-time to looking for omens that could foretell the future for the king and his kingdom. The science of Nimitta, combined with techniques of predicting future calamities, and the fate of entire nations, forms one entire section of Jyoti∑h, called Saµhitå. B®hat Saµhitå. The foremost authority in the field of Nimitta and Saµhitå, is Varåhamihira, who is reported to have lived around 500 AD. He has written a text called B®hat Saµhitå, an ambitious work of a hundred chapters.105 He describes the omens and portents pertaining to unusual astronomical events, such as arrival of comets, planetary transits, conjunctions and planetary wars. Prognostication regarding special indications at dawn and twilight, falling of meteors, halos around planets, and rainbows, are given, as also omens from horses and cows and many different kinds of wild animals. There are approximately 3900 verses in the text’s one hundred chapters . The last chapter summarizes the contents of the entire text. There is an English translation by M. R. Bhat.106 Beginning and ending verses are as follows:

≈I…s≤ıivn;yko ivjyte bOhTs'iht; ) ¨pnyn;?y;y" 1 jyit jgt" p[sUitivRê;Tm; shj.UW,' n.s"


583

&tknksÎxdxxtmyU%m;l;…cRt" sivt; 1 p[qmmuink…qtmivtqmvloKy g[NqivStrSy;qRm( n;itlùivpulrcn;….®¥t" Sp∑m…./;tum( 2 muinivr…ct…md…mit y≤∞rNtn' s;/u n mnujg[…qtm( tuLyeåqeRå=r.ed;dmN]kÉ k; ivxeWo·ˇ_" 3 ≤=ittnyidvsv;ro n xu.’idit yid ipt;mhp[oaoˇ_É k⁄jidnmin∑…mit v; koå] ivxeWo nOidVy’te" 4 a;b[˜;idivin"sOtm;loKy g[NqivStr' £mx" i£ym;,kmevwtTsm;stoåto mmoTs;h" 5 a;sIˇm" ikled' t];p;' twjseå.vıwme Sv.URxkle b[˜; ivê’d<@ºåkúxixnyn" 6 kipl" p[/;nm;h {Vy;dIn( k,.ugSy ivêSy k;l' k;r,mekÉ Sv.;vmpre jgu" kmR 7 ***concluding verse***

idnkrmuingu®cr,p[…,p;t’tp[s;dmitnedm( x;S]mups©»hIt' nmoåStu pUvRp[,etO>y" 6 107

IX. THE READING CURRICULUM IN JYOTIÛH Jyoti∑h is an enormous field with a rich and profound literature. The main texts of the six branches of Jyoti∑h, Gola, Gaîta, Jåˇaka, Praßhna, Muh™rta, and Nimitta have now been examined. In the introduction to this chapter, it was pointed out that the calculations that were presented in the various textbooks were not actually what was structured in the human physiology; what H.M. King Nader Råm has located in the physiology are the cosmic counterparts, the planets, Råßhis, Nak∑hatras and Bhåvas that


584

are tangible manifest structures in the human physiology. Since the texts themselves are not the items that are located in the physiology, reading the vast literature of Jyoti∑h book by book, in Sanskrit, for its sound value is not necessary for enlivening the all-knowing quality in the awareness. His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi has recommended the reading of one book from each of four main divisions of Jyoti∑h, Jåˇaka, Muh™rta, Praßhna, and Gaîta. The B®hat Paråßara Horå Íåstra together with S™rya Siddhånta, Muh™rta Cintamaî, and Ûaˇpañcåßika present a program of reading that surveys the whole field of Jyoti∑h in depth without getting lost in the details. These four texts constitute the curriculum of reading for the field of Jyoti∑h.


Notes: 1

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1994), pp. 89-90.

2

Santhanam, R., Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra, vol. I, (New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1990), p. 25. 3

Gray, (2005), p. 369-371.

4

Sharma, Girish Chand, Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra, vol. I, (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1994), p. 28. 5

Carpenter and Sutin, pp. 54 and 552.

6

Sharma, G.C., p. 28.

7

Gray, (1918), pp. 834-835.

8


9


10

Gray, (2005), p. 428.

11


12

Gray, (2005), p. 427.

13


14

Gray, (2005), p. 427-428.

15


16

Gray, (2005), p. 419.

17

Gray, (2005), p. 424.

18


19

Gray, (2005), p. 421.

20


585


21

Please refer to above, translation of verses 4-6 of chapter 3 of Paråshara.

22

Gray, (1918), pp. 884-885.

23


24


25

Gray, (1918), pp. 881-882.

26


27

Gray, (1918), p. 910.

28


29

Gray, (1918), p. 914.

30


31

Gray, (1918), p. 882.

32


33

Gray, (1918), pp. 901-902.

34


35

Gray, (1918), p. 885.

36


37

Gray, (1918), p. 906.

38


39

Gray, (1918), p. 886.

40


41

Gray, (1918), p. 899.

586


42


43

Gray, (1918), p. 906.

44


45

Gray, (1918), p. 906-7.

46


47


48

Santanam, R., p. 121.

49


50


51

Santanam, R.

52


53

Santanam, R.

54


55

Santanam, R.

56


57

Santanam, R.

58


59

Santanam, R.

60


61

Santanam, R.

62


587


63

Santanam, R.

64


65

Santanam, R.

66


67

Santanam, R.

68


69

Santanam, R.

70


71

Santanam, R.

72

Sharma, Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra, pp. 293-297.

73

588

Nader, Tony, Creating a Perfect Man, Lesson 30, “Nak∑hatras Part 2,” Maharishi Open University broadcast, 2000. 74

“Norepinephrine,” Wikipedia, the Free Encyclopedia, 22 May 2006, < http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norepinephrine>. 75

Byrd, A., “Serotonin and Its Uses,î Serendip, Bryn Mawr College, Biology 202, 1999 First Web Reports, 26 May 2006 . 76

“Dopamine,” Wikipedia, the Free Encyclopedia, 24 May 2006, . 77


78


79


80

B®ihat Paråshara Horå Shåstra, chapter 1, v. 2.

81

Sarma, K.V., and Sastry, T.S., Vedanga Jyotisa of Lagadha in its Rk and Yajus Recensions, (New Delhi: Indian National Science Academy, 1985).


589

82

Datta, Bhagavad, Ãtharvaâ Jyoti∑ham or the Vedåãga Jyoti∑ha of the Atharva Veda, (Lahore: Punjab Sanskrit Book Depot, Motilal Banarsidass, 1924). 83

Ebenezer Burgess, Translation of the S™rya-Siddhånta, a Textbook of Hindu Astronomy, (Varanasi: Indological Book House, 1977), p. viii. 84

S™rya-Siddhånta I.57 and I.2.

85

Ebenezer Burgess, Translation of the S™rya-Siddhånta.

86

Burgess.

87

Vindhyesvariprasada Dvivedi, Jyautisha Siddhanta Sangraha: A Collection of Ancient Hindu Astronomical works, (Benares : Braj Bhushan Das & Co., 1912-1917), vol. 2. 88

Vindhyesvariprasada Dvivedi.

89

The edition edited by Girish Chand Sharma (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1995), has three additional chapters, for a total of 100, because of the inclusion of three chapters from other works by Paråshara. These interpolations are explained by the editor in his introduction. 90

R. Santhanam, Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra of Maharshi Parasara, 2 vol., (New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1990). 91

R. Santhanam, Garga Hora, (New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1997).

92

Krishna Kumar Pathak, ed., Garga Hora Shastra, (New Delhi: Nishkaam Peeth Prakashan, 1999). 93

Sanjay Rath, Jaimini Maha Rishiís Upadesa sutras: complete with four chapters, (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1997). 94

V. Subrahmanya Sastri, Shatpanchasika, (Bangalore, Sri Råma Press, 1966).

95

Shrivastaw, Manish, “Daivagya Vallabhaa: Text, summary, and encoding,” Sanskrit Documents, 21 December 2003. 26 May 2006 . 96

Shrivastaw.


590

97

Råman, Bangalore Venkata, Praßna Mårga, 2 vol., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991). 98

In Muh™rtachintåmaˆ¥, favorable Nak∑hatras are named for nearly every Muh™rta, while days of the week, lunar days, etc., are specified less often. 99

Íåstr¥, Kapileßhvara, Muh™rtachintåmaˆ¥ of Ír¥ Råmadavajña, (Varanasi: Chaukhamba Amarabharati Prakashan, 1989). 100

Sharma, Girish Chand, Daivagye Acharya Shriram’s Muhurta Chintamani, (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1996). 101

Íåstr¥, Kapileßhvara.

102

N.P.Subramania Iyer, Kalaprakasika, the Standard Book on the Election (Mahoortha) System, (New Delhi, Asian Educational Services, 1991). 103

N.P.Subramania Iyer.

104

Ganapati Daivajna, (17th cent.), Muh™rtagaâpati˙, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). 105

M. Råmakrishna Bhat, Varåhamihiraís B®hat Saµhitå, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1992). 106

M. Råmakrishna Bhat.

107

M. Råmakrishna Bhat.

`




July, 2006



CHAPTER 9: PRESENTING A NEW PARADIGM IN EDUCATION I. MAHARISHI’S NEW PARADIGM OF EDUCATION In the preceding chapters all the textbooks that comprise the six Vedåãga have been examined. These are the first six of thirty-six branches of Vedic Literature to be read in sequence. The program of reading consists essentially in this sequence of syllables, this sequence of sounds that the student recites. This is the curriculum. Reading and pronouncing the syllables of the ancient Vedic Literature for their pure sound value, without regard to meaning, represents a new paradigm in education, at least in the Western world. Since the dawn of modern science and scientific method, and since the advent of the modern university system, the focus in Western education has been on teaching concepts. The question naturally arises as to how this new paradigm of education works, what is taking place in the process of pronouncing these texts. What is the inner dynamic that brings practical results through the process of pronouncing Vedic sounds? To answer this question, the process of reading will be examined on two levels, on the level of the texts, that means the flavors or purport of those texts as Maharishi has described them; and on the level of the syllables, the flavors or purport of the individual sounds of the Vedic texts that the student pronounces aloud. II. MAHARISHI’S VISION OF THE KNOWLEDGE CONTAINED IN THE SIX VEDÃõGA There are surface levels of meaning of a written text, and there are deeper levels. It is a common experience that if one reads a book when one is young, and then reads it again five, ten, or twenty years later, one is able to pick up much deeper, more profound

CHAPTER 9: VEDIC EDUCATION

592

meanings from the text. In the same way, Maharishi’s holistic vision of the full range of knowledge of the Vedic texts picks up the deepest and most useful meanings of the texts. These deeper meanings may not correspond directly to the explicit themes of the text, but take into account the overall flow of intelligence in the sequential unfoldment of syllables and gaps. The meanings that Maharishi ascribes to the various branches of the Vedic Literature are on the one hand, a deep and profound synthesis of all the explicit themes and surface values of meaning, for their collective import; and on the other hand, a representation of the abstract flavors of consciousness that the student experiences directly and immediately through reading the sequence of sounds and gaps that constitute the texts of that branch. Maharishi’s description of the purpose and function of each of the six Vedåãga in terms of specific qualities and transformations of pure consciousness provides a synthesis of this very diverse group of texts, showing them all to be the component parts of a single theme of human development. 1. Íhik∑hå: For the branch of Íhik∑hå, it is obvious that all the texts present through principles and examples, the rules for correct pronunciation of the Vedic texts. These rules of pronunciation, experienced on the surface level of meaning, do not unseat the deeper level of meaning characteristic of the Íhik∑hå texts, the unfoldment of the silence of Transcendental Consciousness. It is actually the experience of unbounded awareness that fundamentally upholds the correct pronunciation of the Vedic text1 and the effectiveness of the Vedic Mantra in the performance of the Yagya.2 The unfoldment of this silence in individual human awareness is the purpose, and deep purport of the texts of Íhik∑hå. Maharishi explains: Íhik∑hå is the name of education in the Vedic context. Íhik∑hå means to unfold.


593

. . . What is there to unfold? Silence, totality. . . . Everyone knows what silence means: You go into silence, inevitably, [in the] deep sleep state, but that is the state of complete unawareness, you are not aware of anything. Now the technique is to unfold what is there underneath the darkness of the night. To unfold what is there underneath the inertia—silence is also inertia—but you penetrate into the field of inertia and go beyond the silence of inertia, go beyond the silence of the night. . . . and that is in the transcendental field of consciousness, which is everyone’s consciousness, but only on the transcendental level, so with the practice of transcendental level one goes to that unmanifest field of life. Unmanifest field of life, there is vacuum there. All the . . . scientific investigations into the finer values through the physical approach from the gross value to the finer value to the finer value, you transcend all the values and come to deep silence, your awareness is faced with silence, and that silence is the basis of all dynamism, all sensory field of life, all the practical fields of life . . . That is the root of life. Íhik∑hå unfolds that.3 The silence that is the root of life, and the basis of all physical manifestations throughout the universe can be unfolded in human awareness through the regular experience of Transcendental Consciousness. When the knowledge is available that can unfold the infinite creative potential of Natural Law within individual awareness, then each new generation should be trained in that knowledge and technology. If the educational system could be Vedic, then no student would miss the opportunity to unfold his or her inner genius. Maharishi elaborates further on the characteristics of Vedic education: Íhik∑hå, education, Vedic Education opens that inner silence, lively field of Selfreferral consciousness. Lively field of Self-Referral consciousness opens to our awareness, and the awareness sees what is what. It sees what is there. And what is there means the field of total knowledge, Veda, is there. Ved, the field of total knowledge, the field of total knowledge is the field of the Constitution of the Universe. Constitution of the Universe, all the Laws of Nature that govern the universe with perfect order, and always Constitution of the Universe is Veda, and when human awareness, we call these days Transcendental Consciousness, from Transcendental Meditation, when it opens to that transcendental field, there is the world of administration, which is administering with most order, perfect order, all the diversity of action. So the action is we would now say properly governed, properly administered, through silence. Eternal silence, unbounded silence, in its nature has unbounded dynamism in it. This Íhik∑hå unfolds. Education should be to unfold [the] inner treasury of life. Treasury is something which helps you to do anything in the world, anything. Huge treasury, this is the


594

treasury of knowledge. Total knowledge is in Being, a unified state of intelligence, unified state of consciousness, Being. That means, everything unfolded. Silence unfolded, dynamism unfolded, and unfolded in such a way that silence is not able to shadow dynamism, dynamism is not able to shadow silence, silence is promotional to dynamism, dynamism is promotional to silence. That is why the unfolding quality of education described by the Vedic word Íhik∑hå, caters for both kinds of unfolding, that means intellectual . . . dynamic waves of total knowledge, and on the level of eternal silence, that there is no wave, silent ocean: Silent ocean and ocean with waves.4 2. Kalpa: Modern set theory discusses collections of items or objects, and these collections are called sets. A set that has no members, such as “The number of elephants in the room,” is called an empty set, or null set. This empty set, which has nothing whatsoever in it, is nevertheless the source of the number system, because from that simple concept of a set with no members, a null set, all the complications of diverse numbers can be built up. The null set has no members, but the empty set itself can be a member of another set; that other set now has one member, the null set. From nothingness, now the number one is brought to light. In this way, in modern set theory multiplicity arises from the empty set, arises from nothingness. Analogously, Íhik∑hå unfolds the pure silence of Transcendental Consciousness, which has no content, no object within it. It could be called a state of zero, a field of nothingness. Now, through transformations within that field of pure silence, relative qualities come into being, and through many levels of transformation, the entire world of diversity comes into being, all based on the transformations of the field of pure consciousness. The study of this field of transformation, properly founded on the field of silence that provides the substance of transformation, which is pure self-referral consciousness, gives total mastery over the phenomenal creation. These transformations are the subject of the Kalpa branch of Vedic Literature, a collection of texts dedicated to explaining all the diverse possible


595

transformations that become possible once the pure silence of Being, Transcendental Consciousness is unfolded in the awareness through Íhik∑hå. As Maharishi explains, Kalpa is the technology based on the science of Íhik∑hå: Now what happens when something unfolds? Unfolding is a process which transforms the thing. What it transforms? It transforms the awareness which is the nature of Being, which is the nature of consciousness itself. So the element of transformation is there. Now what is this? This is getting deeper into the fabrics of the constitution of the universe. Íhik∑hå is a constitution of the universe. What it leads to, and what is there actually, it is Kalpa. Kalpa is another word, Kalp means transformation, transformation mechanics, this can be translated to some extent by the word technology. Science is unfolded by Íhik∑hå, unfolded, zero is unfolded, and this unfoldment is in the nature of transformation. This transformation is called Kalpa.5 3. Vyåkaraâ: Creation is composed of layers, one within the other. On each level there are different laws of nature functioning, and on each level there are specific changes that can be brought about, specific transformations that are possible. The process of creation of an object—for example a thought, from the abstract field of selfreferral consciousness at the source of thought, goes through many different layers, and experiences different transformations at every step. Grammar explains in detail the different levels of transformation whereby the starting point, the Vedic root, expands and expands until it becomes the fully expressed Vedic word. Different transformations, such as the expansion of the root vowel, called V®iddhi, the addition of various prefixes and suffixes, the addition of case or conjugation endings, and the application of rules of Saµdhi, take place, each on its own level, in proper sequence, as the original root expands and progresses towards becoming a fully expressed word of the language. This process of expansion, which threads together the different layers of transformation until the abstract root or source becomes fully expressed, completely manifest on the surface


596

of life is a culmination of the process of unfolding brought out in Íhik∑hå and the process of transformation examined in Kalpa. Maharishi explains the role of Vyåkaraâ: Where there is transformation there is evolution, and evolution is detailed in the literature of Vyåkaraâ. That is Vyåkaraâ, that is this grammar, grammar of the Vedic words explains all those values which make evident the transcendental level which is being unfolded by Íhik∑hå, education unfolding that, putting them in terms of transformation, explaining them in terms of Vyåkaraâ, grammar.6 4. Nirukta: As the Vedic root expands to become the Vedic word, at each new level of expression, it becomes increasingly disconnected from the abstract field of all possibilities in Transcendental Consciousness which is its source. However, if the connectedness with the source were to be completely lost, completely forgotten, then the impulse of creation would lose its momentum, and the creativity would be checked. Nirukta provides the knowledge of the connectedness with the source at every step of expansion. Due to Nirukta, the dynamism of progressive layers of expansion do not overshadow the silence which is the reservoir of energy and intelligence giving rise to that expansion. Maharishi explains: Grammar is expanding, there is also a reversal of expansion. Reversal of expansion is when we see silence and dynamism together. When dynamism is seen emerging in silence, be careful that the silence is not lost to every forward step. Because silence is eternal, dynamism is activity, but that activity is not devoid of its source, not devoid of base, not devoid of silence, so the advancement further is not devoid of the connection with the source. The example is when you walk, you go forward, you expand. One foot goes forward, the other foot remains behind. The other foot goes forward, the one foot remains behind. This is just a very crude example. In this expansion, grammar, there is another hidden value in expansion, that is going back to the source, maintaining connectedness with the source. Silence is not lost. This is the speciality that when you unfold silence, the dynamism is not lost. When you are dynamism, the silence is not lost.7 5. Chhandas: Chhandas is a branch of knowledge that simply counts the number of syllables in the different Vedic meters. Vedic grammar starts with a monosyllabic Vedic root, and through progressive adding of syllables in the process of expansion of the


597

root, creates the Vedic word, composed of many syllables. Nirukta, on the other hand, starts with the multi-syllabic Vedic word, and indicates one or more mono-syllabic roots that are at the root of the expression of that Vedic word. In the flow of expression in the Vedic texts, both of these trends are lively and vital, drawing the expressed word out of the silence of the unmanifest gap, and then again locating the unmanifest silence in the dynamism of the expressed word. In between these two trends, there is the single meeting point, where grammar and Nirukta meet, and that is in the countable number of syllables. That meeting point, as Maharishi explains in the quote below, is like a river dashing against a mountain. The expansion of Vyåkaraâ meets the self-referral of Nirukta at the junction between the syllable and the gap that follows. In the relationship between the expressed syllable and the unmanifest gap, the emerging word and the submerging into silence are simultaneously lively. This is the speciality of the knowledge contained in Chhandas: And when there is a turning point, you go forward you go back, you go forward you go back, what are you doing? You are creating a whirlpool at the point of return. A stream comes and dashes against the mountain, and there it becomes a whirlpool. So going back and going forward, the returning point is a point, that point is lively in terms of both directions, emerging and submerging. This is Chhand. Chhand is a field of knowledge which deals with the meeting point of Vyåkaraâ and Nirukta. Chhand [is] that point. That [is] Total Knowledge at a point.8 6. Jyoti∑h: The culmination of all the knowledge of the Vedåãga is the knowledge of Jyoti∑h, which locates total knowledge of infinity on the basis of the silence of self-referral consciousness unfolded through the science of Íhik∑hå. When the individual Vedic syllable plunges into the unmanifest gap that follows it, it undergoes transformation in that field of silence and comes out as the next expression in sequence. In that moment of silence, in that gap, Maharishi explains that there is complete


598

knowledge of the entire sequence of expression, so that the transformation takes place on the basis of what has gone before, and all of what is yet to come in the overall expression of knowledge. The awareness that comprehends the whole field of expression, and computes the specific value required at that point has the total value of unmanifest silence unfolded in it. It has all the knowledge of transformation by which one syllable is transformed into another, it has all the knowledge of expansion described by Vedic grammar, and of referral back to silence described by Nirukta, as well as the knowledge of the countable numbers of expressed syllables that express the whirlpool where the expansion of grammar and the referral to silence of Nirukta meet. That special quality of awareness that incorporates all these values is called Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå. On the one hand, the status of all-knowingness characteristic of Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå has been defined in terms of knowledge of the unfolding sequence of the syllables of the Vedic texts, letter by letter and gap by gap. On the other hand, because the stages of expansion of the Vedic root according to the laws of Vyåkaraâ correspond step by step to the stages of expansion of the manifest object in creation to which the word corresponds, based on the intimacy of name and form in the Vedic language, the ability to locate the total range of sequential unfoldment of the syllables of the Veda in each point of the Vedic text is precisely the same quality of consciousness that locates the totality of events of an individual’s life in the characteristics of the birth time. This is why the quality of awareness called Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå is the culmination and supreme attainment of the study of the Vedåãga: Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå unfolds not only total knowledge of the Laws of Nature in the abstract, but practically applies that knowledge in terms of the minutiae, the daily happenings, events, comings and goings, successes and failures, weaknesses and inherent potentialities of the human condition. Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå is that level of consciousness which practically applies the infinite, eternal, pure consciousness which is


599

abstractly unfolded in Íhik∑hå, and progressively developed in each of the subsequent branches of the Vedåãga. Maharishi explains: Now total knowledge at a point is total knowledge of infinity, that is Jyoti∑h. Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå, it clarifies in the name itself, that it is a field of consciousness, which appreciating the point value of consciousness, simultaneously it is awake in the spread out value of point: Infinity, unboundedness. And that is Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå where you see totality, you know totality, and in the practical field, you know what this zero contains, you know by birth, just birth of someone, that is the birthtime. And all the calculations are there to predict all his future of life, hundred year, thousand year, whatever his span of life. Jyoti∑h is capable of calculating on what year what he'll do. And Jyoti∑h expresses if you do something wrong, then the wrong has to be prevented before it rises. . . . Prevention of problems, this is Vedic administration.9 This all-knowing quality of consciousness, while appreciating a point is at the same time capable of being awake to the broader context of the nearby surroundings, and the far distant cosmic environment: This quality of awareness is capable of performing action in the world that will not violate any law of nature on any level of creation, and will not violate the interests of the actor so that he will not create suffering for himself or for those around him. A doer who can fulfill his desires without injuring himself or others is acting in the light of knowledge, not in ignorance: This is the ideal characteristic of an educated man. Education should aim for this. The attainment of this quality of Jyoti∑hmat¥ prajñå is the fulfillment of everything one could hope to achieve through the

process of gaining knowledge. This is the shrine which the pilgrimage of education should aspire for. The speciality of Vedic education, which is Consciousness-BasedSM education, is that this long sought-for goal of education is attained, not by collecting facts and concepts, not by understanding individual laws of nature as discovered by modern sciences, but rather by culturing the nervous system of the student, refining the style of functioning of the student’s brain.


600

III. THE EDUCATIONAL STRATEGY OF MAHARISHI’S VEDIC EDUCATION This new educational curriculum comprises direct experience of the self-referral field of consciousness through the practice of the Transcendental Meditation technique and reading of the Vedic Literature in sequence. Both lay emphasis on culturing the nervous system of the student, developing the student’s brain. Maharishi teaches: Maharishi Vedic University holds the human brain physiology to be the hardware of a Cosmic Computer that can deliver anything through proper programming, unlike other universities, which are based on the concept that all knowledge cannot be gained by any one individual and therefore everyone is led to focus on specific fields of knowledge.10 The speciality of the Transcendental Meditation technique is that it directly gives rise to the experience of total brain functioning in the state of Transcendental Consciousness. In the state of Transcendental Consciousness, the individual experiences pure consciousness, consciousness awake in itself without any object of experience; it is a state of complete abstraction, often described as restful alertness. This experience cultures the brain to function as a whole: Maharishi insists that there is no other way to culture total brain functioning other than through the experience of Transcendental Consciousness, easily gained through the Transcendental Meditation technique.11 The reading of the Vedic Literature in Sanskrit has its own unique EEG signature, indicating increasing stabilization of the total brain functioning experienced through the Transcendental Meditation technique, but with eyes open.12 The strategy of Maharishi Consciousness-Based education is to implement both these technologies on a daily basis, to profoundly culture the human brain physiology, systematically awakening the inner genius of the student. This paradigm of education, which is consciousness-based education, Vedic education, promises dramatic benefits: 1) satisfying the thirst for knowledge in the student; 2) creating an ideal man, an individual competent to fulfill his own desires without injuring himself or others and without creating the ground for future suffering for


601

himself or others; and 3) finally, and perhaps most remarkably, raising individual health to the level of perfection, so that the individual lives not only free from disease, but is also capable of exploring the frontiers of longevity, expanding human life-span in the direction of immortality. This new paradigm of education is based on knowledge of how the human brain functions, and how the brain can be cultured for optimum functioning.13 Here is a remarkable synthesis, engineered by His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, bringing together the complete knowledge of Natural Law systematically presented in the ancient Vedic Science with the contemporary knowledge of human anatomy and physiology, and specifically, the organization and function of the brain. The result, Maharishi explains, is a program for enlivening the latent unbounded potential hidden in the consciousness and physiology of every student: Reading every aspect of the Vedic Literature as it flows and progresses in perfect sequential order has the effect of regulating and balancing the functioning of the brain physiology and training consciousness, the mind, always to flow in perfect accordance with the evolutionary direction of Natural Law. This training of the mind fulfills the purpose of education by fully training the student to think and act spontaneously according to Natural Law.14 The purpose of education is fulfilled by enlivening the inner genius of the student, enlivening the latent, untapped potential of the consciousness of the student, by enlivening total knowledge in the awareness of every student. Total knowledge is the proper foundation for multi-phased interdisciplinary action15—the foundation of success in every channel of endeavor. When Maharishi uses the term “Total knowledge,” he is referring to knowledge of everything. Everything means not just everything that is taught, or that could be taught, but all the Laws of Nature, and all of their expressions in the phenomenal world. The fulfillment of any aspiration, the achievement of any goal or desire depends on practical knowledge of innumerable aspects of life. The enquiry into all the point values of


602

knowledge necessary for success in action could be unending, if one proceeds on the path of mastering the diverse relative disciplines, math, physics, engineering, and so forth, one by one. Yet, even though the attainment of the requisite knowledge piecemeal, point by point is not a practical strategy for gaining complete knowledge, complete knowledge is nevertheless necessary for success in action. According to Maharishi, complete, total knowledge is easily attainable through Vedic Science. Total knowledge is available in its pure state in the self-referral consciousness of the individual, and it is available in its expressed values in the 40 branches of Vedic Literature. Maharishi explains that the knowledge how to create, and hence the knowledge of how to achieve anything is contained in the Vedic Literature: It is interesting to see that all aspects of the Vedic Literature answer all possible enquiries regarding the basic Creative Intelligence that promotes the transformation of singularity into diversity—the transformation of the unmanifest reality of consciousness into the manifest reality of diverse qualities of the universe—the transformation of Saµhitå into Âi∑hi, Devatå, and Chhandas—the transformation of consciousness into all possible expressions of consciousness within the field of its own self-referral singularity.16 The total knowledge at the basis of the whole creation, the infinite organizing power that has given rise to the diverse manifest universe is the source and the goal of Maharishi’s new paradigm of education that synthesizes the ancient knowledge of Vedic Science, and the modern knowledge of brain physiology. “Total knowledge”17 is at once the source of every manifest expression in creation, and the goal of living enlightenment, living life in light, living life in knowledge.

IV. SATISFYING THE STUDENT’S THIRST FOR KNOWLEDGE The student’s thirst for knowledge is only really satisfied when he gains complete knowledge, total knowledge. The speciality of the Vedic system of education is that the goal of knowledge is given first, at the very outset of the educational process, rather than at the end of a long and tedious search. The first package of knowledge contains the total


603

knowledge in seed form, containing all possibilities within its structure. This all-possibilities structure of total knowledge is then systematically unfolded as the educational program advances. Knowledge remains total at every step. In this way, the student is fulfilled for knowledge at all times, and has within his grasp the infinite organizing power at the basis of creation. Although modern physics has glimpsed the unified field of natural law in Theories of Everything, such as Superstring Theory, the knowledge of physics is not yet complete; research continues. Physicists cannot yet offer total knowledge to the student and thereby satisfy the student’s thirst for knowledge. The same is true in chemistry, biology, and indeed, in all the modern scientific disciplines. The ultimate has not been reached in any discipline, and so there is no discipline that can satisfy the thirst for total knowledge in the student. However, in contrast to the ongoing mission of research in all of the fields of knowledge, Vedic Science, Maharishi contends, is a complete and perfect science of life.18 The ongoing research project in Vedic Science is for every individual to explore, verify and authenticate for himself the complete knowledge that is contained in the Vedas and the Vedic Literature. The sound “A” is the master key to opening the treasury of total knowledge within the individual awareness. Maharishi quotes an expression in the Vedic Literature, that affirms that, “All of speech is contained in the letter ‘A.’ ”

ak;ro vw sv;R v;k™ akåro vai sarvå våk19

“A” is the first sound of the Âik Veda, which begins

aô…¶mIÿ¬π puûroihÿt' yÖDSyÿ deÖvmOû‚Tvjÿm( agnim ¥¬e purohitaµ yajñasyadevam ®tvijam “A” is the seed of total knowledge of Veda, which unfolds sequentially, syllable by syllable from its first expression, always remaining connected to the total knowledge


604

contained in the first expression. Maharishi calls “A” the one syllable expression of the Constitution of the Universe.20 That is to say, the total knowledge at the basis of creation, the constitution or set of laws by which creation is carried forward, has according to Vedic Science, a compact, concise one-syllable expression, that contains in seed form all the knowledge of creation, and that is “A.” What makes Vedic education simple and comprehensible, making it easy for even a child to master total knowledge in a short time, is that the sound “A” is the sound of the pure consciousness of the student, the inner Self of the student, reverberating. The inner Self, the Transcendental Consciousness that lies deep within the awareness of every individual, is called Ãtmå, in Sanskrit. The Ãtmå is a flow of “A.”21 The process of unfolding total knowledge from within “A” is simultaneously and significantly the process of unfolding total knowledge within the Self of the child, within the self-referral consciousness of the individual. Vedic education starts with the knowledge of the Self, and it continues to unfold total knowledge as the reverberations of the student’s own consciousness. “A” is the master key of total knowledge because it provides entry into the technologies of consciousness, the principles of the dynamism of Natural Law which unfold infinite organizing power within the simplest form of human awareness. IV. EIGHT FUNDAMENTAL TECHNOLOGIES OF CONSCIOUSNESS The technologies of consciousness, which are contained in seed form within “A,” are called Svara. As was seen in Chapter 2 of this dissertation, Svara means literally the “Ra” of “Sva,” the reverberation (“Ra”) of the Self (“Sva”).22 The Svara, the reverberations of the Self, are the vowels of the Vedic language. For all the Veda and the Vedic Literature, every syllable has a vowel, a Svara. The vowels in Sanskrit are eight in number, and these are the fundamental technologies of consciousness, the principles of dynamism of Natural Law. They are “A,” “I,” “U,” “Âi,” “L®i,” “E,” “O,” and “Aµ.” These were introduced in Chapter 2, where the alphabet was first described, but here


605

they are important as technologies of consciousness. “When we understand them in terms of the total field of knowledge,” Maharishi explains, “then these eight are the eight qualities of dynamism: Eight technologies or eight dynamic values within one holistic dynamic value of ‘A.’ ”23 The eight Svara represent the eight somersaults of “A,” as “A” transforms itself systematically and sequentially from infinity to point, in the expression “AK,” the first syllable of Âik Veda.24 Maharishi explains how the expressed sound “A” in the first syllable of Âik Veda progressively minimizes in eight steps as the sound “A” collapses onto a point: Very gradual(ly) mantra, solid sound, loses [the] solidity of the sound, and sequentially becomes unmanifest sound: “A” loses its totality gradually, and in eight somersaults . . . it gets to “Ma,” point value.25 How do these simple sounds convey the dynamics of total knowledge? According to Maharishi Vedic Science, the Svara encapsulate the total dynamism of Natural Law at the basis of creation. The Svara are not only the fundamental sounds of the Vedic Alphabet, but also the organizing principles by which the fabrics of Natural Law are sequentially unfolded from within the Unified Field of all the Laws of Nature, the simplest form of awareness which is the self-referral consciousness of every individual. The eight Svara, seen as the somersaults, the sequential steps of the collapse of “A” to “Ka” in the first expression of Âik Veda, unfold the inner dynamics by which total knowledge is gained in the educational program of reading the Vedic Literature. Uncovering the true significance of the eight Svara, significance which is upheld through all of their expressions in all the branches of Vedic Literature, it can now be understood how it was said in ancient times that Råm, the son of Raghu, the hero of the Råmåyana, went to his teacher, Vasi∑hˇha, and gained total knowledge in a short time. Maharishi explains: What I am indicating is how in short time the whole knowledge is gained. In the history of Råm, Råm went to his teacher and got total knowledge in short time. Total knowledge in short time is the quality of self-referral characteristic of the basis of all language.26


606

These eight Svara unfold the infinite dynamism of Natural Law in human awareness. 1A. The Svara “A,” Parå Prak®iti. The eight somersaults of “A” are called eight Prak®itis, or Aparå Prak®iti—these eight somersaults constitute the divided Nature of “A.” Contained within the sound “A,” there is first of all its undivided Nature, like the roar of the marketplace from a distance, in which one cannot distinguish individual voices. That undivided Nature of “A” is called Parå Prak®iti. The Svara “A” in its undivided state presents total knowledge, the embodiment of the Parå Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of the Parå Prak®iti is the first Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Parå Prak®iti is expressed in the 192 neuronal fibers within the brain and the peripheral nervous system, which together make up the principle nerves of the human nervous system. 1B. The Svara “A,” Aparå Prak®iti. With regard to the divided nature of A, the Aparå Prak®itis, ìA” is again the first of the eight Svara. Maharishi explains that the vowel “A” is defined by the words Akhaˆ∂a, Ananta, and Apåra.27 Khaˆ∂a means having chasms, gaps, or breaks; it comes from the root khaˆ∂, to break, divide.28 Thus A-khaˆ∂a, with the negative prefix, “A,” means continuous, unbroken, not fragmentary, whole. The word Ananta comes from the negative prefix “An,” together with “anta,” meaning “End, limit, boundary, term.”29 Ananta therefore means, “Endless, boundless, eternal, infinite.” Apåra means not having an opposite shore, boundless, unbounded. It is made up of the negative prefix, “A,” plus Påra, meaning, “The further bank or shore or boundary, and bank or shore, the opposite side, the end or limit of anything, the utmost reach or fullest extent.”30 Maharishi sums up all the meanings that define “A” with one word, infinite.31 The flow of the infinite unbounded fullness of the Self has all possibilities within it: “A” contains everything, all the Svara are in “A,” total Vedic Literature is in “A,” total speech is in “A,” “A,” silence flowing, is there at the beginning


607

and at the end of every expression of the Veda.32 “A” is said even to be the most basic syllable of all the 7000 languages of the world.33 Fundamentally there is one value, and then one becomes two and two becomes three, and three becomes four, and four becomes five, becomes six and seven, eight values. . . . This is the origin of the alphabets, the origin of sound in specific quantities of vowels and consonants. [There are] eight vowels, and all these eight vowels are inherent in the first vowel. And sequentially they emerge. This is the emergence, sequential emergence of variety: Eight varieties, eight qualities, eight natures, eight values emerging from one value “A.”34 The Svara “A” is the first somersault of A in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “K” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “A,” representing infinite unbounded silence, is the embodiment of the Ãkåßha tattva, the space element or Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of Ãkåßha Prak®iti is the sixth Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Ãkåßha is expressed in the joints, and in the gaps in the physiology, as for example the synaptic gaps.35 2. The Svara “I.” As from a distance, the bustle of an active marketplace seems to be a roar, a cacophony of sound in which nothing can be distinguished, but as one approaches nearer and nearer to the marketplace, one begins to be able to distinguish voices and sounds within that bustling roar, so also as one investigates into the nature of “A,” one begins to distinguish its component parts. In this way, the seer Madhuchhandas, in cognizing the first syllable of Âik Veda, “A,” saw the infinity, the wholeness of total knowledge in “A”; and at the same time he saw the flow of that wholeness. Wholeness is on the move, wholeness is flowing, and that flow is expressed in the second sound, the second Svara, “I.” “I” is said to be the sound of total dynamism, because it is the last sound of Âik Veda: Âik Veda ends with va˙ susahåsati.


608

sôm;ônmÿStu voô mnoô yq;ÿ vÖ" susôh;sÿit 4 samånam astu vo mano yathå va˙ susahåsati 4 Thus “I” is the culmination or goal of the entire flow of dynamism of Natural Law in Âik Veda—the entire flow of Âik Veda comes to fulfillment in the expression of “I.” Two distinct values can therefore be identified, the undifferentiated continuum of infinity— one might say infinite silence—expressed in the sound “A,” and the immensely varied dynamism of the Veda expressed in the sound “I.” Silence and dynamism together make up the wholeness of knowledge contained in Âik Veda. In the Upani∑hadic expression,

pU,Rmd" pU,Rimd' pU,;RTpU,RmudCyte pU,RSy pU,Rm;d;y pU,Rmev;vix„yte — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" p™râm ada˙ p™râm idaµ p™rˆåt p™râm udacyate p™râsya p™râm ådåya p™râm evåvaßhi∑hyate oµ ßhånti˙ ßhånti˙ ßhånti˙ P™râm ada˙ p™râm idaµ has been explained by Maharishi to signify that “A,” ada˙ is fullness, totality, and “I,” idaµ, the expression of dynamism, is fullness, totality. The words ada˙ and idaµ, usually recognized as pronouns, are being presented by Maharishi as Ad and Id, referring to “A” and “I,” infinite silence “A” and infinite dynamism “I.” In a similar way, there is a S™tra from the Yoga S™tra,

vO…ˇs;ÂPy…mtr]

v®itti sår™pyam ita˙ atra V®itti sår™pyam ita˙ atra, states that the self-referral consciousness, svar™pe avasthånam, described in the previous S™tra, has a circular motion, called V®itti. That circular motion, the flow within the self-referral consciousness, is “A” becoming “I,” and “I” becoming “A,” back and forth, over and over again. In this S™tra, Ita˙ stands for the Svara “I,” and


609

Atra stands for the Svara “A.” In this way, Maharishi concludes that “A” stands for total knowledge, and “I” total dynamism, the action principle: Between “A” and “I” there is total knowledge and the action principle based on that total knowledge. The Svara “I” is the second somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “I,” representing all motion, infinite dynamism, is the embodiment of the Våyu tattva, the air element or Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of Våyu Prak®iti is the fifth Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Våyu is expressed in the lungs.36 3. The Svara “U.” Maharishi explains that within the cognition of the first syllable of the Âik Veda, there is the infinite silence of “A,” and the flow of infinity, “I.” As “A” is being transformed into “I,” there is a process in which “A” is progressively minimized, and “I” is progressively expanding. “A” therefore is submerging, and “I” is emerging. There is a relationship between “A” and “I,” and this relationship points to a third quality. This submergence, or convergence of “A” that allows “I” to come forward, is a quality of hiding. “A” is being obscured by the hiding quality, and this makes it possible for “I” to emerge. This hiding quality represents a third Svara, the Svara “U.” Madhuchandas, the first seer of the Veda, in “A,” what he found? He heard “A,” its very obvious, to any one, “A,” means flow, flow means “I.” “I” is a flow of “A.” So in “A” he sees “I,” and when he sees “I,” what is simultaneously seeing, that “I” is emerging, and “A” is converging. So this convergence of “A” and emergence of “I,” so emergence of the dynamism, and convergence of the whole thing. This convergence is also a dynamic quality, but it is a quality to hide. “I” unfolds and “U” hides, these are the inner aspects of the language.37 Although emerging and submerging are reciprocal qualities, that value which brings about emergence is called Devatå, and that value which brings about submergence, hiding, is called Chhandas. The three fundamental Svara, “A,” “I” and “U,” correspond to Âi∑hi, Devatå and Chhandas, the defining characteristics of the Vedic S™ktas. Therefore, these three together, “A,” “I” and “U,” are the three fundamental Svara, the most fundamental sounds of the Vedic language.


610

The Svara “U” is the third somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “U,” representing the hiding quality, Chhandas, is the embodiment of the Tejas tattva, the fire element or Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of Tejas Prak®iti is the fourth Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Tejas, is expressed in the digestive system.38 4. The Svara “Âi.” The collective sound of the three fundamental Svara together, “A,” “I,” and “U,” presents a fourth sound, “Âi.” Because “Âiî encompasses all the three, “A,” “I” and “U,” corresponding to Âi∑hi, Devatå, and Chhandas, the knowledge of “Âiî is the total knowledge of Veda. The name of Âik Veda, “Âi-K” (or ìÂi-G,” taking into account the phonetic changes called Samdhi,) derives from “AK,” in which the three fundamental Svara “A,” “I” and “U,” are submerging together onto a point, “Ka.” The togetherness of “A,” “I” and “U” is expressed as “Âi.” Thus “AK” is “Âik.” Âik Veda is the Veda that expounds the total knowledge of the collapse of “A” into “Ka,” the completely elaborated details of the interaction of “A,” “I” and “U,” comprising the three fundamental values of Âi∑hi, Devatå and Chhandas. The Svara “Âiî is the fourth somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “Âi,” representing the togetherness or combined value of “A,” “I,” and “U,” is the embodiment of the Jal tattva, the water element or Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of Jal Prak®iti is the third Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Jal is expressed in the cardiovascular system, and the lymphatic system.39 5. The Svara “£ri.” The next step in the progressive collapse of “A” into “Ka,” takes the sound “Âi,” which is consciousness reverberating, and converts it into the reverberation of physiology. This is the Svara “£ri,” expressing the conversion of the flow of consciousness into the flow of matter, the flow of physiology.


611

The Svara “£riî is the fifth somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “£ri,” representing the conversion of the flow of consciousness into the flow of physiology, is the embodiment of the P®ithiv¥ tattva, the earth element or Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of P®ithiv¥ Prak®iti is the second Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of P®ithiv¥ is expressed in the bones and muscles of the body.40 6. The Svara “E.” The flow of physiology is an holistic flow, containing the complete range of knowledge that was lively in the flow of consciousness. The flow of consciousness was expressed in the V®itti or circular motion between “A” and “I,” representing infinite silence and infinite dynamism: “A,” the first sound of Âik Veda, and “I,” the last sound of Âik Veda.

The physiology, waking up to the full range of

expression of silence and dynamism in one structure, puts these two sounds together in one homogenous sound “E.” “E” thus represents the total sound of Veda awake in the physiology. The Svara “E” is the sixth somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “E,” representing the total knowledge of Veda, from “A” to “I,” awake in the physiology, is the embodiment of the Manas tattva, the mind Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of the Manas Prak®iti is the seventh Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Manas is expressed in the hypothalamus and endocrine system.41 7. The Svara “O.” The Svara “O” is a further elaboration of the Svara “E,” in which the hiding influence of “A” comes along with “U”; the “A” and the “U” together make the homogenous sound “O.” The Svara “O” is the seventh somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The sound “O,” representing the combination of “A” and “U,” is the embodiment of the Buddhi Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package


612

of knowledge of the Buddhi Prak®iti is the eighth Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Buddhi is expressed in the thalamus, the organ within the brain responsible for controlling and governing the flow of sensory inputs.42 8. The Svara “Aµ.” The Svara “O” collapses and becomes a point, the point of consciousness. In this way, “A” collapses into a point “Aµ.” This is the furthest extremity of Ãtmå—Ãtmå, the Self, is the collapse of “A” onto its own point “Ma.” In this eighth Svara, the expression of the vowels is complete, and the total range of Sva-Ra, the reverberations of the Self, the Svara have been completely unfolded. The Svara “Aµî is the eighth somersault of “A” in the eight-fold collapse of “A” into “Ka” in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The Svara “Aµî presents the point value of consciousness, the embodiment of the Ahaµkåra Prak®iti. The fully elaborated package of knowledge of the Ahaµkåra Prak®iti is the ninth Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. In the human physiology, the knowledge of Ahaµkåra is expressed in the brain and the immune system.43 Point of consciousness “Aµî becomes point of physiology, “Ka.” Maharishi explains these eight somersaults of “A” as the transformations that are taking place in the gap between “A” and the full stop of “A,” the consonant “Ka.” The final step in the collapse of infinity, “A,” onto its own point, is the transformation of the point of consciousness “Aµ,î into the point of physiology, “Ka.” First step of unfoldment is that “A” becomes gap. “AK,” “A” becomes “K.” So between “A” and “K” is unmanifest, this unmanifest is the gap, and in this gap transformation takes place, transformation of “A” into “I” into “U,” “A,” “I,” “U,” and “Ri,” “L®i,” “E,” “O,” and “Aµ,” comes to a point. So these eight somersaults in the gap of the first word of the Veda gives us a very clear perspective of how transformation takes place, and how all transformations from infinity to point take place, in the first gap of the Rig Veda. “A,” “Ka,” “NI,” between “A” and “Ka,” all these somersaults. So what is in the nature of it? In the nature of it is “A,” is fullness, fullness has a quality of “A,” has a quality of “I” expressed, and has a quality of “U” which makes it unmanifest. So “A” immediately becomes a gap. So the word and the gap, the word and the gap, the word and the gap, both different qualities, are defined in terms of Veda. What is


613

Veda? Veda is “AK.” “A” expressed, and unexpressed value immediately after “A” till it becomes “K.”44 The pure Anusvåra was described in Chapter 2 as a voiced sound involving only the Nåsika and no oral articulation. The mouth is kept naturally closed without forming any particular articulation and the air is allowed to pass into the nasal cavity. As “A” collapses into “K,” the closing of the glottis restricts the passage of air more and more until just before the final collapse when the sound is completely choked off, there is a moment when the passage of air into the mouth has been blocked, but there is still movement of air into the nose, and there is still voiced sound. This is the expression of the somersault of “Aµ.” When this somersault is complete, then the voiced sound is completely cut off, and the sound “A” has become completely unmanifest. At that moment, when even the point of “Aµ” is dissolved, “A” has become a “gap.” When the eight somersaults of the collapsing “A” are complete, “A” has become completely unmanifest. Then the unvoiced silence of “Ka” takes over. In that momentary gap between the final collapse of “Aµ” and the beginning of “Ka” there is a transformation, Maharishi explains, between the point of consciousness, “Aµ” and the point of physiology, “Ka.” These two diametrically opposite values, consciousness and physiology, are brought into relationship with each other as the eternal continuum of flow of the sound “A” sequentially cones down to become the non-moving, non-flowing stillness of a point. In the gap, the “unexpressed value immediately after “A,”” there is the birth of speech, where consciousness reverberates in terms of physiology, generating flow and stop, vowels and consonants, syllables expressing the junction point between consciousness and physiology. The vision of speech which Maharishi is presenting is the flow of intelligence expressed in terms of the eternal relationship between infinity and point, between silence and dynamism, between consciousness and physiology, between vowels and consonants.45


614

The recognition of the junction point between “A” and “Ka” as the fountainhead of all speech identifies Madhuchhandas as the seer of a theory of sound which His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi is now reviving as a comprehensive science of Sanskrit phonetics on a cosmic scale. The eight somersaults of the collapse of “A” into the silence of the gap, and the transformation in the gap into the point of physiology presents a vision in seed form of the organizing power at the basis of all creation. This is the dignity of the cognition by Madhuchhandas of the dynamics of transformation contained within the first syllable of Âik Veda, “AK.” The Eight Svara in Terms of the Eight Prak®iti. These eight somersaults of “A,” embodied in the eight Svara, encompass the entire knowledge of the mechanics of creation: They are, in the light of the cognition of Rishi Madhucchandas, the fundamental technologies whereby stars, galaxies, even the whole universe is created out of the empty space. They are, Maharishi asserts, “The syllables of life.” The eight somersaults present step by step, the complete knowledge of each of the eight Prak®iti in turn. The eight Prak®iti are the fundamental constituents of creation. Lord K®i∑hâ explains in the Bhagavad G¥tå:

.U…mr;poånlo v;yu" %' mno bu≤ırev c ah'k;r îtIy' me ….•; p[’itr∑/; 4 Earth, water, fire, air, space, mind, intellect and Ego, this is my eight-fold divided Nature (Prak®iti).46

Maharishi has explained that these eight Prak®iti are fundamental themes of the Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda. The first Maˆ∂ala expounds the comprehensive knowledge of Nature, Prak®iti, in its undivided state. Maˆ∂ala two through nine describe each of the eight Prak®iti, starting with Earth element, and the tenth Maˆ∂ala describes the Absolute, unmanifest value, which is called Puru∑ha in the Såµkhya system. Building on Maharishi’s analysis of the ten Maˆ∂ala of Âik Veda in terms of the eight Prak®iti, His Majesty King Nader Råm has correlated each Maˆ∂ala with an organ


615

system in the physiology. Thus, according to H.M. King Nader Råm, the Âik Veda contains the total knowledge of human physiology, organized along the lines of the eight fundamental elements called Prak®iti. The eight Prak®iti present a comprehensive system of categorizing the structure and function of human physiology. Dr. John Hagelin, a theoretical physicist, has explored fundamental parallels between the objective elements, Earth, Water, Fire, Air and Space, and the five fundamental spin-types in contemporaray Quantum Field Theories.47 According to Hagelin, the eight Prak®iti present a comprehensive system for categorizing all the force and matter fields at the basis of manifest creation. Summing together the viewpoints of these ancient and modern sciences in terms of the eight Prak®iti, it has been said that the universe is made up of these eight Prak®iti; the human physiology, a microcosm of the whole, is again made of these eight Prak®iti; and the eight Svara, the eight fundamental vowels of the Vedic language, express on the level of speech these same eight different values of Prak®iti. This gives a glimpse of how speech might be capable of “binding the boundless,”48 giving expression to the infinite dynamism of total Natural Law at the basis of creation. In order to fully appreciate the implications of every syllable expressed in Vedic language, one must be a theoretical physicist, and one must be a physiologist as well. The relationship between name and form, between sound and meaning in the Vedic language, has as its theater the entire manifest creation and its corresponding counterparts in the human physiology. Maharishi’s Revival of the Complete Knowledge of Vedic Phonetics, Íhik∑hå. The parallel between the individual physiology and the universe is the subject of a Vedic expression, “As is the individual, so is the universe.”49

yq; ip<@º tq; b[˜;<@º yathå piˆ∂e tathå brahmåˆ∂e


616

The relationship between the individual and the cosmos is the proper launching point of Vedic phonology, Íhik∑hå. In the science of Íhik∑hå as Maharishi is reviving it, the sounds of the Vedic Literature, properly pronounced in precise sequence can culture the human physiology towards perfection by expressing on the level of speech the selfinteracting dynamics of universal life. Maharishi’s new science of speech synthesizes the traditional knowledge of Íhik∑hå with the knowledge of physiology, physics and cosmology in one all-encompassing science of Total Natural Law, expressed in the Constitution of the Universe, Âik Veda, and encapsulated in the eight Svara located in the first syllable of Âik Veda.50 In the foregoing the broad outline of a science of speech based on the eight somersaults of “A” has been presented. As every Vedic syllable collapses into the gap and gets transformed into the next syllable, it progresses through eight somersaults, enlivening in its collapse each of the eight Prak®iti in turn.51 According to Maharishi, these dynamics of the gap are characteristic of the dynamics of the creative process in Nature, and are characteristic of the expression of speech in human physiology.52 As consciousness flows in the expression of the speech of the Vedic Literature, the different qualities of the eight Prak®iti are enlivened, from moment to moment, involving the entire physiology in a precise sequence of expression that spontaneously and naturally attunes the intelligence of the physiology to the order and intelligence in the whole of Nature, which Maharishi calls the Constitution of the Universe.53 Maharishi calls this flow of intelligence the self-referral dynamics of consciousness. Maharishi’s Vedic Science concludes that the four Veda and the thirty-six aspects of the Vedic Literature together structure the process of creation and evolution through the self-referral dynamics of consciousness, and render the process of creation to be the process of evolution; and this is how the mechanics of the everexpanding universe are administered by the self-interacting dynamics of the Veda and Vedic Literature, which are the self-interacting dynamics of everyone’s consciousness. . . . Now it is clear to us that the total organizing power of Natural Law, which is lively within the self-referral dynamics of Natural Law within the


617

GAPS and words of the Veda, is the reality of the self-referral Transcendental Consciousness of everyone.54 In this way, the program of the Vedic Literature Reading Curriculum, reading the Vedic Literature in sequence from beginning to end, is the showpiece of an holistic science of speech, that is capable of enlivening in the student the benefit of total knowledge of Natural Law. A vision of this grand synthesis of Eastern and Western sciences in terms of the self-interacting dynamics of consciousness and the transformations taking place in the gaps, the framework of a systematic science of speech, is shown in chart form in Maharishi Vedic University: Celebrating Perfection in Education.55 However, it is not necessary to devote many years of study in physics, math, and physiology, in order to appreciate Maharishi’s synthesis of the modern scientific disciplines in this new revival of Vedic phonetics: There is a shortcut. In order to take full advantage of the Vedic science of phonology to benefit personal life, one needs only to learn how to properly pronounce the 52 letters of the Vedic alphabet, and then begin to read the texts of the Vedic Literature in sequence. Maharishi’s revival of Íhik∑hå systematically applies to practical life the whole depth and breadth of the ancient Vedic wisdom with a simple technique that is within the reach of everyone. Harnessing the Syllable as a Technology of Consciousness. While it has been seen that these Svara encapsulate the total knowledge of creation, that they are “syllables of life,” embodying the knowledge of the Constitution of the Universe by which Nature governs the whole creation, it is actually not sufficient merely to read the Vedic Literature in sequence. This is because these eight Svara, containing within themselves the seeds of all creation, are not objective, manifest sounds: They are transformations of the unmanifest, and that means transformations within the Transcendental Consciousness of every individual. They cannot be known or realized by reading alone, without cultivating the requisite state of Being. Total brain functioning cannot be gained without direct experience of Transcendental Consciousness.56 Reading the Vedic Literature is of


618

no use to the individual who has not opened the windows of his own inner unbounded awareness through the practice of the Transcendental Meditation technique. This is because the Constitution of the Universe, expressed as the reverberations of the Self, the Svara, can only be known on its own level. The Svara can only be comprehended and made use of by someone who is open to experience of his own pure consciousness, his own Self. The Svara are to be grasped and experienced on their own level, by Being them. This is the import of the Âicho Ak∑hare verse, described in Chapter 2, which exclaimed, “He who does not have that level of consciousness, what can the hymns of the Veda accomplish for him?” Culturing of the awareness is a corequisite of the program of reading the Vedic Literature. Between the eight Svara of Vedic language, properly pronounced, in perfect sequence, by an individual who has gained pure consciousness, and the every day expressions in all the 7000 languages of mankind on earth, there is a junction point between the universal expression of total Natural Law and its individual manifest expression. Maharishi says: All these varying values of the vowels and consonants of the language: They are the junction point of the individual consciousness and Cosmic Consciousness. Here is the meeting point of the Absolute Order in the universe and the disorder— or, we can say, order—in terms of the individual. Order in terms of the Cosmos— ever-expanding—and order of the individual. And individual means either a destroying tendency or a supportive tendency, either Truth or untruth, either ugliness or purity. The meeting point of the two constitutions: constitution of the individual and Constitution of the Universe—the meeting point of them is the meeting point of the Cosmic Order, Eternal Cosmic Order, and eternal disorder on the individual. That is the meeting point of the cosmic reality and individual reality—Universal Consciousness and individual consciousness.57 The syllable, Maharishi explains, is the meeting point of the individual and the universal. Everyone is already speaking and acting, but their speech and their action is not the infinitely orderly expression of the Constitution of the Universe. Instead their speech and action is the expression of disorder—individual desires and actions that do


619

not take into account the total knowledge of creation, that are not spontaneously in accordance with the needs of the family, society, nation, world and universe as a whole. If one could train the individual awareness to function in accordance with the Constitution of the Universe, then the individual could participate in the Cosmic Order, in the Purity of Universal Existence, in his every thought, speech and action. This is the program supplied by Vedic education. Vedic education makes use of the perfect orderliness of the Vedic sounds, the Svara, pronounced in proper sequence in each of the texts of Vedic Literature. These eight technologies of consciousness are complementary to the technology that directly cultures the individual awareness to come in tune with the Universal field of Cosmic Order, through the experience of Transcendental Consciousness, the simplest form of human awareness, easily gained through the practice of the Transcendental Meditation technique. The complete knowledge of the mechanics of creation is accessible by virtue of the characteristics of each letter, each Svara, but only in the proper context of experiencing the sounds as the reverberations of the Self, the reverberations of Transcendental Consciousness, opened to the awareness during the practice of the Transcendental Meditation and TM-Sidhi programs. That is why the practice of the Transcendental Meditation and TM-Sidhi programs is corequisite to the program of reading the Vedic Literature in sequence. There is a program to harness the full organizing power of the syllable, and that is the formula of Vedic education, “Close the eyes and transcend, and open the eyes and read the Vedic Literature.”58 This is a comprehensive technology that enlivens the infinite creative potential, the latent inner genius of every individual by handling the junction point of individual and universal, the junction point between the individual constitution and the Constitution of the Universe, the syllable. The individual unit of speech, the letter of the alphabet, has been learned by rote since early childhood. And yet, that same syllable sits at the junction point between the individual and the Universal Cosmic


620

Existence, because that same syllable can be aligned with man-made law and man-made order, or aligned with Cosmic Law and the Constitution of the Universe. This junction point is the target of Vedic education. The awakening of pure knowledge, along with the infinite organizing power of Natural Law, with its eight distinct technologies, all operating within the consciousness of the student of Vedic Science, can be accomplished in a short time, by making use of these two programs, the direct experience of the self-referral field of consciousness through the practice of the Transcendental Mediation and TM-Sidhi programs, and reading the Vedic Literature in sequence in the language of Natural Law, the language of the eight Svara, the ancient Vedic Sanskrit language. These programs combined in one educational curriculum will present to the student total knowledge at every step of his education, so that at every turn, throughout his educational career, his thirst for knowledge will be satisfied. V. CREATING PERFECT HEALTH AND RESEARCHING IMMORTALITY In Maharishi Vedic Science, health is defined as Svåsthya, establishment in the Self. The Self that is intended to be the platform of health is not the individual ego, but rather the broad, unbounded Nature of the higher Self, the cosmic Nature of man. This inner Self is described in the Bhagavad G¥tå as undecaying and immortal. Chapter 2, verse 20 says:

n j;yte im[yte v; kd;…c•;y' .UTv; .…vt; v; n .Uy" ajo …nTy" x;êtoåy' pur;,o n hNyte hNym;ne xrIre na jåyate mriyate vå kadåcinnåyaµ bh™två bhavitå vå na bh™ya˙ ajo nitya˙ ßåßvato'yaµ puråô na hanyate hanyamåne ßar¥re “He is not born, nor does he ever die, nor once having been does he ever cease to be. The Self is Unborn, eternal, everlasting. . . .” This quality of eternity is the playground of life; Maharishi says, that according to the Veda, life is infinity, life is immortality. The


621

standard of health in Maharishi Vedic Science is not merely freedom from disease, but also freedom from the grip of the aging process: Healthy is he who is immortal, who is not decaying. The field of health encompasses the knowledge of human physiology and how it functions; but it has been shown that the Svara of the Vedic language may be correlated with the different organ systems of the human physiology: The Svara encompass within themselves the seeds of total knowledge of human physiology. Thus the Veda, whose every syllable contains one of these eight Svara, is an expanded package of knowledge of how the human physiology functions: The field of health is just the field of the Veda. All knowledge of perfect health may therefore be said to be contained in the first word of the Veda, “A,” and its elaboration in the gap following “A,” where the “A” progressively becomes unmanifest until it is completely lost in a point. So manifest value totality, “A,” and unmanifest value, where “A” changes into “Aµ,” and “Aµ” changes into “Ka.” These changes are there within the eternal non-change. This is the total knowledge of health contained in the first word of Âik Veda. In expounding the Vedic system of health care, Maharishi explains that the blueprint of perfect health, the textbook for the ideally functioning, undecaying human physiology, is located in the relationship of these eight Svara, contained in the first syllable of Âik Veda. The first syllable of Âik Veda, “AK,” is the seed of total knowledge which is elaborated in the ten Maˆ∂alas of Âik Veda, and further elaborated in the four Vedas, Âik, Såma, Yajur and Atharva, and even more elaborated in the 36 branches of Vedic Literature. This complete range of expression of Natural Law contained in seed form in the first word of Âik Veda, is the expression of the fabrics of the Self, which is nothing


622

other than the knowledge of immortality. The impulses of the Vedic Literature, telling its own story to itself, are the expression of immortality on its own level. Maharishi says, “This whole Vedic Literature is the definition, and we could now say the qualification of the unified state of immortality, eternity.”59 The Vedic Literature is the comprehensive Literature of the speech of Ãtmå: through all these words immortality is described. “Immortal,” Maharishi explains, “is the real value of life.” Science and technology of the Veda is the science and technology of creation, and this is science and technology of achieving and maintaining perfect health.60 Long life, Maharishi says, is the new destiny of perfection brought about by the inauguration of colleges of Maharishi Vedic Science around the world where the knowledge of the 40 branches of Vedic Science will be taught in their completeness. Long life is available on the level of the transcendental Being, the self-referral consciousness that lies deep within every human being on earth. Gaining knowledge of the eternity of the transcendent expressed in the Vedic Literature is the theme of Vedic education, the theme of Íhik∑hå. Íhik∑hå unfolds that quality of immortality which is already there latent within the Self of every individual. Unfolding the immortality that is already present in the blueprint of Vedic Literature—this is how perfect health and long life is achieved in the program of reading the Vedic Literature. VI. EDUCATION TO DEVELOP THE TOTAL BRAIN The possibility through Vedic education, Maharishi’s consciousness based education, is to raise every student to perfection. Every student should become the master of Natural Law, the master of creation. Every student should be able to fulfill his individual desires, and be able to participate in society as an ideal citizen, of maximum


623

usefulness to himself and to everyone around him. This means learning to use the full potential of the human nervous system, learning to harness the power of whole-brainfunctioning. With this end in view, with this possibility of perfection in education dawning, how each student spends his time in school becomes crucial: Is the time spent in culturing the brain, familiarizing the student with the different flavors of self-referral functioning of the whole brain? If, rather than enlivening the total brain, and learning to harness the infinite organizing power vested in whole-brain functioning, the student is engaged in learning concepts, his time is wasted; not because learning concepts in math or physics, grammar or literature is inherently bad, but in view of the opportunity presented to develop the total brain. Failure to avail of that possibility during the student years when the brain is most pliable, is regrettable. In terms of developing the full potential of the brain, concept-based education is not only a waste of the student’s precious time, it is fraudulent. Concept-based education actually creates functional holes in the brain by training the student to be satisfied with partial brain functioning. Therefore students at every level of school and college should enliven total brain functioning by practicing the Transcendental Meditation technique twice a day, and should spend as much time as possible reading the Vedic Literature in Sanskrit. V. MAHARISHI'S VISION OF IDEAL EDUCATION Maharishi University of Management's Vedicreserve website presents the entire Vedic Literature—ultimately about 60,000 pages—in sequence, in a consistent type-face, without distraction of commentaries or translations, and with all the texts arranged in proper order. This is the necessary foundation for immediate implementation of the most powerful technologies of education available in the world today—Maharishi's educational technologies which awaken the total brain of every student, giving every


624

individual access to his own unbounded inner resourcefulness. In this dissertation the history of the development of the Vedicreserve website has been reviewed in the context of the Doctoral Program in Maharishi Vedic Science at Maharishi University of Management; the Sanskrit alphabet has been examined in depth with special emphasis on the expositions by the ancient Íhik∑hå-kåra, the writers of the textbooks of Vedic phonetics; the individual textbooks that comprise the limbs of the Veda, the six Vedåãga, have been explored, presenting in brief the content of each text as well as the role of that quality of intelligence in human physiology as described by His Majesty King Nader Råm; and the textbooks have been presented in tabular format of all the remaining 30 branches of Vedic Literature, with their beginning and ending pages. (Please refer to Appendix 1.) Finally, in this last chapter, the theoretical underpinnings, the inner dynamics of the educational program of reading Vedic Literature have been examined. Maharishi's program to read the Vedic Literature from beginning to end is now seen to be fully actualized and completely accessible to everyone in the world through the WorldWide-Web. Maharishi describes the advantage of his Consciousness-Based Vedic Education in the context of describing the curriculum of the new International University of World Peace. He gives an inspiring vision of the fulfillment of education, the vision that is the guiding light of this dissertation: Every higher degree of knowledge will be just the expansion of Total Knowledge—which was out of awareness, which existed and is functioning in the universe. Its application is not to be designed anew. It’s not a design of human mind. It’s taking the functioning value of consciousness of the cosmic mind. . . . The International University of World Peace is not anything that is new that has been constructed by us—no. It is the old; it is the ancient—the ancient, eternal, old value of Total Knowledge that has been out of human awareness. And then our students—the future citizens, the present citizens of the world—are going to be lively in that field of Total Knowledge.


625

The curriculum of our International University of World Peace is a curriculum which is already in force. And where it is? It is available from beginning to end of the Vedic Literature. It starts with “A” and goes into “Ka” and “NI” and expanding value of sound. Expanding value of the language is the language that the totality blossoms in its magnitude, more and more. And these are the higher classes of our International University. And because this curriculum is just opening the awareness to the existing expanding realities, every student of our university will be opening his awareness to wholeness from the first day. And he opens that wholeness more, and enters into that more and more. So the wholeness that is there at every level of creation from point to infinity: that will be the direct exploration day by day by every student of our university. It’s not that we’ll succeed. It is that we put ourselves on the escalator of success, which is always going on and on and on—going on from point to infinity. In the point: the curriculum explains the totality of Natural Law in the point—in two points, two fullnesses; three points, three fullnesses; four points, fullnesses. This is how sequentially developing awareness of the already existing, functioning cosmic government with—that will be owned by every student of our University. Every student of our University will be a lighted lamp of Total Knowledge from the very first day. Second day: again something—the same Total Knowledge blossoming more, the same Total Knowledge blossoming more, the same Total Knowledge blossoming more. We can think of an automation of increasing light in a lamp. These days, it’s possible to imagine. You put a switch on, and the switch lights a lamp: maybe one-watt lamp, and then next moment two-watt lamp, and a three-watt lamp, and four-watt lamp, thousand-watt lamp, million-watt lamp, trillion-watt lamp— increasing: the light increasing. But the whole light was there even in the first flame. And the intensity of light increases. As it comes up, it keeps on increasing, increasing, increasing, increasing. That is the curriculum of Total Knowledge right from the beginning, becoming livelier in the consciousness of every student, in the consciousness of all the students—thousands of students. And when they grow into their youth, the whole population of the world in increasing intensity of enlightenment—increased intensity of enlightenment. But the full flame is there right from the beginning. The flame increases in its fullness and fullness and fullness, like that, like that. And where does the flame of fullness of knowledge increase? It increases in the field of action. So the silence decreases, dynamism increases, until the awareness of the student meshes with the dynamism—with the silent dynamism—of the universal government, running in complete silence but in full enlightenment with the Total Natural Law: total value—infinite, unbounded, eternal, invincible value of Total Natural Law,

CHAPTER 9: VEDIC EDUCATION lighted at every stage of the student’s life, every day—every day the same fullness, more and more, and ultimately, more than the most.61

626


627

Notes: 1

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Vedic Study and the Science of Creative Intelligence, the source, course and goal of knowledge, Lesson 2: The Radiant Flowers of the Garden of Knowledge, videotaped course, (Interlaken, MERU, 1974). 2

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Philosophy of Yagya,” audiotaped lecture, (Engelberg, Switzerland: MERU, Nov. 11, 1973). 3

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, ìMaharishi’s Inaugural Address to the World Parliament on Íhik∑hå,î January 26, 2006, videotaped lecture, MERU, Holland. 4

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, January 26, 2006.

5


6


7


8


9


10


11

“Only the experience of Transcendental Consciousness makes use of total brain physiology.” Maharishi's Global News Conference, July 24, 2002. 12

Travis, F.T., Olsen, T., Egenes, T., & Gupta, H.K. (2001). Physiological patterns during practice of the Transcendental Meditation Technique compared with patterns while reading Sanskrit and a modern language. International Journal of Neuroscience, 109, 71–80. 13

The knowledge of how the brain functions is brought to light by modern phsyiological sciences, especially EEG and NMR studies showing the distinctive physiological changes that characterize different tasks. The knowledge of how to culture the brain for optimum functioning is drawn from the ancient Vedic Science. 14 15


Please refer to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “SCI and Interdisciplinary Study,” Lesson 28 of Science of Creative Intelligence Teacher Training Course, 33 lesson videotaped course, Fuiggi, Italy, 1972.


16

628


17

For further development of what Maharishi means by the expression, “total knowledge,” please refer to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1994), pp. 37ff. 18

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Vedic Science: the Perfect Science of Life,” in Conference on Science, Consciousness and Ageing, videotaped lecture, January 19, 1980, MERU: Seelisberg, Switzerland. 19

Hår¥ta Sm®iti 3:66.

20

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Inauguration of Worldwide Poverty Removal Program: Maharishi's Address,” in Establishment of the International Capital of the Global Country of World Peace in Geneva, Switzerland, videotaped lecture, December 1, 2005. Ãtmå is Ãt-må: Ãt is A with ablative ending, giving the meaning from A, so Ãtmå refers to the flow of A, the flow of consciousness from infinity to point, from A to Ma. 21

22

Maharishi Channel, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi's Global News Conference, videotaped lecture, December 3, 2003. 23

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahaesh Yogi, ìInaugural Address to the World Parliament on Education,î February 5, 2006, videotaped lecture, Vlodrop, Holland. 24

Maharishi explains that the first syllable of Rik Veda is “AK,” which through rules of internal Saµdhi is transformed from a hard unvoiced consonant to a soft, voiced consonant, in the word Agni. 25

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Inaugural Address to the World Parliament on Culture and Religion,î February 13, 2006, videotaped lecture, Vlodrop, Holland. 26

Maharishi Mahaesh Yogi, Feb. 5, 2006.

27

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Inaugural Address to the World Parliament on Health and Immortality,” February 9, 2006, videotaped lecture, Vlodrop, Holland. 28

Monier-Williams, Monier, A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, etymologically and philologically arranged with special reference to cognate Indo-European languages, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1995).

CHAPTER 9: VEDIC EDUCATION 29

Monier-Williams.

30

Monier-Williams.

31

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Feb. 9, 2006.

629

32

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Inauguration of Maharishi Vedic University: Maharishi's Address,” in Establishment of the International Capital of the Global Country of World Peace in Geneva, Switzerland, November 28, 2005, Vlodrop, Holland. 33

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Inauguration of Maharishi Vedic University: Maharishi's Address.” 34

Maharishi Mahaesh Yogi, Feb. 5, 2006.

35

Maharishi Open University, Nader, Tony, “Dr. Tony Nader presents Veda in Human Physiology as the knowledge to establish Ram Raj,” videotape, March, 1999, 42 min. 36

Nader, Tony, “Dr. Tony Nader presents Veda in Human Physiology.”

37


38


39


40


41


42


43


44

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Maharishi's Inaugural Address,” World Parliament on Law and Order, March 5, 2006, videotaped lecture, MERU, Holland. 45

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi’s Global News Conference, “The Whole Vedic Literature is the Sequentially Emerging Totality of the Self,” January 15, 2003. 46

Bhagavad G¥tå, Chapter 7, verse 4.


630

47

Hagelin, J. S. “Restructuring physics from its foundation in light of Maharishi's Vedic Science.” Modern Science and Vedic Science 3(1): 3-72, 1989. Also Collected Papers v5., Paper 430, p. 3701. 48

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Science of Creative Intelligence Teacher Training Course, “Lesson 25: SCI and Speech,” videotaped lecture, (Fuiggi, Italy: Maharishi International University, 1972). 49

Maharishi Open University off-the-air program slates show this traditional Vedic expression translated into many of the languages of the world. 50

The blueprint of this synthesis forms the subject matter of the book, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Maharishi Vedic University: Celebrating Perfection in Education, (India: Maharishi Vedic University Press, 1997). Please refer to for example, pp. 71 and 73, and the series of charts, “Celebrating Vision of Total Knowledge.” 51

A detailed study of this is available in terms of the sequential unfoldment of Âik Veda according to Maharishi’s Apauru∑heya Bhå∑hya, in Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1997), pp. 150–151 ff. 52


53


54


55

Please refer to Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1997), pp. 8ff, 52ff and 150ff.

56

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Total Brain Functioning versus Modern Psychology,” in Maharishi’s Global News Conference, July 31, 2002. 57

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi’s Global News Conference, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “The syllable is the meeting point between the Cosmic Constitution and the Administration of Individual Life,” January 26, 2005. 58

Quote from popular poster, based on Morris, Bevan, “The Value of Reading Vedic Literature: Dr. Bevan Morris Addresses the Guru Purnima Assembly,” July 17, 1994, audiotaped lecture, Maharishi International University, Fairfield, Iowa, and Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, (1994), p. 117. 59

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, February 9, 2006.

60

Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, February 9, 2006.

CHAPTER 9: VEDIC EDUCATION 61

631

Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, “Maharishi’s Global News Conference,” June 8, 2005.

`




July, 2006



ABSTRACT

The Vedicreserve website presents nearly 50,000 pages of consistently type-set Devanågar¥ text as an ordered, sequential program of reading of more than 300 heretofore scattered texts of the Vedic Literature that have been identified by Maharishi Maharishi Yogi as the essential components of a simple and universal curriculum of total knowledge. In this program, first proposed by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi in 1991, students read the entire Vedic Literature in sequence from beginning to end in Sanskrit. Practical benefits of this reading program have been verified in a series of dissertations at Maharishi University of Management. In this dissertation a model curriculum of reading the Vedic Literature is presented for the six Vedåãga, a group of texts encompassing the Vedic sciences of phonetics, Yajña, grammar, etymology, prosody, and Vedic astrology. Included in this model curriculum are samples of each text, description of the content and structure of each text, and presentation of the correlates in human physiology, based on the research of Dr. Tony Nader. Fifty-four Íhik∑hå texts and 72 Kalpa texts are reviewed; the A∑hˇådhyåy¥ is described along with five satellite texts; Nirukta, and its word list, the Nighaˆˇu, is described, the Piãgalachhandas-S™tra is presented as the textbook of Chhandas, the fifth Vedåãga, and 15 texts belonging to Jyoti∑h, Vedic astrology and astronomy, are described. In all, 150 texts belonging to the Vedåãga are described, and the proper sequence and program of reading is laid out.

iv

For the 30 remaining branches of Vedic Literature that students read, 180 individual texts are identified and referenced, and an overview of the structure and the beginning and ending paragraphs of each text is presented. Finally, the inner dynamics of the program of reading Vedic Literature is explained in terms of a revival of the ancient Vedic science of phonetics brought about by His Holiness Maharishi Mahesh Yogi. Locating all eight vowels (Svara) of the Vedic language in the first syllable of Âik Veda, Maharishi’s science of speech synthesizes the traditional knowledge of Íhik∑hå, Sanskrit phonetics, with the knowledge of modern physiology, physics and cosmology in one all-encompassing science of Total Natural Law.

`




July, 2006



APPENDIX I: Completing The Reading Curriculum: Darßhanas, Upaveda, Ãyurveda, Bråhmaâs, and Pråtißhåkhyas

Table of Contents of Appendix Darßhanas

664

Upaveda

686

Ãyurveda

742

Bråhmaâs Loop

758

Pråtißhåkhyas

1012

Upå‹ga

664

Branch 7: NyŒya Dar§hanam Structure: 5 Chapters with 2 divisions each. Beginning:

Ny;y dxRnm( p[qmoå?y;y" p[qm a;iˆk" p[m;,p[meys'xyp[yojnÎ∑;Ntisı;Nt;vyvtkúin,Ryv;djLpivt<@;heTv;.;sCzlj;iting[hSq;n;n;' tÊvD;n;i•"≈eys;i/gm" 1 du"%jNmp[viO ˇdoWimQy;D;n;n;muˇroˇr;p;ye tdnNtr;p;y;dpvgR" 2 p[Ty=;num;nopm;nxBd;" p[m;,;in 3 îiN{y;qRsi' nkWo≥Tp•' D;nmVypdeXymVyi.c;·r Vyvs;y;Tmk˘ p[Ty=m( 4 aq tTpUvk R ˘ i]iv/mnum;n' pUvvR CzπWvTs;m;Nyto Î∑' c 5 p[isıs;/My;RTs;?ys;/nmupm;nm( 6 a;¢opdex" xBd" 7 s i√iv/o Î∑;Î∑;qRTv;t( 8 a;TmxrIreiN{y;qRbiu ımn"p[v…O ˇdoWp[Te y.;vfldu"%;pvg;RStu p[mye m( 9 îCz;√πWp[yàsu%du"%D;n;Ny;Tmno il©m( 10 ce∑ie N{y;q;R≈y" xrIrm( 11 `[;,rsnc=uSTvK≈o];,IiN{y;i, .Ut>e y" 12 pOiqVy;pStejo v;yur;k;ximit .Ut;in 13 gN/rsÂpSpxRxBd;" pOiqVy;idgu,;Stdq;R" 14 buiı®pliB/D;RnimTynq;RNtrm( 15 yugpJD;n;nuTpiˇmRnso il©m( 16 p[viO ˇv;RGbuiıxrIr;rM." 17 p[vtRn;l=,; doW;" 18 pun®Tpiˇ" p[Te y.;v" 19 p[viO ˇdoWjintoåqR" flm( 20 b;/n;l=,' du"%m( 21 tdTyNtivmo=oåpvgR" 22 sm;n;nek/mo≥ppˇeivRpi[ tpˇe®plB?ynuplB?yVyvSq;tí ivxeW;pe=o ivmxR" s'xy" 23 ymqRmi/’Ty p[vtRte tTp[yojnm( 24 l*ikkprI=k;,;' yiSm•qe≥ buiıs;My' s Î∑;Nt" 25 tN];i/kr,;>yupgms'iSqit" isı;Nt" 26 s ctuivR/" svRtN]p[ittN];i/kr,;>yupgms'iSqTyq;RNtr.;v;t( 27 svRtN];iv®ıStN]eåi/’toåqR" svRtN]isı;Nt" 28 sm;ntN]isı" prtN];isı" p[ittN]isı;Nt" 29 yiTsı;vNyp[kr,isiı" soåi/kr,isı;Nt" 30 aprIi=t;>yupgm;ˇi√xeWprI=,m>yupgmisı;Nt" 31 p[itD;hetdU ;hr,opnyingmn;Nyvyv;" 32 s;?yindex R " p[itD; 33 ¨d;hr,s;/My;RTs;?ys;/n' het"u 34 tq; vw/My;Rt( 35 s;?ys;/My;RˇımR.;vI Î∑;Nt ¨d;hr,m( 36 ti√pyRy;√; …vprItm( 37

Upå‹ga

665

Branch 7: NyŒya Dar§hanam continued Ending:

p[itWe/åe ip sm;no doW" 48 svR]vw m( 39 p[itWe/ivp[itWe/e p[itWe/doWv∂oW" 40 p[itWe/' sdoWm>yupTe y p[itWe/ivp[itWe/e sm;no doWp[s©o mt;nuD; Svp=l=,;pe=oppÊyups'h;re hetiu ndºx R e prp=doW;>yupgm;Tsm;no doW" 41 îit p[qm a;iˆk" pçmoå?y;y" i√tIy a;iˆk" p[itD;h;in" p[itD;Ntr' p[itD;ivro/" p[itD;s'Ny;so heTvNtrmq;RNtr' inrqRkmivD;t;qRmp;qRkmp[;¢k;l' NyUnmi/k˘ pun®ˇ_mnnu.;W,mD;nmp[it.; iv=epo mt;nuD; pyRnyu oJyope=,' inrnuyoJy;nuyogoåpisı;Nto heTv;.;s;í ing[hSq;n;in 1 p[itÎ∑;Nt/m;R>ynuD; SvÎ∑;Nte p[itD;h;in" 2 p[itD;t;qRpi[ tWe/e /mRivkLp;ˇdqRindex R " p[itD;Ntrm( 3 p[itD;heTvoivRro/" p[itD;ivro/" 4 p=p[itWe/e p[itD;t;q;Rpnyn' p[itD;s'Ny;s" 5 aivxeWoˇe_ het* p[itiWıe ivxeWimCzto heTvNtrm( 6 p[’t;dq;Rdp[itsMbı;qRmq;RNtrm( 7 v,R£mindºx ≥ vi•rqRkm( 8 p·rWTp[itv;id>y;' i]ri.ihtmPyivD;tmivD;t;qRm( 9 p*v;Rpy;Ryog;dp[itsMbı;qRmp;qRkm( 10 avyvivpy;Rsvcnmp[;¢k;lm( 11 hInmNytmen;Pyvyven NyUnm( 12 hetdU ;hr,;i/kmi/km( 13 xBd;qRyo" punvRcn' pun®ˇ_mNy];nuv;d;t( 14 aq;Rd;p•Sy SvxBdºn punvRcn' pun®ˇ_m( 15 ivD;tSy p·rWd; i]ri.ihtSy;Pyp[Tyu∞;r,mnnu.;W,m( 16 aivD;t' c;D;nm( 17 ¨ˇrSy;p[itpiˇrp[it.; 18 k;yRVy;s©;Tkq;ivCzπdo iv=ep" 19 Svp=e doW;>yupgm;Tprp=e doWp[s©o mt;nuD; 20 ing[hSq;np[;¢Sy;ing[h" pyRnyu oJyope=,m( 21 aing[hSq;ne ing[hSq;n;i.yogo inrnuyoJy;nuyog" 22 isı;Ntm>yupTe y;inym;Tkq;p[s©oåpisı;Nt" 23 heTv;.;s;í yqoˇ_;" 24 îit i√tIy a;iˆk" îit pçmoå?y;y" îit Ny;ydxRnm( Reference: Vidyåbhu∑ana, Mahåmahopådhyåya Satißa Chandra, tr., The Nyåya Sutras of Gotama, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1975) [First published in 1913 by Panini Office, Allahabad.]

Upå‹ga

666

Branch 8: Vai§he·hika Dar§hanam--short Sªtra recension Structure: 10 chapters with two divisions each. Beginning:

vwxie WkdxRnm( p[qmoå?y;y" p[qm a;iˆk" aq;to /m| Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 ytoå>yudyin"≈eysisiı" s /mR" 2 t√cn;d;ª;ySy p[;m;y;' tÊvD;n;i•"≈eysm( 4 pOiqVy;pStejo v;yur;k;x' k;lo idg;Tm; mn îit {Vy;i, 5 ÂprsgN/Spx;R" s':y;" pirm;,;in pOqKTv' s'yogiv.;g* prTv;prTve buıy" su%du"%e îCz;√ºW* p[yà;í gu,;" 6 ¨T=ep,mv=ep,m;k⁄çn' p[s;r,' gmnimit km;Ri, 7 sdinTy' {VyvTk;y| k;r,' s;m;NyivxeWvidit {Vygu,kmR,;mivxeW" 8 {Vygu,yo" sj;tIy;rM.kTv' s;/MyRm( 9 {Vy;i, {Vy;Ntrm;r.Nte gu,;í gu,;Ntrm( 10 kmR kmRs;?y' n iv¥te 11 n {Vy' k;y| k;r,' c b/it 12 ¨.yq; gu,;" 13 k;yRivroi/ kmR 14 i£y;gu,vTsmv;iyk;r,imit {Vyl=,m( 15 {Vy;≈Yygu,v;Ns'yogiv.;ge„vk;r,mnpe= îit gu,l=,m( 16 Ek{Vymgu,' s'yogiv.;ge„vnpe=k;r,imit kmR l=,m( 17 {Vygu,kmR,;' {Vy' k;r,' s;m;Nym( 18 tq; gu," 19 s'yogiv.;gveg;n;' kmR sm;nm( 20 n {Vy;,;' kmR 21 Vyitrek;t( 22 {Vy;,;' {Vy' k;y| s;m;Nym( 23 gu,vw/My;R• kmR,;' kmR 24 i√Tvp[.tO y" s':y;" pOqKTvs'yogiv.;g;í 25 asmv;y;Ts;m;Nyk;y| kmR n iv¥te 26 s'yog;n;' {Vym( 27 Âp;,;' Âpm( 28 gu®Tvp[yàs'yog;n;muT=ep,m( 29 s'yogiv.;g;í kmR,;m( 30 k;r,s;m;Nye {VykmR,;' km;Rk;r,muˇ_m( 31 îit p[qm a;iˆk" p[qmoå?y;y" i√tIy a;iˆk" k;r,;.;v;Tk;y;R.;v" 1 n tu k;y;R.;v;Tk;r,;.;v" 2 s;m;Ny ivxeW îit bud?( ype=m( 3 .;voånuvˇO re ve hetTu v;Ts;m;Nymev 4 {VyTv' gu,Tv' kmRTv' c s;m;Ny;in ivxeW;í 5 aNy];NTye>yo ivxeW>e y" 6 sidit yto {Vygu,kmRsu s; sˇ; 7 {Vygu,kmR>yoåq;RNtr' sˇ; 8

Upå‹ga

667

Branch 8: Vai§he·hika Dar§hanam--short Sªtra recension continued Ending:

asm;iht;Nt"kr,; ¨ps'˙tsm;/ySteW;ç 13 tTsmv;y;TkmRg,u We u 14 a;Tmsmv;y;d;Tmgu,We u 15 îit p[qm a;iˆk" nvmoå?y;y" i√tIy a;iˆk" aSyed' k;y| k;r,' s'yoig ivroi/ smv;iy ceit lwi©km( 1 aSyed' k;yRk;r,sMbN/í;vyv;∫vit 2 Eten x;Bd' Vy;:y;tm( 3 hetru pdexo il©÷ p[m;,' kr,imTynq;RNtrm( 4 aSyed' bud?( ypei=tTv;t( 5 a;Tmmnso" s'yogivxeW;Ts'Sk;r;∞ SmOit" 6 tq; Sv“" 7 Sv“;iNtkm( 8 /m;R∞ 9 îiN{ydoW;Ts'Sk;rdoW;∞;iv¥; 10 t∂ë∑D;nm( 11 adu∑' iv¥; 12 a;W| isıdxRn' c /me>≥ y" 13 îit i√tIy a;iˆk" îit nvmoå?y;y" dxmoå?y;y" p[qm a;iˆk" î∑;in∑k;r,ivxeW;i√ro/;∞ imq" su%du"%yorq;RNtr.;v" 1 s'xyin,Ry;Ntr;.;ví D;n;NtrTve het"u 2 tyoinR„piˇ" p[Ty=lwi©k;>y;m( 3 a.UidTyip 4 sit c k;y;RdxRn;t( 5 Ek;qRsmv;iyk;r,;NtreWu Î∑Tv;t( 6 Ekdexe îTyekiSmiHxr" pOœmudr' mm;Ri, ti√xeWSti√xeW>e y" 7 îit p[qm a;iˆk" dxmoå?y;y" i√tIy a;iˆk" k;r,imit {Vye k;yRsmv;y;t( 1 s'yog;√; 2 k;r,e smv;y;Tkm;Ri, 3 tq; Âpe k;r,wk;qRsmv;y;∞ 4 k;r,smv;y;Ts'yog" p$Sy 5 k;r,k;r,smv;y;∞ 6 s'yˇu _smv;y;d¶evx ≥w ie Wkm( 7 Î∑;n;' Î∑p[yojn;n;' Î∑;.;ve p[yogoå>yudy;y 8 t√cn;d;ª;ySy p[;m;
Upå‹ga

668

Branch 8: Vai§he·hika Dar§hanam--long Sªtra recension. Structure: 7 chapters with 2 divisions each and 3 chapters (8 - 10) with no divisions. Beginning:

vwxie WksU]m( p[qmSy;?y;ySy p[qmm;iˆkm( aq;to /m| Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 ytoå>yudyin"≈eys…s≤ı" s /mR" 2 t√cn;d;ª;yp[;m;yo ivxeW>e y" 6 sidit yto {Vygu,kmRsu 7 {Vygu,kmR>yoåq;RNtr' sÊ;; 8 Ek{VyvÊv;• {Vym( 9 gu,kmRsu c .;v;• kmR n gu," 10 s;m;NyivxeW;.;v;∞ 11

Upå‹ga

669

Branch 8: Vai§he·hika Dar§hanam--long Sªtra recension continued Ending:

n;iSt `$o geh îit sto `$Sy gehs'yogp[itWe/" 10 n;STyNyíN{m; îit s;m;Ny;∞N{ms" p[itWe/" 11 sdstovw/R My;‹Tk;yeR sdsÊ;; n 12 a;TmNy;Tmmnso" s'yogivxeW;d;Tmp[Ty=m( 13 tq; {Vy;NtreWu 14 a;Tme≤N{ymnoqRs…•kW;R∞ 15 tTsmv;y;TkmRg,u We u 16 a;Tmsmv;y;d;Tmgu,We u 17 aSyed' k;y| k;r,' sMbiN/ Ek;qRsmv;…y ivro…/ ceit lwi©km( 18 Eten x;Bd' Vy;:y;tm( 19 hetru pdexo ≤l©÷ in…mˇ' p[m;,' k;r,…mTynq;RNtrm( 20 aSyed…mit buı‰pe=Tv;t( 21 a;Tmmnso" s'yogivxeW;t( s'Sk;r;∞ SmOit 22 tq; Sv“" Sv“;≤Ntk˘ c 23 /m;R∞ 24 î≤N{ydoW;t( s'Sk;r;∞;iv¥; 25 t∂u∑' D;nm( 26 adu∑' iv¥; 27 a;W| …sıdxRn' c /me>R y" 28 îit nvmoå?y;y" dxmoå?y;y" a;Tmsmv;y" su%du"%yo" pç>yoåq;RNtrTve hetSu td;≈…y>yí gu,>e y" 1 î∑;in∑k;r,ivxeW;i√ro/;∞ …mq" su%du"%yorq;RNtr.;v" 2 s'xyin,Ryyorq;RNtr.;ví D;n;NtrTve het"u 3 tyoinR„p·ˇ" p[Ty=lwi©k;>y;' D;n;>y;' Vy;:y;t; 4 .Ut…mit p[Ty=' Vy;:y;tm( 5 .iv„ytIit k;y;RNtre Î∑Tv;t( 6 tq; .vtIit s;pe=>e yoånpe=>e yí 7 a.UidTy.Ut;t( 8 sit c k;y;Rsmv;y;t( 9 Ek;qRsmv;…yWu k;r,;NtreWu dxRn;dekdex îTyekiSmn( 10 ixr" pO∑mudr' p;…,·rit ti√xeW>e y" 11 k;r,…mit {Vye k;yRsmv;y;t( 12 s'yog;√; 13 k;r,smv;y;TkmR…, 14 tq; Âpe k;r,k;r,smv;y;∞ 15 k;r,smv;y;Ts'yoge 16 tq; k;r,;k;r,smv;y;∞ 17 s'yˇu _smv;y;d¶evx Rw ie Wkm( 18 lwi©k˘ p[m;,' Vy;:y;tm( 19 Î∑;n;' Î∑p[yojn;n;' Î∑;.;ve p[yogoå>yudy;y 20 t√cn;d;ª;yp[;m;
Upå‹ga

670

Branch 9: SŒµkhya Dar§hanam Structure: 6 Chapters Beginning:

s;':y dxRnm( p[qmoå?y;y" aq i]…v/du"%;TyNtinvO…ˇrTyNtpu®W;qR" 1 n Î∑;ˇiTs…ıinRvˇO re Pynuv…O ˇdxRn;t( 2 p[;Tyihk=uTp[tIk;rvˇTp[tIk;rce∑n;Tpu®W;qRTvm( 3 sv;RsM.v;TsM.veåip sÊv;sM.v;ıey" p[m;,k⁄xlw" 4 ¨TkW;Rdip mo=Sy sv;RTe kWR≈tu "e 5 a…vxeWío.yo" 6 n Sv.;vto bıSy mo=s;/nopdex…v…/" 7 Sv.;vSy;np;…yTv;dnnuœ;nl=,mp[;m;y;' n;xKyopdex" 11 n k;lyogto Vy;ipno inTySy svRsMbN/;t( 12 n dexyogtoåPySm;t( 13 n;vSq;to deh/mRTv;ˇSy;" 14 as©oåy' pu®W îit 15 n kmR,;Ny/mRTv;ditp[sˇ_Éí 16 …v…c].og;nupp…ˇrNy/mRTve 17 p[’itinbN/n;∞e• tSy; aip p;rtN}ym( 18 n inTyxuıbuımuˇ_Sv.;vSy t¥ogSt¥og;Îte 19 n;…v¥;toåPyvStun; bN/;yog;t( 20 vStuTve …sı;Nth;in" 21 …vj;tIy√¯t;p…ˇí 22 …v®ıo.yÂp; cet( 23 n t;ÎKpd;q;Rpt[ Ite" 24 n vy' W$(pd;qRv;idno vwxie Wk;idvt( 25 an…ytTveåip n;y*…ˇ_kSy s'gh[ oåNyq; b;loNmˇ;idsmTvm( 26 n;n;id…vWyopr;ginimˇkoåPySy 27 n b;Á;>yNtryo®prJyoprÔk.;voåip dexVyv/;n;CΩflSqp;$≤lpu]Sqyo·rv 28 √yorekdexlB/opr;g;• VyvSq; 29 aÎ∑vx;∞et( 30 n √yorekk;l;yog;dupk;y;Rpe k;rk.;v" 31 pu]kmRvidit cet( 32 n;iSt ih t] ‚Sqr Ek;Tm; yo g.;R/;n;idn; s'iS£yet 33 ‚Sqrk;y;R…sıe" =≤,kTvm( 34 n p[Tyi.D;b;/;t( 35 ≈uitNy;y…vro/;∞ 36 Î∑;Nt;…sıeí 37 yugp∆;ym;nyonR k;yRk;r,.;v" 38 pUv;Rp;y ¨ˇr;yog;t( 39 t∫;ve tdyog;du.yVyi.c;r;dip n 40 pUv.R ;vm;]e n inym" 41 n …vD;nm;]' b;Áp[tIte" 42 td.;ve td.;v;CzUNy' tihR 43 xUNy' tÊv' .;vo …vnXyit vStu/mRTv;i√n;xSy 44 apv;dm;]mbuı;n;m( 45

Upå‹ga

671

Branch 9: SŒµkhya Dar§hanam continued Ending:

p[’ter;¥op;d;nt;NyeW;' k;yRTv≈ute" 32 inTyTveåip n;Tmno yoGyTv;.;v;t( 33 ≈uit…vro/;• k⁄tk;RpsdSy;Tml;." 34 p;rMpyeå≥ ip p[/;n;nuv…O ˇr,uvt( 35 svR] k;yRdxRn;i√.uTvm( 36 gityogeåPy;¥k;r,t;h;inr,uvt( 37 p[…sı;…/Ky' p[/;nSy n inym" 38 sÊv;dIn;mtımRTv' t{ÜpTv;t( 39 anup.ogeåip pumq| sOi∑" p[/;nSyo∑^k•⁄ mvhnvt( 40 kmRv…w c}y;TsOi∑vw…c}ym( 41 s;MyvwWMy;>y;' k;yR√ym( 42 …vmuˇ_bo/;• sOi∑" p[/;nSy lokvt( 43 n;NyopspR,åe ip muˇ_op.ogo inimˇ;.;v;t( 44 pu®WbÛTv' VyvSq;t" 45 ¨p;…/íeˇiTsı* pun√¯tR m( 46 √;>y;mip p[m;,…vro/" 47 √;>y;mPy…vro/;• pUvmR ˇu r' c s;/k;.;v;t( 48 p[k;xtStiTsı* kmRktR…O vro/" 49 j@Vy;vOˇo j@' p[k;xyit …c{Üp" 50 n ≈uit…vro/o r;…g,;' vwr;Gy;y tiTsıº" 51 jgTsTyTvmdu∑k;r,jNyTv;ä;/k;.;v;t( 52 p[k;r;Ntr;sM.v;TsduTp…ˇ" 53 ah'k;r" kt;R n pu®W" 54 …cdvs;n; .u…ˇ_StTkm;R…jRtTv;t( 55 cN{;idlokÉåPy;vO…ˇinRimˇs∫;v;t( 56 lokSy nopdex;iTs…ı" pUvvR t( 57 p;rMpye,≥ tiTsı* …vmu…ˇ_≈uit" 58 git≈utíe Vy;pkTveåPyup;…/yog;∫ogdexk;ll;.o Vyomvt( 59 an…/iœtSy pUit.;vp[s©;• tiTs…ı" 60 aÎ∑√;r; cedsMbıSy tdsM.v;∆l;idvd•re 61 ingR,u Tv;ˇdsM.v;dh'k;r/m;R Áete 62 …v…x∑Sy jIvTvmNvyVyitrek;t( 63 ah'k;rk]R/In; k;yR…s…ıne≥êr;/In; p[m;,;.;v;t( 64 aÎ∑o∫ÜitvTsm;nTvm( 65 mhtoåNyt( 66 kmRinimˇ" p[’te" SvSv;im.;voåPyn;idbIRj;•rvt( 67 a…vvekinimˇo v; pç…x%" 68 ≤l©xrIrinimˇk îit snNdn;c;yR" 69 y√; t√; tduæCz…ˇ" pu®W;qRStduæCz…ˇ" pu®W;qR" 70 îit Wœoå?y;y" îit s;':ydxRnm( Reference: Sinha, 1. Nandalal, The Samkhya Philosophy, New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1979). [Originally published in 1915 by Panini Office, Allahabad.] 2. Ballantyne, J.R., The SŒµkhya aphorisms of Kapila, (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1995).

Upå‹ga

672

Branch 10A: Yoga: Mahar·hi Pata–jali Praö´taµ Yoga Dar§hanam Structure: 4 Chapters. Beginning:

mhiWR ptÔ≤l p[,It' yogdxRnm( p[qm" p;d" aq yog;nux;snm( 1 yog…íˇvO…ˇinro/" 2 td; {∑ë" SvÂpeåvSq;nm( 3 vO…ˇs;ÂPy…mtr] 4 vOˇy" pçtYy" ÆKl∑;ÆKl∑;" 5 p[m;,-…vpyRy…vkLpin{;SmOty" 6 p[Ty=;num;n;gm;" p[m;,;in 7 …vpyRyo …mQy;D;nmt{Üpp[itœm( 8 xBdD;n;nup;tI vStuxNU yo …vkLp" 9 a.;vp[Tyy;lMbn; vO…ˇinR{; 10 anu.tU …vWy;sMp[moW" SmOit" 11 a>y;svwr;Gy;>y;' t…•ro/" 12 t] ‚Sqt;w yàoå>y;s" 13 s tu dI`Rk;lnwrNtyRsTk;r;se…vto Î!.U…m" 14 Î∑;nu≈…vk…vWy…vtO„,Sy vxIk;rs'D; vwr;Gym( 15 tTpr' pu®W:y;teg,uR vwt„O y;spUv"R s'Sk;rxeWoåNy" 18 .vp[Tyyo …vdehp[’itly;n;m( 19 ≈ı;vIyRSmOitsm;…/p[D;pUvk R îtreW;m( 20 tIv[sv' ge ;n;m;s•" 21 mOdmu ?y;…/m;]Tv;ˇtoåip …vxeW" 22 Èêrp[…,/;n;√; 23 KlexkmR…vp;k;xywrpr;mO∑" pu®W…vxeW Èêr" 24 t] inritxy' svRDbIjm( 25 s EW pUvWRe ;mip gu®" k;len;nvCzπd;t( 26 tSy v;ck" p[,v" 27 t∆pStdqR.;vnm( 28 tt" p[TyKcetn;…/gmoåPyNtr;y;.;ví 29 Vy;…/STy;ns'xyp[m;d;lSy;…vrit.[;≤NtdxRn;lB/.UimkTv;nv‚SqtTv;in …cˇ…v=ep;SteåNtr;y;" 30 du"%d;wmnR Sy;©mejyTvê;sp[ê;s; …v=epsh.uv" 31 tTp[itWe/;qRmk e tÊv;>y;s" 32 mw]Ik®,;muidtope=;,;' su%du"%puy;' v; p[;,Sy 34 …vWyvtI v; p[v…O ˇ®Tp•; mns" ‚SqitinbN/nI 35 …vxok; v; Jyoit„mtI 36 vItr;g…vWy' v; …cˇm( 37 Sv“in{;D;n;lMbn' v; 38 yq;….mt?y;n;√; 39 prm;,uprmmhÊv;NtoåSy vX;Ik;r" 40 =I,vOˇre ….j;tSyev m,egh[R ItOgh[ ,g[;ÁeWu tTSqtdÔnt; sm;p…ˇ" 41 t] xBd;qRD;n…vkLpw" s'k°,;R s…vtk;R sm;p…ˇ" 42

Upå‹ga

673

Mahar·hi Pata–jali Praö´taµ Yoga Dar§hanam continued Ending:

sÊvpu®Wyo" xu…ıs;Mye kìvLym( 55 îit tOtIy" p;d" ctuq"R p;d" 2 in…mˇmp[yojk˘ p[’tIn;' vr,.edStu tt" =ei]kvt( 3 inm;R,…cˇ;Ny‚Smt;m;];t( 4 p[v…O ˇ.ede p[yojk˘ …cˇmekmnekWÉ ;m( 5 t] ?y;njmn;xym( 6 km;RxKu l;’„,' yo…gn≤S]…v/…mtreW;m( 7 ttSti√p;k;nug,u ;n;mev;….Vy…ˇ_v;Rsn;n;m( 8 j;itdexk;lVyviht;n;mPy;nNty| SmO…ts'Sk;ryorekÂpTv;t( 9 t;s;mn;idTv' c;…xWo inTyTv;t( 10 hetf u l;≈y;lMbnw" s'ghO ItTv;deW;m.;ve td.;v" 11 atIt;n;gt' SvÂptoåSTy?v.ed;ım;≥,;m( 12 te Vyˇ_sU+m; gu,;Tm;n" 13 p·r,;mwkTv;√StutÊvm( 14 vStus;Mye …cˇ.ed;ˇyo…v≥.ˇ_" pNq;" 15 n cwk…cˇtN]' ce√Stu tTp[m;,k˘ td; …k˘ Sy;t( 16 tdupr;g;pe≤=Tv;≤∞ˇSy vStu D;t;D;tm( 17 sd; D;t;…íˇvOˇyStTp[.o" pu®WSy;p·r,;m;t( 18 n tTSv;.;s' ÎXyTv;t( 19 Eksmye co.y;nv/;r,m( 20 …cˇ;NtrÎXye bu…ıbuıre itp[s©" SmOits'krí 21 …cˇerp[its'£m;y;Std;k;r;pˇ;w Svbu…ıs'vde nm( 22 {„$OÎXyoprˇ_˘ …cˇ' sv;RqmR ( 23 tds':yeyv;sn;….…íˇmip pr;q| s'hTyk;·rTv;t( 24 …vxeWd…xRn a;Tm.;v.;vn;…vinvO…ˇ" 25 td; …vvekinª' kìvLyp[;G.;r' …cˇm( 26 tÆCz{eWu p[Tyy;Ntr;…, s'Sk;re>y" 27 h;nmeW;' Klexvduˇ_m( 28 p[s:' y;neåPyk⁄sIdSy svRq; …vvek:y;te/mR mR è " sm;…/" 29 tt" KlexkmRinvO…ˇ" 30 td; sv;Rvr,ml;petSy D;nSy;nNTy;JDeymLpm( 31 tt" ’t;q;Rn;' p·r,;m£msm;i¢gu,R ;n;m( 32 =,p[ityogI p·r,;m;pr;Nting[;ÁR " £m" 33 pu®W;qRxNU y;n;' gu,;n;' p[itp[sv" kìvLy' SvÂpp[itœ; v; …citx…ˇ_·rit 34 îit ctuq"R p;d" îit mhiWR ptÔ≤l p[,It' yogdxRnm( Reference: Nader, Tony, Human Physiology: Expression of Veda and the Vedic Literature: Modern Science and Ancient Vedic Science Discover the Fabrics of Immortality in the Human Physiology, Fourth Edition, (Vlodrop: Maharishi Vedic University, July, 2000), pp. 158-172.

674

Upå‹ga

Branch 10B: Yoga:

êhiva Sªtras

Structure: 3 Chapters. Beginning:

cwtNym;Tm; 1 D;n' bN/" 2 yoinvgR" kl;xrIrm( 3 D;n;…/œ;n' m;tOk; 4 ¨¥mo .wrv" 5 x·ˇ_c£s'/;ne ivês'h;r" 6 j;g[TSv“suW¢u .ede tuy;R.ogs'.v" 7 D;n' j;g[t( 8 Sv“o ivkLp;" 9 aivvek; m;y;s*Wu¢m( 10 i]ty.oˇ_; vIrex" 11 ivSmyo yog.U…mk;" 12 îCz; x·ˇ_®m; k⁄m;rI 13 ÎXy' xrIrm( 14 ˙dye …cˇs'`Ø;∂»XySv;pdxRnm( 15 xuıtÊvs'/;n;√;åpxux·ˇ_" 16 ivtkú a;TmD;nm( 17 lok;nNd" sm;…/su%m( 18 x·ˇ_sN/;ne xrIroTp·ˇ" 19 .Uts'/;n.UtpOqKTvivês'`Ø;" 20 xuıiv¥ody;∞£ÉxTv…s≤ı" 21 mh;Ód;nus/' ;n;NmN]vIy;Rn.u v" 22 îit p[qm ¨NmeW" …cˇ' mN]" 1 p[yà" s;/k" 2 iv¥;xrIrsÊ;; mN]rhSym( 3 g.eR …cˇivk;soåivix∑iv¥;Sv“" 4 iv¥;smuTq;ne Sv;.;ivkÉ %ecrI ixv;vSq; 5 gu®®p;y" 6 m;tOk;c£sMbo/" 7 xrIr' h…v" 8 D;nm•m( 9 iv¥;s'h;re tduTqSv“dxRnm( 10 îit i√tIy ¨NmeW" a;Tm; …cˇm( 1 D;n' bN/" 2 kl;dIn;' tÊv;n;mivveko m;y; 3 xrIre s'h;r" kl;n;m( 4 n;@«s'h;r.Utjy.UtkìvLy.UtpOqKTv;in 5 moh;vr,;iTs≤ı" 6 mohjy;dnNt;.og;Tshjiv¥;jy" 7 j;g[id≠√tIykr" 8 ntRk a;Tm; 9 r©oåNtr;Tm; 10 p[=e k;,I≤N{y;…, 11 /Ivx;TsÊv…s≤ı" 12 …sı" SvtN].;v" 13 yq; t] tq;Ny] 14 bIj;v/;nm( 15 a;snSq" su%' Óde inm∆it 16 Svm;];inm;R,m;p;dyit 17 iv¥;åivn;xe jNmivn;x" 18 kvg;RidWu m;heêy;R¥;" pxum;tr" 19 i]Wu ctuq| twlvd;seCym( 20 m¶" Sv…cˇen p[ivxet( 21 p[;,sm;c;re smdxRnm( 22 m?yeåvrp[sv" 23 m;];Svp[Tyys'/;ne n∑Sy pun®Tq;nm( 24

675

Upå‹ga Branch 10B: Yoga

êhiva Sªtras

Continued:

ixvtuLyo j;yte 25 xrIrvOiˇv[tR m( 26 kq; jp" 27 d;nm;TmD;nm( 28 yoåivpSqo D;hetíu 29 Svx·ˇ_p[cyoåSy ivêm( 30 iSqitly* 31 tTp[vÊO ;;vPyinr;s" s'vˇe .O ;v;t( 32 su%du"%yobRihmRnnm( 33 ti√muˇ_Stu kÉvlI 34 mohp[its'htStu km;RTm; 35 .editrSk;re sg;RNtrkmRTvm( 36 kr,x·ˇ_" Svtoånu.v;t( 37 i]pd;¥nup;[ ,nm( 38 …cˇiSqitvCzrIrkr,b;ÁºWu 39 a….l;W;äihgRit" s'v;ÁSy 40 td;Â!p[…mteStT=y;∆Ivs'=y" 41 .Utkçuk° td; ivmuˇ_o .Uy" pitsm" pr" 42 nws…gRk" p[;,s'bN/" 43 n;…sk;NtmR?ys'ym;≤Tkm] sVy;psVys*WuªWe u 44 .Uy" Sy;Tp[itmIlnm( 45 îit tOtIy ¨NmeW"

Reference: Singh, Jaideva, êiva Sªtras: The Yoga of Supreme Identity, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991).

676

Upå‹ga

Branch 10C: Yoga:

êhiva SaµhitŒ

Structure: 517 verses, distributed among five chapters. Beginning:

Ek˘ D;n' inTym;¥NtxUNy' n;Ny≤Tk≤ç√ˇe te vStu sTym( y∫ºdoiSm…•≤N{yop;…/n; vw D;nSy;y' .;ste n;Nyqwv 1 aq .ˇ_;nurˇ_oåh' v·ˇ_ yog;nux;snm( Èêr" svR.tU ;n;m;Tmmu·ˇ_p[d;yk" 2 TyKTv; ivv;dxIl;n;' mt' duD;Rnhetk u m( a;TmD;n;y .Ut;n;mnNygitcets;m( 3 sTy' kÉ…cTp[xs' ≤Nt tp" x*c' tq;pre =m;' kÉ…cTp[xs' i' t tqwv smm;∆Rvm( 4 kÉ…c∂;n' p[xs' ≤Nt iptOkmR tq;pre k…cTkmR p[xs' ≤Nt kÉ…c√wr;Gymuˇmm( 5 kÉ…cÌ»hSqkm;R…, p[xs' ≤Nt ivc=,;" a¶eho];idk˘ kmR tq; kÉ…cTpr' ivdu" 6 mN]yog' p[xs' ≤Nt kÉ…cˇIq;Rnsu ve nm( Ev' bÙnup;y;'Stu p[vd≤Nt ih muˇ_ye 7 Ev' Vyv…st; lokÉ ’Ty;’Tyivdo jn;" Vy;mohmev gCz÷it ivmuˇ_;" p;pkmR…." 8 EtNmt;vlMbI yo lB?v; du·rtpykÉ .[mtITy( avx" soå] jNmmOTyuprMpr;m( 9 aNywmiR tmt;' ≈eœgŸ ¢Ru ;lokntTprw" a;Tm;no bhv" p[oˇ_; inTy;" svRgt;Stq; 10 y¥Tp[Ty=ivWy' tdNy•;iSt c=te k⁄t" Svg;Rdy" sNtITyNye in…ítm;ns;" 11 x;np[v;h îTyNye xUNy' kÉ…cTpr' ivdu" √;vev tÊv' mNyNteåpre p[’itpU®W* 12 aTyNt….•mty" prm;qRpr;Ñü%;" EvmNye tu s'…cNTy yq;mit yq;≈utm( 13

677

Upå‹ga Branch 10C: Yoga:

êhiva SaµhitŒ continued

Ending:

s;/kStu .ve¥ogI ]wloKye soåitdul.R " 204 i]pure i]purNTvek˘ ixv' prmk;r,m( a=y' tTpd' x;Ntmp[mye mn;mym( – l.teås* n sNdeho /Im;NsvRm.I‚Pstm( 205 ixviv¥; mh;iv¥; gu¢; c;g[e mheêrI m∫;iWt…md' x;S]' gopnIymto bu/"w 206 h#iv¥; pr'goPy; yo…gn; …s≤ı…mCzt; .ve√«yRvtI gu¢; invIRy;R c p[k;ixt; 207 y îd' p#te inTym;¥op;Nt' ivc=," yog…s≤ı.Rvˇe Sy £me,vw n s'xy" – smo=' l.te /Im;Ny îd' inTymcRyte ( 208 mo=;…qR>yí sve>R y" s;/u>y" ≈;vyedip i£y;yuˇ_Sy …s≤ı" Sy;di£ySy kqM.vet( 209 tSm;≤T£y;iv/;nen ktRVy; yo…gpug' vw" yÎCz;l;.sNtu∑" sNTyKTv;Ntrs'Dk" – gOhSqí;Pyn;sˇ_" s muˇ_o yogs;/n;t( 210 gOhSq;n;' .veiTs≤ırIêr;,;' jpen vw ) yogi£y;….yuˇ_;n;' tSm;Ts'ytte gOhI 211 gehe iSqTv; pu]d;r;idpU,"R s©÷ TyKTv; c;Ntre yogm;geR ) …sıe…íˆ' vI+y pí;d( gOhSq" £°@ºTso vw mMmt' s;/…yTv; 212 îit ≈Iixvs'iht;y;' hrg*rIs'v;de yogx;S]e p'cm" p$l" sm;¢" 5 xu.m( Reference: Vasu, Rai Bahadur Srisa Chandra, tr., The êiva SaµhitŒ, (New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1979).

678

Upå‹ga

Branch 10D: Yoga:

Vj–Œnabhairava

Structure: 163 verses. Beginning:

≈IdeVyuv;c ≈ut' dev my; sv| ®{y;mlsM.vm( i]k.edmxeW,e s;r;Ts;riv.;gx" 1 a¥;ip n invOˇo me s'xy" prmeêr ik˘ Âp' tÊvto dev xBdr;ixkl;mym( 2 ik˘ v; nv;Tm.edne .wrve .wrv;’t* i]ixro.ed….•' v; ik˘ v; x·ˇ_]y;Tmkm( 3 n;d…bNdumy' v;ip ik˘ cN{;/Rinro…/k;" c£;Â!mnc(k˘ v; ik˘ v; x·ˇ_SvÂpkm( 4 pr;pr;y;" sklmpr;y;í v; pun" pr;y; yid t√TSy;t( prTv' ti√®?yte 5 nih v,Riv.edne deh.edne v; .vet( prTv' in„klTven sklTve n t∫vet( 6 p[s;d' k⁄® me n;q in"xeW' …ziN/ s'xym( .wrv ¨v;c s;/u s;/u Tvy; pO∑' tN]s;r…md' ip[ye 7 gUhnIytm' .{e tq;ip kqy;…m te y≤Tk≤çTskl' Âp' .wrvSy p[k°itRtm( 8 tds;rty; deiv ivDey' x£j;lvt( m;y;Sv“opm' cwv gN/vRngr.[mm( 9 ?y;n;q| .[;NtbuıIn;' i£y;@MbrvitRn;m( kÉvl' v…,Rt' pus' ;' ivkLpinht;Tmn;m( 10 tÊvto n nv;Tm;s* xBdr;ixnR .wrv" n c;s* i]ixr; devo n c x·ˇ_]y;Tmk" 11 n;d…bNdumyo v;ip n cN{;/Rinro…/k;" n c££ms'….•o n c x·ˇ_SvÂpk" 12

679

Upå‹ga Branch 10D: Yoga:

Vij–Œnabhairava

Ending:

ywrve pUJyte {VywStPyRte v; pr;pr" yíwv pUjk" svR" s Evwk" Kv pUjnm( 153 v[jTe p[;,o ivxe∆Iv îCzy; k⁄i$l;’it" dI`;RTm; s; mh;devI pr=e]' pr;pr; 154 aSy;mnucrn( itœn( mh;nNdmyeå?vre ty; deVy; sm;iv∑" pr' .wrvm;“uy;t( 155 sk;re, bihy;Rit hk;re, ivxet( pun" h'sh'sTe ymu' m']' jIvo jpit inTyx" 155 W$(xt;in idv; r;]* shßyek…v'xit" jpo deVy;" smui∂∑" sul.o dul.R "¯ 156 îTyetTk…qt' deiv prm;mOtmuˇmm( Et∞ nwv kSy;ip p[k;Xy' tu kd;cn 157 prix„ye %le £Àre a.ˇ_É gu®p;dyo" inivRkLpmtIn;' tu vIr;,;mu•t;Tmn;m( 158 .ˇ_;n;' gu®vgRSy d;tVy' inivRx˚y; g[;mo r;Jy' pur' dex" pu]d;rk⁄$Mü bkm( 159 svRmte Tp·rTyJy g[;ÁmetNmOg=e ,e ikme….riSqrwdiRe v iSqr' pr…md' /nm( 160 p[;,; aip p[d;tVy; n dey' prm;mOtm( ≈IdevI ¨v;c devdev mh;dev p·rtO¢;iSm x˚r 161 ®{y;mltN]Sy s;rm¥;v/;·rtm( ) svRx·ˇ_p[.de ;n;' ˙dy' D;tm¥ c 162 îTyuKTv;n≤Ndt; devI k<#π l¶; ixvSy tu 163 Reference: Singh, Jaideva, ViäŒnabhairava or Divine Consciousness, A Treasury of 112 Types of Yoga, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993).

680

Upå‹ga

Branch 11A: Karma M´mŒµsŒ:

Karma KŒö¶a

Structure: 12 chapters, with a total of 60 sections. Beginning:

mhiWR jw…min p[,It' kmR mIm;'s; dxRnm( p[qmoå?y;y" p[qm" p;d" aq;to /mRijD;s; 1 codn;l=,oåqo≥ /mR" 2 tSy inimˇprIi∑" 3 sTsMp[yoge pu®WSyeiN{y;,;' bu…ıjNm tTp[Ty=minimˇ' …v¥m;noplM.nTv;t( 4 a*Tp…ˇkStu xBdSy;qenR sMbN/StSy D;nmupdexoåVyitrekí;qeåR nuplB/e tTp[m;,' b;dr;y,Sy;npe=Tv;t( 5 kmwk R É t] dxRn;t( 6 aSq;n;t( 7 kroit xBd;t( 8 sÊv;Ntre y*gp¥;t( 9 p[’it…v’Tyoí 10 vO…ıí ktO.R ªU ;Sy 11 sm' tu t] dxRnm( 12 st" prmdxRn' …vWy;n;gm;t( 13 p[yogSy prm( 14 a;idTyv¥*gp¥m( 15 v,;RNtrm…vk;r" 16 n;dvO…ıpr; 17 inTyStu Sy;∂xRnSy pr;qRTv;t( 18 svR] y*gp¥;t( 19 s':y;.;v;t( 20 anpe=Tv;t( 21 p[:y;.;v;∞ yogSy 22 ≤l©dxRn;∞ 23 ¨Tpˇ* v;vcn;" SyurqRSy;t…•imˇTv;t( 24 t∫Ut;n;' i£y;qenR sm;ª;yoåqRSy t…•imˇTv;t( 25 lokÉ s'inym;Tp[yogs'inkWR" Sy;t( 26 ved;'ík w É s'inkW| pu®W;:y;" 27 ainTydxRn;∞ 28 ¨ˇ_Ntu xBdpUvTR vm( 29 a;:y; p[vcn;t( 30 prNtu ≈uits;m;Nym;]m( 31 ’te v; …vinyog" Sy;TkmR," sMbN/;t( 32 îit p[qm" p;d" i√tIy" p;d" a;ª;ySy i£y;qRTv;d;nqRKymtdq;Rn;' tSm;dinTymuCu yte 1 x;S]Î∑…vro/;∞ 2 tq;fl;.;v;t( 3 aNy;nqRKy;t( 4 a.;…gp[itWe/;∞ 5 ainTys'yog;t( 6 …v…/n; Tvekv;KyTv;TStuTyqenR …v/In;' Syu" 7 tuLy' c s;Mp[d;…ykm( 8 ap[;¢; c;nupp…ˇ" p[yoge ih …vro/SSy;CzBd;qRSTvp[yog.UtStSm;dupp¥et 9 gu,v;dStu 10 Âp;Tp[;y;t( 11 dUr.UySTv;t( 12 S}ypr;/;TktuíR pu]dxRnm( 13 a;k;≤lkÉPs; 14 …v¥;p[xs' ; 15 svRTvm;…/k;·rkm( 16 flSy kmRin„pˇeSteW;' lokvTp·rm;,t" fl…vxeW" Sy;t( 17 aNTyyoyRqoˇ_m( 18 …v…/v;R Sy;dpUvTR v;√;dm;]' ÁnqRkm( 19 lokvidit cet( 20 n pUvTR v;t( 21

681

Upå‹ga Branch 11A: Karma M´mŒµsŒ:

Karma KŒö¶a

Ending:

s'Sk;re c tTp[/;nTv;t( 8 s':y;su tu …vkLp" Sy;CΩitp[itWe/;t( 9 {Vy…vk;r;ˇu pUvvR dqRkmR Sy;ˇy; …vkLpen inymp[/;nTv;t( 10 {VyTveåip smu∞yo {VySy kmRin„pˇe" p[itpxukmR.ed;dev' sit yq;p[’it 11 kp;leåip tqeit cet( 12 n kmR," pr;qRTv;t( 13 p[itp…ˇStu xeWTv;t( 14 Íteåip pUvvR TSy;t( 15 …vkLpoåNvqRkmRinymp[/;nTv;CzπWe c kmRk;yRsmv;y;ˇSm;ˇen;qRkmR Sy;t( 16 ¨%;y;' k;MyinTysmu∞yo inyoge k;mdxRn;t( 17 asit c;s'S’teWu kmR Sy;t( 18 tSy c devt;qRTv;t( 19 …vk;ro v; inTySy;¶e" k;Myen tduˇ_het"u 20 vcn;ds'S’teWu kmR Sy;t( 21 s'sge≥ c;ip doW" Sy;t( 22 vcn;idit cedqetriSm•uTsg;Rp·rg[h" kmR," ’tTv;t( 23 s a;hvnIy" Sy;d;Ûits'yog;t( 24 aNyo voıTy;hr,;ˇiSmNtu s'Sk;rkmR …x∑Tv;t( 25 Sq;n;ˇu p·rluPyern( 26 inTy/;r,e …vkLpo n ÁkSm;Tp[itWe/" Sy;t( 27 inTy/;r,;√; p[itWe/o gt…≈y" 28 pr;q;RNyek" p[ity≤NtvTs];hInyo yjm;ng,eåinymoå…vxeW;t( 29 mu:yo v;…vp[itWe/;t( 30 s]e gOhpitrs'yog;ı*]vd;ª;yvcn;∞ 31 svw"R v; tdqRTv;t( 32 gOhpit·rit c sm;:y; s;m;Ny;t( 33 …vp[itWe/e prm( 34 h*]e pr;qRTv;t( 35 vcn' prm( 36 p[.Tu v;d;iTvRJy' svRv,;Rn;' Sy;t( 37 SmOtve ;R Sy;d(b;[ ˜,;n;m( 38 flcms…v/;n;∞etreW;m( 39 s;'n;YyeåPyev' p[itWe/" s*mpIqhetTu v;t( 40 ctu/;Rkr,e c index R ;t( 41 aNv;h;Yye≥ c dxRn;t( 42 îit ctuq"R p;d" îit √;dxoå?y;y" References: Sandal, Mohan Lal, Introduction to the Mimamsa Sutras of Jaimini, (Allahabad: Panini Office, 1925). P. Gaöe§a§Œstr´ Jo§´, êr´majjaiminipraö´te M´mŒµsŒdar§ane, 6 vol. (ÌnandŒ§ramasaµsk¨tagranthŒvaliú, 1981). K.P. Bahadur, Wisdom of Meemaansaa, (New Delhi: Sterling Publishers, 1983).

682

Upå‹ga

Branch 11B: Karma M´mŒµsŒ:

Saµkar·ha KŒö¶a

Structure: 4 chapters, with a total of 16 sections. Beginning:

aq ≈Ijw…minmuinp[,It" s˚WRk;<@" p[qm;?y;ye p[qm" p;d" anuyjtITynuvW$(k;río¥te 1 s {o,klx;t( îJyet sv;RqTR v;t( yq;ååJy;q;R /[vu ;y;" 2 iv.ˇ_;in hvI'iW tq; km;R…, kmRsy' og;Tpun·rJy; 3 ≤l©dxRn;∞ 4 tN]' p[d;nmekdevtTv;¥q; dxRp,U -R m;syo" 5 Ekk;l' tu n .vTyevde ' k;lpOqKTv;t( 6 svn.ed;∞ 7 anuxBd;qRvÊv;∞ 8 a;vOiˇ' c dxRyit 9 Eten .=;í Vy;:y;t;" 10 x;…m]' tITvoRTsOjie dit k;„,;R…jin" tN]m…/[g"u pyR…¶’t;init co¥te 11 anNtr' v; pyR…¶kr,;t( ik˘ p[Ty=;' ≈uitmit£;me¥q; n p[y;j; îJyNt îit nwkdexp[itWe/" 12 a…¶' …cTv; s*];my;' invRp;mIit 37

683

Upå‹ga Branch 11B: Karma M´mŒµsŒ:

Saµkar·ha KŒö¶a

Ending:

îN{;y vwr;jy;nubUh[ Iit vwr;jSycRmnUCy vwÂpSyc;R yjet( îN{;y x;Kvr;y;nubhU[ Iit xKvrImnUCy rwvTy; yjet( îN{;y rwvt;y;nubhU[ Iit rwvtmnUCy xKvy;R yjet( devt;….VyRitWjit VyTy;smNv;heit ) s;m;Nyen ivihte puro@;xe îN{;y r;qNtr;y;nubhU[ Iit rqNtrSy AcmnUCy bOht Ac yjeidTyuˇ_m( ) n bOhTy; vW$(ky⁄ ;Rt( ydnubhO Ty; vW$(ky⁄ ;Rt( zNd;'…s --- gmyet( anUv;KyyoíTv;yR=r;…, y;Jy;mnUCy yjit a;nu∑.ë ' c hv; EtTs'p;dyit 6 a…. Tv;xUr nonumoåduG/; îv /env" Èx;nmSy jgt" SvÎ≥x' Èx;nmo…mTynUCy îN{ tSqupSTv;…m≤ı hv;mhe îit yjet( ) Tv…m≤ı hv;mhe s;t;v;jSy k;rv" Tv;' vO]ie „vN{ sTpit' nrSTv;' k;œ;…mTynUCy SvvRtoå….Tv; xUr nonumo…mit yjet( ) Evmet¥q;sm;ª;tSy;=r£m;¥ivro/en;=r£m;,;m?yUhnm( 7 √π y;Jye Sy;t;' tdqRTv;t( 8 ≤l©;∞ 9 ¨.e sp[,ve Sy;t;' p[’TyupbN/;t( 10 gOhme/Iye devt;v;hn' n iv¥te s;…m/eNy;nNty;Rt( tTpun" p[itiW?yte 11 iv¥te v;ånNty;Rt( ak;rm;nNty| yq; v;Sto„ptIye 12 v;…jn;m;v;hn' iv¥te yq;Ny;s;' devt;n;m( 13 hivrinytTv;√; n iv¥te yq; iv„,o®®£mSy 14 Et;Î…git mNy;mhe pur"p[vı O ;n;' prtN]Vypet;n;' p[itWe/" tÆLl©Tv;CzBdSy 15 Ekdevt;n;' n;n;devtVypet;t;' tN]m;v;hn' iv.v;t( 16 k;lpOqKTv;d>y;vtetR 17 px;vuˇme p[y;je ßug;d;pno n iv¥te s'pie[ WtTv;t( 18 iv¥te v;åNyk;lTv;¥q; y;Jy;sMp[Ww o yq; y;Jy;sMp[Ww " 19 îit s˚WRk;<@º ctuqSR y;?y;ySy ctuq"R p;d" sm;¢' ced' s˚WRk;<@m( îit kmRmIm;'s;dxRnm( Discussion: The Saµkar·ha KŒö¶a of Karma M´mŒµsŒ was cited by êha‹kara as authentic and authoritative in his Brahma Sªtra BhŒ·hya. Reference: S. Subrahmanya Shastri, ed., Sankar∑hakåˆ∂a: Mahar∑hi Jaiminimunina praˆ¥tam Devaswåmiviracitabhå∑hyamanvalitam, (Madras: University of Madras, 1965). Sarma, K.V., Sa‹kar·a KŒö¶a Sªtras of Jaimini, (Hoshiarpur, Vishveshvaranand Vedic Research Institute, 1963).

684

Upå‹ga

Branch 12: VedŒnta Dar§hanam Structure: 4 chapters, with a total of 16 sections. Beginning:

1 2 3 4 5

˝1ã ˝2ã ˝3ã ˝4ã ˝5ã

6

˝6ã

7 8 9 10

˝7ã ˝8ã ˝9ã ˝10ã

11 ˝11ã

1

˝12ã

ved;NtdxRnm( p[qmoå?y;y" p[qm" p;d" aq;to b[˜…jD;s; 1 jNm;¥Sy yt" 2 x;S]yoinTv;t( 3 tˇu smNvy;t( 4 È=ten;RxBdm( 5 g;w,íe•;TmxBd;t( 6 t…•œSy mo=;epdex;t( 7 heyTv;vcn;∞ 8 Sv;Pyy;t( 9 gits;m;Ny;t( 10 ≈utTv;∞ 11 a;nNdmyoå>y;s;t( 12 …vk;rxBd;•eit ce• p[;cuy;Rt( 13 tıºtVu ypdex;∞ 14 m;N]v≤,Rkmev c gIyte 15 netroånuppˇe" 16 .ede Vypdex;∞ 17 k;m;∞ n;num;n;pe=; 18 a‚Sm•Sy c t¥og' x;‚St 19 aNtStımoRpdex;t( 20 .edVypdex;∞;Ny" 21 a;k;xStæLl©;t( 22 at Ev p[;," 23 Jyoitír,;…./;n;t( 24 zNdoå…./;n;•eit ce• tq; cetoåpR,ingd;ˇq; ih dxRnm( 25 .Ut;idp;dVypdexoppˇeívw m( 26 ¨pdex.ed;•eit ce•o.y‚Sm•Py…vro/;t( 27 p[;,Stq;nugm;t( 28 n vˇu_r;Tmopdex;idit ced?y;TmsMbN/.Um; Á‚Smn( 29 x;S]Î∑‰; tUpdexo v;mdevvt( 30 jIvmu:yp[;,≤l©;•eit ce•op;s;]w…v?y;d;…≈tTv;idh t¥og;t( 31 îit p[qm" p;d" i√tIy" p;d" svR] p[…sıopdex;t( 1 …vv≤=tgu,oppˇeí 2

Upå‹ga

685

Branch 12: VedŒnta Dar§hanam Ending:

5 ˝185ã k;y| b;d·rrSy gTyuppˇe" 7 …vxeiWtTv;∞ 8 s;mIPy;ˇu t√‰pdex" 9 k;y;RTyye td?y=e, sh;t" prm…./;n;t( 10 SmOtíe 11 pr' jwiminmu:R yTv;t( 12 dxRn;∞ 13 n c k;ye≥ p[itpÊy….s'…/" 14 6 ˝186ã ap[tIk;lMbn;•ytIit b;dr;y, ¨.yq;doW;ˇT£tuí 15 …vxeW' c dxRyit 16 îit tOtIy" p;d" ctuq"R p;d" 1á2 ˝187ã sMp¥;…v.;Rv" SvenxBd;t( 1 muˇ_" p[itD;n;t( 2 a;Tm; p[kr,;t( 3 a…v.;gen Î∑Tv;t( 4 3 ˝188ã b[;˜e, jwimin®pNy;s;id>y" 5 …cit tNm;]e, td;TmkTv;idTy*@uloim" 6 EvmPyupNy;s;TpUv.R ;v;d…vro/' b;dr;y," 7 4 ˝189ã s'kLp;dev tu tCΩte" 8 at Ev c;nNy;…/pit" 9 5 ˝190ã a.;v' b;d·rr;h Áevm( 10 .;v' jwimin…vRkLp;mnn;t( 11 √;dx;hvdu.y…v/' b;dr;y,oåt" 12 tNv.;ve s'?yvduppˇe" 13 .;ve j;g[√t( 14 6 ˝191ã p[dIpvd;vexStq; ih dxRyit 15 Sv;PyysMpÊyorNytr;pe=m;…v„’t' ih 16 7 ˝192ã jg√‰;p;rvj| p[kr,;ds'inihtTv;∞ 17 p[Ty=opdex;idit ce•;…/k;·rkm<@lSqoˇ_É" 18 …vk;r;vit≥ c tq; ih ‚Sqitm;h 19 dxRytíwv' p[Ty=;num;ne 20 .ogm;]s;My≤l©;∞ 21 an;vO…ˇ" xBd;dn;vO…ˇ" xBd;t( 22 îit ctuq"R p;d" îit ctuqoRå?y;y" îit ved;NtdxRnm( Reference: Swami Gambhirananda, Brahma-S™tra-Bhå∑ya of Ír¥ Íaãkaråcårya, (Calcutta: Advaita Ashrama, 1983).

686

Upaveda

Branch 13A: Gandharva Veda

NŒÿya êhŒstra


p[,My ixrs; dev* ipt;mhmheêr* ) n;$‰x;S]' p[v+y;…m b[˜,; ydud;˙tm( 1 sm;¢qPy' v[itn' Svsut"w p·rv;·rtm( ) an?y;ye kd;…cˇu .rt' n;$‰koivdm( 2 muny" pyupR ;Sywnm;]eyp[mdu ;" pur; ) pp[CzSte mh;Tm;no inyte≤N{ybuıy" 3 yoåy' .gvt; sMyGg[…qto veds‚Mmt" ) n;$‰ved" kq' b[˜•uTp•" kSy v; ’te 4 kTy©" ik˘pm[ ;,í p[yogí;Tm k°Îx" ) svRmte ¥q;tÊy' .gvNvˇ_⁄mhR…s 5 teW;' tu vcn' ≈uTv; munIn;' .rto muin" ) p[Tyuv;c tto v;Ky' n;$‰yvedkq;' p[it 6 .v≤∫" xu…c…..UTR v; tq;åvihtm;nsw" ) .Uyt;' n;$‰vedSy sM.vo b[˜in…mRt" 7 pUv| ’tyuge ivp[; vOˇe Sv;yM.uvåe Ntre ]et;yugåe q sMp[;¢e mnovwvR SvtSy tu 8 p[;My/mRpv[ ˇO e tu k;mlo.vx' gte È„y;R£o/;ids'm!º lokÉ su≤%tdu"≤%te 9 devd;nvgN/vRy=r=omhorgw" jMbU√«pe sm;£;Nte lokp;lp[itiœte 10 mheN{p[m% u dw vRe ®w ˇ_" ikl ipt;mh" £nIyk…mCz;mo ÎXy' ≈Vy' c y∫vet( 11 n vedVyvh;roåy' s'≈;Vy" xU{j;itWu tSm;t( sOj;pr' ved' pçm' s;vRv…,Rkm( 12 EvmiSTvit t;nuKTv; devr;j' ivsOJy c sSm;r cturo ved;n( yogm;Sq;y tÊvivt( 13

687

Upaveda Branch 13A: Gandharva Veda

NŒÿya êhŒstra

Ending:

b[˜,; smnuD;t;" p[;¢;" Svg| pun" sut;" 22 EvmuvIRtle n;$‰' ix„yw" smvt;·rtm( .rt;n;' c v'xoåy' .iv„y' c p[vitRt" 23 kohl;id….rev' tu vTsiLy/UitRt"w mTyR/mRi£y;yuˇ_ì" k…íTk;lmviSqtw" 24 EtCz;S]' p[,It' ih n;r;,;' bu≤ıv/Rnm( ]wloKySy i£yopet' svRx;S]indxRnm( m©Ly' l≤lt' cwv b[˜,o vdno∫vm( 25 y îd' ≈u,yu ;n( inTy' p[oˇ_' ced' SvyM.uv; k⁄y;Rt( p[yog' yíwvmqv;å/Itv;n( nr" 26 y; gitvedR ivduW;' y; gityRDk;·r,;m( y; gitd;RnxIl;n;' t;' git' p[;“uy;≤ı s" 27 d;n/meWR u sveWR u k°TyRte tu mht( flm( p[=e ,Iyp[d;n' ih svRd;neWu xSyte 28 n tq; gN/m;Lyen dev;Stu„y≤Nt pU…jt;" yq; n;$(py[ ogSqwinRTy' tu„y≤Nt m©lw" 29 g;N/v| ceh n;$‰' c y" sMyk™ p·rp;lyet( ) s Èêrg,ex;n;' l.te sÌit' pr;m( 30 Ev' n;$‰p[yoge b¸iv…/iviht' kmRx;S]' p[,It' ) noˇ_' y∞;] lok;dnu’itkr,;t( ) s'iv.;Vy' tu tJDw" – ik˘ c;Nyt( sMp[p,U ;R .vtu vsumtI n∑du….R=rog; ) x;≤NtgoRb;[ ˜,;n;' .vtu nrpit" p;tu pOQvI' smg[;m( 31 îit .rtIye n;$‰x;S]e guÁtÊvkqn;?y;y" s¢i]'x" ) n;$‰x;S]m( s'p,U mR ( ) Reference: Joshi, K.L., ed., Natyasastra of Bharatamuni with the commentary Abhinavabharati by Abhinavaguptacharya, 4 vols., (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1989).

688

Upaveda

Branch 13B: Gandharva Veda

Saµg´taratnŒkara

Structure: 7 Chapters Beginning:

s'gItrà;kr ) p[qm" Svrgt;?y;y" ) b[˜g[iNqjm;®t;nugitn; …cˇen ˙Tp˚je sUrI,;mnu rÔk" ≈uitpd' yoåy' Svy' r;jte ) ySm;d( g[;miv.;gv,Rrcn;ål˚;rj;it£mo vNde n;dtnu' tmuırë jgÌIt' mude x˚rm( 1 aiSt SviStgOh' v'x" ≈ImTk;XmIrs'.v" ) AWevWRO g,;∆;t" k°iˇR=;≤ltidÑü%" 2 yJv…./Rm/R I/uyvRw dRe s;grp;rgw" ) yo i√jeN{wrlç£É b[˜…..UgR tw·rv 3 t];.U∫;Skrp[:yo .;SkrStejs;' in…/" ) al˚t|u d≤=,;x;' yí£É d≤=,;åynm( 4 tSy;.Uˇny" p[.tU ivny" ≈Iso!l" p[*!/IyenR ≈Ikr,p[vı O iv.v' .UvLl.' ….Llmm( ) a;r;?y;≤%llokxokxmnIk°·Ê;‹" sm;s;idt; jw]e jw]pd' Ny/;…y mhtI ≈I…sÏ,e ≈Irip 5 Ek" +m;vlye ≤=tIêr…mlNm*lIN{nIl;v≤lp[odç∂‰uit…ci]t;õ™…`[n%r≈e…,nOpR ;l;g[,I" ) ≈ImiTsÏ,dev Ev ivjyI ySy p[t;p;nlo ivêVy;Pyip dNdhIit ˙dy;Nyev i√W;muırë " 6 t' p[s;¥ su/I/uyoR gu…,n' gu,r;…g,m( ) gu,g[;me, yo ivp[;nupk;rwrtItOpt( 7 dd* n ik˘ n ik˘ jD* n d/* k;' c sMpdm( ) k˘ /m| ivd/* nwW n b.* kìg,Ru rw ym( 8 tSm;∂uG/;Mbu/je ;Rt" x;©≥dve " su/;kr" ) ¨pyupR ·r sv;RNy" sud*d;yRSf⁄rTkr" 9 ’tgu®pdsev" p[I…,t;xeWdev"

689

Upaveda Branch 13B: Gandharva Veda

Saµg´taratnŒkara

Ending:

îTyuˇ_;≤S]iv/; .;v;" Sq;ipno Vy….c;·r," s;iÊvk;í rseWu Syu" sveR sveWR u s;iÊvk;" 1681 Ek" k;yoR rs" Sq;yI' rs;n;' n;$kÉ sd; rs;Stdnuy;…yTv;dNye tu Vy….c;·r," 1682 ivro…/no rs;SteWu s'd>yR" pOqg;≈y" guM.…í]o rs;n;' Sy;•;$‰e k⁄smu guMfvt( Sq;yI tu sU]Sq;nIyo rso rsivd;' mt" 1683 sU·r≈Ix;©≥dve ne n;$‰ved;Mbu/·e rdm( smStmuıt» ' s;r' /Irwr;tOi¢ seVyt;m( 1684 g[Nqe mdIye yid k…ídiSt gu,SttStSy p·rg[h;y m;>yqRye v" su…/y" preW;' gu,oå,urPyi{smo .vTsu 1685 s;v¥t; v; inrv¥t;åStu g[Nqe my;å] g[…qte ty; ikm( a;r;/ne v" p[v,; mitmeR sNto gu," k˘ nnu n;itxete 1686 yu„mT=od=m' vStu iky];iSt jgT]ye ik˘ tu mTp[me t" sNt" purSk⁄®t me ’itm( 1687 y√; pur;,' pNq;n' munIn;mhmNvg;m( ≤òÁ≤Nt c insge,R sNt" sNm;gRg;…min 1688 a;·rr;/…yWo" s;/U≤Nk' p[D;iv.ven me r;mm;nNdy≤Nt Sm ityRçoåip kpIêr;" 1689 n iv¥;dpRto g[Nqp[viO ˇmRm ik˘ iTvdm( iv√Nm;nsv;s;y gNtu' p;qeym;iSqtm( 1690 îit ≈Imdnv¥iv¥;ivnod≈Ikr,;…/pit≈Iso!ldevnNdnin"x˚≈Ix;©≥dve ivr…cte s'gItrà;kre s¢mo ntRn;?y;y" sm;¢" 7 sm;i¢mgmdy' kl;in…/smet" s'gItrà;kr" ) Reference: Sa‹g´ta RatnŒkaraú, 2 vols., (ÌnandŒ§ramasaµsk¨tagranthŒvaliú, 1985).

690

Upaveda

Branch 14A: Dhanur Veda

Vasi·hÿha Dhanur Veda

Structure: 4 Main Chapters, approximately 265 verses. Beginning:

mhiWR v…sœ ivr…ct; /nuvdRe s'iht; aqwkd; iv…jgIWuivRê;…m]o r;jiWRg®Ru v…sœm>yupTe y p[,Myov;c ) b[iU h .gvn( /nuivR¥;' ≈oi]y;y Î!cetse ≤x„y;y du∑x]uivn;x;y c ) tmuv;c mhiWRb˜[ iWRpv[ ro v…sœ" Í,u .o r;jn( ivê;…m] y;' srhSy/nuivR¥;' .gv;n( sd;≤xv" prxur;m;yov;c t;mev srhSy;' væCm te iht;y gob[;˜,s;/uvde s'r=,;y c yjuvdRe ;qvR s‚Mmt;' s'iht;m( aqov;c mh;devo .;gRv;y c /Imte tˇeåh' s'pv[ +y;…m yq;tQyen s'Í,u 1 t] ctu∑yp;d;Tmko /nuvdRe " ) ySy p[qme p;de dI=;p[k;r" ) i√tIye s'gh[ " tOtIye …sıp[yog;" ctuqRe p[yogiv/y" 2 aq kSy /nuvdRe ;…/k;r îType=;y;m;h /nuvdRe e gu®ivRp"[ p[oˇ_o v,R√ySy c yuı;…/k;r" xU{Sy Svy' Vy;p;id ≤x=y; 3 ctuivR/m;yu/m( ) muˇ_mmuˇ_'mˇu _;muˇ_'yN]muˇ_çeit 4 du∑dSyucor;id>y s;/usr' =,' /MmRt" p[j;p;ln' /nuvdRe Sy p[yojnm( 5 Ek;ip y] ngre p[…sı" Sy;ınuırR " tto y;NTyryo dUr;NmOg;" …s'hgOh;idv 6 a;c;Yye,R /nu∂y≥º ' b[;˜,e suprI≤=te luB/e /UˇRe ’tfle c mNdbuı* n d;pyet( 7 b[;˜,;y /nu∂y≥º ' %@±g' vw =i]y;y c vwXy;y d;pyet( k⁄Nt' gd;' xU{;y d;pyet( 8 /nuí£ç k⁄Ntç %@±gç =u·rk; gd; s¢m' b;¸yuı' Sy;dev' yuı;in s¢/; 9 aq;c;YyRl=,m( a;c;YyR" s¢yuı" Sy;∞tu….R.;RgvR " SmOt"

691

Upaveda Branch 14A: Dhanur Veda

Vasi·hÿha Dhanur Veda

Ending:

tdnu ih ac v,;R a;idk;" sVvRl:e y;" ¨p·rgt.vSt;n( Sq;Py sv;Rn( £me, .vit c yuvySy; yuı‰t;' s; p[sne ; 56 rq£m" rq;ês;/nNtu sm;idSqle iv/eym( aq sen;pit kr,iv…/' v+y;m" Í,u .o r;jWeR ivê;…m] a;k;riv¥;blyuˇ_' =i]ysen;pit' ivı‰;t( ) tSywte inym;" smStv;ihnI' EkÎ∑‰;vlokyet( ) aNyt( sVv;‹n( pd;tIn( p·r≈msÎxm…/k;r' d¥;t( ) VyUhrcn;y;mit inpu,;í .vet( s Ev sen;nIivR/ye " ) îit aq ≤x=; t];d* W#np;#niv…/' b[mU ; ) a;d* =;]koxVy;kr, sU];
692

Upaveda

Branch 14B: Dhanur Veda

êhiva Dhanur Veda

Structure: 227 Verses, 15 Divisions. Beginning:

aq /nuvdRe " Èêroˇ_;ınuvdRe ;√‰;sSy;ip su.;iWt;t( pd;Ny;’„y r…cto g[Nq" s'=pe to my; 1 ivn; x;©≥/r' n;Nyo /nuvdRe ;qRtÊvivt( yt" Sv“e inix p[;¢; /nuvdRe ;qRtÊvivt( yt" Sv“e inix p[;¢; ixv;ˇÊvivc;r,; 2 at" s'dhe dol;y;' rop,Iy' n m;nsm( g[NqeiSm'í;pcturvw IRr…cNt;m,* Kv…ct( 3 ySy;>y;sp[s;den in„p¥Nte /nu/rR ;" jet;r" prswNy;n;' tSy;>y;so iv/Iyt;m( 4 Ekoåip y] ngre p[…sı" Sy;ınu/rR " tto y;NTyryo dUr' mOg;" …s'hgOh;idv 5 aq /nu/;Rr,iv…/" a;c;ye,R /nudyRe ' b[;˜,e suprI≤=te luB/e /UtRe ’tfle c mNdbuı* n dIyte 6 b[;˜,;y /nudyRe ' %@±g' vw =i]y;y c vwXy;y d;pyeTk⁄Nt' gd;' xU{Sy d;pyet( 7 /nuí£˘ c k⁄Nt' c %@±g' c Cz⁄·rk; gd; s¢m' b;¸yuı' Sy;dev' yuı;in s¢/; 8 a;c;yR" s¢yuı" Sy;∞tuyı Ru Stu .;gRv" √;>y;' cwv .ve¥o/ EkÉn g,ko .vet( 9 hSt" punvRs"u pu„yo roih,I coˇr;]ym( anur;/;…ênI cwv revtI dxmI tq; 10 jNmSqe c tOtIye c Wœº vw s¢me tq; dxmwk;dxe cN{esvRkm;R…, k;ryet( 11 tOtIy; pçmI cwv s¢mI dxmI tq;

693

Upaveda Branch 14B: Dhanur Veda

êhiva Dhanur Veda

Ending:

t' dI,Rmnu dIyRNte yo/;" xUrtm; aip 216 duinRv;rtr; cwv p[.¶; mhtI cmU" ap;…mv mh;veg]St; mOgg,; îv 217 yStu .¶eWu sinyeWu iv&teWu invtRte pde pdeåême/Sy l.te flm=ym( 218 √;ivm* pu®W* lokÉ sUymR <@l.eidn* p·rv[;@± yogyuˇ_í r,e c;….mu%o ht" 219 y] y] ht" xUr" x]u…." p·rvei∑t" a=y' l.te lok˘ yid KlIb' n .;Wte 220 mU…z≥t' nwv ivkl' n;xS]' n;Nyyo…/nm( pl;ym;n' xr,' gt' cwv n ih'syet( 221 .I®" pl;ym;noåip n;Nve∑Vyo blIys; kd;…cCzÀrt;' y;it mr,e ’tiníy" 222 s'.TO y mhtI' sen;' ctur©;' mhIpit" VyUh…yTv;g[t" xUr;NSq;pye∆y≤lPsy; 223 aLp;y;' v; mhTy;' v; sen;y;…mit iníy" hWoR yo/g,Sywko jyl=,muCyte 224 aNvet' v;yvo y;≤Nt pOœº .;nuvyR ;'…s c anuPlvNte me`;í ySy tSy r,e jy" 225 apU,eR nwv mtRVy' s'p,U eR nwv jIvit tSm;ıwy| iv/;tVy' hNtVy; prv;ihnI 226 …jte l+mImOtR e SvgR" k°itRí /r,Itle tSm;ıwy| iv/;tVy' hNtVy; prv;ihnI 227 Etm( ixv/nuvdRe Sy .gvto Vy;sSy c Reference: êŒr‹gadhara, Bïhat êŒr‹gadhara Paddhati, verses 1714-1941. 1. http://www.atarn.org/india/Dhanurveda.pdf 2. Petersen, Peter, ed.., The Paddhati of êŒr‹gadhara, A Sanskrit Anthology, Vol. I, (Bombay: Government Central Book Depot, 1888).

694

Upaveda

Branch 14C: Dhanur Veda

N´ti PrakŒ§hikŒ


nIitp[k;ixk; p[qmoå?y;y" ≈ImÌj;nn' v;,I' nTv; b[˜;idsÌuÂn( nIitp[k;ixk; sey' tNyte Á;dr;Nmy; 1 ≈Imˇ=ixl;y;' tu sUpiv∑' vr;sne jnmejy.Up;l' {∑ëk;mo mh;tp;" 2 vwxp' ;ynn;m; tu mhiWRSs'ixtv[t" a>y;g;t( sihtÆXx„ywVy;Rsix„yo mh;muin" 3 tm;y;'tmOiW' ≈uTv; jnmejy.Upit" p[Tyu∆g;m shs; sh m'i]puroihtw" 4 p;¥m~y| tq; g;' c m/upk| iv/;y c tSmw p[ov;c k⁄xl' p[˙∑en;Ntr;Tmn; 5 /NyoåSMynughO ItoåiSm yNme dxRnm;gt" t;·rt;" iptrSsveR p;≤ltoåh' Tvy; mune îTyuˇ_vNt' r;j;n' p[yyu oj;ixWXxu.;" /meR te rmt;' bu≤ı·rTyuKTv;g;Tsm;' tt" ¨piv∑e mun* tiSmn( .{pI#π nOpoˇm" p·rvOTy;sn;>y;xe ’t;'j≤l®p;ivxt( kq;Ntrmq;s;¥ jnmejy.Upit" p[,My tmOiW' .KTy; ’t;'j≤lr.;Wt 9 r;j/m;R" ’t;SsveR .;rtIy;STvyoidt;" ˙id me s'xy" k…ít( t' .v;Hzπˇmu hRit 10 îtí;nuidn' /mRSsTy' x*c' =m; dy; k;len k≤ln; b[ñ( =rTy;yubl R ' SmOit" 11 ivˇmev kl* nø,;' jNm;c;rgu,ody" /mRNy;yVyvSq;y;' k;r,' blmev ih 12 d;'pTyeå….®…chetR mu ;Ryvw Vy;vh;·rkÉ

695

Upaveda Branch 14C: Dhanur Veda

N´ti PrakŒ§hikŒ

Ending:

/mRx;S]pur;,;in Ápr; º sm>yset( s'?y;' cop;Sy iv…/vd…¶' ¸Tv; sm;iht" 90 .uKTv; .;gvt' x;S]' pi#Tv; ?y;ns'ytu " s'ivxe∞ yq;k;lmuiˇœºi√gtKlm" 91 Ev'vˇO Sy nOptenIRitm;g;Rnsu ;·r," /m;Rqk R ;mmo=;í …s?yeynu ;R] s'xy" 92 pOqmu ve ' p[x;Sywv b[˜; lokgu®STvy' t]wv;NtdR/e devo dwvtwSsihtStq; vwNyoåip tt( tq; c£É b[˜p[oˇ_' pur;tn' .uKTv; ss;gr;muvIRmNte b[˜ jg;m h; 94 p;rI≤=t TvmPyev' ’Tv; s*:y' .iv„y…s :y;it' c lokÉ s'Sq;Py pr;' gitmv;PSy…s 95 y;vTk°itRmnR „u ySy lokÉWu ivc·r„yit t;v√WRshß;…, b[˜lokÉ mhIyte 96 p#π∞ y îd' k;Vy' Í,uy;√; sm;iht" b[;˜," =i]yo r;j; ivxeW,e nr;…/p" 97 vwXyo v; xU{j;tIyÆSS]yo r;jp·rg[h;" te k°itRmNto .UTveh pr] gitm;“uy"u 98 nIitx;S]…md' p[oˇ_' my; te jnmejy s'=pe ,e g…m„y;…m y] Vy;so gu®mRm 99 vwxp' ;yn îTyuKTv; t]wv s jg;m h p;rI≤=toåip mumdu e sunITy; p;lyn( p[j;" 100 îit ≈Im•Iitx;S]e nIitp[k;ixk;y;' r;jVy;p;rkqn' n;m;∑moå?y;y" Discussion: Chapters 2 through 5 of the N´tiprakŒ§hika present a comprehensive examination of the principles and practice of Dhanurveda. Reference: Oppert, Gustav, ed., N´tiprakŒ§hika, (New Delhi: Kumar Brothers, 1970).

696

Upaveda

Branch 15A: SthŒpatya Veda

MŒnasŒra VŒstu ShŒstra


m;ns;rm( s'gh[ " ¨Tp·ˇr=,ly;n( jgt;' p[kv⁄ nR ( .Uv;·rviˆm®to ggn' c sUte n;n;surêe rikrI$ivlolm;l;.O©;vlI!cr,;Mbu®h' nm;…m 1 g©;≤xr"kml.Ukmle=,eN{gIv;R,n;rdmu%rw ≤%lwmnuR IN{w" p[oˇ_' smSttrvSTvip v;Stux;S]' tNm;ns;rAiW,;ip ih l+yte Sm 2 m;nopkr,' c;d* ≤xLpl=,pUvk R m( aq v;Stupk [ r,' .UprI=;iv…/' tq; 3 .Usg' h[ Stt" p[oˇ_' xïSq;pnl=,m( dev;dIn;' Sq;pn;y pdivNy;sl=,m( 4 b≤lkmRiv…/' cwv g[;m;dIn;' c l=,m( ngrIl=,' cwv .U…mlMbiv/;nkm( 5 g.RNy;siv…/' cwv coppI#Sy l=,m( a…/œ;niv…/' cwv p;dm;nSy l=,m( 6 p[StrSy iv…/' cwv s‚N/kmRSy l=,m( ivm;nl=,' cwvmek.UMy;í l=,m( 7 i√tlSy iv…/' cwv i]tlSy iv/;nkm( ctuStliv…/' cwv pç.UMy;í l=,m( 8 W$(s¢lk˘ cwvm∑.Unv.U…mkm( dx.U…miv/;n' c ®{.U…miv/;nkm( 9 tl' √;dxk˘ cwv p[;k;r;,;' c l=,m( p·rv;rl=,' cwv gopur;,;' c l=,m( 10 m<@pSy iv/;n' c x;l;n;' cwv l=,m( ivNy;sí gOhSy;q gOhp[vx e l=,m( 11 √;rSq;niv…/' cwv √;rm;nSy l=,m( r;jhMyRiv…/' cwv r;Jy;©Sy tu l=,m( 12 .Upitl=,' cwv y;n;idrql=,m(

697

Upaveda Branch 15A: SthŒpatya Veda

MŒnasŒra VŒstu ShŒstra

Ending:

nOˇgIt;idmu{íw dxRyæe CziLpivˇm" nynoNmIln' p[oˇ_' pí;d( g[;mp[d≤=,m( 49 l=,oı;rmevoˇ_muˇ_vd( re%y; ≤l%et( p[itm;' lohj' p[oˇ_' tq; rà' tu ivNyset( 50 ≤xl;≤l©÷ tu …bMb;n;' yˇTkm;Rvs;nkÉ Sq;pn;TpUvk R É rà' ivNy;s' k;ryed( bu/" 51 pI#÷ tSy c m?ye tu nvkoœ' p[kLpyet( pµr;g' tu tNm?ye vj[' ceN{vd( Nyset( 52 p[v;l' c;…¶koœº tu mh;nIl' yme tq; vwdyU | Nyse•A w T≥ ye mrtk˘ p…íme tq; 53 v;yVye pu„pr;g' c m*·ˇ_k˘ tu k⁄bre kÉ îN{nIl' tu Èxe tu ivNyset( iv…/ivˇm" 54 Sqpit" Sq;pkío.* Sq;pyed( …bMb≤l©km( Ev' tu ràivNy;s' xeWm©÷ yqoˇ_vt( 55 ˙dykmlm?ye dIpvˇTpr' Sy;t( kmljh·rhr;iddevt;n;' c svRm( 56 iv…/…mh sklÂp' c c=u®NmIln' c ’it…mit r≤%lmuˇ_' m;ns;r' pur;,w" 57 ipt;mheN{p[m% u "w smStw" dev·w rd' x;S]vr' puroidtm( tSm;TsmuıT» y ih m;ns;rm( x;S]' ’tm( lokiht;qRmte t( 58 îit m;ns;re v;Stux;S]e nynoNmIlnl=,iv/;n' n;m s¢ittmoå?y;y" m;ns;r' s'p,U mR ( Reference: Acharya, Prasanna Kumar, Manasara on Architecture and Sculpture: Sanskrit text with critical notes, (Delhi: Low Price Publications, 1995).

698

Upaveda

Branch 15B: SthŒpatya Veda

Mayamatam VŒstu ShŒstra

Structure: 36 Chapters plus a Pari§i·ÿa Beginning:

mymtm( p[qmoå?y;y" p[,My ixrs; dev' svRD' jgdIêrm( t' pOÇ;Sm;dl' ≈uTv; x;iSt x;S]' yq;£mm( 1 twitl;n;' mnu„y;,;' vSTv;dIn;' su%odym( p[;Do muinmRy" kt;R sveRW;' vStul=,m( 2 a;d* vStup[k;r' c .UprI=;pirg[hm( m;nopkr,' cwv xïSq;pnm;gRkm( 3 spd' surivNy;s' bilkmRivi/' tq; g[;m;dIn;' c ivNy;s' l=,' ngr;idWu 4 .UlMbSy iv/;n' c g.RivNy;sl=,m( ¨ppI#ivi/' cwv;i/œ;n;n;' tu l=,m( 5 StM.;n;' l=,' cwv p[St;rSy ivi/£mm( siN/kmRiv/;n' c ix%r;,;' tu l=,m( 6 Ek.Uimiv/;n' c i√tlSy tu l=,m( i]tlSy iv/;n' c ctu.RMU y;idl=,m( 7 ss;l' pirv;r;,;' gopur;,;' tu l=,m( m<@p;idivi/' cwv x;l;n;' cwv l=,m( 8 gOhivNy;sm;g| c gOhvexnmev c r;jveXmiv/;n' c √;rivNy;sl=,m( 9 y;n;n;' xyn;n;' c l=,' il©l=,m( pI#Sy l=,' sMygnukmRivi/' tq; 10 p[itm;l=,' devdevIn;' m;nl=,m( c=u®NmIln' cwv s'i=Py;h yq;£mm( 11 ipt;mh;¥wrmrwmnuR IêrwyqR ; yqoˇ_˘ skl' myen tt( tq; tqoˇ_˘ sui/y;' idv*ks;' nO,;' c yuKTy;i%lvStul=,m( 12 îit mymte vStux;S]e s'g[h;?y;y" p[qm"

699

Upaveda Branch 15B: SthŒpatya Veda

Mayamatam VŒstu ShŒstra

Ending:

itiqivi/m;h nOis'h"-ic];dx;RStq; irˇ_; vJy;R" xeW;" xu.;vh;" xk⁄n;idiniv∑' c ivxeW,e ivvjRyte ( 6 xu£DjIvcN{;,;' v;åq vgoRdy;" xu.;" 7 n=]ivi/m;h-mUl;¶ey m`;XleW; ivx;%; .r,I tq; a/omu%;iS]pUv;R:y;" kÀp;id%nne xu.;" 8 roih
700

Upaveda

Branch 15C: SthŒpatya Veda

Vi§hvakarma VŒstu ShŒstra

Structure: Part I: 18 Chapters. Beginning:

≈I srSvTyw nm" ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ≈IivêkmR,e nm" ) ≈I ivêkm;R’t;y; v;Stux;S]e v;Stuiv¥;m( ) pUv;R/R ) a;y;idg…,t;?y;y p[qmo?y;y 1 ≈I ivêkm;R¨v;c-aq;t" s'pv[ +y;…m a;y;idn;' l=,e p[;s;dinlyepru e v;ipp[;kr m'@ye 1 v;Stu kmemR u sveWR u a;y;idg…,t yojyet( Èd;nI k…q…y„y;…m g,Itv;StukmRkÉ 2 a;yTv' c pOqTu ve n gu,yed;kmR…, a∑;….hRrTw .;g yTxeWa' ;y;idxu 3 ?vj;/UmStq;…s'h ê;novOW%r*gj ?v;='cvw sm' {∑Üv; p[;Vy;Ridpupd[ ≤=,e 4 ?vjo…s'ho vOWogjo xXyte≈.u veXmxu a/m;n' %ro?v;'=o /Umê;n"su%;vh; 5 p[;s;d p[itm;≤l©π jgtIpI#m'@pe vedIk⁄@˘ x º …u c cwv pt;k;z] ?vj;dey 6 a…¶kmRWsu veWR u homx;l; mh;nse qUmoå…¶k⁄@˘ s'Sq;ne homkmRghO åe ip c 7 a;yu/We su mSteWu nOp;,;' .benWe ∞u nOp;sne …s'h√;re …s'ht] invexyet( 8 ê;no>leCz÷ghO e p[oˇ_o veXy;g;ren$Sy c nOTyk;reWu sveWR u ê;n"ê;nop…jivn;m( 9 v…,jkmRWu sveWR u .ojnp;]eWu m'@pe vOW;Stur©x;l;n;' g*x;l;gok⁄lWe u c 10 tt( ivtfl;idSvre v;…j]e iviv/e tq; k⁄l;l rj;k;idk; %ro gdR.op…jivn;m( 11 gjí gjx;l;y;' …s'hyàen vjRyte (

701

Upaveda Branch 15C: SthŒpatya Veda

Vi§hvakarma VŒstu ShŒstra

Ending:

ctur≈I ’te=]e e √;'i]xi√.;…jte W$(pc' ;xTpdwyˇRu _;Nyek;dx xt;iny 10 m?ySq;ne ≤l%et pµ'vde g.R îitSmOtm( b[˜;Nte c .ve√«qI cTv;·rxTpdw" £m;t( 11 ayRMmoåSte .ve√«…q xt' c √;dxoˇmm( iv…qk,Re smStev' pdmu·ˇ_" £moidt 12 a¢d'x m'@leWu c;¥e pµ' inp;tyet( tdnNtrp'ˇ_* c b[˜;W<, vitpd" 13 tdNte ivqIk;k;y;R cTv;·rxTpd;iNvt; sixit….í cTv;roåqRm;¥;í ctuidRxm( 14 cTv;·r'x pdwrqwr∑* Syub˜R k,Rt( tdNtivqIk; k;y;R xt' c √;dxoˇrm( 15 tdb;Áº c .ve i√qI √;'i]xd…/k˘ xtm( k*,e loPy;í W$(p;d;ítuWRu ctu…v|xit" 16 îx;fl; ®{d;s;Nt; lt; vIQy'Ntregt; Ev'pd;in a;yNte Wæ$(]x ' d…/k˘ xtm( 17 b;Á k,Rte u cTv;r" p[Sq;Py; nv…." pdw" s¢ s¢ td;…ít; yoJy;a∑;∑;…." pdw" 18 tNm;n;nu£m;¥oJy; xeW; a∑pd;Stq; Ev' shßpdwyˇRu _' svRto.{l=,' – îit shßpd'svRto.{ v;Stu 19 a/;s,e v;Stu p[pJU yte yjm;n se v;StupjU ; ivn;v;Stu p[;r'.e n .vexne – îit v;Stu îit ≈I ivêkm;R’t;y;' v;Stux;S]e v;Stuiv¥;y;' v;Stul=,;?y;y £m;'k a?y;y 18 Reference: Somapura, Prabhasankara Oghadabhai, Sri Vi§vakarmakrtŒya §rI vŒstuvidyŒyŒm VŒstu§Œstre, 2 vols. (Somapura: Sri Balavantaraya Prabhasankara Somapura ane Bandhuo, 1970).

702

Upaveda

Branch 15D: SthŒpatya Veda

Manu§hyŒlaya ChandrikŒ


mnu„y;lyc≤N{k p[qmoå?y;y" .UprI=;p·rg[h* nO…s'hy;dv;k;rtejoi√tym√ym( r;jte intr;' r;jr;jm©l/;min 1 ≈ImTk⁄<@pure ivr;jit pr£o@º c tej" pr' n;v;n;…ª c /;…ª y∞ intr;' mLlIivh;r;lye aêTq;rVyinkÉ tneåip c pure ≈IkÉrl;/Iêre s'M.Uytw du®p[k;xivWye …cˇe mmo∆OM.t;m( 2 ≈Im©l;Spdsd;≈ynIlk<#p[me p[kWRinly" skl;….vN¥" ≈ImiÌrIN{tny;tnyoå…õ±`.[ ;j;' k;mp[do jyit mˇmt©j;Sy" 3 t∂ºvp;dkmlwksm;≈y" koåPyu¥otm;ngu®vyR’p;….yog;t( iv¥;p·r≈mpro b¸/;Tmxuı‰;mu¥ogv;n( .vit b;livbo/ne c 4 yeW;' ≈uitp[,…ynI …/W,; ydIys˚Lpk‚Lpttnu" prmeêroåip teW;' mhIsumns;' mhnIy.;s;muˇs' ye prmud;rpd;rivNdm( 5 insgRs…' sısmStixLpp[;vI
703

Upaveda Branch 15D: SthŒpatya Veda

Manu§hyŒlaya ChandrikŒ

Ending:

r;D;' /;min .Usru Sy c gOh' inTy;cRn;y;©,e xveNR {;…¶jlexid=u k⁄ldwv;c;R p[itœ;id c p[;s;d;id iv/;nmIxsurn;q;GNyNtk;x;gt' kÉtTU q' vOWj' krotu c inA≥Ty;d* £m;Cz^yπ se 31 seivtk⁄ldwvt/;mwxinA≥Ty;idkÉ tu vOWj' Sy;t( gOhpurpˇnngrg[;m;d;v….mu%; .v≤Nt td; 32 inr©s;©;idiv….•g;hp[itiœt; y;" p[itm;Stu t;s;m( cl;clTvo.y.edtSt≤T£y;vx;∞;ip .ved( ivxeW" 33 s*:y;q| /r,I.Ot;' m…,gOh' …m]e ivh;roåinle Vy;y;moågRlkÉ tqwv inA≥t* ò;n;id pjRNykÉ îN{e toypt* c .u·ˇ_inly' nOˇ;id g;N/vRkÉ xS];¥' inA≥t* gOh=tpde p[;Cye c xYy;gOhm( 34 d<@;Nt' smtITy vp[miu dt' mO≤∫" ixl;¥wStq; ≈eœ' tTp·r%; tu m?ymmte x;%;vOití;/mm( tTp;n;idWu k<$ik&mlt; g[;Á;í ve
704

Upaveda

Branch 15E: SthŒpatya Veda

SamŒra‹gana SªtradhŒra


mh;r;j;…/r;j≈I.ojdevivr…ct' smr;©,sU]/;r;prn;m/ey' v;Stux;S]m( mh;sm;gmno n;m p[qmoå?y;y" dev" s p;tu .uvn]ysU]/;rSTv;' b;lcN{k≤lk;i˚tjU$koi$" ) EtTsmg[mip k;r,mNtre, k;Tò‰;‹dsUi]tmsU}yt yen ivêm( 1 su%' /n;in A≤ıí sNtit" svRd; nO,;m( ip[y;
705

Upaveda Branch 15E: SthŒpatya Veda

SamŒra‹gana SªtradhŒra

Ending:

ptk;vev inidR∑* pLlv* n;mt" kr* îit pLlv* ¨√πi∑tvtRny; gTy; iSqt* mU›"R p;êRi√tye pLlvs'Sqne kÉxbN/;:y* 244 îit kÉxbN/* a….mu%mu.* iniv∑* .uivi∑tRvtRn£m;ds* pLlvhSt* p;êRi√tye Sy;t;' lt;s'D* 245 îit lt;hSt* Vy;vitRtkr,;>y;' d≤=,o lt;hSt; ¨•tivlo≤lt" Sy;≤T]Wˇ_ko v;mhStStu 446 îit k·rhSt" ¨√πi∑tvtRny; i]pt;k;v….mu%* yd; ì$t* k·rhSts…•iv∑* kr* td; p=v≤çtk* 247 îit p=v≤çtk* t;vev i]pt;k* hSt* ki$xIWRs…•iv∑;g[* ivpr;vOiˇiv/;n;t( p=p[Cyotk* n;ª; 248 i]p x;%* hSt;v/omu%; ih td( ivDey* g®@p=;:y* îit g®@p=k* a;vitRtp·rvitRtkr,’t* h'sp=k* gm( 149 p=itÂpTvm;n;Nt* p[stO * c yd; .vet( ¨p=* Vy;vitRtp·rvitRtyog* yid m<@l;’tI Sy;t;m( 250 Ë?vRvitRt;d`vd; SmOt;vU?vRm<@≤ln* tqo?vRm<@≤ls'D* v;vitRt' iv/;y; p·rvitRtkr,t;r* îit p;êRm<@≤ln* ¨√πi∑t* ydwk Ev .[…mt ¨rs" Sq;ne t* √;vip Sy;t;m( inytmurom<@≤ln* ivD;tVy* td; tJDw" îTyurom<@≤ln* ---pLlvo hStStq;r;l;◊; v;pr; Vy;vtRn;’tíwkStyorNyopve∑n;t( ¨ro/Ryog;Tp;ê;R/yR og;∞ £mx" iSqt* Et* iv√;n( ivj;nIy;dur" p;ê;R/mR <@l* îTyur"p;ê;R/mR <@l* Reference: Kumar, Pushpendra, ed., SamarŒ‹gana SªtradhŒra, (Delhi: New Bharatiya Book Corporation, 1998).

Upaveda

Branch 15F: Kåßhyapa Íhilpa Íhåstram Beginning:

≈I g,ex;y nm" k;XypixLpx;S]m( pUv.R ;g" aq p[qm" p$l" mh;dev' xix/r' svRlokìkn;ykm( mheN{m?yg' x;ñ' p;vRtI siht' prm( 1 devd;nv…sı;¥w" seivt' surpU≤Ôtm( p[,My devcr,' Ev' b[yU ;Ts k;Xyp" 2 xucte ( st" prms∫;v' p[snot( sOi∑k;r,;t( jgt;m….vOı‰/| yo…gn;mupk;rkm( 3 dev;n;' c iht;q;Ry ixvD;n' pr' mht( mh;qRmLpg[q' ' c k≤%R,;¥cRn;ñkm( 4 t' xumte mh;t'];t( Tvyoˇ_' ih pur;qRkm( t']' t√ddev;n;' ®{;,;m…yt;rI,;m( 5 kLp;yu„y;id/m;R,;' nr;,;' Tv…/k;·r,;' knugh[ ;q| TvetWe ;' s'=pe ;√dme p[.o 6 s;/us;/umh;ivp[ykKvy; p·rcoidt' dul.R ' tdh' v+ye Í,u cwk;g[m;ns" 7 pu„ym;s;idW
706

Upaveda Branch 7: Kåßhyapa Íhilpa Íhåstram continued Ending:

xix.{sm;yuˇ_' m?ye v;r,s'ytu m( n;n;msUrkSq' .veidk;¥wrl'’tm( 186 s.;k;r' ixro v;ip x;l;k;rmq;ip v; mu%e mu%e mh;n;sI p;êRyo" i√i√n;…skÉ 187 kte" p;doˇrwyˇRu _' p[Stre tu tl' p[it ktesop;ts'yˇu _' m?ye v;r,s'ytu m( 188 Ev' i]/; smui∂∑' √;rgopurm?ym' k≤¬÷{;'x' c k⁄@‰' v; vOW.Sqlmev v; 189 tuLy;¥w" p[sr' v;q k≤¬÷{;ı' yqo…ctm( x;l;k;r' s.;k;r' m;lIk;k;rmev c 190 y¥id∑' tu yd(√;re tˇ]wv p[kLpyet( b;Áåb;Áº`' p[ ;d;>y;' m?yk⁄@‰yut' tu v; 191 gOhip<@« g.Rghe ' p[;≤ç vwv p[kLpyet( t≤¬÷{h;ryom;Rne ivvOt;'…`[kmev v; 192 p[Streid∑.UMyTv' gop;n;idsmiNvtm( kÀ$koœ;¥l'k;rmU?vRSR tmTp[kLpyet( 193 .U…m.;gml'k;r' g¬;Tv' p·rkLpyet( xIW| d<@;.' x;l;.' x;l;k;r' tduCyte 194 lup;roip tm;yˇ' s.;k;rkmuCyte p[Str' p[its'z;¥ m<@p' y≤T]ivi∑n; 195 m;≤lk;’itk˘ :y;t' m<@pe tu prSprm( gopur' Áºvm;:y;t' p·rv;riv/' Í,u 196 îit k;XypixLpe gopuÂ=,' n;m pçcTv;·r'x" p$l" sm;¢" îit pUv.R ;g" sm;¢" Reference: Early twentieth century Grantha edition, lacking title page.

707

708

Upaveda

Branch 15G: SthŒpatya Veda

VŒstu Sªtra Upani·had

Structure: 6 PrapŒthakas Beginning:

v;Stus]U ¨pinWd( p[qmp[p;#kSy sU];…, v;Sto„pitDeyR îit 1 W$(ixLp;©p[yoge, p[jny≤Nt Âp;…, 2 yUp…md' Jyoit" 3 vOˇD;n' re%;D;n' c yo j;n;it s Sq;pk" 4 ixLp;t( p[itm; j;yNte 5 s p[vh," ixLpsU];?y;y' Sq;pkiv¥;' c;vdt( 6 xrIrmUitRrihte mn a;veXy ivxeW,e ivk‚LpdoWyuˇ_' .vit îit 7 v;StuW@©…mit ≈eœm( 8 W@±/; xwl' Deym( 9 xwl;d©r;gD;n' p[srit 10 i√tIyp[p;#kSy sU];…, inidR∑;qRkp[itm; g[;Á; 1 tTp;tn' p[qm; i£y; 2 tNmdRn' i√tIy; i£y; 3 ivl…mit mmRDye m( 4 n ’TyÂp;q| re%;kr,' ktRVym( 5 a;d* vOˇm( 6 EkìkSy s'yoge Ek°.vit 7 reK%;Nvye sv;R©;…, Ny;sy 8 tej;'…s srlre%;…, 9 n;.* ÂpkmR p[;r>yte 10 p[;j;pTyrITy; vOˇ' ih tejStd;åp;' .;se cturßm( 11 k,R√y' m®∫;ven a;cr≤Nt 12 /rev k…,Rk=e]m;kWRy≤Nt Sq;pk;" 13 t] m?ye lB/…bNdU rs;y;" p[;," 14 i]¸t;…¶" SmyRtåe ip c lokÉ 15 inªg;≤S]¸t; a;p îit 16 W$(ko,ko ih a;kWR,Iiv¥;ivxeW" 17 yq; Âpe tq; yUpåe nuCzπd;Nt; g[;Á;" 18 %nnp[k;ro ?yey" 19 sU];yne re%;" su.g; .v≤Nt 20 ïTqtre%; a…¶Âp;" p;êRg; ab[pU ;" ityRg% e[ ; m®tÂp; îit 21 Âps*.;Gy;ı‰;n.;vo j;yte 22 a…¶re%;y;muˇ©u Âp;…, j;yNte 23 ab[% e ;y;muTsukÂp;…, j;yNte 24 m;®tre%;y;' twjsÂp;…, 25 re%;D;n' svR…mit Deym( 26 tOtIyp[p;#kSy sU];…, ÂpSy .;vo mu:y" 1 .;v;nus;rto re%;iv/;n…mit Deym( 2 teW;' b¸/; ’Ty' ≈ey" 3 Ny;s;q| k;lbo/o ?yey îit 4 %in];…, a….mN]yet( 5 %in]pçk˘ ≈eœm( 6 Âpp[kW;Rq| Âp;©÷ ≤òG/…mit 7 ixLpk;r;" p[lpe y≤Nt {;vkrsm( 8 EW; heitiv¥; ≈eœ; 9

709

Upaveda Branch 15G: SthŒpatya Veda

VŒstu Sªtra Upani·had

Ending:

p[qmrs" Í©;r" 5 Í©;rÂp;qRmb[% e ; g[;Á;" 6 s h;so i√tIyrs" 7 mu%l=,;{s' j;n≤Nt sveR È=,en 8 s tOtIy" k®,rs.;v îit 9 r*{" ixLpk;reWu ctuqoR rs" 10 ityRg% e[ ;y;' .;v" p[k$o .vtIit ivxeW" 11 s vIr.;v" pçm" 12 vwr.;ve ¨Tk$e .y˚ro .vit s ivl=," Wœrs" 13 tSy;©m;®tre%;y;…mit s s¢m" 14 x;Nt.;v" soå∑mo rs" 15 .;v;nugtÂp;…, ctu/;R mu:y;in 16 lokÉ .;vbo/Sy hetmu nR " 17 mnu„y;,;' vOiˇmR:u yeit 18 s˚Lp;i√kLp îit ivxeW" 19 EW .uvnkoWo deh;nu.TU y; £m" 20 aÂp;d( Âp' tSy flm( 21 idx;nustO e idx;p;l;nup;sNte 22 Ev' dwv.ed;n( m;gR.de ; j;yNte 23 Wœp[p;#kSy sU];…, Ny;s/;r,; ≈eœ; 1 vOÊy; dwv…cNtne .ed" sÔ;yte 2 l=,p[k;x;q| ixLpiv¥; 3 Ny;soål˚;rmu{;yu/b;/[k=v;hnopdev;·rStuvk£me, Âpnv;©ivxeWo ?yey" 4 itß" re%;" ≈eœ;" 5 Âp=e]e koœk;≤lmR:u y; 6 Wo@xkoœkm?ye Âp;…, p[.v≤Nt t{Up;q| ≈eœm( 7 ivl…mit mmR b[˜ve in/eym( 8 Wo@xkoœkp[m;,iv.;gStu b[˜dwvjwvopdwvy;jk£me, pç/;?yey" 9 Âp;©÷ ctu/iRe t ivxeW" 10 …bNdub[˜R ve b[˜/[vu m( 11 b[˜ sTy;d* 12 b[˜…bN√vlMbnen Âp;©;…, s*.g;in .v≤Nt 13 al˚r,' dwv.UW,…mit 14 p[mod;{it" p[srit 15 krmu{; ÂpSy .;v' D;pyit 16 b;/[' bl' D;pyit Âpe 17 a;sn' W@±/; Deym( 18 gu,;nustO ' Âp]ym( 19 v;hn' ÂpSy p[’itD;pkivxeW" 20 ¨pdwvt' p[itÂp…mit 21 ¨pdwvt;{UpD;n' p[srit 22 a·rsN/; ?yey; 23 Âp/;r;y; vOiˇ·rit ≈eœ; 24 Stotø,;' Âpe su.givxeW" 25 p[D;qRmte d( v;StUp;:y;nm( 26 Reference: Boner, Alice, et al., VŒstusªtra Upani·ad: The Essence of Form in Sacred Art, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986).

710

Upaveda

Branch 15H: SthŒpatya Veda

KŒmikŒgama

Structure: Two Main Divisions. The first Division has 75 Paÿalas. Beginning:

k;…mk;gm" ) pUv.R ;g" ) tN];vt;rp$l" ) kìl;sd≤=,e Í©π n;n;íyRsmiNvte p[vı O v$vO=oTqCz;y;Cz•eåitivStOte 1 Vy;`[cmRprI/;ne pI#π ràopxo….te devd;nvgN/vR…sıiv¥;/r;id…." 2 seVym;n' mh;dev' ≈Ik<#÷ ivên;ykm( k*ixk" k;XypoågSTyo g*tmo n;rdStd; 3 snTk⁄m;rSsnkSsn;tnsnNdn* .Ogíu ;i].r√;jv…sœ;¥; mhWRy" 4 …jD;sv" pr' D;n' ixvxKTyuNmu%I’t;" p[,My cr,* tSy p[;¸r;xmum;pitm( 5 AWy" -.gvn( devdevx e pxup;xivmock sOi∑iSqititro.;vly;nugh[ k;rk 6 ivyd;idmh;m;y;vOˇSe s;=;Tp[vtRk mhj;nNdsNdohSvs'ivLl=,;Tmk 7 prs'ivTSvÂip
711

Upaveda Branch 15H: SthŒpatya Veda

KŒmikŒgama

Ending:

ikçwtd…/dev;'í D;n;:yi£yy; sh 86 i]Wu ceTSyu≤S]tÊv;in ctsOWu kl;" SmOt;" invOiˇ' c ivn; b[˜riht;" k;r,' tu v; 87 s¥oj;t;idk; v;ip invOÊy;¥;Stu pçsu a<@;NtvRitRn„W$(su kl;Ny;s;" p[k°itRt;" 88 kl;¥;Ss¢ ivDey; iv¥ex; vsukLpne v;m;¥; nvkLpe SyuloRkp;l; dx;:ykÉ 89 ®{s':ye tu ®{;SSyur;idTy;í;kús:' ykÉ ivêe®{;…ênI p[oˇ_;ítu„pçdx;iNvte 90 itqyo .uvn;Nyuˇ_; d=;d;r>y p…íme tˇTSvn;mmN]e, Nyseˇı;…ª in…mRte 91 gopurSq;pn' k⁄y;Rˇdg[e m<$pe ’te pUvoRˇ_iv…/n;yuˇ_k⁄<@º v; Sqi<@leåip v; 92 nvk⁄<@¯ks':ye v; pu
712

Upaveda

Branch 15I: SthŒpatya Veda

KŒraöŒgama

Structure: 4 Divisions. Only one, the KriyŒ PŒda is published in DevanŒgar´. Beginning:

pUvR k;r,;gme p[itœ; tN]e tN];vt;rp$l p[;r'." kLy;,' k⁄rt;' k…ít( k®,;v®,;ly" myUrngr;qxommnOˇivn;yk" 1 .U/rSyo?vRÍg' We u ràÍ©inkÉtne t];sInMmh;dev' ≈Ik<#÷ surv≤Ndtm( 2 yogpI#iSqt' tSy v;meg*rI sm;yutm( svRdve ;vOt' …sı' muingN/vRsie vtm( 3 £¥'t k;r,' pUJympOCzCzvR®{km( p[,MMy cr,* tSy p[j;pitrq;b[vIt( 4 b[˜ ¨v;c devdevmhex;n iSqTyuTpiˇlyexk jgt;mip p[ITy/| yo…gn;' mu·ˇ_hetk u m( 5 ixvD;n' pr' guÁ' vd me xvR®{k 6 xvR®{ov;c Kvy;pO∑…md' sv| v+yeh' su%s;/nm( k;r,;:y' mh; tN]' p[itœ;tN]muˇmm( 7 ko$‰ekg[N/s' yuˇ_' kWR,;¥cRn;Ntkm( s'=pe ,e ;/un;ivp[≈,u vu +ye sm;st" 8 tSy;d* tN]s∫;v' mUl.edop.edyuk™ k;…mk˘ yogj' …cNTy' k;r,' Kv…jtNtq; 9 dI¢' sU+m' shßNtk˘ xum;Nsup.[ de km( ivjyNtwv inê;s' Sv;y'.vu Ntq;inlm( 10 vIrNtr*rvNtwv mk⁄$' ivmlNtq; c'{D;nNt…b'bNtp[oÌIt' l…¬t' tq; 11 nu]ygt;n;idml]yms* gu®"

713

Upaveda Branch 15I: SthŒpatya Veda

KŒraöŒgama

Ending:

a;v;Á;>yCyRp„u p;¥wdı R ‰Nten b≤lNddet( k;…bdevI g,;n( sv;Rn( nvsiN/Wu pUjyet( kÀ„m;<@Ntb…l' ’Tv; p;rxwvne k;ryet( Ev' p[d≤=,' ’Tv; p[ivxed;ly' p[m;t( tto m?y;ˆsmye mUl' devI' p[pjU yet( – ¨TsvexINts'pJU y p[.tU hivWNddet( b[;˜,;n( .ojyeTpí;t( dIn;N/;dI'í .ojyet( Eex;Nye pUv.R ;ge c ¨ˇre p…íme ipv; p…íme √;rs'yˇu _' k;rye¥;gm<$%m( tNm?ye veidk;' k⁄y;Rt( n c .;gwk.;gt" tTpUvRe yoink;<@Ntu me%l; ]ys'ytu m( gomy; lepn' k⁄y;Rt( klÑéTy yq;iv/I pU
714

Upaveda

Branch 15J: SthŒpatya Veda

AjitŒgama

Structure: 4 Divisions. Only one, the KriyŒ PŒda is published. Beginning:

a…jt;gm" ) i£y;p;d" ) p[qm" p$l" ) tN];vt;r" ) ≈ImiÌ·rvre rMye mNdre c;®kNdre ) devd;nvgN/vRdTw yidVy;©n;g,w" 1 y=r;=sn;geN{.Utp[te ipx;ckì" ) m;tOik˘p®u Wwívw p[mqwvnRw teykì" 2 iv¥;/rwí iviv/w" ik•rwmiuR n….Stq; ) a∑;dxg,wrte jw ∑Ru e tui∑p[de sd; 3 ˙∑pu∑;Nypu∑;¥w" pt©¯" p·rn;idte ) pu„p.;r;vnm[íw fl.;r;vnm[k"ì 4 n;n;vO=lt;guLmw" p·rt" p·rxo….te ) h·rcNdnmNd;rp;·rj;tw" skLpkì" 5 sNt;nwí ’to¥;ne g©;ßot"sm;k⁄le ) h'sk;r<@v£*çc£v;k;ids'tte 6 mˇm;t©…s'h=RmgO x;%;mOg;id…." ) n;n;sÊvg,wmˇuR _vwr.;vw" sm;k⁄le 7 a;sInm;sne idVye /m;R¥"w p·rk‚Lpte ) ¨mex' devdevx e ' som' somiv.UW,m( 8 b[Ñe {/nd;kÉNú duv®,;Ntkv;yu…." vSv;idTywí ®{;¥w" svRdve ®w p;…stm( 9 ivnyen;Cyuto gTv; pOCzit Sm jgÌu®m( aCyut ¨v;c .gvNdevdevx e i]pur;Ntk x'kr 10 a…jt' n;m yˇN]' ixv;Tp[;¢' Tvy; pur; tNmm;c+v devx e tSyoTpi¢pur"srm( 11 Evmuˇ_o mh;dev" Sf⁄r…•i$llocn" ¨v;c tN]' ˙∑;Tm; …g·rj;pitrVyy" 12

715

Upaveda Branch 15J: SthŒpatya Veda

AjitŒgama

Ending:

Ev' kmR sm;:y;t' SvtN]prtN]yo" yq;£mmqo v+ye SvtN]Sy;…/k˘ iv…/m( 89 d≤=,etryoStSy p;êRyoStu jn;dRn ¨W;' c p[TyuW;' cwv ’Tv; cwk;sniSqt;m( 90 kr<@mk⁄$opet;' sv;R.r,.UiWt;m( i√ne];' i√.uj;' cwv hemv,;| /Ot;Mbuj;m( 91 ne]oNmIlnkm;Rid svRk;y| shwv tu a…/v;se tyo" k⁄M.* p;êRyorip ivNyset( 92 p[/;nk⁄<@º hom' c tyo{RVywí twrip Svn;mpdmN];>y;' k⁄y;Rd]oˇ_s':yy; 93 mN]Ny;s' c t;>y;' tu devSy;nu p[kLpyet( Ev' vw x·ˇ_k; v;ip Sq;pyeTSvSvmN]kì" 94 √;r;?y=* c ktRVy* d≤=,etryorip ¨g[px [ ;Ntn;m;n* √;rSy p·rkLpyet( 95 tyo" k⁄M.* tq; Sq;ne veidk;p;êRyoNyRste ( ag[åe ®,' tq; Sq;Py v;…jn' täih" £m;t( 96 lokp;l;Nyq;Sq;n' k⁄M.Sq;iNvNyseT£m;t( p·rv;r;'í sv;|St;n…/v;se shwv tu 97 mN]Ny;s;vs;ne tu yq;Sq;n' p[yojyet( îit y" k;ryeNmTyR" sivtu" Sq;pn' prm( 98 a;yur;roGym;“oit pu];in∑;'Stqwv c k;m;Nk;myte yo vw s t;Nsv;Rnv;Py c 99 dehTy;goˇre k;le .;ste c;ip sUyvR t( îTy…jt;:ye mh;tN]e i£y;p;de sUySR q;pniv…/ítu"pç;x" p$l" Reference: Bhatt, N. R., AjitŒgama, 2 vols., (Pondichery: Institut Francais D'Indologie, 1967).

716

Upaveda

Branch 15K: SthŒpatya Veda

D´ptŒgama

Structure: Vol. 1 has 21 Chapters. Beginning:

dI¢;gm" m©lm( gjvdnm…cNTy' tI+,dNt' i]ne]' bOhdudrmxeW' .UtÂp' pur;,m( amrvrsupJU y' rˇ_v,| surx e ' pxupitsutmIx' ivflr;j' nm;…m 1 ¨m;komlhSt;Bjs'.;ivtll;$km( ihr
717

Upaveda Branch 15K: SthŒpatya Veda

D´ptŒgama

Ending:

p[d≤=,' tt" ’Tv; √;rpUj;' sm;r.et( 63 p[ivXy g.Rghe ' tu k⁄bre ;….mu%" iSqt" sumÙu teR sul¶e tu mN]Ny;s' sm;r.et( 64 ¨m;k⁄M.;dum;bIj' ipi<@k;y;' tu ivNyset( Ë?vRpµo Á/opµe tTk<#π cwv ivNyset( 65 pUv;RdIx;npyRNt' NySTv; v;m;idxKTy,Un( pUj…yTv; yq;Ny;y' g*rIg;yi]mN]t" 66 pçv,RhivdR¥;Tsopd'x' ixvSy tu p;ys' ipi<@k;y;' tu tNmUlne vw d;pyet( 67 a;cmn' ˙d; dÊv; inm;RLy' tu ivsjRyte ( mu%v;s' c kpUrR ' ixvom;>y;' tu d;pyet( 68 òpn' k;ryeTpí;¥q;x·ˇ_ ivxeWt" a;c;y| pUjyeTpí;√S];.r,k⁄<@lw" 69 Sv,RyDopvIt' c s¢hem;©ëlIykì" xYy;v;hnd;sI'í rà;in iviv/;in c 70 sup∑u ;' vsu/;' cwv svTs;' g;' tqwv c Et;in gurve d¥;Tpí;TSvymip .ojyet( 71 a/m' pçin„k˘ tu i√gu,' m?ym' .vet( ¨ˇm' i]gu,' p[oˇ_m;c;yRSy tu d≤=,; 72 pUj…yTv; yq;Ny;y' nwv¥e ;Nt' ivxeWt" Ev' y" k⁄®te mTyR" ipi<@k;Sq;pn' prm( 73 pu]p*];í v/RNte S]Ijn;n;' su%;vhm( ipi<@k;Sq;pn' p[oˇ_' Í,u deixkl=,m( 74 îit dI¢x;S]e p[itœ;tN]e ipi<@k;Sq;pnp$l Ek…v'xittm" Reference: Barazer-Billoret, M.-L.; Dagens, B., & Lefevre, V. ; and SivŒcŒrya, S. Sambandhan, D´ptŒgama, Vol. 1 (chap. 1-21), (Pondichery: French Institute of Indology, 2004).

718

Upaveda

Branch 15L: SthŒpatya Veda

Sªk·hmŒgama

Structure: 4 Divisions. Only one, the KriyŒ PŒda is published. Beginning:

sU+m;gme ¨ˇr.;ge ) i£y;p;d" ) p[qm" p$l" ) kìl;xv,Rnm( ) ≈ImTkìl;six%re n;n;&mivr;…jte n;n;p≤=sm;k°,Re n;n;mOgsm;k⁄le 1 …sıc;r,gN/vRy=r=og,wvtRO e b[˜;id….devR g,w·rN{;¥wloRkplkì" 2 yo…g…." snk;¥wí muinvyw"R xuk;id…." nN¥;idp[mq;n;' c g,w" s'sie vte xu.e 3 s;ÂPy;idpd' p[;¢wmhR ;.;gwivRr;…jte n;n;ràmye idVye su%k w fld;ykÉ 4 iv.[;jte mh;Í©÷ s*v,| idVym≤Ndrm( ràStM.shß;!ye t]Sqe m…,m<$pe 5 …s'h;sne sm;sIn' b[Ñe {;idsurvw tRO m( pp[Cz p;vRtI devI x˚r' lokx˚rm( 6 deVyuv;c .gvn( devdevx e svRD prmeêr Tvmev ≈uittN];,;' tÊv' j;n;…s x˚r 7 TvNmu%;M.ojin„y≤NdsU·ˇ_/;r;mOt' p[.o pITv; ≈o]pu$;>y;' tu tOi¢meR nih j;yte 8 iviv/;in c tN];…, ≈ut;in b¸/; my; tq;ip cçl' …cˇ' b¸≈v,k;r,;t( 9 tSm;Ts'gÁO s;r;'x' mo=m;gwk R k;r,m( sMyk™ tÊv' ivin…íTy k;®
719

Upaveda Branch 15L: SthŒpatya Veda

Sªk·hmŒgama

Ending:

ixv ¨v;c Sto]e,;nen tu∑oåiSm tv .KTy; c p;vRit vr' vry d;Sy;…m yˇe mn…s rocte 52 deVyuv;c vrmNy' n y;ceåh' tv .·ˇ_' ivn; p[.o t;mev suÎ!;' deih swv me prm; git" 53 ixv ¨v;c tqwv stt' .Uy;t( ikml>y' tv ip[ye pun.Rˇ_iht;q;Ry vrmNy' dd;…m te 54 Sto]mihm; Tvy; ’t…md' Sto]' .·ˇ_.;ven .;ivt" y" p#π…•yto .UTv; s y;it prm;' gitm( 55 a>ysedNvh' deiv s'v;d…mmm;vyo" W$(SqlD;nsMp•" p[;“uy;Nmu·ˇ_muˇm;m( 56 Evmuˇ_' my; deiv mo=m;gwk R s;/nm( ved;gmpur;,;n;' s;r.Ut' tv ip[ye 57 x;S]Sy gopnIyt; gopnIy…md' x;S]' vIrm;heêrip[ym( teW;mev ih vˇ_Vy' vIrm;g;Rnsu ;·r,;m( 58 ≤l©]ywkinœ;n;' tTp[s;d;nuvitRn;m( aNyeW;' tu n vˇ_Vy' kd;…cd( ….•vTmRn;m( 59 îit ≈uTv; mh;D;n' p;vn' ixvx;snm( ?y;ym;n; ixv' devI tSq* sNtu∑m;ns; 60 îit ≈IsU+m;gme i£y;p;de ixvSto]inÂp,' n;m dxm" p$l" 10 Reference: Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha, Sªk·mŒgamaú: KriyŒpŒdaú: Translation with Notes, (Varanasi, Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratisthanam, 1994).

720

Upaveda

Branch 15M: SthŒpatya Veda

SuprabhedŒgama

Structure: 4 Divisions. Excerpt: I, 14, 142 ff.:

hombLyuTsv;n( p[;t" ’Tv; cU,oRTsv' tt" p[;s;dSy;g[to v;ip y;Mye v; p;vkÉåqv; 142 gomy;lepn' ’Tv; /UpdIpwSsmiNvtm( p;≤lk;¥wrl'’Ty Sqi<@l' t] k;ryet( 143 xUl' p…ímt" Sq;PyolU%l' musl' tt" vS]e,olU%l' ve∑‰ d.wrR ;ve∑yeTpun" 144 gN/;¥wrcR…yTv; tu i]xUl' lU%l' tt" Òt' ixroåpR,' ’Tv; hemdUv;Rïr;=tw" 145 sux„u k;' rjnI' pUv| cU,eR cU,eR tu lU%le ˙d; p[≤=Py c;S]e, k⁄Øye∂iº xk≤S]…." 146 tto .ˇ_jnwSs;/| cU,yR ∂e iº xkoˇm" s'ò;Py ≤l©÷ cU,neR pçb[˜ smu∞rn( 147 ò;pyeTk*tuk˘ xUl' ˙NmN]e, stwlkm( a;c;y| pUjyeˇ] vS]hem;©ëlIykì" 148 g[;m' v; ngr' v;ip xI`[' gCzπTp[d≤=,m( ndIt$;ktIre v; Sqi<@li√tye ’te 149 xUl' t]wv s'Sq;Py tTpUvRe klx;•‰set( acRyTe SvSvmN]e, xUl' vw klx;'Stq; 150 g©; c ymun; cwv nmRd; c srSvtI …sN/ugoRd;vrI cwv k;verI cwv s¢k;n( 151 a;v;Á m?yklxe gN/toysup·U rte anNt;idix%<@‰Nt;Nklxe„v….to Nyset( 152 puyCyR pUjyet( ò;pyeTklxw" pí;Tò;n' tIqeR sm;cret( 153 i]xUlne shwv;] ye tIq| k⁄vtR e nr;" muCyte svRp;pe>yo inmoRk;idv p•g;" 154

721

Upå‹ga Branch 15M: SthŒpatya Veda

SuprabhedŒgama

Excerpt: II, 7, 38 ff.:

p[.;te iv…/vTò;Tv; sklI’tivg[h" pyuiR Wt;in pu„p;…, piv];…, ivsjRyte ( 38 pUjn' pUvvR T’Tv; òpn;Nte ivxeWt" mO∞,U l R pe n' pUv| .Smn; lepn' tt" 39 dNtk;œŸí dNt;in /;vye∂iº xkoˇm" pU,k R M⁄ .odkì" ò;n' ’Tv; gN/;id…." pun" 40 vS]wr;.r,wívw mUlmN]e, deixk" s'pJU y devdevx e ' nOˇgeysmiNvtm( 41 sd;ixvmnuSmOTy mUlmN]' smu∞ret( piv];roh,' ’Tv; devx e ' ipi<@k;iNvtm( 42 m<@lSq' ixv' yÇ; gN/;¥wrnupvU x R " shß;=rmN]e, ¸Tv;Nteå…¶' smPyR vw 43 piv]' viˆm;roPy p·rxeWm;q;cret( pç;vr,dev;n;' piv]' ˙dyen tu 44 aNyeW;' cwv dev;n;' d;pyeˇu piv]km( ktuíR deixkSywv tyo" pà‰oí deixk" 45 ix„y;,;' p·rc;r;,;' dÊv; vw tTpiv]km( gN/pu„pwStu s'pJU y /UpdIpwivRxWe t" 46 p[.tU hivW' pí;Tp;ys;dIin d;pyet( hom' tqwv ktRVym;¥Nt' muin.ojnm( 47 jn;n;' svRd;n;in dÊv; t] yq;hRkm( vS]wr;.r,wí;Nywr;c;y| pUjyeˇt" 48 ytIn;' xuıxwv;n;mNy;Nm;heêr;nip ivxeW.ojn' d;n' ’Tv; t] Svx·ˇ_t" 49 Reference: Suprabhedågama, (Íintåtiripeˇˇai, Madras: ÍivañåNapotayantraßålai, 1907).

722

Upaveda

Branch 15N: SthŒpatya Veda

SvŒyambhuvŒgama

Structure: 4 Divisions. Only one, the VidyŒ PŒda is published. Beginning:

Sv;y'.vu sU]s'gh[ " ) iv¥;p;d" ) p[qm" p$l" ) pxuivc;r" ) ixv' p[,My prm' in/nexmt" prm( ) D;ndI=e p[v+y;…m te Í,u?v' sm;iht;" 1 aq;Tmmlm;y;:ykmRbN/ivmuˇ_ye ) Vyˇ_ye c ixvTvSy ixv;JD;n' p[vtRte 2 tdekmPynekTv' ixvvK];Mbujo∫vm( ) pr;pre, .edne gCzTyqRpi[ t≈y;t( 3 EvmetTsurx e ;n" x;S]s∫;vmuˇmm( ) sU]√yen s'gÁO p[;h ivStrx" pun" 4 aq;Tm;ivmlo bı" punmRˇu _í dI=y; ) ivDey" s i]/;vSq" kÉvl" skloåml" 5 acetno iv.uinRTyo gu,hInoåi£yoåp[."u ) Vy;`;t.;gxˇ_í xo?yo bo?yoåkl" pxë" 6 pUv| m;y;Tmk;äN/;idTqm;Tm; iSqto my; ) p[oˇ_o gu®mu%oˇ_Én XlokbN/en he i√j;" 7 .oˇ_; .ojk.;ven n;n;.ogivsipR,; s;'pt[ ' p[oCyte bıo bN/en;Tm; kl;idn; 8 aTyNtm≤lnSy;Sy p[;guˇ_Sy;ivk;·r," kl; s'XleWm;y;it ixveCz;nuiv/;…ynI 9 kloä≤ltcwtNyo iv¥;d≤xRtgocr" r;ge, r≤Ôtí;ip buı‰;idkr,wStt" 10 m;y;¥vinpyRNttÊv.Ut;TmvTmRin .u¤π t] iSqto .og;N.ogwkr…sk" pum;n( 11 .ogoåSy vedn; pus' " su%du"%;idl=,; t;' sm…qRtcwtNy" pum;n>yeit kmRt" 12 kmRtí xrIr;…, ivWy;" kr,;in c

723

Upaveda Branch 15N: SthŒpatya Veda

SvŒyambhuvŒgama

Ending:

aNtr©tr; xo?y; bihr©tr;ip c bihr©πåpnIte Sy;dNtr©i£y;£m" 13 Evm?v; ixvSyoˇ_ ¨äN/£myu·ˇ_t" lokÉ c;?vVyvSqey' Î∑; vStuinbN/ne 14 dG/s's;rbIjSy y; pus' oåp…ím; iSqit" s; gitStSy ivDey; n dex;Ntrs'iSqit" 15 /m;Rım;RNtrVyˇ_* sTy;' lokÉ gt' yq; p[oCyte p$p,;Rid vStu t√Tpum;nip 16 îit Sv;yM.uvsU]s'gh[ e tOtIy anugh[ x·ˇ_p$l" ctuq"R p$l" a?v; aq;TmbN/s't;npxuTvivinvOˇye Vyˇ_ye c ixvTvSy Wi@™v/oå?veh k°TyRte 1 tÊv;?v; c pd;?v; c v,;R?v; .uvn;Tmk" mN];Tmk" kl;?v; c ivxTyek˘ ixv' pdm( 2 ap[mye mindeXR ymn*pMymn;mym( sU+m' svRgt' inTy' /[vu mVyymIêrm( 3 ap[mye mnNtTv;dindeXR yml+yt" an*pMyms;ÎXy;i√mlTv;dn;mym( 4 sU+m' c;nupl>yTv;√‰;pkTv;∞ svRgm( inTy' k;r,xUNyTv;dclTv;∞ td(/vu[ m( 5 aVyy' p·rpU,TR v;TSv;…m.;v;ˇqeêrm( ixvtÊv…md' p[oˇ_' sv;R?vop·r s'iSqtm( 6 ao'k;r;Tmty; .;it x;NTytIt" pr" ixv" bIjp˚jm?ySq" smSt;?vmu%" p[."u 7 Reference: Filliozat, Pierre-Sylvain, ed., The Tantra of Svayaµbhª vidyŒpŒda with the commentary of Sadyojyoti, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994).

724

Upaveda

Branch 15O: SthŒpatya Veda

V´rŒgama

Structure: Four paÿalas of the latter half of V´rŒgama, have been published. Beginning:

vIr;gmoˇrm( ) p[qm" p$l" ) kìl;six%re rMye svR/;tusmiNvte pu
725

Upaveda Branch 15O: SthŒpatya Veda

V´rŒgama

Ending:

l.te s;/u yTpO∑' p;d√N√rj" xu.m( 589 piv]m/n;x' c sTyD;nwks;/nm( asurNe {;" ixrom?ye /;ry≤Nt ikm∫⁄tm( 590 sveWR ;' xM.uyogIn;' gu®{;,;' pdCyutm( y{j" svRd; lokÉ ivr;y b[˜yogIêr;" sd; v;l≤%Lyd/ICyi]xt;nNdpuÂrv;" 594 svRkm;R…, s'TyJy y{j" x;M.v;Tmkm( vIrm;heêr;,;' c p;d√N√Cyut' xu.m( 595 a;Tm;n…mv k;yeWu /;yRte D;ns;/n;t( dI=;' iv¥uTp[.;Âp;' mo=pUj;' mnohr;m( 596 `$pçks'yˇu _;' ixv;gmp·r„’t;m( pçb[˜;iNvt;' iv¥;' pçsUtkv…jRt;m( 597 pur;tn;" pu
726

Upaveda

Branch 15 P: SthŒpatya Veda

RauravŒgama

Structure: There are two divisions, VidyŒ PŒda and KriyŒ PŒda. Beginning:

r*rv;gm" ) iv¥;p;d" ) p[qm" p$l" ) ¨poı;t" ) ixviv¥;TmivD;ntÊv;idix%r;…≈tm( ) .;numNt…mv;.;Nt' .;….rp[itm*jsm( 1 tejor;≤x' mh;p[;D' ®®˘ muinvroˇmm( p[s•mns' x;Nt' ixvD;nwkk;r,m( 2 .;gRv;i©rs;]eyp*lSTy;" smrIcy" pp[Cz⁄ivRny;nm[; AWyo ˙iWt;nn;" 3 .gvæHzviv¥;TmtÊvivD;ns'iv…/m( y;gs'Sk;ryog;'í iv…/vTp[bv[ Iih n" 4 s mN]pUt;n( s'SpOXy pu„ppU,oR JJvl;ÔlIn( hW;RdÌu trom;ç" p[;h v;Ky…md' ®®" 5 sur;…/p' nmS’Ty xx;˚’txe%rm( kp;lm;≤ln' dev' p[,toåiSm sd;ixvm( 6 k;leêr' mh;k;l' k;lÔrinv;…snm( k;l’Tk;lveÊ;;r' p[,toåiSm sd;ixvm( 7 svR’TsvRvÊe ;;r' svRDmpr;…jtm( svR.tU ;Tm.UtSq' p[,toåiSm sd;ixvm( 8 yoåsOjTsvR.tU ;in b[˜;¥;'í sur;sur;n( tmh' lokkt;Rr' p[,toåiSm sd;ixvm( 9 vr' vre
727

Upaveda Branch 15 P: SthŒpatya Veda

RauravŒgama

Ending:

Sy;dU®mUl;Ntrmekm;]' s;/;R©l ë e n;NtrmU®m?ye j;NvNtjÏ;nlk;Ntr' c Sy;d∑W@±.;gW@©ëlne 47 m;nsU]√y' cwv m…,bN/;vs;nkm( aqv; p;êRs]U ' c m…,bN/;vs;nkm( 48 √‰Ntr' ved.;g" Sy;Tpç.ed;vs;nkm( kr<@mk⁄$opet' j$;mk⁄$mi<@tm( 49 pIt;Mbr/r' cwv dukl À ;Mbrmev v; n;>y/" pçm;]' Sy;√‰;sm;n' iv/Iyte 50 guLf;dU?veR W@©ëLy' vS]pyRNt…m„yte a.y' sVyhSte Sy;TStncUck u sImkm( 51 sU];ˇu tlm?ye tu √‰Ntr' √;dx;©ëlm( vrd' v;mhSte Sy;Czô
728

Upaveda

Branch 15Q: SthŒpatya Veda

MakuÿŒgama

Structure: Two divisions have been published, KriyŒpŒda and CharyŒpŒda. Beginning:

i£y;p;d ) i£y;p;de p[qm" p$l" ) kìl;sixkr;v;s" k;lk;l" ’p;in…/" ap;rmihm;/;ro mh;devo mheêr" 1 axeWjgd;/;r' svRk;r,k;r,m( a;idm?y;Ntrihtmp[mye mn;k⁄lm( 2 as':y;t;∫⁄t;…cNTySvx·ˇ_p·rxo….tm( pr' ixv' sm;gMy p[,Myov;c .·ˇ_m;n( 3 ®{ ¨v;c a;iddev ’p;…sN/o pç’Typr;y, ytSTv' svRkt;Rå…s svRD" svRmPy…s 4 at" svoRpk;r;y ingm;gms'iht;" xBd;qRm:u y; .vt; in"ê;svdudI·rt;" 5 ≈ImNmu%;d…/gt' mk⁄$' mk⁄$;…ytm( .gvn( ≈otuk;moåiSm tdIy' .;gmuˇrm( 6 ¨ˇm; y] kQyNte s;=;Nmo=p[d;…yn" ivix∑/m;R îit ih x;M.vv[t/;·r,;m( ) ¨ˇ_' purSt;d( .vt; tidd;nI' inbo/ me 7 prixv ¨v;c Í,u„v;ved…y„y;…m rhSy' mk⁄$oˇre x;M.vv[tm;h;TMym;iˆk˘ v[itn;mip 8 ac;RivxeW;" pUjopkr,;n;' c s;/nm( tdNTyei∑p[k;rí kQyNte Á] s'gh[ ;t( 9 x;M.vv[t;cr,m( ittIWujR NR mv;r;≤x' n;n;du"%g[h;k⁄lm( ved;gm;Ntividt' x;M.vv[tm;cret( 10 tnu]ygt;n;idml]yivxo/n;"

729

Upaveda Branch 15Q: SthŒpatya Veda

MakuÿŒgama

Ending:

mr,;x*cSy p[;/;Nym( j;tkÉ mOtk˘ v;åip mOtkÉ v;åip j;tkm( yid Sy;NmOtkSywv p[;/;Ny' p·rk°itRtm( ip]oStu mr,;x*cmNy;x*cSy b;/km( 23 iptudx R ;hm?ye tu m;t; yid mOt; .vet( iptu" pU,| tu invRTyR m;tug Ru It p≤=,Im( 24 xv;nugme xu≤ıiv…/" anugMy xv' ivp[o D;terNySy v; pun" ò;Tv; c .SmnoıÜLy m;' ÎÇŸv ivxuı‰it 25 nwiœk;n;' vnSq;n;' ytIn;' b[˜c;·r,;m( n jNmmr,o∫Àtm;x*c…mh iv¥te 26 s¥"x*civ/;nm( d;ne ivv;he yDe c s'g;[ me dexivPlve a;p¥ip c k∑;y;' s¥"x*c' iv/Iyte 27 sN?y; pUj; c kd;ip n Ty;Jy; sUtkÉ mOtkÉ cwv sN?y;' pUj;' sNTyjet( ¨p;'xsu N?y;' pUj;' tu k⁄y;Rt( i]kr,wrip 28 g[Nqops'h;r" x;M.vv[itn;' /m;R" s'=pe ,e myo·rt;" ≈ı;vNto ivmuCyNte ÆKlXnNTyNye ivmoiht;" 29 mk⁄$' /mRx;S]' tu mdIy' mk⁄$;…ytm( p#nIy' p[yàen mTp[s;d;….k;iÕ,; 30 îit ≈Imk⁄$;gme ¨ˇr.;ge cy;Rp;de a;x*civ…/kqn' n;m dxm" p$l" 10 sm;¢í;y' mk⁄$;gm" Reference: Ghose, Rama and Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha, MakuÿŒgama, KriyŒpŒda and CharyŒpŒda, English translation and notes, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1996).

730

Upaveda

Branch 15R: SthŒpatya Veda

Chandraj–ŒnŒgama

Structure: Two of four divisions, KriyŒpŒda and ChŒryŒpŒda have been published. Beginning:

cN{D;n;gm" ) p[qm" p$l" ) kl/*t;cloˇu©Í©·r©…•kÉtnm( ) /mRmiU tR/r' ≈ImNmh;vOW.kÉtnm( 1 anNt®{p[mqp·rW…•kWoJJvlm( ) anNt®{m;s;¥ …/W,o …/W,o•t" 2 p·rSpOxn( ≈Ipd;BjpI#÷ mU›;R mu¸mRÛu " ) bı;Ô≤l" sups[ ;¥ nIcwv;Rcmuv;c h 3 bOhSpit®v;c .gvn( k®,;…sN/o svRD;nsm;≈y ) n;iv„’t;íed( .vt; Sf⁄$m;gms'iht;" – jgt( ikl;N/t;…mße inm∆edD( ;nv…jRtm( 4 aivD;ywv yo lokÉ .vd;gms'iht;" ) ivp…ít' Sv' mnute n tSm;i√¥te pxë" 5 .vTp[s;ds'pÊy; .vdIy;gm;mOtm( ) inpIywv;mrgu®r.v' …sıs;/n" 6 a;k…,Rt; my; .;g;íN{D;n;gt;" xu.;" ) bhvStidh b[iU h ’py; ixvx;snm( 7 mo=/m;R ivxeW,e t]oCyNt îit ≈utm( ah' ≈utne yen Sy;' ividt;xeWvedn" 8 anNt®{ ¨v;c yuˇ_' pO∑' ih su…/y; i]idvexguro Tvy; Í,u„v;vihto .UTv; v+y;…m ixvx;snm( 9 pxupitpd;qRinvRcnm( b[˜;¥;" Sq;vr;Nt;í devdevSy xU≤ln" pxv" p·rk°TyRNte s's;rvxvitRn" 10 teW;' pitTv;i√êex" ixv" pxupit" SmOt"

731

Upaveda Branch 15R: SthŒpatya Veda

Chandraj–ŒnŒgama

Ending:

=urkm;Ridivxu≤ı" =urkmR…, v;Nte c p[te /Ume c mwqnu e du"Sv“e dujnR SpxeR nr" ò;Tv; ivxuı‰it 16 s;iv}y;idjpSy mh;p;tkn;xkTvm( ayut' cwv s;iv}y;" p[;,;y;mxt√ym( ò;n√;dxk˘ n¥;' tIqRy;]; i√yojne – p[;j;pTySy ’Cz^Sy tuLymet∞tu∑ym( 17 shßprm;' devI' xtm?y;' dx;pr;m( g;y]I' c jpe…•Ty' mh;p;tkn;xnm( 18 v;mdeVy' i]r;vOTy tdˆwv ivxuı‰it p*®W' sUˇ_m;vOÊy muCyte svRikæLbW;t( 19 ®{wk;dxk˘ jPTv; tdˆwv ivxuı‰it ≈ImTpç;=rI' jPTv; tT=,;dev xuı‰it 20 aqvRixrs' cwv nIl®{' tqwv c s’∆PTv;å≤%lw" p;pwStiSm•hin muCyte i]sup,| c jPTvwv muCyte svRikæLbWw" 21 ≈ı;y;" ixvs;yuJyp[;pkTvm( y" ≈ıywv;crit iviht' ixvx;sne s ≈Ik<#p[s;den ixvs;yuJymOCzit 22 x;S]Sy gopnIyt; îit te gidt' sMyGgI„pte ixvx;snm( rhSy' svRx;S]eWu gopnIy' p[yàt" 23 îit ≈IcN{D;n;gme ¨ˇr.;geånNt®{bOhSpits'v;de ixvx;sne cy;Rp;de p[;y…íˇiv…/kqn' n;m;∑m" p$l" 8 Reference: Ghose, Rama and Dvivedi, Brajavallabha, Candraj–ŒnŒgama: KriyŒpŒda and ChŒryŒpŒda, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1995).

732

Upaveda

Branch 15S: SthŒpatya Veda

Parame§hvarŒgama

Structure: 23 chapters Beginning:

p[qm" p$l" mt.edSvÂpinÂp,m( ) m©l;cr,m( ) vNde …grIN{tny;i√rd;nn;…¶.Un≤Nd.Oi©·ri$seivtp;dpµm( ) pç;nn' f…,xxI.tr=ucmR.WU ' mhexminx' ixrs; …grIxm( 1 p;x;ïxe∑divW;,kr;g[bIjpUroJJvl' t®,idVy j$;p[k;xm( ) ko$Irkoi$xixre%mum;tnUj' vNde g,eN{minx' vrd;nd=m( 2 kìl;six%re rMye …sıgN/vRsie vte ) svRkLy;,inlye pu
733

Upaveda Branch 15S: SthŒpatya Veda

Parame§hvarŒgama

Ending:

deVyuv;c an;/;r sd;/;r /;trIêr vLl. inrNtr inr;t˚ p·rpU,;R√y p[.o 12 inTysTysu%Jyoit"kÉvlSy …cd;Tmn" s∫;veåNySy k;yRSy;i√tIyTv' k⁄tStv 13 ¨ˇ_;in l=,;Nyet;Ny≤%l;in SyurIêr tq;ip Tv…y ivêex …zN?yett( s'xy' mm 14 Èêr ¨v;c `$;¥; mOTsmup•; mOdve Vyvh;rt" n;mÂpi£y;vÊv' knk;t( k⁄<@l;idvt( 15 k;yRSy k;r,;TmTv' lok…sımip ≈uit" mOiˇkÉTyev sTy' ceTy;h bIj;ïr' Sf⁄$m( 16 Vyvht;R Vyv˙itVyRvh;yR…md' ]ym( Ek Ev;s…mh yt( suv,RTv' ih k;çnm( 17 y;v•;Tmp·rD;n' ixXnodrk⁄v;idn;m( t;v∫ºdvd;.;so D;te m…y k⁄to ….d; 18 r∆* spRTvm;roPy Sv.[;NTy; k⁄mn; aih" …b.eit ik˘ v; tSyey' kroit n kroit v; 19 s'iSqte mYy…/œ;ne inStr©su%;Mbu/* s'j;yNte ivlIyNte n;mÂp;Tmbuädë ;" 20 deVyuv;c p[’te" prtN];y; y√; Sv;tN}yv](mn" j;Ty;/Oit·ry' ne∑; .vtoåiSt p[yojnm( 21 îit ≈Ip;rmeêrtN]e ]yo…v'xitp$l" sm;¢" 23 Reference: Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha, PŒrame§varŒgamaú, Translation with Notes, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratisththanam, 1995).

734

Upaveda

Branch 15T: SthŒpatya Veda

KiraöŒgama

Structure: 12 chapters of VidyŒpŒda have been published. Beginning:

ikr,;gm pxup$l" kìl;s≤x%r;sIn' som' som;/Rx% e rm( hr' ÎÇ;b[vIÊ;;+yR" StuitpUv…R md' vc" 1 g®@" jy;N/kpOqSu kN/bN/.edivc=, jy p[vrvIrexs'®ıpurd;hk 2 jy;≤%lsurx e ;n≤xrXzπd.y;nk jy p[…qts;mQyRmNmqiSqitn;xn 3 jy;Cyuttnu?v'sk;lkÀ$bl;ph jy;vtRmh;$ops·r√πgiv/;r, 4 jy d;®vno¥;nmuinpàIivmohk jy nOˇmh;rM.£°@;iv=o.d;®, 5 jyog[Âps'rM.]…sti]dx;sur jy £ÀrjneN{;Syd≤xRt;sOKsuinZúr 6 jy vIrp·rSpNdd=yDivn;xn jy;∫⁄tmh;≤l©s'Sq;nblgivRt 7 jy êetin…mˇog[mTO yudhe inp;tn jy;xeWsu%v;sk;mmoihtxwlj 8 jyopmNyust' ;pmohj;ltmohr jy p;t;lmUlo?vRlok;lokp[d;hk 9 .ˇ_Sy mm .ItSy ≤xvD;n' pr' vd ydv;Py nr;" sveR mu·ˇ_m;y;≤Nt kÉvl;m( 10 Evmuˇ_o hr" p[;h p[Sf⁄r∞N{xe%r" .gv;n( .{metÊvy; pO∑' Í,u D;n' mhodym( 11 ikr,;:y' mh;tN]' pr;mOtsu%p[dm(

735

Upaveda Branch 15T: SthŒpatya Veda

KiraöŒgama

Ending:

i]yuˇ_; lokp;l;" SyuítuqåRe ∑^;…, kLpyet( 9 iv¥ex;n;' Í,u„v;NyLl=,' m;tOk;Tmkm( Vy;pk˘ refs'yˇu _' ctuqSR vrs'ytu m( 10 …bNduyˇu _mnNtSy v;ckTven s'iSqtm( refv,Rytu ' x;Nt' WœSvrsmiNvtm( 11 …bNdudhe sm;yuˇ_' sU+mdevSy v;ckm( mk;r' iv.usy' og;i√sg;R∞ ≤xvoˇm" 12 x;Ntv,;R≤Ntmo v,oR refyuˇ_" s…bNduk" WœSvrsm;yuˇ_" p[oˇ_o ne]k w n;min 13 xv,;RNt;≤Ntmo v,oR r;Nt;Nten sm;yut" i√tIySvrs'yˇu _ Ek®{" s…bNduk" 14 .;Nt;Nt;/" iSqto r;Nto √;dx;Nten .eidt" …bNdun; .UiWto mU…›R i]mUtvRe ;Rcko mt" 15 WœSvryut" x;Nt" s…bNdu" s;Ntt" iSqt" ≈Ik<# EW iv:y;tStt" Í,u ≤x%i<@n" 16 l;Nt;≤NtmítuqnRe .UiWto …bNdusy' tu " sm;sen my; t;+yR iv¥ex;" p·rk°itRt;" 17 kÀ$mIk;rs'yˇu _' …bNdun;div.UiWtm( gy]I cwv s;iv]I ik˘ tu refivxeW,m( 18 ao'k;r;idnmoNt;'í D;Tv; mN];Np[yojyet( ò;Tv; xuı" p#πNmN];Hz⁄…c" p[;G.ojn;Tpr" 19 √yorPyNyq; doWo .vediu Cz∑s'.v" 20 îit ≈Im≤Tkr,;:ye mh;tN]e iv¥;p;de yN];vt;ro √;dx" p$l" sm;¢" iv¥;p;d" sm;¢" Reference: Vivanti, Maria Pia, "Il "KiraöŒgama", Testo e traduzione del "VidyŒpŒda," in Annali, Supplemento n. 3 agli: vol. 35 (1975), fasc. 2, Napoli, 1975.

Upaveda

Branch 16: HŒr´ta SaµhitŒ Structure: 6 Main Divisions. Beginning:

h;rIts'iht; aq p[qm Sq;nm( p[qmoå?y;y" nTv; ≤xv' prmtÊvkl;ivÂ!' D;n;mOtk w c$ul' prm;TmÂpm( r;g;idrogxmn' dmn' SmrSy xêT=p;…/p/r' i]gu,;TmÂpm( 1 a;]eyh;rIts'v;d" ihmvduˇre kÀle …sıgN/vRsie vte x;Nte mOgg,;k°,| n;n; p;dpxo….te 2 t]Sq' tps; yuˇ_' t®,;idTytejsm( xuıSfi$kvCz⁄.'[ .Uit.UiWtivg[hm( 3 j$;jU$;$vImUle ïWt' xu.k [ <⁄ @lm( a;]ey' b¸≤x„ywStu r;…jt' tps;iNvtm( 4 pp[Cz ≤x„yo h;rIt" svRD;n…md' mht( 5 h;rIt ¨v;c .vn( gu,g,;/;r a;yuvdRe ivd;' vr ivny;divnItoåh' pOCz;…m muinpu©v 6 kq' rogsmuTpiˇ®Tp•o D;yte kqm( ¨pc;r" p[c;rí kq' v; …s≤ı…mCzit 7 EtTsMyk™ p·rD;n' kqySv mh;mune Ev' pO∑o mh;c;yoR h;rIten mh;Tmn; p[Tyuv;c AiW" pu]' p[hSyoTf⁄Lllocn" 8 a;]ey ¨v;c Í,u pu] mh;p[;D svRx;S]ivx;rd …cikTs;x;S]k⁄xl vw¥iv¥;ivc=, 9 a;yuvdRe mp;rNtu Xlok;n;' l=s':yy; kq' tSy p·rD;n' k;len;Lpen pu]k 10 aLp;yuWoåLpvˇ_;r" SvLpx;S]ivx;rd;" aLp;v];r,e xˇ_;" kl* j;t; îme nr;" 11

736

Upaveda Branch 16: HŒr´ta SaµhitŒ Ending:

≈uTv; cwn' mh;tej; h;rIto muinsˇm" 1 p[…,pTy gu®≈eœ' ˙∑;Nt"kr,Stt" jg;m Sv,RdItIr' ò;n?y;nrtStq; 2 y Ett( p#it x;S]' mhWRvcR n;CΩtm( svRp;pivinmRˇu _o nI®j" su%m≈ute 3 a;d* yd( b[˜,; p[oˇ_mi],; tdnNtrm( /NvNt·r,; p[oˇ_ç a…ên; c mh;Tmn; 4 Ev' vedsm' Dey' n;vD;k;r,' mtm( aNywí b¸/; p[oˇ_ n;n;x;S]ivx;rdw" 5 amIW;' c mt' g[;Á' tSm;t( sveR sm' ivdu" crk" su≈tu íwv v;G.$ç tq;pr" 6 mu:y;í s'iht; v;Cy;iStS] Ev yuge yuge 7 ai]"’tyugve ¥w o √;pre su≈tu o mt" kl* v;G.$n;m; c g·rm;] p[ÎXyte 8 vw„,vI c;…ênI g;gIR t] m;?y;iˆk;pr; m;kú<@ºy; c k…qt; yogr;jen /Imt; 9 s'iht; AiW…." p[oˇ_; mN]wn;Rn;iv/wivR.o 10 a…¶vexí .e@í j;tUk
737

Upaveda

738

Branch 17: Bhel SaµhitŒ Structure: 8 Main Divisions. Beginning:

.el s'iht; sU]Sq;nm( ctuqoRå?y;y" ipPpLy;id p;np[lpe nm( ipPpLyo dIPykíwv tq; mUiWkk…,Rk;" …bLvSy pLlv;" êet; h·r{; m/uk˘ tq; 1 Ete k⁄œ' p[itfl≤Nt yuˇ_;" p;np[lpe nw" goipˇ;id p[lpe " gv;' ipˇ' x(nu " ipˇ' al;bU' k$uk;' tq; 2 inMb' nt' xkúr;' c d¥;ˇ√Tp[lpe nm( aNy" p[lpe " y; tu<@m<@lI√«p;t( mUl;Nye@gjSy c 3 sur;dnI' sugN/;' c d¥;ˇ√Tp[lpe nm( suv,Rp„u Py;id xo/nm( suv,Rp„u pI' k$uk;' Xy;m;' tejovtI' tq; 4 i]vOTsÔ;tk˘ cwv k⁄œº s'xo/n' ivdu" a;rGv/;id tnulpe nm( a;rGv/' c .;gI| c s;êgN/;m( gv;dnIm( 5 êet;' Jyoit„mtI' cwv sU+mcU,;Rin k;ryet( gv;' ipˇen t∞U,| s¢’Tv" su.;ivtm( 6 yoJy' sWRptwlne swN/ven c yu·ˇ_t" Et√w ˙tdoWSy …mtd?y•.o…jn" 7 tnulpe nmui∂∑' ’…mk⁄œivn;xnm( gve/k u mk⁄œp[yog" gve/k u mk⁄œ* c %idrKv;qp;…ct* 8 t;vPyu.* p[yÔu It k⁄iœn;' k⁄œ x;Ntye k<@ÜflvO=p[yog" aq k<@ÜflvO=;,;' rs;" Syu" k⁄iœn;' iht;" 9

Upaveda

739

Branch 17: Bhel SaµhitŒ Ending:

v;r;hvStvOW,* vOW,* govOWSy c c$kkú$k;'ívw =Ire, sh s;/yet( 79 t…•Âh' tu xu£,É bSt;n;mq …m≈yet( ¨∞$e=ru k˘ c;] kLkpe„y' sm;vpet( 80 Òtm;≤=ks'yˇu _' p[,It" xkúr;yut" ik≤çLlv…,to b‚StgRmyeTS]Ixt;Nyip 81 EW n;rIivh;r;,;' b◊Nt"purv;…sn;m( retoblkr" ≈eœ" £°@;b‚Strnuˇm" 82 a;Tmgu¢;flw" =Irmu∞$e=ru kì" Ítm( .ojne v;nup;ne v; vO„y;q| sMp[yojyet( 83 rs;ynb‚St„vitdex" rs;yn; bStyStu ye my; pUvdR ≤xRt;" t;netmw ;|sinyUhR yw oRjyeTkLpk‚Lpt;n( 84 b.[sU k U r%@±g;í z;ggomihW;Stq; £*çk;r<@v;" £*çc£v;kbk;Stq; 85 inÂhmeW;' s'˙Ty l;.tSs;/u yojyet( pnsbIj;idb‚St" =Ir' pnsbIj;in kipkCzÀfl;in c 86 ¨∞$e=ru bIj;in m/uk˘ t;lmStkm( ipPpLyXx;·rv; {;=; %jUrR o mdn;Nyip 87 jIvkWR.k* med; bIj' nIloTplSy c g.e,R ;nen s'…sı' c$k;<@rs;yutm( 88 xkúr;m/usy' ˇu _ ---- – îit .el s'iht; sm;¢m( Reference: Shastri, K.S. Subramania, and Sarma, C. Raja Rajeswara, Bhel SaµhitŒ, (New Delhi: Sahitya Anusandhana Ekaka, 1977).

Upaveda

Branch 18: KŒ§hyapa SaµhitŒ Structure: 8 Main Divisions. Beginning:

≈Ik;Xyps'iht; v; vOıjIvk°y' tN]m( k*m;r.OTym( sU]Sq;nm( ik˘v; leh…ytVy' c ik˘v; leihtl=,m( aitleihtdoW;" kÉ kÉ c doW; aleihte 1 mNdIlI!Sy ik˘ Âp' gu@doW;í t] kÉ kÉ lehno∫v; rog;" kí teW;mup£m" 2 EtNme .gvn( sv| vˇ_⁄mhR…s tÊvt" su%' du"%' ih b;l;n;' dOXyte lehn;≈ym( 3 îit pO∑o mh;.;g" kXypo lokpU…jt" p[Xn' p[ov;c in≤%l' p[j;n;' ihtk;Myy; 4 yd•p;n' p[;ye, g….R,I S]I inWevte rso invRttR e t;dOk™ i]/; c;Sy;" p[vtRte 5 m;tOp∑u ‰qRmk e ;'xo i√tIyo g.Rp∑u ye tOtIy" Stnpu∑‰q| n;y;R g.RStu pu„yit 6 t;dOKp[’tyStSm;Ì.;Rt( p[.iO t deihn" v;tipˇkfSqU,;‚Stß" p[’tyí t;" 7 v;itk;" pw·ˇk;" kÉ…ct( kifníwv deihn" √N√p[’tyí;Nye smSqU,;Stq;åpre 8 arog;Stu smSqU,; v;itk;¥;" sd;tur;" Et;" p[’ty" p[oˇ_; deihn;' vOıjIvk 9 Et; a;…≈Ty tÊvDo .eWj;NyupkLpyet( y Et; ved tÊven n s muÁit .eWje 10 ivl©flm;]' tu j;tm;]Sy deihn" .eWj' m/usipR>y;| mitm;nupkLpyet( 11 v/Rm;nSy tu ≤xxom;Rse m;se ivv/Ryte ( aq;mlkm;]' tu pr' iv√;• v/Ryte ( 12

740

Upaveda Branch 18: KŒ§hyapa SaµhitŒ Ending:

îdmuˇrmÆKl∑' Vy;:y;tumpu c£me k⁄®=e]' m?ydex;¥ojn;n;' xt' prm( 5 smSt;n( W@^s;n( p[;yo .uÔte m?ydexj;" .+y.oJy;•vIr;Ste tu .uÔNto v;ås’ˇq; 6 pUvdR x e Stu ivDeyo m/ur" xItlo gu®" k⁄m;rvtRnIm;d* k$IvWRStqwv c 7 mg/;su mh;r;∑^mWO .√«pmev c p*'@v^ /Rnk˘ c;ip mO·ˇk;v/Rm;nkm( 8 kvR$' c sm;t©÷ t;m≤l¢' scIrkm( ip[y©ëmq k*xLy' k≤l©pOœpUrkm( 9 EWu PlIhivno mTy;R glgi<@kmev c gu@x;Lyodnp[;y; mTSy.ojnseivn" 10 p[;yxo m/ur;h;r; v;tXle„m;Tmk; nr;" teW;' k$ukitˇ_' c Â=mu„,' c .ojnm( 11 y∞;Nydip Xle„mfl' teW;' tˇt( p[yojyet( kçIpd; nv?v;n; k;vIr;StuLyyorip 12 v;nsI k⁄mdu ;r;Jy' …c·rp;≤lStqwv c cIrr;Jyç cor;,;' pu≤lNd' {iv@ºWu c 13 kr`;$xn;n;' c ivveh; m<@peWu c k;Nt;r' c vr;h' c `$;Sv;.Irmev c 14 d≤=,;' idxm;…≈Ty dex; iv --≤%lSq;nSywt;v;nev .;g ¨plB/" k;Xyps'iht; vOıjIvk°ytN]' c Et;vTyevoplB/.;ge iv≈;Myit Reference: Tewari, P.V., KŒ§yapa-SaµhitŒ or V¨ddhaj´vakýa Tantra, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Visvabharati, 1996).

741

Ìyurveda

Branch 19: Charaka SaµhitŒ Structure: 120 Chapters Beginning:

crks'iht; sU]Sq;nm( p[qmo dI`RÔI…vtIy;?y;y" aq;to dI`RÔI…vtIym?y;y' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 îit h Sm;h .gv;n;]ey" 2 dI`| jI…vtm‚NvCzN.r√;j ¨p;gmt( îN{mugt[ p; bud?≠ v; xry;' .gv;Hz£" p[itpede h kÉvlm( AiWp[oˇ_o .r√;jStSm;Cz£mup;gmt( 5 …vflmUt; yd;rog;" p[;du.tRU ;" xrI·r,;m( tpopv;s;?yynb[˜cyRvt[ ;yuW;m( 6 td; .Ut„e vnu£ox' purS’Ty mhWRy" smet;" pu
742

Ìyurveda

743

Branch 19: Charaka SaµhitŒ Ending:

indxRn' invRcnR ' s'inyogo ivkLpnm( 44 p[TyuTs;rStqoı;r" s'.vStN]yuˇ_y" tN]e sm;sVy;soˇ_É .vNTvet; ih kéTòx" 45 Ekdexne dOXyNte sm;s;….ihte tq; yq;åMbujvnSy;kú" p[dIpo veXmno yq; 46 p[bo/np[k;x;q;RStq; tN]Sy yuˇ_y" Ek‚Sm•ip ySyeh x;S]e lB/;Spd; mit" 47 s x;S]mNydPy;xu yu·ˇ_DTv;t( p[b?u yte a/Iy;noåip x;S];…, tN]yuKTy; ivn; ….Wk™ n;…/gCzit x;S];q;Rnq;Rn( .;Gy=ye yq; 48 dughRO It' ≤=,oTyev x;S]' xS]…mv;bu/m( sughO It' tdev D' x;S]' xS]' c r=it 49 tSm;det;" p[v+yNte ivStre,oˇre pun" tÊvD;n;qRmSywv tN]Sy gu,doWt" 50 îdm≤%lm/ITy sMygq;Rn( ivmOxit yoåivmn;" p[yoginTy" smnujsu%jIivtp[d;t; .vit /OitSmOitbu≤ı/mRvı O " 51 ySy √;dxs;hßI ˙id itœit s'iht; soåqRD" s ivc;rD…íikTs;k⁄xlí s" 52 rog;'SteW;' …cikTs;' c s ikmq| n bu?yte …cikTs; viˆvexSy suSq;turiht' p[it 53 yidh;‚St tdNy] y•eh;‚St n tTKv…ct( a…¶vexkéte tN]e crkp[its'Skéte 54 îTy…¶vexkéte tN]e crkp[its'Skétåe p[;¢e dO!bls'p·U rte …s≤ıSq;ne ¨ˇrb‚St…s≤ın;Rm √;dxoå?y;y" 12 sm;¢…md' crktN]m( Reference: Sharma, V.P., Caraka SaµhitŒ: Agnive§a's treatise refined and annotated by Caraka and redacted by D¨¶habala, 3 vols., (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1981).

Ìyurveda

744

Branch 20: Su§hruta SaµhitŒ Structure: 186 Chapters. Beginning:

su≈tu s'iht; sU]Sq;nm( p[qmoå?y;y" aq;to vedoTp…ˇm?y;y' Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 yqov;c .gv;n( /NvNt·r" 2 aq %lu .gvNtmmrvrmOiWg,p·rvOtm;≈mSq' k;…xr;j' idvod;s' /NvNt·rm*p/envvwtr,*r.[p*„kl;vtkrvIyR gopurr…=tsu≈utp[.Oty Ëcu" 3 .gvn( x;rIrm;ns;gNtu….Vy;R…/….…vR…v/vedn;….`;top&t;n( sn;q;nPyn;qvi√ce∑m;n;n( …v£oxtí m;nv;n….smI+ymn…s n" pI@; .vit teW;' su%iw W,;' rogopxm;qRm;Tmní p[;,y;];q| p[j;ihthetor;yuvedR ' ≈otu…mCz;m îhopidXym;nm( a];yˇmwihkm; mu‚„mk˘ c ≈ey" t∫gvNtmupp•;" Sm" …x„yTvenie t 4 t;nuv;c .gv;n( Sv;gt' v" svR Ev;mIm;'Sy; a?y;Py;í .vNto vTs;" 5 îh %Lv;yuvdRe ' n;mop;©mqvRvde Sy;nuTp;¥wvp[j;" Xlokxt shßm?y;yshß' c ’tv;n( SvyM.U" ttoåLp;yuÇmLpme/ STv' c;loKy nr;,;' .Uyoå∑/; p[,Itv;n( 6 y¥q; xLy' x;l;Ky' k;y…c…kTs; .Ut…v¥; k*m;r.OTym( agdtN]' rs;yntN]' v;jIkr,tN]…mit 7 aq;Sy p[Ty©l=,sm;s" t] xLy' n;m …v…v/tO,k;œp;W;,p;'x-u lohlo∑;‚Sqb;ln% pUy;ß;vdu∑v[,;NtgR.R xLyoır,;q| yN]xS]=;r;…¶p[…,/;nv[,…v…níy;q| c 1 x;l;Ky' n;mo?vRj]ugt;n;' ≈v,nynvdn`[;,;ids'…≈t;n;' Vy;/In;mupxmn;qRm( 2 k;y…c…kTs; n;m sv;R©s'…≈t;n;' Vy;/In;' Jvrrˇ_…pˇxoWoNm;d;pSm;rk⁄œmeh;its;r;dIn;mupxmn;qRm( 3 .Ut…v¥; n;m dev;surgN/vRy=r=" …ptO…px;cn;gg[h;¥upsO∑cets;'

Ìyurveda

745

Branch 20: Su§hruta SaµhitŒ Ending:

pu®W" Wo@xkl" p[;,;íwk;dxwv ye 7 rog;,;' tu shß' yCzt' …v'xitrev c xt' c pç {Vy;,;' i]s¢Ty…/koˇrm( 8 Vy;st" k°itRt' t≤ı ….•; doW;S]yo gu,;" i√Wi∑/; .vNTyete .U…y∑…mit iníy" 9 ]y Ev pOqk™ doW; i√xo nv sm;…/kì" ]yodx;…/kìki√smm?yoLb,w≤S]x" 10 pç;xdev' tu sh .v≤Nt =ym;gtw" =I,m?y;…/k=I,=I,vOıSw tq;åprw" 11 √;dxwv' sm;:y;t;S]yo doW; i√Wi∑/; …m≈; /;tumlwdoRW; y;NTys':yeyt;' pun" 12 tSm;t( p[s©÷ s'yMy doW.edivkLpnw" rog' ividTvopcre{s.edyw qR ·w rtw" 13 ….Wk™ kt;Råq kr,' rs; doW;Stu k;r,m( k;yRm;roGymevk w mn;roGymtoåNyq; 14 a?y;y;n;' tu W$(W∑‰; g[…qt;qRpd£mm( EvmetdxeW,e tN]muˇrmO≤ımt( 15 Sp∑gU!;qRivD;nmg;!mNdcets;m( yq;iv…/ yq;p[Xn' .vt;' p·rk°itRtm( 16 shoˇr' Tvetd/ITy sv| b[;˜' iv/;nen yqoidten n hIyteåq;RNmnsoå>yupte ;det√co b[;˜tIv sTym( 17 îit su≈tu s'iht;y;muˇrtN]e doW.edivkLpo n;m W$(Wi∑tmoå?y;y" 66 îit s*≈ute a;yuvdRe x;S]e ¨ˇrSq;n' sm;¢m( sm;¢…md' su≈tu tN]m( Reference: Pandey, Shastri Shambhunatha, ed., Su§ruta-SaµhitŒ of Mahar·i Su§rut, (Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1985).

746

Ìyurveda

Branch 21A: VŒgbhaÿÿa SaµhitŒ

A·htŒ‹gahïdaya


≈Im√;G.$…vr…cte a∑;©˙dye sU]Sq;nm( p[qmoå?y;y" r;g;idrog;n( stt;nuWˇ_;nxeWk;yp[stO ;nxeW;n( a*TsuKymoh;ritd;Ô`;n yoåpUvvR ¥w ;y nmoåStu tSmw 1 a;yu" k;mym;nen /m;RqsR % u s;/nm( a;yuvdRe opdexWe u …v/ey" prm;dr" 2 b[˜; SmOTv;åyuWo ved' p[j;pitm…jg[ht( soå…ên* t* shß;=' soåi]pu];idk;NmunIn( 3 teå…¶vex;idk;'Ste tu pOqk™ tN];…, te…nre te>yoåit…vp[k°,e>R y" p[;y" s;rtro∞y" 4 …£yteå∑;©˙dy' n;its'=pe …vStrm( k;yb;lg[ho?v;R©xLyd'∑;^ jr;vOW;n( 5 a∑;v©;…n tSy;¸…í…kTs; yeWu s'…≈t; v;yu" …pˇ' kfíeit ]yo doW;" sm;st" 6 …v’t;å…v’t; deh' fl≤Nt te vˇRy≤Nt c te Vy;…pnoå…p ˙•;>yor/om?yo?vRs≈' y;" 7 vyoåhor;i].uˇ_;n;' teåNtm?y;idg;" £m;t( tw.vR ie √WmStI+,o mNdí;…¶" smw" sm" 8 koœ" £Àro mOdmu ?R yo m?y" Sy;ˇw" smwr…p xu£;tRvSqwjNR m;d* …vWe,ve …vW’me" 9 twí itß" p[’tyo hInm?yoˇm;" pOqk™ sm/;tu" smSt;su ≈eœ;…nNd(y; i√doWj;" 10 t] Â=o lù" xIt" %r" sU+míloå…nl" …pˇ' sòehtI+,o„,' lù …vß' sr' {vm( 11 ≤òN/" xIto gu®mRNd"Xl+,omOTò" ‚Sqr" kf" s'sgR" s…•p;tí td(i√i]=ykopt" 12 rs;sOõm± ;'smedoå‚Sqm∆xu£;…, /;tv"

747

Ìyurveda Branch 21A: VŒgbhaÿÿa SaµhitŒ

A·htŒ‹gahïdaya

Ending:

tSm;dnLpfl mLpsmu¥m;n;' p[ITyqRmte duidt' pOqgev tN]m( 80 îdm;gm…sıTv;Tp[Ty= fldxRn;t( mN]vTs'py[ oˇ_Vy' n mIm;'Sy' kqçn 81 dI`RjI…vtm;roGy' /mRmq| su%' yx" p;#;vbo/;nuœ;nwr…/gCzTyto /[vu m( 82 EtTp#n( sõ±gh[ bo/xˇ_" Sv>yStkm;R ….Wgp[kMPy" a;kMpyTyNy …vx;ltN] ’t;….yog;n( yid t• …c]m( 83 yid crkm/Ite td( /[vu ' su≈tu ;id p[…,gidtgd;n;' n;mm;]eå…p b;Á" aq crk…vhIn" p[…£y;y;m≤%•" …k…mv %lu krotu Vy;…/t;n;' vr;k" 84 a….…nvex vx;d….yuJyte su.…,teå…p n yo Î!mU!k" p#tu yàpr" pu®W;yuW' s %lu vw¥km;¥m…n…vRd" 85 v;te …pˇe Xle„mx;Nt* c pQy' twl' sipRm;R…=k˘ c £me, Etd( b[˜; .;Wt;' b[˜jo v; k; …nmRN]e vˇ_é.de o…ˇ_x…ˇ_" 86 a…./;tOvx;t( …k'v; {Vyx…ˇ_…vR…x„yte ato mTsrmuTsOJy m;?ySQymvlMByt;m( 87 AiWp[,Ite p[IitíeNmuKTv; crksu≈tu * .e@;¥;" …k' n p#‰Nte tSm;d(g;[ Á' su.;iWtm( 88 ˙dy…mv ˙dymetTsv;Ryvu dRe v;õ±mypyo/e" ’Tv; yCz⁄.m;¢' xu.mStupr' tto jgt" 89 îit ≈Ivw¥pit…s'hgu¢sUn≈u Im√;G.$…vr…ct;y;m∑;©˙dys'iht;y;' Wœe ¨ˇrSq;ne v;jIkr,…v…/n;Rm cTv;·r'xoå?y;y" 40 Reference: Murthy, K.R.Srikantha, tr., VŒgbhaÿa's A·ÿŒ‹ga Hïdayam, 3 vols., (Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1991-3).

748

Ìyurveda

Branch 21B: VŒgbhaÿÿa SaµhitŒ

A·htŒ‹gasaµgraha

Structure: Three Main Divisions. Beginning:

a∑;©s§h" ) sU]Sq;ne a;yu„k;mIy" p[qmoå?y;y" ) r;g;idrog;" shj;" smUl; yen;xu sveR jgtoåPyp;St;" ) tmekvw¥' ixrs; nm;…m vw¥;gmD;'í ipt;mh;dIn( 1 aq;t a;yu„k;mIy' n;m;?y;y' Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) îit h Sm;¸r;]ey;dyo mhWRy"-a;yu" k;mym;nen /m;RqsR % u s;/nm( ) a;yuvdRe opdexWe u iv/ey" prm;dr" 2 a;yuvdRe ;mOt' s;v| b[˜; buıv± ; sn;tnm( ) dd* d=;y soå…ê>y;' t* xt£tve tt" 3 /m;Rqk R ;mmo=;,;' ivflk;·r….r;myw" ) nreWu pI@‰m;neWu purS’Ty punvRsmu ( 4 /NvNt·r.r√;jin…mk;XypkXyp;" ) mhWRyo mh;Tm;nStq; lMb;yn;dy" 5 xt£tumpu ;jGmu" xr
749

Ìyurveda Branch 21B: VŒgbhaÿÿa SaµhitŒ

A·htŒ‹gasaµgraha

Ending:

ap;ne skf˘ mU]x’to" Sy;Tp[vtRnm( îit √;…v'xitiv/' v;yor;vr,' ivdu" 48 p[;,;dyStSq;NyoNym;vO
Ìyurveda

Branch 22: MŒdhava NidŒna SaµhitŒ Structure: 70 Chapters. Beginning:

m;/v…nd;nm( pç…nd;nl=,m( p[,My jgduTp…ˇ‚Sqits'h;rk;r,m( Svg;RpvgRyo√;Rr' ]wloKyxr,' …xvm( 1 n;n;munIn;' vcnw·rd;nI' sm;st" s≤∫Wj;' …nyog;t( sop{v;·r∑…nd;n…l©o …nb?yte rog…v…níyoåym( 2 n;n;tN]…vhIn;n;' ….Wj;mLpme/s;m( su%' …vD;tum;t˚mymev .…v„yit 3 …nd;n' pUvÂ R p;…, Âp;y;' Vy;/e" p[;/;Nym;idxet( 12 heTv;idk;TSNy;Rvyvwbl R ;bl …vxeW,m(

750

Ìyurveda Branch 22: MŒdhava NidŒna SaµhitŒ Ending:

aq …vWy;nu£m…,k; Jvroåits;ro g[h,I c;xoRåjI,| …vsU…ck; alsí …vlMbI c …£…m®Kp;<@ük;ml;" 1 hlImk˘ rˇ_…pˇ' r;jy+m; ¨r"=tm( k;so ih‘; sh ê;sw" Svr.edSTvrock" 2 zidRStO„,; c mUCz;R¥; rog;" p;n;Tyy;dy" d;hoNm;d;vpSm;r" k…qtoåq;…nl;my" 3 v;trˇ_mU®StM. a;mv;toåq xUl®k™ p…ˇ_j' xUlm;n;h ¨d;vtoRåq guLm®k™ 4 ˙{ogo mU]’Cz^÷ c mU];`;tStq;åXmrI p[mhe o m/umhe í …p@k;í p[mhe j;" 5 medStqodr' xoqo vO≤ıí glg<@k" g<@m;l;åpcI g[‚NqrbudR " XlIpd' tq; 6 …v{…/v[,R xoqí √* v[,* .¶n;…@kÉ .gNdropd'x* c xUkdoWSTvg;my" 7 xIt…pˇmuddRí ko#íwv;Ml…pˇkm( …vspRí s…vSfo$" srom;NTyo msU·rk;" 8 =u{;Syk,Rn;s;…=…xr"S]Ib;lk;my;" …vW' ceTyymui∂∑o ®‚Gv…n…íys'gh[ " 9 su.;iWt' y] yd‚St …k…çˇTsvRmk e °’tm] yà;t( …v…níye svR®j;' nr;,;' ≈Im;/venNe dukr;Tmjen 10 yT’t' su’t' …k…çT’Tvwv' ®‚Gv…níym( muçNtu jNtvSten …nTym;t˚sNtitm( 11 îit ≈Im;/vkr…vr…ct' m;/v…nd;n' sm;¢m( Reference: Murthy, K.R. Srikanta, MŒdhava NidŒnam (Roga Vini§caya) of Madhavakara, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1993).

751

752

Ìyurveda

Branch 23A: ShŒr‹gadhara SaµhitŒ Structure: Three Main Divisions. Beginning:

x;©≥/r s'iht; pUv% R <@º p[qmoå?y;y" m©l;cr,m( …≈y' s d¥;∫vt;' pur;·ryRd©tej"p[sre .v;nI …vr;jte …nmRlc≤N{k;y;' mh*W/Iv Jv…lt; ihm;{* 1 smUl' g[Nqp[yojnm( p[…sıyog; mu…n…." p[yˇu _;…í…kTskìyRe b¸xoånu.tU ;" …v/Iyte x;©≥/re, teW;' susg' h[ " s∆nrÔn;y 2 rog…níypUvk R ˘ …c…kTs; heTv;idÂp;’its;TMyj;it.ed"w smI+y;tursvRrog;n( …c…k‚Tst' kWR,bOh' ,;:y' k⁄vIRt vw¥o …v…/vTsuyog" 3 aoW…/p[.;v;" idVy*W/In;' bhv" p[.de ; vONd;rk;,;…mv …vSf⁄r≤Nt D;Tveit s'dhe mp;Sy /Irw" s'.;vnIy; …v…v/p[.;v;" 4 g[Nqp[yojnm( Sv;.;…vk;gNtukk;…yk;Ntr; rog; .vey"u …kl kmRdoWj;" tCzºdn;q| du·rt;ph;·r," ≈eyomy;Nyogvr;…•yojyet( 5 g[Nqm;h;TMym( p[yog;n;gm;‚Tsı;Np[Ty=;dnum;nt" svRlokiht;q;Ry v+y;Mynit…vStr;t( 6 pUv% R <@;?y;y;nu£m" p[qm' p·r.;W; Sy;∫wWJy;:y;nk˘ tq; n;@IprI=;åid…v…/SttodIpnp;cnm( 7 tt" kl;åidk;:y;nm;h;r;idgitStq; rog;,;' g,n; cwv pUv% R <@oåymI·rt" 8 m?ym%<@;?y;y;nu£m" Svrs" Kv;qf;<$* c ihm" kLkí cU,k R m(

Ìyurveda

753

Branch 23A: ShŒr‹gadhara SaµhitŒ Ending:

jr;yuroge pQy;pQym( jr;yuro…g,I n;rI n c sevte pU®Wm( n %;dedgu v[ Iy;R…, n;…p k⁄Yy;Rdit≈mm( a<@;/;re pQy;pQym( pQym] h…vduGR /' x;…l p[ào yv‚Stl" z;gm;'srsíwv {Vymug'[ n xMmR,e aojomehe pQy;pQym( lù bLy' pur;,ç /;Ny' muÌyv;idkm( v;ˇ;Rkç⁄ p$olç k;koduMbrk˘ tq; k;rveLl;idk˘ xSt' v∆RyNe m/ur' gu® m;'s' mTSy;'Stq;å?v;nm;tp;…¶…nWev,m( dUiWt;itxIttoyò;np;n;vg;hnm( l…sk;mehe pQy;pQym( rˇ_x;Lyodn' mudg( ' yvo v;StUkmev c p;lKy; cwv ve];g[' kkoR$I kdlI tq; ihm;lyp[dx e e c v;so v; suSq…cˇt; iht;net;n( …nWevte guv…R .„y≤Nd .ojnm( mTSy' m;'s' tq; r*{sev;å?v;n' p·r≈mm( v∆Ryde ( yàto /Im;n;yur;roGyvOıye p;rd…vk;re pQy;pQym( v;trˇ_É tq; k⁄œe pQy;…n y;…n t;…n c …xvtejo.ve roge …nidRxte ( k⁄xlo ….Wk™ îit pQy;pQy…vvecn;Tmk˘ i√tIy' p·r…x∑' sm;¢m( sm;¢í;åy' g[Nq" Reference: Murthy, K.R. Srikanta, tr., Sarngadhar-SaµhitŒ, a treatise on Ìyurveda, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1995).

754

Ìyurveda

Branch 23A: ShŒr‹gadhara SaµhitŒ

Upavanavinodaú

Structure: 15 Divisions. Beginning:

aq ¨pvnivnod" p[St;vn; pu„p/Nv; ivjyteån©πn;Py≤%l' jgt( vxI’t' yen h#;ˇ( ssur;surm;nuWm( 1 pus' ;' svRs% u k w s;/nkr;" s*NdyRgvoRd/ur£°@;lolivl;…snIjnmn" Sf°tp[mod;vh;" ) guÔ∫»©ivin{p˚j.rSf;roLls∂I…`Rk;yuˇ_;" s≤Nt gOhWe u ySy ivpul;r;m;" s pOQvIpit" 2 nv' mnoh;·r vpuvrR ;©n;" s%; kl;ivt( klvLlrISvn;" /n;in sv| ivfl' su%iw W,o ivn; ivh;ropvn' mhIpte" 3 aq t®mihm; b¸….bRt ik˘j;tw" pu]/w mR ;RqvR …jRt"w vrmek" p…q t®yR] iv≈mte jn" 4 dxWUpsm; v;pI dxv;pIsmo Ód" dxÓdsm" pu]o dxpu]smSt®" 5 £°@;r;mNtu y" k⁄y;Rd∂u ;mfls'ytu m( s gCzπCz˚rpur' vseˇ];yut]ym( 6 Ett( sv| p·rD;y vO=rop' sm;r.et( /m;Rqk R ;mmo=;,;' &me>y" s;/n' yt" 7 y;vi∂n;in tulsI roipt; yÌ»he vset( t;v√WRshß;…, vwk<⁄ #π s mhIyte 8 yStu s'ropyeiäLv' x˚rp[Iitk;rkm( tTk⁄låe ip sd; l+mIiStœºd;pu]p*]km( 9 Evmev ih yoåêTq' ropyed( iv…/n; nr" y] k⁄];ip v; Sq;ne s gCzπd( .vn' hre" 10 ten∑e ; bhvo yD;Sten dˇ; vsuN/r; svRd; b[˜c;rI s yen /;]I p[roipt; 11

755

Ìyurveda Branch 23A: ShŒr‹gadhara SaµhitŒ

Upavanavinodaú

Ending:

%rturgiv@inve≤xt ˇ;iptxl;ky; mUle ityRg( ivı; kdlI flit fl' k·rkr;k;rm( 170 k*lxo…,tmed;My;m˚olKv…qten v; …s≤çt; kdlI sUte d;…@mIflmuˇmm( 171 nrm;'svs;rˇ_d≤NtdNtivcU…,Rt"w …m…≈ten;M.s; …sˇ_; rM.; cUtfl' .vet( 172 a˚olk…qt' …ê•' nOm;'s' z;…gduG/yuk™ ip
Ìyurveda

Branch 24: BhŒva Praka§ha SaµhitŒ Structure: Three Main Divisions. Beginning:

≈Im∫;v…m≈p[,It" .;v p[k;x" pUvR %<@m( gjmu%mmrp[vr' …s≤ıkr' …vflht;Rrm( gu®mvgmnynp[d…m∑krI…m∑devt;' vNde 1 a;yuvdRe ;gmn' £me, yen;.vd(.mU * p[qm' …l%;…m tmh' n;n;tN];…, s'ÎXy 2 a;yuihRt;iht' Vy;/e…nRd;n' xmn' tq; …v¥te y] …v√≤∫" s a;yuvdRe ¨Cyte 3 anen pu®Wo ySm;d;yu…vRNdit ve…ˇ c tSm;Nmu…nvrwrWe a;yuvdRe îit SmOt" 4 …v/;t;åqvRsvRSvm;yuvdRe ' p[k;xyn( Svn;ª; s'iht;' c£É l=XlokmyImOjmu ( 5 tt" p[j;pit' d=' d=' sklkmRsu …v…//IRnIr…/" s;©m;yuvdRe mup;idxt( 6 aq d=" …£y;d=" Svvw¥R * vedm;yuW" vedy;m;s …v√;'s* sUy;|x* sursˇm* 7 d=;d/ITy dß* …vtnut" s'iht;' SvIy;m( skl…c…kTsklokp[itp…ˇ…vvOıye /Ny;m( 8 SvyM.uv" …xræXz•' .wrve, ®W;åq tt( a…ê>y;' s'iht' tSm;ˇ* j;t* yD.;…gn* 9 dev;surr,e dev; dwTywyRe s=t;" ’t;" a=t;Ste ’t;" s¥o dß;>y;m∫ët' mht( 10 v…j[,oå.Ud( .ujStM." s dß;>y;' …c…k‚Tst" som;…•pittíN{St;>y;mev su%I ’t" 11 …vxI,;R dxn;" pU„,o ne]e n∑e .gSy c x…xno r;jy+m;å.Ud…ê>y;' te …c…k‚Tst;" 12 .;gRvXCyvn" k;mI vOı" sn( …v’it' gt"

756

Ìyurveda

757

Branch 24: BhŒva Praka§ha SaµhitŒ Ending:

vW;Råid„v.y; p[;Xy; rs;yngu,iw W,; 8 punnRvSy;ıRpl' nvSy …p∑' …pbe¥" pys;åım;sm( m;s]y' t…T]gu,' sm' v; jI,oRå…p .Uy" s punnRv" Sy;t( ye m;smek˘ Svrs' …pb≤Nt idne idne .O©rj"smuTqm( =Ir;…xnSte blvIyRyˇu _;" sm;" xt' jIvnm;“uv≤Nt 10 xt;vrI muÆ<@itk; gu@cU I sh‚Stk,;R sht;lmUlI E't;…n ’Tv; sm.;gyuˇ_;Ny;Jyen …k' v; m/un;åv…lÁ;t( 11 jr;®j;mOTyu…vyuˇ_deho .ve•ro vIyRbl;idyuˇ_" …v.;it devp[itm" s …nTy' p[.;myo .U·r…vvO≤ıyuˇ_" 12 pITv;åêgN/;' pys;åım;s' Òtne twlne su%;Mbun; v; vIyRSy pui∑' vpuWo …v/ˇe b;lSy vO=Sy yq;åMbuviO ∑" 13 ay" pl' guGgulmu ] yoJy' pl]y' VyoWpl;…n pç pl;…n c;∑* i]fl;rjí kW| …lhNy;TymrTvmev 14 n kÉvl' dI`R…mh;yurXnute rs;yn' yo …v…/v…•Wevte git' s deviWR…nWe…vt;' xu.;' p[p¥te b[˜ tqwv c;=rm( 15 îit i]s¢ittmo rs;yn;…/k;r" sm;¢" 73 g[NqkˇOx R .u ;xI" x'snm( y;vd( Vyom…n …bMbmMbrm,e·rNdoí …v¥otte y;vt( s¢ pyo/y"s…gry‚Stœ≤Nt pOœe .uv" y;v∞;v…nm<@l' f…,pter;Ste f,;m<@le t;vTs≤∫Wj" p#Ntu p·rto .;vp[k;x' xu.m( 1 g[NqSy;Sy;?y;pkn;Ôn;n;' m?ye nø,;m;dr' k⁄vtR ;' c ≈Isomex;idTy…vp[ps[ ;d;d;yudIR`| s*:ym;St;' sdwv 2 sm;¢…mdmuˇr%<@m( sm;¢í;y' g[Nq" Reference: Mi§ra, êr´ Brahma§a‹kara, and Vai§ya, êr´ RªpalŒlaj´, eds., BhŒvaprakŒ§a of êr´ BhŒva Mi§ra, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Sanskrit Sansthan, 1984).

758

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25A: Upani·had

Ú§hŒ Upani·had

Structure: 18 Verses. Beginning:

Èx;v;SyopinWd( pU,mR d" pU,Rimd' pU,;RTpU,mR udCyte pU,RSy pU,mR ;d;y pU,mR ev;vix„yte — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" —Èx; v;Syimd˝ sv| yiTk˘ c jgTy;' jgt( ten Tyˇ_Én .uÔIq; m; gO/" kSy iSvınm( 1 k⁄vR•ve he km;Ri, ijjIivWeCzt˝ sm;" Ev' Tviy n;NyqetoåiSt n kmR ilPyte nre 2 asUy;R n;m te lok; aN/en tms;vOt;" t;˝Ste p[eTy;i.gCziNt ye kÉ c;Tmhno jn" 3 anejdek˘ mnso jvIyo nwn∂ºv; a;PnuvNpUvRmWRt( tı;vtoåNy;nTyeit itœˇiSm•po m;tirê; d/;it 4 tdejit t•wjit t∂Üre t√iNtkÉ tdNtrSy svRSy tdu svRSy;Sy b;Át" 5 yStu sv;Ri, .Ut;Ny;TmNyev;nupXyit svR.tU We u c;Tm;n' tto n ivjuguPste 6 yiSmNsv;Ri, .Ut;Ny;Tmwv;.Ud( ivj;nt" t] ko moh" k" xok EkTvmnupXyt" 7 s pyRg;Czë£mk;ymv[,mò;ivr˝xuımp;pivım( kivmRnIWI pir.U" Svy'.yU ;Rq;tQytoåq;RNVyd/;Cz;êtI>y" sm;>y" aN/Ntm" p[ivxiNt yeåiv¥;mup;ste tto .Uy îv te tmo y ¨ iv¥;y;˝ rt;" 9 aNydev;¸ivR¥y;Nyd;¸riv¥y; îit xu≈um /Ir;,;' ye nSti√cci=re 10 iv¥;' c;iv¥;' c ySt√πdo.y˝ sh aivd(¥y; mOTyu' tITv;R iv¥y;mOtmXnute 11

759

Bråhmaâ Branch 25A: Upani·had

Ú§hŒ Upani·had

Ending:

aN/Ntm" p[ivxiNt yeås'.iU tmup;ste tto .Uy îv te tmo y ¨ s'.TU y;˝ rt;" 12 aNydev;¸" s'.v;dNyd;¸rs'.v;t( îit xu≈um /Ir;,;' ye nSti√cci=re 13 s'.iU t' c ivn;x' c ySt√πdo.y˝ sh ivn;xen mOTyu' tITv;R s'.TU y;mOtmXnute 14 ihr
Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

760

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25B: Upani·had

Kena Upani·had

Structure: 4 Khaö¶as. Beginning:

kÉnopinWd( a;Py;yNtu mm;©;in v;Kp[;,í=u" ≈o]mqo blimiN{y;i, c sv;Ri, sv| b[õpinWd' m;h' b[˜ inr;k⁄y;| m; m; b[˜ inr;krodinr;kr,mSTvinr;kr,' meåStu td;Tmin inrte y ¨pinWTsu /m;RSte miy sNtu te miy sNtu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" kÉnie Wt' ptit p[eiWt' mn" kÉn p[;," p[qm" p[iw t yuˇ_" kÉnie Wt;' v;cimm;' vdiNt c=u" ≈o]' k ¨ devo yuniˇ_ 1 ≈o]Sy ≈o]' mnso mno y√;co h v;c\ s ¨ p[;,Sy p[;," c=uWí=uritmuCy /Ir;" p[eTy;Sm;Llok;dmOt; .viNt 2 n t] c=ugCR zit n v;GgCzit no mno n ivµo n ivj;nImo yqwtdnuix„y;dNydev ti√idt;dqo aividt;di/ îit xu≈um pUveRW;' ye nStd(Vy;cci=re 3 y√;c;n>yuidt' yen v;g>yu¥te tdev b[˜ Tv' iviı ned' yiddmup;ste 4 yNmns; n mnute yen;¸mRno mtm( tdev b[˜ Tv' iviı ned' yiddmup;ste 5 y∞=uW; n pXyit yen c=U\iW pXyit tdev b[˜ Tv' iviı ned' yiddmup;ste 6 yCzô]e, n Í,oit yen ≈o]imd\ ≈utm( tdev b[˜ Tv' iviı ned' yiddmup;ste 7 yTp[;,en n p[;i,it yen p[;," p[,Iyte tdev b[˜ Tv' iviı ned' yiddmup;ste 8 îit kÉnopinWTsu p[qm" %<@" 1 yid mNyse suvde eit d.[mve ;ip nUn' Tv' veTq b[˜,o Âpm( ydSy Tv' ydSy c deve„vq nu mIm;'Symev te mNye ividtm( 1

761

Bråhmaâ Branch 25B: Upani·had

Kena Upani·had

Ending:

tSmw tO,' ind/;vetd;dTSveit tdupp[ye ;y svRjven t• xx;k;d;tu' s tt Ev invvOte nwtdxk˘ ivD;tu' ydet¥=imit 10 aqeN{mb[uvNm`v•eti√j;nIih ikmet¥=imit tqeit td>y{vˇSm;iˇrod/e 11 s tiSm•ev;k;xe iS]ym;jg;m b¸xo.mn;mum;\ hwmvtI' t;\ hov;c ikmet¥=imit 12 îit tOtIy" %<@" 3 s; b[˜eit hov;c b[˜,o v; Eti√jye mhIy?vimit tto hwv ivd;'ck;r b[˜eit 1 tSm;√; Ete dev; aittr;imv;Ny;Ndev;Nydi¶v;Ryiu rN{Ste Áen•eidœ' pSpOxuSte ÁenTp[qmo ivd;'ck;r b[˜eit 2 tSm;√; îN{oåittr;imv;Ny;Ndev;Ns Áen•eidœ' pSpxR s ÁenTp[qmo ivd;'ck;r b[˜eit 3 tSywW a;dexo ydeti√¥uto Vy¥utd;3 îtINNymIimWd;3 îTyi/dwvtm( 4 aq;?y;Tm' ydet˝CztIv c mnoånen cwtdupSmrTy.I=,' s'kLp" 5 tı t√n' n;m t√nimTyup;istVy' s y Etdev' ved;i. hwn' sv;Ri, .Ut;in s'v;HziNt 6 ¨pinWd' .o b[hU ITyuˇ_; y ¨pinWd(b[;˜I' v;v t ¨pinWdmb[mU eit 7 tSyw tpo dm" kmeRit p[it∑; ved;" sv;R©;in sTym;ytnm( 8 yo v; Et;mev' ved;phTy p;Pm;nmnNte SvgeR lokÉ Jyeye p[ititœit p[ititœit 9 îit ctuq"R %<@" 4 a;Py;yNtu mm;©;in v;Kp[;,í=u" ≈o]mqo blimiN{y;i, c sv;Ri, sv| b[õpinWd' m;h' b[˜ inr;k⁄y;| m; m; b[˜ inr;kroinr;kr,mSTvinr;kr,' meåStu itd;Tmin inrte y ¨pinWTsu /m;RSte miy sNtu te miy sNtu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îit s;mvedIy; kÉnopinWTsm;¢; Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

762

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25C: Upani·had

Kaÿha Upani·had

Structure: Two Chapters with Three Divisions each. Beginning:

k#opinWd( sh n;vvtu sh n* .unˇ_⁄ sh vIy| krv;vhw tejiSvn;v/ItmStu m; ivi√W;vhw — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" ¨xn( h vw v;j≈vs" svRvde s' dd* tSy h nickÉt; n;m pu] a;s 1 t˝ h k⁄m;r˝ sNt' di=,;su nIym;n;su ≈ı;ivvex soåmNyt 2 pItodk; jG/tO,; duG/doh; iniriN{y;" anNd; n;m te lok;St;Ns gCzit t; ddt( 3 s hov;c iptr' tt kSmw m;' d;SysIit i√tIy' tOtIy' t˝ hov;c mOTyve Tv; dd;mIit 4 b˛n;meim p[qmo b˛n;meim m?ym" ik˝ iSv¥mSy ktRVy' yNmy;¥ kir„yit 5 anupXy yq; pUveR p[itpXy tq;pre sSyimv mTyR" pCyte sSyimv;j;yte pun" 6 vwê;nr" p[ivxTyitiqb[;R˜,o gOh;n( tSywt;˝ x;iNt' k⁄viR Nt hr vwvSvtodkm( 7 a;x;p[tI=e s'gt˝ sUntO ;' ce∑;pUtRe pu]pxU˝í sv;Rn( Etd(vO¤π pu®WSy;Lpme/so ySy;nXnNvsit b[;˜,o gOhe 8 itßo r;]IyRdv;TsIgORhe meånXnNb[˜•itiqnRmSy" nmSteåStu b[ÑSviSt meåStu tSm;Tp[it ]INvr;NvO,I„v 9 x;Nts'kLp" sumn; yq; Sy;√ItmNyug*Rtmo m;i. mOTyo TvTp[s∑O ' m;i.vdeTp[tIt EtT]y;,;' p[qm' vr' vO,e 10 yq; purSt;∫ivt; p[tIt a*∂;likr;®i,mRTp[s∑O "

763

Bråhmaâ Branch 25C: Upani·had

Kaÿha Upani·had

Ending:

buiıí n ivce∑it t;m;¸" prm;' gitm( 10 t;' yogimit mNyNte iSqr;imiN{y/;r,;m( ap[mˇStd; .vit yogo ih p[.v;Pyy* 11 nwv v;c; n mns; p[;¢u' xKyo n c=uW; aStIit b[uvtoåNy] kq' tdupl>yte 12 aStITyevoplB/VyStÊv.;ven co.yo" aStITyevoplB/Sy tÊv.;v" p[sIdit 13 yd; sveR p[mCu yNte k;m; yeåSy ˙id i≈t;" aq mTyoRåmOto .vTy] b[˜ smXnute 14 yd; sveR p[i.¥Nte ˙dySyeh g[Nqy" aq mTyoRåmOto .vTyet;vd(?ynux;snm( 15 xt' cwk; ˙dySy n;@‰St;s;' mU/;Rnmi.in"sOtwk; tyo?vRm;y•mOtTvmeit iv„võ™õNy; ¨T£m,e .viNt 16 a©uœm;]" pu®WoåNtr;Tm; sd; jn;n;' ˙dye s'iniv∑" t' Sv;CzrIr;Tp[vhO eNmuÔ;idveWIk;' /wy,Re t' iv¥;Cz⁄£mmOt' t' iv¥;Cz⁄£mmOtimit 17 mOTyup[oˇ_;' nickÉtoåq lB?v; iv¥;met;' yogivi/' c ’Tòm( b[˜p[;¢o ivrjoå.Ui√mOTyurNyoåPyev' yo ivd?y;Tmmev 18 îit i√tIyeå?y;ye tOtIy; vLlI sm;¢; 3 îit i√tIyoå?y;y" 2 sh n;vvtu sh n* .unˇ_⁄ sh vIy| krv;vhw tejiSvn;v/ItmStu m; ivi√W;vhw — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îit yjuveRdIy; k#opinWTsm;¢; Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

764

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25D: Upani·had

Pra§hna Upani·had

Structure: Six Pra§hnas. Beginning:

p[XnopinWd( .{' k,eRi." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=i.yRj];" iSqrwr©ŸStu∑vë ;\sStnUi.VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" SviSt n îN{o vOı≈v;" SviSt n" pUW; ivêved;" SviSt nSt;+yoR air∑neim" SviSt no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" sukx É ; c .;r√;j" xwByí sTyk;m" s*y;Ry,I c g;GyR" k*xLyí;êl;yno .;gRvo vwdi.R" kbN/I k;Ty;ynSte hwte b[˜pr; b[˜inœ;" pr' b[˜;NveWm;,; EW h vw tTsv| v+ytIit te h simTp;,yo .gvNt' ipPpl;dmups•;" 1 t;Nh s AiW®v;c .Uy Ev tps; b[˜cye,R ≈ıy; s'vTsr' s'vTSyq yq;k;m' p[Xn;NpOCzt yid ivD;Sy;m" sv| h vo v+y;m îit 2 aq kbN/I k;Ty;yn ¨peTy pp[Cz .gvNk⁄to h v; îm;" p[j;" p[j;yNt îit 3 tSmw s hov;c p[j;k;mo vw p[j;pit" s tpoåtPyt s tpStPTv; s imqunmuTp;dyte riy' c p[;,' ceTyet* me b¸/; p[j;" kir„yt îit 4 a;idTyo h vw p[;,o riyrev cN{m; riyv;R EtTsv| yNmUt| c;mUt| c tSm;NmUitR‡rev riy" 5 aq;idTy ¨dyNyTp[;cI' idx' p[ivxit ten p[;Cy;Np[;,;n[iXmWu s'in/ˇe ) y∂i=,;' yTp[tIcI' ydudIcI' yd/o ydU?v| ydNtr; idxo yTsv| p[k;xyit ten sv;RNp[;,;n[iXmWu s'in/ˇe 6 s EW vwê;nro ivêÂp" p[;,oåi¶®dyte tdetÎc;>yuˇ_m( 7 ivêÂp' hir,' j;tveds' pr;y,' Jyoitrek˘ tpNtm( shßriXm" xt/; vtRm;n" p[;," p[j;n;mudyTyeW sUy"R 8

765

Bråhmaâ Branch 25D: Upani·had

Pra§hna Upani·had

Ending:

tSmw s hov;c îhwv;Nt"xrIre soMy s pu®Wo yiSm•et;" Wo@xkl;" p[.vNtIit 2 s È=;'c£É kiSm•hmuT£;Nt ¨T£;Nto .iv„y;im kiSmNv; p[itiœte p[itœ;Sy;mIit 3 s p[;,msOjt p[;,;Cz^ı;' %' v;yuJyoRitr;p" pOiqvIiN{y' mnoå•m•;√Iy| tpo mN];" kmR lok; lokÉWu c n;m c 4 s yqem; n¥" SyNdm;n;" smu{;y,;" smu{' p[;Py;St' gCziNt i.¥ete t;s;' n;mÂpe smu{ îTyev' p[oCyte ) Evmev;Sy pir{∑ëirm;" Wo@xkl;" pu®W;y,;" pu®W' p[;Py;St' gCziNt i.¥ete c;s;' n;mÂpe pu®W îTyev' p[oCyte s EWoåkloåmOto .vit ) tdeW Xlok" 5 ar; îv rqn;.* kl; yiSmNp[itiœt;" t' ve¥' pu®W' ved yq; m; vo mOTyu" pirVyq; îit 6 t;Nhov;cwt;vdev;hmetTpr' b[˜ ved n;t" prmStIit 7 te tmcRyNtSTv' ih n" ipt; yoåSm;kmiv¥;y;" pr' p;r' t;rysIit ) nm" prmAiW>yo nm" prmAiW>y" 8 îit Wœ" p[Xn" 6 .{' k,eRi." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=i.yRj];" iSqrwr©ŸStu∑vë ;\sStnUi.VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" SviSt n îN{o vOı≈v;" SviSt n" pUW; ivêved;" SviSt nSt;+yoR air∑neim" SviSt no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îTyqvRvde Iy; p[XnopinWTsm¢; Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

766

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25E: Upani·had

Muö¶aka Upani·had

Structure: Three Muö¶akas with two Khaö¶as each. Beginning:

mu<@kopinWd( .{' k,eRi." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=i.yRj];" iSqrwr©ŸStu∑vë ;\sStnUi.VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" SviSt n îN{o vOı≈v;" SviSt n" pUW; ivêved;" SviSt nSt;+yoR air∑neim" SviSt no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" b[˜; dev;n;' p[qm" s'b.Uv ivêSy kt;R .uvnSy go¢; s b[˜iv¥;' svRiv¥;p[itœ;mqv;Ry Jyeœpu];y p[;h 1 aqvR,e y;' p[vdet b[˜;qv;R t;' purov;c;i©re b[˜iv¥;m( s .;r√;j;y sTyvh;y p[;h .;r√;joåi©rse pr;vr;m( 2 x*nko h vw mh;x;loåi©rs' ivi/vdups•" pp[Cz kiSm•u .gvo ivD;te svRimd' ivD;t' .vtIit 3 tSmw s hov;c ) √π iv¥e veidtVye îit h Sm yd(b[˜ivdo vdiNt pr; cwv;pr; c 4 t];pr; AGvedo yjuvRed" s;mvedoåqvRvde " ix=; kLpo Vy;kr,' in®ˇ_˘ zNdo JyoitWimit ) aq pr; yy; td=rmi/gMyte 5 yˇd{eXymg[;Ámgo]mv,Rmc=u"≈o]' tdp;i,p;d' inTy' iv.u' svRgt' susU+m' tdVyy' y∫Utyoin' pirpXyiNt /Ir;" 6 yqo,Rn;i." sOjte gO te c yq; pOiqVy;moW/y" s'.viNt yq; st" pu®W;TkÉxlom;in tq;=r;Ts'.vtIh ivêm( 7 tps; cIyte b[˜ ttoå•mi.j;yte a•;Tp[;,o mn" sTy' lok;" kmRsu c;mOtm( 8 y" svRD" svRiv¥Sy D;nmy' tp" tSm;detd(b[˜ n;m Âpm•' c j;yte 9 îit p[qmmu<@kÉ p[qm" %<@" 1

767

Bråhmaâ Branch 25E: Upani·had

Muö¶aka Upani·had

Ending:

n;ym;Tm; blhInen l>yo n c p[m;d;ˇpso v;Pyil©;t( Etw®p;ywytR te yStu iv√;'StSywW a;Tm; ivxte b[˜/;m 4 s'p[;PywnmOWyo D;ntO¢;" ’t;Tm;no vItr;g;" p[x;Nt;" te svRg' svRt" p[;Py /Ir; yuˇ_;Tm;n" svRmve ;ivxiNt 5 ved;NtivD;nsuin…ít;q;R" s'Ny;syog;¥ty" xuısÊv;" te b[˜lokÉWu pr;Ntk;le pr;mOt;" pirmuCyiNt sveR 6 gt;" kl;" pçdx p[itœ; dev;í sveR p[it devt;su km;Ri, ivD;nmyí a;Tm; preåVyye svR Ek°.viNt 7 yq; n¥" SyNdm;n;" smu{åe St' gCziNt n;mÂpe ivh;y tq; iv√;•;mÂp;i√muˇ_" pr;Tpr' pu®Wmupiw t idVym( 8 s yo h vw tTprm' b[˜ ved b[˜wv .vit n;Sy;b[˜ivTk⁄le .vit trit xok˘ trit p;Pm;n' guh;g[iNq>yo ivmuˇ_oåmOto .vit 9 tdetÎc;>yuˇ_m( i£y;vNt" ≈oi]y; b[˜inœ;" Svy' ju◊t EkiW| ≈ıyNt" teW;mevwt;' b[˜iv¥;' vdet ixrov[t' ivi/v¥wStu cI,Rm( 10 tdetTsTymOiWri©r;" purov;c nwtdcI,Rv[toå/Ite nm" prmiWR>yo nm" prmiWR>y" 11 îit tOtIymu<@kÉ i√tIy" %<@" 2 .{' k,eRi." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=i.yRj];" iSqrwr©ŸStu∑vë ;\sStnUi.VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" SviSt n îN{o vOı≈v;" SviSt n" pUW; ivêved;" SviSt nSt;+yoR air∑neim" SviSt no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îTyqvRvde Iy; mu<@kopinWTsm;¢; Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

768

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25F: Upani·had

MŒö¶ªkya Upani·had

Structure: 12 Sªtras. Beginning:

m;<@ÜKyopinWd( .{' k,eRi." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=i.yRj];" iSqrwr©ŸStu∑vë ;\sStnUi.VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" SviSt n îN{o vOı≈v;" SviSt n" pUW; ivêved;" SviSt nSt;+yoR air∑neim" SviSt no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" aoimTyetd=rimd\ sv| tSyopVy;:y;n' .Ut' .v∫iv„yidit svRmo˚;r Ev ) y∞;NyiT]k;l;tIt' tdPyo˚;r Ev 1 svR\ Áetd(b[˜;ym;Tm; b[˜ soåym;Tm; ctu„p;t( 2 j;girtSq;no bih"p[D" s¢;© Ekoniv'xitmu%" SqUl.uGvwê;nr" p[qm" p;d" 3 SvPnSq;noåNt"p[D" s¢;© Ekoniv'xitmu%" p[ivivˇ_.uˇ_ìjso i√tIy" p;d" 4 y] su¢o n k˘cn k;m' k;myte n k˘cn SvPn' pXyit tTsuWu¢m( suWu¢Sq;n Ek°.Ut" p[D;n`n Ev;nNdmyo Á;nNd.uKcÉtomu%" p[;DStOtIy" p;d" 5 EW sveRêr EW svRD EWoåNty;RMyeW yoin" svRSy p[.v;Pyy* ih .Ut;n;m( 6 n;Nt"p[D' n bih"p[D' no.yt"p[D' n p[D;n`n' n p[D' n;p[Dm( aÎ∑mVyvh;yRmg[;Áml=,micNTymVypdeXymek;Tmp[Tyys;r' p[pçopxm' x;Nt' ixvm√Ÿt' ctuq| mNyNte s a;Tm; s ivDey" 7 soåym;Tm;?y=rmo˚;roåi/m;]' p;d; m;]; m;];í p;d; ak;r ¨k;ro mk;r îit 8 j;girtSq;no vwê;nroåk;r" p[qm; m;];¢er;idmÊv;√;Pnoit h vw sv;RNk;m;n;idí .vit y Ev' ved 9

769

Bråhmaâ Branch 25F: Upani·had

MŒö¶ªkya Upani·had

Continuing:

SvPnSq;nStwjs ¨k;ro i√tIy; m;]oTkW;Rdu.yTv;√oTkWRit h vw D;ns'tit' sm;ní .vit n;Sy;b[˜ivTk⁄le .vit y Ev' ved 10 suWu¢Sq;n" p[;Do mk;rStOtIy; m;]; imterpItev;R imnoit h v; îd\ svRmpIití .vit y Ev' ved 11 am;]ítuqoRåVyvh;yR" p[pçopxm" ixvoå√Ÿt Evmo˚;r a;Tmwv s'ivxTy;Tmn;Tm;n' y Ev' ved y Ev' ved 12 .{' k,eRi." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=i.yRj];" iSqrwr©ŸStu∑vë ;\sStnUi.VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" SviSt n îN{o vOı≈v;" SviSt n" pUW; ivêved;" SviSt nSt;+yoR air∑neim" SviSt no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îit m;<@ÜKyopinWTsm;¢;

Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

770

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25G: Upani·had

Aitareya Upani·had


EetreyopinWt( v;Ñπ mnis p[itiœt; mno me v;ic p[itiœtm;ivr;vImR Ei/ vedSy m a;,ISq" ≈ut' me m; p[h;sIrnen;/Iten;hor;];Ns'd/;MyOt' vid„y;im sTy' vid„y;im tNm;mvtu t√ˇ_;rmvtu avtu m;mvtu vˇ_;rmvtu vˇ_;rm( — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" a;Tm; v; îdmek Ev;g[ a;sI•;NyiTk˘cn imWt( s È=t lok;•u sOj; îit 1 s îm;'Llok;nsOjt aM.o mrIcImRrm;poådoåM." pre, idv' ¥*" p[itœ;Ntir=' mrIcy" pOiqvI mro y; a/St;ˇ; a;p" 2 s È=teme nu lok; lokpl;•u sOj; îit soåŒ Ev pu®W' smuıTO y;mUCz≥yt( 3 tm>ytpˇSy;i.t¢Sy mu%' inri.¥t yq;<@m( mu%;√;Gv;coåi¶n;RiskÉ inri.¥et;' n;isk;>y;' p[;," p[;,;√;yuri=,I inri.¥et;m=I>y;' c=uí=uW a;idTy" k,*R inri.¥et;' k,;R>y;' ≈o]' ≈o];i∂xSTviõ±nri.¥t Tvco lom;in lom>y aoWi/vnSptyo ˙dy' inri.¥t ˙dy;Nmno mnsíN{m; n;i.inRri.¥t n;>y; ap;noåp;n;NmOTyu" ixXn' inri.¥t ixXn;{eto rets a;p" 4 îit p[qm" %<@" 1 t; Et; devt;" sO∑; aiSmNmhTy,Rve p[;pt'Stmxn;ipp;s;>y;mNvv;jRt( t; Enmb[uv•;ytn' n" p[j;nIih yiSmNp[itiœt; a•md;meit 1 t;>yo g;m;nyˇ; ab[uv• vw noåymlimit t;>yoåêm;nyˇ;" ab[uv• vw noåymlimit 2 t;>y" pu®Wm;nyˇ; ab[uvn( su’t' bteit pu®Wo v;v su’tm( t; ab[vI¥q;ytn' p[ivxteit 3

771

Bråhmaâ Branch 25G: Upani·had

Aitareya Upani·had

Ending:

s Ev' iv√;nSm;CzrIr.ed;dU?vR ¨T£My;mui„mn( SvgeR lokÉ sv;Rn( k;m;n;PTv;mOt" sm.vt( sm.vt( 6 îit ctuq"R %<@" 4 îTywtrey;r
772

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25H: Upani·had

Taittirýa Upani·had

Structure: Three Main Chapters. Beginning:

twiˇrIyopinWd( xI=;?y;y" x' no im]" x' v®," x' no .vTvyRm; x' n îN{o bOhSpit" x' no iv„,u®®£m" nmo b[˜,e nmSte v;yo Tvmev p[Ty=' b[˜;is Tv;mev p[Ty=' b[˜ vid„y;im At' vid„y;im sTy' vid„y;im tNm;mvtu t√ˇ_;rmvtu avtu m;m( avtu vˇ_;rm( — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" x' no im]" x' v®," x' no .vTvyRm; x' n îN{o bOhSpit" x' no iv„,u®®£m" nmo b[˜,e nmSte v;yo Tvmev p[Ty=' b[˜;is Tv;mev p[Ty=' b[˜ vid„y;im At' vid„y;im

773

Bråhmaâ Branch 25H: Upani·had

Taittirýa Upani·had

Ending:

pUv| deve>yoåmOtSy n;3.;iy yo m; dd;it s îdev m;3v;" ahm•m•mdNtm;3iµ ah' ivê' .uvnm>y.v;3m( suvnRJyotI" y Ev' ved" îTyupinWt( 6 îit .OguvLLy?y;ye dxmoånuv;k" 10 sh n;vvtu sh n* .unˇ_⁄ sh vIy| krv;vhw tejiSv n;v/ItmStu m; ivi√W;vhw — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îit .OguvLLy?y;y" sm;¢" 3 x' no im]" x' v®," x' no .vTvyRm; x' n îN{o bOhSpit" x' no iv„,u®®£m" nmo b[˜,e nmSte v;yo Tvmev p[Ty=' b[˜;is Tv;mev p[Ty=' b[˜ vid„y;im At' vid„y;im sTy' vid„y;im tNm;mvtu t√ˇ_;rmvtu avtu m;m( avtu vˇ_;rm( — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îit twiˇrIyopinWTs'p,U ;R Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

774

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25I: Upani·had

êhvetŒ§hvatara Upani·had

Structure: Six Chapters. Beginning:

êet;êtropinWd( pU,mR d" pU,Rimd' pU,;RTpU,mR udCyte pU,RSy pU,mR ;d;y pU,mR ve ;vix„yte — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" b[˜v;idno vdiNt ik˘ k;r,' b[˜ k⁄t" Sm j;t; jIv;m kÉn Kv c s'pi[ tœ;" ai/iœt;" kÉn su%te reWu vt;Rmhe b[˜ivdo VyvSq;m( 1 k;l" Sv.;vo inyityRÎCz; .Ut;in yoin" pu®W îit icNTy; s'yog EW;' n Tv;Tm.;v;d;Tm;PynIx" su%du"%heto" 2 te ?y;nyog;nugt; apXyNdev;Tmxiˇ_˘ Svgu,iw nRg!U ;m( y" k;r,;in ini%l;in t;in k;l;Tmyuˇ_;Nyi/itœTyek" 3 tmekneim' i]vOt' Wo@x;Nt' xt;/;Rr' iv'xitp[Tyr;i." a∑kì" Wi@±.ivRêÂpwkp;x' i]m;gR.de ' i√inimˇwkmohm( 4 pçßotoMbu' pçyoNyug[v£;' pçp[;,oim| pçbud?( y;idmUl;m( pç;vt;| pçdu"%*`veg;' pç;x∫ºd;' pçpv;Rm/Im" 5 sv;RjIve svRs'Sqe bOhNte aiSmNh'so .[;Myte b[˜c£É pOqg;Tm;n' p[eirt;r' c mTv; ju∑SttSten;mOtTvmeit 6 ¨˝ItmetTprm' tu b[˜ tiSm'S]y' supi[ tœ;=r' c a];Ntr' b[˜ivdo ividTv; lIn; b[˜i, tTpr; yoinmuˇ_;" 7 s'yˇu _metT=rm=r' c Vyˇ_;Vyˇ_˘ .rte ivêmIx" anIxí;Tm; b?yte .oˇ_é.;v;JD;Tv; dev' muCyte svRp;xw" 8 D;D* √;vj;vIxnIx;vj; Áek; .oˇ_é.oGy;qRyˇu _; anNtí;Tm; ivêÂpo Ákt;R ]y' yd; ivNdte b[˜mett( 9 =r' p[/;nmmOt;=r' hr" =r;Tm;n;vIxte dev Ek" tSy;i.?y;n;¥ojn;ˇÊv.;v;∫Uyí;Nte ivêm;y;invOiˇ" 10 D;Tv; dev' svRp;x;ph;in" =I,w" KlÉxwjRNmmOTyup[h;i,"

775

Bråhmaâ Branch 25I: Upani·had

êhvetŒ§hvatara Upani·had

Ending:

Eko h˝so .uvnSy;Sy m?ye s Ev;i¶" sille s'iniv∑" tmev ividTv;it mOTyumeit n;Ny" pNq; iv¥teåyn;y 15 s ivê’i√êivd;TmyoinDR" k;lk;ro gu,I svRiv¥" p[/;n=e]DpitguR,x e " s˝s;rmo=iSqitbN/hetu" 16 s tNmyo ÁmOt Èxs'Sqo D" svRgo .uvnSy;Sy go¢; y Èxe aSy jgto inTymev n;Nyo hetiu vR¥t Èxn;y 17 yo b[˜;,' ivd/;it pUv| yo vw ved;'í p[ih,oit tSmw t˝ h devm;Tmbuiıp[k;x' mumu=uvwR xr,mh' p[p¥e 18 in„kl' ini„£y˝ x;Nt' inrv¥' inrÔnm( amOtSy pr˝ setu' dG/eN/nimv;nlm( 19 yd; cmRvd;k;x' ve∑iy„yiNt m;nv;" td; devmivD;y du"%Sy;Nto .iv„yit 20 tp"p[.;v;∂ºvp[s;d;∞ b[˜ h êet;êtroåq iv√;n( aTy;≈im>y" prm' piv]' p[ov;c sMygOiWsÏju∑m( 21 ved;Nte prm' guÁ' pur;kLpe p[coidtm( n;p[x;Nt;y d;tVy' n;pu];y;ix„y;y v; pun" 22 ySy deve pr; .iˇ_yRq; deve tq; gur* tSywte kiqt; Áq;R" p[k;xNte mh;Tmn" p[k;xNte mh;Tmn îit îit êet;êtropinWTsu Wœoå?y;y" 6 sh n;vvtu sh n* .unˇ_⁄ sh vIy| krv;vhw tejiSvn;v/ItmStu m; ivi√W;vhw — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

776

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25J: Upani·had

ChhŒndogya Upani·had


z;NdoGyopinWd( a;Py;yNtu mm;©;in v;Kp[;,í=u" ≈o]mqo blimiN{y;i, c sv;Ri, sv| b[õpinWd' m;h' b[˜ inr;k⁄y;| m; m; b[˜ inr;krodinr;kr,mSTvinr;kr,' meåStu td;Tmin inrte y ¨pinWTsu /m;RSte miy sNtu te miy sNtu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" aoimTyetd=rmu˝Iqmup;sIt aoimit Áu˝;yit tSyopVy;:y;nm( 1 EW;' .Ut;n;' pOiqvI rs" pOiqVy; a;po rsoåp;moW/yo rs aoW/In;' pu®Wo rs" pu®WSy v;g[so v;c Ag[s Ac" s;m rs" s;ª ¨˝Iqo rs" 2 s EW rs;n;\ rstm" prm" pr;?yoRå∑mo ydu˝Iq" 3 ktm; ktmKkútmTktmTs;m ktm" ktm ¨˝Iq îit ivmO∑' .vit 4 v;gevkú™ p[;," s;moimTyetd=rmu˝Iq" t√; EtiNmqun' y√;k™ c p[;,íkú™ c s;m c 5 tdetiNmqunmoimTyetiSm•=re s\sOJyte yd; vw imqun* sm;gCzt a;pyto vw t;vNyoNySy k;mm( 6 a;piyt; h vw k;m;n;' .vit y Etdev' iv√;n=rmu˝Iqmup;Ste 7 t√; EtdnuD;=r' yiı ik˘c;nuj;n;TyoimTyev td;hwWo Ev smOiıyRdnuD; sm/Riyt; h vw k;m;n;' .vit y Etdev' iv√;n=rmu˝Iqmup;Ste 8 teney' ]yI iv¥; vtRt aoimTy;≈;vyTyoimit x\sTyoimTyu˝;yTyetSyw v;=rSy;picTyw mihª; rsen 9 teno.* k⁄®to yíwtdev' ved yí n ved n;n; tu iv¥; c;iv¥; c ydev iv¥y; kroit ≈ıyopinWd; tdev vIyRvˇr' .vtIit %LvetSywv;=rSyopVy;:y;n' .vit 10 îit p[qm;?y;ye p[qm" %<@" 1 dev;sur; h vw y] s'yeitr ¨.ye p[;j;pTy;Stı dev; ¨˝Iqm;jÓërnen

777

Bråhmaâ Branch 25J: Upani·had

ChhŒndogya Upani·had

Ending:

tm;Tm;nmnuiv¥ ivj;n;tIit h p[j;pit®v;c p[j;pit®v;c 6 îTy∑m;?y;ye √;dx" %<@" 12 Xy;m;Czbl' p[p¥e xbl;Cz‰;m' p[p¥eåê îv rom;i, iv/Uy p;p' cN{ îv r;homu% R ;Tp[mCu y /UTv; xrIrm’t' ’t;Tm; b[˜lokmi.s'.v;mITyi.s'.v;mIit 1 îTy∑m;?y;ye ]yodx" %<@" 13 a;k;xo vw n;m n;mÂpyoinRviR ht; te ydNtr; td(b[˜ tdmOt\ s a;Tm; p[j;pte" s.;' veXm p[p¥e yxoåh' .v;im b[;˜,;n;' yxo r;D;' yxo ivx;' yxoåhmnup[;piTs s h;h' yxs;' yx" XyetmdTkmdTk\ Xyet' ilNdu m;i.g;' ilNdu m;i.g;m( 1 îTy∑m;?y;ye ctudx R " %<@" 14 tıwtd(b[˜; p[j;pty ¨v;c p[j;pitmRnve mnu" p[j;>y a;c;yRk⁄l;√πdm/ITy yq;iv/;n' guro" km;RitxeW,e ;i.sm;vOTy k⁄$Mü be xuc* dexe Sv;?y;ym/Iy;no /;imRk;iNvd/d;Tmin sveiR N{y;i, s'pi[ tœ;Py;ih\sNTsvR.tU ;NyNy] tIqeR>y" s %Lvev' vtRyNy;vd;yuW' b[˜lokmi.s'p¥te n c punr;vtRte n c punr;vtRte 1 îTy∑m;?y;ye pçdx" %<@" 15 îTy∑moå?y;y" sm;¢" 8 a;Py;yNtu mm;©;in v;Kp[;,í=u" ≈o]mqo blimiN{y;i, c sv;Ri, sv| b[˜*pinWd' m;h' b[˜ inr;k⁄y;| m; m; b[˜ inr;krodinr;kr,mSTvinr;kr,' meåStu td;Tmin inrte y ¨pinWTsu /m;RSte miy sNtu te miy sNtu — x;iNt" x;iNt" x;iNt" îit z;NdoGyopinWTs'p,U ;R Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

778

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25K: Upani·had

BïhadŒraöyaka Upani·had


bOhd;rNykopinWt( — pU,mR d" pU,…R md' pU,;RTpU,mR du Cyte pU,SR y pU,mR ;d;y pU,mR ve ;v≤x„yte — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" — ¨W; v; aêSy me?ySy ≤xr" ) sUyíR =uv;‹t" p[;,o Vy;ˇmi¶vwêR ;nr" s'vTsr a;Tm;êSy me?ySy ) ¥*" pOœmNt·r=mudr' pO…qvI p;jSy' idx" p;êeR av;Ntridx" pxRv Atvoå©;in m;s;í;/≥m;s;í pv;‹
779

Bråhmaâ Branch 25K: Upani·had

BïhadŒraöyaka Upani·had

Ending:

v;k;‹®,Ipu];√;k;‹®,Ipu]o v;k;‹®,Ipu];√;k;‹®,Ipu] a;tR.;gIpu];d;tR.;gIpu]"x*©«pu];Cz*©«pu]" s;'’tIpu];Ts;'’tIpu] a;lMb;ynIpu];d;lMb;ynIpu] a;lMbIpu];d;lMbIpu]o j;yNtIpu];∆;yNtIpu]o m;<@Ük;ynIpu];Nm;<@Ük;ynIpu]o m;<@Ük°pu];Nm;<@Ük°pu]" x;æ<@lIpu];Cz;æ<@lIpu]o r;qItrIpu];{;qItrIpu]o .;luk°pu];∫;luk°pu]" £*≤çk°pu];>y;' £*≤çk°pu]* vwd.OtIpu];√¯d.OtIpu]" k;xRkÉyIpu];Tk;xRkÉyIpu]"p[;cInyogIpu];Tp[;cInyogIpu]" s;'jIvIpu];Ts;'jIvIpu]" p[;XnIpu];d;su·rv;…sn" p[;XnIpu] a;sur;y,;d;sur;y, a;surre ;su·r" 2 y;DvLKy;¥;DvLKy ¨∂;lk;du∂;lkoå®,;d®, ¨pvexe®pve≤x" k⁄≈e"k⁄…≈v;‹j≈vso v;j≈v; …j◊;vto b;?yog;≤∆◊;v;Nb;?yogoå…st;√;WRg,;d…sto v;WRg,o h·rt;TkXyp;ı·rt" kXyp" ≤xLp;TkXyp;æCzLp" kXyp" kXyp;•w/vu[ "e kXypo nw/…u[ vv;‹co v;g‚M.
780

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25L: Upani·had

Kau§h´taki Upani·had


k*WItikb[;˜,opinWt( ≈ImTk*WItk°…v¥;ve¥p[D;pr;=rm( p[ityo…g…vinmuˇR _b[˜m;]' …v…cNtye v;Ñπ mn…s p[it…œt; mno me v;…c p[it…œtm( a;…vr;…vmRyoRå.UvedR s;mTs;,IA≥t' m; m; ih'sIrnen;/Iten;hor;];Ts'vs;My¶î¬; nm î¬; nm AiW>yo mN]’Œo mN]pit>yo nmo voåStu dev>e y"≤xv; n" x'tm; .v sum¬ O «k; srSvtI m; te Vyom s'Î≤x adB/'mn îiWr' c=u" sUyoR JyoitW;' ≈eœo dI=e m; m; ih'sI" 1 …c]o h vw g;Gy;‹y…,yR+ym;, a;®…,' vv[e s h pu]' êetkÉtp'u …[ j`;y y;jyeit t' h;sIn' pp[Cz g*tmSy pu];‚St s'vtO ' lokÉy‚SmNm; /;SySyNymut;ho v;?v; tSy m; lokÉ /;SysIit shov;c n;hmet√πd hNt;c;y| pOCz;nIit s h iptrm;s;¥ pp[CzπtIitm;åp[;=ITkq' p[itb[v;,Iit s hov;c;hmPyet• ved sdSyev vy'Sv;?y;ym/ITy hr;mhe y•" pre ddTyeÁ.u * g…m„y;v îit s hs…mTp;…,…í]' g;Gy;‹y…,' p[itc£m ¨p;y;nIit t' hov;c b[˜;/oRå…sg*tm yo n m;nmup;g; Eih Vyev Tv; Dp…y„y;mIit 1 shov;c ye vw kÉ c;Sm;Llok;Tp[y≤Nt cN{msmev te sveR gCz≤Nt teW;' p[;,w" pUvpR = a;Py;yte t;nprp=e n p[jnyit Et√¯ SvgRSylokSy √;r' yíN{m;St' y" p[Ty;h tmitsOjteåq y En' n p[Ty;ht…mh vOi∑.UTR v; vWRit s îh k°$o v; pt©o v; xk⁄inv;‹ x;dUl R ov; …s'ho v; mTSyo v; prê; v; pu®Wo v;åNyo vwtWe u Sq;neWu p[Ty;j;yteyq;kmR yq;…v¥m( tm;gt' pOCzit koåsIit t' p[itb[Uy;i√c=,;Îtvo ret a;.Ot' pçdx;Tp[stU ;≤Tp}yvtStNm; pu…' s ktRyrRe y?vm( pus' ; k];‹ m;t·rm; iniWˇ_ s j;y ¨pj;ym;no √;dx]yodx ¨pm;so√;dx]yodxen ip];s' ti√de p[itti√deåh' tNm Atvo amTyRva;.r?vm( ten sTyen ten tps; AturSMy;tRvoå‚Sm koå‚Sm TvmSmIit tmitsOjte 2 s Et' devy;n' pNq;nm;p¥;…¶lokm;gCzits v;yulok˘ s a;idTy-

781

Bråhmaâ Branch 25L: Upani·had

Kau§h´taki Upani·had

Ending:

t;sutd; .vit yd; su¢" Sv“ n k˘cn pXyTyq;‚SmNp[;, Evwk/; .vittdwn' v;KsvwnR ;‹m…." sh;Pyeit c=u" svwR Âpw" sh;Pyeit ≈o]' svw"R xBdw" sh;Pyeit mn" svw?R y;‹n"w sh;Pyeit s yd; p[itbu?yteyq;å¶eJvRlt" sv;‹ idxo …vSf⁄≤l©; …vp[itœºr•wvmevtw Sm;d;Tmn"p[;,; yq;ytn' …vp[itœNte p[;,e>yo dev; dev>e yo lok;" 19 t¥q; =ur" =ur/;neåviht" Sy;t( …vê'.ro v; …vê'.rk⁄l;y EvmevWw p[D a;Tmedx ' rIrm;Tm;nmnup…[ v∑ a;lom>y a;n%e>y" tmetm;Tm;ment a;Tm;noåNvvSy≤Nt yq; ≈e…œn' Sv;" t¥q; ≈eœI Sv.u¤R yπ q; v; Sv;" ≈e…œn' .uÔNTyevmevWw p[D;Tmwtrw ;Tm…..u¤R π Ev' vwtm;Tm;nmet a;Tm;no .uÔ≤Nt s y;vı v; îN{ Etm;Tm;n' n…vjDe t;vdenmsur; a….b.Ub"u s yd; …vjDeåq hTv;åsur;‚Nv…jTysveWR ;' dev;n;' ≈wœ‰' Sv;r;Jym;…/pTy' prIy;y tqo Evwv' …v√;Nsv;‹Np;PmnoåphTy sveWR ;' .Ut;n;' ≈wœ‰' Sv;r;Jym;…/pTy' pyeiR t y Ev' vedy Ev' ved 20 At' vid„y;…m sTy' vid„y;…m tNm;mvtu t√ˇ_;rmvtu avtu m;m( avtu vˇ_;rm( — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" v;Ñπ mn…s p[it…œt;mno me v;…c p[it…œtm;…vr;…vmRyoRå.UvdRe s; mTs;,IA≥t' m; m;ih'sIrnen;Ìten;hor;];Ts'vs;My¶ î¬; nm î¬; nm AiW>yo mN]’ŒomN]pit>yo nmoåStu dev>e y" ≤xv; n" x'tm; .v sumO¬«k; srSvitm; te Vyom s'Î≤x adB/' mn îiWr' c=u" sUyoR JyoitW;' ≈eœo dI=em; m; ih'sI" — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" îit AGved;NtgRtk*WItikb[;˜,;r
782

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25M: Upani·had

JŒbŒla Upani·had

Structure: Six Khaö¶as. Beginning:

j;b;lopinWt( .{' k,e…R ." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=….yRj];" æSqrwr©¯Stu∑vë ;\ sStnU….VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" Sv‚St n îN{o vOı≈v;" Sv‚St n" pUW; …vêved;" Sv‚St nSt;+yoR a·r∑ne…m" Sv‚St no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" bOhSpit®v;c y;DvLKy' ydnu k⁄®=e]' dev;n;' devyjn' sveWR ;' .Ut;n;' b[˜sdnm( ) a…vmuˇ_' vw k⁄®=e]' dev;n;' devyjn' sveWR ;' .Ut;n;' b[˜sdnm( ) tSm;¥] Kvcn gCzit tdev mNyet td…vmuˇ_mev ) îd' vwk®⁄ =e]' dev;n;' devyjn' sveWR ;' .Ut;n;' b[˜sdnm( ) a] ih jNto" p[;,eWTU £mm;,eWu ®{St;rk˘ b[˜ Vy;c∑e yen;s;vmOtI.UTv; mo=I.vit tSm;d…vmuˇ_mev inWevte a…vmuˇ_' n …vmuçde ve mevtw ¥;DvLKy" îit p[qm" %<@" aq hwnmi]" pp[Cz y;DvLKy' y EWoånNtoåVyˇ_ a;Tm; t' kqmh' …vj;nIy;…mit ) s hov;c y;DvLKy" soå…vmuˇ_ ¨p;Syo y EWoånNtoåVyˇ_ a;Tm; soå…vmuˇ_e p[it…œt îit ) soå…vmuˇ_" k‚SmNp[it…œt îit vr,;y;' n;Sy;' c m?ye p[it…œt îit ) k; vw vr,; k; c n;sIitsv;‹in≤N{y’t;NdoW;Nv;rytIit ten vr,; .vit sv;‹in≤N{y’t;Np;p;•;xytIit ten n;sI .vtIit ) ktm∞;Sy Sq;n' .vtIit ) .[vu o`[;,‹ Sy c y" s'…/" s EW ¥*loRkSy prSy c s'…/.RvtIit ) Et√¯s…' /' s'?y;' b[˜…vd ¨p;st îit soå…vmuˇ_ ¨p;Sy îit ) soå…vmuˇ_' D;nm;c∑e yo vw tdetdev' vedie t îit j;b;lopinWTsu i√tIy" %<@" aq hwn' b[˜c;·r, Ëcu" ik˘ j;Pyen;mOtTv' b[UhIit ) s hov;cy;DvLKy" xt®i{ye,Te yet;in h v; amOtn;m/ey;Nyethw R v; amOto.vtIit ) Evmevt¥;DvLKy"

783

Bråhmaâ Branch 25M: Upani·had

JŒbŒla Upani·had

Ending:

aq hwnmi]" pp[Cz ) y;DvLKy pOCz;…m Tv; y;DvLKy ayDopvItI kq' b[;˜, îit ) s hov;c y;DvLKy îdmev;Sy t¥DopvIt' ya;Tm; p[;Xy;cMy;y' …v…/" p·rv[;jk;n;m( ) vIr;?v;ne v;ån;xkÉ v;åp;' p[vx e e v;å…¶p[vx e e v; mh;p[Sq;ne v;åq p·rv[;@± …vv,Rv;s; mu<@oåp·rg[h" xë…cr{ohI .w=;,o b[˜.Uy;y .vit ) y¥;tur" Sy;Nmns; v;c;v; s'Nyset( ) EW pNq; b[˜,; h;nu…vˇSteniw t s'Ny;sI b[˜ …vidTyevmevWw .gv…•it vw y;DvLKy" îit j;b;lopinWTsu pçm" %<@" t] prmh's; n;m s'vtRk;®…,êetkÉtdu vu ;‹sA.uind;`[email protected]ˇ;]eprwvtkp[.tO yoåVyˇ_≤l©; aVyˇ_;c;r; anuNmˇ; ¨Nmˇvd;crNt‚S]d<@÷ km<@lu' ≤xKy' p;]' jlp…v]' ≤x%;' yDopvIt' ceTyetTsv| .U"Sv;heTyPsu p·rTyJy;Tm;nm‚NvCzπt( ) yq; j;tÂp/ro in√≥N√o in„p·rg[hStˇÊvb[˜m;geR sMyKs'p•" xëım;ns" p[;,s'/;r,;q| yqoˇ_k;le…vmuˇ_o .w=m;cr•udrp;]e, l;.;l;.* sm* .UTv; xUNy;g;rdevgOhtO,kÀ$vLmIkvO=mUlk⁄l;lx;l;…¶ho]ndIpu≤ln…g·rk⁄hrkNdrko$rinZúrSqæ<@le„vinkÉtv;Syp[yào inmRm" xëKl?y;npr;y,oå?y;Tminœoåxë.kmRinmUl R npr" s'Ny;sen dehTy;g' kroit s prmh' so n;m s prmh'son;meit îit j;b;lopinWTsu Wœ" %<@" .{' k,e…R ." Í,uy;m dev; .{' pXyem;=….yRj];" æSqrwr©¯Stu∑vë ;\ sStnU….VyRxme deviht' yd;yu" Sv‚St n îN{o vOı≈v;" Sv‚St n" pUW; …vêved;" Sv‚St nSt;+yoR a·r∑ne…m" Sv‚St no bOhSpitdR/;tu — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" îTyqvRvde e j;b;lopinWTsm;¢; Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

784

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25N: Upani·had

MahŒnŒrŒyaöa Upani·had


mh;n;r;y,opinWt( — nmo mhte n;r;y,;y aM.Syp;re .uvnSy m?ye n;kSy pOœº mhto mhIy;n( xu£,É JyotI'iW smnupi[ v∑" p[j;pitírit g.eR aNt" 1 yiSmi•d' s' c iv cwit sv| yiSmNdev; ai/ ivêe inWedu" tdev .Ut' tdu .Vym;nimd' td=re prme Vyomn( 2 yen;vOt' %' c idv' mhI c yen;idTyStpit tejs; .[;js; c ydNt" smu{e kvyo vdiNt td=re prme p[j;" 3 yt" p[stU ; jgt" p[stU I toyen jIv;NVycsjR .UMy;m( ydoW/Ii." pu®W;NpxU'í ivvex .Ut;in cr;cr;i, 4 at" pr' n;Nyd,Iys' ih pr;Tpr' yNmhto mh;Ntm( ydekmVyˇ_mnNtÂp' ivê' pur;,' tms" prSt;t( 5 tdevt| tdu sTym;¸Stdev b[˜ prm' kvIn;m( î∑;pUt| b¸/; j;t' j;ym;n' ivê' ib.itR .uvnSy n;i." 6 tdev;i¶St√;yuStTsUySR tdu cN{m;" tdev xu£mmOt' td(b[˜ td;p" s p[j;pit" 7 sveR inmeW; jiDre iv¥ut" pu®W;di/ kl; mu˛t;R" k;œ;í;hor;];í svRx" 8 a/Rm;s; m;s; Atv" s'vTsrí kLpt;m( s a;p" p[duè ¨.e îme aNtir=mqo suv" 9 nwnmU?v| n ityRç÷ n m?ye pirjg[.t( n tSyexe kín tSy n;m mh¥x" 10 n s'Îxe itœit ÂpmSy n c=uW; pXyit kínwnm( ˙d; mnIW; mns;i.KlO¢o y En' ivdurmOt;Ste .viNt 11 aŒ" sM.Uto ihr
785

Bråhmaâ Branch 25N: Upani·had

MahŒnŒrŒyaöa Upani·had

Ending:

≈ı;sTyo mhSv;'Stpsopir∑;JD;Tv; tmev' mns; ˙d; c .Uyo n mOTyumupy;ih iv√;n( ) tSm;NNy;smeW;' tps;mitirˇ_m;¸" 1 vsur
786

Bråhmaâ

Branch 25 O: Upani·had

Pai‹gala Upani·had


pw©lopinWt( — pU,mR d" pU,…R md' pU,;‹TpU,mR du Cyte pU,SR y pU,mR ;d;y pU,mR ve ;v≤x„yte aq h pw©lo y;DvLKymupsmeTy √;dxvWRx≈ë WU ;pUvk R ˘ prmrhSykìvLymnubhU[ Iit pp[Cz ) s hov;c y;DvLKy" sdev soMyedmg[ a;sIt( ) t…•Tymuˇ_m…vi£y' sTyD;n;nNd' p·rpU,| sn;tnmekmev;i√tIy'b˜[ ) t‚SmNm®xu·ˇ_k;Sq;,uSfi$k;d* jlr*Pypu®Wre%;idvLloihtxëKl’„,gu,myI gu,s;My;inv;‹Cy; mUlp[’itr;sIt( ) tTp[it…b‚Mbt'yˇTs;≤=cwtNym;sIt( ) s; pun…vR’it' p[;Py sÊvoi{ˇ_;åVyˇ_;:y;vr,x·ˇ_r;sIt( ) tTp[it…b‚Mbt' yˇdIêrcwtNym;sIt( ) s Sv;/Inm;y"svRD" sOi∑æSqitly;n;m;idkt;‹ jgdïrÂpo .vit Sv‚Sm‚NvlIn'skl' jgd;…v.;‹vyit ) p[;…,kmRvx;deW p$o y√Tp[s;·rt" p[;…,kmR=y;Tpun‚Stro.;vyit ) t‚Sm•ev;≤%l' …vê' s'ko…ctp$v√tRte ) Èx;…/…œt;vr,x·ˇ_to rjoi{ˇ_; mhd;:y; …v=epx·ˇ_r;sIt( ) tTp[it…b‚Mbt' yˇ≤ır
787

Bråhmaâ Branch 25 O: Upani·had

Pai‹gala Upani·had

Ending:

anNtkmRx*c' c jpo yDStqwv c tIqRy;];….gmn' y;vˇÊv' n …vNdit 18 ah'b˜[ ie t inyt' mo=hetmu hR ;Tmn;m( √π pde bN/mo=;y n mmeit mmeit c 19 mmeit b?yte jNtuinRmmR ie t …vmuCyte mnso ÁuNmnI.;ve √¯t' nwvopl>yte 20 yd;y;TyuNmnI.;vStd; tTprm' pdm( y] y] mno y;it t] t] pr' pdm( 21 t] t] pr' b[˜ svR] smvæSqtm( hNy;Nmui∑….r;k;x'=/u ;tR" %<@yeˇWu m( 22 n;h'b˜[ ie t j;n;it tSy mu·ˇ_nR j;yte y EtdupinWd' inTym/Ite soå…¶pUto .vit s v;yuptU o .vit ) s a;idTypUto .vit ) s b[˜pUto .vit ) s …v„,uptU o .vit ) s ®{pUto .vit ) s sveWR u tIqeWR u ò;to .vit ) s sveWR u ved„e v/Ito.vit ) s svRvde v[tcy;‹su c·rto .vit ) ten-e ith;spur;,;n;' ®{;,;'xtshß;…, j¢;in fl;in .v≤Nt ) p[,v;n;myut' j¢' .vit ) dxpUv;‹Ndxoˇr;Npun;it ) s p…¤p;vno .vit ) s mh;N.vit ) b[˜hTy;sur;p;nSv,RSteygu®tLpgmntTs'yo…gp;tkÉ>y" pUto .vit ) ti√„,o"prm' pd' sd; pXy≤Nt sUry" ) idvIv c=ur;ttm( ) ti√p[;so …vpNyvo j;gOv;'s" s…mN/te ) …v„,oyRTprm' pdm( 23 — sTy…mTyupinWt( — pU,mR d" pU,…R md' pU,;‹TpU,mR du Cyte pU,SR y pU,mR ;d;y pU,mR ve ;v≤x„yte îit pw©lopinWTsm;¢; Reference: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968).

788

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26A: Ìraöyaka

Jaiminýa Ìraöyaka

Structure: Twelve anuvŒkas. Beginning:

jw…mnIy;ryt( 6 ydu h v; a;p" pr;cIrev p[stO ;SSyNderN=IyerS' t;" yd˚;'…s k⁄v;R,; inve∑m;n; a;vt;RNsOjm;n; y≤Nt =y;dev …b>ytI" tdet√;yoíwv;p;' c;nu vTmR geym( 7 2 p[qmeånuv;kÉ i√tIy" %<@"

789

Bråhmaâ Branch 26A: Ìraöyaka

Jaiminýa Ìraöyaka

Ending:

s y] yDStCzNd;'…s y] v; zNd;'…s t¥D" te √π yonI tdek‚Mmqunm( 8 kSsivt; k; s;iv]I Stn…yàurve sivt; iv¥uTs;iv]I 9 s y] Stn…yàuSti√¥u¥] v; iv¥uˇTStn…yàu" te √π yonI tdek‚Mmqunm( 10 kSsivt; k; s;iv]I a;idTy Ev sivt; ¥*Ss;iv]I 11 s y];idTySt∂‰*yR] v; ¥*Std;idTy" te √π yonI tdek‚Mmqunm( 12 kSsivt; k; s;iv]I cN{ Ev sivt; n=];…, s;iv]I 13 s y] cN{St•=];…, y] v; n=];…, t∞N{" te √π yonI tdek‚Mmqunm( 14 kSsivt; k; s;iv]I mn Ev sivt; v;Ks;iv]I 15 s y] mnSt√;Gy] v; v;ˇ_Nmn" te √π yonI tdek‚Mmqunm( 16 kSsivt; k; s;iv]I pu®W Ev sivt; S]I s;iv]I s y] pu®WStTS]I y] v; S]I tTpu®W" te √π yonI tdek‚Mmqunm( 17 27 √;dxeånuv;kÉ p[qm" %<@" tSy; EW p[qm" p;do .UStTsivtuvrR
790

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26B: Ìraöyaka

êhŒ‹khŒyana Ìraöyaka


aq AGvedIym( x;ƒ;yn;y' ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" ) p[j;pitvwR s'vTsr" ) tSywW a;Tm; yNmh;v[tm( ) tSm;d( Ent( prSmw n x'sne ( net( sveWR ;' .Ut;n;m( a;Tm;n' priSmn( d/;nIit – aqo îN{SywW a;Tm; yNmh;v[tm( ) tSm;d( Ent( prSmw n x'sne ( ned( îN{Sy;ååTm;n' priSmn( d/;nIit – aqo ym( Evwtm( AÑy' yjumyR ' s;mmy' pu®W' s'Sk⁄v≤R Nt tSywW a;Tm; yNmh;v[tm( ) tSm;d( Ent( prSmw n x'sne ( net( sveWR ;' zNds;m( a;Tm;n' priSmn( d/;nIit – k;m' tu s≤T],;' hot; x'ste ( ) ip]e v;ååc;y;Ry v;ååTmne hwv;åSy tCzSt' .vit ) a;Tmnwv t¥D' sm/Ryit ) tSy pç…v'x" Stom" ) ctu…v|xitvwR s'vTsrSy;å/Rm;s;" s'vTsrSywv;å¢‰w ) aqo p[j;pitvwR s'vTsr" pç…v'x" ) aqo ctu…v|xo vw purSt;t( ’to .vit tSywW; g·rTyt( pç…v'x" ) EeN{í AW." p[;j;pTyí;åj ¨p;l.* ) EeN{' v; Etd( ah" ) îN{ ¨ vw p[j;pit" ) tt( p[;j;pTy' Âpm( ) aqo Etd( Ev pxu„vwN{' Âp' yt( AW." 1 tSy ivxoivxo vo ait…q…mit √;dxcRm;Jym( ) √;dx vw m;s;" s'vTsr" s'vTsrSywv;åå¢‰w ) tiSmn( vw √π zNdsI .vto g;y}yí;ånu∑.ë í ) a…¶' nro dI…/it….yo" îTyett( pç…v'xTyOcmups'xs' it ) pç…v'xo ih Stom" ) t√w xS]' smOı' yTStomen s'p¥te ) tiSmn( vw √π zNdsI .v(to ivr;jí i]∑ë.í ) t;in cTv;·r s'p¥Nte ) ctu∑y' v; îd' svRm( aSywv svRSy;åå¢‰w ) ]w∑.ë " p[¨g" ) îN{Sywvtw CzNdo yt( i]∑ëp( ) tden' Sven zNds; sm/Ryit ) k⁄ivd© nms; ye vO/;s" îit v;yVy' mh√d vO/vt( ) mh√t(--mh√ı‰etdh" ) at Evoˇr' tOcmwN{v;yvm( y;vˇrStNvo y;vdoj" îit y;v•rí=s; dI?y;n;" îTyetne Âpe, ) ¨√;' c=uv®R , supt[ Ik…mit mw];v®,m( devyoreit sUySR ttNv;n( îTyetne Âpe, )

791

Bråhmaâ Branch 26B: Ìraöyaka

êhŒ‹khŒyaöa Ìraöyaka

Ending:

s EW" tÊvm…s îit ) a;Tm;åvgMyoåh' b[˜;SmIit ) tdetd(b˜[ ;åpUvmR prmnprmnNtrmb;Ám( ) aym;Tm; b[˜ sv;Rånu.·U rTynux;sn…mit y;DvLKy" ) tdet•;åpu];y n;ånNtev;…sne v; b[yU ;idit ) y îm;m≤∫" p·rgOhIt;' vsumtI' /nSy pU,;| d¥;t( îdmev tto .Uy" îdmev tto .Uy îTynux;snm( ) t;met;m( ¨pinWd' vedixro n yq; kq'cn vdet( ) tdetÎc;å>yuidtm( 1 îit x;ƒ;yn;rR y" ) gu,;:y;Cz;ƒ;yn;d( aSm;….r/Itm( ) gu,;:y" x;ƒ;yn" khol;t( k*pItkÉ" ) khol" k*WItik®∂;lk;d;®,e" ) ¨∂;lk a;®…," ip[yv[t;t( s*m;pe" ) ip[yv[t" s*m;ip" somp;t( ) somp" s*m;Tp[;itveXy;t( ) s*m" p[;itveXy" p[itveXy;t( ) p[itveXyo bOhi∂v;t( ) bOhi∂v" suªyo" ) suªyu®∂;lk;t( ) ¨∂;lko ivêmns" ) ivêmn; Vyê;t( ) Vyê" s;kmê;t( ) s;kmêo devr;t;t( ) devr;to ivê;…m];t( ) ivê;…m] îN{;t( ) îN{" p[j;pte" ) p[j;pitb[˜R ," ) b[˜; SvyM.U" ) nmo b[˜,e nmo b[˜,e 1 îit x;ƒ;yn;ykÉ pçdxoå?y;y" ) îit x;ƒ;yn;yk˘ sm;¢m( Reference: Dev, Bhim, êŒ‹khŒyana Ìraöyakam, (Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Vedic Research Institute, 1980).

792

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26C: Ìraöyaka

ChhŒndogya Ìraöyaka


z;NdoGy;r
793

Bråhmaâ Branch 26C: Ìraöyaka

ChhŒndogya Ìraöyaka

Ending:

a•imit hov;c sv;Ri, h v; îm;in .Ut;Ny•mev p[ithrm;,;in jIviNt swW; devt; p[ith;rmNv;yˇ; t;' cediv√;Np[Tyhir„yo mU/;R te Vypit„yˇqoˇ_Sy myeit tqoˇ_Sy myeit 9 îit p[qm;?y;y Ek;dx" %<@" 11 aq;t" x*v ¨˝IqStı bko d;L>yo Gl;vo v; mw]ye " Sv;?y;ymu√v[;j 1 tSmw ê; êet" p[;dub.R vU tmNye ê;n ¨psmeTyocur•' no .gv;n;g;yTvxn;y;m v; îit 2 t;Nhov;cehwv m; p[;t®psmIy;teit tı bko d;L>yo Gl;vo v; mw]ye " p[itp;ly;'ck;r 3 te h yqwvde ' bih„pvm;nen Sto„ym;,;" s\rB/;" spRNtITyev m;ssOpuSte h smupivXy ih'c£⁄" 4 —3md;3mo'3ipb;3mo'3devo v®," p[j;pit" sivt;2•imh;2hrd•pte3•imh;2hr;2hro3imit 5 îit p[qm;?y;ye √;dx" %<@" 12 ay' v;v loko h;¨k;ro v;yuh;Rîk;ríN{m; aqk;r a;Tmehk;roåi¶rIk;r" 1 a;idTy Ëk;ro inhv Ek;ro ivêedve ; a*hoîk;r" p[j;pitih|k;r" p[;," Svroå•' y; v;iGvr;$( 2 ain®ˇ_S]yodx" Sto." s'cro ¸'k;r" 3 duG/eåSmw v;Gdoh' yo v;co dohoå•v;n•;do .vit y Et;mev\ s;ª;mupinWd' vedopinWd' ved îit 4 îit p[qm;?y;ye ]yodx" %<@" 13 îit p[qmoå?y;y" 1 Reference: Shastri, J.L., Upanisat-Samgrahah Containing 188 Upani·ads, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984).

794

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26D: Ìraöyaka

MaitrŒyaöýa Ìraöyaka

Structure: Seven PrapŒÿhakas Beginning:

mw];y,Iym;re y" – Ë?v| …jg;tu .eWj˝ x•o aStu i√pde x' ctu„pde 1 — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" mw];y
795

Bråhmaâ Branch 26D: Ìraöyaka

MaitrŒyaöýa Ìraöyaka

Ending:

pu®Wí;=uWo yoåy' d≤=,eå≤=yùStuym¡| hˇùrm( 7 i]ù„vekp¡ ;∞ùrde b( ˜ÿ[ i]ùp;∞ÿritù coˇÿre sùTy;nOtÿ opù.og;ÿqoR √¯tù I.;ÿvo mùh;Tmÿn"ù 8 îitÿ √ùt¯ I.;ÿvo mùh;Tmÿnåù îitÿ 11 îit mw];y,Iy;ryo mN]’Œo mN]ivŒo mN]ivŒo mN]pit>yo m; m;mOWyo mN]’to mN]ivd" p[;dudvRw I\ v;cmu¥;s' ju∑;' dev>e y" Sv/;vrI' iptO>yoånumt;Nmnu„ye>yStNm; dev;åavNtu xo.;…y iptroånumdNtu – — x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" x;≤Nt" – îit – Reference: Satyavalekara, DŒmodara, Maitrayana Samhita, (PŒradi: SvŒdhyŒya Maö¶ala, 1983), pp. 543-564.

796

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26E: Ìraöyaka

Aitareya Ìraöyaka

Structure: Five major divisions, called Ìraöyakas Beginning:

Eetrey a;r
797

Bråhmaâ Branch 26E: Ìraöyaka

Aitareya Ìraöyaka

Ending:

hotOxS]eWKU qx; yj somSyeTyek" p[Ww " sn;r;x's„e vn;r;x'sWe u v; ho]k;,;m( ) ¨Kqx; yj som;n;…mit ) tiddmhn;RnNtev;…sne p[b-U[ y;•;s'vTsrv;…sne no Ev;s'vTsrv;…sne n;b[˜c;·r,e n;sb[˜c;·r,e no Ev;sb[˜c;·r,e n;n….p[;¢;ywt' dexm( ) n .Uy" s’Ìdn;id≠√gRdn;√; √Yyev ) Ek EkSmw p[byU[ ;idit h Sm;h j;tUkyJy noNmdRn' k;r…yTv; n n;ipten k;r…yTv; n ò;Tv; n v,RknÉ ;nu≤lPy n ßjmipnÁ n ≤S]ymupgMy noÆLl:y n;iv≤l:y ) nedmekiSm•hin sm;pyeidit h Sm;h j;tUky" sm;pyedve Te y;…¶veXy;ynoåNymNyiSmNdexe xmym;n îit ) y]edm/IyIt n t];Nyd/IyIt y] TvNyd/IyIt k;m…md' t];/IyIt ) nedmn/IyNò;tko .vit y¥PyNyä◊/Iy;•wvde mn/IyNTò;tko .vit ) n;Sm;d/It;Tp[m;¥e¥¥PyNySm;Tp[m;√‰e•vw ;Sm;Tp[m;¥e•o Ev;Sm;Tp[m;¥et( ) aSm;∞e• p[m;¥edlm;Tmn îit iv¥;t( ) al' sTy' iv¥;t( ) nedi' vdind'ivd; smui∂xe• sh .uÔIt n s/m;dI Sy;t( ) aq;t" Sv;?y;y/m| Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) ¨p pur;,en;pIte k=odkÉ pUv;R º n s'….•;su z;y;Svpr; º n;?yU¿h me`åe pt*R vWeR i]r;]' vwidkÉn;?y;yen;Nt·ry;•;iSmNkq;' vdet n;Sy r;]* cn …ck°tR…yWet( ) tidit v; EtSy mhto .UtSy n;m .vit yoåSywtdev' n;m ved b[˜ .vit b[˜ .vit 3 îTywtreypçm;r
798

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26F: Ìraöyaka

Taittirýa Ìraöyaka

Structure: Ten PrapŒÿhakas, followed by a substantial Pari§i·ÿa. Beginning:

tw·ˇrIy;r
799

Bråhmaâ Branch 26F: Ìraöyaka

Taittirýa Ìraöyaka

Ending:

Eùt√w jÿr;mym…¶hoù]˝ sù]' y Eùv' ivù√;nudÿ gyÿne p[mù Iyÿte devù ;n;mevù mihùm;n¡' gùTv;ååidùTySyù s;yuJÿ y' gCzùTyùq yoù d≤=ÿ,e p[mù Iyÿte iptO,è ;mevù mÿihùm;n'¡ gùTv; cùN{mÿs"ù s;yuJÿ y' gCzTyetù * vw sUyÿ ;RcN{ùmsoÿmiR hùm;n*ÿ b[;˜ù,o ivù√;nù….jÿyitù tSm;ÿdb( ˜[ù ,oÿ mihùm;nÿm;“oit tSm;ÿdb( ˜ù[ ,oÿ mihùm;nÿ…mTyupinWt( îit îit ’„,yjuvdRe IytwiˇrIy;ykÉ dxmp[p;#kÉ n;r;y,opinWid ctuWi∑tmoånuv;k" 64 sùh n;ÿvvtu ) sùh n*ÿ .unˇ_⁄ ) sùh vIùy¡| krv;vhw ) tejù iù Sv n;ùv/IÿtmStuè m; ivÿi√W;ùvhwÿ ) — x;≤Ntù" x;≤Ntù" x;≤Ntÿ" ) h·r" — ) îit ’„,yjuvdRe IytwiˇrIy;r
800

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26G: Ìraöyaka

MŒdhyandinýa Ìraöyaka

Structure: The nine chapters of the Ìraöyaka KŒö¶a of the Shatapatha BrŒhmaöa Beginning:

aom( ) dev; h vw sT]' inWed"u ) a…¶·rN{" somo m%o iv„,uivRêe dev; aNy]wv;…ê>y;m( 1 teW;' k⁄®=e]' devyjnm;s ) tSm;d;Û" k⁄®=e]' dev;n;' devyjn…mit tSm;¥] Kv c k⁄®=e]Sy ingzit tdev mNytåîd' devyjn…mit d≤ı dev;n;' devyjnm( 2 tåa;st ) …≈y' gzπm yx" Sy;m;•;d;" Sy;meit tqoåEveme sT]m;ste …≈y' gzπm yx" Sy;m;•;d;" Sy;meit 3 te hocu" ) yo n" ≈me, tps; ≈ıy; yDen;¸it….yRDSyoÎc' pUvoRåvgz;Ts n" ≈eœoåsˇdu n" sveWR ;ã sheit tqeit 4 ti√„,u" p[qm" p[;p ) s dev;n;6 ≈eœoå.vˇSm;d;¸ivR„,udvRe ;n;6 ≈eœ îit 5 s y" s iv„,uyDR " s ) s y" s yDoås* s a;idTySt√πd' yxo iv„,unR xx;k s'yNtu' tiddmPyetihR nwv svR îv yx" xKnoit s'yNtum( 6 s itsO/Nvm;d;y;pc£;m ) s /nur;à‰;‹ ixr ¨pSt>y tSq* t' dev; an…./O„,uvNt" smNt' p·rymOJyNt ) yq; iviˇ' veTSym;n; Ev' t…mN{" p[qm" p[;p tmNv©mnuNyp¥t t' pyRg O ;ˇ' p·rgOÁdº ' yxoå.v¥idd…mN{o yxo yxo h .vit y Ev' ved 12 s ¨ Ev m%" s iv„,u" ) tt îN{o m%v;n.vNm%v;Nh vw t' m`v;inTy;c=te proå=' proå=k;m; ih dev;" 13 t;>yo vm[I>yoå•;¥' p[;yzn( ) a;po vw svRm•' t;….hIRdm….KnUy…mv;d≤Nt yidd' ikMvd≤Nt 14 aqem' iv„,u' yD' ]e/; Vy.jNt ) vsv" p[;t" svn6 ®{; m;?y≤Ndn6 svnm;idTy;StOtIysvnm( 15 a…¶" p[;t"svnm( îN{o m;?y≤Ndn6 svn'

801

Bråhmaâ Branch 26G: Ìraöyaka

MŒdhyandinýa Ìraöyaka

Ending:

aq v6x" ) tidd' vy' .;r√;jIpu];∫;r√;jIpu] v;TsIm;<@vIpu];√;TsIm;<@vIpu]" p;r;xrIpu];Tp;r;xrIpu]o g;gIRp]u ;Ì;gIRp]u " p;r;xrIk*i<@nIpu];Tp;r;xrIk*i<@nIpu]o g;gIRp]u ;Ì;gIRp]u o g;gIRp]u ;Ì;gIRpu]o b;@ºyIpu];ä;@ºyIpu]o m*Wek°pu];Nm*iWk°pu]o h;·rk,IRp]u ;∫;·rk,IRp]u o .;r√;jIpu];∫;r√;jIpu]" pw©«pu];Tpw©«pu]" x*nk°pu];z*nk°pu]" 30 k;XypIb;l;Ky;m;#rIpu];Tk;XypIa;l;Ky;m;#rIpu]" k*TsIpu];Tk*TsIpu]o b*/Ipu];∂*/Ipu]o x;l˚;ynIpu];z;l˚;ynIpu]o v;pRg,Ipu];√;pRg,Ipu]o g*tmIpu];Ì*tmIpu] a;]eyIpu];d;]eyIpu]o g*tmIpu];Ì*tmIpu]o v;TsIpu];√;TsIpu]o .;r√;jIpu];∫;r√;jIpu]" p;r;xrIpu];Tp;r;xrIpu]o v;k;≥®,Ipu];√;k;≥®,Ipu] a;tR.;gIpu];d;tR.;gIpu]" x*©«pu];z*©«pu]" s;'’tIpu];Ts;'’tIpu]" 31 a;lMbIpu];t( ) a;lMbIpu] a;lMb;ynIpu];d;lMb;ynIpu]o j;yNtIpu];∆;yNtIpu]o m;<@Ük;ynIpu];Nm;<@Ük;ynIpu]o m;<@Ük°pu];Nm;<@Ük°pu]" x;i<@lIpu];z;i<@lIpu]o r;qItrIpu];Ì;qItrIpu]" £*≤çk°pu];>y;' £*≤çk°pu]* vwd.Otopu];√wd.OtIpu]o .;luk°pu];∫;luk°pu]" p[;cInyogIpu];Tp[;cInyogIpu]" s;'jIvIpu];Ts;'jIvIpu]" k;xRkyÉ Ipu];Tk;xRkyÉ Ipu]" 32 p[;XnIpu];t( ) a;su·rv;…sn" p[;XnIpu] a;sur;y,;d;sur;y, a;surre ;su·ryIDvLKy;¥;DvLKy ¨∂;lk;du∂;lkoå®,;d®, ¨pvex®e pve≤x" k⁄≈"e k⁄…≈v;RD≈vso v;D≈v; …D◊;vto b;?y;g;≤∆◊;v; b;?yogoå…st;√;WRg,;d…stI v;WRg,o h·rt;TkXyp;ı·rt" kXyp" ixLp;TkXyp;…zLp" kXyp" kXyp;•w/vu[ "e kXypo nw/iu[ vv;Rco v;g‚M.
802

Bråhmaâ

Branch 26H: Ìraöyaka

KŒÿha Ìraöyaka

Structure: Fragmentary work: 240 prose passages. Beginning:

k#;ry" p[vGyRSsiM.[yte ) idG>y Ev p[vGy\R sM.rit ) v;nSpTy; .v≤Nt ) vnSpit….vwR p[vGyRSsiM.[yte ) vnSpit….rev p[vGy\R sM.rit 2 ¨·ˇœ b[˜,Spt îTyu·ˇœit ) bOhSpitvwR b[˜,Spitr( ) bOhSpitrev .UTvo·ˇœit 3 ¨pp[yNtu m®tSsud;nv îit ) sud;nvo vw m®t a;re y Ev yD\ sM.rit 7 devI ¥;v;pO…qvI devyjneånu me m's;q;…mtIme vw mh;vIr;t( siM.[ym;,;d…b.It;m( ) tejs; n; ¨ı+ytIit ) s bOhSpitrb[vId( ) yuvyo.;Rg/ey…mit ) tt EnmNvmNyt;m( 8 AtSy ?y;Rsm¥ m%Sy ≤xr îit sM.rit ) yDSywv ≤xrSsM.rit ) i]hRrit ) i]WTy; ih dev;s( ) smNtm.[I" p·r≈yit ) r=s;Mpr;,uÊyw ) p[j;ptevwR p[j;æSssO=m;,Sy tSy tejo y…Dymp;£;mt( ) tidm;Mp[;ivxt( ) t√r;ho .UTv;NvivNdd( 9 îTyTyg[ a;sI·rit ) y√r;hivhtM.vTySy; Ev tejo y…Dy\ sM.rit 10 devIvR…m[yoåSy .UtSy p[qmj; îit ) v…m[yo v; aSy .UtSy p[qmj;s( ) t; v; Eti√duy]R ;Sy; jIv' y…Dy' ) y√LmIkv;pn;\ sM.rTySy; Ev jIv' y…Dy\ sM.rtIN{o vw y√é]mh'StSy*jo vIyRmp;£;mt( ) tdoW/I" p[;ivxt( ) te pUtIk; a.v•( 11 îN{Sy*joåsIit ) yTpUtIk;n;\

803

Bråhmaâ Branch 26H: Ìraöyaka

KŒÿha Ìraöyaka

Ending:

svRm;yurie t ) swv t] p[;y…í·ˇs( ) tmo v; EtSy yD' yuvte ySy mh;vIre p[vJO ym;ne sUyoRåStmeit ) s a;it| yjm;n a;XzRit 237 ¨du Ty' j;tveds' …c]' dev;n;mudg;idit √;>y;' ju¸y;d( ) as* v; a;idTyo ®{o mh;vIrs( ) Svenvw nw M.;g/eyne xmyit ) svRm;yurie t ) swv t] p[;y…í·ˇ --- --- swv t] p[;y…íˇI ) ®{o v; EtSy pxUn….mNyte ySy mh;vIre p[vJO ym;ne `mR/õu ™ inWIdit ) t; --- 238 ySm;∫IW; inWId…s tto no a.yõ™’…/ ) a.y•" pxu>yo nmo ®{;y mI!üW îit √;>y;' ju¸y;d( ) a…¶vwR ®{s( ) Svenvw nw M.;g/eyne p[xt xmyit ) svRm;yurie t ) swv t] p[;y…í·ˇr( ) mOTyuv;R EtSy p[j; a….mNyte ySy mh;vIre p[vJO ym;ne vy;'…s ê;pd;in v;ip/;vNt 239 asONmu%o iv g; îveit √;>y;' ju¸y;n( ) mOTyuvRw yms( ) Svenvw nw M.;g/eyne p[xt xmyit --- --- a;Tmnoåih\s;yw ) --- p[vGye,R p[c·rWUan( dI≤=tSy --- --- p[vGy\R sM.rit ) a…jne sM.rTy…¶v;R --- --- sM.rit xkúr;…./OTR y; aMyw"R kp;lwr-( -- --- -- a*duMbr;sNdI .vit ) Ë?v;R ¨duMbr ËjRvw nw ;,( d;/;r ) m*Ô;ivv;n; .vit ) ËGvRw muÔ; ) ËjwvR nw ;' d;/;r ) p[;dexm;]p;d; .vit ) Et;v≤ıme 239-1 iv p[;,; --- Een;Nd;/;r ) ’„,;…jnm;StO,;it ) ’„,;…jnen p[Xz;dyit ) b[hm v; Et{Up' yT’„,;…jnm( ) b[˜,wvnw ;' d;/;r ) p[;gudGg;hRpTy;T%r' kroTyudç* pr* %r* kroit ) ay' vw loko g;hRpTyoås; a;hvnIyo g;hRpTye ¸t\ Svg| lok˘ gmyit ) --- it ) täih∑;t(--- √;r;
804

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27A: BrŒhmaöa

Gopatha BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Six PrapŒÿhakas Beginning:

gopqb[;˜,pUVvR.;ge ) p[qm" p[p;#k" ) ao' b[˜ h v; îdmg[ a;sIt( SvyNTvekmev tdw=t mh√wy=' tdekmev;iSm hNt;h' mdev mNm;]' i√tIy' dev' inmRm îit td>y≈;Myd>ytpt( tSy ≈;NtSy t¢Sy sNt¢Sy ll;$e òeho yd;¥[mR ;j;yt ten;nNdˇmb[vIt( mh√w y=' suvde mivd;mh îit ) t¥db[vIt( mh√wy=' suvde mivd;mh îit tSm;t( suvde oå.vˇ' v; Et' suvde ' sNt' Sved îTy;c=te ) pro=e, pro=ip[y; îv ih dev; .v≤Nt p[Ty=i√W" 1 s .Uyoå≈;My∫ÀyoåtPyd( .Uy a;Tm;n' smtpt( ) tSy ≈;NtSy t¢Sy s't¢Sy sve>R yo romgte>R y" pOqk™ Sved/;r;" p[;SyNdNt ) t;….rnNdt( ) tdb[vIt(--a;….v;R ah…md' sv| /;r…y„y;…m yidd' ik˘ c a;….v;R ah…md' sv| jn…y„y;…m yidd' ik˘ c a;….v;| ah…md' svRm;PSy;…m yidd' ik˘ ceit ) t¥db[vIt(--a;….v;R ah…md' sv| /;r…y„y;…m yidd' ik˘ ceit tSm;ı;r; a.vn( ) tı;r;,;' /;r;Tv' y∞;su …/[yte ) t¥db[vIt(--a;….v;R ah…md' svR jn…y„y;…m yidd' ik˘ ceit tSm;∂;y; a.vn( ) t∆;y;n;' j;y;Tv' y∞;su pu®Wo j;yte y∞ PpuT]" ) pu•;m nrkmnekxtt;r' tSm;T];tIit puT]" ) tt( puT]Sy puT]Tvm( ) t¥db[vIt(--a;….v;R ah…md' svRm;PSy;…m yidd' ik˘ ceit tSm;d;poå.vn( ) tdp;mPTvm( ) a;“oit vw s sv;Rn( k;m;n( y;n( k;myte y Ev' ved 2 t; ap" sOÇ;Nvw=t ) t;su Sv;' z;y;mpXyt( ) t;mSye=m;,Sy Svy' retoåSkNdt( ) tdPsu p[Tyitœt( ) t;St]wv;>y≈;Myd>ytLpTsmtpt( ) t;" ≈;Nt;St¢;" s't¢;" s;/Rmve rets; √w/m.vn( ) t;s;mNytr; aitlv,; apey; aSv;√‰" ) t; ax;Nt; ret" smu{' vOÊv;itœn( ) aqetr;" pey;" Sv;√‰" x;Nt;" ) t;St]wv;>y≈;Myd>ytpTsmtpt( ) t;>y" ≈;Nt;>ySt¢;>y" s't¢;>yo y{et a;sIˇÎ.O∆‰t ) yd.O∆‰t

805

Bråhmaâ Branch 27A: BrŒhmaöa

Gopatha BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

t∂ºvpiv]e,vw v;c' punIte ) s; v; anu∑Bë .vit ) v;Gv; anu∑pë ( ) tTSvenvw zNds; v;c' punIte ) t;m`Rcx R " x'sit p[itiœTy; Ev ) aq p;vm;nI" x'sit ) piv]' vw p;vm;Ny" ) îy' v;g;hnSy;' v;cmv;dIt( ) tt( p;vm;nI….rev v;c' punIte ) t;" sv;R anu∑.ë o .v≤Nt ) v;Gv; anu∑pë ( ) tTSvenvw zNds; v;c' punIte ) t; az≥cx R " x'sit p[itiœTy; Ev ) av {Pso a'xmu tImitœidTyet' tOcmwN{;b;hRSpTy' sUˇ_' x'sit ) aq hwtduTsO∑m( ) t¥det' tOcmwN{;b;hRSpTymNTy' tOcmwN{;j;gt' x'sit svn/;r,…md' guLmh îit vdNt" ) tdu tq; n k⁄y;Rt( ) i]∑ëb;ytn; v; îy' v;geW;' ho]k;,;' ydwN{;b;hRSpTy; tOtIysvne ) t¥det' tOcmwN{;b;hRSpTymNTy' tOcmwN{;j;gt' x'sit Sv Evwn' td;ytne p[I,;it SvyodevR tyo" ) k;m' inTymev p·rd?y;Tk;m' tOcSyoˇmy; ) td;Û"--s'xs' te ( Wœºåhin n s'xs' te ( ) kqmNye„vh"su s'xs' it kqm] n s'xs' tIit aqo %Lv;Û"--nwv s'xs' te ( ) SvgoR vw lok" Wœmh" ) asm;yI vw SvgoR lok" ) k…í√w SvgeR lokÉ xmytIit ) tSm;d(n s'xs' it ) ydev n s'xs' it tTSvgRSy lokSy Âpm( ) y√πvnw ;" s'xs' it yd(n;.;neidœo v;l≤%Lyo vOW;kiprevy;m®det;in v; a]oKq;in .v≤Nt tSm;d(n s'xs' it ) EeN{o vOW;kip" ) sv;R…, zNd;'Sywtxp[l;p" ) ¨p;¢o ydwN{;b;hRSpTy; tOtIysvne t¥det' tOcmwN{;b;hRSpTy' sUˇ_' x'sit EeN{;b;hRSpTy; p·r/;nIy;--ivxo adevIr>y;crNtI" îit ) aprjn; h vw ivxo adevo" n ÁSy;prjn' .y' .vit x;Nt;" p[j;" KlO¢;" shNte y]wvi' vd' x'sit y]wvi' vd' x'stIit b[;˜,m( 16 îTyqvRvde oˇrgopqb[;˜,Sy Wœ" p[p;#k" sm;¢" 6 sm;¢í;y' g[Nq" – Reference: Mitra, Rajendra Lal, Gopath Brahmana, (Delhi: Indological Book House, 1972) originally published as part of Bibliotheca Indica.

806

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27B: BrŒhmaöa

Vaµ§ha BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Three Khaö¶as Beginning:

v'xb[;˜, nmo b[˜,e nmo b[;˜,e>yo nm a;c;ye>R yo nm AiW>yo nmo dev>e yo nm v;yve c mOTyve c iv„,ve c nmo vw≈v,;y c 1 ¨pj;yt xvRdˇ;Ì;Gy;RCz;vRdˇo g;GyR" 2 xvRdˇo g;GyoR ®{.Ut{e ;RÁ;y,;t( 3 ®{.Uit{;RÁ;y,S];t;dwWmu ;t( 4 ];t EWumto ing@;t( p;,RvLkÉ" 5 ing@" p;,RvæLk" …g·rxmR," k;<#πivıe" 6 …g·rxm;R k;<#πiv≤ıb[˜R vOıXe zNdogm;hkÉ" 7 b[˜vO≤ıXzNdogm;hik…mR]vcRs" Sqwrk;yn;t( 8 …m]vc;‹" Sqwrk;yn" supt[ It;d*luN¥;t( 9 supt[ It a*luN¥o bOhSpitgu¢;Cz;ySqe" 10 bOhSpitgu¢" x;yiSq.Rv];t;Cz;ySqe" 11 .v];t" x;yæSq" k⁄Stuk;Cz;kúr;+y;t( 12 k⁄Stuk" x;kúr;S+y" ≈v,dˇ;Tk*hl;t( 13 ≈v,dˇ" k*hl" sux;rd;Cz;l˚;yn;t( 14 sux;rd" x;l˚;yn ËjRyt a*pmNyv;t( 15 ËjRy•*pmNyvo .;numt a*pmNyv;t( 16 .;num;n*pmNyv a;nNdj;∞;N/n;yn;t( 17 a;nNdjí;N/n;yn" x;Mb;Cz;kúr;+y;Tk;Mboj;∞opmNyv;t( 18 x;Mb" x;kúr;+y" k;Mbojí*pmNyvo m{k;r;Cz*©;yne" 19 m{k;r" x*©;yin" Sv;ter*∑^;=e" 20 Sv;itr*∑^;≤=" su≈vso v;WRg
807

Bråhmaâ Branch 27B: BrŒhmaöa

Vaµ§ha BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

r;jNy" sumN];ä;.[v;Ì*tm;t( 12 sumN]o b;.[vo g*tm" xUW;√;êy;∫;r√;j;t( 13 xuWo v;ê>yo .;r√;joår;l;∂;teyR ;Cz*nk;t( 14 ar;lo dteyR " x*nko dOtre Nw {ot;Cz*nk;iTptu" 15 dOitrwN{ot" x*nk îN{ot;Cz*nk;iTpturve 16 îN{ot" x*nko vOWxu„m;√;t;vt;t( 17 vOWxu„mo v;t;vto inkoqk;∫;yj;Ty;t( 18 inkoqko .;yj;Ty" p[itqedvRe trq;t( 19 p[it…qdevR trqo devtrs" x;vs;yn;iTptu" 20 devtr;" x;vs;yn" xvs" ipturve 21 xv; a…¶.uv" k;Xyp;t( 22 a…¶.U" k;Xyp îN{.uv" k;Xyp;t( 23 îN{.U" k;Xypo …m].uv" k;Xyp;t( 24 …m].U" k;Xypo iv.u<@k;Tk;Xyp;iTptu" 25 iv.<@k" k;Xyp A„yÍ©;Tk;Xyp;iTptu" 26 A„yÍ©" k;Xyp" k;Xyp;iTpturve 27 kXypoå¶e" 28 a…¶·rN{;t( 29 îN{o v;yo" 30 v;yumOTR yo" 31 mOTyu" p[j;pte" 32 p[j;pitb[˜R ," 33 b[˜; SvyM.U" 34 tSmw nmStSmw nm" 35 2 a;c;ye>R yo nmSkéTv;q v'xSy k°tRyte ( Sv/; pUvWRe ;' .vit net;yudIR`mR Xnute îTyuKTv;nu£;me√x ÷ m; b[˜," 1 ny•yRm.Ut"e k;lbv;t( 2 ayRm.Uit" k;lbv" .{xmR," k*≤xk;t( 3 .{xm;R k*≤xk" pu„pyxs a*dv[j"e 4 pu„pyx; a*dv[…j" s'kr;Ì*tm;t( 5 s'kro g*tmoåyRmr;/;∞ go….l;TpU‚„m];∞ go….l;t( 6 pUW;…m]o go….loåê…m];Ìo….l;t( 7 aê…m]o go….lo v®,…m];Ìo….l;t( 8 v®,…m]o go….lo mUl…m];Ìo….l;t( 9 mUl…m]o go….lo vTs…m];Ìo….l;t( 10 vTs…m]o go….lo g*LgulvIpu];Ìo….l;t( 11 g*LgulvIpu]o go….lo bOh√so" iptu" 12 bOh√sugoR….lo go….l;dev 13 go….lo r;/;∞ g*tm;t( 14 sm;n' pr' sm;n' prm( 15 3 Reference: Vaµ§a BrŒhmaöa, (Calcutta: Indian Research Institute, 1985).

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27C: BrŒhmaöa

808

êhatapatha BrŒhmaöa (MŒdhyandina)


aom( ) nmo g,ex;y – v[tmup„w yn( ) aNtre,;hvnIy' c g;hRpTy' c p[;õ™itœ•p ¨pSpOxit t¥dp ¨pSpOxTyme?yo vw pu®Wo ydnOt' vdit ten pUitrNtrto me?y; v;åa;po me?yo .UTv; v[tmup;y;nIit piv]' v;åa;p" piv]pUto v[tmup;y;nIit tSm;√;åap ¨pSpOxit 1 soå…¶mev;.I=m;,o v[tmupiw t ) a¶e v[tpte v[t' c·r„y;…m tzkÉy' tNme r;?yt;…mTy…¶vwR dev;n;' v[tpitStSm;åEvwtTp[;h v[t' c·r„y;…m tzkÉy' tNme r;?yt;…mit n;] itroiht…mv;iSt 2 aq s6iSqte ivsOjte ) a¶e v[tpte v[tmc;·rW' tdxk˘ tNmeår;/ITyxkı‰et¥o yDSy s6Sq;mg•r;…/ ÁSmw yo yDSy s6Sq;mg•etne Nvev .U…yœ; îv v[tmupyNTynen Tvevopey;t( 3 √y' v;åîd' n tOtIymiSt ) sTy' cwv;nOt' c sTymev dev; anOt' mnu„y; îdmhmnOt;TsTymupmw Iit tNmnu„ye>yo dev;nupiw t 4 s vw sTymev vdet( ) Etıvw dev; v[t' cr≤Nt yTsTy' tSm;ˇe yxo yxo h .vit y Ev' iv√;'TsTy' vdit 5 aq s6iSqte ivsOjte ) îdmh' y Ev;iSm soåSmITym;nuW" îv v;åEt∫vit yd(vt[ mupiw t n ih tdvkLpte yd(byU[ ;iddmh6 sTy;dnOtmupmw Iit tdu %lu punm;RnWu o .vit tSm;iddmh' y Ev;iSm soåSmITyev' v[t' ivsOjte 6 aq;toåxn;nxnSywv ) tduh;W;!" s;vyso ånxnmev v[t' mene mno h vw dev; mnu„ySy;j;n≤Nt tåEnmetd(vˇ[ mupyNt' ivdu" p[;tnoR y+ytåîit te Sy ivêe dev; gOh;n;gz≤Nt teåSy gOhWe pU vs≤Nt s ¨pvsq" 7 tNNvev;nvKlO¢m( ) yo mnu„ye„vnXnTsu pUvoRåXnIy;dq ikmu yo dev„e vnXnTsu pUvoRåXnIy;ˇSm;du nwv;XnIy;t( 8 tdu hov;c y;DvLKy" ) yid n;Xn;it iptOdve Tyo .vit y¥uåaXn;it dev;nTyXn;tIit s ydev;ixtmnixt' tdXnIy;idit ySy vw hivnR ˙ ≤Nt tdixtmnixt6 s ydXn;it ten;iptOdve Tyo .vit y¥u tdXn;it ySy hivnR gO ≤Nt teno dev;•;TyXn;it 9 s v;åa;r
809

Bråhmaâ Branch 27C: BrŒhmaöa

êhatapatha BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27D: BrŒhmaöa

810

TŒö¶ya Pa–caviµ§ha BrŒhmaöa


t;<@‰mh;b[;˜,m( ) p[qmoå?y;ye ) p[qm" %<@" ) — mhNme voco .goR me voco yxo me voc" Stom' me voco .u·ˇ_' me voc" sv| me vocStNm;vtu tNm;ivxtu ten .u≤=WIy 1 devo devmetu som" sommeTvOtSy pq; 2 ivh;y d*„’Tym( 3 b√;n;m;…s sOit" somsr,I som' gmeym( 4 iptro .U" iptro .U" iptro .U" 5 nOm, Ëı±v.R rs' Tvoı±v.R r; Îxeym( 6 mOd; ix…qr; dev;n;' tIq| veidr…s m; m; ih'sI" 7 iv„,o" ixro…s yxo/; yxo m…y /eih 8 îW Ë∆R a;yuWe v∞Rse c 9 îit t;<@‰b[;˜,e p[qm;?y;ySy p[qm%<@" aq i√tIy" %<@" yuniJm te pO…qvIm…¶n; sh yuniJm v;c' sh sUYye,R yuˇ_o v;toNt·r=e, te sh yuˇ_;iStßo ivmOj" sUYyRSy 1 AtSy sdne sId;…m 2 Atp;]m…s 3 v;nSpTyo…s b;hRSpTyo…s p[;j;pTyo…s p[j;ptemı RU ;‹SyTy;yup;]msIdmh' m;' p[;ç' p[oh;…m tejse b[˜v∞Rs;y 4 m®to np;toåpÕy;" pvRt;n;˚k⁄." Xyen; a…jr; EN{' v¶un; bht òWe,;mIv;' c;ty?v' yuˇ_;Sq vht 5 îdmhmmu' yjm;n' pxu„v?yUh;…m pxuWu c m;' b[˜vcRse c 6 vsvSTv; g;y]e, zNds; sMmOjNtu ®{;STv; ]w∑.ë ne zNds; s'mjO NTv;idTy;STv; j;gten zNds; s'mjO Ntu 7 piv]Nte ivtt' b[˜,Spte p[.gu ;R];…, pYyeiR W ivêto t¢tnUne td;mo aXnute Ít;s î√hNt" sNtd;xt" 8 p[x£ u tì u devI mnIW;Mm{q" sut∑o n v;Jy;yuWe me pvSv vcRse me pvSv ivdu" pO…qVy; idvo jin];Czée yo nmo v;c nmo v;cSptye deiv v;Gyˇe v;co m/umˇiSmNm;/;" srSvTyw Sv;h; 1 sUYyoR m; idVy;>yo n;∑^;>y" p;tu v;yurNt·r=;>yo …¶" p;…qRb;>y" Sv;h; 2 yoå¥ s*Myo

811

Bråhmaâ Branch 27D: BrŒhmaöa

TŒö¶ya Pa–caviµ§a BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

te shß'ã shß' pu];n( pu„y≤Nt y Etdupy≤Nt 3 îit Wo@x" %<@" s¢dx" %<@" aitr;]" shß' i]vOt" sMvTsr; aitr;]" p[j;pte" shßs'vTsrm( 1 Eten vw p[j;pit" svRSy p[svmgCzTsvRSy p[sv' gCz≤Nt y Etdupy≤Nt 2 Et√w p[j;pit∆IRYy;‹ mUr ¨pwˇne jr;mp;ht;åp jr;' flte y Etdupy≤Nt 3 tdetTp[j;pte" shßs'vTsrmetne vw p[j;pit" sv;Rm≤O ım;›oRt( sv;Rm≤O ımO›vu ≤Nt y Etdupy≤Nt 4 îit s¢dx" %<@" a∑;dx" %<@" pç pç;xt≤S]vOt" s'vTsr;" pç pç;xt" pçdx; pç pç;xt" s¢dx;" pç pç;xt Ekivãx; ivêsOj;ã shßsMvTsrm( 1 Eten vw ivêsOj îd' ivêmsOjNt yi√êmsOjNt tSm;i√êsOj" 2 ivêmen;nnu p[j;yte y Etdupy≤Nt 3 tpo gOhpitb[˜R b[˜re ;pTNymOtmuÌ;t; .Ut' p[Stot; .iv„yTp[ithˇRˇvR ¨pg;t;r a;ˇRv;" sdSy;" sTyã hotÊ;| mw];v®, aojo b[;˜,;CzãsI iTviWí;åp…cití ne∑;pot;r* yxoåCz;v;koå…¶rev;å¶I∫go g[;vStudgU •Ru te ; v;Ksub˜[
812

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27E: BrŒhmaöa

ChhŒndogya BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Two PrapŒÿhakas Beginning:

z;NdoGy-b[;˜, dev sivt" p[svu yD' p[svu yDpit' .g;y ) idVyo gN/vR" kÉtpU" kÉt' n" pun;tu v;cSpitv;Rc' n" Svdtu 1 k;m ved te n;m mdo n;m;…s sm;ny;mu\ sur; te a.vt( ) prm] jNm;¶e tpso in…mRtoå…s ) Sv;h; 2 îm' t ¨pSq' m/un; s\sjO ;…m p[j;ptem% uR met‚d(√tIym( ) ten pus\ oå…..v;…s sv;Rn( avx;Nv≤xNy…s r;DI ) Sv;h; 3 a…¶' £Vy;dm’
813

Bråhmaâ Branch 27E: BrŒhmaöa

ChhŒndogya BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

tto m; r;≤ır;gCztu 5 sVy' p;dmvneinje å‚Smn[;∑ê …≈y' d/e 6 d≤=,' p;dmvneinje å‚Smn[;∑ê …≈ym;vexy;…m 7 pUvmR NymprmNymu.* p;d;vvneinje r;∑^Syı‰;R a.ySy;v®ı‰w 8 a•Sy r;i∑^r…s r;i∑^rh' .Uy;sm( ) 9 Syxoå…s yxo m…y /eih 10 Syxso yxoå…s 11 Syxso .=oå…s mhso .=oå…s ≈I.=oå…s …≈y' m…y /eih ) Sv;h; 12 Smuç g;\ v®, p;x;d( i√WNt' meå…./eih t' jÁmu„y co.yor( ¨TsOj g;mˇu tO,;in ipbtUdkm( 13 Sm;t; ®{;n;' duiht; vsUn;\ Svs;idTy;n;mmOtSy n;…." ) p[ ,u voc' …ciktuWe jn;y m; g;mn;g;midit\ v…/∑ aomuTsOjt 14 8 îit i√tIyo .;g" Reference: Stoenner, 1. Heinrich, Das MantrabrŒhmaöa, 1. PrapŒÿhaka, Diss. Halle/Saale 1901; 2. Joergensen, Hans, Das MantrabrŒhmaöa, 2. PrapŒÿhaka, Diss. Kiel. Darmstadt 1911.

814

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27F: BrŒhmaöa

Ìr·heya BrŒhmaöa


jw…mnIy;WeyR b[;˜,m( ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) p[qm" %<@" ) ao…mTyetTprmeiœn" p[;j;pTySy s;m 1 prmeiœno v; p[;j;pTySy b[˜,o v; b[˜v;co v; sTy' s;m 2 SvgRSy v; lokSy √;rivvr,m( ) dev;n;' v*`" ) ]ySy v; vedSy;Py;ynm( ) ay;ty;m;=rSq' s;m 3 v;…sœo ih'k;r" ) p[;j;pTyo v; gv;' v; 4 aq;t AWI,;' n;m/eygo]od;hr,m( ) SvGy| /Ny' pu
815

Bråhmaâ Branch 27F: BrŒhmaöa

Ìr·heya BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

p[j;pte®Lbjr;yu,I 4 p[j;pte®≤∫äl….d* 5 √N√pvR i√tIy" %<@" .gRyxsI 1 /mRSy tnU 2 v;kújM.e 3 t*r≈vse 4 t;SpN¥e 5 tOtIy" %<@" ]I…, c=Ui' W 1 v;W;Rhr;…, 2 .{≈ey;'…s ]I…, 3 v…sœSy xf* ctuq"R %<@" b;hRiÌrr;yov;jIye 1 s'’itp;TqurR Xme 2 vOWkXyen* 3 /enpu ysI 4 y
816

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27G: BrŒhmaöa

êhŒ‹khŒyana BrŒhmaöa


aq AGvede x;ƒ;ynb[;˜,m( ) h·r — ) aiSmNvw lok ¨.ye devmnu„y; a;suSte dev;" Svg| lok˘ yNtoå…¶mUcSu Tv' no aSy lokSy;?y= E/Iit t;n…¶®v;c;q yıoåh' òrs'SpxRtmoåSMynpc;…yt;ro mnu„y;" kq' vSt∫iv„yit yNmnu„yei„vit te dev; ËcuStSy vw te vy' òr;StnUivRin/;Sy;moåq ywv te ixv; xGMy; y…Dy; tnUStyeh mnu„ye>yo .iv„ysIit tSy;Psu pvm;n;md/uv;Ry* p;vk;m;idTye xu…cmq ywv;åSy ixv; xGMy; y…Dy; tnUr;sIˇyeh mnu„ye>yoåtpdet; v; a¶eStNvSt¥det; devt; yjTy];…¶" s;©" stnU" p[Ito .vit t; vw itßo .v≤Nt ]yo v; îme lok; îm;nev t' lok;n;“oit p*,Rm;s' p[qm;yw tN]' .vTy;m;v;Sy' i√tIy;yw ten h;Sy dxRp,U mR ;s;vNv;rB/* .vt È≤¬tvTy* hVyv;@±vTy* p[qm;yw s'y;Jye tTs'y;Jy;Âp' Á¶I i√tIy;yw √* Á¶I yjit s¢dxs;…m/enIk; tOtIy; s¢dxs;…m/enIk; v; îi∑pxubN/;Stidi∑pxubN/;n;“oit s√Nt;v;Jy.;g* .vtoås;noit v;å¶In;/ˇe Sy;…mit k;myte s yid h v; aip SvwW; vIr îv s•¶In;/ˇe ≤=p[ Ev sM.vit ≤=p[e .oGyt;mXnute y" s√Nt* k⁄®te ivr;j* s'y;Jye ≈IivRr;¬•;¥' …≈yo ivr;joå•;¥Syop;¢‰w t; vw g;y}yo .v≤Nt g;y]o v; a…¶g;Ry]CzNd;" Svenvw tCzNds;å¶In;/ˇe t; v; ¨p;'xu .v≤Nt ret"…s·ˇ_v;R aGNy;/eymup;'xu vw ret" …sCyteå….Âp; .v≤Nt y¥Deå….Âp' tTsmOı' yDSywv smOı‰w √;dx d¥;√;dx vw m;s;" s'vTsr" s'vTsrSywv;åå¢‰; aê' ]yodx' dd;it yS]yodxo m;sStSy;¢‰w 1 dev;sur; v; EWu lokÉWu s'yÊ;; a;suSte>yoå…¶rp;£;mTs AtUNy;ivxˇe dev; hTv;åsur;iNv…jTy;…¶mNvwzS÷ t' ymí v®,í;NvpXyÊ;;' tmup;mN]yNt tmDpy'StSmw vrmddu" s hwt' vr' vv[e p[y;j;Nme anuy;j;\í kÉvl;n(Òt' c;p;' pu®W' c*W/In;…mit tSm;d;¸r;¶ey;" p[y;j;nuy;j; a;¶eym;Jy…mit tto vw dev; a.vNpr;sur; .vTy;Tmn; pr;Sy √π„yo y Ev' ved 2

817

Bråhmaâ Branch 27G: BrŒhmaöa

êhŒ‹khŒyana BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

pxvo vw CzNdom;" p;¤;" pxv" pxUn;mev;åå¢‰w W$(W¬üˇryo" W@±v; Atv" s'vTsr" s'vTsrSywv;åå¢‰w ctur;h;v;in xS];…, pxvo v; ¨Kq;in ctu∑y; vw pxvoåqo ctu„p;d;" pxUn;mev;ååTyw Wœ Ev;hNmw];v®,Sy pç;h;v' .vit pxvo v; ¨Kq;in p;¤;" pxv" pxUn;mev;åå¢‰; Eek;ihk; ¨Kqy;Jy;" p[itœ; v; Ek;h" p[itiœTy; Ev;nuvW$(kv⁄ NR Ty;¸tIn;mev x;NTy; a;¸tIn;' p[itiœTyw 10 pç CzNd;'…s r;]* x'sNTynu∑.ë ' g;y]I mui„,h' i]∑ë.' jgtI…mTyet;in vw r;i]CzNd;'…s pç;h;v; r;i]v;RjpeySy c;it·rˇ_oKqmuKqSy;itg[ho r;i]XzNdxXzNds Ev td;ÙyNt îit h Sm;åh k*WItikrj;…mt;y; aq yiˇro aˆ‰vtI' i]∑ë.m;…ênoKqg[hSy puronuv;Ky;mNv;h itroaˆ‰v;Np[Ww iStroaˆ‰; ih som; .vNTyqo bl' vw vIy| i]∑ëBblmev t√«y| yjm;ne d/;it ctur;h;v;Ny;¢oy;RmSy;it·rˇ_oKq;in .v≤Nt pxvo v; ¨Kq;in ctu∑y; vw pxvoåqo ctu„p;d;" pxUn;mev;åå¢‰w =w]pTy;" p·r/;nIy;" k⁄vtR îy' vw =e]' pO…qVySy;mdIn;y;mNt" p[itœ;Sy;m îTySy;mev tddIn;y;mNtt" p[ititœTyq yiˇroaˆ‰vTy≤S]∑ë.o y;Jy; .v≤Nt itroaˆ‰; ih som; .vNTyqo bl' vw vIy| i]∑ëBblmev t√«y| yjm;ne d/TynuvW$(k⁄vRNTy;¸tIn;mev x;NTy; a;¸tIn;' p[itiœTy; aq h;·ryojnen cr≤Nt tSyoˇ_' b[;˜,' i]∑ë.' h;·ryojnSy puronuv;Ky;mNv;h tSy; ¨ˇ_' b[;˜,mq yditp[Ww Sy puronuv;Ky;mNv;h;vIyoR v; ¨ s p[Ww o yoåpuronuv;Kyoåqo i√devTyeWu vw puronuv;Ky; .v≤Nt sveWR u c p[iSqteWu tSm;dSy puronuv;Ky;mNv;h;q yditp[wWm;h prmevwtdhr….vdit prmevwtdhr>y;r>y vsNtIit h Sm;ååh k*WItik" prmevtw dhr>y;r>y vsnIit h Sm;ååh k*WItik" 11 îit x;ƒ;ynb[;˜,e i]'xoå?y;y" 30 îit x;ƒ;ynb[;˜,' sm;¢m( Reference: Rai, Ganga Sagar, The êŒ‹khŒyana BrŒhmaöa, (Varanasi: Ratna Publications, 1987).

818

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27H: BrŒhmaöa

SŒma VidhŒna

Structure: Three PrapŒÿhakas. Beginning:

s;miv/;nb[;˜,m( ) aq p[qm" p[p;#k" ) p[qm" %<@" ) b[˜ h v; îdmg[ a;sIt( 1 tSy tejo rsoåTy·rCyt ) s b[˜; sm.vt( 2 s tU„,I' mns;?y;yt( ) tSy yNmn a;sIt( s p[j;pitr.vt( 3 tSm;t( p[;j;pTy;' mns; ju◊it ) mno ih p[j;pit" 4 tSy ¥*" ixr a;sIduroåNt·r=' m?y˝ smu{" pO…qvI p;d* 5 s v; îd' ivê' .OtmsOjt ) tSy s;mopjIvn' p[;yCzt( 6 ¨pjIvnIyo .vit y Ev' ved 7 t¥oås* £⁄∑tm îv s;ª" SvrSt' dev; ¨pjIv≤Nt ) yoåvreW;' p[qmSt' mnu„y; yo i√tIySt' gN/v;RPsrso yStOtIySt' pxvo yítuqSR t' iptro ye c;<@ºWu xerte y" pçmStmsurr=;˝…s yoåNTyStmoW/yo vnSptyo y∞;Ny∆gt( ) tSm;d;Û" s;mwv;•…mit ) s;m ÁºW;mupjIvn' p[;yCzt( 8 ¨pjIvnIyo .vit y Ev' ved 9 tSy h v; EtSy s;ª Agev;SqIin ) Svro m;˝s;in ) Sto.; lom;in 10 yo h vw s;ª" Sv' y" suv,| ved Sv' c h vw s;ª" suv,| c .vit ) Svro v;v s;ª" Sv' tdev suv,Rm( 11 yo h vw s;ª" p[itœ;' ved p[it h itœTy‚Sm˝í lokÉåmu‚„m˝í ) v;Gv;v s;ª" p[itœ; ) y√πt√;…gTyOgve s; ) A…c s;m p[itiœtm( 12 s yd; g;y]' bOhTy;' g;yit b;hRt' jgTy;m( j;gt' i]∑ë…." smt;' c;p¥te ) tSm;dett( s;meTy;h ) sm; ¨ h v; a‚Sm˝XzNd;'…s s;My;idit tTs;ª" s;mTvm( 13 £⁄∑" p[;j;pTyo b[;õ v; vwêdevo v;idTy;n;' p[qm" s;?y;n;' i√tIyoå¶eStOtIyov;yoítuq"R s*mo mN{o …m];v®,yoritSv;yR" 14 te dev;" p[j;pitmup;/;vn( ) teåb[vu n( kq' nu vy˝ Svg| lok…my;m îit ) te>y Et;n( yD£tUn( p[;yCzt( Etw" lokme„yq îit ) tw" Svg| lokm;yn( 15 Svg| lokmeit y Ev' ved 16 teW;mhIyNt;j;" pOXnyo vw%;ns; vsuro…cWo ye c;pUt; ye c k;mePsvSteåb[vu n( kq' nu vy' Svg| lok…my;m îit ) te>y Ett( Sv;?y;y;?yyn' p[;yCzt(

819

Bråhmaâ Branch 27H: BrŒhmaöa

SŒma VidhŒna BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

r;i]Stu m; pun;tu r;i]" %metTpu„p;Nt' yTpur;,m;k;x' t] me Sq;n' k⁄vpR nu .Rv;y;punjRNmn Et;vdev r;]* r;]evtR[ ' c r;]evtR[ ' c 8 nvm" %<@" cturo m;s;n( pyo.=o g; anu gTv;ry;' t;i<@x;$‰;yinn* b¸>y" 8 soåymnUc;“;y b[˜c;·r,e sm;vtRm;n;y;:yey" 9 ¨p;?y;y;y g[;mvr˝ shß˝ êet' c;ê' p[d;y;nuD;to v; y' k;m' k;myte tm;“oit tm;“oit 10 îit tOtIy" p[p;#k" ) îit s;miv/;n' b[;˜,' sm;¢m( ) Reference: Sharma, B.R., SŒmavidhŒna BrŒhmana, with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa and PadŒrthamŒtravivrti of BharatasvŒmin, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1980).

820

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27I: BrŒhmaöa

Aitareya BrŒhmaöa


Eetreyb[;˜,m( p≤çk; 1 a?y;y 1 %<@" 1-6 a…¶vwR dev;n;mvmo iv„,u" prmStdNtre, sv;R aNy; devt; a;¶;vw„,vMpuro¬;x' invRp≤Nt dI=,Iymek;dxkp;l' sv;R>y Evwn' t∂ºvt;>yoånNtr;y' invRpNTy…¶vwR sv;R devt; iv„,u" sv;R devt; Ete vw yDSy;NTye tNv* yd…¶í iv„,uí t¥d;¶;vw„,vMpuro¬;x' invRpNTyNtt Ev t∂ºv;nO›uv≤Nt td;¸yRdek;dxkp;l" puro¬;xo √;v¶;iv„,U kìnyoSt] k™≤¿¢" k; iv.·ˇ_·rTy∑;kp;l a;¶eyoå∑;=r; vw g;y]I g;y]m¶eXzNd≤S]kp;lo vw„,v≤S]hIRd' iv„,uVyR£mt swnyoSt] k™≤¿¢" s; iv.·ˇ_ÒtR e c®˘ invRpte yoåp[itiœto mNyet;Sy;' v;v s n p[ititœit yo n p[ititœit t¥Ót' t≤TS]yw pyo ye t<@ël;Ste pus' St‚Nmqun‚Mmqunne vw nw ' tTp[jy; pxu…." p[jnyit p[j;Tyw p[j;yte p[jy; pxu….yR Ev' ved;rB/yDo v; EW a;rB/devto yo dxRp,U mR ;s;>y;' yjt a;m;v;Syen v; hivWeÇ; p*,Rm;sen v; t‚Sm•ev hiviW t‚SmNbihRiW dI=etWw o Ek; dI=; s¢dx s;…m/enIrnubyU[ ;Ts¢dxo vw p[j;pit√;Rdx m;s;" pçtRvo hemNt≤x≤xryo" sm;sen t;v;Ns'vTsr" s'vTsr" p[j;pit" p[j;pTy;ytn;….rev;.I r;›oit y Ev' ved 1 yDo vw dev>e y ¨d£;mˇ…mi∑…." p[Ww mwzNyidi∑…." p[Ww mwzS÷ tid∑In;…mi∑Tv' tmNvivNd•nuivˇyDo r;›oit y Ev' ved;Ùtyo vw n;mwt; yd;¸ty Et;….vwR dev;Nyjm;no ◊yit td;¸tIn;m;¸itTvmUty" %lu vw t; n;m y;….devR ; yjm;nSy hvm;y≤Nt ye vw pNq;no y;" ßutySt; v; ËtySt ¨ EvwtTSvgRy;,; yjm;nSy .v≤Nt td;¸yRdNyo juhoTyq yoånu c;h yjit c kSm;ˇ' hoteTy;c=t îit y√;v s t] yq;.;jn' devt; amum;vh;mum;vheTy;v;hyit tdev hotuhoRtOTv' hot; .vit hoteTyenm;c=te y Ev' ved 2 punv;R EtmO‚Tvjo g.| k⁄v≤R Nt y' dI=yNTy≤∫r….iWç≤Nt reto v; a;p" sretsmevnw ' tT’Tv; dI=y≤Nt nvnIten;>yÔNTy;Jy' vw dev;n;' sur….

821

Bråhmaâ Branch 27I: BrŒhmaöa

Aitareya BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

cN{m; v; am;v;Sy;y;m;idTymnupi[ vxit soåNt/IRyt;' t' n inj;Rn≤Nt yd; vw …m[yteåq;Nt/IRyteåqwn' n inj;Rn≤Nt s b[yU ;∞N{mso mr,e i√WNme …m[yt;' soåNt/IRyt;' tMm; inD;R…sWu·rit ≤=p[' hwvnw ' n inj;RnNTy;idTyo v; aSt' y•…¶mnupi[ vxit soåNt/IRyte t' n inj;Rn≤Nt yd; vw …m[yteåq;Nt/IRyteåqwn;ª inj;Rn≤Nt s b[yU ;d;idTySy mr,e i√WNme …m[yt;' soåNt/IRyt;' tMm; inD;R…sWu·rit ≤=p[' hwvnw ' n; inj;RnNTy;…¶v;R ¨√;Nv;yumnupi[ vxit soåNt…/Ryte t' n inj;Rn≤Nt yd; vw …m[yteåq;Nt/IRyteåqwn' n inj;Rn≤Nt s b[Uy;d¶emRr;,e i√WNme …m[yt;' soåNt/IRyt;' tMm; inD;R…sWu·rit ≤=p[' hwvnw ' n inj;Rn≤Nt t; v; Et; devt; at Ev punj;RyNte v;yor…¶j;Ryte p[;,;≤ı bl;NmQym;noå…/j;yte t' dOÇ; b[yU ;d…¶j;Ryt;Mm; me i√WÔNyt Ev pr;õ™p…[ j~y‚Tvit ato hwv pr;õ™p…[ j~yTy¶ev;R a;idTyo j;yte t' dOÇ; b[yU ;d;idTyo j;yt;Mm; me i√WÔNyt Ev pr;õ™p…[ j~y‚TvTyto hwv pr;õ™p…[ j~yTy;idTy;√w cN{m; j;yte t' dOÇ; b[yU ;c( cN{m; j;yt;Mm; me i√WÔNyt Ev pr;õ™p…[ j~y‚Tvit ato hwv pr;õ™p…[ j~yit cN{mso vw vOi∑j;Ryte t;' dOÇ; b[yU ;√éi∑j;Ryt;Mm; me i√WÔNyt Ev pr;õ™p…[ j~y‚TvTyto hwv pr;õ™p…[ j~yit vO∑ve Rw iv¥u∆;yte t;' dOÇ; b[yU ;i√¥u∆;yt;Mm; me i√WÔNyt Ev pr;õ™p[…j~y‚TvTyto bwv pr;Np[…j~yit s EW b[˜," p·rmrStmetMb[˜," p·rmrMmw]ye " k*W;rv" suTvne kì·rxye .;g;Ry,;y r;De p[ov;c t' b pç r;j;n" p·rmm[Su tt" suTv; mh∆g;m tSy v[t' n i√Wt" pUvR ¨pivxe¥id itœNtMmNyet itœºtwv n i√Wt" pUvR" s'ivxe¥¥;sInMmNyet;sItwv n i√Wt" pUv"R p[SvPy;¥id j;g[tMmNyet j;gOy;dev;ip h y¥Sy;XmmU/;R i√WN.vit ≤=p[' hwvwn' StO,ute StO,tu e 28 5 îTy∑mp≤çk; sm;¢; xu.' .vtu Reference: Aufrecht, Th., Das Aitareya BrŒhmaöa.mit Auszuegen aus dem Commentare von SŒyaöŒcŒrya und anderen Beilagen, (Bonn: Adolph Marcus, 1879).

822

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27J: BrŒhmaöa

Taittiíya BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Three main divisions, called KŒö¶as. Beginning:

tw·ˇrIyb[;˜, b[˜ s'/ˇ' tNme …jNvtm( ) =]\ s'/ˇ' tNme …jNvtm( ) îW\ s'/ˇ' t;' me …jNvtm( ) Ëj\R s'/ˇ' t;' me …jNvtm( ) r…y\ s'/ˇ' t;' me …jNvtm( ) pui∑\ s'/ˇ' t;' me …jNvtm( ) p[j;\ s'/ˇ' t;' me …jNvtm( ) pxUNs'/ˇ' t;Nme …jNvtm( ) Stutoå…s jn/;" ) dev;STv; xu£p;" p[,yNtu 1 suvIr;" p[j;" p[jnyNprIih ) xu£" xu£xo…cW; ) Stutoå…s jn/;" ) dev;STv; m‚Nqp;" p[,yNtu ) supj[ ;" p[j;" p[jnyNprIih ) mNqI m‚Nqxo…cW; ) s'jGm;n* idv a; pO…qVy;yu" ) s'/ˇ' tNme …jNvtm( ) p[;,\ s'/ˇ' t' me …jNvtm( ) ap;n\ s'/ˇ' t' me …jNvtm( 2 Vy;n\ s'/ˇ' t' me …jNvtm( ) c=u" s'/ˇ' tNme …jNvtm( ) ≈o]\ s'/ˇ' tNme …jNvtm( ) mn" s'/ˇ' tNme …jNvtm( ) v;c\ s'/ˇ' t;' me …jNvtm( ) a;yu" Sq a;yumRe /ˇm( ) a;yuyDR ;y /ˇm( ) a;yuyDR ptye /ˇm( ) p[;," Sq" p[;,' me /ˇ' ) p[;,' yD;y /ˇm( 3 p[;,' yDptye /ˇm( ) c=u" Sqí=umRe /ˇm( ) c=uyDR ;y /ˇm( ) c=uyDR ptye /ˇm( ) ≈o]\ Sq" ≈o]' me /ˇm( ) ≈o]' yD;y /ˇm( ) ≈o]' yDptye /ˇm( ) t* dev* xu£;m‚Nqn* ) kLpyt' dwvIivRx" ) kLpyt' m;nuWI" 4 îWmUjmR Sm;su /ˇm( ) p[;,;NpxuWu ) p[j;' m…y c yjm;ne c ) inrSt" x<@" ) inrSto mkú" ) apnuˇ* x<@;mk*R sh;mun; ) xu£Sy s…md…s ) m‚Nqn" s…md…s ) s p[qm" s'’itivRêkm;R ) s p[qmo …m]o v®,o a…¶" ) s p[qmo bOhSpit…íikTv;n( ) tSm; îN{;y sutm;juho…m 5 ’·ˇk;Sv…¶m;d/It ) Et√; a¶en=R ]m( ) yT’·ˇk;" ) Sv;y;mevnw ' devt;y;m;/;y ) b[˜vcRsI .vit ) mu%' v; Et•=];,;m( ) yT’·ˇk;" ) y" ’·ˇk;Sv…¶m;/ˇe ) mu:y Ev .vit ) aqo %lu 6

823

Bråhmaâ Branch 27J: BrŒhmaöa

Taittirýa BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

ap;no iv√;n;vOt" ) p[it p[;itœd?vre ) a;tRv; ¨pg;t;r" ) sdSy; Atvoå.vn( ) a/Rm;s;í m;s;í ) cms;?vyRvoå.vn( ) ax\sd(b˜[ ,Stej" ) aCz;v;koå.v¥x" ) AtmeW;' p[x;St;sIt( ) yi√êsOj a;st 52 Ëg[;jR ;nmudvht( ) /[vu gop" shoå.vt( ) aojoå>y∑*Ì[;V," ) yi√êsOj a;st ) ap…cit" po]Iy;myjt( ) ne∑I^ y;myjæÊviW" ) a;¶Iıâ;i√duWI sTym( ) ≈ı; hwv;yjTSvym( ) îr; pàI ivêsOj;m( ) a;kÀitripnó…v" 53 î?m\ h =u∞>w y ¨g[e ) tO„,; c;vht;mu.e ) v;geW;\ sub˜[ yíwnTp[;Û" 56 12 3 Reference: Krsnayajurvediyam Taittiriya-Brahmanam, 3 vols. (Punyapattane] : Anandasrama, 1979).

824

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27K: BrŒhmaöa

Jaiminýa BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Three main books Beginning:

jw…mnIyb[;˜,m( td;Û" kÉn juhoit k‚SmNÙyt îit ) p[;,envw juhoit p[;,e Ùyte ) t¥detd¶INmNq≤Nt yjm;nSywv tTp[;,;Ôny≤Nt ) t¥;v√w mNq≤Nt n tihR p[;…,it ) ar
825

Bråhmaâ Branch 27K: BrŒhmaöa

Jaiminýa BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

svn;in sveR pxvSsveR dev;SsveR lok;SsveR k;m; ) √;dx;hmNv;yˇ; ) √;dx;hmNv;.ˇ_; ) √;dx;hmnust' PO y≤Nt ) √;dx;he s'p•; ) √;dx;he p[itiœt;" ) td;¸yRdte ;in dxwv;h;Nyq kSm;d(√;dx;h îTy;:y;yt îit ) s b[yU ;¥devtw e √;dx;…¶∑om; s'p¥Nte tenie t 385 td;¸yRT]yodx m;s;Ss'vTsrSs'vTsrí ctudx R oåq kÉn ]yodx' c m;smup;“uv≤Nt s'vTsr' c ctudx R …mit ) aitr;];>y;…mit b[yU ;t( ) p[;y,Iyen;itr;]e, ]yodx' m;smup;“uvNTy( ) ¨dynIyen s'vTsr' ctudx R m( ) td;¸Ss v;¥ √;dx;h' iv¥;t( ) s v; vedie t mNyet ) y En' sveWR u lokÉWu p[itiœt' iv¥;idit ) m;s; vw √;dx;hSy;h;in ) t Ev lok; ) Et Ev devlok;" ) f;Lguno vw m;so √;dx;hSy p[qmmhx( ) cw]o i√tIy' vwx;%StOtIym( ) a;W;!;p*,Rm;sítuq| ) ≈o,;≈ivœ" pçm' ) x;t….Wj„Wœ' ) p[oœpd" s¢mm( ) a;êyujoå∑m' ) k;itRko nvmm( ) m;gRxIWoR dxm' ) twW Ek;dx' ) m;ò √;dx' ) p[;y,Iy Ev;itr;]S]yodxo m;s ) ¨dynIySs'vTsrítudx R " ) s EW √;dx;hSsveWR u lokÉWu p[itiœt" ) s y Evmet' √;dx;h' sveWR u lokÉWu p[itiœt' ved sveWR u lokÉWu p[ititœit ) s EW v;v √;dx;ho y EW tpTyeW îN{ ) EW p[j;pitr( ) EW Eved' svR…mTyup;…stVym( ) EW Eved' svR…mTyup;…stVym( 386 Reference: V´ra, Raghu, and Candra, Lokesh, Jaiminýa-BrŒhmaöa of the SŒmaveda, (Nagpur: L. Candra, 1954), and the grantha manuscripts, Vohd II, 2 Nr. 535, Berlin.

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27L: BrŒhmaöa

826

TŒö¶ya óa¶viµ§a BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Six Chapters Beginning:

Wi@±vx ' b[;˜,m( ) p[qm" %<@" ) b[˜ c v; îdmg[e mub˜[ c;St;m( 1 tt" sub˜[ od£;mt( 2 aq h dev; yDen b[˜ pyRg O t 3 a…¶vwR b[˜;s;v;idTy" sub˜[ 4 t∂ºv; yDSy s'/;vNvwCzn( 5 EW vw yDSy s'…/yR]Ww ¨Tkr" 6 tSm;duTkre itœNTsub˜[ y;' hId' sv| hrit 13 me/;itqemWRe ie t 14 me/;it…q' h k;e y" suTy;' p[;h 27 dev; b[˜;, îit 28 dev; hwv dev; aq hwte mnu„ydev; ye b[;˜,;" xu≈vu ;'soånUc;n;Ste mnu„ydev;" 29 a;¸ty Ev dev;n;' d≤=,; mnu„ydev;n;m( ) a;¸it….hR dev;n( p[I,;it ) d≤=,;….mRn„u ydev;n( xu≈vu Wu oånUc;n;n( b[;˜,;n( p[I,;it 30 îit p[qm;?y;ye p[qm" %<@" 1 i√tIy" %<@" aq y] sub˜[
827

Bråhmaâ Branch 27L: BrŒhmaöa

TŒö¶ya óadviµ§a BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

iv„,ve Sv;h; svR.tU ;…/ptye Sv;h; c£p;,ye Sv;h; Èêr;y Sv;h; svRp;pxmn;y Sv;h; îit Vy;˙it….ÛRTv; aq s;m g;yet( 3 %nn;√hn;d….mxRn;Ìo….r;£m,;∞ ctu….R" xu?yte .U…m" pçm;∞oplepn;t( 4 s'.;r;n( p[d≤=,m;nIy b[;˜,;n( SviSt v;Cy 5 Etw" s'.;rwydR pu SpO∑' td>yu=te ( ) x;Myit h;t" 6 b[;˜,.ojn' ihr
828

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27M: BrŒhmaöa

Saµhitopani·had BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Five Khaö¶as. Beginning:

s'ihtopinWd(b;[ ˜,m( ) p[qm" %<@" ) aq;t" s'ihtopinWdo Vy;:y;Sy;m" 1 svRpro=; devs˝iht; .vit 2 svRpT[ y=;surs˝iht; .vit 3 pro=p[Ty=iWRs˝iht; .vit 4 yq;/Imhe ) SvGy;R devs˝iht; .vit ) Svg| lok˘ gCzit yStq;/Ite 6 pxVy;surs˝iht; .vit ) pxum;n( .vit yStq;/Ite 7 b[˜vcRSyiWRsi\ ht; .vit ) b[˜vcRsI .vit yStq;/Ite 8 aqwt;iStß" s\iht; .v≤Nt ) devÙrek; ) v;k™ xbÙrek; ) a…m]Ùrek; 9 s; y; mN{SvrvtI s; devÙ" ) a; h;Sy dev; hv' gCz≤Nt yStq;/Ite 10 aq yt( Kl…bt…mv in®idt…mv s; b;KxbÙ" ) ≤=p[' m·r„ytIit iv¥;¥Stq;/Ite 11 aq yd;£≤Ndt…mv in£≤Ndt…mv s;…m]Ù" svRJy;in' Jy;SytIit iv¥;¥Stq;/Ite 12 t√w %lu smO≤ımev ?y;y•up;sIt 13 s; y;dIntm; s'p,U ;R s's∑O ; s'yt; v;k™ s; pu}ypxVy; ) t¥q;v;te v;it p[j; inmRCu yNt Evmety; 14 aq y; m?y;…ynI s'p,U ;R s's∑O ; s'yt; v;k™ s; pu}ypxVy; ) t¥q; v;toåPsu xnwv;Rn( su%I .vTyevmety; 15 aq yoTsO∑; guLmI.Ut;s'p,U ;Rss' ∑O ;s'yt; v;k™ s;pu}ypxVy; ) t¥q; v;ten;itxI`[' v;t; b¸iv.¶' p[.¶' xet Evmety; 16 aqwt;iStß" s'iht; .v≤Nt ) xuı;du"SpO∑;in.ujR ie t 17 aqwW; xuı; s'iht; .vit sve>R y" k;me>y" ) t¥q; smÔnvt; rqen y' k;m' k;myte tm>yXnut Evmety; 18 aqwW;du"SpO∑; s'iht; .vit sve>R y" k;me>y" ) t¥q; smÔnvt; pU,% R ne rqen y' k;m' k;myte tm>yXnute ) Evmety; 19 aqwW;in.ujR ; s'iht; .vit sve>R y" Ev k;me>y" ) t¥q; smÔnvt; pU,% R ne sm;ihten rqen y' y' k;m' k;myte t' tm>yXnute ) Evmety; 20 aqwt;iStß" s'iht; .v≤Nt v;yo·rN{Sy;¶e" ) sv;Rvı O ; v;yo" ) svRvı O Ne {Sy ) ¨Tse/pro=vOı;¶e" 21 îit p[qm" %<@" 1

829

Bråhmaâ Branch 27M: BrŒhmaöa

Saµhitopani·ad BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

ait s'…s≤ımip gCzπt iv¥y; sh 17 D;nv;n( n Tven;mste d¥;t( 18 stí n ivm;nyet( 19 aqwt; vedSy;∑;vupinWdo .v≤Nt ) iviˇíopStví dmí ≈ı; c s'pX[ ní;n;k;xIkr,' c yogí;c;yRx≈u WU ; ceit 20 tdetTk*k⁄®<@ºvcR n' vedyNte i]…." py;Ry"w y" s'p,U | pXyit ) zNdSto devt;to ingmt îit s mN]dxIR .vit 21 aq y Etwrs'p,U | pXyit s g;q;dxIR .vit 22 te %æLvm Evmev pUvrRw ;c;yw"R p[oˇ_; /m;R" 23 îit tOtIy" %<@" ctuq"R %<@" d;nen sv;Rn( k;m;n( av;“oit ) …crjIivTv' c 1 b[˜c;rI Âpv;nih'ß ¨pp¥te 2 SvGy| p,;Rxn;t( 3 idivcr" pyo.=" 4 Sq;nvIr;sn;i√ˇv;n( 5 iptOm;tOg®u xu≈WU ;?y;nv;NTs(vgIR 6 y" k;çnd;t; y;v;nu vw rsSt;v;n;Tm; s" 7 EW îm Ev lok;" 8 ay' slok" s p[itiœt Ev .vit 9 p[itiœt îv Áy' lok" 10 aq yduˇr' s; ¥*mUiR tRmTsu gOh„e v….j;yte 11 ]I
Bråhmaâ

Branch 27N: BrŒhmaöa

830

Kauthuma Ìrsheya BrŒhmaöa


a;WeyR b[;˜,m( ) p[qm" a?y;y" ) p[qm" %<@" ) aq %Lvym;WR" p[dx e o .vit 1 AWI,;' n;m/eygo]op/;r,m( 2 SvGy| yxSy' /Ny' pu
831

Bråhmaâ Branch 27N: BrŒhmaöa

Kauthuma Ìr·heya BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

idx;' v[t' dx;nug;nm( 1 kXypv[t' dx;nug;nm( ) kXypg[Iv; i√tIym( ) p[j;pte˙d≥ y' pçmm( ) î@;n;' s'=;r" Wœ" ) kXyppuCz÷ dxmm( ) p[;Gdxm;Ìv;' v[te 2 inˆv;….inˆv* √* ) an@ëdv( t[ e √π v; 3 îit s¢m" %<@" tOtIy' pvR sm;¢mctuq| pvR p[qm" %<@" a¶evtR[ m( 1 v;yoí v[tm( 2 mh;vwê;nrv[te √π 3 sUySR y .[;j;.[;je √π 4 v;yoivRk,R.;se √π ) mOTyov;R 5 EeN{' mh;idv;k°TyRm( ) s*y| v; dx;nug;nm( ) tSy ixrí g[Iv; c SkN/k°ks* c purIW;…, c p=e c;Tm; coÂ c puCz÷ cwtt( s;m sup,R…mTy; c=te 6 îit p[qm" %<@" i√tIy" %<@" a;idTyv[tmek…v'xTynug;n…mit x;i<@lIpu]" ) √;…v'xit·rit v;„y;Ry,Ipu]" 1 vwêdev;" smwry;" s'x;n;in .UtvidTyekm( 2 …c]' dev;n;m( aNt·rit √yorprm( 3 gN/v;RPsrs;m;nNdp[itnNd* p=* 4 s*yoRåtIW©" ) îN{Sy s/Sqm( ) m®t;' .Uit" 5 p[j;pteiStß" s;pRr;D‰;" ) sp;R,;' v; ) abudR Sy v; 6 spRSy `mRrocn…mN{Sy v; 7 W@¯N{;" p·r/y" 8 AtUn;' v;g;id ip}ym( 9 aNTy' vwk‚Lpkm( 10 tiNm];v®,yoí=u·rTy;c=te ) ≈o]' c tdevk w É 11 i√tIyoåtIW©StiNm];v®,yo" ≈o]…mTy;c=te ) c=uí tdevk w É 12 tOtIyoåtIW©StidN{Sy ixr îTy;c=te 13 a;idTySyo•y' td;idTy;TmeTy;c=te 14 EeN{(yo mh;n;ª‰" p[j;ptev;R ) iv„,ov;R ) ivê;…m]Sy v; ) …sm; v; ) m$(
832

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27 O: BrŒhmaöa

DaivatŒdhyŒya BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Four Khaö¶as. Beginning:

devt;?y;yb[;˜,m( ) p[qm" %<@" ) a…¶·rN{" p[j;pit" somo v®,STv∑;i©rs" pUW; srSvtIN{;¶I 1 î@;in/n;in pdin/n;nIk;r…,/n;nITy;¶ey;in 2 sv;R…, in/nvNTywN{;y" 3 sv;R…, Sv;r;…, p[;j;pTy;in 4 yq; v;mdeVym( 5 AKs;m;in s*m;in 6 yq*xnk;ve v;Æõ™n/n;in v;®,;in 8 yq; yD;yDIym( 9 a=r;nuSvr;…, Tv;∑^;…, 10 yq; v;rvNtIy' c;.IvtRí 11 Sv"pOœ;Ny;i©rs;in 12 Sv…,R/n;in p*W;…, 13 ky; n…í] a; .uvd; pvSv sh≤ß,…mit v;Æõ™n/ne s;rSvte 14 y a;nyTpr;vt" îTywN{;¶e 15 sut' r…yœ;" sho r…yœ; îTy;¶eyNw {e 16 vsvo ®{; a;idTy; ivêe dev;" 17 vsUn;' Sv;r;…, ®{;,;' in/nv≤Nt a;idTy;n;mw@;in ivêeW;' dev;n;' v;Æõ™n/n;in 18 yq; .UySTven p[dx e ; vtRNt îTyNtr;…, 19 aq;Ntrtr;…, sv;R
833

Bråhmaâ Branch 27 O: BrŒhmaöa

DaivatŒdhyŒya BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

aq;to invRcnm( 1 g;y]I g;yte" StuitkmR," 2 g;yto mu%;dudptidit ih b[;˜,m( 3 ï„,guTò;n;æTòÁtev;R k;≤NtkmR,oåip vo„,IiW,ITy*p…mkm( 4 kk⁄p( kk⁄dÂip,ITy*p…mkm( 5 kk⁄p( c k⁄Bjí k⁄jtevoRBjtev;R 6 anu∑bë nuSto.n;t( 7 aNvSt*idit ih b[;˜,m( 8 ippI≤lk; peltegiR tkmR," 9 ippI≤lkm?yeTy*p…mkm( 10 bOhtI bOhteivR≤ıkmR," 11 ivr;i@™vrm,;i√r;jn;i√r;/n;√; 12 p…¤" p≤çnI pçpd; 13 i]∑ë.( Sto.Tyuˇrpd; 14 k; tu i]t; Sy;ˇI,Rtm' zNdo .vtIit 15 i]vO√j[StSy Sto….nIveTy*p…mkm( 16 jgtI gttm' zNdo j∆git.Rvit ≤=p[git" 17 j∆l;k⁄v•R sOjteit ih b[;˜,m( 18 aitCzNd;XzderqeR 19 zNd;'…s zNdytIit v; 20 incOt( inpUv;R∞tO "e .r,;t( .u·rguCyte 21 aq;to g;y]m;¶ey' .KTy; .vit ) dev;n;' vWIR,;' v; prmeiœno v; p[;j;pTySy s;m 22 s;iv]Igey' y];gItm( 23 tTsivtuvRre…,ûyom( ) .goR ûdevSyû /ImûhI å 2 ) …/Äyo yonû" p[cûo 1212 ) ¸m( a;Å 2 ) d;yo ) a; 2345 – îit – îit tOtIy" %<@" 3aq s;iv}y©;in Vy;:y;Sy;m" ) ixro b[˜; ) ll;$' ¥*" ) cN{;idTy* c=uWI ) mu%m…¶" ) …j◊; srSvtI ) Tv∑; g[Iv; ) vsví ®{;í b;Ù ) ¨ro v;yu" ) rom;…, p; yv" ) pOœ…mN{" ) iv„,un;R…." ) p[j;pitjR`nm( ) ËÂ m®t" ) ved;" p;d* ) iSmt' iv¥ut( ) ê…st' v;yu" ) aSqIin pvRt;" ) smu{; v;s;'…s ) n=];…, al'k;r" 1 y Ev' ved 2 du∑t;du®pyuˇ_;•‰Un;…/k;∞ svRSm;TSviSt 3 SviSt devAiW>yí 4 b[˜ sTy' c p;tu m;…mit ) b[˜ sTy' c p;tu m;…mit 5 îit devt;?y;yb[;˜,' ctuq"R %<@e 4 devt;?y;yb[;˜,' sm;¢m( ) Reference: Sharma, Belikoth Ramachandra, DevatŒdhyŒya-Saµhitopani·ad-Vaµ§aBrŒhmaöas with commentaries, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1983).

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27P: BrŒhmaöa

834

KŒövýa êhatapatha BrŒhmaöa


k;
835

Bråhmaâ Branch 27P: BrŒhmaöa

KŒövýa êhatapatha BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

836

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27Q: BrŒhmaöa

VŒdhªla AnvŒkhyŒna

Structure: Five PrapŒÿhakas Beginning:

’„,yjuvdRe Iy' v;/Ul-aNv;:y;nm( aq p[qm" p[p;#k" yDen dev;" suvg| lokm;yn( teW;' mnu„y;,;mKlO¢ne yDen yjm;n;n;' k⁄…sN/;Nyev p[;v/RNt n;Ny;in k;incn;©;in no h dev;n( hVy' p[;p te dev; ab[vu n( mnu„y; v; aKlO¢ne yDen yjNte tennw ne n A›uv≤Nt te v;c' b[vu n( v[jt' yuv' mnu„ye>yo yD' kLpyt…mit t* h;gTy mnu„y;nUctur;v' vw vo yD' kLp…y„y;v îit teW;˝ h mnu„y;,;' ip[y' b.Uv 1 tNmno v;c' p[;ivxt( tto mnurj;yt s; v;Ñnu' p[;ivxt( tt î@; m;nVyj;yt s mnu·r@;' p[;ivxˇt" puÂrv; Ee@oåj;yt se@; puÂrvs' p[;ivxt( tt ¨vRXyj;yt mnu„y; h puÂrvs' r;j;nmk⁄vtR gN/v;R hovRxI' duihtrmk⁄vtR t* tq; mnu„ye>yo yD…mCzNt* certu" 2 s h puÂrv; mOgy;çr•Psrsoå…/jg;m t;s;˝ hovRxImev;….d?y* t;' j;y;' c£É s; g.| d/e t' prwv;s s; i√tIy' d/e t' prwv;s s; tOtIy' d/e t' prwv;s s; ctuq| d/e s; hov;c--aymu.yeW;' devmnu„y;,;m•;do .iv„yit iptOi„vmÔny;nIit 3 s; hovRxI iptøn( ivjintu…my;y tSm;duttw t( S]I iptøn( ivjintu…my;det;mev;nu devivihitm( Èêro h;•;do .ivtoy| t] jnyit 4 s; hovRxI pum;˝s' jny;çk;r tSy h;yu·rit n;m d/u" t•u hwtd;yur;yu·rit crNTy;yu„m;nsITqmsIit 5 s h puÂrv; a;vv[;j ikmuvve ;NyidTyeWoåêTq" xMy;'Â! îit hov;c s v;v yD îit hocu" tt( sTy˝ s; y…Dy; tnU" s v;v yD" p[Ty=…mit 4 s EW Evm;˙to yD" puÂrvs; mnu„ye>y" tto vw mnu„y;,;' KlO¢ne yDen yjm;n;n;m©;pÂ˝„y©ë≤lpÂ˝iW p[;v/RNt yqem;in pu®WSy;©;pÂ˝iW a©ë≤lpÂ˝iW p[v/RNt Evm( 5 tSm;•u h ¨vRXy…s îTyev;/r;r…,m;ddIt puÂrv;" îTyuˇr;r…,m( Òtne ;ˇ_É îTyn·ˇ_ vOW,' d/;q;…mTyvd/;it g;y]' zNdoånu p[ j;ySv îit zNdo….r;Tm;nm…. invtRyte ]w∑.ë ' zNdoånu p[ j;ySv j;gt' zNdoånu p[

837

Bråhmaâ Branch 27Q: BrŒhmaöa

VŒdhªla AnvŒkhyŒna

Ending:

tiSmNv; EtiSm•¶* s'…ct a;idTyoåStmeit ymiSm•et˝ s'…cteå¶;iv?m' p[hr≤Nt s tt Ë?voR /Um ¨deit soåNt·r=' gCzit tdu hwv;Nt·r=e s'.vit s tt Ë?voR /Um ¨deit s idv' gCzit t√; Ett( sveWR ;' .Ut;n;' p[jnnSy Âpm( p[ hwv p[jy; pxu….…mRqnu jw ;Ryte y Ev' ved 1 îit Wi@±vx ' oånuv;k" kdo h v; Et{Up' yt( ≤S]y; aq hwtNmnso Âp' yTpu˝s a;idTySy Âpm( ten v; Et* …mqun* s'.vt" tSy;metd( √π/; iv.ˇ_' xuKl' retoånusrit p[ hwv;NytrCz⁄Kl' reto .vit Stn; ¨ hwv;NytrCz⁄Kl' reto gCzit tdu hwv =Ir' .vit tdu hwv j;to /;tu' /yte tSm;¥; ivj;yte tSy; Ev =Ir' .vit s; ÁºtCz⁄Kl˝ ret" p[itgO ;it aq y; n ivj;yte no hwv tSy;" =Ir' .vit n ih s; tCz⁄Kl˝ ret" p[itgO ;it 1 t•u hwtdekÉ xUl;’tSy inp;Ky' %;d≤Nt EW; v; aSywtd( devt; Âpm;dˇ îit vdNt" 2 xu£Ít˝ Sy;t( tt( pum;n( %;det( k;m' tu h S]I inp;Ky' %;ded;Tmnwv;Tm;n˝ smn·ˇ_ 3 îit s¢…v'xoånuv;k" s¢ c xt;in …v˝xitíe∑k;" p[qm; …cit®p/Iyte anus:' y;t; g;hRpTy;" Ev' i√tIywv' tOtIywv' ctuQyevR ' pçMyev' WœI ¨ˇm;y;' …cTy;' …/i„,y;nnu s'c∑e t;in v; Et;in ]I…, c shß;…, s'p¥Nte W$( c xt;in Et;vNto vw pç;n;˝ s'vTsr;,;mhor;]; y;vtIret; î∑k; y;v;n…¶" s'…ct Et;v≤∫h;RSy yD£tu….·r∑' .vit y;vtIret; î∑k; y;v;n…¶" s'…cto y Ev'iv√;n…¶' …cnute ySy vwvi' v√;n…¶' …cnoit 1 îTy∑;…v'xoånuv;k" îTy…¶cyn;Nv;:y;n' sm;¢m( îit pçm" p[p;#k" îit v;/Ul aNv;:y;n' sm;¢m( Reference: Chaubey, Braj Bihari, VŒdhªla-AnvŒkhyŒnam, (Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 2001).

838

Bråhmaâ

Branch 27A: BrŒhmaöa

KŒÿhaka BrŒhmaöa

Structure: Fragmentary: 7 BrŒhmaöas. Beginning:

k#kb[;˜,m( a¶‰;/eyb[;˜,m( b[˜v;idno vd≤Nt pur; v; a*∂;likr;®…,®v;c b[˜,e Tv; p[;,;y ju∑' invRp;…m b[˜,e Tv;p;n;y ju∑' invRp;…m b[˜,e Tv; Vy;n;y ju∑' invRp;…m b[˜,e Tv; sm;n;y ju∑' invRp;…m k; Et; devt; y;s;mevtw ∆u∑' invRpTyOco vee b[˜," p[;, Ac;mevte ∆u∑' invRpit yjUi' W vee b[˜,oåp;no yjuW;mevet∆u∑' invRpit s;m;in vee b[˜,o Vy;n" s;ª;mevet∆u∑' invRpTyqv;R,o vee b[˜," sm;noåqvR,;mevte ∆u∑' invRpit ) ctu"xr;vo .vit cTv;ro hIme ved;St;nev .;…gn" kroit mUl' vee b[˜,o vedo ved;n;mevte NmUl' ydO‚Tvj" p[;Xn≤Nt td(b˜[ *dnSy b[˜*dnTvm( 1 in≤x cmRNb[˜; b[˜*dn' invRpit r=;'…s vee dev;n;' yDm;…j`;'sS' t;in b[˜,;p;flt b[˜ b[˜; b[˜,wv yD;{=;'Syph≤Nt ) ctu"xr;vo .vit ctßo idxo id‚G.rev yD;{=;'Syph≤Nt ) jIvt<@ëlo .vit s'pı‰; ) apUto v; EWoåme?yoåy…DyoånOtmU…cv;Ny A,;Nynvd;y;…¶m;/ˇe tmNv;rM.…yTv; y∂ºv; devhe@n' yddIVy•O,mh…mTyet; a;¸tIr;Jyen juhoit pun;Tyevne ' pUto me?yo y…Dyoå…¶m;/ˇ Ek…v'xitret; a;¸tIjuhR oTys; a;idTy Ek…v'x EW sivt; s h devSy sivtu" piv]' ten-w vene ' sivtu" piv]e, pun;it ydNt·r=…mTy¶y Evene metdens" p[mçu ≤Nt s'ksuko ivksuk îTyetdev;Sm; a¶yo y+m' c;ty≤Nt ’Ty;' inA≥it' s' vcRsTe y;≤xWmev;x;Ste 2 dev;í v; asur;í;¶‰;/ey;yop;vsNsm;vTk⁄v;R,; ydev dev; ak⁄vtR tdsur; ak⁄vtR te dev; Etmodnm;s;¥wt; a;¸tIr;Jyen;juhvuStdsur; n;Nvv;y's( tto dev; a.vNpr;sur; a.vNy Ev' iv√;netmodnm;s;¥wt; a;¸tIr;Jyen juhoit .[;tOVySy;nNvv;y;y .vTy;Tmn; pr;Sy .[;tOVyo .vit p[v/e se kvy îTyuKTvodnSy juhoit dev;n;mev he@;Nyvyjte c;tum;RSy;Ny;lPSym;nSy dI≤=„ym;,Sywt; a;¸tIr;Jyen juhoit pun;Tyevne ' pUto me?yo y…Dyo yjte pUto me?yo y…Dyo dI=te )

839

Bråhmaâ Branch 27A: BrŒhmaöa

KŒÿhaka BrŒhmaöa

Ending:

lokmeTy;¸rNy‚Sm' LlokÉ s…m/; p[Tyitœ••;¥' c b[;˜,e>yoåp;sr\Ste>yoåb[vu •¶* k⁄m;R¶* k·r„y;My¶* krv;,Iit teåb[vu Nk⁄®t k⁄®„v i£yt;…mit y' k;myet p[j;v;NSy;idit tSy yDe k⁄®teit b[yU ;¥' k;myet pxum;NSy;idit tSy yDe k⁄®„veit b[yU ;¥' k;myet vsIy;NSy;idit tSy yDe i£yt;…mit b[yU ;d¶IWomIy' v; EtıivyRd¶*kr,m¶IWomIyenvw te ıVyen;‚Sm' LlokÉ yjm;no vsIy;N.vit 3 mno v; EW yu¤π yo y+ym;,o yu¤π nih mns; yDSt;yte s yDo .vTyq ≈ıˇe ≈∂/;n' vee iptroåNv;y≤Nt vO≤ı' ≈uTv; y√é≤ı≈;ı' k⁄v≤R Nt ten;Sy teå.I∑;" p[It; .vNtIN{o vee p[j;k;m" iptOyDen;yjˇSy;sur; yDm…j`;'sS\ t;iNvêe dev; ¨p;flNy√wêdev' purSt;Tk⁄vNR Tysur;,;mphTyw p[;cInp[v,e dey' p[;cInp[v,o vee vj[o vj[,e vw yD;{=;'Syph≤Nt d≤=,;g[;íodgg[;í d.;R .v≤Nt d≤=,;g[…e .v;R aSy iptr" smupsrNTyudgg[…e .devR ;StSm;d(b;[ ˜,e>y a;vOˇ; d.;R" p[dIyNte iptø,;mupsrTv;yeve mSy iptr" smupsrNTyNtihRt; Ámu„m;d;idTy≤Tptroåqo aNtihRt; ih dev>e yí mnu„ye>yí iptr ¨pmUl' bihRd;Rit ten iptø,;' ydOtme l U ' ten dev;n;mu.ye hIJyNteåNtihRt; ih vI=y; mnu„ySywv…mv ih teåNtihRt; .v≤Nt 4 îit ≈;ıb[;˜,m( me%l;b[;˜,m( îy' du®ˇ_;Tp·rb;/m;n îit du®ˇ_; vjR…yTv; p·rb;/Nte v,| piv]' puntI n a;g;idTypo vee v,Rmve piv]ml' kroit p[;,;p;n;>y;' blm;hjNtIit p[;,evpe ;n;>y;' bl' d/;it su%; devI su.g; me%ley…mTy;≤xWmev;x;Ste s*.;Gy' vee su%; devI d/;it shßm;iv p[itrNt a;yu" îit me%l;b[;˜,m( Reference: Caland, W., "BrŒhmaöa- en Sªtra-Aanwinsten," (Verslagen en Mededelingen der Koninklijke Nederlandsche Akademie van Wetenschappen, Afd. Letterkunde, 5. Reeks, Deel iv, 1920), pp. 461-498.

840

Bråhmaâ

Branch 28A: ItihŒsa

VŒlm´ki RŒmŒyaöa

Structure: Seven main divisions, called KŒö¶as. Beginning:

r;m;y,Sy b;lk;<@m( p[qm" sgR" tp"Sv;?y;y…nrt' tpSvI v;‚Gvd;' vrm( n;rd' p·rpp[Cz v;LmI…kmu…R npug' vm( 1 ko Nv‚SmNs;p[t' lokÉ gu,v;Nkí vIyRv;n( /mRDí ’tDí sTyv;Kyo Î!v[t" 2 c;·r]e, c ko yuˇ_" svR.tU We u ko iht" …v√;Nk" k" smqRê kíwkip[ydxRn" 3 a;Tmv;Nko …jt£o/o mitm;NkoånsUyk" kSy …b>yit dev;í j;troWSy s'ygu e 4 EtidCz;Myh' ≈otu' pr' k*tUhl' ih me mhWeR Tv' smqoRå…s D;tumve …' v/' nrm( 5 ≈uTv; cwt…T]lokDo v;LmIkÉn;Rrdo vc" ≈Uyt;…mit c;mN}y p[˙∑o v;Kymb[vIt( 6 bhvo dul.R ;íwv ye Tvy; k°itRt; gu,;" mune v+y;Myh' bud?( v; twyˇRu _" ≈Uyt;' nr" 7 î+v;k⁄vx ' p[.vo r;mo n;m jnw" ≈ut" …nyt;Tm; mh;vIyoR ¥uitm;N/Oitm;NvxI 8 bu≤ım;•Iitm;Nv;GmI ≈Im;Hz]u…nbhR," …vpul;'so mh;b;¸" kMbugI[ vo mh;hnu" 9 mhorSko mhe„v;so gU!j]ur·r'dm" a;j;nub;¸" su…xr;" sull;$" su…v£m" 10 sm" sm…v.ˇ_;©" ≤òG/v,R" p[t;pv;n( pInv=; …vx;l;=o l+mIv;Hz⁄.l=," 11 /mRD" sTys'/í p[j;n;' c ihte rt" yxSvI D;ns'p•" xu…cvRXy" sm;…/m;n( 12 r…=t; jIvlokSy /mRSy p·rr…=t;

841

Bråhmaâ Branch 28A: ItihŒsa

VŒlm´ki RŒmŒyaöa

Ending:

tCΩTv; …v„,uvcn' b[˜; lokgu®" p[."u lok;Ns;Nt;…nk;•;m y;SyNtIme sm;gt;" 16 y∞ ityRGgt' …k'…c{;mmev;nu…cNtyt( p[;,;'STy+yit .KTy; vw s't;ne tu …nvTSyit svwrR ve gu,yw ˇRu _É b[˜lok;dnNtre 17 v;nr;í Svk;' yo…nmO=;íwv tq; yyu" 18 ye>yo …v…n"sOt; ye ye sur;id>y" sus.' v;" AiW>yo n;gy=e>ySt;'St;nev p[pie dre 19 tqoˇ_vit devx e e gop[t;rmup;gt;" .e…jre sryU' sveR hWRp,U ;R≈…u vKlv;" 20 avg;Á jl' yo y" p[;,I Á;sITp[˙∑vt( m;nuW' dehmuTsOJy …vm;n' soå?yroht 21 ityRGyo…ngt;í;…p s'p;[ ¢;" sryUjlm( idVy; idVyen vpuW; dev; dI¢; îv;.vn( 22 gTv; tu sryUtoy' Sq;vr;…, cr;…, c p[;Py tˇoy…vKled' devlokmup;gmn( 23 dev;n;' ySy y; yo…nv;Rnr; A=r;=s;" t;mev …v…vxu" sveR deh;…•…=Py c;M.…s 24 tq; SvgRgt' sv| ’Tv; lokgu®idRvm( jg;m i]dxw" s;/| ˙∑w˙∑R o mh;mit" 25 Et;vdev a;:y;n' soˇr' b[˜pU…jtm( r;m;y,…mit :y;t' mu:y' v;LmI…kn; ’tm( 26 îit ≈Ir;m;y,e ¨ˇrk;<@º xttm" sgR" 100 sm;¢' ¨ˇrk;<@m( Reference: Vasishth, Shivram Sharma, êrimadvŒlm´kirŒmŒyaöa of Mahar·i VŒlm´ki, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1982).

842

Bråhmaâ

Branch 28B: ItihŒsa

MahŒbhŒrata

Structure: 18 Parvas Beginning:

mh;.;rt a;idpvR ≈Ig,ex;y nm" aq p[qmoå?y;y" — n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( lomhWR,pu] ¨g[≈v;" sUt" p*r;…,ko nw…mW;rygCzd(b˜[ WIRn( s'…xtv[t;n( …vny;vnto .UTv; kd;…ct( sUtnNdn" 2 tm;≈mmnup;[ ¢' nw…mW;r
843

Bråhmaâ Branch 28B: ItihŒsa

MahŒbhŒrata

Ending:

s nr" p;p…nmuˇR _" k°it| p[;Pyeh x*nk gCzºTpr…mk;' …s≤ım] me n;‚St s'xy" 44 .;rt;?yyn;Tpu
844

Bråhmaâ

Branch 28C: ItihŒsa

êhr´mad Bhagavad G´tŒ


≈Imd( .gvd( gIt; p[qmoå?y;y" /Otr;∑^ ¨v;c /mR=]e e k⁄®=e]e smvet; yuyTu sv" m;mk;" p;<@v;íwv …kmk⁄vtR s'jy 1 s'jy ¨v;c ÎÇ; tu p;<@v;nIk˘ VyU!' duyoR/nStd; a;c;yRmpu s'gMy r;j; vcnmb[vIt( 2 pXywt;' p;<@up]u ;,;m;c;yR mhtI' cmUm( VyU!;' &pdpu],e tv …x„ye, /Imt; 3 a] xUr; mhe„v;s; .Im;junR sm; yu…/ yuy/u ;no …vr;$í &pdí mh;rq" 4 /O∑kÉtíu …e kt;n" k;…xr;jí vIyRv;n( pu®…jTk⁄≤Nt.ojí xwByí nrpug' v" 5 yu/;mNyuí …v£;Nt ¨ˇm*j;í vIyRv;n( s*.{o {*pdey;í svR Ev mh;rq;" 6 aSm;k˘ tu …v…x∑; ye t;…•bo/ i√joˇm n;yk; mm swNySy s'D;q| t;Nb[vI…m te 7 .v;N.I„mí k,Rí ’pí s…mit'jy" aêTq;m; …vk,Rí s*md…ˇStqwv c 8 aNye c bhv" xUr; mdqeR Tyˇ_jI…vt;" n;n;xS]p[hr,;" sveR yuı…vx;rd;" 9 apy;R¢' tdSm;k˘ bl' .I„m;….r…=tm( py;R¢' ‚TvdmetWe ;' bl' .Im;….r…=tm( 10 ayneWu c sveWR u yq;.;gmv‚Sqt;" .I„mmev;….r=Ntu .vNt" svR Ev ih 11 tSy s'jnyNhW| k⁄®vOı" …pt;mh" …s'hn;d' …vn¥o∞w" xƒ÷ d?m* p[t;pv;n( 12

845

Bråhmaâ Branch 28C: ItihŒsa

êhr´mad Bhagavad G´tŒ

Ending:

n c tSm;Nmnu„yeWu k…íNme ip[y’ˇm" .…vt; n c me tSm;dNy" ip[ytro .u…v 69 a?ye„yte c y îm' /My'R s'v;dm;vyo" D;nyDen ten;h…m∑" Sy;…mit me mit" 70 ≈ı;v;nnsUyí Í,uy;d…p yo nr" soå…p muˇ_" xu.;\Llok;Np[;“uy;Tpu
846

Bråhmaâ

Branch 28D: ItihŒsa

RŒmopŒkhyŒna

Structure: Chapters 258 to 275 of the Ìraöyaka Parva Beginning:

m;kú<@ºy ¨v;c p[;¢mp[itm' du"%' r;me, .rtWR. r=s; j;nk° tSy ˙t; .;y;R blIys; 1 a;≈m;{;=seN{e, r;v,en …vh;ys; m;y;m;Sq;y trs; hTv; gO/'[ j$;yuWm( 2 p[Ty;jh;r t;' r;m" sugI[ vblm;…≈t" bd(?v; set'u smu{Sy dG?v; l˚;' …xtw" xrw" 3 yu…/iœr ¨v;c k‚Smn[;m" k⁄le j;t" …k'vIyR" …k'pr;£m" r;v," kSy v; pu]" …k' vwr' tSy ten h 4 EtNme .gvNsv| sMyg;:y;tumhR…s ≈otu…mCz;…m c·rt' r;mSy;ÆKl∑kmR," 5 m;kú<@ºy ¨v;c ajo n;m;.v{;j; mh;…n+v;k⁄vx ' j" tSy pu]o dxrq" xêTSv;?y;yv;Hxu…c" 6 a.v'StSy cTv;r" pu]; /m;Rqk R o…vd;" r;ml+m,x]ufl; .rtí mh;bl" 7 r;mSym;t; k*sLy; kìkyÉ I .rtSy tu sut* l+m,x]ufl* su…m];y;" pr'tp* 8 …vdehr;jo jnk" sIt; tSy;Tmj; …v.o y;' ck;r Svy' Tv∑; r;mSy mihWI' ip[y;m( 9 Et{;mSy te jNm sIt;y;í p[k°itRtm( r;v,Sy;…p te jNm Vy;:y;Sy;…m jneêr 10 …pt;mho r;v,Sy s;=;∂ºv" p[j;pit" Svy'."U svRlok;n;' p[."u ß∑; mh;tp;" 11 pulSTyo n;m tSy;sINm;nso d…yt" sut"

847

Bråhmaâ Branch 28D: ItihŒsa

RŒmopŒkhyŒna

Ending:

yq;gten m;ge,R p[yy* Svpur' p[it 58 ayo?y;' s sm;s;¥ purI' r;∑^pitStt" .rt;y hnUmNt' dUt' p[Sq;pyˇd; 59 l=…yTve…©t' sv| ip[y' tSmw …nve¥ c v;yup]u e pun" p[;¢e n≤Ndg[;mmup;gmt( 60 s t] mlidG/;©' .rt' cIrv;ssm( ag[t" p;dukÉ ’Tv; ddx;RsInm;sne 61 smeTy .rten;q x]uflne c vIyRv;n( r;`v" shs*…mi]mumR du e .rtWR. 62 tq; .rtx]ufl* smet* gu®,; td; vwdÁe ; dxRnne o.* p[hW| smv;ptu" 63 tSmw t∫rto r;Jym;gt;y;….sT’tm( Ny;s' …ny;Rty;m;s yuˇ_" prmy; mud; 64 ttSt' vw„,ve xUr' n=]eå….mteåh…n v…sœo v;mdeví siht;v>yiWçt;m( 65 soå….iWˇ_" k…p≈eœ' sugI[ v' ssu˙∆nm( …v.IW,' c p*lSTymNvj;n;ÌOh;Np[it 66 a>yCyR …v…v/w ràw" p[Iityuˇ_* mud; yut* sm;/;yeitktRVy' du"%en …vssjR h 67 pu„pk˘ c …vm;n' tTpUj…yTv; s r;`v" p[;d;√Ÿ≈v,;ywv p[ITy; s rùnNdn" 68 tto deviWRsiht" s·rt' gomtImnu dx;ême/;n;jÓe j;ÂQy;Ns …nrgRl;n( 69 îit ≈Imh;.;rte a;r
848

Bråhmaâ

Branch 28E: ItihŒsa

Vi·höu SaharanŒma Stotram

Structure: Introduction, 1000 Names, and Conclusion. Beginning:

≈I iv„,ushßn;mSto]m( xuKl;Mbr/r' iv„,u' xixv,| ctu.jRu m( p[s•vdn' ?y;yet( svRivflopx;Ntye 1 n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( Vy;s' v…sœn¢;r' xˇ_É" p*]mkLmWm( pr;xr;Tmj' vNde xukt;t' tpoin…/m( 2 Vy;s;y iv„,uÂp;y Vy;sÂp;y iv„,ve nmo vw b[˜in/ye v;…sœ;y nmo nm" 3 aivk;r;y xuı;y inTy;y prm;Tmne sdwkÂpÂp;y iv„,ve svR…j„,ve 4 ySy Smr,m;]e, jNms's;rbN/n;t( ivmuCyte nmStSmw iv„,ve p[.iv„,ve 5 aSy ≈Iiv„,oidRVyshßn;mSto]mh;mN]Sy ) ≈IvedVy;so .gv;n( AiW" ) anu∑pë ( zNd" ) ≈Imh;iv„,u" prm;Tm; ≈Im•;r;y,o devt; ) amOt;'x∫ U vo .;nu·rit bIjm( ) devk°nNdn" ß∑eit x·ˇ_" ) ¨∫v" =o.,o dev îit prmo mN]" ) xƒ.O•Ndk° c£°it k°lkm( ) x;©≥/Nv; gd;/r îTyS]m( ) rq;©p;…,r=o>y îit ne]m( ) i]s;m; s;mg" s;meit kvcm( ) a;nNd' pr'b˜[ ie t yoin" ) AtuSsudxRn" k;l îit idGbN/" ) ≈IivêÂp îit ?y;nm( ) ≈Imh;iv„,upI[ TyqeR shßn;mSto]p;#π ivinyog" Ð ?y;nm( =IrodNvTp[dx e e xu…cm…,ivlsTswkte m*·ˇ_k;n;' m;l;KlO¢;snSq" Sfi$km…,in.wm*R·ˇ_kìit;©" ) xu.rw[ .[rw d.[®w p·rivr…ctwmˇuR _pIyUWvWw"R a;nNdI n" punIy;d·rn≤lngd;xƒp;…,mRk u N⁄ d" 1

849

Bråhmaâ Branch 28E: ItihŒsa

Vi·höu SahasranŒma Stotram

Ending:

¨Ê;;r,o du„’ith; puy" svRph[ r,;yu/" 107 vnm;lI gdI x;©«‹ xƒ« c£° c nNdk° ≈Im;•;r;y,o iv„,uv;Rsdu ve oå….r=tu 108 nmoåSTvnNt;y shßmUtyR e shßp;d;≤=ixro®b;hve shßn;ªe pu®W;y x;ête shßkoi$yug/;·r,e nm" 109 k;yen v;c; mnse≤N{ywv;R buı‰;ååTmn; v; p[’te" Sv.;v;t( kro…m y¥t( skl' prSmw n;r;y,;yeit smpRy;…m 110 Reference: Swami Vimalananda, Sri Vishnu Sahasranama Stotram, (Tirupparaitturai: Sri Ramakrishna Tapovanam, 1978).

850

Bråhmaâ

Branch 28F: ItihŒsa

Harivaµ§ha

Structure: 118 chapters, divided among three Parvas Beginning:

n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( – x*nk ¨v;c ) s*te sumhd;:y;n' .vt; p·rk°itRtm( ) .;rt;n;' c sveWR ;' p;…qRv;n;' tqwv c 1 dev;n;' d;nv;n;' c gN/voRrgr=s;m( ) dwTy;n;mq …sı;n;' guÁk;n;' tqwv c 2 aTy∫⁄t;in km;R…, iv£m; /mR iníy;" ) iv…c];í kq;yog; jNm c;g[‰mnuˇmm( 3 k…qt' .vt; pu
851

Bråhmaâ Branch 28F: ItihŒsa

Harivaµ§ha

Ending:

n c ivrmit ivp[pjU n;• c ivinvtRit yDxIln;t( n c ivWyp·rr=,;∞‰utoås* n c p·rghRit vpu∑m;' c 41 iv…/ivihtmxKymNyq; ih kt|u yÎiWr…cNTytp;" pur;b[vITs" îit nrpitr;Tmv;'Std;s* tdnuiv…cNTy b.Uv vItmNyu" 42 îd' mh;k;VymOWme hR ;Tmn" p#•O,;' pUJytmo .ve•r" p[’∑m;yu" smv;Py dul.R ' l.et svRDfl' c kÉvlm( 43 xt£to" kLmWivp[mo=,' p#…•d' muCyit kLmW;•r" tqwv k;m;iNviv/;NsmXnute sm;¢k;mí …cr;y nNdit 44 yq; ih pu„pp[.v' fl' &m;ˇt" p[j;y≤Nt puní p;dp;" tq; mhiWRp.[ v; îm; …gr" p[v/RyNte tmOiW' p[vitRt;" 45 pu];npu]o l.te suvcRsíyut" punivRNdit c;Tmn" iSqitm( Vy;…/' n c;“oit …cr' c bN/n' i£y;' c pu
852

Bråhmaâ

Branch 29A: PurŒöa (01)

BhŒgavata MahŒpurŒöa

Structure: Twelve Skandhas Beginning:

≈Im∫;gvtmh;pur;,m( ) p[qm" SkN/" ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" jNm;¥Sy ytoåNvy;idtrtí;qe„R v….D" Svr;$( tene b[˜ ˙d; y a;idkvye muÁ≤Nt yTsUry" tejov;·rmOd;' yq; ivinmyo y] i]sgoRåmOW; /;ª; Sven sd; inrStk⁄hk˘ sTy' pr' /Imih 1 /mR" p[oæJZtkìtvoå] prmo inmRTsr;,;' st;' ve¥' v;Stvm] vStu ≤xvd' t;p]yoNmUlnm( ≈Im∫;gvte mh;muin’te ik˘ v; prwrIêr" s¥o ˙¥v®?yteå] ’it…." xu≈WU …u .StT=,;t( 2 ingmkLptrogR≤lt' fl' xukmu%;dmOt{vs'ytu m( ipbt .;gvt' rsm;ly' mu¸rho r…sk; .uiv .;vuk;" 3 nw…mWeåin…mW=e]e Èxy" x*nk;dy" s]' Svg;Ry lok;y shßsmm;st 4 t Ekd; tu muny" p[;tÛRt¸t;¶y" sT’t' sUtm;sIn' pp[Cz⁄·rdm;dr;t( 5 AWy Ëcu" Tvy; %lu pur;,;in seith;s;in c;n` a;:y;t;NyPy/It;in /mRx;S];…, y;Nyut 6 y;in vedivd;' ≈eœo .gv;Nb;dr;y," aNye c muny" sUt pr;vrivdo ivdu" 7 veTq Tv' s*My tTsv| tÊvtStdnugh[ ;t( b[yU "u ≤òG/Sy ix„ySy gurvo guÁmPyut 8 t] t];Ôs;ååyu„mN.vt; yi√in…ítm( pus' ;mek;Ntt" ≈eySt•" x'…stumhR…s 9

853

Bråhmaâ Branch 29A: PurŒöa (01)

Bhågavata Mahåpuråâ

Ending:

t{s;mOttO¢Sy n;Ny] Sy;{it" Kv…ct( 15 inªg;n;' yq; g©; dev;n;mCyuto yq; vw„,v;n;' yq; x'."u pur;,;n;…md' tq; 16 =e];,;' cwv sveWR ;' yq; k;xI Ánuˇm; tq; pur;,v[;t;n;' ≈Im∫;gvt' i√j;" 17 ≈Im∫;gvt' pur;,mml' y√w„,v;n;' ip[y' yiSmNp;rmh'Symekmml' D;n' pr' gIyte ) t] D;nivr;g.·ˇ_siht' nw„kMyRm;iv„’t' tCzé
854

Bråhmaâ


Padma PurŒöa

Structure: Seven Khaö¶as Beginning:

≈Ipµpur;,m( sOi∑%<@m( p[qmoå?y;y" ≈I…v„,venm" SvCz'c{' ;vd;t'k·rkrmkr=o.s'j;tfÉn' b[õd(.iU tp[sˇ_ìvtR[ …nymprw" se…vt'…vp[m:u yw" k;r;l'’teni].uvngu®,;b[˜,;Îi∑pUt' s'.og;.ogrMy'jlmxu.hr'p*„kr' v"pun;tu 1 sUtmek;'tm;sIn'Vy;s…x„y'mh;mit" lomhWR,n;m;v;¨g[≈vsm;htt( 2 AWI,;m;≈m;'St;tgTv;/m;RNsm;st" pOCzt;'…vStr;d(biU[ hyNmˇ"≈utv;n…s 3 vedVy;s;Nmy;pu]pur;,;Ny≤%l;…nc tv;:y;t;…np[;¢;…nmu…n>yovd…vStr;t( 4 p[y;gem…u nvywíR yq;pO∑"Svy'p.[ "u pO∑ne c;nu…x∑;Stemnu yo/mRk;'…=," 5 dexp'
855


Padma Puråâ

Ending:

Vy;s ¨v;cyÆTk'…cTk⁄®tekmRmTyoR/m|kl*yuge 46 tdpRyNe mh;…v„,*.…ˇ_.;vsm‚Nvt" …v„,*smipRtk ' mRsvRmve ;=y'.vet( 47 Vy;s¨v;cîittek…qt'sv|vˇO b' ;[ ˜,sˇm yCz±®Tv;.…ˇ_.;vennromo=mv;“uy;t( 48 sUt¨v;cEv'pb[ o…/tStenjw…m…n" prm;Tmn; …£y;yogrto.UTv;jg;mprm'pdm( 49 îm'…£y;yogs;r'Vy;senoˇ_˘mh;Tmn; yep#'itjn;.ˇ_™y;Í
856

Bråhmaâ


Brahma PurŒöa


b[˜pur;,m( p[qmoå?y;y" t];d* nw…mW;r
857


Brahma Puråâ

Ending:

vwXywí;nuidn' ivxuık⁄ljw" xU{Sw tq; /;…mRk"ì ≈otVy' iTvdmuˇm' b¸fl' /m;RqmR o=p[dm( 35 /meR mit.Rvtu v" pu®Woˇm;n;' s Áºk Ev prlokgtSy bN/u" aq;R" ≤S]yí inpu,rw ip seVym;n; nwv p[.;vmupy;≤Nt n c iSqrTvm( 36 /me,R r;Jy' l.te mnu„y" Svg| c /me,R nr" p[y;it a;yuí k°it| c tpí /m| /me,R mo=' l.te mnu„y" 37 /moRå] m;t;iptr* nrSy /mR" s%; c;] pre c lokÉ ];t; c /mRiSTvh mo=dí /m;RÎte n;iSt tu ik˘…cdev 38 îd' rhSy' ≈eœ' c pur;,' veds'…mtm( n dey' du∑mtye n;iStk;y ivxeWt" 39 îd' myoˇ_' p[vr' pur;,' p;p;ph' /mRivv/Rn' c ≈ut' .v≤∫" prm' rhSym( a;D;py?v' munyo v[j;…m 40 îit ≈Imh;pur;,e a;idb[;˜e romhWR,muins'v;de pur;,p[xs' n' n;m W$(cTv;·r'xd…/ki√xttmoå?y;y" 246 sm;¢…mdm;idb[;˜;…./' mh;pur;,m( —tTsd(b˜[ ;pR,mStu Reference: BrahmamahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1985).

858

Bråhmaâ


Vi·höu PurŒöa

Structure: Six Khaö¶as Beginning:

iv„,upru ;,m( ) p[qm" %<@" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) …jt' te pu<@rIk;= nmSte ivê.;vn ) nmSteåStu ˙WIkÉx mh;pu®W pUvjR 1 pd=r b[˜ y Èêr" pum;n( gu,o‚MmsOi∑≤%itk;ls'ly" ) p[/;nbuı‰;idjgTp[pçsU" s noåStu iv„,umiR t.Uitmu·ˇ_d" 2 p[,My iv„,u' ivêex' b[˜;dIn( p[…,pTy c ) gu®˘ p[,My v+y;…m pur;,' veds‚Mmtm( 3 îith;spur;,D' vedved;©p;rgm( ) /mRx;S];idtÊvD' vixœtny;Tmjm( 4 pr;xr' muinvr' ’tpUv;R… ki£ym( ) mw]ye " p·rpp[Cz p[…,pTy;….v;¥ c 5 Tvˇo ih ved;?yynm/Itm≤%l' guro ) /mRx;S];…, sVv;‹…, ved;©;in yq;£mm( 6 TvTp[s;d;Nmuin≈eœ m;mNye n;’t≈mm( ) v+yNte svRx;S]eWu p[;yxo yeåip ivi√W" 7 soåh…mCz;…m /MmRD ≈otu' Tvˇo yq; jgt( b.Uv .Uyí yq; mh;.;g .iv„yit 8 yNmyç jgd(b˜[ n( ytíwt∞r;crm( lInm;sI¥q; y] lyme„yit y] c 9 yTp[m;,;in .Ut;in dev;dIn;ç sM.vm( smu{pvRt;n;' c s'Sq;nç tq; .uv" 10 sUYy;‹dIn;ç s'Sq;n' p[m;,' muinsˇm dev;dIn;' tq; v'x;n( mnUn( mNvNtr;…, c 11 kLp;n( kLpivkLp;'í ctuygRu ivk‚Lpt;n( kLp;NtSy SvÂpç yug/m;|í ’Tòx" 12

859


Vi·höu Puråâ

Ending:

yDwyDR ivdo yj≤Nt stt' yDeêr' k‚MmR,o y' y' b[˜my' pr;prmy' ?y;y≤Nt c D;inn" ) yç p[;Py n j;yte n …m[yte no vıRte hIyte nwv;s• c s∫vTyit tt" ik˘ v; hre" ≈Uyt;m( 56 kVy' y" iptOÂp/O‚Gv…/¸t' hVyç .u¤π p[.du vRe Tve .gv;nn;idin/n" Sv;h;Sv/;s'…Dtm( ) yiSmn( b[˜…, sVvRx·ˇ_inlye y;n;in no m;inn;m( inœ;yw p[.v≤Nt h≤Nt kluWe ≈o]' s y;to h·r" 57 n;NtoåiSt ySy n c ySy smu∫voåiSt vO≤ınR ySy p·r,;mivv≤∆RtSy ) n;p=yç smupTw yivkLpvStu ySt' ntoåiSm pu®Woˇmm;¥mIxm( 58 tSywv yoånug,u .uGb¸/wk Ev xuıoåPyxuı îv mUiˇRiv.;g.ed"w ) D;n;iNvt" sklsÊviv.UitkÊ;;‹ tSmw ntoåiSm pu®W;y sd;Vyy;y 59 D;np[viO ˇinymeKymy;y pus' o .ogp[d;np$ve i]gu,;Tmk;y ) aVy;’t;y .v.;vnk;r,;y vNde SvÂpm.v;y sd;jr;y 60 Vyom;inl;…¶jl.Urcn;my;y xBd;id.ogivWyopny=m;y ) pus' " smStkr,w®pk;rk;y Vyˇ_;y sU+mivml;y sd; ntoåiSm 61 îit iviv/mjSy ySy Âp' p[’itpr;Tmmy' sn;tnSy ) p[idxtu .gv;nxeWpus' ;' h·rrpjNmjr;idk;' s …s≤ım( 62 sm;¢…md' …≈iv„,upru ;,m( ) Reference: Wilson, H.H., The Vi·öu PurŒöa: A system of Hindu mythology and tradition, 2 vols. (Delhi: Nag, 1980).

860

Bråhmaâ


êhiva PurŒöa

Structure: Seven SaµhitŒs, and a total of 416 chapters Beginning:

≈I ixvpur;, ) iv¥eêrs'iht; ) a;¥Ntm'glmj;tsm;n.;vn;yRtmIxmjr;mrm;Tmdevm( ) p'c;nn' Mp[blp'civnodxIl's' .;vyemn…sx'krm‚MbkÉxm( – /mR=]e e mh;=e]e g'g;k;≤l≤Nds'gme p[y;ge prme pu
861


êhiva Puråâ

Ending:

n ≤lPyte c p;p*`w" pµp]' yq;'.s; 36 yiSmNdexe vse…•Ty' ixyogrto muin" s*åip dexo .veTpUt" s pUt îit ik˘ pun" 37 tSm;Tsv| p·rTyJy ’tmNyi√c=," svRd"u %p[h;,;y ixvyog sm>yset( 38 EtiCzvpur;,;' ih sm;¢' ihtm;dr;t( pi#tVy' ≈otVy' c tqwv ih 39 n;iStk;y n vˇ_Vym≈ı;y x#;y c a.ˇ_;y mhex tq; /mR?vj;y c 40 EtCΩTv; Áºkv;r .veTp;p' ih .Sms;m( a.ˇ_o .·ˇ_m;“oit .ˇ_o .·ˇ_sv≤ı.;k™ 41 pun" ≈ute c s∫·ˇ_mR·u ˇ_" Sy;∞ ≈ute pun" tSm;Tpun" puníwv ≈otVy ih mum=u …." 42 pcvO·ˇ" p[ktRVy pur;,;Sy;Sy s≤ıy; pr' fl smui∂Xy tTp[;“oit n s'xy" 43 pur;tn;í r;j;no ivp[; vwXy;í sˇm; s¢’TvStd;vOTy;ål.'t ixvdxnm( 44 ≈o„yTyq;ip yíed' m;nvo .·ˇ_tTpr îh .uKTv;å≤%l;N.og;nte mu·ˇ_' l.e∞ s" 45 EtiCzvpur;,' ih ixvSy;itip[y' prm( ) .u·ˇ_mu·ˇ_p[d b[˜s'…mt' .·ˇ_vıRnm( 46 EtiCzvpur;,Sy vˇ_u" ≈otuí svRd; ) sm," ssut" s;b" x' krotu s xkr" 47 ≈I ixvpur;, sm;¢' – Reference: ÌchŒrya, RŒma Sharma, êr´êiva PurŒöa , (Mathura: Rashtriya Press, 1972).

862

Bråhmaâ


NŒrada PurŒöa

Structure: Two main divisions and a total of 204 chapters. Beginning:

≈In;rdIymh;pur;,m( aq p[qmoå?y;y" — ≈Igu®>yo nm" — ≈I g,ex;y nm" — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y — n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( — vedVy;s;y nm" vONde vONd;vn;sIn…m≤Ndr;nNdm≤Ndrm( ¨peN{' s;'{k;®
863


NŒrada Puråâ

Ending:

yto v;co …nvtRNte n mno y] s'…vxet( ti√¥;d;Tmno Âp' ÁÂpSy …cd;Tmn" 52 ySy sTyty; sTy' jgdeti√k;xte …v…c]Âp' vNde t' …ngu,R ' tms" prm( 53 a;d* m?ye c;Pyjní;Nte cwk;=ro …v.u" …v.;it n;n;Âpe, t' vNdeåh …nrÔnm( 54 …nrÔn;TsmuTp•' jgdet∞r;crm( itœTyPyeit v; y‚Sm'StTsTy' D;nm√ym( 55 …xv' xwv; vdNTyen' p[/;n' s;õ±:yveidn" yo…gn" pu®W' …vp[;" kmR mIm;'sk; jn;" 56 …v.u' vwxie Wk;¥;í …cCz…ˇ_' x…ˇ_…cNtk;" b[˜;i√tIy' t√Nde n;n;Âp…£y;Spdm( 57 .…ˇ_.Rgvt" pus' ;' .gvd(r[ pU k;·r,I t;' lB?v; c;pr' l;.' ko v;Hzit …vn; pxum( 58 .gvi√mu%; ye tu nr;" s's;·r,o i√j;" teW;' mu…ˇ_.Rv;$Vy; n;‚St sTs©mNtr; 59 s;/v" smud;c;r;" svRlokiht;vh;" dIn;nuk‚Mpno …vp[;" p[p•;St;ry≤Nt ih 60 yUy' /Nytm; lokÉ muny" s;/usMmt;" yNmu¸v;Rsdu ve Sy k°it| pLlvnUtn;m( 61 /NyoåSMynughO Itoå‚Sm .v≤∫loRkm©lm( yTSm;·rto h·r" s;=;TsvRk;r,k;r,m( 62 — îit ≈IbOh•;rdIypur;,e bOhdup;:y;ne ¨ˇr.;ge mh;pur;,e EtTpur;,≈v,;idfl…nÂp,' n;m √‰xIittmoå?y;y" 82 Reference: NŒradýa MahŒpurŒöa, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1984).

864

Bråhmaâ


Agni PurŒöa

Structure: 383 chapters and 11,457 verses Beginning:

ai¶pur;,m( p[qmoå?y;y" g[Nq-p[St;vn; ) i≈y' srSvit' g*rI' g,ex' SkNdmIêrm( ) b[˜;,' viîmN{;dINv;sudve ' nm;Myhm( 1 nwimWe hirmIj;n; AWy" x*nk;dy" ) tIqRy;];p[s©en Sv;gt' sUtmb[vu n( 2 AWy Ëcu" sUt Tv' pUijtoåSm;i." s;r;Ts;r' vdSv n" ) yen ivD;nm;]e, sVvRDTw v' p[j;yte 3 sUt ¨v;c s;r;Ts;r;e ih .gv;n( iv„,u" sg;Rid’i√.u" ) b[˜;hmiSm t' D;Tv; sVvRD;Tv' p[j;yte 4 √e b[˜,I veidtVye xBdb[˜ pr' c yt( ) √e iv¥evie dtVye ih îit c;qvR,I ≈uit" 5 ah' xu£í pwl;¥; gTv; vdirk;≈mm( ) Vy;s' nTv; pO∑vNt" soåSm;n( s;rmq;b[vIt( 6 Vy;s ¨v;c xuk;¥w" Í,u sUt Tv' vix„#o m;' yq;åb[vIt( ) b[˜s;r' ih pOCzNt' muini.í pr;Tprm( 7 vis„# ¨v;c √wiv?y' b[˜; v+y;im Í,u Vy;s;i%l;nugm( ) yq;åi¶m;| pur; p[;h muini.dwvR tw" sh 8 pur;,' prm;¶ey' b[˜iv¥;=r' prm( ) AGved;¥pr' b[˜ svRdve su%;vhm( 9 ai¶noˇ_' pur;,' yd;¶ey' b[˜siMmtm( .uiˇ_muiˇ_p[d' idVy' p#t;' Í
865


Agni Puråâ

Ending:

ved;Nt' b[˜ivD;n' yogI Á∑;© îRirt" ) Sto]' pur;,m;h;TMy' iv¥; Á∑;dx SmOt;" 383-62 AGved;¥;" pr; Á] pr;iv¥;=r' pr' ) sp[pç' in„p[pç' b[˜,o ÂpmIirt' 383-63 îd' pçdxs;hß' xtkoi$p[ivStr' ) devlokÉ dwvtwí pur,' p#‰te sd; 383-64 lok;n;' ihtk;men s'i=Pyod(gItmi¶n; ) sv| b[˜ie t j;nI?v' muny" xonk;dy" 383-65 Í,uy;Cz^;vye√;ip y" p#eTp;#yedip ) il%eLle%;pye√;ip pUjyeTkIˇRyde ip 383-66 pur;,p;#kçwv pUjyet( p[yto nOp" ) go.Uihr
866

Bråhmaâ


MŒrkaö¶eya PurŒöa


m;kú<@ºy pur;,' ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) y¥o…g…..Rv.y;iˇRivn;xyoGym;s;¥ v≤NdtmtIv ivivˇ_…cˇw" ) t√" pun;tu h·rp;dsrojyuGmm;iv.RvT£mivl…Ït.U.vRu "Sv" 1 p;y;t( s v" sklkLmW.edd=" =Irodk⁄≤=f…,.oginiv∑mU·Ê;‹" ) ê;s;v/Uts≤lloTk…,k;kr;l" …sN/u" p[nTO y…mv ySy kroit s©;t( 2 n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇm' devI' srSvtI' Vy;s' tto jymudIryet( – tp"Sv;?y;yinrt' m;kú<@ºy' mh;muin' ) Vy;six„yo mh;tej; jw…min" pYyRpCO zt 1 .gvn( .;rt;:y;n' Vy;senoˇ_' mh;Tmn; pU,mR Stmlw" xu.nw[ ;Rn;x;S]smu∞yw" 2 j;itxu≤ısm;yuˇ_' s;/uxBdopxo….t' ) pUVvRp=o·ˇ_…sı;Ntp·rinœ;smiNvt' 3 i]dx;n;' yq; iv„,ui√≥pd;' b[;˜,o yq; .UW,;n;ç sveWR ;' yq; cU@;m…,vRr" 4 yq;yu/;n;' k⁄≤lx…m≤N{y;,;' yq; mn" tqeh sVvRx;S];,;' mh;.;rtmuˇm' 5 a];qRívw /mRí k;mo mo=;í v
867


MŒrkaö¶eya Puråâ

Ending:

s¢i]'xd…/k xttmoå?y;y" m;kú<@ºy ¨v;c dmen r;D; îTyuˇ_É iptu" x]u" pl;…yt" m≤Tpt; t;psoåNyí tPyt;' in.Ry' mht( pl;ynpr;n( ÎÇ; ik≤ç•oˇ_' dmen t;n( 1 m;kú<@ºy ¨v;c EtTsVvRmpu ;:y;n' /MMy| Svg;RpvgRd' y" Í,oit p#π√;ip …sı' tSy smIiht' 2 a;…/Vy;…/jdu"%en kd;…c•;….yuJyte b[˜hTy;idp;pe>yo muCyte n;] s'xy" 3 sNt" sujn…m];…, .v≤Nt ihtbuıy" n;ry" s'.iv„y≤Nt dSyvo v; kd;cn 4 sdqoR …m∑.ogI c du….R=nw ;RvsIdit prd;rpr{Vyprih's;idikæLbWw" 5 muCyteånekdu"%e>yo inTyçwvorgoˇm A≤ıvO≤R ı" SmOit" x;≤Nt" ≈I"pui∑Stui∑rev c inTy' tSy .vei√p[ y" Í,oit kq;…mm;' 6 m;kú<@ºypur;,metd≤%l' Í
868

Bråhmaâ


VŒrŒha PurŒöa

Structure: 218 Chapters, a little more than 10,000 verses Beginning:

v;r;hpur;,m( ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtIçwv tto jymudIryet( – nmStSmw vr;h;y lIlyoırte mhIm( ) %urm?ygto ySy me®" %,%,;yte 1 d'∑;^ g[,e oı»t; g*®d…/p·rvOt; pvRtiw nRªg;…." s;k˘ mO≤Tp<@vTp[;GbOhdu®bpuW;ånNtÂpe, yen ) soåy' k˘s;sur;·rmRru nrkdx;Sy;Nt’TsvRsS' q" ’„,o iv„,u" surx e o nudtu mm ·rpUn;iddevo vr;h" 2 sUt ¨v;c yiSmn( k;le ≤=it" pUv| kLPlv;r;hÂip,; ) ¨ı»t; iv.un; xKTy; pp[Cz prmeêrm( 3 /r
870

Bråhmaâ


Li‹ga PurŒöa

Structure: PªrvaArdha and an Uttara Ardha, with 108 and 55 chapters respectively Beginning:

≤l©pur;,m( ≈Ig,ex;y nm" – — nm" ≤xv;y nmo ®{;y hrye b[˜,e prm;Tmne p[/;npu®Wex;y sgRiSqTy'tk;·r,e 1 n;rdo>yCyR xwlx e e x'kr' s'gmeêre ihryCy;‹sn' tSmw t¥oGy' smkLpyn( 5 soip Î∑o muinvrwdÊR ;' .eje td;snm( s'pJU ym;no muin…." su%;sIno vr;sne 6 c£É kq;' iv…c];q;| ≤l'gm;h;TMym;…≈t;m( Et‚Sm•ev k;le tu sUt" p*r;…,k" Svym( 7 jg;m nw…mW' /Im;n( p[,;m;q| tpiSvn;m( tSmw s;m c pUj;' c yq;v∞i£re td; 8 nw…mWey;Stu ix„y;y ’„,√wp;ynSy tu aq teW;' pur;,Sy xu≈WU ; smp¥t 9 ÎÇ; tmitivêSt' iv√;'s' romhWR,m( apOCz÷í tt" sUtmOiW' sveR tpo/n;" 10 pur;,s'iht;' pu
871


Li‹ga Puråâ

Ending:

aq te muny" sveR nw…mWey;" sm;iht;" 37 p[,me du vRe mIx;n' p[Iitk˘$iktTvc" x;%;' p*r;…,k°mev' ’Tvwk;dixk;' p[."u 38 b[˜; Svy'..U gR v;ind' vcnmb[vIt( lwg' m;¥'tm≤%l' y" p#πCzé,yu ;dip 39 i√je>y" ≈;vye√;ip s y;it prm;' gitm( tps; cwv yDen d;nen;?yynen c 40 y; gitStSy ivpul; x;S]iv¥; c vwidk° kmR,; c;ip …m≈e, kÉvl' iv¥y;ip v; 41 invOiˇí;Sy ivp[Sy .ve∫·ˇ_í x;êtI m…y n;r;y,e deve ≈ı; c;Stu mh;Tmn" 42 v'xSy c;=y; iv¥; c;p[m;dí svRt" îTy;D; b[˜,StSm;ˇSy sv| mh;Tmn" 43 AWy" p[ocu" AWe" sUtSy c;Sm;kmetWe ;mip c;Sy c n;rdSy c y; …s≤ıStIqRy;];StSy c 44 p[Iití ivpul; ySm;dSm;k˘ romhWR, 45 s; sd;Stu ivÂp;=p[s;d;ˇu sm'tt" Evmuˇ_ÉWu ivp[We u n;rdo .gv;nip 46 kr;>y;' sux.u ;g[;>y;' sUt' pSp≤xRv;'STv…c ) SvSTyStu sUt .{' te mh;deve vOW?vje 47 ≈ı; tv;Stu c;Sm;k˘ nmStSmw ixv;y c 48 îit ≈I ≤l©mh;pur;,e ¨ˇr.;ge p'cp'c;xˇmo?y;y" sm;¢" 55 sm;¢' cwtLlwg' oˇr;/Rm( ) ≈I.v;nIx'kr;pR,mStu ) sm;¢oåy' g[Nq" Reference: Shastri, J.L., Ed., Linga PurŒna of Sage K¨·öa DvaipŒyana VyŒsa, (Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1985).

872

Bråhmaâ


Brahma Vaivarta PurŒöa

Structure: Four Khaö¶as Beginning:

≈Imd(√p¯ ;ynmuinp[,It' b[˜vwvtRpru ;,m( ) t];ååidm' b[˜%<@m( ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" ) g,exb[˜x e surx e xeW;" sur;í sveR mnvo munIN{;" srSvtI≈I…g·rj;idk;í y' nm≤Nt deVy" p[,m;…m t' iv.um( 1 SqUl;StnUivRd/t' i]gu,' ivr;j' ivê;in lomivxreWu mh;Ntm;¥m( ) sO∑‰uNmu%" Svkly;åip ssjR sU+m' inTy' smeTy ˙id yStmj' .j;…m 2 ?y;yNte ?y;ninœ;" surnrmnvo yo…gno yogÂ!;" sNt" Sv“eåip sNt' kitkitjin….y| n pXy≤Nt tPTv; ) ?y;ye Sv'Cz;my' t' i]gu,prmho inivRk;r' inrIh' .KTy; ?y;nwkhetoinR®pm®…crXy;mÂp' d/;nm( 3 vNde ’„,' gu,;tIt' pr' b[˜;Cyut' yt" ) a;ivbR.vU "u p[’itb[˜iv„,uixv;dy" 4 — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' Vy;s' tto jymudIryet( 1 amOtprmpUv| .;rtIk;m/en'u ≈uitg,’tvTso Vy;sdevo dudoh ) ait®…crpur;,' b[˜vwvtRmte ≤Tpbt ipbt muG/; duG/m=Yy…m∑m( 2 .;rte nw…mW;r
873


Brahma Vaivarta Puråâ

Ending of Khaö¶a 3:

p;vRtIixvs;'in?ye su%' tSq* g,eêr" 40 îd' g,pte" %<@÷ y" Í,oit sm;iht" s r;jsUyyDSy flm;“oit in…ítm( 41 apu]o l.te pu]' ≈Ig,exp[s;dt" /Ir' vIr' c /inn' gu…,n' …crjIivnm( 42 yxiSvn' pui],' c iv√;'s' sukvIêrm( …jte≤N{y;,;' p[vr' d;t;r' svRsp' d;m( 43 suxIl' c sd;c;r' p[xS' y' vw„,v' l.et( aih'sk˘ dy;lu' c tÊvD;nivx;rdm( 44 .KTy; g,ex' s'pJU y vS];l'k;rcNdnw" ≈uTv; g,pte" %<@÷ mh;vN?y; p[syU te 45 mOtvTs; k;kvN?y; b[Ñpu]' l.ed/( vu[ m( adU„ydUW,pr; xuı; cwv l.eTsutm( 46 spU,| b[˜vwvt| ≈uTv; yLl.te flm( tTfl' l.te mTyR" ≈uTved' %<@muˇmm( 47 v;Hz;' ’Tv; tu mn…s Í,oit prm;iSqt" tSmw dd;it sve∑R ' xUr≈eœo g,eêr" 48 ≈uTv; g,pte" %<@÷ ivfln;x;y yàt" ) Sv,RyDopvIt' c êetCz]' c m;Lykm( 49 p[dIyte v;ck;y SviStk˘ itLlõ™õk ⁄ ;n( ) p·rpKvfl;Nyev dexklo∫v;in c 50 îit ≈Ib[˜vwvteR mh;pur;,e g,pit%<@º n;rdn;r;y,s'v;de prxur;m;gmgnwtT%<@≈v,flv,Rn' n;m W$(cTv;·r'xoå?y;y" 46 sm;¢…md' ≈Ib[˜vwvtRpru ;,Sy tOtIy' mh;g,pit%<@m( Reference: Jha, Tariö´§a, Brahmavaivarta PurŒöam, (PrayŒga: Hind´ SŒhitya Sammelana, 1981).

874

Bråhmaâ


Bhavi·hya PurŒöa

Structure: 3 Main Divisions Beginning:

.iv„ymh;pur;,m( ) b[;˜pvR ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( 1 jyit pr;xrsUn"u sTyvtI˙dynNdno Vy;s" ) ySy;Sykmlg≤lt' v;ÑymmOt' jg≤Tpbit 2 mUk˚roit v;c;l' p©ë' lÏyte …g·rm( ) yT’p; tmh' vNde prm;nNdm;/vm( 3 p;r;xyRvc" srojmml' gIt;qRgN/oTk$' n;n;:y;nkkÉsr' h·rkq;sMbo/n;bo…/tm( ) lokÉ s∆nW$(pdwrhrh" pepIym;n' mud; .Uy;∫;rtp˚j' k≤lmlp[?v'…s n" ≈eyse 4 yo goxt' knkÍ©my' dd;it ivp[;y vedivduWe c b¸≈ut;y ) pu
875


Bhavi·hya Puråâ

Ending:

s c h'so h·r" s;=;CztsUysR mp[." xu£˘ p[Ò;dp[m% u ;NStejs; t;p…y„yit 30 td; pr;…jt; dwTy;STyKTv; g;' du"≤%t; .Oxm( ivtle c g…m„y≤Nt mh;devne r≤=t;" 31 punSte skl; dev; in.Ry; in®p{v;" vwvSvtSy tny' c;….We+y≤Nt .Upde 32 idVyvWRxt;yuí s î+v;k⁄.iR v„yit vW;R,;' c p[m;,en nO,;m;yuítuXxtm( 33 îit te k…qt' sv| yTpO∑oåh' mno Tvy; ctuygRu ;n;' c·rt' nOp;,;' c pOqk™ pOqk™ 34 ctu„p;d; ih /mRSy D;n' ?y;n' xmo dm" a;TmD;n' s vw D;n' ?y;nm?y;Tm…cNtnm( mn" iSqrTv' c xmo dmiSTv≤N{ying[h" 35 ctul=R ;Bdk;Nyev √;i]'x∞ shßkm( tTsƒ‰y; ih /mRSy p;díwk" p[k°itRt" 36 p[; m?y;ˆs;y;ˆ' i]sN?y' c .veTsd; ) EkìknÉ pd; tSy ivr;jo .uiv vtRte 37 yd; /moR .ve√ı é Std;yuívw vıRte ) s¢Xlokshß;…, %<@ºåiSmNk…qt;in ih – atíoˇr%<@÷ ih v,Ry;…m mno Í,u 38 îit ≈I.iv„ye mh;pur;,e p[itsgRpvR…, ctuygRu %<@;prpy;Rye k≤lyugIyeith;ssmu∞yv,Rn' n;m Wi@±vx ' oå?y;y" 26 îit ≈I.iv„ye mh;pur;,e tOtIy' p[itsgRpvRctuygRu %<@;prpy;Ry' sm;¢m( 3 Reference: Sharma, R.N., The Bhavi·ya MahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: NAG, 1984).

876

Bråhmaâ


VŒmana PurŒöa

Structure: Pªrva BhŒga with 6,000 verses in 69 chapters Beginning:

aq ≈Iv;mnpur;,m( ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' Vy;s' tto jymudIryet( – ]wloKyr;Jym;≤=Py ble·rN{;y yo dd* ) ≈I/r;y nmStSmw zµv;mnÂip,e 1 pulSTymOiWm;sInm;≈me v;‚Gvd;' vrm( ) n;rd" p·rpp[Cz pur;,' v;mn;≈ym( 2 kq' .gvt; b[ñ( iv„,un; p[.iv„,un; ) v;mnTv' /Ot' pUv| tNmm;c+v pOCzt" 3 kq' c vw„,vo .UTv; p[Ò;do dwTysˇm" ) i]dxwyyRu /u e s;/Rm] me s'xyo mh;n( 4 ≈Uyte c i√j≈eœ d=Sy duiht; stI ) x'krSy ip[y; .;y;R b.Uv vrv…,RnI 5 ikmq| s; p·rTyJy SvxrIr' vr;nn; ) j;t; ihmvto gehe …grIN{Sy mh;Tmn" 6 puní devdevSy pàITvmgmCz⁄.; ) EtNme s'xy' …ziN/ svRivÊv' mtoå…s me 7 tIq;Rn;' cwv m;h;TMy' d;n;n;' cwv sˇm v[t;n;' iviv/;n;' c iv…/m;c+v me i√j 8 Evmuˇ_o n;rden pulSTyo muinsˇm" p[ov;c vdt;' ≈eœo n;rd' tpso in…/m( 9 pulSTy ¨v;c pur;,' v;mn' v+ye £m;…•≤%lm;idt" av/;n' iSqr' ’Tv; Í,u„v muinsˇm 10 pur; hwmvtI devI mNdrSq' mheêrm( ¨v;c vcn' ÎÇ; g[I„mk;lmupiSqtm( 11

877


VŒmana Puråâ

Ending:

kok;mu%e yTp[vd≤Nt ivp[;" p[y;gm;s;¥ c m;`m;se 6 s tTfl' p[;Py c v;mnSy s'k°tRyn( n;Nymn;" pd' ih gCzπNmy; n;rd teå¥ coˇ_' y{;jsUySy fl' p[yCzπt( 7 yd( .U…mlokÉ surlokl>ye mhTsu%' p[;Py nr" smg[m( p[;“oit c;Sy ≈v,;NmhWeR s*];m,en;RiSt c s'xyo me 8 ràSy d;nSy c yTfl' .ve¥TsUySR y ceNdog[hR ,e c r;ho" a•Sy d;nen fl' yqoˇ_' bu.≤u =te ivp[vre c s;…¶kÉ 9 du….R=s'pI…@tpu].;yeR D;t* sd; poW,tTpre c dev;…¶ivp[iWRrte c ip]o" sute tq; .[;t·r JyeœkÉ c – dˇe fl' tt( p[vd≤Nt dev;" s tt( fl' l.te c;Sy p;#;t( 10 ctudx R ' v;mnm;¸rg[‰' ≈ute c ySy;`cy;í n;xm( p[y;≤Nt n;STy] c s'xyo me mh;≤Nt p;p;Nyip n;rd;xu 11 p;#;Ts'≈v,;i√p[ ≈;v,;dip kSy…ct( svRp;p;in nXy≤Nt v;mnSy sd; mune 12 îd' rhSy' prm' tvoˇ_' n v;Cymetı·r.·ˇ_v…jRte i√jSy inNd;rithInd≤=,e shetvu ;Ky;vOtp;psÊve 13 nmo nm" k;r,v;mn;y inTy' yo vde…•yt' i√j" tSy iv„,u" pd' mo=' dd;it surpU…jt" 14 v;ck;y p[d;tVy' go.USv,Riv.UW,m( ) ivˇx;#‰' n ktRVy' k⁄vnR ( ≈v,n;xkm( 15 i]s'?y' c p#n( Í
878

Bråhmaâ

Branch 29A: PurŒöa (14A)

BrahmŒö¶a PurŒöa

Structure: Three Main Divisions, with a total of 156 chapters. Beginning:

≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) ≈IsrSvTyw nm" ) ≈Ir;mcN{;y nm" ) aq b[˜;<@mh;pur;,' pUv.R ;gp[;rM." ) nmonm" =ye sO∑* iSqt* sÊvmy;y v; ) nmo rjStm"sÊvi]Âp;y Svy'.vu e 1 …jt' .gvt; ten h·r,; lok/;·r,; ) ajen ivêÂpe, ingu,R ne gu,;Tmn; 2 b[˜;,' lokkÊ;;‹r' svRDmpr;…jtm( ) p[.'u .Ut.iv„ySy s;Mp[tSy c sTpitm( 3 D;nmp[itm' tSy vwr;Gy' c jgTpte" ) EeêYy| cwv /mRí s≤∫" seVy' ctu∑ym( 4 îm;•rSy vw .;v;…•Ty' sdsd;Tmk;n( ) a…v'xk" punSt;Nvw i£y;.;v;qRmIêr" 5 lok’LloktÊvDo yogm;Sq;y yogivt( ) asOjTsvR.tU ;in Sq;vr;…, cr;…, c 6 tmh' ivêkm;R,' sTpit' loks;≤=,m( ) pur;,;:y;n…jD;sugCR z;…m xr,' iv.um( 7 pur;,' loktÊv;qRm≤%l' veds'…mtm( p[xx's s .gv;n( v…sœ;y p[j;pit" 8 tÊvD;n;mOt' puy" p[dd* vxI loktÊviv/;n;q| p'c>y" prm;∫⁄tm( 12

879

Bråhmaâ Branch 29A: PurŒöa (14A)

BrahmŒö¶a Puråâ

Ending:

a®,; j…ynI pí;ˇq; sveêR rI mt; k*≤lnIit smuˇ_;in t;s;' n;m;in sU·r…." 41 c£ÉêrI' Nyse∞£˘ smPyR Vy;Py v„mR…, ˙id i]ko,' s'.;Vy id=u p[;g;idt" £m;t( 42 täihivR•‰seıIm;n;yu/;n;' ctu∑ym( NysedGNy;idko,eWu m?ye pI#ctu∑ym( 43 m?yvOˇ' Ny…sTv; c inTy;Wo@xk˘ Nyset( k;meêrI tq; inTy; inTy; c .gm;≤lnI 44 inTyÆKl•; tq; inTy; inTy; .e®i<@nI mt; viˆv;…sink; inTy; mh;vj[êe rI tq; 45 inTy; c dUtI inTy; c Tv·rt; tu tt" prm( k⁄lsuNd·rk; inTy; k⁄Ly; inTy; tt" prm( 46 inTy; nIlpt;k; c inTy; tu ivjy; pr; ttStu m©l; cwv inTypUv;R p[c+yte 47 p[.;m;≤link; inTy; …c]; inTy; tqwv c ) Et;≤S]ko,;Ntre, p;dto ˙id ivNyset( 48 inTy; p[moidnI cwv inTy; i]pursuNdrI ) tNm?ye ivNysedve Im%<@jgd;‚Tmk;m( 49 c£ÉêrI' ˙id NySy ’Tv; c£˘ smuıt» m( ) p[dXyR mu{;' yoNy;:y;' sv;RnNdmnu' jpet( 150 îTy;TmnStu c£Sy c£devI .iv„yit 151 îit ≈Ib[˜;'@mh;pur;,e ¨ˇr.;ge hyg[Iv;gSTys'v;de l≤ltop;:y;ne ctuíTv;·r'xoå?y;y" 44 sm;¢' l≤ltop;:y;nm( ) sm;¢…md' b[˜;<@mh;pur;,m( Reference: êŒstr´, Jagad´§a, êr´ VyŒsa Mahar·iproktaµ BrahmŒö¶apurŒöam, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1983).

880

Bråhmaâ

Branch 29A: PurŒöa (14B)

VŒyu PurŒöa

Structure: Two divisions and a total of 111 chapters. Beginning:

v;yuph;pur;,m( ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( – jyit pr;xrsUn"u sTyvtI˙dynNdno Vy;s" ) ySy;Sykmlg≤lt' v;ÑymmOt' jg≤Tpbit – p[p¥e devmIx;n' x;êt' /[vu mVyym( ) mh;dev' mh;Tm;n' svRSy jgt" pitm( 1 b[˜;,' lokkÊ;;‹r' svRDmpr;…jtm( ) p[.'u .Ut.iv„ySy s;Mp[tSy c sTpitm( 2 D;nmp[itm' ySy vwr;Gy' c jgTpte" ) EeêyRçvw /mRí sh…s≤ıctu∑y" 3 y îm;n( pXyte .;v;…•Ty' sdsd;Tmk;n( ) a;ivx≤Nt punSt' vw i£y;.;v;qRmIêrm( 4 lok’LloktÊvDo yogm;Sq;y tÊvivt( ) asOjt( svR.tU ;in Sq;vr;…, cr;…, c 5 tmj' ivêkm;R,' …cTpit' loks;≤=,m( ) pur;,; :y;n…jD;suvjR[ ;…m xr,' p[.mu ( 6 b[˜v;yumheN{e>yo nmS’Ty sm;iht" ) AWI,;ç v·rœ;y v…sœ;y mh;Tmne 7 t•P]e c;ityxse j;tUk,;Ry cWRye v…sœ;y c xucye ’„,√wp;yn;y c 8 pur;,' sMp[v+y;…m b[õˇ_' veds‚Mmtm( /m;RqNR y;ys'yˇu _ìr;gmw" suiv.UiWtm( 9 asIm’„,e iv£;Nte r;jNyeånupmiTviW p[x;stIm;' /me,R .U…m' .U…mpsˇme 10 AWy" s'ixt;Tm;n" sTyv[tpr;y,;"

881

Bråhmaâ Branch 29A: PurŒöa (14B)

VŒyu Puråâ

Ending:

gy;y;ç vOWoTsg;R≤T]" s¢k⁄lmuıret( 70 y] t] iSqt; dev; AWyoåip …jte≤N{y;" a;¥' gd;/r' ?y;Hz^;ıip<@;idd;nt" 71 k⁄l;n;' xtmuıT» y b[˜lok˘ nyet( iptøn( gy; gyo gy; idTyo g;y]I c gd;/r" 72 gy; gy;suríwv W@±gy; mu·ˇ_d;yk;" gy;:y;n…md' pue y" puyse¥" sm;iht" 75 ten∑e ' r;jsUyne aême/ne n;rd ≤l%e√; le%ye√;ip pUjye√;ip puStkm( 76 tSy gehe iSqr; l+mI" sups[ •; .iv„yit ¨p;:y;n…md' pu
Reference: The VŒyumahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1983).

882

Bråhmaâ


Skanda PurŒöa

Structure: 94,000 verses, in seven Khaö¶as Beginning:

aq ≈ISk;Nde mh;pur;,e p[qm' m;heêr%<@÷ p[;r>yte ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) — n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( 1 Vy;s ¨v;c ySy;Dy; jgTß∑;iv·r'…c" p;lko h·r" ) s'ht;R k;l®{;:yo nmStSmw ipn;ikne 1 tIq;Rn;muˇm tIq| =e];,;' =e]muˇmm( ) t]wv nw…mp;r
883


Skanda Puråâ

Ending:

p;p' p[xmm;y;it svRtIqRfl' l.et( 20 amOtne odrSqen …m[yNte svRdve t;" k<#iSqtivWe,;ip yo jIvit s p;tu v" 21 Vy;s ¨v;c îTyuKTvoprte sUte x*nk;idmhWRy" s'pJU y iv…/vTsUt' p[xSy;q;>ynNdyn( 22 AWy Ëcu" k…qto .vt; sgR" p[itsgRStqwv c v'x;nuvx ' c·rt' pur;,;n;mnu£m" 23 mNvNtrp[m;,' c b[˜;<@Sy c ivStr" Jyoití£SvÂp' c yq;vdnuv…,Rtm( 24 /Ny;" Sm ’t’Ty;" Sm vy' tv mu%;Mbuj;t( Sk;Nd' mh;pur;,' ih ≈uTv; sut;ithiWRt;" 25 vy' mhWRyo ivp[;" p[dµoå¥ tv;ååixW" Vy;six„y mh;p[;D …cr' jIv su%I .v 26 îit dÊv;ååixWStSmw dÊv; v;soiv.UW,m( ) ivsOJy lomx' sUt' y(Ôkm;R
884

Bråhmaâ


Garu¶a PurŒöa

Structure: Two Main Divisions, a total of 311 chapters, and about 8,000 verses. Beginning:

≈I’„,√wp;ynVy;smh;muinp[,It' ≈Ig®@mh;pur;,m( ) pUv;RımR ( ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) ajmjrmnNt' D;nÂp' mh;Nt' ixvmmlmn;id' .Utdeh;idhInm( ) sklkr,hIn' svR.tU iSqt' t' h·rmmlmm;y' svRg' vNd Ekm( 1 nmSy;…m h·r' ®{' b[˜;,ç g,;…/pm( ) devI' srSvtIçwv mnov;‘mR…." sd; 2 sUt' p*r;…,k˘ x;Nt' svRx;S]ivx;rdm( ) iv„,u.ˇ_' mh;Tm;n' nw…mW;ryCy;‹Stuvn( kivm( 4 x*nk;¥; mh;.;g; nw…mWIy;Stpo/n;" ) munyo rivs˚;x;" x;Nt; yDpr;y,;" 5 AWy Ëcu" ) sUt j;n;…s sv| Tv' pOCz;mSTv;mto vym( ) devt;n;' ih ko dev Èêr" pUJy Ev k" 6 ko ?yey" ko jgTß∑; jgTp;it c h≤Nt k" ) kSm;t( p[vˇRte /moR du∑hNt; c k" SmOt" 7 tSy devSy ik˘ Âp' jgTsgR" kq' mt" kìvtR[ "w s tu tu∑" Sy;t( kÉn yogen v;Pyte 8 avt;r;c kÉ tSy kq' v'x;idsM.v" v,;R≈m;id/m;R,;' k" p;t; k" p[vˇRk" 9 EtTsv| tq;åNy∞ b[iU h sUt mh;mte n;r;y,kq;" sv;R" kqy;Sm;kmuˇm;" 10 sUt ¨v;c pur;,' g;®@÷ v+ye s;r' iv„,ukq;≈ym( g®@oˇ_' kXyp;y pur; Vy;s;CΩt' my; 11

885


Garu¶a Puråâ

Ending:

AWy" svRmte ˇu jNtUn;' p[.v;idkm( my; p[oˇ_' ih vw muKTyw p[te Sy c*?vRdiw hkm( ind;n' væCm lok;n;' iht;y prm*W/m( 43 l;.SteW;' jySteW;' k⁄tSteW;' pr;jy" yeW;…mNdIvrXy;mo ˙dySqo jn;dRn" 44 iv„,um;Rt; ipt; iv„,uivR„,u" Svjnb;N/v" yeW;mev' iSqr; bu≤ınR teW;' dugiR t.Rvte ( 45 m©l' .gv;iNv„,um©R l' g®@?vj" m©l' pu<@rIk;=o m©l;ytn' h·r" 46 h·r.;RgIrqI ivp[; ivp[; .;gIrqI h·r" .;gIrqI h·rivRp;[ " s;rmet∆gT]ye 47 apiv]" piv]o v; sv;RvSq;' gtoåip v; y" SmreTpu<@rIk;=' s b;Á;>yNtr" xu…c" 48 ≈I.gv;nuv;c îit sUtmu%oÌI,;| svRx;S];qRm<@nIm( vw„,vI' v;Ksu/;' pITv; AWyStui∑m;“uy"u 49 p[xx'sSu tq;NyoNy' sUt' sv;RqdR ≤xRnm( p[hWRmtulç;pu" x*nk;¥; mhWRy" 50 sveWR ;' m©l' .Uy;TsveR sNtu inr;my;" ) sveR .{;…, pXyNtu m; k…íd( du"%.;G.vet( 51 îit g®@pur;,e p[te kLpe p[j;n;' ihtm….ihtm;d* sUtpu],e pu
886

Bråhmaâ


Kªrma PurŒöa

Structure: PªrvŒrdha and an UttarŒrdha, and approximately 6000 verses. Beginning:

kÀmpR ru ;,m( ) pUv.R ;g" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtIçwv tto jymudIryet( – nmS’Ty;p[mye ;y iv„,ve kÀmÂ R ip,e ) pur;,' sMp[v+y;…m yduˇ_' ivêyoinn; 1 s];Nte sUtmn`' nw…mWey; mhWRy" ) pur;,s'iht;' pu
887


Kªrma Puråâ

Ending:

s p[Te y gTv; inry;n( xun;' yoin' v[jTy/" 139 nmS’Ty h·r' iv„,u' jg¥*in' sn;tnm( a?yetVy…md' x;S]' ’„,√wp;yn' tq; 140 îTy;D; devdevSy iv„,or…mttejs" p;r;xyRSy ivp[WVRe y;RsSy c mh;Tmn" 141 ≈uTv; n;r;y,∂ºv;•;rdo .gv;nOiW" g*tm;y dd* pUvRe tSm;∞wv pr;xr" 142 pr;xroåip .gv;n( g©;√;re munIêr;" muin>y" kqy;m;s /mRk;m;qRmo=dm( 143 b[˜,; k…qt' pUv| snk;y c /Imte snTk⁄m;r;y tq; svRp;pp[,;xnm( 144 snk;∫gv;n( s;=;∂ºvlo yogivˇm" av;¢v;n( pçix%o devl;iddmuˇmm( 145 snTk⁄m;r;∫gv;n( suin" sTyvtIsut" le.e pur;,' prm' Vy;s' sv;RqsR çym( 146 tSm;√‰;s;dh' ≈uTv; .vt;' p;pn;xn" Ë…cv;Nvw .v≤∫í d;tVy' /;…mRkÉ jne 147 tSmw Vy;s;y gurve svRD;y mhWRye ) p;r;xy;Ry x;Nt;y nmo n;r;y,;Tmne 148 ySm;t( sÔ;yte ’Tò' y] cwv p[lIyte ) nmStSmw prex;y iv„,ve kÀmÂ R ip,e 149 îit ≈Ik*meR mh;pur;,e ¨ˇr.;ge p[itsg;Ridkqn' n;m ctuíTv;·r'xoå?y;y" 44 sm;¢ ¨ˇr.;g" ) îit kÀmpR ru ;,' sm;¢m( Reference: RŒma§aµkarabhaÿÿŒcŒrya, KªrmapurŒöam, (VŒrŒöas´: Iö¶olŒºjikala BukahŒusa, 1967).

888

Bråhmaâ


Matsya PurŒöa

Structure: 14,062 verses in 291 chapters. Beginning:

≈Imd(√p¯ ;ynmuinp[,It' mTSypur;,m( ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" p[c<@t;<@v;$ope p[≤=¢; yen idGgj;" .vNtu ivfl.©;y .vSy cr,;Mbuj;" 1 p;t;l;duTpit„,omRkrvstyo ySy puCz;….`;t;dU?v| b[˜;<@%<@VyitkrivihtVyTyyen;ååpt≤Nt ) iv„,omRTSy;vt;re sklvsumtIm<@l' VyXnuv;n;StSy;SyodI·rt;n;' ?vinrphrt;d…≈y' v" ≈utIn;m( – n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( 2 ajoåip y" i£y;yog;•;r;y, îit SmOt" i]gu,;y i]ved;y nmStSmw Svy'.vu e 3 sUtmek;g[m;sIn' nw…mW;r
889


Matsya Puråâ

Ending:

p[itm;l=,' t√∂ºvt;r;/n' tt" 27 p[;s;dl=,' t√Nm<@p;n;' tu l=,m( .iv„y{;jindex R o mh;d;n;nuk°tRnm( kLp;nuk°tRn' t√d≠gN[ q;nu£m,I tq; 28 EtTpiv]m;yu„ymetTk°itRivv/Rnm( EtTpiv]' kLy;,' mh;p;phr' xu.m( 29 aSm;Tpur;,;Tsu’t' nr;,;' tIq;RvlIn;mvg;hn;n;m( smSt/m;Rcr,o∫v;n;' sdwv l;.í mh;fl;n;m( 30 EtTpur;,' prm' svRdoWiv`;tkm( mTSyÂpe, h·r,; k…qt' mnveå,Rve 31 aSm;Tpur;,;dip p;dmek˘ p#πˇu y" soåip ivmuˇ_p;p" n;r;y,Sy;ååSpdmeit nUnmn©vi∂Vyvpu" su%I Sy;t( 32 pur;,metTskl' rhSy' ≈ı;iNvt" puyCyR b[˜;,' sidv;krm( Xlok˘ Xlok;/Rp;d' v; ≈ıy; y" Í,oit v; ≈;vye√;åip /mRDStTfl' Í,ut i√j;" 34 b[;˜,o l.te iv¥;' =≤T]yo l.te mhIm( vwXyo /nmv;“oit su%' xU{Stu ivNdit 35 a;yu„m;Npu]v;'ívw l+mIv;Np;pv…jRt" ≈uTv; pur;,m≤%l' x]u….í;pr;…jt" 36 îit ≈Im;TSye mh;pur;,eånu£m…,k; n;mwknvTy…/ki√xttmoå?y;y" 291 a;idt" Xlok;n;' sm∑‰˚;" 14062 îit ≈Imd(√p¯ ;ynmuinp[,It' mTSypur;,' sm;¢m( Reference: êr´maddvaipŒyanamunipraö´taµ MatsyapurŒöam, (ÌnandŒ§rama Press, 1981).

890

Bråhmaâ

Branch 29B: UpapurŒöa (01)

Ìdi PurŒöa


a;idpur;,m( ) p[qmo ?y;y" ) — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtIçwv tto jymudIryet( 1 a;id pur;, m;h;TMy rjojuWe jNmin sÊvvOˇye iSqt*p[j;n;' p[lye tmSpOxe ) rvINdun]e ;y c loks;≤=,e …cNm;]Âp;y pr;TmÂip,e 1 b[õit ySy ingmwivRvtO ≤çd'xo m;yeêr" pu®WÂp/ro yd'x" ) p[;,o dko bl…/y;' prmo ivxuı" a;nNdsTyvpuWe p[,m;…m tSmw 2 jIvo rhSyev iv/;y p;p' n in„’it' p[iw t ih ivêmUÊ;e"‹ ) sd;TmÂpoåNtrto ih xêt( p;pç pXyTyq puy;' ivingRt* dev* ’„,;nusÎx* xu.* 52 StuTv; nTv; ¨p;mN}y gt;v;TminkÉtnm( b;l;n;' vcn' kÉ…c∆gO¸neiR t kÉcn 53 SmOTv; pUv’ R t' kmR kÉ…cTsTy' c meinre s≤NdG/cets" kÉ…c√.UvSu te b[j*ks" 54 nNd;¥; v[jgop;í yxod;¥;í goipk;" pXyNto m;' k⁄x≤ln' modm;WursImkm( 55 nNdo mh;mn;St] i√j;n;Ùy ≈ıy; dd* d;n;in su.x O ' b[;˜,e>y" sm'tt" 56 yxod; pUvvR T]St; r=;iv…/mk;ryt( 57 îd' my; te k…qt' mh;∫⁄t' v;Lye vySywí·rt' my; yt( ) Í,oit y" ≈;vyte c .·ˇ_ rnugh[ o me .vtIh tiSmn( 58 îit ≈Isklpur;,s;r.Ute ≈Ia;idpur;,e vwy;…skÉ n;rdx*nks'v;de yml;junR mo=v,Rn' n;mwkoni]'xoå?y;y" 29 sm;¢çedm;idpur;,m( Ìdi Puråâ is found in the traditional list of Upapuråâs found in K™rma Puråâ.

Reference: Dubey, Jagdish Narayan, Ìdi-PurŒnam, (Varanasi: Sudarshan Book Agencies, 1990).

892

Bråhmaâ


Narasiµha PurŒöa


≈Inr…s'hpur;,m( p[qmoå?y;y" ≈Il+mInO…s'h;y nª" ) ≈IvedVy;s;y nm" ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( 1 t¢h;$kkÉx;NtJvlTp;vklocn vj[;…/kn%SpxR idVy…s'h nmoåStu te 2 p;Ntu vo nr…s'hSy n%l;õ™gl U ko$y" ihr
893

Bråhmaâ Branch 29B: UpapurŒöa (02)

Narasiµha Puråâ

Ending:

îTyett( svRm;:y;t' pur;,' n;r…s'hkm( svRp;phr' pu
Reference: The Narasiµhapurånam, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1987).

894

Bråhmaâ


Vi·höudharmŒú


iv„,u/m;R" — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y n;r;y,' nmSkéTy nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' cwv tto jymudIryet( 1 √wp;yn*œpu$in"sOtmp[mye ' puy;yyu" p[ITy; x*nk;¥; mhWRy" 1 t;n;gt;Ns r;jiWR" p;¥;~y;‹id….r…cRt;n( su%opiv∑;…Nv≈;Nt;N’ts'pX[ nsTkq;n( 2 tTkq;…." ’t;Ò;d" p[…,pTy ’t;Ô≤l" xt;nIkoåq pp[Cz n;r;y,kq;' pr;m( 3 r;jov;c ym;…≈Ty jg•;q' mm pUviR pt;mh;" ivp=;p˙t' r;Jymv;pu" pu®Woˇm;" 4 {*…,b[˜;S]indRG/o mm yen ipt;mh" prI≤=Tp[;,s'yog' devdevne l‚M.t" 5 tSy devSy m;h;TMy' deviWR…sımnuj"w ≈ut' subÛxo my; StutSy;xeWjNmn" 6 k" StotumIxStmj' ySywtTscr;crm( aVyySy;p[mye Sy b[˜;<@mudre xym( 7 ®{" £o/o∫vo ySy p[s;d;∞ ipt;mh" tSy devSy k" xˇ_" p[vˇ_⁄' v; iv.Uty" 8

895


Vi∑hûdharmå˙

Ending:

pu<@rIkSy yDSy s p[;“oit fl' nr" 101 m/um;/vs'De tu y" Í,oit nrÆSTvm;n( soåême/£to.UpR p[;“oTyivkl' flm( 102 Í
896

Bråhmaâ


Vi·höudharmottara PurŒöa

Structure: 807 chapters divided between three Khaö¶as Beginning:

≈Ig,ex;y nm" — ≈In;r;y,;y nm" aq ≈Iiv„,u/moRˇrp[;rM." n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtI' Vy;s' tto jymudIryet( 1 ’tvm;R tq; .oj" êeto m;ih„mtIpit" k⁄≤lNd" svRdmno m;livíN{vıRn" 2 vTsn;.í b;,í nNdIxo drsTpit" p[its;r…í]/nuSsvoR v;yurqStq; 3 {iv@" k⁄smu ;pI@ ao]í smrip[y" xM.u" ikr;tr;jía*rso n≤Ndvr/n" 4 v$üml U í tUnx e " x;Lví jnmejy" su˜r;r;jo d/Ik,oR b;Ò«ko dmnStq; 5 ihr
897


Vi·höudharmottara Puråâ

Ending:

in"≈eys' t∫gv;n;c∑;' t∫gv;iNvdt;' inrSy p;Pm;n' inrSy kLmW' xêCz;≤Ntmupny ≈ey ¨pny SviStmupny a;ixWmupny b[˜ p[p¥e Tv;' iv„,o .gvNpu<@rIk;=D;nwêyRx·ˇ_bltejogu,;Tmk prmpu®W prmm©Ly pµn;. hyixr" a;idvr;h nr…s'h v;mn i]iv£m r;m r;m v;sudve s˚WR, p[¥ªu ;in®ı pu®W sTy;≈ut v;sudve a;idm?yin/nkcei∑t ce∑;Tmm;y;hor;]yitm;≤ÔœxuKlv;s" sup,R t;lmkr?vjprmiv¥;kmRk;ln;. SvSTySm>y' SviSt p[j;>y" – Tvmev m']' Tv' r=; Tvm*W/mnuˇmm( i]iv/;dip du"%;Nm;' p[cody jgTpte 1 b[Ñp[p¥e Tv;' iv„,o xr,;gtvTsl td; xuıo mh;mit.Rvdu"%ivingRt" 2 îTyuˇ_" s c r;jeN{ AiW,; idVyc=uW; nmS’Ty AWe" p;d* sg," sh r;j…." p[d≤=,mup;’Ty p[ivvex pur' Svkm( 3 AWySteåPynuD;t; m;kú<@ºyne /Imt; nmS’Ty h·r' dev' Sv;≈m' j≤Gmre td; 4 r;j;ip vj[o /m;RTm; m;kú<@ºyne .;iWtm( pur;n' …cNty…•Ty' n;r;y,pr;y," r;Jy' c p[;ixW…•Ty' p[j; /me,R p;lyn( 5 îit ≈Iiv„,umh;pur;,e i√tIy.;ge ≈Iiv„,u/moRˇre tOtIy%<@º m;kú<@ºyvj[sv' ;de ≈Inr…s'hSto]v,Rn' n;m pçpç;xduˇri]xttmoå?y;y" 355 îit ≈Iiv„,u/moRˇr' sm;¢m( ) sm;¢' ced' iv„,umh;pur;,m( ) The Vi·öudharmottara PurŒöa is listed as an UpapurŒöa in the list found in B¨haddharma PurŒöa I: 25. 23-26 Reference: The Vi·öudharmottarapurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1998).

898

Bråhmaâ


KriyŒyogasŒropapurŒöa


aq ≈Ip;µe mh;pur;,e s¢m' i£y;%'@÷ p[;r>yte )≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq i£y;yogs;r%<@m;r>yte ) l+mIn;qpd;r…v'dyusl u b' ˜[ êe r;¥;mr≈e,inm[ixro≤lm;≤laml'vd' ;mhest' tm( ) .KTy; yo…gmnSt@;gsuWm;s'dohpu„yˇm' g©;M.omkr'd…bNduinkr'ss' ;rdu"%;phm( 1 yomUtIRb¸R /;iv/;y.gv;n[=•xeWj' gd( yTp;d;cRntTpr;nihpunmR∆i' tivê;,Rve ) svRp;[ …,∂»db' ju We vu sityRSyp[.o"s'tt' rMy£o@vpu/rR ;yhryedve ;ytSmw nm" 2 ved>e y¨ı»TysmSt/m;RNyoy'pru ;,eWju g;ddev" ) Vy;sSvÂpe,jg≤ıt;yv'dte metk ' ml;smetm( 3 Ekd;muny"svesR vRlokihtwiW," ) surMyen…w mW;r
899


KriyŒyogasŒropapuråâ

Ending:

Vy;s ¨v;c y≤Tk˘…cTk⁄®te kmRmTyoR/m| kl*yuge 46 tdpRyNe mh;iv„,* .·ˇ_.;vsmiNvt" iv„,* smipRt' kmRsvRmve ;=y' .vet( 47 Vy;s ¨v;c îit te k…qt' sv| vOˇ' b[;˜,sˇm yCΩTv;.·ˇ_.;vennromo=mv;“uy;t( 48 sUt ¨v;c Ev'pb[ o…/tStenjw…min" prm;Tmn; i£y;yogrto.UTv;jg;mprm'pdm( 49 îm' i£y;yogs;r' Vy;senoˇ_' mh;Tmn; ye p#÷it jn;.KTy;Í
900

Bråhmaâ


Kalki PurŒöa

Structure: Three Divisions called Aµ§has, with a total of 35 chapters. Beginning:

kæLkpur;,m( ) p[qm a'x ) p[qmoå?y;yx"--a ) seN{; devg,; munIêrjn; lok;" sp;l;" sd; Sv' Sv' kMmR su…sıye p[itidn' .KTy; .jNTyuˇm;" ) t' ivflexmnNtmCyutmj' sVvRDsVv;‹≈ym( ) vNde vwidkt;≤N]k;idiviv/w" x;S]w" puro v≤Ndtm( 1 n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇmm( devI' srSvtIçwv tto jymudIryet( 2 y∂odR<@kr;lspRkvlJvl;Jv;li√g[h;" net"u sTkrv;ld<@d≤lt; .Up;" ≤=it=o.k;" ) xêt( swN/vv;hno i√jjin" kæLk" pr;Tm; h·r" p;y;TsTyyug;id’Ts .gv;N/MmRpv[ iO ˇip[y" 3 îit sUtvc" ≈uTv; nw…mW;r
901


Kalki Puråâ

Ending:

ye .KTy;] pur;,s;rmml' ≈Iiv„,u.;v;Plut' Í
902

Bråhmaâ


êhivadharma PurŒöa

Structure: Twelve Chapters Beginning:

nmStu©ixríu‚Mb cN{c;mrc;rve ]wloKyngr;rM.mUlStM.;y xM.ve – sVv;‹k;rmxeWSy jgt" sVvRd;ixWm( gob[;˜,nOp;,;ç ixv ßvtu sVvRt" – ixvm;d* ixv' m?ye ixvmNte c sVvRd; sVveWR ;' ixv.ˇ_;n;' mnuj;n;ç n n" ---– me®pOœº su%;sIn' AiWsÏ¯" sm;vOtm( lok;nugh[ k˘ x;Nt' sVvRD' n≤NdkÉêrm( teW;' m?ye smuTq;y muinb[˜R sutoˇm" snTk⁄m;r" sutp;" pOCzit Sm yq;iv…/ – .gvn( sVvR/MmRD ixv/MmRpr;y, ≈otuk;m;" prN/MmR…mme sVveR sm;gt;" – a…¶∑om;dyo yD; b¸ivˇi£y;iNvt;" n;TyNtfl.U…yœ; b◊;y;ssmiNvt;" – n xKyNte yt" kˇumR Lpivˇwi√≥j;id…." mu%op;ymto b[iU h sVvRk;m;qRs;/km( – iht;y sVvRmÊy;‹n;' ixv/m| sn;tnm( n≤NdkÉêr ¨v;c ≈Uyt;m…./;Sy;…m su%op;y' mht( --prm' sVvR/Mm;‹,;' ixv/Mm| ixv;Tmkm( – ixven k…qt' pUVvRm( p;VvRTy;" W
903


êhivadharma Puråâ

Continuing:

Ekk;l' i√k;lç i]„k;l' c;ip inTyx" ye Smr≤Nt ivÂp;=' ivDey;Ste g,eêr;" – k°ˇR…y„y≤Nt ye ®{' s’dPy;xu tenr;" sVvRp;pw" p[mCu yNte s¢jNm’twrip – yeå∞Ry≤Nt sd; ®{' n te p[’it --îTyuˇ_o v" sm;sen ixv/moRå≤%l£m;t( ini∂≥∑" p[qmeå?y;ye xeWoåSywv p[ivStr" – yiSTvm' p#te inTy' Í,uy;√;ip .·ˇ_t" s muˇ_" sVvRp;pwStu ixvlokÉ mhIyte – @;ikNyo iviv/;k;r;" r=;‚Ns p[te n;yk;" n tSy pI@;' k⁄VvR≤Nt tq;Nyeåip ivihNsk;" – /nm;yuyx R o iv¥;' p[.;vmtul' l.et( xu.ne opcy' y;≤Nt inTypU,mR norq;" – îit ixv/RMmeR n≤NdkÉêrp[oˇ_É p[qmoå?y;y" ) snTk⁄m;r ¨v;c in∆RrTviv…/' pu
— ¨g[;y v;yumˇU yR e nm" — ®{;y;…¶mUˇyR e nm" — .v;y jlmUˇyR e nm" — sVv;‹y ≤=itmUˇyR e nm" — pxuptye yjm;nmUˇyR e nm" — .Im;y a;k;xmUˇyR e nm"mUˇyR oå∑* ixvSywt;" pUVv;‹id£myogt" a;¶ey;Nt" p[yoJy --- ixv;©p[pjU nm( – êhivadharma Puråâ is found in the traditional list of Upapuråâs found in K™rma Puråâ. Reference: ShŒstr´, MahŒmahopŒdhyŒya Haraprasad, ed., A descriptive catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. V, PurŒöa Manuscripts, (Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press,

904

Bråhmaâ


êhivadharmottara PurŒöa

Structure: Twelve Chapters. Beginning:

— nm" ixv;y nmoåStu tSmw skleNdu/;·r,e f,IN{rà¥uitk<#r;…g,e ) hr;y xu.;[ .kp;lm;≤lne iv….•dwTySf⁄·rtwkxU≤lne – D;nx·ˇ_/r' x;Nt' k⁄m;r' x˚r;Tmj' dev;·rSkNdn' SkNdmg‚St" p·rpOCzit .gv∂xRn;ˇuLymnujSy;ip sÌit" s¢ jNm;in ivp[Stu Svg;Rd.( ∑[ " p[j;yte – ten;…s n;q .Ut;n;' sVveWR ;mnukMpk" at" sVvRiht' /Mm| s'=pe ;t( p[vv[ Iih me – /Mm;‹ b¸iv/; deVy;" devne k…qt;" ikl te c ≈ut;STvy; sVveR pOCz;…m Tv;mh' tt" – ik˘ p[/;n;" ixv/m;R" ixvv;Kyç k°Îxm( ≤l©πå≤∞Rt" ixv" kÉn iv…/n; s'ps[ Idit – iv¥;d;nç d;n;n;' sVveWR ;muˇm' ikl t∞ ≈ut* i√jeN{;,;' n;NyeW;' smud;˙tm( tTpu
905


êhivadharmottara Puråâ

Continuing:

k;in …cˆ;in j;yNte .uˇ_xeW,e kMmR,; – s's;rs;gr;ór;t( /Mm;‹/MmoR‚MmRsïl;t( ) g.;Riddu"%fÉn;!‰;NmuCyNte deihn" kqm( – îit ixv/MmoRˇre W@©iv…/n;Rm p[qmoå?y;y" sm;¢" Excerpt from Chapter 5:

aq /Mm;‹" ixvenoˇ_;" ixv/Mm;‹gmoˇre Dey; b¸iv/;Ste c kMmRyogp[.de t" – ih's;doWivinMmuˇR _;" Klex;y;sivv≤∆Rt;" sVvR.tU iht;" xuı;" sus+U m;" sumhTfl;" – anNtx;%;k≤ll; ixvmUle c s'iSqt;" sVveR sVvRg,u opet;" ixv/Mm;‹" sn;tn;" – Ending:

prmexp[s;den muCyte n;] s'xy" ySm;dev' at" k⁄y;Rt( ixvpuStkv;cnm( – .og;pvgRfld' ixv.ˇ_o idne idne n m;rI n c du….R=' n r=;'…s n cety" – n;k;le …m[yte r;j; pI@‰te n c x]u…." Í,oit y] stt' ixv/Mm| nr;…/p" – t] dexe .ve…•Ty' sVveWR ;' deihn;' ixvm( îit ixv/moRˇre √;dxmoå?y;y" sm;¢m( ixv/moRˇr' x;S]' sm;¢…mit The êivadharmottara PurŒöa is the latter half of the êivadharma PurŒöa; it is sometimes considered an independent work, but it is not listed in any of the lists of UpapurŒöas. Reference: ShŒstr´, MahŒmahopŒdhyŒya Haraprasad, ed., A descriptive catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. V, PurŒöa Manuscripts, (Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, 1928).

906

Bråhmaâ


ParŒ§haropapurŒöa

Structure: 18 chapters and 1008 verses. Beginning:

≈Ig,ex;y nm" ≈Is;Mbsd;≤xv;y nm" s*rm<@lm?ySq' s;Mb' s's;r.eWjm( nIlg[Iv' ivÂp;=' nm;…m ≤xvmVyym( 1 me®Í©π sm;sIn' s's;rod…/t;rkm( xuk" p[,My svRD' ≈Ipr;xrm;dr;t( 2 pp[Cz prm' guÁ' .KTy; prmy; mud; .vp;xen bı;n;' .vp;xivmocnm( 3 pr;xroåip .gv;n( .v;nIpitvLl." p[;h k;®…,k" ≈Im;n( ?y;Tv; s;Mb' i]locnm( 4 ≈Ipr;xr ¨v;c pur; pur;,m≤%l' Vy;s" sTyvtIsut" ’Tv; ≤xvp[s;den munIn;' .;ivt;Tmn;m( 5 dxR…yTv; munIN{wStu sups[ •wmhR ;Tm…." pU…jto .vdTyq| pur…jTp;dvLl." 6 aiSm•vsre ≈Im;n( mh;k;®…,koˇm" mh;devo mh;deVy; sh s…•ihtoå.vt( 7 t' ÎÇ; devdevx e ' i]ne]' cN{xe%rm( p[,My muny" sveR d<@vTpO…qvItle 8 p[d≤=,]y' ’Tv; p[pJU y prmeêrm( p[d≤=,]y' ’Tv; p[pJU y prmeêrm( tu∑vë ˙u ∑≥ mnso iviSmt; ivvx;" xuk 9 muny Ëcu" ≤xv;y sTyivD;nmh;nNdSvÂip,e Svivl=,hIn;y Svy'v¥e ;y te nm" 10 Sv;Tm.Utmh;m;y;x·ˇ_vw.vs;≤=,e ß∑ê .]eR c s'h]eR svRSy jgt" sd; 11

907


ParŒ§haropapuråâ

Ending:

pr;xro muin" ≈Im;n;loKy xukm;iStkm( 125 .v;nIsiht' dev' .vrogivn;xnm( lMbodr' g,;?y=' x·ˇ_p;…,' c W
908

Bråhmaâ


NŒnd´ PurŒöa

Structure: Two Main Divisions, 67 Chapters Total Beginning:

≈I n;'dImu% pUJy; ≈I v£;'Gyw .gvTyw nm" ) m'gl;cr,m( ) g,pit" xuKl;br/r' dev' xixv,| ctu.jRu m( ) p[s• vdn' ?y;yet( svR ivflopx;'tye – jgd'b; b;l;kú m<@l;.;s;' ctub;R¸÷ i]locn;' ) p;x;'kx ⁄ /nub;R, /;ryNtI' ixv;' .je – ixv" krcr,' ’t' v;‘;yj' kmRjv' ; ) ≈v, nynj' v; m;ns' v;åpr;/' – iviht miviht'v; svR me tT=mSv ) jy jy k®,;B]e ≈I mh;devx'.o – iv„,u" s≤∞d;n'd Âp;y jgd'kr⁄ hetve ) sdoidt;y pU,;Ry nmoån't;y iv„,ve – sUy"R ihr
909


NŒnd´ Puråâ

Ending:

prSpr ivro/en n.v'it kd;cn a$‰t( kl* mh;m?ye sd;c;r p[vtRk" 103 teW;' c sTk⁄le jNm Svy'D;it yuge yuge b[˜D;nI mh;ivp[; s'py[ ;it ixv;lye 104 kl*yuge c a;k;r" a;¥'t ivv…jRt" m?ye /mR ivj;nIy;t( îit s'D;' iv/;y c 105 invs'it sd;c;re iv¥;'cvw .iv„yit p[cl'it ikyTk;l' £teTy;id mh;fl' 106 n;rdx;p dG/en n'dv;,eWu b[;˜…, s*:y' j;yte s;ip krk;∑' ivh;y c 107 .v'it su≤%n" sveR Âpy*vn g…jRt;" krk˘k, s'yˇu _; hem.;r p·rvOˇ;" 108 idVy cIr mh;xo.; pd=Irodv;ss" svex R ;p ivinmRˇu _; .tOR v;c; pr;y,;" 109 n'dv;,Sy m;h;TMy' y"Í,oit s bu≤ım;n( iv¥;qIR l.te iv¥;' /n;qIR /nm;“uy;t( 110 mo=;qIR l.te mo=' n;r;y, p[s;dt" ahon;'dImu%; ivp[; yeW;'t∑u o gd;/r" 111 .iv„y'it yq; Âp; p[;¢e ’tyuge pun" îit ≈Iviˆpur;,e ctur;xIit s;hß‰;' s'iht;y;' b[˜mrI…c s'v;de b[˜%'@º n;'dImu%v,Rne n'dv;,; m;h;TMye pun"’t yug;vSq; v,Rn' n;m p'cdxoå?y;y" Nandi (or Nanda) PurŒöa occurs on a list of the 18 UpapurŒöas found in ParŒ§ara PurŒöa. Reference: Bola, Vajeßaµkara Devaråma, ed., Nånd¥puråâ: nånd¥mukha bråhmaâjåtine ßåstr¥ya itihåsa [Skt., Guj.](Calcutta : Damodara Viththalarama Parakhani, 1948).

910

Bråhmaâ


SŒmba PurŒöa


aq s;Mbpur;,m( m©l;cr,m( it…mrk·rikr;t" p[Tyh' sp[.;v" kmlivipnbN/u" pu
911


SŒmba Puråâ

Ending:

EtTsv| Tvy; :y;t' b◊q| ≈uit ivStrm( yCz⁄Tv; svRp;pe>yo muCyte n;] s'xy" 6 sUymR iu ∂Xy;kúdye ' p;#k;y mh;Tmne yen tu„yeˇu .gv;n( .;Skr" p;ptSkr" 7 n;rd ¨v;c Í,u s;Mb mh;b;ho kq;y;…m tv;n` tmev sUy| ivD;y pUjitTv; yq;iv…/ 8 g'/pu„p;=twívw /UpdIpwStqoˇmw" Sv,;Rlk ' ;rvS]í ≤xroràiv.UW,w" 9 p[pJU y sUyR Âp' t' dey;c kipl; xu.; go/Um yv/;Ny;in m;WmuÌIiStl;'Stq; 10 gj;êmihWodR¥;{à;in iviv/;in c ihr
912

Bråhmaâ


Saura PurŒöa


s*rpur;,' Vy;s’tm( ySy;Dy; jgTß∑; ivr≤ç" p;lko h·r" s'ht;R k;l®{:yo nmStSmw ipn;ikne 1 tIq;Rn;muˇm' tIq| =e];,;' =e]muˇmm( munIn;m;≈yo inTy' nw…m„y;r
913


Saura Puråâ

Ending:

¨.yoíwv s'yog" svRp;phr" ≤xv" îit ≈uTv; tu deviWRb˜R[ ,o vcn' td; 54 jg;m kt|u tIq;Rin ≤xv.·ˇ_purS’t" EtTs*r' pur;,' te yq;vTsmudI·rtm( 55 yCΩTv; mnuj" sMyGgoshßfl' l.et( ik˘ tIqwSR tu p[y;g;¥w" ik˘ yDwm·RU rd≤=,w" 56 yid ≈ut' ≈∂/;nw" pur;,…mdmuˇmm( y] dev;…/devSy m;h;TMy' kQyte iv.o" 57 …grIxSy tu yogIN{;" ik˘ ten sÎx' .vet( ≈∂/;n" ≤xve .ˇ_o inyt" Í,uy;iddm( 58 b[;˜,;ÆHxv.ˇ_;'í purS’Ty sm;iht" sm;Py skl' ved' pUjye√;ck˘ nr" 59 knkÉn suxı u ne tq; cNdn%
Reference: Lele, Kasinatha Sastri, ed., SaurapurŒöaµ VyŒsak¨tam, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1980).

914

Bråhmaâ


KŒlikŒ PurŒöa


k;≤lk;pur;,m( ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) y¥o…g…..Rv.y;itRivn;xyoGym;s;¥ v≤NdtmtIvivivˇ_…cˇw" t√" pun;tu h·rp;ds rojyuGmm;iv.Rvt( £mivl…Ït.U.vRu " Sv" 1 s; p;tu v" sklyo…gjnSy …cˇeåiv¥;t…mßtr…,yRitmu·ˇ_het"u y; c;Sy jNtuinvhSy ivmoihnIit m;y; iv.ojRniu W xuık⁄b≤u ıhN]I2 Èêr' jgt;m;¥' p[,My pu®Woˇmm( inTyD;nmy' b+ye pur;,' k;≤lk;◊ym( 3 m;kú<@ºy' muin≈eœ' iSqt' ihm/r;≤NtkÉ muny" p·rpp[Cz⁄" p[,My km#;dy" 4 .gvn( sMyg;:y;t' svRx;S];…, tÊvt" ved;n( sv;|Stq; s;©;n( s;r.Ut' p[mQy c 5 svRvde We u x;S]eWu yo yo n" s'xyoå.vt( s s iCz•STvy; b[ñ( siv]ev tmíy" 6 jwv;tOk;g[‰ .vt" h(ps[ ;d;i√jsˇm in"s'xy; vy' j;t; vede x;S]e c svRx" 7 ’t’Ty; vy' b[˜S' Tvˇoå/ITy smNtt" srhSy' /mRx;S]' ydv;id SvyM.uv; 8 .UyStCzôtu…mCz;mo hr' k;lI pur; kqm( mohy;m;s yitn' stIÂpe, ceêrm( 9 svRd; ?y;ninly' y…mn' yitn;' vrm( s'=o.y;m;s kq' s's;rivmu%' hrm( 10 stI v; kqmuTp•; d=d;r;su xo.n; kq' hro mní£É d;rg[h,kmR…, 11 kq' v; d=kopen Tyˇ_deh; stI pur; ihmvˇny; j;t; .Uyo v; kqm;gt; 12 kqm/RxrIr' s;åhrt Smr·rpo" pun"

915


KŒlikŒ Puråâ

Ending:

ten gu¢…md' sv| k;mÂpe sur;lye t…md;nI' sm;:y;t' Vyˇ_I’Ty mhWRy" 32 yuSm;….rip no dey goPy' lokÉWu svRd; x#;y cl…c'Ê;;y n;iStk;y;…jt;Tmne 33 .·ˇ_≈ı;ivhIn;y n d;tVy' kd;cn îd' s’t( p#πd( yStu pur;,' k;≤lk;◊ym( 34 s k;m;n≤%l;n( p[;Py xeWåe mOtmv;“uy;t( m≤Ndre ≤l≤%t' ySy pur;,…mdmuˇmm( 34 sd; itœit no tSy ivfl" s'j;yte i√j;" yoå/IteåhNyhNyetd( guÁ' tN]…md' prm( 36 a/It;" skl; ved;Stenhe i√jsˇm;" tSm;•wv;…/koåNyoåiSt ’t’Tyo ivc=," 37 s su%I bLlv;\LlokÉ dI`;Ryru ip j;yte 38 yo lokmIx"stt' …b.itR y" p;lyTyNtkrStq;Nte îd' smSt' .[mm.[m' v; ydIyÂp' c nmoåStu tSmw 39 p[/;npu®Wo ySy p[pço yo…gn;' ˙id y" pur;,;…/po iv„,u" p[sIdtu s v" ixv" 40 yo het®u g[" pu®W" pur;," sn;tn" x;êt Èêr" pr" ) pur;,’√πdpur;,ve¥" p[St*…m t•*…m pur;,xeWe 41 îit skljgiä.itR y;s;' m/u·rpumohkrI rm;SvÂp; ) rmyit c hr' ixv;SvÂp; ivtrtu vo iv.v' xu.;in m;y; 42 îit ≈Ik;≤lk;pur;,e nvittmoå?y;y" 90 îit ≈Ik;≤lk;pur;,' KŒlikŒ Puråâ is found in the traditional list of Upapuråâs found in K™rma Puråâ.

Reference: Shastri, B.N., The KŒlikŒpurŒöa, Text, Introduction & Translation in English, 3 vols., (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1991).

916

Bråhmaâ


MahŒbhŒgavata PurŒöa


p[qmoå?y;y" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) devNe {m*≤lmNd;rmkrNdk,;®,;" ) ivfl' hrNtu herMbcr,;Mbujre,v" 1 n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nr' cwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtI' Vy;s' tto jymudIryet( 2 y;m;r;?y iv·r≤çrSy jgt" ß∑; hr" p;lk" s'ht;R …g·rx" Svy' sm.vı‰ey; c y; yo…g…." ) y;m;¥;' p[’it' vd≤Nt munyStÊv;qRivD;" pr;' t;' devI' p[,m;…m ivêjnnI' Svg;RpvgRpd[ ;m( 3 y; SveCzy;Sy jgt" p[iv/;y sOi∑' s'p;[ Py jNm c tq; pitm;p xM.um( ) ¨g[Sw tpo….rip y;' smv;Py pàI' xM.u" pd' ˙id dè p·rp;tu s; v" 4 Ekd; nw…mW;r
917


MahŒbhŒgavata Puråâ

Ending:

s;=;Nmhext;' y;it ’tp;pxtoåip cet( 39 y] k⁄] c s'Sq;y s'SmreTprmeêrm( t]wv svRtIq;Rin invs≤Nt mh;mte 40 îit te k…qt' sv| yTpO∑' muinsˇm mh;p;phr' pu
918

Bråhmaâ


Dev´ BhŒgavata PurŒöa

Structure: Twelve Skandhas. Beginning:

≈Im∂ºvI.;gvtm( ) p[qm" SkN/" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) — svRctw NyÂp;' t;m;¥;' devI' c /Imih ) bu≤ı' y; n" p[cody;t( 1 x*nk ¨v;c sUt sUt mh;.;g /Nyoå…s pu®WWR. yd/It;STvy; sMyKpur;,s'iht;" xu.;" 2 a∑;dx pur;,;in ’„,en muinn;ån` k…qt;in suidVy;in pi#t;in Tvy;ån` 3 p'cl=,yuˇ_;in srhSy;in m;nd Tvy; D;t;in sv;R…, Vy;s;TsTyvtIsut;t( 4 aSm;k˘ pu
919


Dev´ BhŒgavata Puråâ

Ending:

s*rwí g;,pTywí Sve∑xˇ_Éí tu∑ye 21 pi#tVy' p[yàen nvr;]ctu∑ye vwidkìinRjg;y]Ip[Itye inTyxo mune 22 pi#tVy' p[Tynen ivro/o n;] kSy…ct( ¨p;sn; tu sveWR ;' x·ˇ_yuˇ_;åiSt svRd; 23 tCzˇ_Érve toW;q| pi#tVy' sd; i√jw" S]IxU{o n p#πdte Tkd;ip c ivmoiht" 24 Í,uy;id≠√jvK];ˇuinTymevie t c iSqit" ik˘ punbR¸noˇ_Én s;r' v+y;…m tÊvt" 25 veds;r…md' pu
920

Bråhmaâ


Dev´ PurŒöa


aq devIpur;,m( ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) — nmíi<@k;yw ) n;r;y,' nmS’Ty nrçwv nroˇmm( ) devI' srSvtIçwv tto jymudIryet( – nmS’Ty ixv;' devI svR.;gvt;' xu.;m( ) pur;,' sMp[v+y;…m yqoˇ_' b[˜,; pur; 1 AWy Ëcu" ) .gv'STv' smStSy Î∑;Î∑Sy tÊvivt( ) pur;,;qR vy' sveR a;gt; .uiv .;ivt;" 2 kQyt;' y] òr;¥; .Ut;" s;Mp[td;nv;" ) .iv„y;í ivn;ix„ye devI devnmS’t; 3 îN{Sy c idv" p[;i¢˙≥tr;JySy d;nvw" ) yq; x£o jy' c£É devdevnmS’t" 4 avt;r; muin≈eœ Wiœ.edgt; yq; ) pUjyet( s pOqu r;j; devI' sv;Rqs| ;/nIm( 5 yq; m;tOsmuTptI ®ron;Rxo mh;Tmn" ) c;mu<@; yen v; devI yen v; svRm©l; 6 in®ˇ_;in c n;m;in vˆw sNtpR,' yq; ) vsu/;r;iv…/St;t devt;Sq;pn;idkm( 7 y] m;yo mh;m;yo inhto r;ms;ykì" y] s'Sq;ipt; devI b¸/; vsu/;tle 8 Sto];…, c iv…c];…, ixv;¥w" xu.het…u ." ’t;in b¸.ed;in tq; m;h;TMyv,Rn; 9 ixvSy c tq; Sto]' y;ml' iv„,ub˜[ ,o" ’t' lokopk;r;y xu£,É c mh;Stvm( 10 rqy;];dy" pu
921


Dev´ Puråâ

Ending:

vsNte .U„yte devI ¨m; svRs% u p[d; ind;è vihloRkNtu svRk;msmiNvtm( 51 tiSmn( .og;n( mh;n( .uKTv; devIlokÉ mhIyte p[;vO$( k;le ®{lok˘ Í,uy;¥;it p;…qRv" 52 xrt( sv;Rnv;“oit k;m;n[;Jy' nOpoˇm i]" ≈uTv; .·ˇ_m;Sq;y muCyte svRp;tkì" 53 ivxuıí .ve√x ÷ " svRk;mfl;vh" p'c ≈uTv; mh;?y;yI SvgRlokÉ mhIyte 54 m;tOs`' ' ymo inTy' tu„yte aivc;r,;t( tSy .og' v,R…ytu' mm v;,I' n xKnuy;t( 55 îhlokÉ xu.' .uKTv; tdNte ixvlokt" %$(v;v/' tq; ≈uTv; ivn;ykSy jNm c 56 m;tOlokmv;“oit £°@te c …cr' su%I devI' sMpUj…yTv; tu iv…/n; nOpsˇm 57 p[s;dç p[kv⁄ I|t p[Ty=; c .vet( ixv; ) sd;c;r" xu.;h;r" sv|sg' ivv…jRt" 58 v;cyn( pur;,meˇˇu svRk;mmv;“uy;t( ) v;cyn( xtm/| v; p[Ty=' p[;“uy;iCzvm( 59 Et∞;>yudyp;d' xtw≤S]….nRroˇmw" ) shßw√;RdxwvTR sk…qt' svR…s≤ıdm( 60 — nmo dug;Ryw îit ≈I devIpur;,e v;cniv…/n;Rm a∑;…v'xTy…/kxttmoå?y;y" ) a;¥e deVyvt;re devIpur;,' sMpU,mR ( Dev´ PurŒöa is only found in the list of UpapurŒöas given in EkŒmra PurŒöa [1.20b23]. Reference: Kumar, Pushpendra, Dev´ PurŒöam: First Critical Edition, (New Delhi: Srilabahadurasastrikendriyasamskrtavidyapitham, 1976).

922

Bråhmaâ


Dev´rahasyam

Structure: 60 chapters in two divisions plus a Pari§i·hÿa. Beginning:

≈IdevIrhSym( ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) nm≤S]pursuNdywR ≈I.wrv ¨v;c a/un; deiv v+y;…m rhSy' prm;∫⁄tm( y• sveWR u tN]eWu y;ml;idWu .;iWtm( 1 pr;devIrhSy;:y' tN]' mN]o∞ivg[hm( tÊv' ≈IWo@x;=y;‹" svRSv' mm p;vRit 2 ap[k;Xymd;tVy' prmo∞flp[dm( .og;pvgRd' lokÉ s;/k;n;' su%;vhm( 3 ≈IdeVyuv;c .gvn( svRtN]D k*≤lkÉêr x˚r TvTp[s;d;Nmy; D;t' tÊv' deVy;" sudl u .R m( 4 tN]' mN];Tmk˘ guÁ' sU…ct' .vt; Svym( pr;devIrhSy;:y' dI=;pUv| vdSv me 5 ≈I.wrv ¨v;c devIrhSymIx;in Í,u Tv' .·ˇ_pUvk R m( yen ≈v,m;]e, koi$pUj;fl' l.et( 6 aq;h' in,Ry' v+ye prm' gu®ix„yyo" ivc;yR iv…/vıIm;n( dI=;kmR sm;cret( 7 b[˜;idk°$pyRNt' jgt( Sq;vrj©mm( pr;deVy; pxuTven moiht' ivgtSpOhm( 8 tq;ip tTp[s;den sevy; tTpd;Bjyo" k*≤lk" pxu.;ven muˇ_o D;n' .jet( tt" 9 dI=;' tSy;" ixve mN]I lB?v; gu®pd;cRn;t( dI≤=t" s .veJD;nI dI=;hIno .vet( pxë" 10 ySy dI=; ixve n;iSt jIvn' tSy in„flm( s j;tu noˇre∂iº v inry;Mbuin/e" Kv…ct( 11

923


Dev´rahasyam

Ending:

gu®deiR v pro /moR gu®rev pr; git" gu®m>ycRy…e •Ty' yen devI p[sIdit 25 îtId' dxmItÊv' sv;RgmrhSykm( s;r;Ts;rtr' deiv gopnIy' mum=u …u ." 26 îtId' prm' tÊv' tÊv' svRSvmuˇmm( dug;RrhSys;r;!‰' guÁ' goPy' c s;/kì" 27 îit devIrhSy;:yStN]oåy' tN]s;gr" svRSv' me rhSy' me sv;Rgmin…/" pr" 28 ≈Idug;Ry;StÊv.Uto mN]r;jmyo /[vu " …s≤ıp[do mh;deiv pUjnIyoåiSt s;/kì" 29 ≈IdeVyuv;c .gvn( .vt; .KTy; p[s;doåy' m…y ’t" yÊvy; v…,RtStN]" ≈Idug;Ry;" k⁄lêe r 30 £°t;iSm tv d;SyiSm .ˇ_;iSm i]pur;Ntk svRq; r=,Iy;iSm ikmNyt( kqy;…m te 31 ≈I.wrv ¨v;c îd' devIrhSy;:y' tN]r;j' mheê·r ad;tVym.ˇ_É>yo dur;Tm>yo mheê·r 32 Svpu]>e yoåNyix„ye>yo n dey' tu mum=u …u ." îd' ih s;r' tN];,;' tÊv' svRSvmuˇmm( 33 rhSy' deiv dug;Ry; gopnIy' Svyoinvt( îit ≈I®{y;mltN];NtgRt-≈IdevIrhSye dxmIiv…/inÂp,' Wi∑tm" p$l" 60 Dev´rahasya is listed by Hazra in Studies in the UpapurŒöas, Vol. 2, as one of the êhakta UpapurŒöas. Reference: Kak, Ram Chandra, and Shastri, Harabhatta, Devirahasya and Pari§i·hÿas, (Vadodara: Butala Publications, 1941).

924

Bråhmaâ


Gaöe·a PurŒöa

Structure: Two Khaö¶as, of 92 chapters and 155 chapters, and a total of 11,079 versBeginning:

aq ≈Ig,expur;,m( ) a;r'. nmSk;r;" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) ≈ISv;n'dx e ;y b[˜,Spteynm" ) ≈Imh;…sı‰wnm" ) ≈Imh;buı‰wnm" ) ≈Il=;ynm" ) ≈Il;.;ynm" ) ≈In¶.wrvr;j;ynm" ) ≈Imd( g,k;y pr'b˜[ gurvenm" ) ≈Imn( muÌl;y prm;c;y;Ry nm" ) ≈I .[x U @'U « g;GyR g[Tsmd .Ogu Vy;s;ynm" ) ≈Imt( sklg;,exgu®>yo a;c;ye>R yí nmonm" ) ≈Ib[˜.Uy mh;…s≤ıpI#;/Iêr ≈ImiÌ·rj;sut yogIN{;ynm" ) ≈ImÌ;,ex jgÌurve ≈ImÌ,exyogIN{;c;y;Rynm" ) ≈Imd'kx ⁄ /;·r,e sÌurve yogIN{;ynm" ) ≈IsÌuÂ herb' r;j;ynm" ) a;?y;y Ek nmStSmw g,ex;y b[˜iv¥; p[d;…yne ySy;gSTy;yte n;m ivfls;gr xoW,e 1 AWy Ëcu" ) sUt sUt mh;p[;D vedx;S] ivx;rd ) svR iv¥; in/e Tvˇo vˇ_;åNyo nopl>yte ) jNmjNm;'trIy' n" iSqt' pu
925


Gaöe·a Puråâ

Ending:

Ek;'gœu nº yiStœº√W;R,;myut' nr" dx;?y;yßutre Sy pur;,Sy tq; flm( 57 l.te m;nvo .KTy; in…ít' n;] s'xy" a;jNmmr,;…•Ty' Í,uy;Nm;nvo .uiv 58 pur;,' tu g,exSy c£vtIR .vetu s" a;jNmmr,;¥Stu k;xIv;s' kroit y" 59 tTpu
Reference: The Gaöe§a PurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1993).

926

Bråhmaâ


Mudgala PurŒöa

Structure: Nine Khaö¶as and 428 chapters Beginning:

aq ≈ImNm*Ìlpur;,p[;r>yte ) ?y;ye iSqre, …cˇen g,ex' svR…s≤ıdm( ) bu≤ıp[k;xk˘ pU,| yo…gn;' ˙id s'iSqtm( 1 …jt' ten;≤%l' n;n;b[˜v,Rnv…,Rtm( ) n;n;jgTsmUh' vw g,exne o.y' ’tm( 2 .ˇ_s'r=,;q;Ry ingu,R " sgu,Stu y" ) n;n;vt;rv;Nsoåip n;n;.ed/ro b.* 3 tSmw nmo g,ex;y nrk⁄j˘ rÂip,e ) sgu,o nrÂpo yo ingu,R o gjvK]k" 4 nm" ixv;y x;'t;y iv„,ve p[.iv„,ve ) sUy;Ry xˇ_ye cwv ctu/;R te iv.;…gne 5 b[˜;,' xeWn;g' c nr' n;r;y,' sd; ) nm;…m .;vyuˇ_oåh' pur;,pu®W' prm( 6 dev;n;' yo…gn;' cwv mhWIR,;' mh;Tmn;m( ) v[j;…m xr,' inTy' pur;,D;n…sıye 7 pur;kLpeå.viNvp[;" x*nk;¥;" sus;/n;" k≤ldoW.y;TsveR nw…mW;r
927


Mudgala Puråâ

Ending:

y¥idCz;mhe n;q tˇt( …sı‰tu svRd; 50 g;,pTy;'í n" sv;Rn( k⁄® Tv' svRd; pr;n( îm;n( vr;n( gu,;?y= p[;…qRt;n( dev deih n" 51 tqeit t;nqoKTv;ås* g,exo b[ñ;yk" Vy;s;dI'í jg;d;ås* vO,?u v' v;æHzt;n( vr;n( 52 twStqwv g,;?y=" p[;…qRto g,pip[y"w tqeit t;nqoKTv; c sUtmUce c ivflp" 53 vr;n( b[iU h mh;.;g Tvy; s'≈;ivt' prm( i√je>ySten s't∑u o d;Sy;…m s tq;åb[vIt( 54 tqeit tmqoKTv;ås* /Umv[ ,oR gj;nn" a't/;Ry Svm;Tm;n' Sv;n'dSqo b.Uv h 55 sveR s't∑u …cÊ;;Ste Sv' Sv' Sq;n' yyuStt" ) m*Ìl' tTsm;…≈Ty g,exm.jn( prm( 56 îm;' muÌlj;' Xlokì" s'iht;' vedbOi' ht;m( ) ]yo…v'xits;hßw" s;/ek R xts'ytu "w 57 a∑;…v'xTy…/kìí a?y;ywí ctu" xtw" ) %<@¯í nv…." pU,;| svR…s≤ımyI…ct;m( 58 muÌl" kqy;m;s sveWR ;' ihtk;r,;t( ) xBdb[˜rhSy;:y;' s;=;d(b˜[ p[d;…ynIm( 59 ao…mit ≈Imd;NTye pur;,opinWid ≈ImNm*Ìle mh;pur;,e nvme %<@º yogc·rte yog;mOt;qRx;S]e d=muÌls'v;de pur;,sm;i¢v,Rn' n;mwkcTv;·r'xoå?y;y" ) ≈Igj;nn;pR,mStu ) Listed as an "Ati-PurŒöa," in the list of 72 PurŒöas and UpapurŒöas presented by êhivŒnanda NauÿiyŒla, in the introduction to Skandapuranantargata Kedarakhandam: Hindi Anuvada Sahita, (Prayaga: Hindi Sahitya Sammelana, 1994). Reference: Atha êr´mudgalapurŒöaµ PrŒrabhyate, (Lak·m´ NivŒsa Hindu Colony: MudgalapurŒöaprakŒ§anamaö¶alam, 1976).

928

Bråhmaâ


Kapila PurŒöa


kiplpur;,m( aq p[qmoå?y;y" p;Ntu vo jldXy;m;" x;©≥Jy;`;tkkúx;" ]wloKym<@pStM.;íTv;ro h·rb;hv" 1 xLy…jduv;c my; ≈ut;in =e];…, pu
929


Kapila Puråâ

Ending:

xƒc£;i˚t' deh' tulsId;m.UiWtm( ≈Imh;dev ¨v;c k;m £o/p·rTyˇ_' …cˆ' vw„,vs'Dkm( 20 EW;' k*pInk˘ ≈eœ' mu%e c m/ur' vc" svRd;nNd˙dy' …cˆ' vw„,vs'Dkm( 21 a;nNd;≈usm;yuˇ_mu∞gw oRivNdk°tRnm( as©Sy p·rTy;g…íˆ' vw„,vs'Dkm( 23 svRSv' n;m bu≤ıTv' svRsÊvsu%;vhm( dy;sTysm;yuˇ_' …cˆ' vw„,vs'Dkm( 24 inmRm' inrh˚;r' devt;b[;˜,;cRnm( st;' sMp[Iitjnn' …cˆ' vw„,vs'Dkm( 25 Ev' vw„,v…cˆ;in ySy s≤Nt s vw„,v" aNye ye d‚M.k; luB/; teW;' ≤l©÷ n k;r,m( 26 îTyuKTv; .gv;n( xM.ug*RrI£°@;guh;Ntrm( p[tIh;rI Tvs* nNdI t];Ste /Otd<@k" 27 n≤NdkÉêrsMv;dmev' devne xM.un; svRx;≤Ntkr' pu
930

Bråhmaâ


Bïhaddharma PurŒöa

Structure: Three Khaö¶as, with a total of 74 chapters. Beginning:

bOhımRpru ;,m( ) — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) — .U.vRu Sv·rit tTsivtuVvRr
931


Bïhaddharma Puråâ

Ending:

Ev' vOˇe s˚r;,;' vOÊy;idp·rkLpne ’t;Ô≤lpu$; .UTv; s˚r; v;Kymb[vu n( 72 s˚r; Ëcu" aSm;k˘ vwidk˘ Sm;Ê;| tq;g…mkmev c k;…yR„yit ko ivp[" kq' no invOiR t.Rvte ( 73 b[;˜,; Ëcu" …v'xtIn;Ntu j;tIn;' puro/;" ≈oi]y; vym( 74 aNyeW;' Wo@x;n;Ntu puro/;" pitto i√j" t∆;ittuLyt;' y;y;d(b˜[ bN/u.vR de ip 75 Vy;s ¨v;c îTyev' STy;py;m;surlÏ‰x;sn; i√j;" sm;crn( s˚r;í b[;˜,w®idt' yq; 76 r;j; SvSqmn; .UTv; b[;˜,;n( smpUjyt( pU…jt;Stu gt; ivp[; yq;Sq;n' mud;iNvt;" 77 r;j; c pOqnu ;m; s hInxSy;' /r;' td; dudoh yen xSy;id vTsdohk.edt" 78 sveR p[l…e .re sVv| v[IihzNdoivW;idkm( ) Etˇe k…qt' ivp[ yTpO∑oåh…mh Tvy; 79 s˚r;,;mup;:y;n' pOqk u °·Ê;‹" sup„u kl; ) EtCz^v,p;#Sy fl' pu
932

Bråhmaâ


Bhavi·hyottara PurŒöa

Structure: 208 chapters. Beginning:

≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) ≈I srSvTyw nm" ) — nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y ) kLy;,;in dd;tu vo g,pityRiSm•tu∑e sit =odIySyip kmR…, p[.ivtu' b[˜;ip …j˜;yte ) .eje y∞r,;rivNdms’Ts*.;Gy.;Gyodyws( tenWw ; jgit p[…s≤ımgm∂ºvNe {l+mIrip 1 xêTpuy;gt; Î∑; Vy;s;¥;" prmWRy" 8 m;kú<@ºy" sm;<@Vy" x;i<@Ly" x;k$;yn" g*tmo g;lvo g;GyR" x;t;tppr;xr* 9 j;md¶‰o .r√;jo .Og.u ;Rg·u rrev c ¨ˇ'k" x'%≤l≤%t* x*nk" x;k$;yin" 10 pulSTy" pulho d;L>yo bOhdê" slomx"

933


Bhavi·hyottara Puråâ

Ending:

v[t' ih s;'.r;…y
934

Bråhmaâ


N´lamata PurŒöa

Structure: 1453 verses Beginning:

nIlmtpur;,m( ao' SviSt ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) nmo .gvte v;sudve ;y aom( ) ≈Iinv;s' h·r' dev' vrd' prmeêrm( ]wloKyn;q' goivNd' p[,My;=rmVyym( 1 p·r≤=√÷x.OCzÎm;•OpitjRnmejy" pp[Cz ≤x„y' Vy;sSy vwxMp;ynm≤Ntk;t( 2 ≈Ijnmejy" mh;.;rts'g;[ me n;n;dexnr;…/p;" mh;xUr;" sm;y;t;" iptø,;' me mh;Tmn;m( 3 kq' k;XmIrko r;j; n;y;tSt] k°tRy p;<@vw/;RtrR ;∑^vw ;R n vOt" s kq' nOp" 4 kXmIrm<@l' cwv p[/;n' jgit iSqtm( 5 vwxMp;yn" ----- v;sudve ' Svy'vre ) jg;m m;/v' yoıë' cturg' bl;iNvt" 6 t] tSy;.vd( yuı' v;sudve ne /Imt; y;Îx' v;sudve Sy nrkÉn sh;.vt( 7 tt" s v;sudve ne suyı u e ivinp;itt" 8 aNtvRàI' tSy pàI' v;sudve oå>yWecyt( .iv„yTpu]r;Jy;q| tSy dexSy g*rv;t( 9 tt" s; suWvu e pu]' b;l' gonNds'…Dtm( b;l.;v;t( p;<@ëstu nw ;RnIt" k*rvwnR v; 10 jnmejy" dexSy g*rv' c£É ikmq| i√jsˇm vsudve o mh;Tm; yd>yiWçt( Svy' ≤S]ym( 11 vwxMp;yn"

935


N´lamata Puråâ

Ending:

amOtSv;dus≤ll;' nO,;' Îi∑mnohr;m( 1443 m;tev vrd;' devIm….gCz≤Nt ye nr;" teå….gCz≤Nt r;jeN{ p[itœ;' .uiv m;nv;" 1444 smu{ÂpSy hrSy .;y;| ihm;lySy;i{pteStnUj;m( suSv;dutoy;mOiWvyRj∑u ;' t;' Tv' piv];' p[,mSv r;jn( 1445 …sN/u≤S]ko$I c tq; ivxok; pu
Reference: Kumari, Ved, The Nilamata Purana, vol. II, (A Critical Edition and English Translation), (Srinagar: J & K Academy of Art, Culture and Languages, 1973).

936

Bråhmaâ


EkŒmra PurŒöa

Structure: Five Parts, with a total of 70 chapters. Beginning:

Ek;m[pru ;,m( ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) — nmo .gvte ivfleêr;y ) k°itRySR y sur;surmw iuR nvrwr;gIyte inTyxo n;k+m;tlv;…s…." surnrwivR¥;/rw" ik•rw" ) p;t;le„vip kNdreWu c mhI/[;,;' gtw" p•gwb˜R[ opeN{sv;sv;iNvtjgTk]eR nm" xM.ve 1 pur; sTyyuge r;j; /mR?vj îit ≈ut" ) svRD…mit pp[Cz sTy' sTyvtIsutm( 2 /mR?vj ¨v;c vedVy;s …≈y;v;s svRD prm;qRd ) ≈otu…mCz;Myh' ik˘…c•O,;\ su’tm∫⁄tm( 3 an;y;sen b¸l' pu
937


EkŒmra Puråâ

Ending:

îTyuKTv; s mh;devo /OTv; tt( krp˚jm( vOWe invex…yTv; t' %SqSt;•;h x˚r" 72 yUy' muink⁄l;" sveR mm n;m;nuk°ˇRn;t( mm s;yuJymmlm…cr;t( p[;PSyq;xu c 73 îTyuKTv;NtdR/e xM.u AiW,; Svg,w" sh te c ivp[;Stq; ’Tv; gt;" ixvgOh' tt" 74 y îd' Í,uy;d( idVymek;m[;:y' pur;,km( s y;it .vn' xM.on;RNyq; Í,u .Upte 75 p#π¥" pry; .KTy; p;#ve√; sm;iht" tSy p;p;in nXy≤Nt b[˜hTy;idk;in c 76 aqv; b¸noˇ_Én ik˘ D;nen mhIpte l.et( fl' b[˜,oˇ_' y;it s;yuJymwêrm( 77 ixvm;d* ixv' m?ye ixvmNte p[itiœtm( gob[;˜,nOp;,;' c ixv' .vtu svRd; 78 xix.toˇ_md" pur;tn' sklp;pinsUdn' mht( ivmltejs; Í,oit yo inlymwêr' p[y;it s" 79 EkStejo….re…." p·r˙tivmle JyoitW;' yo iv.;t;STv∑* te lokp;l;" suiv/Otixrs; x;sne inTyyuˇ_;" ) ß∑;Vy;.Uts'`;íturjin jgt( pç.*t;Tmk˘ yo yoås* mU·Ê;| iv.itR i√gu…,tctur;' p;tu v" ’iˇv;s" 80 îTyek;m[pru ;,e W$(s;hß‰;mwêy;| s'iht;y;' pçmeå' xe anu£mfl≈uitkqn' n;m s¢ittmoå?y;y" ) sm;¢…mdmek;m[pru ;,m( ) EkŒmra PurŒöa is included only in its own list of UpapurŒöas

Reference: Dhal, Upendra Nath, The EkŒmra PurŒöam, Critical Edition, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1986).

938

Bråhmaâ


PurŒöaSaµhitŒ

Structure: 34 chapters, and 3158 verses. Beginning:

≈Ipu®Woˇm;y ’„,;y nm" ) ≈Imd(√p¯ ;ynp[,It; pur;,s'iht; ) x*nk ¨v;c sUt sUt mh;.;g Tvy; .gvt; st; Vy;sp[s;d;…/gtx;S]sMbo/nen c 1 a∑;dxpur;,;in seith;s;in c;n` ¨p£mops'h;riv…/noˇ_;in ’Tòx" 2 ctudx R shß' tu m;TSy' p[oˇ_mitSf⁄$m( tTs':y;k˘ .iv„y' c p[oˇ_' p'cxt;…/km( 3 m;kú<@ºy' mh;rMy' p[oˇ_' nvshßkm( aq .;gvt' idVym∑;dxshßkm( 4 xtoˇr' c b[˜;<@÷ sUysR :' y;shßkm( k…qt' b[˜vwvtRm∑;dxshßkm( 5 shß;…, dxwvoˇ_' pur;,' v;mn;…./m( 6 tqwv;yuts':y;k˘ W$(xt;…/km;inlm( ]yo…v'xits;hß' vw„,v' smud;˙tm( 7 p'c…v'xits;hß' n;rdIymud;˙tm( ®{s':y;shß;…, p[oˇ_' ≤l©;:ym∫⁄tm( 8 Ekon…v'xs;hß' vwnteymud;˙tm( shßp'cp'c;xt( p;µMp[oˇ_' suivStrm( 9 s¢dxshß;…, kÀm| p[oˇ_' mnohrm( ctu…v|xit s;hß' x*kr' prm;∫⁄tm( 10 Ek;xIitshß;…, Sk;Ndmuˇ_' suivStOtm( Evm∑;dxoˇ_;in pur;,;in bOhi' t c 11 pur;,e„veWu bhvo /m;RSte ivinÂipt;" r;…g,;' c ivr;…g,;' ytIn;' b[˜c;·r,;m( 12

939


Puråâ SaµhitŒ

Ending:

prb[˜pd' y;it y] gTv; n xocit 88 pç’Tv" ≈ut' h≤Nt b[˜hTy;' sud"u sh;m( b[;˜,o b[˜vcRSvI =i]yo ivjyI r,e vwXyStu /nl;.;!‰" xU{" su%mv;“uy;t( 89 …sı;'tpur;,s'iht;men;' yo?y;pyit .·ˇ_t" a/Ite v; n ih tyoyRm;dip .y' .vet( 90 p#?v' muny" sveR p*r;,I' s'iht;…mm;m( ihTv; k≤l.y' s¥" ’t’Ty; .iv„yq 91 x*nk;idAWy Ëcu" aho sUt mh;.;g ≈;ivt' prm' rh" SvSTyStu te ikmpr' kQyte prm;qRt" 92 n copkt|u p[.vo vymete munIêr;" ’„,k°itRs/u ; ÁºW; dev;n;mip dul.R ; 93 p;…yt; .vt; sUt svRlokÉWu dul.R ; ) k;lkmR.y;ˇI,;R" p[s;d;ˇv suvt[ 94 jytu jytu ’„," s≤∞d;nNdmUitRjRytu jytu ’„," sTSvÂp…íd;Tm; ) jytu jytu ’„," kÉvl;nNdmUitRjRytu jytu ’„," Sv;…mnIòeh…sˇ_" 95 îit ≈ImTpur;,s'iht;y;' …sı;Nts;re Vy;sixvs'v;de v;sn;j;g[itkqn' n;m ctuiS]'xoå?y;y" 34 îit ≈Ipur;,s'iht; sm;¢; Not included in any list of UpapurŒöas. Reference: PriyŒchŒrya, Krishna, ed., The PurŒöa SaµhitŒ, revealed to Veda VyŒsa, including ÌlamandŒra SaµhitŒ, B¨hatsadŒ§iva SaµhitŒ and SanatkumŒra SaµhitŒ: edited with notes, introduction, etc., (Benaras: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1951).

940

Bråhmaâ


BhŒrgava PurŒöa

Structure: 40 chapters belonging to the Uttara Khaö¶a Beginning:

p[qmoå?y;y" ≈Imte r;m;nuj;y nm" ) ySy i√rdvK];¥;" p;·rW¥;" prXxtm( ) ivfl;…•fl≤Nt .jt;' iv„vKsen' tm;≈ye 1 ≈Ix*nk;dy Ëcu" svR/m;RqtR ÊvD svRx;S]ivx;rd tÊv;qRivduW;' ≈eœ sUt √wp;ynip[y 2 y;in km;R…, lokÉWu c·r];
941


BhŒrgava Puråâ

Ending:

y" p[itœ;pyeLlokÉ rmte h·r,; smm( komlwStulsIp]wy"R x;lg[;mmcRyte ( 51 gu®rev h·r" s;=;t( sNtu∑" Sy;d( h·r" sd; 52 £⁄ıe sit sd; £⁄ıStSm;TsMpUjyeÌ®u m( i]d<@/;·r,' ÎÇ; yit' ivD;ns;/nm( 53 p[,meTpUjye¥Stu .gv∫·ˇ_m;n( .vet( vwr;GyD;n.KTy;idÂp≈ey"p[d;ykm( 54 mh;yogIxm;h;TMy…md' mu·ˇ_p[d' nO,;m( a;yu„y' ≈Ikr' .{' yxSy' ivjy;vhm( 55 /My| piv]' p;pflm;roGykrmuˇmm( y" ≈;vyeTsd; nO,;' ò;t" pu
942

Bråhmaâ

Branch 30A: Smïti (01)

A‹girasa Smïti

Structure: 72 verses Beginning:

a;i©rsSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;ynm" ) aq;d* p[;yixˇiv/;nv,Rnm( ) gOh;≈meWu /meWR u v,;Rn;mnupvU x R " p[;y…íˇ iv…/' ÎÇ; ai©r;muinrb[vIt( 1 aNTy;n;mip …sı;•' .=…yTv; i√j;ty" c;N{' ’Cz^' tdıRNtu b[˜=T] ivx;' ivdu" 2 rjkímRk;rí n$ovu®@ Ev c kìvˇR.de ….Ll;í s¢wte c;NTyj;" SmOt;" 3 aNTyj;n;' gOhe toy' .;<@º pYyuiR Wtç yt( p[;y…íˇ' yd; pIt' tdwv ih sm;cret( 4 c;<@;lkÀp.;<@ºWu TvD;n;t( ipvte yid p[;y…íˇ' kq' teW;' v,Re v,Re iv/Iyte 5 cret( s;Ntpn' ivp[" p[;j;pTyNtu .U…mp" tdıRNtu cre√Xw y" p;d' xU{We u d;pyet( 6 aD;n;≤Tpvte toy' b[;˜,STvNTyj;itWu ahor;]oiWto.UTv; pçgVyen xu?yit 7 ivp[o ivp[,e s'SpO∑ ïCz∑en kd;cn a;c;Nt Ev xu?yet ai©r;muinrb[vIt( 8 =≤T]ye, yd; SpO∑ ïCz∑en kd;cn ò;n' jPyNtu k⁄vIRt idnSy;ıenR xu?yit 9 vwXyen tu yd; SpO∑" xun; xU{,e v; i√j" ¨po„y rjnImek;' pçgVyen xu?yit 10 anuiCz∑en s'SpO∑* ò;n' yen iv/Iyte tenvw oiCz∑s'SpO∑" p[;j;pTy' sm;cret( 11 at Ëı±v| p[v+y;…m nIlI vS]Sy vw iv…/m( S]I,;' £°@;qRsy' oge xynIye n du„yit 12 p;lne iv£ye cwv t√éˇÂ e pjIvne

943

Bråhmaâ Branch 30A: Smïti (01)

Angirasa Smïti

Ending:

p;duk;snm;Â!ogeh;t( pçgOh' b[jte ( zπdyeˇSy p;d* tu /;…mRk" pO…qvIpit" 62 a…¶ho]I tpSvI c ≈oi]yo vedp;rg" Ete vw p;dukYì y;‹≤Nt xeW;Nd<@ºn t;@yet( 63 jNmp[.iO ts'Sk;re cU@;Nte .ojn' nvm( asip<@ºn .oˇ_Vy' cU@Sy;Nte ivxeWt" 64 y;ck;•' nv≈;ımip sUtk.ojnm( n;rIp[qmg.eWR u .uKTv; c;N{;y,' cret( 65 aNydÊ;; tu y; kNy; punrNySy dIyte tSy;í;•' n .oˇ_Vy' pun.U"R s; p[gIyte 66 pUvíR ß;ivtoyí g.oRyí;Pys'S’t" i√tIye g.RsS' k;rSten xu≤ıivR/Iyte 67 r;j;¥w∂x ≥ ….m;Rsyw ;Rviˇœit guivR,I t;v{=; iv/;tVy; punrNyoiv/Iyte 68 .tOx R ;snmuLlÏ‰ y; c S]I ivp[vˇRte tSy;íwv n .oˇ_Vy' ivDey; k;mc;·r,I 69 anpTy; tu y; n;rI n;XnIy;ˇÌ»håe ip vw aq .u¤π tu yo moh;t( pUys' nrk˘ v[jte ( 70 ≤S]y;/nNtu ye moh;dupjIv≤Nt b;N/v;" ≤S]y; y;n;in v;s;'…s te p;p; y;NTy/ogitm( 71 r;j;•' hrte tej" xU{;•' b[˜v∞Rsm( sUtkÉWu c yo .u¤π s .u¤π pO…qvI mlm( 72 îTyi©rs; mhiWR,; p[,It' /mRx;S]' sm;¢m( sm;¢;cey' a;i©rsSmOit" ) Reference: Sm¨ti Sandarbha, Vol. I, (Delhi: Nag, 1981), pp. 591ff.

944

Bråhmaâ


VyŒsa Smïti

Structure: Four Chapters. Beginning:

aq vedVy;sSmOit" ≈Ig,ex;y nm" p[qmoå?y;y" aq /m;Rcr,;dexp[yˇu _v,RWo@xs'Sk;rv,Rnm( v;r;,Sy;' su%;sIn' vedVy;s' tpoin…/m( pp[Cz⁄mnuR yoå>yeTy /m;Rn( v,RVyviSqt;n( 1 s pO∑" SmOitm;n( SmOTv; SmOit' ved;qRg….Rt;m( ¨v;c;q p[s•;Tm; muny" ≈Uyt;…mit 2 y] y] Sv.;ven ’„,s;ro mOg" sd; crte t] vedoˇ_o /moR .ivtu mhRit 3 xu·rSmOitpur;,;n;' ivro/o y] ÎXyte t] ≈*t' p[m;,Ntu tyo√¯/≥ e SmOitvRr; 4 b[;˜,"=i]yovwXyS]yo v,;R i√j;ty" ≈uitSmOitpur;,oˇ_/mRyoGy;Stu netre 5 xU{ov,RítuqoRåip v,RTv;ımRmhRit vedmN]Sv/;Sv;h;vW$(k;r;id….ivRn; 6 ivp[vi√p[iv•;su =]iv•;su ivp[vt( j;tkm;R…, k⁄vIRt tt" xU{;su xU{vt( 7 vwXy;su ivp[=T];>y;' tt" xU{;su xU{vt( a/m;duˇm;y;Ntu j;t" xU{;/m" SmOt" 8 b[;˜
945


VyŒsa Smïti

Ending:

y¥ekp¤‰;' ivWm' dd;it òeh;∫y;√; yid v;qRhte o" vedWe u Î∑' AiW….í gItm( td(b˜[ hTy;' munyo vd≤Nt 62 ËWre v;ipt' vIj' ….•.;<@ºWu goduhm( ¸t' .Smin hVyç mU%Re d;nmx;êtm( 63 mOtsUtkpu∑;©o i√j" xU{;•.ojne ahmev' n j;n;…m k;' yoin' s g…m„yit 64 xU{;•enodrSqen yid k…íN…m[yte y" s .vetC( zÀkro nUn' tSy v; j;yte k⁄lm( 65 gO/o[ √;dx jNm;in s¢ jNm;in xUkr" ê; cwv s¢ jNm;in îTyev' mnurb[vIt( amOt' b[;˜,;•en d;·r{' =i]ySy c 66 vwXy;•en tu xU{Tv' xU{;•;•rk˘ b[jte ( yí .u¤åπ q xU{;•' m;smek˘ inrNtrm( 67 îh jNmin xU{Tv' mOt" ê; cwv j;yte ySy xU{; pce…•Ty' xU{o v; gOhme…/nI 68 v…jRt" iptOdve Sw tu r*rv' y;it s i√j" .;<@s˚rs˚«,;R n;n;s˚rs˚r;" 69 yoins˚rs˚«,;R inry' y;≤Nt m;nv;" p…¤.edI vOq;p;k° inTy' b[;˜,inNdk" 70 a;dexI vediv£Ét; pçwte b[˜`;tk;" 71 îd' Vy;smt' inTym?yetVy' p[yàt" Etduˇ_;c;rvt" ptn' nv iv¥te 72 îit ≈IvedVy;sIye /mRx;S]e gOhSq;≈mp[xs' ;idv,Rno n;m ctuqoRå?y;y" sm;¢; cey' Vy;sSmOit" Reference: Sm¨ti Sandarbha III, p. 1631.

946

Bråhmaâ


Ìpastamba Smïti

Structure: Ten Chapters. Beginning:

a;pStMbSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" ) aq goro/n;idivWyeågohTy;y;' c p[;y…íˇv,Rnm( ) a;pStMb' p[v+y;…m p[;y…íˇivin,Rym( ) dUiWt;n;' iht;q;Ry v,;Rn;mnupvU x R " 1 preW;' p·rv;deWu invOˇmOiWsˇmm( ) ivivˇ_dex a;sInm;Tmiv¥;pr;y,m( 2 anNymns' x;Nt' sTvSq' yogivˇmm( ) a;pStMbmOiW' sveR smeTy munyoåb[vu n( 3 .gvn( m;nv;" sveåR sNm;geåR ipiSqt; yd; crey/u mR k R ;y;R,;' teW;' b[iU h ivin„’itm( 4 ytoåvXy' gOhSqen gv;idp·rp;lnm( ’iWkm;Rid c;pTsu i√j;mN],mev c 5 deyç;n;qkÉåvXy' ivp[;dIn;ç .eWjm( b;l;n;' StNyp;n;idk;yRç p·rp;lnm( 6 Ev' ’te kq≤çt( Sy;Tp[m;do y¥k;mt" gv;dIn;' ttoåSm;k˘ .gvn( b[iU h in„’itm( 7 Evmuˇ_" =,' ?y;Tv; p[…,p;t;d/omu%" ÎÇ; AWInuv;cedm;pStMb" suin…ítm( 8 b;l;n;' StNyp;n;idk;yeR doWo n iv¥te ivpÊ;;vip ivp[;,;m;mN],…cikTsne 9 gv;dIn;' p[v+y;…m p[;y…íˇ' ®j;idWu kÉ…cd;¸nR doWoå] deh/;r,.eWje 10 a*W¥' lv,çwv òehpu∑‰•.ojnm( p[;…,n;' p[;,vOÊyqR" p[;y…íˇ' n iv¥te 11 ait·rˇ_' n d;tVy' k;le SvLPlNtu d;pyet( ait·rˇ_É ivp•;n;' ’Cz^mve iv/Iyte 12

947


Ìpastamba Smïti

Ending:

n x·ˇ_x;S];….rtSy mo=o ncwv rMy;vsqip[ySy n .ojn;Cz;dntTprSy Ek;NtxIlSy Î!v[tSy 6 mo=o .vet( p[IitinvˇRkSy a?y;TmyogwkrtSy sMyk™ mo=o .ve…•Tymih'skSy Sv;?y;yyog;gtm;nsSy 7 £o/yuˇ_o y¥jte y∆uhoit yd∞Rit sv| hrit dˇSy a;mk⁄M. îvodkm( 8 apm;n;ˇpovO≤ı" sMm;n;ˇps" =y" a…cRt" pUjto ivp[o duG/; g*·rv sIdit 9 a;Py;yte yq; /enSu tO,rw mOtsM.vw" Ev' jpí homwí punr;Py;yte i√j" 10 m;tOvt( prd;r;'í pr{Vy;…, lo∑^vt( a;Tmvt( sv.Ut;in y" pXyit s pXyit 11 rjkVy;/xwlWU ]e,cmoRpjIivn;m( yo .u¤π .uˇ_metWe ;' p[;j;pTy' ivxo/nm( 12 agMy;gmn' ’Tv; a.+ySy c .=,m( xu≤ı' c;N{;y,' ’Tv; aqvoRˇ_' tqwv c 13 a…¶ho]' Tyje¥Stu s nrovIrh; .vet( tSy xu≤ıivR/;tVy; n;Ny; c;N{;y,;Îte 14 ivv;hoTsvyDeWu aNtr; mOtsUtkÉ ) s¥" xu≤ı' ivj;nIy;TpUv| s˚‚Lpt' cret( 15 dev{o
948

Bråhmaâ


Dak·ha Smïti

Structure: Seven Chapters Beginning:

d=SmOit" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq;d* -a;≈mv,Rnm( ) svR/m;RqtR ÊvD svRvde ivd;' vr" ) p;rg" sVvRiv¥;n;' d=o n;m p[j;pit" 1 ¨Tp·ˇ" p[lyíwv iSqit" s'h;r Ev c ) a;Tm; c;Tmin itœºt a;Tm; b[˜
949


Dak·ha Smïti

Ending:

a;≈me tu yityRSy muÙˇRmip iv≈met( ikNtSy;Nyen /me,R ’t’Tyoå….j;yte 44 s…mt' yÌ»hSqen p;pm;mr,;≤Ntkm( s indRhit tTsVvRmk e r;]oiWtoyit" 45 yog;≈mp·r≈;Nt' yStu .ojyte yitm( in≤%l' .o…jt' ten ]wloKy' scr;crm( 46 yiSmn( dexe vse¥ogI ?y;nyogivc=," soåip dexo .vet( pUt" ik˘pnu StSy v;N/v;" 47 √wtçwv tq;√wt' √wt;√wt' tqwv c n √wtm( n;ip c;√wt…mTyett( prm;…qRkm( 48 n;h' nwv;NysMvN/o b[˜.;ven .;ivt" ÈÎx;y;mvSq;y;mv;Py' prm' pdm( 49 √wtp=;" sm;:y;t; yeå√wte tu VyviSqt;" a√witn;' p[v+y;…m yq; /mR" suin…ít" 50 t];TmVyitrek,É i√tIy' yid pXyit tt" x;S];yíopj;yte 54 îit d;=e /mRx;S]e s¢moå?y;y" ) sm;¢; cey' d=SmOit" ) Reference: Sm¨ti Sandarbha I, p. 569.

950

Bråhmaâ

Branch 30: Smïti (05)Vi·höu Smïti

Prathama Vi·höu Smïti

Structure: 113 Verses Beginning:

iv„,uSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) mh;mte mh;p[;D svRx;S]ivx;rd ) a=I,kmR bN/Stu pu®Wo i√jsˇm 1 stt' ik˘ jpn( jPy' ivbu/" ikmnuSmrn( ) mr,e y∆p' jPy' yç .;v mnuSmrn( 2 y∞?y;Tv; i√j≈eœ pu®Wo muTyu m;gt" ) prMpd mv;“oit tNme vd mh;mun"e 3 x*nk ¨v;c îdmev mh;r;j pO∑v;'Ste ipt;mh" .I„m' /mR.tO ;' ≈eœ' /mRp]u o yu…/iœr" 4 yu…/iœr ¨v;c ipt;mh mh;p[;D svRx;S] ivx;rd p[y;,k;le y≤∞NTy' sU·r….StTv…cNtkì" 5 ik•u Smrn( k⁄®≈eœ mr,e pyupR iSqte p[;“uy;Tprm;' …s≤ı' ≈otu…mCz;…m t√d 6 .I„m ¨v;c a∫⁄t' c iht' sU+m' ¨ˇ_' p[Xn' Tvy;n` Í,u„v;vihto r;jn( n;rden pur; ≈utm( 7 ≈IvTs;˚÷ jgäIj mnNt' loks;≤=,m( pur; n;r;y,' dev' n;rd" p·rpO∑v;n( 8 n;rd ¨v;c Tvm=r' pr' b[˜ ingu,R ' tms" prm( a;¸ve¥R ' pr' /;m b[˜;id kmlo∫vm( 9 .gvn( .Ut.Vyex ≈∂/;nw …jte≤N{yw" kq' .ˇ_ìivR…cNTyoå…s yo…g….dehR mo≤=…." 10 ik˘ c jPy' jpe…•Ty' kLymuTq;y m;nv;"

951

Bråhmaâ Branch 30: Smïti (05)

Vi·höu Smïti

Prathama Vi·höu Smïti

Ending:

nmo n;r;y,;yeit ye ivdub˜R[ x;êtm( aNtk;le jp•eit ti√„,o" prm' pdm( 103 a;c;rhIno muinp[vIr .KTy; ivhInoåiptu ivNdtoåip s'k°TyR n;r;y,xBdm;]' ivmuˇ_p;po ivxteåCyut;' gitm( 104 k;Nt;rvndugWRe u ’Tòe„v;pTsu s'ygu e dSyu…." s…•ro/e c n;m….m;| p[k°tRyte ( 105 n idVypu®Wo /Im;n( yeWu Sq;neWu m;' Smret( c*rVy;`[ mh;spw"R £Àrrw ip n v;?yte 106 jNm;NtrshßeWu tpo?y;nsm;…/…." nr;,;' =I,p;p;n;' ’„,e .·ˇ_" p[j;yte 107 n;m;iSt y;it x·ˇ_í p;pe inhRr,e hre" êpcoåip nr" kt|u =mSt;v• ikæLbWm( 108 n t;vt( p;pmStIh y;v•;mht' hre" aitrek .y;d;Û" p[;y…íÊ;;Ntr' bu/;" 109 gTv; gTv; invtRNte cN{sUy;Rdyo g[h;" a¥;ip n invtRNte √;dx;=r…cNtk;" 110 n v;sudve ;TprmiSt m©l' n v;sudve ;TprmiSt p;vnm( n v;sudve ;TprmiSt dwvt' n v;sudve ' p[…,pTy sIdit 111îm;' rhSy;' prm;mnuSmOit' Á/ITy bu≤ı' l.te c nwiœkm( ) ivh;y du"%;in ivmuCy s˚$;t( s vItr;go ivcreNmhI …mm;m( 112 g©;y;' mr,' cwv Î!; .·ˇ_í kÉxve b[˜iv¥;p[bo/í n;LpSy tps" flm( 113 îit iv„,uSmOit" Sm;¢; ) Reference: Sm¨ti Sandarbha I, p. 389.

952

Bråhmaâ


YŒj–avalkya Smïti

Structure: Three Main Chapters. Beginning:

aq y;DvLKySmOit" p[qm a;c;r;?y;y ¨po´;tp[kr,m( yogIêr' y;DvLKy' sMpUJy munyoåb[vu n( v,;R≈metr;,;' no b[iU h /m;RnxeWt" 1 …m…ql;Sq" s yogIN{" =,' ?y;Tv;b[vINmunIn( y‚SmNdexe mOg" ké„,St‚SmN/m;R…•bo/t 2 pur;,Ny;ymIm;'s;/mRx;S];©…m…≈t;" ved;" Sq;n;in iv¥;n;' /mRSy c ctudx R 3 mNvi]iv„,uh;rIty;DvLKyoxnoåi©r;" ym;pStMbsMvt;R" k;Ty;ynbOhSptI 4 pr;xrVy;sxƒ≤l≤%t; d=g*tm* x;t;tpo v…sœí /mRx;S]yojk;" 5 dexe k;l ¨p;yen {Vy' ≈ı;smiNvtm( p;]e p[dIyte yÊ;Tskl' /mRl=,m( 6 ≈uit" SmOit" sd;c;r" SvSy c ip[y' a;Tmn" sMyKsMkLpj" k;mo /mRml U ' îd' SmOtm( 7 îJy;c;rdm;ih's;d;nSv;?y;ykmR,;m( ay' tu prmo /moR y¥ogen a;TmdxRnm( 8 cTv;ro ved/mRD;" pWRT]wiv¥mev v; s; b[tU e y' s /mR" Sy;deko v;?y;TmivÊ;m" 9 2 b[˜c;·rp[kr,m( b[˜=i]yiv$(x{U ; v,;RSTv;¥;S]yo i√j;" inWek;¥;" Xmx;n;Nt;SteW;' vw mN]t" i£y;" 10 g.;R/;nmOt* pus' " svn' SpNdn;Tpur; Wœºå∑me v; sImNto m;Syete j;tkmR c 11 ahNyek;dxe n;m ctuqRe m;…s in„£m"

953


YŒj–avalkya Smïti

Ending:

yq;kqm(…c≤Tp<@;n;' cTv;·r'xCzt√ym( m;senvw op.uÔIt c;N{;y,mq;prm( 324 k⁄y;R≤T]Wv,ò;yI kéCz^' c;N{;y,' tq; piv];…, jpe≤Tp<@;Ng;y}y; c;….mN]yet( 325 an;id∑eWu p;peWu xu≤ıí;N{;y,en c /m;Rq| yíredte ∞N{Sywit slokt;m( 326 kéCz^kı é mRk;mStu mhtI' …≈ym;“uy;t( yq; gu®£tufl' p[;“oit susm;iht" 327 ≈uTvwt;nOWyo /m;RNy;DvLKyen .;iWt;n( îdmUcmu hR ;Tm;n' yogIN{m…mt*jsm( 328 y îd' /;r…y„y≤Nt /mRx;S]mt≤N{t;" îh lokÉ yx" p[;Py te y;Sy≤Nt i]iv∑pm( 329 iv¥;qIR p[;“uy;i√¥;' /nk;mo /n' tq; a;yu„k;mStqwv;yu" ≈Ik;mo mhtI' …≈ym( 330 Xlok]ymip ÁSm;¥" ≈;ıe ≈;v…y„yit iptø,;' tSy tOi¢" Sy;d=Yy; n;] s'xy" 331 b[;˜," p;]t;' y;it =i]yo ivjyI .vet( vwXyí /;Ny/nv;nSy x;S]Sy /;r,;t( 332 y îd' ≈;vyei√p[;n( i√j;n( pvRsu pvRsu ) aême/fl' tSy t∫v;nnumNyt;m( 333 ≈uTvwt¥;DvLKyoåip p[It;Tm; muin.;iWtm( ) EvmiSTvit hov;c nmS’Ty SvyM.uve 334 îit y;DvLKyIye /mRx;S]e p[;y…íˇ p[kr,' n;m tOtIyoå?y;y" ) îit y;DvLKySmOit" sm;¢; ) Reference: Sm¨ti Sandarbha III, p. 1235.

954

Bråhmaâ


Likhita Smïti


aq ≤l≤%tSmOit" ) aqe∑;pUtk R mR vOWoTsgRfl gy;ip<@d;n Wo@x ≈;ı;in v,Rnm( ) î∑;pUtRe tu ktRVye b[;˜,en p[yàt" ) î∑en l.te Svg| pUtRe mo=mv;“uy;t( 1 Ek;hmip ktRVy' .U…mœmudk˘ xu.m( ) k⁄l;in t;ryeTs¢ y] g*ivRtWO I .vet( 2 .U…md;nen ye lok; god;nen c k°itRt;" ) t;\Llok;Np[;“uy;NmTyR" p;dp;n;' p[rop,e 3 v;pIkÀpt@;g;indevt;ytn;in c pitt;Nyuıre¥Stu s pUtf R lmXnute 4 a…¶ho]' tp" sTy' ved;n;' cwv p;lnm( a;itQy' vwêdev' c î∑…mTy…./Iyte 5 î∑;pUtRe i√j;tIn;' s;m;Nyo /mR ¨Cyte a…/k;rI .veCzÀ{" pUtRe /meR n vwidkÉ 6 y;vdiSq mnu„ySy g©;toyeWu itœit t;v√WRshß;…, SvgRlokÉ mhIyte 7 devt;n;' iptø,;' c jle d¥;∆l;ÔlIn( as'S’tmOt;n;' c Sqle d¥;∆l;Ô≤lm( 8 Ek;dx;he p[te Sy ySy coTsOJyte vOW" muCyte p[te lok;ˇu iptOlok˘ s gCzit 9 E∑Vy; vhv" pu]; y¥ekoåip gy;' v[jte ( yjet v;åême/ne nIl' v; vOWmuTsOjte ( 10 v;r;,Sy;' p[iv∑Stu kd;…c…•„£me¥id hs≤Nt tSy .Ut;in aNyoNy' krt;@nw" 11 gy;ixre tu y≤Tk˘…c•;ª; ip<@÷ tu invRpte ( nrkSq; idv' y;≤Nt SvgSq; mo,m;“uy"u 12

955


Likhita Smïti

Ending:

p[;j;pTy' n d;tVy' ’Cz^' s;'tpn' cret( 85 creTs;'tpn' ivp[" p[;j;pTy' tu =≤T]y" td/| tu cre√Xw y" p;d' xU{e tu d;pyet( 86 rjSvl; yd; SpO∑; ê;nsUkrv;ysw" ¨po„y rjnImek;' pçgVyen xu?yit 87 a;j;nut" ò;nm;]m;n;.eStu ivxeWt" at Ë?v| i]r;]' Sy;Nmidr;SpxRne mtm( 88 b;líwv dx;he tu pçTv' yid gCzit s¥ Ev ivxu?yet n;x*c' nodki£y; 89 x;vsOtk ¨Tp•e sUtk˘ tu yd; .vet( x;ven xu?yte sUitnR sUit" x;vxo…/nI 90 Wœºn xu?yetk w ;h' pçme Tvhmev tu ctuqRe s¢r;]' Sy;≤T]pu®W' dxmeåhin 91 mr,;rB/m;x*c' s'yogo ySy n;…¶…." a;d;h;ˇSy ivDey' ySy vwt;inNko iv…/" 92 a;mm;s' Òt' =*{' òeh;í fls'.v;" aNTy.;<@iSqt; Áºte in„£;Nt;" xucy" SmOt;" 93 m;jRnIrjmeW W;<@÷ ò;nvS]`$odkm( nv;M.…s tq; cwv h≤Nt pu
956

Bråhmaâ


Samvarta Smïti


aq sMvˇRSmOit" ) aq;d* b[˜cyRv,Rnm( ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) sMvˇRmk e m;sInm;Tmiv¥;pr;y,m( ) AWyStu sm;gMy pp[Cz⁄/mRk;iÕ," 1 .gvn( ≈otu…mCz;m" ≈eySkmR i√joˇm ) yq;vımRm;c+v xu.;xu.ivvecnm( 2 v;mdev;dy" sveR tmpOCzn( mh*jsm( ) t;nb[vINmunIn( sv;Rn( p[It;Tm; ≈Uyt;…mit 3 Sv.;v;¥] ivcret( ’„,s;r" sd; mOg" /MyRdx e " s ivDeyo i√j;n;' /mRs;/nm( 4 ¨pnIt" sd; ivp[o guroStu ihtm;cret( ßGgN/m/um;'s;in b[˜c;rI ivvjRyte ( 5 sN?y;' p[;t" sn=];mup;sIt yq;iv…/ s;idTy;' p…ím;' sN?y;mı;‹St…mt.;Skre 6 itœn( pUv;| jp' k⁄Yy;‹db( ˜[ c;rI sm;iht" a;sIn" p…ím;' sN?y;' jp' k⁄Yy;‹dt≤N{t" 7 a…¶k;Yy| tt" k⁄y;RNme/;vI tdnNtrm( ttoå/IyIt vedNtu vI=m;,o guromR% u m( 8 p[,v' p[;Kp[yÔu It Vy;˙itStdnNtrm( g;y]Iç;nupvU ,Re ttoved' sm;r.et( 9 hSt* susy' t* k;Yy*R j;nu>y;mup·riSqt* gurornumt' k⁄Yy;‹t( p#•;Nymit.Rvte ( 10 s;y' p[;tStu ….=et b[˜c;rI sd; v[tI inve¥ gurveåXnIy;t( p[;Ñü%o v;Gyt" xu…c 11 s;y' p[;ti√≥j;tIn;mxn' ≈uitcoidtm( n;Ntr; .ojn' k⁄Yy;‹d…¶ho]smo iv…/" 12 a;cMywv tu .uÔIt .uKTv; copSpOxie √j"

957


Samvarta Smïti

Ending:

g;y}y; l=jPyen svRp;pw" p[mCu yte 216 ay;Jyy;jn' ’Tv; .uKTv; c;•' ivgihRtm( g;y}y∑shßNtu jPy' ’Tv; ivmuCyte 217 ahNyhin yoå/Ite g;y]I' vw i√joˇm" m;sen muCyte p;p;durg" kçuk;¥q; 218 g;y]I' y" sd; ivp[o jpte inyt" xu…c" s y;it prm' Sq;n' v;yu.tU " %mUiˇRm;n( 219 p[,ven tu s'yˇu _; Vy;˙it" s¢ inTyx" g;y]I' ixrs; s;ı| mns; i]" p#πid≠√j" 220 ingOÁ c;Tmn" p[;,;n( p[;,;y;mo iv/Iyte p[;,;y;m]y' k⁄Yy;‹…•Tymev sm;iht" 221 m;ns' v;…ck˘ p;p' k;yenvw tu yT’tm( tTsvR nXyte tU,| p[;,;y;m]ye ’te 222 AGvedm>yse¥Stu yju"x;%;mq;ip v; s;m;in srhSy;in svRp;pw" p[mCu yte 223 p;vm;nI' tq; k*Ts' p*®W' sUˇ_mev c jPTv; p;pw" p[mCu yet ip}yç m/uCzNds;m( 224 m<@l' b[;˜,' ®{sUˇ_oˇ_;í vOhTkq;" v;mdeVy' vOhTs;m jPTv; p;pw" p[mCu yte 225 c;N{;y,Ntu sveWR ;' p;p;n;' p;vn' prm( ) ’Tv; xu≤ımv;“oit prm' Sq;nmev c 226 /mRx;S]…md' pu
958

Bråhmaâ


êha‹kha Smïti


aq xƒSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) aq b[;˜,;dIn;' kmRv,Rnm( ) SvM.uve nmS’Ty sOi∑s'h;rk;·r,e ) c;tuv
959


êha‹kha Smïti

Ending:

√;dx;hopv;sen pr;k" p·rk°itRt" 5 iv…/nodk…sı;in m;smXnIt yàt" s ’Tv; sodk;Nm;s' ’Cz^' v;®,muCyte 6 …bLvwr;mlkìv;Råip pµ;=wrqv; xu."w m;sen lokÉåit’Cz^" kQyte bu≤ısˇmw" 7 gomU]' gomy' =Ir' d…/ sipR" k⁄xodkm( Ekr;]opv;sí ’Cz^' s;'tpn' SmOtm( 8 EtwStu }yhm>ySt' mh;s;'tpn' SmOtm( ipy;s;ˇul;pu®W ¨Cyte gopurIW;xno .uTv; m;s' inTy' sm;iht" 10 v[t' tu y;vk˘ k⁄y;RTsvRp;p;pnuˇye g[;s' cN{kl;vOı‰; p[;XnIy;√/RyNsd; 11 Ó;sye∞ kl;h;n* v[t' c;N{;y,' cret( mu<@≤S]Wv,ò;yI a/" x;yI …jte≤N{y" 12 S]IxU{pitt;n;' c vjRyTe p·r.;W,m( piv];…, jpeCzKTy; ju¸y;∞wv x·ˇ_t" 13 ay' iv…/" s ivDey" svR’Cz^Wπ u svRd; ) p;p;Tm;nStu p;pe>y" ’Cz^"w s't;·rt; nr;" 14 gtp;p;idk˘ y;≤Nt n;] k;y;R ivc;r,; ) xƒp[oˇ_…md' x;S]' yoå/Ite bu≤ım;•r" ) svRp;pivinmRˇu _" SvgRlokÉ mhIyte 16 îit x;ƒπ /mRx;S]eå∑;dxoå?y;y" ) sm;¢;cey' xƒSmOit" ) — tTsd(b˜[ ;pR,mStu ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha III, p. 1415.

960

Bråhmaâ


Bïhaspati Smïti


aq bOhSpitSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) t];d*ssuv,Rp…O qvId;nflmhTvv,Rnm( îÇ; £tuxt' r;j; sm;¢vrd≤=,m( m`v;n( v;‚Gvd;' ≈eœ' pYyRpCO zd( bOhSpitm( 1 .gvn( kÉn d;nen svRt" su%me/te y∂ˇ' yNmh;`| c tNme b[iU h mh;tp 2 Ev…mN{e, pO∑oås* devdevpuroiht" v;cSpitmRh;p[;Do bOhSpit®v;c h 3 suv,Rd;n' rod;n' .U…md;n' c v;sv Ett( p[yCzm;nStu svRp;pw" p[mCu yte 4 suv,| rjt' vS]' m…,rà' c v;sv svRmve .ve∂ˇ' vsu/;' y" p[yCzit 5 f;l’∑;' mhI' dÊv; sbIj;' xSyx;≤lnIm( y;vt( sUYyRkr; lok;St;vt( SvgeR mhIyte 6 y≤Tk≤çt( k⁄®te p;p' pu®Wo vOiˇk≤xRt" aip gocMmRm;]e, .U…md;nen xu?yit 7 dxhSten d<@ºn i]'x∂<@;in vˇRnm( dx t;Nyev ivSt;ro gocmeR tNmh;flm( 8 svOW' goshß' c y] itœTyt≤N{tm( b;lvTsp[stU ;n;' td( gocmR îitSmOtm( 9 ivp[;y d¥;∞ gu,;iNvt;y tpoivyuˇ_;y …jte≤N{y;y y;vNmhI itœit s;gr;Nt; t;vt( fl' tSy .vednNtm( 10 yq; vIj;in roh≤Nt p[k°,;Rin mhItle Ev' k;m;" p[roh≤Nt .U…md;nsm;…jRt;" 11 yq;Psu pitt" s¥ StwlivNdu" p[spRit Ev' .U…m’t' d;n' sXye sXye p[rohit 12

961


Bïhaspati Smïti

Ending:

t' n t;ryte yStu tm;¸b[˜R `;tkm( 69 ¨piSqte ivv;he c yDe d;ne c v;sv moh;∞rit ivfl' y" s mOto j;yte i£…m" 70 /n' flit d;nen jIivt' jIvr=,;t( ÂpmwêyRm;roGymih's;flmXnute 71 flmUl;xn;t( pUJy' Svg| sTyen l>yte p[;yopvexn;{;Jy' svR] su%mXnute 72 gv;!‰"x£dI=;y;" SvgRg;mI tO,;xn" ≤S]y ≤S]Wv,ò;yI v;yu' pITv; £tu' l.et( 73 inTyò;yI .vedkú" sN?ye √π c jpn( i√j" n tTs;/yte r;Jy' n;kpOœmn;xkÉ 74 a…¶p[vx e e inyt' b[˜lokÉ mhIyte rà;n;' p[its'h;re pxUn( pu];'í ivNdit 75 n;kÉ …cr' s vste ¨pv;sI c yo .vet( stt' cwkx;yI y" s l.edI‚Pst;©itm( 76 vIr;snm( vIrxYy;' vIrSq;nmup;…≈t" a=Yy;StSy lok;" Syu" svRk;mgm;Stq; 77 ¨pv;sç dI=;ç a….Wekç v;sv ’Tv; √;dxvW;R…, vIrSq;n;i√≤x„yte 78 a/ITy svRvde ;n( vw s¥o du"%;t( p[mCu yte 79 p;vn' crte /m| SvgeR lokÉ mhIyte 80 bOhSpit mt' pu
962

Bråhmaâ


Atri Smïti


aq ai]SmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aD;nit…mr;N/Sy vOtne ;nen kÉxv p[sId sum% u o n;q D;nÎi∑p[do .v 1 ¸t;…¶ho]m;sIn mi]' ≈utvt;' vrm( ¨pgMy c pOCz≤Nt AWy" x'…stv[t;" 2 .gvn( kÉn d;nen jpen inymen c xu?yNte p;tkìyˇRu _;St' b[vIim mh;mune 3 aip:y;iptdoW;,;' p;p;n;' mht;' tq; sveWR ;' copp;t;n;' xu≤ı' v+y;…m tTvt" 4 p[;,;y;mw" piv]wí d;nwhoRmjw pR Sw tq; xu≤ık;m;" p[mCu yNte p;vkÉ>yo n s'xy" 5 p[;,;y;m;n( piv];'í Vy;˙tI" p[,vNtq; piv]p;…,r;sInoå?y>ySyb[˜ nw‚Tykm( 6 a;vˇRyTe sd;yuˇ_" p[;,;y;m;n( pun" pun" a;kÉx;g[;d;n%;Nt;ˇpStPyt ¨ˇmm( 7 TvKcmRm;'s®…/rmedom∆;iSq…." ’t;" tqe≤N{y’t; doW;" dÁNte p[;,ing[h;t( – inro/;∆;yte v;yuv;Ryor…¶ihR j;yte t;pen;po ih j;yNte ttoåNt" xu?yte i]…." 8 tq; cmR tq;n©; doW; a>yitR /mRt" tqe≤N{y’t; doW; dÁNte p[;,ing[h;t( 9 p[;,;y;mwdhR te ( doW;ı;r,;….í ikæLvWm( p[Ty;h;re, ivWy;N?y;nen;nwêr;n( gu,;n( 10 n c tIv[,e tps; n Sv;?y;ywncR Je yy; mit'gNtu' sur;" xˇ_; yog;Ts'p;[ “uv≤Nty;m( yog;TsMp[;Pyte D;n' yog;ımRSy l=,m(

963


Atri Smïti

Ending:

amuˇ_yo rStgyo r¥;∂»Ç; preåhin ySy SvjNmn=]e gOÁtº e xix.;Skr* 71 Vy;…/" p[v;he mOTyuí d;·r¥[ç mh∫ym( tSm;∂;n' c homç devt;>ycRn' jpm( 72 k⁄y;RˇiSmn( idne yuˇ_É tSy x;≤Nt.Riv„yit sv| g©;sm' toy' r;¸g[Ste idv;kre 73 yo nr" ò;it tˇIqeR smu{e setbu N/ne ¨po„y rjnI mek;' r;¸g[Ste idv;kre 74 s¢jNm’t' p;p'tT=,;dev nXyit someåPyev' sUytR Lu y' tSm;t( sv| sm;cret( 75 îit a;]eySmOt* pçmoå?y;y" îÇ; £tuxtwrve ' devr;jo mh;¥uit" Svgu®˘ v;≤Gmn;' ≈eœ' pyRpCO z√éhSpitm( 1 .gvn( kÉn d;nen SvgRt" su%me/te yd=y' mh;.;g Tv' b[iU h vdt;Mbr 2 Ev' pO∑" s îN{e, devdevpuroiht" v;cSpitmRh;tejo vOhSpit®v;c h 3 ihr
964

Bråhmaâ


KŒtyŒyana Smïti

Structure: 3 PrapŒÿhakas, subdivided into 29 Khaö¶as. Beginning:

k;Ty;ynSmOit" ≈Is;mved;y nm" p[qm" %<@" aq;c;r;?y;y" t];d* yDopvItkmRpk [ r,v,Rnm( aq;to go….loˇ_;n;mNyeW;' cwv kmR,;m( aSp∑;n;' iv…/' sMyGdxR…y„ye p[dIpvt( 1 i]vOdı U v± vR tO ' k;y| tNtu]ym/ovOtm( i]vOˇçopvIt' Sy;ˇSywko g[iNq·r„yte 2 pOœv'xe c n;>y;' c /Ot' yi√Ndte ki$m( tı;yRmpu vIt' Sy;•;tolMb' ncoiCz^tm( 3 sdopvIitn; .;Vy' sd; bıix%en c ivix%o Vyupv;tí yTkroit n tT’tm( 4 i]"p[;Xy;po i√®NmOJy mu%met;NyupSpOxte ( a;Syn;m;≤=k,;|í n;….v="ixro'åxk;n( 5 s'ht;….S}y©ë≤l….r;SymevmupSpOxte ( a©ëœnº p[die xNy; `[;,' cwvmupSpOxte ( a©ëœ;n;…mk;>y;ç c=u" ≈o]' pun" pun" 6 kinœ;©ëœyo•;‹….' ˙dy' tu tlen vw sv;R….Stu ixr" pí;√;h c;g[,e s'SpOxte ( 7 y]opidXyte kmR kturR ©÷ n tUCyte d≤=,St] ivDey" kmR,;' p;rg" kr" 8 y]idÆõ™nymo n Sy;∆phom;idkmRsu itßSt] idx" p[oˇ_; EeN{Is*My;pr;…jt;" 9 itœ•;sIn" p[◊o v; inymo y] neÎx" td;sInen kˇRVy' n p[◊,º n itœt; 10 g*rI pµ; xcI me/; s;iv]I ivjy; jy; devsen; Sv/; Sv;h; m;tro lokm;tr" 11

965


KŒtyŒyana Smïti

Ending:

gy;d* ip<@m;]Sy dIym;nTvdxRn;t( 9 .ojnSy p[/;nTv' vdNTyNye mhWRy" b[;˜,Sy prI=;y;' mh;yàp[dxRn;t( 10 a;m≈;ıiv/;nSy ivn; ip<@¯" i£y;iv…/" td;l>y;Pyn?y;yiv/;n≈v,;dip 11 iv√Nmtmup;d;y mm;Pyetı»id iSqtm( p[;/;Nymu.yoyRSm;ˇSm;deW smu∞y" 12 p[;cIn;vIitn; k;y| ip}yeWu p[o=,' pxo" d≤=,o√;sn;Ntç croinRvpR ,;idkm( 13 s•pê;vd;n;n;' p[/;n;qoR n hItr" p[/;n' hvnçwv xeW' p[’itv∫vet( 14 √«pmu•tm;:y;t' x;d; cwv∑e k; SmOt; k°≤ln' sjl' p[oˇ_' dUr%;todko m®" 15 √;rgv;=" sNd.w"R k∂≥m….TyNtko, v; ve/êw ;n∑' v;Stuòr' iv√Nmn;£;Ntm;g[íwR 16 vx©m;…bit b[IhIHzπWíeit yv;'Stq; as;ivTy] n;moKTv; ju¸y;æT=p[homvt( 17 s;=t' sumnoyuˇ_mudk˘ d…/s'ytu m( a~y| d…/m/u>y;ç m/upkoR iv/Iyte 18 k;'Syenvw ;hR,IySy innyed~yRmÔl* k;'Sy;ip/;n' k;'SySq' m/up‘| smpRyte ( 19 îit k;Ty;ynivr…cte kmRpd[ Ipe tOtIy" p[p;#k" îTyekoni]'x" %<@" sm;¢; cey' k;Ty;ynSmOit·ritle:y'n;STy] tSm;dy'gN[ q" sm;¢onveTy]s'dhe " Reference: Sm¨ti Sandarbha, Vol. III, (Delhi: Nag, 1981), pp. 1335ff.

966

Bråhmaâ


ParŒ§hara Smïti


≈ImNmhiWR pr;xrp[,It; pr;xrSmOit" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) ≈Ig,ex;ynm" ) aq;to ihmxwl;g[e devd;® vn;lye Vy;smek;Gg[m;sInmpOCz•OWy" pur; 1 m;nuW;,;' iht' /m| vtRm;ne kl* yuge x*c;c;r' yq;v∞ vdsTyvtI sut" 2 tCz^Tu viWRv;Ky' tu s≤x„yoå©‰kús…ª." p[Tyuv;c mh;tej;" ≈uitSmOitivx;rd" 3 n c;h' svRtÊvD" kq' /m| vd;Myhm( aSm≤Tptwvp[∑Vyeit Vy;s" sutoåb[vIt( 4 ttStWRy" sveR /mRtÊv;qRk;iÕ," AiW' Vy;s' purSkéTygt; bd·rk;≈mm( 5 n;n; pu„pll;k°,| flvO„kìrl'kté m( ndI p[ßv,opet' pu
967


ParŒ§hara Smïti

Ending:

yjetv;ême/ne r;j; tu pO…qvIpit" pun" p[Ty;gte veXmv;s;qRmpu spRit 72 spu]" sh.OTywí k⁄y;Rdb( ;[ ˜,.ojnm( g;íwvk w xt' d¥;∞tuivR?yeWu d≤=,;m( 73 b[;˜,;n;' p[s;den b[˜h; tu ivmuCyte svnSq;' ≤S]y' hTv; b[˜hTy; v[t' cret( 74 m¥pí i√j" k⁄y;R•dI' gTv; smu{g;m( c;N{;y,e ttíI,Re k⁄y;Rdb( ;[ ˜,.ojnm( 75 an@ëTsiht;' g;' c d¥;i√p[We u d≤=,;m( sur;p;n' skéTkéTv;…¶v,| sur;' ipbet( 76 sp;vyedq;Tm;n…mhlokÉ pr] c ap˙Tysuv,| tu b[;˜,Sytt" Svym( 77 gCzπNmuslm;d;yr;j;>y;x' v/;ytu tt" xu≤ımv;“oit r;D;s* muˇ_ìv c 78 k;mtStu két' yTSy;•;Nyq; v/mhRit a;sn;Czyn;¥;n;TsM.;W;Tsh.ojn;t( 79 s'£;m≤Nt ih p;p;in twl…bNdu·rv;M.…s c;N{;y,' y;vk˘ tu tul;pu®Wwv c 80 gv;' cwv;nugmn' svRp;pp[,;xnm( EtTpr;xr' x;S]' Xlok;n;' xtpçkm( 81 i√nvTy;sm;yuˇ_' /mRs;S]Sys'gh[ " yq;?yyn km;R…, /mRx;S]…md' tq; 82 a?yetVy' p[yàen inyt' SvgRg;…mn; 83 îit p;r;xre /mRx;S]e √;dxoå?y;y" ) sm;¢; cey' pr;xrs'iht; ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha II, pp.625ff.

968

Bråhmaâ


Manu Smïti


mnuSmOit" ) p[qmoå?y;y" mnumk e ;g[m;sInm….gMy mhWRy" p[itpUJy yq;Ny;y…md' vcnmb[vu n( 1 .gvNsvRv,;Rn;' yq;vdnupvU x R " aNtrp[.v;n;' c /m;R•o vˇ_⁄mhR…s 2 Tvmeko ÁSy svRSy iv/;nSy Svy'.vu " a…cNTySy;p[mye Sy k;yR tÊv;qRivTp[.o 3 s tw" pO∑Stq; sMyg…mt*j; mh;Tm…." p[Tyuv;c;CyR t;Nsv;RNmhWIR≈yU t;…mit 4 a;sIidd' tmo.Utmp[D;tml=,m( ap[tKyRmivDey' p[s¢u …mv svRt" 5 tt" Svy'..U gR v;nVyˇ_o VyÔy…•dm( mh;.Ut;id vOˇ*j;" p[;dur;sIˇmonud" 6 yoås;vtI≤N{yg[;Á" sU+moåVyˇ_" sn;tn" svR.tU myoå…cNTy" s Ev Svymuä.* 7 soå….?y;y xrIr;TSv;‚TssO=iu vRiv/;" p[j;" ap Ev ssj;Rd* t;su vIyRmv;sOjt( 8 td<@m.vıwm' shß;'xsu mp[.m( t‚Smñ( jDe Svy' b[˜; svRlokipt;mh" 9 a;po nr; îit p[oˇ_;po vw nrsUnv" t; ydSy;yn' pUv| ten n;r;y," SmOt" 10 yˇTk;r,mVyˇ_' inTy' sdsd;Tmk˘ ti√sO∑" s pu®Wo lokÉ b[˜ie t k°TyRte 11 t‚Sm•<@º s .gv;nuiWTv; p·rvTsrm( Svymev;Tmno ?y;n;ˇd<@mkro‚d(√/; 12 t;>y;' s xkl;>y;' c idv' .U…m' c inmRme

969


Manu Smïti

Ending:

t√oå….iht' sv| in"≈eyskr' prm( aSm;dp[Cyuto ivp[" p[;“oit prm;' gitm( 116 Ev' s .gv;Ndevo lok;n;' ihtk;Myy; /mRSy prm' guÁ' mmed' svRmˇu _v;n( 117 svRm;Tmin s'pXyeTs∞;s∞ sm;iht" sv| Á;Tmin s'pXy•;/meR k⁄®te mn" 118 a;Tmwv devt;" sv;R" svRm;TmNyvS…qtm( a;Tm; ih jnyTyeW;' kmRyog' xrI·r,;m( 119 %' s'invexyeT%eWu ce∑nSpxRnåe inlm( p·ˇ_dO∑‰o" pr' tej" òehåe po g;' c mUitRWu 120 mnsINdu' idx" ≈o]e £;Nte iv„,u' ble hrm( v;Cy…¶' …m]muTsgeR p[jne c p[j;pitm( 121 p[x;…st;r' sveWR ;m,Iy;'sm,orip ®Km;.' Sv“/IgMy' iv¥;ˇ' pu®W' prm( 122 EtmekÉ vdNTy…¶' mnumNye p[j;pitm( îN{mekÉ pre p[;,mpre b[˜ x;êtm( 123 EW sv;R…, .Ut;in pç….Vy;RPy mUitR…." jNmvO≤ı=ywinRTy' s's;ryit c£vt( 124 Ev' y" svR.tU We u pXyTy;Tm;nm;Tmn; s svRsmt;meTy b[˜;>yeit pr' pdm( 125 îTyetNm;nv' x;S]' .Ogpu o[ ˇ_' p#≤N√j" .vTy;c;rv;…•Ty' yqe∑;' p[;“uy;Ìitm( 126 sm;¢' m;nv' /mRx;S]m( îit m;nve /mRx;S]e .Ogpu o[ ˇ_;y;' mnuSmOTy;' √;dxoå?y;y" Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha I, pp.1ff.

970

Bråhmaâ


Au§hanasa SaµhitŒ


aq a*xns s'iht; ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq;nulomp[itlomj;TyNtr;,;' inÂp,v,Rnm( ) at" pr' p[v+y;…m j;itvOiˇiv/;nkm( ) anulomiv/;nç p[itlomiv…/' tq; 1 s;Ntr;lks'yˇu _' sv| s'≤=Py coCyte ) nOp;d(b;[ ˜,kNy;y;' ivv;heWu smNvy;t( 2 j;t" sUtoå] ini∂≥∑" p[itlomiv…/i√≥j" ) ved;nhStq; cwW;' /m;R,;mnubo/k" 3 sUt;i√p[ p[stU ;y;' sUto ve,k u ¨Cyte nOp;y;mev tSywv j;to yímRk;rk" 4 b[;˜
971


Au§hanasa SaµhitŒ

Ending:

xU{Sy ivp[ss' g;R∆;t ¨g[ îit SmOt" nOpSy d<@/;r" Sy;∂<@÷ d<@‰eWu sçret( 41 tSywv c*rs'vSO y; j;t" xui<@k ¨Cyte j;tdu∑;n( sm;roPy xu<@;kmR…, yojyet( 42 xU{;y;' vwXys'sg;Ri√…/n; sUck" SmOt" sUck;i√p[kNy;y;' j;tSt=k™ ¨Cyte 43 ixLpkm;R…, c;Ny;in p[;s;dl=,' tq; nOp;y;mev tSywv j;to yo mTSyb;/k" 44 xU{;y;' vwXytí*y;Rt( k$k;r îit SmOt" vixœx;p;T]et;y;' kÉ…ct( p;rxv;Stq; 45 vw%;nsen kÉ…cˇu kÉ…c∫;gvten c vedx;S];blMv;Ste .iv„y≤Nt kl* yuge 46 k$k;r;Stt" pí;•;r;y,g,;" SmOt;" x;%; vw%;nsenoˇ_; tN]m;gRiv…/i£y;" 47 inWek;¥;" Xmx;n;Nt;" i£y;" pUj;©sU…ck;" pçr;]e, v; p[;¢' p[oˇ_' /m| sm;cret( 48 xU{;dev tu xU{;y;' j;t" xU{ îit SmOt" i√jxu≈WU ,pr" p;kyDpr;iNvt" 49 sCzÀ{' ta;' ivj;nIy;dsCzÀ{SttoåNyq; c*y;RTk;kvco Deyí;ê;n;' tO,v;hk" 50 EtTs'=pe t" p[oˇ_' j;itvOiˇiv.;gx" j;TyNtr;…, ÎXyNte s'kLp;idt Ev tu 51 îTy*xns' /mRx;S]' sm;¢m( xu£ s'iht; sm;¢; Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha III, pp.1544ff.

972

Bråhmaâ


V¨ddha HŒr´ta Smïti


aq vOıh;rItSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) aq pçs'Sk;rp[itp;dnv,Rnm( ) aMbrIWStu t' gTv; h;rItSy;≈m' nOp" ) vvNde t' mh;Tm;n' b;l;kúsÎxp[.m( 1 s'p∑O " k⁄xlSten pU…jt" prm;sne ) ¨piv∑Stto ivp[mvu ;c nOpnNdn" 2 .gvn( svR/MmRD tTvvedivd;Mvr ) pOCz;…m Tv;' mh;.;g prm' /mRmVyym( 3 b[iU h v,;R≈m;,;Ntu inTynw…miˇki£y;" ktRVy; muinx;∂Ül ≥ n;rI,;ç nOpSy c 4 SvÂp' jIvpryo" kq' mo=pqSy c tTp[;¢e s;/n' b[ñ( vˇ_⁄mhR…s suvt[ 5 Evmuˇ_Stu ivp[iWRSten r;jiWR,; td; ¨v;c prmp[ITy; nmS’Ty jn;dRnm( 6 h;rIt ¨v;c Í,u r;jn( p[v+y;…m sv| vedopvOi' htm( yduˇ_' b[˜,; pUv| pOCzto mm .Upte 7 td(bv[ I…m pr' /m| Í,u„vwk;g[m;ns" sveWR ;mev dev;n;mn;id" pu®Woˇm" 8 ÈêrStu s Ev;Nye jgto iv.urVyy" n;r;y,o v;sudve o iv„,ub˜R[ ;Tmno h·r" 9 ß∑; /;t; iv/;t; c s Ev prmeêr" ihr
973


V¨ddha HŒr´ta Smïti

Ending:

tdev ih my; r;jn( vwix„ye, tve·rtm( ivix∑' prm' /mRx;S]' vw„,vmuˇmm( 343 y îd' Í,uy;∫KTy; kqye√; sm;iht" p;rmwk;NTy s'…s≤ı' p[;“oTyev n s'xy" 344 svRp;pivinmRˇu _o y;it iv„,o" pr' pdm( yiSTvd' Í,uy;∫KTy; inTy' iv„,oí s…•/* 345 aême/shßSy fl' p[;“oTys'xy" h;rItmetCz;S]Ntu prm;' /MmRsi' ht;m( 346 a;loKy pUjyn( iv„,u' p;rmwk;NTymXnute EtCΩTv;MbrIWStu h;rIto·ˇ_' nOpoˇm" 346 vvNde pry; .KTy; tmOiW' vw„,voˇm" Tvmev prmo/MmRSTvmev prm' tp" 347 Tvd…õ±`y[ gu l' p[;Py svR…s≤ımv;“uy;m( mh;muin…mit StuTv; r;jiWR" s mh;tp;" 347 p[;¢v;n( prmwk;NTy' tTp[s;d;Tsu…s≤ıdm( vwix∑‰' p;rmwk;NTymetCz;S]' mm;Vyym( 348 .;r√;j;dy" sveR nOp;í jnk;dy" yo…gn" snk;¥;í n;rd;¥;" surWRy" 349 v…sœ;¥; vw„,v;í ivêKsen;dy" sur;" ) EtCz;S];nus;re, pUjy;m;surCyutm( 350 prm' vwidk˘ x;S]met√w„,vmuˇmm( ) D;Tvwv prmwk;NtI pUjyei√„,umIêrm( 351 îit vOıh;rItSmOt* ivix∑/MmRx;S]e vOTy…/k;ro n;m a∑moå?y;y" ) sm;¢;cey' vOıh;rItSmOit" Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha Vol. II, pp.994ff.

974

Bråhmaâ


Gautama Smïti


g*tm SmOit" ≈Ig,ex;y nm" p[qmoå?y;y" aq;c;rv,Rnm( vedo /mRml U ' ti√d;ç SmOitxIle Î∑o /mRVyit£m" s;hsç mht;' n tu Î∑oåqoRvrd*bRLy;ˇuLyblivro/e ivkLp" ) ¨pnyn' b[;˜,Sy;∑me nvme pçme v; k;My' g.;Rid" sƒ‰;vW;R,;' tid≠√tIy' jNm ) t¥Sm;Ts a;c;yoR ved;nuvcn;∞ ) Ek;dx√;dxyo" =i]yvwXyyo" ) a;Wo@x;d(b;[ ˜,Sy;pitt; s;iv]I √;…v'xter;jNySy Á…/k;y; vwXySy ) m*ÔIJy;m*vIRs*}yo me%l;" £me, ’„,®®vSt;…jn;in v;s;'…s x;,=*mcIrk⁄tp;" sveRW;' k;p;Rsç;iv’tm( ) k;W;ymPyekÉ ) v;=| b[;˜,Sy m;≤Ôœh;·r{e îtryo" vwLvp;l;x* b[;˜,Sy d<@;vêTqpwlv* xeWe y…Dy; v; sveWR ;mpI·rt; yUpc£;" svLkl; mUıl R l;$n;s;g[pm[ ;,;" ) mu<@ji$lix%;j$;í ) {VyhSt ïCz∑oåin/;y;c;me∂V^ yxu≤ı" p·rm;jRn p[d;ht=,in,Rejn;in twjsm;iˇRkd;yvt;Ntv;n;' twjsvduplm…,xƒxuˇ_In;' d;®vdiSq.UMyor;vpnç .Umeíwlv{∆uivdlcmR,;muTsgoRv;TyNtopht;n;m( ) p[;Ñü%¨dÑü%ov; x*cm;r.et( ) xuc* dexa;sIno d≤=,' b;¸÷ j;NvNtr; ’Tv; yDopvITy;m…,N/n;t( p;,I p[=;Lyv;Gyto˙dy'SpOx'≤S]ítuv;Rpa;c;-mei√" p[mJO y;Tp;d* c;>yu=Te %;in copSpOxCe z«WRyvh;rs'yogeWu c y] c;ª;yoivd?y;t( ) p;…,n; sVymups'gÁO ;©ëœm/Iih .oîTy;mN]yet gu®" ) t] c=umnR " p;,opSpxRn' d.w"R p[;,;y;m;S]y" pçdxm;];" p[;‘Àl„e v;snç —pUv;R Vy;˙ty" pçs¢;Nt;" ) guro" p;dops'gh[ ,' p[;tb[˜R ;nuvcnec;-

975


Gautama Smïti

Ending:

vOW.oå…/koJyeœSy vOW.Wo@x; JywiœneySy sm' v; Jywiœneyne yvIys;' p[itm;tO v; SvvgeR .;g ivxeW" ) iptoTsOjte ( pui]k; mnpTyoå…¶' p[j;pitçeÇ;SmdqRmpTy…mit s'v;¥;….siN/m;];Tpui]kÉPyekWÉ ;' tTs'xy;•opyeCzπd.[;tOk;m( ) ip<@go]AiWsMbN/; AKq' .jern( S]Ic;npTySy bIj' v; ≤lPset devrvTyNytoj;tm.;gm( ) S]I/n' duihtø,;mp[Ê;;n;mp[itiœt;n;ç .…gnIxuLk˘ sody;R,;m?v' m;tu" pUvçR k w É ) s's∑O iv.;g" p[te ;n;' JyeœSy s'siO ∑in p[te e as's∑O I AKq.;k™ iv.ˇ_j" ip}ymev ) Svym…jRt' vw¥oåvw¥>e y" k;m' .jern( ) pu]; a*rs=e]jdˇ’i]mgU!oTp•;p…bı; AKq.;j" k;nInsho!p*n.Rvpui]k;pu]SvyNdˇ£°t; go].;jítuq;|x.;…gní*rs;¥.;ve b[;˜,Sy r;jNy;pu]o Jyeœogu,sMp•StuLy;'x.;k™ Jyeœ;'xhInmNyt( r;jNy; vwXy;pu]smv;ye s yq; b[;˜,Ipu],e =i]y;∞et( xU{;pu]oåPynpTySy xu≈WU íu Le l.et vOiˇmUlmNtev;siv…/n; sv,;Rp]u oåPyNy;yvOˇo n l.etwkÉW;' ≈oi]y; b[;˜,Sy;n pTySy AKq' .jern( r;jetreW;' j@KlIv* .ˇRVy;vpTy' j@Sy .;g;h| xU{;pu]vTp[itlom;sUdkyog=em’t;•e„viv.;g" S]IWu c s'yˇu _;Svn;D;te dx;vrw" ix∑wÂhv≤∫rluB/w" p[xSt' k;yRm( ) cTv;rítu,;| p;rg; ved;n;' p[;guˇm;S]y a;≈…m," pOqG/mRivdS]y Et;n( dx;vr;n( p·rWidTy;c=te asM.ve TvetWe ;m≈oi]yo vediviCz∑oivp[itpˇ* yd;h ytoåymp[.vo .Ut;n;' ih's;nugh[ yogeWu /…mR,;' ivxeW,e Svg| lok˘ /mRivd;“oit D;n;….invex;>y;…mit /moR /mR" îit g*tmIye /mRx;S]e Ekoni]'xˇmoå?y;y" sm;¢; cey' g*tmSmOit" Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha Vol. IV, pp.1879 ff.

976

Bråhmaâ


Yama Smïti


aq ymSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;ynm" ) aq p[;y…íˇv,Rnm( ) aq;to ÁSy /mRSy p[;y…íÊ;;…./;ykm( ) ctu,;Rmip v,;Rn;' /mRx;S]' p[vˇRte 1 jl;¶‰u√N/n.[∑;" p[bJ[ y;nxnCyut;" ) ivWp[ptnp[;yxS]`;tCyut;í ye 2 sveR te p[Tyv…st;" svRlokvih„’t;" ) c;N{;y,en xu?y≤Nt t¢’Cz^√yen v; 3 ¨.y;v…st;" p;Kp; yeåg[;Myxr,Cyut;" îNdu√yen xu?y≤Nt dÊv; /en'u tq; vOWm( 4 gob[;˜,hn' dG/; mOtmu√N/nen c p;x' tSywv …zÊv; tu t¢’Cz^' sm;cret( 5 ’…m….v[,R s'.tU mw ≤R =k;êop/;itt" ’Cz^;ı| s'pk [ v⁄ IRt xKTy; d¥;ˇu d≤=,;m( 6 b[;˜,Sy ml√;re pUyxo…,tsM.ve ’…m.uˇ_v[,e m*ÔIhomen s ivxu?yit 7 y" =i]yStq; vwXy" xU{í;Pynulomj" D;Tv; .u¤π ivxeW,e cre∞;N{;y,' v[tm( 8 k⁄‘$⁄ ;<@p[m;,Ntu g[;sç p·rkLpyet( aNyq;h;rdoWe, n s t] ivxu?yit 9 Ekìk˘ vıRyCe z⁄Kle ’„,p=e c Ó;syet( am;v;Sy;' n .uÔIt EW c;N{;y,oiv…/" 10 sur;Nym¥p;nen gom;'s.=,e ’te t¢’Cz^çrei√p[SyTp;pStu p[,Xyit 11 p[;y…íˇe Áup£;Nte kt;R yid ivp¥te pUtStdhrev;ip îhlokÉ pr] c 12 y;vdek" pOqk™ {Vy" p[;y…íˇen xu?yit

977


Yama Smïti

Ending:

ro/ne bN/ne cwv Sq;ipte pu„kle tq; k;œº vnSpt* ro/s˚$e r∆uvS]yo" 67 Etˇe k…qt' sv| p[m;dSq;nmuˇmm( y] y] mOt; g;v" p[;y…íˇ' sm;cret( 68 d;®,; `;tne ’Cz^' p;W;,wi√≥g,u ' .vet( aıR’Cz^Ntu %;te Sy;t( p;d’Cz^Ntu p;dpe 69 xS]`;te i]’Cz^;…, yi∑`;te √y' cret( 70 ’Cz^,π vS]`;teåip goflíeit ivxu?yit yovˇRyit gom?ye ndIk;Nt;rm≤NtkÉ 71 rom;…, p[qme p;de i√tIye Xm≈u v;pyet( tOtIye tu ix%; /;y;R ctuqRe six%' vpet( 72 n S]I,;' vpn' k⁄y;Rt( n c s; g;mnuvj[ te ( n c r;]* vseÌoœº n k⁄y;R√iw dk°' ≈uitm( 73 sv;Rn( kÉx;n( smuıT» y zπdyed©ë≤l√ym( Evmev tu n;rI,;' ixrso vpn' SmOtm( 74 mOtkÉn tu j;ten ¨.yo" sUtk˘ .vet( p;tkÉn tu ≤l¢en n;Sy sUtikt; .vet( 75 cTv;·r %lu km;R…, sN?y;k;le ivvjRyte ( a;h;r' mwqnu ' in{;' Sv;?y;yç ctuqk R m( 76 a;h;r;∆;yte Vy;…/" £Àrg.Rí mwqnu e ) in{; …≈yo invˇRNte Sv;?y;ye mr,' /[vu m( 77 aD;n;ˇu i√j≈eœ v,;Rn;' ihtk;Myy; ) my; p[oˇ_…md' x;S]' s;v/;noåv/;ry 78 îit ymp[oˇ_' /mRx;S]' sm;¢m( ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha IV, pp.2083ff.

978

Bråhmaâ

Branch 30B: Upasmïti (01)

KŒ§hyapa Smïti

Structure: 55 Verses (including some prose) Beginning:

aq k;XypSmOit" p[;y…íˇv,Rnm( aq k;XypIy;n( gOhSq/m;Rn( Vy;:y;Sy;m" a;iht;…¶" Svd;rinrtoåc;GNy…¶ho]I ò;t;mOtk u ;lg;mI deviptOmnu„y.Utb[˜yD;nusve m;n" Eki√i]ctu,;| b[;˜,;n( k⁄v;R,o v[tinymhomj;Pypro m;tOiptO.ˇ_o d;r;pTypoWk" xeW;nu.ojI ¨pv;sI ]wv…,RkmedksUtk;•p·rhrm;,oål;'glvO·ˇ" ) t] c .UMypo!ne vO=Czπdne n;Sy/moR.vit ) kÀpsettu @;givp[dve t;ytn.edne p[;y…íˇ' b[;˜,e>yo inve¥ ctß a;¸tIju¸R y;t( ) îd' iv„,u·rit p[qm; m;nStok îit i√tIy; Svv;s; îit tOtIy; d'∑;^ >y;…mit ctuqIRrTyßpo!yet( tSywv devt;yw pU,;R¸it' ju¸y;t( ) aq goblIvdRmihW/Uy;Rivkih's;v;¢* p[;y…íˇk;mk;rt;…mTyekÉ ) doG/OdmnpyRStp;W`Øn`'$;.r,.UW,yojn twlm'@*W/.eWJyi]tym;,e Vy;¢;n;mk;m;v;¢‰w p[;y…íˇ' b[;˜,e>yo inve¥ s≤xr=urvpn' ’Tv; p[;j;pTy' ’Cz^m;cret( ) cI,;|te g;' d¥;t( itl/en'u jl/en'u ceitk;Xyp" ) aq mOgmihWg'@k u vr;hxr.A=…s'hVy;`[m@' k Ü xUkr mTSyg[;h≤xxum;r;dIn;' v/e„vhor;]' ) cI,;|te g;' d¥;t( ) meW s i]r;]' cI,;RNte ihryo inve¥ p[;j;pTy' ’Cz^' cret( ) cI,;RNte sv[IhIn( d¥;t( ) ’kl;sspRnk⁄liv@;lgoj;v/e i]r;]' cI,;RNte loh' d¥;t( )

979

Bråhmaâ Branch 30B: Upasmïti (01)

KŒ§hyapa Smïti

Ending:

s¢ p*n.Rv; kNy; vjRnIy; k⁄l;/m;" 5 v;c; dÊ;; mnodÊ;; ’tm'glk*tuk; ¨dkSpxRk; y; c y; c p;…,g[hIitk; 6 a¶‰up;y' gt; y; c punv;RÁSy v;idk; îTyet;" kXypp[oˇ_; dhey"u k⁄lm…¶vt( 7 p[rohTy…¶m;d;y p;dp;n;' k⁄lm' ht( n ih pun.Rv;dIn;' k⁄l' tSy p[rohit 8 ipt; v; yid v; .[;t; m;t; v; yidvetr" nrí ’tp;p;n;' git y;' y;it t;' Í,u 9 minvtIR yq; Xyeno gCzTyev ym;ly' Ev' c nrk˘ y;it kNy; amOtk;rk; 10 pun" sMp¥te n;rI gtm;Tm;nm;Tmin aiSqm;]' Tvc' ….Tv; xu£˘ tejobl' tq; 11 xu≤ı' n ye p[yCz÷it duihtr' lo.moiht;" teW;' tu nrkÉ òre y;it vw s¢m' k⁄lm( 12 gmn;gmn;yog;t( Ev' xu£É iv/Iyte Ev' D;Tv; yuˇ_kNy;' …v'dte s tTk⁄l;t( 13 nSy;∂Ÿve c ip}ye c d;sISy;dq s'…ct; £y£°t; tu s; d;sI n s; pàI iv/Iyte 14 a…¶∑om;itr;];,;' xt' xtgu,I ’tm( ) p[;“oit pu®WodTv; homm']w rl'’t;m( 15 yStu s;Tym/me,R ipt; smpRyte ( sut;m( ) s p[Te y l.te Sq;n' yq; d= p[j;pit" 16 îit k;Xyp p[,It' /mRx;S]' sm;¢m( ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha IV, pp.2485ff.

980

Bråhmaâ


Pulastya Smïti


aq pulSTySmOit" ) v,;R≈m/mRv,Rnm( ) k⁄®=e]e mh;Tm;n' pulSTymOWyoåb[vu n( ) t;'í /m;RNp[k;r;'í no vd Sm;tRm;gmm( 1 Ev' pO∑" p[Tyuv;c sv;|St;n( pOCzt AWIn( ) p'c/; v;iSqt' /m| Í,u?v' i√jsˇm;" 2 v,R/mR" SmOtSTvek a;≈m;,;mt" prm( ) v,;R≈mStOtIyStu gu,nw…miˇkStq; 3 v,Rmk e ˘ sm;…≈Ty yoå…/k;r' p[vtRte v,R/mR" s ivDyo yqopnyn' i]Wu 4 ySTv;≈y' sm;…≈Ty pd;qR" s'iv/Iyte ¨ˇ_ a;≈m/mStu ….=;ip<@;idk˘ tq; 5 ¨.ySy in…mˇen yo iv…/" sMp[vtRte nw…miˇk" sivDey" p[;y…íˇiv…/yRq; 6 b[˜c;rI gOhSqí v;np[Sqí ….=uk" ¨ˇ_ a;≈m/mRStu r;j/mRStu pçm" 7 v,R/mRítu,;| y" a;≈m;,;' tqwv c √yo" s;/;r,o /moR yí;s*√yxeW.;k™ 8 îJy;?yynd;n;in yq;x;S]' sn;tnm( b[˜ =i]y vwXy;n;' s;m;Nyo /mR ¨Cyte 9 y;jn;?yyne r;Do .Ut;n;ç;….r=,m( p;xup;Ly' ’iWíwv vwXySy;jIvn' SmOtm( 10 xU{Sy i√jxu≈WU ; i√j;n;mnupvU x R " xU{; c vOiˇStTsev; k;®
981


Pulastya Smïti

Ending:

vnev;s" pyomUlnIv;rk,vOiˇt; 17 p[itg[hinvOiˇí i]"ò;n' m*n/;r,m( devt;it…qpUj; c /moRåy' vnv;…sn;m( 18 sv;Rr.' p·rTy;go .w=;•' vOˇmUlt; in„p·rg[ht; {oh" smt; svRjNtuWu 19 ip[y;ip[yp·r„v©" su%du"%;ivk;·rt; s b;Á;>yNtr;x*c' inymo v[tk;·rt; 20 sve≤R N{ysm;h;ro /;r,;?y;ninTyt; .;vxu≤ıStqeTyev' p·rv[;@±/mR ¨Cyte 21 aih's; sTyv;dí sTy' x*c' dy; =m; v…,Rn;' ≤li©n;çwv s;m;Nyo /mR ¨Cyte 22 SvD;n' ˙id sveWR ;' /moRåy' v…,R≤li©n;m( aÎ∑;qoR i√iv/" p[oˇ_o Î∑;qRíi√tIyk" 23 ¨.y;qRStOtIyí Ny;ymUlítuqk R " ¨.y;Vyvh;rí d'@/;r,mev c 24 tuLy;q;Rn;' ivkLp"Sy;•‰;ymUl" p[k°iˇRt" vede tu ividto /mR" SmOt* t;Îx Ev tu 25 anuv;k" ≈uitsUˇ_' k;y;Rq…R mit m;nv;" tdqRí p[y;soåy' s c seVy" fl;…qRn; 26 ¨ˇ_" pç iv/o /mR" ≈eyoå>yudyhetk u " ) pu®W;,;' yq;yog' sc seVy" fl;…qRn; 27 s¥Stu p[*!b;l;y;mNyq; vTsr;Cz…c" ) p[d;t; y;' i]r;]e, dÊ;;y;' p≤=,I .vet( 28 îit pulSTyp[oˇ_' /mRx;S]' sm;¢m( ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha IV, pp.2134ff.

982

Bråhmaâ


NŒradýa Manu Smïti

Structure: 20 Divisions. Beginning:

n;rdIymnuSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq;d* Vyvh;rdxRniv…/" ) mnu" p[j;pityRiSmNk;le r;Jymbu.ju t( ) /mwk R t;n;" pu®W;Std;sn( sTyv;idn" 1 n∑e /meR mnu„yeWu Vyvh;r" p[k‚Lpt" ) {∑;c Vyvh;r;,;' r;j; d<@/r" ’t" 2 ≤l≤%t' s;≤=,í;] √* iv/I sMp[vitRt* ) s≤NdG/;≈Rivxuı‰q| √yoivRvdm;nyo" 3 soˇroånuˇríwv s ivDeyo i√l=," soˇroå>y…/ko y] ivle%;pUvk R " p," 4 ivv;de soˇrp,e √yoyRSt] hIyte s p,' Sv’t' d;Pyo ivny' c pr;jye 5 s;rStu Vyvh;r;,;' p[itD; smud;˙t; tı;n* hIyte v;dI tr'St;muˇro .vet( 6 k⁄l;in ≈e,yíwv g,;í;…/’to nOp" p[itœ; Vyvh;r;,;' guv>Re yStUˇroˇrm( 7 s ctu„p;∞tu"Sq;nítu"s;/n Ev c ctuihRtítuVy;RpI ctu„k;rI c k°TyRte 8 a∑;©oå∑;dxpd" xtx;%Stqwv c i]yoin√‰R….yogí i√√;ro i√gitStq; 9 /mRí Vyvh;rí c·r]' r;jx;snm( ctu„p;√‰vh;roåymuˇr" pUvbR ;/k" 10 t] sTye iSqto /moR Vyvh;rStu s;≤=Wu c·r]' puStkr,e r;j;D;y;' tu x;snm( 11 s;m;¥up;ys;?yTv;∞tu"s;/n ¨Cyte ctu,;Rm;≈m;,;' c r=,;TsctuihRt" 12 ktønR qo s;≤=,í s>y;n[;j;nmev c

983


NŒradýa Manu Smïti

Ending:

sopv;sí %;det devb[;˜,s'in/* 38 ivW' vegKlm;pet' su%ne yid jIyRte ivxuı…mit t' D;Tv; r;j; sT’Ty mo=yet( 39 Tv' ivW b[˜," pu]" sTy/mRrt* iSqt" xo/ywn' nr' p;p;TsTyen;Sy;mOtI.v 40 kox" at" pr' p[v+y;…m koxSy iv…/muˇmm( 41 pUv;R º sopv;sSy ò;tSy;{Rp$Sy c sxUkSy;Vysinn" koxp;n' iv/Iyte 42 y∫ˇ_" soå….yuˇ_" Sy;ˇ∂ŸvTy' tu p;yyet( s¢;h;¥Sy ÎXyte i√s¢;hen v; pun" p[Ty;‚Tmk˘ tu y≤Tk˘…ct( swv tSy iv.;vn; 43 i√s¢;h;Tpr' ySy mh√; vw’t' .vet( n;….yoJy" s ivduW;' ’tk;lVyit£m;t( 44 mh;pr;/e in/RmRe ’tfle KlIbk⁄iTste n;iStkv[;Tyd;seWu koxp;n' ivvjRyte ( 45 yqoˇ_Én iv/;nen pç idVy;in /mRivt( ) dd{;j;….xSte>y" p[Te y ceh c nNdit 46 n ivW' b[;˜,e d¥;• loh' =i]yo hret( n inm∆‰;Psu vXyí xU{" kox' n p;yyet( 47 vW;Rsu n ivW' d¥;t( hemNte n;Psu m∆yet( n loh' h;ryed( g[I„me n koW' p;yye…•ix 48 îit pç idVy;in ) sm;¢wW; n;rdIymnuSmOit" ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha I, pp.250ff.

984

Bråhmaâ


Vi§hvamitra Smïti


ivê;…m]SmOit" ) aq p[qmoå?y;y" ) inTynw…miˇkkmR,;'v,Rnm( ) shßdlp˚je sklxItriXmp[.e ) vr;.ykr;Mbuj' ivmlgN/pu„p;Mbrm( – p[s•vdne=,' skldevt;Âip,' ) SmreiCzr…sp;vn' tdiv/;npUv| gu®m( 1 a;iˆkm( ) ctu"pç`$Im;n' muÙt| b[˜s'…Dtm( ) pçpç`$I Dey; ¨W"k;l îtI„yte 2 Atub;,`$Im;nm®,odys'…Dtm( ) ¨W" pç`$Im;n' p[;t"k;l îit SmOt" 3 Ev' D;Tv;' p[.;te tu inTy£m sm;cret( inTynw…miˇkÉ k;Mye ’te k;le tu sTflm( 4 b[;˜e muÙtR ¨Tq;y ’Tv; x*c' sm;iht" ò;n' k⁄y;RdWu "k;le a;Tm;qRm®,odye 5 p[;t"k;l jp' k⁄y;R…•Tynw…miˇk˘ ivdu" riXmmNt' sm;loKy ¨pSq;n' sm;cret( 6 sN?y;y;' mu:yk;l;it£me doW" k;l;tIt' n ktRVy' ktRVy' k;ls'ytu m( tSm;TsvRpy[ àen k;le kmR sm;cret( 7 ¨ˇ_k;le tu yTkmR p[m;d;d’t' yid 8 i]shßjp' k⁄y;RTp[;y…íˇ' iv/Iyte tq; p[oˇ_' p[;,;y;m√yi]km( 9 aqv; jpm;]e, k;l;tIten doW.;k™ i]shß' shß' v; i]xt' xtmev v; 10 anulomivlom;>y;' jPTv;dp;p =yo .vet(

985


Vi§hvamitra Smïti

Ending:

go]p;•' .vTyev vOq; ≈;ı' n s'xy" inTy≈;ıe gy;≈;ıe tIqR≈;ıe tqwv c 74 vwêdev' ¸ned;d* tt" ≈;ı' sm;cret( Sv;h;k;re, ¸Tv;d* Sv/;k;re, vw tt" 75 Ev' hom]y' ’Tv; tt" ≈;ı' sm;cret( vwêdevivWye" hiv„ymNt' Òtsïl' c vˆ* sm;'x' ju¸y;≤T]y;mm( √yoˇr' i]jityuGms'D' ao'k;rm;d* p[itmN]yuˇ_m( 76 rsyuˇ_' hiv„y' Sy;Ótyuˇ_' tqodnm( b[;˜,o vwêdev;q| k⁄y;R…•Tymt≤N{t" 77 aNySy ce{s' TyKTv; vwêdev' kroit y" dev>e yXx;pm;“oit d·r{o .vit /[vu m( 78 supKv' rss'yˇu _' r;j;•' Òts'ytu m( tıiv„y…mit D;t' supI[ t;≤S]dx;dx" 79 pvR√ye sm;yoge ≈;ı;Nte vwêdev;y p;k˘ ’Tv;p[yàt" 80 ¸Tv; dTv; c .uKTv; c i√jí;N{;y,' cret( dev;n;' c AWI,;' c iptø,;' c ivxeWt" 81 py;Ry,e p[d;tVy' ≈;ık;le hivi√≥j"w ) deviWRiptOt∑u ‰qRmk e p;ko iv/Iyte 82 pOqKp;ko n ktRVy" ’tíeTpitto .vet( ) a’Tv;•' tu nwv¥e ' y" k⁄y;R≤T£…msïlm( 83 hom' ’Tv; p[yàen vwêdev' p[kLpyet( ) îit ivê;…m]SmOt* vwêdev p[kr,'n;m;∑moå?y;y" sm;¢m( ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha V, pp.2645ff.

986

Bråhmaâ


Devala Smïti


aq devlSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq p[;y…íˇv,Rnm( ) …sN/utIre su%;sIn' devl' muinsˇmm( ) smeTy muny" sveR îd' vcnmb[vu n( 1 .gvNm(lCe znIt; ih kq' xu≤ımv;“uy"u ) b[;˜,;" =≤T]y; vwXy;" xU{;íwv;nupvU x R " 2 kq' ò;n' kq' x*c' p[;y…íˇ' kq' .vet( ) ikm;c;r; .veySu te td;c+v sivStrm( 3 devl ¨v;c i]xï÷ vjRy∂e x º ' sv| √;dxyojnm( ¨ˇre, mh;n¥; d≤=,en tu k°k$m( 4 p[;y…íˇ' p[v+y;…m ivStre, mhWRy" 5 mOtsUte tu d;sIn;' pàIn;' c;nulo…mn;m( Sv;…mtuLy' .veCz*c' mOte Sv;…min y*inkm( 6 apey' yen s'pItm.+y' c;ip .≤=tm( MleCz¯nIRtne ivp[,e agMy;gmn' ’tm( 7 tSy xu≤ı' p[v+y;…m y;vdek˘ tu vTsrm( c;N{;y,' tu ivp[Sy spr; k˘ p[k°itRtm( 8 pr;kmek˘ =T]Sy p;d’Cz^,π s'ytu m( pr;k;/| tu vwXySy xU{Sy idnpçkm( 9 n%lomivhIn;n;' p[;y…íˇ' p[d;pyet( ctu,;Rmip v,;Rn;mNyq;åxu≤ıriSt ih 10 p[;y…íˇivhIn' tu yd; teW;' klevrm( ktRVySt] s'Sk;ro me%l;d<@v…jRt" 11 MleCz¯nIRtne xU{vw ;R h;·rte d<@me%le s'Sk;rp[m% u ' tSy sv| k;y| yq;iv…/ 12 s'Sk;r;Nte c ivp[;,;' d;n' /eníu d≤=,;

987


Devala Smïti

Ending:

pçgVy' c go=Ir' d…/ mU]' Òt' py" p[;Xy;preåˆ‰upvseT’Cz^' s;'tpn' cret( 81 pOqKs;'tpn' {Vyw" W@h" sopv;sk" s¢;hen tu ’Czôåy' mh;s;'tpn" SmOtm( 82 p,oRdMu brr;jIvivLvp]k⁄xodkì" p[Tyek˘ p[Tyh' pItw" pU,’ R Cz^ ¨d;˙t" 83 t¢=IrÒt;MbUn;mekk ì ˘ p[Tyh' ipbet( Ekr;]opv;sí t¢’Cz^Stu p;vn" 84 Ek.ˇ_Én nˇ_Én tqwv;y;…cten tu ¨pv;sen cwknÉ p;d’Cz^ ¨d;˙t" 85 ’Cz^;it’Cz^" pys; idvs;nek…v'xitm( √;dx;hopv;sen pr;k" p·rk°itRt" 86 ipy;s;dekk ì Sy yq;£mm( tul;pu®W îTyeW Dey" pçdx;ihk" 88 it…q vOı‰; cre≤Tp<@;Hz⁄Kle ix:y<@s'…mt;n( ) Ekìk˘ Ó;sye≤Tp<@;N’Cz^c;N{;y,' cret( 89 yq;kq'…c≤Tp<@;n;' cTv;·r'xCzt√ym( ) îit devl ’t' /mRx;S]' p[k°itRtm( 90 sm;¢ey' devlSmOit" ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha III, pp.1655ff.

988

Bråhmaâ


MŒrkaö¶eya Smïti


aq m;kú<@ºySmOit" ) t];d* v,;R≈m/mR v,Rnm( m;kú<@ºy' b[˜kLpd≤xRnmeTy te mh;Tm;n" x*nk;¥;" svRDmOWyoåb[vu n( 1 .gv'STv' b¸b[˜kLpdxIR ivxeWivt( atSTv' svRdve iWR" yo…gyJv;…/ko mt" 2 svRv,;R≈m;c;r/m;R/mRpv[ tRk;n( ) j;n;…s ’ts'v;dStwrTyNt' mh;Tm…." 3 anekb[˜kLp;n;' s'pd[ ;ypr;qRg" ) punvedR ;qRtTvD" i£y;kLpivxeWivt( 4 îith;spur;,D" SmOittÊvrhSyg" a;pTk;lwkktRVymTyR/mRiv.;givt( 5 d·r{s'pTsmysdsTk;yRin,Rye p·rCzπÊ;; ivxeW,e mu:y;mu:y;idtTvivt( 6 tSm;Êv;m/un; sveR s'Ì.Uy;≤∞r;√ym( sm;loCyiv/;nenin…íTy c pun" pun" 7 pOCz;m" svR/m;|í ktRVy;Nmo=s;/n;n( svRv,;R≈m’te in"xeWyugs'mt;n( 8 atSTv' ’py;Sm;su t;n( sMyGvˇ_⁄mhR…s îTyev' s ’tp[Xn" x*nk;¥wmhR iWR…." 9 m;kú<@ºyo mh;.;g" svRdxIR ’p;my" tihR Í,u?v…mTyuKTv; iSmtpUv| vcoåb[vIt( 10 b[˜;dyoåip in≤%l;" ik˘…cJD; Ev kÉvlm( pr' tu t] sveWR ;' r=omTy;R mOt;N/s;m( 11 t;rtMy' tSy cwW;' t≤∫•;n;' c sNttm( aSTyev prm' ten gu®noRåy' ipt;mh" 12 svRDStu Evwko .gv;n( .Ut.;vn"

989


MŒrkaö¶eya Smïti

Ending:

sgu,' x;S]iviht' ten mu·ˇ_' p[p¥te anNt;StÌu,;" sNtu te Tvs;?y;" SmOt;" sd; – anuœ;tumtR íeme mu:y;" kÉcn t;n( b[vu e SvSvpàID;itbN/u’t;•en ’t' yid – ip]o" ≈;ı' smIcIn’t' s;Ìu
990

Bråhmaâ


åi§hya§hï‹ga Smïti

Structure: Two divisions, a total of 104 Chapters. Beginning:

AXyÍ'gs'iht; ) ≈I g,ptye nm" ) ≈I s;Mbixv;y nm" ) v;gIx;¥;" sumnsSsv;Rq;Rn;mup£me y' nTv; ’t’Ty;" SyuSt' nm;…m gj;nnm( 1 ≈I j;nk°x p;d;BjÎ!.ˇ_' …jte≤N{ym( iv.<@k sut' x;Nt;.t;Rr' tps;' in…/m( 2 …sı;≈me sm;sInmOXyÍ©mkLmWm( ¨∂;lk ¨d˚í m*ÌLy;' g;¬vStq; 3 g*tmSysut" s;=;Czt;nNdo mh;tp;" tIqRy;];p[s©πn …sı;≈mmup;gt;" 4 t] …sı;≈me puR y' n;Nyq; tps;' in/e 12

991


å§hya§hï‹ga Smïti

Ending:

deixk˘ x;S]vˇ_;rmsMpUJy ivmU!/I" 32 i£y;h;inmv;“oit k;yR…s≤ı' n ivNdit y" pUjyit vˇ_;r' x;S]Sy;Sy mh;Tmn;" x;êt' ydv;“oit punr;vOiˇv…jRtm( 33 k⁄$Mü bvO≤ı' /n/;NyvO≤ı' s*.;GyvO≤ı' c xu.;in inTym( av;Py x;S]≈v,en pí;t( pr' pd' y;it rm;…/v;sm( 34 A„yÍ© ¨v;c îTyuˇ_' …g·rj;deVyw ixven prm;Tmn; …cTkl;mnum;h;TMym;r>ywt{hSykm( 35 pUv| n;r;y,enoˇ_muˇr' x˚re·rtm( tN]' d;xrqIy;:y' veds;r;qR s'gh[ m( 36 a]wkmip v;å?y;ymqRD;n purSsrm( p#π¥" Í,uy;√;ip ivmuˇ_" p;pr;ix…." 37 p[y;it prm' /;m sn;tnmnuˇmm( A„yÍ©mu%;M.oj;t( ≈uTvwtTprmWRy" 38 mTv;ååTm;n' pr' b[˜ r;m' n;r;y,' iv.um( ) A„yÍ©÷ sm;.;„y D;Tv; /mRrhSykm( 39 ’t’Ty;Stto jGmu" Sv;≈m;Nmuidt;nn;" ) îd' tN]' mhÌu¢' t;rk b[˜Âip,; ) j;nk° pitn; p[oˇ_' jgd;nNdhetk u m( 40 îit ≈Imdnuˇr b[˜tTvrhSye d;xrqIye tN]e veds;r;qRsg' h[ e s*.;Gyiv¥odye r;jr;jiv¥; m;h;TMye ¨ˇr.;ge x;S]rhSykqn' n;m pçcTv;·r'xoå?y;y" sm;¢" – ≈IgoivNd;y nm" ) ≈Ir;mcN{;y nm" ) Reference: RŒmŒnuja TŒtŒchŒrya, åishyasringa Samhita, Edited with Introduction, 2 vols., (Thanjavur: Sarasvati Mahal Library, 1983).

992

Bråhmaâ


Ì§hvalŒyana Smïti


aq l~v;êl;ynSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) t] p[qmm;c;rp[kr,v,Rnm( ) a;êl;ynm;c;y| nTv;åpOCzNmunIêr;" i√j/m;RNvd;Sm;k˘ SvgRp;[ i¢kr;Nmune îit t√cn' ≈uTv; s /m;RNmuinrb[vIt( 1 /m;RNv" purto v+ye ?y;Tv;åh' .o munIêr;" lokSy c iht;q;Ry b[˜m;gRrtSy c 2 ò;n' sN?y; jpo hom" Sv;?y;y;>ysn' tq; m;?y;iˆk° i£y; pçyD;¥it…qpUjnm( 3 d;nix∑p[itg[;h* po„yvgw"R sh;xnm( sTkq;≈v,' s;y's?' y;hom;idk˘ c ih 4 xyn' c yq;k;le /mRpà‰; sh gOhI b[˜c;rI Sv/mRSqo gu®sev;pro vset( 5 yjn' y;jn' cwv vedSy;?yyn' c ih a?y;pn' tq; d;n' p[itg[h…mhoCyte 6 Et;in b[;˜," k⁄y;RTW$(km;R…, idne idne at" p[;t" smuTq;y …cNtyed;Tmno ihtm( 7 ingu,R ' inrh'k;r' n;r;y,mn;mym( sgu,' c …≈y; yuˇ_' dev' devI' srSvtIm( 8 yq;iv…/ tt" k⁄y;RdTu sg| mlmU]yo" b[˜c;rI gOhSqí x*cm≤∫mOdR ;ååcret( 9 Ek; ≤l©π kre itß" kryomOdR √( y' gude pç v;me dx p[oˇ_;" kre s¢;q hStyo" 10 EtCz*c' gOhSqSy i√gu,' b[˜c;·r,"

993


Ì§hvalŒyana Smïti

Ending:

iptOm;nev .uÔIy;Cz^;ı…mNdu=ye i√j" tO¢;" Syu" iptrSten d;t; SvgRmv;“uy;t( 21 ≈;ıkt;| n .uÔIy;Tpr≈;ıe iv/u=ye .u¤π ce≤Tptro y;≤Nt d;t; .oˇ_;åPy/ogitm( 22 dxeiR ∑k; VytIp;to vw/iO tí mh;ly" yug;í mnv" ≈;ık;l;" s'£;NtyStq; 23 gjCz;yopr;gí WœI y; kipl; tq; a/oRdy;dyíwv ≈;ık;l;" SmOt; bu/"w 24 s'.tU e c nve /;Nye ≈oi]yo gOhm;gte a;c;y;‹" kÉ…cidCz≤Nt ≈;ı' tIq| c svRd; 25 ≈;@±/k;leWu sveWR u k⁄y;RCz^;ı' c x·ˇ_t" ivxeWto mOt;he tu ip]oíwv iv/Iyte 26 moh;• k⁄®te ≈;ı' m;t;ip]omOtR he åin inr;x;" iptro y;≤Nt dugiR t' c;ip vw sut" 27 aD;n;√; p[m;d;√; yo mOt;hmit£met( s y;it nrk˘ òr' y;vd;.Uts'Plvm( 28 ait£m' mOt;hSy doW" Sy;TsUtk˘ ivn; n k⁄y;RCz^;ım;x*ce p[vd≤Nt mhWRy" 29 a;crei√…/vCz^;ı' m;t;iptomOtR åe hin iptrSten tOPy≤Nt gCz≤Nt pdmuˇmm( 30 sd;c;rpro ivp[" ’p;lu" ≈;ı’ˇq; a;TminœoåqRlokÉWu t;ryeˇrit Svym( 31 îTy;êl;yn/mRx;S]e ≈;ıopyo…gp[kr,m( sm;¢ey' l~v;êl;ynSmOit" ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha III, pp.1683ff.

994

Bråhmaâ


NarŒyaöa Smïti


n;r;y,SmOit" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) n;r;y,duv;Rsso"sMv;d" ) Ekd; nw…mW;ry;' vOWiSqt" 5 tt" k≤lyuge p[;¢e p;denk w nÉ itœit tt" ’to yug"≈eœo m?ymStdnNtrm( 6 a/mo √;pryug" k≤lSSy;d/m;/m" ’te ’te yuge p;pe t∂ºx' s'p·rTyjet( 7 ]et;y;' g[;mm;]' tu √;pre k⁄lmusjO te ( kl* yuge ivxeW,e kÊ;;‹r' tu p·rTyjet( 8 ’t]et;√;pre tu mr,;Nt;idin„’it" kl* yuge tu sMp[;¢e mr,;Nt; n in„’it" 9 p;p; nviv/;" p[oˇ_;" s;v/;nty; Í,u b[˜hTy; sur;p;n' Stey' guv©R n;gm" 10 y EtwSsh s'yogI mh;p;tikniSTvme aitdex;dmIW;' yd;itdeixkmuCyte 11 EtTp[k;xp;p;n;' rhSy;n;m( tqwv c gov/;idkmenoydup;tkmuCyte 12

995


NarŒyaöa Smïti

Ending:

t;t te kqy;My¥ Í,u v;TsLyg*rv;t( 2 aTyNt;ˇoR yid b[ñ( a/n" k≤lvJyR’t( xr,' yid s'p;[ ¢" p[;y…íˇ…md' vdet( 3 six%' vpn' ’Tv; inTykmRpr;y," pu
996

Bråhmaâ


BhŒradvŒja Smïti


.;r√;jSmOit" ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) .;r√;jMp[it .OGv;idmunIn;' sN?y;idp[m% u kmRivWye p[Xn" ) hem;i{ix%re rMye su%;sIn' mh;jnm( .r√;j' muin≈eœ' svRiv¥;tpoin…/m( 1 pu
997


BhŒradvŒja Smïti

Ending:

Vy;˙tIn;mqwtiSmNpuríy;Riv…/' pur" xKTyqRmNyq;x·ˇ_nR purír,' ivn; 39 tSm;TpuríreıIm;n( aq kmR sm;cret( km;R,I∑;in …s?y'it sTy' tSy;g[jNmn" 40 i]ò;n' b[˜cy| c vsu/;xyn' cret( jped√( ;dxs;hß' ¨pv;s]y' i√j" 41 axˇ_oySTvhor;]' vopo„y;….iht' jpet( apurír,' Áºtid∑;nq;RNyq;ååcret( 42 b[˜vcRsk;míeTshß' b[˜.U®h;m( sr/;ˇ_*rd?yˇ_;" s…m/o ju¸y;Ll.et( 43 tejSk;mStq;ååJyen /;Nyk;mStu x;≤l…." =Ire, pxuk;mStu pu]k;mo vdeN/nw" 44 x;'itk;m"xmIk;œŸ" aqRk;mokútpR,"w r=oivn;xn;qIRcLl;jwripit vwrip 45 du"Sv“p;pn;x;qIR p;pI s¥o ivnXyit p[≤=Py;…..[;tOk;m" pu];qIR ipPpleN/nw" 46 ap;m;gwrR êw yRk;m" ≈Ik;mI y" pl;xkì" su/m;R ip[yk;mStu svR{Vy;
998

Bråhmaâ


Lohita Smïti


loihtSmOit" ) ivv;h;¶*Sm;tRkmRiv/;nv,Rnm( ) loiht' svRvde ;NttÊvD' Ny;yivˇm;" s;m;NyD;ns'j;ts'xy;SsvR vStuWu 1 ivxeW' p·rpp[Cz⁄" .;y;Rp]u /n;idWu Sm;t| kmR ivv;h;¶* k⁄vIRt p[Tyh'ghO I 2 îTy] iv¥m;noå…¶ xBdoåy' s'xy;Spdm( p[/;nl;jhom;…¶" ivv;h;…¶·ritSmOt" 3 soåy' inTyTv/;yRTvivihto ih yto mt" ivv;hpcn;…¶íeTp[’ten smÔs" 4 tSyoˇr] k;yeWR u ivinyogwkxUNyt" p[/;nhom;¶* t] punSs'xy Eekk" 5 a;¥;¶* v; i√tIy;¶* tOtIy;¥nleåip v; aq v; Sy;∞tuq;R¶* pçm;¶* n ceˇq; 6 svR]vw ;ivxeW,e k⁄vIRt p[Tyh' gOhI" Ev' punStq; pí;T=i]y;¥nleWu v; 7 kÉn {Vye, .Uyí kq' mN];í kÉ pun" îTyev' s'xye j;te iníy' væCm voå¥ tu 8 b¸.;yRSy*p;sn;d* ivxeW" b[˜cyRinvOiˇSs; ySy;Ssmudp¥t /mRpàI swv lokÉ k…qt; tTsm; c s; 9 .turR /RxrIr; c svR/mRsm;≈y; ti√v;hsmu∫tÀ o viînR≤%lkmR,;m( 10 mN]pUto vedjNy" svRy;gwks;/k" s Ev ih p[/;n;…¶" b[;˜,Symh;Tmn" 11 i√tIy;¥¶y" ix∑;" dubl R ;StTsm;n tu n te vwidk’TySy tU„,Ik; Ev kÉvlm( 12

999


Lohita Smïti

Ending:

iv¥;ivhIn' ipxun' p;mr' p;pcetsm( 710 yàen r;j; in…íTy k;len mht; xnw" jnv;Kyen mht;' cyRy; .;W,e n c 711 pUvoRˇ_;n( ix=yeTsMyk™ sTpqe ivinvexyet( tSyop;y;'í v+y;…m Spœ;y ivxd;y c 712 Sv;…mn; Sv;…mn' k;yRk;le t…mNsm;gte ivvdNt' smTven s¥SsMyKp[t;@yet( 713 aD' s.;y;' ivduW; smTvenvw in.Rym( ivvdNt' /r;/Ix" sNt;@‰o√;syeäih" 714 a≈oi]y' ≈oi]ye, ivvdNt' s.;Svit tU„,I' ivnwv my;Rd;' dm' k⁄y;Rˇu ¸˚ét"e 715 g[;me r;∑ê c svR] p[;/;Nyen …cr;iTst;n( mh;Tmno mh;.;g;n( du∑;n( kÉcn sÏx" 716 …m≤lTv; t≤T£y; p*v;RpyRmy;Rdy; ’t;" yà;dNyqyNto vw n;Sm;k˘ sMmit" pr; 717 îy…mTyev ye du∑; t;Ns¥oindRy' nOp" Ekd; .IWye∞ˇe u d<@s§h,;Tprm( 718 any; in≤%l;í;ip s¥Xx;Nt; .v≤Nt ih any;n;m.;ve tu lokoåy' su%mXnute 719 loko yd; su%I r;j; td; sv;RNmnorq;n( avx;dev l.te n;] k;y;R ivc;r,; 720 îtId' k…qt' x;S]' loihten mh;Tmn; ihty svRlok;n;' s;rmuıT» y x;S]t" 721 ≈IloihtSmOit" sm;¢; Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha V, pp.2701ff.

1000

Bråhmaâ


VyŒghrapŒda Smïti


Vy;`[p;dSmOit" ) t];d* SmOitmhÊvv,Rnm( ) AiWmek;Ntm;sIn' Vy;`[' mitmt;' vrm( pp[Cz⁄mnuR y" sveR /mRx;S]kq;nkm( 1 ¸t;…¶ho]' iv…/vt( Vy;`[' vedivd;' vrm( svRx;S]iv…/' D;Tv; AiW….ínmS’tm( 2 nmS’Ty c te sveR îd' vcnmb[vu n( iht;q| svRlok;n;' .gvn( kqySv n" 3 vedtÊv;qRtÊvD; yNm;' pOCzq s'xye te sveR s'pv[ +y;…m yq;Î∑' yq;≈utm( 4 svRtIq;RNyupSpOXy sv;RNved;Np[,My c jPTv; tu svsUˇ_;in svx;S];nus;rt" 5 svRp;phr' idVy' svRsx ' yn;xnm( ctu,;Rmip v,;Rn;' Vy;`[" x;S]mkLpyt( 6 ye c p;p’tolokÉ ye c;Nye /mRdWU k;" svRp;pw" p[mCu yNte ≈uTved' x;S]muˇmm( 7 tSm;idd' vediv≤∫r?yetVy' p[yàt" ix„ye>yí p[vˇ_Vy' svOˇ>e yísvRt" 8 a;c;r' cwv sveWR ;' k;y;R,;' c ivin,Rym( yq;£m' yq;yoGy vˇ_⁄mhRSyxeWt" 9 .gvn( svRv,;Rn;' yq;vdnupvU x R " aNtr' c p[.;v;n;' /m;R•o vˇ_⁄mhR…s 10 yugye gu e c s;mQy| ivxeW' muin.;iWtm( Vy;`[,e c yq;p[oˇ_' p[;y…íˇ' p[dIPyte 11 yugye gu e c ye /m;RSteWu teWu c ye i√j;" teW;' inNd; n ktRVy; yugÂp; ih te i√j;" 12 a’te vwêdeve tu ye .uj' ≤Nt i√j;ty"

1001


VyŒghrapŒda Smïti

Ending:

n¥;' tu iv¥m;n;y;' n ò;y;dNyv;·rWu 385 aò;tm;turò;ne s tIq| tu Ítodkm( ò;$(v; tu v;ssI /*te aÆKl•e p·r/;y c 386 p[=;Lyo®mOt;c;≤∫hRSt* p[=;lyeˇt" k;W;y' ’„,vS]' c m≤ln' kÉxdUiWtm( 387 jI, nIl' s'…/t' c p;rKy' mwqnu e /Otm( aiCz•;g[mpu vS]' k⁄iTst' /mto ivdu" 388 yD' d;n' jpo hom' Sv;?y;y' iptOtp,m( nwkvS]o i√j" k⁄y;R∫ojn' tu sur;cRnm( 389 tTsvRmsurNe {;,;' b[˜; .;gmkLpyt( tt" sN?y;mup;sIt xuı…cˇo…jte≤N{y" muÙt;Rd…¶ho];…, ny'it prm;' gitm( 390 a]SvgRímo=í yo yq; gNtu…mCzit yidCz…s mh;…s≤ı' tIqRr;j;….Wecnm( 391 ivp[p;divinmRˇu _' toy' ixr…s /;ry d≤=,;' s b[˜sU]' Steyme e d≤=,;mu%" 392 k⁄x;St;n( i√gu,I k⁄vnR ( j;nusVy' in/;y c m;jRn' tpR,' ≈;ı' n k⁄y;R√;·r/;ry; 393 kroit yid mU!;Tm; tTsv| in„fl' .vet( 394 iv√;NSvy' tu yo b[yU ;t( s /mR" prm" SmOt" aiCz{…mitt√;Ky' vd'it ≤=itdevt;" 395 p[,Myixrs;g[;Ám…¶∑omflw" sh Vy;`[p;den c;:y;t' /mRx;S]oˇmoˇmm( 396 îit Vy;`[p;dp[,It' /mRx;S]' sm;¢m( Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha IV, pp.2491ff.

1002

Bråhmaâ


DŒlbhya Smïti


d;L>ySmOit" ) d;L>yMp[itAWI,;' /mRivWyk" p[Xn" ) ’t;….Wek˘ d;L>y' Sve a;≈me smupiSqtm( ) p·rpOCz≤Nt tTvD' AWyo vedp;rg;" 1 /m;R/mRivvek˘ c xu≤ıj;RtmOtSy c ) a;yu„y;in c tIq;Rin m;sxu≤ıStqwv c 2 ≈;ık;l' c b[˜flgoflc<@;ls'krm( ) rs;n;' p·rveÊ;; c kqySv yq;yqm( 3 SmOits;r' p[v+y;…m yq; xƒπn .;iWtm( î∑;pUviR v…/íwv p[;y…íˇiv…/Stq; 4 î∑;pUt*R tu ktRVy* b[;˜,en p[yàt" î∑en l.te mo=' pUtRe SvgoRå…./Iyte 5 Ek;hmip k*Ntey .U…mSqmudk˘ k⁄® k⁄l;in t;ryeTs¢ y] g*ivRtWO ; .vet( 6 .U…md;nen ye lok; god;nen c k°itRt;" t;n( lok;n( p[;“uy;NmTyR" p;dp;n;' p[roh,e 7 v;pIkÀpt@;g;in devt;ytn;in c pitt;Nyuıre¥Stu s pUtf R lmXnute 8 a…¶ho]' tp" sTy' dev;n;' p[itp;lnm( a;itQy' vwêdeví î∑…mTy…./Iyte 9 î∑;pUt*R i√j;tIn;' s;m;Ny* /mRs;/k* a…/k;rI .veCzÀ{" pUtRe /meR n vwidkÉ 10 y;vdSqIin g'g;y;' itœ≤Nt pu®WSy c t;v√WRshß;…, SvgRlokÉ mhIyte 11 dev;n;' c iptø,;' c jle d¥;∆l;ÔlIn( as'S’tp[mIt;n;' Sqle d¥;∆l;ÔlIn( 12 kÉxk°$kx'bk U miSqk˘$kmev c

1003


DŒlbhya Smïti

Ending:

ap;' xt`$oı;r" p'cgVyen xu?yit 156 d;r;…¶ho]s'yog' k⁄®te yoåg[je iSqte p·rveÊ;; s ivDey" p·riviˇStu pUvjR " 157 p·riv·ˇ" p·rveÊ;; y; y; c p·r…v'dit sveR te nrk˘ y;≤Nt d;tOy;jkp'cm;" 158 iptOVypu];" s;pà;" prn;rIsut;í ye d;r;…¶ho]/me,R n doW" p·rvedne 159 Jyeœo .[;t; yd;itœºd;/;n' nwv k;ryet( anuD;tStu k⁄vIRt x'%Sy vcn' yq; 160 a;mm;'s' Òt' =*{' òeh;í p]s'.v;" MleCz.;<@gt; ye vw a;Tm.;<@gt;" xu…c" 161 p]cU,WeR u yˇoy' gorseWu c s'iSqtm( n dU„y' t∫ve√;·r îTyev' mnurb[vIt( 162 s'g;[ me aØm;geR c y;];devgOhWe u c mhoTs;he mhoTp;te SpO∑;SpOi∑nR du"„yit 163 idv;kipCzz;y;y;' r;]* d…/xmIWu c /;]IfleWu s¢My;ml+mIvRste sd; 164 xUpvR ;to n%;iäNdu" kÉxvS]`$odkm( m;jRnIre,su iht' h≤Nt puy’t' x;S]' ≈;v…y„yit yo i√j;n( ) svp;pivxuı;Tm; puyp[oˇ_' /mRx;SS]' sm;¢m( ) xu.M.Uy;t( ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha V, pp.2933ff.

1004

Bråhmaâ


PrajŒpati Smïti


aq p[j;pitSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;y nm" ) aq b[˜;,' p[it ®ce" p[Xn" ≈;ık;l;…./;nç iptuv;RKy;qRk;rI c ®…c" p[Mlocy; sh ) nmSyov;c devx e ' b[˜;,' jgt" pitm( 1 b[˜iNv/e iv·rçeit /;t" x'.o p[j;pte ) TvTp[s;d;idm' /m| jg[;h iptOv;Kyt" 2 any; sh tIqeWR u my; ≈;ı;Nynekx" ) ’t;in iptOd∑u ‰q| /n;q' pu]k;Myy; 3 SmOtyí pur;,;in Tvy; Î∑;Nynekx" Î∑STvnek/; /;t" ≈;ıkLp" sivStr" 4 tq;åPys'xy;p•' i£ym;,iv…/' vd yen ivD;nm;]e, n muÁåº h' kd;cn 5 ctu,;Rmip ved;n;' x;%;" s≤Nt shßx" aD;n;dLpx;S];q;R mohy≤Nt pde pde 6 kiSmNk;le c ktRVy' kt;R ≈;ıSy k°Îx" {Vy' dex" p;kkt;R kd; ivp[;…•mN]yet( 7 b[;˜,;" k°Îx;St] inym;St] k°Îx;" ≈;ıoph;rp;];…, .+y' tTk;ldevt; 8 tt" ≈;ıeWu kÉ mN];" pd;q;Rid£m" kqm( a;sn;v;hn;NyòRå¶* hom" p;];lM.nm( 9 ivp[.oJy' ip<@d;n' =m;pniv…/£mm( vwêdev' .OTy.oJy' vd s;y'tn' iv…/m( 10 b[õv;c iptrStv tu∑; vw ®ce Í,u mh;mte m;≤lNy;' r*Cyn;m; vw Tvˇ" pu]o .iv„yit 11 ndI' ttumR n;" p;r' pr;c;rSy iviˇ km(

1005


PrajŒpati Smïti

Ending:

a;b[˜StMbpyRNt' pUvjR ;" s≤Nt ye k⁄le tO¢; .v≤Nt te sveR pu]hSten n;Nyq; 187 apu]Sy gitn;RiSt SvgoR nwv c nwv c yen kÉn;Pyup;yen pu]muTp;dyeTsu/I" 188 swkoi∂∑' dwvhIn' yt" pu]o n iv¥te a;y;≤Nt pui]," pUvRe deviWRiptOvie ∑t;" 189 dxeR √π p;vR,e k;yeR m;tum;Rt;mhSy c =y;he c iptum;Rt"u p;,Rv' p;vR,' ’tm( 190 aMb∑k;su nv…." ip<@¯" ≈;ımud;˙tm( ip];d* m;tOm?ySq' tto m;t;mh;≤Ntkm( 191 aNv∑Kye iptO>yí ttS]I>yí dwvtm( t;>ySTvdwvt' vOı* te>yí;ip sdwvt" 192 m;tr" p[qm' pUJy;" iptrí tt" prm( m;t;mhí tdnu vO≤ı≈;ıe Tvy' £m" 193 p;vR,;in myoˇ_;in ivprIt;in t;in te aqvR,;StpRy≤Nt t√πdoˇ_mt' yq; 194 ait…q' ≈;ır=;qRmte iv„,uSvÂip,m( invexye iv„,usm' b[;˜,' vedp;rgm( 195 kVyv;h;dyo yeåmI iv¥Nte ye c pUvjR ;" sveWR ;mev v,;Rn;' ≈;ıe tOPy≤Nt devt;" 196 s;=;i√„,u/mR rR ;j" ≈;ıdeví kQyte ) ivêe dev;" iptOit…q" sv| iv„,u·rit SmOtm( 197 pUvjR ;Stui∑n;y;≤Nt d;t; .oˇ_; n s'xy" 198 îit p[j;pitSmOit" sm;¢; ) — tTst( ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha III, pp.1664ff.

1006

Bråhmaâ


êhŒtŒtapa Smïti


aq x;t;tpSmOit" ) ≈Ig,ex;ynm" ) aq;å’tp[;y…íˇv,Rnm( ) p[qmoå?y;y" ) p[;y…íˇivhIn;n;' mh;p;tikn;' nO,;m( ) nrk;Nte .ve∆Nm …cˆ;i˚txrI·r,;m( 1 p[itjNm .veˇWe ;' …cˆ' tTp;psU…ctm( ) p[;y…íˇe ’te y;it pí;Ê;;pvt;' pun" 2 mh;p;tkj' …cˆ' s¢jNmin j;yte ) ¨pp;po∫v' pç ]I…, p;psmu∫vm( 3 du„kmRj; nO,;' rog; y;≤Nt cop£mw" xmm( jpw" sur;cRnhw oRmdw ;RnSw teW;' xmo.vet( 4 pUvjR Nm’t' p;p' nrkSy p·r=ye b;/te Vy;…/Âpe, tSy jPy;id…." xm" 5 k⁄œç r;jy+m; c p[mhe o g[h,I tq; mU]’Cz^;XmrIk;s; atIs;r.gNdr* 6 du∑v[,' g<@m;l; p=;`;toå≤=n;xnm( îTyevm;dyo rog; mh;p;po∫v;" SmOt;" 7 jlodr' y’t( PlIh; xUlrogv[,;in c ê;s;jI,RJvrCzi∂≥.m[ mohglg[h;" rˇ_;vudR ivsp;R¥; ¨pp;po∫v; gd;" 8 d<@;pt;nk…í]vpu" kMpivc…cRk;" vLmIkpu<@rIk;¥; rog;" p;psmu∫v;" 9 axRa;¥; nO,;' rog; aitp;p;∫v≤Nt ih aNye c bhvo rog; j;yNte v,Rs˚r;" 10 ¨CyNte c ind;n;in p[;y…íÊ;;in vw £m;t( mh;p;peWu sv| Sy;ˇdıRmpu p;tkÉ 11 d¥;t( p;peWu pœ;'x' kLPy' Vy;…/bl;blm(

1007


êhŒtŒtapa Smïti

Ending:

aXmn; inhte d¥;t( svTs;' g;' pyiSvnIm( ivWe, c mOte d¥;NmeidnI' =e]s'ytu ;m( 38 ¨äN/nmOte c;ip p[d¥;Ì;' pyiSvnIm( mOte jlen v®,' hwm' d¥;≤T]in„kkm( 39 vO=' vO=hte d¥;t( s*v,| Sv,Rsy' tu m( atIs;rmOte l=' s;iv}y;" s'ytojyet( 40 s;ikNy;idmOte cwv' jpe&{' yqo…ctm( iv¥uTp;ten inhte …b¥;d;n' sm;cret( 41 aSpxeR c mOte k;Yy| vedp;r;y,' tq; sCz;S]puStk˘ d¥;√;Ntm;…≈Ty s'iSqte 42 p;itTyen mOte k⁄Yy;‹t( p[;j;pTy;in Wo@x mOte c;pTyrihte ’Cz^;,;' nvitçret( 43 in„k]y…mtSv,| d¥;dê' hy;hte kipn; inhte d¥;t( kip' knkin…mRtm( 44 ivsU…ck;mOte Sv;du .ojye∞ xt' i√j;n( itl/en"u p[d;tVy; k<#πå•kvle mOte 45 kÉxrogmOte c;ip a∑* ’Cz^;n( sm;cret( ) Ev' ’te iv/;nen ivd?y;d*ı±vdR iw hkm( ) tt" p[te tTvinmRˇu _;" iptrStipRt;Stq; 46 d¥u" pu];'í p*];'í a;yur;roGysMpd" ) îitx;t;tpp[oˇ_oivp;k" kmR,;mym( ) ix„y;y xr.©;y ivny;t( p·rpOCz‰te 47 îit x;t;tpIye kmRivp;kÉ agitp[;y…íˇ' n;m Wœoå?y;y" ) sm;¢; cey' x;t;tpSmOit" ) Reference: Sm¨ti-Sandarbha I, pp.598ff.

1008

Bråhmaâ


VŒdhªla Smïti


v;/UlSmOit" v;/Ulmuinm;sInm….gMy mhWRy" p[itpUJy yq;Ny;y…md' vcnmb[vu n( 1 .gvn( b[;˜,;dIn;m;c;r' vd tÊvt" tCΩTv; muinx;dUl R St;nOWIn( p[;h /mRivt( 2 b[;˜;NmuÙt;Rd;r>y i]k;le iviht' tq; inTynw…miˇk˘ cwv p[v+y;…m yq;mit 3 b[;˜e muÙteR sMp[;¢e Tyˇ_in{" p[s•/I" p[=;Ly p;d;v;cMy h·rs˚«tRn' cret( 4 b[;˜e muÙteR in{;' c k⁄®te svRd; tu y" axu…c' t' ivj;nIy;dnhR" svRkmRsu 5 n=]Jyoitr;r>y sUySR yodyn' p[it p[;t"sN?yeit t;' p[;Û" ≈utyo muinsˇm;" 6 p[;t"sN?y;' sn=];mup;sIt yq;iv…/ s;idTy;' p…ím;' sN?y;m/;RSt…mt.;Skr;m( 7 idv;sN?y;su k,RSqb[˜sU] ¨dÑü%" k⁄y;RNmU]purIWe tu r;]* ced( d≤=,;mu%" 8 avgu‚<#tsv;R©StO,rw ;Cz;¥ meidnIm( `[;,;Sye v;ss;Cz;¥ mlmU]' Tyjed( bu/" 9 ap[;vOtixro yStu ivyeTy k⁄y;RCz*c' mOdMbu…." 11 ar≤lm;]muTsOJy k⁄y;RCz*cmnuıt» e pí;ˇCzo/yeˇIqRmNyq; n xu…c.Rvte ( 12 iv$(z*c' p[qm' k⁄y;RNmU]x*c' tt" prm(

1009


VŒdhªla Smïti

Ending:

m;…skÉ p=mek˘ Sy;d;‚BdkÉ c td/Rkm( Ekoi∂∑e vTsr' Sy;t( W;yNtre yid ≈;ı;•;dIin k⁄v;R,o ≤=p[mve ivnXyit 225 m?y≤Ndne Î!;©o y" ò;n' TyKTv;åcRyı e ·rm( vwêdev' c y" k⁄y;RTs guLmVy;…/pI…@t" 226 iptrSt] modNte g;yNte c ipt;mh;" p[ipt;mh;í nOTyNte ≈oi]ye gOhm;gte 227 dex;Ntre durNn;n;' p[;y…íˇ√y' SmOtm( smu{g;ndIò;n' ix∑;g;reWu .ojnm( 228 an;c;rSy ivp[Sy pitt;•' yteStq; xU{;•' iv/v;•' c êm;'ssÎx' .vet( 229 yo moh;dqv;åålSy;d’Tv; kÉxv;cRnm( .u¤π s y;it nrk˘ ê;nyoinWu j;yte 230 anOt' m¥gN/' c idv;Sv;p' c mwqnu m( pun;it vOWlSy;•' s;y' sN?y; bih"’t; 231 ò;n' sN?y;' jp' hom' Sv;?y;y' iptOtpR,m( devt;r;/n' cwv vwêdev' yq;iv…/ 232 n k⁄y;R¥id mohen c<@;lo n;] s'xy" 233 v;/UlSmOit" sm;¢m( Reference: Chaubey, Braj Bihari, VŒdhªla Smïti, Critically Edited with Hindi Translation, Detailed Introduction and Several Indexes, (Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 2000).

1010

Bråhmaâ


Gobhila Smïti

Structure: Three PrapŒÿhakas, and a total of 29 Khaö¶as (chapters) Beginning:

aq k;Ty;ynSmOit" ) ≈Is;mved;y nm" ) p[qm" %<@" ) aq;c;r;?y;y" ) t];d* yDopvItkmRpk [ r,v,Rnm( ) aq;to go….loˇ_;n;mNyeW;' cwv kmR,;m( aSp∑;n;' iv…/' sMyGdxR…y„ye p[dIpvt( 1 i]vOd?U vRvtO ' k;y| tNtu]ym/ovOtm( i]vOˇ∞opvIt' Sy;ˇSywko g[iNq·r„yte 2 pOœv'xe c n;>y;' c /Ot' yi√Ndte kitm( tı;yRmpu vIt' Sy;•;tolMb' n co…z^tm( 3 sdopvIitn; .;Vy' sd; bıix%en c ivix%o VyupvIt∞ yt( kroit n tt( ’tm( 4 i]" p[;Xy;po i√®NmOJy mu%met;NyupSpOxte ( a;Syn;s;≤=k,;|í n;….v="ixro'sk;n( 5 a©ëœnº p[die xNy; `[;,' cwvmupSpOxte ( a©ëœ;n;…mk;>y;' c c=u" ≈o]' pun"pun" 6 kinœ;©ëœyon;R….' ˙dy' tu tlen vw sv;R….Stu ixr" pí;ä;Ù c;g[,e s'SpOxte ( 7 y]opidXyte kmR kturR ©÷ n tUCyte d≤=,St] ivDey" kmR,;' p;rg" kr" 8 y] idÆõ™nymo n Sy;∆phom;idkmRsu itßSt] idx" p[oˇ_; EeN{Is*My;pr;…jt;" 9 itœ•;sIn" p[◊o v; inymo y] neÎx" td;sInen ktRVy' n p[◊,º n itœt; 10 g*rI pµ; xcI me/; s;iv]I ivjy; jy; devsen; Sv/; Sv;h; m;tro lokm;tr" 11 /Oit" pui∑Stq; tui∑r;Tmdevty; sh g,exne ;…/k; Áºt; vOı* pUJy;ítudx R 12

1011


Gobhila Smïti

Ending:

p[;/;Ny' ip<@d;nSy kÉ…cd;¸mRnIiW," gy;dI ip<@m;]Sy dIym;nTvdxRn;t( 9 .ojnSy p[/;nTv' vdNTyNye mhWRy" b[;˜,Sy prI=;y;' mh;yàp[dxRn;t( 10 a;m≈;ıiv/;nSy ivn; ip<@¯" i£y;iv…/" td;l>y;Pyn?y;yiv/;n≈v,;dip 11 iv√Nmtmup;d;y mm;Pyetı»id iSqtm( p[;/;Nymu.yoyRSm;ˇSm;deW smu∞y" 12 p[;cIn;vIitn; k;Yy| ip}yeWu p[o=,' pxo" d≤=,o√;sn;Ntç croinRvpR ,;idkm( 13 s•pê;vd;n;n;' p[/;n;qoR n hItr" p[/;n' hvnçwv xeW' p[’itv∫vet( 14 √«pmu•tm;:y;t' x;d; cwv∑e k; SmOt; k°≤ln' sjl' p[oˇ_' dUr%;todko m®" 15 √;rgv;=" sNd.R"w k∂≥m….ÊyNtko, v; ve/êw ;n∑' v;Stuòr' iv√Nmn;£;Ntm;ywíR 16 vx©m;ivit v[IhIHz÷Wíeit yv;'Stq; as;ivTy] n;moKTv; ju¸y;t( ≤=p[homvt( 17 s;=t' sumnoyuˇ_mudk˘ d…/s'ytu m( a~y| d…/m/u>y;ç m/upkoR iv/Iyte 18 k;'Syenvw ;hR,IySy innyed~yRmÔl* k;'Sy;ip/;n' k;'SySq' m/up‘| smpRyte ( 19 îit k;Ty;ynivr…cte kMmRpd[ Ipe tOtIy" p[p;#k" sm;¢; cey' k;Ty;yns'iht;" Reference: Schrader, Friedrich, Der Karmaprad´pa, Diss., Halle, 1889. Bhattacharya, "KŒtyŒyana Smïti" in Dharma§hŒstrasaµgrahaú, (Calcutta, 1876), pp. 630 ff. Sm¨ti-Sandarbha III, pp.1335ff.

PrŒti§hŒkhya

Branch 31: åik Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Structure: Three Chapters, containing six paÿalas each Beginning:

aq AGvedp[;itx;:ym( aq p[qm' p$lm( a∑* sm;n;=r;
1012

PrŒti§hŒkhya

1013

Branch 31: åik Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Ending:

i]….Stu pUv| tt ¨ˇr' Sy;d( i√x≤S]xo v; yid v; smStm( √;>y;' pun" s¢pd;vs;n' √;>y;' c m?yeå∑pd;su iv¥;t( 24 a…¶mI¬π Îte·rv g;yNTyetm/IÆNNvit ay' c£˘ nik∑' c nikdevR ; …mnIm…s 25 5 ivê;Ndev;Nhv;mhe s =po in„k˘ suWmu nih v;' p[o Wu s ih x/Rs( t; Acoå] indxRnm( 26 √;>y;' p;den √;>y;' tu tv TyTpçpd;i∑" aVyUhne ;itxKvrI tOtIy" Wo¬x;=r" 27 ctu….RStt EkÉn;¶e tm¥eit c ctu….RStu pr' √;>y;' tv Sv;idœ; tCz÷yo" 28 .r√;j;y tCz=ur/Id( vO=; √te·rv Et;su n VyvSyNTyekÉ √;dxk;idWu 29 p[XnStOc" p…¤Wu tu √éco v; √π √π c p¤πr…/k;=reWu Ek; c sUˇ_' smy;STvg
PrŒti§hŒkhya

1014

Branch 32: êhukla-Yajur-Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Structure: 8 Chapters. Beginning:

aq xuKlyju"p[;itx;:ym( p[qmoå?y;y" Svrs'Sk;ryoXzNd…s inym" 1 l*ikk;n;mq|pvU k R Tv;t( 2 n smTv;t( 3 Sy;√;ª;y/imRTv;CzNd…s inym" 4 yˇ• 5 v;yu" %;t( 6 xBdStt( 7 s˚rop 8 s sÏ;t;dIn( v;k( 9 ]I…, Sq;n;in 10 √e kr,e 11 xrIr;t( 12 xrIrm( 13 xrIre 14 teW;' smUh;t( s ¨dy\S]wk;Lym( 15 ao'k;r" Sv;?y;y;d* 16 ao'k;r;qk;r* 17 ao'k;r' vedWe u 18 aqk;r' .;„yeWu 19 p[yt" 20 xuc* 21 î∑m( 22 Atu' p[;Py 23 yojn;• prm( 24 .ojn' m/ur' …òG/m( 25 v,RdoW…vvek;qRm( 26 it˚Oˇiıtctu∑ysm;s;" xBdmym( 27 t;' v;cmo'k;r' pOCz;m" 28 aq …x=; …viht;" 29 svn£me,or"k<#.[mU ?y;in 30 a;y;mm;dRv;i.`;t;" 31 ¨∞nIc…vxeW" 32 aq;:y;" sm;ª;y;…/k;" p[;…g[ift;t( 33 ¨p…d∑; v,;R" 34 aNTy;√,;Rt( pUvR ¨p/; 35 index R îitn; 36 k;re, c 37 aVyvihten Vy∆nSy 38 r EfÉn c 39 Svrwip 40 n;nuSv;rym…vsjRnIy≤j◊;mUlIyop?m;nIy;" 41 dNTySy mUıNR y;p…ˇnRit" 42 sm;nSq;nkr,;Syp[yà" sv,R" 43 …sm;idtoå∑* Svr;,;m( 44 sN?y=r' prm( 45 ak<$‰o .;vI 46 VyÔn' k;id 47 anNtr' s'yog" 48 Spxe„R vev s':y; 49 √* √* p[qm* …jt( 50 Ë„m;,í hvjRm( 51 mu∞ 52 …/ xeW" 53 i√tIyctuq;R" so„m;," 54 am;]Svro ÓSv" 55 m;]; c 56 i√St;v;n( dI`R" 57 Plut≤S]" 58 VyÔnm/Rm;]; 59 td/Rm,u 60 prm;
PrŒti§hŒkhya

1015

Branch 32: êhukla-Yajur-Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Ending:

D;ne 37 p*®„ym( 38 SvGyRm( 39 yxSym( 40 a;yu„ym( 41 aq;ip .vit 42 vedSyl?yyn;d( /mR" s'pd[ ;n;ˇq; ≈ut"e ) v,Rxoå=rxo D;n;i√.…ˇ_pdxoåip c 43 ]yo…v'xit®CyNte Svr;" xBd;qR…cNtkì" ) i√cTv;·r'xd( VyÔn;Nyet;v;Nv,Rsg' h[ " 44 t‚Smn( ¬VVh…j◊;mUlIyop?m;nIyn;…sKy; n s‚Nt m;?y‚Ndn;n;m( 45 lOk;ro dI`R" Plut;íoˇ_vjRm( 46 aq v,Rdve t;" 47 a;¶ey;" k<#‰;" 48 nwATR y; …j◊;mUlIy;" 49 s*My;St;lVy;" 50 r*d[; dNTy;" 51 aoœ‰; a;…ên;" 52 v;yVy; mU/NR y;" 53 xeW; vwêdev;" 54 tTsmud;yoå=rm( 55 v,oR v; 56 a=rsmud;y" pdm( 57 a=r' v; 58 t∞tu/;R 59 n;m;:y;topsgRinp;t;" 60 t] p[it…vxeW" 61 i£y;v;ckm;:y;tmupsgoR …vxeW’t ) sÊv;i./;yk' n;m inp;t" p;dpUr," 62 ctudx R inp;t; yeånud;ˇ;Steåip s…çt;" ) inhNyte %Lv;:y;nmupsg;R,;' ctu∑ye 63 aq pdgo];in 64 .;r√;jkm;:y;t' .;gRv' n;m .;„yte ) v;…s∑ ¨psgRStu inp;t" k;Xyp" SmOt" 65 aq pddevt;" 66 sv| tu s*Mym;:y;t' n;m v;yVy…m„yte a;¶eyStUpsgR" Sy;…•p;to v;®," SmOt" 67 îTy;h Svrs'Sk;rp[itœ;p…yt; .gv;n( k;Ty;yn" 68 vOı' vO…ı" 69 4 Reference: Rastogi, Shrimati Indu, The êuklayajuh-PrŒti§Œkhya of KŒtyŒyana, critically edited from original manuscripts, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1967).

PrŒti§hŒkhya

1016

Branch 33: Atharva Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Structure: Eleven PŒdas in Three PrapŒÿhakas Beginning:

aqvR[p;itx;
PrŒti§hŒkhya

1017

Branch 33: Atharva Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Ending:

Tv¢{ev Âpimit tOt7y;Ntm9 $* ap®?m Iit /mø $( kLmil" k˛Lmlimit lmø %) sÊe i√tk;rm9 %! a;:RhSt; sm™õt Iit ref™k;r;id" s'yog" %@ ityRimit itrø %# A>v;5' m;tir>vr7it .vø %$ aNtvÇ; smNte [p y≥iNd£o ij◊;' in tON/7it nk;r;id" %% Iit i√t7y" p;d" nk;rSy ivsjRn7y" %^ nk;rSy ref" %& ÓSvop/Sy tvgeR [pkÕTy; %* d7òRp/" sπ/;tu ivsjRn7ySy %( yq;p® sm;se sk;r" kpyo" ^) pçMy;" prø ^! ivsjRn7ySy sk;r" ^@ WTvSy;pv;d" ^# anupsg;RTWk;r" ^$ pUvRpd;t9 ^% üpsgRSyoÊrpde d7`R" ^^ ain©œeWUÊrpde d7`R I©œeWu c ^& a>y;sSy d7`R" zNdis ^* aŒ;d7n;' mtø ^( svRil©vcneWu c &) [pqmSy &! i√t7ySy &@ s;+;s;h;d7n;muÊrpd;¥Sy &# n;meTySy ÓSv;Ntmsm;se &$ inp;t;Vyy;n;muÊrpd;¥Sy &% Iit tOt7y" p;d" açtø luπ[pTyye ne©œte &^ devt;√N√¸ d7`;Ri≥>y;]>y"Ssu && smStmek;=r' vO÷œ; &* Ek;=rmv5;RNtm9 &( Svril©Svriv.i†vcnivxeWeWu *) v5Ril©Svriv.i†v;KyVyTyy≈zNdis *! v5Rlop;gmÓSvd7`RPlut;Tmne.;W;prSmw.;W; aipyNTyipyiNt *@ Iit ctuqR" p;d" Iit tOt7y" [pp;3kƒ a;qvR5e s'iht;l=5[gNqe [p;itx;
PrŒti§hŒkhya

1018

Branch 34: Atharva Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya ChaturadhyŒy´ Structure: Four Chapters and a total of 434 Sªtras Beginning:

aqvRvde p[;itx;:y x*nk°y; ctur;?y;yIk; — nm" srSvTyw nm" — nmo b[˜ved;y aqv;Ri©rs" ctu,;| pdj;t;n;' n;m;:y;topsgRinp;t;n;' sN?yp¥* gu,* p[;itDm( 1 Evimheit c …v.;W;p[;¢' s;m;Nye 2 pd;NTy" p¥" 3 aNlOk;r" Svr" p¥" 4 lk;r…vsjRnIy* c 5 Spx;R" p[qmoˇm;" 6 n cvgR" 7 p[qm;Nt;in tOtIy;Nt;nIit x*nkSy p[itD;n' n vO…ˇ" 8 ai/Spx| c 9 i√tIyctuq;R" so„m;," 10 ¨ˇm; anun;…sk;" 11 Xv;soåòWe„vnupd[ ;n" 12 n;do òWvTSvreWu 13 sm;nymeå=rmuCcw®d;ˇm( 14 nIcwrnud;ˇm( 15 a;…=¢' Sv·rtm( 16 Sv·rtSy;idto m;];/Rmdu ;ˇm( 17 mu%e …vxeW;" kr,Sy 18 k<#‰;n;m/rk<#" 19 …j◊;mUlIy;n;' hnuml U m( 20 t;lVy;n;' m?y…j◊m( 21 mU/NR y;n;' …j◊;g[' p[itve≤„$tm( 22 Wk;rSy d[o…,k; 23 dNTy;n;' …j◊;g[' p[StI,Rm( 24 ao„#‰;n;m/r*œm( 25 n;…sKy;n;' n;…sk; 26 anun;…sk;n;' mu%n;…skm( 27 refSy dNtmUl;in 28 SpO„$' Spx;Rn;' kr,m( 29 ÈWTSpO∑mNt"Sq;n;m( 30 Ë„m,;' …vvOt' c 31 Svr;,;' c 32 EkÉ SpO∑m( 33 Ek;r*k;ryo…vRvtO tmm( 34 ttoåPy;k;rSy 35 s'vtO oåk;r" 36 s'SpO∑refmOv,Rm( 37 dI`RPlutyo" pUv;R m;]; 38 slk;rm( lOv,Rm( 39 s'?y=r;…, s'SpO∑v,;RNyekv,Rvd(v…O ˇ" 40 nwk;r*k;ryo" Sq;n…v/* 41 …vsjRnIyoå….…n∑;n" 42 VyÔn…v/;r,m….…n/;n" pI…@t" sNntro hInXv;sn;d" 43 SpxRSy Spxe-R å….…n/;n" 44 pd;Nt;vg[hyoí 45 lk;rSyo„msu 46 õ,n;n;' hk;re 47 a;Sq;…pt' c 48 atoåNyTs'yˇu _m( 49 pUvÂ R pSy m;];/| sm;nkr,' prm( 50 ÓSv' lùsy' oge 51 guvNR yt( 52 anun;…sk˘ c 53 pd;Nte c 54 prSy SvrSy VyÔn;…n 55 s'yog;id pUvSR y 56 p¥' c 57 refhk;r£mj' c 58 Ekm;]o ÓSv" 59 VyÔn;…n c 60 i√m;]o dI`R" 61 i]m;]" Plut" 62 W$(pru so®k;roåNTySy

PrŒti§hŒkhya

1019

Branch 34: Atharva Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya ChaturadhyŒy´ Ending:

a;x; id…x 71 p[’itdxRn' sm;p…ˇ" 73 WTv,Tvop;c;rdI`R$Tu vlop;Npd;n;' cc;Rp·rh;ryo" sm;p…ˇ" 74 pUvpR d…n…mˇ;n;' c 75 î'Gy;n;m( 76 aNyen;…p pvR,; 77 £me pre, …vgOÁ;t( 78 dI`RSy …vr;me 79 ctUr;]oåvg[h Ev 80 pd;Nt…v’t;n;m( 81 a>y;s…vnt;n;' c 82 S]wWyU ' n;WRdne du∑r' ]w∑.ü ' ]wh;y,;∆;SpTym( 83 a>y;sSy pro=;y;m( 84 v;vO/;np[.tO In;' c 85 ’…p®…p·rWI,;mn◊;n;m( 86 jIhI@;hm( 87 s;Á;m 88 dId;yt( 89 n;rk;dIn;m( 90 Cy;vyte" k;·rt;NtSy 91 y;vyter;:y;te 92 v…ny…m≈…qGl;…p 93 n;∑n" 94 ihnote" 95 bo/p[tIbo/* kÉsrp[;bN/;y; a>y`;y≤Nt p…n„pd;itiœp' d;/;r j;g;r mIm;yeit 96 p[p," p,terve 97 îdmU„v;idWu pdTv;t( 98 b[˜e y" 104 yDe punloRk;" p[itiœt;" 105 pçjn; lokÉWu 106 pd;?yynmNt;idxBdSvr;qRD;n;qRm( 107 £m;?yyn' s'iht;pdd;!‰;qRm( 108 Svropjní;Î∑" pdeWu s'iht;y;' c 109 √º pde £mpdm( 110 tSy;Nten prSy p[s/' ;nm( 111 n;Ntgt' pre, 112 ]I…, pd;NypOˇ_m?y;…n 113 Ek;dexSvrs'…/dI`R…vn;m;" p[yojnm( 114 a;k;r*k;r;id pun" 115 ¨k;r" p·rh;yR Ev 116 p[gÁO ;vgOÁsm;p;¥;Ntgt;n;' i√vRcn' p·rh;r îitm?ye 117 √;>y;muk;r" 118 anun;…skdI`RTv' p[yojnm( 119 Plutí;Plutvt( 120 anun;…sk" pUvíR xuı" 121 yq;x;S]' p[s/' ;nm( 122 p[gÁO ;vgOÁcc;Ry;' £mvduˇr‚Sm•vg[h" 123 sm;p;¥;n;mNte s'iht;v√cnm( 124 tSy punr;Sq;…pt' n;m 125 s Ekpd" p·rh;yRí 126 îit x*nk°ye ctur;?y;…ykÉ ctuq"R p;d" Reference: Whitney, W.D., The Atharva-veda PrŒti§Œkhya, or êaunakýa CaturadhyŒyika, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1962).

PrŒti§hŒkhya

1020

Branch 35: Kï·höa-Yajur-Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Structure: 24 Chapters. Beginning:

tw·ˇrIyp[;itx;:y aq v,Rsm;ª;y" 1 aq nv;idt" sm;n;=r;…, 2 √π√π sv,Re ÓSvdIèR 3 n PlutpUvmR ( 4 Wo@x;idt" Svr;" 5 xeWo VyÔn;in 6 a;¥;" pç…v\xit Spx;‹" 7 pr;ítßoåNtSq;" 8 pre W@Ü„m;," 9 Spx;Rn;m;nupVU yR,e pçpç vg;‹" 10 p[qmi√tIytOtIyctuqoRˇm;" 11 Ë„mivsjRnIyp[qmi√tIy; aòW;" 12 n hk;r" 13 VyÔnxeWo òWv;n( 14 a;p[;vop;>y…/p[itp·rivnITyupsg;‹" 15 v,R" k;roˇro v,;R:y; 16 ak;rVyveto VyÔn;n;m( 17 n ivsjRnIy…j◊;mUlIyop?y;mIn;nuSv;rn;…sKy;n;m( 18 EfStu rSy 19 ÓSvo v,oR·ˇrS]y;,;m( 20 ak;ro VyÔn;n;m( 21 g[h,Sy 22 a"k;r a;gmivk;·rloipn;m( 23 g[h,' v; 24 a;s•\ s'dhe e 25 anekSy;ip 26 p[qmo vgoRˇro vg;R:y; 27 a' ivk;rSy 28 pUvR îit pUv"R 29 pr îTyuˇr" 30 Ak;rLk;r* ÓSv* 31 ak;rí 32 ten c sm;nk;lSvr" 33 anuSv;rí 34 i√St;v;NdI`R" 35 i]" Plut" 36 ÓSv;/Rk;l' VyÔnm( 37 ¨∞w®d;ˇ" 38 nIcwrnud;ˇ" 39 sm;h;r" Sv·rt" 40 tSy;id®∞wStr;mud;ˇ;dNtre y;vd/\R ÓSvSy 41 ¨d;ˇsm" xeW" 42 sVyÔnoåip 43 anNtro v; nIcwStr;m( 44 anud;ˇsmo v; 45 a;idrSyod;ˇsm" xeWoånud;ˇsm îTy;c;y;‹" 46 svR" p[v, îTyekÉ 47 n;n;pdvid'Gyms':y;ne 48 tSy pUvpR dmvg[h" 49 pdg[h,eWu pd' gMyet 50 aip iv’tm( 51 aPyk;r;id 52 aNk;r;id c 53 Ekv,R" pdmpOˇ_" 54 a;¥Ntv∞ 55 v,RSy ivk;rlop* 56 ivn;xo lop" 57 aNv;dexoåNTySy 58 ¨pbN/Stu dex;y inTym( 59 n;n;pdIy' c in…mˇ' p[gh[ ß;idWu 60 yqoˇ_' pun®ˇ_' i]pdp[.iO t i]pdp[.iO t 61 îit p[qmoå?y;y" aq xBdoTp·ˇ" 1 v;yuxrIrsmIr,;Tk<#orso" s'/;ne 2 tSy p[;it≈uTk;in .vNTyur" k<#" ≤xro mu%' n;…skÉ îit 3 s'vtO e k<#π n;d"

PrŒti§hŒkhya

1021

Branch 35: Kï·höa-Yajur-Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Ending:

annuSv;rs'yˇu _metLlù inWo/tw tLlù inbo/t 15 îit √;…v'xoå?y;y" aq v,RivxeWoTp·ˇ" 1 anupd[ ;n;Ts\sg;RTSq;n;Tkr,ivNyy;t( j;yte v,Rvx w „e y' p·rm;,;∞ pçm;d( îit 2 v,RpˇO _" xBdo v;c ¨Tp·ˇ" 3 s¢ v;c Sq;n;in .v≤Nt 4 ¨p;\x-u ?v;ninmdop‚BdmNmN{m?ymt;r;…, 5 kr,vdxBdmmn"p[yogmup;\xu 6 a=rVyÔn;n;mnuplæB/?v;Rn" 7 ¨plæB/inRmd" 8 sxBdmup‚Bdmt( 9 ¨r…s mN{' k<#π m?ym\ ≤xr…s t;rm( 10 mN{;idWu i]Wu' Sq;neWu s¢s¢ ym;" 11 ’∑p[qmi√tIytOtIyctuqmR N{;itSv;y;‹" 12 teW;' dIi¢joplæB/" 13 i√tIyp[qm’∑;S]y a;◊;rkSvr;" 14 mN{;-dyo i√tIy;Nt;íTv;rStw·ˇrIyk;" 15 i√tIy;NmN{Stw·ˇrIy;,;' tOtIy-ctuq;RvnNtr' t∞tuymR …mTy;c=te 16 t‚Sm≤N√ym;Ntr; vO·ˇ" 17 t;mupde+y;m" 18 t∞tuymR …mTyuˇ_m( 19 £…mv£ms'p•;m&t;mivl‚Mbt;m( nIco∞Sv;rs'p•;' vdeıtO vtI\ sm;' vdeıtO vtI\ sm;…mit 20 îit ]yo…v'xoå?y;y" aq ctß" s\iht;" 1 pds\iht;=rs\iht; v,Rsi\ ht;©s\iht; ceit 2 n;n;pds'/;ns'yog" pds\ihteTy…./Iyte 3 yq;Svm=rs\iht;dIn;mPyevm( 4 gu®Tv' lùt; s;My\ ÓSvdI`RPlut;in c ) lop;gmivk;r;í p[’itivR£m" £m" Sv·rtod;ˇnIcTv\ ê;so n;doå©mev c ) EtTsv| tu ivDey' zNdo.;W;m/Iyt; 5 pd£mivxeWDo v,R£mivc=," ) Svrm;m(];iv.;gDo gzπd;c;yRss\ d' gzπd;c;yRss\ d…mit 6 îit ctu…v|xoå?y;y" Reference: Whitney, William D., The Taittirýa-PrŒti§Œkhya with its commentary the TribhŒ·yaratna: Text, Translation and Notes, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1973).

PrŒti§hŒkhya

1022

Branch 36: SŒma Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya (Pu·hpa Sªtram) Structure: Ten PrapŒÿhakas Beginning:

s;mp[;itx;:ym( pu„piWRp,[ Itm( ¨∞mhI pun; rvjye a;Tv*xn' ky;deVy' t'vo /s' troleyã Sv;idiht' pvSveN{mCz sf„kle pur"Xy;v;gveå….ip[k;vã Sv;su DIy meÁ-U s;k' vy' .rm/;me/R ' p;Ntã hVy' p[v" x;KTy' vy˚;
PrŒti§hŒkhya

1023

Branch 36: SŒma Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya (Pu·hpa Sªtram) Ending:

aqohgItIn;' p[St;vo∂ºx" Sto." purSt;d'tv;R p[Stoturt' ve ; iv/;¥ ¨Ì;tuSˇk;r;vWR.p;vm;njin];,;' ¸v;idv;R…s∑e p¥on;dexe √‰=rov;s'’itd;!RCyutyoítur=rov;suÂp;…jgw@s;kmê;n;' sdevtov;r;jnx;KvrWR.yo i√p;Ts' jyn; ndg*Í'gr;i]dwvod;s;n;' k;v≈*tk=;WR.}yRt;y;Syw@*+,*r'/@w[ s*p,RmoT=m;gIRyv' jr;bo/Iyy√;ihœIyoTse/v;m[Sv;rs;mr;jp*®mI!pUvRv;rv'tIyv;]RturyySto√‰=ra;nOp$w ts*hivWvw„,voˇrpyo't" Svr;,;m…¶'dtU ;>ySt;m?ym£*'cSy p;do>yStovW@÷t;>ySt;kÀp;rr;jnpys;' √;dx;=r;…, crwvtRW.e }y=robOhTkÉ soms;mg;y]I£*'cvwÂp*dlg;y}y*xnsw'/u≤=tmw/;itqroihtkÀlIyehvdw?mv;he'{yx" k
`




July, 2006



BIBLIOGRAPHY Abhyankar, M.K.V. A Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar. Baroda: Oriental Institute, 1986. Abhyankarasastri, Kasinatha Vasudeva. K¨·öayajurvedýaµ TaittirýŒraöyakam, 2 vols. Punyakhyapattane: ÌnandŒ§ramasaµstha, 1969. Acharya, Prasanna Kumar. Manasara on Architecture and Sculpture: Sanskrit text with critical notes. Delhi: Low Price Publications, 1995. AchŒrya, RŒma Sharma. êr´êiva PurŒöa. Mathura: Rashtriya Press, 1972. Achyuthan, A., and Prabhu, Balagopal T.S. Manu·yŒlayacandrikŒbhŒ·ya: An

engineering commentary on Manu·yŒlayacandrika of Tirumangalat N´lakaöÿhan Mªsat. Saraswatham, Kiliyanad, Calicut: VŒstuvidyŒprati·ÿhŒnam, 1998.

AgŒ§he, KŒ§hńŒtha§hŒstr´, ed. SatyŒ·hŒhaviracitaµ êrauta Sªtram, 10 vols. Punyakhyapattane, India: ÌnandŒ§hrama Press, 1907. Aithal, K. Parameswara. Ì§hvalŒyanag¨hyapari§hi·hÿa. Madras: Adyar Library and Research Center, 1964. __________. Veda-Lakshana: Vedic Ancillary Literature: A Descriptive Bibliography. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993. Anderson, Michael, home page, "Current Research," Department of Psychology, Trinity College, Dublin. http://www.tcd.ie/Psychology/Michael_Anderson/research.html

BIBLIOGRAPHY

633

Ashta-Vik¨ti-Viv¨ti of Madhusªdana-maskarin. In Abhyankar, K.V., and Devasthali, G.V., eds. Veda-vik¨ti-lak·haöa-saµgraha. Poona: Bhandekar Oriental Research Institute, 1978. Asiatic Society of Bombay. Manuscript of MaitrŒyaöiya êhulba Sªtra.

Atha êr´mudgalapurŒöaµ PrŒrabhyate. Lak·m´ NivŒsa Hindu Colony: MudgalapurŒöaprakŒ§anamaöalam, 1976.

Aufrecht, Th. Das Aitareya BrŒhmaöa mit Auszuegen aus dem Commentare von SŒyaöŒcŒrya und anderen Beilagen. Bonn: Adolph Marcus, 1879. Bahadur, K.P. Wisdom of Meemaansaa. New Delhi: Sterling Publishers, 1983. Bakre, M.G. Grihya-Sètra by PŒraskar with Five Commentaries. Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt. Ltd. Bombay: 1982. Ballantyne, J.R. The SŒµkhya aphorisms of Kapila. Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1995. Banerjea, K. M. The MŒrcandeya PurŒna. Calcutta: Bishop's College Press, 1855. Banerji, Suresh Chandra. A Companion to Dharma Sastra. New Delhi: DKPrintworld, 1998. Barazer-Billoret, M.-L.; Dagens, B., & Lefevre, V. , and SivŒcŒrya, S. Sambandhan. D´ptŒgama, Vol. 1 chap. 1-21. Pondichery: French Institute of Indology, 2004.

Bhagavan Veda. Swami GangeshwarŒnand Ìshram. Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute. Svaravya–jana êhik·hŒ manuscript. BORI 212 of 1875-1876. Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute. Charayaniya Shiksha manuscript. No. 21 of 1875-1876.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

634

Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute. LaugŒk·i êhik·hŒ manuscript. BORI 21 of 1875-76, 13 folios folios numbered 6 - 18. Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute. Manuscript of MŒdhava ChikitsŒ. Poone, India,. Bhatnagar, K.N. Nidåna-S™tra of Patañjali, Edited with an Introduction, a Fragmentary Commentary and Indices. Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1971. Bhatt, N. R. AjitŒgama, 2 vols. Pondichery: Institut Francais D'Indologie, 1967. __________. RauravŒgama, 3 vols. Pondichery, Institut Francais D'Indologie, 1985, 1972, 1988. Bhattacharji, Sukumari. Literature in the Vedic Age. Calcutta: K.P. Bagchi, 1984. Bhattacharya, Ahibhushan, tr. The Varaha Purana: with English translation. Varanasi: All-India Kashiraj Trust, 1981. Bhattacharya, Dipak. AtharvavedýŒ PaippalŒdasaµhitŒ. Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1997. BhattŒchŒrya. Dharma êhŒstra Saµgrahaú. Calcutta, 1876. Bhat, M. Råmakrishna. Varåhamihiraís B®hat Saµhitå. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1992.

Bhavi·yamahŒpurŒöam. Delhi: Nag, 1993. Bhishe, Usha R. NŒradýa êhik·hŒ with the Commentary of Bhaÿÿa êobhŒkara, Critically Edited with Translation and Explanatory Notes in English. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1986. Bibliotheque Nationale. Manuscript of Madhava Chikitsa. Paris, France.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

635

Bloomfield, Maurice. The Kau§hika Sªtra of Atharva Veda. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1972. Bola, Vaje§aµkara DevarŒma, ed. NŒnd´purŒöa: nŒnd´mukha brŒhmaöajŒtine §Œstrýa itihŒsa. [Skt., Guj.] Calcutta : Damodara Viththalarama Parakhani, 1948. Bolling, George Melville. "The Cantikalpa of the Atharva-Veda," in Transactions and Proceedings of the American Philological Association. Volume 35 1904 77127. __________, and von Negelein, Julius, eds. The Pari§i·ÿhas of the Atharvaveda, Vol. 1, parts 1 and 2. Leipzig: Harrassowitz, 1909-1910. Boner, Alice, et al. VŒstusªtra Upani·ad: The Essence of Form in Sacred Art. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986.

BrahmamahŒpurŒöam. Delhi: Nag, 1985. Brodal, Alf. Neurological Anatomy in Relation to Clinical Medicine. New York: Oxford University Press, 1981. Bucknell, R. Sanskrit Manual: A Quick-reference Guide to the Phonology and Grammar of Classical Sanskrit. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994. Buehler, G. Apastamba-Dharmasªtra. Bombay Sanskrit Series Nos. LIV and L, 3rd ed. 1932. __________, tr. The Sacred Laws of the Ìryas as Taught in the Schools of Ìpastamba, Gautama, Vasishÿha and BaudhŒyana, 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986. __________. VŒsi·hÿha-Dharma§hŒstra. Bombay Sanskrit and Prakrit Series. Burgess, Ebenezer. Translation of the S™rya-Siddhånta, a Textbook of Hindu Astronomy. Varanasi: Indological Book House, 1977.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

636

Burnell, A.C. The Jaiminiya text of the Arsheyabrahmana of the Sama Veda. Mangalore: Basel Mission Press, 1878. Byrd, A., "Serotonin and Its Uses", Bryn Mawr College student report, internet posting, http://serendip.brynmawr.edu/bb/neuro/neuro99/web1/Byrd.html Caland, W., and Vira, Raghu. The êatapatha BrŒhmaöa in the KŒövýa Recension. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1998. __________. "BrŒhmaöa- en Sªtra-Aanwinsten," Verslagen en Mededelingen der Koninklijke Nederlandsche Akademie van Wetenschappen. Afd. Letterkunde, 5. Reeks, Deel iv, 1920, pp. 461-498. __________, ed. Vaikhånasa Írautas™tram: The Description of Vedic Rites According to the Vaikhånasa School belonging to the Black Yajurveda. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt Ltd, 1991. Originally published in 1941 in Bibliotheca Indica Series, Calcutta. __________, ed.VaikhŒnasasmŒrtasªtram, The Domestic Rules of the VaikhŒnasa School, Belonging to the Black Yajurveda. Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1927. __________. The BaudhŒyana êrauta Sªtra Belonging to the Taittirýa-SaµhitŒ, Vols. 1-3. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1982; 1st Edition Calcutta 1904-13. __________. The Jaiminig¨hyasªtra Belonging to the SŒmaveda, with extracts from the commentary, edited with an introduction and translated into English. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991. Reprinted from Lahore Punjab Sanskrit Book Depot. __________. tr. Vaikhanasasmartasutram: The Domestic Rules and Sacred Laws of the Vaikhanasa School Belonging to the Black Yajurveda. New Delhi: Ramanand Vidya Bhawan, 1982.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

637

__________. Vaikhanasasmartasutram: Vaikhanasagrhyasutram Vaikhanasadharmasutram ca. New Delhi: Meharcand Lachmandas Publications, 1989, 1927. __________. and Vira, Raghu, eds. Våråha-Írauta-S™tra Being the Main Ritualistic S™tra of the Maitråyaˆ¥ Íåkhå. Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1971. __________. The KŒÿhakag¨hyasªtra with Extracts from Three Commentaries, an Appendix and Indexes. Lahore: DayŒnanda MahŒvidyŒlaya Saµsk¨ta GranthamŒlŒ, 9, 1925. __________. Vaikhanasasmartasutram : the Domestic Rules and Sacred Laws of the Vaikhanasa School Belonging to the Black Yajurveda. New Delhi : Ramanand Vidya Bhawan, 1982. __________, and Chandra, Lokesh. Sankhayana Srautasutra: Being a Major Yajnika Text of the Rgveda, Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1980, ©1953. Cardona, George. "On the Ìpi§hali§hik·hŒ", in : A Corpus of Indian Studies -- Essays in Honour of Prof. Gaurinath Sastri. Calcutta: Sanskrit Pustak Bhandar, 1980, pp. 245-256. __________. PŒöini: A survey of research. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1976. __________. Påîni, His Work and its Traditions, Vol. I. Second Edition, New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988. Carpenter, Malcolm B., and Sutin, Jerome. Human Neuroanatomy. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 1983.

Chandra, Lokesh, and Vira, Raghu. Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics. New Delhi: Satapitaka Series Vol. 282, 1981.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

638

Chaubey, Braj Bihari. VŒdhªla Smïti, Critically Edited with Hindi Translation, Detailed Introduction and Several Indexes. Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 2000. __________. VŒdhªla-êrautasªtram critically edited with Introduction and Indices. Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 1993. __________. "The Asvalayana Samhita of the Rigveda;" in Vishveshvaranand Indological Journal. June-December 1992; pg. 7-28. __________. VŒdhªla-AnvŒkhyŒnam. Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 2001. Chintamani, T.R. The Kau§´taka G¨hyasètras with the Commentary of Bhavatrata. University of Madras Madras: 1944.

Columbia Electronic Encyclopedia, 6th Edition, Columbia University Press, 2005. Dagens, Bruno. Mayamatam: Treatise of housing, architecture and iconography, 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994. Daivajna, Ganapati. Muh™rtagaâpati˙. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988. Datta, Bhagavad Datta. Ìtharvaöa Jyoti·ham or the VedŒ‹ga Jyoti·ha of the Atharva Veda. Lahore: Punjab Sanskrit Book Depot, Motilal Banarsidass, 1924. de Freitas, Graham. “A Case Study of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s Program for Reading Vedic Literature: Revealing the Effect of Vedic Sounds on Growth Towards Higher States of Consciousness, Enhanced Intuition, and Increasingly Refined Poetic Expression.” Diss., Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt., 2002. Dell, Gli Inni, ed. Atharvaveda Saunaka. Trasliterazione a cura di Chatia Orlandi, Pisa: 1991.

Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Adyar Library.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

639

Dev, Bhim. êŒ‹khŒyana Ìraöyakam. Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Vedic Research Institute, 1980. Dhal, Upendra Nath. The EkŒmra PurŒöam, Critical Edition. Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1986. Dikshitar, V.R. Ramchandra, and Ayyar, P.S. Sundaram. BhŒradvŒja§hik·hŒ with NŒge§hvara's Commentary. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1938. Dillbeck, Michael. "World Peace Parliament" broadcast on the Maharishi Channel. August, 2004.

Dorland's Medical Dictionary. www.Mercksource.com. Dresden, Mark J. Manavagrhyasutra: a Vedic Manual of Domestic Rites; Translation. Groningen, Batavia: J.B. Wolters, 1941. Dubey, Jagdish Narayan. Ìdi-PurŒnam. Varanasi: Sudarshan Book Agencies, 1990. Dvivedi, Vindhyesvariprasada. Jyautisha Siddhanta Sangraha: A Collection of Ancient Hindu Astronomical works. Benares : Braj Bhushan Das & Co., 1912-1917, vol. 2. Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha. Sªk·mŒgamaú: KriyŒpŒdaú: Translation with Notes. Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratisthanam, 1994. __________. PŒrame§varŒgamaú, Translation with Notes. Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratisththanam, 1995. Egenes, Thomas. Learning the Sanskrit Alphabet. Fairfield: Maharishi University of Management Press, 1997.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

640

Filliozat, Pierre-Sylvain, ed. The Tantra of Svayaµbhª vidyŒpŒda with the commentary of Sadyojyoti. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994. Freeman, Marci. “Enlivening Veda in Consciousness and Physiology by Reading the Vedic Literature in Conjunction with the Experience of the Transcendental Meditation and TM-Sidhi Programs of Maharishi Mahesh Yogi.” Diss., Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt., 1997. Freund, ed. Karma M´mŒmsŒ Sªtras of Maharishi Jaimini. Fairfield: Maharishi U. of Mgmt. Press, 1998. __________. NyŒya Sªtras of Maharishi Gautama. Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Management Press, 1997. __________. SŒmkhya Sªtras of Maharishi Kapila. Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Management Press, 1998. __________. Vaisheshika Sªtras of Maharishi KanŒda. Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt. Press, 1997. __________. VedŒnta Sªtras of Maharishi BŒdarŒyana. Fairfield: Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt. Press, 1996. __________. Yoga Sªtras of Maharishi Patanjali. Fairfield: Maharishi International Univ. Press, 1995. __________. Shr´mad Bhagavad G´tŒ. Fairfield: Maharishi International University Press, 1994. Gambhirananda, Swami. Brahma-Sªtra-BhŒ·ya of êr´ êa‹karŒcŒrya. Calcutta: Advaita Ashrama, 1983. Ganganatha Jha Research Institute, Allahabad. Padacandrika. Manuscript #33169 cited by Aithal, p. 416.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

641

Gaöe§a PurŒöam. Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1993. Garbe, Richard. Vaitana Sutra: the Ritual of the Atharvaveda, edited with critical notes and indices. New Delhi: Mahalakshmi Publishing House, 1982.

Gautam¥ya-Dharmas™tra. Ãnandåßrama Sanskrit Series 61, 1966. Ghosal, S.N. "The Vaitanasutra," in Indian Historical Quarterly, v. 34-36. Calcutta: 1958-1960. Ghose, Rama and Dvivedi, Brajavallabha. Candraj–ŒnŒgama: KriyŒpŒda and ChŒryŒpŒda. Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1995. __________, and Dwivedi, Brajavallabha. MakuÿŒgama, KriyŒpŒda and CharyŒpŒda, English translation and notes. Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1996. Ghosh, M. PŒöinýa êik·hŒ: Text and Translation. Delhi: V.K. Publishing House, 1991. Gonda, J. The Savayajñas Kausikasutra 60-68. Translation, Introduction, Commentary. Amsterdam: Noord-Hollandsche Uitg. Mij., 1965. Gonda, Jan, ed. A History of Indian Literature: Vol. 1, The Ritual Sªtras. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1977. Goswami, C.L. Sr´mad BhŒgavata MahŒpurŒöa with Sanskrit text and English translation, 2 vols. Gorkhapur: Gita Press, 1982. Gough, Archibald Edward. The Vai§eshika aphorisms of KanŒda. New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1975.[Originally published in 1873 by E.J. Lazarus &Co., Benares.] Gray, H., and Goss, C.M. Anatomy of the Human Body. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger, 1973.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

642

__________, and Lewis, Warren H. Anatomy of the Human Body. Philadelphia: Lea & Febiger, 1918. Gruenendahl, Reinhold, ed. Vi·öudharmŒú: Precepts for the Worship of Vi·öu. 3 vols., Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1983-1989. Gupta, Anand Swarup. The VŒmana PurŒöa. Varanasi: All-India Kashiraj Trust, 1967. Hankey, Deborah. "The Awakening of Full Human Potential Through Maharishi Mahesh Yogi's Vedic Science: Research on the Experience of Reading the Vedic Literature." Diss., Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt., 2000. Hart, Carol. Secrets of Serotonin. Griffin: St. Martin's Press, 1996. Hillebrandt, Alfred. êhŒ‹khŒyana êhrauta Sªtra Together with the Commentary of Varadattasuta Ìnartýa and Govinda. New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981. Howard, W. Veda. Recitation in VŒrŒöas´. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986. Hultzsch. Das Baudhayana-Dharmasutra, Zweite, Verbesserte Auflage. Abhandlungen fuer die Kunde des Morgenlandes, 16, Leipzig 1922. Iyer, N.P.Subramania. Kalaprakasika, the Standard Book on the Election (Mahoortha) System. (New Delhi, Asian Educational Services, 1991). Jambuvijayaji, Muni êr´. Vai§eshikasªtra of KanŒda with the Commentary of CandrŒnanda. Baroda: Oriental Institute, 1982.[Originally published in 1873 by E.J. Lazarus &Co., Benares.] Jha, Krishnanand. Upavanavinodah, A system of tree plantation. Kameshwaranagar, Darbhanga: K.S.D. Sanskrit University, 1984. Jha, Tariö´§a. Brahmavaivarta PurŒöam. PrayŒga: Hind´ SŒhitya Sammelana, 1981.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

643

Joergensen, Hans. Das MantrabrŒhmaöa, 2. PrapŒÿhaka. Diss. Kiel. Darmstadt 1911. Jo§´, P. Gaöe§a§Œstr´. êr´majjaiminipraö´te M´mŒµsŒdar§ane, 6 vol. ÌnandŒ§ramasaµsk¨tagranthŒvaliú, 1981. Jolly, Julius. The Institutes of Vishnu. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1970. Joshi, K.L., ed. Natyasastra of Bharatamuni with the commentary Abhinavabharati by Abhinavaguptacharya, 4 vols. Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1989. Kak, Ram Chandra, and Shastri, Harabhatta. Devirahasya and Pari§i·hÿas. Vadodara: Butala Publications, 1941. Kanta, Surya, ed. Atharva-PrŒti§Œkhya, with an introduction, English translation, notes and indices. New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1999. Kartre, Sumitra M. A∑ˇådhyåy¥ of Påîni in Roman Transliteration. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press, 1987. Kashikar, C.G. "Haut¨ka" in Annals of the Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute, Vol. LXXIX. Pune: A.M. Ghatage, 1998, pp. 137-148. __________, and Garbe, R., eds. The êrauta Sªtra of Ìpastamba, Belonging to the Taittirýa SaµhitŒ, with the Commentary of Rudradatta, 3 vol. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1983. __________. KŒtyŒyanýa Hautrapari§hi·hÿa together with Karka's Commentary and an English Translation. Pune: Tilak Maharashtra Vidyapeeth, 1984. __________. The êrauta, Pait¨medhika and Pari§he·ha Sªtras of BharadvŒja. Poona: Vaidika Saµ§hodhana Maöala, 1964, vol. 2. __________, tr. The Baudhayana Srautasutra, 4 vols. New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts and Motilal Banarsidass, 2003.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

644

Keith, Arthur Berriedale. The Aitareya Ìraöyaka. New Delhi: Master Publishers, 1981. Khadilkar, S.D. KŒtyŒyana êhulba Sªtra. Poona: Vaidika Saµ§hodhana Maöala, 1974.

KhŒdirag¨hyasªtram, athavŒ, DrŒhyŒyaöag¨hyasªtram, Rudraskandav¨ttisahitam, Hind´vyŒkhyopetam. Delhi: CaukhambŒ Saµsk¨ta Prati·ÿhŒna, 1991. Kielhorn, F. "Remarks on the Shikshas," Indian Antiquary, May-July, 1876. Kinjwadekar, Ramchandra Sastri, ed. Astanga Sangraha of Sri Vaghbhatta Virchit. 3 vols. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1990. Kleinschnitz, Anne Christy. "Reading the Vedic Literature: The Approach in Maharishi’s Vedic Science for Accelerating the Development of Consciousness." Diss., Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt., 1996. Knauer, Fedor Ivanovich. Gobhila-G¨hyaSªtra. Leipzig: Simmel & Co., 1884. Krishnamacharya, V., ed. Vi·höusm¨ti. The Adyar Library Series, Vol. 93 in 2 parts, Madras: The Adyar Library and Research Center, 1964.

Krsnayajurvediyam Taittiriya-Brahmanam, 3 vols. Punyapattane : Anandasrama, 1979.

Ksemaraja, Srikrsnadasa and Misra, Baladev Prasad, eds. Sri-Kalkipuranam Delhi : Nag Publishers, 1986. Kumar, Pushpendra. Dev´ PurŒöam: First Critical Edition. New Delhi: Srilabahadurasastrikendriyasamskrtavidyapitham, 1976. __________, ed. SamarŒ‹gana SªtradhŒra. Delhi: New Bharatiya Book Corporation, 1998.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

645

__________. The MahŒbhŒgavata PurŒöa: an Ancient Treatise on êakti Cult. Delhi: Eastern Book Linkers, 1983. Kumari, Ved. The Nilamata Purana, vol. II. A Critical Edition and English Translation, Srinagar: J & K Academy of Art, Culture and Languages, 1973. Lele, Kasinatha Sastri, ed. SaurapurŒöaµ VyŒsak¨tam. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1980. Leutgeb, Stevan and Mizumori, Sheri J.Y. "Excitotoxic Septal Lesions Result in Spatial Memory Deficits and Altered Flexibility of Hippocampal Single-Unit Representations," The Journal of Neuroscience. August 1, 1999, 1915: 6661-66 Lueders, H. Die Vyasa-çikshâ Besonders in ihrem Verhältnis zum Taittirîya-prâtiçâkhya. Göttingen: Dieterich'sche univ.-buchdr. W.F. Kaestner, 1894. MacDonell, A.A. A Vedic Grammar for Students. Delhi: Low Price Publications, 1990. Maharishi Mahesh Yogi. “Introduction,” in Maharishi's Global News Conference, May 28, 2003. __________. "SCI and Interdisciplinary Study," Science of Creative Intelligence Teacher Training Course, 33 lesson videotaped course, Fuiggi, Italy, 1972. __________. "Study of the Veda is the study of consciousness, our own Self," Lesson 5 in videotaped course, Maharishi Vedic Science, Maharishi Vedic University, 2001. __________. "The Three Eurekas," videotaped lecture, February 16, 1974, Interlaken, Switzerland. __________. Bhagavad-Gita: A New Translation and Commentary with Sanskrit Text, Chapters 1-6. Los Angeles, International SRM Publications, 1967.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

646

__________. "Unbounded Scope of Maharishi's Vedic Science," videotaped lecture. January 14, 1991. __________. "Vedic Engineering to create anything from an empty box." March 3, 2004, Maharishi's Weekly Global News Conference. __________. "Vedic Literature: the radiant flowers of the garden of knowledge," Feb. 14, 1974, Interlaken, Switz. __________. "Question on the appropriateness of giving students total knowledge," in Education Press Conference, Maharishi Channel broadcast, April 2, 2004. __________. in Maharishi's Weekly Global News Conference, August 13, 2003. __________. in Maharishi's Weekly Global News Conference, Jan. 15, 2003, Question 6. __________. in Maharishi's Weekly Global News Conference, Jan. 15, 2003. __________. in Maharishi's Weekly Global News Conference, October 29, 2003. __________. Maharishi Technology of the Unified Field: Integration of Modern Science and Ancient Vedic Science Creating Unified Field based Perfect Civilization for all Mankind in This Scientific Age. (Fairfield, Iowa: Institute of World Leadership, 1984).

__________. Maharishi Vedic University Introduction. Holland: Maharishi Vedic University Press, 1994. __________. Maharishi Vedic University: Celebrating Perfection in Education: Dawn of Total Knowledge. India: Age of Enlightenment Publications, 1997. __________. Maharishi's Absolute Theory of Government. Vlodrop, the Netherlands: MVU Press, 1993. __________. Maharishi's Global News Conference. June 8, 2005.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

647

__________. Maharishi's Weekly Global News Conference. Broadcast on the Maharishi Channel, October 2, 2002, Question #3. __________. Vedic Studies Core Course. "Lesson 6: The Vedangas: Preservation embedded in the Nature of Life." Interlaken: MIU Video, 1974. __________. 17 November 1972, Lake Tahoe, audiorecording, "The Root Bh™ and Vedic Grammar." Malladevaru, H.P., ed. V´rŒgamottaram, Vol. 1. Mysore: Oriental Research Institute, 1988. Mani, Vettam. Puranic encyclopaedia: a Comprehensive Dictionary with Special Reference to the Epic and Puranic Literature. Delhi : Motilal Banarsidass, 1975. Martini, Frederic H. Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1995. Das Ma§hakakalpasªtra, in Caland, W., ed. Der Arseyakalpla des Samaveda. Liechtenstein: Nendeln, 1966 reprint. Mi§ra, êr´ Brahma§a‹kara, and Vai§ya, êr´ RªpalŒlaj´, eds. BhŒvaprakŒ§a of êr´ BhŒva Mi§ra. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Sanskrit Sansthan, 1984. Mimamsaka, Yudhisthira, ed. Katyayana-Grhyasutram. Bahalagarha: Ramalala Kapura Trust, 1983. Mitra, Rajendra Lal. Gopath Brahmana. Delhi: Indological Book House, 1972 originally published as part of Bibliotheca Indica. Modak, B.R.. The Ancillary Literature of the Atharva-Veda. New Delhi: Rashtriya Veda Vidya Pratishthan, 1993.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

648

Mueller, F.M., ed. åig-Veda-SamhitŒ: The Sacred Hymns of the BrŒhmans Together with the Commentary of SŒyanŒchŒrya, 5 Vols. Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1983. Murthy, K.R. Srikanta. MŒdhava NidŒnam: Roga Vini§caya of Madhavakara. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1993. __________, tr. Sarngadhar-SaµhitŒ, a treatise on Ìyurveda. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1995. __________, tr. VŒgbhaÿa's A·ÿŒ‹ga Hïdayam, 3 vols., Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1991-3. Nader, T. Human Physiology, Expression of Veda and the Vedic Literature. Vlodrop, The Netherlands: Maharishi Vedic University, 1995. __________. Human Physiology:Expression of Veda and the Vedic Literature:

Modern Science and Ancient Vedic Science Discover the Fabrics of Immortality in the Human Physiology, Fourth Edition. Vlodrop: Maharishi Vedic University, 2000.

__________. "Creating a Perfect Man." Videotaped course, broadcast 1999-2000, and 2000-2001. __________. Creating a Perfect Man, Lesson 30, "Nak·hatras Part 2." Maharishi Open University broadcast, 2000.

NarasiµhapurŒnam. Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1987. Navathe, P.G., ed. Descriptive catalogue of manuscripts in the Government

Manuscripts Library deposited at the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute.

Poona : Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1990.

NŒradýa MahŒpurŒöa. Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1984.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

649

Nooten, Barend A. Van. "The RŒmopŒkhyŒna and the RŒmŒyaöa" In: IT 8-9, 19801981: Dr. Ludwik Sternbach commemoration volume ... 1981. - pp. 293-305. Oertel, Hanns. "The Jaiminiya or Talavakara Upanisad Brahmana: Text, Translation, and Notes." In: Journal of the American Oriental Society 16 1896, pp. 79-260. Oldenberg, Hermann. "êŒ‹khŒyana-G¨hyasªtra." In Indische Studien, Beitraege fuer die Kunde des Indischen Alterthums, herausgegeben von Albrecht Weber. fuenfzehnter Band, 1878, pp. 1-166, Berlin: F. Duemmler. __________, tr. The Gïhya Sªtras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997 [first published by Oxford University Press, 1886]. Online Computer Library Center, OCLC Online Computer Library Center, Inc. Dublin, OH 43017-3395. Oppert, Gustav, ed. N´tiprakŒ§hika. New Delhi: Kumar Brothers, 1970. Oxford Indian Institute Library. LaugŒk·i êhik·hŒ, manuscript. #62, 98 folios in Sharada script.

PadmamahŒpurŒöa, Uttara KriyŒ BhŒga. Delhi: Nag, 1984. Pandey, Rama Chandra. KŒraöŒgama: KriyŒpŒda: Translation with Notes. Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1994. Pandey, Ramtej. GarudapurŒöa of K¨·öadvaipŒyana VyŒsa. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1986. Pandey, Shastri Shambhunatha, ed. Su§ruta-SaµhitŒ of Mahar·i Su§rut. Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1985. Pandey, U.C. Ìpastamba-G¨hya-Sªtra. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1971.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

650

Pandeya, Ramateja. Srimaddev´bhŒgavatam MahŒpurŒöam. Varanasi: ChaukhambŒ VidyŒbhavana, 1983. Pandeya, Umesa Chandra. Baudhayana-Dharmasutra with the 'Vivarana" Commentary by Sri Govinda Svami and critical notes by M.M.A. Chinnaswami Sastri. Varanasi: The Kashi Sanskrit Series, 104, 1972. Parpola, Asko. In Acta Orientalis 36, 504, Leiden, Copenhagen, and in Orientalia Suecana 16, 207, Uppsala. Ref. from Gonda. __________. The êrauta Sªtras of LŒÿyŒyana and DrŒhyŒöa and Their Commentaries: an English Translation. Helsinki: Societas scientiarum Fennica, 1968. Pathak, Krishna Kumar, ed. Garga Hora Shastra. New Delhi: Nishkaam Peeth Prakashan, 1999. Petersen, Peter, ed. The Paddhati of êŒr‹gadhara, A Sanskrit Anthology, Vol. I. Bombay: Government Central Book Depot, 1888. Price, John F. "Applied Geometry of the êhulba Sªtras." In Gorini, Catherine A., ed. Geometry at Work. Washington, D.C.: Mathematical Association of America, 2000. Price, Kingsley. "History of Philosophy of Education." In Edwards, Paul, ed. Encyclopedia of Philosophy. New York: Macmillan, 1967. PriyŒchŒrya, Krishna, ed. The PurŒöa SaµhitŒ, revealed to Veda VyŒsa, including

ÌlamandŒra SaµhitŒ, B¨hatsadŒ§iva SaµhitŒ and SanatkumŒra SaµhitŒ: edited with notes, introduction, etc. Benaras: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office

Prooye-Salomons, H.J.W. The Domestic Ritual According to the School of Bharadvaja. Leyden: E.J.Brill, Ltd., 1913.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

651

Proposal to the Unicode Consortium for Additional Character Assignments to Accomodate Vedic texts, Omkarananda Ashram, http://www.omkaranandaashram.org/Sanskrit/vedicaccents.htm. Radhakrishnan, S. The Principal Upanishads. London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968. Rai, Ganga Sagar. The êŒ‹khŒyana BrŒhmaöa. Varanasi: Ratna Publications, 1987. Rama§aµkarabhaÿÿŒcŒrya. KªrmapurŒöam. VŒrŒöas´: IöolŒºjikala BukahŒusa, 1967. Råman, Bangalore Venkata. Praßna Mårga, 2 vol. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991. Ramberg, Jan. "The Effects of Reading the Vedic Literature on Personal Evolution in the Light of Maharishi Vedic Science and Technology." Diss., Maharishi Univ. of Mgmt., 1999. Ranade, H. G. Asvalayana Srauta-Sutram, 2 vols. Poona: R.H. Ranade, 1981-1986. __________. Kåtyåyana Írauta S™tra: Rules for the Vedic sacrifices. Pune: H.G. Ranade and R.H. Ranade, Publishers, 1978. Rani, Mrs. Sharada, ed. Vedic Studies - A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira. New Delhi: Sata-Pitaka Series -- Indo-Asian Literatures, vol. 272, 1981. Rastogi, Shrimati Indu. The êuklayajuh-PrŒti§Œkhya of KŒtyŒyana, critically edited from original manuscripts. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1967. Rath, Sanjay. Jaimini Maha Rishiís Upadesa sutras: complete with four chapters. (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1997). Ravivarmma, El. E. Ìgnive§hyag¨hyasªtra. Trivandrum: University of Travancore, 1940.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

652

Ray, Purnima. Vasi·hÿha's Dhanurveda SaµhitŒ. Delhi, J.P. Publishing, 1991. Resnick, Howard Jay. "The 'Daivika-Catustayam' of the 'Vaikhanasa-mantra-prasna' : a Translation." Thesis, Cambridge MA : Harvard Univ., 1996. Roth, R., and Whitney, W.D. Atharva Veda Samhita. Berlin: 1856.

Sa‹g´ta RatnŒkaraú, 2 vols. ÌnandŒ§ramasaµsk¨tagranthŒvaliú, 1985. Salomons, Henriette J.W., ed. BhŒradvŒjag¨hyasªtram: the Domestic Ritual According to the School of BhŒradvŒja. New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1992. Sama§hram´, Satyavrata, ed. "Upagrantha Sutra." In U·hŒ 4, Calcutta, 1897. Sandal, Mohan Lal. Introduction to the Mimamsa Sutras of Jaimini. Allahabad: Panini Office, 1925. Santanam, R. Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra of Maharshi Parasara. New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1990. __________. Garga Hora, New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1997. Sarasvati, Svami Satya Prakash, and Vidyalankar, Satyakam. ågveda SamhitŒ with English translation. New Delhi: Veda Pratishthana, 1977. Sarma, K.V., and Sastry, T.S. Vedanga Jyotisa of Lagadha in its Rk and Yajus Recensions. New Delhi: Indian National Science Academy, 1985. __________. Sa‹kar·a KŒöda Sªtras of Jaimini. Hoshiarpur, Vishveshvaranand Vedic Research Institute, 1963. Sarup, Lakshman. The Nighaˆˇu and the Nirukta. (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984).

BIBLIOGRAPHY

653

Sastri, Asoke Chatterjee, ed. Pi‹galachhandaúsªtra: A study. Calcutta: University of Calcutta, 1987. Sastri, Haraprasad, ed. B¨haddharma PurŒöam. Varanasi: Chaukhamba Amarabharati Prakashan, 1974. Sastri, K.S.V. ågvedýa JaÿŒpaÿalam -- §hr´ madhusªdanýa-§hik·hŒntargatam, §hr´ satyavratavyŒkhyŒ-sahitam. Srirangam: Vani Vilas Press, 1964. Referenced in Aithal. Sastri, P.N. Pattabhirama, ed. VyŒsa êik·hŒ. Varanasi: Mimamsa Research Centre, 1976. Sastri, P.R., ed. Dantyo·hÿha-Vidhi, the 4th Lak·haöa treatise of the Atharvaveda. Lahore: D.A.V. College, 1921. Sastri, R.H. MaitrŒyanýa MŒnava G¨hya Sètram with the Commentary of A·ÿavakra. Meharchand Lachmandas New Delhi: 1982. Sastri, V. Subrahmanya. Shatpanchasika. Bangalore, Sri Råma Press, 1966. Satavalekara, êr´pŒda DŒmodara, ed. SŒmavedasaµhitŒ. PŒr´: SvŒdhyŒya-Mandala. __________, ed. êuklayajurvedýa KŒövasaµhitŒ. Pardi: SvŒdhyaya Mandala. __________. ed. Kï·höayajurvedýa KŒÿhakasaµhitŒ. Pardi: SvŒdhyŒya Mandala, ca. 1950. __________. ed. Kï·höayajurvedýa MaitrŒyaöýa SaµhitŒ. Pardi: SvŒdhyŒya Mandala. __________. ed. Rigveda, 4th edition. Pardi: Svadhyaya Mandala, 1982. __________. Maitrayana Samhita. PŒradi: SvŒdhyŒya Maöala, 1983.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

654

Schrader, Friedrich. Der Karmaprad´pa. Diss., Halle, 1889.

Scientific Research on the Transcendental Meditation Program, Collected Papers,

Volumes 1-6. Bopart and Livingston Manor: Maharishi European Research University Press, 1975-2004.

Sehgal, S.R. êŒ‹khŒyana-G¨hyasªtra. Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1960. Sen, S.N., and Bag, A.K. The êulbasªtras of BaudhŒyana, Ìpastamba, KŒtyŒyana and MŒnava withText, English Translation and Commentary. New Delhi: Indian National Science Academy, 1983. Sharma, B.R., ed. DrŒhyŒyaöa êrauta Sªtram With the Commentary of Dhanvin. Allahabad: Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan, 1983. __________. ed. K·hudrakalpasªtra of Mashaka GŒrgya with the Commentary of Shri ShrńivŒsa. Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Vishva Bandhu Institute of Sanskrit and Indological Studies, 1974. __________. Gayatravidhanabhashyam. Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Institute, 1971. __________. SŒmavidhŒna BrŒhmana, with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa and PadŒrthamŒtravivrti of BharatasvŒmin. Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1980. __________. DevatŒdhyŒya-Saµhitopani·ad-Vaµ§a-BrŒhmaöas with commentaries. Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1983. __________. Ìrseya BrŒhmaöa with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa. Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1984. __________. óadviµ§a BrŒhmaöa with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa. Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1983.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

655

__________, ed. Pa–cavidha-Sªtra with Commentary. Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1970. Sharma, Girish Chand. Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra. New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1994. __________. Daivagye Acharya Shriram's Muhurta Chintamani. New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1996. Sharma, Kundanlal. Kalpasutra Vaidika Vanmaya ka vivechanŒtmaka brihad itihŒsa: saptama khanda. Hoshiarpur, Punjab: VishveshvarŒnand Vaidika·hodha SamsthŒna, 1981. Sharma, R.N., ed. The AgnimahŒpurŒöam. Delhi: Nag, 1985. __________. The Bhavi·ya MahŒpurŒöam. Delhi: NAG, 1984. Sharma, V.P. Caraka SaµhitŒ: Agnive§a's treatise refined and annotated by Caraka and redacted by D¨habala, 3 vols. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1981. Shastr´, A. CinnaswŒm´, and êŒstr´, PaÿÿŒbh´rŒma. TŒödyamahŒbrŒhmaöa belonging to the SŒma Veda, with the commentary of SŒyaöŒchŒrya. 2 vols. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Sanskrit Sansthan, 1987. Shastri, B.N. The KŒlikŒpurŒöa, Text, Introduction & Translation in English, 3 vols. Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1991. Shastri, J.L., ed. Linga PurŒna of Sage K¨·öa DvaipŒyana VyŒsa. Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1985. __________. êr´ VyŒsa Mahar·iproktaµ BrahmŒöapurŒöam. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1983. __________. Dhåtupåˇha˙. (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984).

BIBLIOGRAPHY

656

__________. Upanisat-Samgrahah Containing 188 Upani·ads. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984.

Shastri, K.S. Subramania, and Sarma, C. Raja Rajeswara. Bhel SaµhitŒ. New Delhi: Sahitya Anusandhana Ekaka, 1977. Shastr´, Kapile§hvara. MuhªrtachintŒmaö´ of êr´ RŒmadavaj–a. Varanasi: Chaukhamba Amarabharati Prakashan, 1989. Shastri, Lak·maöa. Pu·pasªtram, Pu·par·ipraö´tam. Benares: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1922. ShŒstr´, M. H. A Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection Under the Care of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Volume II and V. Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1923ff. __________. A Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of The Asiatic Society of Bengal, Volume II (Vedic Manuscripts), (Calcutta, 1921), page 1047, item 1322 (999): Tandalakshana Sutra of Samaveda. 14 Folia, extent in Shlokas = 280. Shastri, Ramavalamba. Harita Samhita, text with Asha Hindi Commentary. Varanasi: Prachya Prakashan, 1985. Shastri, S. Subrahmanya, ed. Sankar·hakŒöda: Mahar·hi Jaiminimunina praö´tam DevaswŒmiviracitabhŒ·hyamanvalitam. Madras: University of Madras, 1965. Shastri, Premnidhi. Jaimin¥ya-Írauta-S™tra-V®tti of Bhavatråta. (New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture, 1966).

Shr´maddvaipŒyanamunipraö´taµ MatsyapurŒöam. ÌnandŒ§rama Press, 1981. Shrivastaw, Manish. Daivagya Vallabhaa: text, summary, and encoding. Internet text, 2003. http://sanskrit.bhaarat.com/The_Document_Project/

BIBLIOGRAPHY

657

doc_z_misc_sociology_astrology/doc_z_misc_sociology_astrology.html Shukla, B¨je§a KumŒra. êr´madbhŒrgavopapurŒöam. Delhi: Nag, 1997. Singh, Jaideva. ViäŒnabhairava or Divine Consciousness, A Treasury of 112 Types of Yoga. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993. __________. êiva Sªtras: The Yoga of Supreme Identity. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991. Sinha, 1. Nandalal. The Samkhya Philosophy. New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1979. [Originally published in 1915 by Panini Office, Allahabad.]

Sm¨ti Sandarbha, Vol. I-VII. Delhi: Nag, 1981. Smirniotopoulos, James George. MedPix Topic Factoid Card: 45. Smythies, J.R. Brain Mechanisms and Behaviour: An Outline of the Mechanisms of

Emotion, Memory, Learning and the Organization of Behaviour, with Particular Regard to the Limbic System. New York: Academic Press, 1970.

Somapura, Prabhasankara Oghadabhai. Sri Vi§vakarmakrtŒya §rI vŒstuvidyŒyŒm VŒstu§Œstre, 2 vols. Somapura: Sri Balavantaraya Prabhasankara Somapura ane Bandhuo, 1970. Sontakke, N. S. et al. ågveda-SaµhitŒ with the commentary of SŒyanŒchŒrya, Volumes I-V. Poona: Vaidik Samsodhana Mandala, 1933-1951. Reprint 19721973.

Srimad-Bhagavad-gita. Gorakpur: Gita Press, 1925. Srinivasachar, L., and Sastri, R. S. BodhŒyanag¨hyasètram of BodhŒyana Mahar·i. Mysore: Oriental Research Institute, 1983 551pp. Stoenner, Heinrich. Das MantrabrŒhmaöa, 1. PrapŒÿhaka, Diss. Halle/Saale 1901;

BIBLIOGRAPHY

658

Sukthankar, V.S.; Sakthankar, Vishnu Sitaram; Belvalkar, Shripad Krishna; and Vaidya, Parasurama Lakshmana. The MahŒbhŒrata, 19 vols. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1927-1966.

SuprabhedŒgama. êintŒtiripeÿÿai, Madras: êiva–ŒNapotayantra§Œlai, 1907. SuryakŒnta. Kauthuma-G¨hya, Edited with Introduction, Notes and Indices. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society, 1956. __________. Kåˇhaka-Saµkalana: Extracts from the Lost Kåˇhaka Bråhmaâ, Kåˇhaka-Írautas™tra and Kåˇhaka G®hyas™tras. New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981. SvŒminŒtha, Ce. KŒmikŒgama. MadrŒs: Dak·iöabhŒratŒrcakasa‹ghaú, 1975. Tagare, G.V. The Skanda-PurŒöa. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1992. TatŒchŒrya, RŒmŒnuja. åishyasringa Samhita, Edited with Introduction, 2 vols. Thanjavur: Sarasvati Mahal Library, 1983. Tewari, P.V. KŒ§yapa-SaµhitŒ or V¨ddhaj´vakýa Tantra. Varanasi: Chaukhambha Visvabharati, 1996. Travis, Frederick, et al. In Maharishi's Global News Conference, March 30, 2005 Maharishi Open University, Maharishi Vedic City, U.S.A.. TripŒÿhi, Kapiladeva. PŒrŒ§aropapurŒöam : sam´k·Œtmakaµ sampŒdanam. VŒrŒöasyŒm: SampªröŒndaSaµsk¨taVi§vavidyŒlayaú, 1990. Tripathi, Shrikrishnamani, ed. Kapilapuranam: A critical edition. Varanasi: Chaukhamba Surbharati Prakashan, 1981. __________. SŒmbapurŒöam, Varanasi: K¨·öadŒsa Academy, 1983.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

659

TripŒth´, êr´ RŒma PrasŒda, ed. êik·hŒsaµgrahaú. VŒrŒnasi: Sampurnand Sanksrit University, 1989.

Vaµ§a BrŒhmaöa. Calcutta: Indian Research Institute, 1985. Vaidya, Parashuram Lakshman. The Harivaµ§a, being the Khila or supplement to the MahŒbhŒrata. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1969. van Gelder, Jeannette. The MŒnava êrautasªtra belonging to the MaitrŒyaö´ SaµhitŒ, 2 vols. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1985. van Nooten, B.A. "The Structure of Sanskrit Phonetic Treatise." In Tartu Oriental Studies 11, 2, Tartu Konks-Numerkund-Maell 1973, pp. 408-437. Varma, S. Critical Studies in the Phonetic Observations of Indian Grammarians. Delhi: Munshi Ram Manohar Lal, 1961. Vasishth, Shivram Sharma. êrimadvŒlm´kirŒmŒyaöa of Mahar·i VŒlm´ki. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1982. Vasu, êr´§ha Chandra. The AshÿŒdhyŒy´ of PŒöini. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988. __________. ed. The Siddhånta Kaumud¥, v.2. Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1982. Vasu, Rai Bahadur Srisa Chandra, tr. The êiva SaµhitŒ. New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1979.

Vedantavagisa, Ananda Chandra, ed. Írauta S™tra of Låtyåyana with the commentary of Agniswåm¥. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1982. Venkatarama Sastri, K. S. ågvedýaµ êamŒnalak·haöam Upalekhasªtraµ ca. êr´ra‹gam: êr´vŒö´vilŒsamudrŒlayaú, 1967.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

660

Verma, Virendrakumar. ågveda-PrŒti§Œkhya of êaunaka along with UvvaÿabhŒ·ya. Delhi: Chaukhamba Sanskrit Pratishthan, 1986.

Vi·öudharmottarapurŒöam. Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1998. VidyŒbhu·ana, MahŒmahopŒdhyŒya Sati§a Chandra, tr. The NyŒya Sutras of Gotama. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1975 [First published in 1913 by Panini Office, Allahabad.] VidyŒratna, RŒmanŒrŒyana, and VedŒntŒvŒg´§a, Anandachandra, eds. The Gïhya Sªtra of Ì§walŒyana: With the Commentary of GŒrgya NŒrŒyana. Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1986. __________. ed. The Írauta S™tra of Ãßwalåyana with the Commentary of Gårgya Nåråyaâ. Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1989. Vimalananda, Swami. Sri Vishnu Sahasranama Stotram. Tirupparaitturai: Sri Ramakrishna Tapovanam, 1978. Vira, Raghu, and Candra, Lokesh. Jaiminýa-BrŒhmaöa of the SŒmaveda. Nagpur: L. Candra, 1954. __________. and Candra, L. Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics. New Delhi: Satapitaka Series, 1981. __________, ed. Kapisthala-katha-samhita, a Text of the Black Yajurveda. New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1968. __________, ed. VŒrŒha-G¨hyasªtra with Short Extracts from the Paddhatis of Ga‹gŒdhara and Vasi·hÿha. New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1982. __________. Jaiminiya-samhita Samavediya. Lavapuram: Sarasvati-Viharah, 1938. Vivanti, Maria Pia. "Il "KiraöŒgama". Testo e traduzione del "VidyŒpŒda." in Annali, Supplemento n. 3 agli: vol. 351975, fasc. 2, Napoli, 1975.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

661

VŒyumahŒpurŒöam. Delhi: Nag, 1983. von Negelein, Julius. "Atharvaprayascittani." In Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. 33 1913, 71-120. Vyasa, Krsnadvaipayana. Padma Puranam. Calcutta: More Pracya Sodha Sanisthana, 1957. Wallace, R. Keith. "The Physiological Effects of Transcendental Meditation: A Proposed Fourth Major State of Consciousness." Doctoral dissertation, reprinted in Orme-Johnson, D.W., ed. Scientific Research on the Transcendental Meditation Program, Collected Papers, Volume 1. Bopart: Maharishi European Research University Press, second edition, 1977. Weber, Albrecht, ed. Die Taittirýa-SamhitŒ. Leipzig: Brockhaus, 1871-1872 Indische Studien, 11-12. __________. The êatapatha-BrŒhmaöa in the MŒdhyandina-êŒkhŒ with extracts from the commentaries of SŒyana, HarisvŒmin, and Dvivedaga‹ga. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1964. __________. The Vajasaneyi-saµhitŒ in the MŒdhyandina and the KŒnva-§ŒkhŒ with the commentary of Mahidhara. Berlin, 1849; reprinted Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series, 1972. Whitney, W.D. The Atharva-veda PrŒti§Œkhya, or êaunakýa CaturadhyŒyika. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1962. __________. The Taittirýa-PrŒti§Œkhya with its Commentary the TribhŒ·yaratna: Text, Translation and Notes. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1973. Wilson, H.H. ågveda SaµhitŒ. Delhi, Nag, 1990.]

BIBLIOGRAPHY

662

__________. The Vi·öu PurŒöa: A system of Hindu mythology and tradition, 2 vols. Delhi: Nag, 1980. Wiskott, Laurenz. "What is the functional role of adult neurogenesis in the hippocampus?" Cognitive Sciences Eprint Archive #4012, 2004. Witzel, Michael. Das Kaÿha Ìraöyaka. Textkritische Edition mit Uebersetzung und Kommentar. Teildruck. Diss. erlangen 1972. YŒjnavalkya êhik·hŒ. In Paöa§´kara, VŒsudeva Lak·maöa êŒstr´, êuklayajurvedaSaµhitŒ text and PadapŒÿha. Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1996.

`




July, 2006



APPENDIX II. A Complete Vedic Library in Sanskrit and English I. Rig Veda Sanskrit 1) Max Mueller's Edition of Rig Veda and Pada Patha Muller, F. Max, Hymns of the Rig-Veda in the Samhita and Pada Texts reprinted from the Editio Princeps, Third Edition with the two texts on parallel pages, in 2 volumes, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1965). 2) Max Mueller's Edition of Rig Veda with Sayana's Commentary Muller, F. Max, Rig-Veda-SamhitŒ, the Sacred Hymns of the BrŒhmans together with the Commentary of SŒyanŒchŒrya, 4 volumes (Varanasi: Krishnada Academy, 1983). 3) Svadhyaya Mandala Edition SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ågvedasaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒyamaö¶ala, 1989). Rig Veda English Wilson translation Wilson, H.H., ågveda SaµhitŒ, Text in Deva Nagari, English Translation and Notes, Mantra-å·i-DevatŒ-Names Index, 7 Volumes, enlarged and arranged by Nag Sharan Singh, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1990). Griffith translation Griffith, Ralph T.H., The Hymns of the ågveda, translated with a popular Commentary, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1973). Sarasvati and Vidyalankar translation Sarasvati, Swami Satya Prakash, and Vidyalankar, Satyakam, tr., ågveda SaµhitŒ with English translation, in 13 Volumes, (New Delhi: Veda Pratishthana, 1977). 5 Shakhas of Rik Veda: Shakala (represented by Svadhyaya Mandala edition), Shankhayana (represented by Sayana's Commentary), Ashvalayana, Mandukeya and Bashkala (described in Svadhyaya Mandala Edition). Article on Shankhayana N. S. Sontakke, et al; Âgveda-Saµhitå with the commentary of Såyanåchårya; Vaidik Samsodhana Mandala; Poona. See vol. 4, Section called ëKhilanií 1st edition of 5 volumes published from 1933-1951. Reprint from 1972-1973.

1025 Article on Ashvalayana Chaubey, B. B.; "The Asvalayana Samhita of the Rigveda"; in ‘Vishveshvaranand Indological Journal,' June-December 1992; pg. 7-28 Khila Suktas Bhise, Usha R., The Khila-suktas of the Rgveda: A Study, Sanskrit text with English translation (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1995). 2. SŒma Veda SamhitŒ êr´pŒda DŒmodara SŒtavalekara, ed., SŒmavedasaµhitŒ, (PŒr¶´: SvŒdhyŒya-Mandala). W. Caland, Die Jaiminiya-Samhita mit einer Einleitung ueber die Samavedaliterature, (Breslau: M. & H. Marcus, 1907). Raghu Vira, Jaiminiya-samhita Samavediya, (Lavapuram: Sarasvati-Viharah, 1938). Sharma, Bellikoth Ramachandra, Samavedasamhita (Kauthumi): padapathena

tathaiva Madhava-Bharatasvami-Sayanacaryair viracitena bhasya-trayena ca samanvita, (Cambridge, Mass: Harvard University Press, 2000). ISBN: 0674005880.

English translation: Ganapati, S.V., SŒma Veda, (New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1982). Griffith, T.H., The SŒma-Veda SaµhitŒ, Text, Translation, Commentary & Notes in

English, Mantra Index, & Name Index, Mantras Found & Not Found in the ågveda, etc. 3. Yajur Veda SamhitŒ Shukla Yajur Veda Albrecht Weber, The Vajasaneyi-saµhitŒ in the MŒdhyandina and the KŒnva-§ŒkhŒ with the commentary of Mahidhara, Berlin, 1849 / reprinted varanasi 1972 as Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series 103. Shastri, Ramakrishna, êr´mad-VŒjasaneyi-MŒdhyandina êuklayajurveda-SaµhitŒ (Text and PadapŒÿha) with the Mantra-BhŒ·ya of êr´mad-UvaÿŒcŒrya and the Vedad´paBhŒ·ya of êr´man Mah´dhara (with Appendices and Mantra-Ko·a), (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1996). SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ed., VŒjasaneyi-MŒdhyandina-êukla Yajurveda-SaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒya-Maö¶ala, 1982). SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ed., êuklayajurvedýa KŒövasaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒyaMaö¶ala, 1983).

1026 Griffith, Ralph T.H., Yajurveda SaµhitŒ, Text with English, Translation, Notes, Mantra-DevatŒ-Name Index, etc., (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1990). Chand, Devi, tr., The Yajur Veda in English, (New Delhi: Sarvadeshik Arya PratinidhiSabha, 1965). Krishna Yajur Veda SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ed., K¨·öayajurvedýa Taittirýa-SaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒya-Maö¶ala, 1983). SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ed., Yajurvedýa KŒÿhaka-SaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒyaMaö¶ala, 1983). SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ed., Yajurvedýa MaitrŒyaö´-SaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒyaMaö¶ala, 1983). Sastri, A. Mahadeva, and Rangacharya, K., eds., The Taittirýa SaµhitŒ of the Black Yajurveda with the Commentary of Bhaÿÿa BhŒskara Mi§ra, in ten volumes, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986) First Edition, Mysore, 1894. Sontakke, N.S., and Dharmadhikari, T.N., Taittirýa SaµhitŒ with the PadapŒÿha and the Commentaries of Bhaÿÿa BhŒskara Mi§ra and SŒyaöŒchŒrya, in 5 volumes, (Poona: Vaidika Saµ§odhana Maö¶ala, 1970). Raghu Vira, ed., Kapisthala-katha-samhita, a text of the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1968). IV. Atharva Veda SŒtavalekara, DŒmodara, ed., Atharvaveda-SaµhitŒ, (PŒra¶´: SvŒdhyŒya-Maö¶ala, 1983). Shastri, Shri Kanth, Saunakiya Atharvaveda samhita: (Delhi: Madhavapustakalayah, 1974–1978). Bhattacharya, Dipak, AtharvavedýŒ PaippalŒdasaµhitŒ, (Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1997). Bloomfield, Maurice, tr., Hymns of the Atharva-Veda together with Extracts from the Ritual Books and the Commentaries, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1964).

1027 English Translations: Whitney, William Dwight, Atharva-Veda-SaµhitŒ, Text with English Translation,

Mantra Index and Names of å·is and Devatas, revised and edited by Nag Sharan Singh, in 2 volumes, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1987).

Griffith, Ralph T.H., The Hymns of the Atharvaveda, Translated with a Popular Commentary, in two volumes, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1968). Chand, Devi, The Atharva Veda, Sanskrit text with English translation, with glossary and index, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers, 1982). V. Shiksha Aithal, K. Parameswara, Veda-Lakshana: Vedic Ancillary Literature: A Descriptive Bibliography, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993). 1. êhamŒna êhik·hŒ Venkatarama Sastri, K. S., ågvedýaµ êamŒnalak·haöam Upalekhasªtraµ ca, (êr´ra‹gam: êr´vŒö´vilŒsamudrŒlayaú, 1967). Vira, Raghu, and Chandra, L., Sanskrit texts on phonetics, (New Delhi: Satapitaka Series, 1981), pp. 280-286. 2. VyŒli êhik·hŒ Abhyankar, K.V., and Devasthali, G.V., Vedavik¨tilak·haöa-Saµgraha, (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1978). Sastri, K.S.V., ågvedýa JaÿŒpaÿalam -- §hr´ madhusªdanýa-§hik·hŒntargatam, §hr´ satyavratavyŒkhyŒ-sahitam, (Srirangam: Vani Vilas Press, 1964.) Referenced in Aithal, p. 15.

êr´manmahŒrŒja Saµsk¨ta MahŒpŒÿha§hŒlŒ PatrikŒ, (vol. 23-26) Mysore Sanskrit College. Referenced in Aithal, p16. 3. Svaravya–jana êhik·hŒ BORI 21(2) of 1875-1876, Manuscript from Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute The Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute describes this manuscript as follows: "Svaravya–jana êhik·hŒ" a êhik·hŒ of åig Veda. Author: Unknown; Date: Unknown; Structure: 6 numbered paragraphs; Length: 3 pages, a total of 25 lines, each line containing approximately 46 syllables. P.G. Navathe, ed., Descriptive catalogue of manuscripts in the Government Manuscripts Library deposited at the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, (Poona : Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1990).

1028 Varma, S., Critical Studies in the Phonetic Observations of Indian Grammarians, (Delhi: Munshi Ram Manohar Lal, 1961), pp. 58-60. 4. êhai·hirýa êhik·hŒ Rani, Sharada, ed., Vedic Studies--A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira, (New Delhi: êatapiÿaka Series, Vol. 272, 1981), pp. 403-420. 5. VyŒsa êhik·hŒ Lueders, H., Die Vyasa-çikshâ Besonders in ihrem Verhältnis zum Taittirîya-prâtiçâkhya. (Göttingen: Dieterich'sche univ.-buchdr. (W.F. Kaestner) 1894). Sastri, P.N. Pattabhirama, ed., VyŒsa êik·hŒ, (Varanasi: Mimamsa Research Centre, 1976). 6. ChŒrŒyaöýa êhik·hŒ BORI 21 of 1875-76, 13 folios (folios numbered 6 - 18) Manuscript from the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute. Also manuscript in the Oxford Indian Institute Library, #62, 98 folios in Sharada script. 7. Ìtreya êhik·hŒ Manuscript not yet obtained. 8. Vasi·hÿha êhik·hŒ Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 251-252. 9. PŒöinýa êhik·hŒ Ghosh, M., PŒöinýa êik·hŒ: Text and Translation (Delhi: V.K. Publishing House, 1991). 10. Lak·hm´kŒnta êhik·hŒ K.P. Aithal, ed., Veda Lak·haöa: Vedic Ancillary Literature: A Descriptive Bibliography, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991). Aithal's #1055, Lak·hm´kŒnta-êik·hŒ or Catuú-êlok´, pp. 523-524. Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Adyar Library, No. 956-958, pp. 324-325. 11. PŒrŒshari êhik·hŒ TripŒth´, êr´ RŒma PrasŒda, ed., êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, (VŒrŒnasi: Sampurnand Sanksrit University, 1989). 12. PadyŒtmikŒ Keshav´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú,

1029

13. Svarabhaktilak·haöapari§hi·hÿa êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, 14. KŒtyŒyan´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 15. Varöaratnaprad´pikŒ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 16. MŒdhyandinýa êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 17. MŒö¶avya êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 18. VŒsi·hÿh´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 19. YŒgyavalkya êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 20. Malla§harma êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú 21. AmoghŒnandin´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú Aithal's #80, p. 101, and BORI 2 of 1873-74, 3 folios (12b-14b). 22. SiddhŒnta êhik·hŒ Chandra and Vira, Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 580-625. 23. Ìpishali êhik·hŒ Cardona, George, “On the Ìpi§hali§hik·hŒ,” in : A Corpus of Indian Studies—Essays in Honour of Prof. Gaurinath Sastri— (Calcutta: Sanskritl Pustak Bhandar, 1980), pp. 245– 256. Edited by Raghu Vira, on the basis of two Adyar Manuscripts, in Journal of Vedic Studies, Vol. 1, 2 (May 1934), pp. 225 ff. Reprinted in Vedic Studies—A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira, ed. by Mrs. Sharada Rani, (New Delhi: SataPitaka Series—Indo-Asian Literatures, vol. 272, 1981) pp. 346–69.

1030 English translation of Ìpi§hali§hik·hŒ in: van Nooten, B.A., "The Structure of Sanskrit Phonetic Treatise," in Tartu Oriental Studies 11, 2, Tartu (Konks-Numerkund-Maell) 1973, pp. 408–437. 24. Sarvasammata êhik·hŒ Chandra and Vira, Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 536–579. German translation: Franke, A. Otto, Die Sarvasaµmata-Íik∑hå mit Commentar, herausgegeben, uebersetzt und erklaert, (Goettingen: Dieterichschen University Press, 1886). 25. Ìraöya êhik·hŒ Chandra, Lokesh, and Vira, Raghu, Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, (New Delhi: Satapitaka Series Vol. 282, 1981), pp. 173–210. 26. êhambhu êhik·hŒ Chandra and Vira, Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 531–535. 27. KŒlaniröaya êhik·hŒ Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 287–289. 28. BhŒradvŒja êhik·hŒ Dikshitar, V.R. Ramchandra, and Ayyar, P.S. Sundaram, BhŒradvŒja§hik·hŒ with NŒge§hvara's Commentary, (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1938). 29. Kauhalýa êhik·hŒ In Vedic Studies, A Collection of the Research Papers of Prof. Raghuvira, Rani, Sharada, ed., (New Delhi: Shatapitaka Series—Indo-Asian Literatures, vol. 272, 1981) pp. 394– 402. 30. PŒriú êhik·hŒ Chandra and Vira, Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 317–394. 31. óho¶a§ha§hlok´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, pp. 136–137. 32. MŒö¶ªk´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, pp. 382–396. Sastri, P.R., ed., Dantyo·hÿha-Vidhi, the 4th Lak·haöa treatise of the Atharvaveda (Lahore: D.A.V. College, 1921).

1031 33. NŒradýa êhik·hŒ Bhishe, Usha R., NŒradýa êhik·hŒ with the Commentary of Bhaÿÿa êobhŒkara, Critically Edited with Translation and Explanatory Notes in English, (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1986).

êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, pp. 330–371. 34. Gautam´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, pp. 372–374. 35. Loma§h´ êhik·hŒ êik·hŒsaµgrahaú, pp. 375–381. 36. PadachandrikŒ: Manuscript #33169 from Ganganatha Jha Research Institute, Allahabad, cited by Aithal, p. 416. Manuscript is lacking its ending colophon. 37. Pada-KŒrikŒ-RatnamŒlŒ, Sanskrit Texts on Phonetics, pp. 433–530. 38. Laugakshi êhik·hŒ, Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute No. 21 of 1875–1876. 39. Kauö¶inya êhik·hŒ, Vedavik¨tilak·haöa-saµgraha. Lakshmanacharya, ed., Sapta-lak·ana, pub. by Sundaresvara Srauti (in Grantha script)— Kumbakonam : Jyotirvilasa Press, 1888. 3, 22 pp. Mullangudi A. Vaidyanatha Sastri, ed., Sapta-lak·ana with commentary (in Grantha script), Kumbakonam : Srividya Press, 1899, pp. 122. Sastri, T.M. Narayana, ed., with the commentary of Vaidyanatha Sastri, pub. by R. Sundaresarya (in Grantha script: Sapta lak·aöam savyŒkhyanam)—Kumbakonam: Sarada Vilas Press, 1918, 158 pp.

Lak·aöa-traya (in Telugu script), together with óa¶viµ§ati-sªtra and JaÿŒmaöi, ed. by

Gomatham Srinivasa Jyosyar—Mysore, 1919. 73 pp.

Sapta-Lak·aöa (in Malayalam script) with the commentary of Vaidyanatha Sastri. -Kunnankulam (Kerala) : K.S. Brothers (Panchangam Press), 1929. 184 pp. VI. Kalpa 1. Ì§hvalŒyana G¨hya Sªtra. VidyŒratna, RŒmanŒrŒyana, and VedŒntŒvŒg´§a, Anandachandra, eds., The Gïhya Sªtra of Ì§walŒyana: With the Commentary of GŒrgya NŒrŒyana, (Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1986).

1032 Aithal, K. Parameswara, Ì§hvalŒyanag¨hyapari§hi·hÿa, (Madras: Adyar Library and Research Center, 1964). English translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, The Grihya Sªtras, rules of Vedic domestic ceremonies, Vol. 29 of Sacred Books of the East series edited by F. Max Mueller, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997). 2. Khadira G¨hya Sªtra. KhŒdirag¨hyasªtram, athavŒ, DrŒhyŒyaöag¨hyasªtram, Rudraskandav¨ttisahitam, Hind´vyŒkhyopetam, (Delhi: CaukhambŒ Saµsk¨ta Prati·ÿhŒna, 1991). English translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, The Grihya Sªtras, rules of Vedic domestic ceremonies, Vol. 29 of Sacred Books of the East series edited by F. Max Mueller, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997), volume 1. 3. KŒÿhaka G¨hya Sªtra. Caland, Willem, The KŒÿhakag¨hyasªtra with Extracts from Three Commentaries, an Appendix and Indexes, (Lahore: DayŒnanda MahŒvidyŒlaya Saµsk¨ta GranthamŒlŒ, 9, 1925). 4. The Kau·h´taka G¨hya Sªtra. Chintamani, T.R., The Kau§´taka G¨hyasètras with the Commentary of Bhavatrata, University of Madras (Madras: 1944) 201 pp. 5. MŒnava G¨hya Sªtra. Sastri, R.H., MaitrŒyanýa MŒnava G¨hya Sètram with the Commentary of A·ÿavakra, Meharchand Lachmandas (New Delhi: 1982) 197 pp. English Translation: Dresden, Mark J., Manavagrhyasutra: a Vedic Manual of Domestic Rites; Translation, (Groningen, Batavia: J.B. Wolters, 1941). 6. PŒraskara G¨hya Sªtra. BŒkre, M.G., Grihya-Sètra by PŒraskar with Five Commentaries, Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt. Ltd. (Bombay: 1982) 548pp. Mimamsaka, Yudhisthira, ed., Katyayana-Grhyasutram, (Bahalagarha: Ramalala Kapura Trust, 1983). English Translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, tr., The Gïhya Sªtras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1997 [first published by Oxford University Press, 1886]).

1033 7. BaudhŒyana Gïhya Sªtra. Srinivasachar, L., and Sastri, R. S., BodhŒyanag¨hyasètram of BodhŒyana Mahar·i, Oriental Research Institute (Mysore: 1983) 551pp. 8. Kau§hika Sªtra. Bloomfield, Maurice, The Kau§hika Sªtra of Atharva Veda, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1972). English Translation: Gonda, J., The Savayajñas (Kausikasutra 60-68. Translation, introduction, commentary), (Amsterdam: Noord-Hollandsche Uitg. Mij., 1965). 9. Hiraöyake§hýa Gïhya Sªtra. KŒ§hńŒtha§hŒstr´ ÌgŒ§he, ed., SatyŒ·hŒ¶haviracitaµ êrauta Sªtram, (India: ÌnandŒ§hrama Press, 1907). English Translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, The Gïhya Sªtras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies, Part 2. 10. VŒrŒha Gïhya Sªtra. Raghu Vira, ed., VŒrŒha-G¨hyasªtra with Short Extracts from the Paddhatis of Ga‹gŒdhara and Vasi·hÿha, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1982). 11. Gobhila Gïhya Sªtra. Knauer, Fedor Ivanovich, Gobhila-G¨hyaSªtra, (Leipzig: Simmel & Co., 1884). English Translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, The Gïhya Sªtras: Rules of Vedic Domestic Ceremonies, Part 2.

12. Ìgnive§hya Gïhya Sªtra. Ravivarmma, El. E., Ìgnive§hyag¨hyasªtra, (Trivandrum: University of Travancore, 1940).

13. êhŒ‹khŒyana Gïhya Sªtra. Hermann Oldenberg,"êŒ‹khŒyana-G¨hyasªtra," in Indische Studien, Beitraege fuer die Kunde des Indischen Alterthums, herausgegeben von Albrecht Weber. fuenfzehnter Band, 1878, pp. 1-166, (Berlin: F. Duemmler). Sehgal, S.R. êŒ‹khŒyana-G¨hyasªtra, (Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1960). English Translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, Vol. I.

1034 14. The Jaiminýa Gïhya Sªtra. Caland, W., The Jaiminig¨hyasªtra Belonging to the SŒmaveda, with extracts from the commentary, edited with an introduction and translated into English, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991). Reprinted from Lahore Punjab Sanskrit Book depot edition of 1922. 15. BhŒradvŒja Gïhya Sªtra. Salomons, Henriette J.W., ed., BhŒradvŒjag¨hyasªtram: the Domestic Ritual According to the School of BhŒradvŒja, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1992). English Translation: Prooye-Salomons, H.J.W., The Domestic Ritual According to the School of Bharadvaja, (Leyden: E.J.Brill, Ltd., 1913).

16. Ìpastamba Gïhya Sªtra. Pandey, U.C., Ìpastamba-G¨hya-Sªtra, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office,

1971).

English Translation: Oldenberg, Hermann, Vol. 2. 17. VaikhŒnasa Gïhya Sªtra. Caland, W., Vaikhanasasmartasutram: Vaikhanasagrhyasutram Vaikhanasadharmasutram ca, (New Delhi: Meharcand Lachmandas Publications, 1989, 1927). English Translation: Caland, Willem, Vaikhanasasmartasutram : the Domestic Rules and Sacred Laws of the Vaikhanasa School Belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi : Ramanand Vidya Bhawan, 1982). Resnick, Howard Jay, “The ‘Daivika-Catustayam’of the ‘Vaikhanasa-mantra-prasna,” Translation,” Thesis, (Cambridge MA : Harvard Univ., 1996). 18. Kauthuma Gïhya Sªtra. SªryakŒnta, Kauthuma-G¨hya, Edited with Introduction, Notes and Indices, (Calcutta: The Asiatic Society, 1956).

19. êhŒ‹khŒyana êhrauta Sªtra. Hillebrandt, Alfred, êhŒ‹khŒyana êhrauta Sªtra Together with the Commentary of Varadattasuta Ìnartýa and Govinda, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981). Caland, Willem; and Chandra, Lokesh, Sankhayana Srautasutra: Being a Major Yajnika Text of the Rgveda, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1980, ©1953).

20. Ìpastamba êhrauta Sªtra.

Kashikar, C.G., and Garbe, R., eds., The êrauta Sªtra of Ìpastamba, Belonging to the Taittirýa SaµhitŒ, with the Commentary of Rudradatta, 3 vol., (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1983).

1035

21. Ma§haka êhrauta Sªtra. "Das Ma§hakakalpasªtra," in Caland, W., ed., Der Arseyakalpla des Samaveda, (Liechtenstein: Nendeln, 1966)(reprint). Upagrantha sªtra in Satyavrata SŒma§hram´, ed., U·hŒ 4, Calcutta, 1897, cited by Gonda, p. 537. Panchavidha sªtra in Sharma, Bellikoth Ramachandra, ed., Pa–cavidha-Sªtra with Commentary, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1970). Taö¶Œlak·aöa and Anustotra Sªtra (manuscripts) in the collection of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta: Shastri, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad, A Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of The Asiatic Society of Bengal, Volume II (Vedic Manuscripts), (Calcutta, 1921), page 1047, item 1322 (999): Tandalakshana Sutra of Samaveda. 14 Folia, extent in Shlokas = 280. Ibid., page 1055, item 1332 (994A): Anustotram of Samaveda, folia 8. KalpŒnupadasªtra: ShŒstr´, M. H., A Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection Under the Care of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Volume II Vedic Manuscripts, (Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1923), page 1061, Catalog Entry # 1339, Manuscript # 995. 22. Kau§hika êhrauta Sªtra. (same as Kau§hika Grihya Sªtra.) Shantikalpa: Bolling, George Melville, "The Cantikalpa of the Atharva-Veda," in Transactions and Proceedings of the American Philological Association, Volume 35 (1904) 77-127. English Translation: Modak, B.R., The Ancillary Literature of the Atharva-Veda, (New Delhi: Rashtriya Veda Vidya Pratishthan, 1993). Nak·hatrakalpa: Bolling, George Melville, and von Negelein, Julius, eds., The Pari§i·ÿhas of the Atharvaveda, Vol. 1, parts 1 and 2, Leipzig: Harrassowitz, 1909-1910). 23. VaitŒna êhrauta Sªtra. Garbe, Richard, Vaitana Sutra: the Ritual of the Atharvaveda, edited with critical notes and indices, (New Delhi: Mahalakshmi Publishing House, 1982). von Negelein, Julius, "Atharvaprayascittani," in Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. 33 (1913), 71-120. English Translation of VaitŒna êhrauta Sªtra: Ghosal, S.N., "The Vaitanasutra," in Indian Historical Quarterly, v. 34-36, (Calcutta: 1958-1960).

1036 24. Hiraöyake§hýa êhrauta Sªtra. ÌgŒ§he, KŒ§hńŒtha§hŒstr´, ed., SatyŒ·hŒ¶haviracitaµ êrauta Sªtram, 10 vols., (India: ÌnandŒ§hrama Press, 1907). 25. Vadhªla êhrauta Sªtra. Chaubey, Braj Bihari, ed., VŒdhªla-êrautasªtram, critically edited with Introduction and Indices, (Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 1993). 26. MŒnava êhrauta Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: van Gelder, Jeannette, The MŒnava êrautasªtra belonging to the MaitrŒyaö´ SaµhitŒ, 2 vols., (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1985). 27. BhŒradvŒja êhrauta Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: Kashikar, C.G., The êrauta, Pait¨medhika and Pari§he·ha Sªtras of BharadvŒja, 2 vols., (Poona: Vaidika Saµ§hodhana Maö¶ala, 1964). 28. DrŒhyŒyaöa êhrauta Sªtra. DrŒhyŒyaöa êrauta Sªtram (With the Commentary of Dhanvin), B.R. Sharma, ed., (Allahabad: Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan, 1983). English Translation: Parpola, Asko, The êrauta Sªtras of LŒÿyŒyana and DrŒhyŒöa and Their Commentaries: an English Translation, (Helsinki: Societas scientiarum Fennica, 1968). 29. LŒÿyŒyana êhrauta Sªtra. Vedantavagisa, Ananda Chandra, ed., Írauta S™tra of Låtyåyana with the commentary of Agniswåm¥, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1982). English Translation: Parpola, Asko. 30. VŒrŒha êhrauta Sªtra. Caland, W., and Vira, Raghu, eds., Våråha-Írauta-S™tra Being the Main Ritualistic S™tra of the Maitråyaˆ¥ Íåkhå, (Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1971). Kashikar, C.G., "Haut¨ka" in Annals of the Bhandakar Oriental Research Institute, Vol. LXXIX (Pune: A.M. Ghatage, 1998), pp. 137-148. 31. KŒtyŒyana êhrauta Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: H.G. Ranade, Kåtyåyana Írauta S™tra: Rules for the Vedic sacrifices, (Pune: H.G. Ranade and R.H. Ranade, Publishers, 1978). Kashikar, C.G., KŒtyŒyanýa Hautrapari§hi·hÿa together with Karka's Commentary and an English Translation, (Pune: Tilak Maharashtra Vidyapeeth, 1984).

1037 32. KŒÿhaka êhrauta Sªtra. S™ryakånta, Kåˇhaka-Saµkalana: Extracts from the Lost Kåˇhaka Bråhmaâ, Kåˇhaka-Írautas™tra and Kåˇhaka G®hyas™tras, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1981).

33. Ì§hvalŒyana êhrauta Sªtra.

Vidyåratna, Råmanåråyaâ, ed., The Írauta S™tra of Ãßwalåyana with the Commentary of Gårgya Nåråyaâ, Calcutta (Asiatic Society, 1989). Ranade, H. G., Asvalayana Srauta-Sutram, 2 vols. (Poona: R.H. Ranade, 1981-1986). 34. Jaiminýa êhrauta Sªtra. Premnidhi Shastri, Jaimin¥ya-Írauta-S™tra-V®tti of Bhavatråta, (New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture, 1966). Parpola, Asko in Acta Orientalis 36, 504, Leiden, Copenhagen, and in Orientalia Suecana 16, 207, Uppsala. (Ref. from Gonda.) 35. Nidåna Sªtra. K.N. Bhatnagar, Nidåna-S™tra of Patañjali, Edited with an Introduction, a Fragmentary Commentary and Indices, (Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1971). 36. BaudhŒyana êhrauta Sªtra. Caland, W., The BaudhŒyana êrauta Sªtra Belonging to the Taittirýa-SaµhitŒ, Vols. 13, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1982; 1st Edition Calcutta 1904-13). Kashikar, Chintaman Ganesh, tr., The Baudhayana Srautasutra, 4 vols., (New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts and Motilal Banarsidass, 2003). 37. VaikhŒnasa êhrauta Sªtra. Caland, W., editor, Vaikhånasa Írautas™tram: The Description of Vedic Rites According to the Vaikhånasa School belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt Ltd, 1991). [Originally published in 1941 in Bibliotheca Indica Series, Calcutta.] 38. Anupada êhrauta Sªtra. Unpublished. 39. Hiraöyake§hýa êhulba Sªtra. Ãgåße, Kåß¥nåthaßåstr¥, ed., Satyå∑å∂haviracitaµ Írauta S™tram, (Punyakhyapattane: Ãnandåßrama Press, 1907) Prashna 25. English Translation of Sutra portion (Ìpastamba): Sen, S.N., and Bag, A.K., The êulbasªtras of BaudhŒyana, Ìpastamba, KŒtyŒyana and MŒnava withText, English Translation and Commentary, (New Delhi: Indian National Science Academy, 1983).

1038 40. BaudhŒyana êhulba Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: Sen and Bag. 41. MŒnava êhulba Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: Sen and Bag.

42. Ìpastamba êhulba Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: Sen and Bag. 43. KŒtyŒyana êhulba Sªtra. Sanskrit and English Translation: Khadilkar, S.D., KŒtyŒyana êhulba Sªtra, (Poona: Vaidika Saµ§hodhana Maö¶ala, 1974).

KŒÿhaka, VŒrŒha, and VŒdhªla êhulba Sªtras are unpublished or unknown. 44. Vi·höu Dharma Sªtra. Krishnamacharya, V., ed., Vi·höusm¨ti, The Adyar Library Series, Vol. 93 (in 2 parts),

(Madras: The Adyar Library and Research Center, 1964).

English Translation: Jolly, Julius, The Institutes of Vishnu, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1970). 45. Vasi·hÿa Dharma Sªtra. Buehler, George, VŒsi·hÿha-Dharma§hŒstra, Bombay Sanskrit and Prakrit Series, cited by M. Fushimi. English Translation: Buehler, George, Sacred Laws of the AryŒs as Taught in the Schools of Ìpastamba, Gautama, VŒsishÿha and BaudhŒyana, vol. 2, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1969).

46. Ìpastamba Dharma Sªtra. G. Buehler, Apastamba-Dharmasªtra, Bombay Sanskrit Series Nos. LIV and L, 3rd ed. 1932.

English Translation: Buehler, George, Sacred Laws of the AryŒs as Taught in the Schools of Ìpastamba, Gautama, VŒsishÿha and BaudhŒyana, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1969). 47. Hiraöyake§hýa Dharma Sªtra. Kåß¥nåthaßåstr¥ Ãgåße, ed., Satyå∑å∂haviracitaµ Írauta S™tram, 10 vols. (India: Ãnandåßrama Press, 1907). 48. Gautama Dharma Sªtra. Gautam¥ya-Dharmas™tra, Ãnandåßrama Sanskrit Series 61, 1966. English Translation: Buehler, George, Vol. 1.

1039

49. VaikhŒnasa Dharma Sªtra. W. Caland, ed.,VaikhŒnasasmŒrtasªtram, The Domestic Rules of the VaikhŒnasa School, Belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1927). English Translation: Caland, W., tr., Vaikhanasasmartasutram: The Domestic Rules and Sacred Laws of the Vaikhanasa School Belonging to the Black Yajurveda, (New Delhi: Ramanand Vidya Bhawan, 1982). 50. BaudhŒyana Dharma Sªtra. Hultzsch, Das Baudhayana-Dharmasutra. Zweite, Verbesserte Auflage. Abhandlungen fuer die Kunde des Morgenlandes, 16, Leipzig 1922; and Pandeya, Umesa Chandra, Baudhayana-Dharmasutra with the 'Vivarana" Commentary by Sri Govinda Svami and critical notes by M.M.A. Chinnaswami Sastri, (Varanasi: The Kashi Sanskrit Series, 104, 1972). English Translation: Buehler, George, Vol. II. VII. Vyakarana Shastri, Bal; Nagesabhatta; Diksita, Bhattoji; and Sastri, Guruprasada, Srimadbhagavatpatañjalimuniviracitam Patañjalam Mahabhasyam (Mahabhashya of Patanjali), 7 volumes, (Varanasi: Vanivilasa Prakasana, 1987). Sumitra M. Kartre, A∑ˇådhyåy¥ of Påîni in Roman Transliteration, (Austin, TX: University of Texas Press, 1987). English Translations: Vasu, êr´§ha Chandra, The AshÿŒdhyŒy´ of PŒöini, 2 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). Joshi, S.D., and Roodbergen, J.A.F., PataÒjali's Vyakarana-mahabhasya, (Poona: Univer sity of Poona, 1968). Ír¥ßa Chandra Vasu, ed., The Siddhånta Kaumud¥, v.2, (Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1982). J.L. Shastri, Dhåtupåˇha˙, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984). Cardona, George, Påîni, His Work and its Traditions, Vol. I, Second Edition, (New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). Cardona, George, PŒöini: A survey of research, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1976). VIII. Nirukta Sanskrit and English Translation: Sarup, Lakshman, The Nighaˆˇu and the Nirukta, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984).

1040 IX. Chhandas Kedaranatha, Chanda§Œstram of PingalŒcŒrya with M¨tasa–j´vani v¨tti of HalŒyudha Bhatta and Chandonirukti of Madhusudana VidyŒvŒcaspati, (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1994). Sastri, Asoke Chatterjee, ed., Pi‹galachhandaúsªtra: A study, (Calcutta: University of Calcutta, 1987). X. Jyotish Sanskrit and English Translations: Santanam, R., Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra of Maharshi Parasara, (New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1990). Sharma, Girish Chand, Brihat Parasara Hora Sastra, (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1994). Sarma, K.V., and Sastry, T.S., Vedanga Jyotisa of Lagadha in its Rk and Yajus Recensions, (New Delhi: Indian National Science Academy, 1985). Datta, Bhagavad Datta, Ìtharvaöa Jyoti·ham or the VedŒ‹ga Jyoti·ha of the Atharva Veda, (Lahore: Punjab Sanskrit Book Depot, Motilal Banarsidass, 1924). Ebenezer Burgess, Translation of the S™rya-Siddhånta, a Textbook of Hindu Astronomy, (Varanasi: Indological Book House, 1977), p. viii. Vindhyesvariprasada Dvivedi, Jyautisha Siddhanta Sangraha: A Collection of Ancient Hindu Astronomical works, (Benares : Braj Bhushan Das & Co., 1912-1917), vol. 2. R. Santhanam, Garga Hora, (New Delhi: Ranjan Publications, 1997). Krishna Kumar Pathak, ed., Garga Hora Shastra, (New Delhi: Nishkaam Peeth Prakashan, 1999). Sanjay Rath, Jaimini Maha Rishiís Upadesa sutras: complete with four chapters, (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1997). V. Subrahmanya Sastri, Shatpanchasika, (Bangalore, Sri Råma Press, 1966). Råman, Bangalore Venkata, Praßna Mårga, 2 vol., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991). êŒstr´, Kapile§hvara, MuhªrtachintŒmaö´ of êr´ RŒmadaivaj–a, (Varanasi: Chaukhamba Amarabharati Prakashan, 1989). Sharma, Girish Chand, Daivagye Acharya Shriram's Muhurta Chintamani, (New Delhi: Sagar Publications, 1996). N.P.Subramania Iyer, Kalaprakasika, the Standard Book on the Election (Mahoortha) System, (New Delhi, Asian Educational Services, 1991). Ganapati Daivajna, (17th cent.), Muh™rtagaâpati˙, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988).

1041 M. Råmakrishna Bhat, Varåhamihiraís B®hat Saµhitå, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1992). XI. NyŒya Darshanam VidyŒbhu·ana, MahŒmahopŒdhyŒya Sati§a Chandra, tr., The NyŒya Sutras of Gotama, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1975) [First published in 1913 by Panini Office, Allahabad.] Jha, Ganganatha, and NyŒyopŒdhyŒya, DhundhirŒja ShŒstri, The Nyaya-Darshana: The Sªtras of Gautama and BhŒsya of VŒtsyŒyana with two commentaries (1) The Khadyota by Ganganatha Jha, and (2) The Bhasyachandra by Raghuttama, (Benares: Vidya Vilas Press, 1925). English Translation: Jha, Ganganatha, tr., NyŒya-Sªtras of Gautama with the BhŒ·ya of VŒtsyŒyana and the VŒrtika of U¶¶yoÿakara, 5 volumes (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984) Reprint from Indian Thought, 1912-1919. XII. Vai§he·hika Dar§hanam Gough, Archibald Edward, The Vaißeshika aphorisms of Kanåda, (New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1975).[Originally published in 1873 by E.J. Lazarus & Co., Benares.] Jambuvijayaji, Muni êr´, Vai§eshikasªtra of KanŒda with the Commentary of CandrŒnanda, (Baroda: Oriental Institute, 1982).[Originally published in 1873 by E.J. Lazarus & Co., Benares.]

Vai§e·ikadar§ana with Pra§astapŒdabhŒ·ya of Mahar·i Pra§astadevŒchŒrya with the PrakŒ§ikŒ Hindi Commentary by ÌchŒrya ëhuö¶hirŒja êŒstr´, edited with Introduction

and Hindi Translation of the Vai§e·ika Sªtras by êr´ NŒrŒyaöa Mi§ra, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Sanskrit Sansthan, 1980).

XIII. SŒµkhya Dar§anam Sinha, Nandalal, The Samkhya Philosophy, New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1979). [Originally published in 1915 by Panini Office, Allahabad.] Ballantyne, J.R., The SŒµkhya aphorisms of Kapila, (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1995). XIV. Yoga Dar§anam Mukerji, P.N., tr., Ìraöya, SwŒmi HariharŒnanda, commentator, Yoga Philosophy of

Patanjali, containing his Yoga Aphorisms with VyŒsa's Commentary in Sanskrit and a Translation with Annotations including many suggestions for the Practice of Yoga,

1042 (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1981). Originally pubished by Calcutta University Press in 1963. Woods, James Haughton, tr., The Yoga System of Patanjali, or the Ancient Hindu Doctrine of Concentration of Mind, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1988). Singh, Jaideva, êiva Sªtras: The Yoga of Supreme Identity, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1991). Vasu, Rai Bahadur Srisa Chandra, tr., The êiva SaµhitŒ, (New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corp., 1979). Singh, Jaideva, ViäŒnabhairava or Divine Consciousness, A Treasury of 112 Types of Yoga, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993). XV. Karma M´mŒµsŒ Dar§hanam Sandal, Mohan Lal, Introduction to the Mimamsa Sutras of Jaimini, (Allahabad: Panini Office, 1925). P. Gaöe§a§Œstr´ Jo§´, êr´majjaiminipraö´te M´mŒµsŒdar§ane, 6 vol. (ÌnandŒ§ramasaµsk¨tagranthŒvaliú, 1981). K.P. Bahadur, Wisdom of Meemaansaa, (New Delhi: Sterling Publishers, 1983). S. Subrahmanya Shastri, ed., Sankar·hakŒö¶a: Mahar·hi Jaiminimunina praö´tam DevaswŒmiviracitabhŒ·hyamanvalitam, (Madras: University of Madras, 1965). Sarma, K.V., Sa‹kar·a KŒö¶a Sªtras of Jaimini, (Hoshiarpur, Vishveshvaranand Vedic Research Institute, 1963). XVI. VedŒnta Dar§hanam Shastri, J.L., ed., Brahmasªtra-êŒnkarabhŒsyam with the Commentaries: BhŒ·yaratnaprabhŒ of GovindŒnanda, BhŒmat´ of VŒcaspatimi§ra, and NyŒya-Niröaya of Ìnandagiri, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1980). English Translation: Swami Gambhirananda, Brahma-Sªtra-BhŒ·ya of êr´ êa‹karŒcŒrya, (Calcutta: Advaita Ashrama, 1983). XVII. Gandharva Veda NŒÿya êhŒstra Joshi, K.L., ed., Natyasastra of Bharatamuni with the commentary Abhinavabharati by Abhinavaguptacharya, 4 vols., (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1989). English Translation: Board of Scholars, NŒÿya êŒstra of Bharatamuni, (Delhi: Srisatguru Publications, 1996).

1043 Saµg´taratnŒkara

Sa‹g´ta RatnŒkaraú, 2 vols., (ÌnandŒ§ramasaµsk¨tagranthŒvaliú, 1985). Shringy, R.K., and Sharma, Prem Lata, tr., Sa‹g´taratnŒkara of êŒr‹gadeva, 2 volumes, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal Publications, 1991). XVIII. Dhanur Veda Ray, Purnima, Vasi·hÿha's Dhanurveda SaµhitŒ, (Delhi, J.P. Publishing, 1991).

Shiva Dhanur Veda Sanskrit text with English Translation in Petersen, Peter, ed.., The Paddhati of êŒr‹gadhara, A Sanskrit Anthology, Vol. I, (Bombay: Government Central Book Depot, 1888). Sanskrit text with English Translation: Oppert, Gustav, ed., N´tiprakŒ§hika, (New Delhi: Kumar Brothers, 1970). XIX. SthŒpatya Veda 1. MŒnasŒra Acharya, Prasanna Kumar, MŒnasŒra on Architecture and Sculpture: Sanskrit text with critical notes, (Delhi: Low Price Publications, 1995). English Translation: Acharya, Prasanna-Kumara, tr. Architecture of Manasara, 2 vols., (London: Oxford University Press, 1934). 2. Mayamatam Sanskrit text and English Translation: Dagens, Bruno, Mayamatam: Treatise of housing, architecture and iconography, 2 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994). 3. Vi§vakarma Somapura, Prabhasankara Oghadabhai, Sri Vi§vakarmakrtŒya §rI vŒstuvidyŒyŒm VŒstu§Œstre, 2 vols. (Somapura: Sri Balavantaraya Prabhasankara Somapura ane Bandhuo, 1970). 4. Manu·yŒlayacandrikŒ Achyuthan, A., and Prabhu, Balagopal T.S., Manu·yŒlayacandrikŒbhŒ·ya: An

engineering commentary on Manu·yŒlayacandrika of Tirumangalat N´lakaöÿhan Mªsat, Saraswatham, Kiliyanad, Calicut: VŒstuvidyŒprati·ÿhŒnam, 1998. 5. SamarŒ‹gana SªtradhŒra Kumar, Pushpendra, ed., SamarŒ‹gana SªtradhŒra, 2 vols., (Delhi: New Bharatiya Book Corporation, 1998).

1044 6. VŒstusªtra Upani·ad Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Boner, Alice, et al., VŒstusªtra Upani·ad: The Essence of Form in Sacred Art, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1986). 7. KŒmikŒgama SvŒminŒtha, Ce., KŒmikŒgama, (MadrŒs: Dak·iöabhŒratŒrcakasa‹ghaú, 1975).

Kaamikaagama, 2 vols., CivanaNapotayantracalai, Cintatiripettai, Madras, 1909. 8. KŒraöŒgama Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Pandey, Rama Chandra, KŒraöŒgama: KriyŒpŒda: Translation with Notes, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1994).

Karanagama, CivanaNapotayantracalai, Cintatiripettai, Madras (vol. I

Purvakaranagama, 1921; vol. II Uttarakaranagama, 1901).

9. AjitŒgama Bhatt, N. R., AjitŒgama, 2 vols., (Pondichery: Institut Francais D'Indologie, 1967). 10. D´ptŒgama Barazer-Billoret, M.-L.; Dagens, B., & Lefevre, V. ; and SivŒcŒrya, S. Sambandhan, D´ptŒgama, Vol. 1 (chap. 1-21), (Pondichery: French Institute of Indology, 2004). 11. Sªk·mŒgamaú Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha, Sªk·mŒgamaú: KriyŒpŒdaú: Translation with Notes, (Varanasi, Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratisthanam, 1994). 12. SuprabhedŒgama SuprabhedŒgama, (êintŒtiripeÿÿai, Madras: êiva–ŒNapotayantra§Œlai, 1907). 13. SvayaµbhªŒgama Filliozat, Pierre-Sylvain, ed., The Tantra of Svayaµbhª vidyŒpŒda with the commentary of Sadyojyoti, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994). 14. V´rŒgama Malladevaru, H.P., ed., V´rŒgamottaram, Vol. 1, (Mysore: Oriental Research Institute, 1988). 15. RauravŒgama Bhatt, N.R., RauravŒgama, 3 vols., [Pondichery, Institut Francais D'Indologie, 1985, 1972, 1988.

1045

16. MakuÿŒgama Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Ghose, Rama and Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha, MakuÿŒgama, KriyŒpŒda and CharyŒpŒda, English translation and notes, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1996). 17. Candraj–ŒnŒgama Ghose, Rama and Dvivedi, Brajavallabha, Candraj–ŒnŒgama: KriyŒpŒda and ChŒryŒpŒda, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1995). English Translation: Ghose, Rama and Dvivedi, Brajavallabha, Candrajnanagama : kriyapada & caryapada (Varanasi : Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratishthanam, 1995). 18. PŒrame§varŒgamaú Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Dwivedi, Vrajavallabha, PŒrame§varŒgamaú, Translation with Notes, (Varanasi: Shaiva Bharati Shodha Pratisththanam, 1995). 19. KiraöŒgama Vivanti, Maria Pia, "Il "KiraöŒgama", Testo e traduzione del "VidyŒpŒda," in Annali, Supplemento n. 3 agli: vol. 35 (1975), fasc. 2, Napoli, 1975.

Kiranagama, Sivagamasiddhantaparipalanasamgha, Devakottai, 1932 (I Vidyapada; II Kriyapada; III Caryapada; IV Yogapada).

XX. HŒr´ta SaµhitŒ Shastri, Ramavalamba, Harita Samhita, text with Asha Hindi Commentary, (Varanasi: Prachya Prakashan, 1985). French Translation: Raison, Alix, tr., La Haritasamhita : texte medical sanskrit (Pondichery: Institut francais d'indologie, 1974). XXI. Bhela SaµhitŒ Shastri, K.S. Subramania, and Sarma, C. Raja Rajeswara, Bhel SaµhitŒ, (New Delhi: Sahitya Anusandhana Ekaka, 1977). English Translation: Krishnamurthy, K.H., Bhela- SaµhitŒ: Text with English Translation, Commentary and Critical Notes, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Visvabharati, 2000). XXII. KŒ§hyapa SaµhitŒ Sanskrit Text with English Translation: Tewari, P.V., KŒ§yapa-SaµhitŒ or V¨ddhaj´vakýa Tantra, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Visvabharati, 1996).

1046 XXIII. Charaka SaµhitŒ Sanskrit Text with English Translation: Sharma, P.V., Caraka SaµhitŒ: Agnive§a's treatise refined and annotated by Caraka and redacted by D¨¶habala, 3 vols., (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1981). XXIV. Sushruta SaµhitŒ Pandey, Shastri Shambhunatha, ed., Su§ruta-SaµhitŒ of Mahar·i Su§rut, (Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1985). Bhishagratna, Kaviraj Kunjalal, An English Translation of the Sushruta Samhita Based on Original Sanskrit Text, 3 vols., (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1991). XXV. VŒgbhatta SaµhitŒ Sanskrit text with English Translation: Murthy, K.R.Srikantha, tr., VŒgbhaÿa's A·ÿŒ‹ga Hïdayam, 3 vols., (Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1991-3). Kinjwadekar, Ramchandra Sastri, ed., Astanga Sangraha of Sri Vaghbhatta Virchit. 3 vols., (Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1990). XXVI. MŒdhava NidŒna SaµhitŒ Sanskrit Text with English Translation: Murthy, K.R. Srikanta, MŒdhava NidŒnam (Roga Vini§caya) of Madhavakara, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1993). XXVII. êhŒrngadhara SaµhitŒ Sanskrit Text with English Translation: Murthy, K.R. Srikanta, tr., SarngadharSaµhitŒ, a treatise on Ìyurveda, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Orientalia, 1995). Jha, Krishnanand, Upavanavinodah, A system of tree plantation, (Kameshwaranagar, Darbhanga: K.S.D. Sanskrit University, 1984). XXVIII. BhŒva PrakŒ§ha SaµhitŒ Mi§ra, êr´ Brahma§a‹kara, and Vai§ya, êr´ RªpalŒlaj´, eds., BhŒvaprakŒ§a of êr´ BhŒva Mi§ra, (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Sanskrit Sansthan, 1984). English Translation: Murthy, K.R. Srikanta, Bhavaprakasa of Bhavamisra : text, English translation, notes, appendeces and index, 2 vols., (Varanasi: Krishnadas Academy, 1998-2000). XXIX. Upanishad Shastri, J.L., ed., Upanisat-Samgrahah, Containing 108 Upani·ads, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984).

1047 English Translation: Radhakrishnan, S., The Principal Upanishads, (London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd., 1968). XXX. Aranyaka 1. Jaiminýa Ìraöyaka Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Oertel, Hanns, "The Jaiminiya or Talavakara Upanisad Brahmana: Text, Translation, and Notes", in: Journal of the American Oriental Society 16 (1896), pp. 79-260. 2. êhŒ‹khŒyana Ìraöyaka Dev, Bhim, êŒ‹khŒyana Ìraöyakam, (Hoshiarpur: Vishveshvaranand Vedic Research Institute, 1980). English Translation: Keith, Arthur Berriedale, The êhŒ‹khŒyana Ìraöyaka with an appendix on the MahŒvrata, (New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corporation, 1975), originally published 1908 by the Royal Asiatic Society, London. 3. ChhŒndogya Ìraöyaka Shastri, J.L., Upanisat-Samgrahah Containing 188 Upani·ads, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984). 4. MaitrŒyaöýa Ìraöyaka Satyavalekara, DŒmodara, Maitrayana Samhita, (PŒradi: SvŒdhyŒya Maö¶ala, 1983), pp. 543–564. 5. Aitareya Ìraöyaka Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Keith, Arthur Berriedale, The Aitareya Ìraöyaka, (New Delhi: Master Publishers, 1981). 6. Taittirýa Ìraöyaka Abhyankarasastri, Kasinatha Vasudeva, K¨·öayajurvedýaµ TaittirýŒraöyakam, 2 vols., ( Punyakhyapattane: ÌnandŒ§ramasaµstha, 1969). Witzel, Michael, Das Kaÿha Ìraöyaka. Textkritische Edition mit Uebersetzung und Kommentar, Teildruck. Diss. erlangen 1972. XXXI. BrŒhmaöas 1. Gopatha BrŒhmaöa Mitra, Rajendra Lal, Gopath Brahmana, (Delhi: Indological Book House, 1972) originally published as part of Bibliotheca Indica.

1048 2. Vaµsha BrŒhmaöa Vaµ§a BrŒhmaöa, (Calcutta: Indian Research Institute, 1985). 3. Shatapatha BrŒhmaöa Weber, Albrecht, The êatapatha-BrŒhmaöa in the MŒdhyandina-êŒkhŒ with extracts from the commentaries of SŒyana, HarisvŒmin, and Dvivedaga‹ga, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1964). English Translation: Eggeling, Julius, The êatapatha-BrŒhmaöa according to the text of the MŒdhyandina School, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1982) first published 1882, Clarendon Press, Sacred Books of the East series. Caland, W., and Vira, Raghu, The êatapatha BrŒhmaöa in the KŒövýa Recension, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1998). 4. TŒö¶ya Panchaviµ§ha BrŒhmaöa êŒstr´, A. CinnaswŒm´, and êŒstr´, PaÿÿŒbh´rŒma, TŒö¶yamahŒbrŒhmaöa belonging to the SŒma Veda, with the commentary of SŒyaöŒchŒrya, 2 vols., (Varanasi: Chaukhambha Sanskrit Sansthan, 1987). English Translation: Caland, W., tr., Panchaviµ§ha BrŒhmaöa, the BrŒhmaöa of Twenty-Five Chapters (Calcutta: Asiatic Society, 1982). First Published 1931. 5. ChhŒndogya BrŒhmaöa 1.Stoenner, Heinrich, Das MantrabrŒhmaöa, 1. PrapŒÿhaka, Diss. Halle/Saale 1901; 2. Joergensen, Hans, Das MantrabrŒhmaöa, 2. PrapŒÿhaka, Diss. Kiel. Darmstadt 1911. 6. Jaiminýa Ìrsheya BrŒhmaöa Burnell, A.C., The Jaiminiya text of the Arsheyabrahmana of the Sama Veda, (Mangalore: Basel Mission Press, 1878). 7. êhŒ‹khŒyana BrŒhmaöa Rai, Ganga Sagar, The êŒ‹khŒyana BrŒhmaöa, (Varanasi: Ratna Publications, 1987). 8. SŒmavidhŒna BrŒhmaöa Sharma, B.R., SŒmavidhŒna BrŒhmana, with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa and PadŒrthamŒtravivrti of BharatasvŒmin, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1980).

1049 9. Aitareya BrŒhmaöa Aufrecht, Th., Das Aitareya BrŒhmaöa.mit Auszuegen aus dem Commentare von SŒyaöŒcŒrya und anderen Beilagen, (Bonn: Adolph Marcus, 1879). Haug, Martin, the Aitareya BrŒhmaöa of the Rigveda, 2 vols., (Delhi: Bharatiya Publishing House, 1977). 10. Taittirýa BrŒhmaöa

Krsnayajurvediyam Taittiriya-Brahmanam, 3 vols. (Punyapattane] : Anandasrama,

1979).

11. Jaiminýa BrŒhmaöa V´ra, Raghu, and Candra, Lokesh, Jaiminýa-BrŒhmaöa of the SŒmaveda, (Nagpur: L. Candra, 1954), and the grantha manuscripts, Vohd II, 2 Nr. 535, Berlin. 12. (TŒö¶ya) óha¶viµ§ha BrŒhmaöa Sharma, Belikoth Ramachandra, óa¶viµ§a BrŒhmaöa with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1983). 13. Saµhitopani·had BrŒhmaöa Sharma, Belikoth Ramachandra, DevatŒdhyŒya-Saµhitopani·ad-Vaµ§a-BrŒhmaöas with commentaries, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1983). 14. Kauthuma Ìrsheya BrŒhmaöa Sharma, Belikoth Ramachandra, Ìrseya BrŒhmaöa with VedŒrthaprakŒ§a of SŒyaöa, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1984). 15. DaivatŒdhyŒya BrŒhmaöa Sharma, Belikoth Ramachandra, DevatŒdhyŒya-Saµhitopani·ad-Vaµ§a-BrŒhmaöas with commentaries, (Tirupati: Kendriya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, 1983). Chaubey, Braj Bihari, VŒdhªla-AnvŒkhyŒnam, (Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 2001). Caland, W., "BrŒhmaöa- en Sªtra-Aanwinsten," (Verslagen en Mededelingen der Koninklijke Nederlandsche Akademie van Wetenschappen, Afd. Letterkunde, 5. Reeks, Deel iv, 1920), pp. 461-498.

1050 XXXII. ItihŒsa 1. RŒmŒyaöa Vasishth, Shivram Sharma, êrimadvŒlm´kirŒmŒyaöa of Mahar·i VŒlm´ki, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1982). English Translation: Shastri, Hari Prasad, tr., The Ramayana of Valmiki, 3 vols., (London: Shantisadan, 1985). 2. MahŒbhŒrata Sukthankar, V.S.; Sakthankar, Vishnu Sitaram; Belvalkar, Shripad Krishna; and Vaidya, Parasurama Lakshmana, The MahŒbhŒrata, 19 vols., (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1927-1966). English Translation: Ganguli, Kisari Mohan, The Mahabharata of KrishnaDwaipayana Vyasa 12 vol., (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers, 1990). 2A. Bhagavad G´tŒ

Srimad-Bhagavad-gita, (Gorakpur: Gita Press, 1925). Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, Bhagavad-Gita: A New Translation and Commentary with Sanskrit Text, Chapters 1-6, (London: International SRM Publications, 1967). 2B. RŒmopŒkhyŒna Chapters 258 to 275 of the Ìraöyaka Parva.[Mbh 3, 258-275, : Nooten, Barend A. Van: The RŒmopŒkhyŒna and the RŒmŒyaöa [Engl.]. In: IT 8-9, 1980-1981: Dr. Ludwik Sternbach commemoration volume ... 1981. - pp. 293-305.] 2C. The Harivaµ§a Vaidya, Parashuram Lakshman, The Harivaµ§a, being the Khila or supplement to the MahŒbhŒrata, (Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, 1969). Bose, Dhirendra Nath, Harivamsha, Translated into English prose from the original Sanskrit text, (Dum Dum (Bengal): Datta Bose, 1987). XXXIII. PurŒna 1. Bhagavata PurŒöa Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Goswami, C.L., Sr´mad BhŒgavata MahŒpurŒöa with Sanskrit text and English translation, 2 vols., (Gorkhapur: Gita Press, 1982).

1051

2. Padma PurŒöa Vyasa, Krsnadvaipayana, Padma Puranam, (Calcutta: More Pracya Sodha Sanisthana, 1957). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Bhagavata PurŒöa, 5 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 3. Brahma PurŒöa

BrahmamahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1985). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Brahma PurŒöa, 4 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 4. Vi·höu PurŒöa Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Wilson, H.H., The Vi·öu PurŒöa: A system of Hindu mythology and tradition, 2 vols. (Delhi: Nag, 1980). 5. Shiva PurŒöa ÌchŒrya, RŒma Sharma, êr´êiva PurŒöa , (Mathura: Rashtriya Press, 1972). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The êiva PurŒöa, 4 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 6. NŒrada PurŒöa

NŒradýa MahŒpurŒöa, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1984). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The NŒrada PurŒöa, 5 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 7. Agni PurŒöa Sharma, R.N., ed., The AgnimahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1985). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Agni PurŒöa, 4 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 8. MŒrkaö¶eya PurŒöa Banerjea, K. M., The MŒrcandeya PurŒna, (Calcutta: Bishop's College Press, 1855). English Translation: Pargiter, F. Eden, tr., The MŒrkaö¶eya PurŒöa, translated with notes, (Delhi: Indological Book House, 1995).

1052 9. VŒrŒha PurŒöa Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Bhattacharya, Ahibhushan, tr., The Varaha Purana: with English translation (Varanasi: All-India Kashiraj Trust, 1981). 10. Linga PurŒöa Shastri, J.L., Ed., Linga PurŒna of Sage K¨·öa DvaipŒyana VyŒsa, (Delhi, Motilal Banarsidass, 1985). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Linga PurŒöa, 2 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 11. Brahma Vaivarta PurŒöa Jha, Tariö´§a, Brahmavaivarta PurŒöam, (PrayŒga: Hind´ SŒhitya Sammelana, 1981). English Translation: Caturvedi, Ramesa, Maharsidvaipayanavyasapranitam Brahmavaivartapuranam, 2 vols., (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 2001). 12. Bhavishya PurŒöa Sharma, R.N., The Bhavi·ya MahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: NAG, 1984). 13. VŒmana PurŒöa Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Gupta, Anand Swarup, The VŒmana PurŒöa, (Varanasi: All-India Kashiraj Trust, 1967). 14. BrahmŒö¶a PurŒöa êŒstr´, Jagad´§a, êr´ VyŒsa Mahar·iproktaµ BrahmŒö¶apurŒöam, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1983). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The BrahmŒö¶a PurŒöa, 5 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). The VŒyumahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1983). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The VŒyu PurŒöa, 2 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 15. Skanda PurŒöa Tagare, G.V., The Skanda-PurŒöa, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1992). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Skanda PurŒöa, 24 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999).

1053 16. Garuda PurŒöa Pandey, Ramtej, Garu¶apurŒöa of K¨·öadvaipŒyana VyŒsa, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Vidyabhawan, 1986). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Garuda PurŒöa, 3 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 17. Kªrma PurŒöa RŒma§aµkarabhaÿÿŒcŒrya, KªrmapurŒöam, (VŒrŒöas´: Iö¶olŒºjikala BukahŒusa, 1967). English Translation: Board of Scholars, The Kªrma PurŒöa, 2 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1999). 18. Matsya PurŒöa

êr´maddvaipŒyanamunipraö´taµ MatsyapurŒöam, (ÌnandŒ§rama Press, 1981). English Translation: Oudh, A Taluqdar of, The Matsya Puranam, (New Delhi: Oriental Books Reprint Corporation, 1980) first published in 1916 by Panini Office, Allahabad. 19. Ìdi PurŒöa Dubey, Jagdish Narayan, Ìdi-PurŒnam, (Varanasi: Sudarshan Book Agencies, 1990). 20. Narasiµha PurŒöa

The NarasiµhapurŒnam, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1987). 21. Vi·höudharmŒú Gruenendahl, Reinhold, ed., Vi·öudharmŒú: Precepts for the Worship of Vi·öu, 3 vols., (Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1983-1989). 22. Vi·höudharmottara PurŒöa The Vi·öudharmottarapurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1998). Shah, Priyabala, Shri Vishnudharmottara, a text of ancient Indian arts (Ahmedabad: P.Shah, 1990) (Khanda 3). Shah, Priyabala, Vishnudharmottara-Purana : Pauranic legends and rebirths : English translation of first khanda (Delhi: Parimal Publications, 1999). Kramrisch, Stella, The Vishnudharmottara: a treatise on Indian painting and imagemaking (Calcutta: Calcutta University Press, 1928).

1054 23. KriyŒyogasaropapurŒöa PadmamahŒpurŒöa, Uttara KriyŒ BhŒga, (Delhi: Nag, 1984). 24. Kalki PurŒöa Ksemaraja, Srikrsnadasa and Misra, Baladev Prasad, eds., Sri-Kalkipuranam, (Delhi : Nag Publishers, 1986). 25. Shivadharma PurŒöa ShŒstr´, MahŒmahopŒdhyŒya Haraprasad, ed., A descriptive catalogue of Sanskrit

Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. V, PurŒöa Manuscripts, (Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, 1928). 26. Shivadharmottara PurŒöa ShŒstr´, MahŒmahopŒdhyŒya Haraprasad, ed., A descriptive catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Government Collection under the Care of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. V, PurŒöa Manuscripts, (Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, 1928). 27. ParŒ§aropapurŒöa TripŒÿhi, Kapiladeva, PŒrŒ§aropapurŒöam : sam´k·Œtmakaµ sampŒdanam ( VŒrŒöasyŒm: SampªröŒndaSaµsk¨taVi§vavidyŒlayaú, 1990). 28. NŒnd´ PurŒöa Bola, Vaje§aµkara DevarŒma, ed., NŒnd´purŒöa: nŒnd´mukha brŒhmaöajŒtine §Œstrýa itihŒsa [Skt., Guj.](Calcutta : Damodara Viththalarama Parakhani, 1948). 29. SŒmba PurŒöa TripŒÿh´, êr´k¨·öamaöi, SŒmbapurŒöam, (Varanasi: K¨·öadŒsa Academy, 1983). 30. Saura PurŒöa Lele, Kasinatha Sastri, ed., SaurapurŒöaµ VyŒsak¨tam, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1980). 31. KŒlikŒ PurŒöa Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Shastri, B.N., The KŒlikŒpurŒöa, Text, Introduction & Translation in English, 3 vols., (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1991). 32. MahŒbhŒgavata PurŒöa Kumar, Pushpendra, The MahŒbhŒgavata PurŒöa: an Ancient Treatise on êakti Cult, (Delhi: Eastern Book Linkers, 1983).

1055 33. Dev´ BhŒgavata PurŒöa Pandeya, Ramateja, Srimaddev´bhŒgavatam MahŒpurŒöam, (Varanasi: ChaukhambŒ VidyŒbhavana, 1983). English Translation: Vijnanananda, Swami, The Srimad Dev´ BhŒgavatam, (New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1992) first published by Panini Office, Allahabad, 1921–1923. 34. Dev´ PurŒöa Kumar, Pushpendra, Dev´ PurŒöam: First Critical Edition, (New Delhi: Srilabahadurasastrikendriyasamskrtavidyapitham, 1976). 35. Devirahasyam Kak, Ram Chandra, and Shastri, Harabhatta, Devirahasya and Pari§i·hÿas, (Vadodara: Butala Publications, 1941). 36. Gaöe·a PurŒöa

The Gaöe§a PurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1993). 37. Mudgala PurŒöa

Atha êr´mudgalapurŒöaµ PrŒrabhyate, (Lak·m´ NivŒsa Hindu Colony:

MudgalapurŒöaprakŒ§anamaö¶alam, 1976).

38. Kapila PurŒöa Tripathi, Shrikrishnamani, ed., Kapilapuranam (A critical edition), (Varanasi: Chaukhamba Surbharati Prakashan, 1981). 39. B¨haddharma PurŒöa Sastri, Haraprasad, ed., B¨haddharma PurŒöam, (Varanasi: Chaukhamba Amarabharati Prakashan, 1974). 40. Bhavi·yottara PurŒöa Bhavi·yamahŒpurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1993). 41. N´lamata PurŒöa Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Kumari, Ved, The Nilamata Purana, vol. II, (A Critical Edition and English Translation), (Srinagar: J & K Academy of Art, Culture and Languages, 1973).

1056 42. EkŒmra PurŒöa Dhal, Upendra Nath, The EkŒmra PurŒöam, Critical Edition, (Delhi: Nag Publishers, 1986). 43. PurŒöa SaµhitŒ PriyŒchŒrya, Krishna, ed., The PurŒöa SaµhitŒ, revealed to Veda VyŒsa, including

ÌlamandŒra SaµhitŒ, B¨hatsadŒ§iva SaµhitŒ and SanatkumŒra SaµhitŒ: edited with notes, introduction, etc., (Benaras: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1951). 44. BhŒrgava PurŒöa êukla, B¨je§a KumŒra, êr´madbhŒrgavopapurŒöam, (Delhi: Nag, 1997). XXXIV. Smriti

Sm¨ti Sandarbha, 7 Vols., (Delhi: Nag, 1981). BhattŒchŒrya, Dharma êhŒstra Saµgrahaú, (Calcutta, 1876). Banerji, Suresh Chandra, A Companion to Dharma Sastra, New Delhi: DK Printworld, 1998). RŒmŒnuja TŒtŒchŒrya, åishyasringa Samhita, Edited with Introduction, 2 vols., (Thanjavur: Sarasvati Mahal Library, 1983). Chaubey, Braj Bihari, VŒdhªla Smïti, Critically Edited with Hindi Translation, Detailed Introduction and Several Indexes, (Hoshiarpur: Katyayan Vaidik Sahitya Prakashan, 2000). Schrader, Friedrich, Der Karmaprad´pa, Diss., Halle, 1889. Bhattacharya, "KŒtyŒyana Smïti" in Dharma§hŒstrasaµgrahaú, (Calcutta, 1876), pp. 630 ff. English Translation: Buehler, G., The Laws of Manu, translated with extracts from seven commentaries, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1993). [Sacred Books of the East series.] Jolly, Julius, tr., The Minor Law Books, 2 vols., (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1994). Dutt, Manmath Nath, tr., The Dharam Shastra: Hindu Religious Codes, (New Delhi: Cosmo Publications, 1978).

1057 Vasu, Srisa Chandra, Yajnavalkya's Smriti, with the commentary of Vijnanesvara, called the Mitaksara, and the gloss of Balambhatta. Part I: The sources of Hindu law and the duties of a student, (New York: AMS Press, 1974). Gopal, Lallanji, and Gopal, Krishna Kanti, Pulastya-Smrti-sangraha: Pulastya and his Smrtis, (Varanasi: Rishi Publications, 1992). ISBN: 8185193134 IslŒmpurkar, VŒman SŒstri, The ParŒsara-dharma samhitŒ; or, ParŒsara-smriti, with the commentary of SŒyana-MŒdhavŒchŒrya, (Bombay: Government Central Press, 1911). XXXV. åik Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Verma, Virendrakumar, ågveda-PrŒti§Œkhya of êaunaka along with UvvaÿabhŒ·ya, (Delhi: Chaukhamba Sanskrit Pratishthan, 1986). English Translation: Sastri, Mangaldeva, The Rgveda-pratisakhya with the commentary of Uvata, (Lahore: Moti Lal Banarsi Das, 1937). XXXVI. êhukla-Yajur-Veda PrŒti§hŒkhya Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Rastogi, Shrimati Indu, The êuklayajuhPrŒti§Œkhya of KŒtyŒyana, critically edited from original manuscripts, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1967). XXXVII. Atharva Veda Pråtißhåkhya Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Surya Kanta, ed., Atharva-Pråtißåkhya, with an introduction, English translation, notes and indices, (New Delhi: Meharchand Lachhmandas, 1999). XXXVIII. Atharva Veda Pråtißhåkhya Chaturadhyåy¥ Whitney, W.D., The Atharva-veda Pråtißåkhya, or Íaunak¥ya Caturadhyåyika, (Varanasi: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1962). Deshpande, Madhav, Saunakiya Caturadhyayika : a Pratisakhya of the Saunakiya Atharvaveda, with commentaries Caturadhyayibhasya, Bhargava-Bhaskara-Vrtti and Pañcasandhi, (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1997). ISBN: 0674789873 XXXIX. K®i∑hâ-Yajur-Veda Pråtißhåkhya Sanskrit Text and English Translation: Whitney, William D., The Taittir¥ya-Pråtißåkhya with its commentary the Tribhå∑yaratna: Text, Translation and Notes, (Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1973). XXXX. Såma Veda Pråtißhåkhya (Pu∑hpa S™tram) Íåstri, Lak∑maâ, Pu∑pas™tram, Pu∑par∑ipraˆ¥tam, (Benares: Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1922).

1058 Tarlekar, Ganesh Hari, Puspasutram nama Samavediyapratisakhyam: The Puspasutra : a Pratisakhya of the Samaveda, 2 vols., (New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts, Motilal Banarsidass, 2001). ISBN: 8120817907 (v. 1) 8120817915 (v. 2) 8120817923 (set).

`




July, 2006



Vedic Education

Recommend Documents